JP7120727B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (generally called "pachinko machines") and reel-type gaming machines (generally called "slot machines").

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as seen in Patent Document 1, for example, there has been known a gaming machine in which a special game is played in which a large amount of prizes can be obtained when a winning prize is won.

That is, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, first, it is determined whether or not there is a winning of a game ball into the starting hole. Then, when the game ball enters the starting hole, a judgment process for judging whether or not a hit is won is performed. Also, at this time, the special symbol is variably displayed on a predetermined display device for a predetermined variation time. Then, when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the prize has been won, and the opening and closing member of the big winning opening is operated, thereby increasing the number of players. provide a special game in which a prize of

JP 2017-006393 A

With such a conventional game machine, there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in amusement in a game.

Means 1 : Judgment means for making judgments,
privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the fact that a predetermined result is obtained in the judgment by the judging means;
reception state execution means capable of generating a reception state in which reception of an operation by a player is permitted, and displaying a post-reception display corresponding to the type of reception state when reception is made in the reception state;
with
As the reception state, a plurality of types of reception states including a first reception state and a second reception state are prepared,
The first reception state can occur while the specific BGM is being audibly output. the specific BGM is rendered inaudible;
The second receiving state can occur after the specific BGM, which has been audibly output, is no longer audibly output. is not audibly output,
Even if the operation by the player is not accepted after the occurrence of the first reception state, the specific BGM is made non-audible when a predetermined timing arrives, and even in the situation where the specific BGM is made non-audible. The first acceptance state continues,
moreover,
The second acceptance state occurs when a predetermined time has passed since the specific variation pattern based on the result of determination by the determination means was started, and the specific BGM is when the specific variation pattern is started. is made inaudible before the elapse of a predetermined time from , but the first reception state does not occur between the start of the specific variation pattern and the time when the specific BGM is made inaudible.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this invention, it is possible to suppress a decline in amusement in a game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with a door frame opened from a main body frame and a main body frame opened from an outer frame; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the rear; FIG. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a right side view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled an outer frame and was seen from the front. (a) is a perspective view of the outer frame side upper hinge member portion of the outer frame, omitting the left frame member, as viewed from below, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) exploded. be. (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an outer upper hinge member; Fig. 10 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the body-side upper hinge member is attached to the; It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect|action of the locking member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19; FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19; FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 19; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit in a door frame, and (b) is a back perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front view of the production operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the production operation unit. (a) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the back. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends; FIG. 34(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34(a). FIG. 34B is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 34(b). (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34(b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the rear. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the decoration board unit of the effect operation unit, which is exploded and viewed from the front; FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which an operation button is pressed in the sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 37; (a) is a view of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a portion of the operation button is cut away to show the portion that is to be hidden by the first button decoration portion of the operation button, the button frame, or the like. (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a portion of an operation button to be hidden by a first button decorative portion, a button frame, or the like in a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. . (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. is a perspective view. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 47(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL. (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. is a perspective view. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 51(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51(a). 51(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the NN line in FIG. 51(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the OO line in FIG. 51(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a front perspective view of the door frame top unit, and (c) is a rear perspective view of the door frame top unit. is. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. 56; It is a front view of a game board. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. It is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as seen from the front. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63, viewed from behind; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the part of the function display unit enlarged from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel in a form different from that of FIG. 63 as seen from the front together with the front structural member, the substrate holder, and the main control unit; FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind; It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board and a peripheral control board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 69; FIG. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input to and output from a game ball lending device connection terminal plate that relays electrical connections between a payout control board that constitutes the main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 69; FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU; FIG. It is a block diagram around VDP with a built-in sound source in a liquid crystal and a sound control part. It is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko machine. FIG. 76 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 75; It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows a power failure monitoring circuit. 4 is a circuit diagram showing an inter-board communication interface circuit between a main control board and a peripheral control board; FIG. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit etc. of a payout control part. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram continued from FIG. 81; It is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit; FIG. 4 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to/from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the arrangement of output terminals on an external terminal plate; 4 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device; FIG. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. 4 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board; FIG. 90 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board in FIG. 89 to the peripheral control boards; FIG. It is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a main-control side power-on process. FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 92; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing; 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when powering on a peripheral control unit; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of LOCKN signal history creation processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of connection failure determination processing; 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of connection recovery processing; 4 is a timing chart for explaining the timing of outputting a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the transmitter IC for the upper tray liquid crystal; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a special design and special electric accessary goods control processing (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process (step S5232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage process (step S5234). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process processing (step S5238). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal process (step S5280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a jackpot determination process (step S5305). (A) is a diagram showing a big hit determination table, and (B) and (C) are diagrams showing symbol determination tables. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop design setting process (step S5281). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S5283). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S5284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a normal design and normal electric accessary goods control processing (step S116). FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the procedure of gate passage processing (step S5402). FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about normal design normal processing (step S5403). It is a diagram showing a determination table T1 of the effect pattern (fluctuation effect) referred to in the effect symbol variation start process when the game is in the normal game state. It is a figure which shows an example of a sound definition table. FIG. 120 is a diagram showing notification content, notification mode, notification time, and conditions for termination of notification (cancellation conditions) for each type of notification sound exemplified in FIG. 119; It is a front view of a game machine provided with a sword effect operation unit. It is a right side view of the game machine provided with the sword effect operation unit. It is a diagram showing an example of a selection table of the production pattern in the production mode in which the sword drawing production can be executed, (A) showing an example of the selection table for selecting the presence or absence of the sword drawing preparation transition production according to the type of variation pattern, (B) ) shows an example of a selection table for selecting whether or not to draw the sword. FIG. 4 is a state transition diagram for explaining the sword drawing operation of the sword decoration when the aura member is provided on the sword portion (blade portion) itself, (A) sword drawn state, (B) first sword drawn state, (C) second. Indicates the sword drawn state. FIG. 4 is a vertical cross-sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member; FIG. 4 is a state transition diagram for explaining the sword drawing operation of the sword decoration when the aura member is provided on the sheath, showing (A) the sword drawn state, (B) the first sword drawn state, and (C) the second sword drawn state. FIG. 4 is a vertical cross-sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member; It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production|presentation display apparatus in the princess ready-to-win production, and the operation|movement transition of the sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production|presentation display apparatus in the princess ready-to-win production, and the operation|movement transition of the sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production|presentation display apparatus in the princess ready-to-win production, and the operation|movement transition of the sword decoration. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device, state transitions of the operation buttons, and movement transitions of the sword ornament in the ready-to-win effect including the operation effects of the operation buttons used in many ways. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device, state transitions of the operation buttons, and movement transitions of the sword ornament in the ready-to-win effect including the operation effects of the operation buttons used in many ways. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device, state transitions of the operation buttons, and movement transitions of the sword ornament in the ready-to-win effect including the operation effects of the operation buttons used in many ways. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device, state transitions of operation buttons, and movement transitions of the sword ornament in the ready-to-win effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device, state transitions of operation buttons, and movement transitions of sword ornaments in the ready-to-win effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device, state transitions of operation buttons, and movement transitions of the sword ornament in the ready-to-win effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device, state transitions of operation buttons, and movement transitions of the sword ornament in the ready-to-win effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device, state transitions of operation buttons, and movement transitions of the sword ornament in the ready-to-win effect. It is a figure explaining the form of the sword ornament used for pseudo-continuous effect. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword ornament is operational during the ready-to-win effect by lottery by the peripheral control board based on the variation effect (ready-to-win effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board. 10 is a diagram showing a transition example of a ready-to-win effect in which a pre-operation suggestive effect of the first suggestive pattern is executed. FIG. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword ornament is operational during the ready-to-win effect by lottery by the peripheral control board based on the variation effect (ready-to-win effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board. 10 is a diagram showing a transition example of a ready-to-win effect in which a pre-operation suggestive effect of the first suggestive pattern is executed. FIG. Similar to the first suggestion pattern described above, when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is to be activated during the ready-to-win effect, the pre-operation suggesting effect of the second suggestive pattern is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition. Although the second suggestion pattern is performed as a pre-operation suggestion effect, the sword decoration does not become operationally valid, and the operation button becomes operationally valid once, and then the sword decoration becomes operationally valid. It is a figure which shows about the suggestion production|presentation before operation of a pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an integrated model image; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of an integrated model image from the start to the end of the effective period; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of an integrated model image from the start to the end of the effective period; It is a figure which shows the example about the progress of production|presentation when a 1st effective period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification about the production|presentation progress when a 1st valid period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification about the production|presentation progress when a 1st valid period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification about the production|presentation progress when a 1st valid period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example about the progress of production|presentation when a 2nd valid period occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a modification of the progress of presentation when the second validity period occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a modification of the progress of presentation when the second validity period occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a modification of the progress of presentation when the second validity period occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a modification of the progress of presentation when the second validity period occurs. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the presentation that indicates the degree of expectation for the integrated model image in stages. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an integrated model image; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of progress of rendering during an effective period in which an integrated model image is displayed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of progress of rendering during an effective period in which an integrated model image is displayed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of progress of rendering during an effective period in which an integrated model image is displayed; FIG. 11 is a time chart showing an example of the content of effects when the second acceptance allowable state occurs; FIG. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing an example of the content of effects when the first acceptance allowable state occurs; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the effect content when the second reception permission state occurs; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the effect content when the first reception permission state occurs; It is a time chart which shows an example of the content of the presentation when the fourth reception permission state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the content of the production|presentation when the 5th reception permission state generate|occur|produces. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing an example of effect contents when a first reception period (first reception effect) occurs as a result of determination that a first condition is satisfied; FIG. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing an example of effect contents when a second reception period (second reception effect) occurs as a result of determination that a second condition is satisfied; FIG. FIG. 11 is a time chart showing an example of effect contents when a third condition is satisfied as a result of determination and a third reception period (third reception effect) occurs; FIG. FIG. 11 is a time chart showing an example of effect contents when a fourth condition is satisfied as a result of determination and a fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) occurs; FIG. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing an example of the content of effects when a fifth condition is satisfied as a result of determination and a fifth reception period (fifth reception effect) occurs; FIG. FIG. 11 is a time chart showing an example of effect contents when a sixth condition is satisfied as a result of determination and a sixth reception period (sixth reception effect) occurs; FIG. FIG. 11 is a time chart showing an example of effect contents when a seventh condition is satisfied as a result of determination and a seventh reception period (seventh reception effect) occurs; FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in the variation pattern which a 1st reception period (1st reception production|presentation) generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in the variation pattern which a 1st reception period (1st reception production|presentation) generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in the variation pattern which a 2nd reception period (2nd reception production|presentation) generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in the variation pattern which a 2nd reception period (2nd reception production|presentation) generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in the variation pattern which 4th reception period (4th reception production|presentation) generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in the variation pattern which 4th reception period (4th reception production|presentation) generate|occur|produces. This is a modified example of the presentation regarding the acceptance period. This is a modified example of the presentation regarding the acceptance period. This is a modified example of the presentation regarding the acceptance period. This is a modified example of the presentation regarding the acceptance period. This is a modified example of the presentation regarding the acceptance period. It is a time chart showing an example of the content of the effect when the reception period A (reception effect A) occurs. It is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the reception period B (reception effect B) occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example of the content of the effect when the reception period C (reception effect C) occurs. It is a time chart showing an example of the content of the effect when the reception period D (reception effect D) occurs. It is a time chart showing an example of the content of the effect when the reception period D (reception effect D) occurs. FIG. 10 is a table showing a setting example related to conditions for occurrence of reception periods A to D; FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in the variation pattern which reception period A (reception production|presentation A) generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in the variation pattern which reception period B (reception production|presentation B) generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in the variation pattern which the reception period C (reception production|presentation C) generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in the variation pattern which the reception period D (reception production|presentation D) generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the modification of the acceptance period D. FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the acceptance period D. FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the acceptance period D. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in the variation pattern which the reception period E (reception production|presentation E) generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in the reception period E. FIG. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 1B acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 1B acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 1B acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 2B acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 2B acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 2B acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 3B acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 3B acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 3B acceptance period. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation of the variation pattern which 1B acceptance period generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation of the variation pattern which 1B acceptance period generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation of the variation pattern which the 2B acceptance period generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation of the variation pattern which the 3B acceptance period generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation of the variation pattern which the 3B acceptance period generate|occur|produces. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing another example of a variation pattern in which the 1B acceptance period occurs; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing another example of a variation pattern in which the 3B acceptance period occurs; It is a time chart which shows the example about the 1C reception period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 1C reception period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 1C reception period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 2C acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 2C acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 2C acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 3C acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 3C acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 3C acceptance period. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation of the variation pattern which 1C acceptance period generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation of the variation pattern which 1C acceptance period generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation of the variation pattern which 2C acceptance period generate|occur|produces. It is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the variation pattern in which the 3C acceptance period occurs. It is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the variation pattern in which the 3C acceptance period occurs. It is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the variation pattern in which the 3C acceptance period occurs. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing another example of a variation pattern in which the 1C acceptance period occurs; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another example of a variation pattern in which the 3C acceptance period occurs; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another example of a variation pattern in which the 3C acceptance period occurs; It is a time chart which shows the example about the 1D acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 1D acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 1D acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 2D acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 2D acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 2D acceptance period. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation of the variation pattern which 1D acceptance period generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation of the variation pattern which 1D acceptance period generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation of the variation pattern which 1D acceptance period generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation of the variation pattern which 1D acceptance period generate|occur|produces. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect of a variation pattern in which a 2D acceptance period occurs; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect of a variation pattern in which a 2D acceptance period occurs; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect of a variation pattern in which a 2D acceptance period occurs; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect of a variation pattern in which a 2D acceptance period occurs; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another example of a variation pattern in which the 1D acceptance period occurs; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another example of a variation pattern in which the 1D acceptance period occurs; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another example of a variation pattern in which the 1D acceptance period occurs; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another example of a variation pattern in which the 2D acceptance period occurs; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another example of a variation pattern in which the 2D acceptance period occurs; It is a time chart which shows the example about the 1E acceptance period. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a reception period-related periodicity display in the 1Eth reception period; It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation of the variation pattern which the 1E reception period generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation of the variation pattern which the 1E reception period generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation of the variation pattern which the 1E reception period generate|occur|produces. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 2E acceptance period. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a reception period-related periodicity display in the 2E reception period; It is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the variation pattern in which the 2E acceptance period occurs. It is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the variation pattern in which the 2E acceptance period occurs. It is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the variation pattern in which the 2E acceptance period occurs. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 3E acceptance period. It is a diagram showing an example of effect of the variation pattern in which the 3E acceptance period occurs. It is a diagram showing an example of effect of the variation pattern in which the 3E acceptance period occurs. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 4E reception period. FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining a reception period-related periodicity display in the 4Eth reception period; It is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the variation pattern in which the 4E reception period occurs. It is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the variation pattern in which the 4E reception period occurs. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 5E reception period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 6E acceptance period. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification of special image display with periodic changes; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification of special image display with periodic changes; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification of special image display with periodic changes; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a basic example of effect when a multiple-operation allowable period occurs; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a basic example of effect when a multiple-operation allowable period occurs; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a basic example of effect when a multiple-operation allowable period occurs; It is a time chart which shows the example about the 1F acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 1F acceptance period. It is a figure explaining the periodicity display in the 1F acceptance period. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation of the variation pattern which 1F acceptance period generate|occur|produces. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 2F acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 2F acceptance period. It is a figure explaining the periodicity display in the 2F acceptance period. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation of the variation pattern which 2F acceptance period generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation of the variation pattern which 2F acceptance period generate|occur|produces. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 3rd F acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 3rd F acceptance period. It is a figure explaining the periodicity display in the 3rd F acceptance period. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation of the variation pattern which the 3rd F acceptance period generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation of the variation pattern which the 3rd F acceptance period generate|occur|produces. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 4th F acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 4th F acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 5th F acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 6th F acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 6th F acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 7th F acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 7th F acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 8th F acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 8th F acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 9th F acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 9th F acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 10th F acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 10th F acceptance period. It is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the variation pattern in which the 10th F acceptance period occurs. It is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the variation pattern in which the 10th F acceptance period occurs. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 11th F acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 11th F acceptance period. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation of the variation pattern which the 11th F acceptance period generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation of the variation pattern which the 11th F acceptance period generate|occur|produces.

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame and outer frame and viewed from the front. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view viewed from the rear after being disassembled into two parts; FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; and a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls are hit by.

The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 is, as shown in FIGS. 20 are connected to each other and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear width. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 .

The outer frame 2 includes a panel member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, and attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 . The body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 .

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a vertically extending rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front and having a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth, and a through hole of the door frame base unit 100.例文帳に追加A handle unit 300 which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by a player to hit a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. A plate unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface below the plate unit 320 and a plate unit 320 attached to the center of the plate unit 320. According to the game state that changes when a game ball is hit into the game area 5a, the player can A performance operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory performance, and a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320. , a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right portion on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, a door frame left side unit 530, and a door frame right side unit 550. and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the front upper part of the door frame base unit 100 above the through hole 111 on the upper side of the door frame base unit 100 .

The body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 consists of a frame-shaped body frame base 600 which can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the body frame base 600. It is attached to both upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the side lower hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, respectively, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 in front view, and the main body frame base 600 A ball launching device 680 for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a right side surface of the main body frame base 600, which is attached to the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and a locking unit 700 for locking between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and a reverse side mounted on the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in the front view to pay out game balls to the player side. An L-shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable and attached to the main body frame base 600. and a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the.

The dispensing unit 800 of the main body frame 4 includes an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a dispensing unit base 801 attached to the top of the dispensing unit base 801 and extending to the left and right to open upward. A box-shaped ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown), and a ball tank 802 attached to a payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 in front view and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. The game balls guided by the ball guiding unit 820 are detachably attached to the lower side of the payout unit base 801 and paid out one by one based on the instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. and a payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 to guide the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward and to release the game balls according to the state of storage of the game balls on the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. An upper full ball path unit 850 that discharges from either a normal discharge port 850d or a full tank discharge port 850e, and an upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801 and discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 A normal guiding path 861 that guides game balls forward and guides them from the front end to the through-ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and guides forward game balls released from the full tank release port 850e to guide the game balls forward and guides the game balls forward from the front end to the full ball passage 273 of the door frame 3. and a lower full ball path unit 860 having a full guideway 862 leading to the tank ball receptacle 274 .

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a lower part for bass sound which is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in front view. A speaker unit 920 having a speaker 921 , a power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view and containing a power supply board inside, and mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 . An interface control board box 940 housing an interface control board inside, and a payout control board 951 mounted across the power board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 to control the payout of game balls are housed therein. A payout control board box 950 is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of a game area 5a into which game balls are hit, and shoots game balls from the ball launching device 680 into the upper portion of the game area 5a. A front structural member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that guide to the front, and a flat plate-like game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. there is

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a player rotates the handle 302 while game balls are stored in the upper tray 321, the ball launcher 680 shoots the game ball with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 . Then, when the game balls hit into the game area 5a are accepted by the winning openings, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 by the paying-out device 830 according to the accepted winning openings. Since the payout of the game balls can enhance the interest of the player, the game balls in the upper tray 321 can be hit into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame exploded and viewed from the front. FIG. 16(a) is a perspective view of the upper hinge member on the outer frame side of the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) exploded. It is a diagram. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are separated vertically and extend left and right, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 are connected to each other. and a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending to. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear width. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 . Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the laterally outwardly facing side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are flush with each other. It is

In addition, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in a front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be attached so as to be opened and closed by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 .

In addition, the outer frame 2 includes a panel member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, and attached to the rear side of the panel member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively; a flat plate-like left sliding member 81 attached to the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 at a position to the left from the center of the left and right; A flat plate-shaped right sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50 . The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) and attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40. As shown in FIG.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. A connecting member 85 is provided. In addition, the outer frame 2 includes an upper hooking member 90 and a lower hooking member 91 which are attached to the inside (left side) of the right frame member 40 and engage an outer frame hook 703 of a locking unit 700 which will be described later. , is equipped.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
An upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 has engaging cutouts 11 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right ends. Upper lateral fixing portions 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 are mounted in the engaging notch portion 11 . In addition, the upper frame member 10 has mounting stepped portions 12 recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and front surface of the left end portion when viewed from the front. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12 .

[2-2. Lower frame member]
A lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed so that its lateral length and vertical thickness are the same as those of the upper frame member 10, and its front and rear width is equal to that of the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the front and back width of the . The lower frame member 20 has engagement cutouts 21 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at positions closer to the rear than the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right ends. In the engaging notch portion 21, a lower lateral fixing portion 88 of a left lower connecting member 85C and a lower right connecting member 85D, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is attached.

In addition, the lower frame member 20 has front end notches 22 recessed rearward from the front surfaces of both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20 , the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10 . When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2 , the portion between the left and right front end cutouts 22 is inserted into the panel member 50 .

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed by extrusions of metal such as aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in shapes symmetrical to each other in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward from a position rearward of the center in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the rear end on the side surface that is the outer side in the left-right direction. It has concave portions 31 and 41 and protruding portions 32 and 42 which protrude from the side surfaces opposite to the concave portions 31 and 41 and have hollow interiors. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced by the protrusions 32 and 42 . Further, lower lateral fixing portions 88 on the rear side of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85 are inserted and attached into the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively.

In addition, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on their surfaces. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility such as a game hall or is transported by the plurality of grooves, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by a worker's finger, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with an open rear side. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extension portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end in the front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape with a size that allows a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extension portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically in a size that allows the game ball to pass through on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension part 51, A vertical wall portion 54 that extends upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rearwardly extending portion 51, and a front surface that bulges forward from near the upper end of the vertical wall portion 54. and a return portion 55 that inclines toward the rear as it goes toward.

The curtain plate member 50 is mounted on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51 on the front side and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51 . A horizontal portion 71, which will be described later, is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position that coincides with a later-described discharge hole 74 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2 . Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in the assembled state with the outer frame 2 . The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52 .

Further, the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 is inclined so that the front end side is lower. The curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the top surface, and a right mounting portion 56 for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the top surface. a portion 57; The bottom surface of the body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82 .

As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Although not shown, the panel member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a grid pattern, thereby enhancing strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the drawing, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper fixing portion 61 extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. , a bearing groove 63 extending from the right end of the forward extending portion 62 to the center of the front extending portion 62 toward the front and penetrating vertically, and the upper fixing portion 61 in plan view. A flat plate-shaped lateral fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a lateral fixing portion extending downward from the left end of the forward extending portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 opens around the front end thereof. A flat plate-like hanging portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 is provided (see FIG. 16(b), etc.).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). there is Further, the forward extending portion 62 extends forward beyond the front end of the upper frame member 10 . Further, the horizontal fixing portion 64 is inserted into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above and fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws.

The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63 to move the main body frame 4. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 consists of a band plate-shaped lock body 66a extending forward and backward with a predetermined width on both sides and an operation portion projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable bar-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a and then obliquely forward left, and a mounting hole penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66d and. This lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extending portion 62 of the outer-frame-side upper hinge member 60 with a mounting screw 67 .

The rear end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is attached to a position rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the forward extending portion 62 of the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. Further, when the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. The hanging portion 65 of 60 extends forward so as to come into contact with the portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a abuts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame upper hinge member 60. As shown in FIG. The lock member 66 is biased in a direction in which the front end thereof rotates leftward about the mounting hole 66d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 near the front end is in contact with the drooping portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space capable of accommodating a body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620, which will be described later, is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock body 66a.

By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. By operating the operation portion 66b to rotate the lock body 66a in a direction in which the front end thereof moves leftward, the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view. can be in a state in which the As a result, the main frame hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63 or removed from the bearing groove 63 .

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the drawing, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 includes a flat plate-like horizontal portion 71 extending horizontally and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 which is located rearward of the center in the front-rear direction. A raised plate-like rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and the horizontal portion 71 are penetrated vertically so that only one game ball can pass through. and a sized discharge hole 74 . The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer-frame-side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a columnar shape and is formed in a truncated cone shape with an upper end narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a leftward position near the front end of the horizontal portion 71 . The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with the center portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction and extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 in an inverted U shape. This discharge hole 74 is formed to have approximately the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 .

When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the panel member 50 and the rear extension portion 51 . is fixed to the panel reinforcement member 80 by a screw (not shown) passing through the upper surface of the panel member 50 . When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 with a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 . In cooperation with the hinge member 60, the body frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed.

In addition, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 is aligned with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 . Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52 . More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls that fall between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 move between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the gap between the two gradually narrows, the ball rolls to the rear side where the gap is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 74 . At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. A game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is discharged from the discharge hole 74 so that it can be easily prevented from rolling backward from the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for a game ball to stay at the part of the lower hinge member 70.例文帳に追加

[2-8. Connection member]
The connecting members 85 of the outer frame 2 include an upper left connecting member 85A connecting the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B connecting the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connection member 85D, which connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40. As shown in FIG.

The connection member 85 includes a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat plate-like upper lateral fixing portion 87 extending upward from one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the horizontal fixing portion. A flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion of 86 from which the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends is provided. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 87. extending downwards. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 spaced apart in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10 . The upper lateral fixing portions 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the engaging notches 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10 . Further, the front lower horizontal fixing portions 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is a screw that is inserted into the projecting portions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. are fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes further rearward than the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and further protrudes further than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward beyond the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the left lower connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 projecting from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. As shown in FIG. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20 . Also, the upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portions 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notch portions 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the lateral end surfaces of the lower frame member 20, respectively. be.

[2-9. Lock Mechanism of Upper Hinge Member on Outer Frame Side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the locking mechanism of the lock member 66 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 with respect to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. will be described with reference to FIG. 17(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an outer upper side view. FIG. 4 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which a body-side upper hinge member is attached to a hinge member; 18A and 18B are explanatory diagrams showing the action of the locking member on the outer frame.

When the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c contacts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a is adapted to block a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a V-shape, and the tip portion of the lock body 66a does not block the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space is formed in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 into which the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

The support mechanism of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in this embodiment is such that the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock body 66a is mounted. is close to the right drooping portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right drooping portion 65, and they are in contact with each other). ), the centers of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock body 66a are diagonally shifted and opposed to each other. state.

In this normal axially supported state, the main body frame hinge pin 622 that supports the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end face of lock body 66a. In other words, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. As shown in FIG. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 can be smoothly rotated when the operating portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. there is Also, in the drawing, the center of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is applied with an acting force F in a direction to pull out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape, and comes into contact with the arc-shaped front end face of the lock body 66a, the acting force is applied. F is the component force F1 (normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the main body frame hinge pin 622 and the arc-shaped front end face, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 and the bearing groove 63. and the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of one side, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66). , the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 does not rotate in the direction away from the right drooping portion 65, and the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is positioned between the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. The state of being sandwiched between the side inner surfaces is maintained.

For this reason, even in a normal axially supported state or a state in which the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always subjected to a load, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. Therefore, it is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c, and prevent the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 from falling out of the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the rightward direction by applying an excessive force, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts the drooping portion 65 and cannot move further. Since it does not rotate, the locking member 66 does not protrude outside the front extending portion 62 .

Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not arcuate, the front end of the lock member 66 may be positioned toward the outside of the front extending portion 62 so that no rotational moment is generated by the action of the force component F1. By locating the center of rotation of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment is generated, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66 a only abuts the hanging portion 65 , so the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62 .

When the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 supports the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert hinge pin 622 . When the main body frame hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main body frame hinge pin 622 contacts the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is pushed against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates around the mounting screw 67 so as to move leftward. As a result, the lock body 66a closing the bearing groove 63 is retracted to open the bearing groove 63, so that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

When the body frame hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is released by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The locking member 66 rotates so that the front end of the locking member 66 moves rightward, and the locking member 66 returns to its normal state. As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 is accommodated in the space on the front side of the front end of the lock body 66 a in the bearing groove 63 , and the main body frame hinge pin 622 can rotate in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 . state is held (locked).

When removing the body frame upper hinge pin 622 from the bearing groove 63, the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock body 66a moves leftward, and the elastic portion The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63 .

[2-10. Crime Prevention Mechanism and Ball Engagement Prevention Mechanism at the Location of the Lower Hinge Member on the Outer Frame Side]
Ball biting prevention for preventing a game ball from being caught between a crime prevention mechanism at a portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be explained.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the front view left end portion of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. As shown in FIG. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer-frame-side lower hinge member 70 is attached in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the panel member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 . The curtain plate member 50 has a standing wall portion 54 rising upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, Since the tip of the unauthorized tool abuts against the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, further insertion of the unauthorized tool to the rear side can be prevented. , tampering through the portion of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side can be prevented.

In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with a return portion 55 extending forward, when an unauthorized tool in contact with the standing wall portion 54 is bent upward, the return portion 55 bends the tip of the unauthorized tool. can be further folded forward, it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and fraudulent actions can be performed through the portion of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side. can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is placed on the outer frame side in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When dropped onto the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not ejected backward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54. There is a risk of being caught between On the other hand, in this embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extension portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 are provided with a discharge hole 74 and a left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass. , and the right ejection hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be ejected downward from the ejection hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be ejected downward. It is possible to reduce the pinching of the game ball between.

Therefore, if a game ball is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 may be damaged, or the main body frame 4 may not be closed in a normal state. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the body frame 4 and fraudulent acts using the gap.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. FIG. 19 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 26 is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view cut along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross-section cut along line CC in FIG. It is a diagram. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into the main members and viewed from the back.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 has a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100. a handle unit 300 attached to the door frame base unit 100, a plate unit 320 attached to the front lower portion of the door frame base unit 100, a performance operation unit 400 attached to the center of the plate unit 320, and a door frame base unit above the plate unit 320. A door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame left side unit 550 and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 .

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear directions, and has a vertically extending rectangular (quadrangular) outer shape when viewed from the front, although the details will be described later. , a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and attached to both upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front, and attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge rotatable. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closing the through hole 111, a security cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, The door frame 3 and the body frame 4, which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110 and can be opened and closed, and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 are locked. a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 for sending game balls to the ball shooting device 680; and a ball shooting device 680 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. and a foul cover unit 270 for receiving a game ball which is shot by and does not reach the game area 5a and discharges it to the lower tray 322. - 特許庁

The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 rotates the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 when the player rotates the rotatable handle 302, which will be described later in detail. The ball can be hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strong force.

The plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, which will be described later in detail, is attached to a portion below the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. A production operation unit 400 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 includes an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be hit into the game area 5a, and an upper plate 321 arranged below the upper plate 321 for receiving game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. A lower tray 322 that can be stored, an upper tray ball extraction button 327 for extracting game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322, and within the range of the balance of cash and prepaid cards thrown into the ball lending machine A ball lending button 328 for lending game balls to the player, a return button 329 for returning the cash or prepaid card after deducting the amount of the game balls lent from the ball lending machine, and the cash put into the ball lending machine. , a ball rental/return display unit 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 that can be operated by the player when presenting an effect, A lower tray ball ejection button 333 for discharging game balls downward from the tray unit 320 is provided.

The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front part of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and presents the effect image to the player. It is possible. Although details will be described later, the effect operation unit 400 includes a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side effect that is arranged in the operation button 410 so as to be visible from the player side and can display the effect image. and a display device 460 .

The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 320 and to the left of the through hole 111 in the through hole 111 ( It decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) that can be decorated with light.

The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3, which will be described later in detail, is attached to the front right portion on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and the through hole 111 ( It decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes farther forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides, and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided at the front end. A right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can decorate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light emission.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is mounted above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It decorates the upper part of the frame 3. Although details will be described later, the door frame top unit 570 includes a pair of upper speakers 573 separated left and right, a top middle decorative member 576 projecting forward at the center of the front surface, and left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are decorated. The door frame top unit 570 can decorate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 with light emission.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31-33. FIG. 31(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 31(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and Fig. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable (hinge rotatable) so that the left side in front view closes the front surface of the body frame 4 . The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 at the lower corner of the front surface, a plate unit 320 to which the effect operation unit 400 is attached at the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 at the left outer front surface of the through hole 111. A door frame right side unit 550 and a door frame top unit 570 are attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111 and the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a vertically extending rectangular shape when viewed from the front and having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear direction. , a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a frame-like reinforcing unit 130 attached to both upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front, projecting forward from the door frame base 110 and projecting from the main body frame 4. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front surface of the door frame base 110 and the front surface of the through hole 111. A door frame left side decorative substrate 160 mounted on the left side of the view and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a glass unit 190 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 are detachably mounted. and a glass unit mounting member 170 for.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 110 at the lower right corner in front view, and is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a cylindrical handle mounting member 180 for mounting the handle unit 300. A glass unit 190 for closing the through-hole 111, a security cover 200 for covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an opening/closing cylinder unit attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward. 210 , a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 , and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 .

Further, although illustration is omitted, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feed solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental return display unit 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , the upper speaker 573 , etc., and a door body relay board for relaying connection with the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900 in the body frame 4 .

[3-1a. door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame base 110 has a quadrangular (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 110 is penetrated in the front-rear direction, and has a through-hole 111 formed in a generally quadrangular shape with an inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The through-hole 111 has an upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner circumference thereof, which are close to the outer circumference of the door frame base 110 , respectively, and a lower side forming the inner circumference extends vertically from the lower end of the door frame base 110 . It is located at about 1/3 of the height of the direction. Accordingly, the door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape as a whole with the through holes 111 penetrating therethrough in the front and rear directions. The door frame base 110 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 has a handle mounting seat surface 112 which is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and is inclined so that the left end side projects slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112 and a through hole 111. A cylinder mounting portion 113 to which a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted is recessed from the rear surface toward the front near the right end in front view between the and the cylinder mounting portion 113, and the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 penetrates in the front and rear at the cylinder mounting portion 113. The cylinder insertion hole 114 through which the cylinder lock 211 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 are penetrated in the front-rear direction on the left side of the front view. and a ball feed opening 115 for facing the ball.

In addition, the door frame base 110 penetrates in the front and rear direction at a position on the left side of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, so that the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. A passage opening 116 for a lower tray and a through-ball passage 273 of a foul cover unit 270 are penetrated in the front-rear direction so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through-opening 111 near the left end of the door frame base 110 in front view. A plate passage opening 117, a glass unit mounting portion 118 recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner circumference of the through opening 111 and into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and both upper left and right sides of the door frame base 110. A speaker insertion opening 119 penetrates in the front and rear direction at the corner and through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. reinforcement unit]
The reinforcement unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (the door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 extending to the left and right and attached along the upper edge of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a middle reinforcing sheet metal extending to the left and right attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A sheet metal 132, a vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the front view left side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a vertically extending right reinforcement sheet attached along the front view right side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A metal plate 134 and a lock engaging portion 135 that is attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing metal plate 134 and engages the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700 .

In the reinforcement unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. Fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 which will be described later. Therefore, the reinforcement unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by an upper reinforcement sheet metal 131, a middle reinforcement sheet metal 132, a left reinforcement sheet metal 133, a right reinforcement sheet metal 134, and the like.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the lock engaging portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a notch 132a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the upper tray passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110 .

Although not shown in detail, the reinforcement unit 130 includes an upper reinforcement sheet metal 131, a middle reinforcement sheet metal 132, a left reinforcement sheet metal 133, and a right reinforcement sheet metal 134, each of which has a portion bent in the front-rear direction. This part not only increases the strength and rigidity, but also prevents unauthorized tools such as piano wires and flathead screwdrivers from entering from the outside.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door-frame-side upper hinge member 140 includes a door-frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 that is attached to the door-frame base 110 and has a pair of projecting pieces 141a that are separated vertically, and a pair of projections of the door-frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A columnar door frame upper hinge pin 142 that passes through the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, and a pair of projecting pieces 141a on the door frame upper hinge pin 142. A disc-shaped flange member 143 attached at a position between and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame, which is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower projecting piece 141a of the pair of projecting pieces 141a. and a lock spring 144 that urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward.

Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat mounting piece connecting the rear ends of the pair of protruding pieces 141a. It is shaped like a letter. The door-frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a mounting piece that connects a pair of protruding pieces 141a and is attached to the rear surface of the door-frame base 110 with screws.

The door frame upper hinge pin 142 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 at a portion (upper end) that protrudes upward from the upper projecting piece 141a. Further, although illustration is omitted, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 has a portion that protrudes downward from the lower projecting piece 141a and is bent in the horizontal direction. This bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the projecting piece 141a on the lower side, thereby restricting upward movement of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. As shown in FIG.

The flange member 143 is an E-ring and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer circumference of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 . The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be inserted, and has its upper end in contact with the flange member 143 and its lower end in contact with the lower projecting piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed in a compressed state between the flange member 143 and the projecting piece 141a on the lower side, and biases the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward via the flange member 143. .

In the door-frame-side upper hinge member 140, the door-frame upper hinge pin 142 is biased upward by a lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door-frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of the piece 141a. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a by a predetermined amount.

When an operator holds the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144, the door frame upper hinge member 140 is attached to the door frame. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a. Therefore, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame upper hinge member 140 can be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame upper hinge member 620 or removed downward. can be done. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame upper hinge member 140 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame upper hinge member 620, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in the front view is moved. , can be hinge-rotatably supported with respect to the body frame 4 .

Further, in the door-frame-side upper hinge member 140, a portion of the door-frame-side upper hinge pin 142 supported by a pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door-frame-side hinge shaft bracket 141 is attached to the door frame of the door-frame-side lower hinge member 150, which will be described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152 . As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state by the door-frame-side upper hinge member 140 and the door-frame-side lower hinge member 150 .

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door-frame-side lower hinge member 150 includes a door-frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 that is attached to the door-frame base 110 and has a flat plate-like extension piece 151a that extends forward, and A columnar door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) projecting downward from the vicinity of the front end of the extending piece 151a.

The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat plate-like mounting piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of a horizontally extending flat plate-like extension piece 151a. is formed in a substantially L shape. The lower door frame hinge shaft bracket 151 has a mounting piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

The lower door frame hinge pin 152 has a truncated cone shape that narrows downward. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into a door frame hinge hole 644 of a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 to be described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 .

The door frame side lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 . can support

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front. The door frame left side decorative board 160 extends vertically from the height below the speaker insertion opening 119 on the left side of the door frame base 110 in the front view to the height near the center of the through opening 111 in the vertical direction. A frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 and a door frame left side lower decoration extending vertically from the height of a lower position of the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the upper tray passage opening 117 . a substrate 162;

A door-frame left-side upper decorative board 161 and a door-frame left-side lower decorative board 162 of the door-frame left-side decorative board 160 are each provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a capable of emitting light forward. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is positioned behind a door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, with the door frame 3 assembled, and has a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a provided (mounted) on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decoration lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be decorated with light emission.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 and is used to detachably mount the glass unit 190 . The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disc-shaped base portion 171 mounted rotatably about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a rod-like member protruding from the base portion 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. and a protrusion 172 that

The glass unit mounting members 170 are rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 below the pair of speaker insertion openings 119 and outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 .

The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 projects upward from the base portion 171, so that the projecting portion 172 is outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the rear. In this position, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 or removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118 .

With the glass unit 190 inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 , the glass unit mounting member 170 rotates so that the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171 . The rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the unit 190 is brought into contact with the rear side of the glass unit 190 to restrict the upper portion of the glass unit 190 from moving rearward.

The center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is positioned within the projecting portion 172 because the protruding portion 172 protrudes from the disk-shaped base portion 171 that is rotatably attached to the door frame base 110 . . Therefore, when the glass unit mounting member 170 is freely rotatable, the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171 and is stable. In the glass unit mounting member 170, when the projecting portion 172 is in the rotational position where the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171, the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is restricted by the projecting portion 172. Even if the member 170 is subjected to vibration or the like, the whole does not rotate so that the projecting portion 172 projects upward from the base portion 171, and the rearward movement restriction of the glass unit 190 is not naturally released. do not have.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 projects upward from the base portion 171, and the projecting portion 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110 .

[3-1g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110 . 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 includes a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, and a rear end of the tube portion 181 extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 181. An extended annular flange portion 182 and a plurality of ( In this example, three) ridges 183 and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 connecting the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 are provided. .

The handle mounting member 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 112 with screws while the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 .

The cylindrical portion 181 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300 . One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side inside the tubular portion 181 and the remaining two are provided on the lower side inside the tubular portion 181 . These three ridges 183 are formed in the handle base 301 at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c. Therefore, in the handle mounting member 180, the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 181 only when the three protrusions 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) with respect to the door frame base 110 can be regulated.

Since the axis of the cylindrical portion 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, the handle mounting member 180 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 so that the cylindrical portion The axis 181 is tilted so as to extend forward right, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a similarly tilted state.

[3-1h. glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 118 , and a glass frame that closes the inside of the glass frame 191 and has a glass frame on the outer periphery. and two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191 . The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space therebetween (see FIG. 26, etc.).

The glass frame 191 includes a pair of flat mounting pieces 191a extending outward from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. and a plate-shaped locking piece 191b. A mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can abut against a projecting portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 . The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

This glass unit 190 is obtained by inserting the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the reinforcing sheet metal 132 in the reinforcing unit 130 from above. , the front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the projecting portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by bringing it into contact with the rear surface of the door frame base 110 .

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the procedure can be reversed. Thereby, the glass unit 190 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 110 .

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The crime prevention cover 200 includes a flat plate-like body portion 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat plate-like rear projecting piece 202 projecting short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 201, and is spaced apart from the left and right. and a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the body portion 201 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110 .

The body portion 201 of the crime prevention cover 200 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward beyond the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110 . Further, the upper end of the body portion 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a on the game board 5 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. More specifically, the upper end of the body portion 201 is shaped along a portion of an inner rail 1002, an out guide portion 1003, a portion of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

The rear projecting piece 202 is formed along substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201 . Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed into a shallow box-like shape that is opened rearward by the body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear projecting piece 202 also protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the body portion 201 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 201 . A rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body part 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front structural member 1000 of the game board 5 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. ing.

Note that the rear projecting piece 202 is not formed at a portion positioned between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 . As a result, the game ball passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball shot by the ball shooting device 680) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200, and is within the game area 5a. It does not interfere with hitting the game ball into.

A pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110 . Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110 .

When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 abuts the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the part protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 is The removed rear projecting piece 202 is inserted into the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. In addition, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security concave portion 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire attempts to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the crime prevention concave portion 1008. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Open/close cylinder unit]
The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder attachment portion 113 positioned between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 in the vicinity of the right end of the door frame base 110 in front view, and cooperates with the locking unit 700 described later. It is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4.

The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 includes a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 having a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extending back and forth, and a locking unit attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 to rotate a key inserted into the keyhole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 that transmits rotation to the key cylinder 710 of 700, and a cylinder mounting plate 213 that mounts the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcement unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 can be rotated by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a. can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of .

The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and is arranged at opposite positions across the central axis from the rear end to the front. It has a pair of cutouts 212a that are cut out in the same direction. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the body frame 4 can be inserted from behind, and projections of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 are inserted into the pair of notches 212a. Thus, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted into the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the lock unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

The cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and has a convex shape that protrudes forward when viewed from above. More specifically, the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 includes a rectangular flat front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of flat plate-like side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. and a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a flat plate shape from the respective rear sides of the pair of side plate portions 213b in directions away from each other. The cylinder lock 211 penetrates the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 from the rear at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. Of the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left side in front view is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right side in front view is attached to the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 . As a result, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 of the reinforcing unit 130 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 .

When the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100 , the front end of the cylinder lock 211 projecting forward from the front plate portion 213 a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 extends from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the cylinder insertion hole. 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110. A front plate portion 213a and a pair of side plate portions 213b of a cylinder mounting plate 213 are accommodated in a box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 that is open rearward. ing.

[3-4. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 41 and the like. FIG. 34(a) is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. Also, FIG. 35(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the back. FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34(a), and FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 34(b). FIG. 39(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34(b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). 40 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into the main members and seen from the back. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front part of the dish unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player. is.

The production operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape, and the central side except for the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent, and an operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player and the production operation unit of the plate unit cover 326 surrounding the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decoration board unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 with light emission, and a frame. A base unit 430 attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and having an operation button 410 and a decoration board unit 420 attached to the front side, and a base unit 430 attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation button 410 and effecting A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image is provided.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. FIG. 42(a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and FIG. 42(b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the rear. The operation button 410 has a circular outer shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the height of the plate unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface (a shape of a part of a spherical surface) so that the outer circumference is circular and the center side bulges forward. It has an annular button frame 412 attached thereto, and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 . The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are made of a member that does not easily transmit light.

The button lens 411 is formed with a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed to have a smooth curved surface without unevenness on the front side. The button lens 411 extends for a predetermined length toward the center (inner side) in a recessed state with a W-shaped cross section from the rear surface of the button frame 412 and is arranged in rows in the circumferential direction. A first button decorative portion 411a extends on an axis toward the center in a recessed state with an arcuate cross section from the back surface at a position on the outer peripheral side of the first button decorative portion 411a, and is arranged in a circumferential direction within a predetermined angular range. and a plurality (six) of second button decoration portions 411b provided.

As shown in the drawing, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends toward the center from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 when assembled to the operation button 410. It extends longer toward the center than

The plurality of second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411 each extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and are formed three each on the left and right sides. These second button decorative portions 411b are formed to face from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward such that the front side thereof is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 exerts a lens effect of refracting light due to unevennesses having a W-shaped cross section or an arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface of the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side cannot be seen clearly.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and has a plurality (six) of frame openings 412a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the circumferential direction in an arc shape with a predetermined length. The six frame openings 412 a are provided three each on the left and right sides, corresponding to the six second button decorations 411 b of the button lens 411 . This button frame 412 has a plated layer with metallic luster on its surface.

The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body portion 413a that extends short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body portion 413a, and an annular flange portion 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body portion 413a. A plurality of (four) guide boss portions 413c projecting rearward along the outer periphery of the main body portion 413a at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and from the rear side of the flange portion 413b along the outer periphery of the main body portion 413a. A plurality (three) of detection pieces 413d protruding rearward in a band-like shape and arranged in the circumferential direction, and a detection piece 413d extending forward and backward through the flange portion 413b outside the main body portion 413a and along the outer circumference for a predetermined length. A plurality (six) of base openings 413e are formed in the circumferential direction, and a base opening 413e extends forward from the front end of the main body 413a. and an inner extending portion 413f that narrows toward (center side).

The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are respectively arranged at portions corresponding to the four upper, lower, left, and right corners with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, respectively. 413 d of three detection pieces are arrange|positioned at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so that two may be distribute|arranged to the upper side and one to the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main-body part 413a. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

The six base openings 413e are provided three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the second button decorative portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. As shown in FIG. At the base opening 413e of the button base 413, part of the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f are recessed inward from the outer circumference. The inner diameter of the inwardly tapering front end of the inner extending portion 413 f substantially matches the inner diameter of the button frame 412 .

The front surface of the operation button 410 bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface), and is formed transparently. can be viewed from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide bosses 413c slidably inserted into holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and an operation button spring 438 inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431. is urged forward by The front side of the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 abuts against the frame unit 415 due to the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430 . By pressing against the , it moves rearward until the rear end abuts the front surface of the base unit 430 . When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413 d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 . Detection of the detection piece 413d by the press detection sensor 440 means that the operation button 410 has been operated.

In addition, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 to the center side in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. The portion 411a makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 .

Further, the operation button 410 has a button lens 411 and a button frame 412 that close the front end opening of a cylindrical button base 413 . A transparent portion that allows the rear to be visually recognized is formed so as to narrow from the outer periphery to the inner side with respect to the outer diameter of 410 . The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 of the base unit 430 .

In addition, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400 , the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body portion 413 a ) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decoration board unit 420 and extends from the front surface of the decoration board unit 420 . It will protrude backwards. As a result, the lights emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420 are emitted from the button. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside of the base 413 to the inside, and the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button top interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button bottom interior of the base unit 430 can be prevented. It is possible to prevent light emitted forward from the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413 . Therefore, the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the decoration board unit 420, the operation button left inner decoration board 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button It is possible to prevent the LEDs mounted on the lower interior decoration board 436 from illuminating the parts other than the part to be luminous decoration, and the luminous decoration can be performed with good appearance.

[3-4b. frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer circumference of the operation button 410 from the front side, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in a shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame main body 416 attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 and having a circular central opening 416a, and frame main bodies 416 on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a. a pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side to the frame, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached from the front side to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a. there is

The frame main body 416 has a circular central opening 416a which is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. A plurality (six) of outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a and arranged in rows in the circumferential direction, and a notch 416c having a predetermined width in the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , is equipped with The central opening 416 a is formed to have substantially the same diameter as the outer peripheral side of the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410 . As a result, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can come into contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening portion 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided three each on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a, and are closed by frame side lenses 417 from the rear side. The cutout portion 416c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

The frame main body 416 also includes a substantially tubular inner tubular portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening portion 416a and the outer peripheral opening portion 416b, and has a cutout portion corresponding to the cutout portion 416c. In the state where the production operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylindrical portion 416d is arranged so that the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420 are respectively arranged. and partitions between the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b (see FIG. 38).

Further, the frame body 416 has a pair of mounting portions 416e that extend outward from the upper left and right sides of the outer periphery, respectively, and are mounted to the effect operation unit mounting portions 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. As shown in FIG. The frame main body 416 (effect operation unit 400) is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 at the left and right portions of the pair of attachment portions 416e and cutout portion 416c.

The frame main body 416 has a metal cover on substantially the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the cutout 416c on the side opposite to the cutout 416c side (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) across the central opening 416a. A glossy plated layer is formed.

The frame side lenses 417 close outer peripheral openings 416b formed on the left and right sides of the frame main body 416 three each, from the rear side. The frame side lens 417 has a smooth surface without unevenness on the front side, and a plurality of unevenness along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear side (see FIGS. 39 and 46). Light is refracted by these multiple unevennesses, so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

The frame top lens 418 has a substantially rectangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the cutout portion 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The frame top lens 418 has a smooth front surface. In addition, the frame top lens 418 has a plurality of concave and convex portions extending in a zigzag pattern on the rear surface side along the periphery of the central opening 416a and arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 37 and 46). reference). The rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen because light is refracted by these unevennesses.

In the frame unit 415, in a state in which the production operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are connected to the second LEDs 422b and 423b of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420, respectively. , and the frame top lens 418 is positioned in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted thereon can be decorated with light. .

[3-4c. Decoration board unit]
The decoration board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 43 and the like. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decoration board unit of the effect operation unit, viewed from the front. The decoration board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission. Vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400 .

The decoration board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 whose upper side is open, and an operation button left external decoration board 422 and an operation button right external decoration board 423 attached to the left and right front surfaces of the board base 421, respectively. , and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 .

The substrate base 421 has an inner circumference that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and an outer diameter that is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415 .

The operation button left external decoration board 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421 . The operation button left external decoration board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner periphery of the board base 421 on the front side, and a plurality of first LEDs 422a on the inner periphery of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 422a. and a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along. The operation button right external decoration board 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421 . The operation button right outer decoration board 423 has a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner periphery of the board base 421 on the front side, and a plurality of first LEDs 423a on the inner periphery of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 423a. and a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along. Both front and rear surfaces of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are white.

The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to the rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

When the decoration board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400 , the rear end side of the cylindrical main body part 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421 . Further, in the decoration board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are positioned behind the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b, 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. As shown in FIG. In addition, in the state assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the frame The inner tubular portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, the decoration board unit 420 illuminates only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 with light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423, respectively. At the same time, only the frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated with light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b.

Further, the decoration board unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the entire presentation operation unit 400. FIG.

[3-4 f. Effects of production operation unit]
The effects of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46 and the like. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 37. FIG. FIG. 45(a) is a view of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut away to be hidden by the first button decorative portion of the operation button, the button frame, or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows a site|part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site|part which is going to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the production|presentation operation unit. FIG. 46(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. is.

The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that changes when the game ball is hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player can operate the effect operation unit 400. The player can be entertained by participating in the performance presented to the player by operating the button 410.例文帳に追加

The performance operation unit 400 is formed to have a total height substantially equal to the height of the portion below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 . Further, the performance operation unit 400 is formed to have a full width slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. - 特許庁The effect operation unit 400 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction under the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) when viewed from the front.

The production operation unit 400 has the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 . When the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit 320, a gap is formed between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. is formed. That is, the effect operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper portion of the plate unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. installed as. As a result, in the effect operation unit 400, the central axis line CL of the transparent operation button 410 that protrudes forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is inclined so that it moves upward as it goes forward. Thus, when the player sits down in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is placed above the plate unit 320 (the effect operation unit 400). Since it is positioned in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes through the vicinity of the player's head. Therefore, when the player looks down from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (projection view from the direction parallel to the central axis CL). Therefore, the operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460 inside the operation button 410, and the like can be visually recognized in good condition.

The effect operation unit 400 has four guide bosses 413c of the operation button 410 slidably inserted into four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and is biased forward by an operation button spring 438. As shown in FIG. In a normal state (a state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the operation button spring 438 pushes the front end of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 toward the frame unit 415 . It abuts on the rear surface of the frame body 416 near the central opening 416a.

In the normal state, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 from the vicinity of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 (center axis line CL side). there is In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that protrudes forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface), a portion protruding forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 is , protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 37, etc.).

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is set to about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end thereof) faces the frame unit with respect to the direction of the central axis CL of the operation button 410. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 , the operation button 410 moves backward along the center axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 . When the rear end of the operation button 410 contacts the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the player presses the button lens 411 that protrudes forward in a curved surface shape (shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter compared to the performance operation button provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed. likely to be To be more specific, the operation buttons for presentation in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that their central axes extend substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the presentation operation unit 400 of the present embodiment are attached. is installed with the central axis CL inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as indicated by the white arrow in FIG. A portion of the operation button 410 away from the center axis CL is pressed.

By the way, since the operation buttons for performance in the conventional pachinko machine are formed on a flat surface to be pressed by the player, if the operation buttons are enlarged while the portions to be pressed are flat surfaces, When a part of the operation button deviated from the center is pressed, the surface to be pressed is tilted so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button cannot retreat straight. There is a possibility that the pressing operation becomes impossible.

On the other hand, in the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player has a curved surface shape (partial shape of a substantially spherical surface) that bulges forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. can be done. Therefore, even if any position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without being tilted. You can fully enjoy the performance to operate.

In addition, the effect operation unit 400 has the vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front surface of the board base 421 of the decoration board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is plated so that the effect operation unit 400 can be suspended. Since it is attached to the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a of the unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the attachment part. , the entire effect operation unit 400 can be greatly (strongly) vibrated, and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the effect operation unit 400. - 特許庁In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged directly below the position (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 44) that is relatively easy for the player to press, the player pressing the operation button 410 It is possible to transmit strong vibrations to the player, and surprise the player and enjoy the performance.

Furthermore, the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the plate unit cover 326 form the lower surface. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or struck, the frame is not held until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. The attachment portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the like bend downward, thereby absorbing the impact. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the effect operation unit 400 is regulated, and the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the plate unit cover 326 are attached to the effect operation unit. It is possible to avoid applying an excessive force to the portion 326a and the like, and to prevent damage to the effect operation unit 400 and the like. Therefore, when the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is pressed and an effect is presented to the player, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit is not pressed. Since the 400 and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid the interruption of the game due to the damage, suppress the decline in the interest of the player, and reduce the increase in the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to damage. can be suppressed.

As described above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, so that the button lens 411 is formed in a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity of the button lens 411 are higher than those of the case, and even if the button lens 411 is hit strongly, the impact can be dispersed over the entire button lens 411, making it difficult to break.

46, the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation button inner decorative member 432 are made of transparent members. The decoration by unevenness such as the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the first button interior decoration portion 432f, and the second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the back side is the front side (player side). ). In addition, since the plate thickness changes in the parts where these uneven decorations are formed, the light is refracted in a complicated way, so it is difficult to see the rear side through the parts where the uneven decorations are formed. .

Since the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center, the first button decoration portion 411a is decorated with unevenness. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear at the outer peripheral portion of the portion inside the button lens 411 . Behind the portion where the first button decorative portion 411a is formed (rear in the direction of the center axis CL), there are the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the inner decorative member 432 of the operation button. 432a, and the first button decorative portion 411a located in front of the gap is positioned from the front side (player side) to close the gap on the outer circumference of the operation button inner decorative member 432. can be made invisible. As a result, even if the operating button interior decoration member 432 whose position is fixed is provided inside the operating button 410 that can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the operating button 410 from deteriorating in appearance. It is possible to prevent the player from having an unpleasant feeling, and it is possible to arrange the operation button internal decoration member 432 inside the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and to improve the appearance of the operation button 410.例文帳に追加

More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 is configured such that the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 are arranged so that the outer circumference of the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 is adjusted. The unit base 431, the decoration board unit 420, and the like on the rear side (back side) of the outer side are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411.例文帳に追加Specifically, in FIG. 45, the cross-hatched portion surrounded by the one-dot chain line is hidden from the player's side. In this way, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outer side and the inner side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 are difficult to see and hidden. It is possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, in turn, the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in rows in the circumferential direction. A second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button interior decoration member 432 arranged inside and behind the operation button 410 extends in a modified octagonal shape around the center axis CL. As shown in FIG. 46, the concave-convex line of the first button decoration portion 411a and the concave-convex line of the second button inner decoration portion 432g intersect with each other. The decoration can be shown to the player.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends). With the second button inner decoration part 432g, a deep and three-dimensional geometric pattern can be shown to the player, and the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410 can be enjoyed.

Furthermore, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second inner button decoration portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the concave-convex line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g changes, the player can see the decoration with movement, and the player can be entertained.

In this way, the effect operation unit 400 provides a moving and three-dimensional decoration to the player by using the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, the pachinko machine 1 can strongly attract the player's interest and have a high appeal.

In addition, in the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), behind the operation button inner decorative member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button An upper interior decoration board 435 and an operation button lower interior decoration board 436 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surfaces thereof emit light, thereby causing the operation button interior decoration member 432 in the operation button 410 to emit light. can be decorated. That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be illuminated by the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433 , the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434 , the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435 , and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 . As shown in FIG. 38, the LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 are as follows. As viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is arranged inside the cylindrical main body portion 413a, so that the light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body portion 413a. , only the inside of the operation button 410 can be favorably illuminated.

In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is arranged behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 positioned near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 in the decoration substrate unit 420 is positioned behind the second button decoration portion 411b. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right external decoration board 423 are arranged, and by lighting these first LEDs 422a and 423a, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are decorated with light emission. can be done. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right external decoration board 423 are formed by the cylindrical body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. 415 and the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylindrical portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be favorably illuminated.

Furthermore, the effect operation unit 400 is arranged behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board A second LED 423b of 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be decorated with light emission by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right external decoration board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 can be decorated with good light. .

In addition, the production operation unit 400 has a frame top lens decoration substrate 437 in the base unit 430 arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of lenses mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437. , the frame top lens 418 can be decorated with light emission. A plate-shaped light shielding wall portion 431c protrudes forward from the lower side of the portion of the base unit 430 to which the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached to near the rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418. Light from the LED of the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the side of the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be favorably illuminated.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. FIG. FIG. 47(a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. 1 is a perspective view seen from . FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 50 is a sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 47(a). The door frame left side unit 530 is arranged above the tray unit 320 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 (door frame left side decorative board 160). It is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100 . The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 530 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the left side of the through hole 111 in the front view of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the left unit base 531. A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffuser lens member 532 attached to the front surface, and a translucent property arranged in front of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown), and a left unit top that is attached to the upper front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, protrudes forward in a cylindrical frame shape, and extends vertically. a decoration base 534, a left unit lower decoration base 535 attached to the front lower portion of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decoration lens member and protruding forward in a frame shape shorter than the left unit upper decoration base 534; A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front sides of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535, and the left unit. and a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the decorative cover 536 .

A left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open rear side, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating in the front and rear directions. As illustrated, the plurality of openings 531a include circular holes and vertically extending rectangular holes. The left unit base 531 has LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162). It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. The openings 531a of the left unit base 531 are formed so that the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are positioned substantially in the vertical center when the door frame 3 is assembled. The left unit base 531 is made of an opaque member.

In addition, the left unit base 531 has a left reflecting standing wall portion 538 (see FIGS. 5 and 23) erected toward the front from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through hole 111. As shown in FIG. ing. In the left reflecting vertical wall portion 538, the inner surface which has a flat planar shape and is provided so as to face the through hole 111 is provided as a reflecting surface capable of reflecting light. This reflective surface can be provided not only by forming the inner surface itself of the left reflecting vertical wall portion 538 from a reflective material such as metal or resin, but also by attaching a reflective seal to the inner surface. It is possible. As will be described later, the left reflecting vertical wall portion 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a portion (left portion) of the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 described above.

The left unit diffuser lens member 532 is made of a transparent member and is vertically divided into an upper diffuser lens member 532A and a lower diffuser lens member 532B. The left unit diffuser lens member 532 includes a circular lens portion 532a that is circular in front view and corresponds to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a rectangular lens portion that is square in front view and corresponds to the square opening 531a. and a lens portion 532b. When the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are positioned immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 532a and square lens portion 532b. formed.

A circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. With this circular lens portion 532a, the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a arranged in the rear can be emitted forward in the form of dots. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be decorated with light emission by the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a.

The square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 includes a central diffuse reflection portion 532c recessed rearward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusion lens portion 532d formed outside the central diffuse reflection portion 532c on the front surface. , an input lens portion 532e that bulges rearward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c), and an input lens portion 532e on the rear surface that is entirely outside of the input lens portion 532e and that extends forward as it goes away from the input lens portion 532e. and a forward reflecting portion 532f that is slanted for movement.

The front diffuser lens portion 532d of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. More specifically, the front diffuser lens portion 532d has grooves recessed rearward in an arc shape in a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and a mountain portion between the grooves extends forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wave shape. In addition, the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portions and the peak portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with respect to the radially extending line that divides it in the circumferential direction.

The front reflecting portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 532e. These plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portions are formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f has a triangular cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, with peaks between grooves sharpening rearward, and is formed in a serrated shape. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed such that the grooves and peaks move forward as the distance from the center increases. In addition, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that groove portions and mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with respect to the radially extending line dividing the portion in the circumferential direction. The radially extending line that divides in the circumferential direction coincides with the radially extending dividing line in the front diffuser lens portion 532d.

When this rectangular lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately behind the input lens portion 532e.

Light emitted forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input into the square lens portion 532b from the input lens portion 532e. Since the input lens portion 532e bulges rearward into a curved surface (convex lens shape), it refracts the light that spreads forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a so that it travels forward in parallel. Almost all of the light can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflection portion 532c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is directed perpendicularly to the longitudinally extending axis (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. direction), and travels outward along the front surface of the square lens portion 532b from the center side. Also, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflection portion 532c travels from the central side to the outside (direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c) over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction.

When the light reflected outward from the central side in the rectangular lens portion 532b substantially parallel to the front surface of the left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame reaches the saw-shaped forward reflecting portion 532f, it is reflected forward by the surface of the forward reflecting portion 532f. reflect to the side. At this time, since the rear surface of the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so as to move forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c, the thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as it moves away from the center. (see Figure 50). As a result, light that is reflected outward over the entire thickness of the square lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction by the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is sequentially forwardly reflected by the front reflection portion 532f as it goes outward from the center side. can be reflected.

The light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f passes through the front diffusion lens portion 532d and is emitted forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532f can be diffused in various directions. light can be emitted substantially uniformly forward (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) from the front surface of the .

In the front diffusion lens portion 532d and the front reflection portion 532f, the square lens portion 532b is formed by dividing a plurality of concentric grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then forming a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves with the dividing lines as boundaries. are shifted in the radial direction, and the concentric arc-shaped grooves are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted forward from the front surface of the rectangular lens portion 532b has a concentric striped pattern of light and shade. It is possible to prevent the light from becoming light, and it is possible to irradiate the light forward with more uniform light and shade. As a result, the multifaceted decorative portion in front of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission.

A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 . The left unit decorative lens member includes a circular decorative portion formed in a portion positioned in front of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and a portion positioned in front of the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532. and a multifaceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer circumference of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and which extends short in the front-rear direction. The polyhedral decorative part has a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts arranged in a vertical direction on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a polyhedron consisting of a plurality of triangles arranged in a vertical direction on both sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is shaped like this. The circular decorative portion and the multifaceted decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multifaceted decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 of the door frame right side unit 550, respectively.

The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536 . In addition, the left unit decorative lens member is configured such that the circular decorative portion is projected forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 by the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532, and the multifaceted decorative portion is projected forward from the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532. By the light irradiated to each of them, they are decorated with light emission.

The left unit upper decorative base 534 has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is formed in the shape of a rectangular tube extending back and forth. The left unit upper decorative base 534 has a portion forming a lower surface on the outer periphery, which is inclined so as to protrude downward from the front end side to the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates in the front-rear direction. The left unit upper decoration base 534 is made of an opaque member.

The left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed in a U shape that opens upward when viewed from the front. The left unit lower decorative base 535 is inclined from the approximate center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves rearward as it goes upward. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed of an opaque member.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530 . The left unit decorative cover 536 has a vertically intermediate portion that is bent rearward. A V-shaped part whose upper part is bent backward along the front end of the unit lower decorative base 535 connects the lower end of the upper V-shaped part and the upper end of the lower V-shaped part. It is composed of a linear part and a.

The left unit decorative cover 536 is attached at both upper and lower ends to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is made of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative members 537 extend short in the vertical direction and are attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is made of an opaque member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55 and the like. Fig. 51(a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. 1 is a perspective view seen from . 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51(a). FIG. 55(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51(a), and FIG. 55(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51(a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320 .

The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the right side of the through hole 111 in the front view of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface of the right unit base 551. and a door frame right side decorative board 552 attached to the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552, which is mounted on the front side of the right unit base 551 on the left side of the front view center and extends in the vertical direction and the front and back direction. A transparent plate-like right unit left diffusion lens member 553, a sheet-like right unit left decoration member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decoration member. and a transparent plate-like right unit left cover 555 attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of 554 .

In addition, the door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and on the right side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 in front view, and on the front side of the right unit base 551 on the right side of the center in front view and the right unit left diffusion lens. A transparent plate-shaped right unit right diffusion lens member 556 that is attached to the member 553 and extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and is attached to the right side surface of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and is decorated. and a right unit right cover 558 in the form of a transparent plate attached to the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. there is

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and is open on the front and right sides. A box-shaped opaque right unit left light shielding member 559 and an opaque right light shielding member 559 attached to the left side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and a right unit right light shielding member 560 having a flat plate shape.

The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and has a translucent right diffuser having a polyhedral decoration on the front end. It is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the unit decorative lens member 561 , the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561 , the front end sides of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 . A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating in the front and rear direction, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover. and a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of 563 . Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to vertically penetrate the right unit base 551, and is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting with the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is The right unit base 551 is made of an opaque member.

In addition, the right unit base 551 has a right reflecting vertical wall portion 568 (see FIGS. 6 and 24) erected toward the front from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through hole 111. ing. In the right reflecting vertical wall portion 568, the inner surface which has a flat planar shape and is provided so as to face the through hole 111 is provided as a reflecting surface capable of reflecting light. As with the inner surface of the left reflective vertical wall portion 538, the inner surface of the right reflective vertical wall portion 568 itself is made of a reflective material such as metal or resin. It is also possible to provide such as by attaching a seal for use. As will be described later, the right reflecting vertical wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and serves as a portion (right portion) of the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 described above.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative board 552 includes a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a left LED 552b mounted on the center of the front surface in the left-right direction. and a plurality of medium LEDs 552c. The left LED 552 a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 is for lighting up the right unit left decoration member 554 via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 . Also, the right LED 552b is for lighting up and decorating the right unit right decoration member 557 via the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 . The middle LED 552c is for decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed white on both front and rear surfaces. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative board 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is connected to the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 553a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 553b projecting from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in front view in a short flat shape, A plurality of notch portions 553c are cut out in a rectangular shape leftward from the right end of the rear wall portion 553b when viewed from the front, and a plurality of notch portions 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. 554, input lens portions 553e protruding rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a and provided in a plurality in the vertical direction, and on the right side of the main body portion 553a when viewed from the front. A plurality of side reflection portions 553f are arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is positioned at the center in the vertical direction.

The body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has a vertically extending quadrangular shape in side view. It is formed in a shape that is slanted to move to the Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 553a is aligned with the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move to the right in front view as it goes forward from the rear end side. Slightly slanted. The front end of the body portion 553 a projects forward to a greater extent than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3 .

The right end of the rear wall portion 553 b extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 . The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 contacts the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

A plurality of cutouts 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of them correspond to the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 . When the door-frame right-side unit 550 is assembled, the inner LEDs 552c of the door-frame right-side decorative substrate 552 face forward from the plurality of cutouts 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emits light by the plurality of inner LEDs 552c. can be decorated.

The housing recess 553 d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of the outer circumference substantially matches the outer shape of the left decorative member 554 of the right unit. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 553e protrude rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, when the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is vertically divided into 6 equal parts, it is formed at substantially the center in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 553e has a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending square protrudes rearward, and a concave portion forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion so as to be curved in a spherical shape. It has a part and a. These input lens portions 553e are positioned immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in the assembled state of the door frame right side unit 550 respectively. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body portion 553a.

A plurality (six) of the side reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 553f is formed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 553e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface on the side farther from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 553f has a cross-sectional shape, when cut in the radial direction centered on the input lens portion 553e, formed in a sharp triangular shape in which the peaks between the grooves face toward the center. , the whole is formed in a saw-like shape. In addition, the side reflecting portions 553f are formed so that groove portions and ridge portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with radial lines separating the plurality of concentric arcuate grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

In this right unit left diffusion lens member 553, the light emitted forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is directed into the body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e. is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the left LED 552a is refracted by the curved surface so that the light from the left LED 552a spreads. will be radially diffused toward the front from the center.

The body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door-frame right-side decorative substrate 552 so as to move to the right in front view as the whole goes forward. Light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decoration board 552 and incident on the main body 553a through the input lens 553e hits the flat left surface of the main body 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the body portion 553a due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the body portion 553a, and is reflected toward the side reflecting portion 553f on the inner surface of the left surface. becomes.

The light incident forward into the body portion 553a from the input lens portion 553e hits the sawtooth side reflecting portion 553f, is reflected leftward in front view, and travels outward from the left surface of the body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (to the right in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflecting portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 passes through the main body portion 553a and is irradiated to the left side. . Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected leftward by the side reflecting portion 553f in the main portion 553a and the light emitted rightward from the side reflecting portion 553f are emitted from the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 to the left. Since the light reflected to the right and passed through the body portion 553a is irradiated to the left, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the body portion 553a can be decorated with good brightness. can.

In the side reflection portion 553f, a plurality of concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of lines extending radially, and the plurality of concentric circular grooves are shifted in the radial direction with respect to the dividing lines to form concentric circular grooves. are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, the light emitted outward (leftward) from the left surface of the main body 553a is prevented from becoming light with concentric striped pattern shading. This makes it possible to irradiate leftward light with more uniform intensity. As a result, the right unit left decorative member 554 housed in the housing recess 553d on the left surface of the main body 553a can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission.

Since the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is made of a transparent member, the side reflection lens member 553 formed on the opposite side from the front view left side of the main body portion 553a (the side where the accommodating recessed portion 553d is formed) A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines in the portion 553f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflection portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion. portion can be decorated with the side reflecting portion 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and decorations such as the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in line with the concept of the performance presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is designed to have The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 .

The right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed substantially bilaterally symmetrical with the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 556a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall projecting short to the left in front view from the rear side of the main body portion 556a. 556b, a plurality of notch portions 556c that are cut out in a rectangular shape from the left end of the rear wall portion 556b to the right when viewed from the front and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction; A front view of a housing recess 556d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, a plurality of input lens portions 556e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a and are provided in the vertical direction, and the main body portion 556a. A plurality of side reflection portions 556f are arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is centered in the vertical direction on the left side.

The main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 has a vertically extending rectangular front end with an upper corner notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and a lower side extending upward toward the front. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to the right direction, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main body portion 553 a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 . Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 556a is aligned with the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move leftward in the front view as it goes forward from the rear end side. Slightly slanted. The front end of the main body portion 556 a projects forward farther than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3 .

The left end of the rear wall portion 556b extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction when assembled with the door frame right side unit 550 . The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 abuts against the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

A plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of the cutouts 556c correspond to the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. As shown in FIG. The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 . Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, a square opening penetrating back and forth between the notch portion 553c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the notch portion 556c of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. is formed, and the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be favorably decorated with light emission by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

The housing recess 556 d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of the outer circumference substantially matches the outer shape of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit. Thereby, the right decorative member 557 of the right unit can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 556e protrude rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, when the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is vertically divided into six equal parts, it is formed at the approximate center in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 556e has a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending square protrudes rearward, and a recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion so as to be curved in a spherical shape. It has a part and a. These input lens portions 556e are positioned in front of the right LEDs 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in the assembled state of the door frame right side unit 550 respectively. Thereby, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body portion 556a.

A plurality (six) of the side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 556f is formed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves circumferentially divided by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 556e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface on the side farther from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 556f has a cross-sectional shape, when cut in the radial direction centered on the input lens portion 556e, formed in a sharp triangular shape in which the peaks between the grooves face toward the center. , the whole is formed in a saw-like shape. In addition, the side reflecting portions 556f are formed so that the groove portions and the ridge portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with respect to the radial line that divides the plurality of concentric arcuate grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

In this right unit right diffusion lens member 556, the light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is directed into the body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e. is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the right LED 552b is refracted by the curved surface so that the light from the right LED 552b spreads. will be radially diffused toward the front from the center.

The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the main body portion 556a moves leftward in a front view as the whole goes forward. Light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decoration board 552 and incident on the main body 556a through the input lens 556e strikes the flat right surface of the main body 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the body portion 556a due to the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the body portion 556a, and is reflected toward the side reflecting portion 556f on the inner surface of the right surface. becomes.

The light incident forward into the body portion 556a from the input lens portion 556e hits the sawtooth side reflecting portion 556f, is reflected rightward in front view, and travels outward from the right surface of the body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (to the left in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflecting portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 passes through the main body portion 556a and is irradiated to the right side. . Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected rightward by the side reflecting portion 556f in the main portion 556a and the light emitted leftward from the side reflecting portion 556f are emitted to the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560. Since the light reflected to the right direction and passed through the body portion 556a is irradiated to the right side, the right decorative member 557 of the right unit attached to the right side of the body portion 556a can be decorated with good brightness. can.

In the side reflection portion 556f, the plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the plurality of concentric arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing lines as boundaries to form the concentric arc grooves. are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, the light irradiated outward (rightward) from the right surface of the main body portion 556a is prevented from becoming light with concentric striped pattern shading. It is possible to irradiate rightward light with more uniform density. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557 accommodated in the accommodation recess 556d on the right surface of the main body portion 556a can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission.

In addition, since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, it is formed on the opposite side from the right side of the main body portion 556a in front view (the side on which the housing recess 556d is formed). A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves and radially extending lines in the portion 556f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflection portion 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion. portion can be decorated with the side reflecting portion 556f.

The right decorative member 557 of the right unit is formed in a thin sheet shape, and decorations such as the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in line with the concept of presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is designed to have The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 . The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially bilaterally symmetrical with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555 . Further, the decoration applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 when viewed from the side. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape that is open on the front and right sides. The right unit left light shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 559a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 559b projecting from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in front view in a short flat shape, and a rear wall portion 559b. A plurality of notch portions 559c are cut leftward from the right end of the wall portion 559b in a front view and have a plurality of cutout portions 559c formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. A plurality of flat reinforcement portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a are provided.

The main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 has a vertically extending rectangular shape in which the upper corners on the front end side are notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side extends upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape inclined so as to move, and has substantially the same outer shape as the body portions 553 a and 556 a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 .

The left end of the rear wall portion 559b extends to the right from the approximate center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 . The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 contacts the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

A plurality of cutouts 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of the cutouts 559c correspond to the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 . The plurality of notches 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notches 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, respectively. Therefore, when the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of cutouts 559c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552c emit light from the right unit decorative lens member 561. can be decorated.

The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided in three sets spaced apart by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, one pair of reinforcing portions 559d having a height substantially equal to the left and right widths and spaced apart in the vertical direction. Each set of reinforcing portions 559 d is formed at a position behind a decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563 . The strength and rigidity of the entire door frame right side unit 550 are enhanced by the plurality of reinforcing portions 559d.

The right light shielding member 560 of the right unit has a shape in a side view such that the upper corner on the front end side of a vertically extending quadrangle is notched obliquely in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559 a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 . The right unit right light shielding member 560 closes the right opening opened to the right of the right unit left light shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 .

The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 as shown in FIG. It is arranged so as to be close to the body portions 553 a and 556 a of the left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 . As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated from each other in the horizontal direction, forming a space extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction with a predetermined width in the horizontal direction. . Through the space formed between the body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560, light emitted forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is emitted from the right unit decoration. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated.

In addition, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of an opaque member, and the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 illuminate forward, respectively. The light emitted is prevented from interfering with each other. Only the middle LED 552c can be used for luminous decoration.

Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged behind each of the divided spaces because the internal space is vertically divided into four by the three sets of reinforcing parts 559d. It is possible to prevent light from interfering between the spaces by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552, which is located in front of each space of the right unit decorative lens member 561. , can be decorated independently. In other words, the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550 can be vertically divided into a plurality of (four) areas, and each area can be illuminated independently.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 . The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and formed with a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer circumference of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and which extends short in the front-rear direction. The polyhedral decorative portion 561b has a plurality of rows of quadrangular pyramid-shaped parts arranged vertically on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of rows of polyhedrons made up of a plurality of triangles on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed into a shape as shown.

More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 has a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and multifaceted decorative portions 561b divided into four spaces by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d of the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the three regions located in the front, the circular decorative portion 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction is provided with one multifaceted decorative portion 561b on each of the upper and lower sides. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 . The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563 . The right unit decorative lens member 561 is decorated with light emission by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 arranged in the rear.

The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shapes of the front and upper ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 . The right unit decoration base 562 is formed so as to be able to cover both the left and right outer sides near the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and the left and right sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561 . The front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 . This right unit decorative base 562 is formed of an opaque member.

The right unit cover 563 is formed so as to be able to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562 . The right unit cover 563 is made of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative members 564 extend short in the vertical direction and are attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is made of an opaque member. The three decorative members 564 vertically divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four.

When the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame left side unit 530 protrudes forward in a large plate shape, and slightly forward than the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. there is The door frame right side unit 550 includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both projecting left and right sides, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end. can be decorated with luminescence.

Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the pachinko machine on the right side. It is possible to exhibit a function and effect like a partition between. As a result, the players playing the pachinko machine 1 can be given the illusion that they are playing in a private room, and the players can play in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about other players around them. can be done.

In addition, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, in a game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are arranged side by side, even if the door frame right side unit 550 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the island facility can be installed. The pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized even from the lateral direction along the line, and the pachinko machine 1 can be conspicuous in a game hall where many pachinko machines are arranged. Therefore, if the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are decorated with light, even if the pachinko machine 1 is not positioned near the front of the pachinko machine 1, the book can be seen from a distance. The existence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the players.

Furthermore, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as a ball jam or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both left and right sides By making the member 561 or the like luminous and decorated in a peculiar manner, it is possible to immediately inform the staff of the game hall of the occurrence of the trouble and make them recognize it, so that the trouble can be dealt with quickly. Therefore, the interruption of the game by the player can be resolved early, and the player's frustration and loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59 and the like. Figure 56 (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame top unit from the back. It is a perspective view. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. The door frame top unit 570 is mounted above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 above the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the left and right sides of the center base 571 that is mounted in the center in the horizontal direction above the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 . A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, and extending to the left and right, with the center in the left and right direction protruding forward. A pair of openings 574a passing through the pair of upper speakers 573 in front of the pair of upper speakers 573 in a box-like shape with an open rear, and a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to the vicinity of the center. It has a plurality of slits 574b (three on each side) extending vertically and penetrating them in the front-rear direction. A unit main body 271, and a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal, which is arranged on the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a. ing.

Here, although illustration is omitted, the pair of side bases 572 (the left side base 572a and the right side base 572b) each have an internal space that is open only toward the side where the opening window is provided. In the internal space of the opening window, the outer peripheral light emitting portion 34 (left outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34a, right outer outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b) provided so as to emit light from outside the outer periphery into the opening window, and from inside the outer periphery of the opening window outer peripheral light detectors 35 (left outer peripheral outer light detector 35a, right outer outer light detector 35b) for detecting the light outside the outer periphery.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 at the center in the left-right direction, and is attached to the top inner decorative member 576 having translucency, and to the rear side of the top inner decorative member 576. A door frame top middle decorative substrate 577 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a plurality of slits 574b attached to the front surface of the unit body 271, respectively, and left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576. A plurality of transparent plate-shaped light guide members 578 (three on each side) extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 across the opening 574a, and a top inner decoration member 576 on the front surface of the unit main body 271. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 attached to the left and right sides and respectively covering the front surfaces of a plurality (three) of light guide members 578, and a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decoration. A top center left decorative member 581, which is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 from the front side of each lens member 580 and extends from both left and right sides of the top center decorative member 576 to near the center side end of the opening 574a, and A top middle right decorative member 582 is provided.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inner side of the left and right side surfaces of the unit main body 271, respectively, and LEDs are mounted on portions facing the left and right outer ends of the plurality (three) of light guide members 578, respectively. A door frame top left decorative board 583 and a door frame top right decorative board 584 pass through, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed on both left and right sides of the center in the left and right direction on the rear side of the unit body 271. A pair of substrate bases 585 attached to the respective parts, and a door attached to the front surfaces of the pair of substrate bases 585 and having a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted behind the slit 574b of the unit main body 271. It is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 on the front side of the frame top center left decoration board 586 and the door frame top center right decoration board 587, and the door frame top center left decoration board 586 and the door frame top center right decoration board 587, respectively. A pair of light blocking members 588 are provided.

In addition, the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 within the unit main body 271, and a central base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. An attached relay board cover 590, an upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271, and a unit cover 591 so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 271. and a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271 .

A central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front. The center base 571 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward, and has a plurality of unevenness on the front surface. A pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the center base 571, respectively. A pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. When the pair of upper speakers 573 are assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the respective front surfaces are obliquely attached so that the side near the center of the door frame top unit 570 in the left-right direction moves rearward. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone speakers capable of outputting sound over a wide frequency band.

The unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that the lower portions near the left and right ends of a square extending in the left and right direction bulge downward when viewed from the front. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that a square extending in the left and right direction is notched with a trapezoid narrowing upward from the lower end side when viewed from the front. The unit main body 271 has a rectangular shape extending to the left and right in a plan view, and a portion of about 1/2 of the total width (length in the horizontal direction) centered on the center in the horizontal direction on the front edge side of the rectangle. A trapezoid protruding forward and a quadrangle protruding short forward with the front end side of the trapezoid as a long side are combined to form a shape. Therefore, the unit main body 271 is arranged such that both sides of the portion protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface are aligned with the lines connecting the left-right end portions of the unit main body 271 and the left-right direction end portions of the front ends of the portions protruding forward. It is located posteriorly (recessed).

The unit main body 271 has openings 574a penetrating in the front-rear direction at portions extending from the right and left ends of the front surface to positions outside the portions projecting forward. In addition, the unit body 271 has a plurality of slits that extend left and right at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and that penetrate in the front-rear direction at a portion that protrudes forward in a trapezoidal shape on the front surface and that extends obliquely. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend laterally from the vicinity of the front end of the front surface of the unit main body 271, which extends obliquely forward, to the vicinity of the opening 574a. Also, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction so as to be separated vertically by three.

The unit main body 271 has an upper opening 574c formed by notching forward from the rear end toward the front in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d formed by notching from the rear end toward the front in the left-right direction on the lower surface. , is equipped with An upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271 is closed by an upper cover 591. As shown in FIG. Also, the lower opening 574 d is closed by a lower cover 592 .

The unit main body 271 also has a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that its front surface is located forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. This unit main body 271 is formed of an opaque member.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion that protrudes forward from the front surface of the unit main body 271 at the center in the left-right direction. The top middle decorative member 576 has a shape when viewed from the front that is a modified pentagon bent so that the center of the lower side of the substantially square in the horizontal direction is positioned downward, and extends laterally outward from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the modified pentagon. It is formed in a shape as if it were a combination of a substantially right-angled triangle connecting the tip of the edge and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined such that the modified pentagonal portion on the front surface moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has translucency.

The door frame top middle decorative board 577 is arranged behind the top middle decorative member 576 in a state in which the front surface is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward so as to follow the front surface of the modified pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576 . side mounted. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top interior decoration substrate 577, and the interior top decoration member 576 can be decorated with light emission by causing the LEDs to emit light.

The light guide member 578 is made of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape along the left and right outer sides of the front end of the front surface of the unit main body 271 protruding forward. The side near the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 is defined as the end side, and the side near the center is defined as the center side. 578a, and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape with a large radius so as to move forward from the central end side of the straight portion 578a toward the central side. The straight portion 578a of the light guide member 578 has a depth in the front-rear direction smaller than the height in the vertical direction, and the arc portion 578b has a depth in the front-rear direction larger than the height in the vertical direction. The straight portion 578a of the light guide member 578 has a constant vertical height, and the circular arc portion 578b has a vertical height that decreases toward the center. When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is positioned immediately before the opening 574a of the unit body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit body 271 from the front. there is

The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and formed of sawtooth unevenness, a diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b and formed of a plurality of irregularities, It has

When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, both left and right outer ends of the light guide member 578 face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input portion 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top center left decorative board 586 or the door frame top center right decorative board 587. FIG. When the light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both left and right outer ends, the light is transmitted to the straight portion 578a. As the light advances toward the center, the light is sequentially reflected forward from the end side by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and the portion in front of the straight portion 578a of them is decorated with light emission.

Light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top center right decorative substrate 587 enters the light guide member 578 from a diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is diffused widely into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. As a result, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b can be decorated with light.

In this way, the light guide member 578 is connected to the LEDs 583 a and 586 a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 , or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 . By guiding the light from the LEDs 584a and 587a, the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in front can be decorated with good (uniform) light.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271 . The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. A decorative lens portion 579 a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578 and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578 . On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, concavities and convexities of truncated square pyramids protruding forward are arranged in rows on the left and right sides.

The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574 e of the unit body 271 . That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 . The top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated by the LEDs 583 a and 586 a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 via three light guide members 578 .

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center in the horizontal direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271 . The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. A decorative lens portion 580 a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578 and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578 . On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, concavities and convexities of truncated square pyramids projecting forward are arranged in rows on the left and right sides.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574 f of the unit body 271 . That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 . The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated by LEDs 584 a and 587 a of a door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and a door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via three light guide members 578 .

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574 a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576 . The top center left decorative member 581 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in the state assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front surface is the top left. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 579 . The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574 a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576 . The top center right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in the state assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front surface is the top right. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 580 . The top center right decorative member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

The door frame top left decorative board 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted directed rightward. The door frame top left decorative board 583 has an LED 583a mounted at a position facing the left end surface of three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 583a can be made to emit light independently. A portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the opening 574a on the left side of the unit main body 271 is illuminated by the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminescence.

The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted directed leftward. On the door frame top right decorative board 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end surfaces of three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 584a can be made to emit light independently. By means of the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, the portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the opening 574a on the right side of the unit main body 271 is illuminated via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminescence.

The pair of board bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion in the unit main body 271 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrical with each other. The substrate base 585 has side walls that are substantially square in side view and have sides that extend vertically and forward and backward, a rear wall that is square in front view and extends outward in the left and right direction at right angles from the rear sides of the side walls, and a front end of the upper side of the side wall. The line connecting the upper sides of the side walls to the middle is the oblique side, and the upper side of a substantially right-angled triangle connects the upper sides of the side wall and the back wall. and a right-angled triangular lower wall, and is formed in a triangular prism-like box shape with an open space between upper and lower oblique sides. The board base 585 is attached to the unit main body 271 so that the open portion is closed by the unit main body 271 . A door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 or a door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 is attached to the substrate base 585 so that the open portion is closed.

The door frame top center left decorative board 586 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 attached to the left rear side of the left-right center of the unit main body 271 . be done. The door frame top center left decorative board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. It becomes inclined. As a result, when the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b are formed on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. becomes a state approximately parallel to .

A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top center left decorative board 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271 . As a result, when the door frame top center left decorative board 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570 , a plurality of LEDs 586 a face forward from the three slits 574 b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 . The door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 586a to light-embellish a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 near the top center decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is mounted on the board base 585 mounted on the rear side of the unit main body 271 on the right side of the left-right center so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front. be done. The door frame top center right decorative board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. It becomes inclined. As a result, when the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b are formed on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. becomes a state approximately parallel to .

A plurality of LEDs 587 a are mounted on the door frame top center right decorative board 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit body 271 . As a result, when the door frame top center right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, a plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit body 271. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 587a to light-embellish a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 near the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

A pair of light shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit main body 271 at positions between the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 587 and the unit main body 271 . The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed substantially bilaterally symmetrical with each other by an opaque member. The light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower portions of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top center right decorative substrate 587 which are arranged in rows corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit main body 271. partitioning. With this light shielding member 588, light can be guided forward only by the LEDs 586a and 587a positioned immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 579 can be guided forward. The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be satisfactorily light-emitting and decorated in an independent state.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571 . The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. It relays the connection between the frame top center right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 . The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door main body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550 . The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590 .

The door frame top unit 570 is provided with a top middle decorative member 576 projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the front surfaces of both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are curved backward. Therefore, the player can be given the illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes greatly forward, and the player's interest in the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted.

In addition, the door frame top unit 570 attaches the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 arranged in the center to the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 . It is formed so as to extend from both sides to a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f formed on both left and right ends of the unit main body 271. As shown in FIG. As a result, the front upper portion of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated with the door frame top unit 570 .

At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each in the vicinity of both left and right ends where the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are arranged. The speaker cover 575 faces forward from between the three vertically spaced decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be listened to by the player in good condition, and the player can enjoy high-quality stereo sound.

Further, the door-frame top unit 570 has a top left decorative lens member 579 and a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top right decorative lens member 580, so that the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 583 are arranged. Light from substrate 584, door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be directed to top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decorative lens member 580, and top left decorative lens member. 579 and the entire front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580 can be well decorated with light emission. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can light-embellish the entire upper front surface of the door frame 3 including the front side of the left and right upper speakers 573 .

[3-8. Effects of door frame]
Effects of the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a through-hole 111 penetrating through the front and rear of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and is made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than the conventional pachinko machine. , the vertical height of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 is reduced in accordance with the enlargement of the through hole 111, and the horizontal width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 is reduced. is made smaller. As a result, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). , corresponds to a game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

The door frame 3 has an effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 protruding forward below the through hole 111. , and the front surface of the lower half (the portion below the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (the front surface of the front lower decorative portion 326c) is hollowed backward (dish unit 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the production operation unit 400, the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 are positioned rearward. ing. As a result, the performance operation unit 400 attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction appears to protrude forward greatly, so that the performance operation unit 400 is made conspicuous and emphasized to the player. , and the effect operation unit 400 can be strongly focused.

The door frame 3 tilts the performance operation unit 400 arranged in front of the plate unit 320 below the through hole 111 so that the large semispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward. Therefore, when the player sits down in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation buttons 410 face the player's head (face), and the player lowers his/her line of sight and presses the effect operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen almost in the front, and the large and round operation button 410 can be strongly recognized, and the expectation for the performance using the operation button 410 can be heightened. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good condition, and the effect image can be sufficiently enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with the operation button 410 which is large in diameter and protrudes forward in a round shape and has a diameter substantially equal to the total height of the plate unit 320, the operation button 410 can be operated by moving the hand over a short distance. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and the "quick press" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward in a round shape, is mounted in a tilted state, it can be pressed from above like the operation button of a conventional pachinko machine. It can be operated satisfactorily even from the front or from the front, and the operation button 410 with good operability can make the performance using the operation button 410 more enjoyable.

Further, the door frame 3 is attached with the effect operation unit 400 in a state of being suspended by the plate unit 320, and is provided with a vibration motor 424 for generating vibrations in the lower part of the effect operation unit 400. When vibration is generated by rotating the vibration motor 424 according to the state, a strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, and the player is startled by pressing the operation button. The production using 410 can be made even more enjoyable.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (effect operation unit 400) extending over the entire height of the plate unit 320 at the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320. Since the lower plate 322 underneath is less conspicuous, it is possible to make it easier for players who are familiar with the conventional pachinko machine to recognize that it is clearly different, and appeal strongly attracting the interest of the players. The pachinko machine 1 with high power can be obtained.

In addition, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d that opens on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the capacity of the lower tray 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower tray opening 326d, and the number of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 can be sufficiently secured. In addition, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts his or her left hand into the lower plate 322 or puts his or her finger on the lower plate opening 326d, Since it is difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower tray 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of incongruity, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game and increasing the size of the lower tray opening 326d. The fact that the lower plate 322 has a larger volume than that can also be made tactilely recognizable.

Further, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball supply port 323c through which game balls from the upper tray 321 are discharged to the lower tray 322, and a lower outlet for discharging game balls from the lower tray 322 to a dollar box or the like below the tray unit 320. The countersunk ball extraction hole 322a is arranged linearly in the front-rear direction, and is arranged on the right outside of the lower dish opening 326d (right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400) in front view. That is, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a are connected to the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outer side of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. Since the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a are not visible from the player side, the appearance of the tray unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be improved. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, in the lower tray 322 of the door frame 3, the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is arranged in front of (directly in front of) the lower tray ball supply port 323c. As a result, the game ball discharged from the upper tray 321 or the like to the lower tray 322 is immediately discharged from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a to the dollar box or the like below as soon as it enters the lower tray 322. At this time, since the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, the flow of the game balls discharged from the upper tray 321 and the like to the dollar box through the lower tray 322 also increases. can't see This allows the player to have the illusion that the game balls on the upper tray 321 or the game balls or the like paid out from the payout device 830 with the upper tray 321 being full are directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and to make the player concentrate on the game (striking operation of the game ball, effect images, etc.) and suppress the decline in interest. can.

In the lower tray 322, the door frame 3 is provided with a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a at a position closer to the front left of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, and the lower tray 322 is erected on the right side of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a. Since the raised wall part is obliquely curved to face the direction of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 is directly discharged. It can be guided to the hole 322a, or it can be reflected by the wall on the right side and indirectly guided to the ball hole 322a. As a result, while the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c is located in the area on the left side of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a in the lower tray 322. (Lower tray first area A1), since it can be ejected downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball circulating in the lower tray 322 is not visible to the player. Game balls can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower plate opening 326d of a plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 faces forward, between the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a (the performance operation unit 400) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower tray opening 326d or puts his hand into the lower tray 322, the front of the lower speaker port 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the lower speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be favorably output forward, and the sound of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. In addition, when the player puts his or her hand into the lower tray 322 or approaches it, the player can feel the vibration caused by the deep bass sound from the lower speaker 921 forwardly output from the lower speaker port 326e. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a plate-shaped right side unit 550 projecting greatly forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an effect like a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. It is possible to give the illusion that the player is there, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about other players around.

Further, the door frame 3 can be decorated with light on the front end and the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward. In the pachinko machine 1, even if it is not positioned in front of the pachinko machine 1, the existence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified even from a distance such as from a lateral direction along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the players. machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a top middle decorative member 576 protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 above the through hole 111, and the front surfaces of both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are The top middle decorative member of the door frame top unit 570 is more concave than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576. 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of 576 are positioned rearward. As a result, only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the top middle decorative member 576 can be made conspicuous and emphasized to the player, and the top can be seen to be emphasized. Strong attention can be drawn to the middle decorative member 576 .

By the way, the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine is equipped with a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other to the left and right, and the two upper speakers stand out. On the other hand, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 has a pair of upper parts whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal on both left and right ends. A speaker 573 is provided, and a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from both left and right sides of a central top middle decorative member 576 through the front of a speaker cover 575 to both left and right ends are provided. The entire front surfaces of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light. As a result, the upper part of the front face of the door frame 3 can be decorated as a whole, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 are not conspicuous in the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration is clearly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to be highly appealing to the player by allowing the player to recognize at a glance that it is there, and the pair of upper speakers 573 can entertain the player with high-quality stereo sound. can.

In this way, the door frame 3 of this embodiment has the effect operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 below and above the through hole 111. Since each of them protrudes greatly forward at the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to present to the player a decoration with a sense of unity in the top and bottom in which the imaginary line passing through the center in the left-right direction is conspicuous, and at the same time, the decoration gives a sophisticated feeling. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous than other pachinko machines and has a high appeal.

In addition, since the door frame 3 has the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 and the production operation unit 400 arranged vertically in the center in the left-right direction protrude forward, the top middle decorative member 576 When the effect operation unit 400 is decorated with light, the player can see a light emitting line extending vertically at the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the line of sight of the player is arranged at the center in the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 of the production operation unit 400 or the like.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66 and the like. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit, FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 and viewed from the front, and FIG. 65 is the game board of FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the function display unit enlarged from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which game balls are struck by the player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. As shown in FIG. The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and a front structural member 1000 that is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to cover the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that partitions, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, and the game is played by hitting the game ball into the game area 5a. and a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game contents to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown).

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of 1100, a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the front surface of the game panel 1100. and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A game board side performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side performance display device 1600. - 特許庁

The game panel 1100 has a transparent flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000, and holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. and a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 includes a plurality of general winning openings 2001 which are always open to accept the game ball hit into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 at different positions in the game area 5a. A first starting port 2002 which is always open to accept a ball, a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. A second start port 2004 that enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by this, and the first special lottery that is drawn by accepting the game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. A big prize winning opening 2005 is provided in which game balls can be accepted either according to the result of the lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached directly above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a big winning port 2005. A start port unit 2100 and a start port unit A lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of 2100 when viewed from the front and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and a side unit attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. It has an upper part 2300 and a frame-like center accessory 2500 having a gate part 2003 and a second starting port 2004 attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the back wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600 is provided.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back top left movable effect unit 3200 attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side in the front view, and the back box. A back left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in the back box 3010, and a back upper center attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view. A movable effect unit 3400 and a back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 are provided.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front constituent member 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65 and the like. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc from a lower end on the left side of the center in the front view in the front view along the circumferential direction in a clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extending obliquely to the upper right; The game is played on the inner rail 1002 which is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 that is linearly inclined from the right end of the out-guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004 . from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 and the impact part 1006 with which the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Further, the front structural member 1000 includes the outer side of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 near the lower ends thereof extending substantially vertically, the outer side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each part has a security recess 1008 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1008 projects backward from the security cover 200 on the door frame 3. inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security concave portion 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire attempts to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the crime prevention concave portion 1008. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front component 1000 also has a plurality of positioning projections 1009 projecting rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002 . By inserting these positioning protrusions 1009 into inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 , the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 .

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1010 projecting rearwardly from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses 1010 can be positioned between the panel holder 1120 (the game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. FIG.

The front structural member 1000 also has a notch portion 1011 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch 1011 is aligned with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, these notches 1011 and 1127 are passed through the lower full ball path. Front end openings of a normal guideway 861 and a full tank guideway 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, FIGS. 64 and 65, and the like. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110 is held. and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and having the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface thereof.

A panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if obstacle nails are planted in the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 has an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed through the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 thereon.

In addition, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of fitting holes 1113 which are circular holes arranged near the outer circumference and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and long holes 1114 arranged near the outer circumference at the lower left portion and penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in the vertical direction. , is equipped with These fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114 are arranged outside the game area 5 a and are used for positioning with the panel holder 1120 . In addition, the panel plate 1110 is provided with stepped engaging stepped portions 1115 recessed on the front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. These engaging stepped portions 1115 are cut out to approximately half the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the game area 5a like the fitting hole 1113 and the long hole 1114, It is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120 .

In addition, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. By fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1009 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole 1116, the inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 detachably holds the panel plate 1110 and has a holding stepped portion 1121 recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and a front-to-rear direction inside the holding stepped portion 1121 having a size substantially equal to that of the game area 5a. and a through hole 1122 penetrating through.

The depth from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110 , and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion 1121 is the same as the panel holder 1120 . Almost flush with the front surface. Further, the holding stepped portion 1121 is formed in such a size that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 on the front inner peripheral surface thereof. Due to this clearance, even if the panel plate 1110 expands and contracts relatively due to changes in temperature and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1113 and the elongated hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding stepped portion 1121, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding stepped portion 1121. It extends and has a plurality of projecting pins 1123 that can be fitted into and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 . By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engaging claw 1124 and an engaging piece 1125 that engage with the engaging stepped portion 1115 at positions corresponding to the engaging stepped portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 . More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is arranged above the holding stepped portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging stepped portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding stepped portion 1121. It protrudes toward and elastically engages with the engaging stepped portion 1115 . The engaging claw 1124 is sized so that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120 .

The engaging piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is arranged below the holding stepped portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engaging stepped portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 . The engaging piece 1125 is arranged along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 on the upper side ( center side) by a predetermined amount. By engaging the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging claws 1124 and the engaging pieces 1125 , the panel plate 1110 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1120 .

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has an out port 1126 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the rear lower side of the out port 1126 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1126. - 特許庁

Further, the panel holder 1120 has a notch portion 1127 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This cutout portion 1127 is aligned with the cutout portion 1011 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, these cutout portions 1011 and 1127 are penetrated to form the lower full ball path unit 860. Front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full-tank guideway 862 face forward.

The panel holder 1120 also has a plurality of mounting holes 1128 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front structural member 1000 . By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front structural member 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front structural member 1000, and the panel holder 1120 can be attached to the front structural member 1000. 1120 (gaming panel 1100) can be positioned.

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has a square insertion hole 1129 penetrating in the front-rear direction above the notch 1127 . The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through the insertion hole 1129 .

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 , the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component member 1000 . As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guide section 1003 and discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 .

[5-2a. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a game panel 1150 of an embodiment different from the game panel 1100 described above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel in a form different from that of FIG. 63, seen from the front together with the front structural member, substrate holder, and main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind. The game panel 1150 is made of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). This game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 described above.

The game panel 1150 is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer shape of the front component 1000 . The game panel 1150 is provided with an out port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out guide portion 1003 of the front structural member 1000 in the lower part of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. In the game panel 1150, the rear lower side of the out port 1151 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1151.例文帳に追加

In addition, the game panel 1150 has a cutout portion 1152 having the same shape as the cutout portion 1011 of the front structural member 1000 and a cutout portion 1152 which penetrates in the front-view left side of the lower end in the front-rear direction and which is open downward, and which is located above the cutout portion 1152 in the vertical direction. and a square insertion hole 1153 through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

In addition, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of inner rails penetrating in the front-rear direction so that the positioning projections 1009 can be fitted in positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning projections 1009 projecting rearward from the inner rails 1002 of the front component member 1000. A fixing hole 1154 is provided. In addition, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front structural member 1000 . By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front component 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the game panel 1150 can be attached to the front component 1000. 1150 can be positioned.

Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating back and forth for mounting the front unit 2000 in the same manner as the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 described above. ing.

The game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 , and the out port 1151 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front structural member 1000 . As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1151 by the out guide section 1003, and discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the center in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below when assembled on the game board 5 . As a result, all of the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000 can be received. It is possible to discharge downward from the discharging portion 1201 that is positioned.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game content, game ball payout, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

The main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When one sealing mechanism is used to close the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be traced. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

Each of the various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042 including the main control board box 1320 is provided as a transparent member so that visual confirmation from the outside is possible. there is That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in particular, the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 have surfaces inferior in fraud prevention performance. Since a mounting area is provided, it is important to ensure such transparency in order to obtain various effects related to fraud countermeasures, which will be described later.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the play area 5a, as shown. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 66). This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the ordinary lottery result, the special lottery result, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator 1401 consisting of one LED for displaying the game status, and four LEDs for displaying the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing game balls through the gate section 2003. Ordinary pattern display 1402 consisting of, normal holding indicator 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball to the gate part 2003, and the lottery by accepting the game ball to the first start port 2002 A first special design indicator 1403 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the first special lottery result, and a first special reservation consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls to the first start port 2002 A number indicator 1404, a second special symbol indicator 1405 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the second start port 2004, and a second start port 2004 A second special reservation number indicator 1406 consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" etc., the big winning opening 2005 A round indicator 1407 consisting of three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern is mainly provided.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc., can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although illustration is omitted, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling lighting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control part for controlling effect images. .

[5-7. Game board side effect display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG. The game board side effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back wall of the back box 3010 at substantially the center thereof. This game board side effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 . This game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface when viewed from the front, and a right fixed piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface when viewed from the front. This game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves which are open on the left inner circumferential surface in a front view inside a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010 described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. The two left fixing pieces 1601 are inserted into 3010c from the oblique rear of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020 to lock. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding the mechanism 3020 downward.

[5-8. front unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. FIG. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. , and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 .

The table unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving a game ball hit into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are located within the game area 5a. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions, a gate part 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and a game ball A second starting port 2004 that enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing through the part 2003, and the lottery by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a big prize winning port 2005 that enables acceptance of game balls according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

A plurality of general winning holes 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged substantially directly below the impact portion 1006 on the upper right side in the front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged right below the gate portion 2003 to the right in front view. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1126 .

In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached directly above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a big winning port 2005. A start port unit 2100 and a start port unit A lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of 2100 when viewed from the front and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and a side unit attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. It comprises an upper part 2300 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 which is attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has a gate part 2003 and a second starting port 2004. - 特許庁

The starting port unit 2100 is arranged directly above the out port 1126 in the vicinity of the lower end portion of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In this starter opening unit 2100, the first starter opening 2002 opens upward to a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time, and the big winning opening 2005 receives a plurality of game balls at once ( For example, 4 to 6 pieces) extend to the left and right with an acceptable size, and are formed so as to be openable and closable according to the game state.

The lower side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has a plurality of general winning holes 2001 capable of receiving game balls at all times.

The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front in the game area 5a, at the upper left side of the lower side unit 2200 in the front view, slightly below the center in the vertical direction. When the upper side unit 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the left end of the shelf is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game ball that has flowed down along the inner rail 1002 is directed to the right (game area 5a). center in the left-right direction).

The center accessory 2500 is arranged above the starter unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200 in the game area 5a and slightly above the center when viewed from the front. installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and through the frame, the game board side effect display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100 and the effect units provided in the back unit 3000 are visually recognized from the front. be able to. The center accessory 2500 has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 .

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, except for the lower side, so that a game ball hit into the game area 5a is projected inside the frame. It is impenetrable.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 which is open on the outer peripheral surface on the left side in the front view so that game balls in the game area 5a can enter, and a game ball which has entered the warp entrance 2520 can be released into a frame. It has a warp exit 2522 that is open and a stage 2530 that rolls the game ball discharged from the warp exit 2522 in the left-right direction and then discharges it into the game area 5a. A starting port unit 2100 is arranged directly below the stage 2530, and when a game ball is released downward from the center of the stage 2530, the game ball is received in the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

[5-9. back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. FIG. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 on the game panel 1100 . Also, behind the back unit 3000, a game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached.

The rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front. The rear wall has a square opening 3010a. A box-shaped performance drive board box 3042 is provided so as to be rotatable about an axis extending left and right along the axis and housing the performance drive board.

The back unit 3000 includes a back left center decorative unit 3050 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back top left movable effect unit 3200 attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side in the front view, and the back box. A back left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in the back box 3010, and a back upper center attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view. A movable effect unit 3400 and a back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 are provided.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front, and has a square opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall and a plate frame-like shape protruding rearward from the periphery of the opening 3010a at intervals. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and two fixing grooves 3010c recessed outward from the inside of the frame on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in rear view, into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted. , and a notch portion 3010d to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached from the rear end to the rear wall of the back case 3010 at the center in the vertical direction of the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in rear view.

The opening 3010 a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 . Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the game board side effect display device 1600 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface in a vertically slidable manner.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixing piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting each movable effect unit and the like at appropriate positions.

The back unit 3000 uses a back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100, a back top left movable effect unit 3200, a back left movable effect unit 3300, a back top middle movable effect unit 3400, and a back bottom front movable effect unit 3500, etc. , luminous effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and the decline of the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

[6. Game content]
Next, game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are released by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. , the ball passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a, and the game with the game ball is started. A game ball hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game balls can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and the more the handle 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be hit. , the game ball can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle pegs (not shown) are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and game balls are placed on the obstacle pegs. By abutting, the falling speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are imparted to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball abuts is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 from the highest part in front view, it hits a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown), The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 will flow down. When the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 , it is supplied from the warp exit 2522 to the stage 2530 .

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves left and right, and is released forward. When a game ball is released into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2530, it is received by the first start hole 2002 with a high probability because it is positioned directly above the first start hole 2002. - 特許庁When the game ball is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100. - 特許庁A game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the open big winning opening 2005, or the like.

By the way, if the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it will be moved to the center in the left-right direction by the upper side unit 2300, There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the starting port 2002 or the like. Then, when the game balls are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

On the other hand, when the game ball hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 (so-called right hitting), On the downstream side, the water flows through a region provided with the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 .

Then, when the right-handed game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and if the lottery result of the normal lottery is "normal hit", the second start port 2004 is opened for a predetermined time ( For example, between 0.3 to 10 seconds), it will be in an open state, and the reception of game balls to the second start port 2004 is possible. Then, when the game ball is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, 4) game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. be.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the indication of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0.5 hours). 01-60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5 . The second starting port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

In addition, if the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 before the normal lottery result is indicated after the game ball passes through the gate part 2003, the normal lottery result cannot be suggested. The start of the suggestion of the result is put on hold until the previous suggestion of the result of the ordinary lottery ends. Further, the upper limit of the number of retained lottery results is set to four, and even if the game balls pass through the gate section 2003, the game balls exceeding the upper limit are discarded without being retained. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating reservations.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 changes the advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot", " A lottery for the special lottery result that generates a medium hit, a small win, a variable probability win, a reduced time win, etc., is performed. Then, the special lottery result of the lottery is indicated to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called special fluctuation time). In addition, the special lottery results drawn by receiving the game ball in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include "loss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", " 15R jackpot", "probability change (probability change) hit", "short time (time reduction) hit", "probability change short time hit", "probability change short time hit", etc.

If the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state , After the elapse of the special fluctuation time, the large winning opening 2005 is in a state in which it is possible to receive game balls in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When game balls are received in the big winning opening 2005 when the big winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls are sent from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. is dispensed to the upper tray 321 . Therefore, when the big winning hole 2005 is capable of receiving game balls, by allowing the big winning hole 2005 to receive the game balls, a lot of game balls can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

If the special lottery result is a "small hit", the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a predetermined short period of time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) to accept a game ball. Repeat the opening and closing pattern multiple times (eg, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the large winning opening 2005 becomes an open state capable of accepting game balls, or the opening to the big winning opening 2005 When any of the conditions of acceptance of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is satisfied, a predetermined opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game ball unacceptable in a closed state is set. Repeat a number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for "2R big win", 5 rounds for "5R big win", and 15 rounds for "15R big win" are repeated to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the "jackpot", after the jackpot game is over, the probability that the special lottery result such as "jackpot" will be drawn ("variable hit") is changed, and the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result is changed. There is a "hit" to do ("time saving hit").

In this embodiment, the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2002 and the first start port 2002 and the second Since the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started when the game ball is accepted in the second start port 2004, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. be. The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being reserved. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating reservations.

This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600. - 特許庁The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the result of the special lottery. Suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly turning on and off a plurality of LEDs to flash for a predetermined period of time, and then suggesting the special lottery result by a combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the game board side effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is suggested as a effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the game board side effect display device 1600 is variably displayed by varying each symbol row in a state in which three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols are arranged in the horizontal direction. The pattern rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each pattern row is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three pattern rows to be stopped and displayed form a combination corresponding to the result of the special lottery. When the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a finalized image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous game state (for example, a small winning game, a big winning game, etc.) is generated according to the drawn special lottery result.

The time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates). A longer time is set for the function display unit 1400 than the time until the finalized image is displayed.

In the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 on the door frame 3 is displayed according to the special lottery result. Operation button 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various decorations of center accessory 2500, various decorations of back unit 3000, back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100, back upper left movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect By appropriately using the unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc., it is possible to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc., and the game can be played by various effects. It is possible to keep the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

[Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in this embodiment is the door unit of the present invention, the main frame 4 in this embodiment is the main unit of the present invention, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of this embodiment is the present invention. , the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment and the operation button 410 in the second effect operation unit 400A The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in this embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention.

In addition, the decorative member inside the operation button of the base unit in this embodiment, the main screen 471 and sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A are the second decorations of the present invention, The second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432, the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decoration member 476, and the peripheral edge decoration member 478 each correspond to the second decoration portion of the present invention. .

Further, each LED and sub-screen decoration substrate mounted on the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 in this embodiment. The LED 477a of 477 is the light emitter of the present invention, the door frame side effect display device 460 of the present embodiment is the back side decoration means of the present invention, the frame unit 415 of the present embodiment, the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and The unit bases 451 of the second base unit 450 each correspond to the base portion of the present invention.

[8. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 (or the second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 protruding forward in the door frame 3 is operated. When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A) The peripheral edge decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral edge decorative member 478, etc.) overlapped decoration, the first button decoration portion 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460 overlapped decoration, etc. Since it is possible to show the player the decoration full of decorativeness with a sense of perspective, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and to differentiate it from other pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 can be made expensive.

In addition, the operation button internal decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)), the door frame side effect display device 460, etc. are arranged in the movement direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). In addition, since the button lens 411 is supported by the unit base 431 (unit base 451) so that it can be moved by the player's operation, the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move it. Then, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second inner button decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral edge decorative member 478, etc.) approach or separate, A change in the distance between the first button decoration portion 411a and the second inner button decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral edge decoration member 478, etc.) changes the distance between the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411a. It is possible to change the perspective of the decoration that appears to overlap with the button interior decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral edge decoration member 478, etc.). The decoration (intersection mode) by the second button interior decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral edge decoration member 478, etc.) can be changed by the player himself, and the player can It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, which is the side opposite to the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A), the first decorative body Since a space is formed between the second decorative body and the player, the distance from the button lens 411 to the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button of the operation button inner decorative member 432 The distance to the inner decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) is greatly different, and the button lens 411 is operated to move it. When the position of the player's eyes moves even when the screen is not on, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second inner button decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral edge decorative member 478, etc.) are displayed. Since the intersecting state (overlapping condition) between the two is changed, the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Furthermore, since the outer peripheral edge of the transparent button lens 411 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a having a radial decoration toward the center, the central side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration portion 411a is not provided The operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame side effect display device 460 on the back side can be visually recognized well through the first button decoration portion 411a. The player's line of sight can be directed to the center of the button lens 411 by the decoration of , and through the center of the transparent button lens 411, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) or the door frame It is possible to draw the player's attention to the side effect display device 460 strongly.

In addition, since the operation button inner decorative member 432 is provided with the second button inner decorative portion 432g having a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centering on the center, the button lens 411 can be seen from the outside. The decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a and the decoration of the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 intersect with each other, so that the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g The pachinko machine 1 can be made to have a high appeal to the players by making the decoration by the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g conspicuous. can.

In addition, since the decoration of the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 has a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centering on the center, the second button inner decoration portion 432g By the decoration, the player's line of sight and interest can be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 visible in the center of the operation button inner decorative member 432, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. can.

Furthermore, each LED mounted on the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 (or the sub-screen decoration substrate 477) When the LED 477a) emits light, the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) can be decorated with light emission, and the button lens 411 can also be decorated with light emission. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the player can also be entertained by light emission decoration. At this time, the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) are operated by the second button inner decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476). Since the light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the decoration substrate 436 can be diffused, in the second button interior decoration portion 432g, the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, and the operation button top Direct light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the interior decoration substrate 435 and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 emits light for decoration. Indirect light diffused by the portion 432g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) is used for luminous decoration, while the second button inner decorative portion 432g (sub-screen decorative member 476) is strongly luminous-decorated. Since the first button decoration portion 411a is weakly illuminated, the LEDs of the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 are illuminated. (or the LED 477a) is illuminated, and the perspective is emphasized when the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) are viewed from the outside. The decoration can be shown to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to strongly attract the interest of the player.

In addition, since the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door There is no need to secure a space for the button lens 411 to move to a portion outside the outer periphery of the frame side second effect display device 460A), and the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame The side second effect display device 460A) can be expanded outward to be made as large as possible, and the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged. 460A) can be highlighted. In addition, as described above, since it is not necessary to secure a space for movement outside the button lens 411, by arranging the frame unit 415 outside the button lens 411, the entire pachinko machine 1 can be The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly decorative and highly appealing to attract the attention of players by improving its appearance.

In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, the button lens 411 has a flat shape when the player hits the button lens 411 and applies an impact to a part of the surface. As compared with the case, the applied impact force is easily distributed over the entire button lens 411, so that the button lens 411 can be made difficult to break (hard to break). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the breakage of the button lens 411 during the game, which interrupts the game and makes some players feel frustrated and lose interest. By making it difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged in the body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the front through the through hole 111 in the door frame 3. The unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 protruding forward on the side has an outer diameter of 10 cm. Operation buttons 410 that are movable (advance and retreat) by being operated by the player in a circular shape of about 15 cm within a range of ~30 cm, and decoration inside the operation buttons that can be seen from the front through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation buttons 410 Since the member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the frame-shaped frame unit 415 in which the operation button 410 is arranged in the frame are attached, the conventional Since the performance operation unit 400 (the second performance operation unit 400A) having as large an operation button 410 as possible can be seen at a position where the storage tray for the game balls is conspicuous in the pachinko machine, the player can see the performance operation unit 400 at a glance. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 is highly appealing. The frame unit 415 is provided with a translucent frame side lens 417, and a translucent second button decoration is provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) so as to be adjacent to the frame side lens 417. 411b, and attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b. First LEDs 422a and 423a for decorating the second button decoration part 411b with light emission and second LEDs 422b and 423b for decorating the frame side lens 417 with light emission are provided, and the frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided. An inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 that partitions from the decoration portion 411b, and a main body portion 413a and an inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 that partitions the second button decoration portion 411b and the central side of the button lens 411. Therefore, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and the button lens 411, or the second LED 422b , 423b can be prevented from illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b, and the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b adjacent to each other can be independently decorated with light emission. can. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be clearly decorated with light emission, and a good-looking light emission effect can be performed. In addition, by appropriately combining lights off, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, etc., for the frame side lenses 417 and the second button decorative portion 411b that are adjacent to each other, various patterns of light emission effect can be performed. This makes it difficult for the player to get bored, entertains the player, and suppresses the decline in the player's interest in the game.

Further, the first LEDs 422a and 423a that decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b that decorate the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are combined into one operation button left outer decoration. Since the board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are provided and the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the second button decoration portion Compared to the case where 411b (operation button 410) is provided with a substrate, the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be kept away from the second button decoration portion 411b as much as possible, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be sufficiently emitted. It is possible to irradiate the second button decoration portion 411b in a diffused state. Therefore, since the second button decoration portion 411b can be uniformly decorated with light emission, the appearance of the light emission decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, and the player's interest is strongly attracted. At the same time, the player can be entertained, and the decline in interest of the player can be suppressed.

Further, since the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (the second base unit 450), the operation button left external decoration board 422 moves along with the movement of the operation button 410. Also, the wiring connected to the operation button right external decoration board 423 is not bent or stretched, and disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (the second button decoration portion 411b) is moved, the wiring will not be disconnected. The player can be entertained with the luminous decoration without any problem, and the loss of interest of the player can be suppressed.

In addition, since the second button decorative portion 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the transparent button lens 411 can be passed through the rear operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460. When looking at (door frame side second effect display device 460A), the outer edges of the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is decorated, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. By appropriately lighting the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen behind. As described above, the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417, which decorate the outer edge of the button lens 411, can be decorated with light emission in various patterns. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the light emission effect, the operation of the operation button 410, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be strongly attracted. It is possible to entertain the effect image or the like by the effect display device 460A) and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the button lens 411 (operation button 410) provided with the second button decorative portion 411b on the outer edge can be operated by the player, the operation button 410 can be operated by the player during execution of the player participation type production. By allowing the operation, the player can enjoy the operation of the operation button 410 (player-participation type performance), and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. Then, when executing the player-participation type production, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are decorated with light emission, thereby attracting the interest of the player to the operation button 410. Therefore, the player can be prompted to operate the operation button 410, and the player can be entertained by participating in the player participation type production.

Furthermore, since only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 is provided with the opaque main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f that can be decorated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 can be The portion closer to the center than the button decoration portion 411b is not decorated (illuminated) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the center side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) is brightened so that it is arranged at the rear. It is possible to prevent the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) from becoming difficult to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration portion 411b can be decorated with light emission in a good state, and the transparent button lens 411 can pass through the transparent button lens 411 to the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460). The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can be sufficiently entertained with decorations, light-emitting effects, and the like, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, since the inner cylindrical portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 having the frame side lenses 417, on the rear side of the frame unit 415, the frame side lenses 417 and the second button decoration of the operation button 410 are arranged. The portion 411b can be completely partitioned by the inner cylindrical portion 416d. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) of the inner tubular portion 416d near the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right external decoration substrate 423, light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b is emitted. Since the rear end of the inner cylindrical portion 416d is positioned closer to the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 than the diffusion range, the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external Even if a gap is formed between the decoration substrate 423 and the front surface, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b illuminates the second button decoration portion 411b. never do. Therefore, it is possible to realize the pachinko machine 1 that reliably blocks the light by the inner cylindrical portion 416d and reliably exhibits the above-described effects.

In addition, since the body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (the button lens 411), the rear side of the operation button 410 has the second button decorative portion 411b. and the central side of the button lens 411 can be completely partitioned by the body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f. On the other hand, the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right external decoration substrate 423 are located near the end (rear end) of the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right external decoration substrate 423 in the main body portion 413a. , the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not pass through the rear end of the main body portion 413a, and the entrance of the light to the central side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 is completely blocked. can be done. Therefore, the second button decoration part 411b can be illuminated in a favorable state by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the transparent button lens 411 can be passed through the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 ( The door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can be sufficiently entertained with the decoration and the light emission effect, thereby suppressing the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the second button decoration is placed in front of the outer portion of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) arranged behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Since the portion 411b is positioned, the operation button inner decorative member 432 (the door frame side second The second button decorative portion 411b can make the outside member and the rear side (back side) of the effect display device 460A) difficult to see, and the deterioration of the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented. Also, at this time, if the second button decoration portion 411b is decorated with light emission by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the brightness of the second button decoration portion 411b is changed by the operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect Since the outer side and the rear side of the display device 460A) are relatively dark, the members on the outer side and the rear side of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) can be made difficult to see. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the operation button inner decorative member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved, and the player can A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the outer peripheral shape of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration portion 411b The side lens 417 has an arcuate shape. Therefore, by appropriately emitting light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, it is possible to produce a light emission effect such that the light circulates around the outer edge of the operation button 410, or light emission such that the light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to show the player an effect, a light-emitting effect in which light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., the player can be kept from getting bored with various light-emitting effects, and the player can enjoy it. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper tray 321 used for the game by hitting the game balls stored in the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 in the door frame 3 into the game area 5a is formed. At the same time, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front side and lower side of the upper plate 321 to provide a mounting space of a predetermined size behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). A remaining space of the mounting space 326j is formed, a portion corresponding to the lower plate first region A1 of the lower plate main body 325 is arranged on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the remaining space of the mounting space 326j is formed from that portion. Since the part corresponding to the lower plate second area A2 in the lower plate main body 325 is extended inside to attach the lower plate 322 capable of storing game balls, the lower plate 322 looks small when viewed from the front. As a result, the lower plate 322 can be made inconspicuous, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be relatively conspicuous. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be seen at the position where the upper tray and the lower tray are vertically aligned in the conventional pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 can make the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine just by looking at it, and can strongly attract the interest of the player. can.

In addition, in the portion of the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, it extends upward from the upper end of the main body vertical wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery, and extends to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. Since lower tray covers 340, 340A for regulating the movement of game balls are provided, the game balls in the lower tray 322 are prevented from coming into contact with the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A). , the game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 and the game balls stored in the lower tray 322 contact or press the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). can be prevented. Therefore, the game ball does not come into contact with the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the game ball does not damage the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the breakage of the performance operation unit 400 (the second performance operation unit 400A), thereby preventing the player from losing interest, and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided on the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322 to prevent game balls from moving toward the remaining space between the main body standing wall portion 325b and the mounting space 326j. , it is possible to prevent game balls from entering (spilling out) from the lower tray main body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost or uncomfortable due to the game ball entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, thereby enhancing the player's interest in the game. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the portion of the lower plate second area A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322 is covered by the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, the game ball supplied into the lower plate 322 bounces within the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be reliably prevented from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. In addition, since the portion of the lower tray second area A2 of the lower tray main body 325 is covered by the lower tray covers 340 and 340A, the player can easily move the lower tray main body 325 toward the lower tray first area A1 (lower tray opening). 326d) into the lower tray second area A2, the lower tray covers 340 and 340A can prevent the fingertips from entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. etc. can be prevented from being injured by touching the lower surface of the upper plate 321 or the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), and the player can play in a safe state. can be done.

Furthermore, since there is a gap between the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), impact and pressure due to the contact of the game ball against the lower plate covers 340, 340A is not transmitted from the lower tray covers 340, 340A to the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and damage to the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is ensured. can be prevented.

In addition, in the portion of the lower tray second region A2 in the lower tray main body 325 of the lower tray 322, since the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is provided in front of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is opened. In this state, the game balls discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can enter the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a as it is and be discharged downward (dollar box), and the game balls can be discharged downward (dollar box). It is possible to make it difficult to reach the front end side of the standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, since the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are provided as described above, the game ball will not reach the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since abutment on the rear side can be prevented, damage to the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be prevented, interruption of the game can be reduced, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 is higher toward the front, the game ball heading toward the front end side of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is inclined. The moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated by climbing the bottom surface. Therefore, since the speed of the game ball contacting the lower tray covers 340, 340A can be slowed down, the lower tray covers 340, 340A reliably restrict the movement of the game ball to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. In addition, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game ball hits the lower tray covers 340, 340A and the main body vertical wall portion 325b, thereby suppressing damage to them.

Further, since at least the lower tray covers 340, 340A are formed as separate members, when the lower tray covers 340, 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired only by replacing the lower tray covers 340, 340A. 1 can be reduced.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center of the front in the left-right direction bulges most forward below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game such as receiving game balls into the general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. After the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 which is put out is provided, the production operation unit 400 and the second production operation unit 400A are detachably attached to the most forwardly bulging portion thereof, and the upper plate 321 is attached to the plate unit cover 326. and a lower plate 322, and the storage plate (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) is provided with the outer side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front. It has a lower tray first area A1 and a lower tray second area A2 positioned in the rear space of the installation space 326j behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be conspicuous, and the storage plate (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) can be made smaller and less noticeable. can. Therefore, since the conspicuous production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be seen in the part where the upper tray and the lower tray were visible in the conventional pachinko machine, the game machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine for the player. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing and capable of strongly attracting the player's interest.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is Although it is small, the first portion of the lower plate main body 325 having the lower plate second region A2 located in the space behind the installation space 326j behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. Since the extension part 325B, the second extension part 325C, and the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are provided, game balls can be stored in a range (lower tray second area A2) of the lower tray 322 that cannot be seen from the front. can. Therefore, since a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured contrary to the appearance from the front, the player can concentrate on the game without worrying about the remaining amount of game balls in the lower tray 322.例文帳に追加This allows the player to enjoy the game and suppress the loss of interest.

Furthermore, the lower tray main body 325 and the main body portion 325A having the lower tray first area A1, the lower tray covers 340 and 340A having the lower tray second area A2, the first extension section 325B and the second extension section Since the lower tray 322 is configured by attaching (combining) the portion 325C, a plurality of lower tray covers 340, 340A having different sizes, the first extension portion 325B, the second extension portion 325C, etc. are prepared in advance. By attaching the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C of sizes corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size of the mounting space 326j in the plate unit cover 326, etc. The volume of dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (replacing) the lower tray covers 340, 340A, the first extension portion 325B, and the second extension portion 325C, it is possible to correspond to the size of the space behind the mounting space 326j. Since the size of this rear space depends on the rearward projection amount of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), various production operation units 400 (second production operation unit 400A) with different rearward projection amounts can be used. The lower plate 322 can be adapted to the production operation unit 400A), and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

In addition, since the lower plate 322 is provided with a bottom wall portion 325a and a main standing wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower plate 322 becomes a downwardly recessed container-like shape and a game ball. can be reliably stored. In addition, since the lower tray covers 340 and 340A have the cover vertical wall section 340a that rises from the upper end of the main body vertical wall section 325b of the lower tray main body 325, various shapes of the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are prepared in advance. By combining (attaching) lower plate covers 340 and 340A having shapes corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the space behind the mounting space 326j, etc., various forms can be accommodated. It is possible to achieve the same effects as those described above.

In the lower tray 322 composed of the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray covers 340 and 340A, the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325. Therefore, since the part of the lower tray 322 on which the game balls are placed is the lower tray main body 325, the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray covers 340, 340A are placed on the part where the load of the game balls is increased due to the storage. Boundaries (joints, dividing lines PL) are never located. Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is received only by the lower tray main body 325, even if many game balls are stored, the lower tray cover 340, 340A will not be pulled away from the lower tray main body 325. It does not work, and can prevent the lower tray covers 340 and 340A from coming off the lower tray main body 325.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an upper plate capable of storing game balls is provided below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game is performed such that the game balls are accepted in the general winning opening 2001 or the like. 321 and a lower plate 322, and a lower plate ball supply port 323c and a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322 by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) arranged in the center in the left-right direction. Since more than half of the lower plate 322 including the and is made invisible (hardly visible) from the front (player), the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made neat and attractive, and the player is interested. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing, capable of strongly attracting . In addition, since the game ball heading from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a is made difficult to see by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the player can play the game inside the lower dish 322. It is possible to prevent the player from being distracted by making it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the ball, and to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the bottom plate of the lower plate 322 to guide the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a Since the part between the ball extraction hole 322a and the game ball guided by the guide means such as the ball guide part 322c and the buffer part 322d is made difficult to see, if the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is kept open, , the game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c are guided by the guiding means and are smoothly (immediately) ejected downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a. It is possible to create the illusion that the game balls are discharged below the lower tray 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower tray 322.例文帳に追加This makes it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and allows the player to devote himself to the game to suppress the loss of interest.

Furthermore, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) makes more than half of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a difficult to see from the front. In addition, the lower tray ball supply port 323c, the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, and the like are positioned behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). That is, since half or more of the lower plate 322 is made to wrap around behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), the size of the lower plate 322 seen from the front is different from the actual size of the lower plate. Since the size (capacity) of 322 is large, it is possible to secure a sufficient amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 compared to its appearance.

Also, in the state where the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is open, the game ball released into the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c is transferred to the lower tray ball supply port 323c on the bottom surface of the lower tray 322 Since it can be smoothly guided to the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a by the guiding means such as the portion between the extraction hole 322a, the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffering portion 322d, and discharged to the lower portion of the lower tray 322 (dollar box). , the game ball can be prevented from circulating in the lower tray 322, and the game ball circulating in the lower tray 322 can be reliably made invisible from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game balls in the lower tray 322, thereby preventing the player from being distracted and reducing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, if the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is left open, the game ball supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 is immediately released by the ball guiding portion 322c or the like without the player noticing it. Since the game balls can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the player is given the illusion that the game balls are discharged below the lower tray 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower tray 322.例文帳に追加can be done. This makes it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and allows the player to devote himself to the game to suppress the loss of interest.

In addition, by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), more than half of the game ball storage area (storage area) in the plan view of the lower plate 322 is made invisible from the front, so the lower plate visible from the front Since the actual lower tray 322 is larger than the visible size with respect to the size 322, a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured as with the lower tray of the conventional pachinko machine.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 protruding forward below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game such as receiving game balls into the general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. Effect operation unit attachment for attaching a large effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having the same height as the total height of the plate unit cover 326 at the center in the left-right direction of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320. In addition to having a portion 326a, the front lower decorative portion 326c of the plate lower than the approximate center in the vertical direction is recessed so as to be gouged rearward on both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. Because of the shape, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a can be seen to protrude greatly forward, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect The operation unit 400A) can be conspicuous. Therefore, the large production operation unit 400 (the second production operation unit 400A) can be seen in an emphasized state at the position where the upper tray and the lower tray were arranged vertically in a conventional pachinko machine, so that the player can see. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be highly appealing by making the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at a glance. The lower plate 322 is recessed rearward from the plate front lower decorative portion 326c recessed rearward on both the left and right outer sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. A part is wrapped around the back of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the amount of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 (volume of the lower plate 322) can be sufficiently secured. The player does not have to worry about the lower plate 322 being filled with game balls while playing, and the player can concentrate on the game, enjoy the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since a part of the lower plate 322 wraps around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), when the player puts his or her hand into the lower plate 322 from the front, the fingertips will not touch the lower plate. It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall of 322 (the front surface of the plate unit base 323), the lower plate cover 340, and the like. As a result, it is possible for the player to perceive that a sufficient amount of game balls is secured by touch, and in a state in which the game balls are stored in the lower tray 322, Since it is possible to recognize that many game balls are stored in the space, the player can be given a feeling of satisfaction, and the game can be enjoyed and the decline in interest can be suppressed. In addition, since the fingertips of the hand placed in the lower tray 322 are less likely to touch the rear wall of the lower tray 322, the lower tray cover 340, etc., the player feels the same as the lower tray in the conventional pachinko machine. As a result, players accustomed to conventional pachinko machines can be prevented from feeling a sense of incongruity, and the players can be relieved and their interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the lower plate 322 is formed to be wider toward the back side (rear), even if the front side is small, a sufficient storage amount of game balls can be secured. In other words, since the front end portion of the lower plate 322 is made small, the lower plate 322 is made inconspicuous on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the plate front lower decorative portion 326c) where the lower plate 322 is open. , and the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) can be relatively conspicuous. Therefore, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be provided while securing a sufficient amount of game balls stored in the lower plate 322, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the player can be attracted. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the lower tray cover 340 covers the sides and upper part of the portion of the lower tray 322 that wraps around behind the production operation unit 400 (the second production operation unit 400A), the player cannot move inside the lower tray 322. When a player puts his or her hand in, it is possible to prevent the fingertip or the like from touching the inner surface of the plate unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) and get injured. The game can be played in a safe state. Also, the lower tray cover 340 can prevent game balls from entering (spilling out) from the lower tray 322 into the tray unit cover 326 .

Furthermore, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is arranged in the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be operated from the player side. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous and highly appealing, capable of strongly attracting the interest of the players, and the decoration by the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be easily seen. By doing so, it is possible to entertain the decorations and effects of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) and suppress the decrease in interest of the player.

In addition, since the lower tray 322 is provided with a lower tray ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper tray 321 and a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a that penetrates vertically so as to be openable and closable, the conventional pachinko machine can be used. Since it has the same function as the lower tray 322, when a player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine plays a game with this pachinko machine 1, the function of the lower tray 322 is not confused and the same as the conventional one. The game can be played with a relaxed feeling, and the player can concentrate on the game and enjoy the game. In addition, since the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a are respectively arranged behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), when viewed from the front, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a are arranged. A pachinko machine with a high appealing power, in which a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is not visible from the player side, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted. machine 1.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the plate unit 320 protruding forward below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a of the door frame 3. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of presenting effects to the player on the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326. The operation button inner decorative member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A screen unit 470) decorating the outside of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) An operation button 410 having a transparent button lens 411 whose diameter is about 15 cm and whose center bulges in a direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) is attached. A tubular button base 413 that includes a first button decoration portion 411a, a second button decoration portion 411b, and a button frame 412 and protrudes from the button lens 411 side toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side. , the first button decorative portion 411a, the button base 413, etc. allow the operation button inner decorative member 432 (door frame side second It is possible to reduce visibility of the outer edge and the back side (rear side) of the screen unit 470) of the two-effect display device 460A, and the appearance of the operation buttons 410 can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the appearance of the operation button 410, the operation button inner decorative member 432 provided inside, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc., and improve the appearance of the player. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 of the operation button 410 allow the button lens 411 and the button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) to pass through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). Since it is possible to make the outer edge and inner side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) difficult to see, by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) can be 470) is relatively large, it can be satisfactorily hidden by the first button decoration part 411a and the like, so that while preventing deterioration in appearance, a large operation button with an outer diameter of about 15 cm can be used. 410 (button lens 411) can be implemented without problems. Therefore, since the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged, the pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous and the player's interest is strongly enhanced. The pachinko machine 1 can be made attractive and highly appealing.

Further, since the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) projecting in a cylindrical shape from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decorative member 432 ( When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed obliquely, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield the objects outside the operation button internal decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) so that they cannot be seen. The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

In addition, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (semispherical shape) that bulges in a direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the portion near the outer periphery of the button lens 411 The surface is a plane formed by the front end side opening of the button base 413 (a plane perpendicular to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are aligned, that is, the advancing/retreating direction of the operation button 410). ), the light is easily refracted when viewed from the player's side. Therefore, the first button decorative portion 411a, the second button decorative portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 provided on the outer peripheral edge are combined to form the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470). ), the outer edge of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470), the back side, and the like can be made difficult to see through the gap between them, so that the above-described effects can be achieved reliably.

In addition, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 increases. The side effect display device 460 (the second door frame side effect display device 460A) can be made larger or made easier to move, and the door frame side effect display device can entertain the player through the operation button 410.例文帳に追加460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be easily provided, and the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the players more can be embodied.

Furthermore, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, the operation button 410 is provided with design (decoration). can be made to face, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played.

In addition, in the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, the button frame 412 is made opaque. It is possible to reliably hide the inner side of the operation button 410 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) from being seen through the gap between the lens 411 and the inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470). It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing deterioration of the appearance of the button 410 and the like.

In addition, the button frame 412 is provided with an opaque button frame 412 covering the entire circumference with a predetermined width from the outer peripheral end of the button lens 411 to the inside. Since the gap between the body portion 413a of the button base 413 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) in the operation button 410 can be made difficult to see from the side, the body portion 413a and the operation button interior decoration member 432 ( The gap between the screen unit 470 and the screen unit 470) can be increased, and the space for moving the operation button 410 and the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be easily secured. can be moved well.

Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, the operation button 410 can be moved smoothly and easily because there is no directivity in the outer periphery compared to the polygonal shape. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is enlarged, it can be pressed without any problem, and the player can surely enjoy the player-participation type performance using the operation button 410, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, since the operation button 410 is made large, when the player participatory effect is executed in which the player operates the operation button 410, it is possible to easily operate the operation button 410 without confirming the position of the operation button 410. Since the operation button 410 can be easily touched and pressed, the player can easily participate in the player-participation type performance using the operation button 410, which amuses the player and reduces interest. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided in the operation button 410, the player's interest is manipulated by presenting the effect image according to the game state. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) In addition to being able to entertain the performance, the player can be prompted to operate the operation button 410 by means of a performance image or a light-emitting performance by the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A). , the decline in interest can be suppressed by making the player actively participate in the player-participation-type production and entertaining the player. In addition, by executing the performance within the operation button 410, it is possible to make some players think that something good will happen, thereby heightening the expectation for the game and suppressing the decrease in interest. can be done.

In addition, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 (the portion inside the first button decoration portion 411a) of the large operation button 410. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the operation buttons 410 of the pachinko machine 1 are clearly different from the operation buttons of the conventional pachinko machine, and the appeal to the players is high. It can be used as a pachinko machine 1, and at the same time, heightens the player's expectation for the performance using the operation button 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) in the operation button 410.例文帳に追加It is possible to suppress the decline in interest of the player.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the above-described embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effects as those described above can be obtained.

In the above-described embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 has the first button decorative portion 411a formed on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the button lens 411 without the first button decorative portion 411a may be used.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation button 410 has the opaque button frame 412 attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 . A decorative portion for hiding the rear side may be formed along the entire circumference at a portion of the lens 411 corresponding to the button frame 412 .

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, in the operation button 410, the base unit 430 (the second Although the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) protruding cylindrically toward the second base unit 450) side is shown, it is not limited to this, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the second effect on the door frame side are shown. At least one may protrude toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) so as to partially surround the entire outer periphery of the display device 460A. The shape of the button base 413 may be a shape that follows the outer circumference of the button lens 411 or a shape that does not follow the outer circumference of the button lens 411 . The button base 413 may have decorations (planar decorations such as pasting stickers or printing, or three-dimensional decorations such as reliefs) on the inner wall side. Furthermore, the button base 413 may be translucent or opaque. Also, the button base 413 may be colored or may be colorless and transparent. Also, when the button base 413 is transparent, it is desirable that at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side is subjected to light diffusion processing such as embossing, slits, prisms, and the like.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example in which the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward only from the left outer portion of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is shown. but not limited to, recessed backward from both left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and a lower plate that is connected to each other behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) 322 may be used, and only the portion on the right outside of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is recessed rearward, and a part of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) wraps around to the rear. You can let it be.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the shape of the portion (front lower decorative portion 326c) of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) is curved rearward. Although an example of a concave shape is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the front surface may be concave like a polygonal prism or a polyhedron.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. , ``equipped with a rotating body having a decoration on its surface,'' ``equipped with a decoration with a decoration and a movable device for moving the decoration,'' and ``a game Equipped with decorations that three-dimensionally imitate characters, items, logos, and scenes (diorama), etc., in line with the concept of the machine", "Characters, items, logos in line with the concept of the machine, A member such as a unit or a panel having decorations such as ", etc. by stickers, printing, etc." may be attached. Moreover, the member attached to the attachment space 326j (the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a) does not have to be one, and a plurality of (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members may be attached, such as a member attached to the upper half of the attachment space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the attachment space 326j.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the plate unit cover 326 is provided with the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a that opens forward for mounting the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A). However, the plate unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover portion) that does not have an opening (effect operation unit mounting portion 326a) for mounting the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) A space corresponding to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed behind the plate unit cover. The front surface of such a plate unit cover can be decorated with characters, items, logos, predetermined models, etc., in line with the concept of the game machine, by means of stickers, printing, attachment of decorative members, etc. desirable.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, an area slightly larger than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game balls in the plan view of the lower plate 322 is covered by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) as a cover. Although an example is shown in which it is difficult to see from the front, the present invention is not limited to this. The entire plate 322 may be made invisible from the front.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are arranged in an arc shape partially in the circumferential direction. , and the second button decorative portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may be formed in an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the second button inner decorative portion 432g of the operation button inner decorative member 432 in the effect operation unit 400, a decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is shown. The decoration is not limited to this, and the second inner button decoration portion 432g may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including ovals) centering on the center.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410, the operation button inner decorative member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side second effect are arranged on the rear side. Although the rear member such as the display device 460A is shown to be visible at all times, it is not limited to this. may be provided with a variable light transmission means that allows the rear side to be visually recognized by satisfying the above. Here, as the variable light transmission means, there are ``things like a magic mirror which makes the rear side visible due to the difference in brightness between the front side and the rear side'', and ``things like a liquid crystal film which are transparent by turning on/off the power supply. or become opaque so that the rear side can be visually recognized”, and the like. In addition, the front member and the rear member may be relatively movable, or relatively non-movable.

At least one of the front member and the rear member has a variable light transmission means, so that only the front member or the front member and the rear member are visible in a normal state, The decoration of the visible member can be shown to the player. In a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, a rear member (a rear member or a member arranged behind the rear member) that cannot be seen in a normal state can be seen. A member and a back member, or a front member, a back member and a member behind the back member can show overlapping decorations. Therefore, the front member and the rear member can be used to show various decorations (decorative effects) to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and entertaining the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in.

More specifically, for example, when the front member has a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, only the front member is decorated by darkening the rear side of the front member. It can be visually recognized by the player. Then, when the space between the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is brightened by light from a light emitting part such as an LED, the conditions for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member are satisfied, and the rear member passes through the front member. The member can be visually recognized, and the player can see the decoration in which the decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member are superimposed.

Alternatively, if the front member is transparent and the rear member has variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member in a normal state. A player can be shown the surface and decoration of the . When the rear side of the rear member is brightened with light from a light-emitting portion such as an LED, the conditions for satisfying the variable light transmission means in the rear member are satisfied, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the rear member. Through the member, the member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decoration such as a character) can be seen by the player.

Furthermore, when both the front member and the rear member have variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, only the decoration of the front member can be seen by the player, When the space between the rear member and the rear member is brightened by light emitted from a light-emitting portion such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member becomes visible through the front member. The decoration by the rear member can be shown to the player. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light emitted from the LED or the like (or the space between the front member and the rear member and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by the light emitted from the LED or the like). ), and the conditions for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front and rear members are satisfied, respectively, and the member behind the rear member (for example, a display device, a decoration such as a character) through the front member and the rear member. can be shown to the player. Accordingly, by appropriately selecting the portion to be brightened by the light of the light emitting portion, the visible range can be changed in multiple stages, and the player can enjoy various decorations.

In the above specific example, since the variable light transmission means is like a magic mirror, it looks like a mirror when the rear side is darkened. A glittering decoration can be shown to the player.

Also, in the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means is explained as something like a magic mirror. In addition, if a liquid crystal film or the like is used as the variable light transmission means, it can transmit light even in an opaque state (it has translucency). If the rear side of the member can be brightened (or decorated with light emission) by the light of the light emitting part such as the LED, the player can see more various effects such as light emission effects and decoration effects. .

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 74. FIG. FIG. 69 is a block diagram of the main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board, FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 73 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input and output to the game ball rental device connection terminal board that relays the electrical connection with the display board. FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram around a sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal display control section.

The pachinko machine 1, as its control configuration, as shown in FIG. 69, in addition to the process of generating control power supply (for example, +5V, etc.), a first control unit MCG that controls the game including the payout of prize balls. , and a second control unit SCG for performing effects related to the game progressed by the first control unit MCG.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of boards. , a payout control board 951, and a power supply board 931, and a peripheral control board 1510 is provided as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in explaining the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931 are explained in this order. 2 The control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310, which controls the progress of the game, controls power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on as shown in FIG. A main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor that stores various control programs such as a main control program that controls game operations, a ROM that stores various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., and various A main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal from the detection switch is input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids. , and a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of a predetermined voltage.

The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT 1310af") for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built-in.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a incorporates a non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a to identify the individual (a unique code that exists only in the world). Since the ID code assigned once is stored in a non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a includes a hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in A hard random number circuit 1310an” is built in. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value to 32767 as the maximum value is preset), A predetermined value is not fixed as an initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit is configured so that a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value to a clock signal ( Based on a clock signal output from a main control crystal oscillator (to be described later), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without overlapping at high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When finished, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without duplication. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeats such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are respectively input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, in the main control input circuit 1310b, information based on detection signals from various detection switches input to various input terminals thereof is not reset by a main control system reset, which will be described later, so that various signals based on the information It is configured as a circuit output from an output terminal.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND). A main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function having a reset terminal provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information, and a main control output circuit without a reset function 1310cb having no reset terminal and not having a reset function. and consists of The main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by resetting the main control system described later. is configured as a circuit in which no signals based on are output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit that outputs signals based on it from its various output terminals.

As shown in FIG. 60, a first starting hole sensor 4002 that detects a game ball entering the first starting hole 2002, a second starting hole sensor 4004 that detects a game ball entering the second starting hole 2004, and general A detection signal from the general winning hole sensor 4020 that detects a game ball that has entered the winning hole 2001 and a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are sent to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. is entered in 60, a gate sensor 4003 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003, a count sensor 4005 for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005, and the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. A detection signal from a magnetism detection sensor 4024 attached to detect fraudulent activity using a magnet is supplied to a panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5, and a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Input to the input terminal of the port.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca based on the detection signal from each of these switches. 1310ca outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and outputs a drive signal from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the starter solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161, or outputs a drive signal to the predetermined output port. By outputting a drive signal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the first special symbol display device 1403 via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, the panel relay board 4161, and the function display unit 1400 , Second special symbol indicator 1405, first special reservation number indicator 1404, second special reservation number indicator 1406, normal symbol indicator 1402, state indicator 1401, and round indicator 1407 or output a drive signal do.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) about the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. By outputting various information (game information) related to the game to the board 951 or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function, the main control with the reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

In this embodiment, non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches are used for the first start sensor 4002, the second start sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005. For the general winning hole sensors 4020, 4020, contact type ON/OFF mechanical switches are used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004 and frequently passes through the gate part 2003, so the first starting hole sensor 4002, the second starting hole sensor 4004, and Detection of game balls by the gate sensor 4003 also occurs frequently. For this reason, long-life proximity switches are used for the first starter sensor 4002, the second starter sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. FIG. Also, when a big winning game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the game balls enter frequently, so the detection of the game balls by the count sensor 4005 also occurs frequently. For this reason, the count sensor 4005 also uses a long-life proximity switch. On the other hand, in general winning openings 2001 and 2201 into which game balls do not enter frequently, detection by general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 does not occur frequently. For this reason, the general prize winning opening sensors 4020, 4020 use mechanical switches that have a shorter life than the proximity switches.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the substrate 951 as serial data. When the payout control board 951 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs to the main control board 1310 a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data at the main control input circuit 1310b, thereby inputting the predetermined serial input port from the main control input circuit 1310b. Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, it sends a signal (main pay ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with a reset function. It outputs to the circuit 1310ca, and outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to the payout control board 951 from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function. , various commands are transmitted as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function.

Here, the main peripheral serial transmission port for transmitting various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as serial data will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around a main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control serial I/O ports, etc., are connected to the bus 1310ah. (See FIG. 79). The main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, etc. (Fig. 79). The main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec. It is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea to start transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. In this embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits multiple commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec after setting multiple commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 has an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when the power is cut off. ) and BC0 (see FIG. 75). This capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is cut off during power cutoff processing. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when an operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from power on. Is output from the payout control board 951, through the main control input circuit 1310b, is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU1310a, and is completely erased from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU1310a (cleared).

[7-2. Payout control board]
Out of the first control unit MCG, a payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of game balls, etc. includes a payout control unit 952 for performing various controls related to payout, and an operation switch 954 for performing various functions. and an error LED indicator 860b for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the operation switch 954, which also functions as a RAM clear switch, controls the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") based on the detection signal output by being operated. .) outputs a RAM clear signal to completely erase the information stored in the memory.

[7-2-1. Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 70, a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout controls power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on, and also controls the payout of game media that is executed after a predetermined time has passed since the power is turned on. A payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor containing various control programs including a payout control program that controls operations, a ROM that stores various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., and detection from various detection switches related to payout A payout control input circuit 952b for inputting signals, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, and a payout motor drive circuit for outputting drive signals to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830. 952 d and a CR unit input/output circuit 952 e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6 . The payout control MPU 952a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"). It also has a built-in watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and a function to prevent fraud.

Under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control program receives various information (game information) about the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands about the payout through the payout control input circuit 952b, respectively, as a main payment serial data reception signal. to receive serial data. In addition, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the game ball payout operation, and operates the operation switch 954 as an error cancellation unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error generation commands and error cancellation navigation commands are sent as serial data to the payer. As a signal, serial data is output to the reception port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port 952b (command transmission means). In addition, this payout control program, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed to start payout control, the payout When an operation error occurs, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

In addition, this payout control program outputs a door frame open command (first door open command) when a detection signal (door frame open detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame open switch 618. , when a detection signal (body frame open detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the body frame open switch 619, a body frame open command (first body frame open command) is output. On the other hand, this payout control program issues a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When the body frame open switch 619 receives a detection signal (body frame closing detection signal) associated with the closing operation, it outputs a body frame closing command (first body frame closing command).

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information that the detection signals from the various detection switches are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. That is, the payout control input circuit 952b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by the payout control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information It is configured as a circuit output from an output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate etc. are input to its various input terminals. A payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information, and a payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb having no reset terminal and having no reset function. and consists of The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset, which will be described later, is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the payout control system reset described later. is configured as a circuit in which no signals based on are output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit that outputs signals based on it from its various output terminals.

A ball run-out detection sensor 827 for detecting the running out of game balls in the supply passage of the ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and a payout detection sensor 842 for detecting game balls released from payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. A detection signal from a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is inputted to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a through a payout control input circuit 952b. Note that, for the sake of explanation later, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 is simply referred to as the rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

Detection signals from the door frame open switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame open switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are applied to the payout control input circuit 952b. input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

Further, a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor 279 for detecting whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the board 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b in the form of serial data at the input terminal of its serial input port, and receives an operation signal (detection command) of the operation switch 954. signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs a payout control signal with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function.

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. Various commands are transmitted from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310 as serial data.
When the main control board 1310 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, it outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 951 to that effect. This signal (primary payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control input circuit 952b.

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. Outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, or outputs the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the error LED indicator By outputting the drive signal for displaying on 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, the drive signal is outputted from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the error LED indicator 860b.

The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 860b include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and It informs that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board with the payout control board 951), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out) Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it informs that there are no game balls in the supply passage of the dispensing device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that "ball is caught" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout rotator and the game ball are engaged near the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830, and the payout rotator becomes difficult to rotate. ), and when the number "3" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "payout detection sensor error" is occurring), and when the number "5" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "retry error" (specifically, that the number of retries for the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit). is displayed, and when the number "6" is displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored). game balls are full), and when the number "7" is displayed, it is "CR not connected" (electrical connection from payout control board 951 to CR unit 6) is disconnected), and when the number "9" is displayed, it is "in stock (with prize ball stock (not paid out))" (specifically, game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached the predetermined number of balls).

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of game balls actually put out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. , the number of game balls actually put out is output to the external terminal plate 784 via a resistor (not shown).

In addition, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) regarding the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal plate 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (infrared LED and photo IC built-in). ), the number of game balls and various information (game information, contents of errors related to the payout operation of game balls, or the fact that there was an error) are communicated to the hall computer installed in the hall computer.
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are in a state of being electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers. It is designed to prevent the computer from malfunctioning or breaking down, and the main control board 1310 that advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 that controls payout etc. It is designed not to malfunction or break down due to application of abnormal voltage. The hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

A game ball lending request signal from the ball lending button 328 and a prepaid card return requesting signal from the return button 329 are first sent to the frequency display plate 365, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and then the game ball lending device connection terminal plate. 869 to the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be rented in accordance with the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 in a serial manner. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the input/output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and sends a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball lending/returning display unit 330. This signal is output to the lending device connection terminal plate 869 , the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the frequency display plate 365 , and this signal is input to the ball lending/returning display section 330 . In addition, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball lending/returning display section 330 receives the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. ing.

In addition, the power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 has a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. there is Due to this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 952a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, the operation signal is transmitted through the payout control input circuit 952b to the payout control MPU 952a. It is input to the input terminal of the input port, and the payout control MPU 952a judges it as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is designed to be completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is also output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb.

[7-2-2. Exchanging various signals with the connection terminal board for rental equipment such as game balls]
Here, exchange of various signals between the payout control section 952 and the CR unit 6 and exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 71, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 not only relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, but also connects the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365. (To be exact, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880. , the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay The terminal plate 880 and the degree display plate 365 are electrically connected). Between the board between the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, between the board between the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control board 951, between the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay The terminal plate 880 and the substrates, and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the frequency display plate 365 are electrically connected by respective wirings (harnesses). Further, AC 24 V, which will be described later, is supplied from the power supply board 931 to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 . The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V")) from the supplied AC 24V by a built-in voltage generating circuit (not shown), and generates the voltage together with the ground LG. , to the payout control board 951 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 , and to the frequency display plate 365 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 . .

A ball lending button 328, which is a push button switch, is mounted on the part surface of the frequency display plate 365 at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch is mounted at a position corresponding to the returning button 329 of the ball lending unit 360. A return button 329 is mounted, and a ball rental/return display section 330 as a segment display is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining rental display section 363 of the rental ball unit 360 .

The ball lending button 328 and return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 . When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via a ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 . When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is switched on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device. Input is made to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board 869 .

The ball lending/returning display unit 330 is composed of three segment displays arranged in a row, and the segment displays of the three digits are sequentially driven one by one by a so-called dynamic lighting method. The lighting of the digit segment indicators is controlled. With such lighting control, the ball lending/returning display section 330 displays the balance of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or displays an error in the CR unit 6 . The ball rental/return display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating a single-digit segment display out of three-digit segment displays, and the designated single-digit segment display. segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be displayed by lighting the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal When input through the plate 880, the 1-digit segment displays are sequentially illuminated according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these 3-digit segment displays are displayed. The contents of the luminescence of the vessel can be visually recognized through the remaining lending display portion 363 .

A CR unit lamp 365 d is mounted on the degree display plate 365 adjacent to the ball lending/returning display section 330 . A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input to the CR unit lamp 365 d via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880 . A predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lendable signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via a CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 931 with a built-in voltage creation circuit, and when the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are valid and the ball lending state is possible controls the logic of the ball lendable signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending/returning display section 330 through the current limiting resistance mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 .

In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is sent from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When input, the ball rental request signal BRDY is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) through the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 issues a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of rental balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which is equivalent to 100 yen as an amount) in one payout operation. BRQ is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) through the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input, outputs EXS, which is a signal for notifying the start or end of one payout operation, to the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. to output to the CR unit 6, and PRDY, which is a signal to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is possible or impossible, is sent to the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 to the CR unit 6. For example, if the hall clerk or the like has set the CR unit 6 in advance so that game balls worth 200 yen are paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. is performed twice in a row, and when 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls worth 100 yen will be paid out, and a total of 50 balls worth 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

In the CR unit 6, when the return button 329 is pressed, the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount after subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of pressing the ball lending button 328 .

[7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, the power board 931 of the first control unit MCG will be briefly described. The power board 931 includes a power switch 934 that can electrically connect or disconnect 24 volts AC (24 VAC) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and a power control unit 935 that generates various power sources. , and a shooting control section 953 that performs shooting control by the shooting solenoid 682 of the ball shooting device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

[7-3-1. Power supply controller]
The power control unit 935 operates a power switch 934 to operate a synchronous rectification circuit 935a that rectifies 24 volts AC (24V AC) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. A power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and various direct currents to be supplied to various substrates from the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c. and a power generation circuit 935d for generating power.

[7-3-2. Launch control section]
A firing control section 953 that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255 mainly includes a firing control circuit 953a. The shooting control circuit 953a receives an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the intensity (shooting intensity) at which the game ball is shot toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 302, A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether or not a finger is touching, and a single-shot button operation sensor 312 that detects whether or not the launch (shooting) of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. , and are inputted via the handle relay terminal board 315 . In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 953a, a CR connection signal is input via the payout control board 951 to notify that effect. .

The shooting control circuit 953a adjusts the drive current for launching (shooting) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, and controls the output to the shooting solenoid 682. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, Control is performed to send the game ball received by the ball sending member to the batted ball launching device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
For such a first control unit MCG, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG performs performance control based on various commands from the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 19, a performance display drive board 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460, a peripheral control unit 1511 for exchanging control commands and various information (various data), a game board side performance display device 1600 and a door. While performing drawing control of the frame side effect display device 460, a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 performing sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, calendar information specifying the date and time A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds time information specifying seconds, and the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are controlled by rotating the knob. and a volume adjustment volume 1510a that is adjusted by operation.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511, which performs performance control, controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on. Peripheral control ROM 1511b for storing various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and control performance operations, various data, various control data and various schedule data, Various information that continues across the peripheral control unit steady-state processing that is executed each time a blank signal is input (for example, schedule data that defines the screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, light emission modes of various LEDs, etc. and information for managing the schedule data that defines the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and various information that continues over the day (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the jackpot game state and special A peripheral control SRAM 1511d for storing information for managing performance flags, etc.) and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control external WDT 1511e") for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally ”.) and are provided.

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can retain the stored contents only for a period of time when power is immediately restored after an instantaneous power failure occurs. ), the peripheral control SRAM 1511d loses its contents, whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931 (hereinafter referred to as "SRAM electrolytic capacitor"). As a result, the stored contents can be held for about 50 hours. By providing an SRAM electrolytic capacitor on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. It loses its contents as it can no longer be held.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset when it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e can be restarted, so the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a incorporates a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decoration board of the game board 5 is controlled based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs etc. The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 and for outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are sent to the motor drive board serial Door-side motor drive for transmitting from the I/O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, and for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 Data is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Peripheral control output of door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of LEDs etc. provided on each decoration board in 3 from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 .

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Also, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided in the effect operation unit 400 and a press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194, and the serialized performance operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, are input to the serial I/O port for detecting the performance operation unit of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are sent to the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180 . Serialized by the serial transmission circuit, this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit through the peripheral control input circuit to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. there is The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"). It is diagnosed whether or not

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a comprises a peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various peripheral control serial I/O controllers. /O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog/digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A/D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads/writes various data from/to the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah. Various data are read from and written to the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h. It reads and writes various data via an internal bus 1511ah, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and an external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d. /O port 1511ag and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak and other input/output devices, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. to DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a peripheral control various serial I/O port 1511ae built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and a peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af. , peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, to transfer data independently. In addition, while reading and writing the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab via the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and It reads and writes from/to an input/output device such as a peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and a peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which are externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Between input/output devices such as O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, In order to transfer data independently, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are read and written via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h. Serial I/O port 1511ae, WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices are connected via peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai. read and write.

A peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls an internal bus 1511ah, a peripheral bus 1511ai, and an external bus 1511h to control a central processing unit of a peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control RAM 1511c. Storage devices such as SRAM 1511d, input/output devices such as peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converters 1511ak It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

Peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae are serial I/O port for lamp drive board, serial I/O port for motor drive board, serial I/O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED , a serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board motor, a serial I/O port for the main control board, and a serial I/O port for obtaining the performance operation unit information.

A peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer, if it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer to the WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control within a certain period (until the timer expires), it is reset. will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag outputs various latch signals such as the game board side motor drive latch signal and the door side motor drive light emission latch signal. Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serial and outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. This LED is a high-intensity white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big win game state is confirmed. In this embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag are directly connected electrically, the path between the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag can be shortened. Therefore, noise countermeasures can be taken for the lighting control of the LED, which has a significant meaning in the game. The lighting control of the LED is executed in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later, and the other LEDs except for this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit regular processing described later. It has become.

The peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume control volume 1510a, and its resistance value is varied by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted to a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the values of 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. FIG. In this manner, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotating operation of the knob.

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying pachinko machine 1 clerk or the like of the occurrence of malfunctions of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts on the pachinko machine 1, and contents related to game effects are announced. (For example, to make the screen unfolding on the game board side effect display device 1600 more powerful, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of shifting to an advantageous game state, etc.). The notification sound also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, and from mute to maximum volume. can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to be described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 levels described above. As a result, for example, even if a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob of the volume control volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the music, sound effects, etc. that flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are produced. Although the sound becomes smaller, when the pachinko machine 1 has a problem or when the player commits a fraudulent act, a notification sound set to a large volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be emitted. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the player's cheating due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 can be produced more powerfully by increasing the volume of the sound, or the game state can shift to an advantageous game state for the player. You can also notify them of high prices.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and music. There are sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The schedule data for screen generation is configured by arranging the screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and the order of the screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is defined. It is The schedule data for generating the light emission mode is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for indicating which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later, and the VDP built-in sound source 1512a. A track number is defined for indicating in which track among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines operations of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Some of the various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are directly read out from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed. Some are read and executed. Various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are also read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and are stored in various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which will be described later, when the power is turned on. In some cases, what is copied in is read out.

In addition, in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, a program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is stored. A brightness correction program is included. This luminance correction program corrects the decrease in luminance due to aging of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the current date and time, brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the internal RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is used based on the correction information. to correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in a range of 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that has been set. Therefore, when six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the luminance When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of 80% obtained by adding 5% which is the acquired correction information to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on. If December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, and the effect display device on the game board side is displayed. When lighting the backlight of 1600, the game board is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85%, which is obtained by adding 10%, which is the acquired correction information, to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A managed work area 1511ca, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc dedicated to storing copies of various information stored in the backup managed work area 1511ca, and a backup area stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Various control program copy area 1511cd for exclusively storing copies of various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and copies of various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. various control data copy areas 1511ce for dedicated storage; backup unmanaged work areas 1511cf for dedicated storage of various types of information updated by execution of various control programs that are not backed up; is provided.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written into the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf to be cleared to zero. For the work area 1511ca to be managed, the first backup area 1511cb, and the second backup area 1511cc, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a power-on state command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 starts the RAM clear effect. and to indicate the game state (for example, to indicate the start of an effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on). Sometimes cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 1511ca is performance information (1fr ) as a backup target, and effect information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs, is backed up. Bank 0 (1 ms) that is exclusively stored as an object. The names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms) will be briefly explained here. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4" provided in an area extending from a backup first area 1511cb to a backup second area 1511 cc, which will be described later, are of the same storage area as "Bank 0". It means that it has a size. "(1fr)" is, as will be described later, when the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a A V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to indicate that it is ready to receive screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Since the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed every time, "Bank 0", "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4" are respectively appended (effect information (1fr) and effect Backup information (1fr) is also used with the same meaning). As will be described later, "(1 ms)" means that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. and "Bank4" (effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms), which will be described later, are also used with the same meaning).

Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is set, and in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED, lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting to the plurality of LEDs, etc. provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 are stored. This is a storage area in which the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting the signal is set. In the received command storage area 1511cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is a storage area where various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a described later) is set. is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to commands received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are set. In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set

Bank 0 (1 ms) includes frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, presentation operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. Door-side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, which is a storage area to be set, a drive signal for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid that operates various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is stored. This is a storage area in which the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. This is a storage area in which various types of information obtained by acquiring the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies are set. Rotation (direction of rotation) of the dial operation unit 401 and operation of the pressing operation unit 405 (for example, dial created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the production operation unit 400) Rotation (rotation direction) history information of the operation unit 401, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is set, and the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak has an effect display drive board 4450 on its periphery. Drawing data is received from the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the control board 1510, and if the received drawing data is determined to be abnormal data, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 output based on the LOCKN signal described later to notify that fact. This is a storage area in which various kinds of information obtained by acquiring the frequency of failures between connections with the effect display drive board 4450 and the occurrence status of failures are set.

The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in Bank 0 (1 fr), the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf in Bank 0 (1 ms). and the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag are each divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa when the peripheral controller steady-state processing described later is executed. , when the next peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, and the peripheral control unit steady-state Each time the process is executed, the game board side emission data SL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when game board side emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control unit steady process, the previous peripheral When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, when the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL is stored in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. -When DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame-decoration driving amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. be. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in this peripheral control unit steady process, When the previous peripheral controller steady-state processing was executed, the process proceeds based on the door-side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame-decoration driving amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. It's becoming

In the frame-decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf stores the door When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. -DAT is set, and every time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is stored in the first area and the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing was executed. Based on this, the process proceeds.

In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Sometimes, when the previous peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing was executed, the processing proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. It's like

Next, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc dedicated to storing copies of performance information, which are various types of information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, two pairs of two banks are managed as one page. Effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Effect information (1 ms) which is copied to the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is the normally used storage area. is transferred to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac as effect backup information (1ms) each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. Copied quickly. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks that constitute the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 1511cb, Bank1 (1 fr) and Bank2 (1 fr) are set as one pair, and Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) are set as one pair, and a total of two pairs are managed as one page. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed for each frame (1frame). Memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, It is copied to Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1 fr) and Bank2 (1 fr) match. This is done depending on whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) match.

In the second backup area 1511cc, one pair of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). Memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, This page is copied to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. This is done depending on whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) match.

Thus, in this embodiment, in the first backup area 1511cb, one pair is Bank1 (1 fr) and Bank2 (1 fr), and one pair is Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms). The backup second area 1511cc is an area for managing pages, and the backup second area 1511cc has a total of 2 pairs, with Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) as one pair, and Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc.

Further, in the present embodiment, the performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored as performance backup information (1fr) by the peripheral control unit every 1 frame. Each time a routine process is executed, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, and the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is the normally used storage area. is backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed as the effect backup information (1ms). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac executes high-speed copying by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in common. That is, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr) and the performance information (1ms) are managed by a common management method (common program execution).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da for exclusively storing information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs; A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc are provided for exclusively storing copies of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. It should be noted that the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are the power-on state command from the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 89) when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure). indicates the start of the RAM clearing effect and the game state (for example, when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time of power-on, it instructs the start of the effect. ), it is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the first backup area 1511cb, and the second backup area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is designed to be By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of the occurrence of the jackpot game state) etc.), on the other hand, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

The backup management target work area 1511da includes performance information (SRAM), which is various information that continues over the course of the day (for example, information for managing the history of the occurrence of a big hit game state and for managing a special performance flag). information, etc.) to be backed up. Here, the name of Bank0 (SRAM) will be briefly explained. As described above, "Bank" is the minimum management unit representing the size of the storage area for storing various information. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4" provided in an area extending from a backup first area 1511db to a backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are of the same storage area as "Bank 0". It means that it has a size. In "(SRAM)", various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is to be backed up. , and “Bank 4” (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM), which will be described later, are also used with the same meaning).

Next, a backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc dedicated to storing a copy of performance information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc are managed as one page, with two banks forming one pair. Effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored as effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Then, it is copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks that constitute the page match.

Specifically, in the first backup area 1511db, a pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA each time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame. This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

In the backup second area 1511dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are paired, and this pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are transferred to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA each time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame. This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first backup area 1511db is an area for managing a pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one page. 1511dc is an area for managing a pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal display control unit]
A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for performing drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is shown in FIG. As described above, a sound source for controlling sounds such as music and sound effects is built in (hereinafter referred to as "internal sound source"), and the drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is performed. Sound source built-in VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 1512a for control, various character data of the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 In addition, various kinds of music, sound effects, etc. A liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing sound data, an audio data transmission IC 1512c for transmitting serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the door frame side effect display device 460. The serialized drawing data is sent to the effect display drive board 4450 which is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is stored in the plate unit 320. A differential circuit 1512e that differentiates the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, into a positive signal and a negative signal. Then, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, and when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, this signal is a forced switching circuit 1512f that is connected so as to transmit the signal, and is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input; It has The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b stores sprite data used for displaying screens and images, which will be described later, such as ring image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), and for displaying an operation menu background image, which will be described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selected display object image data used to display at least one selected display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale to be described later, volume adjustment icon to be described later In addition to volume setting icon image data used for display, body frame back image data used to display the body frame back image that allows the position of each part on the back of the body frame 4 to be visually recognized from the player's point of view, display of the service mode screen Service mode screen image data used for , break timer setting screen image data used for displaying the rest timer setting screen, and during rest screen image data used for displaying the during rest screen are stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestive display object image data used to display a suggestive display object for prompting the user to operate the pressing operation section 405 (operation section) of the effect operation unit 400. FIG.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to commands from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. 1511cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the first screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511. After extracting from the control data copy area 1511ce and outputting to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, when a V blank signal (to be described later) is input, the first screen data is extracted according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The following screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is output to the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a. In this manner, the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae every time the V blank signal is input. Then, the screen data are output one by one from the first screen data to the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a copies the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is extracted and set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. After extracting various control data from the control data copy area 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator, when the V blank signal is input, the leading data is extracted according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and receives the V blank signal. Each time, the sound command data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a one by one from the top sound command data.

[7-4-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a in addition to the above-described built-in tone generator, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source controls the game board from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, as shown in FIG. The side character data and the top dish side character data are extracted to create sprite data, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated. A built-in VRAM (hereinafter referred to as "internal VRAM") for The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, and outputs the drawing data for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data is sent from channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, while the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame periphery. A terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display stored in the plate unit 320 by being arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450 . As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short due to being attached to the game board 5 respectively, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 can The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because the control board 1510 outputs to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 . On the other hand, since the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450. Since the length of wiring required for the path of CH1 is much longer than that of the channel CH1, it is extremely susceptible to noise. For this reason, for channel CH2, in which the wiring for sending drawing data is much longer than channel CH1, THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One ( By adopting a differential communication system called "Registered Trademark", it is a mechanism that is less susceptible to noise.

Channel CH1 uses a serial differential interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), whereas channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 4610d and stored in the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 . The serialized various signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460 .

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs screen data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, the VDP with built-in sound source 1512a Based on this input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to create sprite data for one screen (1 frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame side is output. Image data for the performance display device 460 is sent from the channel CH2 to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and a performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via. That is, the "screen data for one screen (one frame)" means that the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is stored in the built-in VRAM. It is the data for generating above.

In addition, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 through the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. Then, it outputs a V blank signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to notify that it is ready to accept screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a executes peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, in response to the input of this V blank signal. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 . Also, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary slightly in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a are mounted.

Note that the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source adopts a frame buffer system. This "frame buffer system" is a frame buffer (built-in VRAM) that holds drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. , drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in this frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 .

When the above-described sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on the command from the main control board 1310, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source 1512b, as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and the music, sound effects, and the like that flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the hall clerk of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the fraudulent action against the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Contains the subvolume value to be used. Specifically, for the effect sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume is adjusted. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 and shifting to a later-described setting mode.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is Actually, it is amplified up to the master volume value which is the sound volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, serializes the amplified effect sound, and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value, so that it flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The volume is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the sound effect, among the multiple tracks, the sound data of the sound effect incorporated in the track to be used and the sub volume value for adjusting the volume of the sound effect incorporated in the track to be used By synthesizing the set volume adjustment volume 1510a with the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob, the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the volume actually flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. is amplified to the master volume value, and this amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. Synthesizing the maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, The volume of this synthesized notification sound is amplified to a master volume value that is the volume actually flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and this amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. .

Here, when the performance sound is being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the control of playing the notification sound to notify the pachinko hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or of an illegal act on the pachinko machine 1 is simple. First, forcibly set the sub-volume value of the track in which the sound effect is incorporated to mute, the sound data of the track in which this sound effect is incorporated, the sub-volume value set to mute, and the notification The sound data of the track in which the sound is embedded and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the informational sound is set to the maximum volume are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the informational sound are actually It amplifies to the master volume value which becomes the sound volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, serializes the amplified effect sound and notification sound, and outputs them as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In other words, the sounds that are actually emitted from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are only the notification sounds with the maximum volume. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound progresses according to the above-mentioned schedule data for sound generation. In this embodiment, the notification sound is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 90 seconds). The volume of the effect sound progressing according to the schedule data for the production is set again as the sub-volume value by the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a (at this time, the dial of the effect operation unit 400 When the operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is operated to shift to the setting mode and adjust, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set), and the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 flowing.

In this way, when the effect sound is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, when the notification sound is played to notify the hall clerk or the like of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1, Although the volume of the effect sound is muted and the informational sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the muted effect sound progresses according to the schedule data for sound generation, so that the predetermined period of time has elapsed. When the sound stops flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the effect sound does not start playing again from the point where the information sound started to flow, but continues to flow according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period has elapsed since the information sound started to flow. It starts to flow again from where it progressed.

[7-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b stores, as shown in FIG. are stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, effect sound, notification sound, notification sound, etc. are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
Audio data transmission IC 1512c receives serialized audio data from VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, and converts the right audio data into positive and negative signals as differential serial data to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) and frame peripheral relay. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and is output to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) as differential serial data in which the left audio data is a positive signal and a negative signal. , frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 , and peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 . As a result, music, sound effects, and the like are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 in accordance with various presentations.

The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as differential serial data between the boards from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, the plus signal of the left audio data, Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal are synthesized by the frame-decorating drive amplifier board 194 to form one left-side audio data, Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Transmitter IC for door frame side production]
As shown in FIG. 74, the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d receives drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. Channel CH2 uses a parallel interface as described above. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. , a green video signal, and a blue video signal each consist of 8 bits, for a total of 24 bits. In this embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to distinguish, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalidated although they are output from the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a.

Three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d transmits three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronous signal, and a vertical synchronous signal. and a clock signal, and serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. with only a differential 1-pair cable. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 , the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 , and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 .

As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is transferred from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and then the door. Since it is output (sent) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from the channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (the first 2 path) is much longer than the wiring length required for the first path, it becomes very susceptible to noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the body frame 4 shown in FIG. For example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 to the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 provided in the door frame 3, on the main body frame 4 side. It is necessary to pass various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closing side of the body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 can guide the game balls. A full-tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding paid-out game balls to the lower tray 322 side when the tank becomes full is arranged.
Further, below the main body frame 4, a payout unit 800 shown in FIG. In this way, various wirings for electrically connecting various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn near the dispensing device 830, the full-tank branch unit 770, the power supply substrate 931, and the like. In addition to the noise caused by the driving of the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the noise caused by the electrostatic discharge caused by the game balls and the power line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The environment is subject to noise, etc.

For this reason, for channel CH2, in which the wiring for sending drawing data is much longer than channel CH1, the transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 for door frame side effect is provided by Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. By adopting a differential system communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)", the system is less susceptible to noise. In this embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, As described above, a differential 1-pair cable is used as a wiring for electrically connecting between the connections of the transmitter and the receiver. is a twisted pair cable, not just parallel wires. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

Here, a case in which parallel lines are used as a differential one-pair cable for electrically connecting a transmitter and a receiver will be briefly described. For the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source that the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is much longer than the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, THine Electronics Even with a mechanism that is less susceptible to noise by adopting differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Co., Ltd., only with such a hardware configuration, electrostatic discharge of game balls When the serial data on the parallel lines are affected by noise, noise intruding into the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the performance display is stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 in the affected state. , the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as being different from normal and disturbed data, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, it appears like a so-called sandstorm. There is a problem that an image is displayed and it becomes impossible to recognize what the image is at all.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is used for the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator, which has a much longer wiring length for sending drawing data than the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator. In the performance transmitter IC 1512d, THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential method communication is adopted to make it less susceptible to noise, and in addition to such a hardware configuration A twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) noise on the receiving side even if differential serial data is affected by noise entering the wiring is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1-pair cable. As a result, even if the serial data is affected by the twisted pair cable due to noise caused by electrostatic discharge of game balls, noise intruding into the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of No. 3, the channel of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a Drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display driving board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460. As a result, the image generated by the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be reliably displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. FIG. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent the door frame side effect display device 460 from displaying an image such as a sandstorm that makes it impossible to recognize what kind of image it is. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play due to the influence of the noise.

In this embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which will be described later, are provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. , that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally constructed, but are separately assembled and attached to the main body frame 4, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the door frame 4, various wiring such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the body frame 4 side. Thus, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, maintenance of the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be reduced by removing the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4 after the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 and various wirings are removed. However, if the defect occurring in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3' is attached to the body frame 4 in place of the defective door frame 3, and the door frame 3 is replaced. By electrically connecting various wirings from various boards provided on the side of the body frame 4 to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the side of the body frame 4, various boards provided on the side of the body frame 4 and various wirings provided on the side of the door frame 3' can be connected. and the substrate can be electrically connected.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effects provided on the peripheral control board 1510 employs differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to this hardware configuration, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by noise that enters the wiring, the noise can be canceled (removed) on the receiving side. ) was employed as the differential one-pair cable to electrically connect between the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, between the substrates between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, between the substrates between the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the effect display drive The substrates 4450 and 4450 are electrically connected to each other by twisted pair cables, while power supply wiring and wiring for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. As a result, in the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting differential serial data transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, Power supply wiring patterns and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. For this reason, on the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the wiring patterns for video transmission are formed separately from the power wiring patterns and various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined distance. Since the path from the transmitter to the receiver straddles a plurality of relay terminal plates such as the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, video transmission terminals formed on these plurality of relay terminal plates are provided. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of the signal that transmits serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise, and the output level of the signal is lowered. occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is applied to the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, between the substrates between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, between the substrates between the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and between the substrates of the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 The terminal plate 882 and the production display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, while the power supply wiring and other wiring for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. However, one wire of the twisted pair cable is red and the other wire is gray, and of the harness, the wire that supplies power is red and the other multiple wires are gray. . Note that the wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
Signals output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are sent to the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is designed to be transmitted to the effect display driving board 4450 that is housed. LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is supplied to the forced switching circuit 1512f in addition to the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e and input. The differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into differential serial signals (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is used for the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or for the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a customer waiting state for a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. During this period, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC 0 (to be described later) provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. , that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, is sent as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460 . The forced switching circuit 1512f, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, connects the circuits so as to transmit these two signals. When the two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the conversion circuit 1512e, the circuit is configured so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. It is As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. , is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, while in the differential circuit 1512e When the two differential signals of the plus signal and the minus signal are not input, the door frame side effect transmitter is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a displays the startup screen on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and performs a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510).

When a serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later, the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 serializes various and a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores a signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460.

The door frame side presentation receiver IC SDIC0 receives the drawing data from the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, and when it judges that the received drawing data is abnormal data, sends a LOCKN signal (to be described later) to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , and output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 . This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 . When a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the sound source built-in VDP 1512a to generate an image for notifying that effect, and outputs the image to the game board side effect display device 1600. is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to notify.

Further, when the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the received two signals are the LOCKN signal output request data, it sends a LOCKN signal (to be described later) to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 . As a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input, and the tray unit of the door frame 3 While it can be determined that there is no problem with the performance display drive board 4450 housed in 320, it is assumed that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is not input. It is determined that the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 has a problem, and a notification image (for example, "There is a problem with the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. Please call the clerk.") is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and a notification sound to that effect (for example, "A problem has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device ) is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and the notification sound is played from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. As a result, the notification can be made by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker provided on the door frame 3 or the like. At this time, all the various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided on the door frame 3 and various decoration substrates provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the RTC control unit 4165, which holds calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second, is mainly composed of the RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a incorporates a RAM 4165aa (hereinafter referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa") that holds calendar information and time information. The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is used in this embodiment) as a drive power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. In other words, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) without receiving any power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). As a result, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold the calendar information and time information by power supply from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information. Based on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be unfolded. As such effects, for example, on December 25th, a screen of a Christmas tree or reindeer will be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, or on New Year's Eve, a New Year's countdown will be displayed. The screen to be executed is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the like. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight. there is The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. . The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and brightness adjustment information for the currently set game. The brightness of the LEDs that are the backlights of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are included.

In addition to the calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa also stores calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information as information on the date and hour, minute, and second first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date and time information is also stored.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a performs ON/OFF control of the backlight or ON only when the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are of the cold cathode tube type. It is designed to

Various types of information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa are set on the production line of the game machine manufacturer. In order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600 on the production line, the year when the input date and time information was input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. It is set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the month, day, hour, minute, and second.

In this way, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores, in addition to calendar information and time information, brightness setting information and input date and time information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. , the information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a jackpot game state with a low probability or a high probability) can be stored.

In addition, depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the luminance setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright for the backlight luminance of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the date and time of manufacture. , sometimes too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation part 401 or the pressing operation part 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the demonstration by the game board side production display device 1600 is being performed in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 . By operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and time information can be reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be set as desired. brightness can be adjusted. The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LEDs stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that if the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight, the game board side effect This corrects the decrease in brightness that accompanies aging of the display device 1600 . Peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires input date and time information from RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, and uses calendar information and time to specify the year, month, and day. Acquire time information specifying minutes and seconds to specify the current date and time, and adjust the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. Luminance setting information including luminance adjustment information for playing and the luminance of the currently set LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, based on the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time, if six months have already passed since the time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, Acquire the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is lit, this 75% Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted so that the brightness is 80%, which is obtained by adding 5%, which is the correction information acquired for If 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. When the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the acquired correction information of 10% is added to this 75% to obtain 85%. Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on so as to achieve the brightness.

Note that the current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. and the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 to specify the current date and time.

[834. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume control volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, etc., that are output from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob. As described above, the sound volume control volume 1510a is adapted to vary the resistance value by rotating the knob portion thereof, and the electrically connected peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is connected to the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into values in 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, as described above, the values of 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. FIG.

In this manner, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotating operation of the knob. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1, a game effect, etc. (For example, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is made more powerful, or the possibility of shifting to an advantageous game state for the player is announced. etc.) also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, and the sound is muted. to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator) by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 levels described above. As a result, for example, even if a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob of the volume control volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the music, sound effects, etc. that flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are produced. Although the sound becomes smaller, when the pachinko machine 1 has a problem or when the player commits a fraudulent act, a notification sound set to a large volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be emitted. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the player's cheating due to the notification sound.

In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side production display device 1600 and the door frame side production display device 460 is produced more powerfully by increasing the volume of the sound, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state.

In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a, the dial operation unit 401 of the production operation unit 400 and the By operating the push operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to a setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation part 401 or the pressing operation part 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the demonstration by the game board side production display device 1600 is being performed in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 . By operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the presentation operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob of the volume control volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is By adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased. there is This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which the sound data of the production sound such as music and sound effects is incorporated among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound and notification sound described above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a, and the dial operation unit 401 or pressing operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 is used. and adjusting the volume of music or sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of . Since the volume control volume 1510 a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 , the body frame 4 must always be left open from the outer frame 2 . Then, the person who can rotate the knob of the volume control volume 1510a is the store clerk in the hall. However, with the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, the player may find the music and sound effects to be too soft and difficult to hear, and the player may feel loud and the music and sound effects loud. Therefore, within a predetermined period of time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated, or the game board side effect display device 1600 is put into a customer waiting state for a demonstration. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period during which the effect is performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the presentation operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume. The dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of 400, the volume can be reduced to a desired volume.

Further, in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a non-playing state for a predetermined period of time and the customer waits for customers, the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). , the volume adjusted by the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled and the volume is initialized. In this volume initialization, the volume is set to the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a. As a result, when a player who has played a game while seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time feels that the adjusted sound volume is too small to hear the music and sound effects, the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. A player who plays a game can operate the dial operation part 401 and the pressing operation part 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired volume, and the player sat in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time and played a game. If the player who has been playing the game feels that the adjusted volume is loud and the music and sound effects are loud, this time, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game can turn the dial operation unit 401 of the production operation unit 400. By operating the pressing operation unit 405, the volume can be reduced to a desired volume.

[8. power supply system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board and the like will be described. The grounds (GND) of various substrates and the grounds (GND) of various terminal plates are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power substrate 931 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 931]
The power board 931 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 934 is operated, power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power board 931, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

The power board 931 includes a power control section 935 and a firing control section 953, as shown in FIG. The power control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. A section 953 is a circuit for driving and controlling the shooting solenoid 682 of the ball shooting device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

The power control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor improvement circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 through the power supply board 931, and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. This synchronous rectification circuit 935a rectifies the AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies it to the power factor correction circuit 935b. The power factor correction circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power to generate DC +37V (DC+37V, hereinafter referred to as "+37V") and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. This smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied +37V ripple, smoothes the +37V, and supplies it to the firing control circuit 953a and the power generating circuit 935d of the firing control section 953, respectively.

Capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built into the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951. It supplies backup power to the RAM (withdrawal control built-in RAM).

The shooting control circuit 953a of the shooting control unit 953 uses +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a drive power source, and shoots the game ball with a launching strength (launching strength) corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 302. While adjusting the drive current for striking (firing) toward the ball and controlling the output to the firing solenoid 682, the ball of the ball feeding unit 250 is output by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250. A feeding member receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 321 of the tray unit 320, and controls feeding of the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the shot ball launching device 650 side.

The power source generation circuit 935d supplies from +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c to DC +5V (DC+5V, hereinafter referred to as "+5V"), DC +12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V"), and DC +24V (DC+24V, hereinafter referred to as "+24V") is generated and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, respectively. A power system to which +5V is applied is a +5V power line, a power system to which +12V is applied is a +12V power line, and a power system to which +24V is applied is a +24V power line.

The +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951 as described later. +5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control filter circuit 951a, and is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM through the diode PD0. ing. The +12V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. This +5V creation circuit 1310g creates +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from +12V from the payout control board 951. The +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control filter circuit 1310h and to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM through the diode MD0. ing.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 951, and the payout The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 951 is also electrically connected. In other words, the +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM, which is forward due to the diode PD0, and the capacitor BC1. The positive terminal is designed to allow current to flow toward it. In this way, the capacitor BC1 is +5V by an electrical connection method in which +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is returned to the payout control board 951 and then again from the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when the +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as payout VBB. Therefore, although the current does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a because it is blocked by the diode PD0, the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. It has become so.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. , and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 on the main control board 1310 . That is, the +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is a current flowing toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0, which are in the forward direction due to the diode MD0. A current flows in the direction of Thus, the capacitor BC0 is supplied with +5V and charged by an electrical connection method in which +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. You can do it. As a result, the +12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the +5V creation circuit 1310g can create +5V. When it is exhausted, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Therefore, a diode is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the main control MPU 1310a does not operate because the current is blocked by MD0, the memory content is retained by supplying the main VBB to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the main control built-in RAM is composed of the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline about the voltage supplied to each control board etc. is demonstrated, Then, the voltage mainly supplied to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board are demonstrated.

The three types of voltages +5V, +12V, and +24V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. Two voltages of +24 V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 . The three types of voltages +5V, +12V, and +24V created by the power source creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, They are supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 respectively.

The three voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are applied to the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180, as shown in FIG. 4180a, respectively. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal and a gradation lighting signal to various decoration boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 outputs the game A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for the board 5 .

The peripheral control board 1510 includes a +3.3V generating circuit 1510b that generates DC 3.3V (DC+3.3V, hereinafter referred to as "+3.3V") from +5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. ing. The +3.3V generated by the +3.3V generation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG. In addition, +12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power source 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG.

On the other hand, the three voltages +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 76(b). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 has a +9V generating circuit 194a that generates DC +9V (DC+9V, hereinafter referred to as "+9V") from +12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. +9V generated by the +9V generating circuit 194a and +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to various decorative substrates of the door frame 3 and the like.

In addition, +12 V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper tray side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x generates +3.3V from +12V. The +3.3 V generated by the upper tray liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to various electronic components constituting the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. and the door frame side effect display device 460, respectively. The voltage generated by the upper tray side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450 y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460 .

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 952a and the like. This payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 931, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952, for example. +12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal plate 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal plate 784 is a circuit for outputting a signal that conveys the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc., to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). is. The hall computer monitors the game played by the player by ascertaining the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like, from signals output from the external communication circuit 784a. In addition, +24 from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 without being used at all in the payout control board 951 .

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a +5V generation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, etc., in addition to the main control MPU 1310a. The +5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and creates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. In the main control board 1310, the +5V power line is a power supply system to which +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is applied and supplied. In this embodiment, the +5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Therefore, the +5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and the +5V power supply of the main control board 1310 The +5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as boards other than the main control board 1310. FIG.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V produced by the +5V production circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to the main control MPU 1310a, for example. +12V from the payout control board 951, for example, is supplied to the main control input circuit 1310b and the like, +24V from the payout control board 951, for example, is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of these +12V and +24V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, it outputs a power failure notice signal as a power failure notice to the main control MPU 1310a. The power failure warning signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a through the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control board 951. Also, the power outage warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310 . 76(b), the power failure warning signal is input to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. At the same time, they are input to the decoration substrates of the door frames and the like via the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 .

In this embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltage applied to each of the +12V power line and the +24V power line by monitoring the voltage applied to either the +12V power line or the +24V power line. Signs of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure can be detected more accurately than when monitoring the voltage applied to the power supply.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit etc. of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. FIG. 77 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board, FIG. 78 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 79 is a circuit showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a diagram. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 75 will be described, followed by the power supply created by the main control board 1310, the main control system reset, the main control crystal oscillator, the main control input circuit, the power failure monitoring circuit, the main control MPU Various input/output signals to and from the main control board 1310 and the interface circuit for communication between the peripheral control boards 1510 will be described.

The main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, a +5V generation circuit 1310g, and a main control MPU 1310a shown in FIGS. In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, peripheral circuits include a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (24 megahertz (MHz )).

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 77, the main control filter circuit 1310h is mainly composed of a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. This main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 has its 1st terminal applied with +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g, its 2nd terminal connected to the ground (GND), and its 3rd terminal to remove noise components. +5V is output. The +5V applied to the No. 1 terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0, one end of which is grounded (GND), so that the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is first removed. are smoothed.

The +5 V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other ends of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded (GND). , the ripple is further removed and smoothed. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. It should be noted that the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is supplied with the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off. It is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after generation.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC3, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded (GND).

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and one end of the capacitor MC4 is connected to the ground (GND). is electrically connected to the other end of the The VBB terminal of this main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4. electrically connected to the terminal. In other words, +5V, whose noise component has been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h, is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 through the diode MD0. is intended to be applied to the positive terminal of As a result, as described above, the +12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. When the circuit 1310g cannot generate +5V, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a Although the main control MPU 1310a does not operate because the current is blocked by the diode MD0, the memory contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
The +5 V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 as shown in FIG. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and includes a delay circuit. The delay capacitor terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC5, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the delay time of the delay circuit is set by the capacity of this capacitor MC5. It is possible to do so. Specifically, the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the elapse of the delay time when +5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (eg, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open-collector output type capacitor, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the other end of which is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by this capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. While being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is applied to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Input to the reset pin respectively. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function The main control output circuit 1310ca with is reset. One end of the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC7 grounded to the ground (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Also, the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is electrically unconnected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
The +5 V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, as shown in FIG. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, this smoothed +5 V is also applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. The main controlled crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5 V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and receives a 24 MHz clock signal. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main controlled crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded (GND), and the D terminal that outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main controlled crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically unconnected to the outside. state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b detects signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. In addition to signals, this is a circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from an operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described here.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 is a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the power on. It is operated to clear the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a, or to cancel the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, and error cancellation after the power is turned on (after a period of time during which the RAM clear function has passed, that is, after a predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on). and a function to perform Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error that the payout control board 951 has, when an operation signal is input from the operation switch 954 within a predetermined period from power on, the main control It is judged as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM, and processing for clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed.

The main control board 1310 receives an operation signal whose logic is LOW from the payout control board 951 when the operation switch 954 is not operated. becomes HI is input from the payout control board 951 (detailed description of this point will be given later).

The transmission line that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period from the time of power-on, as shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 through the resistor MR3. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR3, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor MTR0 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC10 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC10A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is transmitted. The line is pulled up to +12V by pull-up resistor MR2. The main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW and is input, while the operation switch 954 is operated. When it is on, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and the logic becomes HI and is input.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954. FIG.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, thereby turning off the transistor MTR0 and also turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is raised to the +5V side by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a instructs to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM. to decide.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, an operation signal pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2 and logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, thereby turning on the transistor MTR0 and switching the switch. The circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs to perform RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. I judge.

It should be noted that the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input through the payout control board 951 . That is, between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, the control reference voltage is higher than +5V A voltage of +12V is used to improve signal reliability. Therefore, in this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, and the second starting opening sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor. While being pulled up, the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general winning gate sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003, which are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to the +12V side by a pull-up resistor like the operation signal from the operation switch 954 .

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltages of +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 through the payout control board 951, and +12V and +24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, and upon detection of a power failure or momentary power failure, outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control board. It is output to the payout control MPU 952 a of 951 and the peripheral control board 1510 . Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of +24 V power failure or momentary power failure, +12 V power failure or momentary power failure monitoring, and the output of a power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. +5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495 V is set in the present embodiment) that serves as a comparison reference voltage for the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC20, one end of which is grounded (GND). AC component) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded (GND).

The comparator MIC21 has two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V with the reference voltage Vref, and the other (MIC21B) is used to compare , +12V are used to compare the monitor voltage V2 and the reference voltage Vref. A monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V is applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21A. A monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V is applied to the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the sixth terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC22 has two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21, one end of which is grounded (GND). , the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is connected to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. +24V blackout or momentary blackout monitoring]
The +24V power failure or momentary power failure is monitored by comparing the +24V monitor voltage V1 and the reference voltage Vref with the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, as described above. As shown in FIG. 78, the third terminal, which is the plus terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is applied, is a resistor MR21 whose one end is electrically connected to the +24V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 grounded to the ground (GND), the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22 and the other end of the capacitor MC23 grounded to the ground (GND); are electrically connected. The monitoring voltage V1 of +24V applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +24V according to the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC23 and smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are such that, when +24V power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the voltage starts to drop from +24V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 21.40V). The monitor voltage V1 of +24V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The first terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR23 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC24, one end of which is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitor voltage V1 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal that has been pulled up to the side and has a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is the ground (GND). A signal that has been pulled down to the side and has a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. +12V blackout or momentary blackout monitoring]
The +12V power failure or momentary power failure is monitored by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +12V monitoring voltage V2 and the reference voltage Vref as described above. As shown in FIG. 78, the fifth terminal, which is the plus terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the +12V monitor voltage V2 is applied, is a resistor MR24 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25 grounded to the ground (GND), the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25 and the other end of the capacitor MC25 grounded to the ground (GND); are electrically connected. The monitoring voltage V2 of +12V applied to the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +12V according to the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are such that, when +12V power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the voltage starts to drop from +12V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 10.47V). The monitor voltage V2 of +12V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref when the voltage is applied.

The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A. A preset D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of a capacitor MC24 having one end grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a terminal. Capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter as described above.

When the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal that has been pulled up to the side and has a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +12V voltage is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is the ground (GND). A signal whose logic is LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Power failure warning signal output]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, according to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and stores this stored value. (logic) is output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a signal whose logic is LOW at the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, it releases the latched state and resets the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal (at this time, the logic of the signal output from 1Q is inverted, that is, the same logic as the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal). A logic signal is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal). On the other hand, when a logic HI signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, the latch state is set. In addition, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to set the latch state by inputting a signal whose logic is HI to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, the logic of the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is LOW. is input, the state of outputting a signal with logic HI from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, is maintained (at this time, the signal output from 1Q is inverted in logic to be negative logic maintains the state of output from the 1Q terminal).

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has the D input terminal 1D terminal and the clock input terminal 1CK terminal grounded (GND), respectively. The circuit is configured so that there is no change in the edge of the input clock signal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is stored and is not output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. ing. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a PR terminal, which is a preset terminal. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors momentary power failure, is input, and based on these signals, a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC22, one end of which is grounded (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. +5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal as the ground terminal is grounded (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal that inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal as the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. It is in an unconnected state.

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a through a main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to a CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal. This power failure clear signal is designed to be started and stopped after a predetermined time has passed in the processing performed by the main control MPU 1310a when power is turned on on the main control side, which will be described later. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function with the logic being LOW. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latched state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. is output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI through the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is adapted to set a latch state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the input state in which the logic is LOW to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 1310cb outputs to the payout control board 951 as a payout power outage warning signal, and outputs to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal.

The main control input circuit 1310b electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the amplifier MIC22, is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR26 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via a resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC23 (Non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC23A) without inverting it.). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR27, MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning off the transistor MTR20. , the switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning on the transistor MTR20. The switch circuit is also turned ON.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal PR, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is output to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is output to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

In addition, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 951 as the payout power outage notice signal is open as shown in FIG. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 via a resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the wiring It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via (harness). In addition, when the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 shown in FIG. 70 in the payout control board 951 In the circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. connected.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the transistor MTR21 of the preceding stage is a switching circuit of the preceding stage, and a circuit composed of the resistors MR33, MR34 and the transistor MTR22 of the succeeding stage is a switching circuit of the latter stage, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 22 .

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the preceding transistor MTR21 is turned off, the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning on the transistor MTR21. The switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, thereby The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned off.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal PR, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, thereby turning on the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power outage warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is issued. It is input to the control board 951 .

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HIGH in logic and is applied to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21. The input turns ON the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, thereby turning off the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951 through the wiring (harness). A payout power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951 .

In addition, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as the peripheral power failure warning signal is open as shown in FIG. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. is electrically connected to The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control section 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. , one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning off the transistor MTR23. , the switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning on the transistor MTR23. The switch circuit is also turned ON.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal PR, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. is input to the peripheral control board 1510 .

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HI in logic and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. As a result, the transistor MTR23 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the peripheral power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is generated by the peripheral control board. 1510.

In this way, a main control input circuit 1310b that transmits a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a blackout warning signal, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs a signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal and a main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function each have one transistor. While the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 1510 is the same logic, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is issued to the payout control board 951. The main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs a power failure warning signal has two transistors, a front stage and a rear stage. The logic is the inversion of the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the control board 1510, and is different from the logic of the power outage warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal.

The collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the main control MPU 1310a through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is connected via wiring (harness) to the payout control board. In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the. This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are located between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. 1310, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board, whereas the power failure warning signal logic (ON / OFF signal) using +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a 951 and between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the main control MPU 1310a, A power failure warning is performed by the power failure warning signal logic (ON/OFF signal) using +12V, which is a voltage higher than +5V which is the control reference voltage of the payout control MPU 952a and the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

[9-6. Various input/output signals to the main control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, receives the serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 as the payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, use the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as the main payment serial data transmission signal as the main control output without reset function. The main payment serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the circuit 1310cb without reset function from the main control output circuit 1310cb to the payout control board 951, and the serial data to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. A peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the main control output circuit 1310 cb without reset function, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 1310 cb without reset function to the peripheral control board 1510 .

In addition to the above-described operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout signal indicating the completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal described above A payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, and detection signals from various switches such as the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b. respectively entered or equal.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a main payment ACK signal indicating the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. Then, a main payment ACK signal is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 951, and a drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function for the start opening solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. and output a drive signal from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the starting port solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. For the device, a drive signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and a drive signal is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to various displays, and various information (game information) related to the game is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, and various information (game information) related to the game is output to the payout control board 951 from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, an interface circuit for communication between main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 1310 is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress this, +12V, which is higher than +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is used for transmission, thereby increasing its reliability.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly comprises a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. It is On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 includes, as a communication interface circuit, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC built-in). It is composed mainly of

+12 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 through the payout control board 951, and the negative terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. is electrically connected to the positive terminal of an electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
As a result, for example, due to a power failure or momentary power failure, when the power from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 +12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 .

In this way, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data can be transferred to the transmission shift register 41aea by the unit 1310aec and transmitted from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main peripheral serial data.

The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, +12V, which is higher than +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is used for transmission, thereby increasing its reliability.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, +12 V is charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 so that it is applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec and transmits it. When it is transmitted from the shift register 1310aea as main cycle serial data, it is possible to transmit a main cycle serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI by +12V from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50.

In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a has a storage capacity of 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data of up to 10 packets are stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. Also, in this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 on the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). A resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal that outputs the main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 via. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded (GND).

A circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit. When the logic of the main frequency serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is applied to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, forward current does not flow through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and also turning on the switch circuit. . As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

+5 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is grounded (GND), and the negative terminal is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the grounded electrolytic capacitor AC10. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6), which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (4th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal (5th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the +5V side by AR11 and electrically connected to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler AIC10, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is transmitted as the main peripheral serial data transmission signal to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. is input to the input terminal of

As a result, as described above, when the +5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to, for example, a power failure or momentary power failure, The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as +5V. When a power outage or momentary power failure occurs, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the main control MPU 1310a by applying +5V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10. The transmission of the data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main circumference serial transmission port 1310ae can be completed, and the main circumference serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main circumference serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the data without missing or missing data.

When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off by turning off the MTR50, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. While the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR50 to turn on the transistor MTR50, thereby turning on the photocoupler AIC10. The voltage applied to the collector terminal is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. . Thus, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. It is the logic of

Thus, in this embodiment, a +5V power line to which +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is applied, and a +12V power line to which +12V, which is the communication voltage applied via the diode MD50, is applied. , measures are taken when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and communication voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, the +5V power supply line, the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the +5V power supply line drops, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h which is the first auxiliary power supply By applying the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of MC2, it is possible to maintain the state in which the control reference voltage is applied. +12V applied to the +12V power supply line is applied to the anode terminal of diode MD50 as a communication voltage for main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, so that a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the communication voltage is applied from the +12V power supply line through the diode MD50. Even if the voltage drops, the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained by applying the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply. there is As a result, the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented from being interrupted, and the command can be prevented from being omitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the command from being missed immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or during an instantaneous power failure.

In addition, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all used as main peripheral serial data, and are composed of the resistor MR50, the resistors MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50. 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. and 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb are reset so that all of them function as interface circuits as main peripheral serial data. Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the non-functioning main control output circuit 1310cb, the peripheral control board 1510 does not interrupt or drop multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. can be received without fail.

[10. Circuit of Payout Control Board]
Next, the circuit etc. of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 85. FIG. 80 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the payout control unit, etc., FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81, and FIG. FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit, and FIG. 85 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to/from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the circuit of the payout control unit, various input/output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

[10-1. Dispensing Control Filter Circuit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a is mainly composed of a payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The 1st terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5 V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. The +5V from the power supply board 931 is smoothed by the capacitor PC0 by first removing the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage). The 2nd terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5V from which the noise component is removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 has one end connected to the ground (GND), and the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). By being electrically connected to each other, the +5V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is further smoothed by removing ripples. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal that is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, etc., which will be described later. . It should be noted that the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is supplied with the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off. It is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after generation.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC3, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is grounded (GND).

Moreover, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a, and one end is the ground (GND) and the capacitor PC4 that is grounded. is electrically connected to the other end of the The VBB terminal of this payout control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4. electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1 through the diode PD0. is intended to be applied to the positive terminal of As a result, as described above, when the +5V generated by the power source generation circuit 935d of the power source substrate 931 shown in FIG. Since it is supplied to the payout control board 951 as, the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. The memory contents are held by applying VBB. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the payout control built-in RAM is composed of the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Circuit of Payout Control Unit]
In addition to a payout control MPU 952a, a payout control input circuit 952b, a payout control output circuit 952c, a payout motor drive circuit 952d, and a CR unit input/output circuit 952e, the payout control unit 952 includes peripheral circuits as shown in FIG. It mainly consists of a payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 that outputs a clock signal (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment). Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, followed by the payout control crystal oscillator, payout control input circuit, payout motor drive circuit, CR unit input/output circuit, and various input/output signals to the payout control MPU.

[10-2-1. Dispensing control system reset]
+5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, as shown in FIG. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and incorporates a delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC5, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the delay time of the delay circuit is set by the capacity of this capacitor PC5. It is possible to do so. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses when +5V input to the power terminal reaches a threshold value (eg, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open-collector output type capacitor, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the other end of which is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of PC6. This capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output with reset function. While input to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is applied to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. Input to the reset pin respectively. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold, the payout control MPU 952a and the reset function The attached payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. One end of the power terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of a capacitor PC7, and the +5 V input to the power terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Also, the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is electrically unconnected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Dispensing Control Crystal Oscillator]
+5V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, as shown in FIG. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, this smoothed +5V is also applied to the OE terminal, which is the output enable terminal of the payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0. When +5 V is applied to the OE terminal of the payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0, the 8 MHz clock signal is output from the OUT terminal, which is the output terminal.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the ground (GND).

[10-2-3. Payout control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b receives payout power failure notice signals from the door frame open switch 618, the body frame open switch 619, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. circuit, handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 70, a circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, a circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, and the like. . First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input will be explained, followed by the circuit to which the detection signal from the body frame open switch is input, the circuit to which the output power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, A circuit to which a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input and a circuit to which an operation signal is input from the operation switch will be described. Various detection switches such as the full tank detection sensor 279, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, the circuit to which the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor is input will be described here.

[10-2-3(a). Circuit where the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input]
The door frame open switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and when the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 3 is closed by the body frame 4, the switch is turned off (disconnected). The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is a pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. , and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 whose one end is grounded (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20, one end of which is grounded (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC20 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC20A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR20 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a door opening signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor PR24, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR21, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door open information output signal.

Further, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and is also connected to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. , and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR22 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door opening signal.

A circuit composed of a pull-up resistor PR20 and a capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed with the body frame 4, It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a flapping phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 repeat ON/OFF for a short period of time.

A circuit composed of resistors PR21, PR22 and transistor PTR20, a circuit composed of resistors PR24, PR25 and transistor PTR21, and a circuit composed of resistors PR26, PR27 and transistor PTR22 are door frame opening switches. It is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a detection signal from 618 .

When the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR20 is turned on. It is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. be. Further, when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 21 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer edge frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the external terminal plate 784 . Further, when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310 .

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is off, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20. , the transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is raised to +5V, thereby turning the transistor PTR21 ON. Then, the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784. FIG. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is raised to +5V, thereby turning the transistor PTR22 ON. Then, the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the main frame door open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 1310 .

In this way, when the door frame 3 is released from the body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned ON, so that the door frame open signal whose logic is HI is output to the input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The outer end frame door open information output signal which is input to PA0 and whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal plate 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is closed to the body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned off, so that the door frame open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. , the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784 , and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310 .

[10-2-3(b). Circuit where the detection signal from the body frame open switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 is of a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and when the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 shown in FIG. 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the switch is turned off (disconnected). The No. 2 terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is grounded (GND), while the No. 1 terminal of the body frame open switch 619 has a pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power line. , and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 whose one end is grounded (GND). In addition, the first terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21, and is connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR23 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door open information output signal.

The first terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. , and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the resistor PR31, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, and the wiring (harness) shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 . When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR24 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door opening signal.

A circuit composed of a pull-up resistor PR28 and a capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generating circuit. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the body frame open switch 619 due to a flapping phenomenon in which the contacts forming the body frame open switch 619 repeat ON/OFF for a short period of time.

A circuit composed of resistors PR29, PR30 and transistor PTR23 and a circuit composed of resistors PR31, PR32 and transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned ON/OFF by a detection signal from body frame open switch 619. FIG.

When the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR23 is turned on. It is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the external terminal plate 784 . In addition, when the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 24 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310 .

On the other hand, when the body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28. , the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side at the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is generated. It is input to the external terminal board 784 . When the body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28. , the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is generated by the main control board. 1310.

In this way, when the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is turned ON, and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal plate 784. A main frame door open signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame open switch 619 is turned off to turn off the logic. is input to the external terminal plate 784 , and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310 .

In this embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 69, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 receives the main frame door opening signal. Although it cannot be determined whether the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 based on the door frame 3 and / or It is possible for the player to determine that the body frame 4 is open, which does not occur during a normal game, and that the outer end frame door open information output signal is sent to the external terminal plate 784. Since the outer end frame door open information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784, the hall computer outputs the door frame door open information output signal based on the outer end frame door open information output signal. 3 is released from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 are opened. It can be determined that a state that does not occur during a normal game has occurred.

In this embodiment, as described above, the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 are normally closed switches. Even if the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, and the main body frame open switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conducting), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. By adopting normally closed switches for the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 in this manner, it is possible to output the main frame door open signal to the main control board 1310 even in the event of a short circuit, and A frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 .

If the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 are changed from normally closed switches to normally open (normally open (NO)) switches (door frame open switch 618' and body frame open switch 619'), , the door frame open switch 618' is turned ON (conducting) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and turned OFF (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4. . The body frame open switch 619 ′ is turned on (conducting) when the body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2 and turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 . Then, even if the door frame open switch 618' is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the door frame 3 will be in a state of being released from the body frame 4. Even if the frame opening switch 619' is broken and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. FIG. In this way, even if normally open switches are used for the door frame open switch 618' and the body frame open switch 619', the main frame door open signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even when the wire is broken. An outer end frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 .

[10-2-3(c). Circuit to which output power failure warning signal from power failure monitoring circuit is input]
A transmission line for transmitting a power outage warning signal from a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR40 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR40 via PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR40 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as the payout power failure warning signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR41, PR42, and transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by an output power failure warning signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310. FIG.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of the two voltages of +12 V and +24 V from the power supply board 931, and when the power failure or momentary power failure signs are detected, the reset function is disabled. A payout power failure notice signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a power failure notice via the main control output circuit 1310cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the +12V and +24V voltages for signs of power failure or momentary power failure, and as described above, the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions of the large condition are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. While the payout power failure warning signal is input to the payout control board 951, one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf When the condition is established, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the above-mentioned pull-up resistor PR40 through the wiring (harness), so that the logic becomes HI. is input to the payout control board 951 .

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltages of +12V and +24V. Occasionally, since a payout power outage notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 951, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, thereby turning off the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +5V side by resistor PR43. As a result, the payout power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of +12V and/or +24V. When there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951, so that the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 to turn on the transistor PTR40, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout power failure warning signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

In this way, when there is a sign of power failure or instantaneous power failure of the voltage of +12V and / or +24V, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a, When there is no sign of power failure or instantaneous power failure of the voltages of +12V and +24V, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. This is because, as described above, when there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltage of +12V and/or +24V, a power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltages of +12V and +24V, the power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, so that the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e The logic of the payout power outage notice signal input to the payout control MPU 952a and the logic of the power outage notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3(d). Circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input]
A detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. is entered in The output terminal of this full tank detection sensor 279 is circuit-configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control board 951. is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a, and is electrically connected to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. This three-terminal filter PIC50 for a full-tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The 2nd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank detection sensor is grounded (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank detection sensor is connected to the 3-terminal for the full-tank detection sensor via a resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50, and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full-tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after noise components are removed in the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank detection sensor. The base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the resistor PR45, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 whose one end is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40. Capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR47 having one end electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40B) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR41 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a full tank signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR45, PR46 and transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279. FIG.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls. In this embodiment, when the accommodation space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full-tank detection sensor 279 is applied via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931, In the payout control board 951, a signal pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 951, while the housing space is filled with the stored game balls. , the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the logic becomes LOW. is input to the payout control board 951 .

When the accommodation space is not filled with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the handle relay terminal plate 315, and through the power supply board 931, to the payout control board 951. A signal pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and logic HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, thereby turning on the transistor PTR41 and also turning on the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the full tank signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when the accommodation space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full-tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931 via the payout control board. At 951, the signal pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, thereby turning off the transistor PTR41 and also turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR47, and the full tank signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In this embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the switch circuit composed of the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the full tank detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC50. Although it was a circuit configuration, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball out detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. It has a circuit configuration in which it is directly input to each switch circuit without going through. Since the full-tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, compared with the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, etc. provided in the payout device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. , the path for transmitting the detection signal is extremely long, and is extremely susceptible to noise.

The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is filled with stored game balls. Based on the detection signal from 279, when it is determined that the storage space is full of stored game balls, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotator. It is designed to control. In other words, when noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a detects that the game balls in which the accommodation space is stored are not full, but the payout motor 834 In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotating body. When game balls are filled up to the upstream side of the winning ball passage by controlling and rotating the payout rotor to continue the payout of the game balls, the payout rotor itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 834 is abnormally loaded, the payout motor 834 is overloaded and abnormally heats up and breaks down. be. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 279 is first filtered by the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank detection sensor to remove the noise component. adopted.

[10-2-3(e). Circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input]
The first and second output terminals of the operation switch 954 are grounded (GND), and the third and fourth output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to +5 V by a pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. The base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR49, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and is also electrically connected to the ground (GND) at one end of the capacitor PC41, the other end of which is grounded. ing. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 via a resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the preceding and subsequent stages, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage changes, and the signal is the RWMCLR signal input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. is entered in

The third and fourth output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to +5 V by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 through a resistor PR55. The base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the resistor PR55, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR2 electrically connected to the power supply line. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR44 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a RAM clear signal.

A circuit composed of a pull-up resistor PR48 and a capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contacts forming the operation switch 954 repeat ON/OFF for a short time, which is a flapping phenomenon. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the operation switch 954 caused by .

A circuit composed of resistors PR49, PR50 and transistor PTR42 is a switch circuit in the previous stage, a circuit composed of resistors PR52, PR53 and transistor PTR43 is a switch circuit in the latter stage, and resistors PR55, PR56 and transistor PTR44. is a switch circuit, which is turned on/off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954 .

As described above, the operation switch 954 is set to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is operated to clear the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or to cancel the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, and to cancel errors after the power is turned on (after a period of time during which the RAM clear function has passed, that is, after a predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on). It has a function and The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is a RAM clear signal in the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. ), it becomes an error cancellation signal.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR48, so that the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is sent to the preceding transistor. The voltage is input to the base terminal of PTR42 to turn on the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on. When the voltage applied is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is determined that the error is not instructed, and the error is canceled when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on). It is judged that it is not instructive.

Further, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the third and fourth output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is generated by the transistor PTR44. , the transistor PTR44 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. is entered. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives a RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, as described above. is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is raised to the +5V side by the resistor MR5, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, it is not an instruction to perform RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the operation signal whose logic becomes LOW is output to the preceding transistor. The voltage is input to the base terminal of PTR42 to turn off the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off. When the voltage applied is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor PR51, the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is cleared. It is judged to be an instruction.

Further, when the operation switch 954 is being operated, the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48, so that the logic becomes LOW. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 to turn off the transistor PTR44, thereby turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives a RAM clear signal whose logic is HI within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, as described above. is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and a RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, it is an instruction to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing Motor Drive Circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the payout motor drive circuit 952d is mainly composed of a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the +12V power line and the +5V power line, respectively, and +12V and +5V are applied, respectively, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is connected to the ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to a power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is designed to be The power supply output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 via the Zener diode PZD60, and is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 834. , and +12 V or +5 V is applied as a motor drive voltage to the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 via the Zener diode PZD 60 based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is supplied to the terminal and the tenth terminal, respectively, and also supplied to the dispensing motor 834 .

The drive ICPIC 60 has four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, 6th terminal and 7th terminal, are grounded (GND) respectively, and the base terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 is grounded. A payout motor drive signal is input to certain 1st, 5th, 8th and 12th terminals through resistors PR60 to PR63. The 2nd, 4th, 9th and 11th terminals that are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 are connected to the 1st, 5th, 8th and 12th terminals that are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, respectively. Correspondingly, when the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal, and 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively, the excitation signal A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 834, respectively. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the drive ICPIC60 via the resistors PR60 to PR63. Outputs are made to base terminals 1, 5, 8 and 12, respectively. These drive pulses are generated by switching exciting currents flowing through the phases (/B phase, B phase, A phase, and /A phase) of the payout motor 834 to rotate the payout motor 834 . When the driving pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) is interrupted by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 will be damaged. Therefore, as a protection, the Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to the front stage of the 3rd and 10th terminals, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. A circuit configuration that

[10-2-5. CR unit input/output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input/output circuit 952e for inputting/outputting various signals to/from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 71 will be described. The payout control board 951 receives the ball rental request signal BRDY and the one-time payout operation start request signal BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 as described above. , are supplied, and a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and ground LG generated from AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Through the terminal plate 869, there is an EXS signal that indicates the start or end of one payout operation, and a PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out balls is possible or not possible. and output As shown in FIG. 84, the input/output circuit for inputting/outputting these various signals and the like is mainly composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (which incorporate an infrared LED and a phototransistor).

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. A cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 . A resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned ON, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. Sometimes, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of PTR71. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71 and also electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR73, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR75 having one end electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is a non-inverting buffer. 80 through ICPIC80 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) without inverting it.). is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR70 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is not only electrically connected to the resistor PR72, but also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 931 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via a wiring (harness), one end of the power supply board 931 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR71 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71, and the signal is input to the power substrate 931 as a CR connection signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR71, PR74, and transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by turning on/off the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR70 and the switch circuit. It turns ON. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. be.

A circuit composed of resistors PR72, PR76 and transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on/off by turning on/off the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR71 and the switch circuit. It turns ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply substrate 931 through the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the power supply substrate 931. be.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the power supply substrate 931 through the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply substrate 931. be done.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. A resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. there is The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR78, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B) without inverting it.). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as the BRDY signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the BRDY signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6. FIG.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79. BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. A resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. there is The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR80, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80C) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is changed by turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC72, and the signal is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a as a BRQ signal.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is the same logic as the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6. FIG.

An EXS signal that tells that one payout operation has started or ended from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function. 952cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR82, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. A resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, while the photocoupler PIC73 is ON, +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a When the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded with the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the CR unit 6 through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 by a pull-up resistor PR83. is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. The ON/OFF of the photocoupler PIC73 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73, and the signal is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS whose logic is LOW becomes the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in controller. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. The resulting EXS is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 . Thus, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. It has the same logic.

A PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out rental balls from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is possible or impossible is sent via a resistor PR84 to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74. is entered in The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. A resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, while the photocoupler PIC74 is ON, +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a The photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF when the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded with the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the CR unit 6 through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR86. is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. The ON/OFF of the photocoupler PIC74 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74, and the signal is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in controller. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. The resulting PRDY is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 . Thus, the logic of the PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input/output signals to payout control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals input/output from input/output terminals of various input/output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be described.

As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 952a, receives serial data from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b as a main payment serial data reception signal. be done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal, which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the serial data to be sent to the main control board 1310 is sent as the payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. A payout serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb.

Each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a is connected to the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, payout power failure warning signal, door open signal, full tank signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection Signal 1, etc.), etc. are input, for example, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310, which informs the completion of normal reception of the above-described payer serial data reception signal, is sent via the payout control input circuit 952b. Also, detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, etc. shown in FIG. 70 are inputted via the payout control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and the EXS signal and the PRDY signal are output from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input/output circuit 952e, the voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the voltage switching signal is sent from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Alternatively, the payout motor drive signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the payout motor drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the payout motor 834 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition, for example, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function outputs a payout control output circuit 952ca with a payer ACK signal that informs the completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal, and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function outputs the payout control output circuit 952ca. Output the ACK signal to the main control board 1310, or output the drive signal of the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. For example, output to the error LED indicator 860b.

[10-3. Various input/output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input/output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[10-3-1. Various input/output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input/output signals with the main control board 1310 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(a), the payout control board 951 controls the above-described payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, etc. is output to the main control board 1310 . These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310. FIG.

On the other hand, the payout control board 951 provides, in addition to the above-described main payment serial data reception signal, main payment ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal), a main prize number information output signal, a 15 round big hit information output signal, And 2 rounds jackpot information output signal such as jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special design display information output signal, normal design display information output signal, information output signal during time saving, starting entrance winning information output signal etc. A game information signal, a payout blackout warning signal, and the like are input from the main control board 1310 . These input signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(b), in addition to the above-described outer end frame door open information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 balls. Jackpot information including a prize ball number information output signal, a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15 round big win information output signal and a 2 round big win information output signal from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Game information signals such as an output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving information output signal, and a start winning prize information output signal are output to the external terminal plate 784. do. These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 . In other words, two signals are output to the external terminal plate 784, the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and the prize ball number information output signal, and the main prize ball number from the main control board 1310 side is output. Information output signal, 15 rounds jackpot information output signal, 2nd round jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special pattern display information output signal, normal pattern display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, and starting entrance winning information Eight signals called output signals are output via (passing through) the payout control board 951 .

A signal output from the external terminal plate 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the games played by the players. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer outputs the number of jackpots with two rounds (2-round jackpot ) and the number of big wins with 15 rounds (the number of occurrences of 15-round big wins) is the sum of the number of big wins of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加For this reason, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of the 2-round big wins and the number of occurrences of the 15-land big wins from the total number of big wins. , it is not possible to grasp whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. A data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and some players refer to the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter to select whether or not to play the game. Some do.

However, the number of occurrences of the big win game state displayed on the data counter may actually be biased toward the number of occurrences of the two-round big win, so even if the player starts playing the game, only the two-round big wins occur. Sometimes the 15 round jackpot doesn't happen easily. In this way, the number of occurrences of the big win game state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but it may unnecessarily stir up the gambling spirit of the player.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by separately outputting the 15 round big win information output signal and the 2 round big win information output signal to the hall computer as the big win information output signal, the hall computer can output the number of occurrences of the 2 round big win, The number of 15-round big hits and the number of occurrences can be accurately grasped. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big wins actually occurring in the pachinko machine 1 is the 2-round big win or the 15-round big win, and the data counter stores 15 rounds. Since the number of occurrences of the big win and the number of occurrences of the 2nd round big win can be separately displayed or only the number of occurrences of the 15th round big win can be displayed as the number of occurrences of the big win game state, it is possible to stimulate the gambling spirit of the player more than necessary. do not have.

In the present embodiment, the 2-round big win information output signal is output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence of the 2-round big win to the end of the 2-round big win, and the 15-round big win information output signal is also output when the 15-round big win occurs. It is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the time it occurs to the time it ends. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round big win information output signal and the 15-round big win information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round big win occurs, the 2-round big win information output signal is output for a predetermined period. The 2-round big win information output signal and the 15-round big win information are output to the hall computer, and when a 15-round big win occurs, the 15-round big win information output signal is outputted to the hall computer for a predetermined period. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer only for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Arrangement of Output Terminals on External Terminal Board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 for outputting various signals to the hall computer installed in the game hall (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. The external terminal plate 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 600, and the rear side thereof is covered with an external terminal plate cover 786. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal plate.

As described above, the external terminal plate 784 outputs the outer end frame door open information output signal, the prize ball number information output signal, the main prize ball number information output signal, the 15 round big win information output signal, and the 2 round big win information output signal. When the jackpot information output signal, the probability fluctuation information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time saving information output signal, and the start opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, It outputs to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 .

Briefly describing these various signals, the outer end frame door open information output signal is not generated during a normal game when the player says that the door frame 3 and/or the body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 are open. This is a signal that conveys that a state has occurred, and the prize ball number information output signal is generated each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. The main prize number information output signal is the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the general winning holes 2001 and 2201, and the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal to inform that each time the number of game balls scheduled to be put out as prize balls based on the entered game balls reaches 10, and the 15-round big win information output signal is a 15-round big win. The 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 2-round jackpot is occurring, and the information output signal during probability fluctuation is a signal that a probability fluctuation occurs. The special symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the special symbol display information output signal is a special symbol display device 1403 or a second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is a signal that informs that the variable display is finished (stopped), and the normal symbol display information output signal is the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is a signal that tells that it is in a stopped state, the time saving medium information output signal is a signal that tells that a time saving state is occurring, and the start winning information output signal is the first start shown in FIG. Each time a game ball enters the port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, it is a signal to notify that effect.

As shown in FIG. 86, the output terminals PT1 to PT10 are horizontally arranged in a line on the external terminal plate 784 . The output terminal PT1 is colored white and outputs a prize number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that notifies each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. In the embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the number of prize balls information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer causes the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 to generate 10 prize balls each time the number of prize balls information output signal is input to the hall computer. It is possible to grasp that the game balls of the balls have been put out as prize balls, and to grasp the total number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of the put out game balls.

The output terminal PT2 is colored green and outputs an outer end frame door open information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door open information output signal indicates that the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and/or the body frame 4 are opened. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer controls the door frame 3 and the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is being input. / Or it can grasp that the main body frame 4 is opened.

The output terminal PT3 is colored gray and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal terminates (stops) the variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the end (stop) of the special symbol fluctuation display in the first special symbol indicator 1403 and the second special symbol indicator 1405 of the function display unit 1400 from the output terminal PT3 It is designed to be output for 0.128 seconds at times. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the special symbol display information output signal, the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variable display of special symbols has ended (stopped) on the display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and count the number of times to display the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. The total number of times the special symbols are variably displayed on the symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 can be grasped.

The output terminal PT4 is colored yellow and outputs a start winning prize information output signal. As described above, the starting hole winning information output signal is a signal that notifies each time a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 shown in FIG. , Every time a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the starting hole winning information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2002 of the pachinko machine 1 each time the starting hole winning information output signal is inputted. It is possible to grasp that the game ball has entered the starting hole 2004, count the number of times the starting hole winning prize information output signal is input, and send to the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls entered.

The output terminal PT5 is colored black and outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal. The 15-round jackpot information output signal is, as described above, a signal that indicates that a 15-round jackpot is occurring. It is designed to be output. When the 15-round big win information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer keeps the pachinko machine 1 generating 15-round big wins while the 15-round big win information output signal is being input. The state can be grasped, and the total number of occurrences of the 15-round big win in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the 15-round big win information output signal is input.

The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a 2-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 2-round big win information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 2-round big win is occurring. It is designed to be output. When the 2-round big win information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is inputted to the hall computer, the hall computer keeps the 2-round big win in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round big win information output signal is being inputted. The state can be grasped, and the total number of occurrences of the 2-round big win in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the 2-round big win information output signal is inputted.

The output terminal PT7 is colored blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. The normal symbol display information output signal, as described above, is a signal that informs that the variable display of normal symbols has ended (stopped) on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, it is designed to be output from the output terminal PT7 for 0.128 seconds at the end (stop) of the normal symbol fluctuation display on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. FIG. When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the normal symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. In 1402, it is possible to grasp that the variable display of normal symbols has ended (stopped), count the number of times, and display the total number of variable displays of normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. The number of times can be grasped.

The output terminal PT8 is colored red and outputs a time saving information output signal. As described above, the information output signal during time saving is a signal that conveys that the time saving state has occurred, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time saving state is occurring. ing. When the time saving information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer grasps that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state when the time saving information output signal is input. In addition, it is possible to grasp the total number of times that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state by counting the number of times that the information output signal during time saving is input.

The output terminal PT9 is colored orange and outputs a probability fluctuation information output signal. As described above, the information output signal during probability fluctuation is a signal that indicates that a probability fluctuation is occurring. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability fluctuation is input from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the information output signal during probability fluctuation, and the pachinko machine 1 is in a state where the probability fluctuation is occurring. In addition, it is possible to grasp the total number of occurrences of probability fluctuations in the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of times the probability fluctuation information output signal is input.

The output terminal PT10 is colored light blue and outputs a main prize number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal is input to various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal that notifies each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the played game balls reaches 10, and is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds in this embodiment. It has become so. When the main prize number information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the pachinko machine 1 outputs 10 prize balls each time the main prize number information output signal is input to the hall computer. It is possible to grasp that the game balls are scheduled to be put out as prize balls, and to grasp the total number of game balls to be put out by the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of the game balls to be put out. can do. It should be noted that game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on game balls that have entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and the big winning opening 2005 When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main prize number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize number information output signal is 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds x 2 times) seconds, It is designed to be output with an interval of 0.128 seconds as if it were one continuous signal.

Of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal plate 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, while the output terminals PT3 to PT10 output the main control board. Various signals output on the 1310 side are arranged to be output via (pass through) the payout control board 951 . The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are colored, respectively. By electrically connecting wirings having connectors colored in the same colors to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, respectively, it is possible to mistakenly connect other wirings. It is possible to prevent an unintended connection. Various signals output on the payout control board 951 side and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side are not mixed, and various signals output on the payout control board 951 side are transmitted to the hall computer. The output terminals PT1 and PT2 are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal plate 784, and the output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output from the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are arranged on the external terminal plate 784. By arranging them in a row from the center left side to the right side, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side It is possible to prevent erroneous electrical connection with the wiring for transmitting the signal to the hall computer.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main number of prize balls information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are respectively sent from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall. configured to communicate to a computer. This is because, for example, game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some trouble in the pachinko island equipment. When the number of game balls is running low, if a 15-round jackpot occurs in the pachinko machine 1 by chance, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out the game balls as prize balls is insufficient, so the game balls are paid out. (For example, if ball clogging or ball entanglement occurs in the payout device 830, game balls cannot be paid out unless this is resolved). Then, as described above, the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches ten. Since it is a signal to convey that every time, when the game ball cannot be paid out, the payout control board 951 outputs the winning ball number information output signal and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. become unable. When the game balls are not paid out, the player calls a hall clerk or the like. A hall clerk or the like checks, for example, a hose-shaped replenishment nozzle for supplying game balls from the pachinko island facility to the prize ball tank 720 to identify the position of the clogged ball (or, for example, to Then, by specifying the position of the clogged ball or the position of the jammed ball and solving it, the game ball will be returned to the state of being paid out.

However, since the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress even when the hall clerk or the like is proceeding with the work, the game balls are paid out by the work of the hall clerk or the like after the jackpot of 15 rounds is completed. When the state is restored, the payout control board 951 will pay out the game balls that have not been paid out one after another, and the payout control board 951 is at the time when the 15 round big win is completed and the 15 round big win has not occurred. Every time the number of game balls actually put out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10, it outputs a prize number information output signal to notify that effect and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784. It will happen. As a result, an extremely large number of game balls are put out even though the 15-round jackpot has not yet occurred. , there arises a problem that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between .

Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 951 and the prize balls are actually paid out, that is, the payout control board 951 outputs the prize ball number information output signal. As a signal of the main control board 1310, the game ball that entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. Each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, a main prize number information output signal is output as a signal to that effect, and the payout control board 951 and the external terminal plate 784 are output. A system was adopted in which the information is transmitted to the hall computer via the system. As a result, even if the above-described troubles (ball clogging in the replenishment nozzle, etc., ball clogging or ball jamming in the payout device 830) occur, the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout in this game state The relationship between the number of game balls to be put out and the relationship can be accurately transmitted to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls to be paid out in the game state.

[12. Circuit of effect display drive board]
Next, the circuit of the effect display drive board 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and housed in the plate unit 320. The liquid crystal module circuit 450V for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured. FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. Liquid crystal module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 87, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 is mainly composed of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is a serial signal (serial data) by a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. are sent as a plus signal and a minus signal, they are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively, and the positive signal and the negative signal are input by the common mode choke coil SDL0. Noise can be separated from negative signals. The noise-separated plus signal and minus signal are input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. This resistor SDR0 is a termination resistor (terminator), which prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively, thereby preventing disturbance of the serial signal.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 outputs three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, and It restores to three synchronizing signals, a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal (that is, restores to a parallel signal before being serialized). Although the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source are each 8 bits, as described above, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal are , the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V receives serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. Two signals obtained by differentiating certain LOCKN signal output request data into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510 are also inputted. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits two signals that are differentially differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e. On the other hand, when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured so that the circuit is connected so as to As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. , is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the two differential signals of the positive signal and the negative signal are not input to the motion circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A signal output from the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. is transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V.

The forced switching circuit 1512f changes the signal output from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the door-frame From the transmitter IC 1512d for side effect, the serial signal (serial data) by THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential method is used as a positive signal and a negative signal, and from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. 868, and through the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, it is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN+ terminal and RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e. When two signals differentially converted into a plus signal and a minus signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, these two signals are It is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. Door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 judges that it is a LOCKN signal output request when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in differential circuit 1512e are input, A LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 . This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 .

As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is used to produce the startup screen on the game board side when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. During the period during which the display is displayed on the display device 1600, or during the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is in the customer waiting state and the demonstration is being performed, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display In order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460 is operated. This is sent as an operation confirmation request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in this embodiment is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, THine Electronics Co., Ltd. The data format is completely different from the company's "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential serial signal (serial data). Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 judges that the signal is not output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, and an abnormal event occurs. Assuming that it is data, a LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal, which will be described later. In other words, in this embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, by utilizing the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 to output the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to forcibly output LOCKN signal output request data having a structure different from the data format of the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 By outputting it, it is possible to confirm whether or not the device called ICSDIC0 for door frame side effect receiver is operating normally. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDSVDD terminal, PLLVDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are each supplied with +3.3 V generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDSGND application form, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminals of the frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are grounded.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GND terminal that serves as the ground for this digital circuit, and the +3.3 V power supply is supplied to the VDD terminal. It removes high frequency noise from the line.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GNDO terminal that serves as the ground for this TTL output. It removes high frequency noise from the +3.3V power supply line.

The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal that serves as the ground for this LVDS input, and is supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal. It removes high frequency noise from the +3.3V power supply line.

The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal that serves as the ground for this PLL circuit, and the power is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power supply line.

When +3.3 V is supplied (applied) to the PDWN terminal, the logic becomes HI, indicating normal operation. It is a terminal to transmit. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3V via a resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of a varistor SDZ0, one end of which is grounded. This varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltages on the +3.3V electrical line supplied through resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal transmits various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later. (logic transitions from LOW to HI) or falling edge (logic transitions from HI to LOW). As shown, the falling edge is designated by grounding the EDGE terminal. By the way, if the EDGE terminal is connected to +3.3V, a rising edge can be specified.

The OE terminal instructs whether or not to permit output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals, D0 to D17 terminals, and CLKOUT terminal) to be described later. As described above, by grounding the OE terminal, the output is always enabled. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to +3.3V, it will be in a state where it cannot be output.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both of them. Operation modes include a normal mode and a handshake mode. In normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signals) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal are generated based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. and three synchronous signals (3-bit synchronous signals) of a horizontal synchronous signal, a vertical synchronous signal, and a clock signal. be. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is connected. In this mode, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). This shake hand mode is automatically switched.

For example, three video signals (18-bit video signals) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, For some reason, the parallel signal restored by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is abnormal. When it is difficult to draw such data on the door frame side effect display device 460, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode, and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the damping resistor SDR2, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and controls the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510 . The peripheral control MPU 1511a sends a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door-frame-side performance transmitter IC 1512d in order to inform the door-frame-side performance transmitter IC 1512d of the establishment of a predetermined condition based on the input LOCKN signal. to output When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is connected to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the door frame side presentation drive board 4450 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Send to receiver IC SDIC0. When such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is received by the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. The INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door A direct electrical connection may be made via the relay terminal plate 882 .

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is a terminal for outputting a request to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the terminals. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistance SDR2, which is the damping resistor of the performance display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510 .

The SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals output three synchronizing signals, a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. terminal. In this embodiment, the SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals are unconnected terminals because the restored three synchronizing signals of the horizontal synchronizing signal, the vertical synchronizing signal, and the clock signal are not used.

The DE terminal outputs a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and a DE signal that indicates whether the data output from the D0 to D17 terminals, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid. A DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via a resistor SDR3, which is a damping resistor.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit incorporated in the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4, which is a damping resistor.

The D0 to D17 terminals receive three video signals (18 This is a data output terminal for outputting a 1-bit video signal). Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D0 to D5 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. They are respectively input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA0. Green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. They are respectively input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA1. The red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and the signal lines of the red video signals R0 to R5 are damping resistors. They are respectively input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA2.

The peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to the same ground. It's becoming

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, FIG. 89 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and FIG. is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a table showing an example of various commands received by the main control board from the payout control board. First, the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, will be described, followed by various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and received by the main control board. Various commands from the payout control board will be explained.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. When the signal is input, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicate with the pachinko machine 1 and drive the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 which are storage trays (a machine that pays out game balls as rental balls) is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is called a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 88(a), the main control board Command 10H to command 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared as prize ball commands to be transmitted from 1310 to the payout control board 951. Command 10H designates one prize ball, and command 11H. , 2 prize balls are specified, and 15 prize balls are specified in the command 1EH. The payout control board 951 controls to drive the payout motor 834 and pay out game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322, which are storage trays, as rental balls) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall). 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is called a "general machine"), as shown in FIG. Commands 20H to 2EH are prepared as the prize ball commands to be sent to , command 20H designates one prize ball, command 21H designates two prize balls, and command 2EH designates a prize ball. 15 spheres are specified. The payout control board 951 controls to drive the payout motor 834 and pay out game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 88(c), and this command 30H designates a self-check. If an ACK signal output from the receiving side as confirmation of receipt of the command is not input for a predetermined period after the command is transmitted, the transmitting side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input. Check connection status. In the case of the CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 951 checks the connection state with the CR unit 6 .

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and a mode showing variations of effects having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

Various commands, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, are related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, special figure 2 synchronization effect related, jackpot related, power on, normal figure synchronization effect related, normal electric role effect related, notification display, status classified into display and others.

[13-2-1. Special figure 1 synchronization production related]
The special figure 1 synchronization effect relation is based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. Consists of commands named special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronization effect end, and state designation at the time of fluctuation. These various commands are assigned a status of "A*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 1 synchronization production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the special pattern 1 specification command specifies loss, specific jackpot, and non-specific jackpot. , Special figure 1 synchronization production end command is intended to indicate the end of special figure 1 synchronization production, state designation command at the time of fluctuation indicates probability and time saving state. In the probability and time saving state, a low probability time saving state that indicates that it is a low probability state and a time saving state, a high probability state that indicates that it is a time saving state, and a low probability It consists of a low probability non-time saving state that indicates that it is a state and not a time saving state, and a high probability non-time saving state that indicates that it is a high probability state and not a time saving state (as a normal game state, A low probability non-time saving state is set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of hitting the jackpot is set higher than the low probability state (normal game state), and the time saving state is, for example, normal by the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. By shortening the time during which patterns are variably displayed compared to a non-time-saving state (normal game state) and stop-displaying with a light emitting pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result, the ordinary lottery result by the ordinary lottery described later in a predetermined time is obtained. The number of times of stop display is increased compared to the non-time saving state, and the period for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 is increased compared to the non-time saving state (normal game state). By increasing the acceptance rate (entrance rate) of the game ball to the second start port 2004 shown, the state that it is possible to obtain a special symbol lottery opportunity without reducing the number of balls (in other words, compared to the non-time saving state , by increasing the number of determinations as to whether or not to open/close the pair of movable pieces, and by lengthening the period of the opening/closing operation of the pair of movable pieces when opening/closing the pair of movable pieces. It is a state of increasing the acceptance rate (entrance rate) of game balls to.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization production start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol 1 synchronization production start, Special figure 1 synchronization The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation is transmitted immediately after the special symbol win-loss information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

[13-2-2. Special Figure 2 Synchronization Production Related]
The special figure 2 synchronization effect related is based on the detection signal from the second start opening sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. It consists of a command named special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end regarding the second special symbol display device 1405 of. These various commands are assigned a status of "B*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 2 synchronization production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the special pattern 2 specification command specifies loss, specific jackpot, and non-specific jackpot. , The end of the special figure 2 synchronization production is intended to instruct the end of the special figure 2 synchronization production.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special figure 2 tuning The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 89, the section related to big win includes big win opening, big win 1 open Nth time display, big win 1 closed display, big win 1 count display, big win ending, big win pattern display, small win opening. , small-hit open display, small-hit count display, and small-hit ending commands. These various commands are assigned a status of "C*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command instructs the start of jackpot opening. During or start of opening of the N-th round of the large winning opening 2005), the large winning opening 1 closed display command is the start of the closing of the large winning opening 1 between rounds (large opening of the starting opening unit 2100). The command for displaying the number of game balls from 0 to 10 (count 0 to 10) indicates that the winning opening 2005 is being closed or has started closing between rounds (shown in FIG. 69). The number of game balls entering the big winning hole 2005 detected by the count sensor 4005) is transmitted, the big winning ending command instructs the start of the big winning ending, and the big winning pattern display command is a big winning symbol display command. It instructs the display of pattern information.

In addition, the small hit opening command instructs the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is the start of the small hit opening (during the opening of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting unit 2100 at the time of the small hit or opening start), and the small hit count display command is a small hit middle and big winning opening winning effect (when a game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 during a small hit is detected by the count sensor , and the small-hit ending command instructs the start of the small-hit ending.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is sent at the start of the jackpot opening, and the big win opening 1 Nth display command is when the big win 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (of the starter unit 2100 When the large winning opening 2005 is opened for the Nth round), the large winning opening 1 closed display command is transmitted when the large winning opening 1 is closed (start closing of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100), The large winning opening 1 count display command is used when the large winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large winning opening 1 (when opening the large winning opening 2005 of the starter unit 2100 and when the game ball entering the large winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005), the jackpot ending command is sent when the jackpot ending starts, and the jackpot pattern display command is sent when the big win opening is opened (when the big win opening 2005 of the starter unit 2100 is opened) ).

In addition, the small winning opening command is transmitted at the start of the small winning opening, and the small winning opening display command is transmitted at the time of opening the small winning (at the time of opening the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 at the time of the small winning), The small hit count display command is transmitted when the small hit middle and large winning opening is won (when the game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during the small winning), and the small winning ending command is , Sent at the start of the small winning ending. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 89, the power-on category is composed of a command named Power-on State and Main Control Return Destination at Power-on. These various commands are assigned a status of "D*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. When the power is turned on, the state command of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. Information that instructs when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, as well as when the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure). .) In the above-mentioned, low probability short working hours state, high probability short working hours state, low probability non-short working hours state, and high probability non short working hours state information that indicates whether to return in any state (probability and short working hours state) , and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of this pachinko machine, for example, when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, which work belongs to which copyright, what kind of game specifications (for example, probability fluctuation occurs) In addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times) (so-called ST machine), etc.). In other words, the information on the model code of a pachinko machine consists of a series code for specifying which type of machine type is the max type, middle type, or sweet digital type, and a series code for specifying the copyright of the work. and the game specification (for example, when a probability change occurs, the game specification that the state will continue until the next big hit game state occurs, in addition to the probability change in a state where the number of special symbol fluctuations is limited and a game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.) that causes

The main control return destination command at power-on instructs the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the drive state of the starter solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69 and information instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. ing.

As for the transmission timing of the power-on state command and the main control recovery target command at power-on, when the main control board power is turned on ) is sent to Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when recovering from a power failure or momentary power failure, the main control side power on time processing described later is executed and the peripheral control board command of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing is executed. In the transmission process, a power-on status command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. Related to Futsuzu Synchronization Production]
The general pattern synchronization production relation is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. Consists of commands with the names of normal pattern synchronization production start, normal pattern designation, general pattern synchronization production end, and change state designation regarding the device 1402. These various commands are assigned a status of "E*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal pattern synchronization production start command instructs the start of the general pattern synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the general pattern specification command specifies a loss, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronous production end command indicates the end of the normal figure synchronous production, and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation indicates the probability and the time saving state. In the probability and time saving state, as described above, a low probability time saving state indicating that it is a low probability state and a time saving state, and a high probability state indicating that it is a time saving state High probability time saving state It consists of a state, a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a low-probability state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state (usually As a game state, a low probability non-time saving state is set).

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the general pattern synchronization production start command is sent at the start of normal pattern 1 fluctuation, the general pattern designation command is sent immediately after the general pattern synchronization production start, and the general pattern synchronization production end command is , It is transmitted when the normal pattern fluctuation time elapses (when the normal pattern is determined), and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation is transmitted immediately after the normal pattern win-loss information is designated. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
8, which are opened and closed by driving the starting solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. It consists of commands named hit opening, general electric open display, and general drawing ending. These various commands are assigned a status of "F*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The general pattern opening command is for instructing the start of the general pattern opening, and the general pattern open display command indicates that the general pattern is open during start (a pair of movable pieces are opened in the left and right direction by driving the starting port solenoid 2107 state, or when expanding), and the ending command per normal pattern instructs the start of ending per normal pattern.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per general pattern is transmitted at the start of opening per general pattern, and the general electrical opening display command is transmitted when the general electrical opening (a pair of movable When spreading in the direction), the ending command per normal pattern is sent at the start of the ending per normal pattern. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the classification of the notification display consists of commands named Winning Abnormal Display, Connection Abnormal Display, Disconnection/Short Circuit Abnormal Display, Magnetic Detection Switch Abnormal Display, Door Open, and Door Close. These various commands are assigned a status of "6*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command is issued when the game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 of the starter unit 2100 when the big winning hole is entered except during the big win (when the condition device is in operation). is detected by the count sensor 4005). It instructs the start of connection abnormality notification when there is a connection abnormality. 4005 or the like, it instructs the start of disconnection/short-circuit abnormality display. It instructs the start of the magnetism detection switch abnormality notification when a

Further, the door opening command is based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. In the open state, the door frame closing command instructs the door open notification, and the door frame closing command causes the door frame 3 to close with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 . When it is in the state of being opened, the end of the door open notification is instructed. On the other hand, the body frame open command is shown in FIG. When the body frame is in the open state, the body frame closing command instructs the body frame open notification. It instructs the end of the notification of the opening of the body frame when the door is in the closed state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a large winning opening other than during the jackpot (during operation of the condition device), and the connection abnormality display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 When there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 at the time of command transmission to The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. Further, the door open command is transmitted when door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in a state of being opened with respect to the body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618), and the door is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618). The main body frame open command is transmitted when the main body frame opening is detected (when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619), and the main body is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when the body frame closing is detected (when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame open switch 619). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the state display is divided into commands named frame state 1 command (corresponding to the error occurrence command), error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the error cancellation command), and frame state 2 command. there is These various commands are assigned a status of "7*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands each having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, and detailed descriptions thereof will be given later. . When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. Along with setting the status, the received command is set as the mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, the additional information "7*H" is added to these received commands. is formatted into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted frame state 1 command is transmitted when power is restored, when the frame state changes, and during error cancellation navigation, the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted when power is restored. , and when the frame state changes. Note that these formatted frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-9. test related]
As shown in FIG. 90, the test-related section consists of various commands named test. This test command is assigned a status of "8*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various tests of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame decoration board shown in FIG. 72). This is for inspecting various substrates such as the driving amplifier substrate 194).

As for the transmission timing of the test command, it is transmitted at times other than the RAM clear when the main control board power is turned on and the RAM clear. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when recovering from a power failure or momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described later is performed. A test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-10. others]
As shown in FIG. 90, the other divisions include start-up winning, variable reduction operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect, and It consists of a command named special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect. These various commands are assigned a status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The starting opening winning command is for instructing the start of starting opening winning effect, and when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, the starting of the effect , and the start of the effect when the game ball enters the second starting hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting hole sensor 4004, respectively. The high-probability end designation command instructs the state transition from the high-probability state to the low-probability state, and the special symbol 1 storage command. is still used for variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 1403 of the function display unit 1400 when the game ball enters the first start port 2002 shown in FIG. The number of balls that have not been held (number of reservations)), and the special design 2 storage command is 0 to 4 special design 2 reservations (the game ball enters the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 8) The second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls (number of reservations) that has not yet been used for the variable display of special symbols, and the normal symbol storage command is normal symbol 1 reservation 0 to 4 It conveys the number of balls (the number of balls that have not yet been used for variable display of normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 1402 of the function display unit 1400 after passing through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 (holding number)). There is, and the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command is read ahead before the special symbol 1 reservation is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 1403 of the function display unit 1400 It is intended to instruct the start of the look-ahead effect to notify the advance notice of the display result by the first special symbol display device 1403 based on, the special symbol 2 storage look-ahead effect command is the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is the special symbol 2 hold Before being used for the variable display of special symbols in the device 1405, it prefetches and instructs the start of the prefetching performance to announce the advance notice of the display result by the second special symbol display device 1405 based on the special symbol 2 reservation.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting entrance winning command is issued at the time of starting entrance winning (when the game ball enters the first starting entrance 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting entrance sensor 4002, or when the game ball enters the second When the game ball enters the second starting hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the starting hole sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The command to specify the end of the fluctuation reduction operation is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is fixed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been completed (after the stop period has passed), and the high-probability end designation command is , In the case of "high probability N times", it is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the high probability number of times has been digested (after the stop period has passed), and the special symbol 1 storage command is the special symbol 1 operation pending ball number change When the game ball enters the first start port 2002 and the first special symbol display device 1403 of the function display unit 1400 has a reserved number that is not yet used for variable display of special symbols, further the first start When the game ball enters the mouth 2002 and the number of reservations increases, or when the number of reservations decreases by using the first special symbol display device 1403 for variable display of special symbols from the number of reservations). , The special symbol 2 storage command is used when the number of special symbol 2 operation pending balls changes (a game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 changes the special symbol. In a state where there is a reserved number that has not been used yet, when the game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the reserved number increases, or from the reserved number, the second special pattern display 1405 fluctuates the special design. used for display and the number of reservations has decreased), and the normal design memory command is transmitted when the number of normal design 1 operation reservation balls changes (the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and the normal design of the function display unit 1400 In a state where there is a reserved number that has not yet been used for variable display of normal symbols on the display device 1402, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and the reserved number increases, or from the reserved number, the normal symbol display device 1402 is displayed. ), and the special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect command is sent when the number of reserved balls has decreased by using it for variable display of normal symbols, and when the number of special symbol 1 operation reserved balls increases (the game ball is in the first start port 2002 When the number of reserved balls has increased by entering a ball), the special symbol 2 memory prefetch effect command is sent when the number of reserved balls in special pattern 2 operation increases (a game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the number of reserved balls increases increased). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is issued when the starting opening wins (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, or when the second starting opening When the game ball enters the second start port 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 4004, the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 mainly send voice to notify that effect. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in 72 uses the start-up winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is designed to be used not only to notify by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 but also to monitor the presence or absence of fraud. On the other hand, in some other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start-up winning command, and the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 do not give voice notification.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 91, various commands from the payout control board 951 are divided into commands named frame state 1, error cancellation navigation, and frame state 2. Frame state 1, error cancellation navigation, and The order of priority is set in the order of frame state 2.

The frame state 1 command (equivalent to the error occurrence command) is prepared for ball out, full tank, stock of 50 or more, connection error and CR unconnected, and bit 0 (B0, "B" represents a bit.) is set to 1, bit 1 (B1) is set to 1 when the tank is full, bit 2 (B2) is set to 1 when 50 or more stocks are in stock, and connection failure A value of 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and a value of 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when CR is not connected. Bits 5 (B5) through 7 (B7) of the Frame State 1 command have a value of 1 in B5, a value of 0 in B6, and a value of 0 in B7.

The error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to the error cancellation command) is prepared for ball catching, payout detection sensor error, and retry error. An error sets bit 3 (B3) to the value 1, and a retry error sets the value 1 to bit 4 (B4). Here, the "payout detection sensor error" indicates whether or not the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 is malfunctioning. A "retry error" indicates that an inconsistent game ball was repeatedly put out by a retry operation. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have value 0 for B0, value 0 for B1, value 0 for B5, value 1 for B6, A value of 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command is provided with "draw ball", and bit 0 (B0) is set to "1" during ball draw. Bits 1 (B1) through 7 (B7) of the Frame State 2 command have a value of 0 in B1, a value of 0 in B2, a value of 0 in B3, a value of 0 in B4, a value of 1 in B5, a value of 1 in B6, and A value of 0 is set in B7.

As transmission timings for these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at power restoration, frame state change, and error cancellation navigation, the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted at the time of error cancellation navigation. is sent when power is restored and when frame status changes. Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

[14. Various control processing of the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG. FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing an example of main control side power-on processing, FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 92, and FIG. 94 is an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart showing. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on processing, and the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a random number for judging a big hit for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state, and a reach (reach loss) when not generating a big hit game state. Reach determination random number for use in determination, shown in FIG. 69, the variation for use in determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol that is variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405 A random number for a display pattern, a random number for a jackpot pattern to be used for determining a jackpot pattern derived and displayed by a first special pattern display device 1403 and a second special pattern display device 1405 when a jackpot game state is generated, and the jackpot pattern. A random number for determination of the initial value of the jackpot symbol for use in determining the initial value of the random number for the symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405 when generating the small winning game state. A small-hit symbol random number for use in determining a small-hit symbol and a small-hit symbol initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of the small-hit symbol random number are prepared. In addition to these random numbers, the normal symbol hit determination random number used to determine whether or not to open and close the movable piece shown in FIG. Random numbers for determining the initial value for determination of the normal symbol hit, and random numbers for the normal symbol variation display pattern for use in determining the variation display pattern of the normal symbols variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 1402 shown in FIG. prepared.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the big hit determination random numbers are updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the big hit judging random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control internal hardware random number circuit 1310an incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first receives a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a with a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. (a clock signal output from the main controlled crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeats such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determining a normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The random number for determining the initial value for normal pattern hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number. .

In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. The game information stored in the main control built-in RAM is regarded as a numerical value, and the checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the total is stored in the main control side power failure processing (power failure). When the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared, such as when it does not match the checksum value (sum value), the random number for determining the initial value for determining per normal symbol is the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. extracts the ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM, and performs initial value derivation processing that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol per judgment based on this extracted ID code. It is a mechanism that executes and sets this derived fixed value. In other words, the initial value determining random number for determining a normal winning pattern is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. In this way, the value set to the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal per symbol is derived using the ID code, and is incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure is that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if the ID code is stored in the external device, and the initial value derivation process is executed when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. A second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on .

Here, the advantage of taking out the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the taken out ID code as the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal per symbol will be described. For example, a person who illegally acquires game balls to be paid out as prize balls obtains the game board 5 by some means, disassembles it, and uses the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter for illegally obtaining and updating the random number for normal pattern hit determination coincides with the normal pattern hit determination value, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a' provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value is completely different from that of the obtained game board 5'. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in the other game board 5', that is, in the other pachinko machine 1', so it is disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece shown in FIG. A game state in which a game ball can be received into the starting port 2004 cannot be generated.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1310a is circuit-configured such that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

92 and 93, the main control program described above performs main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. FIG. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, it is possible to update the main control built-in RAM (game storage section).

Following step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S12). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as " A timer setting value is set in the WDT control register), the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated, and timing is started until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated, the main control built-in WDT 1310af starts clocking, and the watch dog timer clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a ( hereinafter referred to as "WDT clear register"), the main control built-in WDT 1310af forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when the WDT 1310af with built-in main control is activated and time measurement is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and clocking is restarted. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the clocking. It is possible to monitor whether or not

Following step S12, the main control program performs power failure clear processing (step S14). In this power clearing process, first, output of a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 78 is started. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is composed of a comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. A comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares +24V with a reference voltage or +12V with a reference voltage, and outputs the comparison results. The result of this comparison is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, with logic HI when no power failure or momentary power failure has occurred. Its logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

In the power clearing process, first, by starting to output a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, the output of the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is started. This power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, through the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, with the logic being LOW from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. It is possible to invert and output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and to monitor the signal from the 1Q terminal.

Subsequently, in the power clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs (phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes smaller than the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input as a power failure forecast from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until it rises to the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). It is Determination of whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, as the power failure warning signal.

If the power failure warning signal is not input even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage after the power is turned on and becomes stable, the main control program outputs the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the power failure clear signal is sent from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the logic HI, and passes through the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC. is entered in As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the latch state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 latches the state in which the logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, it outputs a power failure warning signal from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal.

Following step S14, the main control program makes it possible to execute RAM clear processing for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) for a predetermined time after the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on). operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) based on the operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 to the main control MPU 1310a. This is done depending on whether or not the Based on the logic value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, it is not an instruction to perform RAM clear, and the operation switch 954 is operated. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the operation switch 954 is being operated by judging that the RAM clear is instructed.

In step S16, the main control program sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when the operation switch 954 is operated (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. State (game control side power-on operation control means). The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG mentioned above indicates whether or not to erase game information related to games such as probability fluctuations and unpaid prize balls stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. It is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased, and set to a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system for performing drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. do). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting.

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage drops below the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure forecast. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure warning signal. When it is determined in step S24 that there is an input of the power failure warning signal, the main control program returns to the determination of step S24 and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared to restart the clocking. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. After that, the main control program, under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, performs the main control side power-on processing again. A detailed description of the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22 will be given later.

When it is determined in step S24 that there is no power failure warning signal input, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased, and is set to a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S28, the main control program compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (at power-off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). If they match, the main control program determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores and retains game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power failure processing described later. It is set to a value of 1 when the main-control-side power-off process has been completed normally, and set to a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process has not been completed normally. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed. , will be described later.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main-control-side power-off process is normally terminated, the main control program sets the work area of the main-control built-in RAM as when the power is restored ( step S34). For this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game information is read out from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to this game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. "Restoration of power" refers to the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and fraudulent means (e.g. A high frequency from a hidden high frequency output device) is irradiated to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a itself resets and then returns.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, the checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed as a result of the subsequent various processes being performed. If FLG is not set to 1, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as will be described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S26, that is, when game information is erased, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S30 , or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power failure processing is not normally completed, the main control program writes all of the main control built-in RAM. Clear the area (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by the input of the detection signal associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program writes the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as the initial value. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a executes processing when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 instructs RAM clearing and the game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is cut off. When not completed normally, the unique ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and based on this taken out ID code, the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for normal design per judgment Perform an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from, and this fixed value is set to the normal symbol per determination initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of the normal per symbol determination random number described above. do.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the working area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is carried out by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built in the main control MPU 1310a (for example, serial input/output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 951, serial input/output ports for the peripheral control board 1510 (reception channel and transmission channel ), the transmission serial port prescaler is set for the communication speed and the presence or absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is set for initialization of the transmission circuit and transmission permission.

Following step S44, the main control program initializes the test signal output port (step S46). Here, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various test information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on in the game machine testing facility.

Following step S46, the main control program performs activation setting of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69 (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a hardware random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a for updating the jackpot determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state by hardware In addition to setting the hardware random number setting register to activate the hard random number circuit 1310an incorporated in the main control. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, a high-speed predetermined clock signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a (a clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77). Other values within the numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and when all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another without duplication. When acquiring a random number (random value) from the main control internal hard random number circuit 1310an, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control internal hard random number circuit 1310an. The random number (random value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is obtained from the built-in hard random number latch register of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the obtained random number as a big hit determination random number.

Following step S48, the main control program sets a reservation for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, in order to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored), the A power-on state command and a main control return destination command at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, even if the game information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this game information are stored. be. In such a case, after completion of transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted. These commands are transmitted in main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. A detailed description of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be given later.

Following step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period set at step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control program issues an error cancellation navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, when the main control side main processing is started. Execution of game control side RAM clear processing triggered by receipt will be regulated (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing based on the concept of time sharing to use the detection signal input in accordance with the operation of the operation switch 954 as an error cancellation navigation command for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. Triggered by the input, RAM clear processing is executed (game control side power-on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, even if there is an input of the error cancellation navigation command, the execution of RAM clear processing is regulated ( Game control side normal operation control means), handled as a release switch for releasing the error notification accompanying the error that occurred. In other words, the operation switch 954 (error canceling unit), which was originally supposed to be used to cancel an error that occurred in the payout operation, is replaced as a game memory unit for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. Main control built-in RAM (and payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit to be described later) function as an operation unit for executing RAM clear processing for starting initialization, or after the predetermined time has elapsed, the game It can be made to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred regarding the ball dispensing operation.

Next, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage drops below the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure forecast. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

When there is no power failure warning signal input in step S54, the main control program performs non-hit-lose random number update processing (step S56). In this non-hit-lose random number update process, the above-described ready-to-win determination random numbers, variable display pattern random numbers, big-hit symbol initial value determination random numbers, small-hit symbol initial value determination random numbers, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-hit-lose random number update process, software updates the random numbers that are not related to the hit-lose determination (big hit determination). Incidentally, the above-described random number for normal symbol hit determination, random number for normal symbol hit determination initial value determination, normal symbol variation display pattern random number, etc. are also updated by this non-hit-lose random number update process.

After step S56, the process returns to step S54, and the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processing of steps S54 to S56 is called "main control side main processing".

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, preventing writing to the main control built-in RAM and protecting the game information from being rewritten.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting to output the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S14 is performed. Thereby, the main control program can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S60, the main control program is shown in FIG. , The drive signal output to the second special pending number display 1406, normal symbol display 1402, normal symbol memory display 1188, state display 1401, round display 1407, etc. is stopped (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control program sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). By setting the RAM access prohibition, access to the main control built-in RAM (game storage section) becomes impossible, so that updating of the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage section) can be prevented.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the clocking starts again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. After that, the main control program, under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, performs the main control side power-on processing again. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power failure processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure.

In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control internal RAM is normal. are inspecting. By double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM in this way, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information has been stored by fraud.

Here, it will be described that the determination of the presence/absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 following the wait time standby processing in step S22, and the subsequent processing proceeds. I will explain the problems in

The VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, charges the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. The charge is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power failure or momentary power failure occurs. In other words, even if the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the power from the pachinko island facility will be restored by applying +5V charge charged to the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2. The main control side power interruption process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the interruption. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when a main control-side main process or a main-control-side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the pachinko island facility is interrupted. When the power is cut off, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power cut-off processing.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, during the wait time standby process of step S22 when power is restored, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. A waiting time (boot timer: in this embodiment, 2.5 seconds is set) until the system that controls drawing of the device 460 starts to count, and immediately before reaching the waiting time. If an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the charge charged in hardware such as the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, but within a period of about 7 ms, step S42 , and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, so that the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed, and even if the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side It may not be possible to complete the main control side power-off processing in the power-on processing. Therefore, the main control side power-on processing is started when the power is restored again without storing the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, when the power is restored this time, the main control side power-on processing is started, and the wait time standby processing of step S22 is completed without occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or power failure. and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, when power is restored, the operation switch 954 is operated by the hall clerk or the like, and even if the hall clerk or the like does not express the intention of clearing the RAM, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared). ).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24, the determination of step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared to restart the clocking. is disabled, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Before performing the wait time waiting process of step S22, although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, even if RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step When it is determined by the determination of step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information from being updated, so that the calculation result of the checksum does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation and stored value in step S64 match. Therefore, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure from being initialized.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, step S22 When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is progressing the game, the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is supplied with power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the processing of steps S58 to S68 and the processing at the time of power failure on the main control side composed of an infinite loop, the main control MPU 1310a When the control MPU 1310a is restarted, the control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the checksum calculation and stored value in step S64). Since the judgment is made, the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM and held immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by restoring the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

Furthermore, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control built-in WDT 1310af causes the main control MPU 1310a to forcibly reset the contents of the main control built-in RAM. On the other hand, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has not been input in step S24, the power failure warning signal has not been input. As a result, the main control side power failure processing can be reliably completed within the "power supply securing period for momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by hardware. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure while the main control side power-on processing is being performed at the time of power restoration, the main control MPU 1310a The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal, as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power failure processing cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed. In step 24 immediately after, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal is input. When the power failure warning signal is input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, step S24 is performed. By repeating the determination, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and restarted. When the timer cannot be started, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. By forcibly resetting the main control MPU 1310a by the main control built-in WDT 1310af by such software, steps after step S24 (specifically, interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then step S52 It is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) from being updated by preventing the progress to the control flow of setting interrupt permission and starting the main control side timer interrupt processing described later). adopted the mechanism. In this way, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the part provided by software so that the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM will not be changed at all, and the power supply on the main control side The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are covered by hardware so that the interruption process is surely completed and the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all. game information) can be reliably prevented from being changed.

Next, a description will be given of the fact that a command to be transmitted at power-on is reserved in step S50. In step S50, as described above, power is turned on (power restored) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In order to convey this, a power-on state command and a main control return destination command at power-on shown in FIG. As described above, this main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the drive state of the starter solenoid 2107 and information instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. there is Here, first, when the main control return destination command at power-on does not include the information instructing the drive state of the starter solenoid 2107 and the information instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. , that is, the problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is not performed in step S50.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big win game state screen (for example, the big win game effect screen) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. drives the attacker solenoid 2108 to open the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, by restoring the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred, the attacker Driving of the solenoid 2108 is started, and the state in which the large prize winning port 2005 is closed by the opening/closing member 2107 is shifted to the state in which it is opened.

However, if an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 generates a jackpot game state as a game state, an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from, the screen can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state and can be returned. It is not possible to display at all which round the jackpot game state is. That is, for example, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the game ball that entered the big winning hole 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, what round) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacker solenoid 2108 and the large winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member 2107 when, for example, the four rounds (fourth round) of the jackpot game state are finished. Peripheral control from the main control board 1310 of the large prize winning port 1 closed display command instructing the transition from the closed state to the closed state (that is, the start of closing between the rounds of the large winning port 2005 of the starting port unit 2100) When the information is transmitted to the board 1510 and the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening/closing member 2107. A 5th big winning gate opening display command for instructing the transition from the state to the open state (that is, the start of opening the 5th round of the big winning gate 2005) is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. do. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of the start of the 5th round of the jackpot game state from the screen corresponding to the probability and time saving state described above, and displays it in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. becomes.

In addition, for example, a screen that informs the player that the game state is such that the game ball can be accepted into the second start port 2004 and that the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, a screen that indicates that the movable piece is expanded) When the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the screen to be communicated to the player in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the starting solenoid 2107 to display the pair shown in FIG. When an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs when the movable piece of the is expanded in the left and right direction, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 stores the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting, by restoring to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the starting port solenoid 2107 is started to drive and paired. The movable piece moves from a state in which it rises substantially vertically to a state in which it spreads in the left-right direction.

However, if an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. , and then when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in the game state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 as the game state, and the game state is advantageous to the player, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and returned, it becomes a game state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 and becomes a game state advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen for telling the presence in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at all. Therefore, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised at the momentary power failure or power failure, and when the power is restored, the game ball is accepted into the second start port 2004 just before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In such a case, the game state is returned to the second start port 2004 as the game state when the power is restored so that the game ball can be accepted. Nevertheless, when the power is restored, the screen for instructing the game (that is, the screen for instructing the game of entering the game ball into the second start port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, there is also a problem that the player does not know what kind of game should be played.

Thus, in the two examples described above, there is a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 powers on (including when the power is turned on, and when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on classified into power-on shown in FIG. is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 receives from the main control board 1310 based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, for example, in the above-described example, in the 4 rounds of the jackpot game state, When an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven as a return destination of the main control board 1310, and the large prize winning opening 2005 is opened from the closed state by the opening and closing member 2107. Since it is possible to transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 that the transition to the state of ) cannot be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, but in the jackpot game state, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven, and the big winning port 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member 2107. (For example, a screen that conveys a message to the player, ``This is a big win. A display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be displayed to instruct a player seated in front of the pachinko machine to enter a game ball into the big winning hole 2005 after the power is restored. For example, in the above-described example, in the state in which the game ball can be accepted into the second start port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then it is restored. When the power is turned on, a screen (for example, "Movable piece The peripheral control board 1510 displays the display area of the game board side production display device 1600 (a screen that conveys the message to the player). can be displayed to instruct a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine to enter a game ball into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored. As a result, when power is restored after an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the main control board 1310 can give detailed instructions on the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 . Therefore, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be quickly restored after power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection. Calculation and determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the power supply of the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board configured by the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off processing, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30 In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created. By storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, the state command at power-on and the main control return destination command at power-on, can be stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. is stored in As for these commands, in the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, the power-on state command is first transmitted, and then the main control return destination command at power-on is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board 1310 issues a power-on status command as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, as described above, the power-on state command is shown in FIG. When the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown is operated to clear the RAM, information to instruct that effect, and when the power is turned on (in addition to turning on the power, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is Including when power is restored.) Return in any state (probability and time saving state) from the above-mentioned low probability short working time state, high probability short working time state, low probability non-short working time state, and high probability non short working time state and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem in the case where the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine is not included in the power-on state command will be described.

As described above, the model code of the pachinko machine is used for the copyright of any work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specifications (for example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, It is possible to specify whether it is a game specification (such as a so-called ST machine) in which a probability change occurs in a state where the game is played 30 times or 70 times).

In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control boards 1310, there are cases where the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed.
Then, the worker of the production line is the owner of the copyright of which work out of the copyrights of multiple kinds of works (for example, the copyright of works such as movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, manga E, and manga F). It becomes unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright for the work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is required to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). There is also an assumption or misunderstanding that it is flowing to the production line. For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the production line may It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is copyrighted, and even if the same work is copyrighted, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) type), and what kind of game specification (game specification or ST machine that when a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big win game state occurs). As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works coexists, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is produced. The main control board 1310 is sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 with the 1310 mixed. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line sometimes attaches to the game board 5 the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 with respect to the copyright of the work. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the model code of the pachinko machine In order to transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 a power-on state command including information indicating the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on shown in FIG. is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, an operator on the production line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying which type it is, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when the probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, a game specification code for specifying the game specification (such as ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited; Based on this, by visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 belongs to. The model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what kind of game specifications (if the probability change occurs, the state will continue until the next big win game state occurs) It is also possible to discriminate whether it is a game specification or ST machine). As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line The operator can visually check the inspection monitor to accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, so that the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work can be sorted into the following. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5 .

[14-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, main control side timer interrupt processing will be described. This main-control-side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed for each interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 92 and 93 .

When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, in the main control board 1310, the main control program switches register banks under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, as shown in FIG. 94 (step S100). The general-purpose storage elements (general-purpose registers) of the main control MPU 1310a have two register banks consisting of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, switch the register bank to the other register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine is started, the processing of saving each register to the stack is not necessary.

Following step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time when the first special symbol indicator 1403 and the second special symbol indicator 1405 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors control process described later, the normal In addition to the time when the normal symbol indicator 1402 lights up according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the symbol and normal electric auditors control process, various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are sent to the payout control board 951. Time management such as ACK signal input judgment time set as a judgment condition when judging whether or not the payer ACK signal is input to inform that the receiver has been received normally. Specifically, when the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the variation time is subtracted by 4 ms. Then, when the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control program detects, for example, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting a game ball entering the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. 8, and a game ball entering the first starting hole 2002 shown in FIG. 8 are detected. A detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and a detection signal from the second starting hole sensor 4004 shown in FIG. , a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. The detection signal and the payout control board 951 indicating that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later are read, respectively, and the input information is read. is stored in the input information storage area. In addition, the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that entered the first start hole 2002, the detection from the second start hole sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that entered the second start hole 2004 When each signal is read, the corresponding start-up winning command shown in FIG. 90 and classified as others is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first starter sensor 4002, a starter winning command corresponding thereto is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and there is a detection signal from the second starter sensor 4004. Then, a start-up winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

In this embodiment, detection signals from general winning gate sensors 4020 and 4020 that detect game balls that have entered the general winning gates 2001 and 2201, and a count sensor 4005 that detects game balls that have entered the big winning gate 2005 A detection signal from, a detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 2002, and a second starting hole sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 2004. and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 are read for the first time when this switch input process is started, and read for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs ), each is read again for the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. A determination is made as to whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the result is not the same, it is read again for the third time, and the result of the third reading is compared with the result of the second reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the fourth time, and the result of the fourth reading is compared with the result of the third reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball.

Thus, in the switch input process, the main control program receives the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003, By performing double reading for a total of two times by comparing the 1st to 3rd readings and the 2nd to 4th readings, it is possible to avoid the effects of chattering, noise, etc. Since it is possible to avoid erroneous detection, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 Reliability can be improved.

Following step S104, the main control program performs win/lose random number update processing (step S106). In this win/lose random number update process, the above-described random numbers for the big-hit design and random numbers for the small-hit design are updated. Also, in addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated in the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for small winning symbols is also updated. The random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are updated in the main control side main process and this main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby enhancing the randomness. . On the other hand, since the random number for the big win pattern and the random number for the small win pattern are related to the win/lose judgment (big win judgment), each counter counts up only each time the win/lose random number update process is performed. Incidentally, the above-described normal symbol hit determination random number and normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number are also updated by this win/lose random number update process.

For example, the counter for updating the random number for determining per normal symbol is, as described above, an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the random number for determination of the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the hit/lose random number update process updates the initial value determination random number for big hit determination. The random number for determining the initial value for normal pattern hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number. .

In this embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are set to the non The win/lose random number update process and the win/lose random number update process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively, but each time an interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven. If the number of executions of the non-hit-lose random number update process in step S56 is random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , and the small-hit symbol initial value determination random number may be updated only in the non-hit-lose random number update process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, a prize ball command shown in FIG. When the number of scheduled game balls reaches 10, the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area, or the main prize number is stored in the output information storage area. A self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for checking the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is created. Then, the generated prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. has reached 10 balls, the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, the output information is stored in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Or, when the payout control board 951 does not receive the payout ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has received the prize ball command normally, the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is confirmed. A self-check command is created and transmitted to the payout control board 951 . If the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls exceeds 10, as in the case of creating a prize ball command to pay out 15 balls as prize balls, the number of balls in excess will be added to the number of balls in the next game. In the prize ball control process, the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added based on this input information, and the added number of game balls is calculated. is reached, the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, and is stored in the output information storage area as the output information.

Following step S108, the main control program performs frame command reception processing (step S110). In the payout control board 951, the payout control program executes various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (eg, frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) divided into the state displays shown in FIG. to send. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error generation command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation navigation command based on the detection signal of the operation switch 954 .
In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, the information to notify the payout control board 951 is stored as output information in the main control built-in RAM. store in the area. In addition, the main control program formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified by status display in FIG. 90 (frame status 1 command, error release The navigation command and frame state 2 command)) are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. The frame state 1 command here corresponds to the first error generation command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

Following step S110, the main control program performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraudulent act detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize balls is checked. For example, when the input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and when the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 is input when the game is not in the jackpot game state (when the game ball enters the big winning hole 2005), etc. 90 as an abnormal state, a winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S112, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. (random number) is acquired from the hardware random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and this acquired random number is set as a jackpot determination random number. And the random number for judging the jackpot (that is, the random value obtained from the hardware random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the jackpot judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match or not. (Determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game state (referred to as "special lottery")), take out the value of the counter for updating the random number for the jackpot pattern, and store it in advance in the main control built-in ROM It determines whether or not it matches the probability variation per determination value (determines whether or not to generate probability variation). Here, "probability change" means that the probability of winning a big hit changes to a high probability (probability variable time) set higher than the normal time (low probability). In this embodiment, as the range of the above-described jackpot determination value (jackpot determination range), a value of 32668 to a value of 32767 is set for a low probability. ~ value 32767 is set and read from the probability variation time determination table. Thus, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process of step S114, the random number for judging the big hit (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a with built-in main control) and the built-in main control When determining whether or not the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the ROM matches, the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) is included in the jackpot determination range.

When these determination results are based on the first start sensor 4002, while creating various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect shown in FIG. In some cases, create various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning performance shown in FIG. Set the output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol indicator 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405 so as to light the device 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405, and store it in the output information storage area described above as the output information do. In addition, according to the game state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a big win game state, various commands (big win opening command, big winning mouth 1 open Nth display command, big winning mouth 1) classified as related to big win shown in FIG. Closed display command, large winning opening 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, or the opening and closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8 is opened and closed. By setting the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 and storing it as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) that the big prize winning port 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state is two times, The output of the lighting signal to the 2nd round display lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. At some point, the output of the lighting signal to the 15th round indicator lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator 1401 is set so that the presence or absence of variation is lit in a predetermined color, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter for updating the random number for determining per normal symbol is extracted as gate information, and the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted. memorize to

This gate information storage area has 0th to 3rd divisions (four divisions), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th division, 1st division, 2nd division, and 3rd division. It's like For example, if the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage. do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information in the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information in the second section of the gate information storage is stored in the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information in the third partition of the information storage is shifted to the second partition of the gate information storage, respectively, and the third partition of the gate information storage becomes a free area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first and second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the first section is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two partitions is shifted to the first partition of the gate information storage, and the second partition of the gate information storage and the third partition of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first section to the third section of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information so that the total number of the stored gate information is used as a holding ball and the normal symbol storage display 1188 is lit. Based on this, the output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol memory display 1188 is set, and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for determining per normal symbol is extracted from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece is determined based on the determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening and closing operation is performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction, so that the second start opening 2004 becomes a game state in which the game ball can be received, which is advantageous to the player. It becomes a game state. This determination and the corresponding normal symbol variation display pattern are determined based on the above-described normal symbol variation display pattern random numbers, and various commands classified into normal symbol synchronization effects shown in FIG. 89 are created and sent as transmission information. While storing in the transmission information storage area described above, set the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 so as to light the normal symbol display 1402 according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and set the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 as output information Store in the output information storage area. In addition, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number matches the normal symbol hit determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric role effect shown in FIG. is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, the output of the drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. , When the value of the taken-out normal symbol per determination random number does not match the normal symbol per determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, normal symbol variation based on the above-described normal symbol variation display pattern random number Determine the display pattern, create various commands classified into the normal pattern synchronization effect shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the symbol display 1402, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above.

Following step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the above-described output information storage area from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control program, for example, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information, when the various commands from the payout control board 951 has been normally received, the payout control board 951 the main payment ACK signal , or when in a jackpot game state, a drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid 2108 that performs the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning opening 2005, and a drive signal is output to the starter solenoid 2107 that performs the opening and closing operation of the movable piece. In addition to outputting, main prize number information output signal, 15 rounds jackpot information output signal, 2nd rounds jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special pattern display information output signal, normal pattern display information output signal, Various information (game information) signals related to the game such as time saving information output information, starting entrance winning information output signal, etc. are output to the payout control board 951.

Following step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area and transmits the transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related, shown in FIG. Commands, various commands classified as related to big wins (for example, big wins based on the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69) when a game ball entering the big win opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected Large winning mouth 1 count display command corresponding to the mouth count command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to general pattern synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to normal electric role effects, Fig. 90 , various commands classified as notification display (door open command, door frame close command, body frame open command, body frame close command, etc.), various commands classified as status display (frame status 1 command, error release navigation commands and frame state 2 commands), various commands classified into test-related commands, and various commands classified into others are stored. One packet of the main circumferential serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating variations of effects having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute various commands as main peripheral serial data. As described above, when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The data can be transferred to the register 41aea and transmitted from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main-circumference serial data. When the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, to inform that the power has been restored in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. In addition, the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on shown in FIG. , as main peripheral serial data, the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the state command at power-on, are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The mode and the sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, game information is read from the game backup information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, and the game information is read according to this game information. various commands may be stored. In such a case, after completion of transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control unit ) (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command having the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command having the form shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error cancellation navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error cancellation navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame open command (first main body frame open command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 A main body frame open command (second main body frame open command) is transmitted to (rendering control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame open command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the body frame open command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the production control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame closing command having the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the body frame closing command having the form shown in FIG.

In addition, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door opening command (first door opening command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. The clearing of the main control built-in WDT 1310af in step S22 is performed by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Then, since the WDT 1310af with built-in main control restarts the clocking, the WDT 1310af with built-in main control does not forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a.

In addition, as described above, the main control board 1310 has the above-described backup function for storing the game information according to the progress of the game before the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The processing can be executed and completed, and at the time of power restoration, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information for which the backup processing was executed as a return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. 89, which instructs the drive state of the starter solenoid 2107 and attacker solenoid 2108, which are electrical drive sources, by the port output process in step S118 in this routine. It is designed to be able to output to That is, the main control board 1310 is the main controller in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the control built-in RAM, in order to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored), a power-on state command and a power-on main command classified into power-on shown in FIG. A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the main control return destination command at power-on. Send to Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, sets the game board side effect display device 1600 as the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Effect display can be performed in the display area of . As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while a player is playing a game and power is restored thereafter, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure can be quickly restored after the power is restored. In addition, since the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and notified, the system of the pachinko machine 1 is stuck, so-called freeze. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the device is out of order because the player sees the device in the broken state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that there is a malfunction by quickly returning to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. At step S38 in the main control side power-on processing, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process, the power-on state command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. and the main control return destination command at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, so that two commands, the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on, are generated. is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the main peripheral serial data constitutes the power-on state command, The status, mode, and sum value are sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in that order, and then the main control board inspection is performed in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the main control return destination command at power-on. Send to the inspection equipment in the process. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process configures the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , the series code for specifying which type is the above-mentioned model type from the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (For example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in a state where the number of special symbol changes is limited (ST machine), etc.), and based on this, detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process.

[16-1. Various control processing of the peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs a peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. When this peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the performance control program performs initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, the hot start/cold start determination process, the process of setting the wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself, but the time required for the process of initializing this peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a enters a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing to be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs from the main control board 1310, shown in FIGS. , various commands such as commands relating to the control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. ) are compared, and effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms), is compared, and Bank3 (1 fr) and Bank4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 1511cc are compared. The performance backup information (1 fr), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (1 ms), and the performance backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 4 (1 ms), are compared, and the contents of the comparison are compared. 73, the performance backup information (1fr) which is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr) for Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. While performing a hot start by copying back the effect backup information (1 ms) which is the content stored in Bank1 (1 ms) to Bank0 (1 ms) to Bank0 (1 ms), when the compared contents do not match (i.e. , mismatch), a value of 0 is forcibly written into each of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, to perform a cold start.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. (SRAM) are compared, and effect backup information (SRAM), which is the content backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in the second backup area 1511dc, is compared. When the contents of the comparison match, the performance backup information (SRAM), which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), is stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. ) is copied back to perform a hot start, and when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), a value is stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. 0 is forcibly written to cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 is forcibly written with a value of 0 to be cleared to zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try not to get caught.

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. is set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. In addition, in the current time information acquisition process, the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and sets the brightness of the LEDs included in the acquired brightness setting information to the brightness of the game board. Processing for adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 and lighting it is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. It includes the set brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 .

Specifically, in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is set to 75%. is lit, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Lights up by adjusting the brightness. In the brightness setting processing of the liquid crystal display device, correction similar to the above-described brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. It is not done at all. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated into the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% every time the brightness setting processing of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. After performing the current time information acquisition process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later. are set to the value 0 when not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V-blank signal is input from the built-in tone generator VDP 1512a to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in the partial V blank signal interrupt process. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. After setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. there is

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is value 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), the process returns to step S1008 to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such a determination, a standby state is established until the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed. After determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try not to get caught.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to 1 (step S1009). The steady-processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

Following step S1009, the effect control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start processing, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is started, and the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed by the 1 ms interrupt timer being started is counted. 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to 1 to initialize the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs continuous DMA serial transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, serial I/O port serial transmission for the lamp drive board is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When this lamp drive board serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, the data shown in FIG. Game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 is created by a lamp data creation process to be described later. is set by default.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the top address is sent to the lamp drive board serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of As a result, the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side emission clock signal SL-CLK to transmit 1 byte of the transmission shift register. data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

Every time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board occurs, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board The 1-byte data written is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is transmitted 1 byte at a time via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai, By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board, the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, In synchronism with the board-side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, transmission of 1-byte data in the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board.

In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Here too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. In 1511cab, door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 is generated by the lamp data generation process described later. is set by default.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the top address of 1511cab is transferred to the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED serial signal via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of the I/O port. As a result, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side light emission clock signal STL-CLK to the transmission shift register. Start transmitting 1-byte data bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac receives a transmission interrupt request for the frame-decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port (in this embodiment, the frame-decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port). 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the remaining door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab are transferred byte by byte to the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. , and via the peripheral bus 1511ai, by transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED receives this written data. The data in the transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, transmission of 1 byte data in the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I/O port.

Following step S1012, the production control program performs production operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this production operation unit monitoring process, in the production operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation button 410 is operated based on the detection signal from the various detection switches provided in the production operation unit 400. Based on the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. determine as appropriate whether or not to reflect

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP with built-in tone generator 1512a outputs the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the VDP with built-in tone generator 1512a in the display data creation process, which will be described later, from channels CH1 and CH2 shown in FIG. Output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 . As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 . In the display data output process, if the drawing exceeds the drawing capability of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is transferred to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect. The output to the display device 460 is canceled. Although this makes it possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, so-called dropped frames may occur. Various effects from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. It is a mechanism that allows you to prioritize synchronization with the production of music and sound effects that match the time.

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the performance control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation process described later to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data, In addition to music and sound effects, sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds are output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. When serialized audio data is input from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the audio data transmission IC 1512c converts the right audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data with positive and negative signals. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted to the frame-decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data with positive and negative signals. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like in accordance with various effects are stereo-reproduced from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and notification sounds and notification sounds are also stereo-reproduced.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the performance control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series that constitute the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, what number screen data from the first screen data is stored in the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series that constitute the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the number of the light emission data from the top light emission data is changed to light emission of various LEDs. Update the pointer to indicate which mode to use.

In the scheduler update process, the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound data of the notification sound and notification sound arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated to indicate what order of the sound command data from the top sound command data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

In the scheduler update process, among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the first drive data is The pointer is updated to indicate which drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitute the electric drive source schedule data, are repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt, which will be described later. It is updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing, which is repeatedly executed each time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is executed. Update the pointer to the data and update the pointer each time you do your own work. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be instructed, the scheduler update process is forcibly instructed to the drive data that should be originally instructed.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the effect control program, the information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, various Various commands received in the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing (command receiving means), which will be described later, are analyzed (command analyzing means). Based on the information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the effect control program generates screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound. The schedule data for generation, the electric drive source schedule data, etc. are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. do. In addition, the effect control program is such that the command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a starting entrance winning command for instructing the start of the starting entrance winning effect, the number of normal symbols held Normal pattern storage command for identifying (0 to 4), pattern synchronization production start command for instructing the start of the pattern synchronization production, pattern storage command output when the number of start suspension changes, large winning opening 2005 A large winning opening 1 count display command (large winning opening count command) output each time a game ball is accepted, or a frame state 1 command (second error generation command, It analyzes (command analysis means) whether it is a full tank error generation command or not, and recognizes which game state it is at present. In addition, in this effect control program, after a predetermined time has passed since the power is turned on, the command received by this peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is a main body frame open command, a main body frame close command, a door open command, or a door frame close Analyze whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. , The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cac. Various commands, shown in FIG. , various commands classified as related to normal figure synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to normal electric role effects, various commands classified as notification display shown in FIG. 90, door frame open command , door frame close command, body frame open command, body frame close command, error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to second error cancellation command) and frame state 1 command (equivalent to second error generation command), etc. There are various commands classified, various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others.

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, furthermore, when the command analyzed by the received command analysis process of step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for emission mode generation, the schedule data for sound generation, the electric drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification, are stored in the peripheral control unit 1511. It extracts from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and sets them in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. In addition, in the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality notification is automatically changed to the remaining abnormality notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is designed to Thus, a plurality of abnormalities can be simultaneously monitored without losing information that one abnormality has occurred due to the occurrence of another abnormality after the occurrence of one abnormality and before the abnormality is resolved. can be done.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the commands analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above are classified into the status displays shown in FIG. In the case of various commands, for example, an error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a manner different from the normal production mode accompanying the production operation, for example, the game board side Effect display device 1600 (effect device), door frame side effect display device 460 (effect device), lamp (effect device) is used to visually warn the outside, or a speaker is used to audibly warn the outside ( error reporting means). By doing so, when a malicious player tries to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 in spite of being in the game state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, it is possible to prevent cheating on the main control board 1310, which may affect the progress of the game.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the performance control program stores in the calendar information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage section are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update processing, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the time information storage unit, are updated, and based on the updated time information, the year, month, and month, which are the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit. date is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer is designated among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set in the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. At the same time, the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 stores the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3. Alternatively, it is created by extracting it from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the presentation control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation, the screen data indicated by the pointer. are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and displays the effect display device on the game board side. 1600 and the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the effect display device 460 on the side of the door frame are generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer points out of the sound instruction data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is output to the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b and controls the built-in sound source to generate the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated in accordance with the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set in accordance with the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob 1510a is converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the values in 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute and board volume 6 is set to maximum volume. Each is set so that the volume increases toward the volume 6. - 特許庁Control the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 so that the sound volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and transmit the audio data as audio data serialized in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC 1512 c, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 .

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 levels described above. For example, even if a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume control volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the production sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are small. However, when there is a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the player's cheating due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side production display device 1600 and the door frame side production display device 460 is produced more powerfully by increasing the volume of the sound, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in a first backup area 1511db and a second backup area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up every frame in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, reception command storage area 1511cac, RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and Effect information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is used as effect backup information (1fr). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the second backup area 1511cc.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are specified to be copied to Bank1 (1fr) in the first backup area 1511cb, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) are copied to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). The contents up to the stored content are copied in sequence from the head address of Bank1 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). 1511ac specifies to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank2 (1fr) in the first backup area 1511cb, and copies the contents stored in the top address of Bank0 (1fr) to Bank0 (1fr ) up to the end address of Bank 2 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb in sequence from the start address of Bank 2 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, ) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are successively stored by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. , and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are continuously transferred to Bank4 ( 1fr) are copied in order from the first address.

In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is backed up every frame in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. Effect information (SRAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is transferred to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of backup first area 1511db as effect backup information (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac at high speed. , and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) are specified to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) in the first backup area 1511db, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) are copied to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The contents up to the stored content are copied in sequence from the top address of Bank 1 (SRAM) of the first backup area 1511db by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). 1511ac is specified to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank2 (SRAM) of the first backup area 1511db, and the contents stored in the top address of Bank0 (SRAM) are copied to Bank0 (SRAM ) up to the end address of Bank 2 (SRAM) of the first backup area 1511db in sequence from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM) of the first backup area 1511db.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, ) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are continuously backed up by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) of the second area 1511dc. , and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are continuously transferred to Bank4 of the backup second area 1511dc by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). SRAM) are copied in order from the first address.

Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clearing process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG as execution completion of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, V blank signal detection flag VB -FLG is initialized by setting a value of 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until a value of 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later. That is, in step S1008, the system waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006. Thus, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is called "peripheral control unit regular processing".

This peripheral control unit steady processing, effect control program, first step S1009 peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed and starts from setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG, 1 ms in step S1010 , and step S1036, and finally, in step S1038, the normal processing flag SP-FLG is set to 0 as execution completion of the peripheral controller normal processing. is set to complete. The peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal is input from the built-in tone generator VDP 1512a to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which blank signals are input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). That is, the peripheral controller steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 72, the V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be received is input from the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. A description will be given of the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing that is executed with the . When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 96 (step S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Each of them is set to a value of 0 when the processing is completed.

When the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control section steady-state processing is being executed, this routine ends. On the other hand, when the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), Exit this routine. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. They are each set to a value of 0 when no routine processing is executed.

In this embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed, and the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed. Sometimes, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. When the signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, it is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. Since the peripheral controller steady-state processing is forcibly canceled on the way and the execution is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, the steady-state processing is canceled in step S1009 in the processing when the peripheral controller power is turned on (peripheral controller steady-state processing) in FIG. By setting the value 1 to the processing in-progress flag SP-FLG, the effect that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. By setting the value 0 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the processing at the time of turning on (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the completion of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is indicated by the peripheral control unit V blank which is this routine. By notifying the signal interrupt processing, it is determined in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. It is determined whether or not it is completed. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the peripheral controller steady-state processing cannot be completed until the next V blank signal is input after the V blank signal is input, ie, a so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing, if the processing cannot be completed within about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next processing will be performed in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. is in a standby state until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral controller steady-state processing that has failed is approximately 66.6 ms. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is normally executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activating a 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) of FIG. 95, will be described later. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process. is executed only 32 times. That is, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is timer interrupt control are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral controller steady-state processing fails, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the presentation.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller regular processing of the peripheral controller power-on processing of FIG. 95, will be described. . When this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. is determined (step S1100). As described above, this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine after the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1ms interrupt timer start processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times that a certain peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which blank signals are input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed at intervals of about 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. is executed, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second, . will occur.

When the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine ends. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is prioritized over the peripheral control unit V Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, , the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (incremented, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are arranged in time series. Of the drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. is driven, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c are transmitted. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the effect operation unit 400 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series. The door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. It is set in the amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. The first byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the top address of the area 1511caf is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port for As a result, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. starts transmitting 1-byte data bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac receives a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame-decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is transferred 1 byte at a time to the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller. 1511ad and via the peripheral bus 1511ai to the transmission buffer register of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port for writing, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port receives this write data. transfer the data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, start transmitting the 1-byte data of the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and frame decoration drive amplifier board Continuous transmission is performed by the motor serial I/O port.

In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Here too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board. When the motor drive board serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, first, the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c are constructed. A motor for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. and the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting the drive signal to the solenoid is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and created. It is set in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in 73 . Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores it in the top address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The first byte of the received game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is sent to the transmission buffer of the motor drive board serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to a register. As a result, the serial I/O port for the motor drive board transfers the data written in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Start sending byte data bit by bit.

Every time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I/O port for the motor drive board occurs, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I/O port for the motor drive board The 1-byte data written is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the rest of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is transmitted 1 byte at a time via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. , by transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board, the serial I/O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, In synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable object information acquisition process, history information (for example, original position history information) of detection signals from various detection switches is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The original position, movable position, etc. of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah.

Following step S1106, effect operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this production operation unit information acquisition process, history information (for example, operation Operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Whether or not the operation button 410 is operated can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the production operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, the history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is set in the control MPU 1511a and the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak of the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When a determination is made, it is a signal that is output to notify that effect. , that is, a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The door frame side effect display device acquires the frequency of failure and the failure occurrence state between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 from the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak. 460 drawing state can be obtained.

Following step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is executed every time a 1ms interrupt timer occurs in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Each time, Bank 0 (1ms) which is a backup target includes a transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor, a storage area 1511cag for the motor drive board side transmission data, and a storage area 1511cah for acquiring movable body information. , and effect information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, is stored in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb as effect backup information (1 ms). The control DMA controller 1511ac performs high-speed copying, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac performs high-speed copying to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) are specified to be copied to Bank1 (1ms) in the first backup area 1511cb, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1ms) are copied to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). The contents up to the stored content are copied in sequence from the head address of Bank1 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) increments, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa executes the peripheral control DMA controller. Copying the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) to Bank2 (1 ms) in the first backup area 1511cb is specified as the request factor of 1511ac, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) are copied to Bank0 (1 ms). ) up to the end address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb in sequence from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank3 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, ) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (1 ms) of the second area 1511cc. , and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank4 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are successively transferred to Bank 4 ( 1ms) are copied in order from the first address.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed within a period of 1ms as the progress of the effects. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. is doing. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, Therefore, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt causes the peripheral control unit After forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed by newly generating the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. In other words, consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which is timer interrupt control, is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the production.

Also, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary slightly even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510 . In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, this It is possible to absorb the time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 start to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 1-byte (8-bit) information is fetched into the receive buffer by the substrate serial I/O port, and when this fetch is completed, an interrupt is generated and the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing is performed. One packet of the main-circumference serial data consists of 3 bytes. The 1st byte is the status, the 2nd byte is the mode, and the 3rd byte is the status and mode. is assigned a sum value calculated from

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 98 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, when it is within the period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received, the peripheral 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main control board serial I/O port built in the control MPU 1511a is taken in (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (incremented, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the main circumference serial data is read out from the reception buffer. When it is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. An initial value of 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, are sequentially sent from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

When the reception counter SRXC is not 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status which is the 1st byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode which is the 2nd byte of the main circumference serial data, and the 3rd byte of the main circumference serial data. is not taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. A 1-byte reception period timer is set in step S1208, thereby setting a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, when the value of the reception counter SRXC is 3 in step S1206, that is, the status, which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, is followed by the mode, which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and then the 3 bytes of the main circumference serial data. When the sum value of the byte is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). This calculation is performed by considering the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the mode, which is the second-byte of the main-circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, as numerical values, and summing them (sum value ).

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main-circumference serial data among the main-circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from a pachinko island facility, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they generate static electricity and generate noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is affected by the noise. in a sanding environment. Therefore, in this embodiment, on the side of the peripheral control unit 1511, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated using the main control board 1310, and does this calculated sum value match the sum value assigned as the 3rd byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310? is determining whether or not As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data between the main control substrate 1310 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 has been affected by noise and changed to non-normal main peripheral serial data. be able to.

In step S1214, when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main-circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are stored in the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. (step S1216) and terminate this routine. This received command storage area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumferential serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumferential serial data are It is stored in the 1511cac peripheral controller receive ring buffer. This "peripheral controller reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. Remember. It should be noted that the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the status assigned as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the status assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data when storing in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. is stored in association with the mode assigned, and the sum value assigned as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received is exceeded. Alternatively, in step S1214, if the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is executed as it is. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit blackout warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 75, a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. Interrupt processing will be described. When this peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. signal) is input (step S1302). If the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in this determination, the routine ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have passed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1320 has passed 2 microseconds. If two macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the routine returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If the signal has been input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. In other words, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine.

If the power failure warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is started in step S1304, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is extinguished, the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5 is turned off, and various LEDs are extinguished. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception waiting process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, a period of at least 17 milliseconds is set so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the commands being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-described peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the received command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. ) stores the received command.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In this command backup process, the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Copy the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb. Then, a predetermined byte (for example, , 1 byte) in sequence from the top address of the received command storage area contained in Bank 1 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb. copy the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and store in Bank0 (1fr) From the contents stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr), each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is continuous. are copied in order from the first address of the received command storage area contained in Bank2 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa stores the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and includes it in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. specified to be copied to the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr), and stored from the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). 1511cc of the backup second area 1511cc. 1511aa transfers the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Copy is specified, and the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is copied to a predetermined address. Bytes (for example, 1 byte) are successively copied from the start address of the received command storage area contained in Bank 4 (1fr) of the second backup area 1511cc.

After step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) has been input (step S1312). When the power failure warning signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clearing process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. .

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal has not been input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. In other words, it is endlessly determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By endlessly continuing determination in this way, when a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sends a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. is not output, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is started again.

As described above, when the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clearing process is executed in step S1314 to perform the peripheral control immediately before the power failure occurs. The MPU 1511a is designed not to be reset. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop, the WDT clear processing is not executed. The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit blackout warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the judgment in step S1302 is passed, step If it is determined in S1312 that the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset because the WDT clearing process of step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process of step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 97 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creating process, the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the data is abnormal, it is a signal that is output to notify that effect. This is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, as shown in FIG. LOCKN-signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is stored in 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. remembered.

Following step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 judges that the drawing data received from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. , a transmission request for a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is not abnormal (normal data). predetermined data for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the transmission of the pattern (SYNC pattern) is not requested.

When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1504). In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift process, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is shifted to the highest bit B7←B6, B6←. B5, B5.rarw.B4, B4.rarw.B3, B3.rarw.B2, B2.rarw.B1, B1.rarw.least significant bit B0.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to 1 (step S1506), and this routine ends.

On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1508). In the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed. The signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is changed to the least significant bit B0 in such a manner that the most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0. , toward the most significant bit B7 by one bit.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to 0 (step S1510), and this routine ends.

In this manner, each time the LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted by one bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then shifted to the least significant bit B0. Since a value of 1 or 0 is set, it is possible to create a history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

[16-1-7. Connection failure determination process]
Next, a description will be given of the connection fault determination process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral controller steady-state process of the peripheral controller power-on processing shown in FIG. In this connection failure determination process, based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

72, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). As described above, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. FIG. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined, it is a signal output to notify that effect. and to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

Subsequent to step S1520, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 (step S1522). This determination is to determine whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value.

In step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 is prepared. It is determined that there is no problem between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. and exit this routine.

On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective. Then, the communication check counter CC-CNT is incremented by 1 (step S1524). Each time this routine is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times it is determined in step S1522 that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is faulty. (to count the cumulative number of times). The communication check counter CC-CNT is set to 0 and reset when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. In some cases, the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before a power failure occurs is restored.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the accumulated count upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative number of times it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative count. While it is determined that the upper limit CC-LMT has not been reached, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the accumulated count upper limit CC-LMT, a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state of having reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

In step S1526, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number of times. If the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 0 (step S1528), and this routine ends. On the other hand, in step S1526, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the accumulated count upper limit value CC-LMT, it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the calculated accumulated number reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 1 (step S1530), and this routine ends. The communication error flag CC-FLG indicates that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not established when the cumulative number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver reaches the upper limit value CC-LMT of the accumulated number of times. is a flag that indicates whether or not a problem has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of being in the accumulated state has not reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0 respectively. The communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 0 and reset when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. In some cases, the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG immediately before a power failure occurs is restored.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, the connection recovery process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 will be described. This connection recovery process is executed following the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. and to confirm (restore) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. We will notify you to that effect.

When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, as shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020, it is determined whether or not the schedule data for screen generation is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, of the screen data arranged in time series that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation, the order of which screen data from the first screen data is to be output to the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a is indicated. Then, it is determined whether the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the presentation progresses according to the screen generation schedule data. When performance is completed along with the data and updating of the pointer is all completed, it is determined that the schedule data for screen generation is not started. In addition, in this determination, the period during which the start screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or the time period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a customer waiting state and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. It can be judged based on the schedule data for screen generation whether or not it is a period of time, and the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. When the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a customer waiting state and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side effect display device 1600, the process advances to step S1542 to be described later, while the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side. During the period displayed on the effect display device 1600, or when the game board side effect display device 1600 is not in the customer waiting state and the demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600 (simple state of waiting for customers), This routine is terminated as it is.

In step S1540, when the effect is progressing according to the schedule data for screen generation, that is, when the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, this routine ends as it is. When the presentation is completed and the pointer has been completely updated, that is, when the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 (step S1542). 101. As described above, the communication check counter CC-CNT is set to the door frame side presentation counter provided in the peripheral control board 1510 in the determination of step S1522 each time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is executed. Count up the number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. (count the cumulative number of times). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is even one.

If the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, if it has not been determined that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, this process is performed as it is. While terminating the routine, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 in step S1542, that is, if it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, even once. If there is, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, this communication error flag CC-FLG is set when the accumulated number of times that it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. A flag that indicates whether or not a problem has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. is set to 0 when the accumulated number of times that it is determined that there is a problem in the connection of , does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT.

When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, when it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the accumulated number of times is the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. If not, SYNC pattern output processing is performed (step S1546), and this routine ends. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effects provided on the peripheral control board 1510, so that the signal for door frame side effects provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is output. The transmitter IC 1512 d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 . This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. It restores the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

On the other hand, when the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (it is 1) in step S1544, that is, when there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, communication error display processing is executed. (step S1548) and terminate this routine. In this communication error display process, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. process to draw to For example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a message is displayed that reads, "There is a problem with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk." Further, in the communication error display process, the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the game board side effect display device 1600 in the customer waiting state are displayed. During the period, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver LOCKN signal output request data is sent from the peripheral control MPU 1511a as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 is LOCKN. As a response signal to the transmission of the signal output request data, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. It is determined that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, and a notification image to that effect (for example, "A problem has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.") is displayed in the game. In addition to performing processing to display in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600, a notification sound (for example, "There is a problem with the upper tray-side liquid crystal display device.") is repeatedly emitted from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. Do the flow process. At this time, it is also possible to carry out a process of turning on all the LEDs for lighting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided on the game board 5 .

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

First, a brief description will be given of the decorative symbols variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. The variable display of the decorative pattern is executed by the unit steady processing etc., and the main control side of the main control side power on time processing shown in FIG. The first special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the first start port 2002 shown in FIG. When the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball into the starting opening 2004 is "big hit", the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is 1 round to 15 rounds. Up to 15 rounds in total, and in each round, within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), when game balls enter the big winning opening 2005 and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls), The round is completed, and every time one game ball enters the big winning hole 2005, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls are paid out.

The first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the first start port 2002, or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the second start port 2004, from the main control board 1310 Based on the command, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, so that left side decorative symbols are displayed on the left side of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and central decorative symbols are displayed in the center. Then, on the right side, the variable display of the right decorative pattern is started, and after a predetermined time has passed, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is stopped, and the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery. The player can recognize the first special The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result can be confirmed even in the design or the second special design. When the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are variably displayed, the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design become translucent to the extent that the background image can be visually recognized, and the left decorative design is displayed. The reels rotate from the upper left side to the lower left side of the area, the center decorative pattern from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the right decorative pattern from the upper right to the lower right of the display area. When the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are stop-displayed, the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design correspond to the stopped-displayed left-hand decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right-hand decorative design. The left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are opaque so that the background image at the position is difficult to see. In this way, the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and started to be displayed in the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66, The left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern, which are displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, are synchronized with each other.

Peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, the first special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the first start opening 2002, or the second lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the second start opening 2004 When receiving a command from the main control board 1310 to convey the result of the special lottery, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled based on the received command, so that the game board side shown in FIG. 8 is displayed as shown in FIG. When the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit steady state of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, the first screen among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since the pointer is updated to indicate which screen data is to be output to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a from the data, that is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, the screen data is displayed according to the schedule data for screen generation. Since the effect is in progress, the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, and while the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, that is, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started. 102 is executed in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. , the determination in step S1540 in the connection recovery process is such that the routine is forcibly terminated.

As a result, the communication check counters CC-CNT are counted during the period from the start of the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to the stop display. Even when the value is not 0, that is, between the connection (that is, the transmitter and (connection between the transmitter and the receiver), the SYNC pattern output processing of step S1546 in the connection recovery processing is not performed, even if it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. There is a problem with the liquid crystal display on the side. Please call the store clerk." In addition to invalidating the LOCKN signal from the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door-frame-side effect display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d. display.

When the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral control section shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the hour process, the presentation is completed in accordance with the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since all the updates have been completed, that is, while the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated in the scheduler update process, and the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated, the power supply to the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. In the judgment of step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. When the value of CNT is 0, that is, when it has not been determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the routine ends as it is, while the communication check counter When the value of CC-CNT is not 0, that is, when it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, the process proceeds to step S1544 in the same process. When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, the accumulated number of times that it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the accumulated number of times upper limit value CC-LMT is reached. If not, the process proceeds to step S1546 in the same process, performs the above-described SYNC pattern output process, and terminates the routine. That is, when there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process proceeds to step S1548 in the same process, the above-described communication error display process is performed, and the routine ends. In other words, while the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC 1512d are displayed. If there is even one failure in the connection with ICSDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number determined to be present does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output processing is always performed, so that the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, In other words, while processing is performed to restore the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the accumulated number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is faulty reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. (that is, there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), by always performing the communication error display process, for example, " A problem has occurred in the liquid crystal display on the upper tray side. Please call the store clerk." The LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which conveys that the data is valid, is validated.

In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern is started and stopped, and again the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern is performed. During the interval period until is started, the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, so as described above, The LOCKN signal from the door-frame-side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which informs that the drawing data received from the door-frame-side performance transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data, is validated, and the door-frame-side performance transmitter IC 1512d and the door-frame-side performance receiver IC DIC0 are validated. If there is even one failure in the connection with the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times determined to be is not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output processing is always performed, so that the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 In other words, while performing processing to restore the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a state of failure reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. When it reaches (that is, there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), the communication error display process is always performed, so that, for example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 A message "A problem has occurred in the liquid crystal display device on the upper tray side. Please call a clerk."

When the variable display of the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is started again (timing K2), as described above, the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, so the left decorative design and the central decorative design are displayed. , and until the right decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the door frame side presentation provided on the peripheral control board 1510 The number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1. Even if there are times, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed. Communication error display processing in step S1548 is not performed, and, for example, the message "There is a problem with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk." Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is invalidated, and the door frame side effect display device. 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d.

In this way, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and then stopped, and then the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed again. In the interval period until the start of the variable display of the pattern, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is validated. On the other hand, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter is operated until the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern is started and stopped. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side rendering receiver IC SDIC0, which informs that the drawing data received from the IC 1512d is abnormal data, is invalidated. This is because the result of the stop display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the most interesting information for the player. Since the player can determine whether or not a jackpot game state in which a Then, until the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the image of the effect drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is disturbed due to the influence of noise, etc. and is not correct. Even if it becomes a state where drawing is not possible, instead of interrupting the effect in the middle and recovering the state where it can be drawn correctly, the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the By stop-displaying the right decorative pattern, the drawing of the information that the player is most interested in is completed.

In this respect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the startup screen on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the customer waiting state. This is very different from the case where the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510 during the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is performing a demonstration. This LOCKN signal output request data is used for the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or for the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a customer waiting state for a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. During the period of execution, it is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and is transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This is sent as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the differential Two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the conversion circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. The forced switching circuit 1512f performs circuit connection so as to transmit the two signals when two signals that are differentially differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input. Two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 . When the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided in the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the received two signals are the LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is As described above, the data format is different from that of the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Output to the control MPU 1511a. As a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input, and the effect display drive board 4450 While it can be determined that no trouble has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, a trouble has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 assuming that a trouble has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A notification image (for example, "There is a problem with the liquid crystal display on the upper tray side. Please call a clerk.") is displayed on the game board side effect display device by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. 1600, and by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 1512a and outputting a notification sound to that effect (for example, "There is a problem with the liquid crystal display on the upper tray side") to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. A notification sound is emitted from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 . As a result, the notification can be made by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker provided on the door frame 3 or the like. At this time, all the various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided on the door frame 3 and various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data, the forced switching circuit 1512f can receive the LOCKN signal output request data at the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The circuit is connected so that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which has received the LOCKN signal output request data, outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a response signal. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no failure in the door frame side effect display device 460. When the signal is not input, it can be determined that the door frame side effect display device 460 is malfunctioning because the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is malfunctioning. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the door frame side effect display device 460 is malfunctioning, the communication error display processing of step S1548 in the connection recovery processing of FIG. 102 can be executed as notification processing. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a discovers a problem with the door frame side effect display device 460, it can notify the store clerk or the like of the fact by executing the notification process. A store clerk or the like in the hall can very easily check whether or not the door frame side effect display device 460 has a problem before the player plays the game, and the check can be made without trouble. ing. Therefore, the malfunction of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be found without much effort.

As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined that there is, it is a signal that is output to notify that effect. Since it is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the ICSDIC0 and the transmitter and the receiver, it is used for door frame side effects. When the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d cannot be normally received by the receiver IC SDIC0, a communication failure occurs between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 in order to notify that the drawn data is abnormal. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, to which the LOCKN signal is input, sends a connection confirmation signal indicating the start of transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. By outputting to the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is possible to eliminate communication problems during image communication. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can detect a failure of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication failure during image communication at an early stage, and can work on the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to eliminate the problem. It's like Therefore, by finding and eliminating the problem of the door frame side effect display device 460, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

Further, the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460, receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. When normal reception is not possible, the effect control microprocessor outputs a LOCKN signal, which is a communication problem occurrence signal, to indicate that a communication problem has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Since it is possible to output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of a certain peripheral control unit 1511, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input controls the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, causing a communication problem. This generated image is displayed in the display area of the game board side production display device 1600. can be displayed and notified. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a quickly discovers a malfunction of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication malfunction during image communication, and notifies the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to that effect. Since the player can inform the pachinko hall clerk or the like or can directly inform the hall clerk or the like who happens to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, the hall clerk or the like can be notified when the trouble occurs. You can start working on resolving the problem at an early stage. Therefore, by early detection and elimination of the malfunction of the door frame side effect display device 460, the player's desire to play can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect provided in the effect display drive board 4450 during the period from the timing K1 to the timing K2 (interval period). If there is even one failure in the connection between the side effects receiver ICSDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for activating the LOCKN signal and resolving communication problems during image communication when the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of being in the state of being in the state of being in the state of accumulation does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. is transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d until the cumulative number of times reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. , can be output repeatedly. Thereby, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 fluctuates the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 Since the connection confirmation signal can be repeatedly output only during the period in which the game is not progressed by starting and displaying the stop display, the communication failure can be resolved.

Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect provided in the effect display drive board 4450 during the period from the timing K1 to the timing K2 (interval period). If there is even one failure in the connection between the presentation receiver ICSDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of being in the state of being in the state of being in the accumulated state does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is generated to validate the LOCKN signal and eliminate the communication failure during image communication. A connection confirmation signal is sent from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to inform the start of transmission to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. While continuing to output repeatedly, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts to fluctuate the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 to play the game. , the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped, and when the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect stops outputting the connection confirmation signal. (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, and the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. It's like Thereby, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 fluctuates the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is a signal for resolving the problem, only during the period in which the game is not progressing by starting and displaying the stop display, the communication problem can be resolved. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and stops displaying. Only during the period in which the progress of the game is not executed, when the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 displays the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Even if the first special symbol or second special symbol game is started to fluctuate and the progress of the game is started again, the distortion of the effect progressing on the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 (disturbance of the image) Every time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 restarts and ends the progress of the game (every time (interval period) between timing K1 and timing K2), it can be made to go in the direction of elimination.

According to the embodiment as described above, the pachinko machine 1 comprises the main control board 1310 of FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 of FIG. The main control board 1310 includes a first start port 2002 and a second start port 2002, which are starting regions in which game balls fired by the ball shooting device 650 toward the game region 5a defined on the game board 5 are provided in the game region 5a. A main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor for controlling the progress of the game based on the fact that the ball has entered the mouth 2004, is installed. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball commands shown in FIGS. 70 payout control MPU 952a is mounted.

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, has at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store game information even after the power is turned off.

The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information on payout even after the power is turned off.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment further comprises an operation switch 954 shown in FIG. When the operation switch 954 is operated within a period from when the power is turned on to when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed, the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM is erased. The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, is output as a RAM clear signal in FIG. A RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal in FIG. When the operation is performed after the period during which the determination process of step S16 in the process at the time of power-on is performed (or the period during which the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit is performed after the power is turned on) has passed, the error that occurred regarding the payout device 830 is canceled. 82 as an error cancellation signal for the game control microprocessor to the main control MPU 1310a which is the game control microprocessor and output to the payout control MPU 952a which is the payout control microprocessor. .

In this way, when the operation switch 954 is operated within a period during which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. The RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 for erasing the information about is output to the main control MPU 1310a which is the game control microprocessor, and when the operation is performed within the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from the time of power-on, A RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. When the operation is performed after the period during which the determination process of step S16 is performed in the main control side power-on process (or the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed after the power is turned on), the payout device 830 An error release function to output to the payout control MPU 952a which is the payout control microprocessor without outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. Since it has both functions, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error canceling function, respectively, by operating one operation switch 954 . Therefore, the RAM clear function and the error cancellation function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input part of the panel relay board 4161 is connected to various detection sensors arranged on the game board, for example, the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, and the vibration detection sensor. , a circuit to which detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the like are input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, here, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is taken as an example of the detection sensor, and the circuit to which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is described. do.

Attempts to gain unfair profits by manipulating the falling state of game balls at will by bringing magnets (e.g., permanent magnets or electromagnets) closer to game balls hit into the game area in a game machine. There is no end to illegal gaming behavior.

In order to detect such fraudulent gaming behavior and suppress fraudulent behavior by means of light-emitting means, sound alarms, etc., magnetism detection sensors 4024 capable of detecting magnetism are provided corresponding to predetermined positions in the gaming area. there is

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the control of game progress and effects will be summarized below.

As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the pachinko machine 1 as a whole, and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the results of the processes. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the control signal (control command) output by the main control board 1310, the display mode of the effect display device 1600 (design, various background images, characters, display images such as characters, etc.), It controls the display mode and operation mode of various members (the performance operation unit 400, movable members, etc.) that contribute to the performance.

In particular, the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process every time an interrupt process is performed. In this special control process, first, the first and second start opening winning process is performed. In this first and second starting hole winning process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the starting hole, and when it is determined that it has won, the processing of increasing the number of reservations on the corresponding special symbol side by 1, etc. done.

If the processing flag is 0 when finishing the first and second starting opening winning processing, the fluctuation start processing is executed. In this fluctuation start process, on the condition that the number of reservations is 1 or more, the jackpot determination in the pending state is digested and executed, and after memorizing the result of this jackpot determination (hitting or losing, its type, etc.) , update the processing flag to "1".

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 1 when finishing the first and second start opening winning processing, the variation pattern setting processing is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device based on the stored result of the big hit determination and the current game state ( After determining and setting the fluctuation time from the start of the variable display of the special pattern to the stop display, etc., and the stop pattern (jackpot pattern, losing pattern, etc.), the processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 2 when the first and second starting opening winning processing is finished, the processing during fluctuation is executed. In this process during fluctuation, the fluctuation time determined and set in the fluctuation pattern setting process is monitored by a timer, and the fluctuation display of the special design in the first special design indicator or the second special design indicator based on the timeout. to stop After that, when the result of the big hit determination stored in the variation start process is a big win, the process selection flag is updated to "3", and when the result of the big win determination stored in the change start process is not a big win (loss). , the process selection flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the fluctuation start process is restarted.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 3 when the first and second starting opening winning processing is finished, the jackpot game processing is executed. In this jackpot game processing, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is operated to set the mode of the jackpot game (for example, the number of rounds) determined based on the type of jackpot won, Based on this, the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 2106 is controlled. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, processing is performed to stop the operation of the condition device, and when the type of the jackpot won is a special type, it is controlled to be in an advantageous state such as a time-saving state or a variable probability state. After updating the game state flag as shown, the processing flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the fluctuation start process is restarted.

As the variation pattern, a plurality of types of variation patterns are stored. The variation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of the symbol variation of the special symbol, and the effect that appears in the effect display device 1600 by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510. It can determine the type of pattern. In this embodiment, the plurality of types of variation patterns can be classified into a variation pattern for big hit variation, a variation pattern for loss reach variation, and a variation pattern for loss variation. The big win variation is a change that is performed when the result of the big win determination is a big win, and in the performance display device 1600, after the ready-to-win performance, the variable display of the decorative pattern finally develops so that the big win pattern is fixed and stopped. The effect to be performed is executed. The loss reach variation is a variation that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a loss and it is determined that the reach is performed by the reach determination based on the reach random number. An effect is executed such that the variable display of the symbols is finally deviated and the symbols are fixed and stopped. The loss variation is a variation that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a loss and it is not determined to perform the reach in the reach determination based on the reach random number, and the effect display device 1600 does not go through the reach effect. , an effect is executed in which the variable display of the decorative symbols is developed so that the finally lost symbols are fixed and stopped. Further, the variation pattern is defined so as to be able to specify which variation pattern is the first special symbol side or the second special symbol side.

That is, the peripheral control board 1510 acquires the game information such as the result of the big hit determination from the main control board 1310 and refers to it, thereby making it possible to appear such a variation pattern of decorative symbols. In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to causing the effect display device 1600 to appear a variation pattern of decorative symbols based on the acquired game information, the effect display (background and reserved image) related to the degree of expectation is changed, and the effect It executes control to change the mode (display and movement) in the operation unit 400 and to operate movable members such as the back and bottom movable effect unit 3100 .

Next, the game control of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 104 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessary product control process (FIG. 94: step S114).

Now, assuming that the main control program is shifted to the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes the above-described second control as shown in FIG. On the condition that the detection signal by the first starting hole sensor 4002 is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting hole 2002) (YES in step S5231), the random number for judging the first big hit is acquired from the random number counter. The first start opening passage processing such as storing this in the first special symbol reservation storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5232). Also, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 4004 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (YES in step S5233), the second special random number of the second special symbol ( Second big hit determination random number) is acquired from the random number counter and stored in the second special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM (step S5234).

Next, it is determined whether or not a big-hit execution flag indicating that the big-hit game state is being controlled is set (step S5235), and if the big-hit execution flag is set, the big-hit game state is controlled. Big hit control processing (step S5240a) is executed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
・When the result of the judgment processing for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting either "8R probability variable jackpot A" or "8R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the large winning opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (round game) is repeated eight times. Control to 8R jackpot game state,
・When the result of the judgment processing for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped becomes a mode that suggests "16R probability variable jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) After that, or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have won the big prize opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed is repeated 16 times to control to a 16R jackpot game state,
・When the result of the judgment processing for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "8R probability variable jackpot B", the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds ) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have won the big prize opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed is repeated 8 times to control to the 8R jackpot game state,
・When the result of the judgment processing for the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol is a mode suggesting "2R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds). A 2R jackpot game state in which an opening/closing pattern (round game) to be closed after playing is repeated twice is controlled.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the situation where the time-saving control is executed, right-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than left-handed, and in situations where the time-saving control is not executed, it is more advantageous than right-handed hitting. As described above, hitting left-handed is advantageous for the player. In this regard, in the left-handed state, even if a jackpot is won as a result of the lottery for the first special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball into the first start port 2002, the jackpot game is open for a long time of 8 rounds at maximum. Only the state (approximately 1000 game balls can be acquired) occurs.

On the other hand, in the right-handed state, if the jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol according to the acceptance of the game ball into the second start port 2004, the probability is about 50% (the allocation rate of the winning species ), 16 rounds of long open jackpot game state (approximately 2000 game balls can be obtained) are executed, and the expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained when winning the jackpot Therefore, when the ball is shifted to the right-handed state, it can be expected to obtain a larger amount of prize balls than when the left-handed state is used.

In the big hit control process, when starting the opening control of such a big winning hole 2005, first, the process of starting the operation of the condition device, the process of resetting the fluctuation number counter described later, and the like are performed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process, after such opening control of the jackpot 2005 is performed, as shown in FIG. Execute each set processing of the flag and the time saving flag.

The high-probability flag is a flag indicating a high-probability state, and is used in the big-hit determination process shown in FIG. 109 to be described later. It is set when the big hit game state based on the probability variable big hit, 8R probability variable big hit B) is ended, and when the next big hit occurs, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 114 to be described later or the second special symbol stop processing (not shown) is reset by

The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control is being executed (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), and as shown in FIG. 110, time saving control (high probability time saving state) after the jackpot game state It is set when ending the big hit game state based on the big hit (8R probability variable big hit A, 16R probability variable big hit, 8R probability variable big hit B), and when the next big hit occurs, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 114 to be described later. Or it is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown). Alternatively, when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is digested 100 times without winning the jackpot after the occurrence of the low-probability time-saving state, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 114 to be described later. Or it is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown).

The variation number counter is a counter that indicates the number of variations of the special symbols after the variation number counter is reset, and is used in the first variation pattern setting process (second variation pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 112 described later. It is updated (for example, counted up) when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are changed, and at least a specific type of jackpot (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B) It is reset when starting a big hit game state based on.

Also, if the big hit executing flag is not set (NO in step S5235), then as the process of step S5236, whether or not the small hitting executing flag indicating that the small hitting game state is controlled is set. determine whether And as a result, if the small hit execution flag is set, small hit control processing (step S5240b) for controlling the small hit game state is executed. In addition, in the small hit control process, the process of opening the big winning opening 2005 only for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds) is performed.

Here, in the small hit control process (step S5240b), unlike the case of the big hit control process (step S5240a), after the opening control of such a big winning opening 2005 is performed, a high probability flag, a time saving flag, a time saving Each set processing such as the number counter is not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110(a), no small win is won in the big win determination.

Also, if the small hit running flag is not set (NO in step S5236), the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of the second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area On the condition that it is "0" (step S5237), the first special symbol process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S5238).

On the other hand, if the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of the second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special design reservation storage area is not "0" (step S5237), the second special design 2nd special design process processing including the lottery processing concerning the display mode at the time of fluctuation display stop is executed (step S5239). As a result, as long as the game is played so as not to lose the lottery for the second special symbol in the pending state (unless the value of the second special pending number counter is "0"), the first special symbol Only the lottery for the random number for judging the second big hit is performed continuously without interruption (priority execution), regardless of the pending status of the lottery.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the time-saving state (high-probability time-saving state), the player simply maintains hitting the game ball to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (right hitting). Only the lottery (judgment processing) for the two big hit judging random numbers can be performed continuously without interruption.

In addition, the special game (symbol variation) using the second special symbol (second special symbol) is limited to those that are executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (first special symbol) Instead, for example, the execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and the start winning is generated. In this case, a table is provided for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the starting prizes are generated, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It should be possible to determine whether

FIG. 105 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first starting opening passing process (step S5232).

Now, in the process of step S5231, if it is determined that the first starting hole sensor 4002 is in the ON state and a game ball has entered the first starting hole 2002, as shown in FIG. 2, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S5241, first, each random number on the first special symbol side (random number for judging a big hit, random number for judging reach, random number for judging a big hit, random number for a variation display pattern ) is obtained from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the first special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the number of reservations of the first special symbol is the maximum value. It is determined whether or not the (upper limit) is "4" (step S5242). In the process of step S5242, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol (determination process for the first special symbol) is newly suspended. , the following steps S5243 to S5245 are performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5243, the first special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Then, as the process of step S5244, each random number obtained in step S5241, the first special design reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM store in

And next, the first special figure prefetching process for executing the first special figure side prefetching effect is executed, and the process is terminated (step S5245). As will be described later, the look-ahead effect on the side of the first special symbol is an effect that suggests in advance the determination result (or its degree of expectation) of the first special symbol before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. In this first special figure look-ahead processing, the peripheral control board 1510 side is required to determine whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect and the content of the look-ahead effect (information related to win-loss for look-ahead determination, information related to symbol type for look-ahead determination information, information on the variation pattern number for pre-reading determination, etc.) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510 . At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the big win game. For example, the information of the stage before being finally determined, such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group, the latent hit group, and the small hit group among the symbol types, may be transmitted as the look-ahead command.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5242, when it is determined that the number of reserved first special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5243 to S5245, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly suspended.

FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second start opening passing process (step S5234).

Now, in the processing of step S5233, if it is determined that the second starting hole sensor 4004 is in the ON state and a game ball has entered the second starting hole 2004, as shown in FIG. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S5251, first, each random number on the second special symbol side (random number for second big hit determination, random number for second reach determination, second big hit symbol random number, random number for the second fluctuation display pattern) is obtained from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the number of reservations of the second special symbol is the maximum value. is "4" (step S5252). In the processing of this step S5252, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly suspended. , the following steps S5253 to S5255 are performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5253, the second special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Then, as the process of step S5254, each random number obtained in step S5251, the second special design reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM store in

And next, the second special figure prefetching process for executing the second special figure side prefetching effect is executed, and the process is terminated (step S5255). As will be described later, the look-ahead effect on the side of the second special symbol is an effect that suggests in advance the determination result (or its degree of expectation) of the second special symbol before starting the variable display of the second special symbol. In this second special figure look-ahead processing, the peripheral control board 1510 side generates information (win-lose information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) required for determining whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect and the content of the effect, It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510 . At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the second special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the big win game. For example, the information of the stage before being finally determined, such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group, the latent hit group, and the small hit group among the symbol types, may be transmitted as the look-ahead command.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5252, when it is determined that the number of pending second special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5253 to S5255, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended.

When the number of reserved first special symbols changes based on the gaming ball entering the first starting port 2002, a command for instructing the number of reserved first special symbols in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) (First hold number specification commands 0 to 4) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . Further, when the number of reserved second special symbols changes based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, the number of reserved second special symbols is indicated in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). command (second hold number designation commands 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 .

FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S5238). In addition, the first special symbol process processing executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control processing and the second special symbol process processing executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control processing are the same. , and only the random numbers and tables used for determination are different, so only the first special symbol process processing executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

1. The random number for judging the big hit corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read, and based on the random number for judging the big hit, the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, etc. 1st special symbol normal processing (step S5280)

2. First special symbol stop symbol setting processing (step S5281 )

3. Executed in correspondence with the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 based on the random number for the variation display pattern and the special symbol on the performance display device (game board side performance display device) 1600 First variation pattern setting processing (step S5282) in which lottery processing etc. are performed for the variation mode of the effect display to be performed

4. First special symbol variation processing (step S5283) to wait until the variation display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped

5. So that the mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403, which is determined based on the result of the determination process for the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped. First special symbol stop processing (step S5284) for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol

In addition, the initial value of the first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S5280) should be performed.

FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal process (step S5280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of 2, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display of the first special symbol in the pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display of the first special symbol in the pending state, then as the process of step S5302, it is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area of the main control built-in RAM. The earliest memory of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first jackpot determination random number, the first reach determination random number, the first jackpot symbol random number, and the first fluctuation display pattern random number) The random number stored in the area is read from the same main control built-in RAM. And then, as the processing of steps S5303 and S304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the first special stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control built-in RAM Random numbers related to the display mode when the fluctuation display of the pattern is stopped (for example, the first big hit judgment random number, the first reach judgment random number, the first big hit pattern random number, the first fluctuation display pattern random number) First-In Shift operation is performed in the First-Out mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol reservation storage area a to first special symbol reservation storage area d), and the start winning prize to the first start port 2002 Random numbers extracted according to occurrence are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the first special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). . Similarly, the second special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol reservation storage area a to second special symbol reservation storage area d), and according to the occurrence of the start winning prize to the second start port 2004 Random numbers extracted by the first (earliest) area are stored in order. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the second special symbol occurred is stored so as to be identifiable, and the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). .

After that, as the process of step S5305, a big hit determination process, which is a process of determining whether or not the big win is hit or lost, is performed based on the read-out first big hit determination random number. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5306) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281), this process is terminated.

FIG. 109 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S5305).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is, if the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability time saving state, high probability non time saving state) (step S5311), at the time of high probability shown in FIG. 110 (A) Select the jackpot determination table (step S5312), if the current game state is a low probability state (step S5311), select the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 110 (A) (step S5313), select The big hit determination table and the random number for big hit determination read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process are compared (step S5314).

As shown in FIG. 110 (A), the jackpot determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and when the game state is low probability for each type of special random number (random number for first jackpot determination, random number for second jackpot determination) (Low probability non-time-saving state, low probability time-saving state) Jackpot judgment table at low probability used in the case of high probability (high probability non-time-saving state, high probability time-saving state) used when the game state is high and a jackpot determination table at the time of probability. In the low-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random numbers, 204 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65332 The random numbers for judging the first big hit (65536 types) are associated with each other so that the random number for judging the first big hit of the type is consistent with the loss judgment value indicating that the type is lost (probability of jackpot at low probability; roughly "1/321"). On the other hand, in order to compare with the second special symbol jackpot determination random number (second jackpot determination random number) in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process In the low-probability jackpot determination table to be referred to, 204 types of second jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65,332 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are lost. The random numbers for judging the second big hit are associated with each other so as to coincide with the misjudgment value indicating that (probability of big hit at low probability; approximately "1/321").

In addition, in the high-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random numbers, 2040 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination values, and 63496 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match. The random numbers for judging the first big hit are associated with each other so that the random number matches the judgment value for winning (big hit probability at high probability; approximately "1/32"). On the other hand, in the high-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process , 2040 types of random numbers for judging a second big hit match the big hit judging value indicating that a big hit has been won, and 63496 types of random numbers for judging a second big hit match with the above-mentioned losing judgment value indicating that the player has lost. The random numbers for judging the second big hit are associated with each other (probability of big win at high probability; approximately "1/32"). It should be noted that the jackpot determination value set in the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number (jackpot determination value The number may be the same and the jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is the same), or the number of jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is different)). In this case, at least one of the low-probability big-hit determination table and the high-probability big-hit determination table should have different jackpot determination values (both may be made different). .

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected jackpot determination table with the jackpot determination random number read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing, and when it is determined to be a jackpot (step S5315 ), a big hit flag indicating that the variation has been won as a big hit is set (step S5316), and the big hit determination process is terminated.

Further, in step S5315, when it is determined that the big hit has been lost, the read-out big-hit determination random number matches the small-hit determination value indicating that the small-hit has been won based on the selected big-hit determination table. It is determined whether or not (step S5317). However, as described above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (second special symbol process processing) of this example, since the random number for big hit determination that matches the small hit determination value is not read out (small hit probability; 0/65536), and in this step S5317, it is determined that a small hit has not been won (determined as a loss).

On the other hand, if it is determined to be lost in step S5317, the reach determination table and the reach determination random number read out in step S5302 are compared (step S5319).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the game state is a high probability non-time saving state. A ready-to-reach determination table in a high-probability time-saving state used in case 1 and a ready-to-reach determination table in a low-probability state used in a case of a low-probability state of a game state (low-probability non-time-saving state) are provided.

Here, in the reach determination table during the high probability time saving state, one type of reach determination random number matches the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached, and the reach determination value indicating that the 71 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach The random numbers for reach determination are associated with each other so as to match with . However, in the reach determination table in the high-probability time-saving state, in order to maximize the progress speed of the game when in the time-saving state, all 72 types of reach determination random numbers match the reach determination value that indicates that the reach is not reached. By doing so, it may be prevented from matching with the reach determination value indicating reach.

In addition, in the reach determination table in the low probability state, five types of reach determination random numbers including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state reach. The random numbers for reach determination are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value shown and match the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of random numbers for reach determination do not reach. Thus, in this embodiment, at the time of the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is increased from the time of the high probability time saving state, and is obtained with a predetermined probability.

Furthermore, in the reach determination table in the high probability non-time saving state, the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state and the low probability state Five types of reach determination including random numbers The random numbers for reach determination are associated so that the random numbers for reach match with the reach determination values indicating reach, and the random numbers for reach determination of 67 kinds match with the reach determination values indicating that the random numbers for reach do not reach. Thus, in this embodiment, in the high probability non-working time saving state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is made the same as the low probability non-working time saving state.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319), and when it is determined that the reach is lost (YES in step S5120) , a reach flag indicating that the change is a reach is set, and the process ends (step S5121).

FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 111, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the big hit determination process (step S5305) is determined. The result of the lottery process is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S5331).

If the big hit flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. By comparing with the selected symbol determination table, a big hit symbol is determined as a mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped (step S5332).

As shown in FIG. 110(B), the symbol determination table on the first special symbol side contains random numbers for the first big hit symbol (here, total 200 Random numbers for the first jackpot pattern) are stored in a form associated with each other. In addition, as shown in FIG. 110 (C), the symbol determination table on the side of the second special symbol contains the second big hit symbol random number ( Here, a total of 200 second jackpot symbol random numbers) are stored in association with each other.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of the big hit by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired random number for the big win design. The symbol determination table of this example is set so that the kind of big win determined based on the random numbers for the first big-hit pattern and the kind of big-win determined based on the random numbers for the second big-hit pattern are different. . More specifically, the distribution rate (allocation) between the probability variable jackpot that triggers the transition to the high probability state and the normal jackpot that does not trigger the transition to the high probability state is the same, but for the first jackpot pattern The expected value of the game balls that can be acquired by the big win determined based on the second big win symbol random number is larger than the expected value of the game balls that can be acquired by the big win determined by the random number. ing.

The following is a concise summary of specific game and performance contents for each type of jackpot.
1. After the big winning symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the big winning hole 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have won the big winning hole 2103. By repeating the opening and closing pattern (round game) eight times to close when detected in the 8R jackpot game state in which the game ball can (easy) enter the big prize opening 2103, and after this 8R jackpot game state is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot game state, a battle production (battle victory production) is performed in which a specific character wins, and in the high-probability time-saving state 8R probability variable jackpot A controlled to the production mode shown in the production display device 1600 to be in a relatively advantageous state

2. After the big winning symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the big winning hole 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have won the big winning hole 2103. By repeating the opening and closing pattern (round game) eight times to close when detected in the 8R jackpot game state in which the game ball can (easy) enter the big prize opening 2103, and after this 8R jackpot game state is controlled to a low-probability time-saving state until the variable display of special symbols is digested 100 times (or a jackpot is won within the period until 100 times are digested), and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot game state A battle performance (battle defeat performance) in which a specific character is defeated is performed, and in a low-probability time-saving state, the 8R normal jackpot is controlled to a performance mode in which a performance display device 1600 indicates a relatively disadvantageous state.

3. After the big winning symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the big winning hole 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have won the big winning hole 2103. By repeating 16 times the opening and closing pattern (round game) that is closed when detected in , the game ball is controlled to a 16R big win game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2103, and after this 16R big win game state is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 16R jackpot game state, the production of whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (16 rounds) ) is performed, and after a predetermined period of time from being controlled to the high-probability time-saving state has passed, the effect display device 1600 indicates that it is in a relatively advantageous state. 16R variable jackpot

4. After the big winning symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the big winning hole 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have won the big winning hole 2103. By repeating the opening and closing pattern (round game) eight times to close when detected in the 8R jackpot game state in which the game ball can (easy) enter the big prize opening 2103, and after this 8R jackpot game state is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot game state, the production of whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (16 rounds) ) is performed, and after a predetermined period of time from being controlled to the high-probability time-saving state has passed, the effect display device 1600 indicates that it is in a relatively advantageous state. 8R probability variable jackpot B

5. After the big winning symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the big winning hole 2103 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds), or the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have won the big winning hole 2103. By repeating twice the opening and closing pattern (round game) that is closed when detected in , the game ball is controlled to a 2R big winning game state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the big winning opening 2103, and after this 2R big winning game state, special A low-probability time-saving state is controlled until the variation display of patterns is completed 100 times (or a jackpot is won within the period until 100 times are completed), and a specific character is selected during the execution period of the 2R jackpot game state. performs a battle performance (battle defeat performance) in which is defeated, and in a low-probability time-saving state, the 2R normal jackpot is controlled to a performance mode in which the performance display device 1600 indicates that it is in a relatively disadvantageous state.

In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) for opening the second starting port 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 does not occur, and only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs, and there is a reserved ball of the second special symbol. Except for the case, only the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 is executed, and the big hits (8R probability variable big hit A, 8R normal big hit) related to the first special symbol are generated. Similarly, the game ball does not enter the first starting port 2002 in the right-handed state. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 occurs, and the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1186 except when there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol Only the variable display is executed, and the big hits (16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) related to the second special symbol are generated.

In addition, in the big hit related to the first special symbol, the opening and closing pattern of opening the big winning hole 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated eight times at maximum, and only about 1000 game balls are paid out. In the big hit related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay out about 2000 game balls by repeating 16 times the opening and closing pattern in which the big winning hole 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) at maximum.

In addition, when the 8R probability variation big hit A is determined in the first special symbol stop pattern setting process, the 8R probability variation big hit A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and when the 8R normal jackpot is determined, the 8R normal jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol. decide. In addition, although not shown, when the 16R probability variation big hit is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 16R probability variation big hit pattern is determined as the big hit pattern, and when the 8R probability variation big hit B is determined, the 8R probability variation big hit pattern is determined as the big hit symbol. The B symbol is determined, and when the 2R normal jackpot is determined, the 2R normal jackpot pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern.

Further, if the big hit flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the small hit flag is set as the process of step S5333. And as a result, if the small hit flag is set in the process corresponding to the step S5333 in the second special symbol process process (step S5239), the small hit symbol ( After determining the special pattern stop mode) (step S5334), the process proceeds to step S5337.

Furthermore, if the small hit flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 decides that the special symbol is to be a losing symbol as a mode of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol (step S5336), and then proceeds to step S5337. do.

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the process of step S5337 as the process of step S5337. (It may be one that instructs the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set. And after that, as the process of step S5338, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variably displayed, and the left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → Stop and display in the order of the middle decorative pattern (the left, middle and right decorative patterns may be synchronously displayed with the same pattern and stopped and displayed at the same time)). For example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines a combination of three left, middle and right decorative symbols when winning a jackpot of a type other than the 2R normal jackpot. On the other hand, when a 2R normal jackpot is obtained, a specific symbol combination (a combination in which at least one of left, middle and right decorative symbols is not the same as other symbols) is determined. In addition, when the reach loss is specified, the lost pattern with the reach (the left and right decorative patterns are a combination of the same patterns "0" to "9" and the middle decorative patterns are different; the reach loss When the missing pattern is specified, the missing pattern (a combination of left, middle and right decorative patterns in which at least the left and right decorative patterns are different) is determined. The stop symbol determined in this way is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has passed (when the game effect is finished).

In any case, when a win is obtained as a result of progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU 1511a causes the effect display (special display mode) at the time of the win to appear before the start of the big win game, so that the big win game can be played. is started, the effect display during the jackpot game is made to appear.

FIG. 112 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. If it is (step S5341), select the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big hit determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop design setting process (step S5342), small hit flag is set (step S5343), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the small hit is selected (step S5344), and if the reach flag is set (step S5345), the variation pattern table at the time of reach ( not shown) is selected (step S5346), and if none of the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and the reach flag are set, that is, if it becomes a normal loss (a loss that does not execute the reach effect), at the time of loss is selected (step S5347).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table and the random number for the variation display pattern read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S5348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 is set to start the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 (step S5349). In addition, the main control MPU 1310a sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the variation timer (step S5350). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5355) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S5283), this process is terminated. As a result, the variable display control of the first special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display device 1403 only for the variation time thus determined, and the effect display device 1600 performs the effect control in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. will take place.

In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is a random number for judging the big hit (random number for judging the first big hit, random number for judging the second big hit) and random number for the big hit design (random number for the first big hit design, random number for the second big hit design). A plurality of types are provided for each determination result based on. In addition, the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table includes a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). They are stored so as to be associated with the random numbers for the first variation display pattern. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a reads in step S5302 of the selected variation pattern table and the first special symbol normal processing among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the random number for judging the big hit and the random number for the big hit symbol. By comparing with the random number for the fluctuation display pattern, and obtaining the fluctuation time information associated with the read random number for the fluctuation display pattern from this table, the special design (first special design, second special design) determine the variation pattern of As a result, the determination process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

However, as described above, in this example, since there is no winning of a small hit, the variation pattern table at the time of a small win is not used. In this example, a small win is not won, but a small win may be won.

In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example, it is set to determine the mode type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach effect is to be executed and the random number for the variation display pattern. It is For example, in the non-time saving state, 164 types of variable display pattern random numbers out of 241 types of variable display pattern random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that one of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 Variation display pattern random numbers are set as determination values (164 to 222) indicating execution of one of the super ready-to-win performances with low expectations for big wins, and 18 kinds of random numbers for variation display patterns have high expectations for big wins. It is set as a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that one of the super ready-to-win effects is executed.

In addition, the super reach performance (SP performance) is a player who has a higher expectation for a big hit than the normal reach performance, and a player who wants to generate a big hit game state when the super reach performance is executed. expectations are rising. That is, such a super ready-to-win effect has the highest selection rate in the variation pattern table at the time of the big win, and even if a loss is finally displayed by this, the player's expectation of the big win game state. will be able to increase However, in reality, in order to sufficiently raise the player's expectation for the jackpot game state, during the period when the super ready-to-win effect is being executed, a highly anticipated advance notice effect that is drawn separately from the fluctuation pattern appears. It is required to do (combine).

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss used when determining the fluctuation time of the first special symbol provided corresponding to the random number for the first big hit determination and the random number for the first big hit pattern, the non-time saving state and the time saving state , and a variable time of 12 seconds is set in common. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the second big hit determination random number and the second symbol random number and used when determining the variation time of the second special symbol, 0.1 seconds to as a time saving state A variable time of 12 seconds can be set, and a variable time of 12 seconds is set as a non-time saving state. In this way, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the same during the time saving state and during the non-working time saving state, and during the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the time saving state, the winning of the game ball to the second start port 2004 As well as prompting, the time for the player to enter the game ball to the second start port 2004 is ensured.

Also, if 0.1 seconds is selected from the variation time at the time of losing the second special symbol, each game ball that is driven into the game area 5a at intervals of 0.6 seconds in the time saving state (high probability time saving state etc.) Discharge without being subjected to lottery processing is suppressed.

That is, the right-handed game ball is supplied to the area directly above the gate portion 2003 . Then, when the same game ball is received in the gate unit 2003 from this area when in a time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), a hit as a normal pattern is obtained (for example, winning probability is 100%), The movable piece involved in opening and closing the second starting port 2004 is maintained in an open state for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example). As a result, in a situation where the second starting port 2004 can be accepted one after another (almost all of the game balls hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be received by the second starting port 2004). Even if there is, every time those game balls are accepted, the lottery on the second special symbol side can be digested one after another with a high jackpot probability (probability in a high probability state) around "approximately 1/32". become possible.

And in this example, since the game ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds when the player is operating the handle 302, in the time saving state (high probability time saving state etc.), the second Game balls are often received at the starting port 2004 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. In this regard, in this example, as described above, the variation pattern table when the second special symbol is lost based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 2004 is extremely It can be set to a short time of 0.1 second. That is, in this case, when a loss is obtained, the pattern variation is completed only in the time (0.1 seconds) less than the shooting interval (0.6 seconds) of the game ball, so 0.6 seconds. Even in a situation where game balls launched at intervals are received one after another in the second starting port 2004, the game balls are prevented from being discharged without being subjected to lottery processing. .

FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S5283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As a process of (1), 1 is subtracted from the variable timer in which the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process (step S5282) for the variable pattern is set. As a result, when it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the randomly selected variable time has passed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, in the process of this step S5373, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so as to shift to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284), this process is terminated.

It should be noted that, even though the variable timer is decremented by 1 (step S5371), if the variable time timer is not 0, until the variable time timer becomes 0 (until the time at which the design should be fixed and stopped), Each time the timer interrupt process is performed, the processes of steps S5371 and S5372 are performed.

FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of , display control is performed to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display device 1403, and the first special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing derived display of the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S5382).

Further, when the big hit flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a big win start command indicating to start the big win game state (step S5387), The standby time until the start of the jackpot game state (time for displaying the start of the jackpot game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, a jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot game state is being executed is set, and if the high-probability flag is set, the high-probability flag is reset, and if the time-saving flag is set. The time saving flag is reset (step S5389), and the variation counter is reset, and the first special symbol process flag is the initial value. S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the jackpot executing flag is set in the processing of step S5235, and the jackpot game is played in the jackpot control processing (step S5240a). state will be executed.

Incidentally, the jackpot start command is a command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S5387, a jackpot start command (8R probability variable jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R probability variable jackpot) corresponding to the type of jackpot (8R probability variable jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) Jackpot command, 8R probability variable jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command) are set. As a result, the production of the jackpot game state (battle production or additional challenge production) corresponding to the type of jackpot indicated by the jackpot start command is executed by the production display device 1600, lamps/LEDs, speakers, and the like.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5386, when it is determined that the big hit flag is not set (NO in step S5386), first, it is determined whether or not the low probability time saving state (step S5390). Then, when it is in the low-probability time-saving state, it is determined whether the number of fluctuations of the special symbols digested after being controlled in the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit value (here, 100 times) ( step S5391). That is, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested after being controlled to the low probability time saving state reaches the predetermined upper limit value (100 times), the conditions for ending the low probability time saving state are satisfied, and time saving The function is stopped and the normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state) is entered (step S5392).

Then, after the processing related to the time saving function is performed in this way, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S5393). And as a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is set (YES in step S5393), a small hit start command indicating starting the small hit game state is set (step S5394), and the small hit game is set. Waiting time until the start of the state (time for displaying the effect of starting the small winning game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, set a small winning in-execution flag indicating that the small winning game state is being executed (step S5396), so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value of the first special symbol process flag (step S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the small hit executing flag is set in the process of step S5236, and in the above-described small hit control process (step S5240b) A small winning game state is executed. Incidentally, unlike when a big win is won, the game state is not changed when such a small win game state is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (NO in step S5393), the first special symbol process is performed without performing the processing related to the big hit or the small hit as a loss. When the flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S5394), this process is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the flag during execution of the big hit or the flag during execution of the small hit is not set (steps S5235, S236), and a new game is started according to the state of suspension. (Lottery and symbol control) processing related to progress is performed (steps S5237 to S5239).

FIG. 115 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116).

Now, in the process of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310, as the process of step S5402, first executes the gate part passing process such as acquiring the normal random number of the normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM. do.

Then, in the normal design process processing, one of the following five process processing is selectively executed according to the normal design process flag.

1. Ordinary symbol normal processing (step S5403) in which the ordinary random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read out, and lottery processing for the display mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the ordinary symbol is performed based on the read ordinary random number (step S5403)
2. Ordinary design fluctuation time determination processing (step S5404) in which lottery processing or the like is performed for the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the ordinary design displayed on the ordinary design display device 1402 based on the ordinary design fluctuation random number.
3. Ordinary design fluctuation processing (step S5405) to wait until the fluctuation display of the ordinary design in the ordinary design indicator 1402 is stopped.
4. Variation display of the normal symbols so that the mode when the variation control of the normal symbols is stopped determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbols is stopped is displayed on the normal symbol display device 1402. Normal design stop processing (step S5406) to stop
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal pattern becomes a mode suggesting "normal pattern winning", the movable piece is opened and the game ball is accepted to the second start port 2004. Ordinary electric accessary product opening process (step S5407)

In addition, the normal design process flag is operated so that the initial value indicates that the normal design normal process (step S5403) should be performed.

FIG. 116 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the gate passage processing (step S5402).

Now, in the process of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate section 2003, the above-described The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the counter value of the normal holding number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as the process of step S5411. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value of "4".

In the processing of this step S5411, when it is determined that the number of suspensions of the normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 in order to newly suspend the variable display control of the normal symbols processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S5412, the normal pending number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S5413, the normal random number and the normal pattern fluctuation random number are obtained from the random number counter. Then, as the process of step S5414, each random number thus acquired is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal reservation number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a.

However, in the process of step S5411, when it is determined that the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly reserved. That is, by not executing the processing of steps S5412 to S5414, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly suspended.

FIG. 117 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal process (step S5403).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. Based on the counter value of the normal reserved number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the reserved state. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the pending state, then as the process of step S5422, the normal symbols stored in the normal symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a Of the random numbers related to the display mode of the pattern (for example, normal random numbers, normal pattern fluctuation random numbers), the random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out from the same RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S5423 and S5424, the normal reservation number counter is counted down, and when the fluctuation display of the normal symbols stored in each storage area of the normal reservation storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stopped Random numbers related to the display mode (normal random numbers, normal fluctuation random numbers) are shifted in the first-in first-out mode.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 are sequentially selected from the first (earmost) area. Remember. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the condition for starting the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is established, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area is read. , is moved to the N-1th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbols occurred is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). .

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the current game state is a time saving state (high probability time saving state) (step S5426), selects a normal figure hit determination table (not shown) during time saving ( Step S5426), if the current gaming state is non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S5425), select the normal figure per determination table (not shown) during non-time saving ( Step S5427), it compares with the normal random number which is read with normal design normal processing step S5422 with the normal design hit decision table which is selected (step S5428).

In addition, the normal pattern hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and is used when the game state is time saving (high probability time saving state). It is provided with a normal pattern hit determination table for non-working time saving used in the case of time (low probability non-working time saving state, high probability non-working time saving state). Then, in the time-saving normal pattern hit determination table that is referenced for comparison with the normal random numbers, all 255 types of normal random numbers match the normal pattern per decision value, which indicates that the normal pattern has been elected. The normal random numbers are associated with each other so as not to coincide with the normal pattern deviation judgment value indicating that it is lost. In this way, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 during the time saving, it is always won in the normal game, and the movable piece is opened and the game ball to the second start port 2004 Acceptance is controlled. Not all of the 255 types, but more normal random numbers than in the non-time saving state may be matched with the normal pattern per judgment value indicating that the normal pattern is won.

In addition, in the non-short-time general pattern hit determination table that is referenced for comparison with normal random numbers, all 255 types of normal random numbers can match the normal pattern per determination value indicating that they have been elected per normal pattern. Instead, the normal random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the normal pattern deviation determination value indicating that the normal pattern is out. In this way, in the non-working hours, even if there is a passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003, because there is no winning per normal figure, the movable piece 2106 is in the open state second start opening There is no control over the acceptance of game balls into 2004. However, as described above, it may be possible to obtain a normal pattern hit even in a non-time-saving state, in this case, the probability of winning is lower than the time-saving state (for example, 50%), and the lottery result of the normal pattern is a hit. When the movable piece of the second starting port 2004 is opened for a shorter time than the time saving state, for example, for 2 seconds to allow the reception of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, then move forward again to the second You may make it impossible to accept a game ball to the second starting port 2004. - 特許庁

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected normal pattern per determination table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal pattern normal processing, and when it is determined that it is per normal pattern (step S5429 ), after setting the normal pattern per flag indicating that the variation has been elected per normal pattern (step S5430), per normal pattern as a mode of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal pattern (stop pattern of the normal pattern) Design is determined (step S5431), on the other hand, as a result of comparison with the normal random number read out in step S5422 of the normal design normal process with the selected normal design per determination table, when it is determined that it is out, the fluctuation of the normal design A normal design is determined as a mode (stop design of normal design) at the time of control stop (step S5432). And after that, when the above-mentioned normal design process flag is updated (step S5433) so that the process shifts to the normal design fluctuation time determination process (step S5404), this process is terminated.

While such control by the main control MPU 1310a is being performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the above-described various commands transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a, thereby performing the above-described peripheral control unit steady-state processing (received command analysis processing ( In step S1022)), the game situation is grasped each time, and an effect can be executed according to the game situation.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a situation in which starting winning has occurred, and when in this situation, performs control related to pending display and look-ahead effects in response to starting winning. And after that, by updating the process flag based on the grasped gaming situation, the following variation pattern designation command reception waiting processing, production design fluctuation start processing, production design fluctuation processing, production design fluctuation stop processing, jackpot display processing , jackpot game processing, or jackpot end effect processing.

Variation pattern specification command reception waiting process: Until the variation pattern command related to the variation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, the design is not in a variation state and the control related to the big hit is not performed (demonstration etc.) While performing control, when receiving a variation pattern command related to the variation pattern from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the performance symbol variation start process.

Production pattern variation start process: Various production contents (production pattern, advance notice production, etc.) in the pattern fluctuation period are determined based on the fluctuation pattern command, etc., and the variation of the decoration pattern is started based on the determined production contents. to control. After that, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during effect symbol fluctuation. Of the variation patterns (production patterns), most of the "variation patterns (production patterns) that stop with a big hit pattern" are prepared in a pair with the "variation patterns that stop with a losing pattern (production pattern)". , and they function as the same variation pattern (production pattern), so that a production is provided as to whether a big hit pattern appears or a losing pattern appears. Therefore, hereinafter, when describing the variation pattern (production pattern), when describing such as "predetermined variation pattern" or "specific variation pattern", unless otherwise noted, "stop with a big hit pattern It means both "predetermined variation pattern (specific variation pattern)" and "predetermined variation pattern (specific variation pattern) that is stopped with a losing pattern", and as a result of the progress of the production content in the same manner It will arrive at a branching point where either a big hit pattern or a losing pattern appears.

Production design fluctuation processing: Various production contents determined in production design fluctuation start processing are controlled to start at each timing during the design fluctuation period, and when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the process flag is changed to the production design Update to the value corresponding to the fluctuation stop processing.
Effect design fluctuation stop processing: Based on the reception of a command (design determination command) instructing to stop all designs, stop the fluctuation of the decorative design and perform control such as deriving and displaying the display result (stop design). When the decorative pattern is to be stopped by the big win pattern, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the big win display process, and when the decorative pattern is to be stopped by the losing pattern, the value of the process flag is changed to the variation pattern specification command reception waiting process. Update to the corresponding value.

Big win display processing: Controls effects (such as display effects for notifying the occurrence of a big win on the effect display device 1600) during the period from when the decorative symbols stop with the big win symbols until the start of the big win game. After that, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the big-hit game.

During jackpot game processing: Various effects are controlled during the occurrence of the jackpot game state. When the jackpot game state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect processing.

Big hit end effect processing: In the effect display device 1600, the effect (such as a display effect for informing the player that the big win game state is over) is controlled during the period from the end of the big win game state to the change allowable state. . Then, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern specifying command reception waiting process.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a determination table T1 of an effect pattern (fluctuation effect) referred to in the effect symbol variation start process when the game is in the normal game state.
As shown in FIG. 118, in the determination table T1, an effect pattern (variation effect) is associated with each of the variation numbers 1 to 22 indicated by the variation pattern command. Therefore, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires a variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a, it determines an effect pattern (variation effect) associated with the variation pattern command based on the determination table T1, and determines the determined effect pattern. Based on (variation performance), control is performed so that the variation of the decorative pattern is started.

Note that the effect pattern (variation effect) does not necessarily have to correspond one-to-one with the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command. For example, one variation number indicated by a variation pattern command is associated with a plurality of production patterns (variation production), and one of these production patterns (variation production) is determined based on a production lottery or game situation. You may make it As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment also associates some of the variable numbers 1 to 22 with a plurality of effect patterns.

In addition, although this will also be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after determining the effect pattern (variation effect) in this way, a notice lottery (determination process of the notice effect) is performed based on the result of the big hit determination, the symbol type, and the change pattern. , by performing control (production pattern fluctuation process) to make the notice effect won in the notice lottery appear at a predetermined timing while the above-determined effect pattern (variation effect) is performed, a plurality of effect contents are performed. The degree of expectation for the appearance of the jackpot pattern is suggested by the mode of appearance of these patterns, which can be combined.

And conventionally, among such composite effects, there are cases where the same specific advance notice effect (for example, timer effect) is executed by making a plurality of appearances while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed. By doing so, it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained. However, since the advance notice effect can be combined only when the expectation for the appearance of the big hit pattern is high, the frequency of executing a plurality of timer effects while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed naturally decreases. , it was considered difficult to sufficiently improve the interest in games.

As will be described later, the "timer effect" refers to a predetermined effect that appears during execution of the effect pattern (variable effect), and the count display toward the timing at which the predetermined effect is performed is set to the first predetermined numerical value. (e.g. "60 seconds") to a second predetermined value (e.g. "0 seconds"), or as a waiting display (preparing, etc.) before starting the count display. is. That is, in this case, when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined number is started as the timer effect, it is guaranteed that some effect will always occur when the second predetermined value is reached. Become. Alternatively, an effect (for example, a conversation notice or a cut-in A , B, etc.) are subject to the timer effect, it is guaranteed that an advantageous effect result will always occur when the second predetermined value is reached. However, in the timer effect (particularly, the timer effect on the advance notice side executed as a result of the advance notice lottery), at least when the count display is started, which effect is the object of the effect is kept secret. It is desirable to In addition, the ``target of the timer effect'' is the effect that appears when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined value as the timer effect reaches the second predetermined value (for example, ``0 seconds''). That is, in the timer effect, a count display is performed toward the timing at which the effect object occurs.

In the "timer effect" according to this embodiment, the elapsed time from the start of counting is displayed to the second decimal place, and the number of seconds and the like are displayed accurately. However, it does not necessarily have to be executed as such a timer effect, and if it is executed as a count effect in which a count display such as count up or countdown is performed, the elapsed time since the count started ( seconds, etc.).

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in addition to the timer effect (notice-side timer effect) as the effect content that appears only when winning the advance notice lottery, the effect pattern ( It is possible to execute a timer effect (fluctuation side timer effect) incorporated in advance as the effect content of the variable effect). That is, in this case, if the count effect display is executed as "the effect contents of the advance notice effect that functions to increase the expectation of the big hit with respect to the effect pattern determined based on the variation pattern command", it is only the announcement side timer effect. However, by executing it as "the effect content of the effect pattern itself determined based on the variation pattern command", the expectation level is changed from the degree of expectation of the big hit indicated by the effect pattern determined based on the variation pattern command. It is possible to make the count effect display (timer effect) appear without wastefully adding up (adding the expectation by satisfying the condition of "winning in advance notice lottery"). For example, when the expected degree of jackpot when a specific effect pattern determined based on the variation pattern command appears is ``20%'', the expected degree of big win is increased by the function of compound effect when the advance notice side timer effect is further executed. As a result, it becomes "40%", for example, and the appearance frequency has to be reduced accordingly, whereas a big hit is expected when a variable side timer effect is executed as the effect content of the specific effect pattern itself. It is possible to execute the timer effect with the degree set to "20%" (it can appear only by selecting a specific variation pattern), and the frequency of appearance can be preferably maintained.

It should be noted that the degree of expectation for a big hit when an effect pattern (variable effect) appears in the determination table T1 differs depending on the variation number (further effect pattern), and basically the greater the variation number, the greater the expectation for a big win. It tends to be higher. For example, in the effect patterns corresponding to the variable numbers 5 (6), 9 (10), and 17 (18), variable side timer effects are executed in which "conversation notice" is the object of effect for all of the effects. The appearance ratio is variation number 5 (6) > variation number 9 (10) > variation number 17 (18), whereas the jackpot expectation at the time of appearance is variation number 5 (6) < variation number 9 ( 10) It is set so that <variation number 17 (18). Also here, for convenience of explanation, only the determination table referred to in the normal game state will be described in detail, but even in the determination table referred to in the low probability time saving state and high probability time saving state, the effect content of the effect pattern itself A production pattern (count fluctuation pattern) in which a variable-side timer production can be executed is included, and can appear at a probability different from that in the normal game state.

Also, in the determination table T1, the variation numbers 3 to 6 are the same in that the same normal ready-to-win effect is performed, but the variable numbers 5 and 6 can execute the variable side timer effect with the conversation notice as the object of effect. It differs from variation numbers 3 and 4 in that respect. Variation numbers 7 to 14 are the same in that the same character leech effect is performed. 12 executes a variable timer effect with cut-in A as the object of effect, and with variable numbers 13 and 14, a conversation notice and cut-in A are executed, and a variable timer effect with them as object of effect is executed. different in that they can be Variation numbers 15 to 22 are the same in that the same SP ready-to-win effect is performed. At 20, a variable timer effect is executed with cut-in B as the object of effect, and at variable numbers 21 and 22, a conversation notice and cut-in B are executed, and a variable timer effect with them as the object of effect is executed. different in that they can be Note that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when the variable timer effect with the cut-ins A and B as the target is performed than when the variable timer effect with the conversation notice as the target is performed. is set so that the degree of expectation for a big hit tends to be higher when the variable side timer effect is executed with both the conversation notice and the cut-ins A and B as the objects of effect.

In addition, "conversation notice" is a production that can appear at a relatively early stage after the production pattern (decorative pattern variation production) is executed, and is often made with a relatively low level of expectation. On the other hand, cut-ins A and B can appear at a relatively late stage after the performance pattern (decorative design variation performance) is executed, and have a relatively high degree of expectation. It is a production that is often performed (or a production that always builds up a relatively high degree of expectation). Therefore, the "conversation notice" is set to have a higher appearance rate (execution probability) than other effects (cut-ins A, B, character A, B, etc., which will be described later) with higher expectations than this. It is supposed to be In addition, the "cut-in" that appears as the content of the variable effect is executed in a manner equivalent to the cut-in A that appears as the content of the effect of the notice effect in the character reach, whereas in the SP reach, the notice It is executed so as to correspond to cut-in B instead of cut-in A appearing as the effect content of the effect.

Moreover, in the determination table T1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118, the effect contents (effect pattern ) is assigned as a variable side timer effect. On top of this, if the variation pattern is ``predetermined types such as shortened variation and normal reach performance with low expectations (for example, variation numbers 1 to 6, etc.)'', the count effect display as the advance notice side timer effect is displayed. The variation pattern is the "variation pattern for executing the variable timer effect ( count variation patterns of variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22, etc.)”, the variation pattern is of the predetermined type (for example, variation (numbers 1 to 6, etc.) are designed to be low.

Here, 14 variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) are prepared as count variation patterns in which the variation side timer effect is executed, and two of them (0 Only the variation patterns (variation numbers 5 and 6) corresponding to the above-mentioned predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6, etc.) can be set individually, so the corresponding ratio is "2/14". On the other hand, 8 variation patterns (variation numbers 1 to 4, 7, 8, 15, 16) are prepared as variation patterns in which the variation side timer effect is not executed, of which 4 variation patterns (variation Numbers 1 to 4) correspond to the predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6, etc.), so the applicable ratio is "4/8".

In such a configuration, when the effect content of the variation pattern is one that can perform the count effect display (variation side timer effect) (count variation pattern), the advance notice is higher than the case where the variation pattern does not perform the variable side timer effect. The ratio of determining that the count effect display (notice-side timer effect) cannot be executed as the effect content of the effect is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the appearance of a plurality of count displays within one production pattern (fluctuation production) without increasing the level of expectation uselessly and lowering the frequency of appearance.

As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (variation effect) determined in the effect symbol variation start process is counted as a count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). ), the rate at which the above-mentioned advance notice timer effect appears differs depending on which count variation pattern the count variation pattern is. For example, as shown in FIG. 118, when the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the advance notice timer effect does not appear at all, and the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 9 to 14 are executed. The timer effect on the advance notice side can appear with a moderate probability of lottery, and when the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 17 to 22 are executed, the timer effect on the advance notice side can appear with a high probability of lottery. ing.

It should be noted that even when the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the above-described advance notice-side timer effect may appear at a low probability. In addition, even if any of the performance patterns corresponding to the variable numbers 15 to 22 in which the timer performance on the advance notice side can appear with a high lottery probability is executed, the big win is actually more likely than the case of losing. The above-mentioned advance notice side timer effect can appear with a higher lottery probability in the performance pattern that wins , and the variation number 22 can appear with a higher lottery probability than the variation number 16.例文帳に追加ing.

With such a configuration, the count effect display can be performed in advance depending on whether the change pattern is the first count change pattern (for example, change number 10) or the second count change pattern (for example, change number 22). The ratio of execution as the content of the effect (notice-side timer effect) will be different. Therefore, among the count variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) in which the ratio of appearance of a plurality of count displays in one production pattern (variation production) is high, the type Depending on the situation, it is possible to further increase the ratio of appearance of a plurality of count displays, so that it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

In particular, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if the same reach type effect content appears in the effect pattern (for example, character reach, SP reach), the variable timer effect is included as the effect content. In the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 17 to 22), the notice-side timer is set within the execution period of the effect pattern compared to the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 15 and 16) that does not include the variable timer effect as the effect content. The rate at which the effect appears (the rate at which it is determined by the preliminary lottery that the timer effect on the advance notice side is to be executed) is set to be high. That is, in this case, two timer effects (fluctuation side timer effect, advance notice side timer effect) appear within one effect pattern only by requiring the degree of expectation for a big hit that one advance notice side timer effect is won in the advance notice lottery. As a result, the double timer performance opportunity can be realized without uselessly increasing the degree of expectation for a big win.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (variation effect) determined in the effect pattern variation start process is the count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). Even in this case, there are variable side timer effects (variable side count effect display) in which "conversation notice" is the object of production and variable side timer effects (variable side count effect display) in which "cut-in" is the object of production. , the mode of count display (the form and color of count numbers, etc.) is different. That is, in this case, even if a production pattern (for example, variation numbers 9 and 11) having the same ready-to-win production as the production content is executed, the state of count display of the variable side timer production (variable side count production display) is confirmed. By doing so, coupled with ``the ratio of appearance of the above-mentioned advance notice timer effect is set to differ according to which count fluctuation pattern it is,'' the likelihood of appearance of the advance notice timer effect is recognized. can be expected.

Regarding the mode of the count display that appears in the notice-side timer effect (prediction-side count effect display), regardless of whether or not the effect target is the same (conversation notice, cut-in), the variable-side timer effect (variation-side It may be different from (or at least different from) the count display mode (conversation notice, cut-in) appearing in the count effect display), or may be the same as the same mode (or at least the same as either) .

However, it is relatively expected that the count display executed as the notice-side timer effect (preview-side count effect display) will be executed in a common manner regardless of the type of effect that is the object of the effect. This is useful in improving the player's sense of anticipation by making the player aware that the forewarning-side timer effect set to a high degree is appearing. In this sense, it is more desirable that the notice-side timer effect be different from any of the count display modes (conversation notice, cut-in) appearing in the variable-side timer effect (variation-side count effect display). A plurality of modes with different expectations (for example, blue count, red count, etc.) are prepared for the above-mentioned common aspect of the advance notice side timer effect (prediction side count effect display), and one of them is executed. You may do so.

In addition, in order to make it possible to more preferably recognize that the advance notice-side timer effect is being executed, a count display when the advance notice-side timer effect is executed and a count display when the variable-side timer effect is executed are displayed. It is desirable to make the count speed (for example, the speed at which the numbers change during count-up and count-down) different. With such a configuration, after the timer effect is started, even during the period in which the count display is in progress, the count speed of the timer effect is made to be watched, and the expectation is relatively low. It is possible to make the player interested in which one of the advance notice side timer performance with a high expectation is being executed and to maintain the interest in the game during the timer expiration period.

Also, at this time, in the variable timer effect, depending on the effect target (conversation notice, cut-in), the count display is performed at a speed relatively close to (or the same speed as) the count speed of the advance notice timer effect ( cut-in) and a mode (conversation notice) in which the count is displayed at a speed not relatively close to the counting speed of the timer effect on the advance notice side, it is possible to determine whether the timer effect on the notice side is being executed. It is possible to make it more interesting by varying the difficulty of judging. Also, in the variable side timer effect (or advance notice side timer effect), the count is displayed by repeating the appearance and disappearance of the count number, whereas in the notice side timer effect (or fluctuation side timer effect), the count number is displayed continuously. You may make it count-display by displaying.

According to such a configuration, when a situation occurs in which the count display of the variable-side timer effect and the count display of the advance notice-side timer effect are executed at the same time, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the advance notice-side timer effect is being executed. It is expected that it will be possible to play games, and that the interest in games will be improved.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the count display is performed for the variation patterns (count variation patterns such as variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, and 17 to 22) corresponding to the variation side timer effects. A plurality of production patterns with different start timings or end timings (total count or time required for all counts) are set as selectable production patterns. Then, when a variation pattern corresponding to the variable side timer effect is acquired, one of the plurality of effect patterns is determined based on a random number for effect, etc., and the count display of the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer are performed. By making the easiness of simultaneous execution with the count display of the effect different (for example, the greater the total number of counts, the easier it is to overlap), the easiness of determining whether or not the advance notice timer effect is being executed can be varied. I try to make it interesting

In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of production patterns (the production target of the timer production and the reach The contents of the production are the same), but there are multiple production patterns with different start timings or end timings of the count display (total count or time required to complete all counts) (however, they are not subject to timer production) The type of effect to be executed and the type of ready-to-win effect to be executed as the effect content of the variation pattern are the same for each effect pattern), and a plurality of different variation patterns may be prepared for one-to-one correspondence.

Also, the count display number (count total number) when it appears in the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect are different, or even if the same specific count display number can be selected, the variable side timer effect and the notice If the selection rate of the specific count display number is made different between the side timer effect and the difficulty of judging whether or not the advance notice side timer effect is being executed, it becomes possible to add interest. .

Also, if the timer effect on the notice side is executed by countdown display, and the timer effect on the variable side is executed by display of countup, it is possible to definitely grasp whether or not the timer effect on the notice side is being executed. It is expected that it will become possible to play games and greatly improve the interest in games. Also, while the notice-side timer effect is executed with a countdown display, the variable-side timer effect for a specific effect (e.g., conversation notice) is executed with a count-up display, and a different effect from the specific effect (e.g., (Cut-in) is executed with a countdown display, the difficulty of judging whether or not the notice-side timer effect is being executed is made different according to the effect object, making it more interesting. be able to give.

Also, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, there are cases where the same effect is targeted for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, and there are cases where different effects are targeted for the effect. to control. And when the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is targeted for the variable side timer effect and the advance notice side timer effect, compared to the case where different effects are targeted for the variable side timer effect and the advance notice side timer effect It is set so that the rate of lowering the expectation of a big hit is high, and even if the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is targeted for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, each count display The end timing is made different.

That is, in this case, even if the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is targeted for effect in the variable timer effect and the advance notice timer effect, one of the change timer effect and the advance notice timer effect is displayed first by a predetermined value. , and the other count display continues, so at this point, it seems as if a different effect is being performed (the timer effect is executed in a relatively high-expectation mode). It looks as if After that, the other count display that has been continued will reach a predetermined value in a manner that makes it clear that the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is the object of effect and will be terminated. Even if the timer effect on the side that finished reveals that the conversation notice with relatively low expectations is targeted for effect, a different effect that can appear after that is targeted for effect ( It is expected that the sense of anticipation for the fact that the timer effect is being executed in a manner with a relatively high degree of expectation will be maintained, and that the interest in the game will be improved.

Also, in this way, when the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is targeted for effect in the variable timer effect and the advance notice timer effect, the timing when the variable timer effect reaches a predetermined value and the advance notice timer effect are predetermined. It is desirable to display separate indications corresponding to the end of the count (for example, "count successful!", "chance up!", etc.) at the timing when the numerical value is reached.

More specifically, a variable-side timer effect and an advance-notice-side timer effect for effecting "conversation notice" executed as a change-side or advance-notice-side effect appear within one effect pattern. In this case, the count display of the variable side timer effect and the count display of the advance notice side timer effect are performed simultaneously. While the count display progresses according to the fluctuation side specific production ("Count success!", Effects according to the appearance of the conversation notice, etc.), the notice side timer production is related to the "conversation notice" Count display according to the notice side specific effect that occurs as the notice side effect ("Chance Up!", timer end display that appears according to the start timing of the conversation notice (or a predetermined number of seconds before the start of the effect), etc.) By advancing the game, different indications corresponding to the end of the count will appear at different timings.

By the way, the effects of the conversation notice and the cut-in are required to be executed without fail when they are the object of the variable-side timer effect (when the count variation pattern is determined). In particular, conversation notice and cut-in are effects that can be executed in a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation. It is required to appear in a highly expected manner. Therefore, the effect to be the effect target of the variable timer effect is incorporated in advance as the effect contents of the above effect pattern (variable effect), and the variable timer effect and the effect object can be changed only by executing the effect pattern. It is desirable to make it possible for each of the effects to be performed (a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation) to appear. However, instead of this, it is also possible to perform control so that when the variable timer effect is executed, the effect (a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation) to be targeted for the effect is always selected in the advance notice lottery. .

In addition, if each effect of the conversation notice and cut-in is not subject to the effect of the variable timer effect, it will be determined whether or not it will appear as the effect content of the notice in the notice lottery described later. A determination is made as to what aspect (relatively high or low expectations) should appear as the content of the side effect, and the appearance is controlled based on the result of the determination. .

Hereinafter, the production pattern determination processing using FIG. 118 will be summarized.
That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the variation pattern command, the symbol type command, etc. from the main control MPU 1310a, first, based on the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command and the symbol type indicated by the symbol type command, the current game Refer to the determination table according to the state. For example, if the production pattern is determined based on the pattern type, it is possible to give bias (expectation) to the probability variation expectation when a specific production pattern appears, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state, etc. become.

Then, as the effect pattern associated with the variable number, a plurality of effect patterns (such as a plurality of effect patterns with different start timings or end timings of the count display that appears in the variable timer effect, etc.) are prepared to be selectable. If so, one of a plurality of performance patterns with different start timings or end timings of count display is selected based on the hit/loss of the big hit determination. At this time, if the jackpot judgment is won, the effect pattern is set so that the start timing or end timing of the count display is delayed at a high rate, and by this, the start timing or end timing of the count display is set. The later it is, the higher the possibility that a big hit pattern will appear.

Also, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the count fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) is obtained when a special effect condition is established. Even in such a case, a performance pattern set so that the variable timer performance does not appear is selected from among the plurality of performance patterns.

Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after the production pattern (the production from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern to the stop of the fluctuation) that appears during the pattern fluctuation is thus selected, what kind of advance notice production is to be performed within the execution period of the production pattern. It will be decided whether to additionally execute (combine) in such a manner (advance lottery).

FIG. 119 shows a specific channel (hereinafter referred to as channel X) out of a finite number of prepared channels for sound control by the fixed channel system for various notification sounds (payout notification sound and abnormality notification sound) excluding the effect sound. ) shows an example of the sound definition table in the case of realizing the process of outputting only in the In this sound definition table, for each sound name, definitions of playback priority, left/right pan initial value, up/down pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, seek point, playback type setting, and output type setting are managed. is doing. For convenience of explanation, only the definitions of the notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown here, and the definitions of the other notification sounds and dramatic sounds are omitted. In addition to the definition by the fixed channel method, the effect sound may be defined by the automatic channel method for each channel other than the channel X to which the notification sound is assigned.

The priority is a parameter used to determine which of the notification sounds should be assigned to channel X to be output when a plurality of notification sounds respectively satisfy the output conditions. A high notification sound is assigned to the channel X and output regardless of the assignment state of the notification sound having a lower priority numerical value to the channel X. As will be described later, if the priorities are the same, the notification sound assigned first to channel X is given priority, and after the output of the notification sound is completed, the notification sound assigned to channel X is output. It will be done.

The left-right pan initial value represents the sound image localization initial position of the sound by the left and right speakers that are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the setting value of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference is generated in the sound volume output from the left and right speakers individually, and a sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. For example, if it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output only from the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L). The difference in volume output from the left and right speakers, which are a combination of the left and right speakers 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, a setting of "0xFF" indicates output from only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

The initial value of vertical panning is the sound image localization of sound by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the set value of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference in the volume output from the upper and lower speakers is created, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, if it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, if it is set to "0x80", it indicates the volume difference that is individually output from the combination of the upper and lower speakers. becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, a setting of "0xFF" indicates output from only the pair of lower speakers 921 .

The volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be set within a setting range from "0x00" to "0xFF", for example. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above. The playback type setting is loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure) that repeatedly plays back the target sound, or 1SHOT playback (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) that plays back the target sound once. It represents whether The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is to be reproduced in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 120 is a table showing, for each type of notification sound illustrated in FIG. 119, notification content, notification mode, notification time, and conditions for termination of notification (cancellation conditions). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a finite notification time is set for each notification sound. This is a measure to maintain the status and refrain from outputting the notification sound thereafter.

As shown in FIG. 120, notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) indicates a state in which magnetism is detected by the magnetism detection sensor 4024 (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act using a magnet is being performed). It informs you of something. And, as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "boo, magnetism detected", and a display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "magnetism detected") ) and lighting by various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively. The notification time is 60 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound six times) from the time when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism detected". In contrast to this, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting of various lamps are continued until the cancellation condition "return power on" is satisfied. It's becoming

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly), the vibration sensor 2405 detects vibration (there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act is being performed by a pounding act). state), and the count sensor 4005 (first big winning opening sensor or second big winning opening sensor or A notification sound that notifies that the detection by the winning opening sensor) is performed (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act is being performed to forcibly open the large winning opening in the closed state to win a game ball) 3 (large prize winning abnormality) is regarded as belonging to the first notification group when there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent act has been performed, and the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group are The notification mode, notification time, and cancellation conditions are all set to be common.

For example, in the notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration), as its notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Boo-boo vibration detected" and a display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, , "Vibration detected") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, respectively. 60 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound for 6 times) from the time of occurrence, the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is terminated. Execution of the lighting is continued until the cancellation condition of "returning the power supply" is satisfied. In addition, in the notification sound 3 (big prize abnormality), as its notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Boo Boo, big prize abnormality detected", Display (for example, "A big winning error has been detected") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed, and as the notification time, 60 seconds after the detection by the count sensor 4005 (equivalent to repeating the notification sound for 6 times), the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is terminated. The display and the lighting of various lamps are continued until the canceling condition of "turning on the power again" is satisfied.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group each adopt a different display mode. Regarding the lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps must be lit) is set for each of the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. It does not have to be a form) is adopted. In addition, for the notification sound to be looped, the notification sound 1, such as "boo-boo", plays a role of notifying that it belongs to the first notification group (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act has been committed). 3, and a message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of informing individual identification as to which content of the notification is. The warning sound consists of a monotonous sound to give a warning meaning in a tense fraudulent situation, and the message sound consists of a variety of sounds to clarify the distinction from other notification sounds. It is desirable to ensure that

In other words, when reporting something belonging to the first reporting group (a state in which there is a high possibility that fraud has been committed), rather than specifying which reporting type it belongs to, the pachinko parlor should respond to the fraudulent activity. It is important to expedite the initial action of In this respect, according to the above configuration, only by outputting a "boo-boo" notification sound or lighting modes unique to the first notification group by various lamps (light-emitting devices), those belonging to the first notification group (fraudulent behavior) Since it is possible to recognize that it is a state where there is a high possibility that it has been committed, it is expected to speed up the initial response of the hall side to the fraudulent act. Furthermore, a message sound indicating which type of notification is being output so as to follow the notification sound of "boo-boo", or display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. Therefore, it is expected that the treatment after the initial response to the hall side will be performed smoothly.

On the other hand, notification sound 4 (door open) is a state in which the door frame open switch 618 detects that the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4 (the possibility that a fraudulent act is being performed by opening the door). However, it is possible that the door has been opened by the hall side's emergency response measures). The notification mode includes a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "The door is open ping-pong ping-pong" and a display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "The door is open. ”) and lighting by various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively. The notification time is 30 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound 3 times) from the time when the door frame open switch 618 detects the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound such as "the door is open ping-pong ping-pong". ), the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting of various lamps are canceled by the release condition "Door closed detection (door frame open switch 618 turns on the main body frame 4 On the other hand, the execution is continued until the condition "detection of closed door frame 3" is satisfied.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 4 (door open), the body frame open switch 619 detects that the body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 ( Although there is a possibility that fraudulent acts are being carried out by opening the body frame, the body frame may be opened by the hall side due to abnormal measures). , is regarded as belonging to the second notification group when there is a medium degree of possibility that some kind of fraudulent act has been committed and it cannot be denied, and the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group are The mode, notification time, and cancellation conditions are all set to be common.

For example, in notification sound 5 (frame open), as its notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong" and a display ( For example, "the frame is open") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively, and as the notification time, the main body frame open switch 619 30 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound three times) from the time of detection, the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is terminated, while the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, Execution of lighting by various lamps is continued until the release condition "detection of frame closure (detection of body frame 4 being closed with respect to outer frame 2 by body frame open switch 619)" is satisfied. It will happen.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group adopt different display modes. Regarding the lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps must be lit) is set for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. It does not have to be a form) is adopted. However, the lighting mode of the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the second notification group is different from the lighting mode of the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the first notification group. In addition, with regard to the notification sounds to be looped, the message sound (unique sound) that plays the role of notifying individual identification as to what the content of the notification is, and the sound that belongs to the second notification group (fraudulent behavior A state in which there is a medium degree of possibility that the there is

That is, in the case of notifying those belonging to the second notification group (the state in which there is a medium degree of possibility that cheating has been committed), it is possible to not make the person who is playing a proper game feel disgust. It is important to be able to take measures to deal with abnormalities on the hall side as quickly as possible. In this regard, according to the above configuration, as the notification sound, first, as in the case of belonging to the third notification group described later, a message sound for notifying which notification type it belongs to is output. Therefore, it is expected that a person who is playing a proper game will be less likely to feel disgust. On the other hand, an alarm sound such as "ping-pong ping-pong" follows the message sound, although the alarm sound is different from that in the case of belonging to the first notification group in order to make it difficult for the person who is playing a proper game to feel disgust. In order to make it difficult for a person who is playing a proper game to feel disgust, the lighting mode is different from that in the case of belonging to the first information group, but is output in the case of belonging to the third information group. It is expected that the emergency countermeasures on the hall side will be speeded up to some extent by giving notification by lighting various lamps that are not used.

On the other hand, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is in the non-time-saving state. The passage is detected by the gate sensor 4003 (the game is being played in a manner that is disadvantageous to the player, and the situation should be corrected to a proper manner (left-handed)). This is to inform you that Then, as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed", and a display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "Please return to left-handed") ”) are executed respectively. In addition, as the notification time, both the loop processing that repeatedly outputs the notification sound "Please return to the left hand" and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are in a non-time saving state. It is designed to end in 20 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound twice) from the time when the gate sensor 4003 detects it.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), the full tank detection sensor 279 detects that the lower tray 322 is full of game balls (lower tray A notification sound 7 (ball removal guide) for notifying that the game ball is in a state where the game ball in the 322 is in a state where the game ball should be removed is performed as a game guide for properly progressing the game although the possibility of cheating is low. It is regarded as belonging to the third notification group when it is in the power state, and for the notification sounds belonging to the third notification group, the notification mode, notification time, and cancellation conditions are all set to be common. and

For example, in notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance), as its notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Please remove the ball from the lower tray" and Display (for example, "Please remove the ball from the lower tray") is executed respectively, and loop processing for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Please remove the ball from the lower tray" as the notification time, and a game board The display in the display area of the side effect display device 1600 is completed in 20 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound twice) after detection by the full tank detection sensor 279. .

However, regarding the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance), the sensor 2401, the When 279 is still in the detection state, the notification processing (notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance)) is executed again from the beginning.

In addition, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, only message sounds are output as the notification sounds 6 and 7, but more strictly speaking, for example, after the message sounds for 5 seconds have been output, silence for 5 seconds is output. Data is assigned to channel X and a corresponding sound (silent output) is output, and loop processing is performed to repeat the notification sound for 10 seconds with the message sound and the silent data as a set. It has become. Since the notification sounds 6 and 7 are designed to output silent data for the same amount of time, they function as unique notification modes different from those of the first notification group and the second notification group. Even the hall side can properly recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group only by confirming the silent data portion instead of the message sound portion which is difficult to hear in the noisy hall. As for silent data, it is desirable to prepare in advance as one sound data (10 seconds of sound data) including a message sound, and to perform loop processing while assigning this to channel X.

By the way, there may be silent portions in the notification sounds used in the first notification group and the second notification group (between the warning sound and the message sound, etc.), but these are very short to give a "pause". It is clear that it is temporal and is fundamentally different from the above-mentioned relatively long period of silence (third reporting group) which has a group identification function.

According to such a configuration, an alarm sound such as "boo-boo" or "ping-pong-ping-pong" is not output, and only the message sound is repeatedly output with a predetermined silent time interposed. It is possible to notify the game guidance without making the player feel disgust.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the same priority order is set for the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group. You may do so. Also, as the playback type setting, loop playback that repeatedly plays back the target sound is adopted, but this is not necessarily the case, and 1SHOT playback that plays back the target sound once may be adopted. . In addition, "boo-boo", which is commonly used in the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group, and "ping-pong ping-pong", which is commonly used in the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group, have a connection with the message sound. The sound data may be prepared separately for each notification sound, or may be prepared as sound data separate from the message sound, and when outputting, sound data is created by combining the message sound and the warning sound. You may assign it to a channel afterward.

[A game machine equipped with a plurality of production operation units]
By the way, in the above description, the gaming machine having the plate unit 320 provided with the effect operation unit 400 capable of being pressed by the player and capable of presenting the effect image to the player has been described. With reference to 121 to 143, a gaming machine capable of motivating the player to operate the machine will be described. Note that the effect control of the effect operation unit described below is performed by the peripheral control board 1510 .

FIG. 121 is a front view of a game machine provided with a sword rendering operation unit 5000. FIG. FIG. 122 is a right side view of a game machine provided with a sword rendering operation unit 5000. FIG. Here, the sword presentation operation unit 5000 arranged on the door frame 3 of the gaming machine 1 will be described, and the same reference numerals will be given to the same components as those described above, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

The sword effect operation unit 5000 is provided on the front surface of the door frame 3 on the right side when viewed from the front. The sword effect operation unit 5000 contains a blade part 5010 having a blade part 5011, a handle part 5012, and a collar part 5013 sandwiched between the blade part 5011 and the handle part 5012, and the blade part 5011 of the blade part 5010. A sword decoration 5001 is composed of a sheath 5020 that can be used.

The sword decoration body 5001 is provided on the door frame 3 so that the sheath part 5020 can be moved in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. Further, the blade portion 5010 is provided so as to be movable in the direction of pulling out the blade and in the direction of retracting the blade. The sword portion 5010 is normally in a sheathed state in which the blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020, and in the sword drawing effect, the sword blade portion 5011 becomes visible to the player by drawing the sword. Then, the sword section 5010 in the drawn state can function as an operation means for receiving the player's sword sheathing operation and returning to the sword sheathed state.

Here, with reference to FIG. 123, a description will be given of an execution opportunity for the sword drawing effect accompanied by the movement of the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword ornament 5001). FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an example of a selection table of effect patterns in the effect mode in which the sword drawing effect can be executed. (B) shows an example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of the drawing effect.

The production patterns described here include a pattern in which the sword drawing preparation transition production is performed after the sword drawing preparation transition production is executed, a pattern in which the sword drawing preparation transition production is performed without performing the sword drawing preparation transition production in advance, and a sword drawing preparation transition production is performed in advance. In spite of this, there is a pattern in which the sword drawing production is not performed, a pattern in which the sword drawing preparation transition production is performed and the sword drawing production is not performed. Two patterns are provided: a form with an aura member and a form without an aura member.

As shown in FIG. 123(A), depending on the type of variation pattern that is determined by the main control board 1310 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, whether or not to execute the drawing preparation transition effect is selected. Here, the plural types of variation patterns are classified into a variation pattern for big win variation at the time of big win, a variation pattern for small win variation at the time of small win, and a variation pattern for loss variation at the time of loss, and variations that result in advantageous results for the player. The pattern is set so that the probability of execution of the drawing preparation transition effect increases as the pattern increases. Specifically, the draw-sword preparation transition effect is executed with a probability of 50% in the case of the variation pattern for the big hit variation, executed with a probability of 30% in the case of the variation pattern for the small win variation, and executed with a probability of 30% in the variation pattern for the loss variation. 20% chance of execution. In addition, the variation pattern at the time of losing variation may change the probability according to the presence or absence of the ready-to-win effect so that the probability of executing the sword drawing preparation transition effect is higher when the ready-to-win effect is performed than when it is not performed. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 123(B), whether or not to execute the sword drawing main effect is selected according to the type of variation pattern and the presence or absence of the sword drawing preparation transition effect. Even if the types of variation patterns are the same, when the sword drawing preparation transition performance is executed, the probability of execution of the sword drawing preparation transition performance is set to be higher than when the sword drawing preparation transition performance is not executed. In addition, it is set such that the more advantageous the result for the player is the variation pattern, the higher the probability of execution of the sword drawing effect. Here, even if the advantage of the variation pattern is low, the execution of the sword drawing preparation transition effect is set to increase the probability of execution of the sword drawing main effect. Specifically, when the sword drawing preparation transition performance is executed in the variation pattern for losing variation, the probability of execution of the sword drawing preparation transition performance is higher than when the sword drawing preparation transition performance is not executed in the small hit variation variation pattern. It should be noted that, in the case of the variation pattern for the big hit variation, regardless of the presence or absence of the drawing preparation transition presentation, the sword draw main presentation is always executed.

In addition, when the main draw effect is executed, the draw preparation transition effect is executed in advance, and the probability of executing the main draw sword effect with the aura member increases as the variation pattern becomes more advantageous for the player. is set to It should be noted that here, in the case of the variation pattern for the small hit variation, the drawing main effect of the form with the aura member is not selected.

(State transition and operation of the aura member by drawing the sword ornament)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127, the sword drawing operation of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword drawing effect (sword drawing preparation transition effect and sword drawing main effect) will be described. In addition, when the aura member 5030 is provided in the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011) capable of receiving the sheathing operation by the player, and the sword portion 5010 is deformed by its own constituent member (aura member 5030) (FIG. 124, 125), the aura member 5035 is provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011), and the sword portion 5010 is united with the member (aura member 5035) on the door frame 3 side. The operation of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be described in the case of forming an integral decoration (FIGS. 126 and 127).

124A and 124B are state transition diagrams illustrating the sword drawing operation of the sword decoration 5001 when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011) itself. (C) shows the second drawn state. FIG. 125 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5030. FIG. 125 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a state in which the blade portion 5011 is extracted from the sheath portion 5020 in order to facilitate understanding of the operation of the aura member 5030. FIG.

The sword ornament 5001 in the normal state is in a sheathed state in which the blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020, as shown in FIG. 124(A). In the sword decoration body 5001 after the sword drawing operation in the sword drawing preparation transition presentation, as shown in FIG. 124(B), only the part of the habaki 5011a fitted to the hand of the blade part 5011 is removed from the sheath part 5020 and visible to the player. It becomes the first unsheathed state. 124(C), the blade part 5011 of the sword decoration body 5001 after the sword drawing operation in the sword drawing main effect is further drawn from the scabbard part 5020, and most of it becomes visible to the player. state. Here, the sword ornament 5001 in the second drawn state can function as an operation means capable of accepting the player's sheathing operation.

The aura member 5030 provided on the blade portion 5011 is configured to be operable independently of the action of drawing the blade portion 5011 . In the case where the sword decoration 5001 is in the form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 is in the sheath when the blade portion 5011 changes from the sheathed state (Fig. 124(A)) to the first drawn state (Fig. 124(B)). Inside the portion 5020, the movable range is moved from the closed state (Fig. 125(A)) to the open state (Fig. 125(B)) as much as possible (maximum movement), and the blade portion 5011 is deformed. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 even when the blade portion 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 changes from the first drawn state to the second drawn state (FIG. 124(C)). As will be described later, the aura member 5030 is positioned below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 even in the maximum movement, so the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 in the first drawn state.

The aura member 5030 in the normal state (closed state) is contained in the blade portion 5011 as shown in FIG. 125(A). The aura member 5030 is provided below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011, and meshes with the right aura member 5031, the left aura member 5032, the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031, and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. and a pinion 5033. The pinion 5033 of the aura member 5030 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by driving means (not shown), so that the rotational force is converted into linear motion in the rightward direction of the rack 5031a and in the leftward direction of the rack 5032a. As shown in (B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 each stop at a position (open state) projecting outward from the outline of the blade portion 5011 .

In addition, an LED board 5011c having a plurality of LEDs is included in the blade shaft 5011b below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011. As shown in FIG. By emitting light from these LEDs, it is possible to decorate the blade portion 50011 (aura member 5030) with light emission.

Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5030, when the sword decorative body 5001 (sword portion 5010) changes from the sheathed state to the first drawn state, the closed state becomes the open state, and the blade portion 5011 is opened by the action of the aura member 5030. Although the example in which the sword ornament 5001 changes from the first sword-drawn state to the second sword-drawn state is shown, the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5030 may start to operate (deform) after the sword ornament 5001 is in the second drawn state. The final mode based on the production pattern set until the sword ornament 5001 in the second drawn state functions as the operation means (not limited to the mode of maximum movement, including the mode of stopping the movement in the middle) ).

126A and 126B are state transition diagrams for explaining the sword drawing operation of the sword ornament 5001 when the aura member 5035 is provided on the sheath 5020. (A) the sword drawn state, (B) the first sword drawn state, and (C). The second drawing state is shown. FIG. 127 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5035. FIG. FIG. 127 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a state in which the blade portion 5011 is extracted from the sheath portion 5020 in order to facilitate understanding of the operation of the aura member 5035. FIG. 125 and 126 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 126(A) to (C), the aura member 5035 provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011) is similar to that of the blade portion 5010 (blade portion 5011). While the aura member 5030 provided in itself is movable in the horizontal direction, it is movable in the vertical direction. Also, the aura member 5035 is provided so as to surround the outer circumference of the blade portion 5011 . In the case where the sword ornament 5001 is in a form with an aura member, the aura member 5035 maintains the relative positional relationship between the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 in the sheathed state, and changes the state of the blade portion 5011 (sword sheathed state). ⇔ first drawn state ⇔ second drawn state). As a result, the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011) can be united with the frame-side member (aura member 5035) to appear as an integral decoration.

The aura member 5035 in the normal state (completely housed state) is housed in the sheath 5020 as shown in FIG. 127(A). The aura member 5035 is provided so that the upper end is below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 in the fully housed state, and is provided so as to surround the outer circumference of the blade portion 5011. and a right pinion 5037a and a left pinion 5037b that mesh with the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, respectively. In the enclosing aura member 5036, the right pinion 5037a is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front and the left pinion 5037b is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front by driving means (not shown). This is converted into upward linear motion of the rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, and as shown in FIG. At this time, the aura member 5035 is in a completely appearing state in which the surrounding aura member 5036 is movable (maximum movement) to the upper limit of the movable range.

Although not shown, the blade portion 5011 includes an LED substrate having a plurality of LEDs, and the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 can be decorated with light.

Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5035, according to the state change of the sword ornament 5001 (sword portion 5010) (sword sheathed state ⇔ first sword drawn state ⇔ second sword drawn state), the relative positional relationship is maintained. 5011 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5035 may start to operate (combine) after the sword ornament 5001 is in the second drawn state. The final mode based on the effect pattern set until the sword ornament 5001 in the second drawn state functions as an operation means (including the form with aura member of the state). Also, the aura member 5035 may be united with the blade portion 5011 so as not to be visually recognized by the player in the state from the sheathed state to the first drawn state.

(Other production pattern 1 using sword decoration 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130, another ready-to-win effect using the aforementioned sword ornament 5001 will be described. 128 to 130 are diagrams for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device 1600 and motion transitions of the sword ornament 5001 in the princess ready-to-win effect. Here, the sword decoration 5001 described above differs mainly in the following points. First, the sheathed sword ornament 5001 functions as an operation means, and detects the player's sword drawing operation. Secondly, the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. It is possible to operate up to the front center.

When the changing pattern forms the ready-to-win state, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the three decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win state (FIG. 128 (A1)), and the start image of the princess ready-to-win is displayed (FIG. 128 (A2)). Here, above the display area of the effect display device 1600, a specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) that can be moved in the vertical direction is provided. In a normal state, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap the display area of the effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front, and is stationary above the display area in a state (initial state) in which a part of the blind is visible to the player. there is Further, at this time, the sword ornament 5001 is in the sheathed state.

In the princess ready-to-win effect, after an image of a princess facing behind a blind is displayed (FIG. 128 (A3)), an operation effect suggesting image suggesting an operation effect is displayed (FIG. 128 (B1)). Then, the operation effect of the sword decoration 5001 is started, and the operation effective period for accepting the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is started, and at the same time, the display area of the effect display device 1600 prompts the player to draw the sword decoration 5001. An operation prompting image and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed (FIG. 129 (B2)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY are moved up and down in small steps from the display of the operation effect suggestion image to the display of the operation promotion image and the gauge indicating the operation effective period. good too. Then, when the player's sword drawing operation is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset development pattern or end pattern.

The sword drawing operation by the player means an operation of pulling out the blade part 5011 from the sheath part 5020 by grasping the handle part 5012 of the sheathed sword ornament 5001 and lifting the sword part 5010 upward. When the sword ornament 5001 shifts from the sheathed state to the second sword drawn state, the player's sword drawing operation is detected, and a detection notification operation is performed to notify the player of the detection. The detection notification action may be any action that the player can feel through the handle 5012 gripped by the player, such as moving the sword 5010 (or the handle 5012) up and down, vibrating, and other actions other than the action of drawing the sword. Just do it. Further, the detection notification operation is performed for a certain period of time after the operation is detected, and the operation can be visually recognized even if the player takes his hand off the handle 5012 . Therefore, since the player can visually confirm the detection of the operation, unnecessary contact with the sword ornament 5001 (grabbing again to confirm the detection, etc.) can be reduced, and failure or damage of the movable body can be prevented. can be done.

Here, when the player draws the sword, the aura member 5030 (5035) does not appear. However, when the player draws the sword, the aura member 5030 (5035) appears visibly from the player according to the degree of expectation. You may do so.

When the end pattern is performed, when the player's sword drawing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap the display area of the effect display device 1600 and remains stationary above the display area (initial state). state) is maintained, and a screen showing the end of the operation presentation by the sword ornament 5001 is displayed (Fig. 129 (C1)). Then, the decorative pattern is stop-displayed in the missing mode "767" (Fig. 129 (C2)). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the sheathed state at the timing when the stop result in FIG. You may do so.

On the other hand, when the development pattern is performed, when the player's sword drawing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is placed in the center of the front overlapping the display area of the effect display device 1600 (below the display area). It is dropped and moved to a state where only the reserved display area is visible (completely dropped state) (Fig. 129 (D1)).Then, the shadow of the princess is projected in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 maintains the second drawn state (FIG. 129 (D2)).At this time, a plurality of patterns of the shadow of the princess may be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. For example, By changing the color of the shadow, the size of the shadow, and the comments to be displayed afterwards, the degree of expectation of the lottery result by Princess Reach (expectation of winning, game profit when winning, etc.) may be suggested. .

Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the sword ornament 5001 was in the second sword drawn state by the player's sword drawing operation, that is, after the shadow of the princess was projected in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second sword drawn state is reached. The sword decoration 5001 moves to the center of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in the front-left and right direction by moving the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (FIG. 129 (D3)). Then, when the sword decoration 5001 reaches the front center position of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the specific decorative member SDY returns from the completely fallen state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 with good visibility becomes An image of a surprised princess with the blinds removed is displayed (Fig. 130 (D4)). After that, the sword ornament 5001 returns to the original position where the sword drawing operation was performed, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the result of the variable display this time is a win, the win is announced with a smiling princess. An image is displayed (FIGS. 130 (E1) and (E2)), and an image informing the loss is displayed together with a sad princess (FIGS. 130 (F1) and (F2)).

When the player's sword drawing operation is detected, the detection notification operation is performed as described above. If the player cannot move because the player is holding the sword when executing , an announcement or display such as "please release the sword" is made. Even if the player does not stop gripping the sword decoration 5001, the effect itself proceeds. If it is held in the performed position, it will cause a delay in the left and right direction movement effect. However, regardless of whether the left-right movable effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is executed or not, the effect executed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the falling movable effect of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) progress. Since it is configured so that the progress of the game is not stagnated. Note that the sword decoration 5001 may be configured such that when the player releases the holding of the sword decoration 5001, the movable effect in the horizontal direction is immediately performed, or the movable effect is not performed. may

As described above, in the princess ready-to-win production, the specific decorative member SDY that suggests the operation production (effective operation) of the sword decoration 5001 is dropped and moved by the player's drawing operation (vertical movement) of the sword decoration 5001. At the same time, the sword ornament 5001 itself, which has been operated outside the display area of the effect display device 1600, is moved forward of the effect display device 1600 (to the operating position) by moving the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3. to the left). That is, based on the player's sword drawing operation, the sword decorative body 5001 itself can be moved to an operating position different from the operating position where the sword drawing operation was performed, thereby increasing the player's operational value and increasing the player's desire to operate. can suppress the decline of In addition, since one operation means can be operated in different stages (vertical direction at the time of operation, horizontal direction after the operation) according to the operation by the player, it provides an effect using a plurality of movable modes. It is possible to increase the operational value of the operating means compared to the conventional operating means having only one movable mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

It should be noted that the effect of moving the sword decoration body 5001 in the horizontal direction is for the purpose of performing an effect integrally with the effect image performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain). Although the operation position outside the display area of the device 1600 is displaced to the action position in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the sword decoration 5001 is positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the sword is drawn, the sword decoration 5001 is moved to be positioned outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is also possible to perform a left-right movement effect in which the player is displaced to the left (the left end of the frame). In addition, since the operation of the sword decoration 5001 of this example by the player is a movement in the up-down direction (sword drawing action of pulling up the sword portion 5011 from the bottom), the sword decoration 5001 is operated after the operation based on the operation. For the movable effect, it is desirable that the sword ornament 5001 moves in a direction (horizontal direction, etc., as in this example) different from the motion direction (here, vertical direction) at the time of operation by the player.

Further, when the player's sword drawing operation is detected, a detection notification operation is performed to notify the player of the detection via the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player, so the player can accurately determine the operation end timing. can be judged. In addition, since the detection notification operation is performed so that the player can visually confirm the detection for a certain period of time, it is possible to suppress unnecessary contact such as touching the operation unit again to confirm the detection. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the operation, delaying the movement performance of the sword ornament 5001, or damaging the movable body due to unnecessary contact. Furthermore, even after the detection notification operation, if the movement effect cannot be executed due to contact with the sword ornament 5001, a warning such as an announcement is made to the player to let go of the player's hand, and the operation is requested during the operation valid period. Since even contact is prohibited after the operation means finishes the detection notification operation, the operational value of the operation means can be increased.

(Other production pattern 2 using sword decoration 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133, another ready-to-win effect using the aforementioned sword ornament 5001 will be described. 131 to 133 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the action transition of the sword ornament 5001 in the ready-to-win effect including the operation effect of the operation button 410, which is used in many ways. be. Here, as the operation effect of the operation button 410, there is a pattern ((A) (B) → N in the figure) in which an expectation level suggestion effect is performed that suggests the level of expectation that the variation during execution will be a big hit, and the operation of the operation button 410 is performed. A pattern ((A) (B)→M in the figure) in which the suggestion and development of the operation presentation of the sword ornament 5001 is performed as the presentation will be described.

In the ready-to-win effect here, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the variable display of the three decorative patterns is in the ready-to-win state (FIG. 131(A)), first, the operation valid period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is Then, an operation prompting effect is performed to prompt the player to press the operation button 410 (FIG. 131(B)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of an operation means (operation button 410) to be operated and an operation effective period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the sheathed state. Then, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset effect pattern.

First, in the pattern in which the expectation degree suggesting effect is performed by pressing the operation button 410, when the player's pressing operation to the operation button 410 is detected, an effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. After that (Fig. 131 (N1)), an image suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit is displayed (Fig. 132 (N2)). After that, the results of the current variation display (big win, loss) are notified (Fig. 132 (N3) or (N4)). It should be noted that a look-ahead effect may be performed instead of the expectation level suggesting effect for the variable display being executed. A character that changes the displayed pending display may appear.

In addition, in the pattern in which the operation effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is suggested and developed by pressing the operation button 410, when the player's pressing operation to the operation button 410 is detected, the display area of the effect display device 1600 131 (M1) in which an effect image is displayed, suggesting that an operation presentation requesting sheathing operation of the sword ornament 5001 will be performed. Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a start image of the operation effect of the sword ornament 5001 (here, a message of the title "Chance to draw the sword" and the operation explanation "I want you to put the sword away") is displayed. At the same time, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second drawn state. The sword ornament 5001 at this time is in the form with an aura member in which the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the maximum movement of the aura member 5030 (Fig. 133 (M2)). Subsequently, when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second drawn state and a predetermined period of time elapses, and the effective period of operation of the sword ornament 5001 begins, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain accessory) is moved up and down in small steps in the initial state, producing an effect. In the display area of the display device 1600, an operation prompting image for prompting the player to sheathe the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge indicating the effective period of operation are displayed (FIG. 133 (M3)). Then, when the player's sword sheathing operation is detected, an effect based on the result of the current variation display is performed.

If the result of the variable display this time is a big hit, when the player's sword sheathing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved from the initial state to the completely falling state ( Figure 133 (M4)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is returned to the initial state, a big hit is notified in the display area of the performance display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is cancelled. An image (decorative pattern stop mode “777”, message “Good job”) is displayed (FIG. 133 (M5)). On the other hand, if the result of the variable display this time is a failure, when the player's sword sheathing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) simply stops moving in small increments in the initial state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (decorative pattern stop mode "767") is displayed to notify the loss (FIG. 133 (M6)).

In this way, by pressing the operation button 410, various effects such as suggesting the degree of expectation or developing an operation effect of other operation means (sword ornament 5001) are possible. Subsequent expansion cannot be specified at the time of manipulating . Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the operation of the operation button 410, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the desire to operate and the decrease in interest in the game, which are concerns due to the monotonous presentation after the operation.

In addition, in the series of ready-to-win effects, the first operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410) and the second operation (sword sheathing operation of the sword ornament 5001) have different operation modes (pressing operation and sword sheathing operation). (press operation of the operation button 410). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in participating in the operation, and to suppress the decrease in interest in the game, which is a concern due to monotonous operation.

In this example, the operation button 410 is used as an effective operation means as the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (sword sheathing operation of the sword ornament 5001) is given based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410. However, it is not limited to this. As the first operation opportunity, the sword sheathing operation of the sword ornament 5001 may be an effective operation. In this case, the operation means to be effective for the second operation opportunity is the sword decoration 5001 rather than the operation button 410 with a relatively lower degree of expectation than the sword decoration 5001 of the first time. is desirable.

(Other production pattern 3 using sword decoration 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 134 to 138, another ready-to-win effect using the aforementioned sword ornament 5001 will be described. 134 to 138 are diagrams for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device 1600, state transitions of the operation buttons 410, and operation transitions of the sword ornament 5001 in the ready-to-win effect. Here, a pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → O in the drawing) that becomes a big hit when the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 Even if the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) does not move and is displayed in the missing mode based on the pressing operation of , the pattern display in the missing mode is changed again, and the player is given an opportunity to operate again. Patterns ((A) (B1) (B2) → (P1) to (P4) → Q when given the opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 / R when given the opportunity to operate the operation button 410) will be explained.

In the ready-to-win effect here, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the variable display of the three decorative patterns is in the ready-to-win state (Fig. 134 (A)), first, the start image of the operation effect of the operation button 410 (here , and the message ``Move the movable body with a single push of the button'') is displayed (FIG. 134(B)), and then the valid operation period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started. An operation facilitating presentation to prompt is performed (FIG. 134(C)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the effective period of operation are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the sheathed state. Then, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset effect pattern. Note that the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is not limited to one hit (one time), and may be repeated hits (multiple times). In addition, in order for the player to easily grasp the object (movable body) that is moved by the operation, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved up and down in small steps in the initial state during the operation valid period of the operation button 410. You may do so. Further, when the sword decoration 5001 is to be operated later, the sword decoration 5001 may be changed from the sword sheathed state to the second sword drawn state at this point.

In the pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) moves and becomes a big hit, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is completely dropped from the initial state. (Fig. 135 (O1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial state again, an image (decorative design of A stop mode "777" and a message of "good job") is displayed (Fig. 135 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be vibrated.

In the pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (blinds) is not movable, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative members SDY (blinds) are only stopped moving in small steps, and can fall. not. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the decorative pattern in the shifted mode ("767") is oscillatingly displayed in the center of the screen (Fig. 136 (P1). A pattern (FIG. 136 (P2)) in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state ("767"), or a resurrection pattern in which the ready-to-win state is revived is developed.

In the resurrection pattern, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a resurrection start image ("not A samurai image) is inserted (Fig. 136 (P3)), and the decorative pattern is again in the ready-to-reach state and displayed in a reduced size in the upper right corner of the screen. is displayed (the face of an ally samurai with his eyes closed) is displayed (FIG. 136 (P4)). As time elapses, the eyes of the displayed samurai are enlarged and the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved up and down in small steps in the initial state (FIG. 136 (P5)). As a result, the player's sense of expectation for performance using the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is heightened. Also, at this time, the operation button 410 may be decorated with light emission in a high-speed flashing mode, or the sword decoration body 5001 may be changed from the sheathed state to the first drawn state and moved up and down. Then, depending on the effect pattern to be set, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 functions as an effective operation means. (Sudare Yakumono) is performed. The pattern in which the operation button 410 is operated is set to have a lower degree of expectation than the pattern in which the sword ornament 5001 is operated.

When the operation button 410 is used as the operation means, an image (operation button confirmation image) in which the samurai's forehead is dripping with sweat in the operation effective suggesting image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed, and the operation button is pressed. 410 is decorated with light emission (Fig. 137 (R1)). Then, while the specific decorative member SDY (a bamboo blind accessory) continues to move in small steps, the operation valid period of the operation button 410 is started while the operation button 410 is decorated with light, and an operation prompting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is performed. Promotion effect is performed (Fig. 137 (R2)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of times of operation, and the effective period of operation are displayed. Here, when the operation button 410 is operated a required number of times, it is no longer illuminated.

Then, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved from the initial state to the completely falling state. (Fig. 137 (R3)). At this time, the decoration pattern displayed at the upper right of the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is stopped and displayed so as to be visible to the player at the lower right of the screen. It should be noted that, at this time, it may be made difficult for the player to grasp the mode of the decoration pattern, as in the case of the above (FIG. 133 (M4)). Next, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is returned to the initial state from the completely fallen state, and the screen An image (decorative pattern stop mode “777”, message “Good luck”) announcing a big hit is displayed in the center (Fig. 137 (R4)).

On the other hand, when the result of the variable display is a failure, when the player's pressing operation of the operation button 410 is detected, the small movement of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is stopped, and the effect display device 1600 is displayed. In the display area, a decorative design in a displaced mode ("767") is stopped and displayed in the center of the screen (Fig. 137 (R5)).

When the sword ornament 5001 is used as the operation means, an image (sword ornament finalized image) is displayed, and the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the sheathed state to the second drawn state with the aura member (FIG. 138 (Q1)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 may be decorated with light. The player can understand from the image in the display area that the operation of the sword decoration 5001, not the operation button 410, is valid. can be understood by actually looking at the sword decoration 5001 . Next, while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved in small steps, the second sword is drawn and a predetermined period of time elapses. In the area, an operation prompting image prompting the player to sheathe the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge indicating the effective period of the operation are displayed (FIG. 138 (Q2)).

Then, if the result of the variable display this time is a big hit, when the player's sword sheathing operation is detected, the effect transition similar to that of FIGS. Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, if the result of the variable display is a loss, when the player's sword sheathing operation is detected, the effect transition similar to that of FIG. 137 (R5) is followed (FIG. 138 (Q5)).

In this way, since the degree of expectation is suggested according to the falling state of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) executed based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the degree of expectation is more powerful than the degree of expectation suggested by the image. Suggestions can be provided, and a decrease in interest in games can be suppressed. Also, even if the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is not moved down based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the player is given the opportunity to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 again. be done. Since the degree of expectation can be suggested by the operating means to which the opportunity to operate is provided, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game, which is a concern due to monotonous operation presentation without changing.

128 to 138 described above show three examples of production patterns for the ready-to-win production using the sword ornament 5001, but various production modes may be combined. As a result, it is possible to provide a wide variety of presentations, and to further increase the interest in the game.

(Form of sword decoration)
The form of the sword ornament 5001 of this example will be described with reference to FIG. The form of the sword ornament 5001 described above has two types, a form with an aura member and a form without an aura member. are provided in two types.

FIG. 139 is a diagram for explaining the form of the sword ornament 5001 used for the pseudo-continuous effect. The sword decoration 5001 here is provided so as to be able to change its shape in two stages by deformation of the handle 5012, and is provided inside the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3, and the player can see from the left and right sides of the sheath 5020. It is characterized by having an aura member 5040 that appears visibly in the The aura member 5040 is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 in the same manner as the aura member 5035 described above, but its operation mode is the same as that of the aura member 5030 described above. 139(A) to (D) are diagrams showing the types (step change) of the form of the sword ornament 5001 in the sheathed state, showing the stage 0 form to stage 3 form in order. The sword ornament 5001 takes any form from stage 0 to stage 3 depending on the presentation.

As shown in FIG. 139(A), the stage 0 configuration is the configuration in the normal state similar to FIGS. showing morphology. As shown in FIG. 139(B), the stage 1 form shows a form in which the aura member 5040 appears outside the side surface of the sheath 5012 due to the action of the aura member 5040 from the stage 0 form. As shown in FIG. 139(C), the stage 2 form is a form in which the handle 5012 from the stage 1 form spreads and moves so as to be divided into left and right from the center, and the first decorative part 5012a appears from inside. show. As shown in FIG. 139(D), in the stage 3 form, the second decorative part 5012b is moved upward from the inside of the handle part 5012 in the stage 2 form to form an integral decoration with the first decorative part 5012a. showing morphology. Here, the stage 1 to stage 3 forms enable the form change without the sword ornament 5001 being in the second drawn state. Furthermore, since the sword part 5010 capable of receiving the operation by the player as the operation part of the operation means and the sheath part 5020 which does not operate operate together to form an integral decoration, a more powerful operation means can be provided. can be done.

(Suggestion effect before operation using specific decorative member SDY)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 140 to 143, the pre-operation suggestive effect executed before the operation valid period during which the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 becomes operational valid in the ready-to-win effect will be described. In the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to suggest whether the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 among the plurality of operation means will be operable by the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory). . Specifically, as a suggestive pattern by the pre-operation suggestive effect using the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain), the operation effective period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is positioned at the initial position. There are a first suggestive pattern and a second suggestive pattern that generates an operation valid period in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved from the initial position to the suggested position. , the second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern. Specifically, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 140(B)) that generates the operation valid period with the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) positioned at the initial position even during the operation valid period. is performed, the sword ornament 5001 becomes operable with a probability of 30%, and the operation button 410 becomes operable with a probability of 70%. On the other hand, when the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 142 (AA1)) generated by the operation effective period is performed in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved to the suggestion position. , the sword ornament 5001 becomes operable with a probability of 70% (including the step-up pattern), and the operation button 410 becomes operable with a probability of 30%. A description will be given below of a production transition example according to the action of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) in the first suggestive pattern and the second suggestive pattern of the pre-operation suggestive production.

(First suggested pattern)
140 and 141, either the operation button 410 or the sword decorative body 5001 is displayed during the ready-to-win effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the variation effect (ready-to-win effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board 1310. is a diagram showing a transition example of a ready-to-win effect in which a pre-operation suggestive effect of the first suggestive pattern is executed when it is determined that the operation is valid. In this ready-to-win effect, when the three decorative patterns in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are in the ready-to-win state (FIG. 140(A)), the operation buttons pre-determined to be operationally valid by lottery of the peripheral control board 1510 The pre-operation suggesting effect of the first suggesting pattern is executed before the operation effective period for the operation means of either 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is generated. As a specific effect content of the first suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggesting image (aura rotation) suggesting that the operation means becomes operationally valid is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation valid period is generated. is displayed (FIG. 140(B)), and at this time, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) maintains its initial position. Also, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 .

Then, with the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) maintained at the initial position, an operation effective period is generated for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) whose operation is predetermined to be effective. Let In this example, when the operation button 5001 is activated, the first suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the second suggestion pattern (described later) as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation valid period occurs while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is in the initial position, the operation button 410 is operated at a higher rate than the sword ornament 5001. It becomes possible to suggest to the player.

When the operation button 410 becomes operationally valid, as shown in FIG. 140(C), the operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) maintains its initial position. Let At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation prompt effect is performed in which an operation prompt image prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. Also, at this time, the operation button 410 is decorated with light so that the player can easily recognize the operation target. Further, even when the sword ornament 5001 is operationally valid, the pre-operation suggesting effect may be executed in the first suggesting pattern, although at a rate lower than that of the operation button 410 . At that time, as shown in FIG. 140(D), an operation effective period for the sword decoration 5001 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (strainer accessory) maintains its initial position. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promoting effect is performed in which an operation promoting image for prompting the player to sheathe the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the sword sheathed state to the second sword drawn state (a form with an aura member), and the player can sheath the sword.

140(C) or (D), when an operation to an operation means (operation button 410 or sword ornament 5001) that is effective for operation is detected, and if the result of this variation display is a big hit, The specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved to fall from the initial state to the fully fallen state (Fig. 141 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is returned to the initial state, a big hit is notified in the display area of the performance display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is cancelled. An image (decorative pattern stop mode "777", message "Good job") is displayed (Fig. 141 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of the variable display this time is a failure, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) remains in its initial state and is not moved, and the failure is notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An image (decorative design stop mode "767") is displayed (Fig. 141 (CC3)).

(Second suggested pattern)
FIG. 142 shows that when it is determined that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is to be activated during the ready-to-win effect, the pre-operation suggestive effect of the second suggestive pattern is performed. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the reach production|presentation performed. In addition, in FIG. 143, even though the second suggestion pattern is performed as the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is not enabled, and the operation button 410 is temporarily enabled. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a pre-operation suggestion effect of a step-up pattern in which a body 5001 becomes operationally valid.

As shown in FIG. 142 (AA1), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001, which is pre-determined to be operable by a lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. is executed before the operation validity period for the operation means of is generated. As a specific effect content of the second suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggesting image (aura rotation) suggesting that the operation means becomes operationally valid is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation effective period is generated. Is displayed. The operation effect suggesting image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first suggesting pattern, but in the second suggesting pattern, the operation effect suggesting image is displayed and the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is displayed. It operates from the initial position to a small falling state (suggested position) overlapping the upper part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in front view, and the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) moves up and down between the initial position and the suggested position. It is moved in small steps in a direction. At this time, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration.

Then, with the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) moved to the suggested position, the effective period of operation for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) whose operation is predetermined to be valid is set. generate. In this example, when the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is enabled, the second suggestive pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggestive pattern as the pre-operation suggestive effect. In other words, when the operation valid period occurs while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is in the suggested position, the sword ornament 5001 is operated at a higher rate than the operation button 410. It becomes possible to suggest to the player.

When the sword decoration 5001 becomes operationally valid, as shown in FIG. 142 (AA3), the operation valid period for the sword decoration 5001 is set while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare role) is moving to the suggested position. generate At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promoting effect is performed in which an operation promoting image for prompting the player to sheathe the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the sword sheathed state to the second sword drawn state (a state with an aura), thereby allowing the player to sheath the sword. Further, even when the operation button 410 is activated, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the second suggestion pattern, albeit at a low rate. At that time, as shown in FIG. 142 (AA2), an operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moving to the suggested position, and at the same time, the effect display device 1600 is displayed. In the display area, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. In the second suggestion pattern, when the player's operation is detected in the operation prompting presentation, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved from the suggested position to the initial state. Further, the movement of the specific decorative member SDY (blind blind) to the fully fallen state or the initial state may be performed from the state of operation to the suggested position without being returned to the initial state.

142 (AA2) or (AA3) described above, when an operation to the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) is detected, the above-described FIG. 140 (C) or (D) Similarly, when the result of the variable display this time is a big hit, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved from the initial state to the fully fallen state (Fig. 141 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is returned to the initial state, a big hit is notified in the display area of the performance display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is cancelled. An image (decorative pattern stop mode "777", message "Good job") is displayed (Fig. 141 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of this variable display is a failure, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) remains in its initial state and is not moved, and the failure is notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An image (decorative design stop mode "767") is displayed (Fig. 141 (CC3)). The effect transition after the operation-promoting effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation-promoting effect in the first suggestion pattern.

Note that the movement pattern of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) in the second suggestive pattern may be not only a pattern in which it is moved to the suggested position, but also a plurality of movement patterns. For example, when a plurality of types of action patterns are provided so that the rate at which the sword decoration 5001 becomes operationally effective is different, the player's interest in the action can be heightened. It is possible to enhance interest in the used pre-operation suggesting effect and operation promoting effect.

(step up pattern)
When the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern generated by the operation valid period is performed with the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) moved to the suggested position, and the sword decoration 5001 becomes operationally valid, 142 (AA1) → (AA3) until the sword decoration 5001 becomes operationally valid, in addition to the basic pattern of following the effect transition of FIG. A step-up pattern is provided to enable operation.

As shown in FIGS. 143(BB1) to (BB4), the step-up pattern pre-operation suggestion effect is an operation valid period for the sword ornament 5001 whose operation is pre-determined by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. is generated, that is, before the effect for prompting the operation of the sword ornament 5001 shown in FIG. 142 (AA3) is performed.

In the step-up pattern, first, an image suggesting an operation effect (rotating aura) similar to that in FIG. 142 (AA1) is displayed and the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved in small steps (FIG. 143 (BB1). ). Next, an operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved to the suggested position. At the same time, the operation button 410 is decorated with light emission, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. (FIG. 143 (BB2)). Here, even if the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected during the valid operation period of the operation button 410, the result notification as shown in FIG. A suggested image (most blackout image) is displayed (FIG. 143 (BB3)). The switching suggestion image is displayed when the player presses the operation button 410 or when the effective period of operation of the operation button 410 expires. After that, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword sheathed state to the second sword drawn state (with aura), and the display area of the effect display device 1600 shows that the operation buttons 410 to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. 143 (BB4). During this time, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is in the suggested position. Then, when the operation valid period of the sword decoration 5001 is generated, the operation promoting effect of the sword decoration 5001 shown in FIG. 142 (AA3) is performed. The effect transition after the operation-promoting effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation-promoting effect (FIG. 141) in the above-described second suggestion pattern.

It should be noted that only the image display of the button operation 410 may be performed without enabling the button operation 410 (no operation prompting effect) at the time of FIG. 143 (BB2) described above. It is sufficient if the player's attention is once directed to the button operation 410 and then the sword ornament 5001 is operated. Also, the step-up pattern may be selectable not only when it becomes the second suggestive pattern, but also when it becomes the first suggestive pattern.

In this way, in the pre-operation suggesting effect of this example, before the operation effective period of the operation means in which one of the plurality of operation means is operational-effective is generated, the specific decorative member SDY ) can be changed, and an operation means that can be operated according to the position is suggested. Specifically, in the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 140(B)) in which the operation valid period is generated in the state where the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is located at the initial position, the operation button 410 is operated. The second suggestion pattern (in FIG. 142 (AA1), the sword decoration body 5001 Therefore, the player pays attention to the state of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) in order to grasp which operating means is effective. It is possible to enhance the interest of the production.

In addition, in the second suggestive pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the pre-operation suggestive effect. Since the effect of the action (fall effect) of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is also used for the notification of the result after the operation of the operating means (Fig. 141), a series of motion effect (fall effect) from the suggestive effect before the operation, starting from the upward and downward movement, is performed. It is possible to show the performance of the game, and to suppress the deterioration of the game interest. In the above description, the state of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain), that is, the degree of expectation that the operating means that becomes operable by the movable body is operable is shown. A display may be provided to indicate expectations. Further, when the operation means to be effective is determined, the operation button 410 is turned on, or the sword decoration body 5001 is changed to the second sword drawn state, and the operation means to be effective is moved by vibration or the like. You can

In addition, in the second suggestive pattern, in the state where the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is located at the suggestive position, the operation button 410 is once activated (or after it is pretended to be activated). 2) A step-up pattern is provided in which the sword ornament 5001 becomes operable. As a result, the player is interested in both operating means. In addition, even if the operation button 410 becomes operationally valid immediately after the pre-operation suggesting effect, it is possible to have an expectation that the sword decoration 5001 may become operationally valid after that, so that the desire to operate is reduced and the interest in the game is reduced. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the first suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation effect suggestion image before the operation valid period in which any one of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) is valid is displayed. At the timing (FIG. 140(B)), similar to the second suggestive pattern (FIG. 142(AA1)), the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is displayed from the initial position in the front view of the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is also possible to operate in a small falling state (suggested position) that overlaps with the upper portion, and move in small increments in the vertical direction between the initial position and the suggested position. It should be noted that the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is returned to the initial position (rest) when the valid operation period is to be generated thereafter. As a result, the motion of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) in the first suggestion pattern is partly the same as the motion in the second suggestion pattern at the same timing, so that the player is suggested an operation effect according to the first suggestion pattern. Even when the image is displayed, it is possible to make the user think that the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is being executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to expect that the operation of the sword ornament 5001 will be valid even when the pre-operation suggestive effect based on the first suggestion pattern is being executed. Since the player strongly desires that the operation effective period occurs in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) that is operated at the display timing of the operation effect suggestion image is moved to the suggestion position, the pre-operation suggestion is performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the production.

[Specific operation-related effects]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific result is obtained in the effect determination according to the result of the big hit determination, the game board side effect display device 1600 performs a specific effect Execute the rendition with the pattern. During the performance period during which a specific performance pattern is executed, a specific performance reception period (effective period) for establishing a specific performance execution condition by an operation by a player can be generated, and the operation is performed within the specific performance reception period. , it is possible to execute a specific operation-time effect (such as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for granting a privilege, etc.) based on the establishment of a specific effect execution condition. The degree of expectation for awarding a privilege suggested as a result of a specific operation-time effect may be 100% or 0%.

Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as an operation means provided for such an effect at the time of operation (such as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for awarding a privilege when operated), an operation In addition to the button 410, it is possible to further provide operating means (sword ornament 5001, etc.) other than this. In this regard, in a specific production pattern, based on the result of the production determination, the operation button 410 is provided with an opportunity to operate (when the operation button 410 is operated, a specific production execution condition is established). There is a case where an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword ornament 5001, etc.) (when a specific effect execution condition is established when another operation means is operated). Then, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001, etc.), even if no operation is performed at that operation opportunity, the pre-operation effect in which the operation opportunity is given only occurs. The player can recognize that the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) for awarding a privilege is higher than when the operation button 410 is given an opportunity to operate. The degree of expectation for awarding a privilege suggested when an opportunity to operate another operation means (sword ornament 5001, etc.) may be 100% or 0%.

According to such a configuration, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001), the operation time corresponding to the operation to the other operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001) It is possible to improve the amusement of the game in the pre-stage where the performance is not yet performed and in the situation where the operation is about to be performed. That is, in this case, the desired effect result (such as a effect result suggesting that the degree of expectation for awarding a privilege is high) does not appear in the operation-time effect corresponding to the operation of another operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001). Even if it is not possible to operate the operation means within the specific effect acceptance period (effective period), the game interest can be improved through such operation-related effects. Become.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity is given to any of the plurality of operation means (operation buttons 410, sword ornaments 5001, etc.) having such effects. In such a case, a common operation-related effect (see, for example, FIG. 142 (AA1)) can be executed at the time of granting these operation opportunities.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, at least
・After the “specific operation-related effect” that can appear even when the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is activated (makes it possible to receive the effect), the operation of the operation button 410 is activated (it becomes possible to receive the effect). ), and the operation of the operation button 410 is validated without the “specific operation-related effect” being started (making the effect acceptable). A plurality of effect modes are prepared, such as a second effect mode that generates an effective period (effect reception period) that is applied, and by executing one of these effect modes, the operation of the operation button 410 is validated (effect It is designed to generate an effective period (drawing acceptance period) during which the performance can be accepted.

According to such a configuration, there may be a period during which the operation of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) can be received for the effect. In either case of a period during which an operation means other than the specific operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) can receive the effect, a common (specific ) can be executed, so it is possible to make it interesting to see which of the specific operation means and another operation means can receive the effect. By allowing the player to perform the operation while the is being performed, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

In addition, in such a common (specific) operation-related effect, when a predetermined time elapses after the effect is started, one of the plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001) is activated. At least at the time when the effect is started, it is determined which of the operation means (for example, the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001) the effect reception period will occur. should be kept confidential. In addition, for each operation-related effect exemplified below, an operation opportunity is given to any of the plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001) before the effect acceptance period occurs. It may be possible to indicate whether the effect is to be performed (appear the effect result display), or during the period after the effect reception period occurs, including at the same time as the effect reception period occurs, multiple operations It is also possible to indicate which of the means (for example, the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001) to which the operation opportunity is granted (appear the effect result display), and to what timing the operation-related effect is executed. It is possible to change it as appropriate.

[Auto button effect status]
In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, control to an automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be executed, and when being controlled to this automatic button effect state, When the effect reception period for the operation button 410 (more precisely, a predetermined effect pattern in which the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is set) occurs based on the result of the big hit determination, the player can Even if the performance of the operation is not received, it is possible to execute the processing (automatic performance function) for causing the same change to the performance as when the performance of the operation by the player is accepted within the performance acceptance period. According to such an automatic button performance state, even if the operation is not performed every time the performance reception period occurs, the performance after the operation is generated when the operation is performed. be able to Regarding the automatic effect function, the same effect reception as when the operation is actually performed may be generated when the automatic effect function functions, so that the process corresponding to the effect reception may be performed, or the effect reception may be generated. Alternatively, the same processing as when the reception of the effect is received may be performed.

In the embodiments relating to the "automatic effect function" described below, the above-described operation-related techniques, effects, settings, etc. may be appropriately combined and used, or may be used in place of each other.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, during the period in which the demo screen in which the pattern variation is not executed is displayed, the automatic button is operated by operating the operation means a plurality of times. Setting to the performance state can be made. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation of operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed by the second operation of operation button 410 (or an operation means different from operation button 410). The "Various Settings" screen is displayed by selecting the "Various Settings" screen, and the "Various Settings" screen is displayed by the third operation of the operation button 410 (or by an operating means different from the operation button 410). When the "automatic button effect state setting" displayed in the window is selected, the automatic button effect state is set. It should be noted that only the operation button 410 may be operated multiple times, or the operation on the operation button 410 and the operation on a different operation means may be operated multiple times.

On the other hand, during the period in which the pattern variation is in the execution state, the operation button 410 is operated only once to set the automatic button effect state. It is possible to set an automatic button performance state while keeping an eye on the progress of performance during pattern variation. However, there are some players who want to actively operate the operation buttons 410 regardless of whether or not the valid period has expired. If the automatic button effect state is set just by operating the button, the interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to set the automatic button effect state during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed, the operation state of the operation button 410 must be maintained for a predetermined time ( Here, it is required to operate this once in a mode (so-called "long-press mode") that is maintained for 2 seconds). As a result, even if the operation button 410 is positively operated irrespective of whether or not the effective period has occurred during the period in which the pattern variation is in the execution state, the automatic button presentation state is entered. It becomes possible to make it difficult to cause erroneous setting. It should be noted that it is desirable to prevent the automatic button effect state from being set even if the operation is performed in the long-press mode when at least the effect reception period is occurring during the period in which the pattern variation is in the execution state. .

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as a method of canceling the automatic button effect state in the state in which it is set, the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not yet executed is displayed. Different operation modes are required during the displayed period and during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed.

That is, during the period in which the demo screen is displayed in the state where the pattern variation is not executed, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled by operating the operating means a plurality of times. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation of operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed by the second operation of operation button 410 (or an operation means different from operation button 410). The "Various Settings" screen is displayed by selecting the "Various Settings" screen, and the "Various Settings" screen is displayed by the third operation of the operation button 410 (or by an operating means different from the operation button 410). When the "cancel the automatic button effect state" displayed inside is selected, the setting of the automatic button effect state is cancelled.

On the other hand, during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled by operating the operation button 410 only once. It is possible to cancel the setting of the automatic button performance state while keeping an eye on the development of the performance during the pattern variation. However, unlike the case of setting the automatic button effect state, even if the operation state of the operation button 410 is not maintained for a predetermined time (even if the operation mode is not a long press), the operation button 410 can be positioned to the operation state. The setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled only by detecting that the button has been pressed (only by operating in a single-shot operation mode). In other words, it can be said that the fact that an operation button 410 is operated in some way indicates that there is a desire to operate the operation button 410. By canceling the setting of the state and returning to the normal presentation state early, it is expected that the game interest is favorably maintained.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is configured with a plurality of operation means including the operation button 410 . In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the operation button 410 is in the automatic button effect state set by the operation, the operation button 410 differs from the operation button 410 based on the result of the big hit determination. An effect reception period during which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration 5001, etc.) (more precisely, a predetermined effect pattern in which an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001, etc. is set) occurs, and even if the player's operation (operation on the sword decoration 5001) is not received within the effect reception period, the player's operation (operation on the sword decoration 5001) is not performed within the effect reception period. It is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change to the effect as when the effect is accepted. According to such a configuration, whether there is a period during which the operation of the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001, etc.) can receive the effect, or whether another operation means (for example, , sword ornament 5001) is executed (specific operation-related effect (see FIG. 164 (AA1), etc.)), the effect As a result, even if any of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 can receive the effect, there is no need to worry about forgetting to operate it, so that the user can enjoy such a specific operation-related effect with peace of mind. Become.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
When a first-side effect acceptance period occurs in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means is set as the operation target while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). , when the first operation means is not operated within the first side effect acceptance period, automatic processing can be executed to cause the same change in the effect as when the first operation means is operated. Yes (first automatic production means),
・The second side effect reception period set as the operation target for the second operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001 etc.) When it occurs, when the second operation means is not operated within the second side effect acceptance period, automatic processing is executed to cause the same change to the effect as when the second operation means is operated. Possible (second automatic production means)
With such a configuration, regardless of whether the first-side effect reception period or the second-side effect reception period occurs, when the same specific time has passed since the period occurred, the second Automatic processing by the first automatic effect means or automatic processing by the second automatic effect means can be executed.

According to such a configuration, when the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is controlled, the first side effect acceptance period in which the first operation means is set as the operation target, and the second operation means is the operation target. Even if any of the second side effect reception period set as occurs within the execution period of the pattern fluctuation, the automatic effect function can function when the same specific time has passed since the occurrence of those periods As a result, you will be able to enjoy the production with peace of mind.

However, in the event that a first-side effect reception period occurs in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as an operation target, when a specific time has passed after the occurrence of the first-side effect reception period The automatic processing by the first automatic effect means is executed when the automatic processing by the first automatic effect means is executed, and when the time different from the specific time has elapsed after the first side effect acceptance period has occurred. It is also possible to make the performance progress within the pattern variation as there is a case. According to such a configuration, it was assumed that the automatic processing by the first automatic effect means would be executed when the specific time passed after the occurrence of the first side effect acceptance period, but the timing is different from this. Since the production reception is made and the production after the operation is automatically generated, it can be made to function as a surprise production.

In addition, when it is controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state), the operating means is given more opportunities to operate within the pattern fluctuation period than when it is not controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state). You may make it so that the ratio which the production|presentation acceptance period which is carried out generate|occur|produces becomes high. That is, in this case, as the frequency of occurrence of the production reception period increases, it can be assumed that the frequency of forgetting to operate within the production reception period also increases, but even if the operation is forgotten, automatic production Since the performance after the operation is executed by the functioning of the function, the performance receiving period can be generated with a higher frequency while suppressing the deterioration of the game interest due to frequent forgetting to operate. Incidentally, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is desirable to increase the rate of occurrence of both the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means. However, it is more desirable to make the degree of increase in the rate of occurrence different between the effect receiving period for the first operating means and the effect receiving period for the second operating means.

Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
When the condition for receiving the effect is satisfied within the effect receiving period, the post-operation effect can be executed (post-operation effect executing means),
・It is possible to execute a process for establishing a performance reception condition based on the fact that the player has performed an operation within the performance reception period (player operation reception means),
・When the player does not perform an operation within the effect acceptance period, it is possible to execute a process to establish the effect acceptance condition without receiving an operation by the player at a specific timing within the effect acceptance period (automatic effect acceptance means )
However, the specific timing within the effect reception period is set so that it will not arrive until at least half of the time set as the effect reception period has passed since the effect reception period started. I am planning to As a result, it is possible to give the player ample time to operate the player himself until the automatic effect function is activated, and it is possible to leave the option of accepting the effect by the player's operation. , the amusement of the game can be favorably maintained.

In this case, the automatic processing by the first automatic effect means is executed when a specific time has passed since the first side effect reception period occurred, and the specific time after the first side effect reception period has occurred When the automatic processing by the first automatic effect means is executed when a different time has elapsed, when the effect progresses within the pattern variation, the above "specific time" or the above "specific time Any of the "time different from" is set as a time value longer than at least half of the time set as the first-side effect reception period.

Here, if an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs during the execution period of the symbol variation when the automatic button effect state is controlled, and an effect reception for the operation of the operation button 410 is received within the effect reception period. , the process of generating the post-operation effect in response to the reception of the effect is executed. However, at this time, in addition to the process of generating the post-operation effect in response to the acceptance of the effect, the process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state may also be performed.

Also, in this case as well, during the execution period of pattern variation when controlled to the automatic button effect state, an effect reception period occurs for operation means (sword ornament 5001, etc.) different from the operation button 410, and the effect reception is generated. Even when the operation to the sword decoration body 5001 is received during the period, the processing for generating the post-operation performance corresponding to the reception of the performance and the processing for canceling the setting of the automatic button performance state are executed respectively. is desirable. In this case as well, regarding the "post-operation effect in response to the effect reception", the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs during the period when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, and the sword decoration is performed during the effect reception period. This is executed as an effect having the same content as the post-operation effect that is executed when the operation to the body 5001 is accepted.

That is, after being controlled to the automatic button production state (specific production state), the desire to return to the production state (normal production mode) in which the production can progress depending on the player's own operation (specific production state) a desire to terminate the state) may arise. Such a desire often arises when an effect reception period occurs during which an operation opportunity is given to the player, but there is a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end of the effect reception period. It is difficult to perform both an operation to end a specific production state and an operation to accept an operation within the system, and as a result, the opportunity to operate may be lost. If so, the interest in gaming may decline. In this respect, in the above configuration, when the effect reception period related to the specific effect occurs while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation button to which the operation opportunity is given within the effect reception period 410 or sword ornament 5001 is operated only once (by being operated in a single-shot operation mode), the process of ending the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and the process of causing a change in the effect. (processing to execute the effect after the operation) and are performed respectively, so that the desire to end the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and progress the effect depending on the player's own operation is received. Even if it occurs within the period, it is possible to smoothly switch the presentation state.

However, regarding the setting change (setting change to automatic button effect state, setting cancellation of automatic button effect state) related to automatic button effect state during the period when the demo screen is displayed (symbol change is not executed) , the settings can be changed without requiring any operation on the sword ornament 5001 . In other words, the sword ornament 5001 has a lower frequency of being given an operation opportunity than the operation button 410 during the execution period of the pattern variation, and when the operation opportunity is given by that much, the expectation of a big hit is higher than that of the operation button 410. It is made high. Therefore, the sword ornament 5001 is not allowed to be operated only for the purpose of changing the setting of the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), and thus the sword ornament 5001 is given an opportunity to operate. It can be said that it is more desirable to maintain the amusement of the game by enhancing the sense of premium when playing the game. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period in which the demo screen in which the pattern variation is not executed is displayed, the operation means (operation buttons) other than the sword ornament 5001 among the plurality of operation means 410 or another operation means) can be set to or canceled from the automatic button effect state by operating the button a plurality of times.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic button effect state can be entered without requiring the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 even during the execution period of the pattern variation when the automatic button effect state is not controlled. Settings can be changed. That is, as described above, if the operation button 410 is operated once in the "long-press mode", it is controlled to the automatic button effect state. For the purpose of this, the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is not permitted.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the case where the setting related to the automatic button effect state can be changed by operating the sword ornament 5001 means that the pattern when it is controlled to the automatic button effect state. It is limited to a case where an effect acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs during the execution period of the variation, an operation for the sword decoration 5001 is accepted for an effect during the effect acceptance period, and a corresponding post-operation effect appears. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting to the automatic button presentation state by operating the sword decoration 5001 without impairing the premium feeling when the sword decoration 5001 is given an opportunity to operate. become.

In addition, as the plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when in the automatic button effect state, "auto In addition to operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) that can be subject to the "effect function", special operation means that are not subject to the "automatic effect function that generates the effect at the time of operation without being operated within the effect acceptance period" may further include. That is, in this case, when the symbol variation is in the execution state, an effect accepting period occurs during which an opportunity to operate the special operating means is given, and if the effect is accepted during the effect accepting period, the operation for the special operating means is accepted. The degree of expectation for a big hit is suggested by the post-operation production in response to the acceptance of the production. However, even if the state is controlled to the automatic button effect state, if the operation for the special operation means is not received within the effect acceptance period, the same effect after the operation as when the above effect is accepted will appear. no. However, in this case, the same post-operation effect as when the effect is accepted does not appear, but if the effect is different from when the effect is accepted, it may be made to appear.

In addition, regarding the setting to the automatic button effect state using the operation button 410 (operation in the mode of long pressing), the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during the period in which the pattern variation is in the execution state. In addition to the time, the effect reception period for the operation means other than the operation button 410 (the effect reception period in which the degree of expectation is suggested by operating the sword ornament 5001, or the degree of expectation is suggested by operating the special operation means It is desirable that this is not allowed even if a performance reception period, etc.) is occurring. That is, if the automatic button effect state is generated by operating the operation button 410 (operating in the form of a long press) during the effect acceptance period for an operation means different from the operation button 410. In the middle of the performance reception period, the original performance reception (operating means different from the operation button 410) is activated by activating the "automatic performance function that generates the performance at the time of operation without operating within the performance reception period". If the player is unfamiliar with the automatic button effect state, the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 may occur without any operation. This is because the user may be puzzled as to whether there is an effect receiving period for an operating means different from that of the player, and it is feared that this will reduce the interest in the game.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the sign effect prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period, but it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). A sign effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period when it is not, and a sign effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period when it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). You may enable it to be performed as a display mode different from. That is, in this case, it is possible to preliminarily recognize whether or not there is a performance state in which the automatic performance function can function within the specific performance acceptance period, and the performance can be enjoyed without anxiety.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific image suggesting the remaining time (for example, "bar display" suggesting the remaining time) is displayed during the effect acceptance period. However, when the effect reception period occurs, at least until the specific image (for example, "bar display" indicating the remaining time) is displayed, the specific image is displayed so that the specific image is displayed. An effect image different from the specific image (for example, an image in which lightning strikes the specific region) may be displayed outside the area (forecast effect). In other words, in this case, when the effect receiving period occurs, by confirming the movement of the effect image different from the specific image, the user can pay attention to the part where the hidden "specific image suggesting the remaining time" will appear. can be urged, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's operation is not completed in time and the specific effect acceptance period ends, and furthermore, Even if the operation by the player is not in time, the automatic effect function functions to execute the effect after the operation, so that it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the state setting and setting cancellation related to the automatic button effect state by the operation by the player. Based on this, the state may be set to the automatic button effect state or the setting of the automatic button effect state may be canceled according to the progress of the game or effect. As an example in which state setting and setting cancellation can be performed according to the progress of the game or effect, for example, "While it is controlled in the normal game state, it is controlled as an automatic button effect state, but the jackpot game state Or, when the state is shifted to a high-probability time-saving state, the automatic button effect state is canceled. A control mode such as "Generate an effect pattern that cancels the setting when a predetermined time has passed since the occurrence" or "Generate an automatic button effect state over a period in which multiple symbol variations are executed" It is possible to employ a control mode such as . Alternatively, the pachinko machine 1 may be always controlled to the automatic button presentation state, and in this case, the automatic button presentation state is not set and released, and the "automatic button presentation state" is set and released. This process itself will disappear.

In addition, the timing at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions may be when the remaining time of the effect reception period is exhausted, or at a predetermined timing after that, or when the remaining time of the effect reception period is left. It may be an intermediate timing (specific timing). When the remaining time of the production reception period is consumed, or when the above-mentioned automatic production function functions at a predetermined timing after that, the production after the operation will be performed as if the production reception was made after the production reception period ended. will be executed. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the middle timing (specific timing) when the remaining time of the effect acceptance period is left, the above-mentioned automatic effect function will function in the same way as when there is an actual operation. At the point of time (specific timing), the effect reception period ends and the post-operation effect is executed.

However, in order to ensure a sense of security that the effect after operation will occur even if you do not operate it when it is controlled to the automatic button effect state, it is necessary to wait until the effect reception period ends (effect reception It is important to make the above-described automatic effect function function at a specific timing within the period, and to start the post-operation effect corresponding to this. That is, in this case, when the above-described automatic effect function does not function even though the specific timing within the effect reception period has arrived, the post-operation effect is generated by the player's own operation after the specific timing has arrived. This makes it possible to reduce the feeling of uneasiness when being controlled to the automatic button effect state and may not be able to check the effect after the operation”, “The automatic effect function may not function due to some trouble, and the effect after the operation may not be confirmed”, etc.) be able to

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a characteristic technique related to such an automatic button effect state. Characteristic techniques related to the automatic button effect state will be described in order below. You may make it use combining suitably.

In describing each of the characteristic technologies below, it is assumed that in a specific production state (automatic button production state), when control is not normally performed to the specific production state (automatic button production state) When a performance reception period occurs, the same post-operation performance as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the performance reception period. However, instead of this, a specific display effect (display effect that can be selected based on the result of the big hit determination) that can be executed only when it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is prepared, When a specific effective period related to the specific display effect occurs while the specific display effect is being performed, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the specific effective period. can be According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance (improvement of the performance by permitting the occurrence of a specific display performance) when being controlled to a specific rendering state (automatic button rendering state). Of course, even if a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is occurring, the automatic effect function may not function during a different effect acceptance period set when the specific display effect is not being performed. On the other hand, during a specific effective period when a specific display effect is being performed, the automatic effect function works to save the trouble of operating, so that the VIP feeling can be enjoyed. Therefore, it is expected that the amusement of the game will be favorably enhanced. It should be noted that it is not necessary to prevent the automatic effect function from functioning during all of the different effect reception periods set when a specific display effect is not being performed, and at least part of the effect reception period is an automatic effect. If the function is disabled, the above effects will occur when the specific effective period occurs while the specific display effect is being performed (when the effect reception period occurs during which the automatic effect function always functions). can be expected. Further, even when such a specific effective period occurs, if there is no operation by the player until the specific timing within the specific effective period arrives, the above-described automatic effect function is activated at the specific timing. It is desirable to start the post-operation production corresponding to this.

Further, after preparing at least a first specific display effect, a second specific display effect, and a third specific display effect as specific display effects that can be executed based on the result of the big hit determination,
・When the first specific effective period occurs while the first specific display effect is being executed, the automatic effect described above occurs at the timing when the first predetermined time has passed since the first specific effective period occurred. While the function functions to terminate the first specific validity period and generate a post-operation effect corresponding to this,
- If the second specific effective period occurs while the second specific display effect is being executed, a second predetermined period of time longer than the first predetermined period of time after the occurrence of the second specific effective period. At the timing of the elapse of, the above-described automatic effect function functions to terminate the second specific effective period and generate a post-operation effect corresponding to this, and further,
・If the third specific effective period occurs while the third specific display effect is being executed, the third specific effective period is reached despite being controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). Each processing may be performed in a specific state of performance such that if there is no operation until the end of the operation, the same post-operation performance as when the operation was performed cannot appear. According to such a configuration, even if an effect reception period (specific valid period) occurs while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the effect reception period starts from the time when the effect reception period occurs. The above-mentioned automatic effect function functions when the predetermined time elapses, or the above-described automatic effect function does not function until a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time elapses, Even if the performance acceptance period ends, the above-described automatic performance function may be disabled in the first place. Therefore, even if it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is confirmed which type of specific display effect was performed when the effect acceptance period (specific valid period) occurred. For example, when the above-described automatic effect function does not function even after the first predetermined time has passed, the above-mentioned It is possible to develop the performance with a sense of tension such as whether the automatic performance function of the above functions or whether the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function in the first place. Note that the first specific effective period, the second specific effective period, and the third specific effective period are all set when the operating means (for example, the operation button 410) to be operated is in an operated state (so-called When the one-shot operation is performed), the effect is accepted and the effect after the operation is generated.

It should be noted that the first specific display effect, the second specific display effect, and the third specific display effect can only be executed when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). There may be. In this way, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a display mode that cannot appear when not controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) can be displayed. In this case, it is possible to favorably maintain the amusement of the game in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). In addition, a first specific display effect (first specific effective period) and a second specific display effect (second specific effective period) are prepared, and a third specific display effect (third specific effective period) is prepared. does not necessarily have to be prepared. Further, the post-operation effects that occur when the effects are accepted in the first specific effective period, the second specific effective period, and the third specific effective period may have different effect contents.

In addition, in the case where the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions to generate the effect after operation, it is necessary to determine at what timing within the effect acceptance period the automatic effect function functioned In order to make it possible to recognize the remaining time of the production acceptance period, the automatic production function functioned for the bar display (display that changes the image (here, the area changes) with the passage of time) to indicate the remaining time. The post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which the display is not hidden at this time. According to such a configuration, for example, by checking the remaining time indicated by the "bar display" that is continuously displayed when the automatic effect function functions, the effect reception period is the first specified effective period ( A period in which the automatic effect function functions when the first predetermined time, which is a relatively early stage after the effect reception period occurs, and a second specific effective period (a period relatively It becomes possible to recognize whether it was a period in which the automatic effect function functions when the second predetermined time, which is a late stage, has passed.

In this sense, when the first specific effective period (the period in which the automatic effect function functions when the first predetermined time has passed since the effect reception period occurred) occurs, and the second specific effective period ( A period in which an automatic performance function functions when a second predetermined time elapses from the occurrence of the performance reception period), the expectation of a big hit is different (for example, the second specific effective period is more advantageous). It is desirable to Further, in this case, the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect may not necessarily be executed. However, when the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect are executed, a big hit is expected when the first specific display effect appears and when the second specific display effect appears. different degree (for example, the second specific display effect is more advantageous). In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the player's operation within the effect acceptance period, the "bar display" may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the automatic effect function described above may be used. function, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which the "bar display" is displayed instead of being hidden. The post-operation effect may not be executed as a display change on the effect display device 1600, but may be executed as light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an action by a movable decorative body, for example. good too.

Further, when the post-operation effect is generated by the functioning of the above-described automatic effect function, the player does not get involved in the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) that is the object of operation. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern that the player may not be able to grasp which operation means the automatically generated post-operation effect corresponds to. Therefore, when the above-described automatic effect function is activated to generate the post-operation effect, first, an operation target suggestion image (for example, an operation target operation In addition to displaying an image display imitating means, even if the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, the operation target suggestive image is not hidden, but is displayed, and the post-operation effect is generated. It is desirable to In this case, the display mode (for example, color or transmittance) of the operation target suggestion image before and after the post-operation effect is generated may not necessarily be the same. It suffices if it can be recognized even in the state where the post-operation effect has occurred. On the other hand, if a post-operation effect occurs due to an operation by the player within the effect reception period, the operation object suggesting image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect occurs, or the above-described automatic display may be performed. As in the case where the effect function functions, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which the operation target suggestive image is displayed instead of being hidden. When the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, such as when the automatic effect function functions within the above-mentioned first specific effective period or when the automatic effect function functions within the above-described second specific effective period, always The post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which the operation target suggesting image is displayed instead of being hidden.

Further, at this time, if the post-operation effect is generated in a state in which the operation object suggesting image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation for the big win, both the mode of the operation object suggesting image and the mode of the post-operation effect can be generated. can be confirmed at the same time, and the amusement of the game can be improved. Further, the effect after the operation may not be executed as a display change on the effect display device 1600, but may be executed as light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an action by a movable decorative body, for example. There may be.

For example, even if the pachinko machine 1 is not equipped with the above-described automatic effect function, the degree of expectation of a big win (for example, it appears only when a big win is obtained) as an image suggesting an operation object (an image imitating an operation means, etc.). A plurality of modes are prepared with different ratios of execution of post-operation effects in non-existent mode), and when an operation is accepted by an operation by a player, the operation target is started at the time when the post-operation effects are started to be executed based on the operation acceptance. If the suggestive image (such as a simulated image of an operation means) is displayed in one of the plurality of modes with different expectations, the mode of the suggestive image to be operated and the mode of the post-operation effect can be changed. Both can be confirmed at the same time, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, when generating an effective period (effect reception period) during which the model image is displayed, the type of the effective period (effect reception period) type, etc.), the display area is reduced as time passes (the first valid period generated by the establishment of the first condition), and the display area is reduced as time passes It is desirable that there is a case where display is not performed (a second valid period that occurs when the second condition is satisfied). In other words, during the valid period in which the display area is reduced as time passes and no display is performed, it becomes difficult to recognize how much time is left to accept the operation. It becomes possible to suitably maintain the tension inside. It should be noted that "do not display the specific image in such a manner that the display area of the specific image decreases with the passage of time" means, for example, that normally (the first effective period), the gauge is displayed in such a manner that the display area decreases with the passage of time. Where the image is displayed, the gauge image itself is not displayed during the second valid period, or the gauge image is displayed but its display area is not reduced over time. be.

In this regard, when the operation is accepted during the second effective period (when the display area is not reduced as time passes), changes (display change, lamp emission, etc.) It is desirable that the model image is displayed instead of being hidden at the time when the execution of at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effects is started. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp that the operation was accepted while the model image was displayed (before the expiration of the valid period). can be removed.

In this case, the display mode of the model image (for example, color transmittance, etc.) may not necessarily be the same, and the simulated image may be in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize it with another image. It is sufficient if the corresponding change (at least one of changes caused by post-operation effects such as display change and lamp emission) is recognizable. However, in order to preferably obtain such an effect, at least at the time when the change corresponding to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as display change and lamp emission) is started. It is desirable that the display state of the model image is maintained in the manner in which it was displayed before the operation was accepted, and that the model image is not obscured by other images. Therefore, if the simulated image is displayed dynamically during the valid period during which operation reception is permitted, at least one of the changes (display change, lamp emission, etc. caused by the post-operation effect) corresponding to the operation reception ) is started, it is desirable to continue the dynamic display. On the other hand, within the first effective period, if a change (at least one of the changes caused by the effect after the operation, such as a change in the display or the lighting of the lamp) occurs due to the operation by the player, the change The model image may be hidden when an event (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) occurs. A change (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) may be generated in response to operation reception in the state.

However, even during the valid period in which "the display area of the specific image is not reduced over time", a simulated image simulating the operation means to be operated is displayed. For images, it is desirable to display them as moving images that progress at a particular speed. With such a configuration, although the remaining time is not suggested by the gauge image, it is difficult to grasp the remaining time during which operation reception is permitted depending on how much the moving image based on the model image has progressed. It is expected that it will be possible and that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example includes the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) and the second operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) as the operation means. There are cases where a valid period (effect acceptance period) is generated during which operation reception is permitted for the second operating means, and there are cases where a validity period (effect reception period) is generated during which operation reception is permitted for the second operating means. Of these, during the valid period during which acceptance of operations on the first operating means is permitted, the first simulated image simulating the first operating means is displayed, and during the valid period during which acceptance of operations on the second operating means is permitted, the second operating means is displayed. The second simulated image is displayed. In addition, between the effective period during which operation reception is permitted for the first operating means and the effective period during which operation reception is permitted for the second operating means, the degree of expectation for a big win suggested when the operation is accepted (post-operation effect As a result, the ratio at which a mode that appears only at the time of a big hit is executed) is made different. In addition to the effective period during which operation reception is permitted for the first operation means (effect reception period) and the effective period during which operation reception is permitted for the second operation means (effect reception period), effective periods different from these are defined. It may be possible to generate further. In this regard, when the operation is accepted in the valid period in which the expectation of the big hit is high (for example, the valid period in which the acceptance of operation on the second operation means is allowed), the change according to the operation acceptance (display change, , lamp lighting, etc.), the model image (second model image) is not hidden but displayed.

As a result, in addition to the case where the operation is accepted in the situation shown in FIG. Despite this, the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is erroneously operated, and the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) remains in the operation state (the operation is performed). Even if the second operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) is operated and the operation is accepted, the player side is made to recognize that the performance is accepted properly. be able to

In this case, the display mode of the simulated image (for example, color and transmittance, etc.) may not necessarily be the same, and the simulated image may be in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize it with another image, and the operation reception will be able to tell which operation means was the operation target. It is sufficient if the corresponding change (at least one of changes caused by post-operation effects such as display change and lamp emission) is recognizable. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, at least at the time when the change corresponding to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the light emission of the lamp) is started, the operation It is desirable to maintain the display state of the model image in the manner in which it was displayed before the reception was made, and to prevent the gauge image from becoming difficult to see due to other images. Therefore, if the simulated image is displayed dynamically during the valid period during which operation acceptance is permitted, at least one of the changes (display change, lamp emission, etc. caused by the post-operation effect) corresponding to the operation acceptance ) is started, it is desirable to continue the dynamic display. In addition, in order to make the player side recognize that the effect has been properly accepted, changes (display changes, lamp emission, etc.) according to the operation acceptance by the operation by the player are made within the first effective period. Even if it occurs, the model image (first model image) is not hidden in the state where the change (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) , lamp emission, etc.).

According to such a configuration, "determination means for making a determination, production means for performing an effect based on the result of determination by the determination means, and based on the fact that a predetermined result is obtained in the determination by the determination means and a specific operation receiving portion provided displaceably between a first position and a second position (an operation button 410 displaceable between a normal position and a pressed position). ), a first detection unit capable of detecting a specific action (pressing operation) by the player based on the displacement of the specific operation receiving unit to the second position, and a special operation receiving unit different from the specific operation receiving unit (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is provided with a second detection unit capable of detecting a special action (for example, sword sheathing operation) by the player, A plurality of effect reception periods including a first effect reception period and a second effect reception period are prepared as the effect reception period (different types), and the first effect reception period is specified by imitating the specific operation receiving unit. A model image is displayed, and an effect reception is performed by detection by the first detection unit. During the second effect reception period, a special model image simulating the special operation receiving unit is displayed, 2. The performance reception is performed by the detection by the detection unit 2, and the specific action by the player despite the fact that the special model image imitating the special operation reception unit is displayed during the second performance reception period. When the specific operation receiving portion is displaced from the first position to the second position by the second detection, even if the special action is performed by the player while maintaining the specific operation receiving portion at the second position, the second detection Effect reception is performed by detection by the unit, and the post-operation effect can be executed based on the reception of the effect.

In such a configuration, "Even if the special action is performed by the player while the specific operation receiving section is maintained at the second position, the effect reception is performed by the detection by the second detection section, and the special action is performed. At the time when the post-operation production is started to be executed based on the reception of the production, the special model image that imitates the special operation receiving part is not hidden and is kept displayed, so that the side that has made the operation by mistake can It is possible to make the player side recognize that the post-operation effect is being executed as an operation on the proper side.

When the special model image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation for big hits, the post-operation effect is started in the displayed mode. If the effect is accepted without such an erroneous operation being performed, the model image may be left displayed instead of being hidden at the time when the post-operation effect is started to be executed. The model image may be hidden at the time when the performance is started.

By the way, the frequency of occurrence of the second effect receiving period during which the special operation receiving part is given the opportunity to operate is lower than that of the first effect receiving period when the opportunity to operate is given to the specific operation receiving part. In many cases, this is considered to be one of the causes of operational errors. Therefore, at the occurrence of the second effect receiving period in which the special operation receiving part is given an operation opportunity, it is suggested that the effect reception is permitted or that the effect reception is permitted. It is desirable to output the acceptable reception sound. As a result, the player can recognize that the second effect acceptance period has occurred, and it is expected that an operation error is less likely to occur. The "acceptable sound" means that when a sound is started to be output, an acceptable acceptability state (effective period) always occurs while the sound is being output (while sound data is assigned), or It is a sound whose allowable state (effective period) has already occurred. In other words, it indicates that the output is started within the set time during which reception of the performance is permitted and the state is reached in which reception of the performance is permitted, or before the start of the set time during which reception of the performance is permitted. It is something that suggests that the output is started at this time and that the reception of the effect will be permitted, for example, it is output as a effect sound such as "picking".

However, even at the occurrence of the first effect acceptance period in which the specific operation receiving part is given an opportunity to operate, it indicates that the effect acceptance is permitted or that the effect acceptance will be permitted. An acceptable acceptance sound may be output. However, in this case, it is desirable that the form (tone color, etc.) of the allowable acceptance sound is different between when the first effect accepting period occurs and when the second effect accepting period occurs. Alternatively, during the first effect reception period, even if the effect reception is made while the reception permission sound is being output, the reception permission sound that is in the output state is continued without being ended, but in the second effect reception period. In (3), if the performance is accepted while the acceptable acceptance sound is being output, it is desirable to terminate the acceptance acceptable sound in the output state in the middle. You may make it employ|adopt both of those structures. According to such a configuration, it becomes easy to grasp which of the first effect receiving period and the second effect receiving period will occur, and an operation to the specific operation receiving section and a special operation receiving period can be performed. It becomes possible to properly grasp which of the operation on the part and the operation on the part has been accepted.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, after displaying a gauge image (small gauge image) having a relatively small display area, the display area of the gauge image (small gauge image) is reduced as time elapses. (For example, the display area is finally set to "0") to generate a small gauge effective period (effect reception period) that suggests the remaining time for which operation reception is permitted. After displaying a relatively large gauge image (large gauge image), the display area of the gauge image (large gauge image) is reduced over time (for example, the display area is finally set to "0"). There is also a case where a large gauge effective period (effect reception period) is generated that indicates the remaining time during which operation reception is permitted by performing a display to accept the operation. The effective period of the small gauge in which the image of the small gauge is displayed and the effective period of the large gauge in which the image of the large gauge is displayed are different from each other. The rate at which a mode that does not appear is executed) is different (for example, the large gauge effective period has a higher jackpot expectation). In addition to the small gauge valid period and the large gauge valid period, a valid period different from these may be generated. The small gauge valid period and the large gauge valid period may provide an operation opportunity to the same operation target, or may provide an operation opportunity to different operation targets.

In this regard, when an operation is accepted during the effective period of the large gauge, the change corresponding to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the effect after the operation, such as a display change or lamp emission) is started at the time when the execution is started. It is desirable to keep the large gauge image visible rather than hidden. In addition, even at the time when a change (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as display change and lamp emission) in response to the operation reception starts to be executed, the large gauge image becomes smaller as time passes. It is desirable to ensure that the display is not terminated and continues. As a result, while the large gauge image was displayed, there was a sense of security that it seemed that there was a lot of remaining time left, but after the operation was accepted, there was a question as to whether the operation was properly accepted. This makes it possible to make the user feel a sense of uneasiness, and it is possible to suitably maintain the sense of tension.

In this case, the display mode of the gauge image (for example, color and transmittance, etc.) may not necessarily be the same, and the gauge image may be made difficult to be visually recognized by another image. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, at least at the time when the change corresponding to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as display change and lamp emission) is started, the operation It is desirable to maintain the display state of the gauge image in the manner in which it was displayed before the reception was made, and to prevent the gauge image from becoming difficult to see due to other images. On the other hand, if the player's operation causes a change (at least one of the changes caused by the effect after the operation, such as a change in the display or the light emission of the lamp) in response to the reception of the operation by the player during the effective period of the small gauge, the change occurs. The gauge image (small gauge image) may be hidden when something (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) occurs. ) may be displayed instead of being hidden, and a change (display change, lamp emission, etc.) may be generated in accordance with the reception of the operation.

In addition, when the large gauge effective period occurs, it is desirable to output a reception acceptance sound that suggests that the reception of the performance is permitted, or that the reception of the performance is permitted. . As a result, the player can recognize that the large gauge effective period has occurred, and the sense of security until the operation reception is performed can be emphasized. The "acceptable sound" means that when a sound is started to be output, an acceptable acceptability state (effective period) always occurs while the sound is being output (while sound data is assigned), or It is a sound whose allowable state (effective period) has already occurred. In other words, it indicates that the output is started within the set time during which reception of the performance is permitted and the state is reached in which reception of the performance is permitted, or before the start of the set time during which reception of the performance is permitted. It is something that suggests that the output is started at this time and that the reception of the effect will be permitted, for example, it is output as a effect sound such as "picking".

However, even when the small gauge effective period occurs, a reception acceptance sound may be output to indicate that the reception of the performance is permitted or that the reception of the performance is permitted. However, in this case, it is desirable to change the form (timbre, etc.) of the acceptability sound between when the small gauge valid period occurs and when the large gauge valid period occurs. Alternatively, during the effective period of the small gauge, even if the effect is received while the permitted reception sound is being output, the permitted reception sound that is in the output state is not ended and continues, but during the effective period of the large gauge. It is desirable to terminate the acceptable acceptance sound in the output state when the performance acceptance is made while the acceptance acceptable sound is being output. You may make it employ|adopt both of those structures. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp which of the small gauge valid period and the large gauge valid period will occur, and the operation reception during the small gauge valid period and the large gauge valid period can be performed. It becomes possible to properly grasp which of the operation acceptance and the operation acceptance in the period is performed.

The large-gauge image and the small-gauge image may not only differ in size, but may also differ in shape (such as images that are not similar).

Note that, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above (or later), during the period in which operation acceptance is permitted, the simulated image is displayed dynamically so as to depict how the operation receiving portion is displaced. It is what is displayed. In this regard, the model image is not hidden and remains displayed at the time when the change (at least one of the changes caused by the effect after the operation, such as the display change and the light emission of the lamp) corresponding to the operation reception is started. In this case, the dynamic display of the model image may be continued without being terminated.

Further, the model image and the gauge image may be displayed as an integrated model image, which is described later, in which they are integrated.

In each of the production examples described above and each production example described later, "operation reception" means detection by mechanical operation means such as buttons, as well as by detecting contact with a specific operation receiving part with a touch sensor. It may be one in which the operation is accepted, or one in which the operation is accepted by detecting a player's movement in a specific area without contact.

In addition, when the effect that generates the effect acceptance period in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of the plurality of operation means) is referred to as "operation-related effect", the operation-related effect is not related to this. It may be executed in parallel with another specific effect (for example, movable body effect, count effect, etc.) without. However, in this case, when the "operational effect" is executed but "another specific effect unrelated to this" is not executed, the "operational effect" and "another unrelated effect" It is desirable that the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a higher rate than in the effect situation in which the "specific effect" is paralleled. In other words, when there is a production situation in which "operation-related production" and "another specific production unrelated to this" are performed in parallel, it is assumed that the production reception is not performed in the "operation-related production" and the post-operation production is not executed. Also, since ``another specific effect unrelated to this'' is in the execution state, the decline in gaming interest can be suppressed, whereas the ``operation-type effect'' is executed but ``another specific effect unrelated to this'' is being executed. When there is a production situation in which the "specific production" is not executed, if the production reception is not performed in the "operation system production" and the production after the operation is not executed, it will be in a situation where no production is executed. Therefore, a decline in interest in gaming is inevitable. Therefore, when the "operational effect" is executed but "another specific effect unrelated to this" is not executed, the "operational effect" and "another specific effect unrelated to this" By making the rate at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions higher than in the effect situation in which "effect" is paralleled, it is possible to preferably maintain the game interest when the operation system effect occurs. become. The percentage may be 100%. By the way, the premonition effect that is performed before the effect reception period occurs, and the effect that the operation means to be operated operates are executed as "operation system effect" or related effects. It can be said that it is a thing. In addition, as the ``other specific effect'', for example, if it is generated before the start of the effect acceptance period (preferably, the premonitory effect), it is suggested in advance that the above-mentioned automatic effect function will function more often. be able to In this case, it is desirable that the effect be executed as an effect that ends after the end of the effect reception period (preferably, the post-operation effect). On the other hand, as "another specific effect", for example, if it is executed as an effect that occurs after the start of the effect reception period (preferably, a sign effect) and ends before the end of the effect reception period, It becomes possible to recognize only immediately before whether there is a high percentage of the above-mentioned automatic production function functioning, and it becomes possible to provide production in a tense atmosphere. In this respect, as "another specific effect", if it is to be generated before the start of the effect reception period (preferably, the sign effect), the "another specific effect" is repeated multiple times within one symbol variation. If it is done, it will be executed even when the production acceptance period does not occur, so the ratio of the automatic production function to function when "another specific production" is executed is high. It will be possible to create a sense of tension about whether the production acceptance period will occur.

In addition, when it is in a specific production state (automatic button production state), the loss variation corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested, and the number of times of execution is a specific value (for example, 999 times). Until reaching the 1000th losing variation), an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) based on the result of the big hit determination can be generated with a predetermined probability. In addition, even if the performance reception period occurs, when there is no operation by the player, the above automatic performance function may or may not function. On the other hand, when it is in a specific production state (automatic button production state), the loss variation according to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested, and the number of times of execution is a specific value (for example, 999 times). , and when reaching the 1000th loss variation), in the pattern variation (production pattern) that reaches the specific value, regardless of the result of the big hit determination, an operation opportunity for the operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) is always generated, and even if there is no operation by the player within the effect reception period, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioned, and there is an operation by the player within the effect reception period. A process for always generating the same post-operation effect as the time may be executed. According to such a configuration, when the number of times of continuous execution of the losing variation reaches a specific value, "The player should be operated every time the effect reception period occurs while the losing variation is being continuously performed. As if he felt responsible for what he had done so far, the pachinko machine 1 itself always functioned automatically even if there was no operation by the player. Since it is realized as an effect to make the game play, the interest in the game can be preferably maintained. It should be noted that at this time, during the effect acceptance period that occurs when the number of times of execution of the unsuccessful variations has reached a specific value (for example, the 1000th unsuccessful variation), the unsuccessful variations are sequentially digested and executed. A special display image (for example, It is desirable to make a message such as "If it is troublesome, I will operate it for you"). Further, even after the symbol variation (production pattern) reaching a specific value is digested, the symbol variation is repeated every time the symbol variation is digested until a specific condition (for example, the occurrence of a jackpot game state) is satisfied. Within (production pattern), regardless of the result of the big hit determination, the production acceptance period in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of the plurality of operation means) is always generated, and a special display image (for example, " If it is troublesome, I will operate it on your behalf." It is desirable to execute a process that always generates the post-operation effect.

In addition, when in a specific production state (automatic button production state), the loss variation corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested, and the number of times of execution is a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive times). The number of remaining variations until reaching the 1000th lost variation) may be displayed.

In addition, while in a specific production state (automatic button production state), the loss variation according to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested, and until the number of executions reaches a specific value, during the pattern variation, the first operation Both the effect receiving period for the means and the effect receiving period for the second operating means can occur. Alternatively, the performance may be developed so that only one of the performance reception period for the first operation means and the performance reception period for the second operation means always occurs, and the other side cannot occur. According to such a configuration, since the operation opportunity is always given to the same operation means, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the effect reception period itself, which causes expectations. become nauseous. However, in this production example, ``Even though the player was urged to operate each time the production acceptance period occurred while the losing variation was being continuously executed, no results were obtained. As if he felt responsible for what he had done so far, even if there was no operation by the player, the pachinko machine 1 itself is realized as an effect that always functions the automatic effect function. In order not to have any more expectations, the effect reception period is generated for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) with a relatively low degree of expectation at the time of occurrence, and the second operation means (for example, It is desirable not to generate an effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001).

Further, for the first effect acceptance period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) of the plurality of operation means is given the opportunity to operate, it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). Although it can occur both when it is not activated and when it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the second operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) among the plurality of operation means Regarding the second effect acceptance period in which the operation opportunity is given to, it cannot occur when it is not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It may be possible to generate it when According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and when in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) game interest can be maintained favorably.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when generating the effect reception period based on the result of the big hit determination,
Displaying a model image imitating the operating means (an operation target suggesting image suggesting the operating means to be operated) (model image display means),
When the player performs an operation while the model image is being displayed after the effect reception period has occurred, the post-operation effect can be executed based on the operation (player operation reception means),
・After the effect acceptance period has occurred, if a specific timing arrives while the model image is being displayed and the player has not performed an operation, the post-operation effect can be executed without receiving an operation by the player ( automatic production reception means)
However, the model image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different ratios (expectations) at which the post-operation effect is executed in a "mode advantageous to the player" when the effect is accepted. It is desirable to be able to According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be recognized in either case where the player operation receiving means generates the post-operation effect or the automatic effect receiving means generates the post-operation effect. It will be possible to generate a post-operation production while it is being done.

Further, when the post-operation effect is generated by the functioning of the above-described automatic effect function, the player does not get involved in the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) that is the object of operation. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern that the player may not be able to grasp which operation means the automatically generated post-operation effect corresponds to. Therefore, when the above-described automatic effect function is activated to generate the post-operation effect, first, a model image (an operation target suggestive image that suggests the operation means to be operated) is displayed within the effect reception period, Even when the automatic effect function described above functions, it is desirable to generate the post-operation effect while the model image is displayed instead of being hidden. In this case, the display mode (for example, color or transmittance) of the operation target suggestion image before and after the post-operation effect is generated may not necessarily be the same. It suffices if it can be recognized even in the state where the post-operation effect has occurred. On the other hand, if a post-operation effect occurs due to an operation by the player within the effect reception period, the operation object suggesting image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-described automatic display may be performed. As in the case where the effect function functions, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which the operation target suggestive image is displayed instead of being hidden. The effect after the operation may be executed using an area of the effect display device 1600 that is different from at least the area where the model image is displayed, or may be performed by emitting light from a lamp provided on the game board 5 or by a movable decoration. may be executed as an operation by

At this time, if the model image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectations, the level of expectation (model image display mode) can be confirmed.

The model image that continues to be displayed in this manner is hidden after the post-operation effect occurs. However, the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic effect means is executed when the specific time has passed after the first side effect reception period has occurred, and the specific time after the first side effect reception period has occurred When the automatic processing is executed by the first automatic effect means when different time passes, the time from the execution of the post-operation effect to the non-display of the model image is also different from each other. is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize whether the post-operation effect has been generated by automatic processing when the specific time has passed, or whether the post-operation effect has been generated by automatic processing when a time different from the specific time has passed. Even if there is no post-operation effect, by checking the time from when the post-operation effect is executed until the model image is hidden, it becomes possible to recognize at what time the post-operation effect occurred. .

In addition, when a post-operation effect occurs by automatic processing when a specific time has passed, and when a post-operation effect occurs by automatic processing when a time different from the specified time has passed, a big hit is determined by the jackpot judgment. may be different.

In addition, when an effect reception period is generated in which an operation opportunity is given to the player while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), two displays are displayed during the effect reception period. Either mode (for example, a low expectation display mode with a relatively low degree of expectation for a big win, or a high expectation display mode with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big win) can appear, and a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image ) appears, even if no operation is performed within the effect acceptance period, the effect is always accepted (the automatic effect function always functions), and the effect after the operation corresponding to the effect acceptance is executed, but the low expectation is displayed. When a mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, an effect reception (automatic effect function functions) is performed when no operation is performed within the effect reception period, and a post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed. The effect may be developed so that there are cases where the effect is not received (the automatic effect function is functioned) and the effect after the operation is not executed. That is, if you forget to operate when a high-expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears, it is inevitable that the effect after the operation will not be confirmed. When a display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, it is assumed that even if an operation is forgotten, the interest in the game will not decrease so much, so a high-expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) has appeared. Sometimes, if you forget to operate it, the automatic production function will always function within the production reception period to avoid the decline in the game interest due to forgetting to operate it, but it also has a low-expectation display mode (for example, blue operation If you forget to operate when the image) appears, the automatic effect function will not necessarily function within the effect acceptance period so that you do not forget to operate. It is expected that the player's sense of participation will be enhanced. Note that when not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the low-expectation display mode (for example, blue operation image) appears, but the high-expectation display mode (for example, red operation image) appears. You may make it so that it cannot appear. In addition, any one of three or more display modes may appear during the effect acceptance period.

[Additional performance of simulated image display]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is to be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern It is possible to execute a production judgment (such as advance notice judgment) as to which of the expected productions (such as advance notice production) is to appear selectively. It should be noted that depending on the result of the production determination, all of the plurality of expected productions prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern (notice production, etc.) may be sequentially executed, or None of the expected effects (notice effects, etc.) may be executed.

Then, when such production judgment (production pattern judgment, advance notice judgment, etc.) is performed, by performing control to display the production content according to the result of the production judgment on the production display device 1600, according to the result of the big hit judgment The variable production by the decorative pattern will be executed along with the expected production (preliminary production) related to the background depiction (background notice) and movable body operation (role production). As a result, as a result of execution of the variation effect by the decorative pattern together with the expected effect of the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, etc., when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed as a privilege for the player. become possible.

In such a configuration, the variable performance by the decorative pattern is provided as a performance having "a function indicating whether or not a big hit has been obtained as a result of the judgment of the big hit", and the background depiction, the movement of the movable body, etc. is provided as an effect having "a function of suggesting the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit has been obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the determination of the variation pattern, it is specified among the highly expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach effects with background changes, etc.) If the variation pattern is selected, even if any result is obtained as the production judgment (such as the advance notice judgment), when the pattern production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing in the SP reach (predetermined condition is established), it is possible to generate an operation reception effect (effective period) in which the reception of the effect is permitted. However, as will be described later, the form of the allowable acceptance sound that is output when the operation reception effect is generated is changed according to the result of the effect determination, so that the post-operation effect is executed in a highly anticipated manner. It is designed to suggest the ratio of winning and the ratio of stopping the jackpot pattern.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low-expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the variation pattern determination, Even if there is, when a special result is obtained in the production determination (advance judgment etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the pattern production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (when a predetermined condition is established), It is possible to generate an operation reception effect (effective period) in which reception of effect is permitted. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, unless a special result is obtained in the performance determination, even if the symbol performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, no operation reception performance (effective period) occurs. . In addition, the operation reception effect (valid period) that occurs in a predetermined variation pattern is different from the operation reception effect (valid period) that occurs when the pattern effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as a performance.

In addition, even if any result is obtained as a notice effect judgment, at a predetermined timing during SP reach, the operation reception effect (effective period) will be generated. may also be provided. However, even if any result is obtained as a notice effect judgment, the fluctuation pattern that generates the operation reception effect (effective period) at the predetermined timing is included in the low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). It is desirable to prevent it from being lost or to lower its selection ratio.

By the way, the operation reception effect (effective period) that can occur under these conditions is a predetermined effect for the effect member that is the object of the effect, as long as the operation is detected within the set time (effective period). (At least one of a display change in the effect display device 1600, a sound effect change in the speaker, a light emission change by the lamp, and a performance action by the movable decorative body) is performed. The reception effect (effective period) itself is poor in effect, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease until the effect is executed after the operation.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation reception effect,
・During the execution period of the pattern production (production pattern) based on the low-expectation fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), the “BGM reproduction (specific type of production sound)” corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (production pattern) is in an unsuppressed mode. During the execution period of the pattern production (production pattern) based on the low-expectation unsuppressed reception production and high-expectation fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern) that gives an operation opportunity while being output, the fluctuation pattern (production pattern) Whether the corresponding "BGM playback (specific type of effect sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silent, or in a non-output state (whether the playback period in which the audible sound is recorded in the sound data As mentioned above, various measures are taken, such as making it possible to at least generate a high-expectation suppression reception effect that gives an opportunity to operate while the game is being terminated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the model image displayed in the operation acceptance effect is further displayed as an integrated model image that is integrated with the periphery decoration image that decorates the periphery of the model image. By doing so, it is intended to improve the amusement of the game when the operation acceptance effect (effective period) occurs. For such an integrated model image, the operation reception effect (effective period) that occurs when the pattern effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to the specific timing during the SP reach, and the operation that occurs in the predetermined variation pattern It is desirable to display it both in the reception performance (effective period) and in both the low-expectation non-suppressed reception performance and the high-expectation suppressed reception performance. Also, in each of the above-described production examples, it is desirable to realize the display mode of the exemplified model image by replacing it with one of the integrated model images described below in order to improve the amusement of the game. .

A case of displaying a model image as an "integrated model image" will be described below.
First, to explain the "simulation image" again, the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given in the operation acceptance effect includes the "operation receiving part" that receives the operation by the player, and the peripheral edge of the operation receiving part. A "peripheral decorative portion" for decoration is provided. In this regard, the "simulated image" means an image that imitates the "operation receiving section" of such operation means. The "operation receiving part" is usually provided so as to be displaced by the player's operation, and the "peripheral decorative part" is often provided as a non-movable member. For example, in the case of the operation means (effect operation unit 400) illustrated in FIGS. will be equivalent to 124, 139, etc., the "operation receiving portion" corresponds to the sword portion 5010, and the "peripheral decoration portion" corresponds to the sheath portion 5020. Become.

FIG. 144 shows an "integrated model image" displayed when an operation reception effect (effective period) is generated for an operation means provided with an "operation receiving portion" that receives a "pressing operation" by a player. It is a figure which shows the example.

In this example of explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that a push-type handle button 5014 is provided as an "operation receiving portion" on the upper surface of the handle portion 5012 of the sword ornament 5001. FIG. In other words, when the handle button 5014 is "pressed" by the player, it is pushed into the handle portion 5012 and detected by a predetermined sensor (detection means), and the detected information is used as an effect (such as a trigger for execution of effect after operation). ). According to such a configuration, the sword ornament 5001 as an operation unit includes a "handle button 5014" that can operate (vertically move) with respect to the handle 5012, and a "handle button 5014" that can operate (vertically move) with respect to the sheath 5020. There will be two operation receivers, a possible "handle 5012".

FIG. 144 explains the “integrated model image” when a specific operation acceptance effect (effective period) occurs in which an operation opportunity is given to the pattern button 5014 when a predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. I decided to. However, in the examples described below, including FIG. It may be applied as an "integrated model image" when an operation reception rendering (effective period) in which an opportunity is given occurs. That is, in this case, the “simulated image imitating the operation button 410” illustrated in each of the above-described production examples can be replaced with the “integrated simulated image” described below. In this case, the pattern button 5014 is not provided and is omitted as a member.

As shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is provided with a specific operation reception. When an effect (effective period) is generated, in the effect display device 1600, the button model image BMG imitating the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is integrated with the edge decoration image SSG decorating the edge. The integrated model images IGa to IGd are displayed. In the examples shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d), the button model image BMG and the border decoration image SSG are not separately prepared as image data, but are integrated into one image data (integrated image data). It is designed to be displayed only as simulated images (IGa to IGd). Further, when the integrated model images IGa to IGd are displayed, operation prompting displays such as "press" and "down arrow" are also displayed, but are omitted here for convenience of explanation.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the post-operation effects to be executed when an operation is accepted in a specific operation reception effect (effective period) are "relatively low expectation first effect mode" and "relative A plurality of production modes are prepared, including a second production mode with a high degree of expectation, and one of these production modes is executed based on the result of the big hit judgment (production judgment). . In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d),
144(b) than when the mode (integrated model image IGa) shown in FIG. 144(a) appears in a specific operation reception presentation (effective period) When appears, the appearance ratio of the "relatively high expectation second effect mode" as a post-operation effect is higher,
144(c) (integrated model image IGc) than when the mode (integrated model image IGB) shown in FIG. When appears, the appearance ratio of the "relatively high expectation second effect mode" as a post-operation effect is higher,
144(d) (integrated model image IGd) than when the mode (integrated model image IGc) shown in FIG. When appears, as a post-operation production, the appearance ratio of "relatively high expectations for the second production mode" is higher. Any one of the simulated images IGa to IGd is displayed.

It is not necessary to prepare all of the four modes shown as integrated model images IGa to IGd. Even if at least two aspects are prepared, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation as a post-operation effect within the validity period. Moreover, it is also possible to further prepare modes different from the above four modes (integrated model images IGa to IGd) and display any one of the prepared modes.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
・Operating means (sword ornaments 5001, 5001, production operation unit 400),
integrated model image display means for displaying a model image imitating the operation receiving part as integrated model images IGa to IGd integrated with peripheral edge decoration images decorating the peripheral edge of the model image;
and an operation reception executing means capable of causing a display change (post-operation effect) when an operation is performed by the player while the integrated model image is displayed and a predetermined displacement occurs in the operation receiving portion, The integrated model image can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (integrated model images IGa to IGd).

Details of the “integrated model images” shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d) will be described separately for each aspect (integrated model images IGa to IGd).

First, the “integrated model image IGa” shown in FIG. 144(a) is composed of a normal button model image BMGa and a normal border decoration image SSGa that decorates the periphery of the normal button model image BMGa. However, in the "integrated simulated image IGa", the normal button simulated image BMGa is displayed as "an image imitating the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which the opportunity to operate is given". On the other hand, the normal peripheral edge decoration image SSGa is "a peripheral edge decoration portion (handle portion 5012 or frame Unit 415) is not simulated, and as a virtual decoration on the display effect on the effect display device 1600, the periphery of the normal button model image BMGa is decorated.

According to such a configuration, first, even if a plurality of operation means are provided, it is possible to determine to which of these operation means the operation opportunity is given. ) can be easily recognized by visually recognizing the normal button model image BMGa that imitates the button model image BMGa. Moreover, the normal button model image BMGa itself is not an actual peripheral edge decoration portion, but a gorgeous and large image (integrated model image IGa) integrated with a preferable peripheral edge decoration image for improving decorativeness and performance. ), the performance impact when the normal button model image BMGa is displayed is increased, and it is expected that the amusement of the game will be improved. In addition, there is no need to worry about the cost and installation space for making the existing peripheral decoration luxurious, and it is possible to realize a highly flexible performance that is not bound by the shape of the existing peripheral decoration. become.

In the “integrated model image IGa” shown in FIG. 144(a), the normal border decoration image SSGa is expressed as a pedestal for installing a button (normal button model image BMGa). It is decorated with a predetermined decoration to warn that it is a button with a high degree of danger. As described above, the "pedestal" and the "predetermined decoration" have different shapes and are represented as different decorations from the actual peripheral edge decoration.

In this regard, in the "integrated model image IGa" according to this embodiment, a display target area for the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided for such a normal edge decoration image SSGa. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 145 and the like, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed so that the display area within the display target area decreases with the lapse of time. More specifically, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced to a predetermined minimum value (including "0") from a predetermined maximum display area when no operation is accepted within the valid period. is displayed so as to decrease with the passage of time until the display area of . That is, in this case, the normal border decoration image SSGa not only has the function of suggesting the operation means to be operated, but also suggests the remaining time until the state (effective period) in which operation reception is permitted ends. It also has a remaining time suggesting function.

In the normal edge decoration image SSGa shown in FIG. 144(a), a partition image KG is provided to partition the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from other areas in the normal edge decoration image SSGa. . The area surrounded by the partition image KG functions as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG". However, the division image KG does not necessarily have to be displayed, and a predetermined range in the normal edge decoration image SSGa may be set as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG".

In the example shown in FIG. 144(a), a predetermined decoration (here, "white and black striped pattern") is applied to the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. , a gauge image (here, a “gray” gauge image) GG having a predetermined transmittance is displayed so as to be superimposed on the display target area to which the predetermined decoration is applied. According to such a configuration, even in a portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed, the predetermined decoration is not hidden and can be visually recognized. It is possible to preferably maintain amusement in the game over the entire period until it becomes empty.

When realizing such a display mode in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the gauge image GG having a predetermined transmittance is superimposed on the display target area to which the predetermined decoration is applied. In addition to the method of displaying the area with a predetermined decoration, it is also possible to employ a method of displaying the area itself to be displayed with a predetermined decoration by changing the color of the area with the gauge and the area without the gauge. In this case, the gauge image GG itself does not exist as a single image data, and the gauge image GG can be expressed only by the color change of the predetermined decoration in the display target area.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 144(a), the predetermined decoration (here, "white and black striped pattern") applied within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is replaced by the normal peripheral edge decoration. Since the image SSGa is applied in a manner that extends over other regions, the display target region of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself can be more highly integrated and decorative. Therefore, it is expected that the interest in the game will be improved when the "integrated model image IGa" is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 144(a), when a specific operation acceptance effect (effective period) in which the "integrated model image IGa" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, the pattern button to be operated is displayed. 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "blue") as the normal button model image BMGa in the "integrated model image IGa". That is, as will be described later, a plurality of modes with different expectations are prepared for the button model image BMG, and as one of these modes, the normal button model image BMGa is displayed. , it is possible to recognize the mode (expectation) of the button model image BMG only by confirming the handle button 5014 to be operated without visually recognizing the normal button model image BMGa.

The "button model image BMGa (FIG. 144(a))" does not necessarily have to be an exact model of the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated. What is necessary is just to be displayed with a copy level (deformation, etc.) to the extent that it is possible to recognize which operation means it is.

On the other hand, the “integrated model image IGb” shown in FIG. , and a peripheral edge decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge thereof. However, in the "integrated model image IGb", the border decoration image SSG is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned "normal border decoration image SSGa", but the button model image BMG is displayed as the above-mentioned "button model image BMGa", but a "special button model image BMGb" having a different shape.

More specifically, in the “integrated model image IGb” shown in FIG. 144(b), the special button model image BMGb simulates the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated. 144(a)), which is displayed as an image having a different shape from the "button model image BMGa (FIG. 144(a))" that imitates the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410). However, if such a display method is simply adopted, there is a concern that it will be difficult to recognize which one of the plurality of operation means is the operation target when the "integrated model image IGb" is displayed.

However, as described above, in the "integrated model image IGa", the "button model image BMGa" that imitates the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated is integrated with the "normal border decoration image SSGa" and displayed. Therefore, the "normal border decoration image SSGa" itself naturally has a function of suggesting that the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is the operation target. In this regard, in the "integrated model image IGb", the "special button model image BMGb" is integrated with the "normal border decoration image SSGa" for display. BMGb" does not properly simulate the operation target, the "integrated model image IGb" as a whole may suggest that the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is the operation target. become able to. In order to preferably obtain such a function and effect (a function of suggesting an operation target by the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa), an operation means different from the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is used for the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa". It can be said that it is important not to display when (handle 5012, etc.) is an operation target.

According to this configuration, the button model image BMG that simulates the operation receiving portion and the peripheral edge decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge of the button image BMG are displayed as an integrated model image. The button model image BMG, which is only a part of the simulated image, can be displayed in a more flexible expression method that is not necessarily bound by the shape of the operation means to be operated, resulting in a more conspicuous effect. It came to be expected to improve the amusement and enjoyment of games through their sexiness and decorativeness.

In the "special button image BMGb" illustrated in FIG. 144(b), a button with a streamlined shape is depicted with a more stylish design than the "button model image BMGa". Words such as "DANGER" are applied. The appearance of the non-existent ``special button image BMGb'' as a component of the pachinko machine 1 makes it possible for the player to easily feel a sense of premium, and the ``button image BMGa'' appears. You will be expected to instinctively feel that expectations are higher than usual.

Also, as shown in FIG. 144(b), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the "integrated model image IGb" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, it is also made to be an operation target. The handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "red") as the special button model image BMGb in the "integrated model image IGb". That is, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a mode corresponding to the type of the button model image BMG in the "integrated model image IG". Even without visually recognizing the image BMG, it is possible to recognize the mode (expectation) of the button model image BMG only by confirming the pattern button 5014 to be operated.

On the other hand, the “integrated model image IGc” shown in FIG. It is configured as an image integrated with a peripheral edge decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge. However, in the "integrated model image IGc", the button model image BMG is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned "normal button model image BMGa", but the border decoration image SSG is displayed as the above-mentioned "normal border decoration image". "Image SSGa" is displayed as "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" having a different shape.

However, the "special edge decoration image SSGb" is similar to the "normal edge decoration image SSGa" in the following points.
- "The peripheral decorative part (handle part 5012 or frame unit 415) actually provided around the peripheral edge of the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given is not modeled, and the performance display As a virtual decoration on the display effect of the device 1600, the periphery of the button model image BMG is decorated.
A display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided.

According to such "integrated model image IGc (FIG. 144(c))", when the "integrated model image IGa (FIG. 144(a))" is used as a reference, any operation means can be operated. It is possible to greatly change the overall shape of the “integrated model image IGc (Fig. 144(c))” without causing a change in the shape of the “button model image BMG” that suggests whether the opportunity is granted. become able to. As a result, it is possible to achieve highly flexible decorativeness and performance by causing a change in shape without sacrificing the function of suggesting the operation target.

In addition, in the "special border decoration image SSGb" (Fig. 144(c)) according to this embodiment, at least part of it is an image having the same decoration as the "normal border decoration image SSGa" (Fig. 144(a)). It is displayed as Therefore, the same post-operation effect is applied when the “integrated model image IGa (FIG. 144(a))” appears and when the “integrated model image IGc (FIG. 144(c))” appears. It becomes possible to suggest that it is a specific operation acceptance effect (effective period).

In particular, in the "special border decoration image SSGb" (Fig. 144(c)) according to this embodiment, a separate member having a special decoration is added to the "normal border decoration image SSGa (Fig. 144(a))". It is displayed as an enlarged image in its entirety in an expanded form. Therefore, it becomes easy to recognize that the "special border decoration image SSGb" is displayed as an advanced version of the "normal border decoration image SSGa", and the degree of expectation is higher than when the "button model image BMGa" appears. People are expected to instinctively perceive high things.

In addition, the "special edge decoration image SSGb" (Fig. 144(c)) has a different shape and decoration from the "normal edge decoration image SSGa" (Fig. 144(a)), but the gauge image (predetermined image) The GG display target area itself is not changed at all.

That is, when a part of the integrated model image IG is used as the display target area of the gauge image GG, is the display target area or the gauge image merely "a part of the decoration" or "the rest of the image?" It is difficult for the player side to distinguish whether it is a portion having a function of suggesting time. In this regard, the ``normal border decoration image SSGa (Fig. 144(a))'' and the ``special border decoration image SSGb (Fig. 144(c))'' are gauges that have an important function of ``indicating the remaining time''. The shape of the display target area of the image (predetermined image) GG is not changed, and the shape of the other portions is changed. It becomes possible to realize decorativeness and performance with a high degree of freedom by creating it.

Also, as shown in FIG. 144(c), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the “integrated model image IGc” is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, it is also made to be an operation target. The pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "blue") as the normal button model image BMGa in the "integrated model image IGc". That is, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a mode corresponding to the type of the button model image BMG in the "integrated model image IG". Even without visually recognizing the image BMG, it is possible to recognize the mode (expectation) of the button model image BMG only by confirming the pattern button 5014 to be operated. However, the normal button model image BMGa when the "integrated model image IGc" is displayed is displayed in a different color (for example, "green") than when the "integrated model image IGa" is displayed. can be In this case, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) also emits green light.

On the other hand, the “integrated model image IGd” shown in FIG. It is configured as an image integrated with a peripheral edge decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge. However, in the "integrated model image IGd", the button model image BMG is displayed not as the above-mentioned "normal button model image BMGa" but as a "special button model image BMGb" having a different shape. The border decoration image SSG is also displayed as a "special border decoration image SSGb" having a shape different from the "normal border decoration image SSGa" described above.

That is, in the "integrated model image IGd (FIG. 144(d))", the "special button model image BMGb" used in the "integrated model image IGB (FIG. 144(b))" and the "integrated model image IGc (Fig. 144(c))" is displayed as an image integrated with the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb". According to such a configuration, the operational effects of the “special button model image BMGb” described above with respect to the “integrated model image IGb (FIG. 144(b))” and the “integrated model image IGc (FIG. 144 ( c))” can be obtained by the above-mentioned “special border decoration image SSGb”, and when the “integrated model image IGa (FIG. 144(a))” is used as a reference, Since the modes of both the button model image BMG and the border decoration image SSG are changed, it is expected that people will instinctively feel that the expectations are high.

On the other hand, while the modes of both the button model image BMG and the border decoration image SSG are changed, the same decoration and shape appear in a part of the border decoration image SSG. 144(a) and IGd (FIG. 144(d)). It becomes possible to suggest that it is the operation acceptance effect (effective period).

Also, as shown in FIG. 144(d), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the “integrated model image IGd” is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, it is also made to be an operation target. The handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "red") as the special button model image BMGb in the "integrated model image IGd". That is, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a mode corresponding to the type of the button model image BMG in the "integrated model image IG". Even without visually recognizing the image BMG, it is possible to recognize the mode (expectation) of the button model image BMG only by confirming the pattern button 5014 to be operated. However, the special button image BMGb when the "integrated model image IGd" is displayed is displayed in a different color (for example, "rainbow color") from when the "integrated model image IGB" is displayed. You may do so. In this case, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) also emits light in rainbow colors.

As shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the pattern effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing, and the predetermined operation acceptance effect (effective period) is reached. occurs, the integrated model image IG in which the button model image BMG and the border decoration image SSG are integrated is displayed. Sometimes the other side can be displayed in one of multiple ways. For example, when the button model image BMG is displayed as a "normal button model image BMGa", the border decoration image SSG can be displayed as either a "normal border decoration image SSGa" or a "special border decoration image SSGb" ( Figure 144 (a), (c)). Further, when the button model image BMG is displayed as the "special button model image BMGb", the border decoration image SSG can be displayed as either the "normal border decoration image SSGa" or the "special border decoration image SSGb" ( Figure 144 (b), (d)). Further, when the border decoration image SSG is displayed as the "normal border decoration image SSGa", the button model image BMG can be displayed as either the "normal button model image BMGa" or the "special button model image BMGb" ( Figure 144 (a), (b)). Further, when the border decoration image SSG is displayed as the "special border decoration image SSGb", the button model image BMG can be displayed as either the "normal button model image BMGa" or the "special button model image BMGb" ( Figure 144 (a), (b)).

According to such a configuration, although the button model image BMG and the border decoration image SSG are displayed in an integrated manner, only one side thereof is displayed when the mode changes. Therefore, by looking at the one side whose aspect is not changed, it is possible to easily recognize that the predetermined operation reception effect (effective period) is being generated regardless of the aspect displayed on the other side. In addition, by looking at the other side whose aspect is changing, it becomes possible to appropriately recognize the degree of expectation. It should be noted that one side of the modeled button image BMG and the border decoration image SSG may not be changed in mode, and only the other side may be changed in mode.

Further, in the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG includes the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Then, when the integrated model image IG is displayed during the operation acceptance effect (effective period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so that the display area within the display target area decreases as time elapses. It is possible. That is, in this case, the "periphery decoration image SSG" has a remaining time suggesting function of suggesting the remaining time until the end of the state in which operation reception is permitted, and indicates which operation means the operation target is. By being displayed as an integrated model image IG that is integrated with the "button model image BMG" responsible for the suggesting function, it is possible to grasp the remaining time and the operation target and recognize which of the multiple modes has appeared. It is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained while the operation acceptance effect (effective period) is occurring.

144(a) to 144(d), in the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d), the peripheral decoration image SSG includes the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. (there are both parts that have the remaining time suggesting function and parts that do not have the remaining time suggesting function). In other words, the margin decoration image SSG is not intended only to indicate the remaining time of the operation acceptance effect (effective period), and in the portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed, the "button model image BMG decoration Since it is possible to actively adopt a display mode for the purpose of "improving the performance", it is possible to suggest the remaining time, but at the same time, the performance when the operation acceptance performance, which is an important performance, occurs. can be improved significantly. In order to obtain such effects, it is more desirable to display the non-display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG as a larger area than the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. I can say.

144(a) to (d), the button model image BMG can be displayed in one of a plurality of modes when the border decoration image SSG is displayed in one mode. However, as a matter of fact, when the “handle portion 5012”, which is the peripheral decorative portion, is one aspect, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410), which is the operation receiving portion, has multiple aspects (multiple emission colors). ). Therefore, when the button model image BMG changes, it can be confirmed only by confirming the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be copied.

144(a) to 144(d), the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed in one of a plurality of modes when the button model image BMG is displayed in one mode. However, as a matter of fact, the “handle portion 5012”, which is the peripheral decorative portion, is designed not to change to any one of the plurality of modes. That is, as described above, the peripheral decoration image SSG decorates the peripheral edge of the model button image BMG as a virtual decoration that does not actually exist as a part of the pachinko machine 1 . Therefore, the peripheral edge decoration image SSG does not need to match the mode of the "pattern portion 5012", which is the peripheral edge decoration portion, and it is possible to perform a variety of depictions that are preferable for enlivening the presentation. The “handle portion 5012”, which is the peripheral decorative portion, may be provided so as not to be changed in a plurality of modes, such as being non-luminous.

In addition, in the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d), there is a case where both the button model image BMG and the border decoration image SSG are changed (FIG. 144(d)). However, as a matter of fact, it is desirable to change the mode of both the button model image BMG and the peripheral edge decoration image SSG when the "pattern portion 5012", which is the peripheral edge decoration portion, is one mode.

Different aspects appear in the "pattern portion 5012", which is the peripheral edge decoration portion, depending on whether the peripheral edge decoration image SSG is the "normal peripheral edge decoration image SSGa" or the "special peripheral edge decoration image SSGb". You may do so. However, the peripheral edge decoration image SSG changes at least in shape depending on whether the peripheral edge decoration image SSG is the "normal peripheral edge decoration image SSGa" or the "special peripheral edge decoration image SSGb". It is desirable that the "handle portion 5012" is allowed to cause only a mode change (for example, a change in the light emission mode) that does not involve a shape change. It can be said that it is desirable to provide the peripheral edge decoration part as one whose shape cannot be changed in order to emphasize the virtual rendering function of the peripheral edge decoration image SSG.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the model images include a button model image BMG that simulates the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410), and a pattern image that simulates the handle portion 5012. TMG is prepared, and the form of the margin decoration image SSG is changed according to which of these model images is displayed. That is, in this case, the peripheral edge decoration image SSGa,b that decorates the peripheral edge of the button model image BMG cannot be displayed when a model image different from the button model image BMG is displayed. The decorative images SSGa,b themselves can also be expected to have a function of suggesting which operation means the operation target is.

When the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG differs according to the form of the model image (button model image BMG, pattern image TMG), the form (thickness , length) should also be different. The operation reception effect in which the button model image BMG is displayed and the operation reception effect in which the pattern image TMG is displayed are effects that occur at the same timing within the same variation pattern (which one occurs is selected according to the effect determination). It may be a production that occurs at different fluctuation patterns or different timings. The border decoration image SSG that appears when the button pattern image BMG is a model image does not imitate the border decoration part. may However, even if the form (thickness, length) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is different, it is desirable that the set time as the operation reception rendering (effective period) may be the same.

In the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d), the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and other areas in the peripheral decoration image SSG have A predetermined decoration (here, “striped pattern”) is applied to the area, and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so as to overlap the predetermined decoration. That is, in this case, as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, the display area of the exposed predetermined decoration increases, so that the interest in the game can be improved. become able to.

In particular, in this embodiment, a gauge image (here, a “gray” gauge image) GG having a predetermined transmittance is displayed in such a manner as to be superimposed on a display target area to which a predetermined decoration is applied. ing. According to such a configuration, even in a portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed, the predetermined decoration is not hidden and can be visually recognized. It is possible to preferably maintain amusement in the game over the entire period until it becomes empty.

However, the predetermined decoration does not necessarily have to be displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Further, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself may have (also serve as) a predetermined decoration. In this case, as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, the display area of the predetermined decoration is reduced, the player who dislikes the reduction of the predetermined decoration is encouraged to perform the operation early.

In the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d), the peripheral edge decoration image SSG is the peripheral edge of the operation receiving portion (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) to be operated. The peripheral decorative portion (the handle portion 5012 or the frame unit 415) provided in the frame is not simulated, and the image represents an insubstantial object as a game machine component. Therefore, it is possible to achieve a higher degree of freedom in decorativeness and presentation without being bound by the substance of a game machine component.

In the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d), among the button model image BMG and the peripheral edge decoration image SSG, at least the peripheral edge decoration image SSG has a plurality of shapes. That is, in this case, it is possible to change the shape of only the border decoration image SSG representing an insubstantial object without changing the shape of the button model image BMG. It is possible to appropriately suggest whether or not it is, and to change the shape of the integrated model image IG to realize a display with higher performance and decorativeness.

As for the border decoration image SSG, when the button model image BMG is in one mode, the shape may not necessarily be changed, and only the color may be changed. However, the reason why the shape change is allowed is that the border decoration image SSG represents an insubstantial object and that the border decoration image SSG is displayed as an image integrated with the model button image BMG. That is why, in this sense, it can be said that changing the shape of the margin decoration image SSG has great technical value.

In the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d), the shape of the peripheral decoration image SSG is changed so as to increase its size. As will be described later, as a method of such a form change, there is a method of increasing the number of objects represented as an image (the number of ornaments, etc.), or a method of using a plurality of different outline shapes (rectangular parallelepiped, sphere, etc.). It is possible to adopt a method such as displaying a target range of a predetermined object represented as an image, or a method of expanding a range of objects to be displayed. Also, as will be described later, regarding the change in the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG, as a premonition effect, an effect is executed in which the expected form is changed stepwise from the form with a low degree of expectation to the form with a high degree of expectation. It is also possible to allow operation reception in the operation reception presentation while the changed form is maintained.

Further, in the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d), the gauge image ( Predetermined image) GG is displayed in the same form without being changed (at least in shape). Therefore, even if the form of the peripheral edge decoration image SSG changes, it is possible to preferably maintain the function of suggesting how much time is left. , the degree of expectation can also be suggested by a shape change in an area different from the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

Depending on which of the above effects is to be achieved, the peripheral edge decoration image SSG does not necessarily have to represent an insubstantial object. It may be displayed as an image imitating the part.

The integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d) can be dynamically displayed during the "effective period in which operation reception is permitted" such as a predetermined operation reception presentation. This prompts the player to perform an operation.

However, in the integrated model image IG according to this embodiment, the button model image BMG and the border decoration image SSG are displayed in an integrated manner. Only one side is displayed dynamically, and the other side is displayed so as not to move. According to such a configuration, one side contributes to improving the performance when the button performance, which is an important performance, is generated by the dynamic expression, while the other side is displayed so as to remain in place. By doing so, when the integrated model image IG is viewed as a whole, it does not move and is displayed, so visibility can be preferably ensured.

In the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d), the button model image BMG is dynamically changed so as to depict how the operation receiving part to which the operation opportunity is given is displaced within its movable range. However, dynamic display of the border decoration image SSG is prohibited. Then, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided on the non-dynamically displayed side (peripheral decoration image SSG), and when the integrated model image IG is displayed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. can be displayed so that the display area within the display target area is reduced with the lapse of time.

In this way, the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is included in the side of the integrated simulated image IG that secures suitable visibility (peripheral decoration image SSG that is not dynamically displayed). As a result, the performance when the operation reception performance, which is an important performance, occurs is improved by dynamic display by the button model image BMG, but how much time is left to allow the reception of the performance? can be easily recognized.

In addition, the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the gauge image ( Predetermined image) GG is also included in the area where it is not displayed. That is, in this case, when performing an effect suggesting the degree of expectation on the side of the integrated model image IG that has secured suitable visibility, the effect is performed in an area where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from being adversely affected.

A region different from the display target region of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in the margin decoration image SSG, the shape of the margin decoration image SSG itself, and the button model image BMG are provided with a plurality of aspects with different expectations. Although one of the modes is displayed based on the result of the big hit determination (performance determination), the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself have different expectations. A plurality of modes may be provided, and one of the modes may be displayed based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination).

By the way, as shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d), when the button model image BMG is displayed as an integrated model image IG that is integrated with the peripheral edge decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge of the button image BMG, In addition, when the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is included in the peripheral edge decoration image SSG, is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG merely a decoration or pattern in the peripheral edge decoration image SSG? , or has a function of suggesting the remaining time. In addition, there is a concern that it will become difficult to grasp the position to which the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has decreased due to the mixture of the decorations and patterns applied to the peripheral edge decoration image SSG, which may reduce the interest in the game. .

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, at least when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced (within the valid period), the gauge image ( An image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or an image obtained by partially changing the form of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed in the display target area where the predetermined image) GG can be displayed.

More specifically, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image obtained by partially changing the form of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is added to the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed at or near the end of the display target area. Then, according to the displacement of the terminal portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display position of the "specific image" in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed is also displaced in the same manner.

According to such a configuration, the "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the specific image obtained by partially changing the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is displaced to a predetermined position. Then, since the valid period ends, even if it is not possible to recognize whether the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself is merely a decoration or suggests the remaining time, the position of the "specific image" By checking , the remaining time can be recognized. In this sense, it can be said that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG does not necessarily have to be displayed when such a "specific image" is displayed.

FIG. 145 is a diagram showing a display example of the integrated model image IG from the start to the end of the effective period during which operation reception is permitted.

As shown in FIG. 145, if a timing A0 for starting an effective period (predetermined operation reception effect) within a predetermined variation pattern has arrived, effect display device 1600 , an integrated model image IG, and an operation prompting image such as "press!", "downward arrow", etc. are displayed.

In this example, the mode (integrated model image IGa) shown in FIG. 144(a) is displayed as the integrated model image IG. ) may be displayed in any of the modes shown in FIG. Even if the integrated model image IG is displayed in any manner, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG within the effective period, the display of the "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display of the "specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" causes changes in the mode described below with the lapse of time.

As shown in FIG. 145(a), first, in the integrated model image IG at the timing A0 (the start timing of the valid period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the entire display target area. It will be done. By displaying the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in such a full state, it becomes possible to recognize that the valid period has just started.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 145(a), at timing A0, which is the start timing of the effective period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG "Specific image whose mode is partially changed" is not displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not a "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or a specific image obtained by partially changing the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is being displayed. Only by confirming, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether or not the predetermined time has already passed since the acceptance of the operation (the remaining crotch area is reduced).

However, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed," A gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in such a manner that "the display area increases by the amount corresponding to the elapsed time" until a predetermined time (time required for the entire appearance of the specific image to finish appearing) elapses. is displayed in the display target area of .

For example, in the integrated model image IG at timing A1, which is a short time after timing A0 (the start timing of the effective period), as shown in FIG. ``Specific image TG'' as a specific image different from the ``specified image'', or a ``specified image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed'' appears until about half of the image is visible. It can be seen that the display area is in the stage of increasing with the lapse of time.

In the integrated model image IG at timings A2 and A3 after a large amount of time has elapsed, as shown in FIGS. A ``specific image TG'' as a ``specific image in which the form of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed'' has already finished appearing in its entirety, and the gauge image can be displayed without increasing the display area. (Predetermined image) It can be seen that there is a situation of displacement within the display target area of GG.

That is, as described above, the “specific image TG” is a gauge image (predetermined image) that is displaced when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced. Image) Displayed at or near the end of GG, and displayed such that its display position is displaced (continuously) in accordance with the displacement of the end of gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It has become.

The "specific image TG" according to this embodiment is displayed at a position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG as an image with a star-shaped mark in a blank square space. It has become a thing. However, the "specific image TG" may not be displayed as a separate image at a position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed in such a manner that the terminal portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed, such as an image in which the image gradually fades over a predetermined length. Alternatively, it may be displayed as an effect image appearing at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

In any case, the "specific image TG" originally functions as a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG that suggests that the remaining time has run out due to the minimum display area (here, "0"). Therefore, even when the remaining time runs out (when the effective period expires), at least a part (or all of them) will not be hidden and the display state will be maintained.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. The display area of the image (predetermined image) GG is "0", and about half of the display area of the "specific image TG" is left. Then, when no operation is accepted until this state is reached, the period during which operation acceptance is permitted ends in this state, and the integrated model image IG is hidden.

However, as described above, the "specific image TG" originally does not function as a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Therefore, it is most desirable to display the integrated model image IG at timing A4, which is the end timing of the valid period, so that the entire display area of the "specific image TG" is left. You may make it

However, it is difficult to realize a display in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG becomes exactly "0" at the end of the effective period. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the "specific image TG" is displayed at its display position in accordance with the displacement of the terminal part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG (in a continuous manner). is displayed so as to be displaced, when viewed from the player side, to what extent of the image displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is the gauge image ( Predetermined image) GG can be ambiguous.

That is, even though the "specific image TG" is not hidden when the effective period expires and most of its display area (more than half or all) remains, When viewed, it appears to be part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG whose display area is set to the minimum value (here, non-display) when the valid period expires. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the gauge image (predetermined image) GG appear to be longer than it actually is, so that it can be made to appear that the validity period remains longer than it actually is. Thus, it is possible to preferably maintain the interest in the game while the operation acceptance effect is being performed.

On the other hand, when the effective period of the operation acceptance effect expires, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed because at least a part of the "specific image TG" is left. Even if the period does not end immediately, it is possible to display the "specific image TG" so that the display area of the "specific image TG" is reduced. It is possible to make it difficult to cause a sense of incongruity due to a lag between the display timing and the end timing of the valid period. In other words, in this case, the "specific image TG" can be expected to play a role as a buffer capable of absorbing such a time lag.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 145, at timing A0, which is the start timing of the effective period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" The "specified image" is not displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. However, at timing A0, which is the start timing of the effective period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image obtained by partially changing the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" It may be displayed within the display target area of the image (predetermined image) GG.

According to such a configuration, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image obtained by partially changing the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is a part of the gauge image GG. Since it can be shown positively as if it were a It is hoped that improvements will be made.

FIG. 146 is a diagram showing another display example of the integrated model image IG from the start to the end of the effective period during which operation reception is permitted.

Now, assuming that the timing A0 at which the effective period (predetermined operation reception effect) starts within the predetermined variation pattern has arrived, even in the example shown in FIG. , an integrated model image IG, and an operation prompting image such as "press!", "downward arrow", etc. are displayed.

In this example as well, the mode (integrated model image IGa) shown in FIG. 144(a) is displayed as the integrated model image IG. You may make it display by any of the aspects shown to d). Even if the integrated model image IG is displayed in any manner, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG within the effective period, the display of the "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display of the "specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" causes changes in the modes shown in FIGS. 146(a) to (d) as time passes. .

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 146(a), in the integrated model image IG at the timing A0 (the start timing of the effective period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the entire area of the display target area. They are not displayed, and the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and the "specific image TG" are displayed. At the timing A0 (the start timing of the effective period), the "specific image TG" may be displayed in its entirety, although only a portion thereof may be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it look as if the "specific image TG" functions as a part of the "gauge image GG", so it seems that a longer time remains than it appears. It is possible to

The “specific image TG” according to this example is an image that expresses an “eraser”, and cannot fit within the area surrounded by the division image KG (the display target area of the gauge image GG), and is , an area whose mode can change according to the degree of expectation, etc.). With such a configuration, the "specific image TG" can be made more conspicuous than the "gauge image GG", and the occurrence of a situation in which it is not possible to recognize how much time is left can be suppressed. Be expected.

Further, in this example, when time passes from timing A0 to timings A2 and A3, and the "specific image TG" is displaced, the "specific image TG" is displaced as shown in FIGS. ” changes to a ”blank area” as if it had been erased with an eraser. According to such a configuration, the display area of the "gauge image GG" expressed in multiple colors (including similar colors and gloss expression) is reduced by an amount corresponding to the amount of displacement of the "specific image TG". Sometimes, the reduced area is expressed in only one color, so the contrast with the "specific image TG" as a boundary becomes prominent, suggesting how much time is left. It is possible to make it easier for the player side to recognize that it is a depiction to do. It is desirable that the color that appears in the reduced area be a color that is not used in the "gauge image GG".

In the example shown in FIG. 146 as well, the "specific image TG" is one of the gauge images (predetermined images) GG that suggests that the remaining time has run out due to the minimum display area (here, "0"). Since it does not originally function as a part, even when the remaining time runs out (when the valid period expires), at least part (or all) must not be hidden and the display state must be maintained. Become.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 146(d), the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is "0" in the integrated model image IG at timing A4, which is the expiration timing of the effective period. , and the entire display area of the "specific image TG" is left. Then, when no operation is accepted until this state is reached, the period during which operation acceptance is permitted ends in this state, and the integrated model image IG is hidden.

However, even in this example, part of the display area of the "specific image TG" is hidden and part of the display area of the "specific image TG" is hidden in the integrated model image IG at the timing A4, which is the end timing of the valid period. may be displayed as follows.

Even in this example, the "specific image TG" is displayed so that its display position is displaced (continuously) in accordance with the displacement of the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. When viewed from the player's side, it is possible to make ambiguous how far the image is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG among the images displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. become.

That is, even though the "specific image TG" is not hidden when the valid period expires and most of its display area (more than half or all) remains, the player cannot When viewed, it appears to be part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG whose display area is set to the minimum value (here, non-display) when the effective period expires. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the gauge image (predetermined image) GG appear to be an image longer than it actually is, so that it is possible to make it appear that the validity period remains longer than it actually is. Thus, it is possible to preferably maintain the interest in the game while the operation acceptance effect is being performed.

On the other hand, when the effective period of the operation acceptance effect expires, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed because at least a part of the "specific image TG" remains and is terminated. Even if the period does not end immediately, it is possible to display so that the display area of the "specific image TG" is reduced, so that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. It is possible to make it difficult to cause a sense of incongruity due to a lag between the display timing and the end timing of the valid period. That is, in this case, the "specific image TG" can be expected to play a role as a buffer that can absorb such a time lag.

In the example shown in FIG. 146, the images of "gauge image GG" and "specific image TG" are different from those in the example shown in FIG. 145, but the same images may be used. Conversely, in the example shown in FIG. 145, the same image as in the example shown in FIG. 146 may be used. 145, and an effective period during which the images of the "gauge image GG" and the "specific image TG" are displayed in the mode shown in FIG. may occur under different conditions. 145 and 146. In this case, the integrated model image IG itself and at least the shape of the display target area of the gauge image GG are mutually different between the valid period in which the mode shown in FIG. 145 appears and the valid period in which the mode shown in FIG. 146 appears. It is desirable to be different.

As described above, the integrated model image IG is dynamic during the effective period of the predetermined operation acceptance effect, as shown in FIGS. 145(a) to (e) and FIGS. It can be displayed to prompt the player to perform an operation. However, as described above, the button model image BMG is dynamically displayed so as to depict how the operation receiving portion to which the operation opportunity is given is displaced within its movable range. prevents this from being displayed dynamically. Then, a display target area for the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided in the margin decoration image SSG, which is the side on which such dynamic display is not performed, and the specific image TG and the gauge image ( (predetermined image) GG is changed, so that it is possible to easily recognize how much time remains until the effective period ends even in the dynamically displayed integrated model image IG. be able to

The “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” and the “specific image TG” may be displayed as one piece of image data, or may be displayed as separate image data.

According to the configuration shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, the “specific image TG” is such that the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” in the display target region of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” is Displayed at or near the end of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" displaced when reduced, and displacing its display position in accordance with the displacement of the end of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" to be displayed. Therefore, when viewed from the player's side, it is unclear how much of the image displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. will be able to

145, the "specific image TG" shown in FIG. 145 is not displayed when the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is at its maximum value. Until the time elapses (until the entire specific image TG appears), the display area of the "specific image TG" is reduced to compensate for the decrease in the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG". is increasing. According to such a configuration, it is as if the remaining time indicated by the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" does not decrease during the first period from the start of the valid period to the elapse of the predetermined time. Since it is possible to give the player a good image, the interest in the game can be favorably maintained.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, the integrated model image IG is displayed in one of a plurality of modes (FIGS. 144(a) to (e)) based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination). However, in any of these modes, the display shapes of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” and the “specific image TG” should be the same. It is desirable to Each aspect (pattern, color, etc.) of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and "specific image TG" may be changed according to the degree of expectation, but the function of suggesting the remaining time may be changed. In order to maintain the image in a favorable manner, even if one aspect of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” and the “specific image TG” changes, it is desirable that the other aspect does not change. For example, if the mark attached to the "specific image TG" shown in FIG. Since the degree of expectation (double circle) gradually becomes visible as the image )GG' is reduced, it is expected that the interest in the game will be improved.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, at least part (or all) of the “specific image TG” is non-existent even when the valid period expires without being operated by the player. Changed to maintain the display state without being displayed. 145 and 146, however, when timing A4 arrives without an operation by the player, the operation is accepted internally and the post-operation display or post-operation sound output (for example, operation It is desirable to function as the above-mentioned "automatic reception effect" in which only sound is output in response to reception. In this case, the timing A4 may be the timing at which the effective period ends, or may be set as the timing before or after this timing. In any case, the timing A4 is after the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” is hidden (timing at which it is hidden or later), and the “specific image TG” is It is desirable to set the arrival timing when at least a portion of the image is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if the player performs an operation immediately after the operation reception is no longer permitted, even immediately before the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output, " Since the specific image TG" is displayed, it is possible to make it appear as if the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output is started in response to the fact that the operation by the player has been completed in time and the operation has been accepted. become able to. The “specific image TG” may be displayed even when the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output is started (for example, after the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output is started, the “specific image TG” may be faded out). gradually disappearing, etc.).

Assuming that the valid period during which such automatic reception is performed is the first valid period generated by the establishment of the first condition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the second valid period different from the first condition It is possible to generate a second validity period in which automatic reception is not performed when the conditions are satisfied. Even in the second effective period, the button model image BMG is displayed as an integrated model image IG that is integrated with the peripheral edge decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge of the button image BMG. ) contains the display target area of GG. However, within the second valid period generated by the establishment of the second condition, the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, but the "specific image TG" is displayed. is no longer displayed. The integrated model image IG displayed within the first valid period and the integrated model image IG displayed within the second valid period are displayed as the same image, except that the "specific image TG" is not displayed. can be

That is, in the second effective period generated by the establishment of the second condition, unlike the first effective period generated by the establishment of the first condition, if the set time elapses without the player's operation being performed, The second valid period expires without the automatic reception functioning, and without generating a post-operation display or a post-operation sound output (or both). Therefore, if the display of the "specific image TG" is left at the point when it is no longer permitted to accept the operation by the player, the effective period ends even though the remaining time has not expired. This can lead to misunderstandings as if the game was played, and eventually the interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, it is desirable to prevent the "specific image TG" from being displayed during the entire period from the start to the end of the second effective period.

In this case, it is desirable that the length of the set time (the length of time from the acceptance of the operation to the end of the acceptance) be different between the first valid period and the second valid period. Further, it is desirable that the display change (post-operation display) and the sound output (post-operation sound output) that occur when an operation is accepted have mutually different contents.

In addition to the first valid period that occurs when the first condition is met, a third valid period during which automatic reception is performed may be generated (for example, generated when the third condition is met), In addition to the second effective period that occurs when the second condition is satisfied, a fourth effective period during which automatic reception is not performed may be generated (for example, generated when the fourth condition is satisfied). In short, at least the first effective period during which the display and sound processes are performed in the manner described above is included in the valid period during which automatic reception is performed (valid periods with different occurrence conditions). It is only necessary that at least the second effective period during which the display and sound processes are performed in the manner described above is included in the effective period during which the sound is not performed (the effective period with different generation conditions).

In addition, the "first effective period" here is
・It does not mean that the post-operation display or post-operation sound output is output only when it is set to a special effect state (automatic reception mode), regardless of whether or not there is an operation within the valid period.
- Regardless of the effect state, it means that the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output are output regardless of whether or not there is an operation within the valid period. In the first place, it is not always necessary to prepare a "special presentation state (automatic reception mode)" or a "plurality of presentation states" as the presentation state. It should be noted that if the ``second effective period'' occurs while the ``special presentation state (automatic reception mode) is set, either can be adopted as to whether or not the automatic reception is activated. (For example, it may be stated that "automatic reception is always activated regardless of the rendering state").

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed as an image having a specific non-linear shape. More specifically, when the effective period of the operation reception effect occurs, the integrated model image IG (peripheral decoration image SSG) is displayed, and one of the areas forming the integrated model image IG (peripheral decoration image SSG) is displayed. In the non-linear region of the part, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced as time passes. According to such a configuration, the depiction itself that reduces the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG as time elapses becomes decorative, so that the remaining time as the effective period is consumed. It becomes possible to suitably maintain the amusement in the game.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, a specific pattern is applied to the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and a gauge image having a predetermined transmittance is displayed. (Predetermined image) GG is displayed in a manner superimposed thereon, or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself is given a specific pattern, so that the gauge image (predetermined image) changes over time. It becomes possible to improve the decorativeness of the depiction itself that reduces the display area of the GG. Moreover, in this embodiment, the specific pattern is applied so as to extend beyond the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It is possible to further improve the decorativeness of the depiction itself that reduces the display area of the GG.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the non-linear specific shape display target area shown in FIGS. Then, a second display target region having a shape (non-similar shape) different from the non-linear specific shape and having a different distance from when the gauge image (predetermined image) GG starts reducing the display area to when it ends. The operation reception effect (effective period) in which is displayed can be generated under different conditions. Then, the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the first display target area is displayed may end when the first set time elapses without any operation by the player, or While there is at least a case where the operation is terminated when the second set time elapses without any operation being performed, the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target area is displayed may end when the first set time elapses without any operation by the player, but when the second set time elapses without any operation by the player I'm trying not to be terminated.

In this regard, the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target area is displayed are the operation objects to which the operation opportunity is given. If the (operation receiving units) are different, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the set times are the same when the operation targets are different. Coupled with the presence of the user, it is possible to encourage the user to enjoy the operation reception performance with a fresher feeling. In this case, the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target area is displayed simulate different operation receiving parts. The model image is displayed in such a way that it is integrated with the peripheral decoration image. As for the peripheral decoration image, an image depicting different decorations for the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target area is displayed. However, in either case, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided in a part thereof. The gauge images (predetermined images) GG may be displayed as having different display shapes.

In addition, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effects, the case where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the display target area of "non-linear specific shape" and the case where "different shape (non-similar shape) from this" is displayed. In the case where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the display target area, even if the same time (the first set time) is set, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output will be "a big hit." It is desirable that the proportions of appearances of "a mode suggesting that" are different. The ratio may be "0%" or "100%".

The same set time (first set time) is set for the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target area is displayed. Sometimes, it is desirable to give an opportunity to accept an operation regarding the same post-operation display or post-operation sound output. It is desirable to provide an opportunity to receive an operation with respect to a different post-operation display or post-operation sound output at different set times.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, by superimposing an operation-related display such as “Press!” or “Down arrow” on the integrated model image IG, When you see these with a button, it is more strongly expressed that you are in a situation that you should operate. However, here, the operation-related display such as "press!" In addition, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG indicating the remaining time and the specific image TG are not displayed overlapping each other.

In such a configuration, an operation such as "press!" Since the related display is superimposed on the integrated model image IG, it is possible to appropriately convey important information to the player and strongly urge the player to perform the operation. Needless to say, this is because the button model image BMG is displayed as an integrated model image IG integrated with the periphery decoration image SSG.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the valid period during which operation reception is permitted is the post-operation display performed when the operation is accepted within the valid period. There are multiple (types) of effective periods with different post-operation sound output contents. Conditions for generating these effective periods are different, and when any of the conditions for generating is satisfied, a corresponding type of effective period is generated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the "specific image TG" is displayed within the plurality of valid periods (the first valid period). and a period during which the "specific image TG" is not displayed (second effective period). Hereinafter, in this example, these "first effective period" and "second effective period" will be referred to as the above-described "first effective period" during which automatic reception is performed and the above-described "second effective period" during which automatic reception is not performed. are the same as the valid period of ", but it may be applied as a valid period different from these.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, when performing a precursor effect (specific display) suggesting that operation acceptance is permitted, the precursor effect (specific display) is may be executed in a form straddling before and after the occurrence timing of the valid period allowed. According to such an indication effect (specific display), since the effective period occurs while the flashy effect is being performed, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the effective period occurs. become able to.

However, when the predictive effect (specific display) is executed in such a manner, the predictive effect (specific display) is preferentially displayed with respect to the integrated model image IG. Even if the simulated image IG is displayed (internal layer display), the part overlapping the precursor effect (specific display) does not appear on the screen (not made visible). Alternatively, even if a predetermined transmittance is set for the portent effect (specific display), the portion of the integrated model image IG that overlaps the portent effect (specific display) is made difficult to see. In any case, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG starts to decrease under such a situation where visibility is difficult.

That is, in this case, the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, or the portion overlapping the precursor effect (specific display) is removed and the entire integrated model image IG (or the display target of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG) is displayed. By the time the visibility of the entire area) is improved, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already decreased, so from the player's point of view, the effective period (set time) may give the impression that the is substantially shortened.

On the other hand, the above-mentioned "specific image TG" can be expected to function as a "pseudo gauge" that looks like a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when viewed from the player's side. . Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, among the plurality of types of valid periods, "the precursor effect (specific display) is not executed, or the precursor effect (specific display) is executed In the "second effective period in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has not decreased at the time the portent effect (specific display) is terminated," the period from the occurrence of the second effective period to the end The "specific image TG" is not displayed at all during the period. On the other hand, among the plurality (types) of effective periods, the gauge image is generated during the execution of the omen effect (specific display) and the entire integrated model image IG becomes visible (or easily visible). In the first effective period in which the display area of the (predetermined image) GG is reduced, the specific image TG is displayed within the first effective period.

According to such a configuration, in the first effective period in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced when the omen effect (specific display) is hidden, the gauge image (predetermined image) Since the “specific image TG” is displayed in the display target area of the GG, the gauge image is displayed at the time when the entire integrated model image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) becomes visible. It becomes possible to make it appear that the display area of the GG has not decreased so much, and the decrease in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

On the other hand, if the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced at the time the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, or the second effective period during which the precursor effect (specific display) is not performed 145, for example, when the valid period occurs, the "specific image TG" is not displayed and the valid period occurs. When seeing how the "specific image TG" gradually appears with the lapse of time, it may be found that this does not function as the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. That is, in this case, since there is concern that exaggerating the length of the remaining time may reduce the interest in the game, the "specific image TG" is displayed during the second effective period. It is desirable to prevent this from occurring in order to prevent a decline in the interest in the game.

In addition to the second valid period, the plurality (types) of valid periods include "the precursor effect (specific display) is not executed, or the precursor effect (specific display) is executed but the precursor effect (specific display) is executed." ) is completed, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced (fifth effective period)" may be prepared under different conditions, or the first effective period In addition, "the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced by the time it occurs during execution of the omen effect (specific display) and the entire integrated model image IG becomes visible (or easily visible). The valid period (sixth valid period)" may be prepared under different generation conditions, and whether or not the above-mentioned "specific image TG" is displayed at this time may be set as appropriate. good. In short, the plurality (types) of effective periods include at least the second effective period during which the "specific image TG" is not displayed and the first effective period during which the "specific image TG" is displayed. If so, at least when the effective period is generated, the above-described action and effect are exhibited in relation to the premonitory effect (specific display).

In each example below, the gauge image GG and the specific image TG are displayed in the manner shown in FIG. may be executed.

FIG. 147 is a diagram showing an example of development of presentation when the first valid period occurs out of the first valid period and the second valid period.

FIG. 147(a) shows that, in the normal game state, when the reserved number is 0, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is a specific effect pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination, and the effect display device 1600 It shows the production situation being performed at.

FIG. 147(b) shows an effect situation in which an indication effect (specific display TH) is started on the effect display device 1600 during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 147(a).

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 147(b), it can be seen that at least in the effect display device 1600, the integrated model image IG has not yet appeared. However, since the precursor effect (specific display TH) is started, the integrated model image IG is internally displayed, and the precursor effect (specific display TH) is preferentially displayed, thereby the integration. The whole of the model image IG may be made invisible (or made invisible by a predetermined transmittance). That is, in this case, operation reception is permitted (effective period is started) from the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is started.

In FIG. 147(c), the precursor effect (specific display TH) shown in FIG. A portion that does not overlap with the portent effect (specific display) appears, and the portion is displayed in a state of good visibility.

That is, the integrated model image IG is the timing (including the timing shown in FIG. 147(b)) that comes after the situation shown in FIG. When the "specific timing (the timing at which the valid period starts)", which is the timing that arrives before the appearance of the situation where the It has become. Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 147(c), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG cannot be visually recognized (or visually difficult), but the reduction of the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started (progressed). In this example, the specific image TG is entirely overlapped with the precursor effect (specific display TH).

According to such a configuration, the predictive effect (specific display TH) is performed across the generation timing (specific timing) of the effective period, and the predictive effect is performed for a predetermined time after the effective period occurs. At least part of the integrated model image IG is rendered invisible or difficult to be visually recognized by the (specific display TH). That is, in this case, since the whole picture of the integrated model image IG is gradually revealed within the valid period, the degree of expectation suggested by the aspect of the integrated model image IG (the aspect of the peripheral decoration image ) or the operation target (aspect of the button model image) can be maintained for a predetermined period of time after the start of the validity period.

In the example shown in FIG. 147(c), the button model image that simulates the operation target is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize, but the peripheral edge decoration image that decorates the peripheral edge of the button image is "special peripheral edge decoration image SSGb". It is in a state in which it is possible to recognize that it is a "normal border decoration image SSGa". In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 147(c), since the "specific image TG" is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize it, the "specific image TG" is originally displayed when the effective period starts ( 146) or a type in which the "specific image TG" is not displayed at the start of the validity period and appears gradually thereafter (see FIG. 145). there is That is, in the case of the type shown in FIG. 146, it is easy to see that the "specific image TG" cannot function as the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, so the type shown in FIG. It can be said that executing the precursor effect in the manner described above when employed is particularly effective in suppressing a decline in interest in the game.

In FIG. 147(d), as a result of further development of the precursor effect (specific display TH) shown in FIG. (Here, the precursor effect is hidden).

As shown in FIG. 147(d), when the whole of the integrated model image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) becomes well visible, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. The area has already decreased, and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started (here, the entire “specific image TG” has finished appearing). That is, in this case, since the "specific image TG" also appears to be a part of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG", the display area is larger than the actual display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It is possible to make it seem that the display area has not decreased so much. As a result, it can be expected that the decrease in interest in the game due to the reduction in the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when the omen effect (specific display TH) ends will be suppressed.

FIG. 147(e) shows that the operation is not accepted until the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG reaches the minimum value (here, "0"), and the valid period ends (or the valid period ends). 16 shows an example of an image appearing on the effect display device 1600 immediately before (immediately before).

As shown in FIG. 147(e), at least a part (or all of them) of the "specific image TG" is displayed even when the effective period expires. In this regard, in the first valid period, as described above, even if the player does not perform any operation during the period, the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when the operation is performed are performed (see FIG. 147). (f)).

According to such a configuration (automatic reception effect), even if a situation occurs in which the player performs an operation immediately after the valid period ends (operation reception is no longer permitted), the post-operation display Since the "specific image TG" is displayed even immediately before the post-operation sound output is performed, the post-operation display and operation can be performed in response to the operation acceptance that accompanies the operation by the player in time. It becomes possible to make it look as if the post-sound output has started. In particular, when the omen effect (pre-display) is performed in such a manner, the gauge image (predetermined The display area of the image) GG has already decreased, and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started. That is, in this case, since it is likely that the player will not be able to perform the operation in time, even if there is no operation by the player within the valid period, the "specific image TG" will be displayed after the operation. It can be said that it is particularly effective to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game by outputting the sound after the operation.

147, the "specific image TG" is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 145, and the "specific image TG" is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. may be applied to any of

In the example shown in FIG. 147, the precursor effect (specific display TH) and the integrated model image IG are displayed in separate layers, and the precursor effect (specific display TH) is preferentially displayed to appear in FIG. We decided to realize the production progress in the mode. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is also possible to store the presentation progress in the aspect shown in FIG. This method can also be applied to each example described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 147, the mode (integrated model image IGa) shown in FIG. 144(a) is made to appear as the integrated model image IG. However, as described above, the integrated model image IG may appear in any of a plurality of modes (modes shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d)) based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination). . When adopting such a technique, it is more desirable to execute the portent effect in the manner shown in FIGS.

FIGS. 148 to 150 are diagrams showing modifications of the progress of presentation when the first valid period occurs out of the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

FIG. 148(a) shows that in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is the first effect pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of reservations is 0, and the effect display device. 1600 shows the production situation being performed.

FIG. 148(b) shows an effect in which the first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) is started in the effect display device 1600 during the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. 148(a). showing the situation.

This first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) is generated when the first effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) progresses to the first timing, and suggests that an operation-related effect will be performed. It functions as a production to do.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, after the first indication effect (first specific display TH1) is performed, based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination), " 149(c)" or "the image shown in FIG. 150(j)" is displayed, and "normal button model image BMGa" and "special button model image BMGa" are displayed as button model images BMG. It suggests which of the button model images BMGb' is likely to appear.

Here, if the "image shown in FIG. 149(c)" is displayed, there is a high possibility that the "normal button image BMGa" will be displayed as the button image BMG (here, "100%"). It is suggested that

The “image shown in FIG. 149(c)” according to this example is different from the “integrated model image IGa” in the normal state (the aspect shown in FIG. 144(a)) (here, translucent). It is displayed as an expressed image IGa'. However, this is not necessarily the case. For example, for the "image shown in FIG. 149(c)", the "integrated model image IGa" may be displayed in the form shown in FIG. 144(a). Alternatively, the "normal button model image BMGa" may not be integrated with the "normal border decoration image SSGa", but may be displayed as a single image. When the “normal button model image BMGa” is displayed as a single image, it may be displayed in the normal mode (the mode shown in FIG. 144(a)) or in the normal mode (the mode shown in FIG. 144(a) ) may be displayed as an image expressed in a different manner (here, semi-transparent).

In any case, in the situation shown in FIG. 149(c), the "normal button model image BMGa" shown in FIG. At least the image BMGa' with the (simulated) outline will be displayed. As a result, the valid period during which the "normal button model image BMGa" is integrated with the "normal border decoration image SSGa" as the "integrated model image IGa (FIG. 144(a))" or the "special border decoration image" is displayed. 144(a)) integrated with the image SSGb".

After the image IGa' (image BMGa') shown in FIG. 149(c) is displayed, the image IGa' (image BMGa') is not the "integrated model image IGa (FIG. 144(a))". , ``integrated model image IGc (Fig. 144(c))''.

In the example shown in FIG. 149(d), "the image IGa' representing the integrated model image IGa (or the image BMGa' representing the normal button model image BMGa)" represents the "special border decoration image SSGb". It is depicted as an effect in which the image SSGb′” that has been drawn is gradually brought closer. As a result of such effects, "the image IGa' representing the integrated model image IGa (or the image BMGa' representing the normal button model image BMGa)" is represented by the "special border decoration image SSGb". When the images are integrated with the image SSGb'" added, an effective period occurs during which the "integrated model image IGc (FIG. 144(c))" appears. On the other hand, an "image SSGb' expressing a special border decoration image SSGb" is added to an "image IGa' expressing an integrated model image IGa (or an image BMGa' expressing a normal button model image BMGa)". When the images are not integrated and not integrated, an effective period occurs during which the "integrated model image IGa (FIG. 144(a))" appears.

FIG. 149(e) shows an effect situation in which a second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is started on the effect display device 1600 after the effect shown in FIG. 149(d) is performed. there is

This second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is generated when the first effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) progresses to the second timing, and suggests that the operation acceptance is permitted. It is executed as a performance. The second foreshadow effect (second specific display TH2) according to this example is for "image IGa' representing integrated model image IGa (or image BMGa' representing normal button model image BMGa)". ``Image SSGb' expressing the special border decoration image SSGb'' is gradually approaching. Alternatively, it is unclear whether or not the image BMGa' representing the normal button model image BMGa)" and the 'image SSGb' representing the special border decoration image SSGb'" are integrated.

When the production shown in FIG. 149(e) progresses, based on the result of the big hit determination (production determination), either "the image shown in FIG. 149(f)" or "the image shown in FIG. 149(h)" is displayed.

The situations and image contents shown in FIGS. 149(f) and 149(h) are basically the same as "the situations and image contents shown in FIG. 147(c)" described above. progresses and the area where the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is displayed is reduced, resulting in an integrated model image IG. , a portion that does not overlap with the foreshadowing effect (specific display) appears, and the portion is displayed in a highly visible state and the content of the image.

That is, the integrated model image IG is the timing (including the timing shown in FIG. 149(e)) that comes after the situation shown in FIG. When the "specific timing (the timing at which the valid period starts)", which is the timing that arrives before the situation shown in 149(h) appears, at least display by internal processing (display on the layer processing ) is to be executed. Therefore, at the time points shown in FIGS. 149(f) and 149(h), at least part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG are preferentially displayed as the second precursor effect (specific display TH2). Although it cannot be visually recognized (or is difficult to be visually recognized) due to the overlap, the reduction in the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started ( progress). In this example, the specific image TG is entirely overlapped with the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2).

According to such a configuration, the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is performed across the generation timing (specific timing) of the valid period, and after the valid period occurs. For a predetermined time, at least a part of the integrated model image IG is not visible or is made difficult to be recognized by the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2). That is, in this case, since the whole picture of the integrated model image IG is gradually revealed within the valid period, the degree of expectation suggested by the aspect of the integrated model image IG (the aspect of the peripheral decoration image ) or the operation target (aspect of the button model image) can be maintained for a predetermined period of time after the start of the validity period.

In this regard, when the situation shown in FIG. 149(f) appears, the edge decoration image SSG included in the integrated model image IG is not the "special edge decoration image SSGb" but the "normal edge decoration image SSGa". 149(d) and (e), the effect shown in FIGS. 149(d) and 149(e) results in "an image IGa' representing the integrated model image IGa' (or an image representing the normal button model image BMGa It can be recognized that the image BMGa')" failed to connect with the "image SSGb' representing the special border decoration image SSGb". That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 149(g), the integrated model image IGa (see FIG. 144(a)) The whole picture will appear. Since the progress of the performance after that is as described above with reference to FIGS.

On the other hand, when the situation shown in FIG. 149(h) appears, it is possible to recognize that the border decoration image SSG included in the integrated model image IG is the "special border decoration image SSGb". 149(d), the “image IGa′ representing the integrated model image IGa (or the image BMGa′ representing the normal button model image BMGa)” becomes the “special border decoration image SSGb It can be recognized that the image SSGb' representing the . That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, the integrated model image IGc (see FIG. 144(c)) is displayed as shown in FIG. 149(i). The whole picture will appear. 147(d) to 147(c). Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it will be omitted.

On the other hand, when the "image shown in FIG. 150(j)" is displayed, there is a high possibility that the "special button image BMGb" will be displayed as the button image BMG (here, "100%"). is suggested.

The “image shown in FIG. 150(j)” according to this example is different from the “integrated model image IGb” in the normal state (the aspect shown in FIG. 144(b)) (here, translucent). It is displayed as an expressed image IGb'. However, this is not necessarily the case. For example, for the "image shown in FIG. 150(j)", the "integrated model image IGb" may be displayed as shown in FIG. 144(b). Alternatively, the "special button model image BMGb" may not be integrated with the "normal border decoration image SSGa" and may be displayed as a single image. When the "special button model image BMGb" is displayed as a single image, it may be displayed in the normal mode (the mode shown in FIG. 144(b)) or in the normal mode (the mode shown in FIG. 144(b) ) may be displayed as an image expressed in a different manner (here, semi-transparent).

In any case, in the situation shown in FIG. 150(j), the "special button image BMGb" shown in FIG. At least the image BMGb' with the (simulated) outline will be displayed. As a result, the valid period during which the "special button model image BMGb" is integrated with the "normal border decoration image SSGa" as the "integrated model image IGb (FIG. 144(b))" or the "special border decoration image" is displayed. 144(d)) integrated with the image SSGb".

After the image IGb' (image BMGb') shown in FIG. 150(j) is displayed, the image IGb' (image BMGb') is not "integrated model image IGb (FIG. 144(b))". , ``integrated model image IGd (Fig. 144(d))''.

In the example shown in FIG. 149(k), "the image IGb' representing the integrated model image IGb (or the image BMGb' representing the special button model image BMGb)" expresses the "special border decoration image SSGb". It is depicted as an effect in which the image SSGb′” that has been drawn is gradually brought closer. As a result of such effects, "the image IGb' representing the integrated model image IGb (or the image BMGb' representing the special button model image BMGb)" is represented by the "special border decoration image SSGb". When the images are integrated with the image SSGb'" added, an effective period occurs during which the "integrated model image IGd (FIG. 144(d))" appears. On the other hand, an "image SSGb' expressing the special border decoration image SSGb" is added to the "image IGb' expressing the integrated model image IGb (or the image BMGb' expressing the special button model image BMGb)". When the images are not integrated and not integrated, there occurs an effective period in which the "integrated model image IGb (FIG. 144(b))" appears.

FIG. 150(l) shows an effect situation in which a second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is started on the effect display device 1600 after the effect shown in FIG. 150(k) is performed. there is Instead of the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2), a different third precursor effect (third specific display) may be executed.

As described above, this second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is generated when the first effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) progresses to the second timing, and operation acceptance is permitted. It is executed as a production that suggests. The second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) according to this example is for "image IGb' representing integrated model image IGb (or image BMGb' representing special button model image BMGb)". ``Image SSGb' representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb'' is gradually approaching. Alternatively, it is unclear whether or not the image BMGb' representing the special button model image BMGb)" and the 'image SSGb' representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb'" are integrated.

When the production shown in FIG. 150(l) progresses, based on the result of the big hit determination (production determination), either "the image shown in FIG. 150(m)" or "the image shown in FIG. 150(o)" is displayed.

The situations and image contents shown in FIGS. 150(m) and 150(o) are basically the same as the above-described "situation and image contents shown in FIG. 147(c)". progresses and the area where the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is displayed is reduced, resulting in an integrated model image IG. , a portion that does not overlap with the foreshadowing effect (specific display) appears, and the portion is displayed in a highly visible state and the content of the image.

That is, the integrated model image IG is the timing (including the timing shown in FIG. 150(l)) that comes after the situation shown in FIG. When the "specific timing (the timing at which the effective period starts)", which is the timing that arrives before the situation shown in 150(o) appears, it is displayed at least by internal processing (display on the layer processing ) is to be executed. Therefore, at the time points shown in FIGS. 150(m) and 150(o), at least part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG are preferentially displayed as the second precursor effect (specific display TH2). Although it cannot be visually recognized (or is difficult to be visually recognized) due to the overlap, the reduction of the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started ( progress). In this example, the specific image TG is entirely overlapped with the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2).

According to such a configuration, the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is performed across the generation timing (specific timing) of the valid period, and after the valid period occurs. For a predetermined time, at least a part of the integrated model image IG is not visible or is made difficult to be recognized by the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2). That is, in this case, since the whole picture of the integrated model image IG is gradually revealed within the valid period, the degree of expectation suggested by the aspect of the integrated model image IG (the aspect of the peripheral decoration image ) or the operation target (aspect of the button model image) can be maintained for a predetermined period of time after the start of the validity period.

In this regard, when the situation shown in FIG. 150(m) appears, the edge decoration image SSG included in the integrated model image IG is not the "special edge decoration image SSGb" but the "normal edge decoration image SSGa". 150(k) and (l), as a result of the production shown in FIGS. It can be recognized that the image BMGb')" failed to connect with the "image SSGb' representing the special border decoration image SSGb". That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 150(n), the integrated model image IGb (see FIG. 144(b)) The whole picture will appear. 147(d) to 147(d). Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it will be omitted.

On the other hand, when the situation shown in FIG. 150(o) appears, it is possible to recognize that the border decoration image SSG included in the integrated model image IG is the "special border decoration image SSGb". 150(k), as a result of the rendering shown in FIG. It can be recognized that the image SSGb' representing the . That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 150(p), integrated model image IGd (see FIG. 144(d)) The whole picture will appear. 147(d) to 147(d). Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it will be omitted.

In the example shown in FIGS. 148 to 150, when FIG. 149(c) appears, the probability that the "special button image BMGb" will appear as the button image BMG is set to "0%". The probability that the "special button model image BMGb" will appear may be slightly increased. That is, in this case, after the effect shown in FIG. 149(e) is performed, FIG. 149(f)→(g), (h)→(i), and FIG. There is also the possibility that the performance progress will be executed in the form of o)→(p).

149(f), (h) or FIGS. 150(m), (o), it is not possible to determine in which mode the border decoration image SSG is displayed. Although it is recognizable, it becomes impossible to recognize in which mode the button model image BMG is displayed. That is, in this case, the degree of expectation is suggested step by step according to the progress of the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2), and the amusement of the game can be improved. . In particular, if the button model image BMG, depending on its display mode, can suggest one of a plurality of operation means with different operation targets, the effective period has started and the degree of expectation related to operation is also suggested. In spite of being in a situation where the operation target is not recognizable, the degree of attention to the performance can be remarkably improved.

However, even in situations where FIGS. 149(f) and (h) and FIGS. 150(m) and (o) appear, the button It is desirable to emit light (for example, to emit light from the occurrence of the effective period) in a manner corresponding to the type displayed as the model image BMG. According to such a configuration, a highly motivated person who tends to directly look at the operation means (operation receiving unit) can quickly recognize the "type displayed as the button model image BMG". Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to want to operate.

Incidentally, in the examples shown in FIGS. 148 to 150, the first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) does not necessarily have to be executed. For example, the situation shown in FIG. 148(a) may be shifted to the situation shown in FIG. 149(c) or FIG. 150(j).

Moreover, in the examples shown in FIGS. 148 to 150, the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) does not necessarily have to be executed. For example, even if the situations shown in FIGS. 149(d) and 150(k) are shifted to the situations shown in FIGS. 149(g) and (i) and FIGS. 150(n) and (p), good. That is, in this case, the effects shown in FIG. 149(d) and FIG. 150(k) will function as precursor effects. At the time of transition, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may already be reduced, or the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may not be reduced. If the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is already reduced at the time of the shift, the gauge image is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 149(d) or FIG. 150(k). (Predetermined image) GG will start reducing its display area.

148 to 150 may be partially omitted depending on the mode prepared as the integrated model image IG. For example, if the forms shown in FIGS. 144(b) and 144(d) are not prepared as the integrated model image IG, all of the series of effects shown in FIG. 150 can be omitted. At this time, the description of FIG. 149(c) may also be omitted.

148 to 150, the image BMG′ representing the button model image BMG (or the button model image BMG itself) is displayed before the acceptance of the operation is permitted (before the valid period occurs). OK) is displayed (Fig. 149(d), Fig. 150(k)), but in this situation (before the valid period occurs), the image BMG' representing the button image BMG (or the button image BMG) is displayed. is not dynamically displayed so as to depict how the is displaced within the movable range of the operation receiving portion. According to such a configuration, even if the model button image BMG or the image BMG' representing it is displayed prior to the occurrence of the valid period, the valid period has not yet occurred. can be implicitly suggested, the player can concentrate on the performance without worrying about the remaining time of the effective period. In addition, since the reception of the effect is permitted when the second predictive effect (second specific display TH2) is being performed, the second predictive effect (second specific display TH2) makes it impossible or difficult to see. Dynamic display of the button model image BMG will be performed in the midst of this.

FIGS. 151 to 155 are diagrams showing an example of how the presentation progresses when the second valid period occurs out of the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

That is, in FIGS. 147 to 150, an effective period (first effective period) is generated in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced at the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden. For the case, an example related to the development of the production has been explained. On the other hand, in FIGS. 151 to 155, it is possible to determine whether the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, or whether the precursor effect (specific display) is performed. An example of how the effect progresses when the valid period (second valid period) occurs without being released will be described.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, basically, a predetermined premonitory effect (premonitor display) is performed at the occurrence of the validity period during which operation acceptance is permitted. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute "a display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" within the effective period, and such In order to make the feature stand out when the performance is performed, a predetermined sign performance (prediction display) itself is not performed when the effective period occurs, or a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided even if the predetermined sign performance (prediction display) is performed. The display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has not yet been reduced and has reached its maximum value at the time when the entire display target area of (1) has been made visible.

Here, as the ``display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG'', normally (see FIGS. 145 to 150, etc.), the gauge image GG is displayed when no operation is performed within the valid period. When the effective period ends when the area reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, "0"), "no operation is performed within the effective period and post-operation display and post-operation sound output are performed. However, when the valid period expires, the display area of the gauge image GG does not reach the predetermined minimum value (here, "0") and has a predetermined display area. It is possible to mention "the first display mode". According to such a configuration, even in a situation where it seems that there is a lot of time left until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, "0"), the player can becomes aware of the possibility that the effective period may be suddenly terminated, so that the tension during the effective period can be preferably maintained.

In addition, as for the "display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG", normally (see FIGS. 145 to 150, etc.), the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced every unit time within the valid period. By the way, it is possible to mention "a second display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced even though it is within the effective period". According to such a configuration, even when it seems that there is only a short time left until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches the predetermined minimum value (here, "0"), the player can still use the gauge. The player becomes conscious of the possibility that the display area of the image GG will not be reduced, and the decline in the interest in the game is suppressed.

That is, in the example described below, by using at least one of the "first display mode" and "second display mode", the "display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG" will be described. It shows an example of display when executing

First, in FIG. 151 (a), in the normal game state, when the number of reservations is 0, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is produced in the second production pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination. It shows the performance situation being performed on the display device 1600 .

FIG. 151(b) shows that during execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. 2 shows a production situation in which the integrated model image IG is displayed. As shown in FIG. 151(b), when the integrated model image IG is displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG has reached a predetermined maximum value and has not yet been reduced. .

Further, when executing the "display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG" within the valid period, the time (set time) set for the valid period (second valid period) is It is longer than the time (set time) set for the effective period (first effective period) during which the display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG is not executed. This means that it takes time to execute a display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG within the effective period. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the first valid period during which the "display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG" is not executed, and the "movement of the gauge image GG Is the integrated model image IG itself the same, despite the fact that the set time until the expiration of the valid period is different from the second valid period in which the "display mode characterized by" is executed, They are displayed in a similar manner (in this example, the integrated model image IG itself is the same, and the gauge image GG (display target area of the gauge image GG) has the same display area). According to such a configuration, at first glance, the first effective period during which the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" is not executed, and the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized by Although it is difficult to recognize that the set time is different from the second effective period during which the "display mode" is executed, when a situation arises in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the time required for the situation in which the display area is not reduced is set. is added, it becomes possible to estimate that the set time is longer than it looks.

It should be noted that, when the effect situation shown in FIG. 151(b) occurs, an indication effect suggesting the occurrence may be performed. However, at the point in time when the entire integrated model image IG (at least the “display target area of the gauge image GG included in the integrated model image IG”) is displayed without overlapping the portent effect, the display area of the gauge image GG has reached its maximum value and is required to be in a situation where it has not yet been reduced.

That is, as described above, in this example, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced in a state (within the effective period) in which operation reception regarding the predetermined post-operation display and predetermined post-operation sound output is permitted. 151(c) after a predetermined period of time has passed since the production situation shown in FIG. 151(b), the gauge image GG is changed to The display area is maintained after being reduced by the amount corresponding to the elapsed time (predetermined time), and the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" is started.

Such a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" is, as shown in FIGS. It's becoming However, even during the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced", the acceptance of operations is maintained, and when an operation is performed on an operation means that is given an opportunity to operate, the valid period is terminated, and along with this, the integrated model image IG is hidden, and the post-operation display and post-operation sound output based on the reception of the operation are executed (see FIG. 151(g)).

According to such a configuration, since "a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" appears within the valid period, compared to the case where the display area of the gauge image GG continues to decrease at a constant speed. to indicate that there is still time left before the validity period expires.

In addition, although the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the acceptance of the operation itself is maintained in a permissible state, so it is possible to give an image as if the validity period has been extended. , it is expected that the game interest will be improved when the valid period is in effect.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 151(c) and (d), during the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced", the decorative pattern SZ that has been displayed until then is in a non-display state or is difficult to see. This prompts attention to the "display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG".

However, when a state where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced occurs, the player may be misunderstood that a so-called "freeze effect" has occurred in which the image in the display screen suddenly becomes stationary. In other words, the "freeze effect" is generally known as a display mode in which no reaction is shown for a predetermined period of time, and the state cannot be canceled. There is a concern that the player will lose the desire to operate the game, and the interest in the game will decrease. In particular, in this example, since the decorative pattern SZ is in a non-displayed state or in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize, this may also encourage misrecognition that the operation acceptance is no longer permitted.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the integrated model image IG itself is not brought to a stationary state in a state where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, but the integrated model image While the gauge image GG included in the IG is set to a static state, the button model image BMG included in the integrated model image IG is dynamically displayed (a state of displacement within the movable range of the operation receiving portion is depicted. display) to continue.

According to such a configuration, while the dynamic display of the button model image BMG is continued, a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears, and thus operation reception is no longer permitted ( It is possible to suppress the possibility of erroneously recognizing that a freeze effect has occurred, and it is expected that the player's desire to operate will be favorably maintained.

Here, the dynamic display by the button model image BMG is executed as a display that repeats a predetermined action (eg, a reciprocating action within the movable range of the operation receiving portion). In this regard, during the valid period (the first valid period shown in FIGS. While the predetermined action by the button model image BMG is repeated n times until the time expires, the precursor effect (specific display) is not executed, or the precursor effect (specific display) is executed but not displayed. 151 to 155) during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at the time of the set time, the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced. It is desirable that the predetermined operation by the button model image BMG can be executed as a display that repeats m (>n) times even during the "non-execution period".

According to such a configuration, when a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears, the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced for a period of time longer than the first valid period shown in FIGS. Since the state of not being activated will continue, even if you are surprised by the occurrence of the state and take time to grasp the situation, you will have enough time to operate. , it is expected that the game interest will be favorably maintained. Note that the valid period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced when the omen effect (specific display) is hidden is different from the first valid period shown in FIGS. If a period (that generates a separate post-operation display or post-operation sound output) is provided, than the longest of the times (set time) set for those validity periods, It is desirable that the number of times of the predetermined action by the button model image BMG is increased during the "period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" in the second valid period shown in FIGS. .

As described above, when the second valid period occurs, the gauge image GG is in a state where its visibility is well secured, and its display area is set to the predetermined maximum value. It is designed to be displayed (Fig. 151(b)). However, at this time, as illustrated in FIG. 146, if the specific image TG is displayed in a well-visible state within the display target area of the gauge image GG, the specific image TG is displayed. It may appear that the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced by only 10%, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be lowered. Further, as illustrated in FIG. 145, when the specific image TG appears in a highly visible state as the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced from the maximum value, the specific image TG It becomes obvious that the game does not function as part of the gauge image GG, and there is concern that the length of the remaining time as the valid period may be exaggerated, thereby reducing the interest in the game.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the specific image TG itself is not displayed during the second effective period. Therefore, even if the reduction of the display area of the gauge image GG is started from the situation shown in FIG. is decreased to a predetermined value, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not decreased" occurs for a predetermined period of time (FIGS. 151(c) and 151(d)).

In this example, when the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends without any operation being accepted by the player, the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced again. In this state, the decorative pattern SZ is displayed again or made visible. After that, when the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined value (minimum value) (FIG. 151(e)), the time (set time) set for the second valid period expires. 151(f), the operation-related images including the integrated model image IG are hidden. Note that here, when the display area of the gauge image GG is "0", that is, when it is hidden (FIG. 151(e)), the time (set time) set for the second effective period expires. Then, the second validity period ends, and the operation-related images including the integrated model image IG are hidden (FIG. 151(f)).

In this way, in the second effective period, if the set time elapses without any operation being accepted (FIG. 151(f)), the same operation as when the operation is accepted within the second valid period is performed. Post-display and post-operation sound output are not executed (automatic reception effect is functioned), and this point is also different from the first effective period. However, instead, in the second effective period, the gauge image GG is displayed in a stopped state for a period of time longer than the time set for the first effective period, and operation reception is permitted even during the display period in the stopped state. As described above, it can be said that the situation in which the operation until the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined value (minimum value) is not completed in time is less likely to occur. .

In the example shown in FIG. 151, normally (see FIGS. 145 to 150, etc.), the gauge image GG is displayed in advance within the validity period as the “display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG”. The case where the display area is decreased at a constant speed, and the application of the "second display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not decreased even though it is within the effective period" has been described. However, as described above, as a “display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG”, normally (see FIGS. When the effective period ends when the display area reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, "0"), "No operation is performed within the effective period and post-operation display and post-operation sound output are performed. However, when the effective period expires, the display area of the gauge image GG does not reach the predetermined minimum value (here, "0") and has a predetermined display area. You may make it apply further the 1st display mode. 152 and 153, or the modes shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, in order to improve the amusement of the game. is more desirable.

FIGS. 152 and 153 are diagrams showing an example of how the presentation progresses when the second effective period occurs out of the first effective period and the second effective period described above.

The situations shown in FIGS. 152(a)-(d) are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. 151(a)-(d) and other examples thereof. Therefore, in this example as well, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs in the middle of the second effective period. When the operation is accepted at , the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance are executed (see FIG. 153(g)).

However, in this example, even if the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not decreased" ends without any operation being accepted by the player, the gauge image GG will continue to decrease its display area. It is never displayed. In this example, the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" continues until the time set for the second valid period (set time) elapses. Therefore, when the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends, the display area of the gauge image GG is left as it is (predetermined value), as shown in FIGS. In this state, the operation-related images including the integrated model image IG are hidden. In this state, the decorative pattern SZ is displayed again or made visible.

In this way, even in the second effective period according to this example, when the set time elapses without any operation being accepted (FIG. 153(e)), the operation is accepted within the second effective period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output are not executed (automatic reception effect is functioned). However, instead, in the second effective period according to this example as well, the gauge image GG is displayed in the stopped state for a longer period of time than the set time for the first effective period, and the operation is performed during the display period in the stopped state as well. As described above, reception is permitted.

However, in this example, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced to a predetermined value (here, "0"), and the second valid period is terminated while the display area of the predetermined value remains. Since the game is terminated, there is a possibility that the second effective period ends due to the player not being able to operate the game despite his intention to operate it, which reduces the interest in the game. I have concerns. Therefore, in this example, after the second valid period expires without any operation by the player, the specific condition (for example, symbol stop or 10 seconds before the symbol stop is not reached) is satisfied. During the period when the operation opportunity is not given, the operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (the handle button 5014 or the operation button 410) as the operation means to which the operation opportunity was given within the second effective period, and the operation opportunity is given to the operation means When the operation is accepted, the second validity period can be generated again based on this operation. In this sense, when the second valid period expires without any operation by the player, a special valid period for regenerating the second valid period is generated from the point of time when the second valid period expires. It can be said that

According to such a configuration, even if the second valid period expires as a result of the lapse of the predetermined set time without any operation by the player, the ), it is possible to generate an operation acceptance for outputting a post-operation display or a post-operation sound output. More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 153(e), when the player operates the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410), the second The validity period is started from the initial state (FIG. 153(f)). After that, the contents as described above are repeated again with reference to FIGS. 152(b) to (d), and FIGS. Therefore, even if an operation is accepted within the regenerated second effective period, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance are executed (see FIG. 153(g)). ).

When the operation is accepted during the special effective period shown in FIG. 153(e), the image shown in FIG. 153(f) (same as the image shown in FIG. 152(b)) appears as the post-operation display. It will happen. Such an image is different from the post-operation display that is executed based on the acceptance of the operation during the second valid period (FIGS. 152(b) to (d), FIG. 153(f), etc.). They are different. Similarly, the post-operation sound output that is executed based on the fact that the operation is accepted during the special valid period shown in FIG. 153(f), etc.), the output sound is different from the post-operation sound output that is executed based on the acceptance of the operation.

FIGS. 154 and 155 are diagrams showing a modification of the progress of presentation when the second valid period occurs, out of the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

The situation shown in FIG. 154(a) is the same as the contents and other examples described above with reference to FIGS. 151(a) and 152(a). However, in this example, during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. A "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs over a predetermined period of time from the time when the integrated model image IG is displayed (FIGS. 154(b) and (c)). In this example, when the integrated model image IG is displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG is at the predetermined maximum value. will be maintained as is.

Note that even when the specific image TG is not displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG or the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the acceptance of the operation is permitted. The configuration and progress within the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced", such as the execution of the post-tone output, are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153 and other examples thereof. .

Also in this example, similarly to the examples shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, until the time set for the second effective period (set time) elapses, the display area of the gauge image GG is decreased. The period during which the Therefore, when the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends, the display area of the gauge image GG remains unchanged (maximum value), as shown in FIGS. In this state, the operation-related images including the integrated model image IG are hidden. In this state, the decorative pattern SZ is displayed again or made visible.

In this way, even in the second effective period according to this example, if the set time elapses without an operation being accepted (FIG. 155(d)), the operation is accepted within the second effective period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output are not executed (automatic reception effect is functioned). However, instead, in the second valid period according to this example as well, the gauge image GG is displayed in the stopped state for a longer period of time than the set time for the first valid period, and the operation is performed even during the display period in the stopped state. As described above, reception is permitted.

However, even in this example, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced to a predetermined value (here, "0"), and the display area of the maximum value remains for the second valid period. Therefore, the second effective period may end due to the player not being able to operate the game despite the intention to operate it, resulting in a decrease in interest in the game. There is concern that Therefore, in this example as well, after the second valid period expires without any operation by the player, the specific condition (for example, the pattern is stopped, or 10 seconds before the pattern is stopped) is satisfied. While it is not performed, the operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) as the operation means to which the operation opportunity was given within the second effective period, and the operation means When an operation for is accepted, the second effective period can be generated again based on this operation. In this sense, it can be said that when the second valid period expires without any operation by the player, a special valid period is generated for regenerating the second valid period.

According to such a configuration, even if the second valid period expires as a result of the lapse of the predetermined set time without any operation by the player, the operation by the player will cause the ), it is possible to generate an operation acceptance for outputting a post-operation display or a post-operation sound output. More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 155(d), when the player operates the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410), the second The validity period is started from the initial state (FIG. 155(e)). After that, the contents as described above are repeated again with reference to FIGS. 154(b), (c), and FIGS. Therefore, even if an operation is accepted within the regenerated second effective period, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance are executed (see FIG. 155(f)). ).

However, in this example, even if the second effective period reoccurs in this way, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" will occur from the time of reoccurrence, so FIG. 2, the decorative pattern SZ is hidden or made difficult to see.

That is, the "image shown in FIG. 155(e)" that appears as the post-operation display when the operation is accepted during the special valid period shown in FIG. 155(d) is replaced by the "image shown in FIG. 154(b)". is the same as Such an image is a post-operation display (FIG. 155 (f )) has a different image display. Similarly, the post-operation sound output that is executed based on the fact that the operation is accepted during the special valid period shown in FIG. 155(d), etc.), which is different from the post-operation sound output (FIG. 155(f)) executed based on the reception of the operation.

Thus, in the examples shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, the entire period from the start to the end of the second effective period functions as "the period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced". In either situation, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced.

Note that in the situations (special effective period) shown in FIG. 153(e) and FIG. 155(d), the integrated model image IG may be displayed as in the second effective period. However, in order to make it easier to recognize that the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output generated according to the operation are different from each other (second valid period, special valid period), the second valid period and the special valid period It is desirable that at least one of the display position and size of the integrated model image IG is different from the effective period. That is, in this case, at the end of the second valid period, the integrated model image IG in the form corresponding to the second valid period is hidden, and the integrated model image IG in the form corresponding to the special valid period is newly displayed. will be displayed in When the integrated model image IG is displayed during the special effective period, a ``period in which the display area of the gauge image is not reduced'' may be generated within the effective period, or a ``period in which the display area of the gauge image is not reduced. ” may be prevented from occurring.

151 to 155, the "display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG" can be executed when the integrated model image IGa out of the integrated model images IGa to IGd is displayed. Therefore, it is desirable not to execute this when the integrated model images IGb to IGd out of the integrated model images IGa to IGd are displayed. In other words, the integrated simulated image IGa is displayed as the aspect with the lowest degree of expectation. Since there is a possibility that a "display mode having a characteristic" appears, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

According to the examples shown in FIGS. 152 to 155, when an operation-related image (integrated model image IG, etc.) is displayed in a “display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG,” Even if a situation arises in which the operation-related image is hidden as a result of the lapse of a predetermined set period (second valid period) without any operation being performed, the operation acceptance occurs and the display changes (or , post-operation sound output). More specifically, even if the predetermined set period (second effective period) has expired, if the operation receiving section (operation means) whose operation has been prompted by the integrated model image IG until then is operated, It is possible to regenerate a predetermined set period (second effective period), and operation acceptance is permitted during the regenerated predetermined set period (second effective period) (Fig. 153(e), (f) and FIGS. 155(d), (e)). According to such a configuration, even if the predetermined set period (second effective period) has expired without being able to understand the "display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG", , the predetermined set period (second effective period) can be regenerated, so that the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

On the other hand, during a predetermined set period (first valid period) during which the operation-related images (integrated model image IG, etc.) are not displayed in a "display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG", the operation reception is not possible. After the predetermined set period (first valid period) expires without the operation being performed, even if the user operates the operation receiving unit (operating means) whose operation has been prompted by the integrated model image IG until then, the predetermined set period (second validity period) is not regenerated (FIGS. 147-150).

Note that the predetermined set period (second effective period) during which the operation-related image (integrated model image IG, etc.) is displayed in the "display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG" does not necessarily mean that the symbol changes. does not have to occur during the execution of For example, it may be a period that occurs using the RTC function regardless of the presence or absence of symbol variation, or during the execution period of the jackpot game or the period before the start of the jackpot game. ” may occur.

Further, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 147 to 155, the second effective period (FIGS. 151 to 155) is set longer than the first effective period (FIGS. 147 to 150). In spite of this, the integrated model image IG itself is displayed in the same or similar manner in the first valid period and the second valid period (in the above example, the integrated model image IG itself is displayed in a similar manner). The simulated image IG itself is the same, and the gauge image GG (display target area of the gauge image GG) has the same display area). When the integrated model image IG is displayed in a similar manner, the size ratio of the gauge image GG (display target area) to the button model image is the same. are expected to appear to be the same length. According to such a configuration, at first glance, the first effective period during which the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" is not executed, and the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized by Although it is difficult to recognize that the set time is different from the second effective period during which the "display mode" is executed, when a situation arises in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the amount of time required for the situation in which the display area is not reduced is set. By adding , it can be estimated that the set time is longer than it looks.

When the integrated model image IG is to be displayed in a similar relationship between the first effective period (FIGS. 147 to 150) and the second effective period (FIGS. 151 to 155), the "gauge image It is desirable to display an integrated model image IG that is smaller than the first effective period during the second effective period in which the "display mode characterized by the movement of GG" appears.

Further, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 147 to 155, during the first effective period (FIGS. 147 to 150), if no operation is received, the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) is reduced to a specific value (here, " 0”), but during the second effective period (FIGS. 151 to 155), if no operation is accepted, the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) is displayed with a value larger than the specific value. is terminated. That is, if the time set for the valid period (set time) is long, the tension during the valid period tends to decrease, but the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) is a specific value (here, " 0”), it is expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained by providing the possibility that the validity period will end.

Further, according to the above-described example, the case where the integrated model image IG is displayed so that the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced while the omen effect is being performed (the first effective period) and the case where the omen When the effect is not performed, or the predictive effect is performed, but the integrated model image IG is displayed so that the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at least while the predictive effect is being performed (the second effective period), the images displayed within the display target area of the gauge image GG are different. In this case, the aspect of the gauge image GG itself may be different from each other. 154 and 155, "although an omen effect is performed, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at least while the omen effect is being performed." This includes the case where the display area of GG is not reduced.

In this respect, according to the above-described example, the specific image TG is displayed during the first effective period (FIGS. 147 to 150), and the specific image TG is displayed after the set time has elapsed without any operation being performed. However, in the second effective period (FIGS. 152 to 155), the specific image TG is not displayed, and the gauge image GG (display target area) is displayed. According to such a configuration, in the first valid period, it is possible to make the valid period appear longer by the amount that the specific image TG is displayed at the end of the valid period, and in the second valid period. By leaving the gauge image GG (display target area) at the end of the valid period, it is possible to maintain the sense of tension by making it appear that the valid period ends earlier than expected by the player. In order to preferably obtain such an effect, in the second valid period, at the end of the valid period, most of the display area of the gauge image GG (display target area) is left (at least an area larger than half of the maximum value). It is desirable to

Further, according to the example described above, the gauge image GG is displayed in such a manner that the display area is reduced every unit time throughout the first effective period (FIGS. 147 to 150). However, in the second valid period (FIGS. 151 to 155), a mode in which the display area is not reduced is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the remaining time only by the size of the display area when the gauge image GG appears, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be favorably maintained.

Further, according to the above-described example, the button model image BMG is dynamically displayed so as to depict how the operation receiving portion is displaced during both the first valid period and the second valid period. However, the gauge image GG is displayed in the first mode (a mode in which the display area is reduced) during the first valid period, while the first mode is displayed during the second valid period. They are displayed in a different second mode (a mode in which the display area is not reduced). That is, in the above example, the button model image BMG is displayed as one image (integrated model image IG) integrated with the gauge image GG (surrounding decoration image SSG). , when the button model image BMG of the integrated model image IG is dynamically displayed, when the gauge image GG is decreasing and when the gauge image GG is not decreasing. There is Therefore, even if the gauge image GG is not reduced, the dynamic display of the button model image BMG allows the operation acceptance as the integrated model image IG. be able to suggest.

Further, according to the above example, only when the normal button model image BMGa is displayed between the normal button model image BMGa and the special button model image BMGb, the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG is characterized by its movement." It is possible to display the "display mode that is held". In addition, when the normal button model image BMGa is displayed, "a display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" may be displayed. ) The display mode characterized by the movement of GG" may not be displayed, and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed in the mode (normal mode) that appears even when the special button model image BMGb is displayed. I made it so. Therefore, it is expected that the decrease in interest in the game when the normal button image BMGa, which is less expected than the special button image BMGb, is displayed is suppressed.

In particular, in the second valid period shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced at all, and the display mode (color, etc.) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced. However, only one mode is displayed. That is, in this case, the remaining time suggesting function and the expected degree suggesting function by the gauge image GG itself are lost, and no information can be obtained from the gauge image GG. is intentionally displayed, and the gauge image GG is displayed statically (with its area unchanged) in the integrated simulated image IG. According to such a configuration, the gauge image GG displayed within the second valid period functions only as a decorative image in the integrated model image IG, not as an image suggesting the remaining time or degree of expectation. As a result, the function can be greatly different from the gauge image GG displayed within the first effective period, and the variety of expressions as the gauge image GG improves the interest in the game. will be expected.

It should be noted that the first valid period and the second valid period may be generated under different conditions. For example, they may occur at different timings within one symbol variation period. In addition, the first effective period means a period during which operation acceptance regarding the first post-operation display and the first post-operation sound output is allowed, and the second effective period means a period during which the operation is permitted. It means a period in which an operation reception is permitted with respect to a second post-operation display different from the post-operation display and a second post-operation sound output different from the first post-operation sound output. The reaction (display change, sound output) that appears when an operation is accepted in , is different from each other.

Also, regarding the integrated model image IG,
The display area of the gauge image GG increases every unit time from the time the precursor effect (specific display TH) is started to be displayed and the "integrated model image IG" is overlapped with the precursor effect in the display state. a reduced aspect (FIGS. 147-150);
The display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced when the omen effect is not displayed, or even if the omen effect is started to be displayed, at least when the omen effect in the display state and the "integrated model image IG" overlap each other. Aspects (Figs. 151-155)
and According to such a configuration, as a result of performing the portent effect, the display area has already been reduced by the time the visibility of the gauge image GG is secured, and regardless of whether or not the portent effect has been performed. When the entire gauge image GG becomes visible, the display area of the gauge image GG may not be reduced, and entertainment is provided by performance using the visibility of the gauge image GG. be able to

In particular, when adopting a mode (FIGS. 151 to 155) in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced when the entire gauge image GG becomes visible regardless of whether or not the omen effect is performed. As long as the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced even though it is still within the effective period, it is possible to further increase the attention to the gauge image GG.

Note that the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced when the portent effect is not displayed, or even if the portent effect is started to be displayed, at least when the portent effect in the display state and the "integrated model image IG" overlap each other. 151 to 155), the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced (FIGS. 151 to 155). A display mode in which the display area is not reduced may not appear. However, in this case, when the condition for generating the second valid period (FIGS. 151 to 155) in which the display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced is set as the second condition, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced. The occurrence condition of the specific validity period in which the aspect does not appear is set as a specific condition different from the second condition.

In the above example, while the button model image BMG is being displayed, there are cases where the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced as time passes, and there are cases where the display is not carried out. did. If the display is not performed, the gauge image GG itself may not be displayed within the effective period and may be hidden. Nevertheless, regarding the display target area of the gauge image GG, not only the first effective period during which the display area is reduced with the passage of time, but also the second effective period during which the display area is not reduced with the passage of time. Since it is displayed even during the effective period, it is expected that it is in a state where reception of the effect is permitted.

In the above example, the gauge image GG is not displayed to reduce the display area as time elapses, and the time (set time) set for the valid period (second valid period) has passed. When the valid period expires, the automatic reception function is not activated. That is, if the automatic reception function is activated, the sense of tension due to the gauge image GG not indicating the remaining time may be completely lost, so the valid period (second valid period ), it is desirable that the automatic reception function is not activated (in any presentation mode). On the other hand, it is desirable to enable the automatic reception function (regardless of the presentation mode) with respect to the above-described first effective period.

In addition, when the button model image BMG and the gauge GG are displayed separately and a display method that pursues only the gauge function (remaining time suggesting function) is adopted, a method is adopted that does not reduce the display area of the gauge image GG. As a result, the player feels a great sense of incongruity that the remaining time suggesting function is not exhibited despite the gauge image GG. In this regard, in the above configuration, the button model image BMG is displayed as an image IG that is integrated with the periphery decoration image SSG including the display target area of the gauge GG. That is, in this case, even when the gauge image GG is displayed, the pattern is made visible on the back side, or the gauge image GG itself has a plurality of colors. Since this itself has a decorativeness in the integrated model image IG, it is expected to suppress discomfort when a situation arises in which the remaining time indication function by the gauge image GG is not exhibited. become.

By the way, in the examples shown in FIGS. 148 to 150, prior to the occurrence of the first effective period, the "button model image BMG" is set to a mode with a low expectation (normal button model image BMGa) and a mode with a high expectation. (special button model image BMGb), and as the "peripheral decoration image SSG", a low-expected mode (normal peripheral-decorative image SSGa) and a high-expected mode (special peripheral-decorative image SSGb) and the performance of which one appears in stages. However, such effects can also be made to appear by the method described below.

156A and 156B are diagrams for explaining a modification of the presentation that indicates in stages the degree of expectation for the integrated model image IG.

First, in FIG. 156 (a), in the normal game state, when the number of reservations is 0, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is produced in the first production pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination. It shows the production situation being performed on the display device 1600 .

In FIG. 156(b), during the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. It shows the rendering situation in which the model button image BMG is displayed.

However, in the situation shown in FIG. 156(b), the button model image BMG is not displayed as an image integrated with the "peripheral decoration image SGG", but is displayed alone. ing. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 156(b), the button model image BMG is displayed in either a mode with a low expectation (normal button model image BMGa) or a mode with a high level of expectation (special button model image BMGb). In the drawing, a case in which a highly expected mode (special button model image BMGb) appears is illustrated. Which of these modes is to be displayed is selected based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination).

FIG. 156(c) shows an effect situation in which the special button model image BMGb shown in FIG. 156(b) is displayed as an image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG.

However, it may be arranged that the effect progress from the situation shown in FIG. 156(b) to the situation shown in FIG. 156(c) is not necessarily performed. For example, the button model image BMG (normal button model image BMGa, special button model image BMGb) shown in FIG. ) occurs, the effect progresses from the situation shown in FIG. 156(b) to the situation shown in FIG. Either a period (first effective period) occurs, or an effective period (first effective period) occurs without progressing to the situation shown in FIG. It will be possible to provide fun about what to do. If the valid period (first valid period) occurs without becoming the integrated model image IG, the gauge image GG will be displayed as an image different from the button model image BMG. ) in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced. In this case, it is desirable not to display the specific image TG.

In addition, when the effective period occurs after the button model image BMG is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG, it is expected that the button image BMG will be stopped with a big winning pattern compared to the case where the effective period occurs without being integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG. It is desirable that the degree (percentage) is high. Also, when the special button model image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 156(b), the normal button model image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. ) and is integrated with the border decoration image SSG. These percentages may include "100%" and "0%".

Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 156(c), the button model image BMG is a border decoration image with a low expectation (normal border decoration image BMGa) and a border decoration image with a high expectation (special border decoration). BMGb) and the image BMGb), and in the figure, a case where a highly anticipated aspect (special peripheral decoration image BMGb) appears is illustrated. . Which of these modes is to be displayed is selected based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination).

For convenience of explanation, the peripheral decoration image BMG (normal peripheral decoration image BMGa, special peripheral decoration image BMGb) according to this example has an image type different from that shown in each of the above-described examples (FIGS. 144 to 156). Although they are different, they are basically displayed as having the same function. The border decoration image BMG according to this example has a box shape for accommodating the button model image BMG. On the other hand, the special border decoration image BMGb has a checkered pattern. Among the patterned areas, "the area from the upper right to the lower left" is displayed as the display target area of the gauge image GG.

The image shown in FIG. 156(c) functions as an image (integrated model image) IGd in which the special button model image BMGb and the special border decoration image BMGb are integrated. 144(d).

FIG. 156(d) shows an effect situation in which the first additional decoration HS1 is added to the integrated model image IGd shown in FIG. 156(c).

However, it may be arranged that the effect progress from the situation shown in FIG. 156(c) to the situation shown in FIG. 156(d) is not necessarily performed. For example, the integrated model image IG (integrated model images IGa to IGd) shown in FIG. 156(c) to the situation shown in FIG. 156(d) and the first additional decoration HS1 is added to the effect. Either a period (first valid period) occurs, or a valid period (first valid period) without the first additional decoration HS1 being added without progressing to the situation shown in FIG. 156(d). It will be possible to provide fun about what happens.

Note that if the valid period occurs after the first additional decoration HS1 is added to the integrated model image IG, the valid period occurs without adding the first additional decoration HS1 to the integrated model image IG. It is desirable to make the degree of expectation (proportion) of stopping with a big hit pattern higher than in the case. When the special button model image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 156(d) than when the normal button model image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. It is desirable that the ratio of adding the first additional decoration HS1 is increased. These percentages may include "100%" and "0%".

In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 156(d), the first additional decoration HS1 is provided with a performance as to whether it is added in a mode with a low degree of expectation or in a mode with a high degree of expectation. You may make it

FIG. 156(e) shows an effect situation in which the second additional decoration HS2 is added to the integrated model image IGd shown in FIG. 156(d).

However, it may be arranged that the effect progress from the situation shown in FIG. 156(d) to the situation shown in FIG. 156(e) is not necessarily performed. For example, the integrated model image IG (integrated model images IGa to IGd) shown in FIG. 156(d) to the situation shown in FIG. 156(e) and the first additional decoration HS1 is added to the effect. A period (first effective period) occurs, or an effective period (first effective period) occurs without the second additional decoration HS2 being added without progressing to the situation shown in FIG. 156(e). It will be possible to provide fun about what happens.

Note that when the effective period occurs after the second additional decoration HS2 is added to the integrated model image IG, the effective period occurs without adding the second additional decoration HS2 to the integrated model image IG. It is desirable to make the degree of expectation (proportion) of stopping with a big hit pattern higher than in the case. When the special button model image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 156(e) than when the normal button model image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. It is desirable to increase the ratio of addition of the second additional decoration HS2. These percentages may include "100%" and "0%".

Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 156(e), the second additional decoration HS2 provides a performance as to whether it is added in a mode with a low degree of expectation or in a mode with a high degree of expectation. You may make it

FIG. 156(f) shows an effect situation in which the valid period (first valid period) occurs while the integrated model image IGd shown in FIG. 156(e) is being displayed.

As shown in FIG. 156(f), when the valid period (first valid period) occurs, an operation instruction image such as "press" or "down arrow" is displayed. In addition, the above-described specific image TG is displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG, and it is possible to accept the operation by confirming the specific image TG. be able to recognize that For convenience of explanation, the specific image TG according to this example is different in image type from those shown in the examples (FIGS. 144 to 156) described above, but basically the same Displayed as having functionality. The specific image TG according to this example depicts a frog character, and the character is displaced according to the "end of the gauge image GG" that is displaced when the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced. It will be done.

Note that the specific image TG according to this example is displayed by a method similar to the example shown in FIG. 146, or may be displayed by a method similar to the example shown in FIG.

Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 156(f), the specific image TG is displayed in either a low-expectation mode (a snail character) or a high-expectation mode (frog character), which is omitted from the drawing. In the figure, a highly anticipated mode is shown as an example. The specific image TG is displayed in a manner with a higher degree of expectation when the valid period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 156(d) than in the case where the valid period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 156(c). 156(e) in the situation shown in FIG. 156(e) than in the situation shown in FIG. 156(d). It is desirable to increase the ratio of displaying the specific image TG. These percentages may include "100%" and "0%".

According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a performance that indicates how much the operation-related image can progress to a highly anticipated mode before the expiration of the effective period. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game with respect to the operation in a state in which the valid period has not yet occurred. Also, while the operation-related images (button model image BMG, border decoration image SGG, additional decoration HS1, 2) suggest the degree of expectation before the validity period occurs, after the validity period occurs , and a different image (specific image TG) further suggests the degree of expectation, so that the interest can be preferably improved over the period from before the valid period to after the valid period occurs. Become.

In the example shown in FIG. 156, the timing of whether or not the production progresses from FIG. 156(b) to FIG. 156(c), and the production development from FIG. 156(d) to FIG. 156(e). You may make it invisible once. That is, in this case, when the operation-related image (button model image, peripheral decoration image, additional decoration, etc.) is displayed again, it is to be interesting to know whether the performance has progressed or the valid period has expired. will be able to

In the example shown in FIG. 156, the button model image, border decoration image, additional decoration, etc. are displayed in the same manner as during the effective period before the effective period occurs. You may make it display by (blinking, translucent, etc.).

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 156, it is desirable that the time required for gradually suggesting the degree of expectation by the operation-related image before the valid period occurs is longer than the set time for the valid period. .

By the way, the sword ornament 5001 according to this embodiment includes a "handle 5012" that can move (vertically move) with respect to the sheath 5020, and a "handle" that can move (vertically move) with respect to the handle 5012. As described above, two operation receiving portions, ie, button 5014', are provided. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when generating an effective period (operation acceptance effect) in which a predetermined condition is satisfied and an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012, the effective period (operation In the reception effect), both a "pattern image TMG" imitating the pattern portion 5012 and a "button imitating image BMG" imitating the pattern button 5014 are displayed. During the valid period during which the handle portion 5012 is provided with the opportunity to operate (operation acceptance presentation), acceptance of the operation on the pattern button 5014 is not permitted, and the valid period during which the handle button 5014 is provided with the opportunity to operate (operation acceptance presentation). ) does not allow acceptance of an operation on the handle 5012 .

In such a configuration, when an effective period (operation acceptance effect) during which an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012 occurs, it is determined whether the operation acceptance of the handle portion 5012 is permitted or whether the operation acceptance of the handle button 5014 is allowed. It becomes difficult to recognize whether is allowed. That is, if the operation is accepted during the effective period during which the opportunity to operate the handle portion 5012 is granted, the number of operations after the operation is longer than when the operation is accepted during the effective period during which the opportunity to operate the handle button 5014 is granted. The ratio of appearance of a mode suggesting that the big-hit symbols are stopped as a display (or a mode that suggests that the big-hit symbols are stopped as a post-operation sound output) is high. The percentage may be 0% or 100%. Therefore, it is difficult to recognize whether the operation reception for the handle portion 5012 is permitted or the operation reception for the handle button 5014 is permitted. When the player comes to recognize this, he/she will operate the handle portion 5012 in a sense of exhilaration, which can significantly improve the amusement of the game.

In order to obtain such an effect, it is required to make it difficult to recognize whether the reception of operation on the handle portion 5012 is permitted or the reception of operation on the handle button 5014 is permitted. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the handle 5012 (the light-emitting portion of the handle 5012) is made to emit light during the effective period (operation acceptance effect) in which the opportunity to operate the handle 5012 is given. , the pattern button 5014 (the light-emitting portion of the pattern button 5014) on the side to which the operation opportunity is not given is made to emit light. In other words, in this case, during the effective period (operation reception effect) in which both the “pattern image TMG” imitating the handle portion 5012 and the “button image BMG” imitating the handle button 5014 are displayed, the handle portion 5012 Even if the handle button 5014 is directly viewed, it remains difficult to recognize which one of the handle part 5012 and the handle button 5014 is given the opportunity to operate. In such a situation, the player recognizes that the acceptance of the operation on the handle 5012 is permitted, so that the player operates the handle 5012 in a sense of exhilaration, and the game interest increases. can be significantly improved.

That is, during the effective period (operation acceptance effect) in which the handle 5012 is given an opportunity to operate, it is difficult to directly see the handle 5012 or the handle button 5014 or to look at the effect display device 1600 for a while. It is difficult to recognize whether the opportunity to operate 5012 or the opportunity to operate pattern button 5014 is provided. At least for those who have played the pachinko 1 for the first time (beginners) and those who are unfamiliar with complicated performance specifications (such as the elderly), the opportunity to operate either the handle portion 5012 or the handle button 5014 is provided. It can be said that it is difficult to recognize

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in this way, after generating "a valid period in which it is difficult to recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 is given an opportunity to operate", It is difficult to instantly recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 has been given an operation opportunity within the effective period, but it can be recognized after a certain amount of time. , the button model image BMG and the pattern model image TMG are displayed respectively.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1, during the effective period (operation acceptance effect) in which the opportunity to operate the handle 5012 is provided, the "pattern image TMG" imitating the handle 5012 and the handle button 5014 are displayed. , and the "button model image BMG" that simulates the "button model image BMG" are respectively displayed. The dynamic display of the "button model image BMG" on the side for which is not permitted is prohibited. The “dynamic display” here means, for example, a display depicting how the operation receiving portion is displaced within its movable range (in the case of the handle portion 5012, the state of movement (vertical movement) with respect to the sheath portion 5020). In the case of the pattern button 5014, it corresponds to the display depicting how the handle 5012 moves (vertically moves).

Even with such a configuration, it is difficult to instantly recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 has been given an opportunity to operate within the effective period. However, when a predetermined amount of time has passed so that it can be recognized as a dynamic display (moving image), the pattern image TMG shows the behavior at the time of operation as a dynamic display, but the behavior at the time of operation appears in the button model image BMG. does not appear as a dynamic display, it becomes possible to recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 is given the opportunity to operate. Then, when the player comes to recognize that the operation receiving portion (handle portion 5012) on the side with a high degree of expectation is permitted to receive an operation, he/she performs an operation on the handle portion 5012 in a sense of exhilaration. As a result, the amusement of the game can be significantly improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the "pattern image TMG" and the "button model image BMG" are displayed during the effective period (operation acceptance effect) in which the opportunity to operate the handle 5012 is given, Also, by displaying these simulated images as ``integrated simulated images'' that are integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates their peripheral edges, the amusement of the game is improved when the operation reception performance (effective period) occurs. We are trying to The functions and modifications of such an integrated model image are basically as described above. For example, even if the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 144 to 156 is displayed so as to further display (include) the “pattern model image TMG” in addition to the “button model image BMG”, good.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "button model image BMG" and the "pattern model image TMG" are displayed as a "composite model image HMG" that simulates at least part of the sword ornament 5001. The "composite model image HMG" is displayed as an "integrated model image IG" that is integrated with the edge decoration image SSG that decorates the edge of the "composite image HMG".

FIG. 157 is a diagram showing an example of the “integrated model image IG” that is displayed when the operation reception effect (effective period) is generated for the handle portion 5012 .

As shown in FIGS. 157(a) to 157(d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a specific operation reception effect (effective period) is generated in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012. In this case, the effect display device 1600 integrates the “pattern image TMG” obtained by imitating the pattern portion 5012 with the “button model image BMG” to form a “composite model image HMG”, and then displays the “composite model image HMG”. "Image HMG" is displayed as integrated simulated images IGe to IGh that are integrated with the edge decoration image SSG that decorates the edge. In the examples shown in FIGS. 157(a) to (d), the "pattern image TMG", the "button model image BMG", and the "periphery decoration image SSG" are not individually prepared as image data. They are displayed as one integrated image data (integrated model images IGe to IGh). In addition, when the integrated model images IGe to IGh are displayed, operation prompting indications such as "push" and "lower left arrow" are also displayed, but are omitted here for convenience of explanation.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the post-operation effect to be executed when an operation is received in a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012 is "relatively A plurality of performance modes including a first performance mode with a low degree of expectation" and a "second performance mode with a relatively high degree of expectation" are prepared, and these performances are based on the results of big hit determination (performance determination). It is intended to carry out any of the aspects. In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 157(a) to (d),
157(b) (integrated model image IGf) than when the mode (integrated model image IGe) shown in FIG. When appears, the appearance ratio of the "relatively high expectation second effect mode" as a post-operation effect is higher,
157(c) (integrated model image IGg) than when the mode (integrated model image IGf) shown in FIG. When appears, the appearance ratio of the "relatively high expectation second effect mode" as a post-operation effect is higher,
157(d) than when the mode (integrated model image IGg) shown in FIG. 157(c) appears in a specific operation reception presentation (effective period) When appears, as a post-operation production, the appearance ratio of "relatively high expectations for the second production mode" is higher. Any one of the simulated images IGe to IGf is displayed.

It is not necessary to prepare all of the four modes shown as integrated model images IGe to IGh. Even if at least two aspects are prepared, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation as a post-operation effect within the validity period. Moreover, it is also possible to further prepare modes different from the above-described four modes (integrated model images IGe to IGh) and display any one of the prepared modes.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
Operation means (sword decoration body 5001) having an operation receiving portion (handle portion 5012) that is displaced by operation by a player, and a peripheral edge decoration portion (such as a sheath portion 5020) provided on the periphery thereof;
Integration that displays a model image (pattern image TMG) obtained by simulating the operation receiving portion (handle portion 5012) as integrated model images IGe to IGh that are integrated with peripheral edge decoration images that decorate the peripheral edge of the model image. a simulated image display means;
An operation reception executing means capable of causing a display change (post-operation effect) when an operation is performed by the player while the integrated model image is being displayed and a predetermined displacement occurs in the operation receiving portion (handle portion 5012); , and the integrated model image can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (integrated model images IGe to IGh).

Details of the “integrated model images” shown in FIGS. 157(a) to (d) will be described separately for each aspect (integrated model images IGe to IGh).

First, the "integrated model image IGe" shown in FIG. 157(a) has a pattern model image TMGe, a button model image BMGe (composite model image HMGe), and a normal border decoration image SSGe that decorates the periphery. configured as follows. However, in the "integrated model image IGe", the pattern model image TMGe and the button model image BMGe (composite model image HMGe) are "an image imitating the handle 5012 to which the operation opportunity is given" and " In contrast to the "image imitating the pattern button 5014 which is not the object to which the opportunity to operate is provided" is displayed as an integrated image, the normal edge decoration image SSGe is displayed as the "image which is the object to which the opportunity to operate is provided." It does not imitate the peripheral decoration (such as the sheath 5020) actually provided on the periphery of the handle 5012. In the normal peripheral decoration image SSGe according to this example, part of the peripheral decoration (such as the sheath 5020) is simulated. Most of the image SSGe serves as a virtual decoration on the display effect of the effect display device 1600 to decorate the periphery of the pattern image TMGe (composite pattern image HMGe). there is

In the "integrated model image IGe" shown in FIG. 157(a), the normal border decoration image SSGa is represented as a treasure chest containing several treasures including the pattern image TMGe (composite model image HMGe). As described above, these "treasures" and "treasure chests" have different shapes and different decorations from the actual peripheral edge decorations.

In this regard, in the "integrated model image IGe" according to this embodiment, a display target area for the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided for such a normal edge decoration image SSGe. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG according to this example can also be displayed so that the display area within the display target area is reduced over time. More specifically, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced to a predetermined minimum value (including "0") from a predetermined maximum display area when no operation is accepted within the valid period. is displayed so as to decrease with the passage of time until the display area of .

In the normal edge decoration image SSGe shown in FIG. 157(a), a division image KG is provided to divide the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from other areas in the normal edge decoration image SSGe. . The area surrounded by the partition image KG functions as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG". In this example, a necklace, which is one of the treasures, is displayed as the block image KG, and a "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is displayed in the necklace. However, the division image KG does not necessarily have to be displayed, and a predetermined range in the normal edge decoration image SSGa may be set as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG".

Further, as shown in FIG. 157(a), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the "integrated model image IGe" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, the handle to be operated 5012 is made to emit light in the first mode (for example, it emits light in the same color as the pattern image TMGe in the “integrated model image IGe” (for example, “blue” in FIG. 157(a))). Also, the handle button 5014, which is not to be operated, emits light in the fifth mode (for example, the same color as the button model image BMGe in the "integrated model image IGe" (for example, "blue" in FIG. 157(a)). ) to emit light). Although the same color is used here, different colors may be used in the first mode and the fifth mode.

On the other hand, the “integrated model image IGf” shown in FIG. The combined model image HMGf) and the edge decoration image SSG that decorates the edge of the image are formed as an integrated image. In the "integrated model image IGf", there is no shape change in the pattern model image TMGf and button model image BMGf (composite model image HMGf). However, regarding the border decoration image SSG, although the treasure box itself is displayed as being the same as the above-mentioned "normal border decoration image SSGe", the amount and type of treasures contained therein are increased in the "first special border image". It is displayed as "decorative image SSGf". The amount and types of treasures are increasing, and necklaces, treasure swords, and cups are also displayed in the case of the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGe" and are common.

In addition, in the "integrated model image IGf" shown in FIG. 157(b), the "necklace (section image KG)", which is the display target area of the gauge image GG, increases as the amount and type of treasure increases. The shape is changed, which makes the display mode of the gauge image GG different. According to such a configuration, the shape of the display target area of the gauge image GG differs (not even similar) depending on which of the plurality of modes with different expectations is displayed. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize how much remaining time is left as it decreases, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 157(b), when a specific operation acceptance effect (effective period) in which the "integrated model image IGf" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, the pattern to be operated The portion 5012 is made to emit light in the second mode (for example, it emits light in the same color as the pattern image TMGf in the “integrated model image IGf” (for example, “green” in FIG. 157(b))). Also, the handle button 5014, which is not to be operated, emits light in the sixth mode (for example, the same color as the button model image BMGf in the "integrated model image IGf" (for example, "green" in FIG. 157(b)). ) to emit light). Although the same color is used here, the second mode and the sixth mode may have different colors.

On the other hand, the “integrated model image IGg” shown in FIG. The image HMGg) and the edge decoration image SSG that decorates the edge of the image are formed as an integrated image. In the "integrated model image IGg", there is no shape change in the pattern model image TMGg and button model image BMGg (composite model image HMGg). However, regarding the border decoration image SSG, although the treasure itself is displayed as being the same as the above-mentioned "normal border decoration image SSGe", the (shape) of the treasure box containing them is different from the "second special border decoration image". Image SSGg".

However, the "second special edge decoration image SSGg" is similar to the "normal edge decoration image SSGe" and the "first special edge decoration image SSGf" in the following points.
- "It does not imitate the peripheral decorative part (such as the sheath part 5020) that is actually provided on the peripheral edge of the handle part 5012 to which the operation opportunity is given, and the virtual display effect on the effect display device 1600 As a decoration, the periphery of the pattern image TMGg (composite pattern image HMGg) is decorated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 157(c), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the “integrated model image IGg” is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, the pattern to be operated The portion 5012 is made to emit light in the third mode (in FIG. 157(c), for example, emits light in the same color (eg, “red”) as the pattern image TMGg in the “integrated model image IGg”). Also, the pattern button 5014, which is not to be operated, emits light in the seventh mode (for example, the same color as the button model image BMGg in the “integrated model image IGg” (for example, “red” in FIG. 157(c)). ) to emit light). Although the same color is used here, different colors may be used in the third mode and the seventh mode.

On the other hand, the “integrated model image IGh” shown in FIG. The image HMGh) and the edge decoration image SSG that decorates the edge of the image are formed as an integrated image. In the "integrated model image IGh", there is no shape change in the pattern model image TMGh and the button model image BMGh (composite model image HMGh). However, with respect to the peripheral decoration image SSG, compared to the above-described "normal peripheral decoration image SSGe", the amount and types of treasures are increased, and the treasure chest (shape) that stores them is also different from the "third It is displayed as a "special peripheral decoration image SSGh".

In addition, in the "integrated model image IGh" according to this example, the shape of the "necklace (section image KG)", which is the display target area of the gauge image GG, changes as the amount and type of treasure increases. , which makes the display mode of the gauge image GG different.

However, the "third special edge decoration image SSGh" is similar to the "normal edge decoration image SSGe" in the following points.
- "It does not imitate the peripheral decorative part (such as the sheath part 5020) that is actually provided on the peripheral edge of the handle part 5012 to which the operation opportunity is given, and the virtual display effect on the effect display device 1600 As a decoration, the periphery of the pattern image TMGh (composite pattern image HMGh) is decorated.

That is, in the "integrated model image IGh (Fig. 157(d))", a part (treasure ) and a part (treasure chest) of the “second special peripheral decoration image SSGg” used in the “integrated model image IGg (FIG. 157(c))” are displayed as a combined image. there is

On the other hand, since the same decorations and shapes appear in some areas of the periphery decoration image SSG, the appearance of the “integrated model image IGe (FIG. 157(a))” and the appearance of the “integrated It is possible to suggest a specific operation acceptance effect (effective period) for the same post-operation effect as in the case where the model image IGh (Fig. 157(d)) appears.

Further, as shown in FIG. 157(d), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the “integrated model image IGh” is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the pattern to be operated The portion 5012 is made to emit light in the fourth mode (for example, it emits light in the same color as the pattern image TMGh in the “integrated model image IGh” (for example, “rainbow color” in FIG. 157(d))). . Also, the pattern button 5014, which is not to be operated, emits light in the eighth mode (for example, the same color as the button model image BMGh in the “integrated model image IGh” (for example, “rainbow color” in FIG. 157(d)). ) to emit light). Although the same color is used here, different colors may be used in the fourth aspect and the eighth aspect.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 157(a) to 157(d), the pattern image TMG and the button model image BMG (composite model image HMG) are displayed in the same shape in any mode. 157(b) and (d)), or according to changes in treasure chests (FIGS. 157(c) and (d)). The shape of the TMG and the button model image BMG (composite model image HMG) may be made different.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 157(a) to (d), the pattern image TMG and the button model image BMG (composite model image HMG) are displayed in different colors in each mode. may be displayed as

When the button model image BMG imitating the pattern button 5014 is displayed, in the example shown in FIGS. I made it In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 157(a) to 157(d) as well, the model button image BMG that imitates the pattern button 5014 is displayed, but the border decoration images SSGa,b are not displayed. . 144(a) to 144(d) and FIG. 157 ( It is possible to display an image completely different from the examples shown in a) to (d), thereby providing various effects.

157(a) to (d), the parts having the same functions as the examples shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d) are shown in FIGS. Needless to say, the same effects as those described above with reference to d) are achieved. Also, in the examples shown in FIGS. 157(a) to (d), the above-described modified examples and production examples for the examples shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d) can be appropriately employed.

157, the effective period during which the integrated simulated image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. The "specific image TG" is displayed.

However, in the effective period (a plurality of effective periods) in which the integrated model image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. type, etc.), there are cases where the "specific image TG" is displayed and cases where the "specific image TG" is not displayed. In the effective period (multiple effective periods) in which IG is displayed, the "specific image TG" is displayed regardless of the type of the effective period (type as post-operation display, post-operation sound output, type of precursor effect, etc.) It is always displayed.

In other words, during the effective period (a plurality of effective periods) during which the integrated model image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 157, the state shown in FIGS. It does not include the effective period generated as a production. Therefore, it is desirable to display the "specific image TG" in order to clarify how much time is left. When the "specific image TG" is displayed, the gauge image GG does not necessarily have to be displayed.

The “specific image TG” when the integrated model image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 157 may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 145 or in the manner shown in FIG. You may make it

In the example shown in FIG. 157, the handle 5012 is given an opportunity to operate while being moved from the original position to the specific position. Operation (sword sheathing operation) is permitted. However, when giving the opportunity to operate the handle 5012, the handle 5012 does not necessarily have to be moved from the original position to the specific position. For example, while the handle 5012 is at the original position, the handle 5012 may be given an opportunity to operate, thereby permitting a moving operation (sword drawing operation) from the original position to a specific position.

FIG. 158 is a diagram showing an example of an effect (operation acceptance effect) when the integrated model image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG.

FIG. 158(a) shows that, in the normal game state, when the reserved number is 0, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is a specific effect pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination, and the effect display device 1600 In the production situation being performed in , the production situation is shown in which the production display device 1600 starts to display the foreshadowing production (specific display TH3). This production pattern may be the same as the production pattern shown in FIGS. 147 to 150, or may be different. When the effect pattern is the same, the effective period (operation reception effect) shown in FIGS. 147 to 150 and the effective period shown in FIG. 158 are generated at the first timing and the second timing in the effect pattern. Alternatively, only one of the valid periods (operation reception effect) may be generated at a predetermined timing within the effect pattern based on the result of the effect determination.

The precursor effect (specific display TH3) according to this example is also executed in a manner straddling before and after the occurrence timing of the effective period in which operation reception is permitted. Receipt of production) is not permitted and the effective period has not occurred.

In this respect, the precursor effect (specific display TH3) according to this example is performed by displaying the integrated model image IG itself (dynamic display by the lid portion of the treasure chest). At the time point shown in FIG. 148(a), the treasure chest represented by the peripheral decoration image SSG of the integrated model image IG is displayed in a "closed mode", whereby the pattern image TMGe (composite model image HMGe) is displayed. is not displayed as an image (by the specific display TH3, which is the lid of the treasure chest), and cannot be visually recognized (or is difficult to be visually recognized).

Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 158(a), the treasure chest represented by the margin decoration image SSG of the integrated model image IG is in the state of relatively low expectation shown in FIGS. 157(a) and (b). 157(c) and (d), which are shown in FIGS. 157(c) and 157(d). A case of displaying in a low mode (FIGS. 157(a) and (b)) is exemplified. Which of these modes is to be displayed is selected based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination). In the case where the treasure chest is displayed in a manner with a high degree of expectation, the explanation is omitted, but the presentation progresses after this in the same manner as "when the treasure chest is displayed in a manner with a low degree of expectation" described below. will be performed.

FIG. 158(b) shows that while the omen effect shown in FIG. (While shrinking over time), in "Treasure", the part that does not overlap with the lid of the treasure box (specific display TH3) gradually expands, and this part is displayed in a good visibility. is shown.

That is, when the portent effect shown in FIG. 158(a) progresses, the specific timing arrives and the effective period for the handle portion 5012 is generated. When the effective period occurs, as shown in FIG. 158(b), the handle 5012 to be operated starts moving to the "specific position" by the driving force from the actuator (motor). Further, as described above, both the "handle portion 5012" to be operated and the "handle button 5014" not to be operated start emitting light in a predetermined manner (blue, green, red, rainbow, etc.).

However, at the time when such light emission is started, the portent effect (specific display TH3) shown in FIG. 158(a) is in the middle of execution. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 158(b), the integrated model image IG changes the lid portion (specific display TH3) of the treasure chest from the "closed state (fully closed)" to the "opened state". It is in a state that depicts the state of being changed to (fully open). Therefore, at the point of time shown in FIG. 158(b), at least part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG are rendered (expressed) as if they were in front of them (specific display TH3). ”, but the reduction of the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started (progressed). ). In this example, the specific image TG is entirely overlapped with the precursor effect (specific display TH) and is not displayed as an image.

According to such a configuration, the foreshadow effect (display related to the specific display TH3) is performed in a form that straddles the occurrence timing (specific timing) of the valid period, and the predetermined time after the valid period occurs is , at least a portion of the integrated model image IG is rendered invisible or difficult to be visually recognized by the foreshadow effect (specific display TH3). That is, in this case, the whole picture of the integrated model image IG (pattern model image TMG and button model image BMG (composite model image HMG), border decoration image SSG, specific image TG, etc.) is gradually exposed within the valid period. Therefore, the degree of expectation (mode of peripheral decoration image) and the operation target (mode of pattern image) suggested by the mode of the integrated simulated image IG are interesting. It can be maintained for a predetermined period of time after the validity period starts.

That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 158(b), the "treasure" that is the contents of the treasure box is displayed in a mode with a small amount and types (a mode with a relatively low degree of expectation shown in FIG. 157(a)). There are at least cases where it is displayed and cases where it is displayed in a mode with a large amount and type (a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation shown in FIG. 157(b)), and in any of these modes It is intended to provide the performance of whether it is displayed. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 158(b), it is possible to recognize that the "treasure" that is the contents of the treasure chest is displayed in a mode with a large amount and type (a mode with a high degree of expectation). ing. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 158(b), since the "specific image TG" is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize it, the "specific image TG" is originally displayed when the effective period starts ( 146) or a type in which the "specific image TG" is not displayed at the start of the effective period and appears gradually thereafter (see FIG. 145). there is That is, in the case of the type shown in FIG. 146, it is easy to see that the "specific image TG" cannot function as the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, so the type shown in FIG. It can be said that executing the portent effect in the manner described above when employed is particularly effective in suppressing a decline in interest in the game. In addition, the case where "treasure" is displayed in a mode with low expectations will be omitted, but this is the same as "when "treasure" is displayed in a mode with high expectations" described below. Subsequent production progress will be performed.

FIG. 158(c) overlaps with the integrated model image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) as a result of the further development of the precursor effect (display related to the specific display TH3) shown in FIG. 158(b). It shows a situation where the part (the part where the specific display TH3 is depicted as being on the front side of the "treasure") has disappeared. However, in this example, the specific display TH3 is not hidden, and the display is maintained while the integrated model image IG is displayed. It is possible to provide one performance from the time of the game to the end of the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

As shown in FIG. 158(c), when the treasure of the integrated model image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is fully visible, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already decreased, and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started (here, the entire "specific image TG" has finished appearing). That is, in this case, since the “specific image TG” also appears to be a part of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG”, the display area is larger than the actual display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It is possible to make it seem that the display area has not decreased so much. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game due to the fact that the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already decreased when the omen effect (the effect of opening the lid portion, which is the specific display TH) is finished. can be expected. The "specific image TG" according to this example is displayed as an image expressing "light" displaced at or near the end of the gauge image GG.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 158(c), the pattern image TMG in the integrated model image IG is dynamically displayed (display depicting how the handle portion 5012 is displaced within its movable range). However, as described above, the button model image BMG is not dynamically displayed (a display depicting how the pattern button 5014 is displaced within its movable range).

FIG. 158(d) shows that the operation is not accepted until the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG reaches the minimum value (here, "0"), and the effective period (set time) ends (or 16 shows an example of an image appearing on the effect display device 1600 immediately before the effective period ends. At the time when the image shown in FIG. 158(d) appears, it is assumed that the operation reception is barely permitted in terms of time. It may be made unacceptable. However, in this case, the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 have already finished emitting light at this time. Also, in this case, images such as "push!" and "lower left arrow" may be hidden. In any case, the "specific image TG" is displayed at least partially (or entirely) even when the effective period expires.

When the valid period expires, both the light emission of the handle 5012 and the light emission of the handle button 5014 are terminated. In this regard, during the valid period in which the opportunity to operate the handle 5012 is given, even if the player does not perform any operation within the period, the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when the operation is performed are displayed. (See FIG. 158(e)). This is the same as the automatic reception (FIGS. 147(e), (f), etc.) functioning within the first validity period described above.

According to such a configuration (automatic reception effect), even if a situation occurs in which the player performs an operation immediately after the valid period ends (operation reception is no longer permitted), the post-operation display Since the "specific image TG" is displayed even immediately before the post-operation sound output is performed, the post-operation display and operation are performed in response to the operation acceptance that accompanies the operation by the player in time. It becomes possible to make it look as if the post-sound output has started. In particular, when the omen effect (pre-display) is performed in such a manner, the gauge image (predetermined The display area of the image) GG has already decreased, and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started. That is, in this case, since it is likely that the player will not be able to perform the operation in time, even if there is no operation by the player within the effective period, the "specific image TG" will be displayed after the operation. It can be said that outputting a sound after operation or after operation is effective in suppressing a decrease in amusement in the game. Also, in this example, the pattern button 5014 on the side to which the opportunity to operate is not provided is made to emit light in accordance with the occurrence of the valid period, and either the handle portion 5012 or the pattern button 5014 is provided with the opportunity to operate. We are trying to make it difficult to recognize whether. That is, in this case, since there is a high possibility that the operation will not be completed in time within the valid period, it can be said to be effective in suppressing the decrease in the interest in the game when the operation is not completed in time.

158, the "specific image TG" is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 145, and the "specific image TG" is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. may be applied to any of

In the example shown in FIG. 158, the precursor effect (specific display TH) and the integrated model image IG are displayed in separate layers, and the precursor effect (specific display TH) is preferentially displayed, thereby appearing in FIG. We decided to realize the production progress in the mode. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is also possible to store the presentation progress in the aspect shown in FIG.

In the example shown in FIG. 158, the mode (integrated model image IGa) shown in FIG. 157(b) is made to appear as the integrated model image IG. However, as described above, the integrated model image IG may appear in any of a plurality of modes (modes shown in FIGS. 157(a) to (d)) based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination). .

According to the example shown in FIG. 158, first, prior to the expiration of the validity period, when the treasure chest that is part of the integrated model image IG is displayed, the treasure chest is displayed in the "highly expected mode" and " A first performance is provided as to whether the display is to be performed in a mode with a low degree of expectation. In addition, after the validity period has occurred, the treasure chest of the integrated model image IG is depicted as being gradually opened, and the “treasure” is either a “high expectation state” or a “low expectation state”. A second effect will be provided as to whether or not to be displayed. That is, in this case, the degree of expectation is suggested by the step-by-step effects (first effect, second effect) that are performed over the occurrence of the effective period, so the effective period occurs. It will be expected that the amusement of the game in the period from before to after occurrence will be favorably improved.

In addition, since such a step-by-step effect is realized by the depiction of the integrated model image IG itself (the depiction of the lid of the treasure chest), other images (the specific display TH shown in FIG. 147) etc.), the player feels less stress than in the case of depriving the visibility of the integrated model image IG, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game. However, even in the example shown in FIG. 158, the precursor effect may be performed in the same manner as in FIG. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 149, the portent effect may be performed in the same manner as in FIG.

In FIG. 158, when the first effect condition is satisfied, the model image imitating the operation target is integrated with the "peripheral decoration image (first decoration image)" including the display target area of the gauge image. In the case of displaying as a model image, an example (the first operation acceptance acceptance period) of the development of the effect has been described. On the other hand, in FIGS. 159 and 160, when the second effect condition is satisfied, the simulated image that imitates the operation target is changed to the "periphery decoration image including the display target area of the gauge image (first decoration image)." An example (the second operation acceptance acceptance period) of the development of the presentation will be described in the case of displaying as "an image that is not integrated with the image". The example shown in FIG. 158 and the examples shown in FIGS. 159 and 160 do not necessarily give the same operation opportunity to the same operation object, but the same operation object is given the operation opportunity. If so, it is desirable that the model image itself that imitates the operation target is displayed as the same image (including similar shapes).

Here, as a mode in which the model image that simulates the operation target is displayed as "an image that is not integrated with the peripheral decoration image that includes the display target area of the gauge image", for example, the model image that simulates the operation target is displayed as a "periphery Displayed as a single image that is not integrated with the decoration image in the first place, or displayed as an image that simulates the operation target and is integrated with the peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image. It is possible to adopt an aspect such as According to such a configuration, when the effective period occurs, the gauge image is displayed in the image when the simulated image simulating the operation target is displayed as one image, and the gauge image is displayed in the image. Since the gauge image may not be displayed in the image when the model image is displayed as one image, the sense of tension during the effective period can be preferably maintained.

In the example described below, a display example is shown in which a simulated image that imitates an operation target is displayed as "an image that is integrated with a periphery decoration image that does not include a display target area of a gauge image".

First, in FIG. 159(a), in the normal game state, when the reserved number is 0, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is effected in a specific effect pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination. In the effect situation performed by the device 1600, the effect display device 1600 shows the effect condition in which the display of the precursor effect (specific display TH3) is started. This effect pattern may be the same as the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 147 to 150 and FIG. 158, or may be different. When the effect pattern is the same, it may be generated at the first timing and the second timing in one effect pattern, or any of the valid periods (operation reception effect) may be generated based on the result of the effect determination. Only one of them may be generated at a predetermined timing within the production pattern.

In this example, the situations shown in FIGS. 159(a) and (b) are basically the same as the situations shown in FIGS. 158(a) and (b), and the description of the same configurations is omitted. However, the "treasure (second decoration image)" partially visible in the situation shown in FIG. 159(b) is partially visible in the situation shown in FIG. 158(b). It has a different content from the existing “treasure (first decorative image)”. That is, as described above, the "simulated image that simulates the operation target" according to this example is displayed as "an image that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image". Regarding the "periphery decoration image not including the display target area of the gauge image", the part displayed as the same image as the above-mentioned "periphery decoration image including the display target area of the gauge image" and the part displayed as a different image. It has become something.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 159(c), the "treasure (second decoration image)" of the edge decoration image SSG according to this example includes the "Holy Grail". This is the same as the shown "treasure (first decorative image)". However, in the "treasure" of the peripheral decoration image SSG according to this example, the "gold bar" and the "necklace (display target area of the gauge image GG)" shown in FIG. 158 are not displayed. An image filled with gold coins is displayed. The treasure box shown in FIG. 159(c) is the same as the treasure box shown in FIG. 158(c), and it is also the same that the treasure box is displayed in one of the multiple modes shown in FIG.

According to such a configuration, even if there is no part of the specific display TH3 that is depicted to be on the front side of the "treasure (perimeter decoration image SSG)" (FIG. 159(c)), The gauge image GG is no longer displayed in the "treasure (peripheral decoration image SSG)". That is, in this case, while the "treasure (peripheral decoration image SSG)" is gradually becoming more visible by the specific display TH3, even if an attempt is made to find the gauge image GG, it cannot be found. It will be possible to preferably maintain a sense of tension as to whether there is enough time left.

In particular, in the peripheral decoration image SSG (treasure) according to this example, although the display target area of the gauge image GG, the "necklace", is not displayed, the display target area of the gauge image GG, the "necklace", is displayed. The same image (such as the Holy Grail) as in the case (FIG. 157(c)) is intentionally included and displayed. That is, in this case, it is possible to make it appear that the "necklace", which is the display target area of the gauge image GG, is also displayed somewhere. After searching for it, when you realize that this is not displayed anywhere, it will be in a situation where a certain amount of time has already passed since the validity period occurred, so the tension during the validity period will be reduced. It can be maintained well.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 159(b) to (d), the integrated model image IG in which the pattern image TMG imitating the operation target is integrated with the peripheral edge decoration image SSG is itself a gauge image. In addition, the display target area of the gauge image is not displayed as an image separate from the integrated model image IG. That is, in this case, since the gauge image is not displayed and it becomes difficult to recognize how much time remains in the valid period, the tension during the valid period can be preferably maintained. Note that the display target area of the gauge image does not necessarily have to be displayed. For example, the gauge image is displayed as an image separate from the integrated model image IG, and its display area is reduced over time. You may do so.

FIG. 159(d) shows an example of an image appearing on the effect display device 1600 when the set time for the valid period has passed and the valid period is about to end. As noted above, no gauge image is displayed in this example. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 159(d), there is no suggestion that the valid period is about to expire, and the player cannot see the image even if he/she sees the image. unable to recognize something.

However, even during the valid period according to this example, the pattern image TMG that is the object of operation is a display that depicts how the handle portion 5012 reciprocates within its movable range (reciprocating motion from the original position to a specific position). (dynamic display) is performed. In this regard, since the effective period of this example is terminated when the reciprocating movement is repeated N times (N may not be an integer) after the occurrence of the period, By continuing to watch the dynamic display of the pattern image TMG, it is possible to recognize how much time (how many reciprocating motions) is left as the valid period.

It should be noted that even during the effective period of this example, as shown in FIGS. display) is not performed. In this respect, in the valid period in which the display target area of the gauge image is not displayed, if the operation receiving portion (here, the handle button 5014) corresponding to the model image on the side where such dynamic display is not performed is operated, However, a post-operation display or a post-operation sound output may be performed in response to the reception of the operation.

That is, during the valid period of this example, the gauge image is not displayed and it is difficult to recognize the remaining time, so that the player hurriedly operates the operation receiving portion on the side that is not dynamically displayed. Since it is assumed that the possibility of operating It is desirable to output the after sound in order to suppress the decline in the interest in the game. Examples of the post-operation display and post-operation sound output in this case include a display and sound output such as "Press the handle, not the handle button!". Therefore, even if the operation receiving unit on the side that is not dynamically displayed is operated and the corresponding post-operation display or post-operation sound output is performed, the effective period may be terminated or the set time period may be changed. It is desirable to continue the dynamic display of the pattern image TMG without stopping it, without resetting it. When the handle portion 5012 is operated within the valid period thus continued, the corresponding post-operation display and post-operation sound output are performed (see FIG. 160(h)). In this case, the post-operation display and post-operation sound output are the post-operation display and post-operation sound output that appear when the operation receiving portion on the non-dynamic display side is operated. It goes without saying that the content is different from the content of However, "within the validity period, the operation receiving unit (pattern button 5014) corresponding to the dynamically displayed button image BMG is not operated, and the dynamically displayed pattern image TMG is not operated. Post-operation display and post-operation sound output when the operation receiving portion (handle portion 5012) is operated (for example, “Congratulations!” After the operation receiving portion (pattern button 5014) corresponding to the BMG is operated, the operation receiving portion (handle portion 5012) corresponding to the dynamically displayed pattern image TMG is further operated. It is desirable in order to improve the enjoyment of the game that the post-operation sound output (for example, "Congratulations on being on time!") is executed with different contents.

FIG. 160(e) shows an example of an image that appears on the effect display device 1600 when no operation is accepted within the time (set time) set for the effective period of this example.

That is, in the effective period of this example, if the set time elapses without any operation being accepted (FIGS. 159(d) and (e)), the handle portion 5012 is operated within the effective period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when it was performed are not executed (automatic reception effect is functioned).

However, in this example, the gauge image GG is not displayed within the integrated model image IG, and the gauge image GG is not displayed as a separate image. There is a possibility that the effective period may expire without being able to operate even though there is an intention to operate it, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game will decrease. Therefore, in this example, after the valid period expires without any operation by the player, while the specific condition (for example, pattern stop, 10 seconds before the pattern stop is not reached, etc.) is not satisfied , the operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (handle 5012 in this case) as the operation means to which the operation opportunity was given within the valid period, and when the operation to the operation means is accepted, this is done. Based on the above valid period can be generated again. In this sense, it can be said that when the valid period expires without any operation by the player, a special valid period for regenerating the valid period is generated from the point of time when the valid period expires.

According to such a configuration, even if the valid period expires as a result of the elapse of the predetermined set time without any operation by the player, the operation shown in FIG. It is possible to generate an operation reception for outputting a post-operation display or a post-operation sound output. More specifically, in the situation (special valid period) shown in FIG. (Fig. 160(f), (g)). After that, the contents as described above are repeated again with reference to FIGS. 159(b) to (d) and FIGS. Therefore, even if an operation is accepted within the valid period regenerated in this way, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance are executed in the manner described above (see FIG. 160(h)). reference).

When the operation is accepted in the situation (special validity period) shown in FIG. 160(e), the images shown in FIGS. (same as the image shown in c)) will appear in sequence. Such an image is a post-operation display executed based on acceptance of an operation during the effective period (FIGS. 159(b) to (d), FIGS. 159(f), (g), etc.). are different. Similarly, the post-operation sound output that is executed based on the acceptance of the operation in the situation (special valid period) shown in FIG. 160(f), (g), etc.), the output sound is different from the post-operation sound output executed based on the reception of the operation.

159 and 160, the specific image TG is not displayed during the valid period (operation acceptance effect) shown in FIGS. good too. For example, when a predetermined condition for accepting an operation regarding a predetermined post-operation display (predetermined post-operation sound output) is satisfied (when a predetermined timing arrives), the situation shown in FIG. 159(c) is caused to appear. , and thereafter, the display may progress in the same manner as in the above example.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 158 to 160, the pattern image TMG and the button model image BMG are displayed as one image (composite model image HMG), but these model images are displayed as separate images. You may make it display. In the examples shown in FIGS. 158 to 160, the "button model image BMG" and the "pattern model image TMG" are displayed as one image (composite model image HMG) containing both of these model images. The "composite model image HMG" is displayed as an "integrated model image IG" that is integrated with the edge decoration image SSG that decorates the edge. However, the "button model image BMG" and the "pattern model image TMG" are displayed as separate images, respectively, and at least one of these model images is integrated with the peripheral edge decoration image that decorates the peripheral edge. You may make it display as an image. For example, if the "pattern image TMG" is displayed as an integrated image integrated with the peripheral decoration image, and the "button model image BMG" is displayed as a separate separate image, the "pattern image TMG" and "button model image BMG" are simultaneously displayed, but the "pattern model image TMG" can be made more conspicuous, and an operation corresponding to the "pattern model image TMG" can be performed. It becomes possible to implicitly suggest that the receiving part (handle part 5012) should be operated. In this case, the "pattern image TMG" in the integrated model image IG is dynamically displayed, whereas the "button model image BMG" displayed as a single image is not dynamically displayed. Configurations and other examples are similarly applicable.

In addition, in the effective period (operation acceptance effect) shown in FIG. 158, both the button model image BMG and the pattern image TMG are displayed. Only the model image TMG) may be displayed.

159 and 160 should preferably be generated with a longer set time than the effective period (operation acceptance effect) shown in FIG. 158. FIG. In this case, the pattern image (here, the pattern image TMG) is dynamically displayed (reciprocating speed, etc.) within the effective period (operation acceptance effect) shown in FIG. It is preferable that the dynamic display mode (reciprocation speed, etc.) of the pattern image (here, the pattern image TMG) be the same within the indicated effective period (operation acceptance effect). According to such a configuration, even when the gauge image GG is not displayed, it is possible to check the "dynamic display of the simulated image" based on the case where the gauge image GG is displayed. You will be encouraged to operate.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 158 to 160, the border decoration image SSG may be a “treasure” image, and the treasure box may not necessarily be displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 158, when the operation receiving portion corresponding to the model image that is not dynamically displayed is the “first operation receiving portion”, in the examples shown in FIGS. The operation receiving portion corresponding to the image may be the "first operation receiving portion". However, in this case, in the example shown in FIG. 158, when the operation receiving portion to be dynamically displayed is the “second operation receiving portion”, in the examples shown in FIGS. It is desirable that the operation receiving portion corresponding to is a "third operation receiving portion" different from the "second operation receiving portion". According to such a configuration, it is possible to generate two types of operation acceptance effects in which the display relationship between the three operation targets (operation receiving units) slides. , it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

Also, the valid period (operation acceptance effect) shown in FIGS. 159 and 160 does not necessarily have to occur during the execution period of the symbol variation. For example, it may be a period that occurs using the RTC function regardless of the presence or absence of symbol variation, or during the execution period of the jackpot game or the period before the start of the jackpot game, such as "a period in which no symbol variation is performed. ” may occur.

159 and 160, during the effective period (operation acceptance effect), the decorative pattern SZ that has been displayed until then is hidden, as in the effective period shown in FIGS. 152 to 155. Alternatively, it may be made difficult to visually recognize, thereby making it easier to notice that the gauge image is in a special effect state in which it is not displayed.

As the effective period during which the image shown in FIG. 158(c) is displayed, a plurality of effective periods having different occurrence conditions may be prepared. In this case, the display progress shown in FIG. 158 does not have to be made in all of these valid periods, and the display progress shown in FIG. 158 may be made in at least one valid period.

As the effective period during which the image shown in FIG. 159(c) is displayed, a plurality of effective periods having different occurrence conditions may be prepared. In this case, the display progress shown in FIGS. 159 and 160 does not have to be made in all of these valid periods, and the display progress shown in FIGS. 159 and 160 may be made in at least one valid period.

159 and 160, unlike the valid period shown in FIG. 158, in the valid period (operation acceptance effect) shown in FIGS. You may make it displayable only in the aspect.

The effective period during which the gauge image is not displayed (operation acceptance effect) can occur only when an operation opportunity is given to one of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014, and the other is given an operation opportunity. An effective period (operation acceptance effect) in which the gauge image is always displayed may be generated when the token is given.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effective period (effective period shown in FIGS. The effective period during which the integrated model image is displayed in which the GG display target area is not provided in the first place (the effective period shown in FIGS. 159 and 160) can be generated as one of multiple types of effective periods. there is In this regard, in these effective periods (FIGS. 151 to 153, 159, and 160), in order to preferably maintain the sense of tension, when the operation by the player is not accepted, when the operation is accepted (no automatic button function), and during the valid period (Figs. In order to maintain the game in a favorable manner, it is desirable that when the player's operation is not accepted, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted is performed (with an automatic button function).

In this respect, the effective period during which the integrated model image is displayed in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced (the effective period shown in FIGS. When an operation is accepted for an operation means to which an opportunity to operate is given during the valid period during which the model image is displayed (the valid period shown in FIGS. 159 and 160), a change (display It is desirable that the integrated model image is displayed instead of being hidden at the time when at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effects such as light emission of lamps) is started. Also, it is desirable to continue the dynamic display of the integrated model image. As a result, the gauge image does not indicate the remaining time, and it is expected that it will be possible to make the player feel uneasy about whether the performance reception was properly performed, and to maintain the tension more appropriately. Become so.

In this case, the display mode of the model image (for example, color transmittance, etc.) may not necessarily be the same, and the simulated image may be in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize it with another image. It is sufficient if the corresponding change (at least one of changes caused by post-operation effects such as display change and lamp emission) is recognizable. On the other hand, within the valid period (FIGS. 147 to 150 and 158) during which the gauge image GG is displayed to be reduced in size as time elapses, changes (display changes, , at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as lamp emission) occurs, the integrated model image (both the model image and the gauge image) in the state where the change (display change, lamp emission, etc.) occurs ) may be hidden, or, as in the case described above, changes (display changes, lamp emission, etc.) in response to operation reception may be performed while the integrated model image is displayed instead of being hidden. may be generated.

However, even during the valid period in which "the display area of the specific image is not reduced over time", a simulated image simulating the operation means to be operated is displayed. For images, it is desirable to display them as moving images that progress at a particular speed. With such a configuration, although the remaining time is not suggested by the gauge image, it is difficult to grasp the remaining time during which operation reception is permitted depending on how much the moving image based on the model image has progressed. It is expected that it will be possible and that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

[Integrated model image, effect before valid period, effect of disappearing model image]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is to be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern It is possible to execute a production judgment (such as advance notice judgment) as to which of the expected productions (such as advance notice production) is to appear selectively. It should be noted that depending on the result of the production determination, all of the plurality of expected productions prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern (notice production, etc.) may be sequentially executed, or None of the expected effects (notice effects, etc.) may be executed.

Then, as described above, when such production determination (production pattern judgment, advance notice judgment, etc.) is performed, by performing control to display the production content according to the result of the production judgment on the production display device 1600, it is possible to judge the big hit. The variable production by the decorative pattern according to the result is executed together with the expected production (preliminary production) related to the background depiction (background advance notice), movable body operation (role production), and the like. As a result, as a result of execution of the variation effect by the decorative pattern together with the expected effect of the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, etc., when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed as a privilege for the player. become possible.

In such a configuration, the variable performance by the decorative pattern is provided as a performance having "a function indicating whether or not a big hit has been obtained as a result of the judgment of the big hit", and the background depiction, the movement of the movable body, etc. is provided as an effect having "the function of suggesting the degree of expectation, that is, the ratio (including 0% and 100%) of the fact that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the determination of the variation pattern, it is specified among the highly expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach effects with background changes, etc.) If the variation pattern is selected, even if any result is obtained as the production judgment (such as the advance notice judgment), when the pattern production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing in the SP reach (predetermined condition is established), it is possible to generate an acceptance acceptance state (effective period) in which acceptance of the performance is allowed.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low-expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the determination of the variation pattern. Even in the case, when a special result is obtained in the production determination (such as advance notice judgment) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the pattern production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (predetermined condition is established Then), it is possible to generate an acceptance allowable state (effective period) in which the performance acceptance is allowed. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination, even if the symbol performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, the reception acceptance state (effective period) does not occur. . In addition, the reception acceptance state (valid period) that occurs in a predetermined variation pattern is different from the reception acceptance state (valid period) that occurs when the pattern production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as a performance.

In addition, even if any result is obtained as a notice production judgment, at a predetermined timing during SP reach, regarding the fluctuation pattern that causes the acceptance acceptable state (effective period), in addition to the above "specific fluctuation pattern" may also be provided. However, even if any result is obtained as a result of the advance notice effect judgment, the fluctuation pattern that causes the acceptance acceptable state (effective period) at the predetermined timing is included in the low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) It is desirable to prevent it from being lost or to lower its selection ratio.

By the way, the acceptability state (effective period) that can occur under these conditions is a pre-determined state for the production member to be produced as long as the operation is detected within the set time (effective period). (At least one of a display change in the effect display device 1600, a sound effect change in the speaker, a light emission change by the lamp, and a effect operation by the movable decorative body) is performed. The permissive state (effective period) itself has poor performance, and there is concern that the game interest will decrease until the performance is executed after the operation.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, first, when the acceptance allowable state (effective period) in which the opportunity to operate is granted occurs, the operation receiving part to which the opportunity to operate is granted is selected. By displaying the simulated model image as an integrated model image (see FIG. 144) that is integrated with the peripheral edge decoration image that decorates the peripheral edge of the model image, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game until the performance after the operation is executed. We are trying to curb the decline. For such an integrated model image, the operation reception effect (effective period) that occurs when the pattern effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to the specific timing during the SP reach, and the operation that occurs in the predetermined variation pattern It is desirable to display it both in the reception performance (effective period) and in both the low-expectation non-suppressed reception performance and the high-expectation suppressed reception performance. Also, in each of the above-described production examples, it is desirable to realize the display mode of the exemplified model image by replacing it with one of the integrated model images described below in order to improve the amusement of the game. .

Note that the "integrated model image" according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. A display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided. In addition, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 144) with different degrees of expectation are prepared as the "integrated model image", and it is the same in that it is displayed in any one of these modes.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the acceptance allowable state occurs, an acceptance allowable sound indicating that the operation acceptance is allowed or that the operation acceptance will be allowed is played. It is designed to output, thereby making it difficult to forget to operate. Here, "acceptable sound" means whether or not an acceptable acceptance state (effective period) always occurs while the sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned) when the output of the sound is started. , is a sound in which the acceptability state (effective period) has already occurred.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, a plurality of reception permission states including a first reception permission state and a second reception permission state are prepared as the reception permission state (effective period). there is Here, the first acceptance allowable state can occur when a specific fluctuation pattern is selected from the high-expectation fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern), but the low-expectation fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) Among them, a valid period that cannot occur in a predetermined variation pattern (or in any variation pattern of low expected variation patterns) validity period generated). In addition, the second acceptance acceptable state is when a specific variation pattern is selected from among the high-expectation variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns), and when a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low-expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns). In either case (or at least one of these variation patterns), the valid period that can occur (the second condition different from the first condition in the production judgment based on the result of the big hit judgment validity period generated based on the fact that it is established).

The "integrated model image" according to this embodiment can be displayed in both the first acceptance state and the second acceptance state. Here, since it is assumed that both the first reception permission state and the second reception permission state occur as reception permission states in which an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (operation button 410), The "integrated model image" displayed in the first reception-permitting state and the second reception-permitting state is an image imitating the same operation means (operation button 410).

However, among the multiple modes prepared as the "integrated model image", the special mode with high expectations (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 144(d)) is the first acceptable state and the second acceptable state. Of these, it can only be displayed in the first acceptance state, and in the second acceptance state, it can be displayed only in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the modes shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(c)). ing. In the first acceptability state, it is determined in which of a plurality of modes including a special mode (for example, FIGS. 144(a) to (d)) based on the result of the jackpot determination whether the "integrated model image" is to be displayed. The "integrated model image" is displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination. Even in the second acceptance allowable state, based on the result of the jackpot determination multiple modes (for example, Figure 144 (a) ~ (c)) which does not include a special mode, whether to display the "integrated model image" A determination may be made, and the "integrated model image" may be displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination.

In such a configuration, two types of acceptance acceptable sounds (first acceptable sound and second acceptable sound) are output in the first acceptance acceptable state, and in the second acceptance acceptable state, One type of acceptance acceptable sound (third acceptance acceptable sound) is output. Here, the first acceptable sound and the third acceptable acceptable sound are, for example, output as sound effects such as "Pickin!" It may be output as sound. On the other hand, the second allowable sound is, for example, output as a message sound such as "press!". However, the second allowable sound does not necessarily have to be output as a message sound. It is possible for the player to preferably recognize that the sound (the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound) is being output.

Here, as described above, in the first acceptance acceptance state, the "integrated model image" can be displayed even in a mode different from the special mode (a mode with a relatively low degree of expectation). Even in this case, two types of acceptance acceptable sounds (first acceptable sound and second acceptable sound) are output. That is, in this case, if only one type of reception acceptable sound is output when the acceptance acceptable state occurs (the integrated simulated image is displayed), the special mode will not be displayed as the "integrated simulated image", and the special mode will not be displayed. However, when two types of acceptable acceptance sounds are output, a special mode is displayed as an "integrated model image", and a mode different from the special mode is displayed. There will be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the possibility that the "integrated model image" will be displayed in a special mode based on the mode in which the acceptable reception sound is output. It becomes possible to improve the game interest when the state occurs.

In addition, when the "integrated model image" is displayed in the first reception permitted state or the second reception permitted state, prior to this, a preliminary effect (predictive effect) is executed. is displayed (displayed in a difficult-to-see state) so as to overlap at least a part of the "image associated with the pre-effect" while the pre-effect is being executed. Then, in the integrated model image, the portion overlapping with the "image for the pre-effect" is gradually reduced, or the transmittance of the "image for the pre-effect" is gradually reduced. , and finally disappears, so that the state (whole) is exposed (displayed in a state that is easy to see) after the occurrence of the acceptable reception state. Such a preliminary effect (premonitory effect) is, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 147(b) and (c) and FIGS. You may make it

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as will be described later, the output of the second permissible sound does not start at the timing when the first permissible sound is output, but it starts outputting with a delay. ing. However, at the time when the output of the first allowable sound is started in advance, "the integrated model image itself is not displayed, or even if it is displayed, it is in a state where it is difficult to recognize the mode". Of course, even when the output of the second allowable sound is started with a delay, at least a part of the integrated model image is in a state in which the image for the preliminary effect (premonition effect) is superimposed from the front side, This makes it difficult to see. Note that the acceptance allowable state (effective period) occurs when the pre-performance (premonition effect) starts to be executed or during its execution period, and at least when the output of the second allowable sound starts. Either it has already occurred, or it will occur at the start of the output.

According to such a configuration, at least when the situation is such that "the first allowable sound is being output and the second allowable sound is not being output", two types of acceptable acceptable sounds (the first allowable sound and the Either the first acceptance acceptable state in which the second acceptable sound is output (or is occurring), or the second acceptable acceptance state in which only one type of acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound) is output occurs ( or is occurring) is difficult to recognize. However, when a situation such as "the output of the second allowable sound starts after the first allowable sound is output," two types of acceptable allowable sounds (first allowable sound and second allowable sound) are output. It is possible to recognize that there is a possibility that the first reception acceptance state, which is to be accepted, has occurred, and that the integrated model image may be displayed in a special mode.

That is, in this case, under the condition that it is difficult to recognize in which mode the integrated model image is displayed (or whether it is displayed),
・When transitioning from "a state in which only the first allowable sound out of the first and second allowable sounds is output" to "a state in which at least the second allowable sound is output" (first acceptance allowable state) When,
・When "only the first allowable sound out of the first and second allowable sounds is output" does not transition to "at least the second allowable sound is output" (second acceptance allowable state) can occur, and it is possible to suggest "the possibility that the integrated model image is displayed in a special mode" by such a mode of "transition of the output of the acceptable acceptance sound". Therefore, during the "state in which only the first allowable sound out of the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound is output", before the image related to the preliminary effect (predictive effect) is hidden, It is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the output of the second allowable sound is started, thereby improving the amusement of the game. As a result, if the second allowable sound is output while the image relating to the preliminary effect (premonition effect) is displayed, the integrated image having the special mode is displayed (displayed). In the midst of such expectation, it is possible to provide performance such that the integrated model image is gradually revealed.

As described above, even when the second allowable sound starts to be output, at least a part of the integrated model image is made difficult to be visually recognized by the "pre-production image". Therefore, although it is possible to recognize that the integrated model image may be displayed in a special mode, at least it is not possible to easily recognize in which mode the integrated model image is displayed. Needless to say. Further, at the time when the output of the second allowable sound is started, the output state of the first allowable sound may be maintained, or the output state of the first allowable sound may be ended. .

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the third condition (third acceptance acceptable state) different from both the first condition (first acceptance acceptable state) and the second condition (second acceptance acceptable state) is satisfied. In this case, the integrated model image is displayed without outputting any reception allowable sound (the first allowable sound or the second allowable sound), and while the integrated model image is displayed, the operation means (here, , operation button 410), a change in the display or a post-operation output sound may be generated as in the case where the operation is accepted in the first acceptability state or the second acceptability state. good. In this case, the change in display and the content of the post-operation output sound may differ according to the type of acceptance acceptance state (first acceptance acceptance state, second acceptance acceptance state, third acceptance acceptance state).

In other words, by displaying the integrated model image without outputting any acceptable acceptance sound, it becomes possible to make it difficult to grasp when the acceptance of the operation became acceptable. It becomes possible to improve the game interest. Therefore, in adopting such a configuration, after displaying the integrated model image, the gauge image GG included in the integrated model image should be displayed in one of the modes shown in FIGS. 151 to 155. It is desirable to According to such a configuration, a "gauge stop period" occurs during which the gauge image GG is not reduced, or the area of the gauge image GG is not set to a predetermined value (0), and the area is left as it is and integrated. Since the image is hidden, it is possible to preferably maintain the tension when the reception acceptance state is occurring, and it is possible to more preferably improve the amusement of the game related to the operation. You will be able to plan.

Alternatively, when the integrated model image is displayed without outputting any acceptable reception sound, the gauge image is not displayed in the integrated model image, and the display target area is not provided. good too. Such a display method is as described above with reference to FIGS. 159 and 160, although the operation target is different. The display target area of the gauge image is not displayed as an image separate from the integrated model image, and the same image (periphery decoration image) is intentionally included when the target area is displayed. It is possible to apply the technical idea in the same way. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain a sense of tension as to how much time is left, and it is possible to more preferably improve the amusement of the game related to the operation. become able to.

Further, even in the acceptance acceptance state according to this example, there are cases where operation reception is permitted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in a non-suppressed mode, ) is output in a suppressed mode, or operation reception is permitted while it is in a non-output state. In this example, "outputting a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) in a suppressed mode" includes the case where the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output at a volume of "0" (silent output). be. "Non-output state" includes, for example, a case where no channel is even assigned.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an acceptance acceptance state in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a non-suppressed mode, and a specific type of effect A plurality of reception permission states are prepared in which operation reception is permitted while sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state. Acceptance state" and "third acceptance acceptance state" are acceptance acceptance states in which operation acceptance is permitted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is being output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state. The above-mentioned "second acceptance permitted state" is one in which an operation is accepted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in an unsuppressed mode. It is included as one of the acceptable acceptance states.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to be conscious of the possibility that the integrated model image is displayed in a special mode when the BGM playback sound (specific type of effect sound) is suppressed or is not output. Since it is possible to do so, it is possible to avoid a situation where the performance is poor, and at the same time, while the sound of the BGM playback is suppressed or in a non-output state, the performance can be enjoyed by giving more concentration. You will be able to

It should be noted that the ``acceptance acceptance state in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state'' means that it is output in a non-suppressed mode. It may be a mode in which the reception acceptance state is generated after the specified type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppression mode or in a non-output state, or the specific type of effect sound ( While BGM reproduction) is output in a non-suppressed mode, an acceptance acceptable state is generated, and while the acceptance acceptable state is occurring (or at the same time), a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is suppressed. , or in a non-output state. The point is that the operation can be accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state.

Further, even in the acceptance allowable state according to this example, when an operation is not detected within the set time in which operation acceptance is allowed, the same display change as when the operation is detected is executed in an automatic acceptance mode. In other cases, the operation is executed in a non-automatic acceptance mode that does not cause the same display change as when the operation is detected.

Here, the reception-permitting state in which the "automatic reception mode" is executed among the reception-permitting states is as described above.
・It does not mean that the post-operation display or post-operation sound output is output only when it is set to a special effect state (automatic reception mode), regardless of whether or not there is an operation within the valid period.
- Regardless of the effect state (state of effect setting), it means that the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output are output regardless of whether or not there is an operation within the valid period. In the first place, it is not always necessary to prepare a "special presentation state (automatic reception mode)" or a "plurality of presentation states" as the presentation state. In addition, if the acceptance acceptance state in which the "non-automatic acceptance mode" is executed among the acceptance acceptance states occurs when it is set to a special effect state (automatic acceptance mode), whether automatic acceptance is enabled Either may be adopted as to whether or not (for example, it may be "automatic reception is not always activated regardless of the production state", or "when a special production state (automatic reception mode) is set auto-acceptance is enabled only when the device is enabled"), which is irrelevant to the configuration according to the technical features described here.

More specifically, during the demo screen (the period in which the symbol variation is not executed), if settings related to the game are possible, even if any of these settings are selected, " Automatic reception is always enabled in the reception-permitting state in which the "automatic reception mode" is executed. Among these settings, when at least a specific set condition is met, the occurrence conditions for the reception allowable state in which the "automatic reception mode" is executed and the reception allowable state in which the "non-automatic reception mode" is executed are different. It can occur in the base. Game-related settings include settings for special effects (automatic reception mode), as well as settings for volume, brightness, probability of appearance of effects, etc. Settings related to special effects (automatic reception mode) are always installed. It doesn't have to be something. If a setting related to a special effect state (automatic reception mode) is installed, the special effect state (automatic reception mode) is not set in the "specific setting conditions".

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as will be described later, at least when certain setting conditions are met, the "automatic reception mode" is executed, and the "non-automatic reception mode" is executed. A plurality of reception acceptance states are prepared for each, but the above-mentioned "first acceptance acceptance state" is included as one of the acceptance acceptance states in which the "automatic acceptance mode" is executed. , and the above-described "second acceptance acceptable state" and "third acceptance acceptable state" are included as one of the acceptance acceptable states in which the "non-automatic acceptance mode" is executed.

According to such a configuration, there is a possibility that the integrated model image will be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 144(d)) (possibility that the interest in the game will be significantly reduced when the operation is forgotten). In the state, the "automatic reception mode" will be executed. Therefore, even if you forget to operate when the integrated model image is displayed in a special mode with a high degree of expectation (a mode in which the rate of stopping with a jackpot pattern is higher than in other modes), the post-operation production (At least one of display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and effect operation by the movable decorative body) can be generated, and the decline in the game interest can be suppressed. will be able to On the other hand, there is no possibility that the integrated simulated image will be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 144(d)) (possibility that the interest in the game will be significantly reduced if the user forgets to operate), and the third Since the ``non-automatic acceptance mode'' is executed in the reception permission state, it is preferable for the tension when the operation reception is permitted while suppressing the deterioration of the game interest when the operation is forgotten. can be maintained at

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at least a part of the period in which the reception permission sound is output overlaps with the reception permission state. Then, based on the fact that the operation has been accepted, the output state of the acceptance acceptance sound can be terminated in the middle (can be made inaudible).

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the timing at which the acceptance allowable sound is terminated in the middle is the timing at which the operation by the player is detected (operation is accepted). Is it in a state where acceptance has been made, or is it in a state where operation acceptance has not yet been made?"

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at least a part of the period during which the acceptance acceptance sound is output overlaps with the acceptance acceptance state, but when the acceptance acceptance sound is in the output state Even if the operation is accepted at the time, the output state of the acceptance acceptance sound cannot be terminated halfway (it can be made inaudible) based on the operation acceptance, and this may be maintained. I have to. As will be described later, a plurality of acceptance acceptable states in which the acceptance acceptable sound is terminated midway and a plurality of acceptance acceptable states in which the acceptance acceptable sound is not terminated midway are prepared. is included as one of the acceptance acceptable states in which the acceptance acceptable sound is terminated in the middle. is included as one of

According to such a configuration, there is a possibility that the integrated model image will be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 144(d)) (possibility that the interest in the game will be significantly reduced when the operation is forgotten). In the state, if an operation is accepted while the acceptable acceptance sound is being output, this will be terminated in the middle. Therefore, when the integrated model image is displayed in a highly anticipated special mode (a mode in which the rate of stopping with a jackpot pattern is higher than in other modes), the question "Is the operation being accepted, or is the operation still being accepted?" It is possible to concentrate on post-operation effects such as post-operation display, post-operation output sound, light emission change by lamps, and production actions by movable decorations. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress the decline in game interest. On the other hand, in the second reception acceptance state in which there is no possibility that the integrated model image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 144(d)) (possibility that the interest in the game is significantly reduced when the operation is forgotten), the reception Even if the operation is accepted while the allowable sound is being output, the operation is not terminated in the middle. It can be maintained well.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, if operation reception is permitted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state, When the integrated model image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 144(d)) and when the integrated model image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (see FIGS. 144(a) to (c)) I try to make it happen from time to time.

More specifically, the first condition is satisfied in the reception permission state in which operation reception is permitted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in a suppressed mode or is not being output. In addition to the first reception acceptance state that occurs when the When the model image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 144(d)) and when the integrated model image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (see FIGS. 144(a) to (c)) However, in the fourth reception acceptance state, the integrated model image is not displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 144(d)), and in a mode different from the special mode (FIGS. 144(a) to ( (see c)). In the first reception permission state, when an operation is received while the reception permission sound is being output, the output state of the reception permission sound is terminated halfway based on the fact that the operation is accepted (inaudible). state), on the other hand, in the fourth acceptance acceptance state, if an operation is accepted while an acceptance acceptance sound is in an output state, the acceptance acceptance sound output state is interrupted based on the fact that the operation is accepted. I try not to end it (not to make it inaudible).

According to such a configuration, an acceptance acceptance state is generated in which operation acceptance is allowed while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in a suppressed mode or is not being output. When the integrated model image is displayed in a special mode in the allowable state, the acceptance allowable sound is terminated halfway based on the operation acceptance. On the other hand, an acceptance acceptance state is generated in which operation acceptance is allowed while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state. When the simulated image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode, there are cases where the acceptable acceptance sound is terminated in the middle based on the operation acceptance, and there are cases where the acceptable acceptance sound is maintained without being terminated in the middle. become.

In other words, in this case, in the reception permission state in which operation reception is permitted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state, the integrated model image is in a special mode. is displayed in a different mode (a mode in which there is a low possibility that the interest in the game will be remarkably lowered when the operation is forgotten), even if the operation is accepted, the acceptance acceptable sound may be terminated in the middle based on the operation acceptance. Since there are cases where the allowable sound is not ended in the middle and is maintained, I wonder if the reason is that the operation is not accepted when the acceptable sound is not ended in the middle. It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish whether the reason is the occurrence of the fourth reception permission state even though it is released, and to suitably maintain the tension while suppressing the decline in the interest in the game. be able to

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the above-mentioned first reception acceptable state occurs, prior to this, a wide area using at least half or more of a predetermined display area (for example, the effect display device 1600 etc.) When the second reception acceptance state occurs, the narrow-area type pre-rendering that uses less than half of the predetermined display region starts to be executed. It is designed to be Then, the model image (here, the integrated model image) that imitates the operation receiving part is displayed both during the period during which the wide-area type preliminary effect is being executed and during the period during which the first reception permitting state is occurring. are displayed in different manners in the period during which the wide-area type preliminary effect is being executed and in the period during which the first reception permitting state is occurring.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, an integrated model image (model image) displayed during the period in which the wide-area type pre-effect is being executed and displayed in the period during which the first reception permission state is occurring. Although the integrated model image (model image) simulates the same operation receiving part (operation button 410), it is displayed based on different image data, As a result, not only the color scheme but also the contour shape itself is displayed as being different.

According to such a configuration, when performing the wide-area type pre-effect, there is a greater degree of freedom without being bound by the form (image data) of the integrated model image (model image) displayed in the first reception allowable state. Since it is possible to display the integrated model image (simulated image) with highly independent expression, it is possible to greatly improve the performance when performing the pre-production in a wider area (wide-area type pre-production). become. It is clear that such effects cannot be achieved by image processing such as fade-in based on single image data.

In addition, in the acceptability state in which the wide-area type pre-performance is executed, as compared to the acceptance-allowed state in which the narrow-area type pre-performance is executed, the effect at the time of the big hit that appears only when the big win is obtained as the post-operation effect. It is designed so that the appearance rate of the mode is high. This percentage may be 0% or 100%.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a plurality of acceptable acceptance states are prepared as acceptance acceptable states corresponding to the wide area type preliminary presentation (in which the wide area type preliminary presentation is executed). A first reception acceptance state and a third reception acceptance state are prepared as one. In addition, a plurality of reception acceptance states are prepared as acceptance acceptance states corresponding to the narrow-range-type pre-production (in which the narrow-range-type pre-production is executed). A state and a fourth reception acceptance state are prepared respectively.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, in the first acceptance permitted state, the operation performed while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state. As described above, the operation can be accepted, and the second acceptance-allowed state is such that the operation can be accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is in the non-suppressed mode. As I said. That is, when the narrow-range type pre-production, which is relatively inferior in performance, is performed, the operation reception is performed while the specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) is not suppressed but is not suppressed. Since the game can be played (second reception permission state), it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the fact that the wide-area type pre-effect, which is relatively excellent in performance, is not performed. On the other hand, if the operation can be accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state, the wide area type that is relatively superior in effect Since the pre-effect is to be performed (first reception permitted state), the game is played by not accepting the operation while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in the non-suppressed mode. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at least when the specific setting conditions (one effect state) exist, in the first reception permission state, the operation is not detected within the set time during which operation reception is permitted. When the operation is detected, it is executed in an automatic acceptance mode that causes the same display change as when the operation is detected. As described above, when the operation is not detected, it is executed in a non-automatic acceptance mode that does not cause the same display change as when the operation is detected. That is, in the first reception acceptance state in which the wide-area type pre-effect is performed, there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game will be reduced when the user forgets to operate the game due to its high performance. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game when the operator forgets to operate. On the other hand, in the second reception acceptance state in which the narrow-range type pre-rendering is performed, it is suggested in a relatively inconspicuous manner that the operation acceptance will be permitted. Only the person who is paying attention and realizes that the operation acceptance will be permitted can be made to enjoy the post-operation presentation such as the post-operation display and the post-operation output sound, so that the tension can be appropriately made. be able to maintain.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the performance sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type is output in a suppressed mode, or is in a reception permission state in which operation reception is permitted while it is in a non-output state. includes at least the first reception acceptance state that occurs when the first condition is satisfied and the fourth reception acceptance state that occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied. As described above. In this regard, in the fourth acceptance permitted state, the operation can be accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in the fourth suppression mode. In this state, an operation can be accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in the first suppression mode, which has a higher degree of suppression than the fourth suppression mode, or is in a non-output state. I have to. Further, when the fourth acceptance allowable state occurs, prior to this, the execution of the narrow-area type preliminary effect using only less than half of the predetermined display area is started. In other words, when the narrow-range pre-production, which is relatively inferior in performance, is performed, even if the specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) is suppressed, the degree of suppression is reduced. (Fourth Acceptable State), it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game due to the fact that the wide-area type pre-effect, which is relatively excellent in the effect, is not performed. On the other hand, the operation can be accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in the first suppression mode having a higher suppression degree than the fourth suppression mode, or being in a non-output state. In the case (first reception acceptance state), since the wide-area type pre-production that is relatively superior in performance is performed, the degree of suppression of the specific type of production sound (BGM playback) was not low. A decrease in amusement interest can be suppressed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when an operation is accepted by the player while the first acceptance permitted state is occurring and the model image (integrated model image) is being displayed, the operation is accepted. Execution of the corresponding post-operation production (at least one of display change in the production display device 1600, production sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and production operation by the movable decorative body) is started, and a model image (integrated model image) is hidden, a wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance effect) using at least half or more of a predetermined display area (for example, the effect display device 1600) is executed. When the operation is accepted by the player while the second acceptance allowable state occurs and the model image (integrated model image) is being displayed, a post-operation effect (effect display device) corresponding to the operation acceptance is generated. At least one of the display change in 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect action by the movable decorative body) is started, and the model image (integrated model image) is hidden. A narrow-range extinction effect (narrow-range extinction effect) that uses less than half of a predetermined display region (for example, the performance display device 1600) is executed.

Here, the annihilation effect (wide-area annihilation effect, narrow-area annihilation effect) is a form that makes part or all of the model image (integrated model image) in the display state difficult to see or invisible. It means "an image different from the model image" or "display effect on the model image" to be displayed. Such a disappearance effect (disappearance effect) may be executed as an image displayed in another layer before the layer in which the model image (integrated model image) is displayed, for example. , the model image (integrated model image) and the image (disappearance effect) are displayed as one video prepared in advance, and a part or the whole of the model image (integrated model image) is displayed in the video (disappearance effect). Effect) may be used to express how it becomes difficult to visually recognize, or it may be executed by changing the display mode of the model image (integrated model image) itself (display effect). may be However, as such a disappearance effect, when hiding the model image (integrated model image), in order to suggest the degree of expectation or to improve the interest in the game, Needless to say, it is more desirable to display them as separate images.

Also, "when the model image (integrated model image) is hidden...the disappearance effect is executed" means "when the model image (integrated model image) is hidden, .. disappearance effect is executed", or "while the model image (integrated model image) is hidden (the model image (integrated model image) itself has a high transmittance etc.) . , is meant to include any of these aspects. In addition, in the process of hiding the model image (integrated model image), the fact that the transmittance of this itself increases is called "when the model image (integrated model image) is hidden. . . , the annihilation effect is executed."

According to such a configuration, when the post-operation effect corresponding to the reception of the operation by the player starts to be executed and the model image is hidden, the wide-area disappearing effect is executed while the post-operation effect is being executed. Since there are cases where the narrow-range disappearance effect is executed, and there are cases where the narrow-range disappearance effect is executed, it is possible to enhance performance until the time when the model image (integrated model image) disappears.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when executing such a disappearance effect (image at the time of disappearance), in the narrow-area disappearance effect (image at the time of narrow-area disappearance), the narrow-area disappearance effect (narrow The background image that was displayed before the narrow-area disappearance effect (image at the time of narrow-area disappearance) is displayed, until the narrow-area disappearance effect (image at the time of narrow-area disappearance) is hidden, or after the operation (Post-operation display and post-operation output sound) are displayed (maintained) without being changed. On the other hand, the wide-area disappearing effect (wide-area disappearing image) is displayed before the wide-area disappearing effect (wide-area disappearing image) is displayed based on the reception of the operation by the player. The background image is changed to a different background until the wide-area disappearing effect (wide-area disappearing image) is hidden, or while the post-operation production (post-operation display or post-operation output sound) is being executed. We are going to transform it into an image.

That is, when the wide-area disappearing effect (wide-area disappearing image) is executed, not only the model image (integrated model image) but also at least part of the background image image) makes it difficult to see, the background image is changed (replaced) with a different background image aiming at the timing when such a wide-area disappearing effect (wide-area disappearing image) is executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to realize a smooth effect transition (transition to a new effect phase) using the button effect. For example, the wide-area disappearing effect (wide-area disappearing image) is an image that is displayed in a separate layer that precedes the layer in which the model image (integrated model image) is displayed and the layer in which the background image is displayed. Alternatively, the model image (integrated model image), the background image, and the image (disappearance effect) may be displayed as one video prepared in advance, and one of the model images (integrated model image) may be displayed in the video. A part or the whole or a part or the whole of the background image may be rendered to be difficult to be visually recognized by the image (disappearance effect).

On the other hand, when the narrow-type disappearance effect (image at the time of narrow-area disappearance) is executed, while the narrow-area disappearance effect (image at the time of narrow-area disappearance) is hidden, or after the operation Since the background image is not changed while the effect (post-operation display and post-operation output sound) is being executed, the effect transition (transition to a new effect phase) is not realized. Therefore, the player is interested in which of the wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance image) and the narrow-area disappearance effect (narrow-area disappearance image) is displayed, in addition to the post-operation effect. Thus, it is possible to preferably maintain the game interest related to the model image from the time the model image (integrated model image) is displayed until it is hidden.

Also, when the wide-area disappearing effect (wide-area disappearing image) is displayed, a big hit is obtained as a post-operation production than when the narrow-area disappearing effect (narrow-area disappearing image) is displayed. The ratio of appearance of the performance mode at the time of the big hit, which appears only when the game is on, is high. This percentage may be 0% or 100%.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a plurality of acceptance acceptance states are prepared as acceptance acceptance states (in which the wide-area disappearance effect is executed) corresponding to the wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance image). As one of these reception permission states, a first reception permission state and a third reception permission state are prepared. In addition, multiple acceptability states are prepared as acceptability states (in which the narrow-range disappearance effect is executed) corresponding to the narrow-range disappearance effect (image at the time of narrow-range disappearance). As one of the above, a second reception permission state and a fourth reception permission state are prepared.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, in the first reception acceptance state, the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state. In the second reception acceptance state, the operation by the player can be accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is in the non-suppression mode. What is happening is as described above. That is, when a narrow-range disappearing effect, which is relatively inferior in performance, is performed, a specific type of performance sound (BGM reproduction) is not suppressed, but is not suppressed. Since the operation can be accepted (second acceptance allowed state), it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the fact that the wide-area disappearing effect with relatively excellent performance is not performed. On the other hand, if the operation can be accepted by the player while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state, the effect is relatively high. Since an excellent wide-area disappearing effect is performed (first acceptance permitted state), it is possible to accept an operation by a player while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in an unsuppressed mode. It becomes possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the fact that it was not done.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when at least a specific set condition (one effect state) is met, in the first acceptance allowable state, the operation is detected within the set time during which the player's operation acceptance is allowed. When the operation is not detected, it is executed in an automatic reception mode that causes the same display change as when the operation is detected. As described above, when an operation is not detected in , it is executed in a non-automatic acceptance mode that does not cause the same display change as when the operation is detected. That is, in the first reception acceptance state in which the wide-area disappearing effect is performed, there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game will be lowered when the player forgets to operate the game due to the high level of performance. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game when the operator forgets to operate. In other words, in this case, even if the player's operation is not accepted and the automatic reception functions, the wide-area disappearance effect is executed in the same manner as when the player's operation is accepted. On the other hand, in the second acceptability state in which the narrow-range disappearance effect is performed, the execution is performed in the above non-automatic acceptance mode, so the set time elapses without any operation by the player (the second acceptability state). state is ended), the model image is displayed without performing the post-operation effect (at least one of display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and effect operation by the movable decorative body). It will be hidden. In this regard, in the second acceptability state, even when the model image is hidden while the post-operation effect is not being executed, the narrow-range disappearing effect is executed, which causes the user to forget to operate. As a result, the decline in the interest in the game when the post-operation effect is no longer executed is suppressed. At this time, the narrow-range disappearing effect may be executed in the same mode (same image) as when the operation is accepted and the post-operation rendering is executed. However, as will be described later, in the second reception acceptance state according to this example, the narrow-range type disappearance effect that appears when the operation is accepted and the post-operation production is executed, and the case where the operation is not accepted and the post-operation production is not executed A different aspect (image) appears in the narrow-range type disappearance effect that appears in .

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the operation reception by the player is permitted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state. The allowable states include at least the first acceptance allowable state that occurs when the first condition is satisfied and the fourth acceptability state that occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied. It is as described above. In the fourth acceptability state, the operation by the player can be accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in the fourth suppression mode. In the acceptability state, the performance sound (BGM reproduction) of the specific type is output in the first suppression mode having a higher suppression degree than the fourth suppression mode, or the operation by the player in the non-output state. It was also mentioned above that the reception can be made. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when an operation is accepted by the player in the fourth acceptability state, the narrow-area disappearing effect is executed instead of the wide-area disappearing effect. . That is, when a narrow-range disappearing effect with relatively inferior performance is performed, prior to that, a specific type of performance sound (BGM reproduction) is suppressed, but the degree of suppression is reduced. Therefore, (fourth reception acceptance state), it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the fact that the wide-area disappearing effect, which is relatively excellent in performance, is not performed. On the other hand, the operation can be accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in the first suppression mode having a higher suppression degree than the fourth suppression mode, or being in a non-output state. In the case (first reception acceptance state), the wide-area extinction effect, which is relatively superior in performance, is performed, so the degree of suppression of the specific type of production sound (BGM playback) was not low. A decrease in amusement interest can be suppressed.

FIG. 161 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the second condition is satisfied and the second reception permission state occurs under the specific setting conditions (effect setting). FIG. 163 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which the second acceptability state occurs.

Now, assuming that the starting condition is satisfied (suspended digestion) in the normal game state (non-probability variable/non-time saving) and the "second variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a First, the performance determination (announcement determination, etc.) corresponding to the second variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (effect depiction according to the second variable pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the second variable pattern, etc.) is started ("Situation shown in FIG. 163 (a) ), and the effect (notice effect) according to the result of the determination of the notice effect is additionally executed to the effect of the selected "second variation pattern" itself within the execution period of the variable effect. It will happen.

Then, as described above, when a special result is obtained (when the second condition is satisfied) in the performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the second variation pattern, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the control as shown in FIG. The second reception acceptance state (effective period) in which operation reception regarding the second post-operation production is permitted when timing tB3 has passed after the second predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable production of the decorative symbol SZ. is generated (corresponding to “situation shown in FIG. 163(d)”). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the second acceptance allowable state (effective period),
- "BGM playback sound (specific type of effect sound)" according to the second variation pattern, for example, operation reception while maintaining the output state in the non-suppression mode of the BGM playback sound during normal fluctuation It is an allowable "unrestrained acceptance allowable state (see FIGS. 161(a) and 161(b)"), and Operation was not detected within the set time (timings tB3 to tB4) in which operation acceptance is allowed. , the "non-automatic reception mode (see FIG. 161(h))" that does not generate the post-operation effect (post-second operation effect) corresponding to the second acceptance allowable state.
It is generated as a "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" executed by.

According to such a configuration, the set time (valid period ) is suddenly set (unsuppressed reception effect), the player is taken by surprise, and the start of movement is likely to be delayed when trying to operate. Nevertheless, if the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tB3 to tB4), the set time ends without the post-operation effect (non-automatic acceptance mode) and the risk of missing the opportunity to generate the post-operation effect (here, the second post-operation effect), so that the tension can be preferably maintained.

However, such a "non-suppressed/non-automatic acceptance effect" is a post-operation effect (here, a second operation-post effect) that appears only at the time of a big hit than the "suppressed/automatic acceptance effect" described later. Although the ratio (may be 0% or 100%) is low, if the post-operation effect does not occur frequently against the player's will, the interest in the game may decrease. Concerned. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. When the timing tB2, which is a little earlier than the timing tB2, starts outputting the "acceptance acceptable sound (here, the first acceptable sound)" (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 163(c)"), the timing within the set time Even if the operation is accepted at tB3a, the output state is maintained across this period. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation reception is permitted at the timing tB2 slightly before the timing tB3 at which the set time (timings tB3 to tB4) of the second reception permitted state is set. It is possible to make it difficult to frequently occur that the player is late in noticing that the reception is permitted, and the operation by the player is not in time, and the post-operation effect (here, the second post-operation effect) ends without occurring. come to be expected. However, the "reception allowable sound (here, the first allowable sound)" does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timings tB3 to tB4) occurs. It may be generated in accordance with the generation timing of tB3.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as the "acceptance allowable sound", the first allowable sound output as a sound effect such as "Pikin!" and a second allowable sound output as a message sound such as . However, as shown in FIGS. 161(f) and (j), in the second reception acceptance state, the second acceptance sound (message sound) is not output, and only the first acceptance sound (effect sound) is output. is output, and even with such an output restriction on the "acceptable sound", a delay is likely to occur in the start of movement when the player tries to operate.

By the way, in the second acceptance allowable state, as a countermeasure against the sudden setting of the set time or the execution in the non-automatic acceptance mode, the operation means (here, the operation By repeatedly hitting the button 410), it is conceivable that some players may try not to miss the opportunity to generate the post-operation effect. However, in this case, since the post-operation effect is started immediately after the operation is accepted, the started effect is "performed in response to the operation acceptance (post-operation effect)." It becomes difficult to recognize whether it is "automatically generated as a mere notice effect unrelated to operation reception", and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 161 (particularly, FIG. 161(e)), in the second acceptance allowable state, the "acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound)" is emitted after the set time (effective period) occurs. When the effect is accepted at the timing tB3a in the output state, the set time itself is ended, but the "acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound)" is not terminated halfway and is treated as the first acceptable sound. The output state is maintained until the timing when the output ends (timing tB3c (Fig. 161 (e), (i)), which is the same as when there is no operation). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is difficult to recognize whether it is what is being done (post-operation effect) or what is automatically generated as a effect unrelated to the operation reception. become.

Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 161, when the production reception is performed within the set time of the second reception permission state (timing tB3a in the drawing), the production display device At least the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated (Fig. 161(d) ). In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker maintain the execution state for the same amount of time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden at a predetermined timing after timing tB4, regardless of the timing within the set time (effective period) when the effect is accepted. On the other hand, the post-operation output sound (effect sound) may be maintained in an output state for a predetermined time from the timing at which the effect is received. However, regardless of the timing at which the operation is accepted, if the timing tB4 has not passed, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) are output. You are required to maintain the status quo.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 161, when the timing tB2, which is earlier than the timing tB3 at which the set time for the second acceptance allowable state is set, arrives, the operation means to be operated on the effect display device 1600 is displayed. is displayed, and a gauge indicating the remaining time until the end of the set time is displayed (corresponding to "situation shown in FIG. 163(c)"). As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation reception is permitted at the timing tB2 slightly before the timing tB3 at which the set time (timings tB3 to tB4) of the second reception permitted state is set. It is possible to make it difficult to frequently occur that the player is late in noticing that the reception is permitted, and the operation by the player is not in time, and the post-operation effect (here, the second post-operation effect) ends without occurring. come to be expected. In this example, the timing at which the model image is displayed is the same as the timing at which the reception acceptable sound (first acceptable sound) starts to be output. can be Alternatively, only one of the model image and the acceptable reception sound (for example, only the model image) may be started before timing tB3.

Further, as described above, the model image displayed when the second acceptability state occurs (the image that imitates the operation receiving part to which the opportunity to operate is provided) has a peripheral edge that decorates the peripheral edge of the model image. It is displayed as an integrated model image IG that is integrated with the decoration image. This "integrated model image IG" is as described with reference to FIGS. A display target area (partition image KG) of the image GG is provided. In addition, as the "integrated model image IG", a plurality of modes (see FIG. 144) with different expectations are prepared, and the same is true for selectively displaying one of the modes. However, in the second reception acceptance state, the special mode (for example, the mode shown in FIG. ) and different from the special mode (for example, the normal mode shown in FIG. 144(a)) can be displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 163, the integrated model image IGa with the lowest expectation is displayed as the integrated model image IG.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 161(c) to (f), it is assumed that timing tB3a arrives while such an integrated model image is being displayed and an operation is accepted. When the operation is accepted under such a situation, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example performs post-operation effects (display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and by the movable decorative body). As at least one of the effect actions), an output related to the liquid crystal display and an output related to the effect sound are respectively started (corresponding to "situation shown in FIG. 163(f)").

However, as shown in FIGS. 161(c), (d) and 163(f), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the integrated model image IG is not displayed at the time when the post-operation effect is started. remain visible. More specifically, even if the operation is accepted, at that time (timing tB3a), the integrated model image IG (specific layer) is not caused to change due to it, and after a short time ( Until the timing tB3b when the predetermined time has passed, the "display on the integrated model image IG" is continued in the same manner as when the operation reception is permitted. The display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced in the same manner as before. Incidentally, in the example shown in FIG. 163, as the post-operation effect (output on the liquid crystal display), a conversation notice (maybe a chance) by the princess character is displayed.

Then, when the timing tB3b arrives, an image KSE (disappearance effect) that is displayed in a form that makes part or all of the integrated model image in the display state difficult to see or makes it invisible appears (see FIG. 163 (g) corresponds to "situation shown in (g)). Such an image KSE may be, for example, an image displayed in a separate layer preceding the layer in which the integrated model image IG is displayed, or an image displayed in a separate layer that precedes the layer in which the integrated model image IG is displayed. ) is displayed as one moving image prepared in advance, and a part or the whole of the integrated model image IG in the moving image is expressed as becoming difficult to see due to the image KSE (annihilation effect). as described above.

As shown in FIG. 161(c), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the integrated model image IG is not displayed even when such an image KSE (disappearance effect) starts to be displayed. remain visible. More specifically, even in the situation where the disappearance effect is displayed (timing tB3b), in the layer where the integrated model image IG is displayed, the integrated model image IG is not caused to change due to it. Also, the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced in the same manner as before. However, by displaying the annihilation effect on the layer above it, the model image and the gauge image GG become difficult or invisible.

That is, in this case, for the purpose of making the model image (integrated model image IG) difficult to see or making it invisible, the disappearance effect image KSE (the same applies to the wide area disappearance effect image HSE described later) is added. A model image (integrated model image IG) that is displayed on a specific layer (behind the specified layer (lower priority side) than the specified layer) in spite of being in a situation to be displayed on the specified layer. The display is maintained as it was when the operation acceptance was permitted, and no change occurs. In addition, the display of the gauge image GG that continues to decrease in display area is continued across the acceptance of the operation. As a result, even in the process of making the model image (integrated model image IG) difficult to see or in the process of making it invisible, the mode (at least a part of) when operation acceptance was permitted is still visible. As a result, it is possible to shorten the time required to maintain the state shown in FIG. 163(f).

Then, the display output (display on the layer) of the integrated model image IG ends during the period (timings tB3b to tB3d) during which the disappearance effect image KSE is displayed ("shown in FIG. 163(i). After this, the disappearance effect (here, a narrow-area disappearance that uses less than half of the predetermined display area Effect) image KSE is displayed. Such disappearing effect image KSE is hidden after a predetermined period of time (timing tB3d) has elapsed since its display started (timing tB3b) (see "FIG. 163 ( j)). In this regard, regarding the timing tB3d at which the display is hidden, regardless of the timing at which the operation is accepted, the display change (here, liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 among the post-operation effects is It is desirable to set it so that it arrives within the period of execution. That is, as will be described later, the disappearing effect image KSE and the integrated model image IG are displayed in a layer in front of the image (preview of the conversation by the princess character) related to the display change in the effect display device 1600. It is displayed in a form that overlaps with this. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 163(g) to 163(i), while the disappearing effect image KSE is being displayed, the image associated with the change in display on the effect display device 1600 (preview of the conversation by the princess character) cannot be visually recognized. It's getting harder. The same is true for the wide-area extinction effect.

According to such a configuration, when the operation is accepted, first of all, the post-operation effect is started. 144(a) to (d), how much time is left indicated by the gauge image GG, etc.) can be grasped ("Figure 163(f)”). Then, after that, the display of the disappearing effect image KSE in a form that makes it difficult to visually recognize the "image related to the display change in the effect display device 1600" and the integrated model image IG in the post-operation effect is started. (corresponding to "situation shown in FIG. 163(g)"). As described above, the annihilation effect includes a narrow-area annihilation effect with low performance and a wide-area annihilation effect with low performance. Here, the narrow-area annihilation effect is executed. While the disappearance effect image KSE is being displayed, the integrated model image IG is hidden (corresponding to the “situation shown in FIG. 163(i)”). When the image KSE is hidden, the "image related to the display change on the effect display device 1600 (preview of the conversation by the princess character)" in the post-operation effect is finally made visible in a clear state (" (corresponding to the situation shown in FIG. 163(j)).

That is, in this case, when the operation is accepted, first, it is possible to enjoy what kind of aspect the integrated model image IG was, and then it is possible to enjoy what kind of aspect appears as the disappearance effect, and then, Since it is possible to enjoy what aspect (here, which of a plurality of conversation announcement aspects with different expectations) will appear as the post-operation effect, when the operation is accepted by such a variety of effects. It becomes possible to improve the game interest of the player.

It should be noted that, in order to preferably obtain such effects, the timing for starting to display an image (post-operation effect) associated with a display change on the effect display device 1600 is not timing tB3a, but timing tB3b, or the disappearance effect. It can be said that it is more desirable to change the timing within the execution period (timings tB3b to tB3d). However, in this case as well, the post-operation effect using the effect sound and the lamp is started at the timing tB3a, so the start timing of the post-operation effect itself remains at the timing tB3a.

On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 161(g) to (j), it is assumed that the set time elapses (the second acceptability state ends) without the player's operation being detected. As described above, since the second reception permission state is executed in the non-automatic reception mode, if the set time elapses without the player performing an operation, the post-operation effect is not being performed. The model image (here, the integrated model image IGa) is hidden.

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIGS. The model image on the specific layer (here, the integrated model image IGa) is not hidden, and maintains the display state that appeared when it was in the acceptability state. More specifically, even if the acceptance of the operation is no longer permitted, at that time (timing tB4), the model image (here, the integrated model image IGa) is not caused to change due to it. Until timing tB4a arrives after a short period of time (predetermined time) has passed since then, the "display on the model image" continues in the same manner as when the operation reception is permitted. there is Further, in this example, the gauge image GG has a small display area even when the state in which operation reception is permitted (the second reception permission state) ends, and the display area is reduced after timing tB4. The display area is reduced in the form of "0".

According to such a configuration, even if the validity period (second reception acceptance state) ends without any operation, the model image is displayed in any mode (any of a plurality of modes with different expectations). It will be possible to check whether the In addition, since the display area of the gauge image is set to "0" after the valid period ends, it is possible to encourage people to think "it was a shame" when the operation reception was not done in time at the last minute. As a result, it is expected to suppress the decline in gaming interest.

Note that in this example, the effective period (second reception acceptance state) ends without the operation reception from the time tB3a when the operation reception is performed until the model image is hidden (not visible). The time from the timing tB4 until the model image is hidden (invisible) is made shorter.

In addition, as described above, in the second acceptability state, if the set time elapses without the player's operation being detected, the post-operation effect is not executed. However, even in this case, as shown in FIG. The model image (here, the integrated model image IGa) is hidden while the narrow-area disappearing effect is being executed. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the narrow-range disappearance effect when the post-operation production is not executed (Fig. 161(g)) is It is executed in a mode (image) different from (FIG. 161(c)).

According to such a configuration, even if it is not possible to understand whether or not the operation has been accepted (whether it was in time), it can be properly understood by confirming the mode of the narrow-range disappearance effect. Since it becomes possible to perform the operation, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the interest in the game due to the inability to grasp whether the post-operation effect is being performed. In order to preferably obtain such a function and effect, when the post-operation production is executed (Fig. 161(c)), the mode of the narrow-range disappearance effect (Fig. 161(c)) is changed when the post-operation production is not executed (Fig. 161(g) )) should not appear. However, for example, the narrow-area disappearance effect (FIG. 161(c)) when the post-operation production is executed is defined as “A (for example, the change in the model image itself)” and “B (for example, the model image Another image display)", when the post-operation production is not executed, the narrow-range disappearance effect (Fig. 161(g)) is executed in "A". may Even with such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the operation has not been accepted at the time when the "B" mode does not appear in the narrow-range disappearance effect, and the situation where the post-operation production is being performed. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the interest in the game due to the inability to grasp whether the game is in the state.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 161, when timing tB1, which is earlier than timing tB3 at which the second reception permission state occurs, narrow-area pre-production that uses less than half of the predetermined display area is executed. (corresponding to "situation shown in FIG. 163(b)"). Then, during the period in which the image KTH related to the narrow-area type pre-rendering is displayed, first, a simulated image (here, the integrated simulated image IGa) that simulates the operation receiving portion is displayed, and the first permitted image is displayed. Sound output is started (timing tB2, corresponding to "situation shown in FIG. 163(c)"). At the time when the display of the model image (here, the integrated model image IGa) is started, part or the whole of the model image (integrated model image IG) is visually recognized by the image KTH related to the narrow-area type pre-effect. it's getting harder. That is, according to the passage of time, the display range of the image related to the narrow-area type pre-effect is reduced, or the transmittance is increased, so that the "simulated image (integrated simulated image) 163(b)-(d)). In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, while the narrow-range pre-production is being executed and the model image (here, the integrated model image IGa) is being displayed, the second Timing tB3 at which the reception permission state occurs arrives, and operation reception is permitted (corresponding to "situation shown in FIG. 163(d)"). That is, in this case, since the acceptance of the operation is allowed in the middle of the visibility of the model image (integrated model image IG), the model image (integrated model image IG) Confirm the mode (expectation) as the model image (integrated model image IG), whether to hide it without confirming the mode (expectation) After that, it is possible to provide a strategic effect such as whether the operation reception (post-operation effect) is performed and this is hidden.

Here, as the image KTH used for such a narrow-area pre-rendering, for example, an image displayed in a separate layer preceding the layer in which the model image (integrated model image IG) is displayed. Alternatively, the model image (integrated model image) and the image (narrow-area type pre-production) are displayed as one moving image prepared in advance, and the visibility of the model image (integrated model image IG) in the moving image is improved. It is also possible to express the state in which the is gradually increased.

In addition, in the narrow-range type pre-effect, not only the image display on the effect display device 1600 but also the related effect sound may be output. However, considering that the second acceptance acceptance state is executed in a non-automatic acceptance mode and is intended to maintain a sense of tension related to operations, the narrow-range type pre-production It can be said that it is preferable to perform image display on the effect display device 1600 without outputting the effect sound related to this, in order to increase concentration on the effect.

In addition, as the narrow-range type pre-effect, a plurality of modes with different expectations may be prepared, and one of these modes may be selectively displayed based on the result of the performance determination based on the result of the big hit determination. . However, in view of the fact that the second reception-allowed state is executed in a non-automatic reception mode, and that the post-operation effect will not be executed if an operation is forgotten, the narrow-range type pre-production is: It is desirable to prepare only one mode and display only by the one mode, in order to prevent the loss of interest in the game when an operation is forgotten.

FIG. 162 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the first condition is satisfied and the first reception permission state occurs under the specific setting conditions (effect setting). FIG. 164 is a diagram showing an example of effect in a variation pattern in which the first acceptability state occurs.

Now, assuming that the starting condition is satisfied (suspended digestion) in the normal game state (non-probability variation/non-time saving) and the "first variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a First, the performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the first variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (the effect depiction according to the first variable pattern, the sound output of the BGM playback according to the first variable pattern, etc.) is started ("Situation shown in FIG. 164 (a) ), and, within the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) according to the result of the determination of the previous notice performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "first variation pattern" itself. It will happen.

And as described above, in the effect related to the "first variation pattern", even if any result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination), as shown in FIG. When timing tC4 (e.g., timing within the SP ready-to-reach state) arrives after the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the SZ variable effect, the first reception is allowed to accept an operation related to the effect after the first operation. A permissible state (effective period) is generated (corresponding to “situation shown in FIG. 164(g)”). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first reception permission state (effective period) is
- "Suppressed Acceptance Allowed State" (Fig. 162(a), (b))”, and ・Even if no operation is detected for the operation means that is the operation target within the set time (timings tC4 to tC5) during which operation acceptance is permitted, When the timing tC4f within the set time arrives, the post-operation effect is started "automatic acceptance mode (see FIG. 162(h))"
It is generated as a "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" executed by. As will be described later, the suppression mode here is also called a "strong suppression mode".

According to such a configuration, it is possible to accept an operation while the "BGM playback sound" is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state (suppressed reception effect). From the user's side, it becomes easy to operate immediately after the set time (effective period) occurs. In addition to this, even if no operation is detected within the set time (timings tC4 to tC5), the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect) is generated at timing tC4f within the set time at the latest. Since it is automatically generated when it arrives (automatic reception mode), you can enjoy operating with a sense of security that you will not miss the highly anticipated post-operation production. . That is, in such a "suppressed/automatic reception effect", the ratio (0% or 100%) in which the post-operation effect is performed in a manner that appears only at the time of the big hit is more than the above-described "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect". as mentioned above.

Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in the "suppressed/automatic acceptance effect", as in the above-described "non-suppressed/non-automatic acceptance effect", , when the timing tC3 slightly before the set time (timings tC4 to tC5) at which the performance acceptance is allowed occurs, the "acceptance acceptance sound (here, the first acceptance sound)" is played. The output is started, and the output state is maintained across the timing tC4 (corresponding to "situation shown in FIG. 164(f)"). As a result, even if the player does not recognize that the "BGM playback sound (specific type of effect sound)" is being output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state, the operation is performed at timing tC3. It becomes possible to recognize that a state in which acceptance is permitted will soon occur, and that ``against the player's will, the performance is accepted by activating the automatic button function, not by the player's own operation.'' It is expected that it will be difficult to make frequent occurrences of However, as described above, the "acceptable sound" does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timings tC4 to tC5). You may do so.

It should be noted that, in order to more preferably obtain the above-described action and effect (suppression acceptance effect), the "sound of BGM playback" should be changed from "output in a non-suppressed mode" to "output in a suppressed mode or in a non-suppressed mode." Timing tC2a transitioning to the state of output is different from that shown in the drawing, but the relationship of "length of timings tC2a to tC3>length of timings tC3 to tC4" is established so that " It can be said that it is desirable to set the output start timing tC4 of the above-described acceptable acceptance sound, which occurs prior to the set time, considerably earlier. For example, the timing tC2a may come before the start of the wide-area pre-effect.

In addition, in the "suppressed/automatic reception effect" according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. As the acceptance acceptable sound, not only the first acceptable sound output as an effect sound such as ``Pikin!'', but also the second acceptable sound, which is a message sound such as ``Press!'', is output. Moreover, in this example, the second allowable sound is delayed by a predetermined time with respect to the timing tC3 at which the output of the first allowable sound is started, and the acceptance of the operation is already permitted (effective period). At the timing tC4a arriving at , the output is started.

That is, in this case, in the second reception acceptable state (effective period) in which the integrated simulated image IG (simulated image) cannot be displayed in a specific high-expectation mode (special mode), the first permitted sound is set for the set time (effective period). , and the second permissible sound is not output. On the other hand, in the first reception acceptance state (effective period) in which the integrated model image IG (simulated image) can be displayed in a specific high-expectation mode (special mode), the first allowable sound is set for the set time (valid period). The output of the second permissible sound is started without delaying the generation, and the output of the second permissible sound is started after the generation of the set time (effective period).

According to such a configuration, the output of the first allowable sound (sound effect) is started when the state of the integrated model image IG (model image) is in a situation where it is difficult or not to be visually recognized due to the pre-staging. After that, when the first acceptance allowable state (effective period) is occurring, it is possible to shift to a state in which both the first allowable sound (sound effect) and the second allowable sound (message sound) are output. Therefore, the possibility that the integrated model image IG (model image) is displayed in a specific high-expectation mode (special mode) is suggested by whether or not the second allowable sound (message sound) is further output. be able to That is, if the second allowable sound (message sound) is further output while the first allowable sound (sound effect) is in an output state, an integrated model image having a specific high-expectation mode (special mode) It is possible to have a sense of expectation for the IG (simulated image) to be displayed, and in such a way the integrated simulated image IG (simulated image) is gradually revealed (clear). sex will be provided. As will be described later, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 162(c) and 162(f), while the "second wide-area-type pre-effect" of the wide-area-type pre-effect is being executed (pre-effect image is displayed), the output of the second allowable sound is started.

As will be described later, in the "suppressed/automatic reception effect" according to this embodiment, "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target" and "when the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target" are based on the result of the advance notice effect determination. When the operation button 410 is operated, a message sound such as "Push!" is output as the second allowable sound (message sound), and the sword ornament 5001 is operated. In this case, a message sound such as "Sheath your sword!" is output as the second allowable sound (message sound).

Also, in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 162(e), (f), (i), and (j), the "second allowable sound" is adopted as a production sound that is output for a relatively short period of time. However, the "first allowable sound" is adopted as a dramatic sound that is output over a relatively long period of time, but the length relationship of these allowable sounds may be reversed.

However, for the "first allowable sound" and the "second allowable sound", as shown in Figs. In addition, the timing at which these output states are ended (the timing at which the inaudible state is set) are all set to arrive at different timings before the timing tc4f at which the automatic button function is activated. It is desirable to According to such a configuration, it is estimated how much time is left until the timing tc4f at which the automatic button function is activated, depending on which of the following situations the "acceptable reception sound" is in. As a result, it is expected that ``against the player's will, the performance reception is performed by activating the automatic button function instead of by the player's own operation'' will be less likely to occur.
・The first situation where only the “first allowable sound” of the “first allowable sound” and the “second allowable sound” maintains the output state ・Both the “first allowable sound” and the “second allowable sound” 2nd situation in which the output state is maintained ・The output state of the "first allowable sound" is maintained, but the output state of the "second allowable sound" is terminated (becomes inaudible). 3rd situation ・Both "first allowable sound" and "second allowable sound" have finished their output state (become inaudible state) 4th situation

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "unsuppressed/non-automatic acceptance effect" in the example of effect shown in FIG. 161 and the "suppressed/automatic acceptance effect" in the example of effect shown in FIG. As the "first allowable sound", the same production sound (for example, "Pikin!") is output. That is, in this case, the message sound (second allowable sound) among the acceptable reception sounds is output as a production sound that is not output in the "unsuppressed/non-automatic reception production", but the effect sound ( Regarding the first allowable sound), since it can be output as a sound effect that is output even in the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect", the "sound of BGM playback (specific type of sound effect)" is suppressed. (second allowable sound), it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the effect reception is allowed (first permissible sound). However, for the "unsuppressed/non-automatic acceptance effect" in the example effect shown in FIG. 161 and the "suppressed/automatic acceptance effect" in the example effect shown in FIG. You may make it output.

It should be noted that the length of time between arbitrary timings shown in each of the above figures and each figure to be described later may be the minimum time (for example, one frame) in the unit of control (processing), or two frames. It may be longer than this. For example, if the acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound) can be output even a little earlier than the set time (effective period), the player will be in a state where operation acceptance is allowed (or (What happened) can be recognized earlier by the preceding time, so the period until the end of the set time or the time until the timing when the automatic button function is activated It will be expected to suppress forgetting to operate inside.

Also, in the example of effect shown in FIG. 162, unlike the example of effect shown in FIG. When the acceptance is made, the output state is terminated halfway based on the acceptance of the operation. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed by the player, the output of the acceptance acceptance sound (the first acceptance sound, the second acceptance sound) is interrupted at that point, and the state in which the operation acceptance is allowed ( valid period) has expired. As a result, it becomes difficult to misrecognize that the operation has been accepted even though the operation has not been accepted, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the automatic acceptance function is activated against the player's intention. become able to. If an operation is performed and the operation is accepted at a timing before the timing tC4f at which the automatic button function is activated within the set time (effective period), the operation is performed at the time when the operation is accepted. It goes without saying that the automatic button function will not be activated even if the timing tC4f arrives, since the state in which acceptance is permitted is ended.

Moreover, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 162(e) and 162(f), the output of the first allowable sound is started without delaying the generation of the set time (effective period), and the output of the second allowable sound is started during the set time (effective period). period) is delayed from the start of output. According to such a configuration, the output of the first allowable sound is started no matter how quickly the operation by the player is accepted. (When the operation is accepted between timings tC3 to tC4a) The state in which the operation acceptance is permitted ends without the output being started, and the effect after the operation (here, the effect after the first operation) ) will be executed. Note that if the operation is performed between the timings tC3 and tC4, the operation is not accepted, and the first allowable sound is not terminated with this as a trigger. Also, if the operation is accepted before the timing tC4a arrives, the output of the second allowable sound is not started.

According to such a configuration, after confirming that the second allowable sound is output (after confirming that the first reception allowable state), or after confirming that the post-operation effect is started. 2. The game determines whether to start the effect after the operation without confirming that the allowable sound is output (without recognizing whether it is in the first reception allowable state or the second reception allowable state). Since it becomes possible to entrust the player's choice, the range of games will be widened, and it is expected that the game interest will be improved.

Moreover, in this example, as will be described later, as shown in FIGS. 162(c) and 162(f), within the period of timings tC3 to tC4a, an image (at least of) the pre-effect (here, wide-area type pre-effect) is displayed. part) is not hidden and is kept displayed. That is, in this case, in a situation where the second allowable sound has not yet been output (timings tC3 to tC4a), the state (expectation) of the integrated simulated image (simulated image) cannot be clearly visually recognized due to the pre-production. Therefore, it is possible to make the above-mentioned game characteristics such as "entrusting the selection to the player's side" more interesting.

Also in this production example, as shown in FIG. 162(d), if the operation is accepted within the set time (effective period) (timing tC4b in the figure), the post-operation production corresponding to the operation acceptance (Here, the first post-operation effect) includes a post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and a post-operation output sound (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member). is generated at least (corresponding to "situation shown in FIG. 164(i)"). Here, unlike the example shown in FIG. 161, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), even if the operation is accepted at any timing within the set time (effective period), the timing In contrast to the non-display (invisible) at a specific timing (same timing) that arrives after tC5, the post-operation output sound (effect sound) is determined in advance from the timing at which the operation is accepted. The output state is maintained for a certain period of time (fixed period of time). In the example shown in FIG. 164, a background announcement by a princess character is displayed as a post-operation effect (output on the liquid crystal display).

However, as shown in FIG. 162, even if the operation is accepted at any timing within the set time (effective period), the post-operation output sound (effect sound) is the "BGM playback sound ( It is desirable to set such that the output state is maintained at timing tC6 when the specified type of effect sound) changes from the suppressed state (non-output state) to the non-suppressed state.

On the other hand, as for the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), the output state is terminated at timing tC6 when the "BGM playback sound" is output in the non-suppressed mode. That is, in this case, at timing tC6, both the "BGM playback sound" is output in a non-suppressed mode and the content of the display effect is switched. It is expected that changes will be made to improve the amusement of the game. However, instead of this, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) may also be maintained in the output state when timing tC6 arrives. Also, the "BGM playback sound" may be gradually restored by a technique such as fade-in when returning to the output in the non-suppression mode.

Also, in the effect example shown in FIG. 162, when the timing tC3, which is earlier than the timing tC4 at which the set time for the first acceptance allowable state is set, arrives, the operation to be operated on the effect display device 1600 is performed. A simulated image simulating the means is displayed, and a gauge indicating the remaining time until the set time has elapsed is also displayed (corresponding to "situation shown in FIG. 164(f)"). As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation reception is permitted at the timing tC3 slightly before the timing tC4 at which the set time (timings tC4 to tC5) of the first reception permitted state is set. It is difficult for the player to notice that the reception is permitted and the operation by the player is not in time, and the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect) ends without occurring. come to be expected. In this example, the timing at which the model image is displayed is the same as the timing at which the reception acceptable sound (first acceptable sound) starts to be output. can be Alternatively, only one of the model image and the acceptable reception sound (for example, only the model image) may be started before timing tC4.

Further, as described above, the model image displayed when the first acceptability state occurs (the image simulating the operation receiving part to which the opportunity to operate is provided) also has a peripheral edge that decorates the peripheral edge of the model image. It is displayed as an integrated model image IG that is integrated with the decoration image. This “integrated model image IG” is as described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 160, or as described as another example or modification thereof. A display target area (partitioned area KG) of the predetermined image GG is provided. In addition, as the "integrated model image IG", a plurality of modes (see FIG. 144) with different expectations are prepared, and the same is true for selectively displaying one of the modes. However, unlike the second reception acceptable state, in the first reception acceptable state, a special mode with a high degree of expectation (for example, FIG. 144 As described above, the aspect shown in (d) (integrated model image IGd)) is included as a lottery (selection) target and can be displayed.

By the way, in the first reception permission state (FIG. 162) executed in the automatic reception mode, the remaining time display ( It is conceivable to dynamically display the gauge image GG). In this regard, in the first acceptance allowable state (FIG. 162) according to this embodiment, the remaining time display ( The gauge image GG) is dynamically displayed. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the set time elapses becomes shorter, and when the set time reaches "0", the gauge amount is dynamically displayed to be "0".

According to such a configuration, the gauge amount in the remaining time display (gauge image GG) is intentionally left when the execution of the post-operation effect is started by activating the automatic button function. It is possible to suggest that there is a risk of ``losing the opportunity to operate'' against the player's will. It becomes possible to prompt the user to perform the operation at an early stage.

However, with regard to the first acceptance allowable state (Fig. 162) executed in the automatic acceptance mode, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted does not necessarily have to be started within the set time. may be started when or after is finished.

In addition, the integrated simulated image IG (simulated image) displayed in the example shown in FIG. 162 may not necessarily be the same as the integrated simulated image IG (simulated image) displayed in the example shown in FIG. good. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 161, the operation means (operation receiving part) that is the operation target is deformed and depicted, whereas in the example shown in FIG. may be realistically depicted.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 161, the operation button 410 is used as the operation means (operation receiving unit) to be operated, and is displayed as an integrated model image IG (model image) modeled on this. In the example shown in FIG. 162, the handle portion 5012 (sword decoration body 5001) is used as the operation means (operation receiving portion) to be operated, and is displayed as an integrated model image IG (model image) modeled on this. 157(a)-(d)). The "integrated model images IGe to IGh" are as described with reference to FIGS. A display target area (partition image KG) of (predetermined image) GG is provided. In addition, as the "integrated model image IG", a plurality of modes (see FIG. 144) with different expectations are prepared, and the same is true for selectively displaying one of the modes.

As described above, in the operation acceptance effect that occurs at timing tC4 in FIG. ”. In other words, in this case, since there is a possibility of confusion as to which operation means is the object of operation after the set time (effective period) that allows reception of the effect occurs, the set time is set to 5 seconds, etc. It is desirable to set a relatively long time for On the other hand, in the operation reception effect that occurs at timing tB3 in FIG. 161, there is no case of "selecting the sword ornament 5001 as the operation target", and the operation button 410 is always used as the operation target. , it is desirable to set a relatively short time such as 3 seconds as the set time. At this time, it is against the player's will to set the timing tC4f at which the automatic button function is activated after three seconds have passed since the set time (effective period) occurred. It is desirable to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the opportunity is lost.

In addition, in the operation reception presentation that occurs at timing tC4 in FIG. Even when the operation means of (1) is operated, it is desirable that the performance is accepted and the performance is executed after the operation. In other words, if a situation appears in which the performance is not accepted despite the operation of the operation means, the player may be confused. Since it is cruel to ask for further operation on the side operation means, even if the erroneous operation state is maintained, when the operation means on the side to be operated is operated, the effect reception is performed. It is desirable to

As described above, in the suppression operation reception effect, the specific type of effect sound is output or not output in the suppression mode before the operation opportunity is given, so compared to the non-suppression operation reception effect There is a concern that the performance will be poor. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the reception permission sound (first permission sound) that is output when the suppressed operation reception effect is generated is output when the non-suppressed operation reception effect is generated. It is possible to output a sound whose output state is maintained for a longer time than the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound).

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the first allowable sound, a plurality of modes (for example, a plurality of modes including a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode) for which the output state is maintained are different. One of the plurality of modes is selectively output as the first allowable sound based on the result of the announcement effect determination. Here, the "first mode" as the first allowable sound is the mode shown in FIG. There is. Further, it is desirable that the rate (expectation) of the appearance of the big hit pattern when the pattern variation is stopped differs depending on which one of the plurality of modes the first allowable sound is output.

It should be noted that "Which of the plurality of modes should be output as the first allowable sound?" and "Which of the plurality of operation means should be used as the operation target?" Alternatively, one judgment result may be obtained in the above-described advance notice effect judgment. However, for at least the first aspect of the plurality of aspects, the first allowable state is set in either case where the "operation button 410" is the object of operation or the case where the "sword decoration 5001" is the object of operation. It is desirable to make it selectable as sound. Also, regarding the second mode and the third mode, it is possible to select whether the "operation button 410" is to be operated or the "sword ornament 5001" is to be operated. However, it is desirable to prepare a mode in which output is possible only when "sword ornament 5001" is to be operated. Then, even if the first allowable sound is output in any of these modes, the output state is maintained for a length of time equal to or greater than the time value required for the modes shown in FIG.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 162(c) to (f), it is assumed that the timing tC4 arrives while the integrated model image IG (here, the integrated image IGd) is being displayed and the operation is accepted. is doing. When the operation is accepted under such a situation, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example performs post-operation effects (display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and by the movable decorative body). As at least one of the effect operations, an output related to the liquid crystal display and an output related to the effect sound are started.

However, as described above, as shown in FIGS. 162(c) and (d), even in this example, the integrated model image IG on the specific layer is not hidden when the post-operation effect is started. , maintains the display state from when it was in the acceptance allowable state. More specifically, even if the operation is accepted, at that time (timing tC4b, corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 164(i)"), the integrated model image IG is attributed to it. No change is caused, and until the timing tC4c after a short time (predetermined time) has passed, the "integrated model image IG" is displayed in the same manner as when the operation reception is permitted. "Display" is continued, and the display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced in the same manner as before.

Then, when the timing tC4c arrives, an image HSE (disappearance effect) that is displayed in a form that makes part or all of the integrated model image IG in the display state difficult to see or makes it invisible appears ("Fig. 164(j)”). Such an image HSE may be, for example, an image displayed in another layer (predetermined layer) before a specific layer in which the integrated model image IG is displayed, or An image (disappearance effect) is displayed as one video prepared in advance, and a part or the whole of the integrated model image in the video is expressed as becoming difficult to see due to the image (disappearance effect). as described above.

As shown in FIG. 162(c), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the integrated model image IG is displayed on a specific layer, and the image HSE ( Even when the disappearance effect) is started to be displayed, it is not hidden, and the display state is maintained as it was when it was in the reception allowable state. More specifically, even when the disappearance effect is displayed (timing tC4c), in the specific layer where the integrated model image IG is displayed, the integrated model image IG changes due to it. Instead, the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced in the same manner as before. However, by displaying the annihilation effect on the predetermined layer on the front side, the model image and the gauge image GG become difficult to see or gradually become invisible.

Then, the display output (display on the layer) of the integrated model image IG is completed during the period (timings tC4c to tC4g) during which the disappearing effect image HSE is displayed. The image HSE of the annihilation effect (here, wide-area annihilation effect using half or more of the predetermined display area) is displayed under the condition that the IG is not displayed on the specific layer either. The disappearing effect image HSE is hidden after a predetermined period of time (timing tC4g) has elapsed since its display was started (timing tC4c). In this regard, regarding the timing tC4g at which the display is hidden, regardless of the timing at which the operation is accepted, the display change (here, liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 among the post-operation effects It is desirable to set it so that it arrives within the period of execution. That is, as will be described later, the image HSE of the annihilation effect and the model image (integrated model image) are displayed in a predetermined layer on the front side of the image (post-operation effect) related to the display change in the effect display device 1600. It is displayed in a form that overlaps with this. Therefore, while the disappearing effect image HSE is being displayed (FIGS. 164(j) and (k)), the image (post-operation effect) associated with the display change on the effect display device 1600 is made difficult to see. there is

According to such a configuration, when the operation is accepted, first of all, the post-operation effect is started. 144(a) to (d), how much time is left indicated by the gauge image GG, etc.) can be grasped. Then, after that, of the post-operation effects, the "image associated with the change in display on the effect display device 1600 (background notice by the princess character)" and the integrated model image IG are displayed in a manner that makes them difficult to see. will start to display. As described above, the annihilation effect includes a narrow-area annihilation effect with low performance and a wide-area annihilation effect with low performance. Here, the wide-area annihilation effect is executed. While the disappearance effect image HSE is displayed, the integrated model image IG is hidden. After that, when the disappearance effect image HSE is hidden, The ``image associated with the display change in the effect display device 1600 (background notice by the princess character)'' is finally visible in a clear state (corresponding to the ``situation shown in FIG. 164(l)'').

That is, in this case, when the operation is accepted, first, it is possible to enjoy what kind of aspect the integrated model image IG was, and then it is possible to enjoy what kind of aspect appears as the disappearance effect, and then, Since it is possible to enjoy what kind of mode will appear as the performance after the operation, it is possible to improve the game interest when the operation is accepted by such various performances.

It should be noted that, in order to preferably obtain such effects, the timing for starting to display an image (post-operation effect) associated with a display change in the effect display device 1600 is not timing tC4b, but timing tC4c, or the disappearance effect. It can be said that it is more desirable to change the timing within the period of execution (timings tC4c to tC4g). However, in this case as well, the post-operation effect by the effect sound and the lamp is started at the timing tC4b, so the start timing of the post-operation effect itself remains at the timing tC4b.

On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 162(g) to (j), it is assumed that the set time elapses (the first acceptability state ends) without the player's operation being detected. As described above, since the first reception permission state is executed in the automatic reception mode, even if the set time elapses without the player performing an operation, the post-operation effect is performed. The model image (here, the integrated model image IG) is hidden during the process.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 162(b) and (g), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, even when the automatic button function is activated, the operation by the player is the same as when the operation is accepted. , the model image (here, the integrated model image) is not hidden and remains displayed. More specifically, even if the automatic button function is activated, at that time (timing tC4f), the model image (here, the integrated model image) does not change due to it. Until timing tC4fa arrives after a short period of time (predetermined time) has passed since then, the "display on the model image" continues in the same manner as when the operation reception is permitted. there is Further, in this example, the gauge image GG has a small display area even when the state (second reception permission state) in which operation reception is permitted ends, and the display area is reduced after timing tC4f. The display area is reduced in the form of "0".

According to such a configuration, even when the post-operation effect is started by activating the automatic button function, the model image is displayed in any manner (any of a plurality of manners with different expectations). It will be possible to check whether the

In this example, the time from the timing tC4c when the operation is accepted until the model image is hidden (not visible), and the time from the timing tC4f when the automatic button function is activated, the model image is hidden (not visible) ) to be the same as the time it takes.

Also, in this example, even if the automatic button function is activated (timing tC4f), the model image (here, integrated model image IG) is not displayed as shown in FIG. 162(g). When the wide area type disappearance effect is executed, the model image (here, the integrated model image) is hidden while the wide area type disappearance effect is being executed. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the image applied by the wide-area disappearing effect (FIG. 162(c)) when the operation by the player is accepted, and the image when the automatic button function is activated. It is executed in the same manner as the image applied to the wide-area erasure effect (Fig. 162(g)) (all images are "image HSE"). This is different from the case of the example shown in FIG. 161 (the narrow-area disappearing effect when the model image is hidden in the non-automatic acceptance mode differs from that during operation).

According to such a configuration, even if the operation reception is not made in time at the last minute, the same aspect as when the operation reception is made in time appears. has been started," and it is expected that the decrease in interest in the game will be suppressed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 162, when the timing tC1 comes before the timing tC3 at which the first reception permitted state occurs, the wide-area type pre-effect using more than half of the predetermined display area is started to be executed. (corresponding to "situation shown in FIG. 164(b)"). Then, during the period in which the wide-area type pre-effect is being executed, the display of a simulated image (here, the integrated simulated image IG) simulating the operation receiving part and the output of the first allowable sound are started ( It is timing tC3 and corresponds to "situation shown in FIG. 164(f)"). At the time when the display of the model image (here, the integrated model image IG) is started, part or the whole of the model image (integrated model image IG) becomes difficult to see due to the wide-area pre-effect. ing. That is, according to the passage of time, the display range of the image related to the wide-area pre-rendering is reduced, or the transmittance is increased, so that the "simulated image (integrated simulated image) ) gradually increases its visibility” (Fig. 164 (f) to (h)). In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the wide-area type pre-production is being executed, and while the model image (here, the integrated model image IG) is being displayed, the first reception When the timing tC4 at which the allowable state occurs arrives, operation reception is allowed. That is, in this case, since the acceptance of the operation is allowed in the middle of the visibility of the model image (integrated model image IG), the model image (integrated model image IG) Confirm the mode (expectation) as the model image (integrated model image IG), whether to make the operation reception (post-operation effect) without confirming the mode (expectation) and hide this After that, it is possible to provide a strategic effect such as whether the operation reception (post-operation effect) is performed and this is hidden.

Here, the image used for such a wide-area pre-effect may be, for example, an image displayed in another layer before the layer in which the model image (integrated model image IG) is displayed. , the model image (integrated model image) and the image (wide-area type pre-effect) are displayed as one moving image prepared in advance, and the visibility of the model image (integrated model image) in the moving image is gradually increased. It may be one that expresses the state of going.

Considering that the wide-area type pre-effect suggests the occurrence of the first acceptance acceptable state with a relatively high degree of expectation, unlike the case of the second acceptance acceptable state, the effect display device 1600 It is desirable that not only the image display but also the related sound effects be output. Then, it may be executed so that a part of the effect sound related to such a wide-area type pre-effect functions as the first allowable sound.

In addition, as a wide area type pre-effect, a plurality of modes with different expectations are prepared, and one of these modes is selectively displayed based on the result of the performance determination based on the result of the big hit determination. This is desirable in terms of improving amusement.

Also, as shown in FIG. 162(c), the wide-area type pre-effect according to this example is started when the timing tC1 within the "first variation pattern" arrives, and the first acceptance allowable state occurs. It is executed across the timing tC4, and ends within the set time of the first acceptance allowable state. However, during the period from the start to the end of such a wide-area type pre-effect, the first wide-area type pre-effect and the second wide-area type pre-effect are sequentially executed as the wide-area type pre-effect. It's like These two wide-area pre-effects may be displayed as one moving image data, or may be displayed as different moving image data.

Here, the display of the first wide-area type pre-effect is started when timing tC1 arrives (corresponding to "situation shown in FIG. 164(b)"), and the second wide-area type pre-effect is the timing When tC2 arrives, the display is started in a form that replaces the first wide-area type pre-effect (corresponding to "situation shown in FIG. 164(e)"), which of these pre-effects is being displayed. Even if it is during the period, during the period during which the pre-rendering is displayed, the "simulated image of the operating means to be operated" is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 162(c), the model image (integrated model image) is displayed when the timing tC1a within the period during which the first wide-area type pre-effect is being executed. This makes it possible to recognize at a relatively early stage which one of the plurality of operation means is to be given an operation opportunity (corresponding to "situation shown in FIG. 164(c)"). In FIG. 164(c), an image HTH1 produced by the first wide-area type pre-rendering produces a “image in which the whole of the model image (here, the integrated model image) is outlined in white”. It is nothing but a blank state, and it cannot be said that it is an image that imitates the production button that is the operation target. After that, "the image A1 in which the whole of the model image (here, the integrated model image) is outlined in white" is "at least the outline of the model image (here, the integrated model image) by at least one of the decoration and the pattern. "Shaped image A2" (corresponding to "situation shown in Fig. 164(d)"), which suggests that the operation target is the production button. From this, it can be said that such an "image A2" is a simulated image that imitates the operating means to be operated. That is, the image A2 is executed as an effect to make it look as if it was produced by the "image HTH1 by the first wide-area type pre-effect". The “contour of the model image (here, integrated model image)” means the contour of the operation receiving portion (here, the contour of the operation receiving portion and the contour of the peripheral decoration image).

However, when the timing tC2 arrives, the "image A2 as a model image (integrated model image)" and the "image HTH1 related to the first wide-area type pre-effect" that have been displayed until then are hidden. Execution of the "second wide-area type pre-effect" is started in a manner that makes it difficult to see (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 164(e)"). Then, when the timing tC3 within the period during which the second wide-area type pre-effect is being executed, the model image (integrated model image IG) is displayed again (the situation shown in FIG. 164(f)). equivalent), and the timing tC4 at which the first acceptance allowable state occurs in the displayed state (corresponding to "situation shown in FIG. 164(g)"). That is, the second model image (FIGS. 164(f) to (k)) is continuously displayed from when the operation reception is permitted until at least when it is not permitted. An operation is accepted while the image is being displayed, and the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect) is started to be executed.

That is, in this case, prior to the occurrence of the first acceptability state, the pre-rendering is executed twice, and in these pre-renderings, "before the operation acceptance is permitted, 164 (c), (d))”, and “the second model image (Figs. 164 (f) to (k) that continue to be displayed even after the acceptance of the operation is permitted”). According to such a configuration, it is possible to have a higher degree of freedom without considering the mode to be displayed when the reception acceptance state is occurring (result of production determination, etc.) Since it is possible to display a model image (a model image that is hidden before the operation reception is permitted (first time)) under the production design, it is possible to expand the range of production. In this sense, "a model image (first time) that is hidden before operation reception is permitted" can be displayed during the period during which operation reception is permitted. It is desirable to display it as an aspect that does not exist (an aspect that is different from any of the aspects shown in FIG. 144).

Here, the model image (second time) displayed while the second wide-area type pre-effect is being performed is the same as the model image displayed during the narrow-area type pre-effect described above. Since the display state is continued even after the state in which operation reception is permitted occurs, it is displayed as one of the plurality of modes shown in FIG. 144 (in the example shown in FIG. 162, , integrated model image IGd), which is a special embodiment. On the other hand, the model image (first time) displayed while the first wide-area type pre-rendering is being performed has at least one of a shape and a pattern (decoration) different from any of the modes shown in FIG. It is desirable to display an image (here, image A2) with For example, in terms of shape, the operation means (operation receiving part), which is the operation target, is deformed and expressed, such as rounding the outline of the model image and using curves instead of straight lines. A method of displaying as an image can be adopted. It should be noted that, in the above-described narrow-area pre-rendering, an image having at least one of a shape and a pattern (ornament) different from those in the acceptability state does not appear.

Further, when the operation means to be operated is a specific operation means, the model image (second time) displayed while the second wide-area type pre-effect is being performed is the plurality of images shown in FIG. Regardless of the mode of display, the model image (first time) displayed while the first wide-area type pre-effect is being performed can be displayed in one mode (same mode). It is desirable to That is, in this case, the first wide-area type pre-effect can be used solely for "indicating to which type of operation means an operation opportunity will be given soon". According to such a first wide-area type pre-effect, the player can be made to recognize the operation object without reducing the interest in the game, and thus the player can be made to recognize the operation object. From there, it will shift to the second wide-area type pre-production that suggests the degree of expectation.

It should be noted that, in order to obtain such a function and effect in a preferred manner, the first wide-area type pre-rendering should be performed with the operation means (sword decoration It can be said that it is more desirable to execute only when an opportunity to operate the body 5001) is given. That is, in this case, either the case where the acceptability state in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 occurs or the acceptability state in which the operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 occurs. However, in the first wide-area type pre-effect, operation button 410 and sword decoration 5001 out of sword decoration 5001 have the opportunity to operate. It will be executable only when granted. In this case, the first acceptability state may be generated as an acceptability state in which only the sword ornament 5001 can be given an opportunity to operate. On the other hand, the second wide-area type pre-effect is executed either when the operation button 410 is given an operation opportunity or when the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity. It is possible. At this time, the second wide-area type pre-effect is executed in the same manner when the operation button 410 is provided with the operation opportunity and when the sword decoration 5001 is provided with the operation opportunity. , or may be implemented in a different manner.

Further, when the model image (second time) displayed while the second wide-area type pre-effect is being performed is displayed as the integrated model image IG, the display target area of the gauge image GG is included in the periphery decoration image. is formed, even in such a case, the display target area of the gauge image GG for the model image (first time) displayed while the first wide-area type pre-effect is being performed may be displayed as an image that does not include In this case, it goes without saying that the shape of the model image (integrated model image) will be different. Further, at this time, the simulated image may be displayed as an integrated simulated image that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image GG, or an image that is not integrated with the peripheral decoration image in the first place. may be displayed as

According to the above-described effect example, in the second acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 161, the model image (integrated model image IG) is not displayed in a special mode, and the first acceptance sound is output as the acceptance acceptance sound. However, the second permissible sound is not output. On the other hand, in the first acceptance allowable state shown in FIG. 162, the model image (integrated model image IG) can be displayed in a special mode, and the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound are respectively used as the acceptor allowable sound. Output is possible. However, in the first acceptability state shown in FIG. 162, even if a mode different from the special mode (the low-expectation mode used in FIG. 161) is displayed as the model image (integrated model image IG), 162, the acceptance allowable sound is processed as described with reference to FIG. 162, and it goes without saying that the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound can be output as the acceptability allowable sound.

At the start of the output of the second allowable sound (message sound), the image associated with the wide-area pre-effect remains, and it is difficult to visually recognize the mode of the model image (integrated model image IG). In a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the form of the model image (integrated model image IG), the state in which only the first allowable sound (sound effect) is output changes to the state in which the second allowable sound (message sound) is also output. Therefore, it becomes possible to suggest the possibility that the model image (integrated model image IG) will be displayed in a special mode by means of the acceptance acceptance sound. That is, if the second allowable sound (message sound) is output, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the model image (integrated model image IGd) with a special mode will be revealed, and such Inside, the model image (integrated model image IG) is gradually exposed.

The integrated model image IG includes the display target area (section image KG) of the gauge image GG, but the integrated model image IG is displayed in either the low expectation mode (IGa) or the high expectation mode (IGd). Even in this case, the display target area of the gauge image GG (the target portion where the gauge image GG is displayed and the portion that increases as the display area of the gauge image GG decreases) is displayed as the same image. It has become. Therefore, it becomes easy to recognize how much time is left regardless of the mode of the model image.

As described above with reference to FIG. 144, the low expectation mode (IGa) and the high expectation mode (IGd) differ not only in the pattern of the model image but also in the mode of the peripheral decoration image. Further, the operating means (such as effect buttons) to be operated by the player can emit light in the same manner as the model image, but the peripheral decoration member does not emit light in the same manner as the peripheral decoration image SSG.

According to the above-described effect example, when in a predetermined game state, the reception acceptance state at the time of suppression in which operation reception is permitted while a specific effect sound is suppressed, and the specific effect sound is suppressed. A plurality of non-suppressed acceptance acceptance states in which operation acceptance is allowed in the absence of control are prepared. On the other hand, in the second reception-allowed state out of the unsuppressed reception-allowed states, the integrated model image IG cannot be displayed in the special mode (IGd), which is a mode different from the special mode. It can be displayed with In the second reception acceptance state, the integrated model image IG is not selectively displayed from a plurality of modes (IGa to IGc) with different expectations excluding the special mode (IGd), but in one mode (IGa). may be displayed only. According to such a configuration, when the specific effect sound is suppressed, it is possible to suppress the feeling that the performance is poor compared to when the specific effect sound is not suppressed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the third condition (third acceptance acceptable state) different from both the first condition (first acceptance acceptable state) and the second condition (second acceptance acceptable state) is satisfied. 151 to 155 for the gauge image GG included in the integrated model image (for example, the modes shown in FIGS. 154 and 155). ) is adopted for display as described above. However, when generating such a third acceptance acceptable state (effective period during which the display area of the gauge image GG does not decrease), similar to the first acceptance acceptable state, prior to this, "BGM playback sound (specified type )” is changed from the non-suppressed state to the suppressed state (or non-output state), and the post-operation display ( It is desirable that a post-operation effect) or a post-operation output sound be executed. In other words, when the "BGM playback sound" is suppressed (or not output) when the reception acceptance state occurs, it is expected that a highly anticipated mode (special mode) will be displayed as the integrated model image IG. However, when it is not displayed in the special mode, only the fact that the performance is inferior to the case where the "BGM playback sound" is output without suppression becomes conspicuous, and the game is played. There is concern about a decline in interest. In this regard, in the third reception-permitting state, a mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced can appear, and the post-operation display that appears only when this mode appears is executed. Even if the special mode does not appear as the integrated model image IG, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

However, regardless of whether the first reception permission state or the third reception permission state, the "BGM playback sound (specific type of effect sound)" in the suppression state (or non-output state) is triggered by the operation reception. It is desirable that the display change and the post-operation output sound are executed while maintaining the suppression state (or non-output state) without restarting the output in the non-suppression mode.

In addition, even if the reception permission state occurs after the "BGM playback sound (specific type of effect sound)" is suppressed (or not output), when the third reception permission state occurs, the third reception permission state occurs. Unlike the case of the 1-acceptance permitted state, the integrated model image IG is prevented from being displayed in a special mode, and can be displayed only in one mode (for example, the normal mode IGa). desirable. According to such a configuration, when the "BGM playback sound (specific type of effect sound)" is set to the suppression state (or non-output state), either the first reception permission state or the third reception permission state is selected. You will be able to add fun to what happens.

In addition, in the third acceptance allowable state, the display area of the gauge image GG is assumed to be executed during the valid period in which the display area is not reduced. 160), a model image (which may or may not be an integrated model image) may be displayed during an effective period. Even with such a configuration, it can be said that similar effects can be achieved. In this case, it goes without saying that the gauge image GG itself is not displayed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of types with different occurrence conditions are prepared as acceptance acceptable states. However, if this is a specific type of acceptable acceptance state, it is desirable to allow the integrated model image IG to be displayed in a special mode (IGd). However, in the case of the acceptability state in which the integrated model image IG can be displayed in a special mode (IGd), it is recommended that the automatic acceptance mode be executed in order to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game when an operation is forgotten. is desirable.

In the production example shown in FIG. 162, the automatic button function is activated at a predetermined timing within the set time (effective period). The button function may be activated to start execution of "the same post-operation effect as when the operation by the player is accepted within the valid period". In this case, the processing from the timing when the automatic button function is activated is the same as the "processing from timing tC4f" shown in FIGS. 162(g) and (h).

163 and 164, even if a predetermined transmittance is set for the image itself and the image behind it can be visually recognized, although it is difficult. good.

According to the production examples shown in FIGS. 161 to 164, at the time when the player's operation is accepted or the automatic button function is activated and the post-operation production is started, a model image (integrated Both the simulated image IG) and the gauge image GG are displayed in good visibility without being difficult to see due to the disappearance effect (Fig. 163 (f), See Figure 164(i)). As a result, it is possible to enjoy the post-operation production after recognizing in which mode the model image (integrated model image IG) is displayed and how much time remains. It becomes possible to improve the game interest.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 163, even if the operation is accepted in the second acceptance permitted state and the post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) is executed, the background image changes before and after the post-operation effect is started. This is maintained without causing switching. On the other hand, in the production example shown in FIG. 164, when the operation is accepted in the first acceptance permitted state and the post-operation production (first post-operation production) is executed, the post-operation production is started. It is designed to cause the background image to switch (after the operation, the space background).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to effectively use the automatic reception function, and even if the operation is forgotten, the background image can be appropriately switched. can progress smoothly. On the other hand, in the reception acceptance state where the automatic reception function is not activated, the background image is not changed, so if you forget to operate the background image, the background image will not be switched or only the background image will be displayed. It becomes possible to avoid the occurrence of inconvenient events such as sudden changes.

Further, in the second acceptance allowable state, after the operation is accepted (or the automatic button function is activated), most of the display area overlaps with the image HSE applied to the wide-area erasing effect and becomes invisible. However, as described above, by changing the background image itself, if there is even a slight portion that does not overlap with the image HSE applied to the wide-area erasure effect, the image in that portion can be checked to determine the state after the operation. can be recognized, and the demerit caused by the execution of the wide-area disappearing effect can be eliminated. In order to preferably obtain such a function and effect, when the operation reception (or the activation of the automatic button function) is made in the second reception permission state, the ratio of the appearance of the big hit pattern is relatively high. To make the background images when the post-operation performance is executed different between when the performance is executed and when the post-operation performance is executed in a mode in which the ratio of appearance of the big win pattern is relatively low. is more desirable. These percentages may be 0% or 100%. In this case, the background image itself is changed when the post-operation effect is executed in a mode in which the ratio of appearance of the big-hit patterns is relatively high, whereas the post-operation effect is performed in a mode in which the ratio of appearance of the big-hit patterns is relatively low. is executed, the background image may remain unchanged.

In the above-described production examples, when providing an operation opportunity, a case where a specific type of production sound is output in a non-suppressed mode (second acceptance allowable state) and a state where a specific type of production sound is output in a suppressed mode There are cases where it is put in a non-output state (first reception allowable state), and depending on the type, the ratio (expectation) at which the post-operation production is executed in a manner that appears only when the jackpot is won is different. As a result, it is possible to improve the performance when the operation opportunity is given. This percentage may be 0% or 100%.

In addition, in the first reception permission state, when an operation opportunity is provided, the specific type of effect sound is output in a suppressed mode or is not output, and when the effect after the operation is generated by this, In accordance with this, a production device is applied so that the production sound can be heard conspicuously. In this regard, in the above configuration, regarding the acceptance acceptable sound that is output when the first acceptance acceptable state occurs, if a performance is accepted while the acceptance acceptable sound is in the output state, the performance is accepted. Since the output state is terminated based on the operation, the effect sound corresponding to the post-operation effect can be emphasized without being disturbed by the reception allowable sound.

A plurality of types of acceptable acceptance states in which the integrated model image IG can be displayed in a special mode (IGd) are prepared. Then, it is desirable that the acceptance acceptable sound is terminated in the middle. On the other hand, a plurality of types are prepared as acceptance acceptable states in which the integrated model image IG cannot be displayed in a special mode (IGd). An acceptance acceptable state in which the acceptance acceptable sound is terminated halfway when an operation is accepted, and an acceptance acceptable state in which the acceptance acceptable sound is not terminated in the middle when an operation is accepted while the acceptance acceptable sound is in the output state ( It is desirable to include both (possible under different conditions).

As described above, acceptable reception sounds include sound effects and message sounds. In this respect, even if the integrated model image is displayed in the normal mode (IGa), the message sound is always interrupted when the effect is received while it is in the output state, whereas the sound effect is , when the integrated model image is displayed in the normal mode (IGa), when it is interrupted when the effect is accepted while in that output state (first acceptance acceptable state), and when it is not interrupted It is desirable to have time (second reception acceptance state). It is desirable to prepare a plurality of types of reception permission states including the first reception permission state as the reception permission states in which the message sound is output.

162 and 164 are realized by sequentially executing the first wide-area type front effect and the second wide-area type front effect. In this regard, in both the first wide-area type pre-rendering and the second wide-area type pre-rendering, a model image (integrated model image) that imitates the operation means (operation receiving part) that is the operation target is displayed in both of these pre-renderations. However, the model image A2 displayed during the execution period of the first wide-area type pre-effect is a model image (integrated model image IG) displayed within the set time of the reception-permitting state (first reception-permitting state). , and does not gradually change to the model image (integrated model image IG).

That is, the model image A2 (Fig. 164(d)) displayed in the first wide-area type pre-effect is non-existent when the second wide-area type pre-effect is executed, prior to the occurrence of the first acceptance allowable state. It is put into a display state (invisible state). Then, after a predetermined period of time in which no model image simulating the operation target is displayed (maintained in an invisible state) (Fig. 164(e)), a model image within the execution period of the second wide-area type pre-effect is displayed. , an image different from the model image A2 displayed in the first wide-area type preliminary effect is displayed (FIG. 164(f)). Then, this "model image within the execution period of the second wide-area type pre-effect" is exactly the model image (integrated model image IG) that is displayed within the set time of the reception-permitting state (first reception-permitting state). The model image (integrated model image IG) is displayed together with the image HSE related to the second wide-area type pre-rendering in a way that straddles the occurrence of the reception-allowed state (first reception-allowed state). It becomes possible to accept the operation while it is being done. The model image (integrated model image IG) is also displayed when the operation is accepted and the post-operation effect starts to be executed (Fig. 164(i)). It is displayed over the period from before the acceptability state occurs to after it ends.

Here, when the model image A2 is displayed in the wide-area type pre-rendering (first wide-area type pre-rendering), the operation means (operation receiving unit) modeled by the model image A2 will soon (other effects The operation opportunity will be given without fail. In other words, instead of generating the acceptability state while maintaining the display state of the model image A2, in the above-described production example, the model image A2 is set to a non-display state, and the "operation object After temporarily generating a state in which no simulated image is displayed, the simulated image that simulates the operation means (operation receiving unit) is replaced with an image ( It is displayed as an integrated model image IG).

According to such a configuration, operation reception is permitted even when a simulated image is displayed for a long time as a pre-effect in order to suggest that an acceptance acceptance state with a high degree of expectation will occur. It will be expected that the operation will be prompted without delaying the timing. That is, if the model image is displayed for a long period of time as a preliminary effect, and if the acceptability state is generated while the model image is being displayed, the timing at which the operation acceptance is allowed suddenly arrives. As a result, operation delays may occur frequently even though the pre-rendering is being executed. In this regard, according to the above configuration, prior to the occurrence of the first acceptance acceptable state, a model image having a description different from the model image displayed within the set time of the acceptance acceptable state is displayed. In addition to displaying, after a period of time during which no model image is displayed, the model image displayed within the set time of the acceptance allowable state is displayed. That is, it is possible to make the player recognize that the first reception acceptance state can occur only within the period after the model image displayed within the set time of the acceptance acceptance state is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an operation delay from occurring while displaying the simulated image for a long time as a preliminary effect.

In order to preferably obtain such an effect, it is preferable that "after the second wide-area type pre-effect is executed, the time required for the first wide-area-type pre-effect" and "the time during which the model image A2 is displayed" are preferred. It is better to set the "time until the 1 acceptance acceptable state occurs" and the "time from the display of the model image (integrated model image IG) until the first acceptance acceptable state occurs" to be shorter. The desirability is clear. The model image A2 may be displayed from the start of the first wide-area type pre-effect.

In addition, in order to preferably obtain such effects, the model image (integrated model image IG) displayed in the second wide-area type pre-rendering should be "operation in the movable area" as the operation means (operation receiving unit). and "behavior when operated" (see FIG. 145, etc.). It is more desirable to display without performing dynamic display. It should be noted that the model image (integrated model image IG) displayed in the second wide-area type pre-effect will continue its dynamic display state even after the occurrence of the first acceptability state. In addition, the simulated image (integrated simulated image IG) displayed in the narrow-area type pre-production also expresses "movement in the movable area" and "behavior when operated" as the operation means (operation receiving part). This is dynamically displayed, and the state of dynamic display is continued even after the occurrence of the second acceptability state.

The model image (integrated model image IG) in the state shown in FIG. 164(f) and the model image (integrated model image IG) in the state shown in FIG. Although they are the same themselves, they may be made different in terms of transmittance.

It is more desirable to display the image KTH associated with the narrow-area pre-rendering shown in FIG. 163 as an image of a size that can cover the entire simulated image (integrated simulated image IG) from the front side. . Then, by reducing the display area of the image KTH or increasing its transmittance, a model image (integrated model image IG ) is preferably displayed in such a manner that it gradually becomes more apparent as time elapses.

Of the images HTH1 and HTH2 associated with the wide-area pre-effect shown in FIG. 164, the image HTH1 is displayed behind the model image A2 (does not adversely affect the visibility of the model image A2). On the other hand, the image HTH2 is displayed in front of the model image (integrated model image IG) (does not adversely affect the visibility of the model image (integrated model image IG)). That is, the image HTH2 is displayed as an image of a size that can cover the entire model image (integrated model image IG) from the front side, similar to the image KTH related to the narrow-area type preproduction (Fig. 164 ( e)), by reducing its display area or increasing its transmittance, a model image (integrated model image IG) is displayed from the place where the image HTH2 was displayed. is gradually revealed as time elapses. On the other hand, since the image HTH1 is displayed so as to make the representation of the model image A2 stand out, there is a demerit in making the model image difficult to visually recognize when giving an opportunity to operate (which operation It becomes difficult to recognize whether an operation opportunity is given to the means, and an operation delay occurs) can be resolved.

The wide-area type pre-effect is performed by sequentially executing the first wide-area type pre-effect and the second wide-area type pre-effect. It is desirable to output by playing two sound effects/music).

In addition, in the narrow-area type pre-rendering shown in FIG. In the pre-effect, the background image that has been displayed before this is changed in the wide-area pre-effect (here, changed at the start of the wide-area pre-effect). With such a configuration, since the background change can be executed as part of the wide-area type pre-production, the pre-production with higher production is compared to the narrow-area type pre-production that only partially changes the production. It will be executed as a production. Note that the background image displayed before the narrow-area type pre-effect (Fig. 163(a)) and the background image displayed before the wide-area type pre-effect (Fig. 164 ( It may be a background image different from a)).

In the second wide-area type preliminary effect shown in FIG. 164(f), the integrated model image is integrated with the "peripheral decoration image in which the partition image KG that partitions the display target area of the gauge image GG is decorated (depicted)". A model image is displayed as the IG, but in the first wide-area type pre-rendering shown in FIG. As a result, in the first wide-area type pre-effect, the player can enjoy the pre-effect without worrying about at least the remaining time. Note that the model image in which the section image KG is not decorated (depicted) may be any image in which the section image KG to be decorated (depicted) in the integrated model image IG is not displayed. In addition to a mode in which the decoration (gauge area) is not displayed, a mode in which the shape itself is different from that of the integrated model image IG may be used.

As described above, the ``acceptance acceptance state in which operation acceptance is allowed while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state and is executed in an automatic acceptance mode.'' , are prepared with different generation conditions (fluctuation patterns, etc.), and "first reception permission state" is prepared as one of these reception permission states. However, in these reception acceptance states, there is a "first wide-area type pre-production (Fig. 164 (c) to (e)) in which a model image is displayed and then hidden, and the timing of occurrence of the acceptance acceptance state. In addition to the first reception acceptable state in which the second wide-area type pre-production (Fig. 164 (e) to (g)) is performed in which the model image is displayed, "the model image is displayed and hidden The second wide-area type pre-effect (Fig. 164(e)-(g)) in which the first wide-area type pre-effect is not performed and the model image is displayed across the occurrence timing of the reception-allowed state is performed. It is desirable to include the state. That is, in this case, in the first reception acceptance state, the ratio of execution of the post-operation production in a manner that appears only at the time of the big win is higher than in the specific reception acceptance state, so that the operation reception is allowed at a timing higher than that in the specific reception acceptance state. The amusement of the game can be heightened from the arrival of a significantly previous timing (the timing at which the first wide-area type pre-performance appears). In this case, the content of the second wide-area type pre-production that is performed when the first reception-permitting state occurs and the second wide-area-type pre-effect that is performed when the specific reception-permitting state occurs do not necessarily have the same content. It may be executed as different presentation contents (images). Further, the operation means to which the operation opportunity is provided may be different between the first reception-permitting state and the second reception-permitting state.

As described above, the ``acceptance acceptance state in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in a non-suppressed mode, and is executed in a non-automatic acceptance mode'' is an occurrence condition (variation patterns, etc.) are prepared in different forms, and "second reception permission state" is prepared as one of these reception permission states.

The wide-area type pre-effect that is performed in the first acceptance allowable state is executed under the condition that the "specified type of effect sound (BGM reproduction)" is suppressed or not output. (BGM reproduction)” is executed over a longer period of time than the narrow-range type pre-production (second reception permission state) that is executed while being output without suppression. be able to In particular, by executing only the first wide-area type pre-performance out of the wide-area type pre-performance for a longer time than the narrow-area type pre-performance, the game interest is greatly improved before the reception permission state occurs. can be increased to The timing of suppressing or not outputting the "specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction)" may be set so that it arrives while the first wide-area type pre-production is being executed, or when the first wide-area type pre-production You may make it arrive before the production|presentation is started.

According to the above-described effect example, when the wide-area type pre-effect (Fig. 164) is performed when the first reception permission state occurs, the effect change including the background image is caused, whereas when the second reception permission state occurs When the narrow-range type pre-rendering (FIG. 163) is performed, the background image is not changed and is maintained while the rendition is changed. In addition, in the first acceptability state that occurs while such wide-area pre-rendering is being performed, the background image can be further changed by the post-operation rendition (automatic reception mode) regardless of whether or not the operation has been performed. On the other hand, in the second acceptability state that occurs while the narrow-area type pre-effect is being performed, the background image is not changed by the post-operation effect and is maintained while the effect progresses. there is According to such a configuration, the background image is changed twice before and after the occurrence of this in the first reception acceptance state, so the effect is different from that in the second reception acceptance state. It will be possible to greatly improve the performance, and it will be possible to encourage more concentration on the production related to the operation.

In the wide-area disappearing effect according to the example of presentation described above, the background image is changed accordingly (Fig. 164(j)). However, the timing at which the background image is changed may come after the timing at which the wide-area disappearing effect is started. That is, in this case, in FIG. 164(i), the execution of the post-operation effect (background announcement by the princess character) is started while the background image is not changed. Then, after the execution of the post-operation effect is started, the wide-area disappearing effect first makes the background image that was displayed when the reception is allowed to be difficult to see or makes it invisible (Fig. 164 (j)). The background image is left unchanged in the situation shown in ), and then the background image is changed by displaying another background image (the situation shown in FIG. 164(k), or change the background image in the situation shown in FIG. 164(l)). Other background images may be displayed in such a manner that they are gradually revealed while the wide-area disappearing effect is being performed, or may be displayed after the wide-area disappearing effect is completed. may

In the example shown in FIG. 164, as the effect after the operation, first, the display change on the liquid crystal display (background notice by the princess character) is started. Execution may be started first as the post-operation effect, and the display change on the liquid crystal display may be started after a delay (for example, at the timing when the background image is changed).

As described above, a plurality of "acceptable states in which the automatic acceptance mode is executed and the wide-area disappearing effect is executed" are prepared with different occurrence conditions (variation patterns, etc.). As one example, a "first reception acceptance state" is prepared. However, in addition to the "first reception acceptance state", the "first reception acceptance state" and "post-operation production (first operation post-production) in the same manner as the first acceptance acceptance state can be executed in these reception acceptance states, but the wide area disappearing effect is executed as a different image (the display timing, etc. may be the same). That is, in this case, even if the same post-operation production is performed, the disappearance effect will be different, so it is possible to improve the production performance, and it is expected that the decline in the game interest will be suppressed. become. The special reception acceptance state may be the specific reception acceptance state described above. The specific reception acceptance state and the special reception acceptance state are executed in the same manner as the first reception acceptance state in terms of display timing of the model image, processing related to the output of acceptance acceptance sound, processing related to disappearance effect, etc. .

As described above, a plurality of "acceptable states in which the non-automatic acceptance mode is executed and the narrow-range type disappearance effect is executed" are prepared with different occurrence conditions (variation patterns, etc.). "Second Acceptable State" is prepared as one of the. However, in addition to the "second reception permission state", these reception permission states include "a post-operation effect (a third post-operation effect ) can be executed, but it is desirable to include a "special reception acceptance state" in which the narrow-area disappearance effect is executed as the same image (the display timing may also be the same). That is, in this case, even if a different post-operation production is performed, the disappearance effect itself is displayed as the same image, so it is easy to be in a situation where the operation is accepted regardless of the type of post-operation production. to be able to recognize The special reception acceptance state is executed in the same manner as the second reception acceptance state in terms of display timing of the model image, processing related to reception acceptance sound output, processing related to disappearance effect, and the like.

In the narrow-range disappearance effect, even when the model image (integrated model image IG) is hidden after the post-operation production is started, the image KSE applied to the narrow-range disappearance effect is hidden. 163(i)). In this regard, the time from when the operation is accepted (when the post-operation effect starts to be executed) to when the model image (integrated model image IG) is hidden is longer than the model image (integrated model image IG). ) is hidden until the image KSE to which the narrow-range disappearing effect is applied is hidden longer. According to such a configuration, the display state of the model image (integrated model image IG) is maintained even after the execution of the post-operation effect is started, so that the state thereof can be confirmed. It seems that the reason why it is difficult to reveal clearly is not due to the "simulated image in which the display state is maintained", but due to the performance by the "image KSE applied to the narrow-range type disappearance effect". Since it becomes possible to play games, it is possible to suppress the decline in game interest. In this case, it goes without saying that the narrow-range disappearing effect is performed by dynamic display of an image different from the model image, instead of a fade-out that ends relatively quickly. For such a "dynamic display with a different image" as a narrow-area disappearance effect, we have prepared multiple types with different expectations, and they appear selectively according to the type of acceptability state with different occurrence conditions. It is more desirable to

According to the wide-area disappearing effect according to the example of presentation described above, it is possible to expect a function that suggests that the first reception permission state has been executed in the automatic reception mode. On the other hand, in the second acceptability state, since the operation is accepted only by the player's operation and the post-operation effect is not executed, it is easy to recognize that the post-operation effect will be executed without affecting the entire screen. On the other hand, it can be said that execution by a narrow-range type extinction effect with a small image applied to the extinction effect is advantageous in that the post-operation rendering can be immediately executed in a state of good visibility. According to such a configuration, in the case of the wide area type extinction effect, it is required to change the background image to ensure its visibility, but in the case of the narrow area type erasure effect, the background image is not changed. Visibility can be ensured only by performing the post-operation production while maintaining the .

As described above, in the second acceptance allowable state, a plurality of aspects (first aspect , including the second mode), the post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) is executed. In this regard, when the first mode (relatively high proportion mode) appears as the post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) and the second mode (relatively low rate mode) appears, In both cases, the narrow-range disappearance effect is executed in the same manner (image). On the other hand, in the first acceptance allowable state, a plurality of aspects (third aspect , including the fourth mode), the post-operation effect (first post-operation effect) is executed. In this regard, when the third aspect (relatively high ratio aspect) appears as the post-operation effect (first operation post-effect effect) and the fourth aspect (relatively low ratio aspect) appears, When the wide-area extinction effect is executed in mutually different aspects (images), or when the third aspect (relatively high ratio aspect) appears, the wide-area extinction effect is performed, and the fourth aspect (relatively It is desirable to execute a narrow-range extinction effect when a low-proportion aspect appears. The narrow-range disappearance effect at this time may be the same as or different from the narrow-range disappearance effect that is performed in response to the second acceptable state.

According to such a configuration, in the first reception acceptance state in which the wide-area extinction effect may occur, out of the first acceptance acceptance state and the second acceptance acceptance state, the disappearance effect itself has a degree of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the low visibility of the post-operation presentation by the wide-area disappearing effect. In addition to the first acceptance state and the second acceptance state, the fourth acceptance state and the fifth acceptance state, which will be described later, can be used in both the variation pattern of losing the big hit and the variation pattern of winning the big win. It can occur, and the above-mentioned first and second variation patterns, as well as the fourth and fifth variation patterns described later, are "the variation pattern at the time of the big hit and the variation pattern at the time of losing (at the time of defeat). It goes without saying that it is prepared as a pair.

Also, the second acceptance allowable state may be generated not only in the second variation pattern but also in the first variation pattern. For example, the second acceptance acceptable state is generated at a relatively early timing within the first fluctuation pattern, and then the first acceptance acceptable state is generated at a relatively late timing.

The timing at which the display output (display on the layer) of the model image (integrated model image IG) ends during the period when the disappearance effect image is displayed (the timing from when the operation is accepted until the display is hidden) may be different between the first allowable reception state and the second allowable reception state.

If the operation is accepted in the "situation where the image KTH associated with the narrow-range type pre-effect is displayed" shown in FIG. 163(d), the image KTH is not hidden. It is desirable that the post-operation effect be started while the image KTH is being displayed. That is, in this case, the image KTH is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 163(f). After that, when the execution of the narrow-range disappearance effect is started, the "image KTH associated with the narrow-area preproduction effect" is made difficult or invisible by the "image KSE associated with the narrow-area disappearance effect." It is desirable to develop the production so that it will be done.

In addition, even if the operation is accepted in the "situation where the image HTH2 related to the wide-area type pre-effect is displayed" shown in FIG. First, it is desirable that the post-operation effect is started while the image HTH2 is being displayed. That is, in this case, the image HTH2 is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 164(i). After that, when the execution of the wide area type disappearance effect is started, the "image HSE associated with the wide area type disappearance effect" makes the "image HTH2 associated with the wide area type front effect" difficult or invisible. It is desirable to develop the production in the future.

In the example shown in FIG. 162, if it is allowed to accept an operation while the "specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction)" is in a non-output state, the "specific type of effect sound ( BGM playback)” may not necessarily be re-output until the symbols are stopped. For example, at timing tC6, either the "specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction)" which is already in a non-output state or the "post-operation effect effect sound" which is started to be output when the operation is accepted. It is also possible to newly start outputting a different special effect sound. The special effect sound does not start to be output when the operation is accepted, but is started to be output based on the arrival of a predetermined timing within the variation pattern.

The image related to the wide-area type pre-effect and the image related to the narrow-area type pre-effect are displayed until the set time of the reception allowable state ends (or until the automatic reception button is activated). good too. Also, the output state of the first allowable sound may be maintained until the set time of the acceptance allowable state ends (or until the automatic acceptance button is activated).

In addition, in the above-described production example, the simulated image that imitates the operation receiving part is displayed in both the wide-area type front effect and the narrow-area type front effect, but the wide-area type front effect (first wide-area type front effect) , is displayed in a mode (image data) different from the mode (image data) appearing during the period (first acceptance permitted state) in which operation reception is permitted. As a result, in the wide-area type pre-rendering (first wide-area type pre-rendering), even if the model image is displayed when the operation reception is not yet permitted, it will be understood that the operation reception is permitted. It is possible to appeal to the occurrence of the operation acceptance effect (acceptance acceptance state) while making it difficult for misrecognition to occur. become. In addition, in the second wide-area type pre-production and narrow-area type pre-production, the model image (integrated model image) is displayed in the form (image data) that appears during the period when operation reception is permitted (reception permitted state). This is gradually revealed as the pre-production is hidden (the display area is reduced). That is, in this case, the display state of the model image displayed on the specific layer when the acceptability state occurs continues from before to after the acceptability state occurs. This is the same for the fourth reception acceptance state, which will be described later.

161 (FIG. 163) and the production example shown in FIG. 162 (FIG. 164). Yes, at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effects such as display changes and lamp lighting) is displayed without hiding the model image (gauge image) (and dynamic display). (See Figure 163(f), Figure 164(i), etc.). After that, the disappearance effect (narrow area disappearance effect or wide area disappearance effect) is started (see FIG. 163(g), FIG. 164(j), etc.). However, in the wide-area disappearing effect executed in a relatively large range, most of the change (post-operation effect) that has once clearly appeared becomes difficult to see, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, when the narrow-range disappearance effect is executed, changes in response to the operation reception (changes in display, lamp lighting, etc., caused by the post-operation production) at least one of) will start executing, and at this point, the model image (gauge image) will not be hidden and will be displayed without being difficult to see due to the narrow-area disappearance effect On the other hand, when the wide-area disappearing effect is executed, changes in response to the operation reception (display change, lamp emission, etc.) at least one of the changes that occur) may not be initiated. That is, in this case, at the time when the change corresponding to the reception of the operation (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as a change in the display and the light emission of the lamp) is started, the model image (gauge image) is displayed instead of being hidden, but is made difficult to see by the wide-area disappearing effect (Fig. 164(j)).

That is, when the narrow-range disappearance effect is executed, at the time when the change corresponding to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation production such as the display change and the light emission of the lamp) is started, the operation The display state of the model image (gauge image) is maintained in the manner in which it was displayed before the reception was made. In this case, the model image (gauge image) does not become difficult to see due to the narrow-range disappearance effect at the time when the execution of the post-operation effect is started. On the other hand, when the wide area type disappearance effect is executed, it is possible to make FIG. 162(j) appear after passing through FIG. 162(j) may appear when the execution of is started.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, regarding the acceptability state executed in the "suppressed operation acceptance effect" in which the specified type of effect sound can be suppressed, the degree of suppression is relatively high or the state of non-output. In addition to the first reception acceptance state executed in the "strong suppression mode (first mode shown in FIG. 162)" that is set to 162, the degree of suppression is relatively low "weak suppression mode (second mode shown in FIG. 161) )” is prepared, as described above. In this case, the specific type of effect sound to be suppressed may be a different effect sound. Just do it.

According to such a configuration, when the set time (effective period) during which operation reception is permitted occurs, it is possible to provide performance as to how much the specific type of performance sound is suppressed. Become.

Here, in order to preferably obtain the above effects, the degree of expectation (big hit It is desirable that the ratio of appearance of the pattern is different. Here, when the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance acceptance state)" occurs, the ratio (expectation) of the "post-operation production corresponding to the operation acceptance" that appears only when the jackpot is won is , When the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance allowable state)" occurs, the ratio (expectation) that is executed in a mode in which the "post-operation effect corresponding to the operation acceptance" appears only when the jackpot is won is lower than ing. The percentage may be 0% or 100%.

In addition, for the "weakly suppressed mode (fourth acceptance acceptable state)", the production according to the high-expectation fluctuation pattern that develops into SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.) and the reach state are not even formed (or reach The state can be formed, but it does not develop into SP reach). ” may not occur in the low-expectation performance pattern, but may occur as a performance corresponding to the high-expectation variation pattern. Even with such a configuration, the degree of expectation for a big hit when the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception acceptance state)" occurs is lower than when the "strong suppression mode (first reception acceptance state)" occurs. I can say.

In addition, in order to obtain the above effects more preferably, it is possible to generate a "special effect state" to which a transition can be made based on the satisfaction of a special effect condition, and in the "special effect state", the player can Each time an operation is accepted during the set time (effective period) during which an operation prompting image (simulated image, gauge display, etc.) is displayed to prompt the operation, a specific type of effect sound (for example, BGM playback effect sound ) is suppressed, it is desirable that the post-operation effect corresponding to the reception of the operation is executed (started). According to such a "special effect state", each time a set time (effective period) during which operation acceptance is permitted occurs, how much the specific type of effect sound (for example, effect sound for BGM reproduction) is suppressed. (Which one of multiple modes including the weak suppression mode and the strong suppression mode appears) can be provided, and apart from the degree of expectation suggested by the post-operation presentation, such a performance Since the degree of expectation is also suggested by (to what degree is it suppressed), it is expected that the interest in the game will be further improved when the reception of the performance is permitted. In this case, the above-described second acceptance allowable state does not occur in the "special effect state", but can occur in a different effect state (normal effect state).

In addition, within the symbol variation "weak suppression mode (fourth reception acceptance state)" and "strong suppression mode (first reception acceptance state)" are sequentially executable variation patterns (for example, high expectation variation pattern Of these, an effect corresponding to a specific variation pattern) may be prepared. That is, in this case, even if the "weak suppression mode (first reception acceptance state)" with relatively low expectations occurs, the "strong suppression mode (first reception acceptance state)" with relatively high expectations )” may occur, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game when the player recognizes that the degree of suppression for the specific type of effect sound is small (weak suppression mode). become.

In addition, in order to more preferably suppress the decline in gaming interest when the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance acceptance state)" occurs, the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance acceptance state)"
・If a specific variation pattern is selected from among the highly expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach effects with background changes, etc.) as a result of the above variation pattern determination, production determination Even if any result is obtained as (announcement determination, etc.), it is assumed that the production of the specific variation pattern will occur when it progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, whereas the "weak suppression mode (first suppression Operation reception performance)”,
・Even if the above specific variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the production judgment (advance judgment, etc.), it will not occur even if the production of the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. , When a special result is obtained in the performance determination (announcement determination, etc.), it occurs when the performance of the specific variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. Then, when the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception acceptance state)" occurs in the production corresponding to the specific variation pattern, the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance acceptance state)" is produced in the production according to the specific variation pattern. Compared to when it does not occur, when the performance is accepted in the ``strong suppression mode (first acceptance acceptance state)'', the rate at which the performance after the operation is executed in a highly expected mode (a mode that appears only at the time of the big win) It is desirable to have a high

In such a configuration, in the production corresponding to the specific variation pattern, the "strong suppression mode (first reception acceptance state)" always occurs, whereas the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception acceptance state)" is When the ``weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance acceptance state)'' occurs, the highly expected post-operation performance is executed in the ``strong suppression mode (first acceptance acceptance state)''. Since the ratio becomes high, it becomes possible to draw attention to whether or not the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance acceptance state)" occurs, and the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance acceptance state)" )” occurs, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

However, the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception acceptance state)" does not necessarily occur in the same variation pattern as the "strong suppression mode (first reception acceptance state)". (First acceptance acceptable state)” may occur within the first variation pattern, and “weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance acceptable state)” may occur within the fourth variation pattern.

FIG. 165 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the fourth condition is satisfied and the fourth reception permission state occurs under the specific setting conditions (effect settings). FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which the fourth acceptable reception state occurs.

Now, for example, assuming that the starting condition is met (suspended digestion) in the above-mentioned "special effect state" and the "fourth variation pattern" is selected as a result of variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a: First, an effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (the effect depiction according to the fourth variable pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the fourth variable pattern, etc.) is started, and the notice is given within the execution period of the variable effect. An effect (announcement effect) corresponding to the result of effect determination is additionally executed to the effect of the selected "fourth variation pattern" itself.

Then, as described above, when a special result is obtained (when the fourth condition is satisfied) in the performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the control as shown in FIG. Secondly, when the timing tD3 when the fourth predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect of the decorative symbol SZ is reached, the fourth acceptance allowable state (effective period) in which the operation reception regarding the fourth post-operation effect is permitted. generate However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the fourth acceptance allowable state (effective period),
・Set a set time (effective period) during which operation reception is permitted while the "BGM playback sound" corresponding to the fourth variation pattern is being output in a non-suppressed mode, but within the set time (effective period) When an operation is accepted in , the "conditional suppression reception effect (Fig. 165 (a) and (b))”, and if no operation is detected within the set time (timings tD3 to tD4) during which operation reception is permitted, the operation corresponding to the fourth reception permission state "Non-automatic reception mode (see FIG. 165(h))" that does not generate the post effect (fourth operation post effect)
It is generated as "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect" executed by. As a method of outputting the "BGM playback sound" in a weakly suppressed mode, the volume value (maximum "100") for the channel to which the "BGM playback sound" is assigned is set to a strong suppression mode (for example, , volume value (audible volume) of "0") to a weak suppression value (for example, volume value (audible volume) of "10").

According to such "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic acceptance effect (fourth acceptance acceptance state)", unless the operation is accepted by the player's operation, the "specific type of effect sound (BGM 161, it appears as if the "non-suppressed reception effect (first acceptance permitted state)" shown in FIG. 161 is occurring. be able to That is, in this case, when the player operates, the player first recognizes that it is not a "suppressed reception effect" by changing to "a state in which a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback sound) is output in a suppressed mode". Since it becomes possible to enjoy the game, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by surprise production.

In addition, in order to obtain such an effect, the fourth variation that can occur depending on the result of the production judgment (preliminary judgment etc.) Patterns are made selectable only when in a special effect state (for example, a look-ahead effect zone, etc.) 161)" can be generated depending on the result of the production judgment (advance judgment, etc.). ) should be high. According to such a configuration, when the "conditional suppression/non-automatic reception effect" appears, the expectation is higher than when the "unsuppressed/non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 161)" appears. Combined with the above-described surprise effect elements, it is possible to improve the game interest.

Furthermore, in order to more preferably obtain the above effects, the "strong suppression mode (first reception acceptance state)" can occur in both the "normal presentation state" and the "special presentation state." In the "normal production state", "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception production (Fig. 161 )” and “suppression (strong suppression mode)/automatic reception effect (Fig. 162)” can occur in sequence, and in the “special effect state”, one variation pattern (one "Conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception performance (Fig. 165)" and "Suppression (strong suppression mode) / automatic reception performance (Fig. 162)" are sequentially performed within the production according to the variation pattern of It is desirable to allow it to occur.

Moreover, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic acceptance effect", when the set time (effective period) elapses without any operation being accepted, the "specific type of effect sound (BGM playback sound ) is output in a weakly suppressed manner”, and the subsequent productions will proceed. In other words, in this case, which of the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect" or "conditional suppression/non-automatic reception effect" occurred, and by extension, the "normal effect state" and the "special effect state" Since it is difficult to recognize which situation it is in, the production after that will progress, so it is said that expectations are relatively low. Even when the "operation reception effect (effective period)" occurs, it is possible to more positively prompt the player to perform an operation.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic acceptance effect (Fig. 165)" occurs ” occurs, the same effect sound is output for the same time as the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound). (Fig. 165)" and "non-suppressed/non-automatic acceptance presentation (Fig. 161)" is made difficult to recognize.

In addition, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 165)", as in the case where "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 161)" occurs,
a. The point that the narrow-range pre-production is performed at timing tD1 prior to acceptance of the operation,
b. When the timing tD2 slightly before the occurrence of the set time arrives, the "acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound)" is started to be output, and the output state is maintained across the timing tD2. point,
c. The second allowable sound (e.g., message sound) is not output, and the first allowable sound (e.g., effect sound) is output;
d. When the timing tD2 slightly before the occurrence of the set time arrives, the effect display device 1600 displays a model image (integrated model image) simulating the operation means to be operated in the operation reception effect. In addition to displaying a gauge image that suggests the remaining time until the set time has elapsed,
e. Even if an operation is accepted while the acceptable acceptance sound is being output, the acceptance acceptable sound in the output state is not terminated halfway.
f. At the time when the operation is accepted, the display state of the model image (integrated model image) and the gauge image is not hidden, and the display state is continued. g. Execution of the narrow-area disappearing effect while the model image (integrated model image) and the gauge image are displayed; and h. Even if the operation is not accepted, the narrow-area disappearance effect is executed, but the narrow-area disappearance effect is executed in a different manner (image) than when the operation is accepted. Each structure is also adopted, and this also causes either "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 165)" or "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 161)". I'm trying to make it difficult to recognize what I'm doing. According to such a configuration, while the output state (unsuppressed mode) of the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is maintained, "a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback sound) is output in a weakly suppressed mode. Since it becomes necessary to distinguish whether or not it has been shifted to "the state where it is performed" by listening, it is expected that the tension will be preferably maintained every time the reception of the performance is performed.

Therefore, as a display method for the model image, the gauge image, the narrow-range type front effect, and the narrow-range type extinction effect, it is the same as when the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 161)" occurs, for example, in Fig. 163 It is desirable to adopt the method shown, and it is desirable to adopt the same mode as the rendering example shown in FIG. 161 for the timing at which these images are hidden. However, the same aspect may not necessarily be adopted.

In addition, even in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic acceptance effect (Fig. 165)", if the operation is accepted within the set time (effective period) (timing tD3a in the figure), the operation acceptance As the corresponding post-operation effect, at least the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated. It has become. In the drawing, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker maintain the execution state for the same amount of time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden at a predetermined timing after timing tD4, regardless of the timing within the set time (effective period) when the effect is accepted. On the other hand, the post-operation output sound (effect sound) may be maintained in an output state for a predetermined time from the timing at which the operation is accepted. However, regardless of the timing at which the effect is accepted, if the timing tD4 has not passed, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) are output. It is required to be set to maintain the state.

161 and 163. In addition, regarding acceptance acceptable sounds and operation-related displays that appear in the "conditional suppression/non-automatic acceptance effect (Fig. 165)", pre-effects, disappearance effects, and post-operation effects, It is possible to adopt examples and modifications as appropriate, and it is desirable to use the same technique.

In this production example, the length of time (predetermined constant time) during which the "BGM playback sound" is output in a weakly suppressed mode is determined by the "conditional suppression/non-automatic reception effect (No. 4 Acceptance Acceptable State)”, even if the operation is accepted at the latest timing tD4 of the set time (effective period), the timing of ending the weak suppression mode is the end timing of the effect sound applied to the post-operation effect. It is set to arrive at the same time or later. However, the timing at which the weak suppression mode for the "BGM playback sound" ends may be set to always be the same as the timing at which the effect sound of the post-operation effect ends. With any of these configurations, it is possible to highlight the post-operation effect when the effect is accepted.

By the way, when an operation acceptance effect that can suppress a specific type of effect sound (for example, a effect sound of BGM reproduction) is generated, the degree of suppression is high (strong suppression mode or non-output first reception allowable state) or low ( As described above, the degree of expectation differs depending on whether the mode is the fourth reception acceptance state of the weak suppression mode. However, when a particular type of effect sound (for example, effect sound for BGM reproduction) is suppressed, it is estimated whether the degree of suppression is high or low (strong suppression mode, non-output, or weak suppression mode). Even if you try, it is actually difficult to guess whether the degree of suppression is high (strong suppression mode or no output) or low (weak suppression mode) without a comparison object. This is especially true when the volume value when suppressed does not have a large difference between the strong suppression mode and the weak suppression mode. is preferably maintained, and the player can be attracted to the presentation.

However, in reality, if it is impossible to guess whether the player is in the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode, there is a concern that the interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect element useful for guessing whether it is in the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode is displayed within the period from the start to the end of the operation reception effect. We are planning to prepare the following in a chronological order.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first allowable sound output when the fourth acceptance allowable state occurs is such that even if the effect is accepted while in the output state, the output is While the sound is output for a predetermined period of time without being terminated, the first permission sound output when the first reception permission state occurs is received during the output state. Then, based on the reception of the effect, the output is terminated halfway. In such a configuration, the first allowable sound itself has a function useful for guessing whether it is in the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode, so that the game can be played without being able to guess. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the first reception permission state occurs, the second permission sound is output in addition to the first permission sound. By confirming whether or not sound is output, it is also possible to estimate whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. However, the second allowable sound may not necessarily be prepared, and only the first allowable sound may be output in both the first acceptance allowable state and the fourth acceptance allowable state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation-related display (display prompting the operation) that appears within the set time (effective period) during which reception of the performance is permitted includes the special mode in the first reception permission state. 144 (a) to (d)), whereas in the fourth reception acceptance state, any of the multiple modes (FIGS. 144 (a) to (c)) excluding the special mode Therefore, it is possible to guess whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode by checking the operation-related display.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the output of the acceptable reception sound and the operation-related display is finished, it is assumed that it is not possible to guess whether it is in the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. Also, by confirming the execution mode of the post-operation effect, it is also possible to guess whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. That is, in the post-operation effect (fourth post-operation effect) corresponding to the fourth reception acceptance state, both the "effect by the liquid crystal display" and the "effect by the effect sound" are "a fixed effect from the time the effect is accepted." On the other hand, in the post-operation production (first post-operation production) according to the first reception acceptance state, the “production with sound production” is “a certain period of time from the time the production reception is received. However, the ``liquid crystal display effect'' is ``finished when a predetermined timing arrives''. That is, in this case, in the post-operation effect corresponding to the first reception permission state, the time from the end of the effect by the liquid crystal display to the end of the effect by the effect sound depends on the timing when the operation is accepted. Since it becomes variable and a large deviation occurs, it becomes possible to estimate whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode by confirming such a deviation.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode by confirming the mode of execution of the pre-staging and disappearance effects for the acceptable acceptance state. is also possible. In other words, in the pre-staging and disappearance effects that correspond to the fourth acceptable acceptance state, the image for the pre-staging and the image for the disappearance effect are displayed in a relatively narrow area, and at that time, the background image is not changed. On the other hand, in the pre-staging and annihilation effects according to the first reception acceptance state, the image for the pre-staging and the image for the annihilation effect are displayed in a relatively wide area, and the background image is changed at that time. We are planning to accompany them. By confirming such a mode as well, it is possible to guess whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode.

However, even if the production elements useful for guessing are scattered in chronological order in this way, some players may not notice them, and as a result, they may be in a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. If there is something that cannot be guessed, the interest in the game will eventually decrease.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the fourth reception acceptance state (weak suppression mode), the production sound for BGM reproduction is produced based on the reception of the production within the set time (effective period). Set to weak suppression mode. On the other hand, in the first acceptance allowable state (strongly suppressed mode or non-output), when the set time (effective period) has not yet occurred, the effect sound for BGM reproduction is set to the strongly suppressed mode, and the strongly suppressed mode is set. A set time (effective period) occurs in the mode, and the performance can be accepted. According to such a configuration, the timing for suppressing the specific type of effect sound (for example, effect sound for BGM reproduction) is suppressed in the fourth reception allowable state (weak suppression mode) and the first reception allowable state (strong suppression mode). are different, it becomes possible to estimate whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode by checking the timing.

Moreover, in the fourth acceptance acceptance state (weak suppression mode) according to this embodiment, unlike the case of the first acceptance acceptance state (strong suppression mode or no output), operation detection is not performed within the set time (effective period). When there is none, the post-operation effect is not automatically generated (see FIG. 165(h)). That is, in this case, if no operation is detected within the set time (effective period), suppression processing (weak suppression mode) triggered by operation acceptance for a specific type of effect sound (for example, effect sound for BGM reproduction) is also performed. Therefore, although there is a cost of not being able to confirm the effect after the operation, it becomes possible to recognize that it was in the weak suppression mode instead of the strong suppression mode.

In addition, in the first acceptance allowable state (strong suppression mode or non-output) according to this embodiment, the timing at which the process of switching the "effect sound for BGM reproduction" to the strong suppression mode is ended is set to the end timing of the post-operation effect. It is set as the same timing as or earlier than that. Therefore, in the fourth acceptance allowable state (weakly suppressed mode), the timing of ending the process of setting the "effect sound for BGM reproduction" to the weakly suppressed mode should come after the end timing of the post-operation effect. For example, by confirming the timing at which the "effect sound for BGM reproduction" is returned to the non-suppression mode, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode.

Further, as described above, in the fourth reception acceptance state according to the above-described production example, regardless of the timing within the set time (valid period) at which the production reception is made, the operation on the production display device 1600 (first production member) The length of the period in which the post-display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are performed in parallel remains unchanged. On the other hand, in the first reception allowable state, depending on at which timing within the set time (effective period) the production reception is performed, the display production (liquid crystal display) after operation in the production display device 1600 (first production member) , and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker (second effect member) are performed in parallel.

According to such a configuration, the effect is generated in "when to perform the performance reception (operation)", and the game interest can be preferably maintained until the performance reception (operation) is performed. Become.

It should be noted that the weak suppression mode, in which the "effect sound for BGM reproduction" is output at a lower degree of suppression than the strong suppression mode, is designed so that it can appear even when the opportunity to operate is not given (when the fourth reception acceptance state does not occur). may That is, in this case, after the "effect sound for BGM reproduction" is in the weakly suppressed mode for a predetermined time, it is returned from the weakly suppressed mode to the non-suppressed mode without being given an opportunity to operate. Then, within the effect corresponding to one variation pattern, the more the number of times the weak suppression mode appears, including the fourth acceptance allowable state, the higher the rate of suppression until the symbol variation is stopped (the second 1 reception allowable state is further executed), it is possible to further improve performance through suppression of the "effect sound of BGM reproduction".

Also, the strong suppression mode for the "effect sound for BGM reproduction" may appear even when the opportunity to operate is not given (when the first reception permission state does not occur). That is, in this case, after the "effect sound for BGM reproduction" is strongly suppressed for a predetermined period of time, the strongly suppressed mode is returned to the non-suppressed mode without being given an opportunity to operate. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a performance as to whether or not an operation opportunity is given when the strong suppression mode appears.

In addition, in the effect example shown in FIG. 165, when the fourth acceptance allowable state occurs, the "effect sound for BGM reproduction" is suppressed (weak) based on the fact that the operation is accepted within the set time (effective period). suppression mode). However, instead of this, even if the fourth reception acceptance state occurs, the "effect sound for BGM reproduction" is suppressed before the set time occurs, as in the case where the first reception acceptance state occurs. A mode (weak suppression mode) may be set, and a set time (effective period) may be generated during which performance reception is allowed while the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) is set. In this case, depending on whether or not a special result is obtained in the performance determination (notice determination, etc.), the "description sound for BGM reproduction" is suppressed (weakly suppressed) when a predetermined timing arrives. Since the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) is not set, the range of performance can be expanded. In the fourth reception acceptance state, the timing at which the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is returned from the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) to the non-suppression mode is the same as or later than the timing at which the post-operation effect is terminated. It is desirable to

Also, in the weak suppression mode, the volume value (audible volume) of the "specific type of effect sound" is set to a specific suppression value (a number greater than 0) lower than in the non-suppression mode, and output in an audible state. Even if the strong suppression mode is to make the "specific type of effect sound" in an inaudible state (output with no sound (audible volume is 0) or no output (end of channel assignment)) good.

In addition, in the above-described production examples, it is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is the operation target and the operation opportunity is given in the same operation mode. In this regard, in the "fourth acceptance acceptable state", the operation button 410 is used only as an operation target (first operation mode), but in the "first acceptance acceptable state", as described above, the result of the announcement effect determination is Based on this, there are "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)" and "when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)". Therefore, when the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode), it becomes possible to easily recognize that the weak suppression mode is not the strong suppression mode. It should be noted that the effects have been received in the case of "selecting the operation button 410 as the operation target (first operation mode)" and "when selecting the sword ornament 5001 as the operation target (second operation mode)". The production after the corresponding operation has the same content.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation means to be operated is
・A first operation mode in which the operation receiving part (the part touched by the player when operating) is not moved when the set time (effective period) occurs, and ・When the set time (effective period) occurs, the operation receiving part is moved by the driving force. An operation opportunity can be provided in any one of a plurality of modes including a second operation mode of moving to a specific position. Here, the "first operation mode" assumes that the operation button 410 is given an opportunity to operate, and the "second operation mode" assumes that the sword ornament 5001 is given an opportunity to operate. The sword ornament 5001 is "a thing that can give the player an opportunity to operate while moving to a specific position". However, one operation means (one operation receiving unit) may have a "first operation mode" and a "second operation mode", and an operation opportunity may be given by either of these modes. Further, as described above, the opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 may always be given in the first reception permission state.

According to the above-described effect example, the acceptance acceptance state (suppress 144(d)), the reception permission state is the "first reception permission state (strong suppression mode)". The case where the model image (integrated model image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 144(a)) is the special mode, and the reception permission state is the "first reception permission state (strong suppression mode or non-output)" or "fourth acceptance allowable state (weak suppression mode)".

That is, in this case, when the simulated image (integrated simulated image) is displayed in a special mode (Fig. 144(d)), if an operation is accepted while the acceptable acceptance sound is being output, the process will be terminated halfway. becomes (first acceptance allowable state). On the other hand, when the simulated image (integrated simulated image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 144(a)), if the operation is accepted while the acceptable acceptance sound is being output, the operation may end midway. There may be cases where the process is not terminated halfway (first reception permitted state, fourth reception permitted state). According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain the amusement of the game when the simulated image (integrated simulated image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 144(a)).

Also, when the model image (integrated model image) is displayed in the special mode (FIG. 144(d)), the acceptance acceptance state is executed in the automatic acceptance mode (first acceptance acceptance state). On the other hand, when the model image (integrated model image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 144(a)), the reception permission state is executed in the automatic reception mode and in the non-automatic reception mode. will occur (first reception permission state, fourth reception permission state). According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain the sense of tension when the simulated image (integrated simulated image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 144(a)).

In this regard, when the simulated image (integrated simulated image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 144(a)), it is displayed when the first acceptance state occurs and when the fourth acceptance state occurs. may be made different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize whether the reception allowable sound is terminated in the middle, and whether it is executed in the automatic reception mode or the non-automatic reception mode.

Further, according to the above-described production example, by confirming whether the pre-production is to be performed in the "wide-area type pre-production" or the "narrow-area type pre-production", a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) can be determined. It is possible to make it easy to confirm whether this is a "weakly suppressed mode" or a "strongly suppressed mode or non-output" when the sound) is put into the suppression mode. After that, by confirming whether or not it will be terminated halfway when the operation is performed while the reception acceptance sound is output, it is possible to determine whether it is in the "weakly suppressed mode (not terminated halfway)" or "strongly suppressed". It is possible to reconfirm whether it is a mode or non-output (end halfway through) while the post-operation effect is being performed.

Further, according to the above-described effect example, when the strong suppression mode or non-output is adopted, the effect sound of the specific type (BGM playback sound) is strongly suppressed or non-output, and the wide area type While the production is executed, when the weak suppression mode is adopted, the narrow-range pre-production is executed while the specific type of production sound (BGM playback sound) is not in the weak suppression mode. become. That is, in this case, it is possible to preferably maintain the effect when the narrow-range type pre-effect is performed.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the ratio of execution of the mode that appears only at the time of the big win as the post-operation effect is higher in the first acceptance acceptance state than in the second acceptance acceptance state (expectation is high). higher) is as described above. This percentage may be 0% or 100%. However, according to the above-described production examples, when the first reception permission state (special reception permission state) occurs and the second reception permission state (predetermined reception permission state) occurs before the operation is accepted. state) occurs, different production contents (acceptance acceptable sound, simulated image, pre-production, etc.) appear, so it is possible that such production contents will cause the second acceptance acceptable state (or , occurring), there is a concern that the player will lose interest in the game.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as one of the plurality of acceptance acceptable states, a fifth acceptance acceptable state (specified Acceptable state) is further prepared, and the fifth acceptable state is made difficult to distinguish from the second acceptable state until the operation is accepted. After that, by realizing the development of the performance that reminds the first reception permission state, it is possible to prevent the game interest from being lowered at least until the operation is received. In order to preferably obtain such a function and effect, when the fifth acceptance allowable state occurs, the first acceptance allowable state continues until the symbol is stopped after the occurrence of the second acceptability state. It is desirable to set so that the rate of occurrence is high. Further, it is desirable to set the ratios of the stoppage of the jackpot symbols when the second acceptability state occurs and when the fifth acceptability state occurs so as to be different from each other. These percentages may be 0% or 100%.

While making it difficult to distinguish between the second reception permission state and the fifth reception permission state, after the operation is received in the fifth reception permission state, the development of the performance is realized to remind the first reception permission state. As a method for doing so, for example, the same form of the acceptance acceptance sound is output when the second acceptance acceptance state occurs and when the fifth acceptance acceptance state occurs, but the first acceptance acceptance state occurs. In such a case, the mode in which the acceptance acceptable sound cannot be output in either the second acceptance acceptable state or the fifth acceptance acceptable state (for example, the type of sound as the first acceptable sound is different, and the second acceptable sound Further output mode, etc.) are output. Then, when an operation is accepted in the second acceptance allowable state, a post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) is executed while continuously outputting the sound that was in the output state at the time the operation was accepted. On the other hand, in the first acceptability state and the fifth acceptability state, when an operation is accepted, (all of) the sounds that were in the output state at the time the operation was accepted are output in a suppressed manner. A state or a non-output state is set, and a post-operation performance (a first post-operation performance or a fifth post-operation performance) is executed in the state. In this regard, if the specific effect movable body is used as an object to cause a change in both the effect after the first operation and the effect after the fifth operation, it is possible to distinguish between the second reception permitted state and the fifth reception permitted state. is made difficult, after the operation is accepted in the fifth acceptance allowable state, it is possible to realize the progress of the performance that reminds the first acceptance allowable state. As a result, the possibility that the first reception acceptance state has occurred (the possibility that the reception acceptance sound has been misheard) becomes conscious, and it is expected that the decline in the interest in the game will be suppressed. .

That is, in this case, in the first acceptance allowable state, at least an effect using the specific effect movable body is executed as a post-operation effect (first post-operation effect). 140 (C), (D), 141 (CC1) to (CC3), etc.) to move the specific effect movable body to the front side of the display area of the effect display device 1600. is possible.

On the other hand, even in the fifth acceptance allowable state, at least an effect using the specific effect movable body is executed as a post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect). It is desirable to execute the effect as if the content of the effect is significantly different from the post-effect. In other words, the fifth acceptance acceptable state is strictly defined as "Even if a situation appears in which the mode of the preproduction or acceptance acceptable sound suggests the possibility of occurrence of the second acceptance acceptable state with a low degree of expectation, at least the operation reception is acceptable. It is prepared for the purpose of enabling the enjoyment of the game to be maintained until the operation is performed, and gives an erroneous recognition that the first reception permission state has occurred at the time when the post-operation effect is executed. If there is such a thing as misrecognition, it is inevitable that the interest in the game will be lowered when the erroneous recognition is noticed.

Therefore, as such a post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect), it is desirable to perform an effect with a tendency to be more suppressed than in the case of the first post-operation effect. The specific effect movable body that was in the light emitting state at the time of the change is not operated (no driving force is generated), the light emitting range is reduced, or the light emitting state is changed to the non-light emitting state. It is possible to perform as a production that causes Note that, in the effect after the second operation, a change in effect that tends to be restrained, such as a reduction in the light emitting range of the specific effect movable body or a non-light emitting state, does not occur. In this case, the specific movable decoration has a predetermined light-emitting portion.

According to such a configuration, the effect change using the specific effect movable body is caused to evoke the first reception allowable state (effect after the first operation), thereby causing the second reception allowable state (second While trying to make the player recognize that it is not the post-operation production), the content of the restrained production is gradually exposed, and it is also calmly determined that it is not the first acceptance allowable state (first operation-post production). Since it becomes possible to play games, it is expected to suppress the decline in gaming interest.

In addition, in order to execute the fifth after-operation effect more preferably as an effect with a tendency to be more suppressed than in the case of the first after-operation effect, it is assumed that the effect after the first operation is the operation target. The operation means (operation receiving part such as a production button) is caused to emit light (or cause a change in light emission) when the operation is accepted, and a driving means (motor, etc.) provided corresponding to the operation means ) is driven to cause a predetermined movement (vibration, etc.), while in the fifth post-operation effect, the operation means (operation receiving part such as a production button) that is the operation target is operated. Triggered by the fact that the reception has been made, the light is extinguished (the light may be gradually extinguished), and a predetermined movement is performed without driving the driving means (such as a motor) provided corresponding to the operation means. (vibration, etc.) should be avoided. In this manner, the post-operation effects (first post-operation effect, fifth post-operation effect) targeting the same movable decorative body are executed in the first reception-permitting state and the fifth reception-permitting state. By creating a mode in which the contents of the effects are opposite between the effect after the 1st operation and the effect after the 5th operation, the above-described effects can be favorably achieved.

FIG. 166 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the fifth condition is satisfied and the fifth reception permission state occurs under the specific setting conditions (effect setting). FIG. 166 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which the fifth acceptable reception state occurs. The variation pattern will be described as the fifth variation pattern, but may be the first variation pattern as described above.

Now, assuming that the starting condition is satisfied (suspended digestion) in the normal game state (non-probability variable/non-time saving) and the "fifth variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a , First, the performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the fifth variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (such as the effect depiction according to the fifth variable pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the fifth variable pattern, etc.) is started, and the notice is given within the execution period of the variable effect. An effect (announcement effect) according to the result of effect determination is additionally executed to the effect of the selected "fifth variation pattern" itself.

As described above, in the fifth variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 166(b), when the timing tE3 after the fifth predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ, the fifth operation is performed. The fifth reception permission state (effective period) is generated in which operation reception regarding the post-performance is permitted. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the fifth acceptance allowable state (effective period),
・"Unsuppressed acceptance allowed state ( (see FIGS. 166(a) and 166(b))”, and if no operation is detected for the operation means that is the operation target within the set time (timings tE3 to tE4) during which operation acceptance is permitted. However, when the timing tE3c within the set time arrives, the post-operation effect is started "automatic acceptance mode (see FIG. 166(i))".
It is generated as "unsuppressed / automatic reception effect" executed by. The timing tE3c does not necessarily come within the set time, and may come when or after the end of the set time.

According to such a configuration, a situation appears as if the second reception acceptance state is occurring until the post-operation effect is started to be executed. Then, since the development of the performance as if recalling the first reception permission state is realized, the game interest can be preferably maintained until the performance is started after the operation. .

Also, in the fifth acceptance allowable state, similarly to the second acceptance allowable state, as shown in FIGS. ), the output of the "acceptance permissible sound (here, the first permissible sound)" is started at timing tE2, which is a little before the occurrence of ), and the output state is changed over the timing tE3 at which the set time occurs. I am trying to maintain it. The length of time from when the output of the first allowable sound is started to when the operation is accepted is also the same. In addition, the sound itself output as the first allowable sound is the same, and the point that the second allowable sound (message sound) is not output is also the same as in the second acceptance allowable state. As a result, until the operation is accepted, the acceptance acceptance sound appears in the same manner in the second acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state, so that the amusement of the game can be preferably maintained. Be expected.

However, as described above, in the second acceptance allowable state, the operation is performed at timing tB3a (FIG. 161(e)) when the "acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound)" is in an output state after the set time (effective period) has occurred. When the acceptance is made, the set time itself is ended, but the "reception allowable sound (first allowable sound)" is not terminated halfway, and is output as the first allowable sound at the timing (no operation is performed). On the other hand, in the fifth reception acceptance state, after the set time (effective period) occurs, the "acceptance acceptance sound (first When the operation is accepted at the timing tE3a (FIG. 166(e)) when the "acceptable sound)" is in the output state, the set time itself is ended, and the "acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound)" In other words, this kind of behavior (halfway termination) for the "acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound)" appears when an operation is accepted in the first acceptability state. Therefore (Fig. 162(e)), even though the situation is such that the fifth reception acceptance state is occurring, the effect progresses as if to evoke the first reception acceptance state. , is expected to favorably maintain amusement.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 166, when the operation is accepted within the set time of the fifth acceptance allowable state (timing tE3a in the figure), the effect display device is displayed as the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation acceptance. A post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in 1600 (first effect member) and a post-operation output sound (effect sound) by a speaker (second effect member) are generated (Fig. 166(d) reference). In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is maintained in the execution state until timing tE5 regardless of when the operation is accepted, and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) is in the execution state for a predetermined time. is maintained, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) does not necessarily have to be executed.

Also, although illustration is omitted, in this production example, a post-operation production (fifth post-operation production) corresponding to the fifth acceptance acceptable state and a post-operation production (first Post-operation effect), at least the "effect using the specific effect movable body" is executed. The effect contents of the "effect using a specific effect movable body" corresponding to the first acceptance acceptable state and the "effect using a specific effect movable body" corresponding to the fifth acceptance acceptable state are as described above. is. For example, as the effect after the first operation, a movable effect of moving the specific effect movable body to the front side of the display area of the effect display device 1600 (Figs. 140(C), (D), Figs. ), etc.) can be performed. In addition, as the effect after the fifth operation, the specific effect movable body that was in the light emitting state at the time when the operation was accepted is reduced in its light emitting range, or changed to a non-light emitting state. It can be done as a performance.

According to such a configuration, the effect change using the specific effect movable body is caused to evoke the first reception allowable state (effect after the first operation), thereby causing the second reception allowable state (second While trying to make the player recognize that it is not the post-operation production), the content of the restrained production is gradually exposed, and it is also calmly determined that it is not the first acceptance allowable state (first operation-post production). Since it becomes possible to play games, it is expected to suppress the decline in gaming interest.

Also in the example of effect shown in FIG. 166 (fifth acceptance-allowing state), as in the example of effect (second acceptance-allowing state) shown in FIG. When the previous timing tE2 arrives, the effect display device 1600 displays a simulated image simulating the operation means to be operated, and also displays a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the set time elapses. are performed respectively. The display mode of these model images and gauge images is also the same as in the case of the second reception acceptance state, and for example, they are displayed as an integrated model image IG. It is also the same that the special mode shown in FIG. 144(d) is not displayed as the integrated model image IG. As a result, until the operation is accepted, the same aspect of the model image and the gauge image appears in the second reception permission state and the fifth reception permission state, so that the interest in the game is preferably maintained. It is expected.

Also in this example, the timing at which the model image is displayed is set to be the same as the timing at which the reception acceptable sound (first acceptable sound) starts to be output. may be made. Alternatively, only one of the model image and the acceptable acceptance sound (for example, only the model image) may be started before timing tE3. However, even if such another example or another example described above is adopted, the configuration until the operation reception is performed should be matched between the second reception permission state and the fifth reception permission state. is desirable.

Also, in the examples shown in FIGS. 166(c) to (f), when timing tE3a arrives while such an integrated model image (model image, gauge image) is being displayed and an operation is accepted. is assumed. When the operation is accepted under such a situation, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example performs the fifth post-operation effect (display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and movable decoration At least one of the production actions by the body) is started, but in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at the time when the production after the fifth operation is started, the integrated model image (model image, gauge image) is not hidden and remains visible. More specifically, even if the operation is accepted, at that time (timing tE3a), the integrated model image (specific layer) does not change due to it, and after a short time (predetermined Until the timing tE3b when the time) has passed, the "display related to the integrated model image (model image, gauge image)" in the same manner as when the operation reception is permitted is continued. , and the display area of the gauge image is also reduced in the same manner as before.

Then, when timing tE3b arrives, an image (disappearance effect) is displayed in such a manner that a part or the whole of the integrated model image (model image, gauge image) in the display state is made difficult or invisible. make it appear. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the integrated model image (model image, gauge image) is not hidden even when such an image (disappearance effect) starts to be displayed. maintain state. More specifically, even under the situation where the annihilation effect is displayed (timing tE3b), in the layer where the integrated model image (model image, gauge image) is displayed, the integrated model image (model image, gauge image) The display area of the gauge image is also reduced in the same manner as before. However, by displaying the annihilation effect on the layer above it, the model image and the gauge image will be difficult to see or will become invisible.

That is, in this case, despite the fact that the image of the annihilation effect is displayed on a predetermined layer for the purpose of making the model image or gauge image (integrated model image) difficult to see or to make it invisible, The model image and gauge image (integrated model image) displayed on the specific layer (behind the predetermined layer (lower priority side)) remain in the state when the operation reception was permitted. is maintained and no change occurs. In addition, the display of the gauge image, which continues to decrease in display area, is continued across the reception of the operation. As a result, even in the process of making the model image and gauge image (integrated model image) difficult to see, or even in the process of making them invisible, the mode (at least part of) when operation acceptance was permitted become visible.

In addition, display output (display on the layer) regarding the integrated model image (model image, gauge image) ends during the period (timing tE3b to tE3e) during which the image of the disappearance effect is displayed. The image of the annihilation effect is displayed in a situation where the model image (model image, gauge image) is not displayed on the layer either.

Regarding the model image and the gauge image, the display method after the operation is accepted is common to the first acceptance state and the fifth acceptance state. no.

Also in the example shown in FIG. 166, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 161, when the timing tE1 before the timing tE3 at which the fifth acceptance allowable state occurs, less than half of the predetermined display area is displayed. Execution of the narrow-range type pre-production using only the area of is started. During the period in which the image related to the narrow-range type pre-effect is displayed, first, a simulated image (here, an integrated simulated image) simulating the operation receiving part is displayed, and the first allowable sound is displayed. and output are started (timing tE2). At the time when the display of the model image (here, the integrated model image) is started, part or the whole of the model image (integrated model image) becomes difficult to see due to the narrow-range pre-effect image. there is That is, according to the passage of time, the display range of the image related to the narrow-area type pre-effect is reduced, or the transmittance is increased, so that the "simulated image (integrated simulated image) The visibility of the image) will be gradually increased.” In this respect, even in the fifth reception-permissible state, the narrow-area type pre-rendering is being executed and the model image (here, the integrated model image) is being displayed. The timing tE3 at which is generated arrives, and operation reception is permitted, and the narrow-range type preliminary effect is performed across the timing tE3 at which the fifth reception permitted state occurs.

Here, the image used for such a narrow-area pre-rendering may be, for example, an image displayed in another layer before the layer in which the model image (integrated model image) is displayed. Then, the model image (integrated model image) and the image (narrow-range type pre-production) are displayed as one moving image prepared in advance, and the visibility of the model image (integrated model image IG) in the moving image gradually increases. It may be one that expresses how it is being raised. However, it is desirable to use the same narrow-range pre-effect image corresponding to the second acceptance-permissible state as the image of the narrow-range pre-effect corresponding to the fifth acceptance-permissible state.

In addition, in the narrow-range type pre-effect, not only the image display on the effect display device 1600 but also the related effect sound may be output. However, considering that the second acceptance acceptance state is executed in a non-automatic acceptance mode and is intended to maintain a sense of tension related to operations, the narrow-range type pre-production It can be said that it is preferable to perform image display on the effect display device 1600 without outputting the effect sound related to this, in order to increase concentration on the effect.

In this way, the narrow-area type pre-performance that occurs before the acceptance of the operation is permitted, since the same mode appears in the second reception-permitting state and the fifth reception-permitting state, the game interest is enhanced. It is expected to remain well.

According to such a configuration, until the operation is accepted, the production progresses in the same manner as the production contents shown in FIGS. Even if the player side is aware in advance that the highly anticipated first acceptance acceptance state has not occurred, it is interesting to know which of the second acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state will occur. As a result, it is expected that the decrease in interest in gaming will be suppressed.

However, as described above, after the operation by the player is detected in the fifth reception permission state and the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) is started, the first reception permission state is entered instead of the second reception permission state. The performance will be developed in a manner reminiscent of

That is, in the example of effect shown in FIG. 166, when an operation by the player is detected (operation is accepted) in the fifth acceptability state, the sound ( ) are put into an output state in a strongly restrained mode or put into a non-output state to terminate this halfway. In the example shown in FIG. 162 (first acceptance allowable state), when the operation is accepted, the "first allowable sound" and "second allowable sound" that were output in the non-suppressed mode are changed to the strongly suppressed mode. 166, but in the example shown in FIG. The "BGM reproduction sound" and the "first allowable sound" which have been output in the mode are changed to the output state in the strong suppression mode or to the non-output state, and these are terminated halfway. As a result, regarding (all of) the sounds that were output in the non-suppressed state before the operation was accepted, the operation acceptance is triggered in both the second acceptance-permitting state and the fifth acceptance-permitting state. , the first reception allowable state can be recalled at the timing tE3a shown in FIG. Appropriate maintenance of amusement will be expected.

In this case, it does not matter whether the output state in the strong suppression mode or the non-output state is set when the operation is accepted. It is desirable to perform the same processing in . For example, in the second reception acceptance state, if the sound that has been output in a non-suppressed mode until then is turned into a non-output state when the operation reception is triggered, even in the fifth reception acceptance state, the operation reception is the trigger. The sound that has been in the output state in the non-suppressed mode until then is put in the non-output state.

On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 166(g) to (k), it is assumed that the set time has passed (the second reception permission state has ended) without the player's operation being detected. As described above, the fifth acceptability state is executed in the automatic acceptance mode. Therefore, when the predetermined timing tE3c arrives without any operation by the player, the operation is accepted. The same processing will be executed.

Therefore, at the timing tE3c, not only does the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) start to be executed, but the sound that has been output in the non-suppressed mode (here, the BGM playback sound) is strongly suppressed. , or to a non-output state to abort them. Even in the first acceptance allowable state (FIG. 162), a predetermined sound (for example, the first allowable sound) is output in a non-suppressed manner until timing tC4f at which the automatic button function is activated, and the timing tC4f. , it may be set to an output state in a strongly restrained mode, or set to a non-output state, and terminated halfway.

Further, at timing tE3d, while the effect after the fifth operation is already in the execution state, the execution of the "wide area type disappearance effect" is started as the disappearance effect described above. As for the "wide-area disappearing effect", the image itself may not necessarily be the same as in the case of the first reception-permitting state, but the background image that was displayed until the operation was accepted is erased with a change. It is desirable to have it executed as an effect. That is, in this case, it goes without saying that at least half or more of the display area is used for execution. As a result, the disappearance effect after the operation is accepted (after the post-operation effect is executed) is the same in both the second acceptance-allowed state and the fifth acceptance-allowed state (wide area-type disappearance effect). Therefore, after the operation is accepted (after the post-operation effect is executed, the first acceptance acceptance state can be recalled, and the game interest can be preferably maintained. The manner in which such an disappearance effect is applied is the same when the operation is accepted (timing tE3b) and when the automatic button function is activated (timing tE3c). is the same as in the case of the first acceptability state.

Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 166, the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) ends at the timing at which the "BGM playback sound" is again output in the non-suppressed mode in the fifth acceptance-allowed state. Although the timing tE5 is set as the timing tE5 when the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) is being executed, it may be the timing that arrives while the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) is being executed. It may be the timing that comes after the end.

Also, in the first reception permission state, similarly to the fifth reception permission state, the timing at which the "BGM playback sound" is set to the output state or the non-output state in the suppression mode is set to the time when the operation is received. good too.

In the first reception permission state and the fifth reception permission state, a process to change the sound that has been output in the non-suppression mode to "output in the suppression mode" or "non-output state" and to change the output sound after the operation. The processing to be output does not necessarily have to be started at the same timing, and it is sufficient if all of these processes are started to be executed based on the acceptance of the operation.

Also, as described above, when the operation is accepted in the fifth acceptance allowable state, this triggers the specific effect movable body that has been in the light emitting state to be turned off for a predetermined period of time (the fifth operation post-effect), and when the operation is accepted in the first acceptance-permitting state, this is used as a trigger to give a driving force to the specific effect movable body so that a predetermined effect action appears (after the first operation directing) is desirable. Further, at this time, in the effect after the first operation, a driving force is generated in the driving means corresponding to the operating means to be operated so that a predetermined movement (vibration or the like) appears in the operating means. On the other hand, it is desirable not to perform such processing in the post-fifth operation effect. In this case, in the first post-operation effect, the lighting mode of the operation means that is the operation target is changed, while in the fifth after-operation effect, the light emission of the operation means that is the operation target is turned off. It is desirable to make It is desirable that these processes in the first acceptance state and the fifth acceptance state can appear when the same result (for example, winning a big win) is obtained as a result of the judgment of the big win.

Further, when the movement effect by the specific effect movable body is performed in the effect after the first operation, it is desirable to be able to emit light in such a manner that it does not appear when the specific effect movable body is not operating.

Further, in the effect after the first operation, the effect sound corresponding to the reception of the operation is started to be output and then continuously output, whereas in the effect after the fifth operation, the effect sound corresponding to the reception of the operation is output. is output for a predetermined period of time, it is desirable that a state in which no dramatic sound is output in a non-suppressed manner (a state in which a strongly suppressed state is output or a state in which no sound is output) appears. According to such a configuration, in the post-fifth-operation effect, while the effect sound corresponding to the reception of the operation is properly executed, there is a tendency to suppress this as compared with the case of the first-post-operation effect. As a result, it is expected that the amusement of the game will be favorably maintained.

Further, it is desirable that the reception permission sounds output when the first reception permission state and the fifth reception permission state are generated are different. That is, as described above, in the first acceptance state, the first acceptable sound (sound effect) and the second acceptable sound (message sound) are output. The allowable sound (message sound) is not output, and the first allowable sound (effect sound) is output. However, it is desirable that the first allowable sound (sound effect) itself is also output as a different sound.

Further, as described above, in the first acceptance allowable state and the fifth acceptability state (second acceptance allowable state), the same mode (shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(c)) as a model image (integrated model image) mode) can be displayed. However, even if the same mode is displayed as a model image (integrated model image) in the first reception acceptance state and the fifth reception acceptance state (second reception acceptance state), the size required for the display are made different (similar in shape), and in the fifth reception acceptance state (second reception acceptance state), it is desirable to display in a smaller form than in the first reception acceptance state. However, the sizes are displayed in the same manner in the second reception-allowed state and the fifth reception-allowed state. Note that in the first acceptance state, the special mode can be displayed as a model image (integrated model image), but in the fifth acceptance state (second acceptance state), the model image (integrated model image ) is not displayed as a special mode, as described above.

In addition, in the first post-operation effect corresponding to the first acceptance allowable state, the effect sound (variation pattern It is desirable to start outputting the production sound output at a predetermined timing in the above in a non-suppressed manner (for example, return of BGM). On the other hand, in the fifth post-operation effect corresponding to the fifth acceptance allowable state, the effect sound not triggered by the operation acceptance ( It is desirable to prevent the production sound output at a predetermined timing within the variation pattern from being output in an unsuppressed manner. That is, in this case, after the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation acceptance is set to the non-output state, the effect sound not triggered by the operation acceptance (the effect sound output at the predetermined timing within the variation pattern) is non-output. Since the output is started in the suppressed mode, by adopting such a suppressed mode as compared with the case of the first reception permitted state, the game interest can be maintained favorably.

Further, as described above, the second acceptance acceptance state can occur in both the variation pattern in which the first acceptance acceptance state occurs and the variation pattern in which the first acceptance acceptance state does not occur. When the state occurs, the possibility of the first acceptance allowable state occurring within the period until the symbol variation in the execution state is stopped may be provided. In addition, the fifth reception acceptance state can also occur in both a variation pattern in which the first reception acceptance state occurs and a variation pattern in which the first reception acceptance state does not occur, thereby generating the fifth reception acceptance state. When the game is executed, the possibility of occurrence of the first reception permission state may be provided within a period until the symbol variation in the execution state is stopped. However, in this case, when the fifth reception acceptance state occurs, the rate of occurrence of the first reception acceptance state within the period until the symbol fluctuation is stopped is higher than when the second reception acceptance state occurs. should be set to This ratio may include 0% and 100%. According to such a configuration, even if the player perceives in advance that the first acceptance allowable state has not occurred before the operation is accepted, the fifth acceptability state has occurred. Since it becomes possible to look forward to the possibilities, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in games.

According to the example of effect described above, as a result of accepting an operation while the model image (integrated model image) is being displayed in a mode different from the special mode (the mode shown in FIG. 144(d)), the operation If the acceptable reception sound is not terminated in the middle based on the reception, not only the acceptable reception sound but also other sounds ("BGM playback sound" etc.) output in the non-suppressed mode are also unsuppressed. The output state is maintained (see FIG. 161). On the other hand, as a result of receiving an operation while the model image (integrated model image) is being displayed in a mode different from the special mode (the mode shown in FIG. 144(d)), If the acceptable reception sound is terminated in the middle, not only the acceptable reception sound but also other sounds (such as "BGM playback sound") that were output in the non-suppressed mode are output or not output in the strongly suppressed mode. (see FIG. 166).

According to the production example described above, in the situation where the big hit is obtained in the big hit determination, as a result of the operation being accepted while the model image (integrated model image) is being displayed, the operation is accepted based on the operation acceptance. When the permissible sound is terminated in the middle, based on the operation reception, "When the specific effect movable body is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner and a specific effect action is generated (Fig. 162)" A case where the light emitting area of the specific effect movable body is reduced or the process of turning off the light is performed, and no effect action is caused (Fig. 166). Therefore, it is possible to preferably maintain the amusement of the game under the condition that the reception allowable sound is terminated in the middle. It should be noted that, in the case of ``lighting the specific effect movable body in a predetermined manner and generating a specific effect action (Fig. 162)'', non-light emission is performed by ``reducing the light emitting area of the specific effect movable body or extinguishing the light''. It is desirable to make the portion where the light is emitted also emit light.

In each of the production examples described above and each production example described later, the integrated model image may be displayed using a plurality of layers. Also, when the model image and the gauge image are separately displayed as separate images instead of the integrated image, they may be displayed on different layers.

In each example described above and each example described later, the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound are output so that there is a timing when they overlap each other. Output of the second allowable sound may be started.

In addition, in the acceptability state according to each example described above and each example described later, the model image is displayed as an integrated model image IG including the gauge image GG, but it is not necessarily displayed as an image including the gauge image GG. It doesn't have to be.

The acceptability states according to the examples described above and the examples described later can occur both in the variation pattern at the time of the big win and in the variation pattern at the time of the loss.

In each acceptance acceptable state described above and each acceptance acceptable state described later, when the post-operation production is executed, the disappearance effect is executed as an image different from the model image, but it is executed in a non-automatic acceptance mode. Only when the post-operation effect is not executed as a result, it is preferable to execute the extinction effect by fading out the model image itself so as not to recognize the degree of expectation. In this case, the model image itself displayed on the specific layer is changed from the state in which the reception is allowed.

In each reception acceptance state described above and each reception acceptance state described later, even if the same reception acceptance state The type of disappearance effect may be changed depending on the degree of expectation as such a mode.

The wide-area annihilation effect is set to more than half of the display screen, and the narrow-area annihilation effect is set to less than half of the display screen. It does not have to satisfy the condition of more than half or less than half. As for the pre-production, the wide-area pre-production should be more than half of the display screen, and the narrow-area pre-production should be less than half of the display screen. , does not necessarily satisfy the condition of more than half or less than half.

The post-operation effect may be executed only by liquid crystal display, sound output, or light emission from a lamp provided on the game board 5 . In short, any change may be made in display, sound, light emission, or the like, triggered by the reception of an operation.

Also, the “specific type of effect sound” may be a BGM playback sound that is output during normal fluctuations, or may be a BGM playback sound that is output over a plurality of fluctuations.

Further, the fourth reception-permitting state does not necessarily have to be executed in the non-automatic reception mode, and may be executed in the automatic reception mode.

In addition, a post-operation effect (first post-operation effect) when an operation is accepted in the first acceptance-permitting state (first post-operation effect) and a post-operation effect (fourth post-operation effect) when an operation is accepted in the fourth acceptance-permitting state. It is desirable to make the contents of the presentation different from each other.

In each example described above and each example described later, when the disappearance effect (predetermined layer) is displayed, processing to reduce the visibility of the integrated model image IG (specific layer) itself (increase the transmittance, etc.) may be performed at the same time.

In each of the examples described above and each example described later, the image applied with the disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance effect, narrow-area disappearance effect) may be displayed with a predetermined transmittance. Even if it is displayed so as to overlap the entire model image (integrated model image), it is possible to confirm the mode of the model image (integrated model image).

In each of the production examples described above and each production example described later, the “narrow area type pre-production” means “background change (the background image that has been displayed so far is made invisible, and a new background image is displayed. It may also be referred to as "pre-production" without production). In this case, the "wide area type pre-effect" means "change of background (effect that makes the background image that was displayed until then invisible and the effect is performed with a new background image displayed) It means "pre-staging accompanied by". The background image may be a solid black or solid white image.

In each of the production examples described above and each production example described later, the aspect shown in FIG. 144(d) may be omitted as the aspect of the integrated model image. In this case, the "special mode" refers to a mode in which the shape of the operation means (the model image itself imitating the operation receiving part is the same and the shape of the peripheral decoration image is different (the mode shown in FIG. 144(c)). will be used.

In each of the production examples described above and each production example described later, when a model image (integrated model image) is displayed, the model image is the "operation in the movable area" or the "operation As described above, this is dynamically displayed in the form of expressing "behavior when In this regard, it is desirable that such dynamic display continues on the specific layer until it is hidden even after the operation is accepted.

In each of the production examples described above and each production example described later, the display method for the simulated images may be changed as appropriate to FIGS. or may be added. 232 to 160, explanations corresponding to these figures, and examples of "BGM It may be appropriately changed or added to the explanatory text described in relation to "Valid period that occurs while the sound of reproduction is strongly suppressed" or the content applied to another example . 232 to 160, and explanations and other examples corresponding to these figures, "BGM It may be appropriately changed or added to the explanatory text described in relation to "Effective period that occurs while the sound of reproduction is in a non-suppressed mode" or the content applied to another example .

[Further details about effect such as disappearance of model image]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, variation regarding which of a plurality of variation patterns is to be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the start winning (holding digestion) Pattern judgment can be executed. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern It is possible to execute a production judgment (such as advance notice judgment) as to which of the expected productions (such as advance notice production) is to appear selectively. It should be noted that depending on the result of the production determination, all of the plurality of expected productions prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern (notice production, etc.) may be sequentially executed, or None of the expected effects (notice effects, etc.) may be executed.

And as described above, when such production determination (fluctuation pattern judgment, advance notice judgment, etc.) is performed, by performing control to display the production content according to the result of the production judgment on the production display device 1600, the big hit judgment The variable production by the decorative pattern according to the result is executed together with the expected production (preliminary production) related to the background depiction (background advance notice), movable body operation (role production), and the like. As a result, as a result of execution of the variation effect by the decorative pattern together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, etc., when the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, the player can enjoy the big win game and the high prize as a privilege. Transition to the probability game state is made executable.

In such a configuration, the variable performance by the decorative pattern is provided as a performance having "a function indicating whether or not a big hit has been obtained as a result of the judgment of a big hit", and the background depiction, the movement of the movable body, etc. is provided as an effect having "the function of suggesting the degree of expectation, that is, the ratio (including 0% and 100%) of the fact that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the determination of the variation pattern, it is specified among the highly expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach effects with background changes, etc.) If the variation pattern is selected, even if any result is obtained as the production determination (preliminary judgment etc.), when the pattern production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach (predetermined condition is established), it is possible to generate an acceptance acceptance state (effective period) in which the acceptance of the performance is allowed.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low-expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the determination of the variation pattern. Even in the case, when a special result is obtained in the production determination (preliminary judgment etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the pattern production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (predetermined condition is established Then), it is possible to generate an acceptance allowable state (effective period) in which the performance acceptance is allowed. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination, even if the symbol performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, the reception acceptance state (effective period) does not occur. . In addition, the reception acceptance state (valid period) that occurs in a predetermined variation pattern is different from the reception acceptance state (valid period) that occurs when the pattern effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as a performance.

In addition, even if any result is obtained as a notice effect judgment, at a predetermined timing during SP reach, regarding the fluctuation pattern that generates the acceptance acceptable state (effective period), in addition to the above "specific fluctuation pattern" may also be provided. However, even if any result is obtained as a result of the advance notice effect judgment, the fluctuation pattern that causes the reception acceptance state (effective period) at the predetermined timing is included in the low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) It is desirable to prevent it from being lost or to lower its selection ratio.

By the way, the acceptability state (effective period) that can occur under these conditions etc. means that as long as the player's operation is detected within the set time (effective period), the effect member to be the object of the effect A post-acceptance effect (post-operation effect) that causes a predetermined change (at least one of display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and effect action by the movable decoration) is executed. Therefore, the reception permission state (effective period) itself has poor performance, and there is concern that the enjoyment of games related to the reception period will decrease.

In addition, including the examples described above and the examples described later, the "player's operation" to be detected means that the player directly operates the "operation button 410", the "sword ornament 5001", or the like. (Pressing action or drawing action), "player's contact action on a specific part" to be detected by the touch sensor, and "player in a specific space" to be detected by the non-contact sensor This means that it also includes "operation by". In short, any one or a plurality of reception means (operation means) for receiving actions (pressing action, sword drawing action, touch action, non-contact action, etc.) by the player are included in the performance. Just do it.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, the following special effects are provided. It should be noted that each performance (each configuration) described below does not necessarily have to include all of these configurations. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest, or it may be selectively provided with some configurations that are considered necessary to obtain further effects, or it can be applied to other configurations. You may make it employ|adopt the structure described as suitably. Furthermore, each effect (configuration) described below is merely an example, and any configuration capable of suppressing a decline in interest in the game related to the acceptance period may be provided.

[Configuration 1]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the model image displayed using a predetermined area in the display screen (effect display device 1600) is displayed based on the acceptance of the action by the player. After the production has progressed (after the production change based on the acceptance has started), the model image display can be accepted even after the production has progressed based on this acceptance. The player can grasp which mode (for example, FIGS. 144(a) to (d)) was displayed during the period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the contents of the production that progresses when the reception is received (conversation notice, cut-in notice, movable body notice, etc. as production after reception, notice production (expectation suggestive production) ) types) are prepared, and it is possible to generate a type of reception period (valid period) according to the result of the judgment (effect judgment).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as will be described later, when an action by a player is accepted within a specific acceptance period, a specific post-acceptance effect image is displayed on the basis of the acceptance. In addition, a specific mode can appear separately from the specific post-acceptance effect image, and when the specific mode appears, the model image display becomes difficult to see. In other words, in this case, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the model image display even after the acceptance is made. By reducing the visibility by , it is expected to encourage the player to naturally shift the gaze target from the "simulated image display" to the "specific post-reception effect image". .

However, since the display of the model image is originally intended to be displayed during the acceptance period when the acceptance has not yet been made, if the model image is displayed even after the acceptance has been made, It becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the specific post-reception effect image has already been displayed, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may decrease. In this respect, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the model image display is hidden (invisible) while the specific mode is appearing, while the specific after-receipt effect is displayed. The image is intended to be displayed while the particular aspect is present. That is, in this case, after the action is accepted by the player, while the specific mode is appearing, the display effect changes from the pre-acceptance display (simulated image display) to the post-acceptance display (specific post-acceptance effect image). Since the transition is realized, it is possible to change from the pre-reception display (simulated image display) simply by confirming whether the situation is before the specific mode appears or whether the specific mode has finished appearing. It becomes possible to easily recognize whether or not the transition to the post-reception display (the specific post-reception effect image) has been completed.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, both the specific mode and the specific after-acceptance effect image appear based on acceptance. It appears before the post-effect image is displayed, in a situation where the specific post-acceptance effect image has not yet been displayed. That is, in this case, in a situation where the specific post-acceptance effect image has not yet been displayed, the model image display becomes difficult to see due to the above-described specific mode. After receiving the reception, the effect image is likely to appear soon, and it is possible to encourage the player to prepare in advance to change the target of the player's attention from the "simulated image display that is difficult to see". .

[Configuration 2]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the first acceptance period (valid period) of the plurality of acceptance periods (valid period), A mode in which the first post-reception effect image can be displayed based on the acceptance, and the model image display becomes difficult to see separately from the first post-reception effect image (first effect mode) can appear. Further, when an action by the player is accepted within a second acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods (valid periods), a second post-acceptance effect image different from the first post-acceptance effect image is generated based on the acceptance. 2 post-reception effect image can be displayed, and apart from the second post-reception effect image, a mode different from the case of the first reception period (second effect aspect) can appear. The above-mentioned "specific mode" may correspond to either the first rendering mode or the second rendering mode, or may correspond to none of them.

According to such a configuration, the model image display can be visually recognized without confirming which of the "first after-reception effect image" and the "second after-reception effect image" is displayed as the after-reception effect image. It is possible to guess the type of post-reception performance image (first post-reception performance image, second post-reception performance image) only by confirming what kind of mode the difficult mode was. That is, the mode (first effect mode, second effect mode) in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize means that at least a part of the predetermined area in the "display screen of the effect display device 1600" where the model image display is displayed is It is realized as an image displayed in the overlapping specific area (if it overlaps with the whole from the start of appearance, a predetermined transmittance will be set), or it is a model image display and front view Needless to say, it is realized as an effect (for example, a movable body effect) using a predetermined effect object in an overlapping position. Therefore, even if there is a player who does not change the target of gaze from the model image display even after the acceptance, the types of aspects (first presentation mode, second presentation mode) that appear (so as to overlap the model image display) appear at the target of gaze (first presentation mode, second presentation mode) ), so that the type of post-reception effect (first post-reception effect image, second post-reception effect image) can be guessed without changing the gaze point. Become

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the third acceptance period (valid period) of the plurality of acceptance periods (valid period), A third post-reception effect image different from the first post-reception effect image and the second post-reception effect image can be displayed based on the acceptance, but the third post-reception effect image can be displayed. Separately, the first effect mode corresponding to the first reception period can appear as a effect mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the display of the model image.

According to such a configuration, when the first effect mode appears, it is unclear which of the first and third post-acceptance effect images will appear. As a mode for making the model image display difficult to visually recognize, it is made possible to guess that a second post-acceptance effect image will appear when the second effect mode appears. That is, in this case, for example, when the first effect mode appears, it is possible to recognize that the possibility of outputting the second after-reception effect image is denied. Since it is unclear which one will appear and the player can be interested in which one will appear, when a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display appears While maintaining the performance and tension of the reception, it is possible to appropriately prompt the shift of the gaze destination to the place where the performance is being executed after reception.

Here, the "post-reception effect image" is illustrated as the post-reception effect. (or executed when there is an acceptance within one acceptance period, but not when an acceptance is received within the other acceptance period), the above-described "acceptance It is also possible to replace "post-effect image" with "lamp emission" or "movable body operation". In any case, in view of the above-mentioned effects such as "be able to guess the type of production after reception without changing the gaze point", a model image display is displayed for production after reception. It is realized as being executed at a position that does not overlap (a position that cannot be confirmed unless the player changes his gaze from the position where the simulated image display is displayed). In addition, if multiple post-reception effects such as "post-reception effect image", "lamp emission", and "movable body operation" are performed in parallel based on the acceptance, at least one of the post-reception effects is the above. It can be said that the above effects can be achieved if it corresponds to the "effect after reception".

If multiple post-reception effects (multiple post-reception modes) such as "post-reception effect image", "lamp emission", and "movable body operation" are performed in parallel based on the acceptance, those post-reception effects ( The fact that at least one of the post-reception mode) can be equivalent to the "post-reception effect" can be applied not only to the above-described effect examples, but also to each effect example described later.

[Configuration 3]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period (specific acceptance period), an effect (of and a state in which the model image display is relatively easy to see and a state in which the model image display is relatively difficult to see during the execution period of the special effect mode. I have to.

That is, in this case, even after the execution of the special effect mode (post-reception effect) is started based on the acceptance, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the model image display. . In addition, during the execution period of the special effect mode (effect after reception), by making the model image display relatively difficult to see, , so that the player's gaze target will be naturally shifted to .

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, the above-mentioned special effect mode (effect after reception) does not affect the visibility of the model image display that is continuously displayed (displayed in an easy-to-view state) before the reception. Execution is started as follows. More specifically, the simulated image display is displayed in a predetermined area within the display screen (effect display device 1600), and the special effect mode (effect after reception) displays at least part of the predetermined area. It is not an image display that is displayed using the display, nor is it an effect that is executed at a position that overlaps at least a part of the predetermined area when viewed from the front. As a result, during the execution period of the special effect mode (effect after reception), by making the model image display relatively difficult to see, it is possible to switch from the "model image display" to the "special effect mode (effect after reception)". )” to encourage the player to naturally shift the gaze target.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the acceptance is made within a specific acceptance period, at least the special effect mode and the predetermined effect mode appear in parallel based on the acceptance. It has become. However, the execution of the predetermined effect mode starts after the execution of the special effect mode is started (behind the special effect mode) so as to adversely affect the visibility of the model image display (make the model image display difficult to see). It is supposed to be As a result, during the execution period of the special effect mode (effect after reception), by making the model image display relatively difficult to see, it is possible to switch from the "model image display" to the "special effect mode (effect after reception)". )” to encourage the player to naturally shift the gaze target.

It should be noted that the processing for causing the predetermined presentation mode to appear is also started upon acceptance. Therefore, a plurality of post-reception performances (a plurality of post-reception modes) including at least a special performance mode and a predetermined performance mode are performed in parallel, and the predetermined performance mode is realized as one mode of the post-reception performance. You may do so. In any case, the predetermined effect mode described in this configuration example is an image display that is displayed using at least a portion of a predetermined area in which a simulated image display is displayed, or at least a portion of the predetermined area. It is realized as an effect that is executed using the effect object that overlaps with , when viewed from the front.

[Configuration 4]
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when the action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period (specific acceptance period), while the model image display is being displayed, Using a specific area including at least part of the predetermined area that is the display target area of the model image display, it is possible to display a "specific extinction effect display" as a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image display. The image display is hidden while the specific disappearance effect display is being displayed after the display of the specific disappearance effect display is started.

That is, in this case, even after the acceptance is made, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the model image display. In addition, the visibility of the model image display is reduced by a specific extinction effect display until the model image display is hidden, and the model image display is hidden while the visibility is reduced. From this, it can be suggested that the remaining time until the display of the model image is hidden is short, and the decline in the interest in the game when the display of the model image is hidden is suppressed. become nauseous.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, the specific disappearance effect display can be displayed even after the model image display is hidden, and at least the specific disappearance effect display is displayed. Execution of the production is started after the acceptance. Then, the post-acceptance effect is displayed using at least a part of the specific area that is the display target area of the specific disappearance effect display, or (at least one of) the specific disappearance effect display. ), and is implemented by using a production object that overlaps with the part) when viewed from the front.

According to such a configuration, among the post-acceptance effects, the specific post-acceptance effect that is executed at a position that overlaps the specific disappearance effect display when viewed from the front is watched from the position where the specific disappearance effect display is displayed. It becomes recognizable without moving ahead. That is, in this case, when the specific disappearance effect display is displayed, it is possible to recognize that it is not necessary to change the gaze destination in order to grasp the mode of the specific post-acceptance effect, It becomes possible to suitably maintain the game interest.

[Configuration 5]
Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, during the period from when the action by the player is accepted in the acceptance period (specific acceptance period) until the model image display is hidden, the specific mode is When the specific mode appears, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the model image display. Regarding this point, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the sign effect display is executed in a specific sign mode based on the fact that the result of the win/lose determination is a special result (for example, a big win, a variable probability big win, etc.). If the action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period corresponding to the indication effect display, the specific mode is the period from the acceptance until the model image display is hidden. It is made possible to appear in

That is, in this case, when the precursor effect display is executed in the specific precursor mode, it is possible to recognize that the specific mode appears until the model image display is hidden, making it difficult to visually recognize the model image display. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to pay attention to which mode the model image display appears before the player performs an action. In addition, the "specific mode" according to the configuration 5 and the "specific mode" according to the configuration 1 may be the same mode, or may be different modes, and may occur in response to different reception periods. may be

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, based on the fact that the result of the win/lose determination is a special result (for example, a big win, a variable probability big win, etc.), an indication effect display is executed in a manner different from the specific indication manner. When the action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period corresponding to the precursor effect display (acceptance period different from the specific acceptance period), the specific mode is a state in which the model image display is hidden from the time of acceptance. There are cases where it appears within the period until it is completed, and cases where it does not appear within that period.

According to such a configuration, when the portent effect display is executed in a mode different from the specific portent mode, the specific mode is performed until the model image display is turned off after the acceptance of the specific mode. Since it is unknown whether or not it will appear within the period of , the performance will be improved after it is accepted until the model image display is hidden. It becomes possible to suitably maintain the feeling of tension.

Configuration 5 above may be realized by replacing it with the following configuration, or may be provided as a configuration (acceptance period) different from configuration 5 above. That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, during the reception period (a specific reception period or a reception period different from the specific reception period), the model image display is in a non-display state after the player's action is received. During the period until the display is completed, a specific mode may appear, and when the specific mode appears, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the model image display. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the sign effect display is a special sign mode (same as the specific ) and the action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period corresponding to the precursor effect display, the specific mode is such that the model image display is hidden from the time of acceptance. It will not be possible to appear within the period until. That is, in this case, when the precursor effect display is executed in the special precursor mode, the specific mode does not appear until the model image display is hidden, making it difficult to visually recognize the model image display in relation to the specific mode. You will be able to recognize that you will not be abused.

In this case, in the pachinko machine 1, based on the fact that the result of the win/lose determination is a special result (for example, a big win, a variable probability big win, etc.), the sign effect display is executed in a mode different from the special sign mode. When the player's action is accepted within the acceptance period corresponding to the effect display (acceptance period different from the acceptance period), the specific mode is such that the model image display is hidden from the time of acceptance. There are cases where it appears within the period up to and there are cases where it does not appear within that period. Even with such a configuration, when the portent effect display is executed in a mode different from the special portent mode, the model image display is turned off from the time the specific mode is accepted. Since it will be unknown whether or not it will appear within the period until, after it is accepted, the effect will be improved until the model image display is hidden. , the tension can be preferably maintained.

As for the configurations according to these modified examples (replacement examples), it is possible to appropriately apply the above-described or later-described configurations applicable to Configuration 5 above.

[Configuration 6]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of types are prepared as an indication display effect suggesting that the reception period during which the action by the player is to be received will soon occur. A specific precursor effect display among the plurality of types of precursor effect displays can be executed across the timing at which the reception period corresponding thereto occurs, and the specific precursor effect display is displayed. , the action by the player can be accepted.

That is, in this case, since the action by the player can be accepted while it is possible to confirm which type (mode) is being displayed as the precursor effect display, the type (mode) of the precursor effect display can be changed. A decline in amusement in a game caused by forgetting to confirm can be suppressed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when an action by a player is accepted while a specific precursor effect display is being displayed, a post-acceptance effect (for example, a special post-acceptance effect) corresponding to the acceptance is performed. Execution is started, but even at the time when the execution of the post-acceptance effect is started, the specific precursor effect display is not hidden and is displayed.

That is, in this case, the action by the player is accepted while it is possible to confirm which type (mode) is displayed as the precursor effect display, and furthermore, the effect is started to be executed after the acceptance according to the acceptance. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game caused by forgetting to confirm the type (mode) of the precursor effect display.

[Configuration 7]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the reception period (for example, the specific reception period) occurs, the reception by the reception means is permitted, or the reception by the reception means is permitted. Since it is possible to perform the process of making the acceptance acceptance sound audible, which suggests that the acceptance will be (soon), it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to perform the acceptance action.

Acceptance acceptable tone means that even if it is realized as something that is audible before the occurrence of the corresponding acceptance period (suggesting that the acceptance period will soon occur), the timing of the occurrence of the acceptance period is It is made audible in the form of straddling, and can be made audible at least halfway during the acceptance period. In addition, in the case of the pachinko machine 1 whose tone setting value can be set to "0", under the situation where the volume setting value is set to "0", although the acceptance acceptable sound is output, it is not audible. It will not be done.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, when the action by the player is accepted while the acceptable acceptance sound is audible (output state) within the acceptance period (for example, the specified acceptance period), the above-mentioned "model image display is Before the "appearance of making it difficult to visually recognize (disappearance effect display, etc.)", and in a state where the "appearance of making it difficult to visually recognize the model image display (disappearance effect display, etc.)" has not yet appeared, the acceptance acceptable sound is played. It is designed to start executing processing for making it inaudible.

In other words, in this case, even if the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" has not yet appeared after the acceptance, the player will be informed that the acceptance period has already ended. It will be possible to suggest suitable As a result, it is possible to display the model image in a visually pleasing manner even if the timing at which the appearance of "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" is delayed. become

[Configuration 8]
In the pachinko machine 1, as described above, a plurality of reception periods (a plurality of reception periods with different effects after reception) including the first reception period and the second reception period are prepared as reception periods. During the period from when the player's action is accepted while the model image display is displayed until the model image display is hidden, the model image display becomes difficult to see. It is supposed to appear. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the action by the player is accepted while the model image display is being displayed in the first acceptance period, the model image display is displayed in the second acceptance period. In both the case where the player's action is accepted while the game is being displayed, and the situation where the model image display is hidden, the ``form in which the model image display becomes difficult to see'' appears. ing.

That is, in this case, regardless of whether it is the first reception period or the second reception period, after the reception is made, it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared as the model image display, and the reception period has ended. It becomes possible to suggest that it is in a state. The "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" according to configuration 8 may be acceptance periods of the same type as the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" according to configuration 2 above. However, the reception period may be of a different type.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode are prepared as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", and the first mode appears during the first acceptance period. Since the second mode appears in the second acceptance period, it is possible to give the ``mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize'' to have performance related to the type of the acceptance period.

Further, as will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 is further provided with a third mode as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see". However, in the second acceptance period, the second mode appears when the application is accepted within the period, and the third mode appears when the application is not accepted within the period.

According to such a configuration, in the second acceptance period, it is determined whether or not the action by the player has been accepted within the acceptance period, based on the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". However, during the first acceptance period, it is not possible to determine whether or not the action by the player has been accepted within the acceptance period based on the appearance of the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". As a result, it is expected that the amusement of games will be improved through such effects.

It should be noted that, in each of the production examples described above and each production example described later, "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" means that the disappearing effect display is performed in a specific area including at least a part of the predetermined area where the model image display is displayed. is displayed, and in addition to the mode in which an effect is executed using an effect object that overlaps at least a part of the predetermined area where the model image display is displayed when viewed from the front, the model image display itself can be visually recognized. The display may be changed (changed) to a display that is difficult to display (for example, the display may be reduced or blurred, or the transmittance setting may be changed).

[Configuration 9]
In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 must be in a state in which reception by the reception means is permitted when the reception period (for example, the specific reception period) occurs, or a state in which reception by the reception means is permitted. Since it is possible to execute the process of making the reception acceptance sound audible, which suggests that the reception will be (soon), the player is prevented from forgetting to perform the reception operation.

Also, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 prepares a plurality of types of indication display effects suggesting that the receiving period for receiving actions by the player will soon occur. A specific precursor effect display among the plurality of types of precursor effect displays can be executed across the timing at which the reception period corresponding thereto occurs, and the specific precursor effect display is displayed. , the action by the player can be accepted. That is, in this case, since it becomes possible to accept the action by the player while it is possible to confirm which aspect of the precursor effect display is displayed, the game is played by forgetting to check the aspect of the precursor effect display. A decrease in interest can be suppressed. Note that the "specific portent effect display" according to the configuration 9 may be the same as the "specific portent effect display" according to the configuration 6, or may be a different type (mode) of the portent effect display. .

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the display of a specific precursor effect is continued even after the effect corresponding to the acceptance of the action by the player (post-acceptance effect) has progressed. By doing so, even after the acceptance is made, the player side can confirm which mode has appeared as the precursor effect display.

However, since the sign display effect is originally displayed in a state in which acceptance is not permitted (before the acceptance period occurs), the action by the player is performed while the sign display effect is being displayed. Even if it is performed, the player may feel uneasy about whether the action has been accepted. Nevertheless, if the premonitory effect display is simply displayed even after the acceptance has been made, there is a concern that it will be difficult to recognize whether or not the acceptance has been made, thereby reducing the interest in the game. be.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when a player's action is accepted while a specific precursor effect display is being displayed, the specific precursor effect will continue to be displayed after the acceptance. Although the display is displayed, a mode in which the specific portent effect display is difficult to visually recognize while the specific portent effect display is being displayed appears. Then, after the appearance of the aspect, the specific portent effect display is hidden under the condition that the specific portent effect display is made difficult to be visually recognized.

That is, in this case, even after the reception is made, it is possible to confirm which aspect of the precursor effect display has appeared, and the visibility is reduced until the precursor effect display is hidden. By doing so, it becomes possible to preferably indicate that the acceptance has already been made.

[Configuration 10]
Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is capable of executing symbol variations (variation patterns) in which the reception period occurs and symbol variations (variation patterns) in which the reception period does not occur. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display screen (effect display device 1600 ), a predetermined image display can be displayed, and the model image display can be displayed even after the production progresses based on the acceptance of the action by the player. there is Then, when an action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period, the model image display is displayed in a manner that makes it difficult to see the model image display. The aspect of making it difficult to visually recognize" is executed so as not to affect the visibility of the above-mentioned predetermined image display that can be displayed even in the case of pattern variations that do not occur during the acceptance period.

In other words, in this case, since the specific disappearance effect display is displayed so as not to affect the visibility of the predetermined image display that is not related to the reception period, it is directly related to the reception period. The game can be progressed without adversely affecting performance that does not occur.

However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least the first image display (predetermined image display) and the The second image display can be displayed within the acceptance period, and the specific disappearance effect display does not affect the visibility of the first image display (predetermined image display), but the second image display ( Retention) is assumed to be displayed so as to affect the visibility.

According to such a configuration, even though the image display is not directly related to the acceptance period, the visibility may be affected when "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" appears depending on the type of image display. Since there are cases where the visibility is not affected, whether or not it is necessary to check whether the image display that is not directly related to the acceptance period should be confirmed when the player performs an action. It will be possible to provide performance about whether.

However, in this case, the first image display will be displayed as an image (suggestion) related to (expectation) of the symbol variation (suggestion), and the second image display will be the symbol variation. To avoid a decrease in amusement in a game when the visibility of the second image display is affected by displaying as a display irrelevant (not suggesting) the win/loss (expectation). above is desirable.

It should be noted that when using the "specific disappearing effect display" displayed in the display screen (the effect display device 1600) as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", the action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period. is specified using a specific area including at least part of the predetermined area in the display screen (effect display device 1600), which is the display target area of the model image display, while the model image display is being displayed. will be displayed.

[Configuration 11]
Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is capable of executing symbol variations (variation patterns) in which the reception period occurs and symbol variations (variation patterns) in which the reception period does not occur. Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the display screen (effect display device 1600) is displayed in both the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the reception period occurs and the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the reception period does not occur. A predetermined image display can be displayed inside, and the model image display can be displayed even after the production progresses based on the acceptance of the action by the player. . The "predetermined image display" in configuration 11 may be the same as the "predetermined image display" in configuration 10, or may be a different image display. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period, the model image display is difficult to visually recognize while the model image display is being displayed. A plurality of modes, including a first mode and a second mode, are prepared as modes that can appear and that the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize.

That is, in this case, since any one of a plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode appears as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", the game interest when the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize It is expected that the

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the "first mode" as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" is executed, the "first mode" is the model image display and the predetermined However, when the “second mode” is executed as “a mode in which the model image display is difficult to recognize”, the “second mode” is the model image display and the predetermined Of the image display, only the model image display is executed so as to make it difficult to visually recognize.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to create a performance as to which of the "first mode" and the "second mode" appears as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". It is hoped that it will increase interest.

It should be noted that the model image display and the predetermined image display are in a state in which either the reception period for the type corresponding to the above "first mode" or the reception period for the type corresponding to the above "second mode" is occurring. In order to improve the amusement of the game, it is desirable that the information can also be displayed.

[Configuration 12]
Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1,
・It is possible to generate a first reception period during which reception by the reception means (for example, the operation button 410) is permitted, and if the action by the player is accepted within the first reception period, the reception is deemed to have been made. Based on this, first reception effect execution means capable of executing the effect display after the first reception in any of a plurality of modes with different expectations (percentage of stopping the jackpot pattern), and reception means (for example, by operating button 410 or a sword ornament 5001 different from the operation button 410) can be generated. When accepted, a second reception performance executing means capable of executing the performance display after the second reception in any of a plurality of modes with different expectations (percentage of stopping the jackpot pattern) based on the acceptance. It has Incidentally, the degree of expectation (percentage of stopping the jackpot symbols) may be 0% or 100%. Further, the first post-reception effect display and the second post-reception effect display are executed as different types of advance notice effects. Further, the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" according to configuration 12 are acceptance periods of the same type as the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" according to configurations 2 and 8 above. Alternatively, reception periods of different types may be used.

Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, either the action by the player is accepted within the first acceptance period or the action by the player is accepted during the second acceptance period. Also, after the reception is made, it is possible to make it difficult for the model image display to be visually recognized while the model image display is being displayed.

That is, in this case, regardless of the type of acceptance period, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the model image display even after acceptance has been made. In addition, since the visibility of the model image display is reduced until the model image display is hidden, it can be suggested that the remaining time until the model image display is hidden is short. Thus, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game when the display of the model image is hidden.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the first acceptance period, the first mode is executed as the effect display after the first reception, and the first mode is executed as the effect display after the first reception. The same mode appears as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" in either case where the second mode, which has a higher degree of expectation than the first mode, is executed. On the other hand, in the second reception period, the second mode with higher expectations than the first mode (or the first mode with lower expectations than the second mode) is executed as the effect display after the second reception. However, when the first mode (or the second mode) is executed as the effect display after the second reception, "the model image display becomes difficult to see". The specific mode does not appear as a mode that makes it difficult to display, but a mode different from the specific mode appears, or the mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image itself does not appear. As described above, the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbols are stopped) may be 0% or 100%.

According to such a configuration, depending on the type of reception period, it is possible to estimate the degree of expectation for the post-reception effect display simply by confirming "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". Since there are cases where it is not possible to guess the speed, it is expected that the performance of such "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" will improve the enjoyment of the game. .

In addition, regarding the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", the "specific mode" that can occur in response to the second acceptance period corresponds to the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" corresponding to the first acceptance period. ”, it will be possible to guess the type of reception period based on ``a mode in which the display of the model image becomes difficult to see'', thereby improving the interest in the game. will be able to In order to obtain such a function and effect, as a "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", the "mode" that can occur corresponding to the first reception period is "a model image" corresponding to the second reception period. It is more desirable that the "mode in which the display becomes difficult to see" should not appear.

However, as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", the same "mode" that can occur during the first reception period and the "mode" that can occur during the second reception period are the same. You can make it appear.

[Configuration 13]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to display a reception-related effect display (simulated image display, gauge image, etc.) at least within the reception period in relation to the occurrence of the reception period. In relation to the generation, it is possible to output a reception-related effect sound (acceptance acceptance sound, etc.) at least within the reception period. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, when an action by a player is accepted within the acceptance period, a post-acceptance output sound related to the post-acceptance effect is generated based on the acceptance. ) can be output, and when an action by the player is accepted while the reception-related effect display is being displayed within the acceptance period, the acceptance is performed. to hide the reception-related effect display. Similarly, if an action by the player is accepted while the reception-related effect sound is audible during the acceptance period, the reception-related effect sound is made non-audible based on the acceptance. I am trying to

In the above configuration, the post-reception effect sound related to the post-reception effect is output, the reception-related effect display is hidden, and the reception-related effect sound is hidden, based on the fact that the action by the player is accepted within the reception period. Since the audible state is set, it is possible to easily recognize that the user is in the accepted state.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reception-related effect display is not finished at the time when a specific post-reception effect corresponding to the acceptance is started to be executed. Although it is displayed, the reception-related effect sound is terminated and made inaudible at the time when the execution of the specific post-reception effect sound corresponding to the reception is started.

According to such a configuration, the reception-related effect display displayed during the reception period is displayed even after the specific post-reception effect is started to be executed. The reception-related effect sound that is audible (output) is not audible at the time when the post-reception output sound is started to be executed. As a result, even after the execution of the specific post-reception performance is started, the reception-related performance sound is made inaudible while the mode of the reception-related performance display displayed during the reception period can be confirmed. This makes it possible to preferably indicate that the acceptance period has already ended.

Note that the non-audible state may be a state in which the reception-related effect sound output processing itself has ended, or the reception-related effect sound output processing itself may be used in each of the examples described above and in each example described later. is continued, but the volume may be adjusted to "0" so that it is not audible. In addition, in each of the above examples and each example described later, the specific post-reception production is a complex post-reception production that uses multiple effects (displays, light-emitting lamps, movable bodies, etc.) according to the reception. If it is executed as a special effect, it may correspond to "effect using a specific effect" among those effects.

[Configuration 14]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of modes are prepared as the precursor effect display. It is capable of initiating an audible output (such as an acceptance tone). Then, the specific precursor effect display and reception-related effect sound can be executed across the timing at which the reception period occurs, and the specific precursor effect display is displayed and the reception-related effect sound is audible (output). , the player's actions can be accepted. Regarding this point, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, when a player's action is accepted while a specific premonition effect display is being displayed within the acceptance period, the specific action is performed based on the acceptance. Hides the sign effect display. In addition, if the player's action is accepted while the reception-related effect sound is audible during the acceptance period, the reception-related effect sound is made non-audible based on the acceptance. ing.

In the above configuration, based on the fact that the player's action is accepted within the reception period, the specific precursor effect display is hidden, and the reception-related effect sound is made inaudible. Therefore, even if the action by the player is accepted while the specific premonitory effect display and reception-related effect sound that have been in the execution state before the acceptance period occurs, the action is accepted. It becomes possible to easily recognize that it is in a state of being The "specific precursor effect display" according to configuration 14 may be the same as the "specific precursor effect display" according to configurations 6 and 9, or may be a different type (mode) of precursor effect display. good too. Further, the "reception-related effect sound" according to the configuration 14 may be the same as the "reception-related effect sound" according to the configuration 13, or may be different.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the specific precursor effect display is accepted within the corresponding reception period, a specific post-acceptance effect is started to be executed. It is displayed without being terminated at the time of On the other hand, the reception-related effect sound is terminated and rendered inaudible at the time when the execution of the specific post-reception output sound corresponding to the reception is started.

According to such a configuration, the specific precursor effect display that is displayed before the reception period occurs is displayed even after the specific post-reception effect is started to be executed. The reception-related effect sound that is audible (output) before the occurrence of the period is not audible at the time when the post-reception output sound is started to be executed. As a result, even after the execution of the specific post-acceptance effect is started, it is possible to confirm the form of the sign effect display that is displayed before the reception period occurs, and at the same time, the reception-related effect that is output before the reception period occurs. By making the sound inaudible, it is possible to preferably indicate that the acceptance period has already expired. Note that the "specific post-reception effect" and "specific post-reception output sound" related to configuration 14 are the same as the "specific post-reception effect" and "specific post-reception output sound" related to configuration 13, respectively. There may be one, or it may be different.

[Configuration 15]
Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is prepared with a plurality of reception periods in which "the content of the effect (type of effect after reception) that progresses based on the acceptance of the action by the player" differs. Further, the simulated image display can be displayed even after the effect has progressed based on the acceptance of the action by the player. Regarding this point, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an action by a player is accepted within a specific acceptance period among a plurality of acceptance periods, a plurality of Any one of the effects is made to appear, and the specific mode can be made to appear even when any of these effects appear.

In the above configuration, the type of presentation mode that appears based on the acceptance of the action by the player ("conversation notice" about which conversation will appear, "movable body" about whether the movable body will move) We have prepared multiple acceptance periods with different types of notice effects such as "movement notice"). In this regard, when the player's action is accepted within a specific acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods, one of the multiple effects will appear based on the acceptance, and which of the effects will appear. It is possible to appear a specific mode even if it is That is, in this case, when any one of the multiple effects appears, the specific mode will also appear along with it. It becomes possible to suggest that it is a common production.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if the action by the player is accepted within a special acceptance period different from the specific acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods, special conditions (jackpot winning conditions, Inrush conditions, etc.) can appear according to whether or not the appearance rate (may be 0% or 100%) is different. When it appears, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the display of the simulated image.

According to such a configuration, a special mode that suggests the degree of expectation appears before the model image display is hidden, and the model image display becomes difficult to see due to the special mode. , the player can enjoy the performance progressing from the model image display to the performance after reception (special mode) without changing the gaze point.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the above-mentioned "specific mode" appears based on the fact that the action by the player is accepted within the above-mentioned specified acceptance period, the model image display is changed to the " It is made difficult to be visually recognized by the "specific aspect". According to such a configuration, when the model image display is difficult to see due to the above-mentioned special mode that suggests the degree of expectation for granting the privilege (special reception period), and the above-mentioned specific mode that does not suggest the degree of expectation for granting the privilege Due to the fact that there are cases where the display of the model image is difficult to see (specific acceptance period), so that the "mode of making the display of the model image difficult to view (specific mode, special mode)" has a production effect. It becomes possible to improve the game interest.

The "specified acceptance period" for configuration 15 may be the same as the "specified acceptance period" for configurations 1, 7, and 9, or may correspond to a different acceptance period.

[Configuration 16]
Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 can display a remaining time suggestive display in which the display area of a specific image (gauge image, etc.) is reduced over time during the acceptance period. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the indication indicating the remaining time can be displayed even after the presentation has progressed based on the acceptance of the action by the player. Since the display area of the specific image can be reduced even while the performance is progressing, it is difficult to recognize "whether the acceptance has been made" even after the acceptance is made, creating a sense of tension. It will be expected to keep well.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a specific partitioned area is displayed within the display screen (effect display device 1600) as a remaining time suggestive display, and a specific image is displayed within the specific partitioned area. (Gauge images, etc.) are rendered in such a way that the display area is reduced. After the presentation progresses based on the acceptance of the action by the player, the display of not only the specific image (gauge image, etc.) but also the specific partition area is continued. According to such a configuration, the display area of the specific image (gauge image, etc.) is reduced because the specific partitioned area is displayed even after the effect is progressed based on the acceptance of the action by the player. It becomes possible to make it easier to judge whether or not the number has decreased.

It should be noted that "the display area of a specific image (such as a gauge image) is reduced after the effect has been performed based on the acceptance of the action by the player" means, for example, At the time when the production progresses based on this, the predetermined display area as the gauge image is left, but at a later point in time, the display area is changed to 0 (non-display). be. However, in this case, it is required that the specific partitioned area is still displayed when the display area of the gauge image is set to 0, and the specific partitioned area is required to be displayed when the display area of the gauge image is set to 0. It will be hidden after the timing.

For example, as the configuration 16, when an action by the player is accepted, the remaining time suggestive display (a specific image, a specific partitioned area, etc.) is hidden based on the acceptance, but the remaining time indication is hidden. Prior to hiding the time-suggestive display, regardless of how much of the display area of the specific image was left at the time of acceptance, the display area within the specific partition area is set to a specific value (predetermined value ) is displayed, or only a specific partitioned area out of the specific partitioned area and the specific image is displayed (the display area is reduced to 0). is possible.

In particular, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the player's action is accepted (when the progress of the performance corresponding to the acceptance is started), it is executed before it is accepted. The "depiction in which the display area of the specific image is reduced" is continued without being terminated. After that, when a predetermined timing arrives, a specific image having a display area of a specific value is displayed in the specific partitioned area, or only the specific partitioned area out of the specific partitioned area and the specific image is displayed. It is supposed to be displayed (the display area is reduced to 0).

That is, in this case, at the timing when the progress of the effect corresponding to the acceptance is started, the display area of the specific image (gauge image, etc.) is not significantly reduced, and the drawing up to that point is continued. It will be expected that the tension will be preferably maintained by making it difficult to recognize ``Is it in a state of being accepted?'' even after the is done. In addition, since the display area of a specific image (gauge image, etc.) will be reduced significantly after the timing when the progress of the production according to the acceptance starts, It is possible to make it look as if it was just in time within the acceptance period), and it is expected that the game will be more interesting.

[Configuration 17]
Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 prepares a plurality of precursor effect displays as precursor effect displays suggesting that the reception period will occur. Regarding this point, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific precursor effect display among a plurality of precursor effect displays is performed, the reception period occurs for the model image display related to the reception target. It is displayed both within the precursor period before and within the acceptance period. The model image displayed during the sign period is different from the model image displayed during the reception period, and is hidden before the reception period occurs. As a result, it is expected that the performance related to the operation will be improved from the period before the reception period occurs.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 hides the display of the model image based on the fact that it has been accepted within the acceptance period, but the model image is not displayed. It is possible to appear "a specific aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image display" until it is turned on. However, as will be described later, with regard to the "specific aspect of making the model image display difficult to visually recognize", when the model image display displayed within the precursor period (specific precursor effect display) is hidden, the non-display I try not to appear until it is done.

According to such a configuration, during the precursor period (the specific precursor effect display), the "specific aspect that makes the model image display difficult to visually recognize" that appears corresponding to the reception period does not appear, and the model image display is disabled. It will be displayed. Therefore, even if the model image display is displayed within the omen period (specific omen effect display) and is hidden before the reception period occurs, the player does not know it. It becomes possible to make it difficult to cause a misunderstanding that the reception period has ended at home.

In addition, if a plurality of "modes that make it difficult to visually recognize the model image display" that can appear in response to the reception are prepared, including the above-mentioned "specific mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image display", In any of the aspects, it is desirable that the simulated image display displayed within the precursor period does not reappear as it is hidden. However, if it is a mode that is different from any of the multiple modes prepared as "a mode that makes the model image display difficult to visually recognize" according to the reception, the model image display will be hidden within the precursor period. You may make it appear "the aspect which makes a model image display hard to visually recognize." In other words, in this case, since it will be recognized as "a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image display" exclusively for the precursor period, even if "a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image display" appears during the precursor period , it is possible to make it difficult for the player to misunderstand that the acceptance period has ended without the player's knowledge.

The "specific precursor effect display" according to configuration 17 may be the same as the "specific precursor effect display" according to configurations 6, 9, and 14, or may correspond to a different precursor effect display. may

[Configuration 18]
Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when the first effect condition is satisfied, the first reception period can be generated as the reception period during the execution period of the symbol variation, and when the second effect condition is satisfied. , a second acceptance period can be generated as an acceptance period during the execution period of the symbol variation. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first acceptance period can be continued even after the symbol variation that occurred during the first acceptance period is terminated and the next symbol variation is started. However, the second acceptance period does not continue until after the symbol variation that caused the second acceptance period is terminated, and is terminated before the symbol variation is terminated. It has become a thing. Furthermore, the model image display related to the reception target is displayed both during the first reception period and the second reception period, and when the action by the player is received during the first reception period, when the action is received during the second reception period Both when the action by the player is accepted within the period and when the action is accepted, the extinction presentation mode appears in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize based on the acceptance.

In other words, in this case, it is possible to suggest that the acceptance period has ended, while making it possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the model image display even after the acceptance has been made. , the first reception period and the second reception period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the disappearance effect mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize is when it is accepted during the first acceptance period and when it is accepted during the second acceptance period. It is to be implemented as a different aspect. In other words, in this case, based on the type of "disappearance effect mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see", it is possible to grasp whether the reception period will end within the pattern variation being executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, the "first acceptance period and second acceptance period" according to the configuration 18 may be the same as the "first acceptance period and second acceptance period" according to the configurations 2, 8, and 12, or may be different. It may correspond to a period.

[Configuration 19]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of game states (first game state and second game state) can occur, and the reception period can occur in both the first game state and the second game state. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period, based on the acceptance, the "simulation" is displayed while the model image display is displayed. A mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance effect mode)" can appear, and after that, the model image display is hidden.

In other words, in this case, it is possible to suggest that the acceptance period has ended, while making it possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the model image display even after the acceptance has been made. , can be obtained regardless of whether the acceptance is made within the acceptance period occurring in either the first game state or the second game state.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first reception period among the plurality of reception periods is only in the first game state among the first game state and the second game state. Among the plurality of reception periods, the second reception period can be generated only in the second game state (jackpot game) among the first game state and the second game state. In this regard, the model image display related to the reception object is displayed in both the first reception period and the second reception period. However, in the first game state (when accepted in the first acceptance period), a specific "model image display" that cannot appear in the second game state (when accepted in the second acceptance period) is visually recognized. A mode (disappearance effect mode) that makes it difficult to do so can appear.

According to such a configuration, without confirming the effect after reception, the first game can be played only by confirming which mode has appeared as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearing effect mode)". It becomes possible to grasp which state the player is in, the state or the second game state, and to improve the interest in the game.

It should be noted that even in the second gaming state (when accepted in the second acceptance period), "the model image display is difficult to visually recognize", which is different from the specific "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to view (disappearance effect mode)". A mode (disappearance presentation mode)" may appear.

[Other configurations]
In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when a reception allowable state (reception period) in which an reception opportunity is given occurs, a model image related to the reception object (such as a model image that imitates the operation receiving part) is displayed. By displaying as an integrated simulated image display (see FIG. 144) that is integrated with the peripheral edge decoration image that decorates the peripheral edge of the image, the decrease in interest in the game until the performance after reception (performance after operation) is executed can be prevented. I try to suppress it. Regarding such an integrated model image display, the operation reception effect (reception period) that occurs when the pattern effect progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach, and the fluctuation pattern that does not develop into the SP reach. It is desirable to display it in both the operation reception effect (reception period) and the low expectation unrestrained reception effect and the high expectation suppressed reception effect. . Also, in each of the above-described production examples, it is desirable to realize the display mode of the exemplified model image by replacing it with one of the integrated model images described below in order to improve the amusement of the game. .

The "integrated simulated image display" according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. is provided with a display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG. In addition, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 144) with different degrees of expectation are prepared as the "integrated simulated image display", and it is also the same that the display is made in one of these modes.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example as well, when the reception permitted state (reception period) occurs, it suggests that the operation reception is permitted or that the operation reception is permitted. An acceptance acceptance sound is output, thereby making it difficult to forget to operate. Here, "acceptable sound" means whether or not the acceptance allowable state (acceptance period) always occurs while the sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned) when the output of the sound is started. , is a sound in which an acceptance allowable state (acceptance period) has already occurred. In other words, it can be said that the "acceptable sound" is a sound that is not output under a situation in which an effect that has nothing to do with the acceptable reception state (acceptance period) is being performed.

Further, each reception allowable state (each reception period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. That is, the acceptance acceptable state classified into the first type is assumed to occur when a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) is selected, but a low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) is a valid period that cannot occur (a valid period generated based on the establishment of a specific condition (selection of a specific high-expectation variation pattern) in the performance determination based on the result of the jackpot determination). In addition, the second type of reception acceptance state is the valid period that can occur in both the high-expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) and the low-expected fluctuation pattern (occurred as a result of advance notice determination validity period, etc.).

The "integrated simulated image display" according to this embodiment can be displayed in both the first-type and second-type reception permission states (reception period). Here, both the first-type acceptance allowable state (acceptance period) and the second-type acceptability state (acceptance period) are acceptance states in which the same operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is given an opportunity to operate. Since it is assumed that this occurs in the allowable state (acceptance period), the "integrated simulated image display" displayed during the acceptance period is an image imitating the same operation means (operation button 410).

However, among the multiple modes prepared as "integrated simulated image display", the special mode with high expectations (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 144(d)) is the first type reception acceptance state (reception period 144, and in the second-type reception acceptance state (reception period), display is possible only in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the modes shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(c)). ing. In the first type acceptance acceptable state (acceptance period), multiple aspects including special aspects based on the result of the jackpot determination (for example, Figure 144 (a) ~ (d)) in any of the "integrated model image display" A determination is made as to whether or not to display, and the "integrated simulated image display" is displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination. Even in the second type acceptance acceptable state (acceptance period), any of the multiple modes (for example, FIGS. 144 (a) to (c)) that do not include special modes based on the result of the big hit determination "integrated model image" may be determined whether to display, and the "integrated simulated image display" may be displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination.

The details of the pachinko machine 1 having the configurations 1 to 19 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

As described above, this pachinko machine 1 is the production content that progresses when the reception is received (conversation notice, cut-in notice, movable body notice, etc. as production after reception). ) are prepared for different reception periods (reception effects), and it is possible to generate a type of reception period (reception effect) according to the result of the judgment (jackpot judgment, production judgment, etc.). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least a first reception period (reception effect) to a seventh reception period (reception effect) are prepared as a plurality of reception periods (reception effects).

Here, the "conversation notice" as a production after reception suggests the degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern, etc.) depending on which conversation content appears among a plurality of conversation contents. 's "cut-in notice" suggests the degree of expectation (percentage of the appearance of the jackpot pattern, etc.) depending on which cut-in image appears among multiple cut-in images, and the "movable body The "notice" indicates the degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the big hit pattern, etc.) depending on whether or not the movable body operates.

With reference to FIGS. 167 to 178, the characteristics of each reception period (reception effect) will be described. It should be noted that each reception period described above with reference to FIG. It may be implemented as any of the seventh acceptance periods.

FIG. 167 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the first condition is satisfied as a result of determination and the first reception period (first reception effect) occurs. 174 and 175 are diagrams showing examples of effects in variation patterns in which the first reception period (first reception effect) occurs.

Now, the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, normal game state that is non-probability variable / non-time saving), and the "first fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, performance determination (announcement determination, etc.) corresponding to the first variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (the effect depiction according to the first variable pattern, the sound output of the BGM playback according to the first variable pattern, etc.) is started ("Situation shown in FIG. 174 (a) ”), during the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) according to the result of the determination of the previous notice performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected “first variation pattern” itself. Become. In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 174(a), for convenience of explanation, the first production display TE ( Here, it is assumed that the "timer effect" described above) and the second effect display FE depicted as a frog character are displayed at the start of the symbol variation. These displays may be displayed in the middle of the fluctuation instead of at the start of the fluctuation, or may be displayed at different timings. The second effect display FE itself may or may not suggest the ratio of appearance of the jackpot symbols when the decorative symbols SZ are stopped in the variable effect.

That is, when a special result is obtained (when the first condition is satisfied) in the production determination (announcement determination, etc.) corresponding to the first variation pattern, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs decoration as shown in FIG. 167(a). When the timing tF3 when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance of the symbol SZ arrives, the first reception period (effective period) is generated in which "acceptance regarding the performance after the first reception" is permitted. ("situation shown in FIG. 174(d)"). Thus, when the player's action is accepted within the first acceptance period, the first post-acceptance effect is performed based on the acceptance.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has a reception period (effective period) in relation to the occurrence of such a first reception period. ) is about to occur, a simulated image that suggests the acceptance target (operation receiving part, etc.), a gauge image that suggests the remaining time of the reception period, and a simulated image display that makes it difficult to see. A related display (a form in which the model image display becomes difficult to see), and a post-reception effect display suggesting the degree of expectation (ratio of appearance of the big hit pattern) according to the reception are performed respectively. As described above, the model image display according to this embodiment is displayed as an "integrated model image display" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display. It is not limited and may be displayed separately. This also applies to other acceptance periods.

More specifically, first, when the timing tF1 before the occurrence of the first acceptance period arrives, the display screen (effect display device) is displayed as shown in FIGS. 1600), execution of the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is started as the precursor effect display. The "first precursor effect display ZEH1" according to the example shown in FIG. Although the display is made to be hidden when the timing tF3 arrives, the display may be made to be hidden before the timing tF3. In any case, as shown in FIG. 174(d), during the first reception period according to this example, the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is displayed in a state in which the reception of actions by the player is permitted. It has become something that has never happened.

However, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, as shown in FIGS. When it arrives, the "integrated model image display IG (simulated image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "first omen effect display ZEH1" is being displayed. At least part of the area where the display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is displayed. That is, in this case, during the period (timings tF2 to tF3) in which both the “integrated model image display IG” and the “first precursor effect display ZEH1” are displayed on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), “ At least part of the "integrated model image display IG" is made difficult to be visually recognized by the "first precursor effect display ZEH1". As a result, during the period (timings tF2 to tF3) before the occurrence of the first acceptance period, the player is strongly interested in which object (operation receiving section) the action of the player is allowed. It is expected that forgetting to operate or erroneously operating after the occurrence of the first acceptance period will be less likely to occur.

In the period (timings tF2 to tF3) in which both the “integrated model image display IG” and the “first precursor effect display ZEH1” are displayed, the “integrated model image display IG” is less visible. It is more desirable to display the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" such that it tends to gradually improve toward the start of the reception period, in order to improve the game interest. For example, it can be realized by gradually decreasing the display range of the "first omen effect display ZEH1" (the range overlapping with the integrated model image display IG), or by gradually increasing its transmittance. be.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 167(b) and 174(c) and (d), in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the "integrated model image display IG" is , is displayed across the timing tF3 at which the first acceptance period occurs. The "integrated model image display IG" is hidden when the application is accepted within the first acceptance period, or when the first acceptance period ends without the acceptance being made. It should be noted that the first acceptance period according to this example ends when the timing tF4 arrives when the action by the player is not accepted (see FIG. 167(b)).

In this respect, the example shown in FIG. 167 and the production from FIG. In the progressing example, it is assumed that the player's action is accepted at timing tF3a within the first acceptance period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 167(a), the first acceptance period ends based on the acceptance of the action by the player at timing tF3a, and the first acceptance period is terminated. Execution of the post-acceptance effect (first post-acceptance effect) is started.

It should be noted that the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 174(d) to "A1 (FIGS. 175(e1) to (i1))" is relatively less expected as a post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period. 174(d) to "A2 (FIGS. 175(e2) to (i2))" corresponds to the case where the first mode is executed. This corresponds to the case where the second mode with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as the post-effect.

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 167(b), FIG. Accordingly, at timing tF3a, which is the point in time when the effect after the first reception is started), the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see. I'm trying

That is, the production after the first reception according to this embodiment includes the "production display after the first reception" using the production display device 1600 (first production device) and the second production device (for example, sub liquid crystal, movable The "specific effect after the first reception" using the body, effect lamps, etc.) and the output sound after the first reception using the third effect device (speaker) are realized as a combined effect. However, among these effect devices, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) that displays the integrated model image display IG (simulated image display, gauge image display), the first effect as the effect after the first reception 1. The time at which the performance display after acceptance is started is delayed compared to other performance devices, thereby maintaining the visibility of the ``integrated model image display IG'' even after acceptance. It has become.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 175(e1) or (e2), even after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is displayed in a plurality of modes (FIG. 144 ( Since the player can easily recognize which one of a) to (d)) was displayed, it is expected that the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed appropriately. become.

Here, after the end of the reception period, in order to easily recognize in which of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 144(a) to (d)) the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period, It can be said that it is desirable to set a longer "time during which the integrated model image display IG is displayed in an easy-to-visual form" after the reception is made. However, even though the acceptance has been made and the post-acceptance effects (the second effect device and the third effect device) are already being executed, the integrated model image display IG is during the acceptance period. If the display continues in the same manner (the manners shown in FIGS. 175(e1) and (e2)), it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the acceptance has been made. As a result, there is a concern that "noticing the post-acceptance effect in the execution state is delayed".

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 167(b), FIG. When a predetermined period of time elapses from timing tF3a (when timing tF3b arrives), the first extinction-related display SK1-1 (corresponding to the first reception period The first aspect of the first disappearance-related display SK1) is started.

That is, in the first rendering device (rendering display device 1600) according to this example, the “first disappearance related display SK1- 1” is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the “first disappearance related display SK1-1” is displayed has an “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)”. It overlaps with the displayed area.

With such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see. It becomes possible to suggest that the effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the gaze of the player will naturally shift from the integrated model image display IG to the post-acceptance effects (second effect device, third effect device) (after timing tF3b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception production (the second production device and the third production device) has already been executed, the integrated model image display IG can be continuously displayed for a relatively long time although it is difficult to visually recognize it. is made possible, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period. Also, even after the first post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) is started, until the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see (timings tF3a to tF3b) Since the mode of the integrated model image display IG can be confirmed with good visual recognition, it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

In addition, in the first acceptance period, corresponding post-acceptance effects are shown in low-expected aspects (FIGS. 175(e1)-(i1)) and high-expected aspects (FIGS. 175(e2)-(i2)). Since the same aspect (first disappearance-related display SK1-1) appears as the first disappearance-related display SK1 in either case, the effect after reception (the second effect device , third effect device) are started to be executed, the degree of expectation can be kept secret in the first effect device (effect display device 1600).

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 167(b), FIG. When the timing tf3c within the period in which the IG becomes difficult to see) arrives, the first effect device (effect display device 1600) responds to the acceptance of the action by the player within the first acceptance period. Execution of the "first post-reception effect display UG1" as the post-reception effect is started. However, here, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. g1), the first mode (first post-reception effect display UG1-1) is displayed as the first post-reception effect display UG1 corresponding to the first reception period, and from FIG. (FIGS. 175(e2) to (i2))” (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as the post-reception production), as shown in FIG. 175(g2), the first reception A second mode (first post-reception effect display UG1-2) is displayed as the first post-reception effect display UG1 corresponding to the period.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and the "first disappearance-related display SK1-1" are displayed, respectively, the "first reception after-reception display UG1 (first reception after-reception display UG1-1 or Execution display UG1-2) after the first acceptance is started. As a result, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed for a relatively long time after being accepted within the first acceptance period, the first effect device (effect display device 1600) The performance after reception (display of performance after first reception) can be started without much delay as compared with other performance devices, and the deterioration of game interest can be suppressed. In addition, since the effect display is started after the first acceptance while the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, it is suggested that the first acceptance period has already ended. It is possible that the target of gaze is naturally shifted from the “integrated model image display IG” to the “post-first reception effect display UG1 (first post-reception effect display UG1-1 or first post-reception effect display UG1-2)”. It becomes expected (after timing tF3c).

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to "the first post-reception effect display UG1 (the first post-reception effect display UG1-1 or the first post-reception effect display UG1-2)" is started, , as shown in FIG. 167(b) and FIG. 175(h1) or (h2), the "post-first reception effect display UG1 (first reception effect display UG1-1 or first reception effect display UG1 -2)” is displayed, first, out of the “integrated model image display IG” and the “first disappearance related display SK1-1”, the “integrated model image display IG” is hidden. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 167(b), FIG. ” is hidden, and under the condition that the visibility is good, the “effect display UG1 after first reception (effect display UG1-1 after first reception or effect display UG1-2 after first reception) ” will be displayed.

In this regard, the “post-first reception effect display UG1” refers to a plurality of modes with different expectations (here, the first post-reception effect display UG1-1 or the first It is displayed in one of the post-acceptance display UG1-2). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 167(b), the ``effect display UG1 after the first acceptance'' is displayed after the ``integrated model image display IG'' and the ``first disappearance related display SK-1'' are hidden. will also run for a relatively long time.

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, it is within a limited time (bold line shown in FIG. 167) with the occurrence of the first acceptance period, and Various displays are performed within a limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decline in the interest in the game. However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tF3c) of the first post-reception effect (first post-reception effect display) in response to the acceptance is set earlier than the received timing tF3a. The reality is that it has to be delayed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a second effect device is prepared separately from the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), and the action by the player is performed within the first acceptance period. When accepted, as shown in FIGS. 167(b) and 167(c), based on the acceptance, a first post-reception production using the second production device (first post-reception specified effect) is started prior to the first post-reception effect (display of the effect after the first reception) using the first effect device.

According to such a configuration, the execution start is delayed from the timing tF3a at which the reception is made in the first reception period only for a part of the effect after the first reception (display of the effect after the first reception). The effect itself after the first reception can be started without delay from the timing tF3a.

As such a second effect device, for example, it may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or it may be a movable object capable of effecting operation, , a production lamp capable of producing production light, or the like may be provided. In any case, it is provided so that effects (display effects, movable effects, light-emitting effects, etc.) can be performed in a plurality of modes with different expectations.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 175, it is assumed that the sub-liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second production device. Then, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. , the mode in which "Sueyoshi" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is the above-described first post-reception specific effect UGT1 (first post-reception specific effect UGT1) corresponding to the first reception period. As a specific effect UGT1-1 after the first reception, which is a mode with a low expectation of the effect UGT1, prior to the effect after the first reception using the first effect device (effect display UG1-1 after the first reception) Execution is started. On the other hand, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. As shown in e2), the mode in which "good luck" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is the specific effect UGT1 (first reception after the first reception) corresponding to the first reception period. As the first post-reception specific effect UGT1-2), which is a highly anticipated aspect of the post-specific effect UGT1, precedes the first post-reception effect (post-first reception effect display UG1-1) using the first effect device. and start executing.

In addition, in the effect example shown in FIG. 174, in addition to the first precursor effect display ZEH1 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) also corresponds to the first reception period. 174(b) to (d)). The first predictive effect in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) differs from the first predictive effect display ZEH1 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device). It is executed even when it arrives, and is executed so as to straddle the timing tF3.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third effect device (speaker) is further provided, and when the first acceptance period occurs, at the timing tF2 shown in FIG. 167(d), It is assumed that the reception allowable sound is started to be output (corresponding to "a situation where ♪ is started to be output in Fig. 174(c)"). In other words, the acceptable reception sound corresponding to the first reception period is audibly output across the timing tF3 (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 174(d)") at which the first reception period occurs. Thus, the action by the player can be accepted while the acceptance acceptance sound is audibly output.

Here, in the first reception period, as shown in FIG. 167(d), FIGS. 175(e1) to (g1), or FIGS. Even if the action is accepted by the player while the player is in the game, the acceptance acceptance sound is not terminated halfway and is output only for a predetermined period of time. That is, as will be described later, during the plurality of reception periods, when an action by the player is accepted while the reception acceptance sound is being audibly output, an audible output state of the acceptance acceptance sound is generated based on the acceptance. is included in the acceptance period that is terminated prematurely. Therefore, when a mode of audible output of the acceptable acceptance sound appears as a result of acceptance while the acceptable acceptance tone is being audibly output within the first acceptance period, whether or not it is in a state of being accepted. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained.

However, in the first reception period, even if the player accepts an action while the reception permission sound is audibly output, the reception permission sound is terminated halfway (half-way termination of the audible output state). However, when the acceptance is made, based on this, the audible output of the first post-acceptance output sound (corresponding to "♪♪" outputted in Fig. 175 (e1) or (e2)) is started. It is a thing. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 167(d), the "acceptance acceptance sound" that is audibly output within the first acceptance period and the audible Since both the "output sound after the first reception", which is the output sound, can be audibly output, it is possible to recognize whether it is within the reception period or the reception period has ended. It becomes possible to make it even more difficult to recognize.

Such an output sound after the first reception is similar to the "effect display UG1 after the first reception", as shown in FIG. -1” is hidden, it will be executed for a relatively long time (“♪♪ is output in Fig. 175 (e1) to (i1) or (e2) to (e1) equivalent to "situation"). In addition, regarding the output sound after the first reception, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 174(d) to “A1 (FIGS. case) and an example in which the production progresses from FIG. It is desirable to output an output sound (mode).

On the other hand, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 167, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. This assumes a case where the motion by the user is not accepted.

That is, in this case, after the occurrence of the first reception period, the timing tF4 arrives without the action by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tF4 (when the first reception period ends and the player is no longer allowed to accept the action), the timing tF3a (first 175(e3), the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the player's action is not accepted in time and the first acceptance period ends, the integrated model will be processed within the first acceptance period after the end of the first acceptance period. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the image display IG was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

After that, even if the action by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. -2 (the second aspect of the first disappearance related display SK1 corresponding to the first reception period) is started.

That is, in the first rendering device (rendering display device 1600) according to this example, the “first disappearance related display SK1- 2” is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the “first extinction related display SK1-2” is displayed has the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)”. It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the first acceptance period has ended without acceptance being made, the integrated model image display IG will continue to be displayed. By making it difficult to see, it is possible to suggest that the first reception period has ended. Also, even in a situation where the first reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the "first disappearance-related display SK1-2" that appears when the action by the player is not accepted within the first acceptance period is It is executed in a mode different from the "first disappearance-related display SK1-1" that appears based on the acceptance of the action by the player within the period. As a result, when the "first disappearance-related display SK1-2" appears, it is possible to suggest that the action by the player has not been accepted, and the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed. .

After that, as shown in FIG. 175(g3), out of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "first extinction related display SK1-2", first, the "integrated model image display IG" is turned off. display. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "first disappearing related display SK-2" is hidden as shown in FIG. 175(h3).

FIG. 168 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the second condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the second reception period (second reception effect) occurs. 176 and 177 are diagrams showing examples of effects in variation patterns in which the second reception period (second reception effect) occurs.

Now, the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is non-probability variable / non-time saving), and the "second fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, performance determination (announcement determination, etc.) corresponding to the second variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (the effect depiction according to the second variable pattern, the sound output of the BGM playback according to the second variable pattern, etc.) is started ("Situation shown in FIG. 176 (a) ), during the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) corresponding to the result of the determination of the previous notice performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "second variation pattern" itself. Become. It should be noted that in the example effects shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the first effect display TE is displayed, but the second effect display FE is not displayed.

However, in the effect related to the "second variation pattern", even if any result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination), as shown in FIG. The second reception period in which "acceptance regarding the effect after the second operation" is permitted when the timing tG3 (for example, the timing within the SP reach state) arrives after the second predetermined time has passed since the effect is started. (effective period) is generated ("situation shown in FIG. 176(d)"). Thus, when the player's action is accepted within the second acceptance period, the second post-acceptance effect is performed based on the acceptance.

In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this embodiment, even when such a second reception period occurs, when the above-described first reception period occurs (FIG. 167) Similar to , related to this, a sign effect display that suggests that the reception period (effective period) will soon occur, a model image display that suggests the reception target (operation receiving part, etc.), and the remaining time of the reception period Gauge image display that makes it difficult to see the model image display, disappearance-related display that makes it difficult to see the model image display (a mode in which the model image display is difficult to see), and post-reception production that suggests the degree of expectation (percentage of big hit patterns that appear) according to the acceptance. Display is performed respectively. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%". As described above, the model image display is displayed as an "integrated model image display IG" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display. It may be displayed. This also applies to other acceptance periods.

More specifically, also in this example, when the timing tG1 before the occurrence of the second reception period arrives, the foreshadow effect is shown in FIGS. 168(b) and 176(b). As a display, the execution of "second precursor effect display ZEH2" is started. As for the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)", as in the example shown in FIG. When the timing tG2 before it occurs, it is displayed while the "second precursor effect display ZEH2" is being displayed (Fig. 168(b) and Fig. 176(c). )). As shown in FIG. 176(c), at least part of the area where the “integrated model image display IG” is displayed overlaps with the area where the “second precursor effect display ZEH2” is displayed, In the case of the example shown in FIG. 174(c) (the precursor effect display corresponding to the first reception period), the "integrated model image display IG" is made difficult to see by the "second precursor effect display ZEH2". is similar to

In addition, the “integrated model image display IG” is displayed so as to span the timing tG3 (situation shown in FIG. 176(d)) at which the reception period corresponding to this (here, the second reception period) occurs. and when the acceptance is made within the corresponding acceptance period (here, the second acceptance period), or when the second acceptance period ends without the acceptance being made 167 is the same as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 167 (first acceptance period). It should be noted that the second reception period according to this example ends when the timing tG4 arrives when the action by the player is not received.

However, in the example (second acceptance period) shown in FIG. 168(b), the "second omen effect display ZEH2" corresponds to the example (first acceptance period) shown in FIG. 167(b). The mode (image display) is different from that of the "first precursor effect display ZEH1". The timing tG3 at which the reception of the information is allowed does not disappear when the timing tG3 arrives, but is displayed in a manner straddling the timing tG3.

That is, in this case, during the second acceptance period, not only the "integrated model image display IG (simulated image display, gauge image display)" but also the "second precursor" that makes the "integrated model image display IG" difficult to see Actions by the player can be accepted while the effect display ZEH2" is being displayed. According to such a configuration, even after the second reception period has occurred, at least a part of the "integrated model image display IG" is made difficult to be visually recognized by the "second precursor effect display ZEH2", and the reception is performed. It becomes possible to suitably maintain the tension during the period.

Here, the "second omen effect display ZEH2" may be displayed until the timing tG4 when the reception period (here, the second reception period) corresponding thereto ends, or the reception period It may be hidden at a predetermined timing within (here, the second acceptance period). Further, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, for the sign effect display (second sign effect display ZEH2), within the corresponding acceptance period (here, the second acceptance period), the "integrated model In order to make the area that overlaps the image display IG (simulated image display, gauge image display) tend to gradually shrink, it is It is desirable to gradually improve the visibility of the image display IG' during the acceptance period. In addition, the area in which the second precursor effect display is displayed and at least part of the area in which the "integrated simulated image display" is displayed do not necessarily overlap each other during the entire period in which the second precursor effect display is displayed. For example, after the arrival of a predetermined timing within the reception period of the entire period, the second precursor effect display is displayed in an area that does not overlap with the area in which the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed. You may do so.

Further, the second omen effect display ZEH2 according to this example is displayed when the acceptance is made within the corresponding acceptance period (here, the second acceptance period), or when the acceptance period (here, the second acceptance period) is entered. period) is hidden when the player's action is not accepted until a predetermined timing.

In this respect, the example shown in FIG. 168 and the production from FIG. In the progressing example, it is assumed that the player's action is accepted at timing tG3a within the second acceptance period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 168(a), the second acceptance period ends based on the acceptance of the action by the player at timing tG3a, and the second acceptance period is terminated. Execution of the post-acceptance effect (second post-acceptance effect) is started.

It should be noted that the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 176(d) to "B1 (FIGS. 177(e1) to (i1))" has relatively low expectations as a post-reception production corresponding to the second reception period. 176(d) to "B2 (FIG. 177(e2)-(i2))" corresponds to the case where the first mode is executed. This corresponds to the case where the second mode with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as the post-effect. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 168 as well, at timing tG3a when the player's action is accepted (when the second post-acceptance effect is started in response to the acceptance), the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed. is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 168, not only the integrated model image display IG, but also the second precursor effect display ZEH2 is displayed at the time when the action by the player is accepted (when the second post-receipt effect is started). ) at the timing tG3a, it is not hidden or made difficult to see.

That is, the effect after the second reception according to this embodiment includes the "effect display after the second reception" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) and the second effect device (for example, sub liquid crystal, movable The "specific effect after the second reception" using the body, effect lamps, etc.) and the output sound after the second reception using the third effect device (speaker) are realized as a combined effect. However, among these effect devices, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) that displays the integrated model image display IG (simulated image display, gauge image display), the second effect as the effect after the second reception 2. The time at which the performance display after acceptance is started is delayed compared to other performance devices, so that even after the acceptance, the "integrated model image display IG" and the "second sign performance display" are displayed. It maintains the visibility of ZEH2.

According to such a configuration, as in the case of the first acceptance period described above, as shown in FIG. In which of a plurality of modes (FIGS. 144(a) to (d)) the simulated image display IG was displayed, and in which mode the portent effect display (first portent effect display ZEH1, second portent effect display ZEH1, second portent effect display Since it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize whether or not the game was displayed in the display ZEH2, etc., it is expected that the decrease in interest in the game can be suitably suppressed.

Here, after the end of the acceptance period, in order to easily recognize in what manner the integrated model image display IG and the portent effect display ZEH were displayed during the acceptance period, It can be said that it is desirable to set "the time during which the integrated model image display IG and the omen effect display ZEH are displayed in an easily recognizable state" to be long. However, despite the fact that the acceptance has been made and the post-reception effects (the second effect device and the third effect device) have already been executed, the integrated model image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH are not displayed during the acceptance period. If it continues to be displayed in the same mode as when it was in, it will be difficult for the player to recognize whether or not it is in a situation where the acceptance has been made, and as a result, the "post-acceptance effect in the execution state There is concern that it will be too late to notice

Therefore, in the examples shown in FIG. 168(b) and FIG. 177(f1) or (f2), a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the timing tG3a at which the second acceptance period ended due to the acceptance of the action by the player. Then (when the timing tG3b arrives), the display related to the "second disappearance-related display SK2" different from the first disappearance-related display SK1 is started as "a mode in which the integrated simulated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize". I have to.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the “second disappearance-related display SK2 ” is displayed, and at least part of the area where the “second disappearance-related display SK2” is displayed is displayed with the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)”. It overlaps with the area.

With such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see. It becomes possible to suggest that the effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the gaze of the player will naturally shift from the integrated model image display IG to the post-acceptance effects (second effect device, third effect device) (after timing tG3b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception production (the second production device and the third production device) has already been executed, the integrated model image display IG can be continuously displayed for a relatively long time although it is difficult to visually recognize it. is made possible, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period. Further, even after the second post-acceptance effect (second effect device, third effect device) is started, until the second disappearance-related display SK2 is displayed (timings tG3a to tG3b), The mode of the second omen effect display ZEH2 can be confirmed while still being visually recognizable, and the integrated model image display IG is also made difficult to see only by the second omen effect display ZEH2. Therefore, it is expected that the amusement of the game will be favorably maintained. It should be noted that when the reception is made after the second omen effect display ZEH2 is hidden during the second reception period, the second omen effect display ZEH2 is displayed until the second extinction related display SK2 is displayed. Needless to say, it is possible to confirm the mode of the integrated model image display IG while maintaining good visual recognition.

Further, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the "second omen effect display (here, the second omen effect display ZEH2)" is displayed, and the "second disappearance-related display SK2" is displayed. At least part of the area where the "second disappearance related display SK2" is displayed overlaps the area where the "second omen effect display ZEH2" is displayed.

According to such a configuration, the second precursor effect display ZEH2 is made difficult to see, thereby suggesting that the post-acceptance effect (the second effect device and the third effect device) is already being executed. is possible, and it is expected that the player's attention will naturally shift from the second precursor effect display ZEH2 to the post-acceptance effect (after timing tG3b). As a result, it is possible to continue to display the second precursor effect display ZEH2 for a relatively long time in a situation where the post-acceptance effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed. In this way, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the sign effect display was displayed within the acceptance period. Further, even after the post-acceptance effect (the second effect device and the third effect device) is started, until the predictive effect display becomes difficult to see (timings tG3a to tG3b), the predictive effect display is not displayed. Since the aspect (here, the second omen effect display ZEH2) can be confirmed with good visual recognition, it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

In addition, in the second reception period, as the corresponding post-reception production, low-expectation aspects (FIGS. 177(e1)-(i1)) and high-expectation aspects (FIGS. 177(e2)- (i2)) appears, different forms (second disappearance-related displays SK2-1, SK2-2) appear as the second disappearance-related display SK2. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 177(f1) and (f2), the "effect display after second acceptance" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet started. Even if this is the case, the second disappearance-related display SK2 appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is the first mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-1) and the second mode (second disappearance-related display SK2- 2 or 2, it is possible to guess whether or not the "second post-reception effect display" will be executed in a highly expected mode.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 168(b), FIG. When the timing tG3c within the period in which the state of being difficult to visually recognize) arrives, the reception in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) corresponding to the acceptance of the action by the player within the second reception period. Execution of the "second reception post-effect display UG2" as a post-effect is started. However, here, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. g1), the first mode (second post-reception effect display UG2-1) is displayed as the second post-reception effect display UG2 corresponding to the second reception period, and from FIG. (Fig. 177 (e2) to (i2))” (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as a post-reception production), as shown in Fig. 177 (g2), the second reception As the second post-reception effect display UG2 corresponding to the period, the second mode (second post-reception effect display UG2-2) is displayed.

That is, in this case, the "integrated model image display IG", the "second precursor effect display ZEH2", and the "second disappearance-related display SK2 (second disappearance-related display SK2-1 or second disappearance-related display SK2-2)" Execution of the “second post-reception effect display UG2 (second post-reception effect display UG2-1 or second post-reception effect display UG2-2)” is started among the respective displays. As a result, even if the integrated model image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 continue to be displayed for a relatively long time after being accepted within the second acceptance period, the first effect device The after-reception performance (second post-reception performance display UG2) in (the performance display device 1600) can be started without much delay compared to other performance devices, thereby suppressing the decrease in game interest. be able to In addition, since the second reception effect display UG2 is started while the integrated model image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 are made difficult to see, the second reception period has already ended. while suggesting that the target of the player's gaze changes from "integrated model image display IG" or "second precursor effect display ZEH2" to "second reception effect display UG2 (second reception effect display UG2-1 or second After the reception, it is expected that the transition to the post-acceptance effect display UG2-2)” will naturally occur (after timing tG3c).

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to "second reception effect display UG2 (second reception effect display UG2-1 or second reception effect display UG2-2)" is started, , as shown in FIG. 168(b), FIG. 177(h1) or (h2), the "post-second reception effect display UG2 (second reception effect display UG2-1 or second post-reception effect display UG2 -2)” is displayed, first, among “integrated model image display IG”, “second precursor effect display ZEH2”, and “second disappearance related display SK2”, “integrated model image display IG" and "second omen effect display ZEH2" are hidden. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" and the "second precursor effect display ZEH2" are respectively hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 167(b), FIG. 177(i1) or (i2) , ``Second disappearance-related display SK2 (second disappearance-related display SK2-1 or second disappearance-related display SK2-2)'' is hidden, and under the condition that visibility is good, "Second disappearance-related display SK2-1" 2nd post-reception effect display UG2 (second post-reception effect display UG2-1 or second post-reception effect display UG2-2)” is performed.

In this regard, the “post-second-receipt effect display UG2” refers to a plurality of modes with different expectations (here, the post-second-reception effect display UG2-1 or the second post-reception effect display UG2-1 or the second It is displayed in any of the post-acceptance display UG2-2). Therefore, even after the “integrated model image display IG”, the “second omen effect display ZEH2”, and the “second disappearance-related display SK2” are hidden, the “second post-receipt effect display UG2” is not displayed. It will run for a relatively long time.

By the way, in the example of the effect corresponding to the first acceptance period (FIGS. 174 and 175) described above, even if the acceptance is made during the first acceptance period and the "effect display UG1 after the first acceptance" is executed, The background image is maintained without being switched before and after the "effect display UG1 after the first reception" is started. On the other hand, in the production examples (FIGS. 176 and 177) corresponding to the second reception period, when the acceptance is made within the second reception period and the "effect display UG2 after the second reception" is executed, The background image is switched before and after the "second post-reception effect display UG2" is started.

According to such a configuration, under the conditions shown in FIGS. 177(e) and 177(f) (timings tG3a to tG3b shown in FIG. 168) where the background image is not switched, the effect display device 1600 (the 1 effect device), even if there is a change in effect, it is possible to suggest that the “second post-reception effect display UG2” has not yet started.

In the example shown in FIG. 177, the background image is switched to the same background image for the appearance of the low-expectation aspect and the appearance of the high-expectation aspect as the post-acceptance effect. The background image may be switched to a different one depending on whether the aspect with a low degree of expectation appears or the aspect with a high degree of expectation appears. Also, the background image may be switched when a mode with a high degree of expectation appears, but the background image may not be switched when a mode with a low degree of expectation appears.

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, even when the second reception period occurs, along with this, within a limited time (bold line shown in FIG. 168) Various displays are performed within a limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decline in the interest in the game. However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tG3c) of the second post-reception effect (second post-reception effect display) in response to the acceptance is set earlier than the received timing tG3a. The reality is that it has to be delayed.

Therefore, also in this example, when the player's action is accepted within the second acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. , the second after-reception effect (specific effect after the second reception) using the second effect device is started prior to the second after-reception effect (the effect display after the second reception) using the first effect device. I am trying to let

According to such a configuration, the execution start is delayed from the timing tG3a at which the reception is made in the second reception period only for a part of the effect after the second reception (display of the effect after the second reception). The second post-receipt effect itself can be started without delay from the timing tG3a.

Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, as described above. It may be provided as a production movable body, a production lamp capable of producing production light, or the like. In any case, it is provided so that effects (display effects, movable effects, light-emitting effects, etc.) can be performed in a plurality of modes with different expectations. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. Then, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. , the mode in which "women's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is the second after-receipt specific effect UGT2 (second As a second post-reception specific effect UGT2-1), which is a low-expected aspect of the post-reception specific effect UGT2, the second post-reception effect using the first effect device (second post-reception effect display UG2-1) Execution is started in advance. On the other hand, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. As shown in e2), the mode in which "men's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is the second after-receipt specific effect UGT2 ( As the second post-reception specific effect UGT2-2), which is a highly expected aspect of the second post-reception specific effect UGT2, the second post-reception effect using the first effect device (second post-reception effect display UG2-2 ) is to be started before execution.

In addition, in the effect example shown in FIG. 176, the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) also corresponds to the second acceptance period, apart from the second precursor effect display ZEH2 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device). The predictive effect (second predictive specific effect) is executed (FIGS. 176(b) to (d)). The second predictive effect in the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is different from the second predictive effect display ZEH2 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), and the timing tG3 at which the second reception period occurs is It is executed even when it arrives, and is executed so as to straddle the timing tG3.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is further provided with a third effect device (speaker), and when the second acceptance period occurs, the timing shown in FIG. At tG2, the reception permission sound (corresponding to "♪" output in FIGS. 176(c) and (d)) is started to be output. In other words, the acceptable reception sound corresponding to the second reception period is audibly output across the timing tG3 (corresponding to "situation shown in FIG. 176(d)") at which the second reception period occurs. Thus, the action by the player can be accepted while the acceptance acceptance sound is audibly output.

Here, in the second reception period, as reception acceptable sounds, long-term acceptable sounds that are audible output for a relatively long time and short-time acceptable sounds that are audible for a relatively short time are used. are output respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 168(d), the long-time permissible sound and the short-time permissible sound are started to be output at the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, one of the long-time allowable sound and the short-time allowable sound may be started to be output at timing tG3 when the second reception period occurs or after that.

Then, in the second acceptance period, when the action is accepted by the player while the long-time allowable sound and/or the short-time allowable sound are audibly output, the action is accepted based on the acceptance. , the long-term permissible sound and/or the short-term permissible sound are terminated in the middle (the audible output state is terminated in the middle).

In the second reception period, if the player accepts an action while the acceptance acceptance sound (long-time acceptance sound, short-time acceptance sound) is audibly output, the acceptance acceptance sound is terminated halfway. In addition, when the acceptance is made, a second post-acceptance output sound different from the first post-acceptance output sound (FIG. 177(e1) or (e2)) is output based on the acceptance. ) to start audible output. That is, in this case, unlike the case of the effect (display effect) performed by the first effect device, during the second reception period, the effect (reception allowable sound) performed within the reception period and the reception are performed. Conflict (overlap) with the effect (output sound after the second reception) performed in response is eliminated.

Such a post-second reception output sound is similar to the "post-second reception effect display UG2", as shown in FIG. 168(d). ” is hidden, it will be executed for a relatively long time (“Situation where ♪♪ is output in (e1) to (i1) or (e2) to (e1) of FIG. 177” equivalent to ). Also, regarding the second post-reception output sound, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 176(d) to “B1 (FIG. case) and an example in which the production progresses from FIG. It is desirable to output an output sound (mode).

In the second reception period, the long-time allowable sound and the short-time allowable sound are output as the reception allowable sounds. As in the reception period, only one acceptance acceptable sound may be output.

On the other hand, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 168, the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 176(d) to “B3 (FIGS. This assumes that the motion by the user is not accepted.

That is, in this case, after the occurrence of the second acceptance period, the above timing tG4 arrives without the action by the player being accepted. In this regard, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tG4 (when the second acceptance period ends and the player is no longer allowed to accept the action), the timing tG3a (second 177(e3), the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see. In this example of effect, since the second precursor effect display ZEH2 is hidden at timing tG4, the second precursor effect display ZEH2 is not displayed after timing tG4.

According to such a configuration, even if the second reception period ends due to the player not being able to accept the action in time, the integrated simulation will be performed within the second reception period after the end of the second reception period. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the image display IG was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

After that, even if the action by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. -1 or the display related to the second disappearance related display SK2-2 (in the figure, the display related to the second disappearance related display SK2-1) is started.

That is, in the first rendering device (rendering display device 1600) according to this example, the “second disappearance-related display SK2- 1 or second extinction-related display SK2-2” is displayed, and at least part of the area where the “second extinction-related display SK2” is displayed is an “integrated model image display IG (model image display , Gauge Image Display)” overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the second acceptance period has ended without acceptance being made, the integrated model image display IG will continue to be displayed. By making it difficult to see, it is possible to suggest that the second reception period has ended. Also, even in a situation where the second reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the action by the player is not accepted within the second acceptance period, the "second disappearance related display SK2-1" is displayed as the second disappearance related display SK2. If the action by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period, the effect progresses from FIG. This corresponds to the case (when the post-acceptance effect with relatively low expectations is being executed). On the other hand, the case where the "second disappearance-related display SK2-2" is displayed as the second disappearance-related display SK2 when the action by the player is not accepted within the second acceptance period means that the second acceptance period 176(d) to "B2 (FIG. 177(e2)-(i2))" (relatively expected It is equivalent to the case where high performance after reception is executed).

That is, in this case, even if the action by the player is not accepted during the second acceptance period, the integrated model image display IG is hidden after the second acceptance period ends. Only by confirming the mode as "second disappearance related display SK2" that appears in the second reception (second disappearance related display SK2-1, second disappearance related display SK2-2) Since it becomes possible to recognize whether the game has been executed or whether it has been executed with a high degree of expectation, it is possible to suitably suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

After that, as shown in FIG. 177(g3), out of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "second extinction related display SK2", first, the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. do. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "second extinction related display SK2" is hidden as shown in FIG. 177(h3).

FIG. 169 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when the third condition is satisfied as a result of determination and the third reception period (third reception effect) occurs.

Now, the starting condition is established (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is non-variable and non-time saving), and the "third variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, performance determination (announcement determination, etc.) corresponding to the third variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (the effect depiction according to the third variable pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the third variable pattern, etc.) is started, and the notice is given within the execution period of the variable effect. An effect (announcement effect) according to the result of effect determination is additionally executed to the effect of the selected "third variation pattern" itself.

However, in the effect related to the "third variation pattern", even if any result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination), the third predetermined time after the start of the variable effect of the decorative symbol SZ When the elapsed timing tH3 (may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or may be the timing within the SP reach state), "acceptance regarding the effect after the third operation" is allowed. The third acceptance period (effective period) is generated. Thus, when the player's action is accepted within the third acceptance period, the third post-acceptance effect is performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the third acceptance period (effective period) may be generated as a result of the announcement effect determination.

In this regard, in the third reception period (third reception effect) according to this embodiment, the content executed as the third reception effect (in the first effect device 167 (or FIG. 174, FIG. 175) is the "effect display after the third reception", the "specific effect after the third reception" in the second effect device, and the "output sound after the third reception" in the third effect device). , the effects after the first reception described above ("effect display after first reception" in the first effect device, "specific effects after the first reception" in the second effect device, "first reception post-output sound”), but the rest of the configuration is basically the same.

For example, timing tH1 shown in FIG. 169 corresponds to timing tF1 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tH1 arrives, as shown in FIG. 169(b), on the display screen (effect display device 1600), the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is started to be executed as the precursor effect display. 169(b), the "first premonition effect display ZEH1" in the example shown in FIG. Allowable timing) tH3 is hidden. However, it is the same as in the case of the above-described first reception period in that it may be hidden before timing tH3. In any case, during the first accepting period according to this example as well, the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is not displayed in a state where acceptance of actions by the player is allowed.

Timing tH2 shown in FIG. 169 corresponds to timing tF2 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tH2 arrives, as shown in FIG. 174(c), the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is being displayed. is displayed, and at least part of the area where the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed overlaps the area where the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is displayed. It should be noted that the configuration of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" displayed in relation to the third reception period, and other examples related to them are shown in FIG. 167 and FIG. 174 and 175, so the description is omitted here.

Timing tH3 shown in FIG. 169 corresponds to timing tF3 shown in FIG. Therefore, when timing tH3 arrives, as shown in FIG. will occur. Regarding the fact that the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden when the acceptance is made within the third acceptance period, or when the third acceptance period ends without the acceptance being made. It is the same. It should be noted that the third acceptance period according to this example ends when the timing tH4 arrives when the action by the player is not accepted.

Timing tH3a shown in FIG. 169 corresponds to timing tF3a shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tH3a arrives, the third acceptance period ends based on the acceptance of the action by the player, and the post-acceptance effect (the third acceptance effect) corresponding to the third acceptance period production) is started. As the third after-acceptance effect, at least a case where the first mode with a relatively low degree of expectation is executed and a case where the second mode with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed are prepared. The contents of the production (the contents of the production display after reception, the specific production after reception, and the output sound after reception) are different from the above-mentioned first production after reception, but the degree of expectation is suggested by which of the multiple modes it is executed. Points and the like are the same as in the case of the above-described effect after the first reception. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%". In addition, at timing tH3a when the player's action is accepted (when the third post-acceptance effect is started in response to the acceptance), the integrated model image display IG is not hidden. The point that the simulated image display IG is not made difficult to see is also the same as in the case of the first after-acceptance effect.

Timing tH3b shown in FIG. 169 corresponds to timing tF3b shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tH3b arrives, the first extinction-related display SK1-1 (the first disappearance-related display SK1-1 (the first display corresponding to both the first reception period and the third 1 disappearance related display SK1) is started. The configuration of the "first disappearance related display SK1" displayed in relation to the third acceptance period and other related examples are as described above with reference to FIGS. 167 and 175. Therefore, we omit it here.

According to such a configuration of the first effect device (effect display device 1600) for "the period from when the first precursor effect display ZEH1 is displayed until when the first disappearance-related display SK1 is displayed", the first It is possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the reception period and the third reception period has occurred (whether it has occurred), thereby the second production device and the third production device To improve amusement in a game by urging the player to have an interest in the game, and making the player strongly interested in which mode (the first reception performance display, the third reception performance display) will appear as the performance display after the reception. will be able to

It should be noted that even in the third reception period, the first disappearance-related display SK1 may be either a mode with a low degree of expectation or a mode with a high degree of expectation as the corresponding post-reception effect. Since the same mode (first disappearance-related display SK1-1) appears, even in a situation where the post-reception production (second production device, third production device) is started to be executed, the first production device In (effect display device 1600), the degree of expectation can be kept secret. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and different disappearance-related displays may appear according to expectations. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

Timing tH3c shown in FIG. 169 corresponds to timing tF3c shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tH3c arrives, the "3rd post-receipt effect display" is displayed as the post-reception effect in the third effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the acceptance of the action by the player within the third reception period. (The type of the advance notice effect is different from the effect display after the first reception)” is started to be executed. A plurality of modes with different expectations are prepared as the "display of the effect after the third reception", and a mode with a low expectation and a mode with a high expectation are executed as the third after-reception effect. As described above, different modes appear as the "effect display after the third reception" depending on whether the display is performed or not.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and the "first disappearance related display SK1-1" are being displayed, the "third effect display after acceptance" is started. As a result, it is possible to create a critical situation in which it is possible to recognize which of the first acceptance period and the third acceptance period has occurred, and whether the player can recognize it. It is expected that the "simulated image display IG" will naturally shift to the "post-reception effect display" (after timing tH3c).

Also in this example, when the display related to the "third effect display after reception" is started in this way, regardless of the mode, while the "third effect display after reception" is being displayed, first, Of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "first disappearing related display SK1-1", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "first extinction related display SK-1" is hidden. Effect display after the third reception” is performed.

In this regard, as described above, the "third effect display after reception" is also displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectations based on the reception of the action by the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 169(b), the "effect display after reception of the third reception" also continues after the "integrated model image display IG" and the "first disappearance related display SK-1" are hidden. , will run for a relatively long time.

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, even when the third reception period occurs, it is within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 169) and is limited. Various displays are performed within the display screen (effect display device 1600). However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tH3c) of the third post-reception effect (third post-reception effect display) in response to the acceptance is set earlier than the received timing tH3a. The reality is that it has to be delayed.

Therefore, even if an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the third acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. 169(b) and (c), the third The production after the third reception (specific production after the third reception) using the second production device is started prior to the production after the third reception (the production display after the third reception) using the first production device. I have to. As for the third post-acceptance specific effect, the content of the effect is different from that of the first post-acceptance specific effect, but basically it is carried out in the same manner as the first post-acceptance specific effect.

For example, a plurality of modes with different expectations are prepared as the third post-acceptance specific performance, and a low-expectation mode and a high-expectation mode are executed as the third post-acceptance performance. Depending on the case, in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device), a different aspect appears as the specific effect after the third reception. Also, as shown in FIGS. 169(b) and 169(c), the specific effect after the third reception using the second effect device is changed to the effect display after the third reception using the first effect device. It is the same as in the case of the above-described specific effect after the first reception, in that the execution is started in advance.

Also, when the third reception period occurs, as in the case of the first reception period, the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (the second effect device) displays an omen effect (common correspondence between the first reception period and the third reception period). It is desirable that the first omen specific effect to be executed) is executed. Also, in this case, the specific omen effect (first specific omen effect) on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is different from the first omen effect display ZEH1 on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device). It is executed even at the timing tH3 when the acceptance period occurs, and it is more desirable to execute the timing tH3 astride the timing tH3.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is further provided with a third effect device (speaker), and when the third reception period occurs, the timing shown in FIG. At tH2, the output of the acceptable acceptance sound is started. That is, the acceptable reception sound corresponding to the third acceptance period is audibly output across the timing tH3 at which the third acceptance period occurs, and the acceptance acceptance sound is audibly output. Among them, actions by the player can be accepted. It is desirable that this acceptance acceptance sound be the same as the acceptance acceptance sound that is output when the first acceptance period occurs.

However, in the third reception period, if an action by the player is accepted while the acceptable acceptance sound is audibly output, the audible output state of the acceptance acceptable sound is changed based on the acceptance. I am trying to terminate it.

In addition, in the third reception period, when an action by the player is accepted while the acceptance acceptance sound is being audibly output, not only is the acceptance acceptance sound terminated halfway, but also, when the acceptance is made, , audible output of a third post-reception output sound different from the first post-reception output sound and the second post-reception output sound is started. That is, in this case, in the third reception period, unlike the production (display production) performed by the first production device, the production (acceptance acceptable sound) performed within the reception period and the reception are performed. Conflict (duplication) with the effect (output sound after the third reception) performed in response is eliminated.

Such output sounds after the third reception are, as shown in FIG. 1” is hidden, it will continue to be executed for a relatively long time. Also, as the third after-acceptance output sound, a plurality of modes with different expectations are prepared, and as the third after-acceptance effect, a mode with a low expectation level is executed and a mode with a high expectation level is executed. It is desirable to output a different output sound (pattern) depending on the situation.

According to such a configuration, although it is difficult to recognize which type has occurred as the acceptance period until the timing tH3c arrives, it is difficult to recognize the occurrence of the reception period just by looking at the first effect device (effect display device 1600). By confirming the third effect device, it becomes possible to recognize which type has occurred as the acceptance period at the time when the earlier timing tH3a has arrived. As a result, the player who tends to concentrate only on the first effect device (the effect display device 1600) can be urged to enjoy the effect with more effect devices.

On the other hand, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 169, even if the action by the player is not accepted within the third acceptance period, the action by the player is basically accepted within the first acceptance period. It is the same as if it had not been done.

That is, in this case, after the occurrence of the third acceptance period, the above timing tH4 arrives without the action by the player being accepted. In this respect, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tH4 (when the third reception period ends and the player is no longer allowed to accept the action), the timing tH3a (the third When the action is accepted by the player within the reception period of ), similar to the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the integrated model image display IG is not hidden. Also, the simulated image display IG is not made difficult to see.

After that, even if the action by the player is not accepted, the first disappearance-related display SK1-2 (the first acceptance period and the third The second mode of the first disappearance-related display SK1), which corresponds in common with the reception period of , is started.

That is, in the first rendering device (rendering display device 1600) according to this example, the “first elimination-related display SK1- 2” is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the “first disappearance related display SK1-2” is displayed has the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)”. It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, when the action by the player is not accepted, it becomes impossible to recognize which type occurred during the acceptance period, so the player is strongly urged to operate. be able to In the third acceptance period, as in the case of the first acceptance period, when the action by the player is not accepted, the "first disappearance-related display SK1" appears in a different mode depending on the degree of expectation. No, a mode (first disappearance-related display SK1-2) different from the mode (first disappearance-related display SK1-1) that appears when an acceptance is made appears.

After that, out of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "first extinction related display SK1-2", first, the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. After the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "first disappearing related display SK-2" is hidden.

FIG. 170 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the fourth condition is satisfied as a result of determination and the fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) occurs. 178 and 179 are diagrams showing examples of effects in variation patterns in which the fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) occurs.

Now, the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is non-probability variable / non-time saving), and the "fourth variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, performance determination (announcement determination, etc.) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (the effect depiction according to the fourth variable pattern, the sound output of BGM playback according to the fourth variable pattern, etc.) is started (situation shown in FIG. 178 (a)) , the performance (notice performance) corresponding to the result of the determination of the foretell performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected ``fourth variation pattern'' itself within the execution period of the variable performance. In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 178(a), for convenience of explanation, the first production display TE ( Here, it is assumed that the above-described "timer effect") and the second effect display FE depicted as a frog character are displayed at the start of the symbol variation. These displays may be displayed in the middle of the fluctuation instead of at the start of the fluctuation, or may be displayed at different timings.

However, in the production related to the "fourth variation pattern", as shown in FIG. 170, even if any result is obtained as the production judgment (advance judgment), the fluctuation production of the decorative symbol SZ is started. When the timing tI3 (which may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or may be the timing within the SP reach state) after the fourth predetermined time has passed after the arrival of the "fourth operation The fourth acceptance period (effective period) in which "acceptance regarding post-effect" is allowed is generated (situation shown in FIG. 178(d)). Thus, when the player's action is accepted within the fourth acceptance period, the fourth post-acceptance effect is performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the fourth acceptance period (effective period) may be generated as a result of the announcement effect determination.

In this regard, in the fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) according to this embodiment, the contents executed as the fourth reception effect (in the first effect device) based on the acceptance of the action by the player 167 (or FIG. 174, FIG. 175) are shown in FIG. , the effects after the first reception described above ("effect display after first reception" in the first effect device, "specific effects after the first reception" in the second effect device, "first reception post-output sound”). In addition, in the fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) according to this embodiment, a fourth disappearance-related display SK1 different from the first disappearance-related display SK1 is used as "a mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize". It is different from the case of the first reception period in that the related display SK4 appears, but the rest of the configuration is basically the same.

Below, the effects performed in relation to the occurrence of the fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) will be described. I will omit it. In other words, for matters that are not particularly mentioned, the effect will be performed as described in the first reception period (first reception effect), and the same can be applied to other examples and modifications.

For example, timing tI1 shown in FIG. 170 corresponds to timing tF1 shown in FIG. Therefore, when timing tI1 arrives, as shown in FIG. 170(b) and FIG. 178(b), the display screen (effect display device 1600) displays "first predictive effect display ZEH1" as the predictive effect display. ” is executed.

Timing tI2 shown in FIG. 170 corresponds to timing tF2 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tI2 arrives, as shown in FIG. 178(c), the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is being displayed. is displayed, and at least part of the area where the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed overlaps the area where the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is displayed.

Timing tI3 shown in FIG. 170 corresponds to timing tF3 shown in FIG. Therefore, when timing tI3 arrives, as shown in FIG. will occur.

Timing tI3a shown in FIG. 170 corresponds to timing tF3a shown in FIG. That is, the production progresses from the example shown in FIG. 170 or from FIG. In this example, it is assumed that the player's action is accepted at timing tI3a within the fourth acceptance period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 170(a), the fourth acceptance period ends based on the acceptance of the action by the player at timing tI3a, and the fourth acceptance period is terminated. Execution of the post-acceptance effect (fourth post-acceptance effect) is started.

Note that the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 178(d) to "C1 (FIGS. 179(e1) to (i1))" is a relatively low expectation as a post-reception production corresponding to the fourth reception period. This corresponds to the case where the first mode is executed, and the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 178(d) to “C2 (FIG. This corresponds to the case where the second mode, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, is executed as the post-effect. However, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of modes with different expectations as the post-reception production corresponding to the fourth reception period. (i1))) may appear. In this case, even if the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize" corresponding to the fourth acceptance period, multiple modes are not prepared according to the degree of expectation, and the same mode is always used when there is an acceptance. Aspects will be made to appear.

It should be noted that, during the fourth acceptance period, similarly, as shown in FIG. 170(b), FIG. At the timing tI3a, which is the point in time when the effect after reception is started, the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see. .

Timing tI3b shown in FIG. 170 corresponds to timing tF3b shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tI3b arrives, "a mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" appears. However, as described above, when the request is accepted in the fourth acceptance period, the display of the fourth disappearance-related display SK4, which is different from the first disappearance-related display SK1, is started (timing tI3b).

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, the "fourth elimination-related display SK4 is displayed, and at least part of the area where the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4" is displayed is displayed with the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)". It overlaps with the area.

With such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see. It becomes possible to suggest that the effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the integrated model image display IG to the post-acceptance effects (second effect device, third effect device) (after timing tI3b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-acceptance production (the second production device and the third production device) has already been executed, the integrated model image display IG can be continued to be displayed for a relatively long time although it is difficult to visually recognize it. is made possible, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period.

In addition, in the fourth reception period, as the corresponding post-reception production, low-expected aspects (FIGS. 179(e1) to (i1)) and high-expected aspects (FIGS. 179(e2) to (i2)) appears, different forms (fourth disappearance-related displays SK4-1, SK4-2) appear as the fourth disappearance-related display SK4. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 179(f1) and (f2), the "fourth reception after reception effect display" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet started. Even if this is the case, the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is the first mode (fourth disappearance-related display SK4-1) and the second mode (fourth disappearance-related display SK4-1). 2) or 2), it becomes possible to guess whether or not the "fourth post-reception effect display" will be executed in a highly expected mode.

Timing tI3c shown in FIG. 170 corresponds to timing tF3c shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tI3c arrives, while the display related to the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 (a mode in which the integrated simulated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize) is appearing, it is possible for the player to perform the operation within the fourth acceptance period. Execution of the "fourth post-reception effect display UG4" as a post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the acceptance of is started. However, here, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. g1), the first mode (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1) is displayed as the fourth post-reception effect display UG4 corresponding to the fourth reception period. (FIG. 179 (e2) to (i2))” (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as a post-reception production), as shown in FIG. 179 (g2), the fourth reception A second mode (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-2) is displayed as the fourth post-reception effect display UG4 corresponding to the period.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4 (fourth disappearance-related display SK4-1 or fourth disappearance-related display SK4-2)" are displayed, respectively, the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4-1" The execution of the 4th post-reception effect display UG4 (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1 or fourth post-reception effect display UG4-2) is started. As a result, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed for a relatively long time after being accepted within the fourth acceptance period, the first effect device (effect display device 1600) The post-reception performance (fourth post-reception performance display UG4) can be started without much delay as compared with other performance devices, and the decline in game interest can be suppressed. In addition, since the effect display UG4 after the fourth reception is started while the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, the player is advised that the fourth reception period has already ended. automatically shifts the gaze destination from "integrated model image display IG" to "fourth post-reception effect display UG4 (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1 or fourth post-reception effect display UG4-2)". is expected (after timing tI3c).

Then, even in the effect related to the fourth reception period, the display related to the "fourth post-reception effect display UG4 (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1 or fourth post-reception effect display UG4-2)" starts. Then, as shown in FIG. 170(b), FIG. While the effect display UG4-2)” is being displayed, first, out of the “integrated model image display IG” and the “second disappearance related display SK2”, the “integrated model image display IG” is hidden. . Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 170(b), FIG. 4 Disappearance Related Display SK4-1 or 4th Disappearance Related Display SK4-2)” is hidden, and under the condition that visibility is good by this, “4th Reception Post Effect Display UG4 (4th Reception After-effect display UG4-1 or fourth reception-after-effect display UG4-2)” is performed.

According to such a configuration, although it is difficult to recognize which type has occurred as the reception period until timing tI3b arrives, the second effect device (effect display device 1600) is difficult to recognize. By confirming the third effect device, it becomes possible to recognize which type has occurred as the acceptance period at the time when the earlier timing tI3a has arrived. As a result, the player who tends to concentrate only on the first effect device (the effect display device 1600) can be urged to enjoy the effect with more effect devices.

Also, even if the player only looks at the first effect device (effect display device 1600), when the timing tI3b arrives, the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 different from the above-described first disappearance-related display SK1 is displayed as "integrated". This will appear as a mode in which the simulated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, by confirming such a mode, it is possible to recognize at an early stage which type of reception period occurred before the "fourth post-reception effect display UG4" is performed. become able to.

In this regard, the “fourth post-receipt effect display UG4” refers to a plurality of modes with different expectations (here, the fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1 or the fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1 or the fourth It is displayed in one of the post-acceptance display UG4-2). Therefore, the "fourth post-acceptance effect display UG4" will continue to be executed for a relatively long period of time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and the "fourth disappearance related display SK4" are hidden. .

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, even when the fourth reception period occurs, along with this, within a limited time (bold line shown in FIG. 170) Various displays are performed within a limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decline in the interest in the game. However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tI3c) of the fourth post-reception effect (fourth post-reception effect display) in response to the acceptance is set earlier than the received timing tI3a. The reality is that it has to be delayed.

Therefore, even when the player's action is accepted within the fourth acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. 170(b) and 170(c), the second effect The fourth post-acceptance effect (fourth post-acceptance specific effect) using the device is started prior to the fourth post-acceptance effect (fourth post-acceptance effect display) using the first effect device. there is

According to such a configuration, the execution start is delayed from the timing tI3a at which the reception is received in the fourth reception period only for a part of the fourth reception production (fourth reception production display). The fourth post-receipt effect itself can be started without delay from the timing tI3a.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. Then, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. , the mode in which "single sword" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) corresponds to the fourth reception specific effect UGT4 (fourth effect) corresponding to the fourth reception period. As the fourth post-reception specific effect UGT4-1), which is a low-expected aspect of the post-reception specific effect UGT4, the fourth post-reception effect using the first effect device (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1) Execution is started in advance. On the other hand, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. As shown in e2), the mode in which "two swords" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is the above-mentioned fourth reception specific effect UGT4 ( As the fourth post-reception specific effect UGT4-2), which is a highly expected aspect of the fourth post-reception specific effect UGT4, the fourth post-reception effect using the first effect device (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-2 ) is to be started before execution.

In addition, in the effect example shown in FIG. 178, in addition to the first precursor effect display ZEH1 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) also corresponds to the fourth acceptance period. The predictive effect (fourth predictive specific effect) is executed (FIGS. 178(b) to (d)). Unlike the first precursor effect display ZEH1 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the fourth predictive effect in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) differs from the first predictive effect display ZEH1 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) in that the timing tI3 at which the first acceptance period occurs is It is executed even when it arrives, and is executed in a form that straddles the timing tI3.

In this embodiment, the predictive effect corresponding to the fourth acceptance period is executed as a different effect (fourth specific predictive effect) from the first specific predictive effect shown in FIG. You may make it perform as the same production|presentation as the 1st precursor specific production|presentation shown. In this case, even when the second effect device is confirmed, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the first reception period and the fourth reception period occurs.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is further provided with a third effect device (speaker), and when the fourth acceptance period occurs, the timing shown in FIG. At tI2, the acceptance acceptance sound (corresponding to "♪" output in FIGS. 178(b) to (d)) is started to be output. That is, the acceptable reception sound corresponding to the fourth reception period is audibly output across the timing tI3 (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 178(d)") at which the fourth reception period occurs. Thus, the action by the player can be accepted while the acceptable acceptance sound is audibly output.

In this regard, in the fourth reception period, if the player accepts an action while the acceptance acceptance sound is audibly output, the acceptance acceptance sound is terminated halfway (audibly) based on the acceptance. (end of the output state in the middle).

In addition, in the fourth reception period, when an action by the player is accepted while the acceptance acceptance sound is being audibly output, not only is the acceptance acceptance sound terminated halfway, but also, when the acceptance is made, Based on, the audible output of the fourth post-reception output sound (corresponding to "♪♪" output in Fig. 179 (e1) or (e2) etc.) different from the first post-reception output sound is started. It has become. That is, in this case, in the fourth acceptance period, unlike the case of the presentation (display presentation) performed by the first presentation device, the effect (acceptance acceptable sound) performed within the reception period and the reception are performed. Conflict (duplication) with the effect (output sound after the fourth reception) performed in response is eliminated.

As shown in FIG. 170(d), the output sound after the fourth acceptance is the same as the "fourth post-acceptance effect display UG4", as shown in FIG. 170(d). ” is hidden, it will be executed for a relatively long time (“Situation where ♪♪ is output in (e1)-(i1) or (e2)-(e1) of FIG. 179”) equivalent to ). In addition, regarding the fourth post-acceptance output sound, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 178(d) to “C1 (FIGS. case) and an example in which the production progresses from FIG. It is desirable to output an output sound (mode).

Regarding the acceptable acceptance sound output corresponding to the fourth acceptance period, in order to make it difficult to recognize which of the first acceptance period and the fourth acceptance period occurs, It is desirable that the sound be the same as the acceptable acceptance sound that is output correspondingly. However, they do not necessarily have to be the same.

On the other hand, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 170, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 178(d) to “C3 (FIGS. This assumes a case where the motion by the user is not accepted.

That is, in this case, after the occurrence of the fourth acceptance period, the above timing tI4 arrives without the action by the player being accepted. In this respect, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tI4 (when the fourth reception period ends and the player is no longer allowed to accept the action), the timing tI3a (fourth 179(e3), the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the fourth acceptance period ends due to the player not being able to accept the action in time, the integrated model will be integrated within the fourth acceptance period after the end of the fourth acceptance period. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the image display IG was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

After that, even if the action by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. -1 or the display related to the fourth disappearance related display SK4-2 (in the figure, the display related to the fourth disappearance related display SK4-1) is started.

That is, in the first rendering device (rendering display device 1600) according to this example, the “fourth elimination-related display SK4- 1 or second extinction-related display SK4-2” is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the “fourth extinction-related display SK4” is displayed is an “integrated model image display IG (model image display , Gauge image display)” overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the fourth acceptance period has ended without acceptance being made, the integrated model image display IG will continue to be displayed. By making it difficult to see, it is possible to suggest that the fourth reception period has ended. Also, even in a situation where the fourth reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the action by the player is not accepted within the fourth acceptance period, the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4-1" is displayed as the fourth disappearance-related display SK4. If the action by the player is accepted within the fourth acceptance period, the effect progresses from FIG. This corresponds to the case (when the post-acceptance effect with a relatively low degree of expectation is being executed). On the other hand, the case where the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4-2" is displayed as the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 when the action by the player is not accepted within the fourth acceptance period means that the fourth acceptance period 178(d) to “C2 (FIG. 179(e2)-(i2))” (relatively expected It is equivalent to the case where high performance after reception is executed).

That is, in this case, even if the action by the player is not accepted during the fourth acceptance period, the integrated model image display IG is hidden after the fourth acceptance period ends. Only by confirming the mode as the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4" that appears in the display (fourth disappearance-related display SK4-1, fourth disappearance-related display SK4-2), the effect after the fourth reception is in a mode with a low degree of expectation. Since it becomes possible to recognize whether the game has been executed or whether it has been executed with a high degree of expectation, it is possible to suitably suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

After that, as shown in FIG. 179(g3), first, out of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "fourth extinction related display SK4", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. do. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "fourth extinction related display SK4" is hidden as shown in FIG. 179(h3).

In the fourth acceptance period, as in the first acceptance period, the corresponding post-acceptance effects are low-expected aspects (FIGS. 179(e1) to (i1)) and high-expected aspects (FIG. 179(e2) to (i2)), the same specific mode may appear as the fourth disappearance-related display SK4. However, in this case, even when the action by the player is not accepted during the fourth acceptance period, unlike the case of the above-described first acceptance period, the same specific mode appears as the fourth disappearance-related display SK4. Become.

By the way, as described above, in both the first reception period and the fourth reception period, the first effect display TE ( Here, the above-described "timer effect") and the second effect display FE (frog character) can be displayed respectively.

In this regard, when the first acceptance period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 174(b) and (c), the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE are not obscured by the "first precursor effect display ZEH1". Further, after the first reception period has ended, as shown in FIGS. mode) and the first disappearance-related display SK1-2 (a mode when not accepted) appear, but the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE are the first disappearance-related displays. SK1 (first disappearance-related display SK1-1 or first disappearance-related display SK1-2) does not make it difficult to see.

On the other hand, even when the fourth acceptance period occurs, as shown in FIGS. The TE and the second effect display FE are not obscured by the "first precursor effect display ZEH1". Further, after the fourth reception period ends, as shown in FIGS. -1 or the fourth disappearance related display SK4-2) appears, but the first effect display TE is not obscured by the fourth disappearance related display SK4. However, the second effect display FE is made difficult to be visually recognized by the fourth disappearance related display SK4.

According to such a configuration, even if the type of the disappearance-related display SK corresponds to which type of the reception period is not stored, the second effect is produced when the disappearance-related display SK is displayed. Only by confirming whether or not the display FE is made difficult to see, it becomes possible to guess which type has occurred as the acceptance period. Further, regarding the first effect display TE, regardless of whether or not the disappearance-related display SK makes the second effect display FE difficult to see, the disappearance-related display SK does not make the first effect display TE difficult to see. Therefore, it is expected that the decrease in interest in games will be suppressed.

On the other hand, when the second reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the "second premonitory effect display ZEH2" is displayed and then the "second post-reception effect display UG2" is displayed. Among the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE, the first effect display TE can be displayed, but the second effect display FE is not displayed. .

That is, in this case, only by confirming whether or not the "predictive effect display" or the "receiving period" has occurred while the second effect display FE is being displayed, the type of the receiving period can be guessed (at least the first effect display). Therefore, the second effect display FE itself does not suggest the degree of expectation for the changing pattern effect. Even so, it is possible to provide an interesting effect using the second effect display FE.

Even when the second reception period occurs, the first effect display TE is difficult to see due to the precursor effect display and disappearance-related display, as in the case of the first reception period and the fourth reception period. It is designed not to be tampered with.

FIG. 171 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when the fifth condition is satisfied as a result of determination and the fifth reception period (fifth reception effect) occurs.

Now, the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, normal game state that is non-probability variable / non-time saving), and as a result of fluctuation pattern determination, "5th fluctuation pattern" is selected. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, performance determination (announcement determination, etc.) corresponding to the fifth variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (such as the effect depiction according to the fifth variable pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the fifth variable pattern, etc.) is started, and the notice is given within the execution period of the variable effect. An effect (announcement effect) according to the result of effect determination is additionally executed to the effect of the selected "fifth variation pattern" itself.

However, in the effect related to the "fifth variation pattern", even if any result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination), the fifth predetermined time after the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ When the elapsed timing tJ3 (may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or may be the timing within the SP reach state), "acceptance regarding the effect after the fifth operation" is allowed. The fifth acceptance period (effective period) is generated. Thus, when the action by the player is accepted within the fifth acceptance period, the fifth post-acceptance effect is performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the fifth acceptance period (effective period) may be generated as a result of the announcement effect determination.

In this regard, in the fifth reception period (fifth reception effect) according to this embodiment, the content executed as the fifth reception effect (in the first effect device "Production display after the 5th reception", "Specific production after the 5th reception" in the second production device, "Output sound after the 5th reception" in the 3rd production device) is after each reception corresponding to the other reception period It is different from the production ("post-acceptance display" in the first production device, "post-reception specific production" in the second production device, and "post-reception output sound" in the third production device). Also, the "fifth precursor effect display" corresponding to the fifth reception period (fifth reception effect) is different from each precursor effect display corresponding to the other reception periods. However, the method of displaying the "fifth post-receipt effect display" and "fifth omen effect display" themselves (the start and end times of the display, and how other images are displayed until they are hidden) etc.) are explained in the display effect performed in relation to the first reception period and the display effect performed in relation to the second reception period (FIGS. 167, 168, 174 to 177), and other configurations are basically the same.

Below, an effect performed in relation to the occurrence of the fifth reception period (fifth reception effect) will be described. However, regarding the configuration that is the same as in the case of the first reception period (first reception effect) or the second reception period (second reception effect), it may be mentioned that it is the same, but further is omitted here. In other words, for matters that are not specifically mentioned, the effect will be performed as described in the first reception period (first reception effect) or the second reception period (second reception effect). Examples are equally applicable.

For example, timing tJ1 shown in FIG. 171 corresponds to timing tF1 shown in FIG. 167 and timing tG1 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tJ1 arrives, the display screen (effect display device 1600) starts executing the "fifth predictive effect display" as the predictive effect display.

In this regard, the "fifth premonition effect display" is a type that is displayed across timing tJ3 at which the fifth acceptance period occurs, as shown in FIG. 171(b). That is, although the "fifth omen effect display" differs from the above-described "second omen effect display ZEH2" displayed corresponding to the second acceptance period in terms of effect content (display image), the "display start time and Regarding the end time and how it relates to the display of other images until it is hidden, etc., "second omen effect display ZEH2" will be described with reference to FIGS. Display is performed in the same manner as described above. Other examples and modifications are similarly applicable.

Timing tJ2 shown in FIG. 171 corresponds to timing tF2 shown in FIG. 167 and timing tG2 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tJ2 arrives, the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "fifth omen effect display" is being displayed. At least a part of the area where the "model image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "fifth precursor effect display" is displayed.

Timing tJ3 shown in FIG. 171 corresponds to timing tF3 shown in FIG. 167 and timing tG3 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tJ3 arrives, the fifth acceptance period occurs while the "fifth omen effect display" and the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" are being displayed. It will happen.

Timing tJ3a shown in FIG. 171 corresponds to timing tF3a shown in FIG. 167 and timing tG3a shown in FIG. Therefore, when the player's action is accepted at timing tI3a, the fifth acceptance period ends, and the post-acceptance effect (fifth post-acceptance effect) corresponding to the fifth acceptance period is started to be executed. It will happen. It should be noted that the fifth post-acceptance effect is similar to the first post-acceptance effect (FIG. 175) and the second post-acceptance effect (FIG. 177). In some cases, the second aspect, which is relatively expected, is executed.

Timing tJ3b shown in FIG. 170 corresponds to timing tF3b shown in FIG. 167 and timing tG3b shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tJ3b arrives, "a mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" appears.

In this regard, when the acceptance is made during the fifth acceptance period, the above-mentioned "first disappearance-related display SK1", which corresponds in common with the first acceptance period, is considered as "a mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize". display is started. 167 and 175 for "first disappearance-related display SK1" or "starting and ending times of display, and how it relates to other image display until it is hidden", etc. as described with reference to Other examples and modifications are similarly applicable.

However, unlike the case of the first reception period, regarding the ``mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see'' corresponding to the fifth reception period, the effect after the fifth reception is ``relatively expected. A different mode may appear when the "first mode with a low degree of expectation" is executed and when the "second mode with a relatively high degree of expectation" is executed.

For example, when the "relatively high-expectation second mode" is executed as the fifth post-acceptance effect, the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see" is set to "first disappearance-related display SK1 (Here, the first disappearance-related display SK1-1 (Fig. 175), which is the first mode, is displayed. On the other hand, as the effect after the fifth reception, "the first display with a relatively low degree of expectation is displayed. mode" is executed, if a mode different from the "first disappearance-related display SK1-1" appears as the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize", the first acceptance When the ``first disappearance-related display SK1-1'' is displayed corresponding to the period, the player is made aware of the possibility that the ``second mode with relatively high expectations'' will be executed as the fifth post-acceptance effect. Since it becomes possible to do so, it becomes possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In this case, when the "second aspect with relatively high degree of expectation" is executed as the fifth after-acceptance effect, the "second aspect with relatively high degree of expectation" is executed as the first after-acceptance effect. It is desirable to set so that the degree of expectation (proportion of appearance of the jackpot pattern) is higher than the time. The percentage may be 100%.

Further, when the "relatively low-expectation first mode" is executed as the fifth post-acceptance effect, the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see" is set to "first disappearance-related display SK1- 1", the different mode may be "the first disappearance-related display SK1-2, which is the second form of the first disappearance-related display SK1". That is, in this case, when the first extinction-related display SK1-2 appears, whether the first disappearance-related display SK1-2 appeared as a result of being accepted in the fifth reception period, or whether the first disappearance-related display SK1-2 appeared It is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the first disappearance-related display SK1-2 has appeared as a result of not being in time for the reception, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the "first disappearance related display SK1-1" is displayed corresponding to the first reception period, the "relatively high expectation second aspect" is executed as the fifth post-reception effect. When the "first disappearance related display SK1-2" is displayed corresponding to the first reception period, the effect after the fifth reception is "relatively expected". In order to more appropriately make the user aware of the possibility that the "lower degree second mode" will be executed, even as the precursor effect display corresponding to the fifth reception period, instead of the "fifth precursor effect display", It is desirable to execute the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" similar to the first reception period.

In addition, when the application is accepted during the fifth acceptance period, as in the case of the first acceptance period and the second acceptance period, as shown in FIG. The effect after the fifth reception (specific effect after the fifth reception) using the effect device (here, the sub liquid crystal 1610) is changed to the effect after the fifth reception (the effect display after the fifth reception) using the first effect device Start execution in advance. It is also the same that the specific effect after the fifth reception is executed so that a different aspect appears according to the degree of expectation. In addition, before the reception period occurs, the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) may also execute the precursor effect (fifth specific precursor effect) corresponding to the fifth reception period. Further, the specific predictive effect using the second effect device (here, the sub-liquid crystal 1610) is executed as the same effect as the first specific predictive effect shown in FIG. 174, instead of the fifth specific predictive effect. good too.

Further, when the fifth reception period occurs, the reception permission sound starts to be output at timing tJ2. As shown in FIG. 171(d), this acceptance acceptance sound is of a type that is terminated halfway when acceptance is made. In the example shown in FIG. 171(d), similarly to the acceptance acceptance sound that is audibly output when the second acceptance period occurs, the "long-time acceptance sound" and the "short-time acceptance sound" are audibly output as acceptance acceptance sounds. 168, 176 and Figure 168, Figure 176 and Figure 168, Figure 176 and Figure 168, Figure 176 and 177, the audible output is performed in the same manner as described for the "acceptable sound". Other examples and modifications are similarly applicable.

However, with respect to the reception acceptable sound output when the fifth reception period occurs, only one reception acceptable sound is output, just like the reception acceptable sound output when the third reception period and the fourth reception period occur. is output, and when it is accepted, it may be output as being terminated halfway.

In any case, in the fifth acceptance period, if the player accepts an action while the acceptance acceptance sound is being audibly output, the acceptance acceptance sound is terminated in the middle, and the acceptance is made. Sometimes this will initiate the audible output of a fifth post-reception tone that is different from the post-reception tone that is output corresponding to the other reception periods. That is, in this case, in the fifth reception period, as in the case of the second reception period, the effect (acceptance acceptance sound) performed within the reception period and the effect (fifth reception post-output sound) do not conflict with (overlap).

It should be noted that the fifth after-reception output sound is similar to the first after-reception output sound, the second after-reception output sound, and the like. audible output as an output sound different from that in the case of execution in the highly anticipated second mode.

On the other hand, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 171, if the action by the player is not accepted within the fifth acceptance period, the action by the player will be accepted after the fifth acceptance period occurs. The timing tJ4 arrives without delay.

In this regard, even in the fifth acceptance period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at timing tJ4 (the time when the fifth acceptance period ends and the player is no longer allowed to accept the action) , the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see.

After that, even if the action by the player is not accepted, the display of the fifth disappearance related display SK5 is started as "a mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize".

As for the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" when no acceptance is made during the fifth acceptance period, it is provisionally accepted during the fifth acceptance period in the same way as the second acceptance period. Aspects that would have appeared if there had been (a different aspect depending on the degree of expectation) will appear. However, in the same way as in the first acceptance period, aspects that cannot appear when accepted in the fifth acceptance period may be made to appear.

FIG. 172 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the sixth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the sixth reception period (sixth reception effect) occurs.

Now, the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is non-probability variable / non-time saving), and "6th variation pattern" is selected as a result of variation pattern determination Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the sixth variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (the effect depiction according to the sixth variable pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the sixth variable pattern, etc.) is started, and the notice is given within the execution period of the variable effect. An effect (announcement effect) according to the result of effect determination is additionally executed to the effect of the selected "sixth variation pattern" itself.

However, in the effect related to the "sixth variation pattern", even if any result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination), the sixth predetermined time after the start of the variable effect of the decorative symbol SZ When the elapsed timing tK3 (may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or may be the timing within the SP reach state), "acceptance regarding the effect after the sixth operation" is allowed. The sixth acceptance period (effective period) is generated. Thus, when the player's action is accepted within the sixth acceptance period, the sixth post-acceptance effect is performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the sixth acceptance period (effective period) may be generated as a result of the announcement effect determination.

In this regard, in the sixth reception period (sixth reception effect) according to this embodiment, the contents executed as the effect after the sixth reception (the first effect device "Effect display after 6th reception", "specific effect after 6th reception" in the second effect device, "output sound after 6th reception" in the 3rd effect device) After each reception corresponding to other reception periods It is different from the production ("post-acceptance display" in the first production device, "post-reception specific production" in the second production device, and "post-reception output sound" in the third production device). In addition, when the action (operation) by the player is accepted in the sixth acceptance period (sixth acceptance effect), the model image display (here So, I'm trying to hide the integrated model image display). However, the method of displaying the "6th reception after reception" and "simulated image display" (the start and end time of the display, and how it will be displayed with other images until it is hidden) are involved, etc.) are the same as those described in the display effects (FIGS. 167, 174, and 175) performed in relation to the first reception period, and other configurations are also It is basically the same as any of the methods described above.

Below, an effect performed in relation to the occurrence of the sixth reception period (sixth reception effect) will be described. However, regarding the same configuration as in the case of the first reception period (first reception effect), the fact that it is the same may be mentioned, but further explanation is omitted here. In other words, for matters that are not particularly mentioned, the effect will be performed as described in the first reception period (first reception effect), and the same can be applied to other examples and modifications.

For example, timing tK1 shown in FIG. 172 corresponds to timing tF1 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tK1 arrives, the display screen (effect display device 1600) starts executing the "first predictive effect display" as the predictive effect display.

Timing tK2 shown in FIG. 172 corresponds to timing tF2 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tK2 arrives, the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "first precursor effect display" is being displayed. At least a part of the area where the "model image display IG" is displayed overlaps the area where the "first precursor effect display" is displayed.

Timing tK3 shown in FIG. 172 corresponds to timing tF3 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tK3 arrives, the sixth acceptance period occurs while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is being displayed.

Timing tK3a shown in FIG. 172 corresponds to timing tF3a shown in FIG. Therefore, when the player's action is accepted at timing tK3a, the sixth acceptance period ends, and the post-acceptance effect (sixth post-acceptance effect) corresponding to the sixth acceptance period starts to be executed. It will happen. It should be noted that the effect after the sixth reception is also the same as the effect after the first reception (FIG. 175), etc., when the first mode with a relatively low degree of expectation is executed and the second mode with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed. may be executed.

However, as shown in FIG. 172, the processing related to the effects related to the sixth reception period does not have anything corresponding to the timing tF3b shown in FIG. Display, gauge image display)" is hidden until it becomes difficult to visually recognize it. This is the same (timing tF3b does not exist) regardless of which of the "mode with low expectations" and the "mode with high expectations" appears as the effect after the sixth acceptance. The same applies to the case where the sixth reception period ends without the action by the player being accepted during the sixth reception period (timing tF3b does not exist).

According to such a configuration, in other acceptance periods, when the acceptance period ends, the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is visually recognized until it is hidden. In spite of the appearance of a mode that makes it difficult to do so, the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is hidden during the sixth acceptance period even if the acceptance period ends. Since the mode (disappearance-related display SK) that makes it difficult to visually recognize it will not appear until the sixth acceptance period ends (the situation where the action by the player has been accepted and deleted) ) can be made difficult to recognize, and it is expected that the tension will be maintained appropriately.

In addition, when the acceptance is made during the sixth acceptance period, as in the case of the first acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 6th post-acceptance effect (specific effect after 6th reception) using the sub liquid crystal 1610) is started prior to the 6th post-acceptance effect (sixth post-reception effect display) using the first effect device. . It is also the same that the specific effect after the sixth reception is executed so that a different aspect appears according to the degree of expectation. In addition, before the reception period occurs, the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) may also execute a precursor effect (sixth precursor specific effect) corresponding to the sixth reception period. In addition, regarding the omen specific effect using the second effect device (here, the sub liquid crystal 1610), the same effect as the first omen specific effect shown in FIG. 174 is executed instead of the sixth omen specific effect. good too.

Further, when the sixth reception period occurs, the reception permission sound starts to be output at timing tK2. As shown in FIG. 172(d), this acceptance acceptance sound is of a type that is terminated halfway when acceptance is made. 170, 178 and FIG. 170, FIG. 178 and FIG. 179, the audible output is performed in the same manner as described for the "allowable reception sound" corresponding to the fourth reception period. Other examples and modifications are similarly applicable.

However, with respect to the acceptable acceptance sound that is output when the sixth acceptance period occurs, two acceptable acceptance sounds are output in the same manner as the acceptable acceptance sound that is output when the second acceptance period occurs. It may be output as being terminated halfway when it is terminated.

In any case, in the sixth reception period, if the player accepts an action while the reception acceptance sound is audibly output, the reception acceptance sound is not only terminated halfway, but also the acceptance is made. Sometimes this will initiate the audible output of a sixth post-reception tone that is different from the post-reception tone output corresponding to the other reception periods. That is, in this case, in the sixth reception period, as in the case of the fourth reception period, an effect (acceptance acceptance sound) performed within the reception period and an effect (sixth reception post-output sound) do not conflict with (overlap).

It should be noted that the sixth post-acceptance output sound is similar to the first post-acceptance output sound and the fourth post-acceptance output sound. audible output as an output sound different from that in the case of execution in the highly anticipated second mode.

On the other hand, although not shown in FIG. 172, if the action by the player is not accepted within the sixth acceptance period, the action by the player will be accepted after the sixth acceptance period occurs. The timing tK4 arrives without delay.

In this regard, even in the sixth reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tK4 (when the sixth reception period ends and the player is no longer allowed to accept the action) , the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see. However, as described above, during the sixth acceptance period, after the timing tK4 arrives without the action by the player being accepted, the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" does not appear. .

FIG. 173 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the seventh condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect) occurs.

Now, the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in the specific game state (for example, the normal game state that is non-probability variable / non-time saving), and the "seventh variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, performance determination (announcement determination, etc.) corresponding to the seventh variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (the effect depiction according to the seventh variable pattern, the sound output of the BGM playback according to the seventh variable pattern, etc.) is started, and the notice is given within the execution period of the variable effect. An effect (announcement effect) according to the result of effect determination is additionally executed to the effect of the selected "seventh variation pattern" itself.

However, in the effect related to the "seventh variation pattern", even if any result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination), the seventh predetermined time after the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ When the elapsed timing tL3 (may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or may be the timing within the SP reach state), "acceptance regarding the effect after the seventh operation" is allowed. The seventh reception period (effective period) is generated. Thus, when the action by the player is accepted within the seventh acceptance period, the seventh post-acceptance effect is performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the seventh acceptance period (effective period) may be generated as a result of the announcement effect determination.

In this regard, in the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect) according to this embodiment, the content executed as the seventh reception effect (in the first effect device "Production display after 7th reception", "Specific production after 7th reception" in the second production device, "Output sound after 7th reception" in the 3rd production device) are after each reception corresponding to other reception periods It is different from the production ("post-acceptance display" in the first production device, "post-reception specific production" in the second production device, and "post-reception output sound" in the third production device). Also, the "seventh precursor effect display" corresponding to the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect) is different from each precursor effect display corresponding to the other reception periods. In addition, in the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect) according to this embodiment, even if "a mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize", each disappearance-related display corresponding to the other reception period , a different "seventh disappearance-related display" appears. However, the method of displaying the "seventh post-acceptance display", "seventh omen effect display", and "seventh disappearance-related display" How it relates to other image display during the period, etc.) is the same as that described in any of the display effects performed in relation to each acceptance period described above, and other configurations are basically the same.

Below, an effect performed in relation to the occurrence of the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect) will be described. However, regarding the same configuration as in other reception periods (other reception effects), the fact that they are the same will be mentioned, but further explanation will be omitted here. In addition, for matters that are not particularly mentioned, the effect will be performed as described in the first reception period (first reception effect), and the same can be applied to other examples and modifications.

For example, timing tL1 shown in FIG. 173 corresponds to timing tF1 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tL1 arrives, the precursor effect display is started on the display screen (the effect display device 1600).

However, as described above, during the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect), the "seventh precursor effect display" that does not correspond to other reception periods is displayed as the precursor effect display corresponding thereto. there is As shown in FIG. 173(b), the "seventh omen effect display" is of a type that is not displayed when the seventh acceptance period occurs and is hidden before this. . That is, although the "seventh omen effect display" differs from the above-described "first omen effect display ZEH1" displayed corresponding to the first acceptance period in terms of effect content (display image), the "display start time and Regarding the end time and how it relates to other image display until it is hidden, etc., it is as described for the "first omen effect display ZEH1" with reference to FIGS. 168 and 174. Display is performed by the method. Other examples and modifications are similarly applicable.

Timing tL2 shown in FIG. 173 corresponds to timing tF2 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tL2 arrives, the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "seventh omen effect display" is being displayed. At least part of the area where the model image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "seventh omen effect display" is displayed.

Timing tL3 shown in FIG. 173 corresponds to timing tF3 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tL3 arrives, the seventh reception period occurs while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is being displayed.

Timing tL3a shown in FIG. 173 corresponds to timing tF3a shown in FIG. Therefore, when the player's action is accepted at timing tL3a, the seventh acceptance period ends, and the post-acceptance effect (seventh post-acceptance effect) corresponding to the seventh acceptance period is started to be executed. It will happen. It should be noted that, similarly to the effects after the first reception (FIG. 175) and the like, the seventh after-reception production is performed in the first mode with a relatively low degree of expectation and in the second mode with a relatively high degree of expectation. may be executed.

Timing tL3b shown in FIG. 173 corresponds to timing tF3b shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tL3b arrives, "a mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" appears. However, as described above, when the acceptance is made during the seventh acceptance period, the "seventh disappearance-related display" that does not correspond to other acceptance periods is considered as "a form in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize". is started (timing tL3b).

Here, the "seventh disappearance-related display" differs from the above-mentioned "first disappearance-related display SK1" displayed corresponding to the first reception period in terms of the effect content (display image), but the "display start time 167, 168, 175, and 177, etc., for "the first disappearance-related Display SK1” is performed by the method described above. Other examples and modifications are similarly applicable. In addition, in both "when the seventh reception effect is executed as a mode with a relatively low degree of expectation" and "when it is executed as a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation", the "seventh elimination-related "Display" is the same as in the case of the first acceptance period in that it is displayed in the same manner.

However, unlike the first reception period, the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see (seventh disappearance-related display)" corresponding to the seventh reception period is different from the first reception period. , a different mode may appear depending on whether the "first mode with a relatively low degree of expectation" is executed or the "second mode with a relatively high degree of expectation" is executed.

Timing tL3c shown in FIG. 173 corresponds to timing tF3c shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tL3c arrives, while the display related to the "seventh disappearance-related display" (a mode in which the integrated simulated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize) is appearing, the player can Execution of the "seventh post-reception effect display" as the post-acceptance effect in the first effect device (the effect display device 1600) in response to the acceptance of the action is started.

In addition, when the reception is received during the seventh reception period, as in the case of the first reception period, as shown in FIG. 173, the second effect device (here, 7th post-acceptance effect (specific effect after 7th reception) using the sub liquid crystal 1610) is started prior to the 7th post-acceptance effect (display of 7th post-acceptance effect) using the first effect device. . It is also the same that the specific effect after the seventh reception is executed so that a different mode appears according to the degree of expectation. In addition, before the reception period occurs, the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) may also execute the precursor effect (seventh precursor specific effect) corresponding to the seventh reception period. In addition, as for the specific predictive effect using the second effect device (here, the sub liquid crystal 1610), the same effect as the first specific predictive effect shown in FIG. 174 is executed instead of the seventh specific predictive effect. good too.

In addition, when the seventh reception period occurs, the reception permission sound starts to be output at timing tL2. As shown in FIG. 173(d), this reception permitting sound is of a type that is terminated halfway when the reception is made. 170, 178 and FIG. 170, FIG. 178 and FIG. 179, the audible output is performed in the same manner as described for the "allowable reception sound" corresponding to the fourth reception period. Other examples and modifications are similarly applicable.

However, with respect to the acceptable acceptance sound that is output when the seventh acceptance period occurs, two acceptable acceptance sounds are output in the same manner as the acceptable acceptance sound that is output when the second acceptance period occurs. It may be output as being terminated halfway when it is terminated.

In any case, during the seventh acceptance period, if the player accepts an action while the acceptance acceptance sound is being audibly output, not only is the acceptance acceptance sound terminated halfway, but the acceptance is made. Occasionally, this will initiate the audible output of a seventh post-acceptance tone that is different from the post-acceptance tone output corresponding to the other acceptance periods. That is, in this case, in the seventh reception period, as in the case of the fourth reception period, an effect (acceptance acceptance sound) performed within the reception period and an effect (seventh reception post-output sound) does not conflict with (overlap).

It should be noted that the seventh post-acceptance output sound is similar to the first post-acceptance output sound and the fourth post-acceptance output sound. audible output as an output sound different from that in the case of execution in the highly anticipated second mode.

On the other hand, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 173, if the action by the player is not accepted within the seventh acceptance period, the action by the player is accepted after the seventh acceptance period occurs. The timing tL4 arrives without delay.

In this regard, even in the seventh reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at timing tL4 (the time when the seventh reception period ends and the player is no longer allowed to accept the action) , the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see.

After that, even if the player's action is not accepted, the display of the seventh disappearance-related display is started as "a mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize".

Regarding the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" when no acceptance is made during the seventh acceptance period, as in the first acceptance period, Aspects that cannot sometimes appear appear. However, in the same manner as in the second acceptance period, a mode (a mode that differs depending on the degree of expectation) that would have appeared if it had been accepted during the seventh acceptance period may appear.

According to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present application, in which the first to seventh reception periods are provided, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

That is, first, regardless of which of the first reception period to the seventh reception period occurs, the model image displayed using a predetermined area in the display screen (effect display device 1600) It is designed to be able to be displayed even after the effect progresses based on the acceptance of the action by the player (after the change in the effect is started based on the acceptance). As a result, even after the production progresses based on the acceptance, the game can determine in which mode (for example, FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d)) the model image display was displayed within the acceptance period. It will be possible for people to understand

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the contents of the production that progresses when the reception is received (conversation notice, cut-in notice, movable body notice, etc. as production after reception, notice production (expectation suggestive production) ) types) have different acceptance periods (1st acceptance period to 7th acceptance period), and it is possible to generate a type acceptance period (effective period) according to the result of the judgment (production judgment). It is supposed to be.

In this regard, during the first reception period to the seventh reception period, when the action by the player is accepted, the effect display after reception (the effect display after the first reception to the seventh reception) is performed based on the acceptance. Effect display after acceptance) can be displayed in the "effect display device 1600". Among these, in the first to fifth reception periods and the seventh reception period, when the action by the player is accepted, the post-acceptance effect display is displayed based on the acceptance. In addition, "a form in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" is further made to appear. In other words, in this case, it is possible to confirm which aspect of the model image display has appeared even after the acceptance is made, and until the model image display is hidden By reducing the visibility of the image display by making it difficult to see the image display (disappearance-related display), the target of the player's gaze naturally shifts from the "simulated image display" to the "post-acceptance display". It will be expected that

However, since the display of the model image is originally intended to be displayed during the acceptance period when the acceptance has not yet been made, if the model image is displayed even after the acceptance has been made, It becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the effect display has already been displayed after reception, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may decrease. In this regard, when the acceptance is made during any one of the first acceptance period to the fifth acceptance period and the seventh acceptance period, the model image display is "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display )” is hidden (invisible) while the display is displayed, while the post-acceptance effect display is displayed while the “mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)” is displayed. I'm trying to That is, in this case, after the action is accepted by the player, while the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)" appears, the display before acceptance (model image display) changes to the display after acceptance The transition of the display effect to (effect display after acceptance) is realized.

It should be noted that both the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" and the "post-acceptance effect display" are common in that they are displayed based on acceptance. However, the “mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)” is, for example, as shown in FIG. 175 (f1), FIG. It appears so as to make the simulated image display difficult to see when the display is in a displayed state. On the other hand, the "effect display after reception" is a situation in which a model image display is displayed, as shown in FIG. 175 (g1), FIG. 177 (g1), FIG. Even if it is displayed at a certain time, it appears so as not to make the display of the simulated image difficult to see. Further, in each of the examples described above, the "effect display after acceptance" is started to be displayed when the model image display is being displayed. The display does not necessarily start when the display is in the displayed state, and the display may start after the model image display is hidden.

In addition, regarding the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)", as a method of "appearing in a manner that makes the model image display difficult to visually recognize", at least a part of the area where the model image display is displayed Secondly, in addition to the method of preferentially displaying (displaying on the front layer) an image display different from the model image display, a part of the model image display is missing due to the image display different from the model image display ( It is possible to adopt a method of realizing by displaying an image (moving image) made to be visible (invisibly). It is also possible to adopt a method of changing the numerical values (transmittance, etc.) related to the display characteristics of the model image display itself instead of the image display different from the model image display. On the other hand, regarding the "post-reception effect display", as a method of "appearing so that the model image display is not difficult to see", the "post-reception effect display" is added to at least a part of the area where the model image display is displayed. However, in addition to the method of displaying the "post-reception effect display" (displayed in the rear layer) in a way that the model image display is prioritized, at least while the model image display is displayed It is possible to employ a method or the like that is realized by displaying the "post-acceptance effect display" only in an area excluding the area where the model image display is displayed.

In addition, as a mode in which the model image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display), a method of displaying an image display different from the model image display in at least a part of the area where the model image display is displayed, It is also possible to adopt both a method of changing a numerical value (transmittance, etc.) related to the display characteristics of the image display itself.

In addition, the ``mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)'' refers to a situation in which the ``post-acceptance display'' is not yet displayed before the ``post-acceptance display'' is displayed. It appears below. In other words, in this case, under the condition that the "post-acceptance effect display" is not yet displayed, the model image display becomes difficult to see due to the above-mentioned "aspect in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)". Therefore, even though the model image display is visible, the ``post-reception effect display'' can appear soon, and the player's gaze is changed from the ``difficult to see model image display''. You will be able to encourage them to prepare in advance.

In addition, when accepted during the first acceptance period to the fifth acceptance period, the seventh acceptance period, etc., the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is the "post-acceptance effect display ” is displayed, and is hidden while the “post-reception effect display” is being displayed. As a result, during the period in which the "post-reception effect display" is displayed, after the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is hidden, the " Since it is possible to provide the effect related to "effect display after reception", it is possible to improve the interest in the game by changing the effect during the display period.

In addition, in each of the production examples described above regarding the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, FIGS. As shown in 179 (g1) and (h1), regarding the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)", not only the area where the model image display is displayed but also the model image display is displayed even in areas where is not displayed. In this area, the "post-reception effect display" is displayed in at least a part of it. At least part of the "display" is displayed (for example, displayed in the rear layer) so as to be difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, the ``mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)'' appears as one that makes not only the model image display but also the ``post-reception effect display'' difficult to see. Since it will be a thing, it is expected to improve both the performance until the model image display is hidden and the performance when the display of "effect display after reception" starts Become.

Further, as described above, in each of the above-described production examples regarding the first reception period to the seventh reception period, the "post-reception production display" is displayed before the "post-reception production display" is displayed after the reception is made. ” is not displayed, apart from the “mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)”, a specific effect after reception that does not make the model image display difficult to see (using the second effect device Effect after reception) can appear in a mode according to the degree of expectation. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the post-acceptance production prior to this without interfering with the production of the first production device.

In addition, in each of the production examples described above regarding the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, the specific production after reception (production after reception using the second production device) Appears in a situation where the "aspect in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" has not yet appeared before the appearance of the "appearance in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)". I'm trying In addition, the post-acceptance specific effect (post-acceptance effect using the second effect device) will continue until after the “mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)” ends. there is

According to such a configuration, a person who dislikes complicated effects in the first effect device can enjoy the effect after reception by the second effect device having simplified effects. It is possible to improve amusement in games for various types of players.

Further, in each of the above-described effect examples regarding the first reception period to the seventh reception period, the precursor effect display is executed across the timings at which the model image display is displayed. Also, in some of the above-described production examples, as shown in FIGS. The "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" makes both the model image display and the precursor effect display difficult to see (such as the above-described priority display).

However, on the other hand, at least at the time when the ``mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)'' appears, neither the model image display nor the precursor effect display overlaps with the whole of them. , at least in part to ensure unobstructed visibility. That is, by gradually deteriorating the visibility of the model image display and the omen effect display (increasing the overlapping area), the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to recognize (disappearance-related display)" is executed. there is

Also, in each of the above-described production examples regarding the first reception period to the seventh reception period, the simulated image display is displayed by dynamic display as described above with reference to FIGS. 145 and 146. becomes. In this case, the dynamic display of the model image display is not terminated and continues even though "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" has appeared after the acceptance. It is desirable to

In addition, in each of the above-described production examples regarding the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is only the model image display. In addition, the gauge image indicating the remaining time until the end of the reception period is also made difficult to see. As a result, even if the gauge image is displayed even after acceptance, it is possible to prevent it from appearing as if there is remaining time left.

Further, in the above-described effect example, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the first acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods, after the first acceptance based on the acceptance The effect display UG1 can be displayed, and apart from the first post-acceptance effect display UG1, a mode (first disappearance-related display SK1) in which the model image display is difficult to see can appear. Further, when an action by the player is accepted within a second acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods, a second post-acceptance effect display UG1 different from the first post-acceptance effect display UG1 is displayed based on the acceptance. The post-reception effect display UG2 can be displayed, and apart from the second post-reception effect display UG2, a mode different from the case of the first reception period (second Disappearance related display SK2) can appear.

According to such a configuration, the model image can be displayed without confirming which of the "first post-reception effect display UG1" and the "second post-reception effect display UG2" is displayed as the post-reception effect display. Only by confirming what kind of mode (first disappearance-related display SK1, second disappearance-related display SK2) is the form that becomes difficult to visually recognize, the type of the post-acceptance effect display can be guessed.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the third acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods, the acceptance is made. Based on this, it is possible to display a third post-reception effect display that differs from both the "first post-reception effect display UG1" and the "second post-reception effect display UG2". Separately, as an effect mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image display, the mode (first disappearance-related display SK1) corresponding to the above-described first reception period can appear.

According to such a configuration, when the first disappearance-related display SK1 appears, it is unclear which of the first and third post-acceptance effect displays will appear, as a mode of making the model image display difficult to visually recognize. However, as a mode of making the model image display difficult to visually recognize, it is possible to guess that the second post-acceptance effect display will appear when the second disappearance-related display SK2 appears.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, the "disappearance related display" is displayed (prioritized display) in an area including at least a part of the area where the simulated image display is displayed. It was decided to realize as However, it is also possible to implement an effect using an effect device (such as a movable body) located in front of the display screen at a position overlapping at least part of the model image display when viewed from the front.

In addition, even if the same mode (first disappearance-related display SK1) appears as the "mode that makes the model image display difficult to see", if the type of reception period is different, the pattern variation will be a big hit symbol. It is desirable that the rate (expectation) at which the is stopped is different.

In addition, in the above-described production example, although the sign effect display is the same (the first sign effect display), when the "first disappearance-related display SK1" appears as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" (the first reception period, third reception period), and when a mode different from the "first disappearance related display SK1" appears (fourth reception period), or when the mode does not appear (sixth reception period ).

In addition, in the above-described production examples, the indications of the precursor effect display (the first precursor effect display and the fourth precursor effect display) are different, but the same aspect (the first extinction-related display SK1 ) appears (first acceptance period, fifth acceptance period).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to guess the type of reception period until it is grasped which type is executed as the performance after reception, and the game interest is improved. be able to

In addition, in the example of the production described above, it is possible to execute the production after reception (specific production after reception) using the second production device, and the production after reception (specific production after reception) is executed using the second production device. During the period, in the first rendering device, there are a state in which the model image display is relatively easy to see and a state in which the model image display is relatively difficult to see.

That is, in this case, even after the execution of the post-acceptance effect (post-acceptance specific effect) using the second effect device is started based on the acceptance, it is possible to determine which mode has appeared as the model image display. It is possible to confirm. In addition, by making the model image display relatively difficult to see during the execution period of the post-acceptance effect (specific post-acceptance effect) using the second effect device, It is expected to prompt the player to naturally shift the player's gaze target to the "second effect device".

In the production example described above, the post-acceptance production using the second production device (post-reception specific production) is continuously displayed (displayed in an easy-to-see state) from before the reception, and the visibility of the model image display is The execution is started so as not to affect the More specifically, the model image display is displayed in a predetermined area within the display screen (effect display device 1600), but the after-acceptance effect (post-reception specific effect) using the second effect device is It is not an image display that is displayed using at least a part of the predetermined area, nor an effect that is executed at a position that overlaps at least a part of the predetermined area when viewed from the front.

In addition, in the example of effect described above, the display of the post-acceptance effect is started after the appearance timing of "the mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". ” may be displayed at the appearance timing.

In addition, in each of the production examples described above, the ``mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize'' is realized as an image display that is displayed using at least a part of the ``area where the model image display is displayed''. I decided to However, in this case, it is desirable to display the image so that the area displayed in the "area where the simulated image is displayed" tends to gradually expand over time.

Further, as described above, the simulated image can be displayed in any one of a plurality of modes with different expectations. Further, according to the above-described production examples, even after acceptance, the display mode including display position, size, dynamic depiction, etc. is maintained and continued. Also, it is possible to recognize in what manner the model image display was displayed during the acceptance period.

However, in this case, when it is in the period immediately after acceptance, the post-acceptance production must be performed under such conditions (the display of the model image is maintained). That is, the range of effects is narrow, and only limited effects (effects after acceptance using only the effect device different from the first effect device) can be executed. However, if time passes and a ``mode that makes the model image display difficult to see (disappearance-related display)'' appears, a post-reception production will be performed under the condition that ``the visibility of the model image display may be deteriorated.'' Therefore, it becomes possible to execute the "effect display after reception in the first effect device" under such conditions. By performing step by step the two post-operation productions having different properties (the specific production after reception in the second production device, and the production display after reception in the first production device), the mode of the model image display even after acceptance. can be easily confirmed, and the role of post-operation production can also be suitably exhibited.

Further, in each of the production examples described above, when the second precursor effect display is displayed as the precursor effect display, if the acceptance is made within the acceptance period corresponding to this, "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" ” appears the second extinction related display SK1 (FIG. 177). Further, when the seventh omen effect display is displayed as the omen effect display, if the acceptance is made within the acceptance period corresponding to this, the seventh disappearance-related display appears as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". It's like On the other hand, if the "first precursor effect display" different from the above "second precursor effect display" or the above-described "seventh precursor effect display" is displayed as the precursor effect display, the corresponding "first precursor effect display" is displayed within the reception period corresponding to this. When the acceptance is made, the first disappearance-related display appears (first acceptance period, third acceptance period), and the fourth disappearance-related display appears ( 4th acceptance period).

That is, in this case, when the second omen effect display or the seventh omen effect display is displayed as the omen effect display, at that time, it is recognized what kind of mode will appear as "the mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". You will be able to

Moreover, in each of the aforementioned production examples, the "first precursor effect display" different from the specific mode (here, the "second precursor effect display" or the "seventh precursor effect display") is used as the precursor effect display. is displayed, even if it is accepted within the corresponding acceptance period, there is a case where "a mode in which the display of the model image becomes difficult to visually recognize" itself does not appear (6th acceptance period). there is

According to such a configuration, the precursor effect display is different from the specific aspect (here, the above-mentioned "second precursor effect display" or the above-described "seventh precursor effect display") (here, the first precursor effect display). If it is executed, whether or not the above-mentioned "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" itself appears within the period from the time when the acceptance is made until the model image display is turned off. is unknown, so the production performance is improved from the time it is accepted until the model image display is hidden, and the tension can be maintained appropriately. become able to.

It should be noted that each of the production examples described above may be implemented by transforming it into the following configuration, or the following configuration (acceptance period) may be further provided as another acceptance period (another sign production display). good too. That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, during the period from when the player's action is accepted until the model image display is hidden during the acceptance period, "the model image display becomes difficult to see." "mode" can appear. In this regard, in this modified example, when a specific aspect (for example, the second precursor effect display, the seventh precursor effect display, or another precursor effect display not described above) is displayed as the precursor effect display, Even if the acceptance is made within the acceptance period corresponding to this, the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" itself is prevented from appearing. That is, in this case, when the precursor effect display is executed in a specific manner, the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" does not appear until the model image display is hidden. It becomes possible to recognize that the simulated image display is not difficult to visually recognize in relation to "the aspect in which the display becomes difficult to visually recognize".

In this case, also in this modification, when the indication of the precursor effect is executed with the "first indication effect display" and is accepted within the corresponding acceptance period, the acceptance is made within the corresponding acceptance period. When the "aspect in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" appears (first reception period, third reception period, and fourth reception period), and the "aspect in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" "This itself does not appear (sixth reception period). Even with such a configuration, the portent effect display differs from a specific mode (for example, the second portent effect display, the seventh portent effect display, or another portent effect display not described above) (here, , first precursor effect display), it becomes unclear whether or not the above-mentioned "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" will appear. The effect is improved until the image display is turned off, and the tension can be preferably maintained.

As for the configurations according to these modified examples (replacement examples), it is possible to appropriately apply each configuration applicable to the above-described configuration before deformation.

Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, when a specific mode (here, "second predictive effect display") is displayed as the predictive effect display, the action by the player is performed within the reception period corresponding to this. Even if the acceptance is not accepted, the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" is made to appear in the same mode as when the acceptance was provisionally made.

On the other hand, when a mode (here, "first portent effect display") different from the specific mode (here, "second portent effect display") is displayed as the portent effect display, the corresponding mode is displayed. a case in which a different aspect appears as a "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" between the case where the player's action is accepted and the case where the acceptance is not made within the acceptance period (first acceptance period, etc.); Even if the action by the player is not accepted within the acceptance period corresponding to this, the ``mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize'' appears in the same mode as when the acceptance was temporarily made. There is a case (fourth acceptance period, etc.).

According to such a configuration, by using the effect (predictive effect display) executed before the acceptance period occurs, the effect after the end of the acceptance period or the effect when the acceptance is not received. etc., can be increased.

In addition, in each of the production examples described above, a specific mode (here, the second disappearance-related display, the fourth disappearance-related display, the seventh disappearance-related display, etc.) appears as the "mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". In the possible reception period, the audible output state of the acceptance acceptance sound is terminated halfway, but a mode different from the specific mode (here, the first disappearance-related display) as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" can appear, there are cases where the audible output state of the acceptance allowable sound is terminated halfway and cases where the audible output state of the acceptance allowable sound is not terminated midway. According to such a configuration, by confirming the output state of the acceptable reception sound when the reception is accepted, a situation may arise in which it is easy to guess what kind of aspect will appear as "the aspect in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". Since situations that are difficult to guess appear, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in each of the production examples described above, the reception acceptable sound that can be used as such judgment material is terminated at a timing (timing within the reception period) before the timing at which the reception period ends. Since it is audibly output as sound, is it possible to accept the acceptable sound while it is in the audible output state, or is it accepted after the audible output state of the acceptable acceptable sound is completed? You will be able to play by selecting what you want to do.

It should be noted that, in each of the production examples described above, during the accepting period during which the precursor effect display is executed in a specific manner (eg, the second precursor effect display), a plurality of modes (eg, FIGS. 144(a) to 144(a) to (d)) can be displayed, and during the acceptance period during which the precursor effect display is executed in a manner different from the specific aspect (for example, the first precursor effect display), the model image It is desirable to have a mode that cannot be displayed as a display (for example, the three modes shown in FIGS. 144(b) to (d) are not displayed, and only FIG. 144(a) is displayed). .

Further, in each of the examples of effects described above, a plurality of types are prepared as an indication display effect suggesting that a reception period in which an action by the player is to be received will soon occur in a reception period of a specific type. Of the plurality of types of precursor effect displays, specific precursor effect displays (second precursor effect display, fifth precursor effect display) can be executed across timings at which the reception period corresponding thereto occurs. , the action by the player can be accepted while the specific premonition effect display is being displayed.

That is, in this case, since the action by the player can be accepted while it is possible to confirm which type (mode) is being displayed as the precursor effect display, the type (mode) of the precursor effect display can be changed. A decline in amusement in a game caused by forgetting to confirm can be suppressed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, when an action by a player is accepted while a specific precursor effect display is being displayed, an effect is started to be executed after the acceptance in response to the acceptance. Even when the performance is started, the specific precursor effect display is not hidden but displayed.

That is, in this case, the action by the player is accepted while it is possible to confirm which type (mode) is being displayed as the precursor effect display, and furthermore, the effect is started to be executed after the acceptance according to the acceptance. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game caused by forgetting to confirm the type (mode) of the precursor effect display.

Further, in each of the production examples described above, among the post-reception productions, the production after reception using the second production device (specific production after reception) is a specific precursor production display (second precursor production display, fifth It is assumed that this is performed so as not to adversely affect the visibility of the precursor effect display).

Further, in each of the production examples described above, among the productions after reception, the production after reception using the first production device (production display after reception) itself is a specific precursor production display (second precursor production). display, and the fifth omen effect display) are to be executed so as not to adversely affect the visibility (specific omen effect display is given priority over the post-reception effect display (front side display on the layer), etc. ).

In addition, in each of the production examples described above, during the acceptance period in which the precursor effect display is executed in a specific manner (for example, the second precursor effect display, the fifth precursor effect display), while the precursor effect display is displayed However, when the action by the player is not accepted, the sign effect display can be hidden before the end of the corresponding acceptance period. ing. That is, in this case, the game can be played by selecting whether to start the production after acceptance with the indication of the precursor effect displayed, or to start the production after reception with the indication of the precursor effect hidden. become.

However, the execution state of a specific precursor effect display may not necessarily end within the acceptance period, and the execution state will not end within the acceptance period and will continue to be displayed until the end of the acceptance period. It can be a thing. In this case, the specific omen effect display is displayed (prioritized display) using at least a part of the area where the model image display is displayed until the timing in the middle of the reception period corresponding to it. In a period after the timing, it is desirable to display only an area different from the area where the simulated image display is displayed.

In addition, in each of the production examples described above, when the reception period occurs, a reception acceptance sound is made audible, suggesting that reception is permitted or that reception will be permitted (soon). processing is enabled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to perform the acceptance action.

168 to 171 and FIG. 173, among the examples of effects described above, the action by the player is accepted while the acceptance allowable sound is audible (output state) during the acceptance period. , the "aspect in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display, etc.)" before the above-mentioned "appearance in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display, etc.)" still appears. In the non-audible state, the execution of processing for making the above-mentioned acceptable acceptance sound inaudible is started.

In other words, in this case, even if the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" has not yet appeared after the acceptance, the acceptance period has already expired. can be preferably suggested to the player. This makes it difficult for inconvenience to occur even if the timing of the appearance of the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" is delayed after acceptance, so that the model image display is displayed in a visually pleasing manner. be able to

In addition, in each of the production examples described above, even if the player's action is accepted while the acceptable acceptance sound is being made audible, the acceptance acceptable sound is not terminated halfway, and the acceptance acceptable sound is made audible. is being continued, a reception period (first reception period, etc.) for displaying the disappearance effect display is further prepared. Therefore, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the reception has been accepted or whether the reception has not yet been made, and the sense of tension can be preferably maintained.

In this regard, a reception period (FIGS. 168, 170, and 173) during which the reception permission sound is rendered inaudible when an action by the player is received while the reception permission sound is made audible, In the acceptance period (Fig. 167) in which even if an action by a player is accepted while the acceptable acceptance sound is made audible, the acceptance acceptable sound is not made inaudible, the "simulation" that occurs corresponding to these Since the type of "image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is different, it is possible to guess the progress of the production after that by checking the output status of the acceptable acceptance sound. Become.

In addition, in each of the production examples described above, a plurality of types are prepared as acceptable acceptance sounds. In this respect, it is desirable to output the same sound as the reception acceptance sound in the first reception period, the third reception period, the fourth reception period, and the sixth reception period. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which of these reception periods has occurred.

On the other hand, the reception acceptable sound that is audible corresponding to the first reception period is the reception acceptance sound that is audible corresponding to the second reception period, the fifth reception period, and the seventh reception period. It is audibly output as a sound different from the allowable sound. According to such a configuration, when the reception allowable sound is started to be output, by confirming the sound, it is possible to narrow down the candidates as to which type is occurring as the reception period to some extent. Further, when the acceptance is made while the acceptance acceptable sound is audible, it is possible to further narrow down the candidates by confirming whether the acceptance acceptable sound is terminated halfway. It becomes possible to provide an interesting performance using.

In addition, in each of the production examples described above, when the precursor effect display is executed in a specific mode (here, the second precursor effect display, the fifth precursor effect display, and the seventh precursor effect display), the reception allowable sound corresponding to this is executed. is being output, the acceptance allowable sound is terminated halfway. When the acceptance is made while the reception acceptance sound corresponding to the is being output, the reception acceptance sound is terminated in the middle (the third reception period, the fourth reception period, the sixth reception period) and in the middle There is a case where it is not finished (first acceptance period). With such a configuration as well, it is possible to provide an interesting performance using the acceptable acceptance sound.

Also, in each of the production examples described above, there is a reception period in which two sounds (a long-time allowable sound and a short-time allowable sound) are output as the acceptable acceptance sound, and an acceptance period in which only one sound is output as the acceptable acceptance sound. . During the reception period, two sounds (long-term acceptable sound and short-term acceptable sound) are output as acceptance acceptable sounds. In the reception period in which only one sound is output as , there are cases where the reception is terminated in the middle when the acceptance is made while the reception allowable sound is audible, and there are cases where the reception is not terminated in the middle. With such a configuration as well, it is possible to provide an interesting performance using the acceptable acceptance sound.

Regarding the acceptance period in which two sounds with different sound data (long-term acceptable sound, short-term acceptable sound) are output as acceptance acceptable sounds, if acceptance is made while acceptable acceptance sounds are being output, two Only one of the reception acceptable sounds (long-time acceptable sound and short-time acceptable sound) may be terminated in the middle, and the other may continue without being terminated in the middle.

In addition, in each of the production examples described above, the same mode appears as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" when the acceptance is made and when the acceptance is not made within the acceptance period. Reception period (2nd reception period, 4th reception period, 5th reception period, 7th reception period, etc.) and when the reception is made during the reception period and when the reception is not made " Since there is a reception period (first reception period, third reception period, etc.) in which a different form appears as a mode in which the model image display is difficult to see (disappearance-related display), It becomes possible to improve the performance when it is not done.

In addition, in each of the production examples described above, when the acceptance is made during a specific acceptance period (first acceptance period, third acceptance period, etc.), "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" , It is realized as a disappearance-related display different from the model image display, but if the acceptance is not made, the model image display itself is changed (the numerical value related to the display characteristics (transparency It is desirable to realize this by changing the rate). According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize whether the acceptance has been made or the acceptance has not been made when the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" appears. become able to.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is capable of executing symbol variations (variation patterns) in which the reception period occurs and symbol variations (variation patterns) in which the reception period does not occur. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display screen (effect display device 1600 ), the first effect display TE (here, equivalent to the above-described “timer effect”), which has no relation to the reception period, and the second effect display FE can be displayed. It's becoming Then, as shown in FIG. 175, when the action by the player is accepted within the first acceptance period or the third acceptance period, while the model image display is being displayed, "the model image display is The mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize (first disappearance-related display SK1)" appears, but the "mode that makes the model image display difficult to visually recognize (first disappearance-related display SK1)" appears even in symbol variations that do not occur during the acceptance period. The visibility of the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE that can be displayed is not affected (the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE are given priority, or the first effect display TE and the disappearance-related display is not displayed at the position where the second effect display FE is displayed).

That is, in this case, the disappearing effect display is displayed so as not to affect the visibility of the predetermined image displays (the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE) that are not related to the acceptance period. Therefore, the game can be progressed without adversely affecting performance that is not directly related to the acceptance period.

However, if the action by the player is accepted within the fourth acceptance period, as shown in FIG. The fourth disappearance-related display SK4)” appears, but the “mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (fourth disappearance-related display SK4)” does not affect the visibility of the first effect display TE. (It is not difficult to see), but it is displayed so as to affect the visibility of the second effect display FE (make it difficult to see).

According to such a configuration, even though the image display is not directly related to the acceptance period, the visibility may be affected when "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" appears depending on the type of image display. Since there are cases where the visibility is not affected, whether or not it is necessary to check whether the image display that is not directly related to the acceptance period should be confirmed when the player performs an action. It will be possible to provide performance about whether.

However, in this case, the first effect display TE is displayed as an image (suggestion) related to (expectation) of the symbol variation (suggestion), and the second effect display FE is displayed as the symbol Displaying as a display irrelevant to (not suggesting) the hit or drop (expectation) of the variation will reduce the interest in the game when the visibility of the second effect display FE is affected. It can be said that it is desirable to avoid

Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, the second receiving period can be generated while the first effect display TE is being displayed, but it can be generated while the second effect display FE is being displayed. It does not occur, and occurs only when the second effect display FE is not displayed. That is, the second effect display FE can be displayed only at a relatively early stage after the start of the pattern variation, and is hidden after that, so that the effect or decoration at the beginning of the variation can be displayed. It is used to enhance In this regard, by making the second reception period possible only when the pattern variation is in a relatively late stage after the start of the pattern variation, this It will be possible to create such relationships.

As shown in FIG. 179, even if the second effect display FE is made difficult to be visually recognized by the fourth disappearance related display SK4, it is displayed again in a state that is easy to be visually recognized. . That is, in this case, it will be hidden when a predetermined timing comes after that. When the second effect display FE is hidden, unlike the case of the model image display, it does not appear difficult to see.

The first effect display TE displays a predetermined effect result (expectation level) at a predetermined timing within the symbol variation. The disappearance-related display is hidden before a predetermined timing arrives.

As shown in FIG. 179, the area where the fourth disappearance related display SK4 is displayed includes at least part of the area where the second effect display FE is displayed. It is displayed in a mode with a higher priority for display than. However, at this time, a predetermined transmittance is set for the fourth disappearance-related display SK4, so that the second effect display FE can be visually recognized through the fourth disappearance-related display SK4, although it is difficult to see. can be

As shown in FIG. 179, the area where the fourth disappearance related display SK4 is displayed includes at least part of the area where the first effect display TE is displayed. It is displayed in a mode with a lower priority for display than. At this time, it is desirable to prevent the fourth disappearance related display SK4 behind the first effect display TE from becoming visible through the first effect display TE.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 175, the first disappearance related display SK1 is displayed so as not to affect the visibility of both the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE. It is a thing.

In the case of the first disappearing effect display SK1 which does not affect the visibility of the second effect display FE, the reception acceptance sound is continued without being terminated in the middle, and the fourth disappearing effect display which affects the visibility of the second effect display FE. In the case of SK4, the acceptable acceptance sound can be terminated halfway. As a result, it is possible to enhance the performance using the acceptable acceptance sound.

Both the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE are dynamically displayed, and both of them are dynamically displayed so as to be continued even in the situation where any disappearing effect display is displayed. It is desirable to

In addition, in each of the production examples described above, while the model image display is being displayed, it is possible to make the "appearance in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)". A plurality of modes are to be prepared as "mode (disappearance-related display)".

That is, in this case, since one of a plurality of modes appears as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)", it is intended to improve the interest in the game when the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize. will be expected.

Further, in each of the production examples described above, when the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (fourth disappearance-related display SK4)" corresponding to the fourth reception period appears (FIG. 179), the fourth Disappearance-related display SK4 makes it difficult to visually recognize both the model image display and the second effect display FE. )” appears (FIG. 175), the first disappearance-related display SK1 is executed so as to make only the model image display difficult to see between the model image display and the second effect display FE. there is

According to such a configuration, it is possible to create a performance as to which of the "first disappearance-related display SK1" and the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4" appears as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". As a result, it is expected that the interest in gaming will be improved.

In this case, the "simulated image display" and "predetermined image display" displayed during the first acceptance period and the "simulated image display" and "predetermined image display" displayed during the fourth acceptance period are , should be displayed in the same manner.

The model image display is hidden while the disappearance-related display appears, but the second effect display FE is not hidden while the disappearance-related display appears, and the disappearance-related display ends. It is desirable to hide the display at a predetermined timing (before the symbol variation stops) after that.

The fourth disappearance-related display SK4 may not be an image, but may be an effect that is performed in front of the model image display and the second effect display FE in front view. However, it is desirable that the first extinction-related display SK1 be realized as an image display.

In each of the effect examples described above, the second acceptance period can occur even when the second effect display FE is in the non-display state. A special mode (second disappearance-related display SK2) that appears only during the acceptance period is prepared. In such a second acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 177, when a special mode appears (second disappearance-related display SK2-2) and when it does not appear (second disappearance related display SK2-1). It is desirable to increase the rate of stopping at symbols). The percentage may be 100%. Also, in this case, it is desirable to execute a special mode precursor performance (second precursor performance display ZEH2) that cannot be executed when the second performance display FE is in the display state during the second acceptance period.

In each of the production examples described above, in the first reception period, the first mode (post-first reception production display UG1-1) is executed as the production display UG1 after the first reception (FIG. 175 (e1) (i1)), and when the second mode (post-first reception effect display UG1-2), which is more expected than the first mode as the effect display UG1 after the first reception, is executed (Fig. 175 (e2) ~ (i2)), the same mode (first disappearance-related display SK1-1) appears as the mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize.

On the other hand, in the second acceptance period, the second mode (effect display after second acceptance), which has a higher expectation than the first mode (effect display UG2-1 after second acceptance), is used as the effect display UG2 after the second acceptance. UG2-2) is executed, a specific mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-2) appears as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", but the first mode as the effect display UG after the second acceptance. When (the second post-receipt effect display UG2-1) is executed, the specific mode does not appear as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", and a mode different from the specific mode (the second disappearance-related display SK2- 2) is made to appear.

According to such a configuration, depending on the type of reception period, it is possible to estimate the degree of expectation for the effect display after reception simply by confirming "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". Since there are cases where it is not possible to guess the degree, it is expected that the performance of such "a mode in which the display of the simulated image becomes difficult to visually recognize" will improve the enjoyment of the game. .

It should be noted that, as a "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", a "specific mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-1 or second disappearance-related display SK2-2)" that can occur corresponding to the second reception period. , cannot appear as a "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" corresponding to the first acceptance period. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to guess the type of reception period based on the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

However, it is also possible to make it possible for the same mode to appear in the first acceptance period and the second acceptance period as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize".

As shown in FIG. 175, during the first acceptance period, if the acceptance is not made, a mode that cannot appear when the acceptance is made (the first disappearance-related display SK-2) was decided to appear. However, if the application is not accepted during the first acceptance period, the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" itself may be prevented from appearing.

In the second acceptance period, any one of a plurality of modes with different expectations (percentages of stopping the jackpot symbols) can be selectively audibly output as acceptance acceptable sounds, and in the first acceptance period, It is desirable to allow only one aspect of acceptable sound to be audibly output. Further, in this case, any of the reception acceptable sounds (a plurality of modes) that can be audibly output in correspondence with the second reception period is different from the reception acceptance sound that is audibly output in correspondence with the first reception period. It is desirable to prepare

In each of the production examples described above, each of the first reception period to the seventh reception period is generated with a different variation pattern. It is also possible to include reception periods that are in a relationship that can occur sequentially within the pattern. That is, in this case, among the first to seventh acceptance periods, at least some of the acceptance periods can occur in a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

For example, regarding the acceptance period (second acceptance period, fourth acceptance period, etc.) in which the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" changes according to the degree of expectation, the "model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)” after the reception period (first reception period, third reception period, etc.) that does not change according to the degree of expectation, occurs within the same symbol variation It is desirable to make it possible.

Further, regarding the acceptance period (the second acceptance period, the fifth acceptance period, etc.) in which the acceptance can be made while the precursor effect display is being displayed, the acceptance can be made while the precursor effect display is being displayed. It is desirable that the reception period (first reception period, third reception period, fourth reception period, etc.) occurs within the same symbol variation.

During the reception period, when the ``mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)'' changes according to the level of expectation, the ``mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)'' It is possible to selectively output a plurality of acceptable acceptance sounds including a specific acceptance acceptable sound that cannot be audibly output during the unchanging acceptance period, and when the specific acceptance acceptable sound is audibly output, the "simulated image display is difficult to see. It is desirable that a highly anticipated mode appears as a mode (disappearance-related display).

In addition, in the acceptance period (second acceptance period, fifth acceptance period, etc.) in which the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" changes according to the degree of expectation, The precursor effect display is executable, but a special advance notice effect is executable at a stage before the execution of the precursor effect display, and when the special advance notice effect is executed, the above-mentioned It is desirable to ensure that "a form in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" is always executed in a highly expected form when the acceptance is made during the acceptance period.

During the reception period, when the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" changes according to the degree of expectation, a big hit is obtained as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)". A form (for example, second disappearance-related display SK2-2, etc.) that can only appear when the player is on the screen may be prepared. In addition, it is also possible to prepare a mode (for example, second disappearance-related display SK2-1, etc.) that cannot appear when a big win is obtained.

In addition, in each of the production examples described above, it is possible to display a reception-related production display (simulated image display, gauge image, etc.) at least within the reception period in relation to the occurrence of the reception period. It is possible to output a reception-related effect sound (reception acceptance sound, etc.) at least within the reception period. Further, when an action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period, a post-acceptance output sound related to the post-acceptance effect can be output based on the acceptance, and the reception-related effect display is performed during the acceptance period. When an action by the player is accepted while a (model image display, gauge image, etc.) is being displayed, the reception-related effect display (model image display, gauge image, etc.) is displayed based on the acceptance. ) is hidden. Similarly, when the action by the player is accepted while the reception-related effect sound (acceptance acceptable sound, etc.) is in the audible state during the reception period, the reception-related effect is generated based on the acceptance. Sounds (acceptable sounds, etc.) may be made inaudible.

In such a configuration, based on the acceptance of the action by the player within the acceptance period, the post-acceptance output sound related to the post-acceptance production is audibly output, and the reception-related production display (simulated image display, gauge image display, etc.) etc.) is hidden, and the reception-related effect sound is set to an inaudible state (acceptance acceptable sound, etc.), so that the reception state can be easily recognized.

In this respect, in each of the production examples described above, the reception-related production display (simulated image display, gauge image, etc.) is ended at the time when the production after reception is started in response to the reception. However, reception-related production sounds (acceptable reception sounds, etc.) may end when the reception output sound corresponding to the reception is started, and may be rendered inaudible. I'm trying to be.

According to such a configuration, the reception-related effect display (simulated image display, gauge image, etc.) displayed during the reception period is displayed until after the execution of the post-reception effect is started. On the other hand, the above-mentioned reception-related effect sound (such as reception acceptance sound) that is audible (output) during the reception period shall be made to be in an audible state at the time when the output sound starts to be executed after reception. becomes. As a result, even after the execution of the post-reception production has started, it is possible to confirm the form of the reception-related production display (simulated image display, gauge image, etc.) that was displayed during the reception period, and the reception-related production sound (acceptance acceptable tone, etc.) is rendered inaudible, preferably indicating that the acceptance period has already expired.

As described above, the reception-related effect display (simulated image display, gauge image, etc.) is executed as a effect display suggesting the rate (expectation) of a big win. In this case, the reception-related production sound (acceptable reception sound) also differs depending on the degree of expectation (mode as a reception-related production display) suggested by the reception-related production display (simulated image display, gauge image, etc.) It is desirable to output

However, in each of the production examples described above, in the first reception period, the reception-related production sound (acceptance acceptable sound) is continued without ending even when the output sound starts to be executed after reception. Therefore, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the user is in an accepted situation, and the tension can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in each of the production examples described above, during the first reception period, only one mode can be displayed as reception-related production display (simulated image display, gauge image, etc.), and a big hit is obtained. It is not executed as a production display that suggests the proportion (expectation) that is. Also, during the first reception period, only one aspect of the reception-related effect sound (acceptable reception sound) appears. It is possible to suitably improve amusement in a game.

Further, in each of the production examples described above, a plurality of modes including a specific mode are prepared as the precursor effect display. An effect display (eg, a second precursor effect display: FIG. 168) can be displayed, and an audible output of a reception-related effect sound (such as a reception acceptable sound) can be initiated. Then, the specific aspect of the precursor effect display (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. 168) and reception-related effect sound (acceptance acceptable sound) can be executed across the timing at which the reception period occurs. Actions by the player can be accepted while the precursor effect display (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. 168) is displayed and the reception-related effect sound (reception allowable sound) is in an audible state (output). ing. In this respect, if the action by the player is accepted while the specific mode of the precursor effect display (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. 168) is being displayed within the acceptance period, to hide the specific aspect of the precursor effect display (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. 168). In addition, if the player's action is accepted while the reception-related effect sound (reception permission sound) is audible during the reception period, the reception-related effect sound (reception permission sound) is generated based on the acceptance. sound) is made inaudible.

In the above configuration, based on the fact that the player's action is accepted within the acceptance period, the specific aspect of the precursor effect display (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. 168) is hidden, Since the reception-related effect sound (acceptable reception sound) is set to an inaudible state, a specific aspect of the precursor effect display (for example, the second precursor effect display: 168) and reception-related performance sound are being executed respectively, even if the player's action is accepted, the acceptance state can be easily recognized.

Further, as shown in FIG. 168 and the like, the specific aspect of the precursor effect display (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. 168) is a post-acceptance effect corresponding to acceptance within the corresponding acceptance period. is displayed without being terminated at the time the is started to run. On the other hand, the reception-related effect sound (acceptance acceptable sound) is terminated and rendered inaudible at the time when the post-reception output sound corresponding to the reception is started.

According to such a configuration, the specific aspect of the predictive effect display (for example, the second predictive effect display: FIG. 168) that is displayed before the reception period occurs is displayed after the execution of the effect after the reception is started. On the other hand, the above-mentioned reception-related effect sound (acceptance acceptable sound), which is audible (output) before the reception period occurs, is audible at the time when the output sound is started after reception. It will be made so that it will no longer be. As a result, even after the execution of the specific post-acceptance effect is started, it is possible to confirm the form of the precursor effect display that is displayed before the reception period occurs, and at the same time, the reception-related effect that is output before the reception period occurs. By making the sound (acceptance acceptable tone) inaudible, it is possible to preferably indicate that the acceptance period has already ended.

The specific aspect of the sign effect display (second sign effect display ZEH2) is displayed as a different display image according to the degree of expectation, and is executed as a performance display that suggests the ratio of the big win (expectation degree). It is desirable to ensure that In this case, the reception-related effect sound (acceptable reception sound) is also output in a different manner according to the degree of expectation suggested by the specific mode of the portent effect display (mode as the specific mode of the portent effect display). is desirable.

However, in each of the production examples described above, during the acceptance period in which the first indication effect display is executed, the first indication effect display can be executed only in one mode, and the percentage of big wins (expected It is designed not to be executed as a production display suggesting the degree).

In addition, during the reception period (second reception period, fifth reception period, etc.) in which multiple acceptance sounds (long-term allowable sound, short-time allowable sound) are output at the same time, the reception allowable sound is output and after the reception. Although the output sounds do not overlap, in the reception period in which only one acceptable acceptance sound is output, when the output of the acceptable acceptance sound and the post-acceptance effect sound overlap (first acceptance period), the output of the acceptable acceptance sound and a case where the post-acceptance output sound does not overlap (third acceptance period, fourth acceptance period, etc.).

The long permissible sound is, for example, a sound output as an effect sound, and the short permissible sound is, for example, a sound output as a message sound. A case in which only one reception acceptable sound is output means, for example, a case in which no message sound is output and only an effect sound is output. It should be noted that the short permissible sound may be "sound output as sound effect" and the long permissible sound may be "sound output as message sound".

When one of the two acceptance acceptable sounds is output as a "message sound", a message image ("press It is desirable to display a reception-related effect display such as ". In this case, the period during which the message sound is output does not overlap with the period during which the post-acceptance effect (such as the post-acceptance output sound) is executed, but the message image (reception-related effect display) corresponding to the message sound is displayed. The period overlaps with the period during which the performance after acceptance is executed.

In each of the production examples described above, the simulated image display is displayed as an integrated simulated image display including the gauge image in the peripheral decoration image. The integrated model image display is as described above with reference to FIG. That is, conventionally, the simulated image display was displayed separately from the gauge image, so it was difficult to make both of them difficult to see by means of an omen effect display, disappearance-related display, or the like. The gauge image may change according to the mode of the simulated image display suggesting the degree of expectation. In this regard, since it is displayed as an integrated model image display, it becomes easy to make it difficult to visually recognize both the model image display and the gauge image.

It should be noted that, in each of the production examples described above, regarding the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)", it was assumed that it would appear so as to make the production display difficult to see after reception. The display may be displayed so as not to be difficult to see (for example, the effect display after reception is given priority). In addition, among the plurality of reception periods, there is a reception period in which the post-reception effect display is difficult to see due to "a mode in which the model image display is difficult to see (disappearance related display)", and a reception period in which "the model image display is difficult to see. A mode (disappearance-related display)" may include a reception period during which the post-reception effect display is not difficult to see.

Moreover, it is not necessary to prepare all of the first to seventh reception periods, and it is also possible to prepare only a part of these reception periods in an appropriate combination.

Even in the first reception period, when the reception permitting sound is audibly outputted, it may be terminated halfway.

The "first omen effect display" and "seventh omen effect display" do not necessarily have to be "types that are not displayed when the acceptance period occurs and are hidden before this", For example, it may be displayed as "a type that is displayed across the timing at which the acceptance period occurs". That is, in this case, the "first omen effect display" and the "seventh omen effect display" are the above-mentioned "second omen effect display ZEH2" displayed corresponding to the second reception period and the effect content (display image). 168, 176 and 177 for "how to start and end the display and how it relates to the display of other images until it is hidden", etc. The display is performed in the same manner as described for the “second omen effect display ZEH2”. Other examples and modifications are similarly applicable.

It goes without saying that when "at least a part" is described above and below, it is intended to include "all."

Next, a modified example of each of the production examples described above will be described. That is, FIG. 180 is a modification of the “effect when the second reception period occurs” shown in FIG. 176, and FIG. This is a modified example of the production of ". It should be noted that, in this modified example, the configuration that is not particularly mentioned is as described above in the "examples of effects related to the second reception period (Figs. 168, 176, and 177)", and the "second reception period It is also applicable to other examples applicable to the example of production.

As shown in FIG. 180, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) as a fourth effect device. For convenience of explanation, the specific decorative member SDY (a blind role) is omitted in each of the above-described production examples. things). In other words, in each of the production examples described above, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) does not operate in relation to the occurrence of the reception period.

Now, assuming that the "second variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, in the modified example for the second acceptance period, first, the production determination (notice determination) corresponding to the second variation pattern is performed. etc.). Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (effect depiction according to the second variable pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the second variable pattern, etc.) is started ("Situation shown in FIG. 180 (a) ”).

From this point onward, it is the same as in the case of FIGS. 176(b) to 176(d). That is, first, as shown in FIG. 180(b), "second precursor effect display ZEH2" is executed (timing tG1). Next, as shown in FIG. 180(c), "integrated model image display IG" is displayed (timing tG2). Then, while the "second omen effect display ZEH2" and the "integrated model image display IG" are being displayed in this manner, the second acceptance period occurs as shown in FIG. 180(d). becomes (timing tG3).

Here, for convenience of explanation, the illustration of the second effect device (sub liquid crystal 1610) is omitted. The post specific effect" and the "predictive effect" are executed in the same manner as in the above-described examples (FIGS. 176 and 177). In addition, the effects using the third effect device (speaker) (reception allowable sound, output sound after second reception, etc.) are executed in the same manner as in the above-described examples (FIGS. 176 and 177). ing.

Further, in this modification, even if the action by the player is accepted at the timing tG3a within the second acceptance period, the second 2 reception period ends, the post-reception effect (second post-reception effect) corresponding to the second reception period is started to be executed.

Note that the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 180(d) to “D1 (FIGS. 181(e1) to (i1))” is a relative 180 (d) to "D2 (FIG. 181 (e2) to (i2))" corresponds to the case where the first mode with a low degree of expectation is executed. This corresponds to the case where the second aspect, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, is executed as the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the second acceptance period. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

Also in the examples shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, as in the case of the above-described examples (FIGS. 176 and 177), when the action by the player is accepted (in response to the acceptance, the effect after the second acceptance starts) At the timing tG3a, which is the point in time when the integrated model image display IG is displayed, the "integrated model image display IG" is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see. Not only the integrated model image display IG, but also the second precursor effect display ZEH2 is hidden at timing tG3a when the action by the player is accepted (when the effect after the second acceptance is started). It is the same as in the case of the above-described example (FIGS. 176 and 177) in that it does not make it difficult to see.

In addition, when the first mode with relatively low expectations is executed as the post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period according to this modification ((e1) to (i1) in FIG. 181), after this are the same as in the above examples (FIGS. 176 and 177). That is, first, at timing tG3b, the display of the "second disappearance-related display SK2-1" is started as a "mode in which the integrated simulated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize". Next, when the timing tG3c arrives, the "second post-reception effect display" is displayed as the post-reception effect in the first effect device (the effect display device 1600) in response to the acceptance of the action by the player within the second reception period. UG2-1” is started to be executed.

After that, as in the case of the above-described examples (FIGS. 176 and 177), as shown in FIG. First, among "integrated model image display IG", "second precursor effect display ZEH2", and "second disappearance related display SK2-1", "integrated model image display IG" and "second precursor effect display ZEH2" ” are hidden respectively. After the “integrated model image display IG” and the “second omen effect display ZEH2” are hidden, the “second extinction related display SK2-1” is hidden as shown in FIG. As a result, the display related to the “second post-reception effect display UG2-1” is performed under the condition that the visibility is good.

However, when the second mode with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as the post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period according to this modification ((e2) to (i2) in FIG. 181), timing tG3b , as a mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is started instead of displaying disappearance-related display in the first effect device (effect display device 1600). Let That is, as shown in FIG. 181(f2), by positioning (operating) the specific decorative member SDY (a bamboo blind) so as to overlap at least a portion of the integrated model image display IG in a front view, The integrated simulated image display IG is made difficult to visually recognize, and this functions as "a mode in which the integrated simulated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize".

According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the expectation is higher in the case shown in FIG. 181 (f2) than in the case shown in FIG. 181 (f1). , it becomes possible to improve the game interest. In addition, since the action of the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) itself suggests the degree of expectation, it can also serve as a post-reception production. It becomes possible to make the simulated image display IG difficult to visually recognize. In this sense, the fourth production device (specific decorative member SDY) is used as a production element that suggests the degree of expectation even in productions different from the production after reception (forecast production that suggests the degree of expectation, etc.). It is desirable to have

Next, in this way, as the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize", the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" is at least part of the integrated model image display IG in a front view. When the timing tG3c arrives while the execution is performed in an overlapping manner, a post-acceptance effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the acceptance of the action by the player within the second acceptance period. Execution of the “second post-receipt effect display UG2-2” is started.

That is, in this case, the "integrated model image display IG" and the "second omen effect display ZEH2" are displayed, and the "fourth effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" is the "integrated model image display IG". While being executed at a position overlapping at least part of the image display IG in front view, the execution of the “second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2” is started. According to such a configuration, while the integrated model image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 are made difficult to see by the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)", the second Since the post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 is started, it suggests that the second acceptance period has already ended. It is expected that the effect display ZEH2” will naturally shift to the “effect display UG2-2 after the second reception” (after timing tG3c).

Then, when the second mode with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the second acceptance period according to this modification ((e2) to (i2) in FIG. 181), 181(h2), when the display of the "second post-reception effect display UG2-2" is started, while the "second post-reception effect display UG2-2" is being displayed, First, "integrated model image display IG", "second omen effect display ZEH2", and "integrated model image display IG" are difficult to visually recognize (here, the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY) is of the effects used)”, the “integrated model image display IG” and the “second precursor effect display ZEH2” are hidden, and the process ends. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" and "second precursor effect display ZEH2" are respectively hidden, as shown in FIG. The "fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY) effect using the fourth effect device (the specific decorative member SDY))" as the "difficult aspect" ends. That is, the specific decorative member SDY is moved to the original position so that the "effect using the fourth effect device (the specific decorative member SDY)" does not overlap the integrated model image display IG when viewed from the front. As a result, the display related to the “second post-reception effect display UG2-2)” is performed under the condition that the visual recognition is good.

It should be noted that when performing the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" as the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see" (a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation (Fig. 181 ( e2) to (i2)) are for the case of performing the "effect using the first effect device (disappearance-related display)" as the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize" (relatively expected It is desirable to lengthen the time from the appearance of the “mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize” to the end of this mode, rather than the low mode (FIGS. 181(e1) to (i1)). In this case, when executing the "fourth effect device (specified decorative member SDY) effect using the fourth effect device (specific It became possible to improve the game interest by the performance of this itself, and after that, the "fourth production device (specific decoration member SDY) production)" was introduced. Even after the end of the game, it is expected that the "effect display UG2-2 after the second acceptance", which has been difficult to see until then, will be revealed, thereby further enhancing the interest in the game. On the other hand, in the first reception period and the third reception period, there is a case where a mode with a low degree of expectation is executed as the post-reception production and a case where a mode with a high degree of expectation is executed as the production after reception, The "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize (first disappearing related display SK-1, etc.)" is executed for the same amount of time.

On the other hand, in the example where the effect progresses from FIG. 180(d) to “D3 (FIGS. 181(e3) to (h3))”, the action by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period according to the modification. It is assumed that there was no

As shown in 181 (e3) to (h3) in FIG. 181, in this modified example, if the action by the player is not accepted within the second acceptance period, the case of the above example (FIG. 177 ( e3) to (h3)) are the same. For example, if the action by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. The mode that would have appeared if the action by had been accepted would appear.

Therefore, as shown in 181 (e3) to (h3) of FIG. 181, when the action by the player is not accepted within the second acceptance period, the "second disappearance related display SK2-1" is displayed. If the action by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period, the effect progresses from FIG. This corresponds to the case (when the post-acceptance effect with a relatively low degree of expectation is being executed). On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, a "fourth effect device (specified 180 (d) to "D2 (FIG. 181 (e2) (i2))” (when the post-acceptance effect with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed).

After that, as shown in FIG. 181(g3), the "integrated model image display IG" and the "integrated model image display IG" are difficult to visually recognize (the second extinction related display SK2-1 or the fourth Of the production device (production using the specific decorative member SDY)”, first, the “integrated model image display IG” is hidden. Then, after the "integrated simulated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. -1 or production using the fourth production device (specific decorative member SDY)” is ended.

As described above, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see" is performed as "the display in the first production device (the production display device 1600)." There are two cases (FIGS. 181(e1)-(i1)) and the other cases (FIGS. 181(e2)-(i2)). In this regard, in the above-described example, the timing at which the "display on the first effect device (the effect display device 1600)" is started and the execution of the "effect using the fourth effect device (the specific decorative member SDY)" are executed. The start timing is set to be the same (timing tG3b). Execution may be started at a timing (for example, timing tG3a) before timing tG3b at which execution of "display at" is started.

According to such a configuration, depending on the type of "a mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize" and the degree of expectation suggested as a production after reception (the ratio of appearance of the jackpot pattern), after acceptance, "integrated Since the time until the appearance of "the aspect in which the simulated image display IG becomes difficult to see" appears, it is possible to add interest and improve the amusement of the game. In particular, the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" functions as a post-reception effect in the same way as the "post-acceptance specific effect using the second effect device". Therefore, by executing this at an early timing, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

However, even in the case where the "rendering using the fourth rendering device (specific decorative member SDY)" is executed in the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize", FIG. As shown in (f2), it is desirable that at least part of the integrated simulated image display IG (simulated image display) is visible.

180 and 181, the production progresses from FIG. 180(d) to "D2 (FIG. 181(e2)-(i2))" When high post-acceptance effects are being executed), "display in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" is not performed as "a mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize". It was decided to carry out "a production using the fourth production device (specific decorative member SDY)". However, in this case, as "a mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize", "display (disappearance-related display) in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" and "fourth effect device (specified Effect using decoration member SDY)" may be performed.

According to such a configuration, after the operation is accepted, the "display (disappearance-related display) in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" and the "fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY) The integrated simulated image display IG becomes difficult to see due to both the "effect used", and it becomes possible to preferably indicate that the reception is in progress.

In this way, as "modes in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize", "display (disappearance-related display) in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" and "fourth effect device (specific decoration When performing both of the "effect using the member SDY)", the disappearance-related display is displayed (prioritized display, etc.) so as to make at least part of the integrated model image display IG difficult to see, and the "fourth The effect using the effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" is executed so as to make at least part of the integrated model image display IG and at least part of the extinction-related display difficult to see.

In this case as well, the execution of the ``effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)'' that functions as ``a mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see'' is started at timing tG3a. The "display (disappearance-related display) in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" functioning as the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" may be started at timing tG3b. .

In addition, as "a mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize", "display (disappearance-related display) in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" and "fourth effect device (specific decorative member 180(d) to “D1 (FIGS. 181(e1)-(i1))” (relative It will be displayed as an image display different from the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display SK2-1)" that appears in the case where the performance after reception, which is generally expected to be low, is executed). It is desirable to

Further, the fourth effect device does not necessarily have to be provided as an operable movable body (specific decorative member SDY). (for example, a flying object that can execute a flying effect on the front side of the effect display device 1600 in the front view, or light guide plate, etc.) may be used. In addition, regarding the production using the fourth production device, in addition to the case where it is executed based on the reception during the reception period, when different production conditions are satisfied (such as when a predetermined timing arrives in the specific pattern fluctuation) should also be executed.

The effect example regarding "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" described with reference to FIGS. 180 and 181 can also be applied to a reception period different from the second reception period. For example, even if it is applied to the fifth reception period, the effect progresses as shown in FIGS. 180 and 181. FIG.

In addition, the production examples related to the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" described with reference to FIGS. Instead, it may be prepared as an eighth reception period (eighth variation pattern, eighth post-reception effect) different from any of these reception periods.

Further, in each of the production examples described above, while the integrated model image display IG (both the integrated model image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH depending on the type of reception period) is being displayed, the effect display after reception However, the post-acceptance effect display is displayed in a manner that makes it difficult to see by the integrated model image display IG (both the integrated model image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH depending on the type of the reception period). (Fig. 175, Fig. 177, Fig. 179).

However, instead of this, while the integrated model image display IG (both the integrated model image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH depending on the type of the reception period) is being displayed, the execution of the post-reception effect display is started. However, the effect display after reception is not made difficult to see by the integrated model image display IG (both the integrated model image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH depending on the type of the reception period) (priority display, etc. ) to start the display.

Hereinafter, a case where such a configuration is applied to an example of the effect related to the second acceptance period will be described. Configurations that are not particularly mentioned are the same as in the above-described examples (FIGS. 168, 176, and 177), and can be appropriately applied to other examples.

Regarding the content of the effect until the action (operation) by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period according to this modification, the content of the above-described effect (FIGS. 176(a) to (d), FIG. 177(e) ) is the same as For example, also in this example, as shown in FIG. 182(e2), at the timing tG3a at which the player's action is accepted, the "integrated model image display IG" or the "second precursor effect display ZEH2" is displayed. is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 are not made difficult to see.

Also in this modification, there are cases where the post-acceptance production with a relatively low degree of expectation is executed and cases where the post-acceptance production with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed. The case where the post-acceptance effect with a low value is executed is the same as the above-described effect content ((e1) to (i1) in FIG. 177), so the description is omitted here.

On the other hand, in this modified example, when the "relatively expected post-acceptance effect" is executed as the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the second acceptance period, the above-described effect contents (FIG. 177 ( Instead of f2) to (i2)), the effect contents shown in FIGS. 182(f2) to (i2) appear.

First, at timing tG3b, as shown in FIG. Then, the second disappearance-related display SK2 appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is executed in the second mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-2). Next, when the timing tG3c within the period during which the display related to the second disappearance-related display SK2 (a form in which the integrated simulated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize) arrives, the player performs an action within the second acceptance period. ``Second post-reception effect display UG2'' as a post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the acceptance is started in the second mode (second post-reception effect display UG2-2). be done. Needless to say, the post-acceptance effect display suggests the degree of expectation (the rate at which the player is awarded the privilege). The percentage may be 100%.

However, the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 according to this modification includes an integrated model image display IG, a second precursor effect display ZEH2, a second disappearance-related display SK2, etc., as shown in FIG. 182(g2). is not obscured by More specifically, the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 according to this modified example overlaps with the area where the integrated model image display IG, the second precursor effect display ZEH2, and the second extinction-related display SK2 are displayed. The integrated model image display IG, the second precursor effect display ZEH2, and the second disappearance-related display SK2 are displayed (prioritized display) in a manner that makes them difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, the effect display UG2-2 itself after the second acceptance can be made to function as "a mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see", thereby improving the game interest. You will be able to plan. It should be noted that even in the second post-receipt effect display UG2-2 according to this example, the first effect display TE (here, corresponding to the above-described "timer effect") is not displayed preferentially, and the first effect is displayed. A portion overlapping the display TE is made difficult to be visually recognized.

After that, as shown in FIG. 182(h2), first, the integrated model image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 are respectively hidden. Next, as shown in FIG. 182(i2), the second disappearance related display SK2 is hidden.

In the modification shown in FIG. 182 as well, if the action by the player is not accepted within the second acceptance period, the same as in the above example (FIGS. 177(e3) to (h3)). . That is, when the action by the player is not accepted, the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" is displayed if the action by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period. A new mode will emerge.

In the example shown in FIG. 182, the second extinction-related display SK2-2 and the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 are displayed as the “mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”. However, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2 may not be displayed, and only the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 may be displayed.

The effect example related to the "post-reception effect display" described with reference to FIG. 182 can also be applied to a reception period different from the second reception period. For example, even if it is applied to the fifth reception period, the effect progresses as shown in FIG. 182 .

In addition, the effect example related to the "effect display after reception" explained with reference to FIG. It may be prepared as an eighth reception period (eighth variation pattern, eighth post-reception effect).

In the above-described modifications (FIGS. 180 to 182) or other examples thereof, when the action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period (specific acceptance period), the model image display (here, integrated model image display) IG) is displayed, a specific area including at least a part of the display target area of the model image display is used to make the model image display difficult to see. Second disappearance-related display SK2-2)" can be displayed, and the model image display is the specific disappearance effect display (second disappearance-related display SK2-2) after the display of the specific disappearance effect display (second disappearance-related display SK2-2) is started. (For example, the second disappearance related display SK2-2) is hidden while it is being displayed.

That is, in this case, even after the acceptance is made, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the model image display. In addition, the visibility of the model image display is reduced by a specific extinction effect display until the model image display is hidden, and the model image display is hidden while the visibility is reduced. From this, it can be suggested that the remaining time until the display of the model image is hidden is short, and the decline in the interest in the game when the display of the model image is hidden is suppressed. become nauseous.

Further, in the modified examples (FIGS. 180 to 182) or another example thereof, the above-mentioned "specific disappearance effect display (eg, second disappearance-related display SK2-2)" is a simulated image display (here, integrated The model image display IG) can be displayed even in a period after it is hidden, and while at least the specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance related display SK2-2) is displayed, A post-acceptance effect (for example, an effect using the specific decorative member SDY, a second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2, etc.) is started to be executed. Then, with regard to the post-acceptance effect, is it displayed using at least a part of the specific area that is the display target area for the specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2)? (example shown in FIG. 182), or by using an effect object (example shown in FIG. 181 and another example thereof) that overlaps (at least a part of) the specific disappearance effect display when viewed from the front. We are trying to realize it as a thing.

According to such a configuration, among the post-reception effects, the specific post-reception effect that is executed at a position that overlaps the specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2) when viewed from the front is disappearance effect display can be recognized without moving the gaze target from the displayed position. That is, in this case, when the specific disappearance effect display is displayed, it is possible to recognize that it is not necessary to change the gaze destination in order to grasp the mode of the specific post-acceptance effect, It becomes possible to suitably maintain the game interest.

When a specific post-acceptance effect (for example, an effect using a specific decorative member SDY, a second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2, etc.) according to the above modification appears, the rate at which benefits are given to the player increases. It may be 100%.

The specific post-acceptance effect related to the above modification (for example, the effect using the specific decorative member SDY, the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2, etc.) is executed before the model image display is hidden. Since it is difficult to visually recognize the display of the model image, it is possible to preferably indicate that the acceptance has been made even while the display of the model image is being displayed. . However, regarding the specific post-acceptance effect related to the above modification (for example, the effect using the specific decorative member SDY, the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2, etc.), after the model image display is hidden Execution may be started.

In addition to the reception period during which the specific post-reception effect related to the above modification (for example, the effect using the specific decorative member SDY, the second post-reception effect display UG2-2, etc.) can be generated, the specific post-reception effect After preparing a reception period in which a different post-reception effect can be generated, a specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2) is displayed even if the different post-reception effect is executed. may also be displayed. The reception period in which different post-reception effects can be generated may be any one of the first reception period and the third reception period to the seventh reception period. However, in the reception period (first reception period) in which the reception allowable sound is not terminated halfway, it is desirable that the specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2) is not displayed (separate disappearance display may be displayed)

It should be noted that in the above-described modifications (FIGS. 180 to 182) or other examples thereof, when the acceptance period occurs, the acceptance of the post-acceptance production corresponding to the acceptance period is allowed, or A process is executed to make an acceptance acceptance sound audible, which suggests that the acceptance will (soon) become acceptable, so that the player may forget to perform the action for acceptance. is being suppressed.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of types of precursor effect displays. When the action by the player is accepted while the precursor effect display ZEH2) is being displayed, the specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2) is displayed even after the acceptance is made, but the specific precursor effect display (ZEH2) is displayed. A mode in which the specific portent effect display (second portent effect display ZEH2) is difficult to visually recognize while the portent effect display (second portent effect display ZEH2) is being displayed appears. Then, after the appearance of the mode, the specific predictive effect display (second predictive effect display ZEH2) is hidden under the condition that the specific predictive effect display (second predictive effect display ZEH2) is made difficult to be visually recognized.

That is, in this case, even after the reception is made, it is possible to confirm which aspect of the precursor effect display has appeared, and the visibility is reduced until the precursor effect display is hidden. By doing so, it becomes possible to preferably indicate that the acceptance has already been made.

In the above-described modified examples (FIGS. 180 to 182) or other examples thereof, the aspect in which the specific predictive effect display (second predictive effect display ZEH2) becomes difficult to visually recognize is the specific predictive effect display (second predictive effect display). ZEH2) is an image display (for example, a second disappearance related display SK2-2 or a post-reception effect display UG2-2), or a specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2) is on the front side. It is supposed to be a production in the production body performed in.

In addition, in the modified examples (FIGS. 180 to 182) or another example thereof, the ``mode of making the specific predictive effect display (second predictive effect display ZEH2) difficult to see'' Not only the portent effect display ZEH2), but also the specific portent effect display and the model image display are executed so as to straddle both when viewed from the front, making it difficult to visually recognize both of them. This aspect may be performed in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire effect display device 1600, but in that case, it is possible to visually recognize a specific precursor effect display or a simulated image display through a predetermined transmittance. It is desirable that

In addition, the "mode of making the specific predictive effect display (second predictive effect display ZEH2) difficult to see" is realized by a change in the display characteristics of the specific predictive effect display itself (transmittance change, etc.). may be

Also in the modified examples (FIGS. 180 to 182) or another example thereof, the specific predictive effect display (second predictive effect display ZEH2) is hidden during the acceptance period. Then, even if the acceptance is made in the non-displayed state, "a mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the specific precursor effect display (second disappearance related display SK2-2, post-reception effect display UG2-2, Directing body, etc.)” is to be executed.

In addition, in the above-described first acceptance period, when an action by the player is accepted, multiple effects (effects shown in FIGS. 175(e1) to (i1), FIG. 175 (e2) to (i2)) will appear, but no matter which one of these effects appears, a specific mode (first disappearance related display SK1-1 (first reception period )) can appear. That is, in this case, when any one of the multiple effects appears, the specific mode will also appear in conjunction with it, so that they are "resulting from the player's action being accepted within the specified acceptance period. It becomes possible to suggest that it is a common production.

On the other hand, in the above-described second reception period, modifications (FIGS. 180 to 182), or the second reception period according to another example, when the player's action is accepted, the special condition (jackpot winning conditions, probability variable rush conditions, etc.) are different depending on whether the appearance ratio (may be 0% or 100%) special mode (for example, second disappearance related display SK2-2, specific Any one of a plurality of modes including effects using the decorative member SDY, effect display after reception (UG2-2, etc.) can appear, and when the special mode appears, the model image display becomes difficult to see. . According to such a configuration, a special aspect suggesting the degree of expectation appears before the model image display is hidden, and the special aspect makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image display. , the player can enjoy the performance progressing from the display of the model image to the performance after reception (special mode) without changing the gaze point.

In this regard, even when the above specific mode (first disappearance-related display SK1-1 (first mode of first disappearance-related display SK1 corresponding to the first acceptance period)) appears, the model image display It is made difficult to visually recognize by "mode". According to such a configuration, when the model image display is difficult to see due to the above-mentioned special mode that suggests the degree of expectation for granting the privilege (special acceptance period), and the above-mentioned specific mode that does not suggest the degree of expectation for granting the privilege Due to the fact that there are cases where the display of the model image is difficult to see (specific acceptance period), so that the "mode of making the display of the model image difficult to view (specific mode, special mode)" has a production effect. It becomes possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, when the acceptance period illustrated in each of the production examples and modifications described above occurs, a model image indicating the object (type of operation means, etc.) that is allowed to be accepted within the acceptance period is displayed. It may be displayed both during the period in which the precursor effect display before the reception period occurs and during the reception period. However, in this case, the model image display displayed during the period during which the precursor effect display is executed shall be in a different mode from the model image display displayed during the acceptance period, and the It is desirable to make it hidden.

A modification will be described below in which the method of displaying the model image in such a manner is applied to the second reception period. That is, FIGS. 183(a) to (f) and FIGS. 184(g) and (h) are modifications related to the "effect when the second acceptance period occurs" shown in FIG. (i) to (l) are modifications of the “effect when the second acceptance period occurs” shown in FIG. It should be noted that, in this modified example, the configuration that is not particularly mentioned is as described above in the "examples of effects related to the second reception period (Figs. 168, 176, and 177)", and the "second reception period It is also applicable to other examples applicable to the example of production.

Now, assuming that the "second variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, even in the modification for the second reception period, the effect determination (notice judgment, etc.). Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (effect depiction according to the second variable pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the second variable pattern, etc.) is started ("Situation shown in FIG. 183 (a) ”).

However, in this modified example, when the timing tG0 before the timing tG1 described above arrives, as shown in FIG. there is In the example shown in FIG. 183(b), another effect example (a model image display is executed within the period during which the precursor effect display is executed, and then this is temporarily hidden as "advance type precursor effect display SZE"). Although the image display used also in the example of the normal effect in which no such action is performed) is executed, the "advance type predictive effect display SZE" is executed in another example of effect (the predictive effect display is executed). It is desirable to display an image that cannot appear in the normal production example where the model image display is not performed within the period and then temporarily hidden.

Then, in this modified example, the model image display TMH (here, integrated model image display) appears while the “preceding type omen effect display SZE” is being displayed. That is, as shown in FIG. 183(c), at least a portion of the simulated image display TMH (here, the integrated simulated image display) according to this example is made difficult to visually recognize by the "advance type precursor effect display SZE". The display is started while the Further, although the model image display TMH according to this example is displayed as an integrated model image display, an image ( It is displayed as a model image display of a form that cannot be displayed within the reception period.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 183(d), the simulated image display TMH (here, the integrated simulated image display) is displayed in such a manner that it is not difficult to see by the "advance type omen effect display SZE". Become so. In this example, the display related to the "advance type omen effect display SZE" is finished, and is displayed in a manner decorated with another effect display (flame effect in the figure).

However, as shown in Fig. 183(c), (d), etc., the model image display TMH (here, integrated model image display) that appears while the "advance type omen effect display SZE" is displayed. is displayed in a manner different from any of the manners (FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d)) as model image display that can be displayed during the acceptance period. As a result, while the model image display TMH is displayed for a relatively long time, it is possible to suggest that the acceptance period has not yet occurred.

In addition, as will be described later, when the model image display TMH (here, the integrated model image display) appears, the plurality of modes (FIGS. 144(a) to (d)) Among them, the simulated image display is displayed in a highly expected mode (for example, FIG. 144(d)). As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the "advance type omen effect display SZE" is displayed. It should be noted that the modes that can be displayed as the model image display do not necessarily have to be the above four modes (FIGS. 144(a) to (d)), and for example, there may be only two modes.

Then, in this modified example, when the timing tG1 arrives, as shown in FIG. A portion of the TMH becomes less visible (eg, priority display). Next, as shown in FIG. 183(f), the "normal type precursor effect display TZE" is displayed in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire model image display TMH. TZE" is displayed, the model image display TMH is hidden.

After that, when the timing tG2 arrives, as shown in FIG. ), the display is started with the mode with the highest degree of expectation. At the time when the display of the model image (here, the integrated model image display IG) that can be displayed within the reception period starts to be displayed, part of it is made difficult to see by the "normal type omen effect display TZE". ing.

Then, while the "normal type omen effect display TZE" and the "simulated image display (here, integrated simulated image display IG)" are being displayed in this way, as shown in FIG. 184(h), the second is generated (timing tG3).

Here, for convenience of explanation, the illustration of the second effect device (sub liquid crystal 1610) is omitted. The post specific effect" and the "predictive effect" are executed in the same manner as in the above-described examples (FIGS. 176 and 177). In addition, the effects using the third effect device (speaker) (reception allowable sound, output sound after second reception, etc.) are executed in the same manner as in the above-described examples (FIGS. 176 and 177). ing.

Further, in this modification, even if the action by the player is accepted at the timing tG3a within the second acceptance period, the second 2 reception period ends, the post-reception effect (second post-reception effect) corresponding to the second reception period is started to be executed.

Also in this modification, there are cases where the post-acceptance production with a relatively low degree of expectation is executed and cases where the post-acceptance production with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed. The case where the post-acceptance effect with a low value is executed is the same as the above-described effect content ((e1) to (i1) in FIG. 177), so the description is omitted here.

On the other hand, in this modified example, when the "relatively expected post-acceptance effect" is executed as the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the second acceptance period, the above-described effect contents (FIG. 177 ( Instead of f2)-(i2)), the effect contents shown in FIGS. 184(i)-(l) appear.

First, in this example as well, as shown in FIG. 184(i), at the timing tG3a when the player's action is accepted, the "normal type precursor effect display TZE" or the "simulated image display (here, , integrated simulated image display IG)” is not hidden, and the “normal type omen effect display TZE” and “simulated image display (here, integrated simulated image display IG)” are made difficult to see. Nor.

However, in this example, dynamic display as a model image display is performed at the time of acceptance and after that while "model image display (here, integrated model image display IG)" is displayed. is designed to continue. Also, the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced as time elapses.

At timing tG3b, as shown in FIG. The second disappearance-related display SK2 appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is executed in the second mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-2). However, here, no matter how much display area the gauge image GG has at the time of acceptance (Fig. 184(i)), the display area becomes "0" when timing tG3b arrives. I'm trying to be According to such a configuration, the gauge image GG whose display area has been reduced under a certain rule with respect to the passage of time (for example, the amount of display area that decreases with the passage of time is in a proportional relationship). However, ignoring the rules up to that point, the display area suddenly decreased significantly, and as a result, "the remaining time was set to '0' by surprise, but I was lucky enough to be able to make it in time for the reception." It is possible to make the player think that the game is interesting, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Then, when the timing tG3c within the period in which the display related to the second disappearance-related display SK2-2 (a mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize) arrives, the player can enter the display within the second acceptance period. ``Second post-reception effect display UG2'' as a post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the acceptance of the action by is started. Needless to say, the post-acceptance effect display suggests the degree of expectation (the rate at which the player is awarded the privilege). The percentage may be 100%.

184(k), the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 according to this modification includes an integrated model image display IG, a second precursor effect display ZEH2, and a second extinction-related display SK2- 2, etc., but it may be displayed in the manner described above with reference to FIG.

After that, first, the integrated model image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 are respectively hidden (FIG. 184(l)). Next, although illustration is omitted, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2 is hidden, and as a result, the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 is displayed under the condition that the visibility is good. become.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 1, a plurality of precursor effect displays are prepared as precursor effect displays suggesting that the acceptance period will occur. In this regard, in the modified examples (FIGS. 183 and 184) described above, when a specific precursor effect display (FIGS. 183(b) to (f) and FIG. 184(g)) is performed among the plurality of precursor effect displays, The model image display related to the reception target is displayed both during the precursor period (model image display TMH) before the reception period occurs and during the reception period (model image display IG).

In particular, in this modified example, after the simulated image display (simulated image display TMH) is displayed during the precursor period, it is not displayed during the precursor period. The model image display TMH that is displayed (and hidden) only during the sign period is different from the model image display IG that can be displayed during the acceptance period. It is expected that the performance related to the operation will be improved from the period before the occurrence of .

Also in this modified example, when an application is accepted within the acceptance period, the model image display IG is hidden based on the acceptance (FIG. 184(l)). Until the model image display IG is hidden, it is possible to appear "a specific aspect (second disappearance related display SK2-2) that makes the model image display difficult to see" (Fig. 184 (j), ( k)). However, with regard to the "specific aspect that makes the model image display difficult to visually recognize (second disappearance-related display SK2-2)", the model image display TMH that is displayed within the precursor period (specific precursor effect display) is not displayed. It is made so that it does not appear until it is hidden when it is turned on.

According to such a configuration, during the omen period (specific omen effect display), the "specific aspect (second disappearance-related display SK2-2) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image display" that appears corresponding to the reception period ” does not appear and the model image display TMH is hidden. Therefore, even if the model image display TMH is displayed within the precursor period (specific precursor effect display) and is hidden before the reception period occurs, the player will not be able to notice it. It is possible to make it difficult to cause a misunderstanding that the reception period has ended before the user has received it.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 1, the "mode of making the model image display difficult to visually recognize" that can appear in response to the reception is replaced with the above-mentioned "specific mode of making the model image display difficult to visually recognize (second disappearance mode)". A plurality of related displays SK2-2)” are to be prepared. In this regard, in the modified examples (FIGS. 183 and 184), none of these aspects appear in accordance with the disappearance of the model image display TMH displayed during the precursor period. It's becoming In the above modification, a mode different from any of the plurality of modes prepared as "a mode that makes the model image display difficult to visually recognize" according to the reception (normal type precursor effect display TZE) is displayed within the precursor period. Until the is hidden, it functions as a "mode of making the model image display difficult to see". In other words, in this case, since it will be recognized as "a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image display" exclusively for the precursor period, even if "a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image display" appears during the precursor period , it is possible to make it difficult for the player to misunderstand that the acceptance period has ended without the player's knowledge.

Further, in the above modification, the "normal type precursor effect display TZE" is displayed as the "mode of making the model image display difficult to see" until the model image display TMH is hidden within the precursor period. When the request is accepted within the acceptance period, the "second disappearance related display SK2-2" is displayed as the "mode of making the model image display difficult to see" until the model image display IG is hidden. I decided to In this regard, the period from when the "normal type omen effect display TZE" is displayed until it is hidden is the period from when the "second disappearance-related display SK2-2" is displayed until it is hidden. It is desirable to make the length longer than the above in order to improve the amusement of the game.

When the model image display TMH is displayed within the prognostic period, in the reception period that occurs correspondingly after the model image display TMH is hidden, the reception object of the type indicated by the model image display TMH Acceptance (acceptance related to post-acceptance production corresponding to the acceptance period) is allowed for (operation means), and acceptance object (operation means) different from the type of reception object (operation means) suggested by the model image display TMH It is desirable that acceptance (acceptance related to post-acceptance production corresponding to the acceptance period) is not permitted. That is, in the case of the above modifications (FIGS. 183 and 184), the model image display model image display TMH displayed within the precursor period suggests the operation button 410 as an object to be accepted. During the acceptance period, no acceptance (acceptance related to post-acceptance effect corresponding to the acceptance period) is allowed for an acceptance object (sword ornament 5001) different from the operation button 410 .

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the "operation buttons 410" and the "sword ornaments 5001" as reception objects related to post-reception effects. In this regard, if the effect is executed in a manner such as "after displaying the model image display, the model image display is hidden within the precursor period", It is desirable that the side with a high probability of appearing a big hit pattern when accepted is accepted. That is, in this case, among the "operation button 410" and the "sword decoration body 5001", the acceptance target with a low ratio of appearance of the big hit pattern when it is accepted as the acceptance target has a corresponding acceptance period. Prior to this, an effect is not executed in such a manner as to "hide the display of the model image within the precursor period after displaying the model image".

Among the modifications described above with reference to FIGS. 183 and 184, for such "effect mode related to omen effect", a reception period different from the second reception period among the plurality of reception periods, or a reception period different from the second reception period. It is also applicable to examples. In addition, the "production mode related to the omen effect" is not applied to any one of the first reception period to the seventh reception period, but is applied to an eighth reception period (eighth reception period) that is different from any of the reception periods. It may be prepared as a variation pattern, an eighth post-acceptance effect).

In addition, among the modifications described above with reference to FIGS. 183 and 184, the “drawing aspect relating to omen effects” may be modified examples illustrated with reference to FIGS. It is also applicable to

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 can display a remaining time suggestive display (display including division images KG, etc.) in which the display area of a specific image (gauge image GG) is decreased over time within the acceptance period. be. In this respect, in the modified examples (FIGS. 183 and 184) described above, the indication indicating the remaining time can be displayed even after the effect has been progressed based on the acceptance of the action by the player. Since the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) can be reduced even while the effect is progressing, it is possible to recognize "whether the acceptance has been made" even after the acceptance has been made. It will be expected that it will be difficult to do so and the tension will be maintained appropriately.

183 and 184, a specific partition area (partition image KG) is displayed in the display screen (effect display device 1600) as the remaining time suggestion display, and the specific partition image KG is displayed. The display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is reduced in the partition area (partition image KG). Then, after the presentation progresses based on the acceptance of the action by the player, not only the specific image (gauge image GG) but also the specific division area (division image KG) are continuously displayed. I have to. According to such a configuration, since the specific partitioned area (the partitioned image KG) is displayed even after the effect is progressed based on the acceptance of the action by the player, the specific image (gauge image GG ) has decreased in display area.

It should be noted that ``the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is reduced after the effect has been performed based on the acceptance of the action by the player'' means, for example, At the point in time when the production progresses based on this, the display area of the gauge image GG, which was left with a predetermined display area, is changed to 0 (non-display) at a later point in time. (Fig. 184(j)). However, in this case, when the display area of the gauge image GG is set to 0, it is required that the specific division area (section image KG) is still displayed, and the specific division area (section image KG) is , after the timing when the display area of the gauge image GG is set to 0, it is hidden.

183 and 184, when the action by the player is accepted, the remaining time suggestive display (gauge image GG, partition image KG, etc.) is displayed based on the acceptance. However, regardless of how much of the display area of the gauge image GG was left at the time of acceptance, prior to hiding the remaining time suggestive display, a specific division area (division image KG ), a specific image whose display area is set to a specific value (predetermined value) is displayed, or a specific partition area (partition image KG) is displayed (the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced to 0). That is, in this case, the gauge image GG, whose display area has been reduced under a certain rule with respect to the passage of time (for example, the amount of display area that decreases with the passage of time is in a proportional relationship, etc.) By ignoring the law of , the display area is suddenly greatly reduced, making people think that ``the remaining time was set to ``0'' by surprise, but I was lucky enough to make it in time for the reception.'' can be done, and it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the modified example described above with reference to FIGS. 183 and 184, when the action by the player is accepted (when the progress of the effect corresponding to the acceptance is started), it is executed before the acceptance. The "depiction in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced" is continued without being terminated. After that, when a predetermined timing arrives, a specific image (gauge image GG) having a display area of a specific value is displayed in a specific partitioned area (partitioned image KG), or a specific partitioned area (partitioned image KG) is displayed. KG) and the specific image (gauge image GG), only the specific partitioned area (the partitioned image KG) is displayed (the display area is reduced to 0).

That is, in this case, at the timing (for example, timing tG3a) when the progress of the effect corresponding to the acceptance is started, the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is not greatly reduced, and the drawing up to that point is continued. Therefore, it is expected that even after the acceptance is made, it is difficult to recognize "whether the acceptance has been made", and the tension is preferably maintained. In addition, at a timing (for example, timing tG3b) after the timing (for example, timing tG3a) at which the progress of the effect corresponding to the acceptance is started, the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG, etc.) is greatly reduced. is performed, it is possible to make it appear as if the acceptance is just in time within the effective period (acceptance period), and it is expected that the game interest will be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 184, the model image display is dynamically displayed within a predetermined dynamic range both before and after acceptance. . In this regard, when the timing tG3b, which is a predetermined time after acceptance, arrives, regardless of the dynamic position of the model image display at the time of acceptance, it will be displayed at a specific dynamic position after acceptance. The model image display is displayed in a stationary manner (in the example shown in FIG. 184(j), when timing tG3b arrives, regardless of the button positions up to that point, the button position is the highest position. (depicted as in ). Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 184(j), after timing tG3b, the simulated image display is not dynamically displayed, and is stopped at the displayed position. This makes it possible to more preferably obtain the above-described effects.

Among the modifications described above with reference to FIGS. "Dynamic display and static display related to model image display" can also be applied to reception periods different from the second reception period among the plurality of reception periods and other examples thereof. In addition, "depiction of the gauge image GG and section image KG after acceptance (Fig. 184 (i) to (k))" is applied to any of the first acceptance period to the seventh acceptance period. Instead, it may be prepared as an eighth reception period (eighth variation pattern, eighth post-reception effect) different from any of these reception periods.

In addition, "depiction of the gauge image GG and division image KG after acceptance (Fig. 184 (i) to (k))" and "dynamic display and static display related to model image display" When applying to one of the period to the seventh reception period (any reception period is fine), it is desirable not to apply to a reception period different from the applied reception period. According to such a configuration, after the reception is made, there are cases where the depiction of the gauge image GG greatly decreasing appears (FIG. 184(j)) and cases where the depiction does not appear, thereby increasing the interest in the game. You will be able to make improvements.

Even during the reception period when "depiction of gauge image GG and section image KG after acceptance (Fig. 184 (i) to (k))" and "dynamic display and static display related to model image display" are not applied, After the acceptance, it is desirable to perform the drawing that reduces the display area of the gauge image GG or the dynamic display itself. In other words, in this case, the only difference is that the display area of the gauge image GG is not depicted by ignoring the previous rule and is greatly reduced, and that static display is not performed.

In each of the production examples and other examples described above, and their modifications, a plurality of reception periods (for example, the first reception period to the seventh reception period, etc.) that can occur under different conditions are prepared. there is In this regard, for a predetermined reception period (for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.) among the plurality of reception periods, the pattern variation that occurred during the predetermined reception period ends. , so that it can be continued even after the next symbol variation is started (that can occur across multiple variations), and a specific reception period (for example, the second reception) among the plurality of reception periods period, fourth reception period, seventh reception period, etc.), it does not continue until after the pattern variation that occurred during the specific reception period is terminated, and the pattern variation is terminated. It may be terminated earlier. In other words, in this case, the model image display related to the acceptance target is displayed during both the predetermined acceptance period and the specific acceptance period, and when the action by the player is accepted within the specified acceptance period, the specified , the model image display is not hidden at the time of acceptance, and the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display etc.) will appear. As a result, it is possible to suggest that the acceptance period has ended while making it possible to confirm which mode has appeared as a model image display even after the acceptance has been made. It becomes possible to preferably obtain it during either the predetermined reception period or the specific reception period.

Further, the "predetermined reception period" is, for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, and the fifth reception period, and the "specific reception period" is, for example, the second reception period, the fourth reception period, In the case of the acceptance period and the seventh acceptance period, the manner in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display) is when the acceptance is made during the "predetermined acceptance period" that can be maintained across multiple fluctuations, It will be executed in a different mode when the acceptance is made in the "specific acceptance period" that does not straddle multiple fluctuations. In other words, in this case, it is possible to grasp whether or not the reception period will end within the pattern variation being executed based on the type of "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display, etc.)". Since it becomes like this, it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, in both the "predetermined acceptance period" that can occur across multiple fluctuations and the "specific acceptance period" that does not span multiple fluctuations, a model image display that imitates the acceptance target is displayed. The model image display may be displayed in different modes (size, position, etc. for display) for the "predetermined reception period" and the "specific reception period." For example, in a "specific reception period" that does not span multiple fluctuations, when the model image display is displayed in the manner described above (displayed only at a predetermined position), it occurs in a form that spans multiple fluctuations. It is desirable that the display position of the model image display itself is changed (moving display) during the possible "predetermined reception period". According to such a configuration, even if the "predetermined acceptance period" occurs in the form of a plurality of fluctuations, it is possible to urge the player to accept the offer as soon as possible.

In addition, in the "acceptance period" that does not span multiple fluctuations, there are cases where the operation button 410 is used as an acceptance target and sword ornament 5001 is used as an acceptance target. During the possible "acceptance period", the operation button 410 may be used as an acceptance target, but it is desirable not to use the sword ornament 5001 as an acceptance target.

It is desirable that the predictive effect display can be executed prior to the occurrence of the "acceptance period" that may occur across multiple fluctuations. That is, in this case, the symbol variation is terminated while the "predictive effect display" is being executed, and after the symbol variation is terminated, there is a case where the reception period corresponding to the "predictive effect display" occurs. Therefore, it is possible to preferably maintain the game interest after the symbol variation is finished.

Even in the "acceptance period (for example, the first acceptance period, the third acceptance period, the fifth acceptance period, etc.)" that can occur across multiple fluctuations, as described above, after the acceptance is made, the "model A mode (disappearance-related display, etc.) that makes the image display difficult to see appears. This "mode of making the model image display difficult to see (disappearance-related display, etc.)" is executed after a predetermined period of time. However, it is desirable that the "mode of making the model image display difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display, etc.)" is continued without being terminated halfway.

"Prediction effect display" executed corresponding to "acceptance period (e.g., first acceptance period, third acceptance period, fifth acceptance period, etc.)" that can occur across multiple fluctuations; Regarding the aspect that makes the model image display difficult to see (such as disappearance-related display), the time from when the symbol variation in the execution state is stopped until the next symbol variation starts to be executed (the symbol in the execution state The execution period (the time from the display of the precursor effect display to the disappearance of the display), making it difficult to see the model image It is desirable that the time from the appearance of an aspect to its termination) is terminated.

As described above, in the "acceptance period (for example, the first acceptance period, the third acceptance period, the fifth acceptance period, etc.)" that can occur across multiple fluctuations, the corresponding "prediction effect display" and "disappearance related display" may be displayed, respectively. In this regard, if the "disappearance-related display" is displayed before the symbol change in which the "predictive effect display" is displayed ends, the same area (overlapping area) as the area where the "predictive effect display" is displayed ) is used to display the "disappearance-related display", and after the symbol variation in which the "predictive effect display" is displayed (the suspension is digested and the next symbol variation is started) If the "disappearance-related display" is displayed after the event, etc.), it is possible to display the "disappearance-related display" by using only the area different from the area where the "predictive effect display" was displayed. desirable. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to easily recognize that this is executed over a plurality of fluctuations while paying attention to the performance after reception.

Also, as described above, multiple modes (FIGS. 144(a) to (d)) with different expectations are prepared as model image displays, and the "acceptance period (for example, the second acceptance period, In the fourth reception period, the seventh reception period)", the model image display is displayed as one of these modes. However, in the "acceptance period (e.g., first acceptance period, third acceptance period, fifth acceptance period, etc.)" that can occur across multiple fluctuations, a specific aspect among multiple aspects (e.g., FIG. 144 It is desirable that only the model image display of (a)) is displayed. However, the "acceptance period (for example, the second acceptance period, the fourth acceptance period, the seventh acceptance period)" that does not span multiple fluctuations, and the "acceptance period that can occur in a form that spans multiple fluctuations (for example, In any of the first reception period, third reception period, fifth reception period, etc.), it is desirable to continue the dynamic display of the model image display after the reception.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of game states (first game state and second game state) can be generated. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "acceptance period" during which the post-acceptance effect can be executed when the player's action is accepted is the first game state and the second game state. It can occur in any game state. Furthermore, if the action by the player is accepted within the "acceptance period", it is assumed that the "acceptance period" occurred in either the first game state or the second game state. Also, after the acceptance, while the model image display is displayed, "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display, etc.)" appears, and after that, the "model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize The model image display is hidden while the mode (disappearance-related display, etc.) is appearing.

In other words, in this case, it is possible to suggest that the acceptance period has ended, while making it possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the model image display even after the acceptance has been made. , can be obtained regardless of whether the acceptance is made within the acceptance period occurring in either the first game state or the second game state.

In addition, the "first game state" corresponds to, for example, a normal game state (low probability/non-time saving), and the "second game state" is generated based on the result of the big hit determination ( State transition) corresponds to "a game state different from the normal game state". Any game state may be used as long as the game state is different from the normal game state.

In this regard, further explanation using the plurality of reception periods (first reception period to seventh reception period, etc.) exemplified in each of the above-described production examples and other examples, and their modifications, for example, a plurality of reception Reception periods of predetermined types among the periods (for example, the first reception period, the fourth reception period, the sixth reception period, and the seventh reception period, etc., but not necessarily all of them) ) is set to occur only in the first game state out of the first game state and the second game state. On the other hand, it is assumed that the third reception period among the plurality of reception periods is set to be generated only in the second game state among the first game state and the second game state. Even with such a configuration, the model image display related to the reception object is divided into a reception period (first game state) of a predetermined type and a third reception period (second game state). displayed in either case. However, in the first game state (when accepted in the first acceptance period), in the second game state (when accepted in the second acceptance period) as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" (the fourth disappearance-related display SK4, the seventh disappearance-related display, etc., but not necessarily all of them) can appear.

According to such a configuration, the first game state and the second game state can be obtained simply by confirming which mode has appeared as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" without confirming the type of effect after reception. It is possible to ascertain which of the two game states the player is in, thereby improving the interest in the game.

181 and 182, the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" also appears only when in the first gaming state (when accepted in the first accepting period). It may also be set as a “mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize”. In other words, in this case, it is expected that the game interest in the most disadvantageous state for the player (normal game state) will be favorably maintained.

Further, according to the above configuration, in the second game state (when accepted in the third acceptance period), the first disappearance-related display is executed as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". However, the first disappearance-related display can also appear in the first game state (when accepted during the first acceptance period). That is, in this case, since the possibility of being in the state of being controlled to the second game state is only indicated, the sense of tension can be preferably maintained. Further, even when the player is controlled to the first game state, when the first disappearance-related display appears, the player is made aware of the possibility of being controlled to the second game state. Since it becomes possible to let the player enjoy the game, it is possible to maintain the interest in the game.

The second reception period and the fifth reception period may be prepared as reception periods that can occur in either the first game state or the second game state, or the first game state. Of the state and the second game state, it may occur only in the first game state.

Further, as described above, during the acceptance period generated in the first game state, the model image display is displayed in one of a plurality of modes (FIGS. 144(a) to (d)). In this regard, during the reception period that occurs in the second gaming state, it is possible to display only a specific mode (for example, FIG. 144(a), which is a mode with a low degree of expectation) among the plurality of modes. desirable. According to such a configuration, even when a mode with a low degree of expectation (FIG. 144(a)) appears as the simulated image display, the possibility of being in the state of being controlled to the second game state is eliminated. Since it becomes possible to make the player aware of the game, the interest in the game can be preferably maintained.

In the first game state, when the action by the player is not accepted within the acceptance period, the same mode as when the action is accepted appears as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" (for example, the first 2 reception period, 4th reception period, 5th reception period, 7th reception period, etc.), and when a different aspect from the case of acceptance appears (for example, 1st reception period, etc.) However, in the second game state (the third acceptance period), the same mode as in the case of acceptance must be made to appear as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", or It is desirable to make sure that a mode different from the accepted case appears. According to such a configuration, when an action is not accepted in the first game state, the same mode as when the action is accepted appears as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". It is possible to make the player aware of the possibility that the second game state is occurring.

The reception period (third reception period) that occurs in the second game state is the same as when it is accepted as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see even if it is not accepted within this period". In the case where the mode is generated as something that always appears", the reception period (third reception period) is the same as the reception period (third reception period). It is desirable to set the valid time (set time) as the acceptance period longer than any of the "receiving period in which the same aspect as when accepted" always appears as the aspect.

In both the first game state and the second game state, the corresponding precursor effect display is executed before the reception period occurs. In this respect, in the first game state, a specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display, fifth precursor effect display, seventh precursor effect display, etc.) that cannot occur in the second game state is executed. It is desirable to

[Special acceptance period]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, variation regarding which of a plurality of variation patterns is to be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the start winning (holding digestion) Pattern judgment can be executed. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern It is possible to execute a production judgment (such as advance notice judgment) as to which of the expected productions (such as advance notice production) is to appear selectively. It should be noted that depending on the result of the production determination, all of the plurality of expected productions prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern (notice production, etc.) may be sequentially executed, or None of the expected effects (notice effects, etc.) may be executed.

And as described above, when such production determination (variation pattern determination, advance notice determination, etc.) is performed, by performing control to display the production content according to the result of the production determination on the production display device 1600, the big hit determination The variable production by the decorative pattern according to the result is executed together with the expected production (preliminary production) related to the background depiction (background advance notice), movable body operation (role production), and the like. As a result, as a result of execution of the variation effect by the decorative pattern together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, etc., when the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, the player can enjoy the big win game and the high prize as a privilege. Transition to the probability game state becomes executable.

In such a configuration, the variable performance by the decorative pattern is provided as a performance having "a function indicating whether or not a big hit has been obtained as a result of the judgment of the big hit", and the background depiction, the movement of the movable body, etc. is provided as an effect having "the function of suggesting the degree of expectation, that is, the ratio (including 0% and 100%) of the fact that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the determination of the variation pattern, it is specified among the highly expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach effects with background changes, etc.) If the variation pattern is selected, even if any result is obtained as the production judgment (such as the advance notice judgment), when the pattern production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing in the SP reach (predetermined condition is established), it is possible to generate an acceptance acceptance state (effective period) in which acceptance of the performance is allowed.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low-expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the determination of the variation pattern. Even in the case, when a special result is obtained in the production determination (such as advance notice judgment) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the pattern production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (predetermined condition is established Then), it is possible to generate an acceptance allowable state (effective period) in which the performance acceptance is allowed. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination, even if the symbol performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, the reception acceptance state (effective period) does not occur. . In addition, the reception acceptance state (valid period) that occurs in a predetermined variation pattern is different from the reception acceptance state (valid period) that occurs when the pattern production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as a performance.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an acceptance period during which the player's actions (operations) are allowed to be accepted, and the player's actions (operations) are accepted within the acceptance period. , the display changes according to the type of reception period that has occurred. In addition, during the reception period, it is possible to display a model image display in which an object (operation means) to be operated by the player is expressed as an image.

In addition, even if any result is obtained as a notice production judgment, at a predetermined timing during SP reach, regarding the fluctuation pattern that causes the acceptance acceptable state (effective period), in addition to the above "specific fluctuation pattern" may also be provided. However, even if any result is obtained as a result of the advance notice effect judgment, the fluctuation pattern that causes the acceptance acceptable state (effective period) at the predetermined timing is included in the low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) It is desirable to prevent it from being lost or to lower its selection ratio.

By the way, the acceptability state (effective period) that can occur under these conditions means that it is possible to accept changes in the display of the effect display device 1600 as long as the player's operation is detected within the set time (effective period). Since the post-display (post-operation display) is executed, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, the effect action by the movable decoration, etc. are only generated, the reception allowable state (effective period) The effect itself is poor, and there is concern that the interest in games related to the reception period will decrease.

In addition, including the examples described above and the examples described later, the "player's operation" to be detected means that the player directly operates the "operation button 410", the "sword decoration 5001", or the like. (Pressing action or drawing action), "player's contact action on a specific part" to be detected by the touch sensor, and "player in a specific space" to be detected by the non-contact sensor This means that it also includes "operation by". The point is that one or a plurality of accepting means (operating means) for accepting actions by the player (pressing action, sword drawing action, touch action, non-contact action, etc.) may be provided.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, the following special effects are provided. It should be noted that each of the effects (each configuration) described below does not necessarily have to include all of these configurations. It is possible to suppress the decrease of, or it may be selectively provided with some configurations that are considered necessary to obtain further effects, or it may be applied to another configuration Any configuration described may be employed as appropriate. Furthermore, each effect (configuration) to be described below is merely an example, and any one configuration that can suppress the decline in interest in the game related to the acceptance period may be provided.

[Configuration 1-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. In both cases, when the first acceptance period occurs and when the second acceptance period occurs, character information is displayed in relation to the occurrence of the acceptance period. Although the same action is accepted as the action by the player in the first acceptance period and the second acceptance period, different character information (for example, "press!", "please press", etc.) is displayed. I'm trying to In addition, the "first reception period (display after first reception)" and "second reception period (display after second reception)" related to the configuration 1-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 1-A. It is just a name used for Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

That is, in the first acceptance period and the second acceptance period, although the player is requested to perform the same action (operation mode), the display change (post-acceptance display) that occurs as a result of detection of the action is requested. are different from each other. In this regard, in this pachinko machine 1, even when the player is requested to perform the same action (operation mode), the character information displayed in relation to the occurrence of the acceptance period is Since it is designed to be different according to the type (type of display after reception), operation (action by the player) while recognizing which type of display change may occur as display after reception can be performed, and it is expected that the decline in gaming interest will be suppressed.

In addition, when requesting a different action (operation mode) from the player, even if the acceptance period is of the same type (that generates the same post-acceptance display), the fact that the acceptance period has occurred It is more desirable to make the character information displayed by different characters different from each other in order to suppress operation errors by the player. In the same sense, when a different action (operation mode) is requested to the player, and the acceptance period is of a different type (that causes a different post-acceptance display), the acceptance period is It is desirable to have the textual information displayed in relation to what has occurred be different from each other.

In addition, the same operation (operation mode) as in the case of the first acceptance period is requested, and the same character information and model image display as in the case of the first acceptance period are displayed. may further prepare a reception period for generating a different post-reception display. That is, in this case, just by looking at the character information and the simulated image display, it is not possible to completely grasp which type is to be executed as the post-reception display. be expected to maintain.

Also, as will be described later, when the "configuration 1-A" is adopted, the character information is not displayed during the first acceptance period until the acceptance is permitted (valid state). On the other hand, during the second acceptance period, while the acceptance state (effective state) continues, the character information can be hidden during that period. You can let it be. In other words, in this case, during the second acceptance period, if the player does not perform an operation (predetermined action) in a relatively short time after the occurrence of the period, the player is requested to perform any action (operation mode). As it becomes difficult to recognize whether the application period is valid or not, and in turn, it becomes difficult to recognize the type of application period, it is difficult to accept the situation where different character information is displayed. It will be expected to preferably avoid such a situation where the tension is completely lost.

Although this will also be described later, when the "configuration 1-A" is adopted, the second acceptance period includes a period in which the character information is displayed and a period in which the character information is not displayed. , the same display change may occur regardless of whether the acceptance is made during any of these periods. That is, in this case, even if the character information is hidden, the operation can be performed properly as long as it is confirmed what kind of operation mode is requested while the character information is displayed. It is possible to do so, and it is expected that the decline in interest in gaming will be suppressed.

[Configuration 2-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. In the first acceptance period, only one mode of the model image display is allowed, and in the second acceptance period, any one of a plurality of modes can be displayed as the model image display. In addition, the "first reception period (display after first reception)" and "second reception period (display after second reception)" related to the configuration 2-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 2-A. It is just a name used for Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, during the second reception period, since the effect that cannot appear when the first reception period occurs is provided, the operation (action) by the player is detected. It becomes possible to suitably improve the game interest of.

It should be noted that, with respect to the "multi-mode model image display" that can be displayed during the second acceptance period, it is possible to set the degree of expectation for the appearance of the big hit pattern to differ depending on which of the model image displays is displayed. It is more desirable to improve interest. Also, any one of the "plural modes of simulated image display" may be the same as the "one mode" that can be displayed during the first acceptance period. In this case, it is desirable that the "least anticipated aspect" of the "multiple modes of simulated image display" be the same as the "one mode" that can be displayed during the first acceptance period.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 2-A", a third reception period is further provided, and only one mode is displayed as a model image display during the first reception period and the third reception period. It may be made possible. In the "second reception period" in which the model image display is displayed in any one of a plurality of modes, the model image display is not hidden until the valid state is terminated. On the other hand, of the "first reception period" and the "third reception period" in which the model image display is displayed only in one mode, the valid state (reception period) is terminated during the "first reception period". However, in the "third reception period", until the effective state (reception period) ends (the effective state is continued) In the meantime, the model image display that has been displayed until then may be hidden. That is, in this case, even during the "first reception period" and the "third reception period" in which only one mode is displayed as the model image display, whether or not the model image display is hidden in the middle of the period is determined. Since the effect is provided, it is possible to preferably improve the game interest until the player's operation (action) is detected. The model image display displayed during the first reception period and the model image display displayed during the third reception period may be the same, but they may not necessarily be the same, so that they are not displayed. You may suggest the possibility of being made into.

Also, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 2-A", in the third acceptance period, either the period during which the model image display is displayed or the period during which the model image display is not displayed. The same display change (post-acceptance display) may be caused even if the acceptance is made at . That is, in this case, even after the model image display is hidden, the valid state (acceptance period) itself will continue without any change, so the performance using the "third acceptance period" ( In creating the non-display of the model image display, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

It should be noted that the "third reception period (display after third reception)" related to the configuration 2-A is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 2-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "third reception period" according to other configurations, or a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, the first reception period or the second reception period according to other configurations) 2 acceptance period, etc.).

[Configuration 3-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. In the first acceptance period, after the model image display is displayed when the first acceptance period occurs, the model image display is not hidden until the first acceptance period ends. , the action by the player can be accepted while the model image display is displayed, and the action by the player can be accepted while the model image display is not displayed in the second acceptance period; The above-described "allowable reception sound" is audibly output when the first reception period occurs, but is not audibly output when the second reception period occurs. In addition, the "first reception period (display after first reception)" and "second reception period (display after second reception)" related to the configuration 3-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 3-A. It is just a name used for Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, not only the "first reception period" in which the reception is performed while the reception acceptance sound is audibly output and the model image display is displayed, but the reception acceptance sound is not audibly output and Since there is a "second reception period" in which the reception is performed while the model image display is not displayed, we are aware of the possibility that the display after reception will occur at various timings unintended by the player. Therefore, it is expected that the amusement of the game will be favorably maintained.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 3-A", a third reception period is further provided, and in the second reception period, the model image is displayed from the start of the second reception period to the end of the second reception period. It is possible for the player to accept an action while the display is not displayed and the model image display is not displayed, but during the third acceptance period, the model image display is only part of the third acceptance period. It may be possible to accept actions by the player during both the period during which the model image display is hidden and the period during which the model image display is not displayed. That is, in this case, the third reception period consists of the first reception period (reception while the model image is displayed) and the second reception period (reception while the model image is not displayed). (reception at the store), so it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. In addition, since there is a possibility that the state in which the player's actions (operations) are accepted continues even after the model image display is hidden, the player's actions (operations) are not accepted. It is expected to suppress the decrease in interest in the game when the model image display is hidden without being displayed.

Note that the “third acceptance period (display after third acceptance)” related to the “configuration 3-A” is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 3-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "third reception period" according to other configurations, or a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, the first reception period or the second reception period according to other configurations) 2 acceptance period, etc.).

In addition, the acceptable reception sound is audibly output when the first reception period occurs, but may not be audibly output when the second reception period occurs and when the third reception period occurs. . That is, there is a timing at which the model image display is displayed during the third acceptance period. In this regard, according to the above configuration for the third reception period, the reception permission sound is not output in accordance with the timing (or before or after) when the model image display is displayed. . As a result, in the third reception period, even at the timing when the reception period occurs, the side as the first reception period (the simulated image display is displayed) and the side as the second reception period (the reception acceptance sound is output) not be played), it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, as will be described later, when the "Configuration 3-A" is adopted, in the third acceptance period, either the period during which the model image display is displayed or the period during which the model image display is not displayed. The same display change (post-acceptance display) may be caused even if the acceptance is made at . That is, in this case, even after the model image display is hidden, the valid state (acceptance period) itself will continue without any change, so the performance using the "third acceptance period" ( In creating the non-display of the model image display, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

[Configuration 4-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, in the first acceptance period, when the player's action is detected within the period, the first post-acceptance display is displayed and the first acceptance sound is output, but the player's action is not detected within the period. Sometimes, the display after the first reception is not displayed and the first reception sound is not output. The display after the second reception is displayed and the second reception sound is output, and even if the movement by the player is not detected within the period, the second reception is the same as when the movement by the player is detected within the period. Although the post-reception display is displayed, the second reception sound is not output. In addition, the "first reception period (display after first reception)" and "second reception period (display after second reception)" related to the configuration 4-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 4-A. It is just a name used for Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the acceptance period, a performance disadvantage may occur, so the tension when the acceptance period occurs is suitable. can be maintained at

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 4-A", a third reception period is further provided, and in the third reception period, when an action (operation) by the player is detected within the period The display after the third reception is displayed and the third reception sound is output, and even if the movement by the player is not detected within the period, the third reception is the same as when the movement by the player is detected within the period. The post-acceptance indication may be displayed and the third acceptance sound may be output. In other words, in this case, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the acceptance period, the same display change (post-acceptance change) as when the action (operation) is accepted is generated so as to produce a demerit in terms of performance. (2nd reception period) and when it occurs so as not to cause demerit of production (3rd reception period). It becomes possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game when it is not present.

Note that the “third acceptance period (display after third acceptance)” related to the “configuration 4-A” is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 4-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "third reception period" according to other configurations, or a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, the first reception period or the second reception period according to other configurations) 2 acceptance period, etc.).

[Configuration 5-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. During the first receiving period, the execution of the first variation pattern is started regardless of the number of judgment information stored by the holding storage means (the number of jackpot judgments in the holding state (holding number)). , and can occur when the first timing arrives when a predetermined time has elapsed since the execution of the first variation pattern was started, and the second acceptance period is the number of judgment information stored by the suspension storage means (suspension When the second variation pattern is started to be executed when the number of jackpot determinations in the state (holding number) is less than a predetermined number, the second variation pattern after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of execution 2 timing, but when the execution of the second variation pattern is started when the number of determination information stored by the reserve storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the second variation pattern does not occur even if the second timing comes after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of execution. In addition, the "first reception period (display after first reception)" and "second reception period (display after second reception)" related to the configuration 5-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 5-A. It is just a name used for Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, when the game is about to be stopped and the number of reservations is reduced, a reception period (second reception period) of a type that has not occurred until then will occur. It is possible to expect that the player will be encouraged not to stop the game, or even if the game is stopped, it will be possible to have an interesting impression on the game at the end.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 5-A", the second variation pattern when the "number of determination information stored by the pending storage means (number of pending)" is less than a predetermined number Even if the execution is started, the number of determination information stored by the pending storage means (holding number)" increases (becomes a predetermined number or more), the second reception period may not occur at a second timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of execution of the second variation pattern. That is, even if the pattern variation (second variation pattern) is started to be executed when the number of reservations is decreasing, if the number of reservations is increased within the execution period of the pattern variation , which suggests that the player is not in a position to stop playing. In this respect, according to the above configuration, even if the symbol variation (second variation pattern) is started to be executed when the number of reservations is decreasing, within the execution period of the symbol variation If the number of reservations is increased, since the second reception period is not generated when the second timing when the predetermined time has elapsed since the execution of the second variation pattern has started, the second reception period is , it can be made to function more properly as "a reception period of a type that can appear only when the game is about to be stopped".

In addition, in order to obtain such effects more preferably, even if the second reception period occurs, during the second reception period, the "determination information stored by the reservation storage means It is more desirable to terminate the second reception period at the time when the number of (holding number) increases.

[Configuration 6-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. The first acceptance period occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner regardless of the production situation, and the second acceptance period is the specific BGM regardless of the production situation. is suppressed or made inaudible, it is possible to provide performance related to the type of reception period before the reception period occurs, using the specific BGM. become. In addition, the "first reception period (display after first reception)" and "second reception period (display after second reception)" related to the configuration 6-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 6-A. It is just a name used for Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

In addition, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 6-A", multiple acceptance periods including the first acceptance period, the second acceptance period, and the third acceptance period will be prepared as the acceptance period. 3. The receiving period may occur while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, or may occur after the specific BGM is in a suppressed mode or in a non-audible state, depending on the production situation. You may do so. According to such a configuration, there are cases where the acceptance period occurs while the specific BGM is being audibly output in the non-suppressed mode, and cases where the acceptance period occurs after the specific BGM is suppressed or in the non-audible mode. In either case, since there is a possibility that the acceptance period is the "third acceptance period", the game interest is preferably maintained until the action (operation) by the player is accepted. be expected to do so.

It should be noted that the "third reception period (display after third reception)" related to the "configuration 6-A" is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 6-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "third reception period" according to other configurations, or a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, the first reception period or the second reception period according to other configurations) 2 acceptance period, etc.).

[Configuration 7-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. In the first acceptance period, when the acceptance is made within the period, the first post-acceptance display corresponding to the acceptance can be executed, and at least the first post-acceptance display is displayed as the design for performance. During this time, the display is given priority over the display after the first reception. On the other hand, in the second acceptance period, if the acceptance is made within the period, the second post-acceptance display corresponding to the acceptance can be executed, and at least the second post-acceptance display is displayed for the design for production. is displayed in such a manner that it is difficult to be visually recognized by the second post-receipt display, or is hidden. It should be noted that the ``mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize'' in the configuration 7-A means that ``at least a part of the design for production is displayed according to the transmittance after the second reception, which is set to a predetermined transmittance. or a mode in which at least part of the design for production is displayed after the second reception that overlaps with it, or a mode in which at least part of the design for production is hidden, etc. ” means. In addition, the "first reception period (display after first reception)" and "second reception period (display after second reception)" related to the configuration 7-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 7-A. It is just a name used for Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the type of reception period by confirming whether or not the visibility of the design for effect is affected by the post-reception display triggered by the player's operation. become. It should be noted that the "drawing pattern" is, for example, a pattern that forms a ready-to-win state as an effect in the effect display device 1600. In addition, the effect of whether or not to form a ready-to-win state, a pseudo-continuous effect, It is a pattern that is also used for full-rotation effects.

However, it has been confirmed that some players feel disgust at the fact that the visibility of the performance symbols deteriorates as a result of the display of the second post-acceptance display. there is Therefore, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 7-A", when the second reception display corresponding to the reception within the second reception period is displayed, the reception period different from the second reception period is generated (for example, generated in response to acceptance within the second acceptance period). Then, when the player's operation is accepted within the different period, the second post-acceptance display may be hidden with the acceptance as a trigger to make the design for performance easily visible.

For example, assuming that the second post-acceptance display corresponding to the acceptance within the second acceptance period is hidden after a predetermined time has passed since the display started, until the predetermined time elapses The player can hide the second post-acceptance display at that point simply by performing a predetermined operation. It should be noted that the operation required of the player to display the second post-acceptance display within the second acceptance period and the acceptance period different from the second acceptance period (acceptance period that occurs in response to acceptance within the second acceptance period) ), the operations required of the player to hide the display after the second reception may be the same operations or different operations. For example, within a reception period different from the second reception period (a reception period that occurs in response to reception within the second reception period), the player uses a plurality of operation means to hide the display after the second reception. may be required to perform an operation on each.

On the other hand, the display after the first reception may be the same time as the predetermined time from the start of display (the predetermined time until the display after the second reception is hidden), or it may be a different time. good) has passed. However, as for the display after the first reception, which does not deteriorate the visibility of the performance pattern, it is not hidden even if the player performs any operation until the predetermined time elapses. It is more desirable to prevent the loss of interest in the game when the player makes an erroneous operation against his/her intention.

[Configuration 8-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. The first acceptance period can occur while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, and if the acceptance is made while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, the first reception period can occur. In the second acceptance period, the specific BGM that was audibly output in the non-suppressed mode is audibly output in the suppressed mode or is not audibly output. , even if the acceptance is made, the state in which the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed manner or the state in which it is not audibly output is maintained. In addition, the "first reception period (display after first reception)" and "second reception period (display after second reception)" related to the configuration 8-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 8-A. It is just a name used for Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, it is interesting to determine at what timing the specific BGM is set to be audibly output in a suppressed manner or not audibly output in relation to the occurrence of the acceptance period. be able to

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 8-A", in the first reception period, when the reception is made, all the sounds that were audibly output at that time are inaudible (only the specific BGM is audible output In the second acceptance period, all sounds that were audibly output at that time are made inaudible (only one sound is audibly output). Sometimes only the one sound may be made inaudible. That is, in this case, in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, the specific BGM is set to "a state in which it is audibly output in a suppression mode or a state in which it is not audibly output", and when the reception is made, it is It is possible to provide a common effect between the first reception period and the second reception period, such as making all the sounds that are played inaudible, so that the game interest can be improved. become.

Further, as will be described later, when the "Configuration 8-A" is adopted, the specific BGM is made inaudible during the first reception period (during the effective period) while the reception of operations by the player is allowed. However, it is desirable to continue the reception period even in such a situation. That is, in this case, even though the specific BGM is rendered inaudible when the reception is made during the first reception period, no reception is made for a predetermined time after the occurrence of the first reception period. If not, the specific BGM is made inaudible while the reception is not yet done, so that it is possible to make one think that the first reception period has ended, and the game is played. You will be able to strongly attract people's interest.

When the acceptance is made, when the specific BGM is made inaudible with this as a trigger, a "display change according to the acceptance (display after the first acceptance)" is generated in accordance with this, but the acceptance has not yet been made. When the specific BGM is made inaudible while not in use, it is desirable not to generate "display change in response to reception (display after first reception)" accordingly. In other words, in this case, the first acceptance period is continued by confirming that the specific BGM has been rendered inaudible but the "display change in response to acceptance (display after first acceptance)" has not yet occurred. You will be able to make them aware of the possibility of doing so. After the specific BGM is made inaudible, if the player's operation is accepted before the end of the first acceptance period, this will be used as a trigger for "display change in response to the acceptance (first acceptance)". To improve amusement in a game by eliminating a feeling of uneasiness (concern that the period of validity may have expired) when the specific BGM is rendered inaudible, because "post-display)" is generated. will be able to

[Composition 9-A]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as operation means, a plurality of operations including a first operation means (first operation receiving portion) and a second operation means (second operation receiving portion) are performed. A means is prepared, and multiple types of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared as the reception period. During the specified acceptance period, both the acceptance of an operation on the first operating means and the acceptance of an operation on the second operating means are allowed as acceptances for causing display changes corresponding to the specified acceptance period. , a specific display change can occur when an operation on the first operating means is accepted, and the specific display change does not occur when an operation on the second operating means is accepted. Since it is possible to generate a display change different from the display change, it is possible to make it interesting as to which operation means is operated. In addition, the "specific reception period (display after specific reception (specific display change))", "first operation means", and "second operation means" related to the configuration 9-A are the technology of the configuration 9-A It is just a designation used to describe the idea. Therefore, it may mean the same thing as the "acceptance period" or "operation means" related to other configurations, or may mean a reception period or operation means different from those acceptance periods. .

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 9-A", the specific reception period is terminated when the first operation means is operated during the specific reception period, but when the second operation means is operated The remaining time may be extended without ending the specific acceptance period. In other words, in this case, as a reception period using multiple operation means, it will be possible to have unprecedented performance, so various interesting reception periods premised on such performance will be created. be able to provide.

[Configuration 10-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. During the first receiving period, a model image display imitating the operation receiving part is displayed, and during the second receiving period, a plurality of model image displays imitating the operation receiving part are displayed. can be executed as a dynamic display that depicts the movement when the operation receiving part is made movable by. It should be noted that the "first reception period (display after first reception)" and "second reception period (display after second reception)" related to the configuration 10-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 10-A. It is just a name used for Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, for example, even if a plurality of operation receiving units with different required operations (for example, pushing, pulling, etc.) are prepared, the player can perform any operation. This makes it easier to recognize whether or not the user has entered the valid period, and makes it difficult for the operator to miss the operation within the valid period.

Also, as will be described later, when the "Configuration 10-A" is adopted, the simulated image display is executed as "dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving portion is made movable by the player's operation". In some cases, it may not be executed as "dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving portion is made movable by the player's operation". That is, in this case, not only is it easy for the player to recognize what kind of operation should be performed even under the situation where the model image display is displayed, but also what kind of operation should be performed. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained until the player's operation is accepted.

[Configuration 11-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of operation means (a plurality of operation receiving units) including a specific operation means (specific operation receiving unit) are prepared as operation means, As the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared. Then, in the first reception period, a model image display imitating the specific operation means and a specific image corresponding to the model image display are displayed, and "specify by reducing the display area of the specific image according to the passage of time. "remaining time specific display indicating the remaining time during which the operation of the operation means is permitted to be accepted" is performed, and in the second acceptance period, a model image simulating the specific operation means is displayed, but the model image is displayed. A specific image corresponding to the display is displayed, and ``remaining time specific display indicating the remaining time during which the operation of the specific operation means is permitted by decreasing the display area of the specific image according to the passage of time'' is performed. I try not to get caught. It should be noted that the "first reception period (display after first reception)" and "second reception period (display after second reception)" related to the configuration 11-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 11-A. It is just a name used for Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, even if a simulated image display imitating the specific operation means is displayed, it is possible to accept the operation for the specific operation means by reducing the display area of the specific image according to the passage of time. Since the "remaining time specific display" indicating the remaining time is not necessarily performed, it is possible to preferably maintain the sense of tension when the reception period occurs.

Also, as will be described later, when the "Configuration 11-A" is adopted, during the second reception period, a specific model image display imitating a specific operation means and a special model image display imitating a special operation means different from this are displayed. is performed, the above-described "remaining time specific display" may not be performed.

That is, in this case, in the second acceptance period, although both the acceptance of the operation for the specific operation means and the acceptance of the operation for the different operation means are permitted, the above-described "remaining time specific display" is displayed. will not be performed. As a result, the second acceptance period is generated without the player being overwhelmed by the fact that both the acceptance of the operation for the specific operation means and the acceptance of the operation for the different operation means are allowed. It is possible to suitably maintain the feeling of tension when the user is present.

[Configuration 12-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as the operation means, "a first operation receiving portion that is displaced by the operation by the player, and a first peripheral decorative portion provided on the peripheral edge. 1 operation means" and "second operation means having a second operation receiving portion that is displaced by a player's operation and a second peripheral decorative portion provided on the peripheral edge of the second operation receiving portion” are prepared. When displaying the first model image display that imitates the first operation means, the first operation receiving part model image that imitates the first operation receiving part and the first peripheral part that decorates the periphery of the first receiving part model image are displayed. When displaying a second model image display that simulates the second operation means, a second operation receiver model image that simulates the second operation receiver and the second receiver model image can be displayed. A second border decoration image that decorates the border can be displayed, and the first border decoration image and the second border decoration image are displayed as images different from each other. The "first operating means" and "second operating means" of the configuration 12-A are merely names used to describe the technical concept of the configuration 12-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "first operation means" or "second operation means" according to other configurations, or may mean operation means on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean an operation means different from those operation means.

According to such a configuration, even if the operation means themselves are similar, the appearance of the first operation means and the second operation means can be greatly different from each other. As a result, it is expected that it will be easy to distinguish which operating means should be operated.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 12-A" is adopted, the first peripheral edge decoration image is displayed as an image imitating the first peripheral edge decoration portion, but the second peripheral edge decoration image is displayed as the second peripheral edge decoration. The image may be displayed as an image including at least a portion imitating a peripheral decoration portion different from the portion. That is, in this case, when the "first model image display" having the first border decoration image, which is an image obtained by simulating the first border decoration part, is displayed, the situation is such that the opportunity to operate the first operation means is given. It becomes possible to suitably recognize that it is in. On the other hand, when the "second model image display" having the second peripheral decoration image, which is an image that does not imitate the second peripheral decoration, is displayed, the opportunity to operate the second operation means is given. It becomes possible to provide the situation where the player is in the situation as a situation with higher performance. In this case, the "second operating means corresponding to the display of the second model image" has a larger operation receiving portion (first operation receiving portion) than the "first operating means corresponding to the display of the first model image". Even if the second peripheral edge decoration image, which is an image that does not simulate the second peripheral edge decoration portion, is displayed, it may be difficult to recognize which operation means should be operated. It is desirable to avoid

In addition, in order to provide a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the second operation means as a "situation with higher performance", the second peripheral decoration image is a fictitious image that does not actually exist in the game machine. It is desirable to display the image as an image simulating the decoration. However, in order to make it easier to recognize that the second operating means is given an opportunity to operate, a part of the second peripheral decoration image includes a part imitating the second peripheral decoration. You may allow

[Configuration 13-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of operation receiving portions including a first operation receiving portion, a second operation receiving portion, and a third operation receiving portion are prepared as operation means. As the reception period, we have prepared multiple types of reception periods, including specific reception periods. Then, during the specific reception period, display of a first simulated image simulating the first operation receiving portion, display of a second simulated image simulating the second operation receiving portion, and display of a third simulated image simulating the third operation receiving portion. are displayed, and when an operation is accepted for the first operation receiving portion among the plurality of operation receiving portions, the acceptance is displayed among the first model image display, the second model image display, and the third model image display. At least the display of the second model image and the display of the third model image imitating the operation receiving part that has not been performed are hidden. The "first operation receiving unit", "second operation receiving unit", "third operation receiving unit", and "specific reception period" related to the configuration 13-A are based on the technical concept of the configuration 13-A. It's just a nomenclature used for explanation. Therefore, it may mean the same thing as the "operation receiving unit" or "receiving period" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different thing.

According to the above configuration, a model image display (second Since the model image display and the third model image display) are hidden, the operation receiving units (the second operation receiving unit, the third It becomes possible to easily recognize whether or not a further operation is necessary for the operation receiving portion).

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 13-A", the first model image display, the second model image display, and the third model image display are displayed during the specific acceptance period. Of the first operation receiving portion, the second operation receiving portion, and the third operation receiving portion, the third operation receiving portion may not be enabled (permitted) to receive the operation. That is, in this case, during the specific acceptance period, the first display change is generated when the operation of the first operation receiving section is accepted, and the second display change is generated when the operation of the second operation receiving section is accepted. However, since the operation to the third operation receiving section is not accepted and the display change triggered by the operation does not occur, until the operation by the player is accepted during the specific acceptance period It is possible to suitably maintain the performance and tension of the game.

[Configuration 14-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. In both cases, when the first acceptance period occurs and when the second acceptance period occurs, character information is displayed in relation to the occurrence of the acceptance period. Although the same action is accepted as the action by the player in the first acceptance period and the second acceptance period, different character information (for example, "press!", "please press", etc.) is displayed. I'm trying to It should be noted that the "first reception period (display after first reception)" and "second reception period (display after second reception)" pertaining to configuration 14-A are for explaining the technical concept of configuration 14-A. It is just a name used for Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

That is, in the first acceptance period and the second acceptance period, although the player is requested to perform the same action (operation mode), the display change (post-acceptance display) that occurs as a result of detection of the action is requested. are different from each other. In this regard, in this pachinko machine 1, even when the player is requested to perform the same action (operation mode), the character information displayed in relation to the occurrence of the acceptance period is Since it is designed to be different according to the type (type of display after reception), operation (action by the player) while recognizing which type of display change may occur as display after reception can be performed, and it is expected that the decline in gaming interest will be suppressed.

In addition, when requesting a different action (operation mode) from the player, even if the acceptance period is of the same type (that generates the same post-acceptance display), the fact that the acceptance period has occurred It is more desirable to make the character information displayed by different characters different from each other in order to suppress operation errors by the player. In the same sense, when a different action (operation mode) is requested to the player, and the acceptance period is of a different type (that causes a different post-acceptance display), the acceptance period is It is desirable to have the textual information displayed in relation to what has occurred be different from each other.

In addition, the same operation (operation mode) as in the case of the first acceptance period is requested, and the same character information and model image display as in the case of the first acceptance period are displayed. may further prepare a reception period for generating a different post-reception display. That is, in this case, just by looking at the character information and the simulated image display, it is not possible to completely grasp which type is to be executed as the post-reception display. be expected to maintain.

Also, as will be described later, when the "configuration 14-A" is adopted, the character information is not displayed during the first acceptance period until the acceptance is allowed (valid state) is terminated. On the other hand, during the second acceptance period, while the acceptance state (effective state) continues, the character information can be hidden during that period. It is more desirable to have In other words, in this case, during the second acceptance period, if the player does not perform an operation (predetermined action) in a relatively short time after the occurrence of the period, the player is requested to perform any action (operation mode). As it becomes difficult to recognize whether the application period is valid or not, and in turn, it becomes difficult to recognize the type of application period, it is difficult to accept the situation where different character information is displayed. It will be expected to preferably avoid such a situation where the tension is completely lost.

Although this will also be described later, when the "configuration 14-A" is adopted, the second acceptance period includes a period in which the character information is displayed and a period in which the character information is not displayed. Different display changes may occur depending on which of these periods the acceptance is made. In other words, in this case, a display change is prepared that cannot be confirmed unless it becomes difficult to recognize what kind of operation mode is requested (a state in which character information is not displayed). The sense of tension is preferably maintained through such performance.

When the first acceptance period occurs, the time from when the corresponding character information is displayed until it is hidden when no operation is performed by the player, and the second acceptance period occur. In this case, it is desirable that the time from when the corresponding character information is displayed until it is hidden when no operation is performed by the player is different from each other.

[Configuration 15-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. In the first acceptance period, only one mode of the model image display is allowed, and in the second acceptance period, any one of a plurality of modes can be displayed as the model image display. In addition, the "first reception period (display after first reception)" and "second reception period (display after second reception)" related to the configuration 2-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 2-A. It is just a name used for Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, during the second reception period, since the effect that cannot appear when the first reception period occurs is provided, the operation (action) by the player is detected. It becomes possible to suitably improve the game interest of.

It should be noted that, with respect to the "multi-mode model image display" that can be displayed during the second reception period, the degree of expectation for the appearance of a big hit pattern may differ depending on which of the model image displays is displayed. It is more desirable to improve interest. Also, any one of the "plural modes of simulated image display" may be the same as the "one mode" that can be displayed during the first acceptance period. In this case, it is desirable that the "least anticipated aspect" of the "multiple modes of simulated image display" be the same as the "one mode" that can be displayed during the first acceptance period.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 15-A", a third reception period is further provided, and only one mode is displayed as a model image display during the first reception period and the third reception period. It may be made possible. Then, during the "second receiving period" in which the model image display is displayed in any one of a plurality of modes, the model image display is not hidden until the valid state ends. On the other hand, of the "first reception period" and the "third reception period" in which the model image display is displayed only in one mode, the valid state (reception period) is terminated during the "first reception period". However, in the "third reception period", until the effective state (reception period) ends (the effective state is continued) In the meantime, the model image that has been displayed until then may be hidden. That is, in this case, even during the "first reception period" and the "third reception period" in which only one mode is displayed as the model image display, whether or not the model image display is hidden in the middle of the period is determined. Since the effect is provided, it is possible to preferably improve the game interest until the player's operation (action) is detected. The model image display displayed during the first reception period and the model image display displayed during the third reception period may be the same, but they may not necessarily be the same, so that they are not displayed. You may suggest the possibility of being made into.

Also, as will be described later, when the "configuration 15-A" is adopted, the third reception period includes a period during which the model image display is displayed and a period during which the model image display is not displayed. However, different display changes may occur depending on which of these periods the request is accepted. In other words, in this case, a display change that cannot be confirmed unless the user is in a state (a state in which the model image display is hidden) that makes them aware of the possibility that the acceptance period has ended is prepared. The sense of tension is preferably maintained through such performance.

It should be noted that the "third reception period (display after third reception)" of the configuration 15-A is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 15-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "third reception period" according to other configurations, or a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, the first reception period or the second reception period according to other configurations) 2 acceptance period, etc.).

[Other configurations]
In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when a reception allowable state (reception period) in which an reception opportunity is given occurs, a model image related to the reception object (such as a model image that imitates the operation receiving part) is displayed. By displaying as an integrated simulated image display (see FIG. 144) that is integrated with the peripheral edge decoration image that decorates the peripheral edge of the image, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game until the display (display change) is executed after reception. I am trying to Regarding such an integrated model image display, the operation reception effect (reception period) that occurs when the pattern effect progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach, and the fluctuation pattern that does not develop into the SP reach. It is desirable to display it in both the operation reception effect (reception period) and the low expectation unrestrained reception effect and the high expectation suppressed reception effect. .

It should be noted that the "integrated simulated image display" according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. For example, a display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the peripheral decoration image. In addition, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 144) with different degrees of expectation are prepared as the "integrated simulated image display", and it is also the same that the display is made in one of these modes.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example as well, when the reception permitted state (reception period) occurs, it suggests that the operation reception is permitted or that the operation reception is permitted. An acceptance acceptance sound is output, thereby making it difficult to forget to operate. Here, "acceptable sound" means whether or not the acceptance allowable state (acceptance period) always occurs while the sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned) when the output of the sound is started. , is a sound in which an acceptance allowable state (acceptance period) has already occurred. In other words, it can be said that the "acceptable sound" is a sound that is not output under a situation in which an effect that has nothing to do with the acceptable reception state (acceptance period) is being performed.

Further, each reception allowable state (each reception period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. That is, the acceptance acceptable state classified into the first type is assumed to occur when a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) is selected, but a low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) is a valid period that cannot occur (a valid period generated based on the establishment of a specific condition (selection of a specific high-expectation variation pattern) in the performance determination based on the result of the big hit determination). In addition, the second type of reception acceptance state is the valid period that can occur in both the high-expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) and the low-expected fluctuation pattern (occurred as a result of advance notice determination validity period, etc.).

The "integrated simulated image display" according to this embodiment can be displayed in both the first-type and second-type reception permission states (reception periods). Here, both the first-type acceptance allowable state (acceptance period) and the second-type acceptability state (acceptance period) are acceptance states in which the same operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is given an opportunity to operate. Since it is assumed that this occurs in the allowable state (acceptance period), the "integrated simulated image display" displayed during the acceptance period is an image imitating the same operation means (operation button 410).

However, among the multiple modes prepared as "integrated simulated image display", the special mode with high expectations (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 144(d)) is the first type reception acceptance state (reception period 144, and in the second-type reception acceptance state (reception period), display is possible only in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the modes shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(c)). ing. In the first type acceptance acceptable state (acceptance period), the "integrated model image display" in any of the multiple modes including special mode (for example, Figure 144 (a) ~ (d)) based on the result of the jackpot determination A determination is made as to whether or not to display, and the "integrated simulated image display" is displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination. Even in the second type acceptance acceptable state (acceptance period), any of the multiple modes (for example, FIGS. 144 (a) to (c)) that do not include special modes based on the result of the big hit determination "integrated model image" may be determined whether to display, and the "integrated simulated image display" may be displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination.

The details of the pachinko machine 1 having the configurations 1 to 15 will be described below with reference to the drawings. However, each configuration described below is merely described as the best embodiment, and does not necessarily have to be provided. That is, for each configuration described in the specification to be described below, only the corresponding configuration can be arbitrarily selected and adopted when further effects are desired.

First, specific examples of the configurations 2, 3, 5 to 8 will be described. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 has production contents (for example, a conversation notice, a cut-in notice, a movable object notice, etc. as productions after reception) that progress when the reception is received. There are multiple reception periods (reception effects) with different types), and it is possible to generate a type of reception period (reception effect) according to the result of the judgment (jackpot judgment, production judgment, etc.). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least reception periods A (reception effects A) to D (reception effects D) are prepared as a plurality of reception periods (reception effects).

With reference to FIGS. 185 to 194, the characteristics of each reception period (reception effect) will be described. It should be noted that even if each reception period described above with reference to FIG. Alternatively, it may be implemented as any one of reception period A (reception effect A) to reception period D (reception effect D).

FIG. 185 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when condition A is satisfied as a result of determination and reception period A (reception effect A) occurs. FIG. 191 is a diagram showing an effect example in a variation pattern in which reception period A (reception effect A) occurs.

Now, assuming that the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is non-variable and non-time saving), and "variation pattern A" is selected as a result of variation pattern determination In the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern A is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern) SZ (depiction according to the variable pattern A, sound output of specific BGM playback, etc.) is started ("situation shown in FIG. 191(a)"), Within the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) corresponding to the result of the determination of the preliminary performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "variation pattern A" itself. It should be noted that in the rendering example shown in FIG. 191(a), a landscape depicting a mountain is displayed as the background image HG1.

That is, when a special result is obtained in the performance determination (announcement determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern A, the peripheral control MPU 1511a starts the variation performance of the decorative symbol SZ as shown in FIG. 185(a). When the timing tM2 arrives after a predetermined time A has passed since (when the condition A is satisfied), the reception period A (effective period) is generated in which "reception of the display A after reception" is permitted ("Fig. 191(b)”). This accepting period A occurs in a state where the specific BGM is being output without suppression. As a result, when the action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period A, the post-acceptance display A is performed based on the acceptance (situation shown in FIG. 191(c)).

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), in relation to the occurrence of such a reception period A, the reception target (operation receiving unit, etc.) ), a gauge image display that suggests the remaining time of the acceptance period, a disappearance-related display that makes it difficult to see the model image display (mode that makes it difficult to see the model image display), depending on the acceptance A post-acceptance display that suggests the degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) is performed respectively. As described above, the model image display according to this embodiment is displayed as an "integrated model image display" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display. It is not limited and may be displayed separately. Further, when a model image display is displayed instead of the "integrated model image display", the gauge image display may not necessarily be displayed. The same applies to other reception periods.

More specifically, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, as shown in FIG. "Integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. That is, the “integrated model image display IG” is displayed so as to straddle the timing tM2 at which the acceptance period A occurs. The "integrated model image display IG" is hidden when the application is accepted within the acceptance period A, or when the acceptance period A ends without the acceptance being made. It should be noted that the reception period A according to this example ends when the timing tM3 arrives if the action (operation) by the player is not received (see FIG. 185(h)). .

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 185(a) to (g) and the examples shown in FIGS. It is assumed that That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 185(a) to (g) and FIGS. 191(b) and (c), based on the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player at timing tM2a, the acceptance period When A is terminated, the post-reception display A (post-reception effect A) corresponding to the reception period A is started.

In the example shown in FIG. 191, only one mode is displayed as the post-reception display A corresponding to the reception period A. FIG. However, although illustration is omitted, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period A, based on the acceptance, the post-acceptance display A has a relatively low degree of expectation (for example, "It's a chance") may be executed, or the second mode (for example, "It's intense heat") with a relatively high degree of expectation as the post-acceptance display A may be executed.

However, although the details are omitted, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the acceptance period A shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 185(b), when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (when the audible output of acceptance sound A in response to the acceptance is started). At the timing tM2a, the integrated simulated image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated simulated image display IG is not made difficult to see.

Here, after the end of the reception period, in order to easily recognize in which of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 144(a) to (d)) the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period, It can be said that it is desirable to set a longer "time during which the integrated model image display IG is displayed in an easy-to-visual form" after the reception is made. However, despite the fact that the reception has already started and the audible output of the reception sound A has already started, the same mode as when the integrated model image display IG was during the reception period (shown in FIG. 167) 175(e1) and (e2)), it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the acceptance has been made. As a result, there is a concern that "noticing the post-reception effect (reception sound A in this case) in the execution state is delayed".

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example as well, as shown in FIG. (When the timing tM2b arrives), the display related to the disappearance-related effect (disappearance-related display A corresponding to the reception period A) is started as "a form in which the integrated simulated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize". Here, the "disappearance-related effect" is an image (another image different from the integrated model image display IG) that is displayed for a predetermined period of time until the integrated model image display IG is hidden. At the time when the display of the "annihilation-related effect" is started, the integrated model image display IG is not hidden but visible, and the integrated model is displayed while the "annihilation-related effect" is being displayed. The image display IG is gradually hidden.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, while the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)” is being displayed, the “disappearance-related display A (disappearance EF in the drawing)” is displayed. is displayed, and at least part of the area where "disappearance-related display A" is displayed overlaps the area where "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. It is designed to

With such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to be visually recognized. It becomes possible to suggest that A is in a situation where it has already been executed. As a result, even in a situation where the reception sound A has already been performed, it is possible to continue displaying the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long period of time, although it is difficult to see. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated simulated image display IG was displayed in A. Further, even after the processing for audibly outputting the reception sound A is started, until the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see (timings tM2a to tM2b), the integrated model image display Since the mode of IG can be confirmed with good visual recognition, it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

In addition, in the reception period A, the same mode appears as the disappearance-related display A regardless of whether the corresponding post-reception display A, a mode with a low degree of expectation or a mode with a high degree of expectation, is executed. I'm trying As a result, even in a situation where reception sound A has started to be executed, the effect display device 1600 can keep the degree of expectation confidential.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIGS. When the timing tM2c within the period in which the player is present arrives, the execution of the "post-acceptance display A" corresponding to the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player within the acceptance period A is started. The post-acceptance display A may be a case in which a first mode with relatively low expectations (eg, "Chance!") is executed, or a second mode with relatively high expectations (eg, "Intense heat!"). ”) may be executed as described above.

That is, in this case, the execution of the "post-acceptance display A" is started while the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display A" are being displayed. In addition, since the "post-acceptance display A" is started while the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, it suggests that the acceptance period A has already ended, and the player's gaze is naturally expected to shift from "integrated model image display IG" to "post-reception display A" (after timing tM2c).

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to the "post-acceptance display A" is thus started, the "post-acceptance display A" is displayed as shown in FIGS. Of the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display A" among the displayed items, first, the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "disappearance-related display A" is hidden. ” will be displayed (in FIG. 191, illustration of progress of these effects is omitted).

In this regard, the "post-acceptance display A" is one that is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectations based on the acceptance of an action (operation) by the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 185(d), the "post-acceptance display A" continues for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display A" are hidden. will be executed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the reception period A occurs, the reception permitting sound is started to be output at the timing tM1 shown in FIG. 185(f). That is, the acceptable reception sound corresponding to the reception period A is audibly output across the timing tM2 at which the reception period A occurs. , the operation (operation) can be accepted.

Here, in the reception period A, as shown in FIG. The permissible sound is not terminated halfway and is output only for a predetermined time. That is, as will be described later, during the plurality of reception periods, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted while the acceptable reception sound is audibly output, the acceptance acceptable sound is output based on the acceptance. An acceptance period is included during which the audible output state is prematurely terminated. Therefore, when a situation arises in which the audible output of the acceptance acceptable sound is continued as a result of acceptance while the acceptance acceptable sound is being audibly output within the acceptance period A, it is determined whether or not it is in a state of being accepted. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize, and it is expected that the tension will be maintained appropriately.

As shown in FIGS. 185(d) and 191(c), the post-acceptance display A according to this example is displayed at a position at least partially overlapping the decorative pattern SZ. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the integrated model image display IG is preferentially displayed over the decorative symbols SZ, but the after-acceptance display A is preferentially displayed over the decorative symbols SZ. First, the decorative pattern SZ is preferentially displayed with respect to the display A after reception. 185(d) and 191(d), the post-acceptance display A according to this example is hidden after a predetermined period of time has passed since the display was started. .

On the other hand, FIGS. 185(h) to (n) and “an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 191(b) to FIG. 191(d) without going through FIG. It is assumed that the action by the player is not accepted in .

That is, in this case, after the accepting period A occurs, the above-mentioned timing tM3 arrives without accepting the action (operation) by the player (and without activating the automatic button function). In this regard, the effect display device 1600 at the timing tM3 (when the acceptance period A ends and the acceptance of the action by the player is no longer permitted) is performed at the timing tM2a (within the acceptance period A, the action by the player is As with the effect display device 1600 at the time of acceptance, the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see. (in the example of FIG. 167, the mode shown in FIG. 175(e3)).

According to such a configuration, even if the reception period A ends because the player's action is not received in time, the integrated model image display IG will be displayed within the reception period A after the end of the reception period A. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what form the game was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

Also, during the acceptance period A, when the action by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. The display of disappearance-related display A) corresponding to period A is not started. At this time, any technique for fading out the integrated model image display IG itself may be used. However, it is desirable not to display another image different from the integrated model image display IG for a predetermined time until the integrated model image display IG is hidden.

FIG. 186 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when condition B is satisfied as a result of determination and reception period B (second reception effect B) occurs. FIG. 192 is a diagram showing an effect example in a variation pattern in which reception period B (reception effect B) occurs.

Now, assuming that the starting condition is established (hold digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is non-variable and non-time saving), and "variation pattern B" is selected as a result of variation pattern determination. In the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern B is performed. After that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (depiction according to the variable pattern B, sound output of specific BGM playback, etc.) is started ("situation shown in FIG. 192(a)"), and the variable effect Within the execution period, an effect (announcement effect) according to the result of the determination of the foretell effect is additionally executed to the effect of the selected "fluctuation pattern B" itself. Note that in the rendering example shown in FIG. 192(a), a landscape depicting a river is displayed as the background image HG2.

However, in the effect related to "fluctuation pattern B", even if any result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination), as shown in FIG. The acceptance period B (effective period) in which "acceptance regarding display B after acceptance" is allowed when timing tN2 (for example, timing within the SP reach state) arrives after a predetermined time B has elapsed since the start of (situation shown in FIG. 192(b)). This reception period B occurs after the specific BGM is output in a suppressed mode or made inaudible. Thus, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period B, the post-acceptance display is performed based on the acceptance. In the example shown in FIG. 192(b), the receiving period B occurs when the decorative symbol SZ forms the ready-to-win state.

In this respect, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this embodiment, even when such a reception period B occurs, this In relation to this, a model image display that suggests the reception target (operation receiving part, etc.), a gauge image display that suggests the remaining time of the reception period, and a disappearance-related display that makes it difficult to see the model image display (the model image display is not visible) Difficult mode), and post-acceptance display suggesting the degree of expectation (proportion of the appearance of the jackpot pattern) depending on the acceptance. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%". As described above, the model image display is displayed as an "integrated model image display IG" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display. It may be displayed. Further, when a model image display is displayed instead of the "integrated model image display", the gauge image display may not necessarily be displayed. The same applies to other reception periods.

More specifically, also in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, as shown in FIG. IG (simulated image display, gauge image display)” is displayed. That is, the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed so as to straddle the timing tN2 at which the acceptance period B occurs. The "integrated model image display IG" is displayed when the acceptance is made within the corresponding acceptance period (here, the acceptance period B), or when the acceptance period B ends without the acceptance being made. The fact that it is hidden is the same as in the example shown in FIG. 185 (reception period A). It should be noted that the acceptance period B according to this example ends when the timing tN3 arrives when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (see FIG. 186(h)).

Here, in the above-described "acceptance period A (see FIG. 191(b))", when the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is displayed, no character information corresponding to this is displayed. , "acceptance period B (see FIG. 192(b))", character information (here, , "Press") are displayed. That is, in the "acceptance period A" and the "acceptance period B", the same mode as the model image display (integrated model image display IG) (out of the multiple modes shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d), 144(a)) is used, when the "acceptance period B" occurs, character information (here, "press") that does not appear when the "acceptance period A" occurs ) is displayed, which suggests that the degree of expectation that can be suggested as a post-reception display is different. In this example, the degree of expectation (proportion) of the appearance of the big winning symbols when the symbols are stopped is higher when the reception period B occurs than when the reception period A occurs. Alternatively, in the after-receipt display B corresponding to the reception period B, there may appear a mode suggesting that the expectation for the appearance of the big hit pattern is 100%. In the post-display A, it may be possible to prevent the appearance of a mode suggesting that the degree of expectation for the appearance of the jackpot pattern is 100%.

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 186(a) to (g), it is assumed that the action (operation) by the player is accepted at the timing tN2a within the acceptance period B. FIG. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 186(a), based on the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player at the timing tN2a, the reception period B is terminated and After-acceptance display B (post-acceptance effect B) is started to be executed.

Note that in the example shown in FIG. 192, only one mode is displayed as the post-reception display B corresponding to the reception period B. In the example shown in FIG. However, although illustration is omitted, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period B, based on the acceptance, the post-acceptance display B is a first mode with a relatively low degree of expectation (for example, "Destroy 10 bodies!") is executed, and the second mode (for example, "Destroy 100 bodies!"), which is relatively expected as display B after reception, is executed. there is

Although the details are omitted, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the acceptance period B shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 186(b), when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (when the audible output of acceptance sound B in response to the acceptance is started). At timing tN2a, the integrated simulated image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated simulated image display IG is not made difficult to see.

Here, after the end of the reception period, in order to easily recognize in which of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 144(a) to (d)) the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period, It can be said that it is desirable to set a longer "time during which the integrated model image display IG is displayed in an easy-to-visual form" after the reception is made. However, despite the fact that the reception has already started and the audible output of the reception sound B has already started, the same mode as when the integrated model image display IG was during the reception period (shown in FIG. 168) 177(e1) and (e2)), it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the acceptance has been made. As a result, there is a concern that "noticing the post-acceptance effect (here, reception sound B) in the execution state is delayed".

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example as well, as shown in FIG. (When the timing tN2b arrives), the display related to the "disappearance-related display B" different from the disappearance-related display A is started as "a mode in which the integrated simulated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize". The "disappearance-related display (disappearance-related effect)" here means an image that is displayed for a predetermined period of time until the integrated simulated image display IG is hidden (a different image from the integrated simulated image display IG). It's about. At the time when the display of the "annihilation-related effect" is started, the integrated model image display IG is not hidden but visible, and the integrated model is displayed while the "annihilation-related effect" is being displayed. The image display IG is gradually hidden.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, the "disappearance-related display B" is displayed while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is being displayed. At least a part of the area where the "disappearance-related display B" is displayed overlaps the area where the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, so that the reception sound It becomes possible to suggest that B is in a situation where it has already been executed. As a result, even in a situation where reception sound B has already been performed, it is possible to continue displaying the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long period of time, although it is difficult to visually recognize it. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated simulated image display IG was displayed in B. Further, even after the processing for audibly outputting the reception sound B is started, until the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see (timings tN2a to tN2b), the integrated model image display Since the mode of IG can be confirmed with good visual recognition, it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

Also, although illustration is omitted, during the reception period B, the mode of the disappearance-related display B differs depending on whether a mode with a low degree of expectation appears or a mode with a high degree of expectation appears as the post-reception effect B corresponding to this. (Disappearance-related displays B1, B2) are made to appear. That is, in this case, even if the "post-acceptance display B" using the effect display device 1600 is not yet started, the disappearance-related display B appearing on the effect display device 1600 is the first mode and the second mode. By confirming in which mode it appears, it becomes possible to guess whether or not the "post-reception display B" will be executed in a highly expected mode.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIGS. When the timing tN2c within the period in which the player is present arrives, the execution of the "post-acceptance display B" corresponding to the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player within the acceptance period B is started. The post-acceptance display B may be a case in which a relatively low-expected first mode (e.g., "Defeat 10 enemies!") is executed, or a relatively high-expected second mode (e.g., "100 Body attack!") may be executed as described above.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display B (disappearance-related display B1 or disappearance-related display B2)" are displayed, respectively, the "after-acceptance display B (first mode or first mode)" 2 aspect)” is started to be executed. In addition, since the post-acceptance display B is started while the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, it suggests that the acceptance period B has already ended, and the player's gaze is " It is expected that the integrated model image display IG" will naturally shift to the "post-reception display B" (after timing tN2c).

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to the "post-acceptance display B" is thus started, the "post-acceptance display B" is displayed as shown in FIGS. Of the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display B" among the displayed images, first, the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "disappearance-related display B" is hidden. ” will be displayed (in FIG. 192, illustration of the development of these effects is omitted). .

In this regard, the "post-receipt display B" is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectations based on the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 186(d), the "post-acceptance display B" can be displayed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display B" are hidden. will be executed over

Incidentally, in the production example (FIG. 191) corresponding to the acceptance period A described above, even if the acceptance is made within the acceptance period A and the "post-acceptance display A" is executed, the "post-acceptance display A" is not started. The background image is maintained without switching before and after the display. In this regard, in the production example (FIG. 192) corresponding to the acceptance period B, when the acceptance is made within the acceptance period B and the "post-acceptance display B" is executed, the "post-acceptance display B" is started. The background image may be switched before and after.

According to such a configuration, during the period when the background image is not switched (timings tN2a to tN2b shown in FIG. 186), even if there is some display change in the effect display device 1600, the "post-acceptance display B ” will be able to suggest that it is in a situation that has not yet started.

In this case, as the post-acceptance display B, the background image may be switched to the same background image depending on whether the mode with low expectation appears or the mode with high expectation appears, or the mode with low expectation appears. The background image may be switched to a different one depending on the situation and the situation where the highly expected aspect appears. Also, the background image may be switched when a mode with a high degree of expectation appears, but the background image may not be switched when a mode with a low degree of expectation appears.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the reception period B occurs, the reception permitting sound is started to be output at the timing tN1 shown in FIG. 186(f). That is, the acceptable reception sound corresponding to the reception period B is audibly output across the timing tN2 at which the reception period B occurs. , the operation (operation) can be accepted.

Here, in the reception period B, as the reception acceptable sound, a long-time acceptable sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively long time and a short-time acceptable sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively short time. It is designed to be output. In the example shown in FIG. 186(f), the long-time permissible sound and the short-time permissible sound are started to be output at the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, one of the long-time allowable sound and the short-time allowable sound may be started to be output at the timing tN2 when the reception period B occurs or after that.

Then, in the acceptance period B, when the action is accepted by the player while the long-time allowable sound and (or) the short-time allowable sound are audibly output, the long-term The time permissible sound and/or the short permissible sound are terminated prematurely (premature termination of the audible output state).

Further, in the acceptance period B, as shown in FIG. 186(f), when the action by the player is accepted while acceptance acceptance sounds (long-time acceptance sound, short-time acceptance sound) are audibly output. , the acceptance acceptance sound is terminated in the middle, and audible output of the acceptance sound B is started when the acceptance is made. That is, in this case, during the reception period B, unlike the display change, the effect (acceptance acceptable sound) performed during the reception period and the effect (second reception sound) performed in response to the acceptance are performed. Conflicting (overlapping) periods will no longer occur.

In such a second reception sound, as shown in FIG. 186(g), the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display B" are hidden, similar to the "post-reception display B". After that, it will be executed over a relatively long period of time. Further, with respect to the second reception sound, different output sounds (modes) may be output depending on whether the post-reception display B shows a mode with a high expectation or a mode with a low expectation. desirable. On the other hand, as for the first reception sound, the same output sound (mode) is output when the mode with high expectation appears as the post-reception display A and when the mode with low expectation appears. is desirable.

In the reception period B, the long-time allowable sound and the short-time allowable sound are output as the reception allowable sounds. Only one acceptable sound may be output as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 186(d) and 192(d), the post-acceptance display B according to this example is displayed at a position at least partially overlapping the decorative pattern SZ. In this example, the integrated model image display IG is preferentially displayed with respect to the decorative pattern SZ, and the post-acceptance display B is also preferentially displayed with respect to the decorative pattern SZ. 186(d) and 192(d), the post-acceptance display B according to this example is hidden after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the display. The visibility of the decorative pattern SZ is improved.

On the other hand, FIGS. 186(h) to 186(n) assume the case where the action by the player is not accepted within the acceptance period B. FIG.

That is, in this case, after the acceptance period B occurs, the timing tN3 comes without the action (operation) by the player being accepted. In this respect, unlike the reception period A, the reception period B is set as "the reception period for which the automatic button function described above is activated". Therefore, even if the above timing tN3 arrives without the action (operation) by the player being accepted in the reception period B, the action (operation) by the player will be performed within the reception period B thereafter. The same after-receipt display B as when there was received is generated.

However, in the reception period B according to this embodiment, although the above-described automatic button function is activated, the effect display device 1600 at the timing tN3 does not allow the player to 186(i), the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, as shown in FIG. Also, the display IG is not made difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the reception period B ends because the action (operation) by the player is not received in time, the integrated model image is displayed within the reception period B after the end of the reception period B. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the display IG was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

After that, even if the action by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. As a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize", display related to disappearance-related display B is started.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, the "disappearance-related display B" is displayed while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is being displayed. At least part of the area where the "disappearance-related display B" is displayed overlaps the area where the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the acceptance period B ends without acceptance, the integrated model image display IG cannot be visually recognized. By making it difficult, it becomes possible to suggest that the acceptance period B has ended. In addition, even in a situation where the reception period B has already ended, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game caused by not being able to recognize in which mode the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period B.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the mode of disappearance-related display B that appears when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the acceptance period B is the action (operation) by the player within the acceptance period B. ) appears if it is accepted.

That is, in this case, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted during the accepting period B, the integrated model image display IG is hidden after the accepting period B ends. Only by confirming the mode of the "disappearance-related display B" that appears, it becomes possible to recognize whether the post-acceptance display B was executed in a mode with low expectations or in a mode with high expectations. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

After that, when the timing tN3b arrives, the execution of the "post-acceptance display B" is started in a manner that would have appeared if the action (operation) by the player had been accepted within the acceptance period B (FIG. 192(b)). ) appears, the situation shown in FIG. 192(c) appears regardless of whether or not there is an operation).

After that, as shown in FIGS. 186(i) to (k), out of the “integrated model image display IG” and “disappearance-related display B”, first, the “integrated model image display IG” is turned off. display. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "disappearance-related display B" is hidden.

It should be noted that the timing at which the "disappearance-related display B" appears and the timing at which the "post-acceptance display B" starts to be executed do not have to be after the timing tN3 when the acceptance period B ends, and the acceptance period B ends. It may be the timing tN3 at which it is performed, or it may be the timing earlier than that.

FIG. 187 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when condition C is satisfied as a result of determination and reception period C (reception effect C) occurs. FIG. 193 is a diagram showing an effect example in a variation pattern in which reception period C (reception effect C) occurs.

Now, assuming that the starting condition is satisfied (hold digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is non-variable and non-time saving), and "variation pattern C" is selected as a result of variation pattern determination. In the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern C is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (depiction according to the variable pattern C, sound output of specific BGM playback, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the variable effect, according to the result of the notice effect determination The effect (notice effect) is additionally executed to the effect of the selected "third variation pattern" itself. Note that in the rendering example shown in FIG. 193(a), a landscape depicting a desert is displayed as the background image HG3.

However, in the effect related to the "variation pattern C", even if any result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination), the predetermined time C has passed since the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ was started. When the timing t02 (which may be the timing before the occurrence of the SP reach state or the timing within the SP reach state) arrives, the "acceptance of the display C after acceptance" is permitted. A reception period C (effective period) is generated. This reception period C occurs after the specific BGM is output in a suppressed mode or made inaudible. Thus, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period C, the post-acceptance display C is performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the acceptance period C (effective period) may be generated as a result of the announcement effect determination.

In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this embodiment, when such a reception period C occurs, the degree of expectation (proportion of appearance of the jackpot pattern) is suggested according to the acceptance. Although the display C after acceptance is performed, unlike the case where the above-described acceptance periods A and B occur (FIGS. 185 and 186), in relation to this, a model that suggests an acceptance target (operation receiving unit, etc.) Image display, gauge image display that suggests the remaining time of the reception period, disappearance-related display that makes it difficult to see the model image display (a mode that makes it difficult to see the model image display), etc. . The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

More specifically, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, as shown in FIG. etc. will not be performed. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize at what timing the reception period C starts and at which timing the reception period C ends, and even to recognize the existence of the reception period C itself. It will be done. It should be noted that the acceptance period C according to this example ends when the timing tO3 arrives when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (see FIG. 187(h)).

In this respect, in the examples shown in FIGS. 187(a) to 187(g), it is assumed that the action (operation) by the player is accepted at the timing t02a within the acceptance period C. FIG. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 187(a), based on the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player at the timing t02a, the reception period C is terminated, and the reception period C is terminated. The post-acceptance display C (post-acceptance effect C) is started to be executed.

Note that in the example shown in FIG. 193, only one mode is displayed as the post-reception display C corresponding to the reception period C. FIG. However, although illustration is omitted, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period C, based on the acceptance, the post-acceptance display C is a first mode with a relatively low degree of expectation (for example, A mode with a small number of ghosts appearing as a group of ghosts) is executed, or a second mode with a relatively high degree of expectation as display C after reception (for example, a mode with a large number of ghosts appearing as a group of ghosts) is executed. It is designed to be executed in some cases.

As described above, during the acceptance period C, as shown in FIG. 187(c), when an action (operation) by the player is accepted, no disappearance-related display is performed. Also, when the acceptance period C occurs, as shown in FIG. 187(f), no acceptance acceptance sound is output.

As shown in FIGS. 187(d) and 193(c), the post-acceptance display C according to this example is displayed at a position at least partially overlapping the decorative pattern SZ. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the post-acceptance display C is not preferentially displayed over the decorative symbols SZ, and the decorative symbols SZ are preferentially displayed relative to the post-acceptance display C. . 187(d) and 193(d), the post-acceptance display C according to this example is hidden after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the display was started. .

On the other hand, FIGS. 187(h) to (n) and “an example where the production progresses from FIG. 193(b) to FIG. 193(d) without going through FIG. It is assumed that the action by the player is not accepted in .

That is, in this case, after the acceptance period C occurs, the timing t03 comes without accepting the action (operation) by the player (and without activating the automatic button function). However, during the reception period C, since there is no display change due to the end of the period C, the timing t03 (when the reception period C ends and the action by the player is Even when the reception is no longer allowed), only the background image HG3 is played on the effect display device 1600, and it is difficult for the player to recognize it.

FIG. 188 and FIG. 189 are time charts showing an example of the effect content when condition D is satisfied as a result of determination and reception period D (reception effect D) occurs. FIG. 194 is a diagram showing an effect example in a variation pattern in which reception period D (reception effect D) occurs.

Now, the specific game state (for example, the normal game state that is non-probability variation and non-time-saving) is established (reserved digestion), and the result of the variation pattern determination is "variation pattern D1 (Fig. 188)" or Assuming that "variation pattern D2 (FIG. 189)" is selected, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (announcement determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation patterns D1 and D2. Then, after that, the decorative pattern (decorative pattern) SZ is started to have a variable effect (depiction according to the variable patterns D1 and D2, sound output of specific BGM playback, etc.) (“Situation shown in FIG. 194(a)”). ), during the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) according to the result of the determination of the previous notice performance is added to the performance of the selected “variation pattern D1” or “variation pattern D2” itself. It will be executed. Note that in the rendering example shown in FIG. 194(a), a landscape depicting mountains and a river is displayed as the background image HG4a.

That is, when a special result is obtained in the performance determination (announcement determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation patterns D1 and D2, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes decorative patterns as shown in FIGS. When the timing tP2 when the predetermined time D has passed since the start of the variable effect of SZ has arrived (when the condition D is satisfied), the reception period D (valid period) is generated (“situation shown in FIG. 194(b)”). Thus, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period D, the post-acceptance display D is performed based on the acceptance (situation shown in FIG. 194(c)).

However, this acceptance period D, more precisely, when the variation pattern D1 that generates the ready-to-win effect is selected, as shown in FIG. It occurs when the timing tP2-D1 (the timing that arrives after the timing at which the ready-to-win state is formed) arrives after the time D1 has passed (when the condition D1 is established), but the ready-to-win effect is not generated. When the variation pattern D2 is selected, as shown in FIG. 189(a), when the timing tP2-D2 when the predetermined time D2 has passed since the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ is started (the condition D2 is is established).

Moreover, when the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D1 at which the predetermined time D1 has passed since the start of the variation effect of the variation pattern D1 that generates the ready-to-win effect is shown in FIG. 188 (e) so that the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed manner, or a state of making it inaudible is generated before the timing tP2-D1 arrives. That is, in this case, the receiving period D occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed manner or is rendered inaudible.

On the other hand, when the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D2 at which the predetermined time D2 has passed since the start of the variation effect of the variation pattern D2 that does not generate the ready-to-win effect is generated, FIG. 189 (e) , the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner when the timing tP2-D2 arrives. That is, in this case, the receiving period D occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner.

In this way, the acceptance period D is generated when the timing tP2-D1 when the predetermined time D1 has passed since the start of the variation performance of the variation pattern D1 for generating the ready-to-win performance, or the ready-to-win performance is not generated. Depending on whether it occurs at timing tP2-D2 when a predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the variable effect of the variable pattern D2, the mode of the effect differs.

First, FIG. 188 shows an example of an effect when a reception period D occurs when a timing tP2 (tP2-D1) at which a predetermined time D1 has passed after the start of the variable effect of the variation pattern D1 that generates the ready-to-win effect is generated. and FIG. 194.

As shown in FIGS. 188(a) and 188(b), in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), in relation to the occurrence of such a reception period D, the reception target (operation receiving unit, etc.) ), a gauge image that suggests the remaining time of the reception period, and a post-reception display that suggests the degree of expectation (percentage of the jackpot pattern that appears) according to the acceptance. there is As described above, the model image display according to this embodiment is displayed as an "integrated model image display" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display. It is not limited and may be displayed separately. Further, when a model image display is displayed instead of the "integrated model image display", the gauge image display may not necessarily be displayed. The same applies to other acceptance periods.

More specifically, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, as shown in FIG. "Integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. That is, the “integrated model image display IG” is displayed so as to straddle the timing tP2 (tP2-D1) at which the acceptance period D occurs. The "integrated model image display IG" is hidden (invisible) when the acceptance is made within the acceptance period D, or when the acceptance period D ends without the acceptance being made. It should be noted that the acceptance period D according to this example is terminated when the timing tP3 arrives if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (see FIG. 188(h)). .

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 188(a) to (g), and in the examples following the production route such as FIG. 194(b)→FIG. 194(e)→FIG. 194(f)→FIG. It is assumed that an action (operation) by the player is accepted at timing tPx within period D. That is, in this case, based on the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player at the timing tPx, the acceptance period D ends, and the post-acceptance display D (post-acceptance effect D) corresponding to the acceptance period D is displayed. Execution is started.

In the example shown in FIG. 194(c), only one mode is displayed as the post-reception display D corresponding to the reception period D. FIG. However, although illustration is omitted, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period D, based on the acceptance, the post-acceptance display D is a first mode with relatively low expectations (for example, A cut-in by a princess character) may be executed, or a second mode (for example, a cut-in by a samurai character), which is relatively expected as the post-acceptance display D, may be executed.

However, during the accepting period D, as shown in FIG. 188(b), the integrated model image display IG is hidden at the point in time when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (here, timing tPx). In addition, the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see.

In addition, during the reception period D, as shown in FIG. 188(c), even if a predetermined time has passed from the timing tPx at which the reception period D ends due to the acceptance of an action (operation) by the player, the disappearance-related effect is never displayed. That is, during the acceptance period D, the disappearance-related display corresponding to this (an image displayed for a predetermined time until the integrated simulated image display IG is hidden (another image different from the integrated simulated image display IG)) is not prepared, and the integrated model image display IG is suddenly hidden.

188(b) to 188(d), during the reception period D, when the timing tPx1 arrives while the integrated model image display IG is being displayed, Execution of "post-acceptance display D" is started in response to acceptance of the action (operation).

However, during the accepting period D, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted, as shown in FIG. The display is started in such a manner that it overlaps with the entire area and is preferentially displayed with respect to the integrated model image display IG. “Post-acceptance display D” may be displayed on the entire screen of effect display device 1600 .

According to such a configuration, when the display of the "post-acceptance display D" starts based on the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player, the integrated model image display IG is suddenly hidden (displayed on the layer). Even if it remains), it will be possible to provide a different performance than other reception periods that use disappearance effects. It should be noted that the post-acceptance display D according to this example is also hidden after a predetermined period of time has passed since the display was started.

In addition, during the reception period D, unlike the other reception periods, even if the display related to the "post-reception display D" starts based on the acceptance, the acceptance will be the trigger. The processing related to the display of the "integrated model image display IG" is not terminated. That is, in the acceptance period D, the process for displaying the "integrated model image display IG" is continued until a predetermined specific condition is satisfied (here, timing tP3). is terminated when is satisfied. Note that when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted until the predetermined specific condition is satisfied, and the acceptance period D continues, the "integrated model image display IG" In addition to terminating the display processing, processing for terminating the acceptance period D is also performed.

That is, in the acceptance period D, when the "post-acceptance display D" starts to be displayed based on the acceptance, the period D ends based on the acceptance. , the display processing of the "integrated model image display IG" itself is not terminated, and the display on the layer is continued. However, since the "post-reception display D" is preferentially displayed over the "integrated model image display IG", the "post-reception display D" prevents the "integrated model image display IG" from 188 and 189, the period covered with diagonal lines is the simulated image display (integrated Equivalent to the period during which the model image display IG) is hidden (invisible)).

In this case, the "integrated model image display IG" may not be completely hidden, but may be made invisible through a predetermined transmittance set in the "post-reception display D".

Further, during the acceptance period D, as shown in FIGS. 188(b), 194(b), (e), and (f), the state in which the player's actions (operations) are accepted continues. 188 and 189), the "integrated model image display IG" is changed from the display state to the non-display state (timing tP2a shown in FIGS. 188 and 189), and the "integrated model image display IG" is changed from the non-display state. The display state may be set (timing tP2b shown in FIGS. 188 and 189). Of course, even when the "integrated model image display IG" is in the non-display state, if an action (operation) is performed by the player, the action (operation) is accepted. 194(e)→FIG. 194(c).

In this example, if the action (operation) by the player is accepted within the accepting period D, is it accepted before the "integrated model image display IG" becomes non-display state (FIG. 194)? (b)→FIG. 194(c)), or whether the acceptance was made when the “integrated model image display IG” was in the non-display state (FIG. 194(e)→FIG. 194(c)), or “integrated Regardless of whether the acceptance is made after the "simulated image display IG" is returned to the display state again (FIG. 194(f)→FIG. 194(c)), the same mode as the "post-acceptance display D" (FIG. 194 ( c)) is made to appear.

According to such a configuration, in the situation shown in FIG. It is possible to provide an atmosphere as if the game is suddenly replaced with the one shown in b), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game through such a surprise performance. On the other hand, even if the action (operation) by the player is accepted in a situation that seems to have suddenly changed from the acceptance period C (in the non-display state of the integrated model image display IG), the acceptance period Since the same mode (FIG. 194(c)) is displayed as the "post-acceptance display D" corresponding to D, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Moreover, in the acceptance period D according to this example, the background image is changed when the "integrated simulated image display IG" changes from the display state to the non-display state. According to such a configuration, when the "integrated model image display IG" changes to the non-display state, it is expected that an atmosphere of suddenly being replaced with another reception period can be more favorably created. become.

In particular, in this example, the "background image HG4a" depicting mountains and rivers is changed to the "background image HG4b" depicting a desert different from the "background image HG3" (see FIG. 194 ( b)→FIG. 194(e)). According to such a configuration, when the "integrated model image display IG" changes to the non-display state, it is more suitable to create an atmosphere as if the acceptance period C, which may occur in the background of the desert, is suddenly replaced. will be expected.

In this example, when the "integrated model image display IG" is returned from the non-display state to the display state, the background image is also changed from "background image HG4b" to "background image HG4a". (FIG. 194(e)→FIG. 194(f)). As a result, it is expected that the atmosphere returned to the initial reception period D will be more suitably created from other reception periods (especially reception period C).

Further, as shown in FIG. 194(c), the post-acceptance display D according to this example is displayed at a position at least partially overlapping the decorative pattern SZ (displayed over the entire screen). may be)). In this example, the integrated model image display IG is preferentially displayed with respect to the decorative pattern SZ, and the post-acceptance display D is also preferentially displayed with respect to the decorative pattern SZ. The post-acceptance display D according to this example is hidden after a predetermined period of time has passed since the display started, as shown in FIGS. 188(d) and 194(d). The visibility of the decorative pattern SZ is improved. In addition, the situation shown in FIG. 194(d) shows a situation in which the production in the ready-to-win state progresses and enters into the SP ready-to-win production.

However, if the post-acceptance display D is preferentially displayed with respect to the decorative pattern SZ, until the display time as the post-acceptance display D elapses, it is possible to see the effects (reach state, etc.) of the decorative pattern SZ. There is concern about a decline in interest in games due to the inability to do so.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period in which the "post-acceptance display D" is displayed, the player is allowed to accept an action (operation). 194(c)→FIG. 194(g). That is, in this case, depending on the player's operation, the timing at which the display of "post-acceptance display D" ends can be made to arrive early (before the display time of post-acceptance display D elapses). Since it becomes (FIG. 194(g)), it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the fact that the effect (reach state, etc.) of the decorative symbol SZ cannot be seen by the "post-acceptance display D". .

In this example, during the acceptance period D, the operation content (press operation on the operation button 410) required to start displaying the "post-acceptance display D" and the period during which the "post-acceptance display D" is displayed , and the operation contents (pressing operation on the operation button 410) required for early termination of the "post-acceptance display D" are set as the same operation contents, but these operation contents are different from each other. may For example, while the operation content required to start displaying the "post-acceptance display D" is "pressing operation on the operation button 410", the operation content required to end the "post-acceptance display D" is It may be "sword drawing operation of sword decoration 5001", or a combination of "pressing operation on operation button 410" and "sword drawing operation of sword decoration 5001" may be used.

In any case, during the period when the "post-reception display D" is displayed, what kind of operation is required to terminate the "post-reception display D", as shown in FIG. 194(c)? It is desirable to clearly indicate by displaying "text information (cancellable in the figure)" or "simulated image display". In this case, it is desirable to display the "model image display" with priority over the "post-reception display D" at a position overlapping the "post-reception display D" (in the figure, "post-reception display D" is displayed at a position that does not overlap). In addition, "character information" is not prepared as a separate image from "post-reception display D", but is displayed as part of the display of "post-reception display D" itself (image on the same layer). You may make it so.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the acceptance period D occurs, as shown in FIG. It is designed to provide a performance that is common to "Period C", which also makes the "acceptance period C" conscious. Even at the timing when the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden or returned to the display state, the acceptable acceptance sound is not audibly output.

On the other hand, the examples shown in FIGS. 188(h) to (n) and the examples of tracing the production paths such as FIGS. It is assumed that the action (operation) by the player is not accepted in .

That is, in this case, after the acceptance period D occurs, the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (and the automatic button function is not activated), and the above-mentioned "predetermined specific condition (here, Arrival of timing tP3)” is established. In this regard, the effect display device 1600 at the timing tP3 (when the accepting period D ends and the acceptance of the action by the player is no longer permitted) is performed at the timing tPx (within the accepting period D, the action by the player is As with the effect display device 1600 at the time of acceptance, the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see. there is

According to such a configuration, even if the reception period D ends because the action (operation) by the player is not received in time, the integrated model image is displayed within the reception period D after the end of the reception period D. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the display IG was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, in the acceptance period D, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. The display applied to the effect does not start. At this time, any technique for fading out the integrated model image display IG itself may be used. However, it is desirable not to display another image different from the integrated model image display IG for a predetermined time until the integrated model image display IG is hidden.

Next, an effect example when the receiving period D occurs when the timing tP2 (tP2-D2) when the predetermined time D2 has passed since the start of the variable effect of the variation pattern D2 that does not generate the ready-to-win effect is shown in FIG. 189 and 194 for further details. FIG. 194 assumes a case where the acceptance period D occurs after the reach state is formed, and does not correspond to the occurrence of the acceptance period D shown in FIG. 194, the receiving period D is generated in a state where the reach state is not formed, and the SP reach effect is not entered after the receiving period D ends. 194 in FIG. 194 for convenience of explanation.

When the timing tP2 (tP2-D2) when the predetermined time D2 has passed since the start of the variable effect of the variation pattern D2 that does not generate the ready-to-win effect is reached, the reception period D is the same reception period as the reception period D described above. Therefore, unless otherwise specified, the contents of the process performed when the request is accepted and the contents of the process performed when the request is not accepted are the same as those described above.

However, as described above, when the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D1 at which the predetermined time D1 has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the variation pattern D1 that generates the ready-to-win effect, FIG. 188 (e ), before the timing tP2-D1 arrives, a state is generated in which the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed manner or made inaudible. On the other hand, when the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D2 at which the predetermined time D2 has passed since the start of the variation effect of the variation pattern D2 that does not generate the ready-to-win effect is generated, FIG. 189 (e) , before the timing tP2-D2 arrives, there is no situation where the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed manner or rendered inaudible.

Therefore, when the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D2 at which the predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the variation pattern D2 that does not generate the ready-to-win effect is shown in FIG. 189 (e) Thus, the receiving period D occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner.

However, when the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2 (tP2-D2) at which the predetermined time D2 has passed since the start of the fluctuation performance of the fluctuation pattern D2 that does not generate the ready-to-win production, the reception period D is being generated, the specific BGM that has been audibly output in a non-suppressed manner is changed to a state in which it is audibly output in a suppressed manner or is made inaudible.

According to such a configuration, while it appears as if the reception period A (see FIG. 185) occurs while the specific BGM is being audibly output in an unsuppressed manner, after that, the specific BGM is It is as if the acceptance period B (see FIG. 186) is occurring in which the player's actions (operations) can be accepted in a state of audible output in a restrained mode, or in a non-audible state. The atmosphere changes, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in order to obtain such effects more preferably, when the acceptance is made during the acceptance period B, the expectation is high that it cannot appear when the acceptance is made during the acceptance period A (for example, a big hit pattern appears). It is desirable that the post-receipt indication may be displayed in a manner suggesting that the percentage is 100% or the like.

Further, in the reception period D according to this embodiment, when the timing tP2a when a predetermined time has elapsed since the reception period D occurred, the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is hidden. As described above, the simulated image display (integrated simulated image display IG) is hidden at the timing tPy when the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed mode or made inaudible. It is set to arrive before the timing tP2a.

In the case where such a configuration is further provided, a state in which the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed manner while the simulated image display (integrated simulated image display IG) is displayed, or a non-audible state 186), it is expected that the atmosphere will be changed more favorably so that the reception period B (see FIG. 186) is occurring.

On the other hand, the timing tP2a at which the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is hidden while the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed mode or in a non-audible state is Therefore, at the timing tP2a, it is possible to more preferably provide an atmosphere as if the acceptance period C (see FIG. 187) had occurred.

In the receiving period D according to this example, when the timing tP2b arrives after a predetermined time has passed since the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is hidden, the model image display (integrated model image display) IG) is displayed again as described above (see FIG. 194(f)). However, even after the simulated image display (integrated simulated image display IG) is displayed again in this way, the specific BGM continues to be in a "state of being audibly output in a suppressed mode or in a non-audible state". .

FIGS. 189(a) to (g) show actions (operations) by the player when the specific BGM is in "a state in which the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed mode or in a non-audible state" during the acceptance period D described above. is assumed to be accepted.

As shown in FIGS. 189(a) to 189(g), during reception period D, as in reception period B, specific BGM is played as shown in FIGS. Even if an action (operation) by the player is accepted while in the "state of being audibly output in a suppressed mode or in a non-audible state", the specified BGM starts audible output in a non-suppressed mode with this as a trigger. Instead, it maintains "a state of audible output in a suppressed mode or a non-audible state". This also makes it possible to more preferably provide an atmosphere as if reception period B (see FIG. 186) is occurring.

FIGS. 189(a′) to (g′) show timing tPy at which the specific BGM is set to “a state in which the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed mode or in a non-audible state” during the reception period D described above. It is assumed that the action (operation) by the player is accepted before, that is, while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner.

As shown in 189(a') to (g') in the same figure, during the reception period D described above, the action (operation) by the player is accepted while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner. In such a case, with the acceptance as a trigger, the specific BGM is set to "a state in which it is audibly output in a suppressed mode, or a state in which it is not audible." That is, in this case, when the specific BGM is "in a state of being audibly output in a suppressed mode or in a non-audible state" and is accepted, the acceptance is used as a trigger to cause the specified BGM to be audibly output in a non-suppressed mode. However, when acceptance is made while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, the acceptance will be used as a trigger to change the specified BGM into a state in which it is audibly output in a suppressed mode or in a non-audible state. ”. As a result, after the reception period D occurs, it becomes possible to prompt the player to perform an operation at an early stage when the action (operation) by the player can affect the specific BGM, and the reception period D occurs. It is possible to suitably maintain the feeling of tension when

As described above, in the acceptance period D according to this example, the "model image display corresponding to the acceptance period D (integrated model image display IG shown in FIG. 194(b))" is triggered by the acceptance. Do not terminate the processing related to the display of . That is, by preferentially displaying the "post-acceptance display D" with respect to the model image display (integrated model image display IG) whose display state is maintained on the layer, the "model image display corresponding to the acceptance period D ( Integrated model image display IG)” is hidden (invisible).

In addition, in the "post-acceptance display D" according to this example, as also described above, the player is allowed to accept an action (operation) during the display period. The processing related to the display of the "post-acceptance display D" is to be terminated early (see the example of tracing the production path from FIG. 194(c) to FIG. 194(g)). Also, at this time, when the acceptance is made for the "simulated image display (integrated simulated image display IG shown in FIG. 194(c))" corresponding to the post-acceptance display D and text information (cancellable), this is triggered. 194(g)).

In such a configuration, during the period in which the "post-acceptance display D" is displayed, depending on the timing at which an action (operation) by the player is accepted, the "display of a model image corresponding to the acceptance period D (integrated model image In a situation where the processing related to the display of "Display IG)" is being continued, it is conceivable that the processing related to the display of "Post-reception display D" may be terminated early. That is, in this case, the display of the "post-acceptance display D" that has been preferentially displayed with respect to the "simulated image display corresponding to the acceptance period D (integrated simulated image display IG shown in FIG. 194(b))" is terminated. As a result, the "simulated image display corresponding to reception period D" is displayed again. At this time, "reception period D" itself may also be generated again.

In this way, if the "receiving period D" is generated again after the processing related to the display of "post-reception display D" is terminated early, the processing related to the display of "post-reception display D" is terminated early. Even after the "receiving display D" is displayed again, if the action (operation) by the player is again received within the "receiving period D" generated again by this, the "post-receiving display D" can be displayed again. become. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game when the "post-acceptance display D" is erroneously terminated early.

185 to 194, variation patterns A to C, D1, and D2 are selected as variation patterns, and a predetermined period of time A to D has elapsed since the symbol variation was started. described above as occurring from time to time. However, the reception periods A to D do not have to occur only when different variation patterns are selected. For example, as described later, when one variation pattern is selected, this triggers may be set so that all of the reception periods A to D occur.

Also, as described above, the reception period D occurs as a reception period having a special property compared to the other reception periods A to C. Therefore, such a reception period D may be set as a reception period that can occur only when the number of pending calls is less than a predetermined number. That is, in this case, when the number of reservations becomes less than a predetermined number as a result of the player's attempt to interrupt the game, the reception period D occurs, and it is as if the reception periods A to C are changed each time. Since a special performance will be provided, it can be expected to encourage the game not to be stopped, or even if the game is stopped, the impression that the game was interesting Finally you will be able to hold it.

FIGS. 190(a) and 190(b) are tables showing setting examples of conditions for generating the reception periods A to D when these effects are realized.

First, FIG. 190(a) is a table that is referred to when the pending number is any one of "2" to "4" in completing the pending. That is, in this case, even if the pattern variation corresponding to the pending digestion is started, the number of pending does not become "0", it is one of "1" to "3", and the risk of stopping the game is Since it is in a low situation, even if any of the "first variation pattern", "second variation pattern", and "third variation pattern" is executed as the variation pattern, the acceptance period D will not occur. .

More specifically, when the number of holds is either "2" to "4" when the hold is digested and the first variation pattern is executed, the result of the production judgment (advance judgment) is 70% None of the reception periods A to D occurs at a rate, and only the reception period A among the reception periods A to D occurs at a rate of 30% as a result of the effect determination (advance judgment).

In addition, when the number of reservations is in any of "2" to "4", the reservation is digested and the second variation pattern is executed. Among A to D, only reception period C occurs, and reception period A and reception period C occur at a rate of 50% as a result of performance determination (announcement determination).

In addition, when the number of reservations is in any of "2" to "4", when the reservation is digested and the third variation pattern is executed, the reception period at a rate of 10% as a result of the production judgment (advance judgment) B and reception period C are generated, and reception period A, reception period B, and reception period C are generated at a rate of 90% as a result of performance determination (notice determination).

It should be noted that the reception period A is, even if any of the "first fluctuation pattern", "second fluctuation pattern", and "third fluctuation pattern" with different fluctuation times is selected, 5 from the start of fluctuation It can occur when seconds have passed, and the reception period C is 15 seconds after the start of fluctuation, regardless of which of the "second fluctuation pattern" and "third fluctuation pattern" is selected. The receiving period B can occur when 35 seconds have passed since the start of variation when the "third variation pattern" is selected.

In addition, reception periods B and C are not subject to production judgment (advance judgment), and are always generated when the corresponding variation pattern is selected. It is subject to judgment (advance judgment), and can occur only when a special result is obtained in the production judgment. However, the receiving periods B and C may be subject to the performance determination (previous notice determination), or the receiving period A may not be subject to the effect determination (previous notice determination).

Next, FIG. 190(b) is a table that is referred to when the pending number is "1" when the pending is consumed. That is, in this case, the number of reservations becomes "0" when the symbol variation corresponding to the reserved digestion is started, and there is a risk that the game will be stopped unless a new suspension is added within the execution period of the symbol variation. , Any of all the variation patterns including "first variation pattern", "second variation pattern", and "third variation pattern" that are selected as variation patterns are executed, the acceptance period It is designed to generate D.

More specifically, when the hold is digested and the first variation pattern is executed when the number of holds is "1", the acceptance period A to D at a rate of 70% as a result of the production determination (notice determination) Of these, only reception period D occurs, and reception period A and reception period D occur at a rate of 30% as a result of performance determination (notice determination).

In addition, when the number of reservations is "1" and the second variation pattern is executed after the suspension is completed, the reception period C and the reception period D occur at a rate of 50% as a result of the production judgment (advance judgment). However, reception period A, reception period C, and reception period D occur at a rate of 50% as a result of performance determination (advance determination).

Further, when the hold is digested when the number of holds is "1" and the third variation pattern is executed, the reception period B, reception period C, and Acceptance period D occurs, and acceptance period A, acceptance period B, acceptance period C, and acceptance period D occur at a rate of 90% as a result of performance determination (announcement determination).

In this embodiment, the "first variation pattern" is a variation pattern that does not form a reach state, and the "second variation pattern" and "third variation pattern" are set as variation patterns that form a reach state. ing. Therefore, when the "first variation pattern" is selected, the reception period D occurs in the manner described with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when "second variation pattern" or "third variation pattern" is selected, reception period D occurs in the manner described with reference to FIG.

In addition, the acceptance period A, the acceptance period B, and the acceptance period C have a predetermined time (5 seconds, 35 seconds, 15 seconds) after the pattern variation starts, regardless of the type of variation pattern or the number of reservations. While each can be generated when it has passed, the reception period D is the first variation pattern, the second variation pattern, and the third variation pattern, depending on which one is selected. The time from start to occurrence (10 seconds, 30 seconds, 50 seconds) is different.

That is, in this case, since it is possible to generate the reception period D aiming for each type of variation pattern at a timing that does not get in the way in relation to the content of the effect, the reception period D can be set in any of all the variation patterns. can also be favorably generated.

In the production example described above, the reception period includes reception period A (equivalent to the first reception period of "configuration 2-A") and reception period B (equivalent to the second reception period of "configuration 2-A"). We are preparing a reception period for. In this regard, during reception period A, only one mode (integrated model image display IGa shown in FIG. 144(a)) can be displayed as model image display (here, integrated model image display IG). During the acceptance period B, multiple modes of simulated image display (integrated simulated image displays IGa to IGd shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d)) are prepared. A mode according to the result of determination (advance determination) is selectively displayed. According to such a configuration, during the acceptance period B, the performance that cannot appear when the acceptance period A occurs is provided. It becomes possible to suitably improve interest.

It should be noted that, with respect to the "multiple patterns of model image display" that can be displayed during the acceptance period B, it is desirable to make the degree of expectation for the appearance of a big hit different depending on which one of the model images is displayed. It is more desirable to improve the Also, any one of the “plural modes of model image display” may be the same as the “one mode” that can be displayed during the acceptance period A. In this case, it is desirable that the “least expected mode” of the “multiple modes of simulated image display” be the same as the “one mode” that can be displayed during the reception period A.

In addition, in the example of the production described above, the reception period D (corresponding to the third reception period of "Configuration 2-A") is further provided, and the reception period A and the reception period D have only one mode as a model image display. is made visible. In the "receiving period B" in which the model image display is displayed in any one of a plurality of modes, the model image display is not hidden until the valid state ends. On the other hand, of the "acceptance period A" and the "acceptance period B" in which the model image display is displayed only in one mode, in the "acceptance period A", the valid state (acceptance period) is terminated. However, in the "acceptance period B", until the valid state (acceptance period) ends (while the valid state continues) , and in the middle of that, the model image display that had been displayed until then is hidden (see FIG. 194(e)). That is, in this case, even in the "reception period A" and the "reception period D" in which only one mode is displayed as the model image display, the effect of whether or not the model image display is hidden in the middle is provided, it is possible to suitably improve the amusement of the game until the operation (action) by the player is detected.

Further, in the above-described production example, during the reception period D, the same display change (after reception (display) is generated (production progress shown in FIGS. 194(b)→(c) and FIG. 194(e)→(c)). That is, in this case, even after the display of the model image is hidden, the valid state (reception period) itself will continue without any change. In creating the non-display of image display, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the amusement of the game.

Further, in the example of the effect described above, during the reception period D, after the model image display is hidden in the middle of the reception period D, the model image display is displayed again. That is, in this case, even if the player misunderstands that the reception period D has ended even though the reception period D has not ended, the misunderstanding is resolved by displaying the simulated image display again. You will be able to

In addition, in the above-described effect example, only one mode of display of the model image is allowed to be displayed in the "acceptance period A" and the "acceptance period D". The content of the display change that appears when the display is changed is different from each other. As a result, it becomes possible to provide interest in what kind of display changes will appear when the acceptance is made.

Further, in the above-described effect example, in the "acceptance period D", during the period in which the model image display is displayed, the operation means (here, the operation button 410) to be accepted is made to emit light, This may prompt the player to perform an action (operation). Also, in this case, even during the period during which the model image display is hidden in the "reception period D", the operation means (here Then, the operation button 410) may be made to emit light. In this regard, in the "acceptance period C", if the operation means (here, the operation button 410) to be accepted is not illuminated, it is possible to determine which type of acceptance period is occurring. be able to suggest.

Also, in the production example described above, first, as the reception period, reception period A or reception period B (equivalent to the first reception period of "configuration 3-A") and reception period C (second reception period of "configuration 3-A") (equivalent to the reception period) are available. Then, during the reception period A or the reception period B, after the simulated image display (here, the integrated simulated image display IG) is displayed when the reception period A or the reception period B occurs, the reception period A or the reception period B The model image display is not hidden until the display of the model image is completed, and it is possible to accept actions by the player while the model image display is being displayed (FIGS. 185, 186, and 191, FIG. 192, etc.), and during the acceptance period C, it is possible to accept actions (operations) by the player while the model image display is not displayed (see FIGS. 187, 193, etc.). The "allowable reception sound" is audibly output when reception period A or reception period B occurs, but is not audibly output when reception period C occurs.

According to such a configuration, not only the "reception period A or reception period B" in which reception is performed while the acceptance acceptance sound is audibly output and the model image display is displayed, but the acceptance acceptance sound is audibly output. Since "acceptance period C" is prepared in which the acceptance is performed while the game is not displayed and the simulated image is not displayed, the possibility that the post-acceptance display will occur at various timings unintended by the player is eliminated. It becomes possible to raise awareness, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

In addition, in the above-described production example, a reception period D (corresponding to the third reception period of "configuration 3-A") is further provided, and the reception period C occurs in the reception period C (FIGS. 187 and 193). The model image display is not displayed from the start to the end, and it is possible to accept the action (operation) by the player while the model image display is not displayed. , FIG. 194), the model image display is hidden only for a part of the acceptance period D, and the period during which the model image display is displayed and the period during which the model image display is not displayed In either case, it may be possible to accept actions (operations) by the player. That is, in this case, the reception period D is divided into reception periods A and B (reception while the model image display is displayed) and reception period C (reception while the model image display is not displayed). (reception of the game), so it is possible to improve the game interest. In addition, since there is a possibility that the state in which the player's actions (operations) are accepted continues even after the model image display is hidden, the player's actions (operations) are not accepted. It is expected to suppress the decrease in interest in the game when the model image display is hidden without being displayed.

In addition, the acceptable reception sound is audibly output when the reception periods A and B occur, but is not audibly output when the reception period C occurs and when the reception period D occurs. That is, in this case, in the reception period D, at the timing when the reception period D occurs, the side of the reception periods A and B (the simulated image display is displayed) and the side of the reception period C (the reception allowable sound It is not output), so it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, in the above-described production example, during the reception period D, the same display change (after reception display). That is, in this case, even after the display of the model image is hidden, the valid state (reception period) itself will continue without any change. In creating the non-display of image display, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the above-described effect examples, the background image that appears when reception period A or reception period B occurs (FIGS. 191 and 192) and the background image that appears when reception period C occurs ( 193). This makes it possible to give the impression that "the background image differs according to the type of reception period."

In this regard, in the above-described effect example, the background image changes during the acceptance period D, and the model image display is turned off from the period in which the model image display is displayed in accordance with the timing of the change. Since the transition is made to the period to be displayed, it is possible to provide performance as if transitioning to a different reception period within the reception period D. - 特許庁

Furthermore, during the acceptance period D, the background image that has been changed once is restored. Since the period is shifted to the displayed period, it is possible to provide performance in the reception period D as if the user were returned to the reception period before the transition.

It should be noted that the background image changes within the acceptance period D when a predetermined time has passed since the occurrence of the period D without the action (operation) by the player being accepted. When the action (operation) by the player was previously accepted, the background image does not change even after a predetermined time has passed since the occurrence of the period D. As a result, it is possible to prevent the background image from changing to a different one while the post-acceptance display corresponding to the acceptance period D is being executed, and the interest in the game can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in the above-described effect examples, during the acceptance periods A, B, and D, the model image display is hidden when the acceptance is made while the model image display is being displayed. At that time, during reception periods A and B, the "disappearing EF" is displayed as an image different from the display of the model image in accordance with hiding the display of the model image, but during the reception period D, the display of the model image is displayed. In accordance with the non-display, the "disappearing EF" as an image different from the model image display is not displayed. That is, in this case, if the "disappearing EF" does not appear when the acceptance is made, it becomes possible to recognize the possibility that the "reception period D" has occurred. While providing both aspects of A and B, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in interest in the game due to the complete incomprehension of which acceptance period has occurred.

Also, in the production example described above, first, as the reception period, reception period A or reception period B (equivalent to the first reception period of "configuration 5-A") and reception period D (second reception period of "configuration 5-A" (equivalent to the reception period) are available. Then, the reception period A or the reception period B is the number shown in FIG. 3 variation pattern (corresponding to the first variation pattern of "configuration 5-A") is started to be executed, the timing when a predetermined time has passed since the execution of the third variation pattern (in FIG. 190, reception period A In the case of , it is the timing 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and in the case of the reception period B, it can occur when the timing 35 seconds after the start of the fluctuation) arrives, and the reception period D is When the number of judgment information (the number of jackpot judgments in the pending state (holding number)) stored by the holding storage means is less than "2" (i.e., "1"), this is digested and the holding number becomes " 0" state shown in FIG. 190 (corresponding to the second variation pattern of "configuration 5-A") is started to be executed, a predetermined time after the start of execution of the second variation pattern It can occur when the elapsed timing (in FIG. 190(b), timing 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation) arrives, but the number of determination information stored by the reserve storage means is "2" or more. When the execution of the second variation pattern is started at a certain time, it is prevented from occurring even if the timing when the predetermined time has passed since the execution of the second variation pattern is started (see FIG. 190 (a) reference).

According to such a configuration, when the game is about to be stopped and as a result, the number of reservations disappears, the reception period (reception period D) of the type that has not occurred until then occurs, so the game is stopped. The player can expect to be prompted not to play the game, or even if the game is stopped, the game can be given an interesting impression at the end.

It should be noted that, in the production example described above, when the "number of determination information stored by the pending storage means (number of pending)" is less than "2" (i.e. "1"), this is digested and the number of pending is " 0" state, even if the execution of the second variation pattern is started, the timing (in FIG. 190(b), 30 seconds from the start of variation when a predetermined time has elapsed since the second variation pattern was started to be executed When the "number of judgment information stored by the pending storage means (holding number)" increases before the elapsed timing) has arrived (when the holding number changes from "0" to "1" or more), The acceptance period D may not occur when a predetermined time has elapsed since the second variation pattern started to be executed.

That is, even if the pattern variation (second variation pattern) starts to be executed in the state of "0" when the number of reservations is "1", it is within the execution period of the symbol variation If the number of holdings increases at , it suggests that the player is not going to quit the game. In this respect, according to the above configuration, even if the pattern variation (second variation pattern) starts to be executed in a state where the number of reservations is "0", the number of reservations is increased within the execution period of the pattern variation. 190(b), even if a predetermined time has passed since the second variation pattern started to be executed (timing 30 seconds after the start of variation), the reception period D is not generated. Therefore, the acceptance period D can be made to function more properly as "a type of acceptance period that can appear only when the game is about to be stopped".

In order to more preferably obtain such effects, even if the acceptance period D occurs, during the acceptance period D "the number of judgment information stored by the suspension storage means (suspension It is more desirable to terminate the acceptance period D (end the state in which acceptance is permitted) at the time when the number) increases.

Furthermore, even in a situation where the acceptance is made within the acceptance period D and the post-acceptance display corresponding to the acceptance is being executed, the "stored by the pending storage means" is displayed before the display time has elapsed. When the number of judgment information to be received (holding number) increases, the post-acceptance display may be terminated (not displayed) at that time.

Also, in the production example described above, during the reception period D, the execution of the first variation pattern shown in FIG. (on the condition that the number of reservations is 0) also when the timing after 10 seconds have passed since the time of arrival. and,
The timing (in FIG. 190 (b), the timing after 30 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation) comes when the second fluctuation pattern (variation pattern forming the reach state) shown in FIG. If the reception period D occurs when the reception period D occurs, the specific BGM is made inaudible before the reception period D occurs, and the reception period D is generated while the non-audible state is maintained. (see Figure 188),
The timing (in FIG. 190 (b), the timing after 10 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation) has arrived If the reception period D occurs when the specific BGM is not set to an audible state, the reception period D is generated while the specific BGM is being audibly output, and within the reception period D that has occurred Make specific BGM inaudible (see Figure 189)
It is supposed to have a configuration such as

According to such a configuration, when the acceptance period D occurs, it appears as if the acceptance period A (see FIG. 185) occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in an unsuppressed manner. Also, it seems as if the receiving period B (see FIG. 186) occurs while the specific BGM is in a suppressed mode or in an inaudible state. It will be possible to plan Also, the acceptance period D, which appeared to have occurred during the acceptance period A (see FIG. 185), now appears as if it has changed to the acceptance period B within the acceptance period D. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, in the example of effect described above, after the execution of the first variation pattern shown in FIG. If there is an acceptance while the BGM is being output, the audible output of the specific BGM is terminated with the acceptance as a trigger (see FIG. 189). However, the audible output of the specific BGM may not be ended with the reception as a trigger, and the audible output may be continued thereafter. For example, even in the example of FIG. 189(e′), instead of setting the specific BGM to the suppression mode or inaudible state at the accepted timing tPx, timing tPy shown in FIG. 189(e) (previously The specified BGM may be suppressed or made inaudible based on the arrival of the predetermined timing. That is, in this case, there is a possibility that the specific BGM will be suppressed or made inaudible in the middle of the display period of the post-acceptance display D, and an interesting performance can be provided.

Also, in the production example described above, first, as the reception period, reception period A (equivalent to the first reception period of "configuration 6-A") and reception period B (equivalent to the second reception period of "configuration 6-A" ) are available. The acceptance period A can occur while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, regardless of the production situation (the result of the judgment of the big hit, the result of the judgment of the production, etc.). Receiving period B can be generated after the specific BGM is suppressed or inaudible regardless of the performance status (the result of judging the big hit, the result of the performance judgment, etc.). , it becomes possible to provide performance related to the type of reception period before the reception period occurs by using the specific BGM.

In addition, in the production example described above, as the reception period, reception period D (equivalent to the third reception period of "Configuration 6-A") is further provided, and the reception period D is the production situation (the result of the jackpot determination , the result of production judgment, etc.), it may occur while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, or it may occur after the specific BGM is in a suppressed mode or in a non-audible state. I made it

More specifically, a predetermined period of time (10 seconds in FIG. 190(b)) has elapsed since the pattern variation of the first variation pattern (see FIG. 190(b), etc.) that does not form a ready-to-reach state is started to be executed. When reception period D occurs, the reception period D is generated while specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed mode (see FIG. 189). On the other hand, the second variation pattern or the third variation pattern forming the reach state (see FIG. 190 (b), etc.) pattern variation is executed for a predetermined time (FIG. 190 (b), the second variation 30 seconds in the case of the pattern, and 50 seconds in the case of the third variation pattern), if the acceptance period D occurs when the specified BGM is suppressed or made inaudible, then the acceptance period D is generated (see FIG. 188).

According to such a configuration, there are cases in which the acceptance period occurs while the specific BGM is being audibly output in the non-suppressed mode, and cases in which the acceptance period occurs after the specific BGM is in the suppression mode or in the non-audible state. In either case, since there is a possibility that the acceptance period is "acceptance period D", the game interest is preferably maintained until the action (operation) by the player is accepted. will be expected.

It should be noted that, even during the reception period A, if an abnormal condition occurs and the notification sound is output, the reception period may occur after the specific BGM is set to the suppression mode or inaudible state. obtain. However, the above-mentioned "acceptance period A" can occur while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, regardless of the production situation (the result of the judgment of the big hit, the result of the production judgment, etc.). ' means that 'when reception period A occurs in a situation where an abnormality is not reported and the production is proceeding properly, the specific BGM is always audibly output in a non-suppressed manner. Generate the acceptance period A."

Also, in the production example described above, first, as the reception period, reception period A (equivalent to the first reception period of "configuration 7-A") and reception period D (equivalent to the second reception period of "configuration 7-A" ) are available. In the acceptance period A, if the acceptance is made within the period, the post-acceptance display A corresponding to the acceptance can be executed, and at least the post-acceptance display A is displayed as the design for production (decoration pattern SZ). 191(c). On the other hand, in the acceptance period D, if the acceptance is made within the period, the post-acceptance display D can be executed according to the acceptance, and the design for production (decorative pattern SZ) is at least the post-acceptance display D. While being displayed, it is displayed in such a manner that it is difficult to be visually recognized by the post-acceptance display D, or is hidden (see FIG. 194(c)).

It should be noted that the ``mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize'' here means that ``at least a part of the design for production (decorative pattern SZ) is set to a predetermined transmittance through the post-reception display D, and the amount corresponding to the transmittance or a mode in which at least a part of the design for production (decorative design SZ) is superimposed on it is made invisible by display D after reception, or at least one of the design for production (decorative design SZ) The mode in which the part is hidden, etc.”.

According to such a configuration, by confirming whether or not the visibility of the production pattern (decorative pattern SZ) is affected by the post-reception display triggered by the action (operation) by the player, the reception period can be determined. It becomes possible to recognize the type of It should be noted that the "design for effect (decorative pattern SZ)" is, for example, a pattern that forms a ready-to-win state as an effect in the effect display device 1600. , It is a pattern that is also used for pseudo-continuous production, full rotation production, etc.

However, some players may feel disgust at the fact that the visibility of such performance symbols (decorative symbols SZ) is deteriorated due to the display of the post-acceptance display D. has been confirmed. In this regard, in the above-described effect example, when the post-acceptance display D corresponding to the acceptance within the acceptance period D is displayed, an acceptance period different from the acceptance period D is generated (for example, according to the acceptance within the acceptance period D When an operation by a player is accepted within the different acceptance period, the post-acceptance display D is hidden (processing related to the display of the post-acceptance display D ), thereby making it easier to visually recognize the design for production (decorative design SZ) (see the progress of production shown in FIG. 194(c)→FIG. 194(g)).

According to such a configuration, if the post-acceptance display D corresponding to the acceptance within the acceptance period D is "not displayed when a predetermined time has passed since the start of display", a predetermined time Until the time elapses, the player can hide the post-reception display D simply by performing a predetermined operation at that time. It should be noted that an action (operation) required of the player to display the post-acceptance display D within the acceptance period D and an acceptance period different from the acceptance period D (an acceptance period that occurs in response to an acceptance within the acceptance period D) The actions (operations) required of the player to hide the display D after reception may be the same actions (operations) or different actions (operations). It should be noted that the "acceptance period different from the acceptance period D" ends when the post-acceptance display D disappears.

On the other hand, the post-reception display A is also displayed for a predetermined period of time (the time may be the same as or different from the predetermined period of time until the post-reception display D is hidden). is hidden when . However, the post-receipt display A, which does not deteriorate the visibility of the effect pattern (decorative pattern SZ), is hidden even if the player performs any operation until a predetermined time elapses. It is more desirable to prevent the player from losing interest in the game when the player makes an erroneous operation against his/her intention.

In addition, in the above-described production example, a reception period B is further provided as the reception period, and in the reception period B, if the reception is made within the period, the post-reception display B can be executed according to the reception. , At least while the post-reception display B is displayed, the performance pattern (decorative pattern SZ) is displayed in a manner that makes it difficult to see by the post-reception display B, or is hidden. (See FIG. 192(c)).

However, in the production example described above, the "post-acceptance display B" and the "post-acceptance display D" are common in that they affect the visibility of the production pattern (decorative pattern SZ). First, the post-reception display B is "hidden when a predetermined time (which may be different from the time until the post-reception display D is hidden) has elapsed since the start of display". If so, even if the player performs any operation before the predetermined time elapses, the post-acceptance display B will not be hidden due to this as a trigger. As a result, it is possible to provide a performance as to whether or not the visibility of the design for performance (decorative design SZ) is affected by the display after reception, and whether or not it can be improved.

It is preferable that the acceptance period B is set as an acceptance period in which the above-described automatic button function is activated, and the acceptance period D is set as an acceptance period in which the above-described automatic button function is not activated.

Also, in the production example described above, first, as the reception period, the reception period D (equivalent to the first reception period of "configuration 8-A") and the reception period B (equivalent to the second reception period of "configuration 8-A" ) are available. The reception period D can occur while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, and if reception is made while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed manner. Triggered by this, the specific BGM is made non-audible (see FIG. 189), and during reception period B, the specific BGM that has been audibly output in the non-suppressed mode is either audibly output in the suppressed mode or is not audibly output. 186).

According to such a configuration, it is interesting to determine at what timing the specific BGM is set to be audibly output in a suppressed manner or not to be audibly output in relation to the occurrence of the reception period. be able to

Further, in the above-described effect example, when the acceptance is made during the acceptance period D, all the sounds that have been audibly output until then, including the effect sound different from the specific BGM, are made inaudible, and during the acceptance period B , when the acceptance is made, all the sounds (acceptance acceptable sounds, etc.) that were audibly output at that time are made inaudible. That is, in this case, in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, the specific BGM is set to "a state in which it is audibly output in a suppression mode or a state in which it is not audibly output", and when the reception is made, it is It becomes possible to provide a common performance between the reception period D and the reception period B, such as making all the sounds that are played inaudible, and to improve the amusement of the game. .

Further, as described above, during the acceptance period D, while the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is allowed (in the middle of the effective period), a situation occurs in which the specific BGM is made inaudible and no sound is output. (see FIG. 188(e)), the acceptance period is continued even in this situation (see FIG. 194(e)). In other words, in this case, in spite of the fact that the specific BGM is rendered inaudible when the acceptance is made during the acceptance period D, if the acceptance is not made for a predetermined period of time after the occurrence of the acceptance period D, Since the specific BGM is made inaudible while the acceptance is not yet made, it becomes possible to make the player think that the acceptance period D has ended, and the player's interest is increased. will be able to strongly attract

In particular, in the above-described effect example, since the background image is changed in accordance with the timing at which the specific BGM is made inaudible while the reception has not yet been performed, a reception period different from the reception period D occurs. The performance will be provided as if you are doing it.

In relation to the occurrence of the reception period D, when the specific BGM is made inaudible with the reception as a trigger (see FIG. 189), "display change according to reception (display D after reception)" is generated accordingly. However, when the specific BGM is made inaudible while the acceptance has not yet been made (see Fig. 189), "display change according to acceptance (display D after acceptance)" is generated accordingly. I tried not to. That is, in this case, when the specified BGM is made inaudible, the reception period D is terminated by confirming that the "display change in response to reception (display D after reception)" has not yet occurred. You will be able to make them aware of the possibility that they are not. Then, after the specific BGM is made inaudible, if an action (operation) by the player is accepted before the end of the acceptance period D, this serves as a trigger for "display change in response to acceptance (acceptance Since the post-display D)" is generated, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, in the above-described effect example, during the reception period B, a predetermined effect sound (for example, a reception acceptance sound) is audibly output until the timing tM3 at which the period ends. When the performance sound is made inaudible, the reception of actions (operations) by the player is not permitted, so that it is easy to determine whether or not the reception period B continues. to be able to recognize It should be noted that in the above-described effect example, the acceptance period B is set as the acceptance period during which the above-described automatic button function is activated. It's becoming

In addition, in the example of effect described above, reception period B occurs, for example, when a predetermined time (35 seconds) has passed since the third variation pattern shown in FIG. is made inaudible before the elapse of a predetermined time after the start of the third variation pattern, but for the reception period D, the specific BGM is made inaudible after the start of the third variation pattern. It is desirable to prevent it from occurring between According to such a configuration, in the third variation pattern, after the specific BGM is made inaudible, reception period B first occurs, and the specific BGM is made inaudible even after that. Since the reception period D can be expected to occur further, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, the reception period D can occur only when the number of reservations is less than the predetermined number, and the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern shown in FIG. In both the variation pattern and the third variation pattern, it is assumed that it can occur when the time set for each has elapsed since the symbol variation started, but in any variation pattern, other It is desirable to set it so that it occurs after the acceptance period (acceptance periods A to C, etc.). That is, in this case, the receiving period D having a special effect can be made to function as the last receiving period for the player who is about to stop the game, so that the game is not stopped. It becomes possible to expect prompting, or, even if the game is stopped, it becomes possible to have an interesting impression on the game at the end.

During the acceptance period D, the post-acceptance display D appears for a specified time after acceptance, but when the specified time elapses and the post-acceptance display D is hidden, it is desirable that the specified BGM is not restarted. In this case, it is more desirable that the specific BGM is not restarted unless the next symbol variation is started.

Next, examples in which the above configurations 1, 14, and 15 are embodied will be described in order as modified examples of the above-described production examples.

That is, in the example of the effect described above, when the acceptance is made during the period during which the model image display is displayed within the acceptance period D, and when the acceptance is made during the period during which the model image display is hidden The same post-acceptance display D is generated in . However, in lieu of this, within the acceptance period D, when the acceptance is made during the period during which the display of the model image is displayed, and when the acceptance is made during the period during which the display of the model image is hidden may generate different post-acceptance displays.

That is, in this case, the acceptance period D is, more strictly speaking, a "acceptance period D1" during which the model image is displayed, and a "acceptance period D2" during which the model image is not displayed. When an application is accepted during the acceptance period D1, the corresponding post-acceptance display D1 is displayed. After the reception, the display D2 is displayed.

FIG. 195 is a diagram showing an example in which the acceptance period D shown in FIG. 194 and the like is modified as described above.

195 will be described below, but the same configuration as the example shown in FIGS. 188 to 190 and FIG. 194 will not be particularly mentioned. That is, the acceptance period D (acceptance periods D1 and D2) shown in FIG. 195 is basically the same as the acceptance period D shown in FIGS. 188 to 190 and FIG. It is possible to apply

However, in the production example shown in FIG. 195, first, the acceptance period D1 occurs (see FIG. 195(b)), and when the acceptance is made during the acceptance period D1, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the acceptance period D1 D1 will be displayed (see FIG. 195(c)).

On the other hand, after the acceptance period D1 occurs (see FIG. 195(b)), when a predetermined time elapses without acceptance (when timing tP2a shown in FIGS. 188 and 189 arrives). , the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is hidden (see FIG. 195(e)). 194 and the like, the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is allowed even under such a situation (under the situation where the model image display is hidden). are the same. However, in this modified example, when the model image display is hidden (see FIG. 195(e)), the "acceptance period D1" ends and a different "acceptance period D2" occurs. It is designed to

That is, when the action (operation) by the player is accepted during the "acceptance period D2" during which the model image display is hidden, the post-acceptance display D2 corresponding to the "acceptance period D2" is displayed. (See FIG. 195(h)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to actually provide a performance in which the "reception period D1" is suddenly replaced with the "reception period D2" different from the reception period D1, and such a surprise. It is possible to improve amusement in a game through a realistic presentation.

Moreover, in the reception periods D1 and D2 according to this example, when the model image display (integrated model image display IG) changes from the display state to the non-display state, the background image is changed. According to such a configuration, when the model image display (integrated model image display IG) changes to the non-display state, it is expected to more preferably create an atmosphere in which the reception period is suddenly replaced with another reception period. It will be done.

In particular, in this example, as in the case of the production example shown in FIG. 194, from the "background image HG4a" depicting mountains and rivers, to the "background image HG4b" depicting a desert different from the "background image HG3" (FIG. 195(b)→FIG. 195(e)). According to such a configuration, when the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is changed to the non-display state, the atmosphere of a sudden change from the reception period C that can occur in the background of the desert can be improved. It will be expected to produce well.

Also, the "post-reception display D2" according to this example has different contents from the "group notice" of the "post-reception display C" shown in FIG. , and the content is somewhat reminiscent of "Display after reception C", and this also makes it more suitable for the atmosphere that suddenly changes from the reception period C that can occur in the background of the desert. will be expected to produce

Further, in this example, when the acceptance is made within the acceptance period D2, the "background image HG4b" is returned (changed) to the "background image HG4a" that was displayed during the acceptance period D1. , a post-acceptance display D2 corresponding to the acceptance is displayed. As a result, instead of a post-reception display that has nothing to do with the reception period D1 (for example, a post-reception display according to the reception period C), a post-reception display related to the reception period D1 (more precisely, the reception period D1 occurs 188 and 189 (when timing tP2a shown in FIGS. 188 and 189 has arrived). become.

It should be noted that when a predetermined time elapses without any action (operation) by the player being accepted after the acceptance period D2 occurs (when the timing tP2b shown in FIGS. 188 and 189 arrives), FIG. 195 (f ), the acceptance period D1 occurs again and the state is returned to the state in which the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is displayed. At this time, the background image is also changed from "background image HG4b" to "background image HG4a" (FIG. 195(e)→FIG. 195(f)). As a result, it is expected that the atmosphere returned to the initial reception period D1 will be more favorably created from the other reception periods.

When the acceptance is made within the acceptance period D1 (FIG. 195(f)) that occurs again in this way, the acceptance period D1 The post-acceptance display D1 corresponding to the request is displayed (see FIG. 195(c)).

Needless to say, such acceptance periods D (acceptance periods D1 and D2) are similarly applied to the configuration described with reference to FIG.

According to the modification shown in FIG. 195, during the acceptance period D (corresponding to the third acceptance period of “Configuration 15-A”), the period during which the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is displayed, There are periods during which the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is not displayed. and "acceptance period D2". That is, in this case, there is a change in the display that cannot be confirmed unless the state (a state in which the display of the model image is hidden) is made to make one aware of the possibility that the acceptance period D has ended (the acceptance is made within the acceptance period D2). Since the display change when the game is played is prepared, the sense of tension can be preferably maintained through such performance.

Further, in the above-described effect example, the receiving period D includes "a period during which the model image is displayed" and "a period during which the model image is not displayed". However, instead of this, in the reception period D, "the period during which the text information related to the acceptance is displayed" and "the period during which the text information related to the acceptance is not displayed" You may make it so that there is "the period during which it is held."

FIG. 196 is a diagram showing an example in which the reception period D shown in FIG. 194 and the like is modified as described above.

196 will be described below, but the same configuration as the example shown in FIGS. 188 to 190 and FIG. 194 will not be particularly mentioned. That is, the acceptance period D shown in FIG. 196 is basically the same as the acceptance period D shown in FIGS. 188 to 190 and FIG. .

However, in the acceptance period D (see FIG. 196(b)) shown in FIG. Character information (here, "Please press") related to pressing is displayed.

That is, as described above, the text information related to acceptance being permitted cannot be displayed during the acceptance period A (see FIG. 191(b)) in which the degree of expectation is relatively low. It is displayed during the reception period B (see FIG. 192(b)) in which the degree of expectation is relatively high. Therefore, by displaying such character information (here, "Please press") during the reception period D, it is expected that the game interest will be improved.

However, during the acceptance period D according to this modified example, as shown in FIGS. 188 and 189), the character information related to acceptance being permitted (here, "Please press") is changed from the display state to the non-display state (timing tP2a shown in FIGS. 188 and 189), and the character information is changed from the non-display state to the display state (timing tP2b shown in FIGS. 188 and 189). Of course, even if the character information (here, "press me") is in the non-display state, if the action (operation) is performed by the player, the action (operation) will be accepted. Based on the acceptance, the post-acceptance display D will be performed (see the example of tracing the production route such as FIG. 196(e)→FIG. 196(c)).

In this example, if the action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period D, the character information (here, "Please press") related to acceptance is in the non-display state. (Fig. 196(b) -> Fig. 196(c)), or was it accepted when the character information (here, "Please press") is in the non-display state? (Fig. 196(e) -> Fig. 196(c)), or whether the character information (here, "Please press") is returned to the display state and then accepted (Fig. 196(f) -> Fig. 196(c)). 196(c)), the same mode (FIG. 196(c)) appears as "display D after reception".

According to such a configuration, in the situation shown in FIG. (See FIG. 191(b)), it is possible to provide an atmosphere as if the characters were suddenly replaced with each other. On the other hand, even if the action (operation) by the player is accepted in a situation (character information non-display state) that seems to have suddenly changed from the acceptance period A, it corresponds to the acceptance period D. Since the same mode (FIG. 196(c)) is displayed as the "post-acceptance display D", it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

Moreover, in the acceptance period D according to this example, the background image is changed when the character information related to acceptance is changed from the display state to the non-display state. According to such a configuration, when the character information related to the fact that acceptance is permitted changes to the non-display state, it is possible to more preferably create an atmosphere in which another acceptance period is suddenly replaced. come to be expected.

In particular, in this example, the "background image HG4a" in which mountains and rivers are drawn is changed to the "background image HG4c" in which mountains different from the "background image HG1" are drawn (Fig. 196 ( b)→FIG. 196(e)). According to such a configuration, when the character information related to the fact that acceptance is permitted changes to the non-display state, it is possible to create an atmosphere in which the acceptance period A, which may occur in the background of mountains, is suddenly replaced with the character information. It is expected that it will be produced more favorably.

Note that, in this example, when the character information related to acceptance being permitted is returned from the non-display state to the display state, the background image is also returned from "background image HG4c" to "background image HG4a". (FIG. 196(e)→FIG. 196(f)). As a result, it is expected that the atmosphere returned to the initial reception period D will be more suitably created from other reception periods (especially reception period A).

Needless to say, such reception period D is similarly applied to the configuration described with reference to FIG.

According to the modification shown in FIG. We have prepared multiple acceptance periods, including the equivalent period). In both cases, when reception period B occurs and when reception period D occurs, character information is displayed in relation to the occurrence of the reception period. Although the same action (pressing action on the operation button 410) is accepted as an action by the player in the period B and the acceptance period D, different character information ("press" in the acceptance period B, "Please press") is displayed.

That is, in the reception period B and the reception period D, although the player is requested to perform the same action (operation mode), the display change (post-reception display B, D) that occurs as a result of detection of the action ) are different from each other. In this regard, in this pachinko machine 1, even when the player is requested to perform the same action (operation mode), the character information displayed in relation to the occurrence of the acceptance period is Since it is made to differ from each other according to the type (type of display after reception), it is possible to recognize which type of display change (post-reception display B, D) may occur as display after reception. It becomes possible to perform operations (actions by the player) with , and it is expected that the decline in the interest in the game will be suppressed.

In addition, the same operation (operation mode) as in the reception period B is requested, and the same character information and model image display as in the reception period B are displayed. A reception period for generating the post-display may be further prepared. That is, in this case, just by looking at the character information or the simulated image display, it is not possible to completely grasp which type is to be executed as the post-reception display. be expected to maintain.

Further, according to the above-described modified example, during the reception period B, the character information is not hidden until the state in which the reception is permitted (valid state) ends. In the reception period D, the character information can be hidden while the reception is allowed (effective state). In other words, in this case, during the reception period D, the player is requested to perform any action (operation mode) unless the operation (predetermined action) is performed relatively quickly after the occurrence of the period. As it becomes difficult to recognize the type of reception period, and by extension it becomes difficult to recognize the type of reception period, there is a sense of tension depending on the situation where text information is displayed. It becomes expected to favorably avoid such things as disappearing altogether.

Further, in the modified example described above, the acceptance period D includes a period during which the character information is displayed (see FIG. 196(b)) and a period during which the character information is not displayed (see FIG. 196(e)). ), the same display change (see FIG. 196(c)) is made to occur regardless of whether the acceptance is made within these periods. That is, in this case, even if the character information is hidden, the operation can be performed properly as long as it is confirmed what kind of operation mode is requested while the character information is displayed. This is possible, and is expected to curb the decline in interest in gaming.

Further, in the modified example described above, during the acceptance period D, the character information is hidden and then displayed again. That is, in this case, even if the player misunderstands that the "receiving period D" has suddenly changed to the "receiving period A" in which the character information is not displayed, the character information is displayed again to correct the misunderstanding. be able to dissolve.

Further, in the modified example described above, the background image is changed during the acceptance period D, and the character information is displayed as non-display in accordance with the timing of the change. We are trying to move to the period to be displayed. As a result, it is possible to preferably give an impression as if the acceptance period D has shifted to a different acceptance period.

In the effect example described with reference to FIG. The same post-acceptance display D is generated when the acceptance is made within the period in which the character information related to the presence is hidden. However, instead of this, when the acceptance is made within the period during which the text information related to acceptance is displayed within the acceptance period D, and A different post-reception display may be generated depending on whether the reception is performed during the period in which the character information is hidden.

That is, in this case, the reception period D is, more strictly speaking, a "reception period D1" which is a period during which text information related to acceptance is displayed, and a period related to acceptance. It consists of two types of reception periods such as "reception period D2" which is a period in which the character information is hidden, and when reception is made during the reception period D1, a post-reception display D1 corresponding to this is displayed. When the application is accepted during the acceptance period D2, the corresponding post-acceptance display D2 is displayed.

FIG. 197 is a diagram showing an example in which the acceptance period D shown in FIG. 196 and the like is modified as described above.

197 will be described below, but no particular reference will be made to the same configuration as the example of presentation shown in FIGS. 188 to 190, 194, and FIG. That is, the acceptance period D (acceptance periods D1 and D2) shown in FIG. 197 is basically the same as the acceptance period D shown in FIG. 196, and can be similarly applied to other examples. .

However, in the production example shown in FIG. 197, first, the acceptance period D1 occurs (see FIG. 197(b)), and when the acceptance is made during the acceptance period D1, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the acceptance period D1 D1 will be displayed (see FIG. 197(c)).

On the other hand, after the acceptance period D1 occurs (see FIG. 197(b)), when a predetermined time elapses without acceptance (when timing tP2a shown in FIGS. 188 and 189 arrives). , the character information (here, "Please press") related to acceptance being allowed is hidden (see FIG. 197(e)). Regarding the fact that even under such a situation (under the situation where the character information related to acceptance being allowed is hidden), acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is allowed, as shown in FIG. It is the same as the case of the production example shown in . However, in this modified example, when the character information related to acceptance being permitted is hidden (see FIG. 197(e)), the "acceptance period D1" ends and this , a different "acceptance period D2" occurs.

That is, when the action (operation) by the player is accepted during the "acceptance period D2" in which the character information related to acceptance being permitted is not displayed, after the acceptance corresponding to the "acceptance period D2" Display D2 is displayed (see FIG. 197(h)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to actually provide a performance in which the "reception period D1" is suddenly replaced with the "reception period D2" different from the reception period D1, and such a surprise. It is possible to improve amusement in a game through a realistic presentation.

Moreover, in the acceptance periods D1 and D2 according to this example, the background image is changed when the character information related to acceptance is changed from the display state to the non-display state. According to such a configuration, when the character information associated with acceptance being permitted changes to the non-display state, the acceptance period A in which the character information is in the non-display state is suddenly replaced. It will be expected to create a better atmosphere.

In particular, in this example, as in the case of the production example shown in FIG. 196, from the "background image HG4a" in which mountains and rivers are drawn, to the "background image HG4c" in which mountains different from the "background image HG1" are drawn. (FIG. 197(b)→FIG. 197(e)). According to such a configuration, when the character information (here, "Please press") changes to the non-display state, the atmosphere of a sudden change from reception period A, which can occur in the background of mountains, can be improved. It will be expected to produce well.

Also, the "post-reception display D2" according to this example has different contents from the "conversation notice" of the "post-reception display A" shown in FIG. , and the content is somewhat reminiscent of "Display after reception A", and this also makes it more suitable for the atmosphere of a sudden change from the reception period A, in which the text information is hidden. It is expected that the

Further, in this example, when the acceptance is made within the acceptance period D2, the "background image HG4b" is returned (changed) to the "background image HG4a" that was displayed during the acceptance period D1. , a post-acceptance display D2 corresponding to the acceptance is displayed. As a result, instead of a post-reception display that has nothing to do with the reception period D1 (for example, a post-reception display according to the reception period C), a post-reception display related to the reception period D1 (more precisely, the reception period D1 occurs 188 and 189 (when timing tP2a shown in FIGS. 188 and 189 has arrived). become.

It should be noted that when a predetermined time elapses without any action (operation) by the player being accepted after the acceptance period D2 occurs (when the timing tP2b shown in FIGS. 188 and 189 arrives), FIG. 197 (f ), the acceptance period D1 occurs again, and the state is returned to the state in which "character information related to acceptance being permitted" is displayed. At this time, the background image is also changed from "background image HG4c" to "background image HG4a" (FIG. 197(e)→FIG. 197(f)). As a result, it is expected that the atmosphere returned to the initial reception period D1 will be more favorably created from the other reception periods.

When the acceptance is made within the acceptance period D1 (FIG. 197(f)) generated again in this way, the acceptance period D1 The post-acceptance display D1 corresponding to the request is displayed (see FIG. 197(c)).

Needless to say, such acceptance periods D (acceptance periods D1 and D2) are similarly applied to the configuration described with reference to FIG.

According to the modified example shown in FIG. 197, during the reception period D (corresponding to the second reception period of "configuration 14-A"), "character information related to acceptance being permitted" is displayed. There is a period and a period during which "character information related to acceptance is permitted" is not displayed, but these periods are made to function as "reception period D1" and "reception period D2", A different display change is caused depending on which of the "acceptance period D1" and "acceptance period D2" is accepted. In other words, in this case, when the "character information related to acceptance is allowed" is hidden, the acceptance period does not end, but a acceptance period different from the acceptance period that has occurred until then. Since it will occur, it is possible to preferably maintain the performance even when the action (operation) by the player is not readily accepted.

185 to 197, the display of the "post-acceptance display" is started when the simulated image is being displayed. The display does not necessarily start when the model image is displayed, and the display may start after the model image is hidden.

185 to 197, the simulated images are displayed so as to extend before and after the reception period occurs. Alternatively, it may be displayed later than that.

185 to 197, the simulated image display is dynamically displayed as described above with reference to FIGS. 145, 146, and the like. In this case, it is desirable that the dynamic display of the simulated image display is continued even after the reception, even if the "disappearance effect (disappearance-related display)" appears.

185 to 197, the "annihilation effect (annihilation-related display)" is not only a model image display, but also a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the acceptance period ends. It was decided to make it difficult to visually recognize this. As a result, even if the gauge image is displayed even after acceptance, it is possible to prevent it from appearing as if there is remaining time left.

185 to 197, during the acceptance period D, even if the acceptance is made within the period, the display processing related to the display of the model image (character information in the modified example) is ended. I tried not to let it. That is, by preferentially displaying the display D after reception over the model image display (character information in the modification), which is kept in the display state on the layer, the model image display (character information in the modification) is hidden (invisible). However, even when the acceptance is made during the acceptance period D, the display processing related to the display of the model image (character information in the modified example) may be ended with this as a trigger.

185 to 197, a simulated image display (integrated simulated image display IG) simulating the operation receiving part to be operated is displayed during the acceptance period. The model image display does not necessarily have to be displayed, and can be realized by, for example, replacing it with an arrow notation that prompts an operation.

In the example shown in FIG. 189, if the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner during the reception period D and is accepted, whether the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed mode is triggered by the acceptance. , or made non-audible, the specific BGM may be made non-audible when a predetermined timing arrives, regardless of whether or not it has been accepted. That is, in this case, there is a possibility that the voice may be rendered inaudible during the execution period of the display after reception, and it is expected that the performance will be improved.

185 to 197, the background images HG1 to HG4a (HG4b, HG4c) are displayed before each acceptance period occurs. It may be displayed according to the timing of occurrence. Further, depending on the type of acceptance period, it may be displayed before the occurrence of the acceptance period, or may be displayed in time with the occurrence of the acceptance period. In short, if the reception can be performed while the background images are being displayed, the above-described effects related to the background images can be obtained.

185 to 197, the acceptance period C is assumed to occur while the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed mode or made inaudible. , may occur when specific BGM is output in a non-suppressed manner.

185 to 197, in the reception period D, a period during which a model image display (in the modified example, text information related to acceptance being permitted) is displayed; These periods are defined as the period when the player makes an action (operation) after confirming that the model image display (or character information) is hidden. Even if it starts, it is set as a sufficient time for acceptance in the non-display state, and after confirming that the model image display (or character information) has been returned to the display state, the game Even if the user starts the operation (operation), it is set as a time sufficient for acceptance in the display state, and it has no technical significance except for display methods such as so-called "blinking display". It is clear that it has

For example, during reception period D, the time period during which the model image display (or character information) is set to "hidden state" and the "non-display state" is maintained is set as reception period A or reception period B. It is desirable to set a time value that is more than half (1.5 seconds or more) of the time (for example, 3 seconds). In addition, after the model image display (or character information) is returned to the display state, the time for which the display state is maintained is half the time set as the reception period A or reception period B (for example, 3 seconds). It is desirable to set a time value of 1.5 seconds or more. It is desirable to set a time value that is more than half (1.5 seconds or more) of the time (for example, 3 seconds) set as A or reception period B.

Alternatively, the time from when the model image display (or character information) is displayed until it is hidden, or after the model image display (or character information) is in the "hidden state" Regarding the time to maintain the display state and the time to maintain the display state after the model image display (or character information) is returned to the display state, the shortest time for pattern variation (required for shortened variation time) may be set as a time value above. This is because such a time value is set as a time value that is sufficient for the player to confirm the symbol variation and that allows the symbol variation to be terminated early.

Next, specific examples of the configurations 4, 9 to 13 will be described. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 has production contents (for example, a conversation notice, a cut-in notice, a movable object notice, etc. as productions after reception, which are performed when the reception is received). We have prepared multiple reception periods (reception effects) with different types), and it is possible to generate a type of reception period (reception effect) according to the result of the judgment (jackpot judgment, production judgment, etc.). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the reception period A (reception effect A) to reception period D (reception effect D) described above, a reception period E is further prepared as a plurality of reception periods (reception effects). I'm doing it.

Features of the reception period E will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199. FIG. It should be noted that each reception period described above with reference to FIG. 184 may be prepared as a reception period different from reception period E (reception effect E).

FIG. 198 is a diagram showing an effect example in a variation pattern in which reception period E (reception effect E) occurs.

Now, assuming that the starting condition is satisfied (hold digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is non-variable and non-time saving), and "variation pattern E" is selected as a result of variation pattern determination. In the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern E is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern) SZ (depiction according to the variable pattern E, sound output of specific BGM playback, etc.) is started ("situation shown in FIG. 198(a)"), Within the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) corresponding to the result of the determination of the preliminary performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "variation pattern E" itself. In addition, in the effect example shown in FIG. 198(a), the same background image (background image HG4a) as the background image shown in FIG. 194(a) is displayed.

Here, when a special result is obtained in the performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern E, the peripheral control MPU 1511a reaches a timing when a predetermined time E has passed since the start of the variation performance of the decorative symbol SZ. (when condition E is established), the acceptance period E (effective period) in which "acceptance regarding display E after acceptance" is allowed is generated ("situation shown in FIG. 198(e)").

In this respect, when the reception period E occurs, the precursor display corresponding to the reception period E is performed. More specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 198(b), the character KI of "Kunoichi" appears. Then, as shown in FIG. 198(c), the character KI throws a smoke ball to cause smoke. Then, as shown in FIG. 198(d), the character KI speaks a line such as "press the button and call that person" is displayed. At this time, the expanding "smoke" is depicted and a "simulated image display" is displayed, but the "smoke" and "simulated image display" are difficult to see due to the priority display of the character KI and dialogue. has been Then, when the reception period E occurs after such precursor display (FIGS. 198(b) to (d)) is performed, the character KI and the lines are hidden, thereby clearly displaying the "simulated image display". It will be done.

In this example, "character KI" and "smoke" are preferentially displayed with respect to the background image HG4a and decoration image SZ. Further, "smoke" may be displayed so as to cover the entire background image HG4a (display screen), thereby changing the background image from "background image HG4a" to "smoke". That is, in this case, "smoke" functions as a "background image" to be changed. "Smoke" does not necessarily have to be displayed prior to the occurrence of the reception period E (it does not have to be displayed as a precursor display).

Here, as shown in FIG. 198(e), during the acceptance period E according to this example, the "integrated model image display IG" modeled on the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 were modeled as model image displays. A "sword decoration image SYG" and a "special model image TM" imitating the special operation means (the button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 are displayed respectively. In this example, a plurality of each of the "integrated model image display IG", the "sword decoration image SYG", and the "special model image TM" are displayed, but they may be displayed one by one. .

In this case, during the reception period E, the player is prompted to operate the "operation button 410", the "sword ornament 5001", and the "special operation means 1410". As a result, the player determines which one of the "operation button 410", "sword ornament 5001", and "special operation means 1410" should be operated.

In this regard, when the operation of the "operation button 410" is accepted within the acceptance period E, as shown in FIG. Along with audible output of E1, there is a display change (post-acceptance display E1) in which "an image suggesting that the integrated model image display IG is correct" and a "samurai character" are displayed, and " A background change to the background image HG5” or the like occurs. After the "post-acceptance display E1" is thus displayed, the effect progresses while the "background image HG5" is being displayed.

On the other hand, if an operation is performed on the "special operation means 1410" within the acceptance period E, as shown in FIG. , and the acceptance period E is not terminated (same as a state in which no reaction occurs and no operation is performed). In other words, during the acceptance period E, the "special model image TM" modeled after the "special operation means 1410" is displayed even though the "special operation means 1410" is not set as an object to be accepted. . According to such a configuration, during the reception period E, a simulated image display (integrated simulated image display IG, sword decoration image SYG) imitating the operation means set as the object of reception during the reception period E, and the Since the simulated image display (special simulated image TM) imitating the operation means not set as the object of acceptance during the reception period E will be mixed, the tension that makes it difficult to recognize which operation means should be operated You will be able to give an opportunity to operate in the presence of In addition, regarding the "special operation means 1410" during the reception period E, the operation for the "special operation means 1410" is accepted, but this triggers no reception sound. In addition, no display change is caused and the reception period E is not terminated (the same state as when no reaction occurs and no operation is performed). good.

On the other hand, when the operation on the "sword ornament 5001" is accepted within the acceptance period E, as shown in FIG. In addition to the audible output, a display change (post-acceptance display E2) in which the character KI speaks a line such as "Let's start again!" is generated. At this time, the background image does not change.

That is, after the "post-acceptance display E2" is displayed, the set time (remaining time) as the acceptance period E is reset instead of progressing the effect, thereby the remaining time as the acceptance period E. is returned to the state immediately after the acceptance period E occurs (it can also be said that "the acceptance period E occurs again"). According to such a configuration, even if an operation for making the post-reception display E1 (samurai character) appear is not performed, and as a result the post-reception display E1 (samurai character) cannot be displayed, the remaining time is Since it becomes possible to redo the "acceptance period E" from the initial state in which is not consumed, it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

It should be noted that the condition for returning to the state immediately after the reception period E occurs is not "the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is accepted once", but "the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is performed a predetermined number of times". It may be "accepted as much as possible".

By the way, if an operation is performed on the "special operation means 1410" during the reception period E, it goes without saying that the remaining time as the reception period E is not reset.

Then, as a result of performing an operation on the "sword ornament 5001" during the acceptance period E, the remaining time as the acceptance period E was returned to the state immediately after the occurrence of the acceptance period E (reception period E occurred again). ), depending on whether the operation on the "operation button 410", the operation on the "sword ornament 5001", or the operation on the "special operation means 1410" is accepted within the acceptance period E, the same operation as described above A phenomenon occurs (FIGS. 198(f), (g), (i)).

However, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period E in which the set time (remaining time) has not been reset, the manner in which the action (operation) by the player is accepted as the post-acceptance display D corresponding to the acceptance and the set time When an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period E in which the (remaining time) is reset, the mode displayed as the post-acceptance display D corresponding to the acceptance is made different from the display D1, D2, etc.). According to such a configuration, since the appearance of the post-acceptance display D without resetting generates a dramatic value, the tension during the acceptance period E is suitable. can be maintained at

On the other hand, ``an example of progressing from FIG. It is assumed that none of them are accepted.

That is, in this case, after the acceptance period E occurs, the action (operation) by the player is not accepted and the remaining time is completely consumed, and the acceptance period E ends. In this regard, the reception period E is set as "the reception period for which the above-described automatic button function is activated". Therefore, during the acceptance period E, even if the remaining time is exhausted without accepting any of the "operation on the operation button 410" and the "operation on the sword decoration 5001", the , the same post-acceptance display E as when there is an action (operation) by the player within the acceptance period E is generated.

However, if neither the "operation on the operation button 410" nor the "operation on the sword decoration 5001" is accepted within the acceptance period E, the "operation on the operation button 410" is accepted within the acceptance period E. However, the reception sound E (ping-pong) that is the same as when the "operation on the operation button 410" is accepted within the acceptance period E is not audibly output. there is

According to such a configuration, while displaying the same post-acceptance display E as when the "operation on the operation button 410" is accepted within the acceptance period E, the selective operation by the player succeeds. Since it is possible to suggest that the "post-acceptance display E" is not displayed as , it is expected to encourage more active operations when the acceptance period E occurs again. Become so.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the reception period E, it is made difficult to recognize how much time is left as the reception period E, and the post-reception display E1 is displayed. A hint is given as to which operation mode (operation type) is required for this purpose.

199(a) to (d) are enlarged views of a part of the display screen shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows a change.

As described above, during the acceptance period E, the "integrated model image display IG" modeled on the operation button 410, the "sword ornament image SYG" modeled on the sword ornament 5001, and the special operation means ("PUSH" in the figure) A "special model image TM" modeled after the button 1410 described above is displayed.

That is, in the acceptance period E, although multiple types of model image displays are displayed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG used to indicate the remaining time is one of the multiple types of model image displays. Only one (integrated model image display IG) is associated. This makes it possible to imply that the operating means (operation button 410) corresponding to the "integrated model image display IG" among the plurality of types of model image displays should be operated.

In addition, as time elapses in the reception period E, the "integrated model image display IG" changes to the "movement when receiving an operation by the player" as shown in FIGS. 199(a) to (d). A portion of the operation button 410 imitating the “operation receiving portion” (button model image BMG) is dynamically displayed as if the user is performing the operation. The contents of this dynamic display are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. 145 and 146, and the same is true when the “integrated model image display IG” is displayed in the production examples shown in FIGS. 191 to 197. FIG.

However, in this production example, the "sword decoration image SYG" and the "special image TM" among the multiple types of simulated image displays are the parts imitating the "operation receiving part" of the sword decoration 5001, and the special The part imitating the "operation receiving part" of the operation means 1410 is not displayed dynamically, but displayed statically. It should be noted that the "sword decoration image SYG" and the "special model image TM" may be changed in light emission mode such as blinking light emission.

According to such a configuration, only the "integrated model image display IG" out of the plurality of types of model image displays expresses the "movement when receiving an operation by the player". It is possible to imply that the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the "integrated model image display IG" among the model image displays of the type should be operated.

Further, as described above, during the reception period E, a gauge image (predetermined image) GG used to indicate the remaining time is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, such a gauge image GG is usually rendered such that its display area gradually decreases as time elapses after the acceptance period has occurred. , is used to indicate how much time is left as the reception period. The use of such a gauge image GG is the same when the "gauge image GG (here, integrated model image display IG)" is displayed in the production examples shown in FIGS. 191 to 197. be.

However, during reception period E, as shown in FIGS. 199(a) to 199(d), although the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself is displayed, "the time has passed since the reception period occurred. Among them, there is no depiction that gradually reduces the display area. That is, in the reception period E according to this example, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is maintained at the maximum value from the start of the period to the end of the period. there is According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize how much time is left in the reception period E, and it is possible to preferably maintain a sense of tension. come to be expected.

In particular, in the reception period E according to this example, it is possible to reset the remaining time as the reception period E by performing an operation on the special operation means 1410, but even if such processing is performed, Since there is no depiction that increases the display area of the gauge image GG, it is expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained by making it difficult to recognize that the remaining time as the reception period E has been reset. It will be done.

199(a) to (d), the “dynamic display related to the integrated model image display IG” is repeated until the acceptance period E ends. Therefore, when an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted within the acceptance period E, the "dynamic display related to the integrated model image display IG" is terminated with the acceptance as a trigger. However, if an operation is performed on the special operation means 1410 during the acceptance period E, the "dynamic display related to the integrated model image display IG" will not be terminated with this as a trigger. Also, when an operation on the sword ornament 5001 is accepted within the acceptance period E, the processing for generating the post-acceptance display D2 is performed, but the "dynamic display related to the integrated model image display IG" is terminated. There is no need to change the display or start over from the beginning, and only the "dynamic display related to the integrated model image display IG" that has been performed up to that point is continued.

According to the production example described above, first, as the reception period, reception period A (equivalent to the first reception period of "configuration 4-A") and reception period E (second reception period of "configuration 4-A") We have multiple acceptance periods, including: In the reception period A (FIGS. 185 and 191), when an action (operation) by the player is detected within the period, the post-reception display A is displayed and the reception sound A is output. When the action (operation) by the player is not detected, the post-reception display A is not displayed and the reception sound A is not output. When the action (operation) by the player is detected within the period, the post-reception display E1 is displayed and the reception sound E1 is output, and even if the action (operation) by the player is not detected within the period The same post-acceptance display E1 as when an action (operation) by the player is detected is displayed, but the acceptance sound E1 is not output.

According to such a configuration, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the reception period E, a demerit in performance may occur, so that the tension when the reception period E occurs. can be suitably maintained.

In addition, in the production example described above, the reception period B (corresponding to the third reception period of "configuration 4-A") is further provided, and in the reception period B (Fig. 186, Fig. 192), the game is played within the period When the action (operation) by the player is detected, the display B after reception is displayed and the reception sound B is output, and even if the action by the player is not detected within the period, the action by the player is made within the period. The same post-receipt display B as when (operation) is detected is displayed, and a reception sound B is output. In other words, in this case, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the acceptance period, the same display change (post-acceptance change) as when the action (operation) is accepted is caused to cause a demerit in terms of performance. (reception period E) and when it is generated so as not to cause a demerit in production (reception period B), so while maintaining the tension when the reception period occurs, It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the period.

In addition, in the above-described production example, during the reception period A (FIG. 191), the character information related to acceptance is not displayed, and the reception period B (FIG. 192) and the reception period E (FIG. 198) are not displayed. ) displays textual information related to acceptance being allowed. In this respect, the character information displayed during the acceptance period B and the character information displayed during the acceptance period E are made different from each other. According to such a configuration, first, when the reception period occurs, by confirming the presence or absence of "textual information related to acceptance being permitted", the reception for which the automatic button function is to be activated is checked. It becomes possible to recognize whether it is a period or not. In addition, if "character information related to acceptance is allowed" is displayed when the acceptance period occurs, by checking the type of the character information, It becomes possible to recognize the type of

As described above, during the acceptance period B, the "disappearance effect (disappearance-related display)" appears when the automatic button function is activated (see FIG. 186(j)). In this regard, in the above-described production example, during the reception period E (Fig. 198), when the automatic button function is activated (such as when progressing from (e) to (h) in Fig. 198), the "disappearance effect (disappearance-related display)" should not appear. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the type of acceptance period based on whether or not the "disappearance effect (disappearance-related display)" appears when the automatic button function is activated. .

It should be noted that during the reception period E (FIG. 198), even when an action (operation) by the player is accepted and the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is hidden on this occasion, the " It is also possible to prevent the "annihilation effect (annihilation-related display)" from appearing.

As described above, during the acceptance period B, the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is displayed in one of a plurality of modes (see FIG. 144). On the other hand, during the reception period A and the reception period E, it is desirable that the model image display is displayed only in one mode.

In addition, in the above-described production example, the background image is not changed (see FIG. 191) based on the reception of the operation by the player during the reception period A, and during the reception periods B and E, the player The background image is changed based on the acceptance of the operation by . According to such a configuration, it becomes easy to recognize that the automatic button function is activated and the post-acceptance display is displayed, so that the game interest can be improved.

However, during the acceptance period E, even if an action (operation) by the player is accepted, if this is due to an operation on the "sword ornament 5001", the post-acceptance display E2 is displayed. changed the background image to a different background image. According to such a configuration, while the post-acceptance display E2 corresponding to the acceptance is displayed, the player can confirm that the background image that should be changed has not yet been changed. It becomes possible to recognize that the period E has not yet ended.

During the acceptance period E, a plurality of objects (operation button 410 and sword ornament 5001, but may also include special operation means 1410) serve as objects (operation means) to be operated (operated) by the player. is set, and the case where the player's action (operation) on the operation button 410 among the plurality of objects is accepted differs from the case where the player's action (operation) on the sword ornament 5001 is accepted. Added reception sound. As a result, it is possible to suitably suggest that different performances will be produced depending on which one of the plurality of objects is operated.

It should be noted that in the reception period B, based on the result of the performance judgment (jackpot judgment), the case where the "reception sound A" corresponding to the reception period A is audibly output, and the "reception sound A" corresponding to the reception period A A different "reception sound B" may be audibly output in some cases.

Also, in the above-described effect example, during the reception period E, the player is given a plurality of options (here, operating the operation button 410, operating the sword ornament 5001, or operating the special operation means 1410). or not) is presented, and different displays (post-reception displays E1, E2) appear as post-reception displays depending on which of these options is selected by the player's action (operation). Then, when none of the plurality of options is selected within the period (here, when none of the actions (operations) by the player is detected), a specific option out of the plurality of options is displayed after reception. is selected (here, when the operation button 410 is operated) (post-acceptance display E1) appears.

According to such a configuration, when no operation is performed within the reception period E, only the same post-reception display is always displayed. will be able to encourage

In addition, in the above-described production example, as the operation means, the operation button 410 (corresponding to the first operation means (first operation receiving part) of "configuration 9-A") and the sword ornament 5001 (of "configuration 9-A" A plurality of operation means including a second operation means (corresponding to the second operation receiving unit) are prepared, and as the acceptance period, a plurality of We have different acceptance periods. During the acceptance period E, both the acceptance of an operation on the operation button 410 and the acceptance of an operation on the sword decoration 5001 are accepted as acceptance for causing a display change corresponding to the acceptance period E. When an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted, the post-acceptance display E1 (specific display change) can be generated, and when an operation on the sword ornament 5001 is accepted, the post-acceptance display E1 (specific display change) can be generated. Since it is possible to generate a display change (post-acceptance display E2) different from the post-acceptance display E1 (specific display change) without generating a change, it is possible to make it interesting to decide which operation means to operate. will be able to

In addition, during the reception period E, when the operation button 410 is operated, the reception period E is terminated with this as a trigger, but when the sword ornament 5001 is operated, the reception period E is not terminated with this as a trigger, I tried to extend the remaining time in reverse. More specifically, when the operation button 410 is operated during the reception period E, the remaining time as the reception period E1 is not used up. That is, in this case, since it is possible to provide unprecedented performance during the reception period E using a plurality of operation means, various interesting performances based on such performance can be provided. be able to provide.

However, in the reception period E according to the above-described production example, the remaining time as the reception period E can be extended simply by performing an operation on the sword ornament 5001, so the tension is preferably maintained. I have concerns that I can't. Therefore, a reception period F that is different from the reception period E is further provided. and a "special model image TM" modeled after the special operation means (the button labeled "PUSH" in the drawing) 1410 are displayed. Also, when the acceptance is made within the acceptance period F, the same as in the above-described acceptance period E (see FIG. 198),
When the operation of the "operation button 410" is accepted, the acceptance sound F1 is audibly output and the post-acceptance display F1 is displayed based on the acceptance,
・If an operation is performed on the "special operation means 1410", no reception sound will be generated, no display change will occur, and the reception period E may be terminated. (no reaction occurs, the same as if no operation was performed),
・When the operation on the "sword ornament 5001" is accepted, an acceptance sound F2 is audibly output based on the acceptance, and a display change (post-acceptance display) different from the above-mentioned post-acceptance display F1 F2) is displayed. In addition, during the reception period F, even if an operation on the "sword decoration 5001" is accepted, the remaining time as the reception period F is not reset (extended), and the reception period F You may make it continue digesting the remaining time as it is. That is, in this case, if an operation on the "sword ornament 5001" is accepted within the acceptance period F, the post-acceptance display F2 is displayed with this as a trigger. The remaining time is not reset, and the reception period F continues thereafter (of course, reception of operations on the operation button 410 is also permitted).

According to such a configuration, the player is presented with options of "operate the operation button 410", "operate the sword ornament 5001", and "operate the special operation means 1410". Even if the reception period occurs, the remaining time as the reception period is not necessarily reset (extended) when the operation on the "sword ornament 5001" is accepted, so the tension is preferable. will be expected to remain at

As with the reception period E, it is desirable that the reception period F is set as a target for which the above-described automatic button function is activated. Also when the automatic button function is activated for the reception period F, similarly to when the automatic button function is activated for the reception period E, when the operation button 410 is accepted within the reception period F It is desirable to display the "post-acceptance display F1" that appears in . However, at this time, when the automatic button function is activated for the reception period F, unlike the reception period E (the reception sound E1 is not audibly output), the reception sound F1 should be audibly output. is more desirable.

According to such a configuration, when the acceptance period ends without any acceptance, it is possible to suggest which of acceptance period E or acceptance period F the acceptance period was. Since it becomes, it becomes possible to suppress the decline in game interest.

In this case, even during the acceptance period F, the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed as a simulated image display that simulates the operation button 410, and the gauge image GG included in the integrated model image display IG is It is desirable to prevent the display area from decreasing over time.

Also, during reception period F, as in reception period E, although a plurality of types of simulated image displays are displayed, a plurality of gauge images (predetermined images) GG used to indicate the remaining time are displayed. It is desirable to associate only one of the types of model image display (integrated model image display IG).

Also, during the acceptance period F, as in the case of the acceptance period E, as time elapses during the acceptance period F, the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed as shown in FIGS. In addition, the portion (button model image BMG) that imitates the "operation receiving part" of the operation button 410 is dynamically displayed as if "the movement when receiving the operation by the player" is performed, The "sword decoration image SYG" and the "special model image TM" are the part that imitates the "operation receiving part" of the sword decoration body 5001 and the part that imitates the "operation receiving part" of the special operation means 1410. It is desirable that it should be statically displayed rather than displayed.

It should be noted that during the acceptance period E and the acceptance period F, it is not necessary to display a simulated image (special simulated image TM) imitating the special operation means 1410, and the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the special operation means 1410 itself. may be omitted.

In addition, in the production example described above, as the reception period, "reception period A or reception period B or reception period D (equivalent to the first reception period of 'configuration 10-A')" and "reception period E ("configuration 10- A” corresponds to the second reception period)”. Then, during the reception period A (or reception periods B and D), a specific model image display (here, integrated model image display IG) is displayed as a model image display imitating the operation receiving part, and during the reception period E, A plurality of simulated image displays (here, integrated simulated image display IG, sword decoration image SYG, and special simulated image TM) are displayed as simulated image displays imitating the operation receiving portion, and the simulated image display is performed by the player's operation. It is made executable as a dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving part is made movable.

In this regard, in the above-described effect example, when the simulated image display is executed as "dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving portion is made movable by the player's operation" (for example, during the acceptance period A, B, E) and a case where it is not executed as "dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving part is made movable by the player's operation" (for example, reception period E). That is, in this case, not only is it easy for the player to recognize what kind of operation should be performed even under the situation where the model image display is displayed, but also what kind of operation should be performed. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained until the player's operation is accepted.

In particular, in the above-described effect example, a plurality of operation receiving units including the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are prepared, and during the reception period A (or reception periods B and D), the sword decoration 5001 is simulated. An image display (sword decoration image SYG) is not performed, and a simulated image display (integrated simulated image display IG) imitating the operation button 410 is performed. is executed as a dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation button 410 is made movable.

On the other hand, during the reception period E, at least both a model image display (integrated model image display IG) imitating the operation button 410 and a model image display (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword ornament 5001 are displayed. , one of the integrated model image display IG and the sword decoration image SYG (here, the integrated model image display IG) depicts the movement when the one operation receiving portion is made movable by the player's operation. Although it is executed as a dynamic display, the other of the integrated model image display IG and the sword decoration image SYG (here, the sword decoration image SYG) is made movable by the player's operation. It is not executed as a dynamic display that depicts the movement of time.

According to such a configuration, when the simulated image display is performed, there are cases where this is executed as dynamic display and cases where it is not executed as dynamic display, so that various effects can be achieved. It becomes possible to realize it, and it is expected that the game interest will be improved.

Moreover, during the reception period E, an operation is performed on the operation receiving unit (here, the operation button 410) corresponding to the simulated image display (here, integrated simulated image display IG) on the side where the dynamic display is performed. When this is accepted, the first display change (post-acceptance display E1) can be generated with this as a trigger, and corresponds to the model image display (here, sword decoration image SYG) on the side where dynamic display is not performed. When an operation is performed on the operation receiving portion (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the operation is accepted, the second display change (post-acceptance display E2) can occur with this as a trigger. That is, in this case, regardless of whether dynamic display is performed or not, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the type of the reception side appears. It becomes possible to give "meaning in production" to the display. For example, even if an operation is performed on the operation receiving unit (here, sword decoration body 5001) corresponding to the simulated image display (here, sword decoration image SYG) on the side where dynamic display is not performed. , it is possible to give surprise to the occurrence of a display change triggered by this.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, a plurality of operation receiving units including the operation button 410 and the special operation means 1410 are prepared, and during the reception period A (or the reception periods B and D), the special operation means 1410 is simulated. An image display (special model image TM) is not performed, and a model image display (integrated model image display IG) imitating the operation button 410 is performed. is executed as a dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation button 410 is made movable.

On the other hand, during the acceptance period E, at least both a model image display (integrated model image display IG) imitating the operation button 410 and a model image display (special model image TM) imitating the special operation means 1410 are displayed. , one of the integrated model image display IG and the special model image TM (here, the integrated model image display IG) depicts the movement when the one operation receiving portion is made movable by the player's operation. Although it is executed as a dynamic display, the other of the integrated model image display IG and the special model image TM (here, the special model image TM) is made movable by the player's operation. It is not executed as a dynamic display that depicts the movement of time.

According to such a configuration, when the simulated image display is performed, there are cases where this is executed as dynamic display and cases where it is not executed as dynamic display, so that various effects can be achieved. It becomes possible to realize it, and it is expected that the game interest will be improved.

Moreover, during the reception period E, an operation is performed on the operation receiving unit (here, the operation button 410) corresponding to the simulated image display (here, integrated simulated image display IG) on the side where the dynamic display is performed. Triggered by this, the first display change (post-acceptance display E1) can be generated, and the operation receiving unit ( Here, when an operation is performed on the special operation means 1410), no display change (post-acceptance display) triggered by this is caused to occur. That is, in this case, even if the model image display (here, the special model image TM) is displayed within the reception period, it is not necessarily accepted when the corresponding operation receiving unit (special operation means 1410) is operated. Therefore, it is expected that the tension will be maintained appropriately during the reception period.

In this case, when the special operation means 1410 is operated during the acceptance period A (or acceptance periods B and D) in which the special model image TM is not displayed, the display change (post-acceptance display) triggered by this operation is performed. It will not occur. However, during the acceptance period A (or acceptance periods B and D) in which the special model image TM is not displayed, when the special operation means 1410 is operated, a display change (post-acceptance display) occurs. You can let it run. According to such a configuration, the effectiveness of the operation cannot be judged only by the presence or absence of the display of the simulated image display, so that the sense of tension can be preferably maintained.

In the production example described above, during the acceptance period E, the sword decoration image SYG and the special model image TM are displayed as still images. However, regarding the sword decoration image SYG and the special model image TM, the operation receiving unit (the sword decoration body 5001 in the case of the sword decoration image SYG, and the special operation means 1410 in the case of the special model image TM) is operated by the player's operation. Anything that is not executed as a dynamic display that depicts the movement when it is made movable, such as a movement (such as rotation) that is different from the movement when the operation receiving part is made movable by the player's operation. Alternatively, it may be executed as a dynamic display.

In addition, in the above-described production example, first, a plurality of operation means (plurality of operation receiving units) including the operation button 410 (corresponding to the specific operation means (specific operation receiving unit) of “Configuration 11-A”) are prepared. , and the acceptance period includes acceptance period A or acceptance period B (equivalent to the first acceptance period of "configuration 11-A") and acceptance period E (equivalent to the second acceptance period of "configuration 11-A"). We have multiple acceptance periods. During reception period A (or reception period B), a model image display (button model image BMG) imitating the operation button 410 and a specific image (gauge image GG) corresponding to the button model image BMG are displayed. , "remaining time specific display indicating the remaining time during which the operation button 41 is allowed to be operated by decreasing the display area of the gauge image GG with the lapse of time" is performed.

On the other hand, during the acceptance period E, a button model image BMG (integrated model image display IG) imitating the operation button 410 is displayed. The "remaining time specific display" indicating the remaining time during which the button 41 is allowed to be operated is not performed.

According to such a configuration, even if the button model image BMG (integrated model image display IG) imitating the operation button 410 is displayed, "the display area of the gauge image GG is Since the "remaining time specific display" indicating the remaining time during which the button 41 is allowed to be accepted is not necessarily performed, it is possible to preferably maintain the tension when the acceptance period occurs. become.

In addition, in the production example described above, during the acceptance period E, a button model image BMG (integrated model image display IG) that imitates the operation button 410 and an operating means (sword ornament 5001) that is different from this image are modeled. Even though the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, the remaining time display (remaining time specific display described above) that suggests (depicts) how much time is left as the reception period E is not performed. ing. That is, in this case, in the acceptance period E, both the acceptance of an operation on the operation button 410 and the acceptance of an operation on a different operation means (sword ornament 5001) are allowed, but the above-mentioned " Remaining time specific display" will not be performed. As a result, the player will not be overwhelmed by the fact that both the acceptance of the operation on the operation button 410 and the acceptance of the operation on the sword ornament 5001 are permitted, and the acceptance period E will not occur. It becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension.

In addition, even in a situation where the remaining time display (remaining time specific display described above) that suggests (depicts) how much time is left as the reception period E is not performed, the remaining time as the reception period E It goes without saying that it is declining.

Further, in the above-described effect example, during the acceptance period E, the button model image BMG that simulates the operation button 410 may be displayed as an image integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that divides and forms the display area of the gauge image GG. and However, the gauge image GG is displayed so as to maintain its display area without decreasing its display area over time. That is, in this case, even though the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at all, the remaining time as the reception period E is reduced, so a large display area of the gauge image GG remains. It becomes expected to maintain the tension when it is in a good condition. The gauge image GG does not reduce its display area until the remaining time as the reception period E becomes "0" and this is not displayed.

Further, in the above-described production example, during the acceptance period E, only the button model image BMG among the button model image BMG that simulates the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG that simulates the sword decoration body 5001 is replaced with the rest. It is displayed as an image integrated with a specific image (gauge image GG) used for time display. That is, in this case, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the gauge image GG also corresponds to the sword decoration image SYG (and thus whether or not the acceptance of operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is validated). Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the feeling of tension.

In this case, of the button model image BMG that simulates the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG that simulates the sword decoration body 5001, only the button model image BMG is used to display the remaining time even during the acceptance period F described above. It is desirable to display as an image integrated with the specific image (gauge image GG) used.

In addition, it is possible to generate a reception period G regarding the post-reception display G, and during the reception period G, the sword decoration image SYG imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is not displayed, and the button model image BMG imitating the operation button 410 is integrated as described above. It should be displayed as a model image display IG. However, in reception period G, unlike reception period A and reception period B, the display area of the gauge image GG in the integrated model image display IG does not decrease over time, and the display area is maintained. Make it visible in the form. According to such a configuration, even if there occurs a reception period during which only the button model image BMG (integrated model image display IG) is displayed as the model image display, the display area of the gauge image GG does not necessarily increase. Since it does not decrease, it is possible to preferably maintain the tension during the reception period.

In the production example described above, during the acceptance periods E, F, and G, the integrated model image display IG including the gauge image GG is displayed as a model image display imitating the operation button 410, and then the gauge By not reducing the display area of the image GG, it is made difficult to recognize the remaining time as the reception periods E, F, and G. However, instead of this, in reception periods E, F, and G, unlike the reception period A and reception period B (integrated model image display IG), the model image display that simulates the operation button 410 is displayed as a "gauge The remaining time may be prevented from being displayed by displaying an image that does not include the image GG. That is, in this case, during reception periods E, F, and G, the gauge image GG is not displayed at any position within the display area.

When the model image display that imitates the operation button 410 is displayed as an "image that does not include the gauge image GG", the "image that does not include the gauge image GG" is the "button model included in the integrated model image display IG". It is desirable that the image is displayed as an image including at least the image "BMG". That is, in this case, when the button model image BMG is displayed, it may be displayed either as an image integrated with the gauge image GG or as an image not integrated with the gauge image GG. , the tension when the reception period occurs can be preferably maintained.

Also, in the above-described production example, at least the following operation means are prepared as operation means.
・Handle portion 5012 (corresponding to the first operation receiving portion of “Construction 12-A”) that is displaced by receiving an operation by the player, and the handle portion 5012 that is provided on the peripheral edge and does not displace even when receiving an operation. A sword decoration 5001 (corresponding to the first operation means of "Construction 12-A") having a sheath 5020 (corresponding to the first peripheral decoration of "Construction 12-A") (see FIG. 124, etc.), and An operation button 410 (corresponding to the second operation receiving portion of “configuration 12-A”) that is displaced by receiving an operation by a player, and a frame that is provided on the periphery and does not displace even if the operation button 410 is operated. A production operation unit 400 (corresponding to the second operation means of "configuration 12-A") having a unit 415 (corresponding to the second peripheral decorative portion of "configuration 12-A") (see FIG. 44, etc.).

Then, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG that simulates the sword decoration body 5001, the handle portion simulated image (corresponding to the first receiving portion simulated image of “Configuration 12-A”) that simulates the handle portion 5012, and the handle portion It is possible to display a handle peripheral edge decoration image (corresponding to the first peripheral edge decoration image of “configuration 12-A”) that decorates the peripheral edge of the model image (see FIG. 199 etc.), and a model of the production operation unit 400 When displaying an image display (here, an integrated model image display IG), a button model image BMG (corresponding to the second receiving part model image of “configuration 12-A”) that simulates the operation button 410 and the button model A peripheral edge decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge of the image BMG can be displayed (see FIG. 199, etc.), and the handle peripheral edge decoration image and the peripheral edge decoration image SSG are displayed as different images from each other.

According to such a configuration, since the peripheral edge decoration images are different from each other, even if the appearance of the operating means itself is similar, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the integrated model image display IG is displayed. It is expected that it will be possible to make the appearance of the display and the display largely different from each other, and that it will be easy to distinguish which operation means should be operated.

Further, in the above-described production example, the handle periphery decoration image in the sword decoration image SYG does not include a portion imitating a decoration part that does not actually exist in the pachinko machine 1, and is displayed as an image display imitating the sheath part 5020. Although it is displayed, the peripheral decoration image SSG in the integrated simulated image display IG is displayed as an image including at least a part imitating a decoration part that does not actually exist in the pachinko machine 1 . That is, in this case, when the "sword decoration image SYG" is displayed, it is possible to favorably recognize that the sword decoration 5001 is given an opportunity to operate. On the other hand, when the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed, the situation in which the operation opportunity is given to the production operation unit 400 (operation button 410) is provided as a situation with higher production. will be able to In this case, the "effect operation unit 400" is provided as a member having an operation receiving part (operation button 410) larger than the "sword decoration body 5001". It is desirable to avoid difficulty in recognizing which operation means should be operated even if the peripheral edge decoration image SSG including at least the part that imitates is displayed.

In this way, in order to provide a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410) as a "situation with a higher effect", the peripheral decoration image SSG It is desirable to display an image imitating a fictitious decorative portion that does not actually exist on the machine 1 . However, in order to make it easier to recognize that the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410) is in a situation where an operation opportunity is given, a part imitating the frame unit 415 is included in a part of the peripheral decoration image SSG. may be included.

Further, in the above-described effect example, the remaining time display is performed only on the peripheral edge decoration image SSG among the handle peripheral edge decoration image in the sword decoration image SYG and the peripheral edge decoration image SSG in the integrated model image display IG. is formed, and the remaining time can be displayed using the display area, as described above.

It should be noted that the "sword decoration image SYG" is displayed as an image display in which a patterned handle image that simulates the handle 5012 and a handle peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the handle part image are integrated. "Integrated model image display IG" is displayed as an image display in which a button model image BMG that simulates the operation button 410 and a periphery decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery of the button model image BMG are integrated. . In this regard, the "sword decoration image SYG" does not have separate "handle pattern image" and "handle peripheral edge decoration image" as its image data, and they are integrated as one image data. It is prepared. Similarly, for the image data of the "integrated model image display IG", the "button model image BMG" and the "peripheral border decoration image SSG" are not provided separately, but prepared as one image data that integrates them. It is supposed to be

In addition, in the above-described effect example, first, as the operation receiving portion, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 (corresponding to the first operation receiving portion of “Configuration 13-A”), the handle portion 5012 of the sword decoration 5001 (“ Prepare a plurality of operation receiving parts including the second operation receiving part of "Configuration 13-A") and the operation receiving part of the special operation means 1410 (corresponding to the third operation receiving part of "Configuration 13-A") As the reception period, a plurality of types of reception periods including the reception period E (equivalent to the specific reception period of “structure 13-A”) are prepared. Then, during the acceptance period E (FIG. 198), the “integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG inside)” which imitates the operation button 410 and the “sword decoration image SYG (inside the handle part)” which imitates the handle 5012 Periphery decorative image)" and a "special model image TM" imitating the operation receiving portion of the special operation means 1410 are both displayed. Among the "integrated model image display IG", "sword decoration image SYG", and "special model image TM", "sword decoration image SYG" and "special model image TM" that imitate the operation receiving part that is not accepted is hidden at least (see FIG. 198).

According to the above configuration, a simulated image display (sword decoration image SYG, special model image TM) will be hidden, so the operation receiving part (handle 5012 of sword decoration 5001, special operation It becomes possible to easily recognize whether or not a further operation is required for the operation receiving portion of the means 1410 .

In addition, during the reception period E, although the "integrated model image display IG", "sword decoration image SYG", and "special model image TM" are displayed, the operation button 410, the sword decoration body 5001, the special operation Of the means 1410, the special operation means 1410 does not validate (permit) acceptance of operation (acceptance of display after acceptance). That is, as described above, during the acceptance period E, when an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted, the first display change (post-acceptance display E1) is generated, and when an operation on the sword ornament 5001 is accepted, the second display is generated. Although a change (post-acceptance display E2) is generated, the operation to the special operation means 1410 is not accepted, and the display change triggered by the operation does not occur. As a result, it is possible to preferably maintain the effect and tension until the player's operation is accepted in the acceptance period E.

In addition, during the acceptance period E, when an operation on the sword ornament 5001 is accepted, a second display change (post-acceptance display E2) occurs. Neither the "decorative image SYG" nor the "special model image TM" are hidden, and their display states are continued (FIG. 198(i)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to generate a display change that is significantly different from when the operation of the operation button 410 is accepted, and it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be favorably maintained.

In particular, during the acceptance period E, when an operation on the sword ornament 5001 is accepted, this is used as a trigger to increase the remaining time of the acceptance period E (Fig. 198(i) → ( In the development of e)), it is expected that the decrease in interest in the game due to the lack of remaining time will be suppressed in order to realize the performance that requires further operations.

Further, in the example of effect described above, during the acceptance period E, when an operation to the operation button 410 is accepted, the first display change (post-acceptance display E1) is generated. E1) is occurring, the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed, and both the "sword decoration image SYG" and the "special model image TM" are hidden (Fig. 198 ( f)). As a result, even after the operation has been accepted while a plurality of simulated images are being displayed, it is recognized that the post-acceptance display E1 has occurred due to the acceptance of the operation on the operation button 410. be able to

Also, at this time, since the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed at a position different from the position displayed during the reception period E (Fig. 198(f)), the reception period E ends. It becomes possible to suggest that it is in a state where

Further, in the example of the effect described above, when the remaining time in the reception period E runs out, the above-described automatic button function is activated, and the operation of the operation button 410 is accepted within the reception period E. The same display screen appears as (see FIG. 198(h)). In this case also, in the state where the first display change (post-acceptance display E1) is occurring, the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed, and the "sword decoration image SYG" and "special model image TM" are displayed. Since both of them are hidden, it is possible to recognize that the post-acceptance display E1 corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed.

It should be noted that during the acceptance period D shown in FIG. may also be hidden at the timing when the character information is hidden. In this case, when the character information (press) is returned to the display state, the model image display is also returned to the display state (FIG. 196(f)).

[Operation reception effect with characteristic image display status]
As explained by exemplifying FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, variation as to which one of a plurality of variation patterns is to be executed is based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the start winning (holding digestion). Pattern judgment can be executed. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern It is possible to execute a production judgment (such as advance notice judgment) as to which of the expected productions (such as advance notice production) is to appear selectively. It should be noted that depending on the result of the production determination, all of the plurality of expected productions prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern (notice production, etc.) may be sequentially executed, or None of the expected effects (notice effects, etc.) may be executed.

And as described above, when such production determination (variation pattern determination, advance notice determination, etc.) is performed, by performing control to display the production content according to the result of the production determination on the production display device 1600, the big hit determination The variable production by the decorative pattern according to the result is executed together with the expected production (preliminary production) related to the background depiction (background advance notice), movable body operation (role production), and the like. As a result, as a result of execution of the variation effect by the decorative pattern together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, etc., when the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, the player can enjoy the big win game and the high prize as a privilege. Transition to the probability game state is made executable.

In such a configuration, the variable performance by the decorative pattern is provided as a performance having "a function indicating whether or not a big hit has been obtained as a result of the judgment of the big hit", and the background depiction, the movement of the movable body, etc. is provided as an effect having "the function of suggesting the degree of expectation, that is, the ratio (including 0% and 100%) of the fact that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the determination of the variation pattern, it is specified among the highly expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach effects with background changes, etc.) If the variation pattern is selected, even if any result is obtained as the production judgment (such as the advance notice judgment), when the pattern production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing in the SP reach (predetermined condition is established), it is possible to generate an acceptance acceptance state (effective period) in which acceptance of the performance is allowed.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low-expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the determination of the variation pattern. Even in the case, when a special result is obtained in the production determination (such as advance notice judgment) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the pattern production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (predetermined condition is established Then), it is possible to generate an acceptance allowable state (effective period) in which the performance acceptance is allowed. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination, even if the symbol performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, the reception acceptance state (effective period) does not occur. . In addition, the reception acceptance state (valid period) that occurs in a predetermined variation pattern is different from the reception acceptance state (valid period) that occurs when the pattern production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. This is executed as an effect (effect after acceptance).

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an acceptance period during which the player's actions (operations) are allowed to be accepted, and the player's actions (operations) are accepted within the acceptance period. Then, a display change (post-reception effect) corresponding to the type of reception period that has occurred is caused.

Also, during the acceptance period, an action target indication indicating which one is the "target of the player's action" can be displayed. Such an action target display can be, for example, a model image display in which an object (operation means) to be operated by the player is expressed as an image. In particular, the "action object display" according to this production example is displayed as a "simulated image display" having a plurality of modes that imitate the player's action target and have different expectations.

In addition, during the reception period, a remaining time display indicating the remaining time during which the action (operation) by the player is permitted can be displayed. Such remaining time display can be executed, for example, as a depiction that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time passes. In particular, in this production example, at least one of the frame image and the gauge image has a plurality of aspects (for example, the rate of decrease of the display area of the gauge image, the suggestion of the degree of expectation, the suggestion of the type of operation means, etc.). are prepared and are intended to be implemented in any of these modes.

In addition, even if any result is obtained as a notice production judgment, at a predetermined timing during SP reach, regarding the fluctuation pattern that causes the acceptance acceptable state (effective period), in addition to the above "specific fluctuation pattern" may also be provided. No matter which result is obtained as a result of the advance notice effect judgment, the fluctuation pattern that causes the acceptance acceptable state (effective period) at the predetermined timing is not included in the low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). or it may be included but its selection rate (occurrence rate) should be low (though not necessarily).

By the way, the acceptability state (effective period) that can occur under these conditions means that it is possible to accept changes in the display of the effect display device 1600 as long as the player's operation is detected within the set time (effective period). Since the post-display (post-operation display) is executed, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, the effect action by the movable decoration, etc. are only generated, the reception allowable state (effective period) The effect itself is poor, and there is concern that the interest in games related to the reception period will decrease.

In addition, including each example described above and each example described later, the "operation (action) by the player" to be detected means that the player It is not limited to those that are directly operated (pressing action or drawing action) by the touch sensor, but also the "player's contact action on a specific part" that is detected by the touch sensor, and the "in a specific space" that is detected by the non-contact sensor. This means that it also includes actions by the player in The point is that one or a plurality of accepting means (operating means) for accepting actions by the player (pressing action, sword drawing action, touch action, non-contact action, etc.) may be provided.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, the state of the model image display when giving the operation opportunity (action opportunity) to the player is provided with the following special effects. I have to. It should be noted that each of the effects (each configuration) described below does not necessarily have to include all of these configurations. It is possible to suppress the decrease of, or it may be selectively provided with some configurations that are considered necessary to obtain further effects, or it can be applied to another configuration ( Desirable application) may be adopted as appropriate. Furthermore, each effect (configuration) to be described below is merely an example, and any one configuration that can suppress the decline in interest in the game related to the acceptance period may be provided.

[Configuration 1-B]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, without displaying an action target display (for example, a model image display having a plurality of modes that imitate the target of the player's action and have different expectations), A plurality of reception periods are prepared, including a specific reception period in which "reception validity determination in which an action by a player is a valid action" is allowed. It should be noted that the “specified reception period” for the configuration 1-B is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 1-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean a reception period different from the "specific reception period" related to other configurations. good. However, in such a specific reception period, it is difficult to recognize from which timing the reception validity judgment is permitted, and furthermore, it is difficult to recognize whether the reception validity judgment is already permitted. There is a concern that only players who are sensitive to performance can enjoy it."

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, upon occurrence of such a specific reception period, a reception acceptance sound indicating that reception validity determination is permitted, or a reception acceptance sound indicating that reception validity determination is permitted. can be output, the action target display (for example, a model image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple modes with different expectations) is not displayed. Although there are still situations in which it is not possible to sufficiently recognize the target of the player's action, there are situations where the player is required to perform some action (situation where the player is given an opportunity to operate). It becomes possible to recognize something, and thereby many players are expected to enjoy the presentation.

In addition, the acceptable reception sound is not limited to the configuration 1-B, and may be generated before the specific reception period and finished before the specific reception period, or may be generated at the timing of the specific reception period. , or may occur after the timing of occurrence of the specific reception period and end within the specific reception period. The acceptability sound may be realized as a sound that always gives (or gives) some action opportunity (operating opportunity) to the player when it is output. In addition, the "state in which the operation object display (simulated image display) is not displayed" is not limited to the configuration 1-B. It is acceptable as long as it cannot be visually recognized on the screen. For example, it includes a state in which an image is displayed on a layer but is not visible due to priority display of an image on another layer.

In addition, it is desirable that the acceptable acceptance sound that is output when the specific acceptance period occurs is a sound that is also output (as the acceptable acceptance sound) when other acceptance periods occur. For example, if the acceptance acceptable sound is output even when the acceptance period in which the same action opportunity (operation opportunity) as the specific acceptance period occurs occurs, the action target display (for example, a model image display) is displayed. Even if it is not given, it is possible to suitably suggest which action opportunity (operating opportunity) is to be given (given) to the player. Further, for example, if the acceptable reception sound is output even when a reception period in which an operation opportunity (operation opportunity) different from the specific reception period occurs occurs, an operation target display (for example, a model image display) ) is not displayed, it is difficult for the player to predict which action opportunity (operation opportunity) will be given, but some action opportunity (operation opportunity) will be given (or will not be given). be able to suggest that it is in a state of

Also, as will be described later, when the "configuration 1-B" is adopted, when the specific acceptance period occurs, first, the display of the operation target (for example, the display of the simulated image) is hidden (not displayed). Let the state appear. Thereafter, a second display state in which an operation target display (for example, a simulated image display) is displayed may appear while the specified acceptance period continues. In other words, in this case, during the specific acceptance period, it will appear as a so-called "hidden button" at first, and only players who are sensitive to such effects can enjoy it. However, while the specified acceptance period continues (before the set time (effective time) has expired), the display of the operation target (for example, the display of a simulated image) must be displayed. Therefore, many players, even if they are not sensitive to the performance, can notice this (the specific acceptance period) and enjoy the performance. In addition, it is expected that through such performance, the ability to see that a so-called "hidden button" is occurring will be nurtured.

Also, at this time, it is desirable that in the second display state, the action target display can be displayed with any of a plurality of different expectations. That is, on the player side, if an action is accepted in the second display state even though the action was not accepted in the first display state, an action object display (for example, a model image display) is displayed. Until then, it is feared that the lack of recognition that the specific reception period has occurred will be revealed to the surroundings, and that the insensitivity to such effects will be revealed, which will reduce the interest in the game. In this regard, in the second display state, if the display of the action object is displayed with one of a plurality of different expectations, even if the player accepts the action in the second display state, the "first Since I was in the display state, I was aware that I was in a state where action acceptance was permitted, but I wanted to see the degree of expectation suggested by the display of the action object (for example, display of a simulated image), so in the first display state , it will be possible to make it look like the player did not dare to accept the action.

In addition, due to the nature of the so-called "hidden button", the player can accurately recognize from which timing the specific reception period in which the "reception validity determination that the player's movement is a valid movement" has occurred. It is difficult. In this case, if an action (operation) is performed a little before the occurrence of the specific reception period, the "reception validity judgment" will not be made, and it will be said that "I thought that the specific reception period occurred, but I was mistaken." There is a concern that the player may mistakenly think that the specified acceptance period has ended without the player performing an action (operation). Therefore, when adopting the "configuration 1-B", even if there is an action (operation) by the player before the specific reception period, the action (operation) is "reception validity determination" at that time. However, after the start of the specified acceptance period, the player's actions (operations) performed before the specified acceptance period are targeted (based on) "reception validity judgment" It should be possible to According to such a configuration, even if an operation (operation) is performed slightly before the occurrence of the specified acceptance period, it can be accepted after the occurrence of the specified acceptance period. , and by extension, it becomes possible to execute the post-acceptance production triggered by this. However, in this case, the detection itself of whether or not an action (operation) has been performed by the player is based on whether or not a reception period has occurred in which the "reception validity determination in which the player's action is a valid action" is permitted. It will be required to execute it regardless.

Further, at this time, an action (operation) performed before the occurrence of the specific reception period is not performed in the second display state after the occurrence of the specific reception period, but in the first display state. It is desirable to be able to accept (acceptance validity judgment) as validity judgment in the state. According to such a configuration, it is the timing (for example, the timing at which the first display state (specified reception period) occurs) after a short period of time has passed since the action (operation) was performed by the player, and the action target display (For example, display of a model image) is not displayed, it is determined that reception is valid, and the execution of the effect after reception is started. As a result, instead of the so-called "automatic reception function" when there is no action (operation) despite the display of the action object (for example, a simulated image display), the state in which the player's action is properly accepted It becomes possible to suggest that it is in, and it becomes possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Configuration 2-B]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. In the first reception period, regardless of the timing at which the "reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid action" is performed, the action target is displayed (here, the target of the action by the player is simulated). A model image display having a plurality of modes with different expectations) is always displayed, and in the second reception period, regardless of the timing at which the reception validity determination is made, the operation target display (here, A model image display that simulates the target of the player's action and has a plurality of modes with different expectations is always prevented from being displayed. Note that the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" for the configuration 2-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 2-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, by providing two types of receiving periods with completely different performances, it is possible to give a clear distinction in requesting an action (giving an opportunity to operate) to the player. It is expected that the game interest will be improved.

Also, as will be described later, when the "configuration 2-B" is adopted, a third reception period is further provided, and in the third reception period, the action (operation) by the player is regarded as a valid action (valid operation). Depending on when the reception validity determination is made, there may be a case where the operation object display (simulated image display) is displayed and a case where the operation object display (simulated image display) is not displayed. It should be noted that the "third acceptance period" for the configuration 2-B is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 2-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "third reception period" related to other configurations, it may mean a different reception period, or a reception period different from these reception periods may mean

According to such a configuration, regardless of the timing at which reception validity determination is made, it appears as if the "first reception period" in which the operation object display (simulated image display) is always displayed is occurring. Or, it can be made to appear as if there is a "second reception period" in which the display of the operation target (simulated image display) is not always displayed regardless of the timing at which reception validity determination is made, The sense of tension when the acceptance period occurs can be preferably maintained through the performance of such uncertainties.

[Configuration 3-B]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, when a "reception validity determination in which the player's motion is a valid motion" is made within the first reception period, the first reception is performed in any one of a plurality of modes with different expectations based on the reception validity determination being made. After one reception, the effect can be executed, and when "receipt validity determination in which the player's motion is a valid motion" is made within the second reception period, the degree of expectation is increased based on the acceptance validity determination. The performance after the second reception can be executed in any one of a plurality of different modes. Note that the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" for the configuration 3-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 3-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, whether the "reception validity determination" is made within the first reception period or the "reception validity determination" is made within the second reception period, the reception validity determination is performed, at least one of the display target areas (specific areas) of the action target display (here, a simulated image display that imitates the action target of the player and has a plurality of modes with different expectations) Since it is possible to execute the extinction EF effect using the part, it is easy to recognize that the acceptance validity determination has been properly made (the acceptance period has ended due to the operation by the player being accepted). be able to

Note that the disappearing EF effect is displayed using at least a part of the display target area (specific area) of the action target display (simulated image display). It does not necessarily have to be displayed. Further, the disappearing EF effect includes, for example, the above-mentioned "mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to see". A mode in which the disappearance effect display is displayed in a predetermined area including the In addition to the mode in which the operation object display (simulated image display) itself is difficult to see (for example, the display is reduced or blurred, or the transmittance setting is changed, etc.), it is changed (changed) and displayed. It may be an aspect.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 3-B", in the first reception period, at what timing is the reception validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid operation (valid operation)? Depending on the operation, there may be a case where the operation object display (simulated image display) is displayed and a case where the operation object display (simulated image display) is not displayed.

In this case, first, when reception validity determination is made in a situation in which an action target display (simulated image display) is displayed, this triggers the action target display (simulated image display) to be displayed in a specific area. To execute a disappearing EF performance in a predetermined area including at least a part of. On the other hand, even if the acceptance validity determination is made in a situation where the action target display (simulated image display) is not displayed, this will trigger the disappearance EF effect to be performed under the above-described situation (action target display is displayed), it is desirable to execute in the same manner as when the reception validity determination is made. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably suggest that the reception validity determination is secretly made even in a situation where the operation target display (simulated image display) is not displayed. . In addition, if the acceptance validity determination is made in a situation where the action object display (simulated image display) is not displayed, the first reception period will end without the action object display being displayed, and the disappearing EF effect will be executed using at least a portion of the area where the action target display was to be displayed.

Also, at this time, during the second reception period, regardless of the timing at which reception validity determination is made to make the action (operation) by the player a valid action (valid operation), the action object display (simulated image display) is always displayed. It is desirable to make it visible. By preparing such a "second reception period in which the display of the object to be operated (simulated image display) is always displayed" separately from the above-described first reception period, the disappearing EF effect is executed. Concurrently, it becomes possible to provide performance with a sense of security, and to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

[Configuration 4-B]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the acceptance period in which an operation opportunity (operation opportunity) is given to the player, an operation target display (here, an operation by the player A simulated image display that simulates the target of the game and has a plurality of modes with different expectations) can be displayed using at least a specific area, and the action by the player while the simulated image display is displayed is an effective action. When the "receipt validity determination" is made, it is possible to put the operation object display (simulated image display) into a non-display state based on the fact that the reception validity determination is made. In addition, if the "reception validity determination" is made while the operation target display (simulated image display) is displayed within the reception period, the operation target display (simulated image display) is hidden. At least part of the specific area can be used to execute the disappearing EF effect.

In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 first prepares a plurality of reception periods including a specific reception period as reception periods. Then, during the specific reception period, the game played in a state where the action target display (here, a model image display having a plurality of modes simulating the action target of the player and having different expectations) is not displayed. It is possible to make a "receipt validity determination" in which the motion by the player is a valid motion, and when the reception validity determination is made, the extinction EF effect is not executed. It should be noted that the “specified reception period” for the configuration 4-B is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 4-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" according to other configurations, or may mean a different reception period.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the "reception validity determination" is properly performed (the reception period has ended due to the player's operation being accepted). As a result, it is expected that the tension during the specific reception period, in which the player is secretly asked to perform an action (secretly given an opportunity to operate), is maintained even after the reception validity determination is made. Become.

Note that even when the disappearing EF effect is displayed, the action target display (simulated image display) does not necessarily have to be displayed. Further, the disappearing EF effect includes, for example, the above-mentioned "mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to see". A mode in which the disappearance effect display is displayed in a predetermined area including the In addition to the mode in which the operation object display (simulated image display) itself is difficult to see (for example, the display is reduced or blurred, or the transmittance setting is changed, etc.), it is changed (changed) and displayed. It may be an aspect.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 4-B" is adopted, the above-mentioned "specified reception period" may be set as the first reception period. A plurality of reception periods including a first reception period (specified reception period) and a second reception period are prepared as the reception period. It may be possible to determine whether reception is valid by determining that a player's action performed in a state in which the image display) is not displayed is a valid action. Then, in the first acceptance period, when it is determined that the acceptance is valid, that the action performed by the player in the state where the action object display (simulated image display) is not displayed is a valid action, the disappearing EF effect is executed. First, in the second reception period, if the acceptance validity determination is made that the action performed by the player in the state where the action object display is not displayed is the valid action, even if the disappearing EF effect is executed. good. In this case, the terms "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 4-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, the first reception period (specified reception period) and the second reception period are set until the player performs an action in a state where the action target display (simulated image display) is not displayed. It is difficult to recognize which one has occurred, but after the acceptance valid judgment is made that this is a valid operation, which of the first acceptance period (specified acceptance period) and the second acceptance period has occurred? can be recognized, it becomes possible to prompt the player to perform an action.

[Configuration 5-B]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Note that the “first acceptance period” and “second acceptance period” related to the configuration 5-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 5-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

Then, when the "reception valid determination that the action by the player is a valid operation" is made within the first reception period, the above-mentioned post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the reception validity determination is performed. At the time when the execution is started, the display of the action object (here, the model image display imitating the target of the player's action and having a plurality of modes with different expectations) is in a state of being displayed instead of being hidden. In the second reception period, if the "reception validity judgment that the action by the player is a valid movement" is made, the above-mentioned reception effect based on the reception validity judgment (post-reception production corresponding to the second reception period ) is started, the action target display (here, a model image display that imitates the target of the action by the player and has a plurality of modes with different expectations) is displayed instead of being hidden. Don't let that be the case.

According to such a configuration, after the execution of the post-acceptance effect based on the "acceptance validity determination" is started, the action target display (here, a plurality of modes that imitate the target of the action by the player and have different expectations) ) is visible, and an action target display (here, a model image display that simulates the target of the action by the player and has multiple modes with different expectations) is visible. Since there is a case where it is not, it is expected that the tension after the performance after reception is started will be preferably maintained.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 5-B", within the first reception period, depending on the timing at which the "reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid action" is made, When the operation object display (simulated image display) is not hidden and is displayed at the time when the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started to be executed. It is desirable that there are cases where the operation target display (simulated image display) is in a non-display state.

That is, from the player's point of view, when the simulated image display is displayed in the "highly expected second mode" among the multiple modes, the after-reception production (corresponding to the first reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" It can be said that it is certainly desirable to continue to display this even after the execution of the post-acceptance effect is started, in order to improve the amusement of the game. However, when the model image is displayed in the “first mode with low expectations” among multiple modes, the after-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the “reception validity judgment” starts to be executed. If this continues to be displayed even after it is displayed, the interest in the game will inevitably decrease.

For example, the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period) has a “low-expectation first mode” and a “low-expectation first mode” within its effective period (first reception period). 2 mode", there is a possibility that it will be executed in a highly expected mode (furthermore, a possibility that it will be executed in a low expected mode). When the post-acceptance effect (the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the first acceptance period) is executed in a manner with a high degree of expectation, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by itself. If the model image display continues to be displayed in the "low expectation mode 1", it is clear that the interest in the game will be reduced, so it is desirable to hide the model image display. I can say. On the other hand, even if the post-reception effect (the post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation, at this time, the model image is displayed in the "second mode with a high degree of expectation". If the display continues to be displayed, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the execution of the post-acceptance effect in a mode with a low degree of expectation, so the model image display should be hidden. It can be said that it is desirable to allow this to continue without interruption.

Alternatively, even when the model image display is displayed in the "first aspect with low expectations", some players have a feeling that " As an "excuse", it seems that there are people who want to keep the display state of the model image not hidden at the time when the performance after reception is started, Even when the model image display is displayed in the ``second mode with high expectations'', some players feel ``irritated'' when the post-reception production is executed in the ``mode with low expectations''. In order to suppress this, it is thought that there are people who want to hide the display of the model image so that it cannot be visually recognized at the time when the execution of the effect after reception is started.

In this respect, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player can display the model image through the timing at which the "reception validity determination" is made within the first reception period. To be able to substantially select whether to start execution of the performance after reception in the displayed state or start execution of the performance after reception in the state where the model image display is hidden and cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, it is expected that the game interest will be favorably maintained.

[Configuration 6-B]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Note that the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" for the configuration 6-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 6-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

Then, in the first reception period, when the "reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid movement" is made, the above-mentioned post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the reception validity determination is performed. At the time when the execution is started, the remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced over time). (multiple modes with different degrees are prepared) may be displayed instead of being hidden, and during the second reception period, "Reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid action" is made. In this case, the remaining time is displayed (for example, a gauge image displayed within a frame image is displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception effect (the post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started. It is a depiction that decreases the area as time passes, and multiple modes with different expectations are prepared as at least one mode of the frame image and the gauge image) is not hidden but displayed. I try not to.

According to such a configuration, the remaining time display (for example, the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is decreased according to the passage of time after the execution of the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity determination" is started. It is a depiction that makes it possible, and as at least one aspect of the frame image and the gauge image, a plurality of aspects with different expectations are prepared), and the remaining time display (for example, in the frame image It is a depiction in which the display area of the displayed gauge image decreases over time, and multiple modes with different expectations are prepared as at least one mode of the frame image and the gauge image) is not visible. Since there will be cases, it is expected that the tension will be preferably maintained after the execution of the after-reception production is started.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 6-B", within the first reception period, depending on the timing at which the "reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid action" is made, At the time when the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is displayed instead of being hidden. It is desirable that there are cases where the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is not displayed.

That is, from the player's side, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "highly expected second mode" among the plurality of modes, the post-reception effect (first It can be said that it is certainly preferable to continue to display this even after the execution of the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the acceptance period is started, in order to improve the amusement of the game. However, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations" among multiple modes, the after-reception production based on the "reception validity determination" (after the reception corresponding to the first reception period If the presentation continues to be displayed even after the performance is started, the interest in the game will inevitably decrease.

For example, the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) has at least one of the frame image and the gauge image within its effective period (first reception period) as the “first mode with low expectations” and “ Even if it is displayed as "low expectation second mode", there is a possibility that it will be executed in a high expectation mode (furthermore, a possibility that it will be executed in a low expectation mode) It's becoming When the post-acceptance effect (the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the first acceptance period) is executed in a manner with a high degree of expectation, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by itself. If at least one of the frame image and the gauge image continues to be displayed in the "low expectation first mode", it is clear that the interest in the game will be reduced. It can be said that it is desirable to hide it. On the other hand, even if the post-reception effect (the post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation, the frame image is displayed in the "second mode with a high degree of expectation" at this time. and the gauge image continue to be displayed, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the execution of the post-acceptance effect with a low degree of expectation. And it can be said that it is desirable to continue this without hiding the gauge image.

Alternatively, even if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations", some of the players believe that the post-acceptance production is executed in the "mode with low expectations". As an 'excuse' when it's gone, a person who wants to keep the frame image and the gauge image in a state where they are not hidden and are kept displayed at the time when the performance is started after the acceptance. Even if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "second mode with a high degree of expectation", some players think that the effect after reception is "a mode with a low degree of expectation". , the frame image and the gauge image should be hidden so that they cannot be seen when the post-acceptance production starts. It seems that there are people

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player can use the frame image and the gauge through the timing at which the "reception validity determination" is made within the first reception period. It is possible to substantially select whether to start the execution of the post-acceptance production while the image is displayed or to start the execution of the after-acceptance production while the frame image and the gauge image are hidden and cannot be visually recognized. As a result, it is expected that the game interest will be favorably maintained.

[Configuration 7-B]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, when a "reception validity determination in which the player's motion is a valid motion" is made within the first reception period, the first reception is performed in any one of a plurality of modes with different expectations based on the reception validity determination being made. After one reception, the effect can be executed, and when "receipt validity determination in which the player's motion is a valid motion" is made within the second reception period, the degree of expectation is increased based on the acceptance validity determination. The performance after the second reception can be executed in any one of a plurality of different modes. Note that the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" for the configuration 7-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 7-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "reception validity determination" is made within the first reception period, the execution of the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" is started. At the time when the action target display (here, a model image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has a plurality of modes with different expectations) may not be displayed and may be in a non-display state. be. On the other hand, if the "reception validity determination" is made within the second reception period, at the time when the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" is started , the action target display (in this case, a model image display that simulates the target of the player's action and has a plurality of aspects with different expectations) is not displayed and is not in a non-display state. there is

According to such a configuration, after the execution of the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity determination" is started, the display of the action object (simulated image display) is made visible, and the display of the action object (simulated image display) is made visible. ) is not made visible in some cases, it is expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained after the execution of the post-acceptance effect is started.

Also, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 7-B", if "reception valid determination is made that the action by the player is a valid action" until the predetermined timing within the first reception period arrives , at the time when the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started, the display of the action object (simulated image display) is in a non-display state and is displayed. However, after the arrival of the predetermined timing within the first acceptance period, if "the reception validity determination is made that the player's action is a valid action", the action target display (simulated image display) is displayed. It is desirable that the performance is started after acceptance in the above.

That is, from the player's point of view, when the simulated image display is displayed in the "highly expected second mode" among the multiple modes, the after-reception production (corresponding to the first reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" It can be said that it is certainly desirable to continue to display this even after the execution of the post-acceptance effect is started, in order to improve the amusement of the game. However, when the model image is displayed in the “first mode with low expectations” among multiple modes, the after-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the “reception validity judgment” starts to be executed. If this continues to be displayed even after it is displayed, the interest in the game will inevitably decrease.

For example, the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period) has a “low-expectation first mode” and a “low-expectation first mode” within its effective period (first reception period). 2 mode", there is a possibility that it will be executed in a highly expected mode (furthermore, a possibility that it will be executed in a low expected mode). When the post-acceptance effect (the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the first acceptance period) is executed in a manner with a high degree of expectation, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by itself. If the model image display continues to be displayed in the "low expectation mode 1", it is clear that the interest in the game will be reduced, so it is desirable to hide the model image display. I can say. On the other hand, even if the post-reception effect (the post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation, at this time, the model image is displayed in the "second mode with a high degree of expectation". If the display continues to be displayed, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the execution of the post-acceptance effect in a mode with a low degree of expectation, so the model image display should be hidden. It can be said that it is desirable to allow this to continue without interruption.

Alternatively, even when the model image display is displayed in the "first aspect with low expectations", some players have a feeling that " As an "excuse", it seems that there are people who want to keep the display state of the model image not hidden at the time when the performance after reception is started, Even when the model image display is displayed in the ``second mode with high expectations'', some players feel ``irritated'' when the post-reception production is executed in the ``mode with low expectations''. In order to suppress this, it is thought that there are people who want to hide the display of the model image so that it cannot be visually recognized at the time when the execution of the effect after reception is started.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player can "activate the action by the player" until the predetermined timing within the first reception period arrives. If it is possible to make the reception validity determination as an action", it is possible to start the execution of the effect after the reception in a state where the model image display is hidden and cannot be visually recognized, and the predetermined Until the timing arrives, when the ``acceptance valid determination that the player's action is a valid action'' is not made, at that point, the execution of the post-acceptance production starts while the model image display is not displayed. Since it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the operation will be performed, those who seek such performance will be able to enjoy the operation performance with peace of mind after that.

[Configuration 8-B]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, when a "reception validity determination in which the player's motion is a valid motion" is made within the first reception period, the first reception is performed in any one of a plurality of modes with different expectations based on the reception validity determination being made. After one reception, the effect can be executed, and when "receipt validity determination in which the player's motion is a valid motion" is made within the second reception period, the degree of expectation is increased based on the acceptance validity determination. The performance after the second reception can be executed in any one of a plurality of different modes. Note that the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" for the configuration 7-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 7-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "reception validity determination" is made within the first reception period, the execution of the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" is started. At the point of time, the remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image decreases over time, and as an aspect of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image, the degree of expectation is are prepared in a plurality of different modes) are not displayed and may be in a non-display state. On the other hand, if the "reception validity determination" is made within the second reception period, at the time when the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" is started , Remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of a gauge image displayed within a frame image is reduced over time, and at least one of the frame image and the gauge image has multiple modes with different expectations. prepared) are not displayed and are not in a hidden state.

According to such a configuration, after the execution of the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity determination" is started, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) can be visually recognized, and the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) are not visible in some cases, it is expected that the sense of tension will be favorably maintained after the execution of the post-acceptance effect is started.

Also, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "Configuration 8-B", the case where "receipt valid determination is made that the action by the player is a valid action" until the predetermined timing within the first reception period arrives , the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is in a non-display state at the time when the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started to be displayed. However, after the arrival of the predetermined timing within the first reception period, if "reception valid determination is made with the player's movement as a valid movement", the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) will be displayed. It is desirable that the post-acceptance effect be started while the display is in the displayed state.

That is, from the player's side, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "highly expected second mode" among the plurality of modes, the post-reception effect (first It can be said that it is certainly desirable to continue to display this even after the execution of the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the acceptance period is started, in order to improve the amusement of the game. However, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations" among multiple modes, the after-reception production based on the "reception validity determination" (after the reception corresponding to the first reception period If the presentation continues to be displayed even after the performance is started, the interest in the game will inevitably decrease.

For example, the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) has at least one of the frame image and the gauge image within its effective period (first reception period) as the “first mode with low expectations” and “ Even if it is displayed as "low expectation second mode", there is a possibility that it will be executed in a high expectation mode (furthermore, a possibility that it will be executed in a low expectation mode) It's becoming When the post-acceptance effect (the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the first acceptance period) is executed in a manner with a high degree of expectation, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by itself. If at least one of the frame image and the gauge image continues to be displayed in the "low expectation first mode", it is clear that the interest in the game will be reduced. It can be said that it is desirable to hide it. On the other hand, even if the post-reception effect (the post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation, the frame image is displayed in the "second mode with a high degree of expectation" at this time. and the gauge image continue to be displayed, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the execution of the post-acceptance effect with a low degree of expectation. And it can be said that it is desirable to continue this without hiding the gauge image.

Alternatively, even if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations", some of the players believe that the post-acceptance production is executed in the "mode with low expectations". As an 'excuse' when it's gone, a person who wants to keep the frame image and the gauge image in a state where they are not hidden and are kept displayed at the time when the performance is started after the acceptance. Even if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "second mode with a high degree of expectation", some players think that the effect after reception is "a mode with a low degree of expectation". , the frame image and the gauge image should be hidden so that they cannot be seen when the post-acceptance production starts. It seems that there are people

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player can "activate the action by the player" until the predetermined timing within the first reception period arrives. If "receipt valid determination" is performed as an action, the frame image and the gauge image are hidden and it is possible to start executing the effect after reception in a state where it is not visible, and within the first reception period. If the ``reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid action'' is not made until the predetermined timing of , the frame image and the gauge image are not displayed at that time, and after the reception Since it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the performance will start to be executed, a person who desires such performance can enjoy the operation performance with peace of mind thereafter.

[Configuration 9-B]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the acceptance period in which an operation opportunity (operation opportunity) is given to the player, an operation target display (here, an operation by the player It is possible to display a simulated image display that simulates the target and has a plurality of modes with different expectations using at least a specific area. During the reception period, when a "reception validity determination" is made that the action by the player is a valid operation, it is possible to execute a post-reception effect according to the type of the reception period based on the reception validity determination. be done. Further, even at the time when the execution of the post-acceptance production is started, there is a case where the operation target display (simulated image display) is not hidden but displayed.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 first prepares a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period as acceptance periods. Then, in both the case where the "valid reception determination" is made within the first acceptance period and the case where the "valid reception judgment" is made during the second acceptance period, the "valid reception judgment" is made. Based on, it is possible to execute the extinction EF effect using at least part of the specific area. Note that the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" for the configuration 9-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 9-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, the acceptance validity determination is properly made under the action acceptance conditions suggested by the simulated image display (the acceptance period has ended due to the acceptance of the action by the player). You can easily recognize what has happened.

Note that the extinguished EF effect includes, for example, the above-described "mode in which the display of the action object (simulated image display) becomes difficult to see". A mode in which the disappearance effect display is displayed in a predetermined area including at least a part of the area, or a production body that overlaps at least a part of the specific area in which the action target display (simulated image display) is displayed in a front view is used. In addition to the mode in which the effect is executed, the display of the operation target (simulated image display) itself is changed to a display that is difficult to see (for example, the display is reduced, blurred, or the transmittance setting is changed). ) to display.

As will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 9-B", in the first reception period, depending on the timing at which the "reception validity determination" that the action by the player is a valid action is made, the first reception period At the time when the post-acceptance effect corresponding to one reception period starts to be executed, the action target display (simulated image display) is not hidden and is displayed, and the action target display (simulated image display) is displayed. It may be in a non-visible state (invisible state).

That is, from the player's point of view, when the simulated image display is displayed in the "highly expected second mode" among the multiple modes, the after-reception production (corresponding to the first reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" It can be said that it is certainly desirable to continue to display this even after the execution of the post-acceptance effect is started, in order to improve the amusement of the game. However, when the model image is displayed in the “first mode with low expectations” among multiple modes, the after-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the “reception validity judgment” starts to be executed. If this continues to be displayed even after it is displayed, the interest in the game will inevitably decrease.

For example, the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period) has a “low-expectation first mode” and a “low-expectation first mode” within its effective period (first reception period). 2 mode", there is a possibility that it will be executed in a highly expected mode (furthermore, a possibility that it will be executed in a low expected mode). When the post-acceptance effect (the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the first acceptance period) is executed in a manner with a high degree of expectation, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by itself. If the model image display continues to be displayed in the "low expectation mode 1", it is clear that the interest in the game will be reduced, so it is desirable to hide the model image display. I can say. On the other hand, even if the post-reception effect (the post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation, at this time, the model image is displayed in the "second mode with a high degree of expectation". If the display continues to be displayed, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the execution of the post-acceptance effect in a mode with a low degree of expectation, so the model image display should be hidden. It can be said that it is desirable to allow this to continue without interruption.

Alternatively, even when the model image display is displayed in the "first aspect with low expectations", some players have a feeling that " As an "excuse", it seems that there are people who want to keep the display state of the model image not hidden at the time when the performance after reception is started, Even when the model image display is displayed in the ``second mode with high expectations'', some players feel ``irritated'' when the post-reception production is executed in the ``mode with low expectations''. In order to suppress this, it is thought that there are people who want to hide the display of the model image so that it cannot be visually recognized at the time when the execution of the effect after reception is started.

In this respect, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player can display the model image through the timing at which the "reception validity determination" is made within the first reception period. To be able to substantially select whether to start execution of the performance after reception in the displayed state or start execution of the performance after reception in the state where the model image display is hidden and cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, it is expected that the game interest will be favorably maintained.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 9-B", in the second reception period, regardless of the timing at which the "reception validity determination" that the action by the player is a valid action is made, At the time when the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the second acceptance period starts to be executed, the display of the action object (the model image display) may always be displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is not always possible to select whether or not to display the target display (simulated image display) at the time of starting the execution of the effect after reception. It becomes possible to suitably maintain the tension within the period.

[Other configurations]
In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when the reception permitted state (reception period) in which the reception opportunity is given occurs, a model image display related to the reception target (a model image imitating the operation receiving part, etc.) is displayed. By displaying as an integrated model image display (see FIG. 144) that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the model image display, the interest in the game is reduced until the display (display change) is executed after reception. is being suppressed. Regarding such an integrated model image display, the operation acceptance effect (acceptance period) that occurs when the pattern effect progresses to a specific timing during the SP reach, and the fluctuation pattern that does not develop into the SP reach. It is desirable to display it in both the operation reception effect (reception period) and the low expectation unrestrained reception effect and the high expectation suppressed reception effect. .

It should be noted that the "integrated simulated image display" according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. For example, a display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the peripheral decoration image. In addition, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 144) with different degrees of expectation are prepared as the "integrated simulated image display", and it is also the same that the display is made in one of these modes.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example as well, when the reception permitted state (reception period) occurs, it suggests that the operation reception is permitted or that the operation reception is permitted. An acceptance acceptance sound is output, thereby making it difficult to forget to operate. Here, "acceptable sound" means whether or not the acceptance allowable state (acceptance period) always occurs while the sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned) when the output of the sound is started. , is a sound in which an acceptance allowable state (acceptance period) has already occurred. In other words, it can be said that the "acceptable sound" is a sound that is not output under a situation in which an effect that has nothing to do with the acceptable reception state (acceptance period) is being performed.

Further, each reception allowable state (each reception period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. That is, the acceptance acceptable state classified into the first type is assumed to occur when a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) is selected, but a low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) is a valid period that cannot occur (a valid period generated based on the establishment of a specific condition (selection of a specific high-expectation variation pattern) in the performance determination based on the result of the big hit determination). In addition, the second type of reception acceptance state is the valid period that can occur in both the high-expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) and the low-expected fluctuation pattern (occurred as a result of advance notice determination validity period, etc.).

The "integrated simulated image display" according to this embodiment can be displayed in both the first-type and second-type reception permission states (reception periods). Here, both the first-type acceptance allowable state (acceptance period) and the second-type acceptability state (acceptance period) are acceptance states in which the same operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is given an opportunity to operate. Since it is assumed that this occurs in the allowable state (acceptance period), the "integrated simulated image display" displayed during the acceptance period is an image imitating the same operation means (operation button 410).

Of the multiple modes prepared as "integrated simulated image display", the highly anticipated special mode (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 144(d)) is the first type reception acceptance state (reception period) 144, and in the second-type reception acceptance state (reception period), display is possible only in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the modes shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(c)). (this configuration is not essential). In this case, in the first type acceptance acceptable state (acceptance period), any of the multiple modes including the special mode (for example, FIGS. A determination is made as to whether or not to display the "display", and the "integrated model image display" is displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination. Even in the second type acceptance acceptable state (acceptance period), any of the multiple modes (for example, FIGS. 144 (a) to (c)) that do not include special modes based on the result of the big hit determination "integrated model image" may be determined whether to display, and the "integrated simulated image display" may be displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination.

The details of the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described "Configuration 1-B" to "Configuration 9-B" will be described below with reference to the drawings. However, each configuration described below is merely described as the best embodiment, and does not necessarily have to be provided. That is, each configuration described in the specification described below corresponds to any one of the above "configuration 1-B" to "configuration 9-B" when it is desired to obtain further effects It is possible to arbitrarily select and adopt only the configuration that

First, a specific example of the above "Configuration 1-B" to "Configuration 4-B" will be described. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 has production contents (for example, a conversation notice, a cut-in notice, a movable object notice, etc. as productions after reception) that progress when the reception is received. There are multiple reception periods (reception effects) with different types), and it is possible to generate a type of reception period (reception effect) according to the result of the judgment (jackpot judgment, production judgment, etc.). Here, as a plurality of reception periods (reception effects), at least a 1B reception period (1B post-reception effects), a 2B reception period (2B post-reception effects), and a 3B reception period (3B post-reception effects). I have it ready.

With reference to FIGS. 200 to 215, the characteristics of each reception period (reception effect) will be described. It should be noted that the reception periods described above with reference to FIG. It may be prepared as a reception period separate from the production), or the 1B reception period (production after the 1B reception), the 2B reception period (the production after the 2B reception), the 3B reception period ( 3B post-acceptance effect) may be realized as any one of them. In order to realize the inventions described below, it is sufficient to have only the necessary configuration among the configurations described below. You can choose not to prepare.

FIGS. 200 to 202 are time charts showing an example of the effect contents when condition 1B is satisfied as a result of determination (big hit determination or effect determination) and the 1B reception period (1B reception effect) occurs. . FIGS. 209 and 210 are diagrams showing examples of effects in variation patterns in which the 1B reception period (1B reception effects) occurs.

Now, the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, normal game state that is non-probable variable / non-time saving), and "1B fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of fluctuation pattern determination Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (announcement effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the 1B variation pattern. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (such as effect depiction according to the 1B variable pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 1B variable pattern, etc.) is started ("Situation shown in FIG. 209 (a) ”), during the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) according to the result of the determination of the previous notice performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected “1B variation pattern” itself. Become.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 200(a), when the timing tQ2 comes after the 1B predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect of the decorative symbol SZ (when the condition 1B is satisfied). , generates the 1B acceptance period (effective period) in which "acceptance regarding the effect after the 1B acceptance" is permitted ("situation shown in FIGS. 209(b) and (c)"). As a result, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 1B acceptance period (if acceptance is determined to be valid), the 1B post-acceptance effect is performed based on the acceptance (acceptance validity determination). become.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), in relation to the occurrence of such a 1B reception period, the reception target (operation receiving unit etc.), the remaining time display that suggests the remaining time of the reception period (effective period) (the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image decreases as time passes Depiction), disappearance-related display (disappearing EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image display, 1B post-reception effect display that suggests the degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) according to acceptance (reception validity determination) are to be carried out respectively. As described above, the simulated image display according to this embodiment is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display (description that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time passes). However, it is not necessarily limited to this, and may be displayed separately. This also applies to other acceptance periods.

More specifically, first, when the 1B reception period occurs at timing tQ2, as shown in FIGS. 1 effect device), as the integrated model image display IG, "model image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)" are displayed. The integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) may appear at timing tQ2, or may appear before timing tQ2 and straddle timing tQ2. may be displayed in It should be noted that the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is accepted (reception validity determination) within the 1B reception period or when the reception (reception validity determination) is made. is hidden when the 1B reception period ends without The 1B reception period according to this example ends when the timing tQ3 arrives when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (reception validity determination) (see FIG. 200(a)).

In addition, in the 1B reception period according to this example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) can be any of a plurality of modes (for example, FIGS. 144 (a), (d)) FIG. 209(b) shows a case where the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(a). FIG. 209(c) corresponds to the case where the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 144(d). In addition, during the 1B reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in any of a plurality of modes including the modes shown in FIGS. may be made.

Then, FIG. 200 assumes a case where "reception validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made when such a relatively early timing tQ2a within the 1B reception period arrives. there is That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 200(a), the 1B reception period ends and the 1B reception period ends based on the fact that the player's action is accepted (reception validity determination is made) at timing tQ2a. Execution of the post-reception effect (1B post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1B reception period is started.

209(b) to "E1 (FIGS. 210(d1) to 210(h1)), the production after reception corresponding to the 1B reception period (1B reception production) This corresponds to the case where the first mode with a relatively low degree of expectation is executed, and the example in which the production progresses from FIG. This corresponds to the case where the second mode with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as the post-reception effect (1B post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1B reception period. "0%" or "100%" may be included.

Here, in this example of effect, as shown in FIG. 200, at timing tQ2a when the player's action is accepted (when the effect after receiving the first B is started in response to the acceptance), "Integration In addition to not hiding the model image display IG, the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see.

That is, the 1B after-reception production according to this embodiment includes the "1B after-reception production display" using the production display device 1600 (first production device) and the second production device (for example, a sub liquid crystal, a movable ``Specific effect after reception of 1B'' using the body, effect lamps, etc.) and the effect sound after reception of 1B using the 3rd effect device (speaker) are realized as a combined effect at least. (It may not necessarily be realized as a composite effect by three effect devices), but among those effect devices, an effect in which an integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed In the display device 1600 (first effect device), the timing of starting the execution of the "first post-reception effect display" as the 1B post-reception effect is delayed compared to other effect devices. The visibility of the "integrated model image display IG" is intentionally maintained even after the acceptance is made by .

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 210 (d1) or (d2), even after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is displayed in a plurality of modes (FIG. 144 ( Since the player can easily recognize which one of a) to (d)) was displayed, it is expected that the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed appropriately. become.

Here, after the end of the acceptance period, in order to facilitate recognition of the mode in which the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period, it is necessary to consider the "integrated model image display" after the acceptance. It can be said that it is desirable to set a longer time period during which the IG is displayed in an easily visible form. However, even though the acceptance has been made and the post-acceptance effects (the second effect device and the third effect device) are already being executed, the integrated model image display IG is during the acceptance period. If it continues to be displayed in the same mode, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the acceptance has been made. There is a concern that

Therefore, in the examples shown in FIG. 200(b) and FIG. (When the timing tQ2b arrives), display related to disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display is started.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the “extinction related display (extinction EF Effect)” is displayed, and at least part of the area where the “disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)” is displayed is “integrated model image display IG (simulated image display, gauge image display)”. overlaps the area where is displayed.

With such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see. It becomes possible to suggest that the effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the gaze of the player will naturally shift from the integrated model image display IG to the post-acceptance effects (second effect device, third effect device) (after timing tQ2b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception production (the second production device and the third production device) has already been executed, the integrated model image display IG can be continuously displayed for a relatively long time although it is difficult to visually recognize it. is made possible, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period.

In addition, in the 1B reception period, as the corresponding post-reception production (1B post-reception production), a low-expectation mode (Fig. 210 (d1) to (h1)) appears, and a high-expectation mode ( 210 (d2) to (h2)), different forms (first disappearance-related display SKB1, second disappearance-related display SKB2) appear as disappearance-related displays. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 210(e1) and (e2), the "effect display after reception of 1B" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet started. Even so, it is confirmed whether the disappearance-related display appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is displayed as "first disappearance-related display SKB1" or "second disappearance-related display SKB2". As a result, it becomes possible to guess whether or not the "1B post-reception effect display" will be executed in a highly expected mode.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 200(b), FIG. When the timing tQ2c within the period in which the mode appears), the first effect device (effect display device 1600) responds to the acceptance of the action by the player within the 1B reception period. Execution of "1B post-reception effect display UGB1 (cut-in effect)" is started. However, here, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. As shown in f1), the first mode (here, the 1B post-reception effect display UGB1-1 as a cut-in effect by the princess character)) is the 1B post-reception effect display UGB1 corresponding to the 1B reception period. 210 (f2 ), the second mode (here, the 1B post-reception effect display UGB1-2 as a cut-in effect by the samurai character) is displayed as the 1B post-reception effect display UGB1 corresponding to the 1B reception period. It is designed to be

That is, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKB1, second disappearance-related display SKB2)" are displayed, respectively, the "1B post-acceptance effect display UGB1 ( Execution of "1B post-reception effect display UGB1-1" or "1B post-reception effect display UGB1-2") is started. As a result, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed for a relatively long time after being accepted within the 1B reception period, the reception by the first effect device (effect display device 1600) After effect (1B after reception effect display UGB1 can be started without a large delay compared to other effect devices, it is possible to suppress the decline in game interest. Since the effect display UGB1 after the 1B reception is started while the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to visually recognize, it suggests that the 1B reception period has already ended, and the player's gaze is changed. is expected to naturally shift from "integrated model image display IG" to "1B post-reception effect display UGB1 (1B post-reception effect display UGB1-1 or 1B post-reception effect display UGB1-2)". (after timing tQ2c).

On the other hand, for the "1B post-reception effect display UGB1 (1B post-reception effect display UGB1-1 or 1B post-reception effect display UGB1-2)", the area where the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed. (it does not necessarily have to overlap), it is displayed behind the "integrated model image display IG", and "1st B The “integrated model image display IG” is preferentially displayed with respect to the post-reception effect display UGB1 (first B post-reception effect display UGB1-1 or first B post-reception effect display UGB1-2). As a result, even though the execution of the "1B post-reception effect display UGB1 (1B post-reception effect display UGB1-1 or 1B post-reception effect display UGB1-2)" is started, the integrated model image is displayed within the reception period. This makes it easier to recognize in which mode the IG was displayed.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to "1B post-reception effect display UGB1 (1B post-reception effect display UGB1-1 or 1B post-reception effect display UGB1-2)" is started in this way, , as shown in FIG. 200(b), FIG. -2)” is displayed, first, out of the “integrated model image display IG” and the “disappearance-related display”, the “integrated model image display IG” is hidden. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 200(b), FIG. "Display SKB1 or Second Disappearance Related Display SKB2" is hidden. 1B Post-acceptance display UGB1-2)” will be displayed.

In this regard, the “1B post-reception effect display UGB1” refers to a plurality of modes (here, the 1B post-reception effect display UGB1-1 or the 1B post-reception effect display UGB1-1 or the 1B It is displayed in one of the post-acceptance display UGB1-2). Therefore, the "1B post-acceptance effect display UGB1" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display" are hidden.

In addition, in the production examples (FIGS. 209 and 210) corresponding to the 1B reception period, when the reception is made during the 1B reception period and the "1B reception after reception production display UGB1" is executed, the "1B The background image is switched before and after the "post-acceptance effect display UGB1" is started.

According to such a configuration, under the conditions shown in FIGS. 210(d) and 210(e) (timings tQ2a to tQ2b shown in FIG. 200) in which the background image is not switched, the effect display device 1600 (second 1 effect device), even if there is a change in effect, it is possible to suggest that the "1B post-reception effect display UGB1" has not yet started.

It should be noted that in this production example, the timing of starting the display of the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKB1, second disappearance-related display SKB2)" ( Although the display is started at a timing (timing tQ2c) later than the timing tQ2b), the timing (timing tQ2b) at which the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKB1, second disappearance-related display SKB2)" starts to be displayed. The display may be started at the same timing (timing tQ2b).

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 210, the background image is switched to the same background image for the appearance of a low-expectation aspect and the appearance of a high-expectation aspect as an effect after reception. The background image may be switched to a different one depending on whether the aspect with a low degree of expectation appears or the aspect with a high degree of expectation appears. Also, the background image may be switched when a mode with a high degree of expectation appears, but the background image may not be switched when a mode with a low degree of expectation appears.

Thus, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, when the 1B reception period occurs, it is within a limited time (bold line shown in FIG. 200), In addition, various displays are performed within a limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decline in the interest in the game. However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tQ2c) of the 1B post-reception effect (1B post-reception effect display) in response to the acceptance is set earlier than the received timing tQ2a. The reality is that it has to be delayed.

Therefore, in this example, when an action by the player is accepted within the 1B accepting period, as shown in FIGS. 200(b) and (c), based on the acceptance, The 1B post-reception performance (1B post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device is started prior to the 1B post-reception performance (1B post-reception performance display) using the first performance device. I'm trying

According to such a configuration, the execution start is delayed from the timing tQ2a at which the reception is received in the 1B reception period only for a part of the 1B post-reception effect (1B post-reception effect display). As for the 1B post-receipt effect itself, the execution can be started without delay from the same timing tQ2a.

Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or may be a movable object capable of effecting operations, or It may be provided as a production lamp capable of emitting light. In any case, it is provided so that effects (display effects, movable effects, light-emitting effects, etc.) can be performed in a plurality of modes with different expectations. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. Then, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. , the mode in which "women's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is the specific effect UTB1 (first reception As a 1B post-reception specific effect UTB1-1), which is a low-expected mode of the post-specific effect UTB1, precede the 1B post-reception effect (1B post-reception effect display UGB1-1) using the first effect device. and start running. On the other hand, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. d2), the mode in which "men's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is the specific effect UTB1 after the 1B reception corresponding to the 1B reception period. As the 1B post-reception specific effect UTB1-2), which is a highly expected aspect of the 1B post-reception specific effect UTB1, the 1B post-reception effect using the first effect device (1B post-reception effect display UGB1-2) Execution is started prior to .

In addition, in the effect example shown in FIG. 209, apart from the "integrated model image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) also has a 1B acceptance period. An effect within the acceptance period is executed to indicate that the situation has occurred (FIGS. 209(b) and (c)). The effect within the reception period on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is a mode in which the "integrated model image display IG" on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is less expected (see FIG. 209(b)). ) and the highly expected mode (see FIG. 209(c)) are displayed in the same mode.

That is, in this case, during the 1B acceptance period in which the player is provided with an action opportunity (operation opportunity), the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) displays different modes depending on the degree of expectation, and The same mode appears on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second rendering device) regardless of the degree of expectation. However, after this, if "receiving valid determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made within the 1B receiving period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) will display "integrated model image display IG ” continues (while the degree of expectation for the post-reception production has not yet been suggested), the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) shows a different mode according to the degree of expectation. Become. According to such a configuration, it is possible to obtain performance information more quickly by paying attention to an appropriate performance device from time to time rather than watching only the performance by one performance device. Since it becomes like this, it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

In this production example, as the 1B post-acceptance specific production UTB1, the degree of expectation is indicated by which of the "1B post-acceptance specific production UTB1-1" and "1B post-acceptance specific production UTB1-2" appears. However, it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of modes for the specific effect UTB1 after receiving the first B reception. For example, as the 1B post-reception specific effect UTB1, only “1B post-reception specific effect UTB1-2” is provided, and depending on whether or not the “1B post-reception specific effect UTB1-2” appears, the degree of expectation (jackpot is obtained) may be suggested. That is, in this case, it is suggested that when "1B post-acceptance specific effect UTB1-2" appears, expectations are higher than when "1B post-acceptance specific effect UTB1-2" does not appear. Become.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is further provided with a third effect device (speaker), and when the 1B reception period occurs, timing tQ1 shown in FIG. , the reception allowable sound is started to be output. That is, the acceptable reception sound corresponding to the 1B reception period is audibly output across the timing tQ2 (corresponding to "situation shown in FIGS. 209(b) and 209(c)") at which the 1B reception period occurs. In this way, the action (operation) by the player can be accepted while the acceptance acceptance sound is audibly output.

Here, in the 1B reception period, as reception acceptable sounds, a first long acceptable sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively long time and a first short acceptable sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively short time and are output respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 200(d), the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound are started to be output at the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, one of the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound may be started to be output at or after timing tQ2 when the first B reception period occurs.

Then, in the 1B reception period, when the action is accepted by the player while the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are audibly output, the action is accepted based on the acceptance. , the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are terminated halfway (halfway in the audible output state).

In this regard, as for the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound, as shown in FIG. )) and the case of execution (audible output) in a highly expected manner (case shown in FIG. 209(c)). That is, in this case, although the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound suggest the degree of expectation within the reception period, unlike the "integrated model image display IG", the reception (reception Since it will be executed as something that cannot be confirmed when the validity judgment) is made, there is tension about when to make the acceptance (validity judgment) within the acceptance period It becomes expected to maintain good feeling.

Further, in the 1B acceptance period, if the player accepts an action while acceptance acceptance sounds (first long acceptance sound and first short acceptance sound) are audibly output, the acceptance acceptance sound is terminated halfway. In addition, when the reception is made, the audible output of the 1B post-reception effect sound is started based on the reception. The 1B post-acceptance production sound is executed in such a way as to suggest the degree of expectation. output). That is, in this case, in the 1B reception period, unlike the case of the production (display production) performed by the first production device, the production (acceptance acceptable sound) performed within the reception period and the acceptance There is no conflict (overlapping) with the effect to be performed (effect sound after reception of 1B).

Such a 1B post-acceptance effect sound is similar to the '1B post-acceptance effect display UGB1', as shown in FIG. Effect)” will continue to be executed for a relatively long period of time even after it is hidden. In addition, regarding the 1B post-reception production sound, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 209(b) to “E1 (FIG. case) and an example in which the production progresses from FIG. It is desirable to output an output sound (mode).

In the 1B reception period, the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound are output as the reception permissible sounds. Only allowable sounds may be output.

In addition, when the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made in the 1B acceptance period, the third effect device can hear not only the 1B post-acceptance effect sound that suggests the degree of expectation, but also the "reception sound" that does not suggest the degree of expectation. It will be output. That is, the "reception sound" is an example where the production progresses from FIG. 209(b) to ``E2 (FIG. 210(d2)-(h2))'' (in the case where expectations are relatively high as an after-receipt effect) audible output in the same manner It is what is done. Such "acceptance sound" is audibly output (regardless of the degree of expectation) even when acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is made in an acceptance period different from the 1B acceptance period. According to such a configuration, no matter how novel the performance after reception is performed, the reception (reception validity determination) is properly performed when the "reception sound" is audibly output. Since it becomes possible to suitably recognize that it is in, it is possible to encourage concentration on the content of the presentation after reception.

On the other hand, FIG. 201 assumes a case where "receiving valid determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made when such a relatively late timing tQ2A within the 1B accepting period arrives. is doing. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 201(a), the 1B reception period ends and the 1B reception period ends based on the fact that the player's action is accepted (reception validity determination is made) at timing tQ2A. Execution of the post-reception effect (1B post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1B reception period is started.

In this respect, in the 1B reception period, even if the reception (reception validity determination) is made at the relatively late timing tQ2A within the 1B reception period (if the reception (reception validity determination) is made at any timing) Even if there is), basically, the production progresses in the same manner as when the reception (reception validity determination) is made at the relatively early timing tQ2a within the 1B reception period. Therefore, also in the case of the example shown in FIG. 201(a), when the production progresses from FIG. 209(b) to "E1 (FIGS. 209(b) to "E2 (FIG. 210(d2)-(h2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as an effect after reception). , and in the first effect device, the second effect device, and the third effect device, basically, the effect will be executed with the contents as explained with reference to FIG. 200 etc. .

However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 201, since the reception (reception validity determination) is made at the relatively late timing tQ2A within the 1B reception period, the gauge image The display area of is further reduced. In the case of the example shown in FIG. 201, as shown in FIG. 201(d), the first short permissible sound is accepted while the audible output has already ended (reception validity determination). Therefore, the first short permissible sound is not terminated halfway (halfway termination of the audible output state) due to the acceptance (validation of acceptance determination).

Also, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 201, the time period during which the "first B post-acceptance effect display" based on acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is displayed is shorter than in the example shown in FIG. will be destroyed. In other words, the "1B specific effect after reception" and "1B effect sound after reception" are executed for a predetermined time (fixed time) from the time of acceptance (reception validity determination). On the other hand, the "1B effect display after reception" is terminated (not displayed) when a predetermined timing tQ4 within the fluctuation pattern arrives, regardless of the timing at which the reception (reception validity determination) is made. It is a thing. According to such a configuration, it is expected that the sense of tension as to at what timing during the reception period the reception (reception validity determination) is to be made is preferably maintained.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 202 and the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. This assumes a case where (operation) is not performed and reception (reception validity determination) is not performed.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 202, after the occurrence of the 1B acceptance period, the above-mentioned timing tQ3 arrives without the action (operation) by the player being accepted. In this respect, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tQ3 (when the 1B receiving period ends and the player is no longer allowed to accept actions (operations)), timing tQ2a and Effect display device 1600 (first effect device ), as shown in FIG. 210(d3), the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted in time and the 1B reception period ends, the integration is performed within the 1B reception period after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the model image display IG was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

After that, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. (Disappearance EF effect) is started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect )” is displayed, and at least part of the area where the “disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)” is displayed is the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)”. It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated simulated image display IG continues to be displayed after the 1B reception period ends without acceptance, the integrated simulated image display IG is visually recognized. It becomes possible to suggest that the 1B reception period has ended by making it difficult to receive the request. Also, even in a situation where the 1B reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1B reception period, the "first disappearance-related display SKB1" is displayed as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect). We are planning to let That is, in this case, if the action (operation) by the player has been accepted within the 1B acceptance period, it is expected that the player will sense the possibility that the effect after the 1B acceptance suggests that the degree of expectation is low. The Rukoto. As a result, it becomes possible to prompt the player to think that he or she did not need to perform the action (operation) within the 1B acceptance period, and the game interest is lowered when the action (operation) is not accepted within the 1B acceptance period. is expected to suppress

However, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1B acceptance period, the "second disappearance-related display SKB2" may be displayed as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect). A mode different from both the first disappearance-related display SKB1 and the second disappearance-related display SKB2 may be displayed.

In addition, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1B reception period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is assumed to be accepted when the action (operation) is accepted. It may be performed in any manner that it may appear. That is, in this case, the case where the "first disappearance-related display SKB1" appears in the situation shown in FIG. 209(b) to "E1 (FIGS. 210(d1)-(h1))" (when the relatively low-expected post-acceptance production is executed). becomes. On the other hand, in the situation shown in FIG. b) to "E2 ((d2) to (h2) in FIG. 210)" (when the post-acceptance production with relatively high expectations is executed). . That is, in this case, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted during the 1B acceptance period, the integrated model image display IG is hidden after the 1B acceptance period ends. Whether the 1B post-acceptance effect was executed in a low-expectation mode or a high-expectation mode, simply by confirming the mode of the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" that appears in the can be recognized, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 210(f3), out of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (in the figure, the first disappearance-related display SKB1)", the "integration Hide the model image display IG. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. It will be displayed.

By the way, in the 1B reception period according to this example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is not in the form shown in FIG. 209(c)), as described above. When the situation shown in FIG. 209(c) appears, it is different from the case where the situation shown in FIG. The only difference is the aspect as "image)", and otherwise the production progresses in the same aspect.

For example, when the production progresses from FIG. 209(c) to “E1′”, the content and basic are substantially the same, and the mode of "integrated model image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGd". Only. Also, when the production progresses from FIG. 209(c) to “E2′”, the content and basic are substantially the same, and the mode of "integrated model image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGd". Only. Also, when the production progresses from FIG. 209(c) to “E3′”, the contents and basic are substantially the same, and the mode of "integrated model image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGd". Only.

FIGS. 203 to 205 are time charts showing an example of the effect contents when condition 2B is satisfied as a result of determination (big hit determination or effect determination) and the 2B reception period (2B reception effect) occurs. . FIG. 211 is a diagram showing an effect example in a variation pattern in which the 2B reception period (2B reception effect) occurs.

Now, the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, normal game state that is non-probability variable / non-time saving), and "2nd B fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of fluctuation pattern determination Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, a performance determination (announcement performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 2B variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (such as the effect depiction according to the 2B variable pattern and the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the 2B variable pattern) is started ("Situation shown in FIG. 211 (a) ”), during the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) according to the result of the determination of the previous notice performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected “2B variation pattern” itself. Become.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 203(a), when timing tR2 comes after the 2B predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect of the decorative symbol SZ (when the condition 2B is satisfied). , generate the 2B acceptance period (effective period) in which "acceptance regarding the effect after the 2B acceptance" is allowed. As a result, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 2B acceptance period (if the acceptance is judged valid), the 2B post-acceptance effect is performed based on the acceptance (acceptance validity judgment). become.

However, in the 2B reception period according to this embodiment, unlike the case where the 1B reception period occurs, the reception target (operation receiving unit, etc.) is suggested in relation to the occurrence of the 2B reception period. and the remaining time display that suggests the remaining time of the acceptance period (effective period) (depiction that the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image decreases according to the passage of time), , disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display is not displayed.

More specifically, in the 2B variation pattern, as shown in FIGS. The timing tR2 arrives while the performance situation in which the gauge image )”) is not displayed is maintained, and the 2B reception period occurs. Then, the 2B reception period ends when the timing tR3 arrives when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (reception validity determination) (see FIG. 203(a)).

Such a 2B reception period is called a so-called "hidden button", and from what timing is "reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid movement" is allowed (2B reception period has occurred), whether the "reception validity determination" is permitted (whether the 2B acceptance period is occurring), or at what timing "the player's action is a valid action No operation-related information is provided, such as whether the reception validity judgment "to be in a state where it is not allowed (whether the 2B reception period ends)." Therefore, it can be said that the 2B acceptance period can only be enjoyed by players who are sensitive to such effects.

FIG. 203 assumes a case in which "receipt validity determination is made to make the motion (operation) by the player as a valid motion" when the relatively early timing tR2a arrives during the 2B reception period. is doing. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 203(a), the 2B acceptance period ends based on the fact that the player's action (operation) is accepted (acceptance validity determination is made) at timing tR2a. At the same time, the post-reception effect (2B post-reception effect) corresponding to the 2B reception period is started to be executed.

211(a) to FIGS. 211(b) and 211(c). 2B specific effect after reception”, “2B effect sound after reception”, etc.), which are relatively highly expected, are executed respectively. As the 2B post-reception effect (“2B post-reception effect display”, “2B post-reception specific effect”, “2B post-reception effect sound”, etc.), the first modes with relatively low expectations are executed respectively. 211(a), the omitted mode (the first mode with a low degree of expectation) is executed after receiving the 2B. There are also cases where there is. However, regarding such a 2B reception period, when the ``reception validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action'' is made, the 2B post-reception effect ("2B post-reception effect display" or " 211 (b), (c), such as the 2B specific effect after reception, 2B effect sound after reception, etc.) (effect after reception (1B reception It may be realized as a type in which the low-expectation mode is not prepared as the post-effect display, the 1B post-acceptance specific effect, and the 1B post-acceptance effect sound). The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

Here, even in this production example (2B acceptance period), as shown in FIGS. At timing tR2a, which is the point in time when the post-reception effect is started), the “2B post-reception effect display UGB2 (group notice effect)” out of the 2B post-reception effect is not executed, and the “2B specific effect after reception UTB2-2” and “2B post-acceptance effect sound (high expectation mode)” are to be executed. According to such a configuration, since the production progresses in the same manner as in the case of the 1B reception-after-reception production, the above-described effects can be similarly obtained.

However, in this production example (2B reception period), as shown in FIGS. The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) described above is not executed. That is, in this case, even if the action (operation) by the player is accepted during the 2B reception period, it is greatly delayed to notice it only by looking at the effect display device 1600 (first effect device). becomes. In this case, combined with the fact that the integrated model image display IG ("model image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)") is not displayed, the situation where the 2B acceptance period does not occur It can be said that it is realized as an effect with a high degree of difficulty in playing the game in this respect as well, since it seems as if the player has acted (operated) below.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 203(b) and FIG. ``Second B post-reception effect display UGB2 (in the figure, a highly anticipated group preview effect by a ghost character, The execution of the 2B post-acceptance effect display UGB2-2)” is started. 203(b) and 211(d), the "2B post-acceptance effect display UGB2" thus started is executed for a predetermined time from the acceptance (acceptance validity determination). It will be terminated (hidden) when (a certain amount of time) has passed.

Note that in the production example (Fig. 211) corresponding to the 2B reception period, unlike the case of the 1B reception period, the background image is switched when the "2B post-reception production display UGB2" is executed. This also makes it difficult to recognize that the application has been accepted.

Also, when an action by the player is accepted within the 2B accepting period, as shown in FIGS. 203(b) and 203(c) and FIGS. Based on this, the 2B post-reception effect using the second effect device (2B post-reception specific effect) precedes the 2B post-reception effect (2B post-reception effect display) using the first effect device. to start execution.

Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or may be a movable object capable of effecting operations, or It may be provided as a production lamp capable of emitting light. In any case, it is provided so that effects (display effects, movable effects, light-emitting effects, etc.) can be performed in a plurality of modes with different expectations. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. Then, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. 211(a) to FIG. The mode in which "ghost" is displayed in 1610 (second effect device) is a mode in which the degree of expectation of the above-mentioned 2B post-reception specific effect UTB2 (2B post-reception specific effect UTB2) corresponding to the 2B reception period is high. As the 2B post-reception specific effect UTB2-2), execution is started prior to the 2B post-reception effect (2B post-reception effect display UGB2-2) using the first effect device. As described above, the explanation of the case where the low-expectation aspect is executed as the 2B post-acceptance effect will be omitted, but the “2B post-acceptance effect display” and the “2B post-acceptance specific effect UTB2” are the low-expectation modes. , and is basically the same as when it is run in the high-expectancy mode.

Also, as shown in FIG. 211(a), the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) does not execute the effect within the reception period, which suggests that the 2B reception period has occurred.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is further provided with a third effect device (speaker). However, when the 2B acceptance period occurs, as shown in FIG. I try to make it difficult to recognize.

In the 1B reception period, when the reception is made, the audible output of the 2B post-reception effect sound is started based on the reception. The 2B post-acceptance production sound is executed in such a way as to suggest the degree of expectation. output).

In addition, when the reception (reception validity determination) is made in the 2B reception period, the third production device can hear not only the 2B post-reception production sound that suggests the degree of expectation, but also the "reception sound" that does not suggest the degree of expectation. It will be output. That is, the "reception sound" is audibly output in the same manner regardless of whether the 2B post-reception effect is executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation or a mode with a low degree of expectation.

On the other hand, FIG. 204 assumes a case where "receipt valid determination is made that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" when the relatively late timing tR2A within the 2B reception period arrives. is doing. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 204(a), the 2B acceptance period ends and the 2B acceptance period ends based on the fact that the player's action is accepted at timing tR2A (reception validity determination is made). Execution of the post-reception effect (2B post-reception effect) corresponding to the 2B reception period is started.

In this respect, in the 2B reception period, even if the reception (reception validity determination) is made at the relatively late timing tR2A within the 2B reception period (when the reception (reception validity determination) is made at any timing) Even if there is), basically, the production progresses in the same manner as when the reception (reception validity determination) is made at the relatively early timing tR2a within the 2B reception period. Therefore, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 204(a) as well, when the production progresses from FIG. 211(a) to FIGS. ) and the case where the illustration is omitted (the degree of expectation is relatively low as the performance after reception), and the first production device, the second production device, and the third production device basically , the effect is executed with the contents as described with reference to FIG.

In particular, in the 2B reception period, unlike the 1B reception period, the "2B post-reception effect display" is similar to the "2B post-reception specific effect" and "2B post-reception effect sound". Since it is executed for a predetermined time (fixed time) from the time (reception validity judgment) is made, the mode as a post-reception production is also at the timing when the reception (reception validity judgment) is made. are the same regardless.

It should be noted that the "second B post-reception effect display", the "second B post-reception specific effect", and the "second B post-reception effect sound" may be performed only for a certain period of time set for each. It does not have to be finished at the same time.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 205 and the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 211(a) to FIG. Validity judgment) is not made.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 205, after the occurrence of the 2B acceptance period, the above-described timing tR3 arrives without the action (operation) by the player being accepted. In this regard, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted in the 2B acceptance period, no effect related to its occurrence or termination is executed as shown in FIG.

According to such a configuration, the player does not know that the 2B reception period has occurred or that the action (operation) has not been possible. A decrease in interest in the game is suppressed.

FIGS. 206 to 208 are time charts showing an example of the effect contents when condition 3B is satisfied as a result of determination (big win determination or effect determination) and the 3B reception period (3B reception effect) occurs. . FIGS. 212 and 213 are diagrams showing examples of effects in variation patterns in which the 3B reception period (3B reception effects) occurs.

Now, the starting condition is established (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is non-variable and non-time saving), and the "3rd B fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (announcement effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the 3B variation pattern. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (effect depiction according to the 3B variable pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 3B variable pattern, etc.) is started ("Situation shown in FIG. 212 (a) ”), during the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) according to the result of the determination of the previous notice performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected “3B variation pattern” itself. Become.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 206(a), when timing tS2 comes after the 3B predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (when the condition 3B is satisfied). , generate the 3B acceptance period (effective period) in which "acceptance regarding the effect after the 3B acceptance" is permitted. As a result, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 3B acceptance period (if the acceptance is judged to be valid), the 3B post-acceptance effect is performed based on the acceptance (acceptance validity judgment). become.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), in relation to the occurrence of such a 3B reception period, the reception target (operation receiving unit etc.), the remaining time display that suggests the remaining time of the reception period (effective period) (the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image decreases as time passes Depiction), disappearance-related display (disappearing EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image display, 1B post-reception effect display that suggests the degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) according to acceptance (reception validity determination) are to be carried out respectively. As described above, the simulated image display according to this embodiment is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display (description that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time passes). However, it is not necessarily limited to this, and may be displayed separately. This also applies to other acceptance periods.

However, the 3B reception period according to this embodiment has the effect of the above-mentioned "1B reception period (so-called normal button effect)" and the effect of the above-mentioned "2B reception period (so-called hidden button effect)". It is realized as a special production that combines both.

More specifically, during the 3B acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. and gauge image)”) is not yet displayed (timing tS2). That is, in this case, the player is secretly provided with an action opportunity (operating opportunity), and an effect is provided as a so-called "hidden button effect".

In this regard, the effect of such a "hidden button effect" continues only until timing X when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the occurrence of the 3B acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 208(b). That is, when the timing X within the 3B reception period arrives, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, as the integrated model image display IG, "model image display" or "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)” is displayed, and an action opportunity (operation opportunity) is provided to the player while the integrated model image display IG is being displayed. will move to It should be noted that the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) displayed in this way is displayed when the acceptance (reception validity judgment) is made within the 3B acceptance period, ) is not performed and the 3B reception period ends, the display is hidden. The 3B acceptance period according to this example ends when the timing tS3 arrives when an action (operation) by the player is not accepted (acceptance validity determination) (see FIG. 208(a), etc.).

According to such a 3B reception period, during the period from the occurrence of the 3B reception period to the arrival of the timing X, while the integrated model image display IG is not displayed, it is in the "first display state". ``Direction as a so-called hidden button'' that allows the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is provided, and from the timing X to the end of the 3B reception period, integrated simulation In the "second display state" in which the image display IG is displayed, a "performance as a so-called normal button" is provided, which allows acceptance of actions (operations) by the player. As a result, the 3B reception period according to this embodiment has the performance of the above-described "1B reception period (so-called normal button presentation)" and the performance of the above-described "2B reception period (so-called hidden button presentation)". It has come to be realized as a special performance that combines both sex and sexuality, and it is expected that this will improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the "second display state" of the 3B reception period according to this example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in a plurality of modes (for example, FIG. 144 (a ) or (c)), and FIG. FIG. 212(c) shows the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 144(c). is equivalent to Also during the 3B acceptance period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in any of a plurality of modes including the modes shown in FIGS. 144(b) and (d). may be made.

FIG. 206 shows that while the above-described "first display state (see, for example, FIG. 212(a))" appears during the 3B acceptance period (timing tS2a in the figure), "game It is assumed that "reception validity determination" is made in which the motion (operation) by the person is the valid motion. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 206(a), the 3B acceptance period ends based on the fact that the action (operation) by the player is accepted (acceptance validity determination is made) at timing tS2a. At the same time, the post-reception effect (3B post-reception effect) corresponding to the 3B reception period is started to be executed.

In addition, in the example where the effect progresses from FIG. 212(a) to "F1 (FIG. 213(d1) to FIG. 213(h1))", the above "first display state" appears during the 3B receiving period. Among them, as a result of "determination of validity of reception", it corresponds to the case where the first mode with relatively low expectation is executed as "3B post-reception production", and from FIG. 212(a) to "F2 ( (d2) ~ Fig. 213 (h2))” is an example in which the “reception validity determination” is made while the “first display state” is appearing during the 3B reception period, resulting in “ This corresponds to the case where the second mode with relatively high expectations is executed as the 3B post-acceptance effect. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

Here, in this example of effect, as shown in FIG. 206, at timing tS2a, which is the time when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (the time when the 3B post-acceptance effect is started in response to the acceptance), The "integrated model image display IG", which has been hidden until then, can now be displayed.

That is, when the player performs an action (operation) while the above-mentioned "first display state" is appearing during the 3B reception period (when "reception valid determination" is made), the player An operation (operation) is performed without recognizing which mode appears as the simulated image display IG (simulated image display, frame image, gauge image). In this regard, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted, the "integrated model image display IG", which has been hidden until then, can be displayed. Assuming that the "second display state" is tentatively set during the period, it becomes possible to recognize which mode appears as the "integrated simulated image display IG".

That is, the 3B after-reception effect according to this embodiment includes the "3B after-reception effect display" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) and the second effect device (for example, sub liquid crystal, movable At least the "3B post-reception specific effect" using the body, effect lamps, etc.) and the 3B post-reception effect sound using the third effect device (speaker) are realized as a combined effect. (It may not necessarily be realized as a composite effect by three effect devices), but among those effect devices, an effect in which an integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed In the display device 1600 (first effect device), the timing of starting execution of the "3rd post-reception effect display" as the 3B post-reception effect is delayed compared to other effect devices. The visibility of the "integrated model image display IG" is intentionally maintained even after the acceptance is made by .

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 213(d1) or (d2), even after the acceptance is made in the "first display state" during the 3B reception period, , the player can easily recognize in which of the multiple modes (FIGS. 144(a) to (d)) the integrated simulated image display IG is to be displayed. , it is expected to suitably suppress the decline in game interest.

Here, after the end of the acceptance period, in order to facilitate recognition of the mode in which the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period, it is necessary to consider the "integrated model image display" after the acceptance. It can be said that it is desirable to set a longer time period during which the IG is displayed in an easily visible form. However, even though the acceptance has been made and the post-acceptance production (the second production device and the third production device) has already been executed, the integrated model image display IG is in the above-mentioned "second display state". If it continues to be displayed in the same mode as it was at some point, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the acceptance has been made. There is concern that it will be delayed.

Therefore, in the examples shown in FIG. 206(b) and FIG. (when the timing tS2b arrives), the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes the model image display difficult to see is started.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the “extinction related display (extinction EF Effect)” is displayed, and at least part of the area where the “disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)” is displayed is “integrated model image display IG (simulated image display, gauge image display)”. overlaps the area where is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG is displayed after the acceptance is made in the "first display state" during the 3B acceptance period, By making the integrated model image display IG difficult to see, it becomes possible to suggest that the post-acceptance effects (the second effect device and the third effect device) are already being executed.

In addition, if the acceptance is made in the above-mentioned "first display state" that provides the performance as a "so-called hidden button" during the 3B acceptance period, either the 2B acceptance period or the 3B acceptance period Although it is difficult to recognize whether it was accepted in the 3B acceptance period, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" that cannot appear during the 2B acceptance period appears. be able to recognize that there is

In addition, in the 3B reception period, the low-expectation mode (FIGS. 213(d1)-(h1)) and the high-expectation mode (FIGS. 213(d2)-(h2)) appear as the 3B post-reception production. The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is executed in the same manner as when appears. According to such a configuration, compared to the case of the 1B reception period (when the appearance of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) differs depending on the degree of expectation), after the acceptance is made within the 3B reception period, the "disappearance Since it is less important to pay attention to the related display (disappearing EF effect)", it is accepted when it is in the "first display state" that provides the effect as a "so-called hidden button" during the 3B acceptance period. is made, the integrated model image display IG can be watched favorably after the acceptance is made.

In addition, in the 3B reception period according to this production example, the after-reception production (1B post-reception production) corresponding to the 1B reception period is expected as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) that appears when the reception is made. The "second disappearance related display SKB2" that is displayed when executed in a high degree mode is used. That is, in this case, in the 3B reception period, as long as the reception is made, it is possible to give an image as if the performance after the reception is executed in a manner with a high degree of expectation, thereby improving the amusement of the game. You will be able to plan.

Note that the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) corresponding to the 3B acceptance period does not necessarily have to be the “second extinction-related display SKB2”. For example, as a disappearance-related display (disappearing EF effect) corresponding to the 3B reception period, it is displayed when the post-reception effect (1B post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1B reception period is executed in a manner with low expectations. Even if the "first disappearance related display SKB1" to be used is used, whether the acceptance is made during the 1B acceptance period or the acceptance is made during the 3B acceptance period It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 206(b), FIG. When the timing tS2c within the period in which the mode) appears, the first effect device (effect display device 1600) responds to the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player within the 3B acceptance period. Execution of the "3B effect display UGB3 (conversation notice) after reception" as the effect is started. However, here, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. As shown in f1), the first mode (here, the 3B post-reception effect display UGB3-1, which is a "silent" conversation notice) is displayed as the 3B post-reception effect display UGB3 corresponding to the 3B reception period. 212 (a) to "F2 (FIGS. 213 (d2) to (h2))" (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as the production after reception), FIG. 213 (f2) , the second mode (here, the 3B post-reception effect display UGB3-2 which is a conversation notice referring to "chance") is displayed as the 3B post-reception effect display UGB3 corresponding to the 3B reception period. It is designed to be

That is, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKB2)" are displayed, respectively, the "3B post-reception effect display UGB3 ("3B post-reception effect display UGB3-1" or "3B post-reception effect display UGB3-2") is started to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed for a relatively long time after being accepted within the 3B reception period, the reception by the first effect device (effect display device 1600) The post-effect (3B post-acceptance effect display UGB3) can be started without a large delay compared to other effect devices, and the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed. Since the effect display UGB3 after the 3B reception is started while the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, it suggests that the 3B reception period has already ended, and the target of the player's gaze is indicated. is expected to naturally shift from "integrated model image display IG" to "3B post-reception effect display UGB3 (3B post-reception effect display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception effect display UGB3-2)". (after timing tS2c).

On the other hand, for the "3B post-reception effect display UGB3 (3B post-reception effect display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception effect display UGB3-2)", the area where the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed. (it does not necessarily have to overlap), it is displayed behind the "integrated model image display IG", and "3rd B The “integrated model image display IG” is preferentially displayed with respect to the post-reception effect display UGB3 (3B post-reception effect display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception effect display UGB3-2). As a result, even though the execution of the "3B post-reception effect display UGB3 (3B post-reception effect display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception effect display UGB3-2)" is started, the integrated model image display is performed within the reception period. This makes it easier to recognize in which mode the IG was displayed.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to the "3B post-reception effect display UGB3 (3B post-reception effect display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception effect display UGB3-2)" is started in this way, , as shown in FIG. 206(b), FIG. -2)” is displayed, first, out of the “integrated model image display IG” and the “disappearance-related display”, the “integrated model image display IG” is hidden. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 206(b), FIG. "Display SKB2)" is hidden, and under the condition that the visibility is good, "3B post-reception effect display UGB3 (3B post-reception effect display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception effect display UGB3 -2)” will be displayed.

In this regard, the “3B post-reception effect display UGB3” refers to a plurality of modes (here, 3B post-reception effect display UGB3-1 or 3B post-acceptance display UGB3-2). Therefore, the “3B post-reception effect display UGB3” will be executed for a relatively long time even after the “integrated model image display IG” and “disappearance-related display” are hidden.

It should be noted that in the production example (FIGS. 212 and 213) corresponding to the 3B acceptance period, even if the acceptance is made during the 3B acceptance period and the "3B post-reception production display UGB3" is executed, the "3B acceptance display UGB3" is executed. The background image is not switched before and after the 3B post-acceptance effect display UGB3” is started. According to such a configuration, when compared with the 1B acceptance period, even if the acceptance is made in the "second display state", the 3B acceptance period also has the effect of a "so-called hidden button". It becomes possible to suggest that the application has been accepted during the acceptance period. In addition, when compared with the above-mentioned 2B reception period, it seems that the production progresses as a result of accepting with the "so-called hidden button" even while the "3B post-reception production display UGB3" is being executed. It is possible to show

In this example of effect, the display of the "3B post-acceptance effect display UGB3" starts at a timing (timing tS2c) later than the timing (timing tS2b) at which the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKB2)" starts to be displayed. However, the display may be started at the same timing (timing tS2b) as the timing (timing tS2b) at which the “disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKB2)” starts to be displayed.

Thus, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, when the 3B reception period occurs, it is within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 206), In addition, various displays are performed within a limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decline in the interest in the game. However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tS2c) of the 3B post-reception effect (3B post-reception effect display) in response to the acceptance is set earlier than the received timing tS2a. The reality is that it has to be delayed.

Therefore, in this example, when the player's action is accepted within the 3B acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. A 3B post-reception performance (3B post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device is started prior to the 3B post-reception performance (3B post-reception performance display) using the first performance device. I'm trying

According to such a configuration, the execution start is delayed from the timing tS2a at which the acceptance is made in the 3B acceptance period only for a part of the 3B post-acceptance effect (3B post-acceptance effect display). As for the 3B post-receipt effect itself, the execution can be started without delay from the same timing tS2a.

Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or may be a movable object capable of effecting operations, or It may be provided as a production lamp capable of emitting light. In any case, it is provided so that effects (display effects, movable effects, light-emitting effects, etc.) can be performed in a plurality of modes with different expectations. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. Then, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. , the mode in which "Sueyoshi" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) corresponds to the 3B reception specific effect UTB3 (3rd reception specific effect after reception) corresponding to the 3B reception period. As a 3B post-reception specific effect UTB3-1), which is an aspect of UTB3 with a low degree of expectation, it is executed prior to the 3B post-reception effect (3B post-reception effect display UGB3-1) using the first effect device. It is supposed to start. On the other hand, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. d2), the manner in which "good luck" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is the specific effect UTB3 after the 3B reception corresponding to the 3B reception period. As a 3B post-reception specific effect UTB3-2), which is a highly expected aspect of the specific effect UTB3, precedes the 3B post-reception effect (3B post-reception effect display UGB3-2) using the first effect device. is to start running.

It should be noted that in the effect example shown in FIG. 213, in the "first display state" of the 3B reception period, it is suggested that the 3B reception period is also occurring in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device). In the second display state of the 3B reception period, the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is also in a state where the 3B reception period has occurred. An effect within the acceptance period is executed (FIGS. 212(b) and (c)). The effect within the reception period on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is a mode in which the “integrated model image display IG” on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is less expected (see FIG. 212 (b)). ) and the highly expected mode (see FIG. 212(c)) are displayed in the same mode.

That is, in this case, when the player is in the "second display state" during the 3B reception period in which an action opportunity (operating opportunity) is given to the player, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is displayed at the degree of expectation. Accordingly, different aspects appear, and the same aspect appears on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second rendering device) regardless of the degree of expectation. However, after this, when the "receiving valid determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made while in the "second display state" during the 3B receiving period, the effect display device 1600 (first While the display related to the "integrated model image display IG" is continued in the production device) (while the degree of expectation as the production after reception has not yet been suggested), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) Different aspects will appear depending on the degree of expectation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to obtain performance information more quickly by paying attention to an appropriate performance device from time to time rather than watching only the performance by one performance device. Since it becomes like this, it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

In this production example, the degree of expectation is suggested by which of the "3B post-reception specific production UTB3-1" and "3B post-reception specific production UTB3-2" appears as the 3B post-reception specific production UTB3. However, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of modes for the 3B post-acceptance specific effect UTB3. For example, as the 3B post-reception specific effect UTB3, only “3B post-reception specific effect UTB3-2” is provided, and depending on whether or not the “3B post-reception specific effect UTB3-2” appears, the degree of expectation (jackpot is obtained) may be suggested. That is, in this case, it is suggested that when the "3B post-acceptance specific effect UTB3-2" appears, the expectations are higher than when the "3B post-acceptance specific effect UTB3-2" does not appear. Become.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is further provided with a third effect device (speaker). , the reception allowable sound is started to be output. The reception allowable sound corresponding to the 3B reception period spans both the timing tS2 at which the 3B reception period occurs and the timing X at which the "first display state" transitions to the "second display state". , and the action (operation) by the player can be accepted while the reception acceptance sound is audibly outputted. However, the acceptable reception sound may be audibly output across the timing X, and may not necessarily be audibly output across the timing tS2.

Here, in the 3B reception period, as the reception allowable sound, a third allowable sound different from the first long allowable sound and the first short allowable sound is audibly output. It becomes possible to suggest that the 3B acceptance period, which has the effect of a "so-called hidden button" instead of the period, will occur (or that it is occurring). However, the reception allowable sound corresponding to the 3B reception period may be executed with either the first long allowable sound or the first short allowable sound.

In the 3B acceptance period, if the player accepts an action while the acceptance acceptance sound corresponding to this (here, the third acceptance sound) is audibly output, it means that the acceptance has been made. Based on this, the reception permission sound is not terminated in the middle (midway termination of the audible output state). It becomes possible to suggest that a period occurs (or is occurring). However, the acceptable acceptance sound corresponding to the 3B acceptance period may also be terminated halfway based on acceptance.

In this regard, as for the acceptance acceptable sound (here, the third acceptable sound) corresponding to the 3B acceptance period, as shown in FIG. It is desirable that there are two cases (the case shown in FIG. 212(b)) and the other case (the case shown in FIG. 212(c)) that is executed (audible output) in a highly expected manner. In other words, in this case, although the reception acceptable sound suggests the degree of expectation within the reception period, unlike the "integrated model image display IG", it is confirmed when the reception (reception validity determination) is made. Since it will be executed as if it will be impossible to accept, it is expected to maintain a sense of tension as to when the acceptance (validation of acceptance) will be made during the acceptance period. become.

Also, during the 3B reception period, if the player accepts an action while the acceptance acceptance sound is being audibly output, the acceptance acceptance sound is not only terminated halfway through, but also accepted. , the audible output of the effect sound is started after receiving the 3B above. The 3B post-acceptance production sound is executed in such a way as to suggest the degree of expectation. output). That is, in this case, in the 3B reception period, unlike the case of the production (display production) performed by the first production device, the production (acceptance acceptable sound) performed within the reception period and the acceptance There is no conflict (overlapping) with the effect to be performed (effect sound after reception of 3B).

As shown in FIG. 206(d), the 3B post-acceptance effect sound is the same as the 3B post-acceptance effect display UGB3, as shown in FIG. 206(d). Effect)” will continue to be executed for a relatively long period of time even after it is hidden. In addition, regarding the 3B post-reception effect sound, an example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 212(a) to “F1 (Fig. case) and an example in which the production progresses from FIG. It is desirable to output an output sound (mode).

Further, when the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made in the 3B acceptance period, the third effect device can hear not only the 3B post-acceptance effect sound suggesting the degree of expectation, but also the "reception sound" not suggesting the degree of expectation. It will be output. That is, the "reception sound" is an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 212 (a) to "F2 (FIG. 213 (d2) to (h2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as the reception after reception) audible output in the same manner It is what is done. Such a "reception sound" is accepted (reception valid determination) in a reception period different from the 3B reception period (for example, the 1B reception period or a predetermined reception period different from each reception period described above). audible output (regardless of the degree of expectation). According to such a configuration, no matter how novel the performance after reception is performed, the reception (reception validity determination) is properly performed when the "reception sound" is audibly output. Since it becomes possible to preferably recognize that it is in, it is possible to encourage concentration on the content of the presentation after reception.

On the other hand, FIG. 207 shows a state in which the "second display state (see, for example, FIGS. 212(b) and (c))" appears during the 3B reception period ( , timing tS2A), it is assumed that "receiving validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 207(a), the 3B acceptance period ends based on the fact that the action (operation) by the player is accepted (acceptance validity determination is made) at timing tS2A. At the same time, the post-reception effect (3B post-reception effect) corresponding to the 3B reception period is started to be executed.

In this respect, in the 3B reception period, reception (reception validity determination ) is made, after the acceptance is made, while the above "first display state (see, for example, FIG. 212(a))" appears within the 3B acceptance period The effect is developed in the same manner as when acceptance (validation of acceptance) is made. Therefore, even in the case of the example shown in FIG. 207(a), when the production progresses from FIG. 212(b) to "F1 (FIGS. When the expectation is low), and when the production progresses from FIG. , and in the first effect device, the second effect device, and the third effect device, basically, the effect will be executed with the contents as described with reference to FIG. 206 etc. .

However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 207, in the situation shown in FIG. The display area of is reduced.

Also, in the 3B acceptance period, the "3B post-reception effect display" is similar to the "3B post-reception specific effect" and "3B post-reception effect sound", etc., from the time of acceptance (reception validity determination). Since it is executed for a predetermined period of time (fixed period of time), the aspect of the post-acceptance effect is the same regardless of the timing at which the acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is made.

It should be noted that the "3B post-reception effect display", "3B post-reception specific effect", and "3B post-reception effect sound" may be executed only for a certain period of time set respectively. It does not have to be finished at the same time.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 208 and the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. This assumes a case where (operation) is not performed and reception (reception validity determination) is not performed.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 208, after the occurrence of the 3B acceptance period, the above-described timing tS3 arrives without the action (operation) by the player being accepted. In this respect, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tS3 (when the 3B acceptance period ends and the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is no longer allowed), timing tS2a and Effect display device 1600 (first effect device ), as shown in FIG. 213(d3), the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted in time and the 3B reception period ends, the integration is performed within the 3B reception period after the end of the 3B reception period. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the model image display IG was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

After that, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. (Disappearance EF effect) is started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect )” is displayed, and at least part of the area where the “disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)” is displayed is the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)”. It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated simulated image display IG continues to be displayed after the 3B reception period ends without acceptance, the integrated simulated image display IG is visually recognized. It becomes possible to suggest that the 3B reception period has ended by making it difficult to receive the request. Also, even in a situation where the 3B reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 3B reception period, the "third disappearance-related display SKB3" is displayed as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect). We are planning to let

It is desirable that the "third extinction-related display SKB3" is not displayed in relation to the 1B acceptance period. That is, in this case, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 3B reception period, the reception period is the above-mentioned "1B reception period (so-called normal button effect)". It can be suggested that both the above-mentioned "second B reception period (so-called hidden button effect)" and the effect of the above-mentioned "2B reception period (so-called hidden button effect)" were combined.

Further, it is desirable that the "third disappearance-related display SKB3" is not displayed when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 3B acceptance period. That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest more preferably that the 3B acceptance period has ended without acceptance being made.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 213(f3), out of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (the third disappearance-related display SKB3 in the figure)", first, the "integration Hide the model image display IG. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. It will be displayed.

By the way, in the 3B reception period according to this example, when the "second display state" is reached, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is shown in FIG. 144(a). As described above, it may be displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 144(c) (see FIG. 212(c)) instead of the mode (see FIG. 212(b)). When the situation shown in FIG. 212(c) appears, the situation shown in FIG. The only difference is the aspect as "image)", and otherwise the production progresses in the same aspect.

For example, when the production progresses from FIG. 212(c) to “F1′”, the content and basic are substantially the same, and the mode of "integrated model image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGc". Only. Also, when the production progresses from FIG. 212(c) to "F2'", the content and basic are substantially the same, and the mode of "integrated model image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGc". Only. Also, when the production progresses from FIG. 213(c) to "F3'", the content and basic are substantially the same, and the mode of "integrated model image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGc". Only.

According to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present application, in which the 1B reception period to the 3B reception period are prepared, the following excellent effects are achieved.

First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the content of the production that progresses when the reception is received (cut-in notice, group notice, conversation notice, etc. as production after reception, notice production (expectation suggestive production) (Type of ) are prepared for multiple acceptance periods (1B acceptance period to 3B acceptance period), and it is possible to generate a type acceptance period (effective period) according to the result of the judgment (effect judgment). It has become.

In this regard, in the 1B reception period to the 3B reception period, when the action by the player is accepted, the effect display after reception (the effect display after the 1B reception to the effect display after the 3B reception effect display) can be displayed in the "effect display device 1600". Of these, in the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, when an action by the player is accepted, not only is the post-acceptance effect display displayed based on the acceptance, but also the "disappearance-related display ( disappearing EF effect)” is made to appear further. In other words, in this case, it is possible to confirm which aspect of the model image display has appeared even after the acceptance is made, and until the model image display is hidden By making it difficult to see the image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) (disappearance-related display), we changed the visibility from the "simulated image display" to the "post-acceptance display". It is expected that the target of gaze by the player will be naturally shifted to . It should be noted that the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" can be used in common for a plurality of reception periods in which the content of the effect that progresses when received is different (Fig. 210 ( e2) and FIG. 213(e2), etc.).

However, since the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are originally displayed during the acceptance period when the acceptance has not yet been made, the model image display will continue after the acceptance has been made. or the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the post-reception display according to the reception has been displayed, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease. be. In this regard, when the reception is made in either the 1B reception period or the 3B reception period, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are changed to "model image display and remaining time display (frame image, Gauge image) is hidden (invisible) while the appearance (disappearance-related display)” is appearing, while the post-reception production display is “simulated image display and remaining time display (frame image , gauge image) is displayed while the mode (disappearance-related display) is appearing. In other words, in this case, after the player accepts the action, while "an aspect (disappearance-related display) in which the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see" appears, A shift in the display effect from the previous display (simulated image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) to the post-acceptance display (post-acceptance effect display) is realized.

It should be noted that both the mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display) and the post-acceptance effect display are displayed based on acceptance. common point. However, the ``mode (disappearance-related display) in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see'' is, for example, shown in FIG. 210 (e1), FIG. When a model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) appear to make it difficult to see. It is what is done. On the other hand, "effect display after reception" means display of a model image or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), as shown in Fig. 210 (f1) or Fig. 210 (f2). Even if it is displayed in such a situation, the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) appear so as not to be difficult to see. Further, in each of the above-described examples, the display of the "effect display after reception" is started when the model image display or the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is being displayed. "Post effect display" does not necessarily have to start displaying when the model image display is being displayed, and should start displaying after the model image display is hidden. good too.

In addition, regarding "modes in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)", "make the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) difficult to see" As a method of "appearing like", at least part of the area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) In addition to the method of realizing priority display (display on the front layer) of a different image display from It is possible to employ a technique of displaying an image (moving image) that is made to appear partially missing (invisible) in the time display (frame image, gauge image). In addition, it is not a separate image display from the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), but the numerical value (transmittance etc.) can also be adopted. On the other hand, regarding the "effect display after reception", as a method of "appearing so as not to make it difficult to see the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)", model image display and remaining time display (frame image , gauge image) is displayed in at least a part of the area where the "reception effect display" is displayed, but the " In addition to the method realized by displaying (displaying on the rear layer) "effect display after reception", at least while the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, the model image display It is possible to employ a method or the like that is realized by displaying the "post-reception effect display" only in an area other than the displayed area.

In addition, as a form (disappearance-related display) in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see, the area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed A method of displaying an image display different from the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) in at least a part of the display of the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) itself It is also possible to adopt both a method of changing the numerical value (transmittance, etc.) related to the characteristic.

In addition, the ``mode in which the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display)'' refers to the ``reception display'' before the ``reception display'' is displayed. "Post-effect display" appears in a situation where it has not yet been displayed. That is, in this case, under the condition that the "effect display after reception" is not yet displayed, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are replaced with the above "model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)." ) becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)”, so while making the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) visible, “post-reception effect display " is likely to appear soon, so that the player's attention is changed from the "simulated image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) that is difficult to see". You will be able to encourage

In addition, when accepted during the 1B acceptance period and the 3B acceptance period, etc., the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" It can be displayed even after the "effect display" is displayed, and is hidden while the "effect display after reception" is displayed. As a result, during the period in which the "effect display after reception" is displayed, the "mode that makes it difficult to see the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) (disappearance-related display)" is hidden. In the subsequent period, we will be able to provide the performance related to the "post-reception display" in a wider range, so we will improve the game interest by changing the performance during such a display period. be able to

In addition, in each of the production examples described above regarding the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, as shown in FIGS. Mode (disappearance-related display)", not only the area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, but also the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) It is also displayed in areas that are not displayed. In this area, the "effect display after reception" is displayed in at least a part of it, but the "model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see. (disappearance-related display)” is displayed (for example, displayed in the rear layer) so that at least a part of the “post-acceptance effect display” is difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, the disappearance-related display (disappearing EF effect) makes not only the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), but also the "post-reception effect display" difficult to see. Since it will appear, the effect until the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is hidden, and the effect when the display of "effect display after reception" starts It will be expected to improve both sexuality and

Also, as described above, in each of the above-described production examples regarding the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, the "post-reception production display" is displayed before the "post-reception production display" is displayed after the reception is made. In the situation where it is not displayed, apart from the disappearance-related display (disappearing EF effect), a specific effect after reception (using the second effect device) that does not make it difficult to see the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) It is possible to appear after the reception. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the post-acceptance production prior to this without interfering with the production of the first production device.

In addition, in each of the production examples described above regarding the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, the post-reception specific production (post-reception production using the second production device) is more likely than the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) to appear. The previous disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is made to appear in a situation where it has not yet appeared. Further, the post-acceptance specific effect (post-acceptance effect using the second effect device) is continued until after the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is terminated.

According to such a configuration, a person who dislikes complicated effects in the first effect device can enjoy the effect after reception by the second effect device having simplified effects. It is possible to improve amusement in games for various types of players.

Also, in each of the production examples described above regarding the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, the simulated image display is displayed by dynamic display as described above with reference to FIGS. 145 and 146. . In this case, as for the model image display, it is desirable that the dynamic display is not terminated and continues even when the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) appears after the acceptance.

In addition, in each of the production examples described above regarding the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) is not only a model image display, but also a gauge that indicates the remaining time until the reception period ends. It was also decided to make it difficult to visually recognize the image. As a result, even if the gauge image is displayed even after acceptance, it is possible to prevent it from appearing as if there is remaining time left.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 3B acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods, "the third operation" is performed based on the acceptance. 3B Post-reception effect display UGB3" can be displayed, but apart from the 3B post-reception effect display UGB3, the mode (second disappearance Related display SKB2) can appear.

According to such a configuration, when the second disappearance-related display SKB2 appears, it is unclear which of the first and third B post-acceptance effect displays will appear, but when the first disappearance-related display SKB1 appears, It is possible to guess that the effect display UGB1 will appear after the 1B acceptance.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is displayed (prioritized display ). However, the production using the production device (movable body, etc.) on the front side of the display screen must be executed at a position that overlaps at least a part of the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) when viewed from the front. It is also possible to realize by

Even if the same aspect (second disappearance-related display SKB2) appears as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect), if the reception period type is different, the big hit pattern will be stopped due to the pattern change. It is desirable to have different ratios (expectations) of

In addition, in the example of the production described above, it is possible to execute the production after reception (specific production after reception) using the second production device, and the production after reception (specific production after reception) is executed using the second production device. During the period, in the first production device, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively easy to see, and the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively visible. It is made to have a state where it is difficult to visually recognize it.

That is, in this case, even after the execution of the post-acceptance effect (specific post-acceptance effect) using the second effect device is started based on the acceptance, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) ), it is possible to confirm which aspect appeared. In addition, during the execution period of the post-acceptance effect (specific post-acceptance effect) using the second effect device, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are made relatively difficult to see. As a result, it is expected that the player's gaze target will be naturally shifted from the "first effect device" to the "second effect device".

In the production example described above, the post-acceptance production (post-reception specific production) using the second production device is a model image display that has been continuously displayed (displayed in an easy-to-see state) from before it is accepted, and the remaining time. The execution is started so as not to affect the visibility of the display (frame image, gauge image). More specifically, the simulated image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed in a predetermined area within the display screen (effect display device 1600). The effect after reception (specific effect after reception) is not an image display displayed using at least part of the predetermined area, nor is an effect executed at a position overlapping at least part of the predetermined area when viewed from the front. It is.

Also, in the example of the effect described above, the post-acceptance effect display is started after the appearance timing of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect), but it is displayed at the appearance timing of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect). You may make it start.

Also, in each of the production examples described above, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) uses at least a part of the "area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed". It was decided to realize it as an image display to be displayed. However, in this case, it is desirable to display the image so that the area displayed in the "area where the simulated image is displayed" tends to gradually expand over time.

Further, as described above, the "simulated image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" according to this embodiment can be used as integrated simulated image display IG in multiple modes (integrated simulated image It can be displayed by any of the displays IGa to IGd). Further, according to each of the production examples described above, even after acceptance, the display mode including the display position, size, dynamic depiction, etc. is maintained and continued. Also, it is possible to recognize in what manner the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) were displayed during the acceptance period.

However, in this case, when it is in the period immediately after acceptance, the production after acceptance must be performed under such conditions (maintaining the display of the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) You won't get it. That is, the range of effects is narrow, and only limited effects (effects after acceptance using only the effect device different from the first effect device) can be executed. However, when the disappearance related display (disappearing EF effect) appears after time passes, after accepting it under the condition that "the visibility of the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) may be deteriorated" Since it is possible to perform the effect, it becomes possible to execute the "effect display after reception by the first effect device" under such conditions. By performing in stages such two post-operation productions with different properties (the specific production after reception in the second production device and the production display after reception in the first production device), the model image display mode even after acceptance. can be easily confirmed, and the role of post-operation production can also be suitably exhibited.

As described above, the "simulated image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" may be displayed separately, or the "simulated image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)” may be displayed.

In addition, in the 1B reception period, the 2B reception period, and the 3B reception period, the target of the action (operation) by the player may not necessarily be the same, and different actions may be required. However, when a different action is desired, the action target display (simulated image display) is also displayed as a different display.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the above-described "first reception validity determination in which the player's motion is a valid motion" is allowed without displaying the model image display (or the remaining time display). A plurality of reception periods are prepared, including the 3B reception period (FIGS. 206 to 208) having "display state". In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1, when such a 3B reception period (first display state) occurs, the reception validity determination is permitted or the reception validity determination is permitted. Since it is possible to output a reception acceptable sound that suggests that the player is not displaying the simulated image display, it is not possible to fully recognize which one is the target of the action by the player. However, it became possible to recognize that the player is in a situation where some kind of action is required (a situation in which an opportunity to operate is given), and as a result, many players You will be expected to enjoy the performance. As a result, unlike the 2B reception period, even though it is a reception period in which the "reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid movement" is allowed without displaying the model image display, the so-called hidden button can be used. Even a player who is insensitive to performance can enjoy the game. However, the acceptable reception sound may not be output when the 3B reception period occurs. In addition, "the state in which the model image display (or the remaining time display) is not displayed" means that the model image display (or the remaining time display) cannot be visually recognized on the display screen. good. For example, it includes a state in which an image is displayed on a layer but is not visible due to priority display of an image on another layer. Further, the “simulated image display (or remaining time display)” here means an image displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectations shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d). is doing. Therefore, as long as it is not possible to determine which of these modes is being displayed, it can be said that it is in a "state in which the model image display (or the remaining time display) is not displayed" (conversely, For example, if it is possible to determine which of these modes the display is in, even if it is not displayed in a visually pleasing mode, the state in which the "simulated image display (or remaining time display) is displayed" ”).

In addition, it was decided that the acceptable reception sound output when the 3B acceptance period occurs is realized as the "third acceptance sound", but it is also output (as acceptance acceptance sound) when other acceptance periods occur. It is desirable that the sound be For example, if the reception allowable sound is output even when a reception period in which the same action opportunity (for example, pressing operation on the operation button 410) as the 3B reception period is given occurs, a model image display is displayed. Even if it is not given, it is possible to suitably suggest to the player which action opportunity (operation opportunity) is to be given (given). In addition, for example, if the acceptable acceptance sound is output even when an acceptance period occurs during which an action opportunity (for example, sheathing the sword ornament 5001) different from the 3B acceptance period occurs, While it is difficult for the player to predict which action opportunity (operation opportunity) will be given while the model image display is not displayed, some action opportunity (operation opportunity) will be given (given state).

In addition, in the 3B receiving period according to the above-described effect example, as shown in FIG. 208 and the like, first, the "first display state" in which the model image is not displayed appears. Thereafter, while the 3B reception period continues, the "second display state" in which the model image display is displayed appears. In other words, in this case, during the 3B reception period, it is initially generated as a so-called "hidden button", which can only be enjoyed by players who are sensitive to such effects. However, while the 3B reception period continues (before the set time (effective time) has expired), the model image display is displayed, so it is sensitive to the production. Even without it, many players will be able to notice this (3B reception period) and enjoy the performance. In addition, through such performance, it is expected that the ability to see that the so-called "hidden button" is occurring will be nurtured.

At this time, in the "second display state", as shown in FIGS. is desirable. That is, if the player does not accept the action in the "first display state" but accepts the action in the "second display state", it will take time until the model image is displayed. It is feared that the fact that the player could not recognize that the 3B reception period had occurred during the interval would be revealed to the surroundings, and that the lack of sensitivity to such effects would lead to a decrease in interest in the game. In this regard, in the "second display state", if the simulated image display is displayed in one of a plurality of different expectations (modes), the player can operate in the "second display state". Even if you accept it, "I was aware that I was in a state where I was allowed to accept actions from the time I was in the first display state, but I wanted to see the degree of expectation suggested by the model image display, so in the first display state , it will be possible to make it look like the player did not dare to accept the action.

In addition, in the 3B reception period (first display state), due to the nature of the so-called "hidden button", the 3B reception that allows the "reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid action" from any timing. It is difficult for the player to accurately recognize whether the period has occurred. In this case, if an operation (operation) is performed a little before the occurrence of the 3B reception period, the ``reception validity determination'' is not made, and the ``I thought the 3B reception period occurred, but It is feared that the player misunderstands that "I was mistaken" and that the 3B reception period ends without the player performing an action (operation).

Therefore, in the 3B reception period, the action (operation) by the player is performed before the timing tS2 at which the state (3B reception period) in which the "reception validity determination in which the player's action is the valid action" is allowed occurs. Even if there is, the action (operation) is not regarded as "reception validity determination" at that time, but when the 3B reception period starts (or after that), the 3B reception It is desirable to make it possible to target (based on) actions (operations) performed by the player prior to the period as "reception validity determination".

However, in this case, the detection itself of whether or not an action (operation) has been performed by the player is based on whether or not the 3B reception period in which "reception validity determination in which the player's action is a valid action" is allowed has occurred. You will be required to do so regardless of whether or not you do.

For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 206, even if the player performs an action (operation) slightly before timing tS2, this will be detected. However, when the action (operation) by the player is thus detected, the 3B reception period has not yet occurred. No “validity determination” is made. However, the presence of this detection information is stored as a memory (history), and after the occurrence of the 3B reception period, the detection information stored as the memory (history) within the 3B reception period Based on this, "receipt validity determination that the player's motion is a valid motion" is made. Then, the 3B post-acceptance effect is executed based on the "acceptance validity determination" thus obtained.

According to such a configuration, even if an operation (operation) is performed slightly before the occurrence of the 3B reception period, it can be accepted within the 3B reception period, As a result, it becomes possible to execute the post-acceptance production (3B post-acceptance production) triggered by this. As a result, it is possible to reduce the difficulty of accepting an action even while the so-called "hidden button" effect (first display state) is realized.

However, if the operation (operation) is performed significantly before the occurrence of the 3B reception period (before a predetermined time or more), it is possible to prevent the performance after the 3B reception from being executed with this as a trigger. desirable. Such a configuration can be realized, for example, by setting a time value to be stored as detection information.

Note that the configuration when the operation (operation) is performed slightly before the occurrence of the 3B reception period may be applied in the same way during the 1B reception period and the 2B reception period, or may not be applied. You may do so.

Also, at this time, regarding the action (operation) performed before the occurrence of the 3B acceptance period, the action (operation) is not in the above-mentioned "second display state" after the occurrence of the 3B acceptance period, It is desirable that the validity determination can be accepted (reception validity determination) in the "first display state". According to such a configuration, it is the timing (for example, the timing at which the first display state (3B reception period) occurs) after a short time has passed since the action (operation) by the player, and the model image is displayed. While the display is not displayed, it is determined that reception is valid, and the performance after reception is started. This suggests that the player's actions are properly accepted, rather than the so-called "automatic reception function" when there is no action (operation) despite the display of the model image. can be done, and it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, in the above-described production examples (FIGS. 206, 212, 213, etc.), the case where the reception (reception validity determination) is made in the "first display state" within the 3B reception period, and the 3B reception It was decided that the same mode would appear as the 3B post-acceptance production corresponding to the acceptance (Fig. 212 and Fig. 213). However, if the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made while in the "first display state" within the 3B acceptance period, or if the acceptance (reception valid It is more desirable to make the contents of the presentation different between when the determination is made and when the determination is made, in order to improve the performance of the reception period having the "first display state" and the "second display state". .

For example, in the above-described production examples (FIGS. 206, 212, 213, etc.), even if acceptance (reception validity determination) is made in the "first display state" within the 3B acceptance period, Similar to the case where acceptance (reception validity determination) is made in the "second display state" within the 3B acceptance period, after the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made, (not displayed until then) ) Integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed (Fig. 212 (a) to "F1 (Fig. 213 (d1) to Fig. 213 ( h1))”, or from FIG. 212(a) to “F2 (FIG. 213(d2) to FIG. 213(h2))”). However, instead of this, if the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made while in the "first display state" within the 3B acceptance period, this will be used as a trigger after the acceptance (reception validity determination) It is desirable not to display the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)).

According to such a configuration, from the player's side, it is possible to accept in the "first display state" where it is relatively difficult to accept due to the effect of the "so-called hidden button". It becomes possible to show the surrounding people that it is in a successful situation (by progressing the production while the model image display is not displayed) after the reception (reception validity judgment) is made, and the game becomes possible. It becomes possible to improve interest.

However, at this time, regarding the disappearance-related display (disappearing EF effect), even if it is accepted (acceptance validity determination) when it is in the "first display state" within the 3B acceptance period, the integrated model image While the display IG (simulated image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed (invisible), it is desirable to display it visibly. In other words, if the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made while the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed (invisible), If the integrated model image display IG is not displayed even after the reception is made, it is determined whether the reception period occurred as the 2B reception period or the 3B reception period (first display state). It becomes difficult to distinguish whether it occurred as In this regard, even if the integrated simulated image display IG (simulated image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) 2 display state”, the reception period is generated as the 3B reception period (first display state) instead of the 2B reception period. be able to suggest

In an example employing these configurations, if acceptance (reception validity determination) is made in the "first display state (see FIG. 212(a))" within the 3B acceptance period, the ) ~ (h1) or Fig. 213 (d2) ~ (h2), etc. are shown in the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)). It will be done in the absence of That is, when reception validity determination is made in the first display state, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed in any of the multiple modes. After the acceptance, the performance will start to be executed, and if the acceptance is determined to be valid in the second display state, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) will be displayed. Execution of the post-acceptance effect is started in the state displayed by any of the modes.

Alternatively, in the "first display state" during the 3B acceptance period,
・Even if the acceptance (reception validity judgment) is made, the 3B acceptance without displaying the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) after the acceptance is made A first period (first state, first timing) during which the post-production is executed;
・When the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made, after the acceptance is made (after the timing of the acceptance), the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed, and the display of the integrated simulated image display IG and the execution of the 3B post-acceptance effect are performed in parallel with a second period (second state, second timing). can be For example, in the first display state, it is desirable that the first period (first state, first timing) occurs first, and then the second period (second state, second timing) occurs. According to such a configuration, since the contents of the presentation differ depending on the timing at which the acceptance is made in the first display state, it is possible to improve the presentation during the acceptance period having the "first display state." It is expected that

In the "first display state" of the 3B reception period, at least one of the first period (first state, first timing) and the second period (second state, second timing) is included. may be included.

In the 3B reception period according to the example of the effect described above, if the set time elapses without the action by the player being accepted (Fig. 208(f)), it is the same as when the reception is made within the 3B reception period. Prevented the execution of the post-acceptance production (automatic reception production functioned). However, the 3B reception period may be generated as an object for which the automatic reception effect functions. In this case, automatic reception is not performed in the first display state, but in the second display state. Further, the first reception period may be generated as a target for which the automatic reception effect functions.

Also, in the 3B acceptance period, the timing at which the automatic acceptance is performed may differ according to the state of the effect (the state that the player can set). However, regardless of the timing of the automatic reception, the same post-reception effect as when the automatic reception is performed in the above "second display state" and the reception is made within the 3B reception period. should start running.

In addition, when the above-mentioned "second display state" occurs during the 3B reception period, the 3B reception period itself has already occurred before this, but with respect to the gauge image, The display (depiction of reducing the area described above) may be started from the state where the display area is the maximum value within the frame (it may be started from the state where the area has already been reduced). According to such a configuration, even if the remaining time as the acceptance period is actually already reduced, by starting to display the area of the gauge image from the maximum value, it is possible to increase the interest in the game. Decrease is suppressed. It is also possible to make the reception period appear as if it is the 1B reception period.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including the 1B reception period and the 2B reception period are prepared as reception periods. In the 1B acceptance period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is always displayed (see FIGS. 200, 201, etc.), and in the 2B reception period, the integrated model image display is performed regardless of the timing at which the reception validity determination is made. IG (simulated image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is always prevented from being displayed (see FIGS. 203, 204, etc.).

According to such a configuration, by providing two types of receiving periods with completely different performances, it is possible to give the player a clear choice when requesting an action (giving an opportunity to operate). It is expected that the game interest will be improved.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is further provided with a 3B reception period. Depending on the timing, the integrated model image display IG (model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) may be displayed, or the integrated model image display IG (model image display or , Remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) may not be displayed.

According to such a configuration, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is always displayed regardless of when the "reception validity determination" is made. or the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display (Frame image, gauge image)) can be shown as if the "2B acceptance period" is always occurring, and through the production of such uncertainty, the acceptance period is It becomes possible to suitably maintain the feeling of tension when it occurs.

In the 1B reception period, as shown in FIGS. 209 and 212, integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge Images)) should be able to be displayed. That is, in the 1B reception period according to the above-described effect example, the special mode (integrated simulated image display IGd) shown in FIG. 144(d) can be displayed, but the special mode does not appear in the 3B reception period. It is something that cannot be obtained. According to such a configuration, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is shown in FIG. 144(a) (integrated model image display IGa). When it is displayed, it becomes difficult to recognize which of the 1B acceptance period and the 3B acceptance period has occurred, and the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) )) is displayed in the special mode (integrated simulated image display IGd) shown in FIG.

In addition, during the 2B reception period, the acceptable reception sound is not output, and during the 3B reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed. It is desirable that the acceptance permission sound is output even when the acceptance is made without the acceptance and the effect after the acceptance is executed accordingly. That is, in this case, it can be suggested that the reception period occurred as the 3B reception period (first display state) instead of the 2B reception period.

In addition, the "reception sound", which is output in the same manner regardless of the mode (expectation) of the performance after reception, is output during the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, and is not output during the 2B reception period. good too. It is desirable to output the same mode as the "reception sound" in the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period. However, such a "reception sound" does not necessarily have to be output during the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period.

In addition, it is desirable to be able to display a disappearing EF effect (for example, the first disappearing-related display SKB1) that cannot appear during the 3B accepting period during the 1B accepting period. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the 1B reception period is occurring instead of the 3B reception period through the type of disappearing EF effect.

In addition, it is desirable to display the extinction EF effect (for example, the second extinction-related display SKB2) that can appear in the third B reception period during the 1B reception period. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period has occurred.

In the 1B reception period, the 2B reception period, and the 3B reception period, the objects (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001, etc.) to which the action opportunity is given may be the same or different. good too. However, if the target to which the action opportunity is given is different, the action target display (simulated image display) will be displayed as a different one.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of acceptance periods including the 1B acceptance period and the 3B acceptance period are prepared as the acceptance period. Then, when a "reception validity determination in which the player's motion is a valid motion" is made within the 1B reception period, the first reception is performed in any of a plurality of modes with different expectations based on the reception validity determination being made. 1B After-acceptance effect can be executed, and when "receipt validity determination in which the player's motion is a valid motion" is made within the 3B reception period, the degree of expectation is raised based on the acceptance validity determination. 3B post-reception production can be executed in any one of a plurality of different modes.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, whether the "reception validity determination" is made within the 1B reception period or the "reception validity determination" is made within the 3B reception period, the reception validity determination is performed, at least part of the display target area (specific area) of the integrated simulated image display IG (simulated image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is used to perform the extinction EF effect. Since it is made executable, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the acceptance validity determination is appropriately made (the acceptance period is terminated due to the acceptance of the operation by the player).

Also, as described above, in the 3B reception period, at what timing (first display state, second display state, etc.) is the acceptance validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action (valid operation)? , the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed, and the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image , gauge image)) may not be displayed. In this case, first, when the reception validity judgment is made under the situation where the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed, this is used as a trigger The extinction EF effect is executed in a predetermined area including at least a part of the specific area where the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed. On the other hand, even if the reception validity judgment is made in the situation where the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed, this is a trigger As such, it is desirable to execute the disappearing EF effect in the same manner as when the reception validity determination is made under the situation where the integrated model image display IG is displayed. According to such a configuration, even in a situation where the integrated model image display IG is not displayed, it is possible to favorably suggest that the reception validity determination is secretly made. It should be noted that if it is determined that the reception is valid in a situation where the integrated model image display IG is not displayed, the first acceptance period ends without the integrated model image display IG being displayed, and the EF disappears. The effect is executed using at least part of the area where the integrated model image display IG was to be displayed.

Also, at this time, during the 1B acceptance period, the integrated model image display IG is always displayed regardless of the timing at which acceptance validity determination is made to make an action (operation) by the player a valid action (valid operation). It is desirable to By preparing the 1B reception period in which such an integrated model image display IG is always displayed separately from the 3B reception period described above, combined with the configuration in which the disappearing EF effect is executed, it is safe It becomes possible to provide a feeling performance, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

In the 1B reception period, if the corresponding post-reception production is executed in the high expectation mode (Fig. 210 (f2) to (h2)), it is used as a disappearing EF production in the 3B reception period (Fig. 210 (e2) to (g2)) appear, but if different from the high expectation mode, the specific mode (Fig. 210 (e2) to (g2)) does not appear as the extinction EF effect, and a mode different from this (Fig. 210 ( It is desirable that e1) to (g1)) appear or that the extinction EF effect itself does not appear. According to such a configuration, when the extinction EF performance is executed corresponding to the 3B reception period, it is possible to give an image as if a high-expectation performance is being executed, and the amusement of the game is lowered. can be suppressed.

In the 1B reception period, the acceptable reception sound is output in a plurality of modes with different expectations, but in the 3B reception period, the acceptable reception sound may be output in only "one mode". According to such a configuration, when the reception permission sound having the "one mode" is output, the 3B reception period having the effect of "a so-called hidden button" may occur. Since it becomes possible to make the user wear the clothes, the feeling of tension can be preferably maintained. The "one mode" may be selectively output (by determination) even when the 1B acceptance period occurs. Also, in this case, it is desirable that the "one mode" be output as the mode with the lowest degree of expectation. In this case, it is expected that the sense of tension will be favorably maintained even in a situation where the acceptable acceptance sound is output in the mode with the lowest degree of expectation.

When a specific variation pattern is selected, both the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period may occur sequentially within the specific variation pattern. In this case, it is desirable that the 1B acceptance period occurs after the 3B acceptance period occurs. Further, in this case, the 1B acceptance period may occur. In this case, it is desirable to allow the 2B reception period to occur between the occurrence of the 3B reception period and the occurrence of the 1B reception period.

Further, it is desirable that the portent effect output when the 1B reception period occurs and the portent effect output when the 3B reception period occurs are different from each other. That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest which of the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period will occur by the precursor effect.

In addition, during the 3B reception period, as the disappearance EF effect, if there is a reception, a specific mode (for example, the second disappearance related display SKB2) will appear, and if there is no reception, a mode different from the specific mode (for example, the third disappearance It is desirable that the associated indication SKB3) appears or does not appear at all. On the other hand, in the 1B reception period, even if there is no reception, it is desirable that the same mode as when the reception is made appears as the extinction EF effect. That is, in the 3B reception period that combines the performance of the above-mentioned "1B reception period (so-called normal button production)" and the performance of the above-mentioned "2B reception period (so-called hidden button production)", It can be said that forgetting to operate (end of the reception period without reception) is more likely to occur than in the above-described "1B reception period (so-called normal button effect)". In this respect, according to the above configuration, if the operation is forgotten during the 3B reception period, the disappearance EF effect (for example, the second disappearance-related display SKB2) does not appear when the reception is made. It is possible to appeal to the player that he/she has forgotten to perform the action, and to appropriately maintain the tension when the acceptance period occurs thereafter. Become. On the other hand, during the 1B reception period, there is no element that is likely to be forgotten to operate. If the action is not accepted in spite of this, there is a possibility that the player dared to choose not to perform the action in the game. If "appealing that the player is in a situation where the player forgets to operate", the interest in the game may be lowered. Therefore, in the 1B reception period, even if there is no reception, it is desirable that the same mode as when the reception is made appears as the extinction EF effect.

In particular, in the 1B receiving period according to the example of the above-described effect, the mode of the extinction EF effect differs according to the mode (expectation) of the effect after receiving the 1B (see FIG. 210). Therefore, in the 1B acceptance period, even if there is no acceptance, if the same mode as when the acceptance is made appears as the extinction EF effect, after the 1B acceptance that appeared when the acceptance was made It becomes possible to recognize the mode (expectation level) of the performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, during the 2B reception period according to this embodiment, the player who performed in a state where the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed "Receiving validity determination" is possible in which the action of .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the "reception validity determination" is properly performed (the reception period has ended due to the player's operation being accepted). Thus, it is expected that the tension of the 2B reception period, in which the player is secretly asked for an action (secretly given an opportunity to operate), will be maintained even after the reception validity determination is made. become.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed during both the 2B reception period and the 3B reception period. It is possible to determine whether reception is valid by making the action performed by the player in the state a valid action. Then, in the 2B acceptance period, when the acceptance validity determination is made that the action performed by the player in the state where the integrated model image display IG) is not displayed is made as a valid action, the disappearing EF effect is not executed. , In the 3B reception period, when the reception validity determination is made that the action performed by the player in the state where the integrated model image display IG is not displayed is a valid action, the disappearing EF effect is executed. did.

According to such a configuration, while the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed, until the player performs an action, It is difficult to recognize which of the 2B reception period and the 3B reception period is occurring, but after the reception validity determination is made that this is a valid operation, the 2B reception period and the 3B reception period Since it becomes possible to recognize which has occurred, it becomes possible to prompt the player to take action.

Further, when the 4B condition is satisfied, the 4B acceptance period may be allowed to occur. Even during this 4B reception period, the action performed by the player while the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed is regarded as a valid action. Acceptance validity determination is possible. During the 4B acceptance period, acceptance is valid, in which actions performed by the player while the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) are not displayed are valid actions. When the determination is made, the extinction EF effect is executed as in the case of the 3B reception period. However, in the 4B receiving period, the extinction EF effect is executed in different modes according to the mode (expectation) of the corresponding 4B post-receiving effect. According to such a configuration, while the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed, until the player performs an action, It is difficult to recognize which of the 2B reception period, the 3B reception period, and the 4B reception period occurs, but after the reception validity determination is made that this is a valid operation, the 2B reception period and the 4th B reception period. In addition to being able to recognize which of the 3B reception period and the 4th reception period occurred, in the case of the 4th reception period, it will be possible to suggest the degree of expectation .

During the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, the integrated simulated image display IG (simulated image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed in the operation receiving section when an action by the player is received. It is desirable that the disappearing EF display is executed while the depiction of the appearing movement and the area reduction of the gauge image are continued.

In addition, each production example and another example described above may be realized by modifying the following configuration, and the following configuration (reception period) may be changed to another reception period (different type of production after reception). You may make it further provide as an omen effect display). That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least the 1B acceptance period, the 2B acceptance period, and the 3B acceptance period are accepted as the acceptance period during which the action (operation) by the player is accepted. I have. Among these, in the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, the disappearing EF effect can be executed based on the reception (reception validity determination) of the action (operation) by the player, and in the 2B reception period. As described above, even if the action (operation) by the player is accepted (acceptance validity determination), the disappearing EF effect is not executed.

In this regard, when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (reception validity determination) in the 1B acceptance period, the degree of expectation (jackpot pattern Appearance ratio) is low, and the 1B post-reception production is executed in a high degree of expectation (proportion of appearance of the jackpot pattern) in the same manner. You may do so. When such a configuration is applied to the example shown in FIG. 210, any of the modes (modes shown in FIGS. h2) appears, and regardless of whether or not the acceptance is made within the 1B reception period (modes shown in FIGS. 210 (d3) to (g3)), the disappearing EF As the effect, one predetermined mode will always appear. In other words, the 1B reception period means that no matter at which timing within the period the reception (reception validity determination) is made (and even if the reception is not made), the integrated model The display of the image display IG (simulated image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is continued. In this case, the situation is such that information such as "in which form the integrated model image display IG (model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) was displayed" is provided. Therefore, if different information is provided by the disappearing EF effect, there is a concern that the effect will become too complicated. In this regard, in such a 1B reception period, any aspect (the aspect shown in FIGS. 210(d1) to (h1), the aspect shown in FIGS. 210(d2) to (h2)) of the 1B post-reception production Appears, and regardless of whether or not the acceptance is made within the 1B acceptance period (modes shown in FIGS. 210 (d3) to (g3)), the extinction EF effect is predetermined By ensuring that one aspect always appears, the concerns described above can be resolved.

In addition, when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (reception validity determination) during the 3B acceptance period, the degree of expectation for the effect after the 3B acceptance (the jackpot pattern is The annihilation EF performance can be executed in different modes depending on whether it is performed in a mode with a low appearance rate or when the performance after receiving the 3B reception is performed in a mode with a high degree of expectation (rate of appearance of the jackpot pattern). You may do so. The 3B reception period has a performance with a "so-called hidden button", and it can be said that it is positioned as a "reception period with a high degree of difficulty", so even after the reception is made, Different effect information can be obtained from both the mode of the simulated image display IG (simulated image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) and the mode of the extinction EF effect. It is desirable in terms of giving the audience a stimulus in terms of performance.

It should be noted that when such a configuration is applied to the example shown in FIG. It is desirable to be different from any of the multiple aspects of. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the acceptance has not been made, and the acceptance period is the effect of the above-mentioned "1B reception period (so-called normal button effect)" and the above-mentioned "2B reception period. It is possible to suggest that it had both the effect of "period (so-called hidden button effect)".

Further, as described above, in another example for the 3B acceptance period, when the acceptance is made while in the "first display state" within the 3B acceptance period, the integrated model image display IG (simulated) is displayed after the acceptance. Image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) will not be displayed. That is, in this case, after the acceptance is made, information such as "in which mode the integrated model image display IG (model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) was displayed" is provided. Under such circumstances, it is desirable to provide information (expectation level information regarding post-acceptance performance) by disappearing EF performance in order to improve the game interest.

Further, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (acceptance validity determination) in the 1B acceptance period, the disappearing EF effect is executed in a mode different from the mode that appears when the acceptance is made. can be This makes it possible to recognize that the acceptance has not been made, and if the aspect cannot appear in the 3B acceptance period, the acceptance period is the above-mentioned "1B acceptance period ( It can be suggested that both the performance of the so-called normal button performance) and the performance of the above-described ``2B reception period (so-called hidden button performance)'' were not combined.

In addition, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (acceptance validity determination) during the 3B acceptance period, the disappearing EF effect is executed in the same mode as the mode that appears when the acceptance is made. may According to such a configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not there is a situation in which an acceptance has been made, so it is possible to enhance the performance as a "so-called hidden button".

As for these modified examples, it is not necessary to apply all of these configurations to the above-described production examples and other examples thereof. For example, an appropriate combination or only one of the configurations (modifications) may be applied to the above-described production example or another example thereof.

Next, a case where some of the modifications described above are applied to the above-described production examples will be described. That is, FIG. 214 is a modification of the "effect that appears when the acceptance is made during the 1B acceptance period or when the acceptance is not made" shown in FIG. 210, and FIG. This is a modified example of "effect that appears when acceptance is made in the 3B acceptance period or when acceptance is not made". It should be noted that, in this modified example, for configurations that are not particularly mentioned, "examples of effects related to the 1B reception period (Figs. 200 to 202, 209, and 210)" 208, Figures 212, and 213)", and can be applied to the "example of presentation regarding the 1B reception period" and the "example of presentation regarding the 3B reception period". is also applicable.

In the modification shown in FIG. 214, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted (acceptance validity determination) during the 1B acceptance period, the 1B post-acceptance effect is expected based on the acceptance (acceptance validity determination). When it is executed in a mode with a low degree of probability (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) (see FIG. 214 (d1) to (h1)), and a mode with a high degree of expectation (percentage of the appearance of the jackpot pattern) after receiving the 1B reception ( 214(d2) to (h2)), the extinction EF effect is executed in the same mode. Here, the second disappearance-related display SKB2 is executed as the disappearance EF effect.

However, in the modification shown in FIG. 214, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (acceptance validity determination) during the 1B acceptance period (see FIGS. 214(d3) to (g3)), As the extinction EF effect, there appears a mode that does not appear when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (acceptance validity determination) in the 1B acceptance period. Here, the third disappearance-related display SKB3 is executed as the disappearance EF effect.

On the other hand, in the modification shown in FIG. 215, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted (reception validity determination) during the 3B acceptance period, the 3B reception is performed based on the acceptance (reception validity determination). When the post-production is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) (see FIG. 215 (d1) to (h1)), and the degree of expectation (percentage of the appearance of the jackpot pattern) of the 3B after-reception production 215 (see d2 ~ (h2)) and when executed in a high mode (see d2 ~ (h2)) is designed to be executed in a different mode EF effect.Here, expectations (proportion of the appearance of the jackpot pattern) (see FIGS. 215(d1) to (h1)), the first extinction-related display SKB1 is executed as the extinction EF effect, and executed in a manner with a high degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of big hit symbols). 215 (see d2 to (h2) in FIG. 215), the second disappearance-related display SKB2 is executed as the disappearance EF effect.

Further, in the modification shown in FIG. 215, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (acceptance validity determination) during the 3B acceptance period (see FIGS. 215(d3) to (g3)), As the extinguishment EF effect, the mode that appears when it is assumed that the action (operation) by the player has been accepted (acceptance validity determination) during the 3B acceptance period appears. That is, in the example shown in FIGS. 215(d3) to (g3), since the first disappearance-related display SKB1 is displayed as the disappearance EF effect, the action (operation) by the player is accepted ( 215 (d1) to (h1), it becomes possible to recognize that the development progress shown in FIGS. 215(d1) to (h1) has occurred. On the other hand, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (acceptance valid determination) during the 3B acceptance period, and the second disappearance-related display SKB2 is displayed as the disappearance EF effect, the 3B acceptance period 215 (d2) to (h2), it becomes possible to recognize that the performance development shown in FIGS. 215(d2) to (h2) has occurred .

In the 1B reception period according to such a modification, as a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that appears when the reception is made, a post-reception effect corresponding to the 3B reception period according to the modification (after the 3B reception A "second disappearance-related display SKB2" that is displayed when the effect is executed in a highly anticipated mode is used. That is, in this case, in the 1B reception period according to the modification, as long as the reception is made, it is possible to give an image that the performance after reception is executed in a highly expected manner, and the game is played. It becomes possible to improve interest.

Note that the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) corresponding to the 3B acceptance period according to the modification does not necessarily have to be the “second disappearance-related display SKB2”. For example, as the disappearance-related display (disappearing EF effect) corresponding to the 1B reception period according to the modification, the post-reception effect (1B post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1B reception period is executed in a mode with low expectations. Even if the "first disappearance related display SKB1" displayed at the time is used, is it accepted in the 1B reception period according to the modification, or is it in the state of being accepted in the 1B reception period according to the modification? It is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the application has been accepted during the acceptance period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this modified example, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1B reception period, the "third disappearance-related display SKB3" is displayed as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect). I am going to display it.

It is desirable that the "third disappearance-related display SKB3" is not displayed in relation to the 3B acceptance period according to the modification. That is, in this case, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1B reception period, the reception period is the above-mentioned "1B reception period (so-called normal button effect)". It can be suggested that it did not have both the above-mentioned "2B acceptance period (so-called hidden button effect)" and the effect of the above-mentioned "2B reception period (so-called hidden button effect)".

Further, it is preferable that the "third disappearance-related display SKB3" is not displayed when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 1B acceptance period according to the modification. That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest more preferably that the 1B acceptance period has ended without acceptance being made.

By the way, for the 3B acceptance period according to this modification, if acceptance is made in the "first display state", "integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, 215(d1)-(h1) or FIGS. 215(d2)-(h2), etc. is performed while the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed. That is, when reception validity determination is made in the first display state, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed in any of the multiple modes. After the acceptance, the performance will start to be executed, and if the acceptance is determined to be valid in the second display state, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) will be displayed. Execution of the post-acceptance effect is started in the state displayed by any of the modes.

Also in the 3B reception period according to this modification, the player receives the signal before the timing tS2 in which the state (3B reception period) in which the "reception validity determination in which the action by the player is the valid action" is permitted occurs. Even if there is an action (operation) by ), and the configuration according to the above another example, such that it is possible to make a "reception validity determination" targeting (based on) actions (operations) by the player performed before the 3B reception period. Alternatively, it is possible to apply a configuration related to the first period (first state, first timing) and the second period (second state, second timing).

In the 3B reception period according to the modification, when a low-expectation aspect appears as the 3B post-reception production ((d1) to (h1) in FIG. 215), the first disappearance-related display SKB1 is executed as the disappearance EF production. However, the disappearing EF effect itself may not appear.

In addition, during the 1B reception period according to the above modification, as the extinction EF effect, a specific mode appears when there is reception (FIGS. 214(d1)-(h1) and FIGS. 214(d2)-(h2)). 214(d3)-(g3)), when there is no acceptance, the disappearing EF effect itself may not appear.

In addition, in the 1B reception period according to the modification, the second disappearance-related display SKB2 is executed as a specific mode (disappearance EF effect) when there is a reception, but it is different from the second disappearance-related display SKB2. may be performed in any manner. For example, even if it is executed in the first extinction related display SKB1, whether the acceptance is made during the 1B acceptance period or the acceptance is made during the 3B acceptance period. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize.

Next, specific examples of the above "Configuration 5-B" to "Configuration 9-B" will be described. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 has production contents (for example, a conversation notice, a cut-in notice, a movable object notice, etc. as productions after reception) that progress when the reception is received. There are multiple reception periods (reception effects) with different types), and it is possible to generate a type of reception period (reception effect) according to the result of the judgment (jackpot judgment, production judgment, etc.). Here, as a plurality of reception periods (reception effects), at least the 1C reception period (1C post-reception effects), the 2C reception period (2C post-reception effects), and the 3C reception period (3C post-reception effects). I have it ready.

With reference to FIGS. 216 to 230, the characteristics of each reception period (reception effect) will be described. It should be noted that the reception periods described above with reference to FIG. Production) may be prepared as a reception period separate from the 1C reception period (1C reception production), 2C reception period (2C reception production), 3C reception period ( 3C post-acceptance effect) may be realized as any one of them. In order to realize the inventions described below, it is sufficient to have only the necessary configuration among the configurations described below. You can choose not to prepare.

FIGS. 216 to 218 are time charts showing an example of the effect content when condition 1C is satisfied as a result of determination (big hit determination or effect determination) and the 1C reception period (1C reception effect) occurs. . 225 and 226 are diagrams showing examples of effects in variation patterns in which the 1B reception period (1B reception effect) occurs.

Now, the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is non-probable variable / non-time saving), and the "1st C fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, a performance determination (announcement performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 1C variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (effect depiction according to the 1C variable pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 1C variable pattern, etc.) is started ("Situation shown in FIG. 225 (a) ”), during the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) according to the result of the determination of the previous notice performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected “1C variation pattern” itself. Become.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 216(a), when the timing tT2 comes after the 1C predetermined time has passed since the variable effect of the decorative symbol SZ is started (when the condition 1C is satisfied). , generates the 1C acceptance period (effective period) in which "acceptance of performance after 1C acceptance" is permitted ("situation shown in FIGS. 209(b) and (c)"). As a result, when the action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 1C acceptance period (if the acceptance is determined to be valid), the 1C reception after-acceptance effect is performed based on the acceptance (acceptance validity determination). become.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), in relation to the occurrence of such a 1C reception period, the reception target (operation receiving unit etc.), the remaining time display that suggests the remaining time of the reception period (effective period) (the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image decreases as time passes Depiction), disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image display, 1C post-reception effect display that suggests the degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) according to acceptance (reception validity determination) are to be carried out respectively. As described above, the simulated image display according to this embodiment is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display (description that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time passes). However, it is not necessarily limited to this, and may be displayed separately. This also applies to other acceptance periods.

More specifically, first, when the 1C reception period occurs at timing tT2, as shown in FIGS. 1 effect device), as the integrated model image display IG, "model image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)" are displayed. The integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) may appear at the timing tT2, or may appear before the timing tT2 and straddle the timing tT2. may be displayed in It should be noted that the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is accepted (reception validity determination) within the 1C reception period or when the reception (reception validity determination) is made. is hidden when the 1C acceptance period ends without The 1C reception period according to this example ends when the timing tT3 arrives when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (reception validity determination) (see FIG. 216(a)).

In addition, in the 1C reception period according to this example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) can be any of a plurality of modes (for example, FIGS. 144 (a), (d)) FIG. 225(b) shows a case where the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(a). FIG. 225(c) corresponds to the case where the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 144(d). In addition, during the 1C reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in one of a plurality of modes including the modes shown in FIGS. 144(b) and (c). may be made.

FIG. 216 assumes a case where "receipt valid determination is made that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" when the relatively early timing tT2a within the 1C reception period arrives. there is That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 216(a), based on the fact that the action by the player is accepted at timing tT2a (acceptance validity determination is made), the 1C accepting period ends and the Execution of the post-reception effect (1C post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1C reception period is started.

It should be noted that an example in which the production progresses from FIG. This corresponds to the case where the first mode with a relatively low degree of expectation is executed, and the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 225(b) to "G2 (FIGS. This corresponds to the case where the second mode with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as the after-reception effect (1C after-reception effect) corresponding to the 1C reception period. "0%" or "100%" may be included.

In this regard, in the 1C reception period, as shown in FIG. 216, at the timing tT2a when the action by the player is accepted (when the effect is started after the reception of the 1C in response to the reception), The "simulated image display IG" is not hidden, and the integrated simulated image display IG is not made difficult to see.

That is, the effect after receiving the 1C reception according to this embodiment includes the "effect display after receiving the 1C" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) and the second effect device (for example, sub liquid crystal, movable ``Specific effect after reception of 1C'' using the body, effect lamps, etc.) and the effect sound after reception of 1C using the third effect device (speaker) are realized as a combined effect at least. (It may not necessarily be realized as a composite effect by three effect devices), but among those effect devices, an effect in which an integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed In the display device 1600 (first effect device), the timing of starting execution of the "first reception effect display" as the 1C post-reception effect is delayed compared to other effect devices. The visibility of the "integrated model image display IG" is intentionally maintained even after the acceptance is made by .

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 226 (d1) or (d2), even after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is displayed in a plurality of modes (FIG. 144 ( Since the player can easily recognize which one of a) to (d)) was displayed, it is expected that the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed appropriately. become.

Here, after the end of the acceptance period, in order to facilitate recognition of the mode in which the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period, it is necessary to consider the "integrated model image display" after the acceptance. It can be said that it is desirable to set a longer time period during which the IG is displayed in an easily visible form. However, even though the acceptance has been made and the post-acceptance effects (the second effect device and the third effect device) are already being executed, the integrated model image display IG is during the acceptance period. If it continues to be displayed in the same mode, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the acceptance has been made. There is a concern that

Therefore, in the examples shown in FIG. 216(b) and FIG. (When the timing tT2b arrives), display related to disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display is started.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the “extinction related display (extinction EF Effect)” is displayed, and at least part of the area where the “disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)” is displayed is “integrated model image display IG (simulated image display, gauge image display)”. overlaps the area where is displayed.

With such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see. It becomes possible to suggest that the effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the gaze of the player will naturally shift from the integrated model image display IG to the post-acceptance effect (second effect device, third effect device) (after timing tT2b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception production (the second production device and the third production device) has already been executed, the integrated model image display IG can be continuously displayed for a relatively long time although it is difficult to visually recognize it. is made possible, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period.

In addition, in the 1C reception period, as the corresponding post-reception production (1C post-reception production), a low-expectation aspect (FIG. 226 (d1) to (h1)) appears, and a high-expectation aspect ( 226(d2) to (h2)), different forms (first disappearance-related display SKC1, second disappearance-related display SKC2) appear as disappearance-related displays. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 226(e1) and (e2), the "effect display after reception of 1C" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet started. Even so, it is confirmed whether the disappearance-related display appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is displayed as "first disappearance-related display SKC1" or "second disappearance-related display SKC2". As a result, it becomes possible to guess whether or not the "effect display after reception of 1C" will be executed in a highly expected mode.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 216(b), FIG. When the timing tT2c within the period in which the mode) appears, the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the acceptance of the action by the player within the 1C reception period. Execution of "1C post-acceptance display UGC1 (cut-in effect)" is started. However, here, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. As shown in f1), the first mode (here, the 1C post-reception effect display UGC1-1 as a cut-in effect by the princess character)) is the 1C post-reception effect display UGC1 corresponding to the 1C reception period. 226 (f2 ), the second mode (here, the 1C post-reception effect display UGC1-2 as a cut-in effect by the samurai character) is displayed as the 1C post-reception effect display UGC1 corresponding to the 1C reception period. It is designed to be

That is, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKC1, second disappearance-related display SKC2)" are displayed, respectively, the "1C post-reception effect display UGC1 ( Execution of "1C post-acceptance display UGC1-1" or "1C post-acceptance display UGC1-2") is started. As a result, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed for a relatively long time after being accepted within the 1C reception period, the reception by the first effect device (effect display device 1600) After production (1C reception after reception production display UGC1 can be started without a large delay compared to other production devices, it is possible to suppress the decline in game interest. Since the effect display UGC1 after the 1C reception is started while the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, it is suggested that the 1C reception period has already ended, and the target of the player's attention is indicated. is expected to naturally shift from "integrated model image display IG" to "1C post-reception production display UGC1 (1C post-reception production display UGC1-1 or 1C post-reception production display UGC1-2)". (after timing tT2c).

On the other hand, for the "1C post-reception effect display UGC1 (1C post-reception effect display UGC1-1 or 1C post-reception effect display UGC1-2)", the area where the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed. When displayed so as to overlap with at least a part of (it does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "integrated model image display IG", and "1st C The “integrated model image display IG” is preferentially displayed with respect to the post-reception effect display UGC1 (1C post-reception effect display UGC1-1 or 1C post-reception effect display UGC1-2). As a result, even when the execution of the "1C post-reception effect display UGC1 (1C post-reception effect display UGC1-1 or 1C post-reception effect display UGC1-2)" is started, the integrated model image is displayed within the reception period. This makes it easier to recognize in which mode the IG was displayed.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display of "1C post-reception effect display UGC1 (1C post-reception effect display UGC1-1 or 1C post-reception effect display UGC1-2)" is started, , as shown in FIG. 216(b), FIG. -2)” is displayed, first, out of the “integrated model image display IG” and the “disappearance-related display”, the “integrated model image display IG” is hidden. After the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 216(b), FIG. Display SKC1 or second disappearance-related display SKC2" is hidden, and under the condition that visibility is good, "1C post-reception effect display UGC1 (1C post-reception effect display UGC1-1 or 1C post-reception effect display UGC1-1 or 1C Effect Display UGC1-2)” after reception is performed.

In this regard, the “1C post-accepting effect display UGC1” refers to a plurality of modes with different expectations (here, the 1C post-accepting effect display UGC1-1 or 1C It is displayed in one of the post-acceptance display UGC1-2). Therefore, the "1C post-reception effect display UGC1" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display" are hidden.

Further, in the production example (FIGS. 225 and 226) corresponding to the 1C reception period, when the reception is made within the 1C reception period and the "production display UGC1 after reception of the 1C" is executed, the "1C The background image is switched before and after the "post-acceptance effect display UGC1" is started.

226(d) and (e) (timings tT2a to tT2b shown in FIG. 216) where the background image is not switched, the effect display device 1600 1 effect device), even if there is a change in effect, it is possible to suggest that the "1C post-reception effect display UGC1" has not yet started.

It should be noted that, in this production example, the timing of the start of display of the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKC1, second disappearance-related display SKC2)" is changed to "display UGC1 after reception of 1C" and "change background" ( Although the display is started at a timing (timing tT2c) later than the timing tT2b), the timing (timing tT2b) at which the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKC1, second disappearance-related display SKC2)" starts to be displayed. The display may be started at the same timing (timing tT2b).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 226, the background image is switched to the same background image for the appearance of a low-expectation aspect and the appearance of a high-expectation aspect as an effect after reception. The background image may be switched to a different one depending on whether the aspect with a low degree of expectation appears or the aspect with a high degree of expectation appears. Also, the background image may be switched when a mode with a high degree of expectation appears, but the background image may not be switched when a mode with a low degree of expectation appears.

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, when the 1C reception period occurs, it is within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 216), In addition, various displays are performed within a limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decline in the interest in the game. However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tT2c) of the 1C post-reception effect (1C post-reception effect display) in response to the acceptance is set earlier than the received timing tT2a. The reality is that it has to be delayed.

Therefore, in this example, when the player's action is accepted within the 1C acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. 1C post-reception performance (specific performance after 1C reception) using the second performance device is started prior to the 1C post-reception performance (1C post-reception performance display) using the first performance device. I'm trying

According to such a configuration, the execution start is delayed from the timing tT2a at which the reception is received in the 1C reception period only for a part of the 1C post-reception effect (display of the 1C post-reception effect). Execution of the 1C post-receipt effect itself can be started without delay from the same timing tT2a.

Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or may be a movable object capable of effecting operations, or It may be provided as a production lamp capable of emitting light. In any case, it is provided so that effects (display effects, movable effects, light-emitting effects, etc.) can be performed in a plurality of modes with different expectations. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. Then, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. , the mode in which "women's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is the specific effect UTC1 after the 1C reception corresponding to the 1C reception period. As a 1C post-reception specific effect UTB1-1), which is a low-expected aspect of the post-specific effect UTC1, precede the 1C post-reception effect (1C post-reception effect display UGC1-1) using the first effect device. and start executing. On the other hand, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. d2), the mode in which "men's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is the specific effect UTC1 (second As the 1C post-reception specific effect UTC1-2), which is a highly expected aspect of the 1C post-reception specific effect UTC1, the 1C post-reception effect using the first effect device (1C post-reception effect display UGC1-2) Execution is started prior to .

In addition, in the effect example shown in FIG. 225, apart from the "integrated model image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) also has a 1C reception period. An effect within the acceptance period is executed to indicate that the situation has occurred (FIGS. 225(b) and (c)). The effect within the acceptance period on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is a mode in which the “integrated model image display IG” on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is expected less (see FIG. 225 (b)). ) and the highly expected mode (see FIG. 225(c)) are displayed in the same mode.

That is, in this case, during the 1C accepting period in which the player is provided with an action opportunity (operating opportunity), the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) displays different modes depending on the degree of expectation, and The same mode appears on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second rendering device) regardless of the degree of expectation. However, after this, if "receiving valid determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made within the 1C receiving period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) will display "integrated model image display IG ” continues (while the degree of expectation for the post-reception production has not yet been suggested), the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) shows a different mode according to the degree of expectation. Become. According to such a configuration, it is possible to obtain performance information more quickly by paying attention to an appropriate performance device from time to time rather than watching only the performance by one performance device. Since it becomes like this, it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

In this production example, the degree of expectation is suggested by which of the "specific production UTC1-1 after the reception of the 1C" and the "specific production UTC1-2 after the reception of the 1C" appears as the specific production UTC1 after the reception of the 1C. However, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of modes for the specific effect UTC1 after receiving the 1C. For example, as the 1C post-reception specific effect UTC1, only “1C post-reception specific effect UTC1-2” is provided, and depending on whether or not the 1C post-reception specific effect UTC1 appears ratio) may be suggested. That is, in this case, it is suggested that when "the specific effect UTC 1-2 after receiving the 1C" appears, the expectation level is higher than when the "specific effect UTC 1-2 after receiving the 1C" does not appear. Become.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is further provided with a third effect device (speaker). , the reception allowable sound is started to be output. That is, the acceptable reception sound corresponding to the 1C reception period is audibly output across the timing tT2 (corresponding to "situation shown in FIGS. 225(b) and 225(c)") at which the 1C reception period occurs. In this way, the action (operation) by the player can be accepted while the acceptance acceptance sound is audibly output.

Here, in the 1C reception period, as reception allowable sounds, a first long allowable sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively long time and a first short allowable sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively short time and are output respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 216(d), the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound are started to be output at the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, one of the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound may be started to be output at or after timing tT2 when the first C reception period occurs.

Then, in the 1C acceptance period, when the action is accepted by the player while the first long allowable sound and/or the first short allowable sound are audibly output, the action is accepted based on the acceptance. , the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are terminated in the middle (the audible output state is terminated in the middle).

In this regard, as for the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound, as shown in FIG. )) and a case of execution (audible output) in a highly expected manner (case shown in FIG. 225(c)). That is, in this case, although the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound suggest the degree of expectation within the reception period, unlike the "integrated model image display IG", the reception (reception Since it will be executed as something that cannot be confirmed when the validity judgment) is made, there is tension about when to make the acceptance (validity judgment) within the acceptance period It becomes expected to maintain good feeling.

Further, in the 1C acceptance period, if the player accepts an action while acceptance acceptance sounds (first long acceptance sound and first short acceptance sound) are audibly output, the acceptance acceptance sound is terminated halfway. In addition, when the acceptance is made, the audible output of the 1C post-acceptance effect sound is started based on the acceptance. The 1C post-acceptance production sound is executed in such a way as to suggest the degree of expectation. output). That is, in this case, in the 1C reception period, unlike the production (display production) performed by the first production device, the production (acceptance acceptable sound) performed within the reception period and the acceptance There is no conflict (overlapping) with the effect to be performed (effect sound after reception of 1C).

Such a 1C post-reception production sound is, like the '1C post-reception production display UGC1', as shown in FIG. Effect)” will continue to be executed for a relatively long period of time even after it is hidden. In addition, regarding the 1C post-reception production sound, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 225(b) to “G1 (FIG. case) and an example in which the production progresses from FIG. It is desirable to output an output sound (mode).

In the 1C reception period, the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound are output as the reception permissible sounds, respectively. Only allowable sounds may be output.

In addition, when the reception (reception validity determination) is made in the 1C reception period, the third production device can hear not only the 1C post-reception production sound that suggests the degree of expectation, but also the "reception sound" that does not suggest the degree of expectation. It will be output. That is, the "reception sound" is an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 225(b) to "G2 (FIG. 226(d2)-(h2))" (in the case where the expectation is relatively high as a post-acceptance production) audible output in the same manner It is what is done. Such "acceptance sound" is audibly output (regardless of the degree of expectation) even when acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is made in a reception period different from the 1C reception period. According to such a configuration, no matter how novel the performance after reception is performed, the reception (reception validity determination) is properly performed when the "reception sound" is audibly output. Since it becomes possible to suitably recognize that it is in, it is possible to encourage concentration on the content of the presentation after reception.

On the other hand, FIG. 217 assumes a case where "receiving valid determination that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made when such a relatively late timing tT2A within the 1C accepting period arrives. is doing. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 217(a), based on the fact that the action by the player has been accepted at timing tT2A (acceptance validity determination has been made), the 1C accepting period ends and the Execution of the post-reception effect (1C post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1C reception period is started.

In this regard, in the 1C reception period, even if the reception (reception validity determination) is made at the relatively late timing tT2A within the 1C reception period (when the reception (reception validity determination) is made at any timing) Even if there is), basically, the production progresses in the same manner as when the reception (reception validity determination) is made at the relatively early timing tT2a within the 1C reception period. Therefore, also in the case of the example shown in FIG. 217(a), when the production progresses from FIG. 225(b) to "G1 (FIGS. 225 (b) to "G2 (FIG. 226 (d2) to (h2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as the reception performance). , and in the first effect device, the second effect device, and the third effect device, basically, the effect is executed with the contents as described with reference to FIG. 216 and the like. .

However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 217, in the situation shown in FIG. The display area of is further reduced. Also, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 226, as shown in FIG. Therefore, the first short permissible sound is not terminated halfway (halfway termination of the audible output state) due to the acceptance (validation of acceptance determination).

Further, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 217, the time period during which the "1C post-acceptance effect display" based on acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is displayed is shorter than in the example shown in FIG. will be destroyed. In other words, the "specific effect after reception of 1C" and the "effect sound after reception of 1C" are executed only for a predetermined time (fixed time) from the time of acceptance (determination of acceptance validity). On the other hand, the "1C effect display after reception" is terminated (not displayed) when a predetermined timing tT4 in the fluctuation pattern arrives, regardless of the timing at which the reception (reception validity determination) is made. It is a thing. According to such a configuration, it is expected that the sense of tension regarding at what timing during the reception period the reception (reception validity determination) is to be made is maintained.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 218 and the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. This assumes a case where (operation) is not performed and reception (reception validity determination) is not performed.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 218, after the occurrence of the 1C reception period, the above-described timing tT3 arrives without the action (operation) by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tT3 (when the 1C receiving period ends and the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is no longer permitted), timing tT2a and Effect display device 1600 (first effect device ), as shown in FIG. 226(d3), the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted in time and the 1C reception period ends, the integration is performed within the 1C reception period after the end of the 1C reception period. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the model image display IG was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

After that, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. (Disappearance EF effect) is started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect )” is displayed, and at least part of the area where the “disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)” is displayed is the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)”. It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated simulated image display IG continues to be displayed after the 1C reception period ends without acceptance, the integrated simulated image display IG is visually recognized. By making it difficult to accept the request, it becomes possible to suggest that the 1C reception period has ended. Also, even in a situation where the 1C reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the first C reception period, the "first disappearance-related display SKC1" is displayed as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect). We are planning to let That is, in this case, if the action (operation) by the player has been accepted within the 1C acceptance period, it is expected that the player will sense the possibility that the effect after the 1C acceptance suggests that the degree of expectation is low. The Rukoto. As a result, it becomes possible to urge the player to think that he or she did not need to perform the action (operation) within the 1C reception period, and the enjoyment of the game decreases when the action (operation) is not accepted within the 1C reception period. is expected to suppress

However, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1C reception period, the "second disappearance-related display SKC2" may be displayed as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect). A mode different from both the first disappearance related display SKC1 and the second disappearance related display SKC2 may be displayed.

In addition, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1C reception period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is assumed to be accepted when the action (operation) is accepted. It may be performed in any manner that it may appear. That is, in this case, the case where the "first disappearance-related display SKC1" appears in the situation shown in FIG. 225(b) to "G1 (FIGS. 226(d1)-(h1))" means the case where the production has progressed (when the production after reception with relatively low expectations is executed). becomes. On the other hand, in the situation shown in FIG. 226(e3), the case where the "second disappearance-related display SKC2" appears means that if the action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 1C acceptance period, the situation shown in FIG. b) to "G2 ((d2) to (h2) in FIG. 226)" (when the post-acceptance production with relatively high expectations is executed). . That is, in this case, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted during the 1C acceptance period, the integrated model image display IG is hidden after the 1C acceptance period ends. By only confirming the mode of "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" appearing as a can be recognized, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

After that, as shown in FIG. 226(f3), out of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance related display (the first disappearance related display SKC1 in the figure)", the "integrated Hide the model image display IG. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. It will be displayed.

By the way, in the 1C reception period according to this example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is not in the form shown in FIG. 209(c)), as described above. When the situation shown in FIG. 225(c) appears, it is different from the case where the situation shown in FIG. The only difference is the aspect as "image)", and otherwise the production progresses in the same aspect.

For example, when the production progresses from FIG. 225(c) to “G1′”, the content and basic are substantially the same, and the mode of "integrated model image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGd". Only. In addition, when the production progresses from FIG. 225(c) to “G2′”, the contents and basic are substantially the same, and the mode of "integrated model image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGd". Only. Also, when the production progresses from FIG. 225(c) to "G3'", the content and basic are substantially the same, and the mode of "integrated model image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGd". Only.

In addition, in the 1C reception period according to this production example, for convenience of explanation, the 1C post-reception production (display UGC after 1C reception, specific production UTC after 1C reception, production sound after 1C reception) is described above. It was decided to execute with the same production content (type) as the 1B post-reception production corresponding to the 1B reception period. However, it is desirable that the post-reception production (post-reception display, post-reception specific production, post-reception production sound) be different in the content (type) of production between the 1B reception period and the 1C reception period.

Also, in the 1C reception period according to this production example, for convenience of explanation, the disappearance-related display SKC is executed as the same (type) as the disappearance-related display SKB corresponding to the above-described 1B reception period. However, the disappearance-related display does not necessarily have to be the same between the 1B reception period and the 1C reception period.

FIGS. 219 to 221 are time charts showing an example of the content of effects when condition 2C is satisfied as a result of determination (big hit determination or effect determination) and the 2C reception period (2C reception effect) occurs. . FIG. 227 is a diagram showing an effect example in a variation pattern in which the 2C reception period (2C reception effect) occurs.

Now, the starting condition is established (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is non-probable variable / non-time saving), and the "2nd C fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, effect determination (previous effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the second C variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (such as effect depiction according to the 2C variable pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 2C variable pattern, etc.) is started ("Situation shown in FIG. 227 (a) ”), during the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) according to the result of the determination of the previous notice performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected “2C variation pattern” itself. Become.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 219(a), when timing tU2 comes after the 2C predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect of the decorative symbol SZ (when the condition 2C is satisfied). , generate the 2C acceptance period (effective period) in which "acceptance regarding the effect after the 2C acceptance" is allowed. As a result, when the action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 2C acceptance period (if the acceptance is judged to be valid), the 2C reception after-acceptance effect is performed based on the acceptance (acceptance validity judgment). become.

However, in the 2C reception period according to this embodiment, unlike the case where the 1C reception period occurs, when the operation by the player is accepted (reception validity determination) ), the integrated model image display IG (“model image display” or “remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)”) is not displayed.

More specifically, in the 2C fluctuation pattern, as shown in FIGS. 219(b) and 227(b), the 2C reception period occurs when the timing tU2 arrives, and the integrated model image display IG (" "Simulated image display" and "Remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)") are displayed. The 2C acceptance period ends when the timing tU3 arrives when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (acceptance validity determination) (see FIG. 219(a)).

FIG. 219 assumes a case in which "reception validity determination that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made when relatively early timing tU2a arrives during the 2C reception period. is doing. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 219(a), the 2C acceptance period ends based on the fact that the player's action (operation) is accepted (acceptance validity determination is made) at timing tU2a. At the same time, the post-reception effect (2C post-reception effect) corresponding to the 2C reception period is started to be executed.

227(b) to FIG. 227(c), the 2C post-reception production corresponding to the 2C reception period (“2C post-reception production display” or “2C post-reception specific This corresponds to the case where the second mode with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as "effect", "effect sound after 2B acceptance", etc.). As the 2C post-reception effects ("2C post-reception effect display", "2C post-reception specific effects", "2C post-reception sound effects", etc.), the first modes with relatively low expectations are executed. 227(b), the omitted mode (the first mode with a low degree of expectation) is executed after receiving the 2C. There are also cases where there is. However, regarding such a 2C reception period, when the "reception validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made, the effect after the 2C reception ("effect display after the 2C reception" or " 227(c) shows whether or not the 2C post-acceptance specific effect, 2C post-reception effect sound, etc.) is executed in the manner shown in FIG. It may be realized as a type in which the low-expectation mode as the 1C post-acceptance specific effect, 1C post-acceptance effect sound) is not prepared. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

In this regard, in this production example (2C reception period), as described above, as shown in FIGS. At timing tU2a, which is the point in time when the production is started after receiving 2C in response to , the integrated model image display IG ("model image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)") is displayed. there is no FIG. 227(c) more strictly shows the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at timing tU2c shown in FIG. 219(c). That is, at the timing tU2a, among the effects after the reception of the 2C, the "effect display UGC2 after the reception of the 2C (group advance notice effect)" is not executed, and the "specific effects after the reception of the 2C UTC2-2" and the "specific effects UTC2-2 after the reception of the 2C" Post-production sound (high expectation mode)" is to be executed. According to such a configuration, since the production progresses in the same manner as in the case of the 1C reception-after-reception production, it is possible to obtain the above-described effects in the same manner.

Therefore, in this production example (2C reception period), as shown in FIGS. The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) described above is not executed. This is because, at the timing when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (when the effect is started after receiving the 2C reception in response to the acceptance), the integrated model image display IG (“model image display” or “remaining image display”) This is because the time display (frame image and gauge image) is not displayed, and there is no need to make it difficult to see.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 219(b) and FIG. ``2C post-reception effect display UGC2 (in the figure, a group announcement effect by a ghost character, which is a highly anticipated mode, 2C after receiving the effect display UGC2-2)”. 219(b) and 227(d), the "2C post-reception effect display UGC2" started in this manner is executed for a predetermined time from the reception (reception validity determination). It will be terminated (hidden) when (a certain amount of time) has passed.

It should be noted that in the production example (Fig. 227) corresponding to the 2C acceptance period, unlike the case of the 1C acceptance period, the background image is switched when the "2C acceptance display UGC2" is executed. never.

Further, when the action by the player is accepted within the 2C accepting period, as shown in FIGS. 219(b) and (c), the second effect device is used based on the acceptance The 2C post-reception performance (2C post-reception specific performance) is started prior to the 2C post-reception performance (2C post-reception performance display) using the first performance device.

Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or may be a movable object capable of effecting operations, or It may be provided as a production lamp capable of emitting light. In any case, it is provided so that effects (display effects, movable effects, light-emitting effects, etc.) can be performed in a plurality of modes with different expectations. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. 227(b) to FIG. 227(c) (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as the post-acceptance effect), the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) displays "ghost". is displayed as the above-mentioned post-2C reception specific effect UTC2 corresponding to the 2C reception period (2-2C post-reception specific effect UTC2-2, which is a high-expectation mode of the post-2C reception specific effect UTC2). , execution is started prior to the 2C post-reception effect (2C post-reception effect display UGC2-2) using the first effect device. As described above, the explanation of the case where the low-expectation aspect is executed as the effect after receiving the 2C reception is omitted, but the “display after the 2C reception effect” and the “specific effect UTC2 after the 2C reception” are the low-expectation modes. , and is basically the same as when it is run in the high-expectancy mode.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is further provided with a third effect device (speaker). However, when the 2C reception period occurs, as shown in FIG. 219(d), no reception acceptance sound is output.

Further, in the 1C reception period, when the reception is made, the audible output of the 2C post-reception effect sound is started based on the reception. The 2C post-acceptance production sound is executed in such a way as to suggest the degree of expectation. output).

In addition, when acceptance (reception validity determination) is made in the 2C reception period, the third effect device can hear not only the 2C post-reception effect sound that suggests the degree of expectation, but also the "reception sound" that does not suggest the degree of expectation. It will be output. That is, the "reception sound" is audibly output in the same manner regardless of whether the 2C post-reception effect is executed in a high-expectation mode or a low-expectation mode.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 220 and the progress from FIGS. 227(b) and 227(e) to FIG. It is assumed that a reception validity determination is made in which an action (operation) by the player is regarded as a valid action. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 220(a), the 2C reception period ends and the 2C reception period ends based on the fact that the player's action is accepted (reception validity determination is made) at timing tU2A. Execution of the post-reception effect (2C post-reception effect) corresponding to the 2C reception period is started.

In this respect, in the 2C reception period, even if the reception (reception validity determination) is made at the relatively late timing tU2A within the 2C reception period (when the reception (reception validity determination) is made at any timing) Even if there is), basically, the production progresses in the same manner as when the reception (reception validity determination) is made at the relatively early timing tU2a within the 2C reception period. Therefore, at the time when the operation by the player is accepted (receipt validity determination) (or at the time when the performance is started after the acceptance), the integrated model image display IG ("model image display" or "remaining time display ( A frame image and a gauge image)”) are never displayed. 220(a), 227(b), and 227(e) to FIG. 227(c). is omitted (when the degree of expectation is relatively low as an effect after reception), basically, in the first effect device, the second effect device, and the third effect device, see FIG. 219 etc. The performance will be executed with the contents as explained while doing so.

In particular, in the 2C reception period, unlike the 1C reception period, the "effect display after the 2C reception" is the same as the "specific effect after the 2C reception" or the "effect sound after the 2C reception". Since it is executed only for a predetermined time (fixed time) from the time (reception validity judgment) is made, the mode as a post-reception production is also at the timing when the reception (reception validity judgment) is made. are the same regardless.

It should be noted that the ``effect display after 2C reception'', the ``specific effect after 2C reception'', and the ``effect sound after 2C reception'' may be performed only for a certain period of time set for each. It does not have to be finished at the same time.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 221 and the example in which the production progresses from FIGS. 227(b) and (e) to FIG. This assumes a case where the request is not accepted (determination of validity of acceptance).

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 221, after the occurrence of the 2C receiving period, the above-described timing tU3 arrives without the action (operation) by the player being received. In this respect, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted during the 2C accepting period, no effect related to the end is executed as shown in FIG. 221 .

It should be noted that in the 2C reception period, only one mode (in FIG. 227, the integrated model image display IGb (see FIG. 144(b))) is displayed as the model image display. The integrated model image display IGb is a mode that is not displayed during the 1C reception period or the 3C reception period. However, the 2C reception period is the time when the reception (reception validity determination) is made (or the time when the performance after reception is started), regardless of the timing of the reception (reception validity determination). ) is characterized in that no model image display (gauge image) is displayed. Therefore, during the 2C acceptance period, any mode may appear as the model image display, or any of a plurality of modes may be displayed. Also, during the 2C reception period, the model image display may not be displayed, and the gauge image may be displayed. Also, during the 2C acceptance period, the gauge image may not be displayed, and a model image display may be displayed. Further, neither the model image display nor the gauge image may be displayed during the 2C reception period.

In addition, according to the above-mentioned feature of the 2C reception period, after the reception is made, it is possible to concentrate only on the mode of production after reception without worrying about the mode of the model image display (gauge image). become. In this case, even if the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period are subject to the above-mentioned automatic reception function, the 2C reception period should not be subject to the above-mentioned automatic reception function. is desirable. As a result, the case where the performance after reception occurs is limited to the case where the player himself/herself who has confirmed the performance mode during the 2C reception period operates it, so the 2C reception period has ended. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game due to the non-display of the model image or the gauge image at the point in time or thereafter.

FIGS. 222 to 224 are time charts showing an example of the effect contents when condition 3C is satisfied as a result of determination (big hit determination or effect determination) and the 3C reception period (3C reception effect) occurs. . 228 to 230 are diagrams showing examples of effects in variation patterns in which the 3C reception period (3C reception effects) occurs.

Now, the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, normal game state that is non-probable variable / non-time saving), and "3rd C fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of fluctuation pattern determination Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, effect determination (previous effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the third C variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (such as effect depiction according to the 3C variable pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 3C variable pattern, etc.) is started ("Situation shown in FIG. 228 (a) ”), during the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) according to the result of the determination of the previous notice performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected “3rd C variation pattern” itself. Become.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 222(a), when the timing tV2 comes after the 3C predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (when the condition 3C is satisfied). , generate the 3C acceptance period (effective period) in which "acceptance regarding the effect after the 3C acceptance" is permitted. As a result, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 3C accepting period (if acceptance is determined to be valid), the 3C post-receiving effect is performed based on the acceptance (receiving valid determination). become.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), in relation to the occurrence of such a 3C reception period, the reception object (operation receiving unit, etc.) Suggested action target display (simulated image display), Remaining time display that suggests the remaining time of the acceptance period (effective period) (description that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image according to the passage of time), Disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image display, and 1C reception post-reception effect display that suggests the degree of expectation (percentage of the appearance of the jackpot pattern) according to the acceptance (reception validity determination). It is designed to be As described above, the simulated image display according to this embodiment is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display (description that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time passes). However, it is not necessarily limited to this, and may be displayed separately. This also applies to other acceptance periods.

In this regard, the 3C reception period according to this embodiment is the above-mentioned "performance by the 1C reception period (at the time of reception (or at the time when the performance is started after reception). Effect in which the image is displayed) and the effect due to the above-mentioned "2C acceptance period" (at the time of acceptance (or at the time when the performance is started after acceptance), a model image display or gauge image is displayed. It is realized as a special production that combines both the performance that has not been done).

More specifically, when the 3C acceptance period occurs during which the player is allowed to accept an operation, first, as shown in FIGS. (“Simulated image display” and “Remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)”) are displayed (timing tV2). However, during the 3C reception period, depending on at what timing within the 3C reception period the player's operation (reception validity determination) is accepted (reception validity determination) is made (or At the time when the post-effect starts to be executed), there are cases where the model image display and the gauge image are displayed and cases where the model image display and the gauge image are not displayed.

As will be described later, in this production example, as shown in FIG. If the operation is accepted (reception validity judgment), the model image display or gauge image will be displayed at the time the acceptance (reception validity judgment) is made (or at the time when the production starts after acceptance). If the operation by the player is accepted (acceptance valid determination) within the period (second period) from the timing Y to the end of the 3C acceptance period A model image display or a gauge image is displayed at the time point when the validity determination is made (or at the time point when the performance is started after acceptance). However, such an aspect is only an example. At the time when the post-effect starts to be executed), the model image display and gauge image are not displayed (not displayed), and the reception is received at the second timing different from the first timing within the 3C reception period (reception When the acceptance (validity judgment) is made (or at the time when the performance is started after acceptance), a model image display or a gauge image may be displayed.

According to such a 3C reception period, during the period from the occurrence of the 3C reception period to the arrival of the timing Y, even if the reception is made, the production after the 3C reception corresponding to this is integrated. The execution of the image display IG is started in a non-display state (invisible state), and the reception is performed from the timing Y to the timing tV3 when the 3C reception period ends. Execution of the 3C post-receipt production in response to the response is started in a state where the integrated model image display IG is displayed (it is sufficient if at least a part of the integrated model image display IG is visible). . As a result, in the 3C reception period according to this embodiment, the above-mentioned "performance by the 1C reception period (at the time of reception (or at the time when the performance is started after reception), the model image display and gauge Effect in which the image is displayed) and the effect due to the above-mentioned "2C acceptance period" (at the time of acceptance (or at the time when the performance is started after acceptance), a model image display or gauge image is displayed. It will be realized as a special effect that combines both the performance that is not performed), and it is expected that this will improve the game interest.

That is, in this case, through the adjustment of the operation timing for the 3C reception period, the player can visually recognize the form of the integrated model image display IG (simulated image display and gauge image) that was displayed during the 3C reception period. In order to start execution of the effect after receiving the 3C while the integrated model image display IG (model image display and gauge image) is displayed, or to concentrate on the effect after receiving the 3C It is now possible to substantially select whether to hide the integrated model image display IG (model image display or gauge image) and start executing the effect after receiving the 3rd C. You will be able to make improvements.

In order to more preferably realize such performance, in the 3C reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is one of multiple modes with different expectations 144(a), (c)), and FIG. , gauge image) is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(a), and FIG. 144(c)). Also during the 3C reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in any of a plurality of modes including the modes shown in FIGS. 144(b) and (d). may be made.

Then, in FIG. 222, during the above “first period (first state) (see, for example, FIG. 228(b))” (timing tV2a in the figure) of the 3C reception period, It is assumed that a "receipt valid determination that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 222(a), the 3C acceptance period ends based on the fact that the action (operation) by the player is accepted (acceptance validity determination is made) at timing tV2a. At the same time, the post-reception effect (3C post-reception effect) corresponding to the 3C reception period is started to be executed.

It should be noted that an example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 228(b) to "H2 ( 229(d2) to FIG. 229(h2))” is an example in which the “valid reception determination” is made during the “first period (first state)” of the 3C reception period. As a result, this corresponds to the case where the second mode with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as the "3C post-acceptance effect". The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, when the "reception validity determination" is made during the "first period (first state)" of the 3C reception period, the following is performed in FIG. 222(b), FIG. d2), at the timing tV2a when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (when the effect after receiving the 3C is started in response to the acceptance), the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed. is hidden and not displayed (made invisible).

According to such a configuration, when the action (operation) is performed by the player during the "first period (first state)" of the 3C reception period ("reception validity determination" is made case), the player performs a post-reception production (here, after the 3rd C reception It becomes possible to enjoy the specific performance UTC3).

In this regard, in the 3C reception period according to this production example, even if the action (operation) is performed by the player during the "first period (first state)", the reception is performed. When a predetermined time elapses from timing tV2a (when timing tV2b arrives), as shown in (e1) or (e2) of FIG. .

That is, in the 3C reception period according to this example, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the above-described "first period (first state)", at the timing tV2b, the "integrated Even though the imitation image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display) is already not displayed (invisible state), the ``disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)'' will start to be displayed. , and at least part of the area where the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed overlaps the area where the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" was displayed. It is designed to

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably suggest that the post-acceptance effect is being executed in association with the proper acceptance of the action by the player.

Also, during the 3C reception period, the performance as the above-mentioned "2C reception period" (at the time of acceptance (or at the time when the production starts after reception), the model image display and gauge image are displayed. If the acceptance is made during the above "first period (first state)" that provides a performance without performance), in which state is the acceptance made, the 2C acceptance period or the 3C acceptance period? is difficult to recognize, but by the appearance of the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" that cannot appear during the 2C reception period, it is possible to recognize that the reception has been made during the 3C reception period. become.

In addition, in the 3C reception period, as the production after reception of the 3C, the low-expectation mode (FIGS. 229(d1)-(h1)) and the high-expectation mode (FIGS. 229(d2)-(h2)) appear. The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is executed in the same manner as when appears. According to such a configuration, compared to the case of the 1C reception period (when the appearance of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) differs depending on the degree of expectation), after the acceptance is made within the 3C reception period, the "disappearance Since the importance of paying attention to the related display (disappearing EF effect) is low, combined with the fact that the model image display (gauge image) is not displayed, focus on what kind of mode will appear as the effect display UGC after receiving the 3C You will be able to

In addition, in the 3C reception period according to this production example, the after-reception production (1C post-reception production) corresponding to the 1C reception period is expected as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) that appears when the reception is made. A "second disappearance related display SKC2" that is displayed when executed in a high degree mode is used. That is, in this case, in the 3C reception period, as long as the reception is made, it is possible to give an image as if the performance after the reception is executed in a manner with a high degree of expectation, thereby improving the amusement of the game. You will be able to plan.

Note that the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) corresponding to the 3C receiving period does not necessarily have to be the “second disappearance-related display SKC2”. For example, as a disappearance-related display (disappearing EF effect) corresponding to the 3C reception period, it is displayed when the post-reception effect (1C post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1C reception period is executed in a manner with low expectations. The "first extinction-related display SKC1" may be used, or a mode that does not correspond to the first C acceptance period may be used as the extinction-related display.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 222(b), FIG. When the timing tV2c within the period in which the mode) appears, the first effect device (effect display device 1600) responds to the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player within the 3C acceptance period. Execution of the "3C post-acceptance-after-effect display UGC3 (conversation notice)" as the effect is started. However, here, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. As shown in f1), the first mode (here, the 3C post-reception effect display UGC3-1, which is a "silent" conversation notice) is displayed as the 3C post-reception effect display UGC3 corresponding to the 3C reception period. 228(a) to "H2 (FIGS. 229(d2)-(h2))" (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as an after-acceptance production), FIG. 229(f2) , the second mode (here, the 3C post-reception effect display UGC3-2, which is a conversation notice referring to "chance") is displayed as the 3C post-reception effect display UGC3 corresponding to the 3C reception period. It is designed to be

That is, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" is not displayed and the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2)" is displayed, the "3rd C acceptance post-reception effect display UGC3 ("3rd C Execution of the post-reception effect display UGC3-1 or the 3C post-reception effect display UGC3-2 is started.

In this regard, the “3C post-reception effect display UGC3 (“3C post-reception effect display UGC3-1” or “3C post-reception effect display UGC3-2”) is a “disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2). is displayed so as to overlap at least part of the displayed area (it does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2)" The "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2)" is preferentially displayed. In this way, by making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the gaze target (the effect display UGC3 after reception of the 3rd C reception), it is possible to encourage further concentration.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to "3C post-reception effect display UGC3 (3C post-reception effect display UGC3-1 or 3C post-reception effect display UGC3-2)" is started, , as shown in FIG. 222(b) and FIG. Or, while the 3C post-acceptance effect display UGC3-2)” is displayed, the “disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2)” is hidden, and this is considered to be good visibility. Originally, "3C post-reception effect display UGC3 (3C post-reception effect display UGC3-1 or 3C post-reception effect display UGC3-2)" is displayed.

In this regard, the “3C post-accepting effect display UGC3” refers to a plurality of modes (here, the 3C post-receiving effect display UGC3-1 Or it is displayed by either the 3C post-acceptance display UGC3-2). Therefore, the "3C post-reception effect display UGC3" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display" are hidden.

In this production example, the display of the "3rd C reception after-reception display UGC3" starts at a timing (timing tV2c) later than the timing (timing tV2b) at which the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2)" starts to be displayed. However, the display may be started at the same timing (timing tV2b) as the timing (timing tV2b) at which the “disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2)” is started.

In this example, when the player's action is accepted within the 3C acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. 3C post-reception performance (3C post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device is started prior to 3B post-reception performance (3B post-reception performance display) using the first performance device. I'm trying

According to such a configuration, even if the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) performs the disappearance-related display and then performs the effect display after receiving the 3C, the effect after receiving the 3C is displayed. As for itself, execution can be started without delay from the same timing tV2a.

Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or may be a movable object capable of effecting operations, or It may be provided as a production lamp capable of emitting light. In any case, it is provided so that effects (display effects, movable effects, light-emitting effects, etc.) can be performed in a plurality of modes with different expectations. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. Then, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. , the mode in which "Sueyoshi" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) corresponds to the above-mentioned 3C reception specific effect UTC3 (3rd reception specific effect after reception) corresponding to the 3C reception period As a 3C post-reception specific effect UTC3-1), which is an aspect of UTC3 with a low degree of expectation, it is executed prior to the 3C post-reception effect (3C post-reception effect display UGC3-1) using the first effect device. It is supposed to start. On the other hand, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. d2), the mode in which "good luck" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is the specific effect UTC3 after the 3C reception corresponding to the 3C reception period (after the 3C reception). As a 3C post-reception specific effect UTC3-2), which is a highly expected aspect of the specific effect UTC3, precedes the 3C post-reception effect (3C post-reception effect display UGC3-2) using the first effect device is to start running.

229, the "first period (first state)" of the 3C reception period (FIG. 229(b)) and the "second state" of the 3C reception period. period (second state)" and (Fig. 229(c)), the receiving period suggesting that the 3C receiving period has occurred in the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device). An internal production is to be executed. The effect within the reception period on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is a mode in which the "integrated model image display IG" on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is less expected (see FIG. 228(b)). ) and the highly expected mode (see FIG. 228(d)) are displayed in the same mode.

That is, in this case, during the 3C reception period in which the player is provided with an action opportunity (operation opportunity), the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) displays different modes depending on the degree of expectation, and sub In the liquid crystal 1610 (second rendering device), the same mode appears regardless of the degree of expectation. However, after this, when the ``receiving validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action'' is made during the 3C reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) ``integrates a model image. Display IG" is hidden (while the degree of expectation as an effect after reception has not yet been suggested), and a different aspect appears on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) according to the degree of expectation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to obtain performance information more quickly by paying attention to an appropriate performance device from time to time rather than watching only the performance by one performance device. Since it becomes like this, it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

In this production example, the degree of expectation is suggested by which of the "specific production UTC3-1 after reception of 3C" and the "specific production UTC3-2 after reception of 3C" appears as the specific production UTC3 after reception of 3C. However, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of modes for the specific effect UTC3 after receiving the 3C. For example, as the specific effect UTC3 after receiving the 3C, only the “specific effect after receiving the 3C UTBC-2” is provided. is obtained) may be suggested. That is, in this case, it is suggested that when "3C acceptance specific effect UTBC-2" appears, expectations are higher than when "3C acceptance specific effect UTBC-2" does not appear. Become.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is further provided with a third effect device (speaker), and when the 3C reception period occurs, the timing tV1 shown in FIG. , the reception allowable sound is started to be output. The acceptable reception sound corresponding to the 3C reception period is audible in a manner straddling both the timing tV2 at which the 3C reception period occurs and the timing Y at which the "first period" shifts to the "second period". The action (operation) by the player can be accepted while the reception acceptance sound is audibly output. However, the acceptable acceptance sound may be audibly output across the timing Y, and may not necessarily be audibly output across the timing tV2.

Here, in the 3C reception period, as the reception allowable sound, a third allowable sound different from the first long allowable sound and the first short allowable sound is audibly output. It becomes possible to suggest the occurrence (or occurrence) of the 3C reception period having multiple effects instead of the period. However, the reception allowable sound corresponding to the 3C reception period may be executed with either the first long allowable sound or the first short allowable sound.

In the 3C acceptance period, if the player accepts an action while the corresponding acceptance acceptable sound (here, the third acceptable sound) is audibly output, it means that the acceptance has been made. Based on this, the acceptable acceptance sound is not terminated in the middle (the audible output state is terminated in the middle), and this also causes the 3C reception period having a plurality of effects instead of the 1C reception period. (or what is happening). However, the acceptable reception sound corresponding to the 3C reception period may also be terminated halfway based on acceptance.

In this regard, regarding the acceptance acceptable sound (here, the third acceptable sound) corresponding to the 3C acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 228(b)) and in a highly anticipated manner (audible output) (shown in FIG. 228(d)).

222(d), the 3C post-reception effect sound is similar to the '3C post-reception effect display UGC3', as shown in FIG. 222(d). Even after is hidden, it will continue to run for a relatively long time. In addition, regarding the 3C post-reception production sound, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 228(a) to “H1 (FIG. case) and an example in which the production progresses from FIG. It is desirable to output an output sound (mode).

Further, when the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made in the 3C acceptance period, the third effect device can hear not only the 3C post-acceptance effect sound suggesting the degree of expectation but also the "reception sound" not suggesting the degree of expectation. It will be output. That is, the "reception sound" is an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 228(b) to "H2 (FIG. 229(d2)-(h2))" (in the case where the expectation is relatively high as a post-acceptance production) audible output in the same manner It is what is done. Such a "reception sound" is accepted (reception validity determination) in a reception period different from the 3C reception period (for example, the 1C reception period, or a predetermined reception period different from each reception period described above). audible output (regardless of the degree of expectation). According to such a configuration, no matter how novel the performance after reception is performed, the reception (reception validity determination) is properly performed when the "reception sound" is audibly output. Since it becomes possible to suitably recognize that it is in, it is possible to encourage concentration on the content of the presentation after reception.

On the other hand, from FIG. 223, FIG. 228(b), (c) to "H3 (FIG. 230(d3)-(h3))" or "H4 (FIG. 230(d4)-(h4)). An example that progresses is that in the above "second period (second state)" within the 3C receiving period (timing tV2A in the figure), "the action (operation) by the player is an effective action It is assumed that the reception validity judgment is made. That is, in this case, as shown in Fig. 223(a), Figs. 230(d3) to (h3) or Figs. Based on the fact that reception validity is determined, the 3C reception period ends and the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance) corresponding to the 3C reception period is started.

In this respect, in the 3C reception period, if the reception (reception validity determination) is made during the above "second period (second state)" within the 3C reception period (shown in FIG. 228(c) Even if the acceptance is made in a state where the acceptance is made), after the acceptance is made, basically, within the 3B acceptance period, in the above "first period (first state)" The effect is developed in the same manner as when the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made (when the acceptance is made in the state shown in FIG. 228(b)). Therefore, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 223(a) as well, from FIG. (h3))”), and the case where the production progresses in a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation as the production after reception from FIG. 228(c) (“H4 (FIG. (h4))”), and basically, in the first effect device, the second effect device, and the third effect device, while referring to FIG. The production is executed with the contents as described.

However, as described above, the 3C reception period according to this embodiment is the above-mentioned "performance by the 1C reception period (effect in which a model image display or a gauge image is displayed at the time when the production after reception is started. ) and the performance of the above-mentioned "2C reception period" (the performance that the model image display and the gauge image are not displayed at the time when the performance after reception is started). If acceptance (reception validity determination) is made during the above "second period (second state)" within the 3C reception period (shown in FIG. 228(c) If the acceptance is made in a state where it is accepted), the performance of the above-mentioned "1st C reception period" (the performance of displaying a model image or a gauge image at the time when the performance starts to be executed after acceptance) appears. It is a thing.

Therefore, it is clear by comparing "FIGS. 230 (d3) to (h3) or (d4) to (h4)" with "FIGS. 229 (d1) to (h1) or (d2) to (h2)". As described above, when acceptance (reception validity determination) is made in the above "second period (second state)" within the 3C acceptance period (in the state shown in FIG. 228(c), acceptance is If it is done), the display state of the integrated model image display IG will not be hidden and will continue at the time when the execution of the 3C post-acceptance effect is started.

It should be noted that such an integrated model image display IG is displayed at the time when the execution of the "3C post-reception effect display UGC3 (conversation notice)" is started (see FIG. 223 and FIG. 230 (f3) or (f4)). is not hidden and continues to be displayed. The integrated model image display IG is not displayed preferentially with respect to the "second extinction related display SKC2", but is displayed behind it, but with respect to the "3C post-reception effect display UGC3 (conversation notice)" It is designed to be preferentially displayed, thereby making it easy to recognize in which mode it was displayed during the acceptance period.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, after the reception (reception validity determination) is made in the above "second period (second state)" within the 3C reception period, in this way "after the 3C reception 223 (b), FIG. 230 (g3) or (g4) is started. , while the "3C post-reception effect display UGC3 (3C post-reception effect display UGC3-1 or 3C post-reception effect display UGC3-2)" is being displayed, first, "Integration "Integrated model image display IG" out of "model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display" is hidden. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 223(b), FIG. "Display SKC2" is hidden, and under the condition that the visibility is good, "3C post-reception effect display UGC3 (3C post-reception effect display UGC3-1 or 3C post-reception effect display UGC3- 2)” is displayed.

Other production modes when acceptance is made in the second period (second state) within the 3C reception period (for example, specific production after reception, disappearance-related display, display production after reception, allowable sound, production after reception, The reception sound, etc.) are as explained with reference to FIG. 229 (or are the same as the example of the effect shown in FIG. 213), so the explanation here is omitted.

It should be noted that, in the production examples (FIGS. 228 to 230) corresponding to the 3C acceptance period, even if the acceptance is made within the 3C acceptance period and the "3C acceptance display UGC3" is executed, the "3C acceptance display UGC3" is executed. The background image is not switched before and after the 3C reception effect display UGC3'' is started. According to such a configuration, the integrated model image display IG is displayed when the acceptance is made during the 1C acceptance period and when the acceptance is made during the second period within the 3C acceptance period. Although it is common in that the production is started after reception while the reception is in, by confirming whether the background image changes according to the reception, the above 1C reception period and the 3C reception period It becomes possible to make it possible to recognize which one has occurred. On the other hand, when the acceptance is made during the 2C acceptance period and the case where the acceptance is made during the first period within the 3C acceptance period, the integrated model image display IG is not displayed. In common in that the post-effect is started to be executed, by confirming whether or not the "disappearance-related display" is executed in response to the reception, the above-mentioned 2C reception period and the 3C reception period It becomes possible to make it possible to recognize which one has occurred.

Also, in the 3C reception period, the "effect display after reception of 3C" is similar to the "specific effect after reception of 3C" and "effect sound after reception of 3C", etc. Since it is executed for a predetermined period of time (fixed period of time), the aspect of the post-acceptance production is the same regardless of the timing at which the acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is made.

It should be noted that the "3C post-reception effect display", the "3C post-reception specific effect", and the "3C post-reception sound effect" may be performed only for a certain period of time set for each. It does not have to be finished at the same time.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 224 and the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. This assumes a case where (operation) is not performed and reception (reception validity determination) is not performed.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 224, after the occurrence of the 3C receiving period, the above-mentioned timing tV3 arrives without the action (operation) by the player being received. In this respect, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tV3 (when the 3C acceptance period ends and the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is no longer permitted), timing tV2A, etc. Similar to the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the time when the action (operation) by the player is accepted in the second period within the 3C acceptance period, the effect shown in FIG. 230 (d5) Thus, the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted in time and the 3C reception period ends, the integration is performed within the 3C reception period after the end of the 3C reception period. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the model image display IG was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

After that, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. (Disappearance EF effect) is started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect )” is displayed, and at least part of the area where the “disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)” is displayed is the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)”. It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated simulated image display IG continues to be displayed after the 3C reception period ends without acceptance, the integrated simulated image display IG is visually recognized. By making it difficult to access, it is possible to suggest that the 3C reception period has ended. Also, even in a situation where the 3C reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 3C reception period, the "third disappearance-related display SKC3" is displayed as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect). We are planning to let

It is desirable that the "third disappearance-related display SKC3" is not displayed in relation to the 1C acceptance period. That is, in this case, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 3C acceptance period, the acceptance period is the above-mentioned "performance by the 1C acceptance period (at the time of acceptance ( Or, at the time when the performance starts to be executed after acceptance), the performance in which the model image display or the gauge image is displayed), and the performance due to the above-mentioned "2C reception period" (at the time when the reception is made (or It is possible to suggest that it had both (at the time when the post-effect starts to be executed) and the effect that the model image display and the gauge image are not displayed).

Further, it is desirable that the "third disappearance-related display SKC3" is not displayed when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 3C acceptance period. That is, in this case, it is possible to more preferably indicate that the 3C acceptance period has ended without acceptance being made.

After that, as shown in FIG. 230(f5), out of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance related display (the third disappearance related display SKC3 in the figure)", the "integrated Hide the model image display IG. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. It will be displayed.

By the way, in the 3C reception period according to this example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is not in the mode shown in FIG. (c)) and may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 144(c) (see FIGS. 228(d) and (e)), as described above. When the situations shown in FIGS. 228(d) and 228(e) appear, the situations shown in FIGS. Model image display, frame image, gauge image)” is different, but otherwise the presentation progresses in the same manner.

For example, when the production progresses from FIG. 228(d) to “H1′”, the content and basic are substantially the same, and the mode of "integrated model image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGc". Only. Also, when the production progresses from FIG. 228(d) to "H2'", the content and basic are substantially the same, and the mode of "integrated model image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGc". Only. Also, when the production progresses from FIG. are substantially the same, and the mode of "integrated model image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGc". Only. Also, when the production progresses from FIG. are substantially the same, and the mode of "integrated model image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGc". Only. Also, when the production progresses from FIG. 228(e) to "H5'", the contents and basic are substantially the same, and the mode of "integrated model image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGc". Only.

In addition, in the 3C reception period according to this production example, for convenience of explanation, the 3C reception production (display UGC after 3C reception, specific production UTC after 3C reception, production sound after 3C reception) is described above. It was decided to execute with the same production content (type) as the 3B post-reception production corresponding to the 3B reception period. However, it is desirable that the post-reception effects (post-reception display, post-reception specific effects, post-reception sound effects) have different effects (types) between the 3B reception period and the 3C reception period.

Further, in the 3C receiving period according to this production example, for convenience of explanation, the disappearance-related display SKC is executed as the same (type) as the disappearance-related display SKB corresponding to the above-described 3B receiving period. However, the disappearance-related display does not necessarily have to be the same between the 3B acceptance period and the 3C acceptance period.

According to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present application, in which the 1B reception period to the 3B reception period are prepared, the following excellent effects are achieved.

First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the content of the production that progresses when the reception is received (cut-in notice, group notice, conversation notice, etc. as production after reception, notice production (expectation suggestive production) (Type of ) are prepared for multiple acceptance periods (1C acceptance period to 3C acceptance period), and it is possible to generate a type acceptance period (effective period) according to the result of the judgment (effect judgment). It has become.

In this regard, in the 1C reception period to the 3C reception period, when the action by the player is accepted, the effect display after reception (the effect display after the 1C reception to the effect display after the 3C reception effect display) can be displayed in the "effect display device 1600". Of these, in the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, when an action by the player is accepted, not only is the effect display after acceptance based on the acceptance made, but also the "disappearance related display ( disappearing EF effect)” is made to appear further. That is, in this case, even after the acceptance is made, it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared as the model image display (or gauge image), as well as the model image display (or gauge image) Until the is hidden, the visibility is reduced by ``modes that make it difficult to see the simulated image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) (disappearance-related display)''. It is expected that the player's gaze target will naturally shift from the "simulated image display (or gauge image)" to the "post-acceptance effect display". It should be noted that the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" can be used in common for a plurality of reception periods in which the content of the effect that progresses when received is different (Fig. 226 ( e2) and FIG. 229(e2), etc.).

However, since the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are originally displayed during the acceptance period when the acceptance has not yet been made, the model image display will continue after the acceptance has been made. or the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the post-reception display according to the reception has been displayed, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease. be. In this regard, when the reception is made in either the 1C reception period or the 3C reception period (second period), the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed as "model image display and remaining time While the display (frame image, gauge image) is hidden (invisible) while the display (frame image, gauge image) is difficult to see (disappearance-related display), The time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed while the mode (disappearance-related display) is appearing. In other words, in this case, after the player accepts the action, while "an aspect (disappearance-related display) in which the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see" appears, A shift in the display effect from the previous display (simulated image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) to the post-acceptance display (post-acceptance effect display) is realized.

It should be noted that both the mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display) and the post-acceptance effect display are displayed based on acceptance. common point. However, the ``mode (disappearance-related display) in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see'' is, for example, shown in FIG. When a model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) appear to make it difficult to see. It is what is done. On the other hand, "effect display after acceptance" means display of a model image or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), as shown in Fig. 226 (f1) or Fig. 230 (f3). Even if it is displayed in such a situation, the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) appear so as not to be difficult to see.

In this regard, in the above example, when the acceptance is made in the first period of the 3C acceptance period, the disappearance-related display and the post-acceptance effect display are displayed as a model image, as shown in FIG. And the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is started while it is already hidden, so the player concentrates on ``what kind of effect display will appear after reception?'' be able to In addition, a model image display and a remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed by adjusting whether the operation is to be accepted in the first period or the second period within the 3C acceptance period. Either make it so that the post-acceptance display starts to be executed while the state continues, or hide the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) and then execute the post-acceptance display. It is now possible to select whether to start the game, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, regarding "modes in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)", "make the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) difficult to see" As a method of "appearing like", at least part of the area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) In addition to the method of realizing priority display (display on the front layer) of a different image display from It is possible to employ a technique of displaying an image (moving image) that is made to appear partially missing (invisible) in the time display (frame image, gauge image). In addition, it is not a separate image display from the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), but the numerical value (transmittance etc.) can also be adopted. On the other hand, regarding the "effect display after reception", as a method of "appearing so as not to make it difficult to see the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)", model image display and remaining time display (frame image , gauge image) is displayed in at least a part of the area where the "reception effect display" is displayed, but the " In addition to the method realized by displaying (displaying on the rear layer) "effect display after reception", at least while the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, the model image display It is possible to employ a method or the like that is realized by displaying the "post-reception effect display" only in an area other than the displayed area.

In addition, as a form (disappearance-related display) in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see, the area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed A method of displaying an image display different from the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) in at least a part of the display of the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) itself It is also possible to adopt both a method of changing the numerical value (transmittance, etc.) related to the characteristic.

In addition, the ``mode in which the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display)'' refers to the ``reception display'' before the ``reception display'' is displayed. "Post-effect display" appears in a situation where it has not yet been displayed. That is, in this case, under the condition that the "effect display after reception" is not yet displayed, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are replaced with the above "model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)." ) becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)”, so while making the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) visible, “post-reception effect display " is likely to appear soon, so that the player's attention is changed from the "simulated image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) that is difficult to see". You will be able to encourage

Also, when accepted during the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period (second period), etc., "a mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" can be displayed even after the "effect display after reception" is displayed, and is hidden while the "effect display after reception" is displayed. As a result, during the period in which the "effect display after reception" is displayed, the "mode that makes it difficult to see the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) (disappearance-related display)" is hidden. In the subsequent period, we will be able to provide the performance related to the "post-reception display" in a wider range, so we will improve the game interest by changing the performance during such a display period. be able to

In addition, in each of the production examples described above regarding the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, as shown in FIGS. Mode (disappearance-related display)", not only the area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, but also the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) It is also displayed in areas that are not displayed. In this area, the "effect display after reception" is displayed in at least a part of it, but the "model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see. (disappearance-related display)" is displayed (for example, displayed in the rear layer) so that at least part of the "post-acceptance effect display" is difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, the disappearance-related display (disappearing EF effect) makes not only the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), but also the "post-reception effect display" difficult to see. Since it will appear, the effect until the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is hidden, and the effect when the display of "effect display after reception" starts It is expected to improve both sexuality and

Also, as described above, in each of the above-described production examples regarding the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the "post-reception production display" is displayed before the "post-reception production display" is displayed after the reception is made. In the situation where it is not displayed, apart from the disappearance-related display (disappearing EF effect), a specific effect after reception (using the second effect device) that does not make it difficult to see the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) It is possible to appear after the reception. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the post-acceptance production prior to this without interfering with the production of the first production device.

In addition, in each of the above-described production examples regarding the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the post-reception specific production (post-reception production using the second production device) is more likely than the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) to appear. The previous disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is made to appear in a situation where it has not yet appeared. Further, the post-acceptance specific effect (post-acceptance effect using the second effect device) is continued until after the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is terminated.

According to such a configuration, a person who dislikes complicated effects in the first effect device can enjoy the effect after reception by the second effect device having simplified effects. It is possible to improve amusement in games for various types of players.

Also, in each of the production examples described above regarding the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the simulated image display is displayed by dynamic display as described above with reference to FIGS. 145 and 146. . In this case, after acceptance, the dynamic display of the model image display continues (until it is hidden) even though the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) appears. It is desirable to

In addition, in each of the production examples described above regarding the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) is not only a model image display, but also a gauge that suggests the remaining time until the reception period ends. It was also decided to make it difficult to visually recognize the image. As a result, even when the gauge image is displayed even after the acceptance, it is possible to prevent it from appearing as if the remaining time remains.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 3C acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods, the "third 3C post-reception effect display UGC3" can be displayed, but apart from the 3C post-reception effect display UGC3, the mode (second disappearance Related display SKC2) can appear.

According to such a configuration, when the second disappearance-related display SKC2 appears, it is unclear which of the 1C and 3C post-acceptance effect displays will appear, but when the first disappearance-related display SKC1 appears, It is possible to guess that the effect display UGC1 will appear after receiving the first C.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is displayed (prioritized display ). However, the production using the production device (movable body, etc.) on the front side of the display screen must be executed at a position that overlaps at least a part of the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) when viewed from the front. It is also possible to realize by

Even if the same aspect (second disappearance-related display SKC2) appears as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect), if the reception period type is different, the big hit pattern will be stopped due to the pattern change. It is desirable to have different ratios (expectations) of

In addition, in the example of the production described above, it is possible to execute the production after reception (specific production after reception) using the second production device, and the production after reception (specific production after reception) is executed using the second production device. During the period, in the first production device, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively easy to see, and the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively visible. It is made to have a state where it is difficult to visually recognize it.

That is, in this case, even after the execution of the post-acceptance effect (specific post-acceptance effect) using the second effect device is started based on the acceptance, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) ), it is possible to confirm which aspect appeared. In addition, during the execution period of the post-acceptance effect (specific post-acceptance effect) using the second effect device, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are made relatively difficult to see. As a result, it is expected that the player's gaze target will be naturally shifted from the "first effect device" to the "second effect device".

In the production example described above, the post-acceptance production (post-reception specific production) using the second production device is a model image display that has been continuously displayed (displayed in an easy-to-see state) from before it is accepted, and the remaining time. The execution is started so as not to affect the visibility of the display (frame image, gauge image). More specifically, the simulated image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed in a predetermined area within the display screen (effect display device 1600). The effect after reception (specific effect after reception) is not an image display displayed using at least part of the predetermined area, nor is an effect executed at a position overlapping at least part of the predetermined area when viewed from the front. It is a thing.

Also, in the example of the effect described above, the post-acceptance effect display is started after the appearance timing of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect), but it is displayed at the appearance timing of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect). You may make it start.

Also, in each of the production examples described above, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) uses at least a part of the "area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed". It was decided to realize it as an image display to be displayed. However, in this case, it is desirable to display the image so that the area displayed in the "area where the simulated image is displayed" tends to gradually expand over time.

Further, as described above, the "simulated image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" according to this embodiment can be used as integrated simulated image display IG in multiple modes (integrated simulated image It can be displayed by any of the displays IGa to IGd). Further, according to each of the production examples described above, the display mode, including the display position, size, dynamic depiction, etc., may be maintained and continued even after acceptance. After that, it is possible to recognize in what manner the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) were displayed within the reception period.

As described above, the "simulated image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" may be displayed separately, or the "simulated image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)” may be displayed.

Further, in each of the production examples described above, when the "simulated image display" or "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" is in a non-display state, it means that the state is invisible to the player. For example, it is displayed on the layer, but by giving priority to other image display, the "model image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" are not visible. Meaning. However, if at least a part of the "simulated image display" or "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" is visible from the player side, this is the "simulated image display" or "remaining time display" (frame image, gauge image)” is made visible, so the “model image display” and “remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)” are hidden. It can be said that it is in a state where the display is continued.

Further, in each of the production examples described above, the post-acceptance specific production may be realized by the first production device (within the display screen of the production display device 1600) instead of the second production device.

In addition, in the 1C reception period, the 2C reception period, and the 3C reception period, the target of the action (operation) by the player may not necessarily be the same, and different actions may be required. However, when a different action is desired, the action target display (simulated image display) and remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) are also displayed as different displays.

By the way, if it is desired that the reception (reception validity determination) is performed in the first period (first state) of the 3C reception period, the reception validity determination is made for the player until the timing Y arrives. will be required to ensure that However, if the 3C reception period is set as "a valid period that lasts for 3 seconds", the first period (first state) can only have a period of about 1 second. becomes. That is, in this case, it is assumed that the player will act (operate) slightly before the occurrence of the 3C acceptance period due to impatience due to having to act (operate) within such a short time. be. In this case, even if the player tries to redo the action, if the timing Y has already arrived by then, there is a concern that the player will not be able to play the game as he/she wants, and that the interest in the game will decrease.

Therefore, in the 3C reception period, the action (operation) by the player is performed before the timing tV2 at which the state (3C reception period) in which the "reception validity determination in which the player's action is the valid action" is permitted occurs. Even if there is, the action (operation) is not regarded as "reception validity determination" at that time, but when the 3C reception period starts (or after that), the 3C reception It is desirable to make it possible to target (based on) actions (operations) performed by the player prior to the period as "reception validity determination".

However, in this case, the detection itself of whether or not an action (operation) has been performed by the player is based on whether or not the 3C reception period in which the "reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid action" is allowed has occurred. You will be required to do so regardless of whether or not you do.

For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 216, even if the player performs an action (operation) slightly before timing tV2, this will be detected. However, when the action (operation) by the player is thus detected, the 3C reception period has not yet occurred. No “validity determination” is made. However, the presence of this detection information is stored as a memory (history), and after the occurrence of the 3C reception period, the detection information stored as the memory (history) within the 3C reception period Based on this, "receipt validity determination that the player's motion is a valid motion" is made. Then, the 3C post-acceptance effect is executed based on the "acceptance validity determination" thus obtained.

According to such a configuration, even if an operation (operation) is performed slightly before the occurrence of the 3C reception period, it can be accepted within the 3C reception period. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the post-acceptance effect (3C post-acceptance effect) triggered by this. As a result, it is possible to reduce the difficulty of accepting the action even while the performance (first period) described above is realized.

However, if the action (operation) is performed significantly before the occurrence of the 3C acceptance period (predetermined time or more), it is possible to prevent the performance after the 3C acceptance from being executed with this as a trigger. desirable. Such a configuration can be realized, for example, by setting a time value to be stored as detection information.

Note that the configuration when the operation (operation) is performed slightly before the occurrence of the 3C reception period may be applied in the same way during the 1C reception period and the 2C reception period, or may not be applied. You may do so.

Also, at this time, with regard to the action (operation) performed before the occurrence of the 3C acceptance period, the action (operation) is changed to the above-mentioned "second period (second state)" after the occurrence of the 3C acceptance period. , it is desirable to be able to accept the validity determination (reception validity determination) in the above-mentioned "first period (first state)". According to such a configuration, acceptance validity is determined at the timing when a little time has passed since the action (operation) by the player is performed, and the execution of the post-acceptance effect is started. As a result, it can be suggested that the action by the player is properly accepted, rather than the so-called "automatic reception function" when there is no action (operation) even though the acceptance period has occurred. It becomes possible to do so, and it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including the 2C reception period and the 3C reception period are accepted as the reception period during which the player's action (operation) is accepted (reception validity determination). We have a reception period. Then, if the "reception validity determination that the player's motion is a valid motion" is made within the 3C reception period, the above-mentioned post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination (1C post-reception performance corresponding to the 1C reception period ) starts to be executed, an action target display (here, a model image display that imitates the action (operation) target by the player and has a plurality of modes with different expectations (FIGS. 144(a) to ( d))) may be displayed instead of being hidden (see FIG. 230), and during the 2C reception period, "Receipt validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action ” is performed, at the time when the above-mentioned post-reception effect (2C post-reception effect corresponding to the 2C reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started, the action target display (here, the action by the player ( The model image display (see FIGS. 144(a) to (d))) that imitates the target of the operation) and has multiple modes with different expectations (see FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d))) is not hidden and is never displayed. (Even if the acceptance is made at any timing, the model image display is in a non-display state at the time when the performance after acceptance is started) (see FIG. 227).

According to such a configuration, after the execution of the post-acceptance effect based on the "acceptance validity determination" is started, the action target display (here, a plurality of modes that imitate the target of the action by the player and have different expectations) (See FIGS. 144(a) to (d)). Since there are cases where the simulated image display (see FIGS. 144 (a) to (d))) having multiple different modes is not visible, the tension after the production is started after reception is expected to be well maintained.

Moreover, in the 3C reception period according to this embodiment, the reception is determined depending on at which timing (see FIGS. 222 and 223) the "reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid action" is made. At the time when the post-acceptance effect based on the validity determination (the 3C post-acceptance effect corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) starts to be executed, the action object display (see FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d)) is not displayed. (See FIG. 230), and when the operation target display ((See FIGS. 144(a) to (d))) is hidden (FIG. 229). (see ).

That is, from the player's side, the simulated image display is displayed in the "highly expected second mode (see FIG. 228(d))" among the multiple modes (see FIGS. 144(a) to (d)). When it is done, continuing to display this even after the execution of the post-reception performance (1C post-reception performance corresponding to the 1C reception period) based on the ``reception validity determination'' is started improves the game interest. It can be said that it is certainly preferable in terms of planning. However, when the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 228(b))" among the multiple modes, the after-reception production based on the "reception validity determination" (during the 3rd C reception period If the corresponding 3C post-acceptance effect) is continued to be displayed even after the start of execution, the game will inevitably lose interest in the game.

For example, the after-reception effect (the 3C after-reception effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) is such that, within its effective period (the 3C reception period), the model image display is the first mode with low expectations (Fig. 228(b) )” or “second mode with low expectations (see FIG. 228(d))”, there is a possibility that it will be executed in a mode with high expectations (furthermore, expectations possible to run in a less aggressive manner). Then, when the post-acceptance effect (the 3C post-acceptance effect corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) is executed in a manner with a high degree of expectation, although this alone is sufficient to improve the amusement of the game, At this time, if the model image display continues to be displayed in the "low expectation first mode (see FIG. 228(b))", it is clear that the game interest will be reduced. It can be said that it is desirable to hide the display of the model image. On the other hand, even if the post-reception effect (the 3C post-reception effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a low-expectation mode, at this time, the "high-expectation second mode (Fig. 228(d))”, it is possible to appropriately suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the execution of the post-acceptance effect in a mode with low expectations. Therefore, it can be said that it is desirable to continue the display of the model image without hiding it.

Alternatively, even if the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with a low degree of expectation (see FIG. 228(b))", some players believe that the effect after reception is a "mode with a low degree of expectation". As an "excuse" when it is executed in , I would like to keep the display state of the model image not hidden at the time when the production after reception is started. Even if the model image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations (see FIG. 228(d))", some players may think that the effect after reception is not performed. In order to suppress ``frustration'' when it is executed in a ``mode with low expectations'', the model image display is hidden and cannot be seen at the time when the production after reception is started. It seems that there are those who wish to live there.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when the 3C reception period occurs, the player can make a simulation through the timing (see FIGS. Either the after-acceptance effect is started while the image display is displayed (see FIG. 230), or the after-acceptance effect is started when the model image display is hidden and cannot be seen (see FIG. 229). See) can be substantially selected, it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

In addition, in the 2C reception period according to this embodiment, the operation target display is displayed in the 3C reception period (integrated model image display IGa shown in FIG. 228(b) and FIG. 228(d) (In the example shown in FIG. 227, the integrated simulated image display IGB), and at any timing "reception valid determination" was made However, at the time when the performance after reception (second C performance after reception) based on the validity determination of reception is started, the display of the object to be operated is not displayed and is always hidden. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest which of the 2C reception period and the 3C reception period is occurring from the time when the reception period in which the opportunity to operate is given to the player occurs. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

Regarding the 3C reception period, even if the action (operation) by the player is not performed, the same post-reception effect (3C post-reception effect) as when the action (operation) is performed is executed. (It may be a target for which the above-described automatic reception function is activated). However, in this case, when the 3C post-reception effect is executed based on the activation of the automatic reception function during the 3C reception period, the operation object display (model image display) is always displayed. That is, in this case, even if the execution of the post-3C acceptance effect is started by the automatic acceptance function before the player notices, the operation object display (simulated image display) is displayed in any mode during the 3C acceptance period. It becomes possible to easily recognize what has been displayed.

Further, when the "3C reception period" is targeted for the above-described automatic reception function, multiple different timings may be prepared according to the production mode or the like as the timing at which the automatic reception function is activated. However, regardless of the timing at which the automatic reception function is activated, when the effect after the 3C reception is executed based on the activation of the automatic reception function in the 3C reception period, the 3C reception period It is desirable that the action object display (simulated image display) is always displayed at the time when the effect after 3C acceptance is executed.

However, during the 2C acceptance period, when the action (operation) by the player is not performed, the same post-acceptance effect (2C post-acceptance effect) as when the action (operation) is performed is executed. It is desirable to prevent this from happening (not subject to activation of the automatic reception function described above).

Further, in the 3C reception period according to this embodiment, when the execution of the effect after the 3C reception is started while the operation target display (simulated image display) is being displayed (see FIG. 230), the operation In either case where the execution of the 3C post-reception effect is started while the target display (simulated image display) is hidden (see FIG. 229), the 3C post-reception effect (3C Post-reception specific effect UTC3, 3C post-reception effect display UGC3, 3C post-reception effect sound, etc.) are the same. Therefore, it is possible to select an effect mode and play a game from the viewpoint of how the player wants to enjoy the effect after the reception of the 3C.

Further, in the 3C reception period according to this embodiment, when the execution of the effect after the 3C reception is started while the operation target display (simulated image display) is being displayed (see FIG. 230), the operation In either case where the target display (simulated image display) is hidden and the execution of the 3C post-acceptance effect is started (see FIG. 229), the same mode as the disappearance related display (second Disappearance-related display SKC2) is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suitably suggest that the reception is properly performed in the 3C reception period, regardless of which mode the production progresses.

In the above effect example, in addition to the 2C reception period and the 3C reception period, the 1C reception period is further prepared. Even in the case of the timing of , the display of the action object is not hidden and is always kept displayed at the time when the performance after reception based on the validity determination of reception is started. That is, in this case, since the 3C reception period has both the performance of the 1C reception period and the performance of the 2C reception period, the amusement of the game can be improved. .

In addition, in the 1C reception period according to this embodiment, the operation target display is displayed in the 3C reception period (integrated model image display IGa shown in FIG. 228(b) and 225(c) (integrated simulated image display IGd in the example shown in FIG. 225(c)). That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest which of the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period occurs from the time when the reception period in which the opportunity to operate is provided to the player occurs. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

On the other hand, in the 1C reception period according to this embodiment, the display of the operation target is also displayed in a form that can be displayed in the 3C reception period (integrated model image display IGa shown in FIG. 228(b)). It is something that can be done. That is, in this case, when the integrated simulated image display IGa is displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period is occurring. The tension within the period is preferably maintained.

It should be noted that during the 3C reception period, the integrated model image display IGc shown in FIG. one mode) may be always displayed.

Also, prior to the occurrence of the 3C accepting period, a specific premonition effect display may be displayed to suggest that the player will be given an opportunity to operate. However, in this case, if the target display (simulated image display) is not hidden and continues to be displayed at the time when the 3C reception effect is started, the 3C reception effect is started. It is desirable that there are cases where the specific portent effect display is displayed and cases where the specific portent effect display is not displayed. On the other hand, if the action target display (simulated image display) is in a non-display state at the time when the 3C post-acceptance effect starts to be executed, a specific precursor is displayed at the time when the 3C post-acceptance effect starts to be executed. It is desirable to ensure that the effect display is always displayed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including the 2C reception period and the 3C reception period are accepted as the reception period during which the player's action (operation) is accepted (reception validity determination). We have a reception period. Then, if the "reception validity determination that the player's motion is a valid motion" is made within the 3C reception period, the above-mentioned post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination (1C post-reception performance corresponding to the 1C reception period ) is started to be executed, the remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced over time, and as at least one aspect of the frame image and the gauge image , multiple modes with different expectations are prepared) may be displayed instead of being hidden (see FIG. 230), and during the 2C reception period, "Action (operation) by player is performed, the remaining time display ( For example, the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced over time, and multiple modes with different expectations are prepared as modes of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image. ) is not hidden and is never displayed (the frame image and gauge image are in a hidden state at the time the production is started even if the reception is performed at any timing) (see Figure 227). The remaining time display according to the above embodiment is displayed as an integrated model image display IG. A plurality of modes) are prepared as a frame image that forms the .

According to such a configuration, the remaining time display (for example, the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is decreased according to the passage of time after the execution of the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity determination" is started. It is a depiction that makes it possible to see, and as at least one aspect of the frame image and the gauge image, multiple aspects with different expectations are prepared (see FIGS. 144 (a) to (d)))). Since there are cases in which the display of the remaining time is not visible in some cases, it is expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained after the execution of the post-acceptance effect is started.

Moreover, in the 3C reception period according to this embodiment, the reception is determined depending on at which timing (see FIGS. 222 and 223) the "reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid action" is made. Remaining time display (see FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d)) is not displayed at the time when the post-reception effect (3C post-reception effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) based on the validity determination is started to be executed. (see FIG. 230), and when the remaining time display ((see FIGS. 144(a) to (d))) is hidden (see FIG. 229). (see ).

That is, from the player's point of view, the remaining time display is displayed in the "highly expected second mode (see FIG. 228(d))" among multiple modes (see FIGS. 144(a) to (d)). When it is done, continuing to display this even after the execution of the post-reception performance (the 3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) based on the 'reception validity determination' is started improves the game interest. It can be said that it is certainly preferable in terms of planning. However, when the remaining time display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 228(b))" among the multiple modes, the after-reception production (in the 3C reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" If the corresponding 3C post-acceptance effect) is continued to be displayed even after the start of execution, the game will inevitably lose interest in the game.

For example, the after-reception production (3C post-reception production corresponding to the 3C reception period) has a remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) within its effective period (3C reception period), which is the first mode (see FIG. 228(b))" and "second mode with low expectation (see FIG. 228(d))", it is executed in a mode with high expectation It is designed to have the potential (and even the possibility of being executed in a manner with low expectations). Then, when the post-acceptance effect (the 3C post-acceptance effect corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) is executed in a manner with a high degree of expectation, although this alone is sufficient to improve the amusement of the game, At this time, if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) continues to be displayed in the ``low expectation mode 1 (see FIG. 228(b))'', the game interest is reduced. Therefore, it is desirable to hide the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image). On the other hand, even if the post-reception effect (the 3C post-reception effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a low-expectation mode, at this time, the "high-expectation second mode (Fig. 228 (d))”, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) continues to be displayed, it is possible to reduce the interest in the game due to the execution of the post-acceptance effect in a manner with low expectations. Since it is possible to suitably suppress this, it can be said that it is desirable to continue the display of the remaining time (gauge image, frame image) without hiding it.

Alternatively, even if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 228(b))", some players do not want the effect after reception. As an ``excuse'' when it is executed in a ``mode with low expectations'', the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not hidden at the time when the production after reception is started. It seems that there are people who want to keep the display state continued, and the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed, some players do not want the post-acceptance effect to be executed in order to suppress their “frustration” when the post-acceptance effect is executed in a “mode with low expectations.” Some people may want to hide the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) at the time of starting so that it cannot be visually recognized.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when the 3C reception period occurs, the player can wait until the timing (see FIGS. 222 and 223) at which the "reception validity determination" is made within the 3C reception period. Either the execution of the post-acceptance effect is started while the time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed (see Fig. 230), or the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is hidden and cannot be seen. Since it becomes possible to substantially select whether to start the execution of the effect after reception in the state (see FIG. 229), it is expected that the game interest will be favorably maintained.

In addition, in the 2C reception period according to this embodiment, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed in the 3C reception period (integrated model image display IGa shown in FIG. 228(b) , and the integrated simulated image display IGc) shown in FIG. 228(d) (in the example shown in FIG. Even if the reception validity judgment is made, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception production (2C post-reception production) based on the reception validity judgment is started. I always make sure it's hidden. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest which of the 2C reception period and the 3C reception period is occurring from the time when the reception period in which the opportunity to operate is given to the player occurs. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

Regarding the 3C reception period, even if the action (operation) by the player is not performed, the same post-reception effect (3C post-reception effect) as when the action (operation) is performed is executed. (It may be a target for which the above-described automatic reception function is activated). However, in this case, when the production after the 3C reception is executed based on the activation of the automatic reception function in the 3C reception period, the remaining time display (gauge image , frame image) are always displayed. That is, in this case, even if the execution of the post-3C reception effect is started by the automatic reception function before the player notices, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed during the 3C reception period. It becomes possible to easily recognize whether it was displayed in a mode.

Further, when the "3C reception period" is targeted for the above-described automatic reception function, multiple different timings may be prepared according to the production mode or the like as the timing at which the automatic reception function is activated. However, regardless of the timing at which the automatic reception function is activated, when the effect after the 3C reception is executed based on the activation of the automatic reception function in the 3C reception period, the 3C reception period It is desirable that the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is always displayed at the time when the effect after 3C acceptance is executed.

However, during the 2C acceptance period, when the action (operation) by the player is not performed, the same post-acceptance effect (2C post-acceptance effect) as when the action (operation) is performed is executed. It is desirable to prevent this from happening (not subject to activation of the automatic reception function described above).

Further, in the 3C reception period according to this embodiment, when the production is started after the 3C reception while the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) continues to be displayed (see FIG. 230). , When the production is started after receiving the 3C while the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is hidden (see FIG. 229), after receiving the 3C Effect (specific effect UTC3 after reception of 3C, effect display UGC3 after reception of 3C, effect sound after reception of 3C, etc.) is the same. Therefore, it is possible to select an effect mode and play a game from the viewpoint of how the player wants to enjoy the effect after the reception of the 3C.

Further, in the 3C reception period according to this embodiment, when the production is started after the 3C reception while the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) continues to be displayed (see FIG. 230). , and the case where the execution of the 3C post-acceptance production is started while the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is hidden (see FIG. 229), the disappearance-related display is the same. A mode (second extinction related display SKC2) is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suitably suggest that the reception is properly performed in the 3C reception period, regardless of which mode the production progresses.

In the above effect example, in addition to the 2C reception period and the 3C reception period, the 1C reception period is further prepared. Even if it is done at the timing of , the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) will not be hidden and will always be displayed at the time when the production after reception based on the reception validity judgment is started. I'm trying to be. That is, in this case, since the 3C reception period has both the performance of the 1C reception period and the performance of the 2C reception period, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. .

In addition, in the 1C reception period according to this embodiment, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed in the 3C reception period (integrated model image display IGa shown in FIG. 228(b) , and integrated simulated image display IGc) shown in FIG. 228(d) (integrated simulated image display IGd in the example shown in FIG. . That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest which of the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period occurs from the time when the reception period in which the opportunity to operate is provided to the player occurs. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

On the other hand, in the 1C reception period according to this embodiment, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed in the 3C reception period (integrated model shown in FIG. 228(b) It can also be displayed by the image display IGa). That is, in this case, when the integrated simulated image display IGa is displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period is occurring. The tension within the period is preferably maintained.

It should be noted that during the 3C acceptance period, the integrated model image display IGc shown in FIG. The integrated model image display IGa (one aspect) may be always displayed.

Also, prior to the occurrence of the 3C accepting period, a specific premonition effect display may be displayed to suggest that the player will be given an opportunity to operate. However, in this case, if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not hidden and continues to be displayed at the time when the performance after receiving the 3C is started, the performance after receiving the 3C is executed. It is desirable that there are cases where a specific portent effect display is displayed and cases where a specific portent effect display is not displayed at the time of starting. On the other hand, if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is in a non-display state at the time when the effect after receiving the 3C is started to be executed, it is specified at the time when the effect after receiving the 3C is started. It is desirable to ensure that the foreshadowing display of is always displayed.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, when "reception validity determination in which the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made within the 3C reception period, a plurality of modes with different expectations (Fig. 229(d1)-(h1), high-expectation modes shown in FIGS. 229(d2)-(h2)). 226 (d1) to ( 226 (d2) to (h2)), the effect after the reception of the 1C can be executed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "reception validity determination" is made within the 3C reception period, the post-reception effect (3C post-reception effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" is performed. At the time when the execution is started, the action target display (here, the model image display which imitates the action target of the player and has a plurality of modes with different expectations) is not displayed and is in a non-display state. Sometimes. On the other hand, if the "reception validity determination" is made within the 1C reception period, at the time when the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the 1C reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" is started , the action target display (in this case, a model image display that simulates the target of the player's action and has a plurality of aspects with different expectations) is not displayed and is not in a non-display state. there is The simulated image display according to the above embodiment is displayed as an integrated simulated image display IG, and as its mode, a plurality of modes shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d) are prepared.

According to such a configuration, after the execution of the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity determination" is started, the display of the action object (simulated image display) is made visible, and the display of the action object (simulated image display) is made visible. ) is not made visible in some cases, it is expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained after the execution of the post-acceptance effect is started.

Moreover, in the 3C reception period according to this embodiment, if "reception valid determination is made that the player's movement is a valid movement" until the timing Y within the 3C reception period arrives (Fig. 222), at the time when the post-reception effect (3C post-reception effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started, the operation object display (simulated image display) is turned off. Although it is not displayed, if ``reception valid determination is made that the player's action is a valid action'' after the arrival of timing Y within the 3C reception period (see FIG. 223), the action target While the display (simulated image display) is being displayed, the performance after receiving the 3C is started to be executed.

That is, from the player's side, when the simulated image display is displayed in the "highly expected second mode (see FIG. 228(d))" among the plurality of modes, after the reception based on the "reception validity determination" It can be said that it is certainly preferable to continue to display the effect (3C post-reception effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) even after the start of execution in order to improve the amusement of the game. However, when the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 228(b))" among the multiple modes, the after-reception production based on the "reception validity determination" (during the 3rd C reception period If the corresponding 3C post-acceptance effect) is continued to be displayed even after the start of execution, the game will inevitably lose interest in the game.

For example, the after-reception effect (the 3C after-reception effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) is such that, within its effective period (the 3C reception period), the model image display is the first mode with low expectations (Fig. 228(b) )” or “second mode with low expectations (see FIG. 228(d))”, there is a possibility that it will be executed in a mode with high expectations (furthermore, expectations possible to run in a less aggressive manner). Then, when the post-acceptance effect (the 3C post-acceptance effect corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) is executed in a manner with a high degree of expectation, although this alone is sufficient to improve the amusement of the game, At this time, if the model image display continues to be displayed in the "low expectation first mode (see FIG. 228(b))", it is clear that the game interest will be reduced. It can be said that it is desirable to hide the display of the model image. On the other hand, even if the post-reception effect (the 3C post-reception effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a low-expectation mode, at this time, the "high-expectation second mode (Fig. 228(d))”, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the execution of the post-acceptance effect in a mode with low expectations. Therefore, it can be said that it is desirable to continue the display of the model image without hiding it.

Alternatively, even if the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with a low degree of expectation (see FIG. 228(b))", some players believe that the effect after reception is a "mode with a low degree of expectation". As an "excuse" when it is executed in , I would like to keep the display state of the model image not hidden at the time when the production after reception is started. Even if the model image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations (see FIG. 228(d))", some players may think that the effect after reception is not performed. In order to suppress ``frustration'' when it is executed in a ``mode with low expectations'', the model image display is hidden and cannot be seen at the time when the production after reception is started. It seems that there are those who wish to stay.

In this respect, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (3C reception period) occurs, the player can "validate the action by the player" until the timing Y within the 3C reception period arrives. If it is possible to execute the reception validity judgment as an operation, the execution of the effect after reception can be started in a state where the model image display is hidden and cannot be visually recognized, and the timing within the 3C reception period When the ``receipt validity determination that the player's motion is a valid motion'' is not made until Y arrives, the execution of the post-reception production starts while the model image display is not displayed at that time. Since it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the operation will be performed, those who seek such performance will be able to enjoy the operation performance with peace of mind after that.

According to such a configuration, during the 3C reception period, the player is given the "right to select whether or not to start the effect after reception while the model image display is displayed". During the reception period, the player is not given the "right to choose whether or not to start the production after reception while the model image display is displayed", and the production after reception is performed while the model image display is always displayed. It will act as a starter.

In this regard, in the 3C acceptance period in which such option is granted, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 3C acceptance period (if there is no reception validity judgment), the reception validity judgment is made. In the 1C reception period in which the same post-reception production as when the reception is not executed (the automatic production function is not activated) and such selection rights are not granted, the action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 1C reception period. If not (if there is no reception validity determination), it is desirable to execute the same post-reception production as when reception validity judgment is made (automatic production function is validated). According to such a configuration, when the 3C acceptance period occurs, compensation for forgetting to operate is not provided in exchange for granting the above-mentioned right of choice. Thus, when the 3C reception period occurs, the performance itself after reception will not be performed unless a judgment such as ``which one to select'' is made within a limited time, so that tension is preferably imparted. will be able to On the other hand, when the 1C reception period occurs, the above-mentioned option is not granted, but even if the reception is not made in time for the reception within the 1C reception period, the post-reception production will be executed properly. Therefore, it is expected that the amusement of the game will be favorably maintained. In this case, if the post-acceptance effect when an operation is forgotten during the 1C reception period is started while the display of the model image continues, the operation can be included even when the operation is forgotten. It is possible to prevent the above option from being granted.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, when "reception validity determination in which the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made within the 3C reception period, a plurality of modes with different expectations (Fig. 229(d1)-(h1), high-expectation modes shown in FIGS. 229(d2)-(h2)). 226 (d1) to ( 226 (d2) to (h2)), the effect after the reception of the 1C can be executed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "reception validity determination" is made within the 3C reception period, the post-reception effect (3C post-reception effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" is performed. At the time when the execution is started, the remaining time display (for example, a representation in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image decreases over time, and as an aspect of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image, are prepared in a plurality of modes with different degrees) are not displayed and may be in a non-display state. On the other hand, if the "reception validity determination" is made within the 1C reception period, at the time when the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the 1C reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" is started , Remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of a gauge image displayed within a frame image is reduced over time, and at least one of the frame image and the gauge image has multiple modes with different expectations. prepared) are not displayed and are not in a hidden state. The remaining time display according to the above-described embodiment is displayed as an integrated simulated image display IG, and as its mode, a plurality of modes shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d) are prepared.

According to such a configuration, after the execution of the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity determination" is started, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) can be visually recognized, and the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) are not visible in some cases, it is expected that the sense of tension will be favorably maintained after the execution of the post-acceptance effect is started.

Moreover, in the 3C reception period according to this embodiment, if "reception valid determination is made that the player's movement is a valid movement" until the timing Y within the 3C reception period arrives (Fig. 222), the remaining time display (the frame image and the gauge image are not displayed) at the time when the execution of the post-reception effect (the 3C post-reception effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started. Although it is not displayed, in the case that "receipt valid determination is made that the player's motion is a valid motion" after the arrival of timing Y within the 3C reception period (see FIG. 223), the remaining In the state where the time display (the frame image and the gauge image are displayed), the performance is started after receiving the 3rd C.

That is, from the player's point of view, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "highly expected second mode (see FIG. 228(d))" among the plurality of modes, the "valid reception determination ” (the 3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) based on ”, it is certainly preferable to continue displaying this even after the execution is started. . However, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 228(b))" among the multiple modes, the after-reception production ( If the 3C post-acceptance effect corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) continues to be displayed even after the start of execution, it inevitably lowers the interest in the game.

For example, the post-reception production (3C post-reception production corresponding to the 3C reception period) is such that the remaining time display within its effective period (3C reception period) is "low expectation first mode (Fig. 228(b) )” or “second mode with low expectations (see FIG. 228(d))”, there is a possibility that it will be executed in a mode with high expectations (furthermore, expectations possible to run in a less aggressive manner). Then, when the post-acceptance effect (the 3C post-acceptance effect corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) is executed in a manner with a high degree of expectation, although this alone is sufficient to improve the amusement of the game, At this time, if the remaining time display continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 228(b))", it is clear that the game interest will be lowered. It can be said that it is desirable to hide the remaining time display. On the other hand, even if the post-reception effect (the 3C post-reception effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a low-expectation mode, at this time, the "high-expectation second mode (Fig. 228(d))”, it is possible to appropriately suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the execution of the post-acceptance effect with a low degree of expectation. Therefore, it can be said that it is desirable to continue the display of the remaining time without hiding it.

Alternatively, even if the remaining time display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 228(b))", some of the players think that the effect after reception is "mode with low expectation". As an ``excuse'' when it is executed in , I want to keep the remaining time display in a state where it is not hidden and is displayed at the time when the execution of the effect after reception is started. Even if the remaining time display is displayed in the ``second mode with high expectations (see FIG. 228(d))'', some players may think that the effect after reception is not performed. In order to suppress "frustration" when it is executed in a "mode with low expectations", the remaining time display is hidden and cannot be visually recognized at the time when the performance after reception is started to be executed. It seems that there are those who wish to stay.

In this respect, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (3C reception period) occurs, the player can "validate the action by the player" until the timing Y within the 3C reception period arrives. If it is possible to execute the reception validity determination as an operation, the execution of the effect after reception can be started in a state where the remaining time display is hidden and cannot be visually recognized, and the timing within the 3C reception period When the ``receipt validity determination that the player's motion is a valid motion'' is not performed until Y arrives, the performance after reception starts to be executed while the remaining time display is not displayed at that time. Since it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the operation will be performed, those who seek such performance will be able to enjoy the operation performance with peace of mind after that.

According to such a configuration, during the 3C reception period, the player is given the "right of choice as to whether or not to start the effect after reception while the remaining time display is displayed". During the reception period, the player is not given the "right to choose whether or not to start the production after reception while the remaining time display is displayed", and the production after reception is performed while the remaining time display is always displayed. It will act as a starter.

In this regard, in the 3C acceptance period in which such option is granted, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 3C acceptance period (if there is no reception validity judgment), the reception validity judgment is made. In the 1C reception period in which the same post-reception production as when the reception is not executed (the automatic production function is not activated) and such selection rights are not granted, the action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 1C reception period. If not (if there is no reception validity determination), it is desirable to execute the same post-reception production as when reception validity judgment is made (automatic production function is validated). According to such a configuration, when the 3C acceptance period occurs, compensation for forgetting to operate is not provided in exchange for granting the above-mentioned right of choice. Thus, when the 3C reception period occurs, the performance itself after reception will not be performed unless a judgment such as ``which one to select'' is made within a limited time, so that tension is preferably imparted. will be able to On the other hand, when the 1C reception period occurs, the above-mentioned option is not granted, but even if the reception is not made in time for the reception within the 1C reception period, the post-reception production will be executed properly. Therefore, it is expected that the amusement of the game will be favorably maintained. In this case, if the post-acceptance effect when an operation is forgotten during the 1C acceptance period is started while the display of the remaining time is continued, even when the operation is forgotten. It is possible to prevent the above option from being granted.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of acceptance periods including the 1C acceptance period and the 3C acceptance period are prepared as the acceptance period. In the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) can be displayed using at least a specific region. Then, when the "reception validity determination in which the motion by the player is the valid motion" is made within the 1C reception period, based on the reception validity determination, the second mode is selected in any one of a plurality of modes with different expectations. The effect can be executed after receiving 1C, and when "receipt validity determination in which the player's motion is a valid motion" is made within the 3C reception period, the degree of expectation is increased based on the acceptance validity determination. The production after the reception of the 3C can be executed in any one of a plurality of different modes. In addition, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) at the time when the performance after receiving the 1st C is started and the performance after the reception of the 3rd C is started. ) is not hidden but displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, both when "reception validity determination" is made within the 1C reception period and when "reception validity determination" is made within the 3C reception period, the reception validity judgment is performed, at least part of the display target area (specific area) of the integrated simulated image display IG (simulated image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is used to perform the extinction EF effect. Since it is made executable, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the acceptance validity determination is appropriately made (the acceptance period is terminated due to the acceptance of the operation by the player).

Also, as described above, in the 3C reception period, the 3C reception period depends on at which timing (first period, second period, etc.) the "reception validity determination" for validating the action by the player is made. A case where the integrated model image display IG is not hidden and displayed at the time when the execution of the effect after reception of the 3rd C corresponding to is started, and a state where the integrated model image display IG is not displayed (visible In some cases, it is in a state where it cannot be done. On the other hand, in the 1C acceptance period, the integrated model image display IG is always displayed regardless of the timing of acceptance validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action (valid operation). It has become so. By preparing the 1C reception period in which such an integrated model image display IG is always displayed separately from the above-described 3C reception period, coupled with the configuration in which the disappearing EF effect is executed, a sense of security is provided. It is possible to provide a certain performance, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

In the 1C reception period, when the corresponding post-reception production (1C post-reception production) is executed in the high expectation mode (FIGS. 226(d2) to (h2), the disappearance EF production (disappearance-related display) A specific mode (FIGS. 226(e2) to (g2)) that is also used during the 3C acceptance period appears, but if it is different from the high expectation mode, a specific mode (FIGS. 226(e2) to (g2)) does not appear and a different aspect ((e1) to (g1) in FIG. 226) appears, or it is desirable that the disappearance EF effect (disappearance-related display) itself does not appear. According to this configuration, when the disappearance EF effect (disappearance-related display) is executed corresponding to the 3C reception period, it is possible to give an image as if the high-expectation effect is being executed, and the game is played. It becomes possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

In the 1C reception period, the acceptable reception sound is output in a plurality of modes with different expectations, but in the 3C reception period, the acceptable reception sound may be output in only "one mode". According to such a configuration, when the acceptable reception sound having the "one mode" is output, the user is made aware of the possibility that the 3C reception period having the above-mentioned two effects is occurring. Since it becomes possible to do so, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the feeling of tension. The "one aspect" may be selectively output (by determination) even when the 1C acceptance period occurs. Also, in this case, it is desirable that the "one mode" be output as the mode with the lowest degree of expectation. In this case, it is expected that the sense of tension will be favorably maintained even in a situation where the acceptable acceptance sound is output in the mode with the lowest degree of expectation.

When a specific variation pattern is selected, both the 1C acceptance period and the 3C acceptance period may occur sequentially within the specified variation pattern. In this case, it is desirable that the 1C reception period occurs after the 3C reception period occurs. Further, in this case, a 1C reception period may occur. In this case, it is desirable to allow the 2C reception period to occur between the occurrence of the 3C reception period and the occurrence of the 1C reception period.

Further, it is desirable that the portent effect output when the 1C reception period occurs and the portent effect output when the 3C reception period occurs are different from each other. That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest which of the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period will occur by the precursor effect.

In addition, during the 3C reception period, as a disappearance EF effect (disappearance-related display), when there is a reception, a specific mode (for example, the second disappearance-related display SKC2) appears, and when there is no reception, a mode different from the specific mode ( For example, it is desired that the third disappearance related indication SKC3) appears or does not appear at all. On the other hand, in the 1C reception period, even if there is no reception, it is desirable that the same mode as when the reception is made appears as the disappearance EF effect (disappearance-related display). That is, the performance of the above-mentioned "1st C reception period" (the performance of displaying a model image or a gauge image at the time when the performance after reception is started) and the performance of the above-mentioned "2nd C reception period" In the 3C reception period, which has both of the characteristics (the performance in which the model image display and the gauge image are not displayed at the time when the performance starts to be executed after reception), it may be difficult to select the performance. Therefore, it can be said that forgetting to operate (end of the reception period without reception) occurs more easily than in the above-described "1C reception period". In this regard, according to the above configuration, if the operation is forgotten during the 3C reception period, the disappearance EF effect (for example, the second disappearance-related display SKC2) does not appear when the reception is made. It becomes possible to appeal to the players that they are in a situation where they have forgotten to operate, and after that, it is possible to suitably maintain the tension when the acceptance period occurs. Become. On the other hand, during the 1C reception period, there are no elements that are likely to be forgotten to operate. Nevertheless, if the action is not accepted, there is a possibility that the player dared to choose "not to perform the action" in the game. If "appealing that the player is in a situation where the player forgets to operate", the interest in the game may be lowered. Therefore, in the 1C reception period, even if there is no reception, it is desirable that the same mode as when the reception is made appears as the disappearance EF effect (disappearance-related display).

In particular, during the 1C reception period according to the above-described production example, the mode of the disappearance EF production (disappearance-related display) differs according to the mode (expectation) of the production after the 1C reception (see FIG. 226). reference). Therefore, in the 1C acceptance period, even if there is no acceptance, if the same mode as when the acceptance is made appears as the disappearance EF effect (disappearance related display), it will appear when the acceptance is made. It becomes possible to recognize the aspect (expectation level) of the performance after receiving the 1C reception, and to improve the amusement of the game.

During the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed on the operation receiving unit when the action by the player is accepted. It is desirable that the disappearing EF display is executed while the depiction of the appearing movement and the area reduction of the gauge image are continued.

In addition, each production example and another example described above may be realized by transforming it into the following configuration, and the following configuration (reception period) is further used as another reception period with a different type of production after reception. You may prepare. That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least the 1C reception period, the 2C reception period, and the 3C reception period are accepted as the reception period during which the action (operation) by the player is accepted. I have it. Among these, in the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the disappearance EF effect (disappearance-related display) can be executed based on the reception of the action (operation) by the player (reception validity determination), As described above, during the 2C acceptance period, even if the action (operation) by the player is accepted (acceptance validity determination), the disappearance EF effect (disappearance-related display) is not executed.

In this regard, if the action (operation) by the player is accepted (reception validity determination) during the 1C reception period, the degree of expectation (jackpot pattern disappearance EF production (disappearance-related display) in the same manner in the case where it is executed in a mode with a low rate of appearance) and the case where the production after the 1C reception is executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may be made executable. Also, when such a configuration is applied to the example shown in FIG. 226, any of the modes (the modes shown in FIGS. 226 regardless of whether the mode shown in ~ (h2)) appears, and whether or not the acceptance is made within the 1C reception period (mode shown in Figure 226 (d3) ~ (g3)), It is desirable to ensure that one predetermined aspect of the disappearing EF effect appears without fail. In other words, the 1C acceptance period means that no matter when the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made at any timing within the period (and even if the acceptance is not made), the period will be After the end, the display of the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is continued. In this case, the situation is such that information such as "in which form the integrated model image display IG (model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) was displayed" is provided. Therefore, if different information is provided by the annihilation EF effect, there is a concern that the effect will become too complicated. In this regard, according to such a 1C reception period, any of the modes (the modes shown in FIGS. 226(d1) to (h1), the modes shown in FIGS. aspect) appears, and regardless of whether or not the acceptance is made within the 1C reception period (aspects shown in (d3) to (g3) of FIG. The above-described concerns can be resolved because the one mode selected will always appear.

In addition, when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (reception validity determination) during the 3C reception period, the degree of expectation (the jackpot pattern is The annihilation EF performance can be executed in different modes depending on whether the performance after the 3C acceptance is performed in a mode with a low degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) or in a mode with a high degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern). You may do so. The 3rd C reception period has the above-mentioned two performances, and it can be said that it is positioned as a "reception period with a high degree of difficulty" by that amount, so even after the reception is made, the integrated model Making it possible for the player to obtain different effect information from both the form of the image display IG (simulated image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) and the form of the extinction EF effect. It is desirable in terms of providing stimulus for production.

It should be noted that when such a configuration is applied to the examples shown in FIGS. It is desirable to make it different from any of the multiple modes as EF effects. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the acceptance has not been made, and the acceptance period is different from the performance by the above-mentioned "1C reception period" and the performance by the above-mentioned "2C reception period". It becomes possible to suggest that it was a combination of both.

Further, as described above, in another example for the 3C reception period, when the reception is made during the "first period (first state)" within the 3C reception period, the integrated model image is displayed after the reception is made. The display IG (simulated image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) will not be displayed. That is, in this case, after the acceptance is made, information such as "in which mode the integrated model image display IG (model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) was displayed" is provided. Under such circumstances, it is desirable to provide information (expectation level information regarding post-acceptance performance) by disappearing EF performance in order to improve the game interest.

In addition, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (acceptance validity determination) in the 1C acceptance period, the disappearing EF effect is executed in a mode different from the mode that appears when the acceptance is made. can be This makes it possible to recognize that the acceptance has not been made, and if the aspect cannot appear in the 3C acceptance period, the acceptance period is the above-mentioned "1C acceptance period" It can be suggested that both the performance by the above-mentioned "second C reception period" was not combined.

In addition, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (acceptance validity determination) during the 3C acceptance period, the disappearing EF effect is executed in the same mode as the mode that appears when the acceptance is made. may

As for these modified examples, it is not necessary to apply all of these configurations to the above-described production examples and other examples thereof. For example, an appropriate combination or only one of the configurations (modifications) may be applied to the above-described production example or another example thereof.

Next, a case where some of the above modifications are applied to the above-described production examples will be described. That is, FIG. 231 is a modification of the "effect that appears when the acceptance is made in the 1C reception period or when the acceptance is not made" shown in FIG. 226, and FIGS. (Reception in the 1st period) and FIG. be. It should be noted that, in this modified example, for configurations not particularly mentioned, "examples of effects related to the 1C reception period (Figs. 216 to 218, 225, and 226)" 224, FIGS. 228 to 230)”, and can be applied to the “example of presentation regarding the 1st C reception period” and the “example of presentation regarding the 3rd C reception period”. is also applicable.

In the modification shown in FIG. 231, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted (acceptance validity determination) in the 1C acceptance period, the 1C post-acceptance effect is expected based on the acceptance (acceptance validity determination). degree (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) is executed in a low mode (see FIG. 231 (d1) to (h1)), and a mode with a high degree of expectation (ratio of the appearance of the jackpot pattern) after receiving the 1C reception ( 231 (d2) to (h2)), the disappearance EF effect (disappearance-related display) is executed in the same mode. Here, the second disappearance-related display SKC2 is executed as the disappearance EF effect.

However, in the modification shown in FIG. 231, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (acceptance validity determination) during the 1C acceptance period (see FIGS. 231(d3) to (g3)), As the extinction EF effect, there appears a mode that does not appear when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (acceptance validity determination) in the 1C acceptance period. Here, the third disappearance-related display SKC3 is executed as the disappearance EF effect.

On the other hand, in the modification shown in FIGS. 232 and 233, when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (reception validity determination) in the 3C reception period, based on the acceptance (reception validity determination) When the 3C reception after-reception effect is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) (see FIGS. 232(d1) to (h1) and FIGS. 233(d3) to (h3)), 3C reception after production is executed in a high mode of expectation (percentage of appearance of jackpot patterns) (see Figure 232 (d2) ~ (h2) and Figure 233 (d4) ~ (h4)) different mode , the disappearing EF effect is executed. Here, when executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation (proportion of appearance of the jackpot pattern) (see FIGS. 232 (d1) to (h1) and FIGS. 233 (d3) to (h3)), the second EF effect is eliminated. When 1 disappearance related display SKC1 is executed and executed in a high mode of expectation (percentage of appearance of jackpot patterns) (see FIGS. 232 (d2) to (h2) and FIGS. 233 (d4) to (h4)) Second disappearance-related display SKC2 is executed as the disappearance EF effect. As described above, FIGS. 232(d1) to (h1) and FIGS. 232(d2) to (h2) show effects that appear when acceptance is made in the first period within the 3C acceptance period according to the modification. Figures 233(d3) to (h3) and Figures 233(d4) to (h4) show the details of progress. It shows the progress of the production that appears in

In the modification shown in FIGS. 232 and 233, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (acceptance validity determination) during the 3C acceptance period (see FIGS. 233(d5) to (g5) ), as a disappearing EF effect, appears in the form that would have appeared if the player's action (operation) had been accepted (acceptance validity determination) during the 3C acceptance period. That is, in the example shown in FIGS. 233(d5) to (g5), since the first disappearance-related display SKC1 is displayed as the disappearance EF effect, the action (operation) by the player is accepted ( 233 (d3) to (h3) (If the reception is in the first period, the production progress shown in (d1) to (h1) in FIG. 232). It becomes possible to recognize that has occurred. On the other hand, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (acceptance validity determination) during the 3C acceptance period, and the second disappearance-related display SKC2 is displayed as the disappearance EF effect, the 3C acceptance period 232 (d2 ) to (h2), it becomes possible to recognize that the development progress shown in (h2)) has occurred.

In the 1C reception period according to such a modification, as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that appears when the reception is made, the after-reception production corresponding to the above-mentioned 3C reception period (after the 3C reception A "second disappearance-related display SKC2" that is displayed when the effect is executed in a manner with high expectations is used. That is, in this case, in the 1C reception period according to the modification, as long as the reception is made, it is possible to give an image as if the production after reception is executed in a highly expected manner, and the game can be played. It becomes possible to improve interest.

Note that the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) corresponding to the third C acceptance period according to the modification does not necessarily have to be the “second disappearance-related display SKC2”. For example, as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) corresponding to the 1C reception period according to the modification, the post-reception effect (1C post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1C reception period is executed in a mode with low expectations. Even if the "first disappearance related display SKC1" displayed at the time is used, is it accepted in the 1C reception period according to the modification, or is it in the state of being accepted in the 1C reception period according to the modification? It is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the application has been accepted during the acceptance period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this modified example, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the first C reception period, the "third disappearance-related display SKC3" is displayed as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect). I am going to display it.

It is desirable that the "third disappearance-related display SKC3" is not displayed in relation to the 3C reception period according to the modification. That is, in this case, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1C reception period, the reception period is the effect of the above-mentioned "1C reception period" and the above-mentioned "1C reception period". It will be possible to suggest that it did not have both the performance of the 2C reception period.

Further, it is preferable that the "third disappearance-related display SKC3" is not displayed when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 1C acceptance period according to the modification. That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest more preferably that the 1C acceptance period has ended without acceptance being made.

Also in the 3C reception period according to this modification, the player receives the signal before the timing tV2 at which the state (3C reception period) in which the "reception validity determination in which the action by the player is the valid action" is allowed occurs. Even if there is an action (operation) by ), and the configuration according to the above another example, such that it is possible to make a "reception validity determination" targeting (based on) actions (operations) by the player performed before the 3C reception period. etc. can be applied.

In the 3C reception period according to the above modification, if a low-expectation aspect appears as the production after the 3C reception (see Figure 232 (d1) ~ (h1) or Figure 233 (d3) ~ (h3)), disappear Although the first disappearance-related display SKC1 is executed as the EF effect, the disappearing EF effect itself may not appear.

In addition, during the 1C reception period according to the above modification, as a disappearing EF effect, a specific mode appears when there is reception (FIGS. 231(d1) to (h1) and FIGS. 231(d2) to (h2)). 231(d3)-(g3)), the disappearing EF effect itself may not appear when there is no acceptance.

Also, in the 1C reception period according to the modification, the second disappearance-related display SKC2 is executed as a specific mode (disappearance EF effect) when there is a reception, but it is different from the second disappearance-related display SKC2. may be performed in any manner. For example, even if it is executed with the first disappearance related display SKC1, whether the acceptance is made during the 1C acceptance period or the acceptance is made during the 3C acceptance period. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize.

[Omen Stock Production]
As explained by exemplifying FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, variation as to which one of a plurality of variation patterns is to be executed is based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the start winning (holding digestion). Pattern judgment can be executed. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern It is possible to execute a production judgment (such as advance notice judgment) as to which of the expected productions (such as advance notice production) is to appear selectively. It should be noted that depending on the result of the production determination, all of the plurality of expected productions prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern (notice production, etc.) may be sequentially executed, or None of the expected effects (notice effects, etc.) may be executed.

And as described above, when such production determination (variation pattern determination, advance notice determination, etc.) is performed, by performing control to display the production content according to the result of the production determination on the production display device 1600, the big hit determination The variable production by the decorative pattern according to the result is executed together with the expected production (preliminary production) related to the background depiction (background advance notice), movable body operation (role production), and the like. As a result, as a result of execution of the variation effect by the decorative pattern together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, etc., when the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, the player can enjoy the big win game and the high prize as a privilege. Transition to the probability game state becomes executable.

In such a configuration, the variable performance by the decorative pattern is provided as a performance having "a function indicating whether or not a big hit has been obtained as a result of the judgment of the big hit", and the background depiction, the movement of the movable body, etc. is provided as an effect having "the function of suggesting the degree of expectation, that is, the ratio (including 0% and 100%) of the fact that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the determination of the variation pattern, it is specified among the highly expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach effects with background changes, etc.) If the variation pattern is selected, even if any result is obtained as the production judgment (such as the advance notice judgment), when the pattern production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing in the SP reach (predetermined condition is established), it is possible to generate an acceptance acceptance state (effective period) in which acceptance of the performance is allowed.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low-expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the determination of the variation pattern. Even in the case, when a special result is obtained in the production determination (such as advance notice judgment) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the pattern production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (predetermined condition is established Then), it is possible to generate an acceptance allowable state (effective period) in which the performance acceptance is allowed. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination, even if the symbol performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, the reception acceptance state (effective period) does not occur. . In addition, the reception acceptance state (valid period) that occurs in a predetermined variation pattern is different from the reception acceptance state (valid period) that occurs when the pattern production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. This is executed as an effect (effect after acceptance).

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an acceptance period during which the player's actions (operations) are allowed to be accepted, and the player's actions (operations) are accepted within the acceptance period. Then, a display change (post-reception effect) corresponding to the type of reception period that has occurred is caused. More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1, "action detection means (sensors, etc.) for detecting actions (operations) by the player" and "detection information storage means (peripheral control RAM 1511c, corresponding processing steps in the program, etc.) and "A receiving period can be generated, and based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means, reception validity determination is made to make the action of the player a valid action. If performed within the reception period, reception-related effect execution means (peripheral control MPU 1511a, relevant processing steps in the program, etc.) that can execute the production after reception corresponding to the reception period. there is

Also, during the acceptance period, an action target indication indicating which one is the "target of the player's action" can be displayed. Such an action target display can be, for example, a model image display in which an object (operation means) to be operated by the player is represented as an image. In particular, the "action object display" according to this example of effect is displayed as a "simulated image display" that simulates the action object of the player and has a plurality of modes with different expectations.

In addition, during the reception period, a remaining time display indicating the remaining time during which the action (operation) by the player is permitted can be displayed. Such remaining time display can be executed, for example, as a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time. In particular, in this production example, at least one of the frame image and the gauge image has a plurality of aspects (for example, the rate of decrease of the display area of the gauge image, the suggestion of the degree of expectation, the suggestion of the type of operation means, etc.). are prepared and are intended to be implemented in any of these modes. A different degree of expectation (ratio of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may be suggested depending on which mode is executed.

In addition, when the acceptance period occurs, it is possible to execute a premonitory effect suggesting that the player will be given an action opportunity (indicating that the acceptance period will occur) before this. there is The portent effect is executed by, for example, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 or the output of the corresponding effect sound.

In addition, even if any result is obtained as a notice production judgment, at a predetermined timing during SP reach, regarding the fluctuation pattern that causes the acceptance acceptable state (effective period), in addition to the above "specific fluctuation pattern" may also be provided. No matter which result is obtained as a result of the advance notice effect judgment, the fluctuation pattern that causes the acceptance acceptable state (effective period) at the predetermined timing is not included in the low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). or it may be included but its selection rate (occurrence rate) should be low (though not necessarily).

By the way, the acceptability state (effective period) that can occur under these conditions means that it is possible to accept changes in the display of the effect display device 1600 as long as the player's operation is detected within the set time (effective period). Since the post-display (post-operation display) is executed, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, the effect action by the movable decoration, etc. are only generated, the reception allowable state (effective period) The performance itself is poor, and there is concern that the interest in games related to the reception period will decrease.

In addition, including each example described above and each example described later, the "operation (action) by the player" to be detected means that the player It is not limited to those that are directly operated (pressing action or drawing action) by the touch sensor, but also the "player's contact action on a specific part" that is detected by the touch sensor, and the "in a specific space" that is detected by the non-contact sensor. It also means that the player's actions in The point is that one or a plurality of accepting means (operating means) for accepting actions by the player (pressing action, sword drawing action, touch action, non-contact action, etc.) may be provided.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, the acceptance of the "player's operation (movement)" is provided with the following special effects. It should be noted that each of the effects (each configuration) described below does not necessarily have to include all of these configurations. It is possible to suppress the decrease of, or it may be selectively provided with some configurations that are considered necessary to obtain further effects, or it can be applied to another configuration ( Desirable application) may be adopted as appropriate. Furthermore, each effect (configuration) to be described below is merely an example, and any one configuration that can suppress the decline in interest in the game related to the acceptance period may be provided.

[Configuration 1-C]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared as reception periods, and a specific performance display can be displayed in the premonition performance. It should be noted that the “specified reception period” for the configuration 1-C is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 1-C. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean a reception period different from the "specific reception period" related to other configurations. good. Also, the “specific effect display” related to the configuration 1-C is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 1-C. Therefore, it may mean the same effect display as the "specific effect display" according to other configurations, or it means a different effect display from the "specific effect display" according to other configurations. may

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, even if the player performs an action while a specific effect display is being displayed, the action is detected by the action detection means (sensor, etc.), and the detection is performed. The information is stored by the detection information storage means (peripheral control RAM 1511c, corresponding processing steps in the program, etc.), and based on the stored detection information, the acceptance validity determination that the player's action is a valid action is the above-mentioned identification. We are trying to make it possible to do it within the reception period. According to such a configuration, even if the player acts (operates) with excessive momentum while the premonition effect (specific effect display) is being executed, the post-acceptance effect can be started with this as a trigger. is possible, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained through such flexible performance.

Further, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 1-C", the action by the player is performed before the occurrence of the specific reception period and in the state where the specific effect display is displayed. Even if the motion is detected, the motion is detected by the motion detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. During the specific reception period, the game is played based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the occurrence of the specific reception period and in a state where the specific effect display is being displayed. There is a case where the acceptance validity judgment is made with the action by the player as the valid action (stock reception effect), and when the reception validity judgment is made, at the time when the execution of the post-reception production based on the reception validity judgment is started, A specific effect display may be displayed. According to such a configuration, even if the player performs an action "within the execution period of the sign effect" before the occurrence of the specific reception period, the action can be properly detected. , the detection information may be stored and held until the timing when the specific acceptance period occurs. In other words, in this case, there is a case where the ``determination of validity of reception, in which the player's motion is a valid motion,'' is made during the specified reception period based on the detection information obtained before the occurrence of the specific reception period. Therefore, even if the player acts (manipulates) with excessive force before the specific acceptance period occurs, the player can perform the action without redoing the action after the specified acceptance period has occurred. You will be able to enjoy the performance. Also, at this time, at the time when the performance after reception starts to be executed due to the action (operation) in a state where the specific reception period has not yet occurred (state in which the specific performance display is displayed) Since the effect display is not hidden but displayed, the post-acceptance effect can be detected by the action (detection) performed by the player while the specific effect display is displayed. information).

[Configuration 2-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods, and a first omen corresponding to the first acceptance period is prepared. A first performance display is displayed in the performance, and a second performance display is displayed in the second precursor performance corresponding to the second receiving period. Note that the “first acceptance period” and “second acceptance period” related to the configuration 2-C are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 2-C. Therefore, it means the same reception period as the "first reception period (or reverse second reception period)" and "second reception period (or reverse first reception period)" related to other configurations. Alternatively, the "first acceptance period" and the "second acceptance period" according to other configurations may mean acceptance periods (for example, specific acceptance periods, etc.) different from each other. Also, the "first effect display" and "second effect display" relating to the configuration 2-C are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 2-C. Therefore, it means the same effect display as "first effect display (or reverse second effect display)" and "second effect display (or reverse first effect display)" according to other configurations. Alternatively, it means an effect display (for example, a specific effect display) different from the "first effect display" and "second effect display" according to other configurations. good too.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, even if the action (operation) is performed by the player while either the first effect display or the second effect display is being displayed, the action is the above-described action. detected by the detection means, the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means, and the reception validity determination for validating the motion by the player based on the stored detection information is performed during the first reception period or the second reception period. Since there is a case where it is performed within the acceptance period, even if the player moves with momentum while the precursor effect (first effect display or second effect display) is being executed With this as an opportunity, it has become possible to start the performance after reception, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained through such flexible performance.

Further, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 2-C", each of the following configurations may be employed. That is, in both the first acceptance period and the second acceptance period, if the player performs an action before the occurrence of the acceptance period and in a state in which the precursor effect is being executed, The motion is detected by the motion detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. In both the first acceptance period and the second acceptance period, the detection stored by the detection information storage means before the occurrence of the acceptance period and in a state in which the precursor effect is being executed. Based on the information, there is a case where reception validity determination is made to make the action by the player as a valid action (stock reception performance). Then, within the first reception period, the game is played based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the occurrence of the first reception period and in a state where the predictive effect is being executed. When it is determined that reception is valid, at least a part of the model image display is always displayed at the time when the performance after reception based on the reception validity determination is started. make it On the other hand, within the second reception period, based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the occurrence of the second reception period and in the state where the precursor effect is being executed. In the event that a reception validity determination is made in which the player's motion is a valid motion, even a part of the model image display is not displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception effect based on the reception validity determination is started. do. When these configurations are adopted, regardless of whether the first acceptance period or the second acceptance period occurs, based on the detection information obtained before the occurrence of the acceptance period, "the player's action is a valid action." Since there are cases where the reception validity determination is made within the reception period, the player acts (operates) with momentum before the first reception period or the second reception period occurs. Even if the reception period is over, the user can enjoy the performance after reception without redoing the operation after the reception period occurs. In addition, if the action (operation) occurs before the first reception period occurs, at least a part of the model image display will be displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception production based on this is started. Although it is always displayed, if the action (operation) is performed with too much momentum before the second acceptance period occurs, the above model image will be displayed at the time when the above-mentioned after-acceptance effect based on this is started to be executed. Since even part of the display is not displayed, it is possible to determine whether the post-reception effect is based on the first reception period or the second reception period (which precedes the occurrence of the reception period). (whether the player acted at the time) can be preferably suggested.

Further, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 2-C", each of the following configurations may be employed. That is, in both the first acceptance period and the second acceptance period, if the player performs an action before the occurrence of the acceptance period and in a state in which the precursor effect is being executed, The motion is detected by the motion detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. In both the first acceptance period and the second acceptance period, the detection stored by the detection information storage means before the occurrence of the acceptance period and in a state in which the precursor effect is being executed. To make reception validity determination that a player's motion is a valid motion based on information in some cases. Then, within the first reception period, the game is played based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the occurrence of the first reception period and in a state where the predictive effect is being executed. When the reception validity determination is made with the motion by the player as the valid motion, at least a part of the remaining time display is always displayed at the time when the performance after reception based on the reception validity determination is started. make it On the other hand, within the second reception period, based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the occurrence of the second reception period and in the state where the precursor effect is being executed. In the event that the reception validity determination is made with the player's motion as a valid motion, even a part of the remaining time display is not displayed at the time when the performance after reception based on the reception validity determination is started to be executed. do. When these configurations are adopted, regardless of whether the first acceptance period or the second acceptance period occurs, based on the detection information obtained before the occurrence of the acceptance period, "the player's action is a valid action." Since there are cases where the reception validity determination is made within the reception period, the player acts (operates) with momentum before the first reception period or the second reception period occurs. Even if the reception period has ended, the performance after acceptance can be enjoyed without redoing the operation after the occurrence of the acceptance period. In addition, if the action (operation) occurs before the first reception period occurs, at least a part of the remaining time display will be displayed at the time when the performance after reception based on this is started to be executed. Although it is always displayed, if the action (operation) is performed with too much momentum before the second acceptance period occurs, the remaining time is at the time when the above-mentioned after-acceptance effect based on this is started to be executed. Since even part of the display is not displayed, it is possible to determine whether the post-reception effect is based on the first reception period or the second reception period (which precedes the occurrence of the reception period). (whether the player acted at the time) can be preferably suggested.

It should be noted that "the simulated image display and the remaining time display are not displayed" is not limited to the configuration 2-C, and is a state in which the simulated image display and the remaining time display cannot be visually recognized on the display screen in other configurations as well. If it is For example, it includes a state in which an image is displayed on a layer but is not visible due to priority display of an image on another layer.

[Configuration 3-C]
Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared as reception periods. It should be noted that the “specified acceptance period” related to the configuration 3-C is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 3-C. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean a reception period different from the "specific reception period" related to other configurations. good.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1, even if the action by the player is not detected within the specified acceptance period, the acceptance validity determination is made and the acceptance corresponding to the specified acceptance period is made. Since the effect is executed in some cases, it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained through such flexible effect.

Further, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 3-C", each of the following configurations may be employed. That is, the specific effect display is displayed in the portent effect corresponding to the specific reception period, and when the specific effect display is being displayed before the specific reception period occurs. Even when the player performs an action, the action is detected by the action detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. Then, during the specific acceptance period, based on "the detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the occurrence of the specific acceptance period and in the state where the specific effect display is being displayed". (stock reception effect), and if the reception validity judgment is made, the model image display will be displayed at the time when the execution of the reception effect based on the reception validity judgment starts. Make sure it is not. On the other hand, if reception validity determination is made based on "detected information stored by the detection information storage means within the specified reception period", at the time when the performance after reception based on the reception validity determination is started , so that the model image display may be displayed. If these configurations are adopted, the case where "reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid action" is made within the specific acceptance period based on the detection information obtained before the occurrence of the specific acceptance period Therefore, even if the player has acted (operated) in a rush before the specific acceptance period occurs, the player can redo the action after the specified acceptance period has occurred. You will be able to enjoy the production after the reception without any need. Moreover, depending on whether or not the model image display is being displayed at the time when the post-acceptance effect is started to be executed, it is possible to determine whether or not "before the specific reception period occurs and the specific effect display is being displayed." In some cases, it is possible to indicate whether or not acceptance validity determination has been made based on the "detected information stored by the detected information storage means".

It should be noted that the “specific effect display” relating to configuration 3-C is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of configuration 3-C. Therefore, it may mean the same effect display as the "specific effect display" according to other configurations, or it means a different effect display from the "specific effect display" according to other configurations. may

Further, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 3-C", each of the following configurations may be employed. That is, the specific effect display is displayed in the portent effect corresponding to the specific reception period, and when the specific effect display is being displayed before the specific reception period occurs. Even when the player performs an action, the action is detected by the action detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. Then, during the specific acceptance period, based on "the detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the occurrence of the specific acceptance period and in the state where the specific effect display is being displayed". If the reception validity judgment is made, the remaining time display will be displayed at the time when the production after reception based on the reception validity judgment starts to be executed. Make sure it is not. On the other hand, if reception validity determination is made based on "detected information stored by the detection information storage means within the specified reception period", at the time when the performance after reception based on the reception validity determination is started , so that the remaining time display may be displayed. If these configurations are adopted, the case where "reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid action" is made within the specific acceptance period based on the detection information obtained before the occurrence of the specific acceptance period Therefore, even if the player has acted (operated) in a rush before the specific acceptance period occurs, the player can redo the action after the specified acceptance period has occurred. You will be able to enjoy the production after the reception without any need. Moreover, depending on whether or not the remaining time display is being displayed at the time when the execution of the post-acceptance production is started, it is possible to determine whether or not "before the specific reception period occurs and the specific production display is being displayed." In some cases, it is possible to indicate whether or not acceptance validity determination has been made based on the "detected information stored by the detected information storage means".

It should be noted that "the model image display and the remaining time display are not displayed" is not limited to the configuration 3-C, and is a state in which the model image display and the remaining time display cannot be visually recognized on the display screen in other configurations as well. If it is For example, it includes a state in which an image is displayed on a layer but is not visible due to priority display of an image on another layer.

[Configuration 4-C]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are first prepared as acceptance periods. It is possible to execute the first post-acceptance effect corresponding to the first acceptance period even if the action detection means does not detect the action by the player within the first acceptance period, and when the second acceptance period occurs, the Even if the movement of the player is not detected by the movement detection means within the second reception period, the second post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period can be executed. The "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" related to the configuration 4-C are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 4-C. Therefore, it means the same reception period as the "first reception period (or reverse second reception period)" and "second reception period (or reverse first reception period)" related to other configurations. Alternatively, the "first acceptance period" and the "second acceptance period" according to other configurations may mean acceptance periods (for example, specific acceptance periods, etc.) different from each other.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, there are at least two timings at which the execution of the effect after the first acceptance is started without the action of the player being detected by the action detection means within the first acceptance period. As a result, it is expected that the game interest will be improved.

Also, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 4-C", the timing at which the execution of the effect after the first acceptance is started without the motion of the player being detected by the motion detection means within the first acceptance period As such, at least a first timing and a second timing are prepared, and in the first timing, "the reception valid state is determined based on the action (detection information) by the player detected before the occurrence of the first reception period. When the determination is made within the first reception period, the execution of the effect after the first reception is started (stock reception effect)", and at the second timing, "including before the occurrence of the first reception period, the player Execution of the effect after the first reception may be started based on the arrival of the predetermined timing (second timing) without any detection of the action by the player.

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 4-C", in the second reception period, "based on the action (detection information) by the player detected before the occurrence of the second reception period Although it is possible to make it so that the execution of the effect after the second reception is started by making the reception validity determination within the second reception period (stock reception effect), "before the occurrence of the second reception period Including, it is also possible to prevent the execution of the effect after the second reception from being started based on the arrival of the predetermined timing without detecting any action by the player.

When both of these configurations are provided, in both the first acceptance period and the second acceptance period, "acceptance period based on actions (detection information) by the player detected before the occurrence of the acceptance period The acceptance validity determination can be made (stock reception effect) within the stock reception effect, thereby making it possible to start executing the effect after the reception. Moreover, in the first reception period, even if such a "stock reception effect" fails, the post-reception effect is executed as a remedy based on the arrival of the predetermined timing. From there, you will be able to challenge the “stock reception effect” with confidence. On the other hand, during the second reception period, if such a "stock reception effect" fails, the post-reception effect will not be executed as a remedy, so a sense of tension is preferably imparted. be able to

[Configuration 5-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared as the reception period. Even if the motion detection means does not detect the operation, the specified post-reception performance corresponding to the specified reception period can be executed as the post-reception performance. It should be noted that the “specified acceptance period” related to the configuration 5-C is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 5-C. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean a reception period different from the "specific reception period" related to other configurations. good.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least the first timing and the second timing are the timings at which the performance is started after the specific acceptance without detecting the motion of the player within the specified acceptance period by the motion detection means. As a result, it is expected that the game interest will be improved.

Also, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 5-C", when the performance after the specific reception is started at the first timing, the model image display is displayed at the time when the performance after the specific reception is started. Although it is not displayed, when the performance after the specific reception is started at the second timing, the model image display may be displayed at the time when the performance after the specific reception is started. That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest at which of the first timing or the second timing the execution of the performance after the specified reception is started after the performance after the specified reception is started.

Also, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "Configuration 5-C", when the performance after the specific reception is started at the first timing, the remaining time display is displayed at the time when the performance after the specific reception is started. Although not displayed, when the performance after the specified reception is started at the second timing, the remaining time display may be displayed at the time when the performance after the specified reception is started. That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest at which of the first timing or the second timing the execution of the performance after the specified reception is started after the performance after the specified reception is started.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 5-C", a specific effect display is displayed as a precursor effect corresponding to the specific reception period, and the execution of the effect after the specific reception is started at the first timing. , the specific effect display is displayed at the time when the performance after the specific reception is started to be executed, but when the performance after the specific reception is started to be executed at the second timing, the performance after the specific reception is started to be executed. A specific effect display may not be displayed at the point in time. That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest at which of the first timing or the second timing the execution of the performance after the specified reception is started after the performance after the specified reception is started.

It should be noted that ``no model image display, remaining time display, or specific effect display is displayed'' is not limited to the configuration 5-C. It is sufficient if the effect display of is not visible on the display screen. For example, it includes a state in which an image is displayed on a layer but is not visible due to priority display of an image on another layer.

Also, the “specific effect display” related to the configuration 5-C is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 5-C. Therefore, it may mean the same effect display as the "specific effect display" according to other configurations, or it means a different effect display from the "specific effect display" according to other configurations. may

[Configuration 6-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared as the reception period. As the post-acceptance performance, the specified post-acceptance performance corresponding to the specified acceptance period can be executed even if the motion detection means does not detect the operation. It should be noted that the “specified acceptance period” related to the configuration 6-C is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 6-C. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean a reception period different from the "specific reception period" related to other configurations. good.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least the first timing and the second timing are used as the timing at which the execution of the performance after the specified acceptance is started without the action of the player being detected by the motion detection means within the specified acceptance period. and make sure there is. In addition, when the action of the player is not detected by the action detection means within the specific reception period and the performance after the specific reception is started at the second timing, the disappearing EF display can be displayed, and the disappearing EF can be displayed. When the display is displayed, the action prompting display is made difficult to see, so that it is possible to preferably recognize that the specific acceptance period has ended.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 6-C" is adopted, the performance after the specified reception is started at the first timing without the motion of the player being detected by the motion detection means within the specified reception period. However, when the disappearing EF display is displayed, a display different from the above-described action prompting display may be made difficult to see. That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest at which of the first timing or the second timing the execution of the performance after the specified reception is started after the performance after the specified reception is started.

At this time, the extinguished EF display is the same when it appears at the first timing when the performance after the specified acceptance starts to be executed, and when it appears at the second timing when the performance after the specified acceptance starts to be executed. It may be displayed as an image display. That is, in this case, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the execution is at the first timing or the second timing just by looking at the disappearing EF display. It is expected that the player's attention will be urged to the "target to be stolen".

[Configuration 7-C]
Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared as reception periods. It should be noted that the “specified acceptance period” related to the configuration 7-C is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 7-C. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean a reception period different from the "specific reception period" related to other configurations. good.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when a specific reception period occurs, the action after the specific reception corresponding to the specific reception period is performed without detecting the movement of the player during the specific reception period by the movement detecting means. There are cases where it is executed, and there are cases where the specific reception period ends without the movement of the player being detected by the movement detection means during the specific reception period and the performance after the specific reception is not executed. This makes it possible to preferably maintain the tension when the specific acceptance period occurs.

In addition, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 7-C", it is possible to generate a predetermined reception period different from the specific reception period, and when the predetermined reception period occurs, the player within the predetermined reception period It is preferable that a predetermined post-acceptance effect corresponding to the action is not detected by the action detection means without fail. It should be noted that the “predetermined acceptance period” related to the configuration 7-C is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 7-C. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "reception period" according to other configurations.

In other words, in this case, when the specific acceptance period occurs, it is preferable to impart a sense of tension such as ``if the action of the player is not detected by the action detection means within the acceptance period, the effect may not occur after the acceptance.'' However, when the predetermined acceptance period occurs, the corresponding post-acceptance effect will always occur, so it is expected that the amusement of the game will be improved.

[Configuration 8-C]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are first prepared as acceptance periods. A first precursor performance can be executed before the first reception period occurs, and when the second reception period occurs, the second precursor performance can be executed before the second reception period occurs. I made it The “first acceptance period” and “second acceptance period” related to the configuration 8-C are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 8-C. Therefore, it means the same reception period as the "first reception period (or reverse second reception period)" and "second reception period (or reverse first reception period)" related to other configurations. Alternatively, the "first acceptance period" and the "second acceptance period" according to other configurations may mean acceptance periods (for example, specific acceptance periods, etc.) different from each other. Also, the “first precursor effect” and “second precursor effect” related to the configuration 8-C are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 8-C. Therefore, it means the same omen effect as the "first omen effect (or reverse second omen effect)" and "second omen effect (or reverse first omen effect)" related to other configurations. Alternatively, the "first precursor effect" and the "second precursor effect" according to other configurations may mean a different precursor effect (for example, a specific precursor effect).

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1, during the period in which the first effect display (first precursor effect) is displayed, when the player performs a motion, the motion is detected by the motion detection means. A first period during which information detected by the motion detection means is used for the reception validity determination within the first reception period, and when a motion is performed by the player, even if the motion is detected by the motion detection means A second period during which the information detected by the motion detecting means is not used for the reception validity determination within the first reception period is included. As a result, it is possible to provide performance with a sense of tension.

Further, as will be described later, after detection by the action detection means is made within the second period of the period in which the first effect display is displayed, the first reception is performed without new detection by the action detection means. Even when the period ends, the first post-reception performance corresponding to the first reception period can be executed as the post-reception performance. That is, in this case, even if the action by the player is detected during the second period instead of the first period while the first precursor effect (first effect display) is being performed, Since it becomes possible to generate the post-acceptance effect without newly detecting an action, it is expected to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the “configuration 8-C”, the first period and the second period of the period in which the first effect display is displayed are both the first reception period and the first acceptance period. It may be the previous period. In other words, in this case, there is a case where the ``determination of validity of reception, in which the motion by the player is regarded as a valid motion'' is made within the first reception period based on the detection information obtained before the occurrence of the first reception period. Therefore, even if the player acts (operates) with excessive momentum before the occurrence of the first acceptance period, the player can redo the action after the occurrence of the first acceptance period. You will be able to enjoy the production after the reception without any need. Moreover, even if the action (operation) by the player is detected within the second period instead of the first period as a result of the player performing an action (operation) before the first accepting period occurs, Since it becomes possible to generate the post-acceptance effect without newly detecting an action, it is expected to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

[Configuration 9-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared as the reception period, and a specific effect display is displayed in the precursor effect corresponding to the specific reception period. We are making it possible to do so. It should be noted that the “specified acceptance period” related to the configuration 9-C is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 9-C. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean a reception period different from the "specific reception period" related to other configurations. good. Also, the “specific effect display” related to the configuration 9-C is merely a name used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 9-C. Therefore, it may mean the same effect display as the "specific effect display" according to other configurations, or it means a different effect display from the "specific effect display" according to other configurations. may

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when a player performs a motion during a period in which a specific effect display is displayed, the motion is detected by the motion detection means, and the detection information by the motion detection means is A first period within the specified acceptance period, which is used for the reception validity determination; Since the second period during which the reception validity determination is not performed within the specific reception period is included, the sense of tension can be preferably maintained.

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 9-C", the first period and the second period are periods before the occurrence of the specific reception period, and a specific effect display is displayed. Both may be included in the period. That is, in this case, even if the player has acted (operated) with excessive momentum before the specific acceptance period occurs, the player can accept the action without redoing the action after the specified acceptance period has occurred. You will be able to enjoy the post-production. However, if you act (operate) with too much momentum before the specific reception period occurs, the post-reception production will not necessarily be executed (second period), so you can feel the tension. It can be maintained well.

[Configuration 10-C]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are first prepared as acceptance periods. The first performance display is displayed in the performance, and the second performance display is displayed in the second precursor performance corresponding to the second receiving period. It should be noted that the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" relating to the configuration 10-C are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 10-C. Therefore, it means the same reception period as the "first reception period (or reverse second reception period)" and "second reception period (or reverse first reception period)" related to other configurations. Alternatively, the "first acceptance period" and the "second acceptance period" according to other configurations may mean acceptance periods (for example, specific acceptance periods) that are different from each other. Also, the “first effect display” and the “second effect display” related to the configuration 10-C are merely names used for explaining the technical idea of the configuration 10-C. Therefore, it means the same effect display as "first effect display (or reverse second effect display)" and "second effect display (or reverse first effect display)" according to other configurations. Alternatively, it means an effect display (for example, a specific effect display) different from the "first effect display" and "second effect display" according to other configurations. good too.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the "player When an action is performed, the action is detected by the action detection means and the information detected by the action detection means is used for the reception validity determination within the reception period. A pre-action non-permissible period during which, even if an action is detected by the action detecting means, the information detected by the action detecting means is not used in the acceptance validity determination within the acceptance period." is included, it is possible to preferably maintain the tension.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 10-C", both the "previous action permissible period" and the "previous action non-permissible period" occur during the reception period (first reception period or second reception period). You may make it the period before the timing which carries out. That is, in this case, based on the detection information obtained before the acceptance period (the first acceptance period or the second acceptance period) occurs, the "reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid action" is determined during the acceptance period. Therefore, even if the player acts (operates) with too much momentum before the reception period occurs, the player will not be able to perform the operation after the reception period has occurred. It becomes possible to enjoy the production after reception without redoing the operation. However, if the action (operation) occurs before the reception period (first reception period or second reception period) occurs, the post-reception production is not necessarily executed. (Pre-movement non-permissible period), the sense of tension can be preferably maintained.

[Configuration 11-C]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared as the reception period. Even if the motion detection means does not detect the operation, the after-reception performance corresponding to the specified reception period can be executed as the after-reception performance. It should be noted that the “specified acceptance period” related to the configuration 11-C is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 11-C. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean a reception period different from the "specific reception period" related to other configurations. good.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, there are at least two timings at which the execution of the performance after the specified acceptance is started without the action of the player being detected by the action detection means within the specified acceptance period. Therefore, it is expected that the game interest will be improved.

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 11-C", the timing at which the execution of the effect after the specific acceptance is started without the action of the player being detected by the action detection means within the specific acceptance period is At least a first timing and a second timing are prepared, and at the first timing, "the reception validity determination is made based on the action (detection information) by the player detected before the occurrence of the specific reception period. Execution of the production after the specific reception is started by being performed within the specific reception period (stock reception production), and at the second timing, ``any action by the player is detected, including before the occurrence of the specific reception period. Instead, the execution of the post-specific reception effect may be started based on the arrival of a predetermined timing (second timing). That is, in this case, ``the acceptance validity determination can be made within the acceptance period based on the action (detected information) by the player detected before the acceptance period occurs (stock acceptance effect). , it becomes possible to start execution of the performance after the specific reception. Moreover, during the specific reception period, even if such a "stock reception effect" fails, the production after the specific reception is executed as a remedy based on the arrival of the predetermined timing (second timing). Because it is, you will be able to challenge the "stock reception effect" with confidence.

[Configuration 12-C]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are first prepared as acceptance periods. Even if the movement of the player is not detected by the movement detection means within the first acceptance period, the corresponding first reception effect can be executed, and when the second acceptance period occurs, the second acceptance period. Even if the movement of the player is not detected by the movement detecting means, the corresponding second post-acceptance effect can be executed. Note that the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" relating to the configuration 12-C are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 12-C. Therefore, it means the same reception period as the "first reception period (or reverse second reception period)" and "second reception period (or reverse first reception period)" related to other configurations. Alternatively, the "first acceptance period" and the "second acceptance period" according to other configurations may mean acceptance periods (for example, specific acceptance periods, etc.) different from each other.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the effect after the first acceptance is executed when the motion of the player is not detected by the motion detection means within the first acceptance period, and when the motion of the player is executed within the first acceptance period Since the execution time is set to be the same between the case where the action is executed based on detection by the action detection means, the interest in the game can be preferably maintained.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 12-C", the detection information (detection information of the player's action) acquired before the occurrence of the first reception period is within the first reception period. By being used for the reception validity determination in the first reception period, the action by the player is not detected by the movement detection means within the first reception period, and the effect after the first reception can be executed, and the second reception period The detection information (detection information of the action by the player) acquired before the occurrence of is provided for the acceptance validity determination within the second acceptance period, so that the action by the player is detected within the second acceptance period. is not detected by the action detection means, and the second reception effect may be made executable. According to such a configuration, even if the player acts (operates) with excessive momentum before the first reception period or the second reception period occurs, the first reception period or the second reception period After the occurrence of the second reception period, the performance after reception can be enjoyed without redoing the operation.

[Configuration 13-C]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the portent effect suggesting that an action opportunity is given to the player, the portent effect sound corresponding to the portent effect is output, There are cases where the omen effect sound corresponding to the omen effect is not output. As a result, it is expected that the sense of tension will be favorably maintained in providing the player with an opportunity to act.

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 13-C", when a specific predictive effect sound is output before the occurrence of the acceptance period in which the player is given an action opportunity, the acceptance While there are at least a first timing and a second timing as timings at which the action by the player is not detected by the action detection means and the corresponding post-acceptance effect is started to be executed within the period, On the other hand, when no foreshadowing effect sound is output before the reception period during which the action opportunity is given occurs, the movement of the player is not detected by the movement detection means during the reception period. There may be a case where there are at least a first timing and a second timing as the timing at which the performance after acceptance is started, and a case where there is at least the first timing without the second timing. That is, in this case, it is expected that the sense of tension in the case where the portent effect sound corresponding to the portent effect is not output is more suitably increased.

[Other configurations]
Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, there is a acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period) in which it is allowed to perform acceptance validity determination that the player's motion is a valid motion based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means. When it occurs, an integrated model image display (Fig. 144 ), it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game until the display (display change) is executed after reception. Regarding such an integrated model image display, the operation reception effect (reception period) that occurs when the pattern effect progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and the fluctuation pattern that does not develop into SP reach. It is desirable to display it in both the operation reception effect (reception period) and the low-expectation non-suppressed reception effect and the high-expectation suppressed reception effect. .

It should be noted that the "integrated simulated image display" according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. For example, a display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the peripheral decoration image. In addition, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 144) with different degrees of expectation are prepared as the "integrated simulated image display", and it is also the same that the display is made in one of these modes.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example as well, when the reception permitted state (reception period) occurs, it suggests that the operation reception is permitted or that the operation reception is permitted. An acceptance acceptance sound is output, thereby making it difficult to forget to operate. Here, "acceptable sound" means whether or not the acceptance allowable state (acceptance period) always occurs while the sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned) when the output of the sound is started. , is a sound in which an acceptance allowable state (acceptance period) has already occurred. In other words, it can be said that the "acceptable sound" is a sound that is not output under a situation in which an effect that has nothing to do with the acceptable reception state (acceptance period) is being performed.

Further, each reception allowable state (each reception period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. That is, the acceptance acceptable state classified into the first type is assumed to occur when a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) is selected, but a low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) is a valid period that cannot occur (a valid period generated based on the establishment of a specific condition (selection of a specific high-expectation variation pattern) in the performance determination based on the result of the big hit determination). In addition, the second type of reception acceptance state is the valid period that can occur in both the high-expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) and the low-expected fluctuation pattern (occurred as a result of advance notice determination validity period, etc.).

The "integrated simulated image display" according to this embodiment can be displayed in both the first-type and second-type reception permission states (reception period). Here, both the first-type acceptance allowable state (acceptance period) and the second-type acceptability state (acceptance period) are acceptance states in which the same operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is given an opportunity to operate. Since it is assumed that this occurs in the allowable state (acceptance period), the "integrated simulated image display" displayed during the acceptance period is an image imitating the same operation means (operation button 410).

Of the multiple modes prepared as "integrated simulated image display", the highly anticipated special mode (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 144(d)) is the first type reception acceptance state (reception period) 144, and in the second-type reception acceptance state (reception period), display is possible only in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the modes shown in FIGS. 144(a) to 144(c)). You may do so. In this case, in the first type acceptance acceptable state (acceptance period), any of the multiple modes including the special mode (for example, FIGS. A determination is made as to whether or not to display the "display", and the "integrated model image display" is displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination. Even in the second type acceptance acceptable state (acceptance period), any of the multiple modes (for example, FIGS. 144 (a) to (c)) that do not include special modes based on the result of the big hit determination "integrated model image" may be determined whether to display, and the "integrated simulated image display" may be displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination.

The details of the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described "Configuration 1-C" to "Configuration 13-C" will be described below with reference to the drawings. However, each configuration described below is merely described as the best embodiment, and does not necessarily have to be provided. That is, each configuration described in the specification described below corresponds to any one of the above "configuration 1-C" to "configuration 13-C" when it is desired to obtain further effects It is possible to arbitrarily select and adopt only the configuration that As described above, the pachinko machine 1 has production contents (for example, a conversation notice, a cut-in notice, a movable object notice, etc. as productions after reception) that progress when the reception is received. There are multiple reception periods (reception effects) with different types), and it is possible to generate a type of reception period (reception effect) according to the result of the judgment (jackpot judgment, production judgment, etc.). Here, as a plurality of reception periods (reception effects), at least a 1D reception period (1D post-reception effect) and a 2D reception period (2D post-reception effect) are prepared.

234 to 246, the characteristics of each reception period (reception effect) will be described. It should be noted that each reception period described above with reference to FIG. Alternatively, it may be implemented as either the 1D reception period (1D post-reception effect) or the 2D reception period (2D post-reception effect). In addition, in order to realize each invention described below, it is sufficient to have only the necessary configuration among the configurations described below, and these are not necessarily required for each reception period described above with reference to FIG. 233. You can choose not to prepare.

FIGS. 234 to 236 are time charts showing an example of the effect content when condition 1D is satisfied as a result of determination (big hit determination or effect determination) and the 1D reception period (1D reception effect) occurs. . 240 to 243 are diagrams showing examples of effects in variation patterns in which the 1D reception period (1D reception effect) occurs.

Now, the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, normal game state that is non-probability variable / non-time saving), and "1D fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of fluctuation pattern determination Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, effect determination (previous effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the 1D variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (such as the effect depiction according to the 1D variable pattern and the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the 1D variable pattern) is started ("Situation shown in FIG. 240 (a) ”), during the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) according to the result of the determination of the previous notice performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected “1D variation pattern” itself. Become.

However, in the effect related to the "1D variation pattern", even if any result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination), as shown in FIG. The 1D reception period (valid period) is generated (“Situation shown in FIG. 241(d)”). Thus, when the player's action is accepted within the 1D acceptance period, the 1D post-acceptance effect is performed based on the acceptance.

In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this embodiment, when such a 1D reception period occurs, a reception period (effective period) will soon occur in relation to this. A sign effect display that suggests, an action target display (simulated image display) that suggests a reception target (operation receiving part, etc.), a remaining time display that suggests the remaining time of the reception period, an operation target display (simulated image display) and remaining Disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the time display, etc., and post-acceptance performance display suggesting the degree of expectation (proportion of appearance of the big hit pattern) according to the acceptance are performed respectively. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%". As described above, the operation target display (simulated image display) according to this example is displayed as the "integrated simulated image display IG" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display. , is not necessarily limited to this, and may be displayed separately. This also applies to other acceptance periods.

More specifically, when the timing tW1 before the occurrence of the first D reception period arrives, as shown in FIG. 234(b) and FIGS. Execution of the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" is started. As will be described later, the ``1D precursor effect display ZEC'' according to this example includes the ``1D precursor effect display ZEC-1 (see FIG. 240(b))'' and the ``1D precursor effect display ZEC-1 , which makes it difficult to visually recognize "1D precursor effect display ZEC-2 (see FIG. 240(c))" are sequentially displayed. However, it is not always necessary to provide such a configuration. In this example, as shown in FIG. 234(d), when the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" is executed, the effect sound (predictive effect sound) corresponding to the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" is output. be done.

Further, the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" according to this example is hidden at the timing tW2 when the 1D reception period occurs, but is displayed so as to straddle the timing tW2. There may be.

Further, as will be described later, in the 1D reception period according to this embodiment, before the occurrence of the 1D reception period, the player performs an operation (for example, pressing the operation button 410) on the operation means (for example, the operation button 410). operation) is performed, the operation (operation) is detected by the operation detection means (sensor, etc.), and the detection information is stored in the detection information storage means (peripheral control RAM 1511c, or corresponding processing step, etc.), it may be stored in memory even at the point in time when the 1D reception period occurs, and may be used for the reception validity determination during the 1D reception period (when the stock reception effect is executed). It has become.

In this respect, in the examples shown in FIGS. 234 and 235 and the example in which the production progresses from FIG. It is assumed that a 1D reception period occurs, that is, a case where detection information obtained before the 1D reception period is not used for the reception validity determination during the 1D reception period.

More specifically, when the first D reception period occurs at timing tW2 without the stock reception effect being performed, the effect display according to this example is shown in FIGS. In the device 1600 (first effect device), as the integrated model image display IG, "model image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)" are displayed. Even if the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) can appear at the timing tW2 when the corresponding reception period (here, the 1D reception period) occurs Alternatively, it may appear before the timing tW2 and be displayed across the timing tW2. It should be noted that the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed when the reception (reception validity judgment) is made within the 1D reception period, is hidden when the 1D reception period ends without the judgment) being made. The 1D acceptance period according to this example ends when the timing tW3 arrives when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (acceptance validity determination) (see FIG. 234(a)).

Also, in the 1D reception period according to this example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) can be displayed in multiple modes (for example, FIGS. 144(a), (d) )). Figures 241 to 243 correspond to the case where the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed in the "mode shown in Figure 144(d)". ing. When the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the “mode shown in FIG. 144(a)”, the integrated model images shown in FIGS. The display IG (simulated image display, frame image, gauge image) is only changed from "the mode shown in FIG. 144(d)" to "the mode shown in FIG. 144(a)". I will omit it. It should be noted that during the 1D reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in one of a plurality of modes including the modes shown in FIGS. 144(b) and (c). may be made.

In FIG. 234, the action by the player is detected within such a first D reception period, and based on the detected information, at the timing tW2a, the "reception validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made. It is assumed that That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 234(a), based on the fact that the action by the player has been accepted at timing tW2a (the acceptance validity determination has been made), the 1D accepting period ends and the Execution of the post-reception effect (1D post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1D reception period is started.

241(d) to "I1 (FIG. 242(e1) to FIG. 242(i1)), the production after reception corresponding to the 1D reception period (1D reception production) This corresponds to the case where the first mode with a relatively low degree of expectation is executed, and the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 241(d) to "I2 (FIGS. This corresponds to the case where the second mode with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as the post-reception effect (1D post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1D reception period. "0%" or "100%" may be included.

In this regard, in the 1D reception period, as shown in FIG. 234, at timing tW2a when the action by the player is accepted (when the effect is started after the 1D reception in response to the acceptance), the "integral The "simulated image display IG" is not hidden, and the integrated simulated image display IG is not made difficult to see.

That is, the effect after receiving the 1D reception according to this embodiment includes the "effect display after receiving the 1D" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) and the second effect device (for example, sub liquid crystal, movable At least the "specific effect after the 1D reception" using the body, effect lamps, etc.) and the effect sound after the 1D reception using the 3rd effect device (speaker) are realized as a combined effect. (It may not necessarily be realized as a composite effect by three effect devices), but among those effect devices, an integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) In the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) where is displayed, the timing of starting execution of the "first reception after reception effect display" as the 1D post-reception effect is delayed compared to other effect devices. By doing so, the visibility of the "integrated model image display IG" is intentionally maintained even after the acceptance is made.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 242 (e1) or (e2), even after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is displayed in multiple modes (FIG. 144 ( Since the player can easily recognize which one of a) to (d)) was displayed, it is expected that the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed appropriately. become.

Here, after the end of the acceptance period, in order to facilitate recognition of the mode in which the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period, it is necessary to consider the "integrated model image display" after the acceptance. It can be said that it is desirable to set a longer time period during which the IG is displayed in an easily visible form. However, even though the acceptance has been made and the post-acceptance effects (the second effect device and the third effect device) are already being executed, the integrated model image display IG is during the acceptance period. If it continues to be displayed in the same mode, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the acceptance has been made. There is a concern that

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 234(b) and FIG. (When the timing tW2b arrives), display related to disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display is started.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the “extinction related display (extinction EF At least part of the area where the “disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)” is displayed is “integrated model image display IG (simulated image display, remaining time display)”. overlaps the area where is displayed.

With such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see. It becomes possible to suggest that the effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the gaze of the player will naturally shift from the integrated model image display IG to the post-acceptance effects (second effect device, third effect device) (after timing tW2b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception production (the second production device and the third production device) has already been executed, the integrated model image display IG can be continuously displayed for a relatively long time although it is difficult to visually recognize it. is made possible, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period.

In addition, in the 1D reception period, as the corresponding post-reception production (1D post-reception production), a low-expectation aspect ((e1) to (i1) in FIG. 242) appears, and a high-expectation aspect ( 242 (e2) to (i2)), different forms (first disappearance-related display SKD1, second disappearance-related display SKD2) appear as disappearance-related displays. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 242(f1) and (f2), the "effect display after reception of the 1D" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet started. Even so, it is confirmed whether the disappearance-related display appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is displayed as "first disappearance-related display SKD1" or "second disappearance-related display SKD2". Thus, it becomes possible to guess whether or not the "1D effect display after reception" will be executed in a highly expected mode.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 234(b), FIG. When the timing tW2c within the period in which the mode) appears, the first effect device (effect display device 1600) responds to the acceptance of the action by the player within the 1D reception period. Execution of "1D post-acceptance display UGD1 (cut-in effect)" is started. However, here, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. As shown in g1), the first mode (here, the 1D post-reception effect display UGD1-1 as a cut-in effect by the princess character)) is the 1D post-reception effect display UGD1 corresponding to the 1D reception period. 242 (f2 ), the second mode (here, the 1D post-reception effect display UGD1-2 as a cut-in effect by the samurai character) is displayed as the 1D post-reception effect display UGD1 corresponding to the 1D reception period. It has become so.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKD1, second disappearance-related display SKD2)" are displayed, respectively, the "1D post-acceptance effect display UGD1 ( Execution of "1D post-acceptance display UGD1-1" or "1D post-acceptance display UGD1-2") is started. As a result, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed for a relatively long time after being accepted within the 1D acceptance period, the acceptance by the first effect device (effect display device 1600) After-effect (1D after-receiving effect display UGD1 can be started without much delay as compared with other effect devices, and deterioration of game interest can be suppressed. Since the effect display UGD1 after the 1D reception is started while the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, it suggests that the 1D reception period has already ended. is expected to naturally shift from the "integrated model image display IG" to the "1D post-reception effect display UGD1 (1D post-reception effect display UGD1-1 or 1D post-reception effect display UGD1-2)". (after timing tW2c).

On the other hand, for the "1D post-reception effect display UGD1 (1D post-reception effect display UGD1-1 or 1D post-reception effect display UGD1-2)", the area where the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed. When displayed so as to overlap with at least a part of (it does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "integrated model image display IG", and the "1st D The “integrated model image display IG” is preferentially displayed with respect to the post-reception effect display UGD1 (first D post-reception effect display UGD1-1 or first D post-reception effect display UGD1-2). As a result, even when the execution of the "1D post-reception effect display UGD1 (1D post-reception effect display UGD1-1 or 1D post-reception effect display UGD1-2)" is started, the integrated model image is displayed within the reception period. This makes it easier to recognize in which mode the IG was displayed.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to "1D post-reception effect display UGD1 (1D post-reception effect display UGD1-1 or 1D post-reception effect display UGD1-2)" is started in this way, , as shown in FIG. 234(b), FIG. -2)” is displayed, first, out of the “integrated model image display IG” and the “disappearance-related display”, the “integrated model image display IG” is hidden. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 234(b), FIG. "Display SKD1 or Second Disappearance-Related Display SKD2" is hidden. After 1D acceptance, the display related to the effect display UGD1-2)” is performed.

In this regard, the “1D post-reception effect display UGD1” refers to a plurality of modes with different expectations (here, the 1D post-reception effect display UGD1-1 or the 1D post-reception effect display UGD1-1 or 1D It is displayed in one of the post-acceptance display UGD1-2). Therefore, the "1D post-reception effect display UGD1" will continue to be executed for a relatively long period of time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display" are hidden.

Further, in the example of the effect corresponding to the 1D reception period (FIG. 242), when the reception is made within the 1D reception period and the "1D post-reception effect display UGD1" is executed, the "1D post-reception effect display UGD1" is executed. The background image is switched before and after the display UGD1'' is started.

According to such a configuration, under the circumstances shown in FIGS. 1 effect device), even if there is a change in effect, it is possible to suggest that the "1D post-reception effect display UGC1" has not yet started.

Note that in this production example, the timing of starting the display of the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKD1, second disappearance-related display SKD2)" ( Although the display is started at a timing (timing tW2c) later than the timing tW2b), the timing (timing tW2b) at which the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKD1, second disappearance-related display SKD2)" starts to be displayed. The display may be started at the same time as (timing tW2b).

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 242, the background image is switched to the same background image for the appearance of a low-expectation aspect and the appearance of a high-expectation aspect as an effect after reception. The background image may be switched to a different one depending on whether the aspect with a low degree of expectation appears or the aspect with a high degree of expectation appears. Also, the background image may be switched when a mode with a high degree of expectation appears, but the background image may not be switched when a mode with a low degree of expectation appears.

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, when the 1D reception period occurs, it is within a limited time and a limited display screen (effect Various displays are performed in the display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decline in the interest in the game. However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tW2c) of the 1D post-reception effect (1D post-reception effect display) in response to the acceptance is set earlier than the received timing tW2a. The reality is that it has to be delayed.

Therefore, in this example, when the player's action is accepted within the 1D acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. The 1D after-reception performance (1D post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device is started prior to the 1D post-reception performance (1D post-reception performance display) using the first performance device. I'm trying

According to such a configuration, the execution start is delayed from the timing tW2a at which the reception is received in the 1D reception period only for a part of the 1D post-reception effect (display of the 1D post-reception effect). Execution of the 1D post-receipt effect itself can be started without delay from the same timing tW2a.

Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or may be a movable object capable of effecting operations, or It may be provided as a production lamp capable of emitting light. In any case, it is provided so that effects (display effects, movable effects, light-emitting effects, etc.) can be performed in a plurality of modes with different expectations. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. Then, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. , the mode in which "women's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is the specific effect UTD1 (first D reception As a 1D post-reception specific effect UTD1-1), which is a low-expected aspect of the post-specific effect UTD1, precedes the 1D post-reception effect (1D post-reception effect display UGD1-1) using the first effect device. and start executing. On the other hand, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. As shown in e2), the mode in which "men's kimono" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is the specific effect UTD1 (first As the 1D post-reception specific effect UTD1-2), which is a highly anticipated aspect of the 1D post-reception specific effect UTD1, the 1D post-reception effect using the first effect device (1D post-reception effect display UGD1-2) Execution is started prior to .

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 241(d), in addition to the "integrated model image display IG" in the production display device 1600 (first production device), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) also displays the first D An effect within the reception period (display of the samurai character and the princess character) that suggests that the reception period has occurred is executed. In the reception period effect on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device), the “integrated model image display IG” on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is displayed in a low-expectation mode (not shown). 241(d)) are displayed in the same manner.

That is, in this case, during the 1D acceptance period in which the player is provided with an action opportunity (operating opportunity), the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) displays different modes depending on the degree of expectation, and The same mode appears on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second rendering device) regardless of the degree of expectation. However, after this, if "receiving valid determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made within the 1D receiving period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) "integrated model image display IG ” continues (while the degree of expectation for the post-reception production has not yet been suggested), the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) shows a different mode according to the degree of expectation. Become. According to such a configuration, it is possible to obtain performance information more quickly by paying attention to an appropriate performance device from time to time rather than watching only the performance by one performance device. Since it becomes like this, it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

In this production example, the reception period production (display of the samurai character and the princess character) on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) is continuously executed before the 1D reception period occurs. , which also functions as a premonition effect suggesting that the 1D reception period will occur. However, the reception period effect on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) and the precursor effect on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) may be executed as mutually different effects.

Also, in this production example, as the specific production UTD1 after the 1D reception, the degree of expectation is suggested by which of the "specific production UTD1-1 after the reception of the 1D" and the "specific production UTD1-2 after the reception of the 1D" appears. However, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of modes for the specific effect UTD1 after receiving the first D. For example, as the 1D post-reception specific effect UTD1, only “1D post-reception specific effect UTD1-2” is provided, and depending on whether the 1D post-reception specific effect UTD1 appears ratio) may be suggested. That is, in this case, it is suggested that when "the specific effect UTD1-2 after the 1D reception" appears, the expectation level is higher than when the "specific effect UTD1-2 after the 1D reception" does not appear. Become.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is further provided with a third effect device (speaker), and when the 1D reception period occurs, timing tW2 shown in FIG. At a timing slightly earlier than this, the output of the acceptable reception sound is started. That is, the acceptable reception sound corresponding to the 1D reception period is audibly output across the timing tW2 at which the 1D reception period occurs. Actions (operations) by the player can be accepted.

Here, in the first D reception period, as the reception allowable sounds, a first long allowable sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively long time and a first short allowable sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively short time and are output respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 216(d), the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound are started to be output at the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, one (or both) of the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound may be started to be output at or after timing tW2 when the first D reception period occurs.

In the first D acceptance period, when the player accepts an action (acceptance validity determination) while the first long allowable sound and/or the first short allowable sound are audibly output, the acceptance is accepted. Based on what has been done, the first long permissive tone and/or the first short permissive tone are prematurely terminated (premature termination of the audible output state).

In this regard, as for the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound, as shown in FIG. 241(d)). That is, in this case, although the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound suggest the degree of expectation within the reception period, unlike the "integrated model image display IG", the reception (reception Since it will be executed as something that cannot be confirmed when the validity judgment) is made, there is tension about when to make the acceptance (validity judgment) within the acceptance period It becomes expected to maintain good feeling.

Further, in the first D acceptance period, if the player accepts an action while acceptance acceptance sounds (first long acceptance sound and first short acceptance sound) are audibly output, the acceptance acceptance sound is terminated halfway. In addition, when the acceptance is made, based on this, the audible output of the above-mentioned 1D post-acceptance effect sound is started. The 1D post-acceptance production sound is executed in such a way as to suggest the degree of expectation. output). That is, in this case, in the 1D reception period, unlike the case of the production (display production) performed by the first production device, the production (acceptance acceptable sound) performed within the reception period and the acceptance There is no conflict (overlapping) with the effect to be performed (effect sound after reception of 1D).

Such a 1D post-acceptance effect sound is similar to the 1D post-acceptance effect display UGD1, as shown in FIG. Effect)” will continue to be executed for a relatively long period of time even after it is hidden. In addition, regarding the 1D post-reception production sound, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 241(d) to “I1 (FIG. case) and an example in which the production progresses from FIG. It is desirable to output an output sound (mode).

In the 1D reception period, the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound are output as the reception permissible sounds. Only allowable sounds may be output.

Further, when the acceptance (reception valid determination) is made in the 1D acceptance period, the third effect device can hear not only the 1D post-acceptance effect sound suggesting the degree of expectation, but also the "reception sound" not suggesting the degree of expectation. It will be output. That is, the "reception sound" is an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 241 (d) to "I2 (FIG. 242 (e2) to (i2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as the reception after reception) audible output in the same manner It is what is done. Such a "reception sound" is audibly output (regardless of the degree of expectation) even when the reception (reception validity determination) is made in a reception period different from the 1D reception period. According to such a configuration, no matter how novel the performance after reception is performed, the reception (reception validity determination) is properly performed when the "reception sound" is audibly output. Since it becomes possible to suitably recognize that it is in, it is possible to encourage concentration on the content of the presentation after reception.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 235, "i1 (FIG. 242(e3)-(i3))" from FIG. The example where the effect progresses to i4))” assumes the case where the player does not perform any action (operation) and the reception (reception validity determination) is not performed within the 1D reception period.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 235, after the 1D acceptance period occurs, the above-described timing tW3 arrives without acceptance of the action (operation) by the player (validation of acceptance determination). However, in the 1D reception period according to this example, even if the action (operation) by the player is not performed within the 1D reception period and reception (reception validity determination) is not performed, the timing tW3 arrives. Based on this, the same post-reception effect (here, 1D post-reception effect) as when reception validity determination is made within the 1D reception period is generated.

For example, the case where the production progresses from FIG. ) to "I1 (Fig. 242 (e1) ~ (i1))" (low expectations) should have progressed, but in reality, the reception validity judgment is not made within the 1D reception period. , corresponds to the case where the 1D post-acceptance effect is executed based on the arrival of the timing tW3. That is, in this case, the display area of the gauge image as the "remaining time display" in the integrated model image display IG is "0", so that "I1 (Fig. 242 (e1) to (i1))" 242(e3)-(i3), the production is basically the same as in the case of "I1 (FIG. 242(e1)-(i1))" will be advanced.

241(d) to "i2 ((e4) to (i4) in FIG. 242)" means that if the acceptance validity determination is tentatively made within the 1D reception period, ) to "I2 (Fig. 242 (e2) ~ (i2))" (high expectations) should have progressed, but in reality, the reception validity judgment will not be made during the 1D reception period. , corresponds to the case where the 1D post-acceptance effect is executed based on the arrival of the timing tW3. That is, in this case, since the display area of the gauge image as the "remaining time display" in the integrated model image display IG is "0", "I2 (Fig. 242 (e2) to (i2))" 242(e4)-(i4), the production is basically the same as in the case of "I2 (FIG. 242(e2)-(i2))" will be advanced.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, there are cases where the 1D post-reception production is executed based on the reception validity determination being made within the 1D reception period, and reception validity determination is made within the 1D reception period. In the case where the 1D post-reception effect is executed based on the arrival of the timing tW3 without being performed, the 1D post-reception effect (post-reception effect display, post-reception specific effect display, post-reception effect sound, etc.) As the execution time is to be different from each other. In this example, if the reception validity determination is not made within the 1D reception period and the timing tW3 arrives, the effect after the 1D reception is executed, the reception validity determination is made within the 1D reception period. The execution time of the 1D post-reception performance is set to be shorter than the case where the 1D post-reception performance is executed based on the above, so that the acceptance validity determination is made within the 1D reception period. The player is encouraged to do so. However, if the reception validity determination is not made within the 1D reception period and the timing tW3 arrives, the effect after the 1D reception is executed, based on the fact that the reception validity determination is made within the 1D reception period The execution time of the 1D post-reception effect may be set longer than when the 1D post-reception effect is executed.

On the other hand, FIG. 236 shows that as a result of the action (for example, pressing operation) performed by the player on the operation means (for example, operation button 410) before the 1D reception period occurs, the action (operation) is detected by an operation detection means (sensor, etc.), and the detected information is stored and held in a detection information storage means (peripheral control RAM 1511c, a corresponding processing step in a program, etc.) until the first D reception period occurs. It is assumed that the above reception validity determination is made within the 1D reception period (the stock reception effect is executed during the 1D reception period).

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. It is made possible to execute a precursor effect display (here, 1D precursor effect display ZEC) suggesting that an opportunity will be granted. In this regard, during the period in which the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is executed,
・A first period (stock period) and
・When the action is performed by the player, even if the action is detected by the action detection means, the information detected by the action detection means will not be used for the "reception validity determination" within the 1D reception period. A second period (non-stock period) is included.

236 and 240(b) and (c), the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" according to this example corresponds to the "first period (stock period)". Premonition effect display ZEC-1 (see FIG. 240(b))” and “1D premonition effect display ZEC-2 (see FIG. 240(c)) corresponding to the above-mentioned “second period (non-stock period)” ” are displayed in sequence. That is, in this case, the action by the player is performed during the period in which the "1D precursor effect display ZEC-1 (see FIG. 240(b))" is executed in the period in which the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" is executed. is detected, this will be used for the acceptance validity determination within the 1D reception period, but within the period in which the "1D precursor effect display ZEC-2 (see FIG. 240(c))" is executed When an action by the player is detected in , it is not used for the reception validity determination during the 1D reception period.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 236, during the "first period (stock period)" of the period in which the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" is executed, the player performs an action, It is assumed that it is detected.

However, it is only during the 1D reception period that the "reception validity determination in which the action (operation) by the player is the valid action" is allowed. Therefore, even if the action is performed by the player during the "first period (stock period)" and is detected by the action detecting means, that time (the time when the 1D acceptance period has not yet occurred). "Reception validity determination" is not made in . That is, the detection information (detection information of the player's action) obtained in the "first period (stock period)" is stored and held even at the timing tW2 when the 1D reception period occurs. Then, at timing tW2 (more precisely, judgment timing tW2A which arrives immediately (several milliseconds) after timing tW2 occurs), "reception validity judgment" is made based on the stored detection information. It will be determined whether or not there is a situation that should be done, and as a result of this determination (based on the stored detection information (detection information obtained in the "first period (stock period)")) " Reception validity determination" is made (stock reception effect). Furthermore, based on the fact that the reception validity determination is made, the 1D reception period that has just occurred is terminated, and the post-reception effect corresponding to the 1D reception period (the 1D post-reception effect ) will be started.

Therefore, even if the action is performed by the player during the "first period (stock period)" and is detected by the action detection means, the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is displayed at the time of detection. There is no possibility that it will be terminated halfway or that the corresponding premonitory effect sound will not be interrupted. Furthermore, even if the action is performed by the player during the "first period (stock period)" and is detected by the action detection means, the effect display device 1600 ( It does not cause any reaction in the first effect device), nor does it stop outputting the reception acceptance sound after the detection. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, until the arrival of the timing tW2 at which the 1D receiving period occurs, the action by the player is performed in the "first period (stock period)", and this action is detected. The performance is developed in the same manner regardless of whether it is detected by the motion detection means or not detected by the motion detection means.

Also, in the 1D reception period, if the "reception validity determination" is made based on the detection information obtained before the occurrence of the 1D reception period (the stock reception effect is executed). Also, as shown in FIGS. 236 and 243, basically, the production progresses in the same manner as when the reception validity determination is made based on the detection information obtained within the 1D reception period. Become.

Therefore, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 236 (when the stock reception effect is executed in the 1D reception period), the effect is changed from FIG. progresses (when the expectation is relatively low as the production after reception), and when the production progresses from FIG. 240 (c) to “J2 (FIG. 234 and 242 (e1) to ( i1) or the effect is executed as described with reference to FIGS. 242(e2) to (i2).

For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 236 (when the stock acceptance effect is executed in the 1D acceptance period), as in the case shown in FIG. At timing tW2 (more precisely, timing tW2A), which is the point in time when the 1D post-acceptance production is started, the “integrated model image display IG” is in the display state, and the integrated model image display IG is visually recognized. I don't make it difficult.

However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 236 (when the stock reception effect is executed in the 1D reception period), as also shown in FIGS. At timing tW2 (more precisely, timing tW2A), which is the time point (the time point at which the 1D post-reception effect is started in response to the acceptance), the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" is not hidden, and this is It is in the condition shown. That is, in this case, the action by the player is accepted based on the detection information obtained during the period in which the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" is executed before the occurrence of the 1D acceptance period ( It becomes possible to suggest that there is a situation in which reception validity determination is made).

Also, in the examples shown in FIG. 236(b) and FIG. 243(f5) or (f6), timing tW2 (more precisely, When a predetermined time has passed from timing tW2A) (when timing tW2B arrives), display related to disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes the integrated simulated image display IG (simulated image display) difficult to see is started. 243(e5)-(i5)) and high-expectation modes (FIGS. 243(e6)-(i6)) appear, 234 and 242 in that different modes (first disappearing related display SKD1, second disappearing related display SKD2) appear as related displays.

However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 236 (when the stock reception effect is executed in the 1D reception period), as shown in FIGS. The display SKD1 or the second extinction-related display SKD2) is displayed so as to make not only the integrated model image display IG (model image display) but also the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" difficult to see.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 236 (an example in which the stock reception effect is executed), the “disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)” is displayed while the “1D precursor effect display ZEC” is being displayed. At least a part of the area where the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed overlaps the area where the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" is displayed. According to such a configuration, even when the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" is continuously displayed after the acceptance is made, the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" is made difficult to be visually recognized. Thus, it is possible to suggest that the post-reception production (second production device, third production device) is already being executed.

Also in the example shown in FIG. 236 (the example in which the stock acceptance effect is executed), when the timing tW2C within the period during which the disappearance-related display is displayed, as shown in (g5) or (g6) in FIG. Secondly, "1D post-acceptance effect display UGD1 (cut-in effect)" as a post-acceptance effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the acceptance of the action by the player within the 1D receive period. starts running. 240(c) to ``J1 (Fig. 240 (c) to “J2 (Fig. 243 (e6) to (i6))” (if the expectation is relatively high as a production after reception ) are executed in different modes (1D post-reception effect display UGD1-1, 1D post-reception effect display UGD1-2), which are similar to the cases shown in FIGS.

However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 236 (when the stock reception effect is executed in the 1D reception period), when the timing tW2C arrives, the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" is hidden. ing.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 236 (an example in which the stock reception effect is executed during the 1D reception period), the "1D post-reception effect display UGD1 (1D post-reception effect display UGD1-1 or 1D post-reception effect display UGD1-1 or 1D post-reception effect display UGD1-1 or 236(b), FIG. 243(h5) or (h6), the "effect display UGD1 after 1D acceptance (first 1D post-reception effect display UGD1-1 or 1D post-reception effect display UGD1-2)” is displayed. "Model image display IG" is hidden. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 236(b), FIG. "Display SKD1 or Second Disappearance-Related Display SKD2" is hidden. After 1D acceptance, the display related to the effect display UGD1-2)” is performed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 236 and 243 (examples in which the stock reception effect is executed), the second effect device is activated based on the fact that the action by the player has been received (the acceptance validity determination has been made). The 1D post-reception effect (specific effect after the 1D reception) and the 1D post-reception effect (the effect sound after the 1D reception) using the 3rd effect device are performed after the 1D reception using the 1st effect device. Execution is started prior to the effect (display of effect after reception of 1D), or acceptance of action by the player while the first long allowable sound and/or the first short allowable sound are audibly output determination) is made, the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are terminated halfway (the audible output state is terminated halfway).

However, one (or both) of the first long permissible sound and (or) the first short permissible sound may be started to be output at the timing tW2 when the first D reception period occurs or later. is as described above. 236 and 243 (examples in which the stock acceptance effect is executed), the examples shown in FIGS. Unlike the case of , the output of the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound may not be started.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the case of the example shown in FIGS. In the case of the example (the case of acceptance based on the detection information obtained during the 1D acceptance period), the 1D acceptance executed based on the acceptance validity determination being made within the 1D acceptance period The execution times of post-effects (post-acceptance effect display, post-acceptance specific effect display, post-acceptance effect sound, etc.) are set to be different from each other. In this example, if the production after the 1D reception is executed based on the detection information obtained before the occurrence of the 1D reception period (see FIGS. 236 and 243), within the 1D reception period The execution time of the 1D post-reception effect is set to be shorter than when the 1D post-reception effect is executed based on the obtained detection information (see FIGS. 234 and 242). The player is encouraged to play such that the player's operation is detected within the 1D acceptance period. However, if the effect after the 1D acceptance is executed based on the detection information obtained before the occurrence of the 1D acceptance period (see FIGS. 236 and 243), it can be obtained within the 1D acceptance period. The execution time of the 1D post-reception effect may be longer than when the 1D post-reception effect is executed based on the detected information (see FIGS. 234 and 242).

236 and 243 (example in which the stock acceptance effect is executed during the 1D acceptance period), the case shown in FIG. ), the execution time as the 1D post-reception production (post-reception production display, post-reception specific production display, post-reception production sound, etc.) is set to be different from each other.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 236 and 243 (examples in which the stock reception effect is executed during the 1D reception period), the timing at which the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" is hidden is set to the 1D post-reception effect. Although the timing tW2C at which the display UGD1 starts to be executed is set to be the same, the timing does not necessarily have to be the same. For example, for the "1D precursor effect display ZEC", at the same timing as the "integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image and gauge image))" (timing after timing tW2C) It may be hidden.

Also, in the examples shown in FIGS. 236 and 243 (examples in which the stock reception effect is executed during the 1D reception period), the "reception valid determination” is made, at the timing tW2 (more precisely, timing tW2A) at which the “reception validity determination” is made, the 1D precursor effect display SKC-2 (second period ) is displayed, instead of this, the 1D precursor effect display SKC-1 that appeared when the detection information was obtained may be displayed. . That is, in this case, it is possible to indicate at what timing the "reception validity determination" is made based on the detection information obtained.

Further, in the above-described example, the period during which the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is executed is
・A first period (stock period) and
・When the action is performed by the player, even if the action is detected by the action detection means, the information detected by the action detection means will not be used for the "reception validity determination" within the 1D reception period. Although the second period (non-stock period) is generated sequentially, instead of this, the second period (non-stock period) is generated first, and then the first period (stock period) is generated. may

Also, in the above example, the effect contents of the 1D precursor effect display ZEC are different between the first period (stock period) and the second period (non-stock period), but the effect contents are the same. (Continued in two periods). Also, the second period (non-stock period) does not necessarily have to be included in the period during which the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is executed.

By the way, in the 1D reception period according to this example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is shown in FIG. As described above, it may be displayed in the manner shown. It was determined in advance (predetermined based on the result of the big hit determination) that the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 144(a). In spite of this, if the "reception validity determination" is made within the first D reception period based on the detection information obtained before the occurrence of the first D reception period, the situation shown in FIG. Appears only in the form of the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image)", and otherwise the production progresses in the same way. That is, when the situation shown in FIG. 243 described above appears, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 144(d). is pre-determined (determined in advance based on the result of the big hit determination).

According to such a configuration, even if the above-described stock reception effect is executed based on the detection information obtained before the first D reception period occurs, the integrated model image display IG (simulated It is possible to preferably suggest which mode was to appear as an image display, a frame image, a gauge image).

FIGS. 237 to 239 are time charts showing an example of the effect contents when condition 2D is satisfied as a result of determination (big hit determination or effect determination) and a 2D reception period (2D reception effect) occurs. . 244 to 247 are diagrams showing examples of effects in variation patterns in which the 2D reception period (2D reception effect) occurs.

Now, the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is non-variable and non-time saving), and the "2D fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, a performance determination (announcement performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 2D variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (such as effect depiction according to the 2D variable pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 2D variable pattern, etc.) is started ("Situation shown in FIG. 244 (a) ), during the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) according to the result of the determination of the previous notice performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "2D variation pattern" itself. Become.

It should be noted that in the effect related to the "2D variation pattern", even if any result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination), as shown in FIG. When the timing tX2 (for example, the timing in the non-reach state) arrives after the 2D time has elapsed since the production was started (when the condition 2D is satisfied), "acceptance of the production after reception of the 2D" is performed. It is possible to generate the above-mentioned 2D reception period (effective period) that is allowed ("situation shown in FIG. 245(d)"), or if a predetermined result is obtained as the performance judgment (advance judgment) Only in the above 2D reception period (valid period) may be generated. In any case, when the player's action is accepted (if acceptance is determined to be valid) within the 2D acceptance period, the post-2D acceptance effect is performed based on the acceptance.

In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this embodiment, when such a 2D reception period occurs, the reception period (effective period) will soon occur in relation to this. A sign effect display that suggests, an action target display (simulated image display) that suggests a reception target (operation receiving part, etc.), a remaining time display that suggests the remaining time of the reception period, an operation target display (simulated image display) and remaining Disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the time display, etc., and post-acceptance performance display suggesting the degree of expectation (proportion of appearance of the big hit pattern) according to the acceptance are performed respectively. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%". As described above, the operation target display (simulated image display) according to this example is displayed as the "integrated simulated image display IG" integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display. , is not necessarily limited to this, and may be displayed separately. This also applies to other acceptance periods.

More specifically, when the timing tX1 before the occurrence of the second D acceptance period arrives, as shown in FIG. 237(b) and FIGS. Execution of the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is started. The "2D precursor effect display ZED" according to this example is hidden at the timing tX2 when the 2D reception period occurs, but is displayed so as to straddle the timing tX2. good too. Note that in this example, as shown in FIG. 237(d), when the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is executed, unlike the case where the above-described "1D precursor effect display ZED" is executed, the The effect sound (predictive effect sound) corresponding to the "2D predictive effect display ZED" is not output.

Also, as will be described later, in the 2D reception period according to this embodiment, as in the above-described 1D reception period, before the 2D reception period occurs, an operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated. Even if an action (for example, pressing operation) is performed by the player, the action (operation) is detected by action detection means (sensors, etc.), and the detection information is stored in detection information storage means (peripheral If the control RAM 1511c, corresponding processing steps in the program, etc.) is stored even at the time when the 2D reception period occurs, and is used for the reception validity determination during the 2D reception period (stock reception effect is executed). However, if the "reception validity determination" is made within the 2D reception period based on the detection information obtained before the 2D reception period occurs, the above-mentioned "before the 1D reception period occurs Unlike the case where "reception validity determination" is made within the 1D reception period based on the detection information obtained earlier, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image , gauge image)) is never displayed (in a visible state), and the post-acceptance effect (here, the 2D post-acceptance effect) is started to be executed. Note that the target (type of operation means) to which the action opportunity is granted during the 1D acceptance period and the target (type of operation means) to which the action opportunity is granted during the 2D acceptance period may be the same. , can be different.

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 237 and 238 and the example in which the production progresses from FIG. It is assumed that a 2D reception period occurs, that is, a case in which the detection information obtained before the 2D reception period is not used for the reception validity determination during the 2D reception period.

More specifically, when the 2D reception period occurs at timing tX2 without the stock reception effect being performed, the effect display according to this example is shown in FIGS. In the device 1600 (first effect device), as the integrated model image display IG, "model image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)" are displayed. Even if the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) can appear at timing tX2 when the corresponding reception period (here, the second D reception period) occurs Alternatively, it may appear before the timing tX2 and be displayed across the timing tX2. It should be noted that the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed when the reception (reception validity determination) is made within the 2D reception period, is hidden when the 2D reception period ends without the judgment) being made. The 2D acceptance period according to this example ends when the timing tX3 arrives when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (acceptance validity determination) (see FIG. 237(a)).

In addition, in the second D acceptance period according to this example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) can be displayed in multiple modes (for example, FIGS. 144(a), (c) )). Figures 245 and 246 correspond to the case where the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed in the "mode shown in Figure 144(c)". ing. When the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the "mode shown in Fig. 144(a)", the integrated model image shown in Figs. The display IG (simulated image display, frame image, gauge image) is only changed from "the mode shown in FIG. 144(c)" to "the mode shown in FIG. 144(a)". I will omit it. Also during the 2D acceptance period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in any of a plurality of modes including the modes shown in FIGS. 144(b) and (d). may be made.

Then, FIG. 237 shows that an action by the player is detected within such a 2D reception period, and based on the detected information, at the timing tX2a, "determination of acceptance validity in which the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made. It is assumed that That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 237(a), the 2D reception period ends and the second D reception period ends based on the fact that the player's action is received (reception validity determination is made) at timing tX2a. Execution of the post-reception effect (2D post-reception effect) corresponding to the 2D reception period is started.

Here, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 245(d) to "K2 (FIGS. 246(e2) to 246(i2)" corresponds to the case where the first mode with a relatively low expectation is executed. This corresponds to the case where the second aspect with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as the post-acceptance production (2D post-acceptance production) corresponding to the 2D acceptance period. , "0%" or "100%".

In this respect, as shown in FIG. 237, even in the 2D reception period, at timing tX2a when the player's action is accepted (when the effect is started after the 2D acceptance in response to the acceptance), " The integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see.

That is, the effect after the reception of the 2D according to this embodiment also includes the "effect display after the reception of the 2D" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) and the second effect device (for example, a sub liquid crystal, a movable At least the "specific effect after receiving the 2D reception" using the body, effect lamps, etc.) and the effect sound after receiving the 2D using the third effect device (speaker) are realized as a combined effect. (It may not necessarily be realized as a composite effect by three effect devices), but among those effect devices, an integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) In the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) where is displayed, the timing of starting the execution of the "second reception after reception effect display" as the 2D post-reception effect is delayed compared to other effect devices. By doing so, the visibility of the "integrated model image display IG" is intentionally maintained even after the acceptance is made.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 246 (e1) or (e2), even after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is displayed in multiple modes (FIG. 144 ( Since the player can easily recognize which one of a) to (d)) was displayed, it is expected that the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed appropriately. become.

Here, after the end of the acceptance period, in order to facilitate recognition of the mode in which the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period, it is necessary to consider the "integrated model image display" after the acceptance. It can be said that it is desirable to set a longer time period during which the IG is displayed in an easily visible form. However, even though the acceptance has been made and the post-acceptance effects (the second effect device and the third effect device) are already being executed, the integrated model image display IG is during the acceptance period. If it continues to be displayed in the same mode, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the acceptance has been made. There is a concern that

Therefore, also in the examples shown in FIG. 237(b) and FIG. (When the timing tX2b arrives), the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display is started.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the “extinction related display (extinction EF At least part of the area where the “disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)” is displayed is “integrated model image display IG (simulated image display, remaining time display)”. overlaps the area where is displayed.

With such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see. It becomes possible to suggest that the effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the gaze of the player will naturally shift from the integrated model image display IG to the post-acceptance effects (second effect device, third effect device) (after timing tX2b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-reception production (the second production device and the third production device) has already been executed, the integrated model image display IG can be continuously displayed for a relatively long time although it is difficult to visually recognize it. is made possible, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period.

However, unlike the case of the 1D reception period described above, in the 2D reception period, the corresponding post-reception production (2D post-reception production) is a mode with a low degree of expectation (Fig. 246 (e1) to (i1) ) appears and the highly anticipated aspect (FIGS. 246(e2)-(i2)) appears, the same aspect (here, the second annihilation-related indication SKD2) appears as the annihilation-related indication. there is That is, in this case, while the disappearance-related display appears on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), it is possible to make it difficult to recognize in what manner the "effect display after reception of the 2D" is executed. become.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 237(b), FIG. When the timing tX2c within the period in which the mode) appears, the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the acceptance of the action by the player within the 2D reception period. Execution of "2D post-reception effect display UGD2 (conversation preview effect)" is started. However, here, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. As shown in g1), the first mode (here, the 2D post-reception effect display UGD2-1, which is a "silent" conversation notice) is displayed as the 2D post-reception effect display UGD2 corresponding to the 2D reception period. 245(d) to "K2 (FIGS. 246(e2)-(i2))" (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as an after-acceptance production), FIG. 246(f2) , the second mode (here, the 2D post-acceptance effect display UGD2-2 which is a conversation notice referring to "chance") is displayed as the 2D post-acceptance effect display UGD2 corresponding to the 2D acceptance period. It is designed to be

That is, in this case, the execution of the 2D post-reception effect display UGD2 is started in one of a plurality of modes with different expectations (2D post-reception effect display UGD2-1, 2D post-reception effect display UGD2-2). However, regardless of which of these modes is started to be executed, one mode (second disappearance-related display SKD2) as the disappearance-related display is displayed so as to overlap the 2D post-acceptance effect display UGD2 (priority Since it functions to make it difficult to visually recognize this, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize in what mode the "effect display after the 2D reception" is being executed.

Further, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKD2)" are displayed, respectively, the "2D post-reception effect display UGD2 ("2D post-reception effect display Execution of "UGD2-1" or "2D post-acceptance display UGD2-2") is started. As a result, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed for a relatively long time after being accepted within the 2D acceptance period, the acceptance by the first effect device (effect display device 1600) After production (2D reception after reception production display UGD2 can be started without a large delay compared to other production devices, it is possible to suppress the decline in game interest. Since the effect display UGD1 after the reception of the 2D is started while the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to visually recognize, it suggests that the reception period of the 2D has already ended, and the target of the player's gaze is indicated. is expected to naturally shift from the "integrated model image display IG" to the "2D post-reception effect display UGD2 (2D post-reception effect display UGD2-1 or 2D post-reception effect display UGD2-2)". (after timing tX2c).

On the other hand, for the "2D post-reception effect display UGD2 (2D post-reception effect display UGD2-1 or 2D post-reception effect display UGD2-2)", the area where the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed. (it does not necessarily have to overlap), it is displayed behind the "integrated model image display IG", and the "second D The “integrated model image display IG” is preferentially displayed with respect to the post-reception effect display UGD2 (2D post-reception effect display UGD2-1 or 2D post-reception effect display UGD2-2). As a result, even when the execution of the "2D post-reception effect display UGD2 (2D post-reception effect display UGD2-1 or 2D post-reception effect display UGD2-2)" is started, the integrated model image is displayed within the reception period. This makes it easier to recognize in which mode the IG was displayed.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to the "2D post-reception effect display UGD2 (2D post-reception effect display UGD2-1 or 2D post-reception effect display UGD2-2)" is started, , as shown in FIG. 237(b), FIG. -2)” is displayed, first, out of the “integrated model image display IG” and the “disappearance-related display”, the “integrated model image display IG” is hidden. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 237(b), FIG. "Display SKD2" is hidden, and under the condition that the visibility is good, "2D post-reception effect display UGD2 (2D post-reception effect display UGD2-1 or 2D post-reception effect display UGD2- 2)” is displayed.

In this regard, the “2D post-reception effect display UGD2” refers to a plurality of modes with different expectations (here, 2D post-reception effect display UGD2-1 or 2D effect display UGD2-1 or 2D It is displayed in one of the post-acceptance display UGD2-2). Therefore, the ``effect display UGD2 after reception of the 2D'' will be executed for a relatively long time even after the ``integrated model image display IG'' and the ``disappearance-related display'' are hidden.

In this production example, the display of the "2D post-acceptance display UGD2" starts at a timing (timing tX2c) later than the timing (timing tX2b) at which the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKD2)" starts to be displayed. However, the display may be started at the same timing (timing tX2b) as the timing (timing tX2b) at which the “disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKD2)” is started.

In this example, when the player's action is accepted within the 2D accepting period, as shown in FIGS. 227(b) and (c), 2D post-acceptance production (specific production after 2D reception) using the second production device is started prior to the 2D production after reception (2D production display after 2D reception) using the first production device. I'm trying

According to such a configuration, even if the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) performs the disappearance-related display and then performs the effect display after receiving the second D, the effect after receiving the second D will not be displayed. As for itself, execution can be started without delay from the same timing tX2a.

Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or may be a movable object capable of effecting operations, or It may be provided as a production lamp capable of emitting light. In any case, it is provided so that effects (display effects, movable effects, light-emitting effects, etc.) can be performed in a plurality of modes with different expectations. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. Then, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. , the mode in which "Sueyoshi" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is the specific effect after receiving the 2D UTD2 (the specific effect after receiving the 2D) corresponding to the 2D receiving period. As a 2D post-reception specific effect UTD2-1), which is an aspect with a low degree of expectation of UTD2, it is executed prior to the 2D post-reception effect (2D post-reception effect display UGD2-1) using the first effect device. It is supposed to start. On the other hand, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. As shown in e2), the mode in which "good luck" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is the specific effect UTD2 after the 2D reception corresponding to the 2D reception period (after the 2D reception). As a 2D post-reception specific effect UTD2-2), which is a highly expected aspect of the specific effect UTD2, precedes the 2D post-reception effect (2D post-reception effect display UGD2-2) using the first effect device. is to start running.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 245(d), in addition to the "integrated model image display IG" in the production display device 1600 (first production device), the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) also displays the second D An effect within the acceptance period (display of an omikuji) is executed to suggest that the acceptance period has occurred. In the reception period effect on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device), the “integrated model image display IG” on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is displayed in a low-expectation mode (not shown). 245(d)) are displayed in the same manner.

That is, in this case, during the 2D reception period in which the player is provided with an action opportunity (operation opportunity), the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) displays different modes depending on the degree of expectation, and The same mode appears on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second rendering device) regardless of the degree of expectation. However, after this, if "receiving valid determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made within the 2D receiving period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) will display "integrated model image display IG ” continues (while the degree of expectation for the post-reception production has not yet been suggested), the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) shows different modes depending on the degree of expectation. Become. According to such a configuration, performance information can be obtained more quickly by watching an appropriate performance device from time to time than by watching only performance by one performance device. Since it becomes like this, it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

In this production example, the reception period production (display of the omikuji) on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) is continuously executed before the 2D reception period occurs. , also functions as an indication effect suggesting that the 2D receiving period will occur. However, the reception period effect on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) and the precursor effect on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) may be executed as mutually different effects.

In addition, in this production example, as the specific production UTD2 after receiving the 2D, the degree of expectation is suggested by which of the "specific production UTD2-1 after the reception of the 2D" and the "specific production UTD2-2 after the reception of the 2D" appears. However, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of modes for the specific effect UTD2 after receiving the second D. For example, as the specific effect UTD2 after receiving the 2D, only "specific effect UTD2-2 after receiving the 2D" is provided, and depending on whether the specific effect UTD2 after receiving the 2D appears ratio) may be suggested. That is, in this case, it is suggested that when the "specific effect UTD2-2 after receiving the 2D reception" appears, the degree of expectation is higher than when the "specific effect UTD2-2 after receiving the 2D reception" does not appear. Become.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is further provided with a third effect device (speaker). At a timing slightly earlier than this, the output of the acceptable reception sound is started. That is, the acceptable reception sound corresponding to the 2D reception period is audibly output across the timing tX2 at which the 2D reception period occurs. Actions (operations) by the player can be accepted.

Here, in the second D reception period, the first long permissible sound that is in the audible output state for a relatively long time is not output as the reception permissible sound, and the first long permissible sound that is in the audible output state for a relatively short time is not output. A short permissible sound is output. However, the reception allowable sound corresponding to the second D reception period may be output as a sound different from both the first long allowable sound and the first short allowable sound.

Then, in the second D reception period, when the player accepts the action while the corresponding acceptance acceptable sound (here, the first short acceptable sound) is audibly output, the acceptance is made. , the acceptance allowable sound is not terminated in the middle (the audible output state is terminated in the middle). (i.e., that there are However, the acceptable acceptance sound corresponding to the 2D acceptance period may also be terminated halfway based on acceptance.

In this regard, the reception allowable sound (here, the first short allowable sound) corresponding to the 2D reception period is executed (audibly output) in a manner with low expectations, as shown in FIG. 237(d). It is desirable to have a case (not shown) and a case (shown in FIG. 245(d)) in which execution (audible output) is performed in a highly expected manner.

In addition, when acceptance (validation of acceptance) is made during the 2D acceptance period, audible output of the 2D post-acceptance effect sound is started based on this. 237(d), the 2D post-acceptance effect sound is similar to the '2D post-acceptance effect display UGD2', as shown in FIG. 237(d). Even after is hidden, it will continue to run for a relatively long time. In addition, regarding the 2D post-reception production sound, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 245(d) to “K1 (FIG. case) and an example in which the production progresses from FIG. It is desirable to output an output sound (mode).

In addition, when the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made in the 2D acceptance period, the third effect device can hear not only the 2D post-acceptance effect sound suggesting the degree of expectation, but also the "reception sound" not suggesting the degree of expectation. It will be output. That is, the "reception sound" is an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 245(d) to "K2 (FIG. 246(e2)-(i2))" (in the case where the expectations are relatively high as a post-acceptance production) audible output in the same manner It is what is done. Such a "reception sound" is audibly output (regardless of the degree of expectation) even when the reception (reception validity determination) is made in a reception period different from the 2D reception period. According to such a configuration, no matter how novel the performance after reception is performed, the reception (reception validity determination) is properly performed when the "reception sound" is audibly output. Since it becomes possible to preferably recognize that it is in, it is possible to encourage concentration on the content of the presentation after reception.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 238 and the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. It is assumed that no action (operation) is performed and no reception (reception validity determination) is made.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 238, after the 2D acceptance period occurs, the above-mentioned timing tX3 arrives without acceptance of the action (operation) by the player (validation of acceptance determination). In the 2D reception period according to this example, unlike the case of the 1D reception period described above, when the action (operation) by the player is not performed within the 2D reception period and reception (reception validity determination) is not made However, the same post-reception effect (here, 2D post-reception effect) as when the reception validity determination is made within the 2D reception period does not occur.

However, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tX3 (when the 2D reception period ends and the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player is no longer permitted) is performed at the timing tX2a (second Similar to the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the time when the action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 2D reception period (or the time when the performance is started after acceptance)) As shown in 246(e3), the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted in time and the 2D reception period ends, after the end of the 2D reception period, the integration is performed within the 2D reception period. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the model image display IG was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

After that, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. (Disappearing EF effect) is started. That is, while the “integrated model image display IG (simulated image display, gauge image display)” is being displayed, the “disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)” is displayed, and the “disappearance-related display (disappearance EF At least a part of the area where "effect)" is displayed overlaps with the area where "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated simulated image display IG continues to be displayed after the second D reception period ends without acceptance, the integrated simulated image display IG is visually recognized. By making it difficult to access, it is possible to suggest that the 2D reception period has ended. Also, even in a situation where the 2D reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the second D acceptance period, the "third disappearance-related display SKD3" is displayed as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect). I am planning to let

It is desirable that the "third disappearance-related display SKD3" is not displayed in relation to the first D acceptance period. That is, in this case, it can be suggested that the first D reception period has not occurred. Further, it is desirable that the "third disappearance-related display SKD3" is not displayed when the action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 2D accepting period. That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest more preferably that the second D acceptance period has ended without acceptance being made.

Regarding "3rd disappearance-related display SKD3", if the reception validity judgment was tentatively made within the 2D reception period, regardless of whether or not the highly expected aspect appeared as "2D post-reception production" , should always be displayed in one mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 246(g3), out of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (the third disappearance-related display SKD3 in the figure)", first, the "integration Hide the model image display IG. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. It will be displayed.

It should be noted that in the 2D reception period according to this example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is not shown in FIG. 144(c), but shown in FIG. As described above, it may be displayed in the manner shown. However, if such a situation occurs, the production progresses in the same manner, with the only difference being the form of the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image)". Therefore, the explanation is omitted.

On the other hand, FIG. 239 shows that as a result of the action (for example, pressing operation) performed by the player on the operation means (for example, operation button 410) before the occurrence of the 2D acceptance period, the action (operation) is detected by the operation detection means (sensor, etc.), and the detected information is stored and held in the detection information storage means (peripheral control RAM 1511c, corresponding processing steps in the program, etc.) until the second D reception period occurs. It is assumed that the above reception validity determination is made during the 2D reception period (the stock reception effect is executed during the 2D reception period).

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. A precursor effect display (here, a 2D precursor effect display ZED) suggesting that an opportunity will be granted can be executed. In this regard, during the period in which the 2D precursor effect display ZED is executed,
・A first period (stock period) and
・When the action is performed by the player, even if the action is detected by the action detection means, the information detected by the action detection means will not be used for the "reception validity determination" during the 2D acceptance period. A second period (non-stock period) is included.

239 and 244(b) and (c), the "second period (stock period)" and the "second period (Non-stock period)” is displayed in the same manner. Therefore, even if the mode of the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is confirmed, which state is occurring, the "first period (stock period)" or the "second period (non-stock period)"? cannot be recognized. However, with regard to the "2D precursor effect display ZED" as well, different aspects will appear between when it is in the above "first period (stock period)" and when it is in the above "second period (non-stock period)". may

Further, in the "2D precursor effect display ZED (see FIG. 239)" according to this example, the precursor effect display is executed as compared with the above-described "1D precursor effect display ZEC (see FIG. 236)". The "first period (stock period)" occupies a large proportion of the period from the start to the start of the reception period. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 236, the ratio of the "first period (stock period)" to the "period from timing tW1 to tW2" is only about 40%, but in the example shown in FIG. The "first period (stock period)" occupies about 70% of the "period from timing tX1 to tX2". That is, in this case, in the "2D precursor effect display ZED (see FIG. 239)", when the action by the player is detected within the period from the start of the precursor effect display to the occurrence of the reception period, this is " The expected value during the "first period (stock period)" can be made higher than in the case of the "1D precursor effect display ZED (see FIG. 236)".

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 239, the action by the player is performed during the "first period (stock period)" of the period during which the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is executed, and this is detected by the action detection means. It is assumed that it is detected.

However, it is only during the 2D reception period that the "reception validity determination in which an action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is allowed. Therefore, even if the action is performed by the player during the "first period (stock period)" and is detected by the action detecting means, that time (the time when the 2D accepting period has not yet occurred). "Reception validity determination" is not made in . That is, the detection information (detection information of the action by the player) obtained in the “first period (stock period)” is stored and held even at the timing tX2 when the 2D reception period occurs. Then, at timing tX2 (more precisely, judgment timing tX2A which arrives immediately (several milliseconds) after timing tX2 occurs), "reception validity judgment" is made based on the stored detection information. It will be determined whether or not there is a situation that should be done, and as a result of this determination (based on the stored detection information (detection information obtained in the "first period (stock period)")) " Reception validity determination" is made (stock reception effect). Furthermore, based on the fact that the reception validity determination is made, the 2D reception period that has just occurred is terminated, and the post-reception effect corresponding to the 2D reception period (2D post-reception effect ) will be started.

Therefore, even if the action is performed by the player during the "first period (stock period)" and is detected by the action detection means, the 2D precursor effect display ZED will be displayed at the time of the detection. It is not terminated prematurely. Furthermore, even if the action is performed by the player during the "first period (stock period)" and is detected by the action detection means, the effect display device 1600 ( It does not cause any reaction in the first effect device), nor does it stop outputting the reception acceptance sound after the detection. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, until the arrival of the timing tX2 at which the 2D receiving period occurs, the player performs an action in the "first period (stock period)", and the action is detected as described above. The performance is developed in the same manner regardless of whether the action is detected by the means or not detected by the action detecting means.

Also, in the 2D reception period, if the "reception validity determination" is made based on the detection information obtained before the occurrence of the 2D reception period (when the stock reception effect is executed), Also, as shown in FIGS. 239 and 247, basically, the production progresses in the same manner as when the reception validity determination is made based on the detection information obtained within the 2D reception period. Become.

Therefore, in the case of the example shown in Fig. 239 (when the stock reception effect is executed in the 2D reception period), the effect is changed from Fig. 244(c) to "L1 (Fig. progresses (when the expectation is relatively low as the production after reception), and when the production progresses from FIG. 244 (c) to “L2 (FIG. 237 and 246 (e1) to ( i1) or the effect is executed as described with reference to FIGS. 246(e2) to (i2).

However, as described above, in the 2D reception period, if the "reception validity determination" is made based on the detection information obtained before the 2D reception period occurs (when the stock reception effect is executed) , the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is never displayed (in a visible state), and the production after reception (here, after reception of 2D production) is to be started.

Therefore, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 239 (when the stock reception effect is executed in the 2D acceptance period), unlike the case shown in FIG. At timing tX2 (more precisely, timing tX2A), which is the point in time when the 2D post-acceptance effect is started, the “integrated model image display IG” is not displayed (in a visible state).

Moreover, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 239 (when the stock reception effect is executed in the 2D reception period), as also shown in FIGS. At timing tX2 (more precisely, timing tX2A), which is the point in time (the point in time when the 2D post-acceptance effect is started in response to the acceptance), the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is not hidden, and this It is in the condition shown. That is, in this case, the action by the player is accepted based on the detection information obtained during the period in which the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is being executed before the occurrence of the 2D accepting period ( It becomes possible to suggest that there is a situation in which reception validity determination is made).

In this respect, also in the examples shown in FIG. 239(b) and FIG. 247(f4) or (f5), timing tX2 (more precisely , timing tX2A) (when timing tX2B arrives), the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is started. 247(e4)-(i4)) with low expectations and high expectations ((e5)-(i5) in FIG. 247), 237 and 246 in that the same mode (second disappearing related display SKD2) appears as the related display.

However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 239 (when the stock reception effect is executed in the 2D reception period), as shown in FIGS. The display SKD2) is displayed so as to make it difficult to visually recognize the "2D precursor effect display ZED" instead of the integrated model image display IG (model image display).

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 239 (an example in which the stock reception effect is executed in the 2D reception period), the “disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)” is displayed while the “2D precursor effect display ZED” is being displayed. is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the "disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed overlaps the area where the "2D sign effect display ZED" is displayed. there is According to such a configuration, even if the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is continuously displayed after the acceptance is made, the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is made difficult to be visually recognized. Thus, it is possible to suggest that the post-acceptance effects (second effect device, third effect device) are already being executed.

Also in the example shown in FIG. 239 (example in which the stock reception effect is executed in the 2D reception period), when the timing tX2C within the period in which the disappearance-related display appears, the timing tX2C shown in FIG. ), as a post-acceptance effect in the first effect device (the effect display device 1600) in response to the acceptance of the action by the player within the 2D acceptance period, a “post-2D reception effect display UGD2 ( Conversation notice effect)” is started to be executed. 244(c) to “L1 (FIG. 247(e4)-(i4))” (relative 244 (c) to “L2 (FIG. 247 (e5) to (i5))” (if the expectation is relatively high as a production after reception ) are executed in different modes (2D post-reception effect display UGD2-1, 2D post-reception effect display UGD2-2), which are similar to the cases shown in FIGS.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 239 (an example in which the stock reception effect is executed in the 2D reception period), in this way, "2D post-reception effect display UGD2 (2D post-reception effect display UGD2-1 or 2D post-reception effect display UGD2-1 or 239(b), FIG. 247(h4) or (h5), the "effect display UGD2 (second D While the post-reception effect display UGD2-1 or the 2D post-reception effect display UGD2-2)” is being displayed, first, the “2D precursor effect display ZED” and the “disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKD2)” are displayed. , the “2D precursor effect display ZED” is hidden. Then, after the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 239(b), FIG. "Display SKD2)" is hidden, and under the condition that the visibility is good, "2D post-reception effect display UGD2 (2D post-reception effect display UGD2-1 or 2D post-reception effect display UGD2 -2)” will be displayed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 239 and 247 (examples in which the stock reception effect is executed in the 2D reception period) as well, based on the fact that the player's action is accepted (reception validity determination is made), 2D production after reception using the second production device (specific production after 2D reception) and production after 2D reception using the 3rd production device (production sound after 2D reception) using the first production device Execution is started prior to the 2D post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance display).

However, in the examples shown in FIGS. 239 and 247 (examples in which the stock reception effect is executed during the 2D reception period), the examples shown in FIGS. example), the first short permissible sound is audibly output, and the first short permissible sound is interrupted based on the acceptance of the action by the player (acceptance validity determination). There is no termination (premature termination of the audible output state).

Further, as described above, the first short permissible sound may be started to be output at the timing tX2 when the second D reception period occurs or after that. 239 and 247 (examples in which the stock reception effects are executed during the 2D reception period), the examples shown in FIGS. 236 and 243 ( Unlike in the case of (example accepted within the acceptance period), it is desirable to ensure that the first short permissible sound is always output.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the case of the example shown in FIGS. In the case of the example (in the case of the example accepted based on the detection information obtained within the 2D acceptance period), the 2D is executed based on the acceptance validity determination being made within the 2D acceptance period. The execution times of the post-acceptance production (post-acceptance production display, post-acceptance specific production display, post-acceptance production sound, etc.) are set to be the same.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 239 and 247 (examples in which the stock reception effect is executed during the 2D reception period), the timing at which the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is hidden is set to the effect after the 2D reception. Although the display UGD2 is set after the timing tX2C at which execution is started, it may be hidden at the same timing tX2C.

Further, in the above-described example, the period during which the 2D precursor effect display ZED is executed is
・A first period (stock period) and
・When the action is performed by the player, even if the action is detected by the action detection means, the information detected by the action detection means will not be used for the "reception validity determination" during the 2D acceptance period. Although the second period (non-stock period) is generated sequentially, instead of this, the second period (non-stock period) is generated first, and then the first period (stock period) is generated. may

Also, the second period (non-stock period) does not necessarily have to be included in the period during which the 2D precursor effect display ZED is executed.

In the 2D reception period according to this production example, the "2D precursor effect display ZED" that can appear even when the reception is made in the 1D reception period is used as the extinction-related display SKD. However, the disappearance-related display may be executed in a manner in which it cannot appear in relation to the 1D acceptance period.

According to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present application in which such a 1D reception period and a 2D reception period are prepared, the excellent effects listed below are exhibited.

First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the content of the production that progresses when the reception is received (the cut-in notice, the group notice, the conversation notice, etc. as the production after the reception, and the notice production (expectation suggestive production) (Type of ) is prepared with multiple acceptance periods (1D acceptance period and 2D acceptance period), and it is possible to generate a type acceptance period (effective period) according to the result of the judgment (effect judgment). It has become.

In this regard, in the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, when the action by the player is accepted, the effect display after the reception (the effect display after the 1D reception, the effect display after the 2D reception, effect display) can be displayed in the "effect display device 1600". Of these, in the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, when an action by the player is accepted, not only is the post-acceptance effect display displayed based on the acceptance, but also the "disappearance-related display ( disappearing EF effect)” is made to appear further. That is, in this case, even after the acceptance is made, it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared as the model image display (or gauge image), as well as the model image display (or gauge image) Until the is hidden, the visibility is reduced by ``modes that make it difficult to see the simulated image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) (disappearance-related display)''. It is expected that the player's gaze target will naturally shift from the "simulated image display (or gauge image)" to the "post-acceptance effect display". It should be noted that the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" refers to a plurality of reception periods (reception periods different from the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period (until FIG. 233 The same aspect can be commonly used for the acceptance period described above with reference to the drawings.

However, since the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are originally displayed during the acceptance period when the acceptance has not yet been made, the model image display will continue after the acceptance has been made. or the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the post-reception display according to the reception has been displayed, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease. be. In this regard, when the acceptance is made in either the 1D acceptance period or the 2D acceptance period, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are changed to "model image display and remaining time display (frame image, Gauge image) is hidden (invisible) while the appearance (disappearance-related display)” is appearing, while the post-reception production display is “simulated image display and remaining time display (frame image , gauge image) is displayed while the mode (disappearance-related display) is appearing. In other words, in this case, after the player accepts the action, while "an aspect (disappearance-related display) in which the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see" appears, A shift in the display effect from the previous display (simulated image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) to the post-acceptance display (post-acceptance effect display) is realized.

It should be noted that both the mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display) and the post-acceptance effect display are displayed based on acceptance. point in common. However, the “mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display)” basically means FIG. 242(f), FIG. As shown in , when the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are made difficult to see. It appears as follows. On the other hand, the "effect display after reception" is, for example, as shown in Fig. 242(g) or Fig. 246(g). Even if it is displayed in such a situation, the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) appear so as not to be difficult to see.

In addition, regarding "modes in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)", "make the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) difficult to see" As a method of "appearing like", at least part of the area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) In addition to the method of realizing priority display (display on the front layer) of a different image display from It is possible to employ a technique of displaying an image (moving image) that is made to appear partially missing (invisible) in the time display (frame image, gauge image). In addition, it is not a separate image display from the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), but the numerical value (transmittance etc.) can also be adopted. On the other hand, regarding the "effect display after reception", as a method of "appearing so as not to make it difficult to see the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)", model image display and remaining time display (frame image , gauge image) is displayed in at least a part of the area where the "reception effect display" is displayed, but the " In addition to the method realized by displaying (displaying on the rear layer) "effect display after reception", at least while the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, the model image display It is possible to employ a method or the like that is realized by displaying the "post-reception effect display" only in an area other than the displayed area.

In addition, as a form (disappearance-related display) in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see, the area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed A method of displaying an image display different from the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) in at least a part of the display of the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) itself It is also possible to adopt both a method of changing the numerical value (transmittance, etc.) related to the characteristic.

In addition, the ``mode in which the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display)'' refers to the ``reception display'' before the ``reception display'' is displayed. "Post-effect display" appears in a situation where it has not yet been displayed. That is, in this case, under the condition that the "effect display after acceptance" is not yet displayed, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are replaced with the above "model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)." ) becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)”, so while making the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) visible, “post-reception effect display " is likely to appear soon, so that the player's attention is changed from the "simulated image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) that is difficult to see". You will be able to encourage

In addition, when accepted during the 1D acceptance period and the 2D acceptance period, etc., "a mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" It can be displayed even after the "effect display" is displayed, and is hidden while the "effect display after reception" is displayed. As a result, during the period in which the "effect display after reception" is displayed, the "mode that makes it difficult to see the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) (disappearance-related display)" is hidden. In the subsequent period, we will be able to provide the performance related to the "post-reception display" in a wider range, so we will improve the game interest by changing the performance during such a display period. be able to

In addition, in each of the above-described production examples regarding the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, as shown in FIGS. Mode (disappearance-related display)", not only the area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, but also the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) It is also displayed in areas that are not displayed. In this area, the "effect display after reception" is displayed in at least a part of it, but the "model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see. (disappearance-related display)” is displayed (for example, displayed in the rear layer) so that at least a part of the “post-acceptance effect display” is difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, the disappearance-related display (disappearing EF effect) makes not only the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), but also the "post-reception effect display" difficult to see. Since it will appear, the effect until the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is hidden, and the effect when the display of "effect display after reception" starts It is expected to improve both sexuality and

In addition, the “disappearance-related display” according to the example shown in FIG. It is displayed not only in the area where the 2D precursor effect display ZED is displayed, but also in the area where the 2D precursor effect display ZED is not displayed. In this area, the "effect display after reception" is displayed at least partly, but at least part of the "effect display after reception" is made difficult to see by the "disappearance-related display". It is supposed to be displayed as follows (for example, displayed in the rear layer). That is, in this case, the disappearance-related display (disappearing EF effect) is not a model image display or a remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), but it is difficult to visually recognize the “2D precursor effect display ZED” and the “after reception effect display”. Since it appears as something to do, it is possible to provide a different performance than the performance described above.

Further, as described above, in each of the above-described production examples regarding the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, the "post-reception production display" is displayed before the "post-reception production display" is displayed after the reception is made. In the situation where it is not displayed, apart from the disappearance-related display (disappearing EF effect), a specific effect after reception (using the second effect device) that does not make it difficult to see the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) It is possible to appear after the reception. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the post-acceptance production prior to this without interfering with the production of the first production device.

In addition, in each of the production examples described above regarding the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, the specific production after reception (the production after reception using the second production device) is more effective than the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production). The previous disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is made to appear in a situation where it has not yet appeared. Further, the post-acceptance specific effect (post-acceptance effect using the second effect device) is continued until after the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is terminated.

According to such a configuration, a person who dislikes complicated effects in the first effect device can enjoy the effect after reception by the second effect device having simplified effects. It is possible to improve amusement in games for various types of players.

Also, in each of the above-described effect examples regarding the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, the simulated image display is displayed by dynamic display as described above with reference to FIGS. 145 and 146. . In this case, after acceptance, the dynamic display of the model image display continues (until it is hidden) even though the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) appears. It is desirable to

In addition, in each of the production examples described above regarding the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) is not only a model image display, but also a gauge that indicates the remaining time until the reception period ends. It was also decided to make it difficult to visually recognize the image. As a result, even if the gauge image is displayed even after acceptance, it is possible to prevent it from appearing as if there is remaining time left.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 2D acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods, the "second 2D post-reception effect display UGD2" can be displayed, but apart from the 2D post-reception effect display UGD2, the mode (second disappearance Related display SKD2) can appear.

According to such a configuration, when the second disappearance-related display SKD2 appears, it is unclear which of the 1D and 2D post-acceptance effect displays will appear, but when the first disappearance-related display SKD1 appears, It is possible to guess that the effect display UGD1 will appear after receiving the first D.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is displayed (prioritized display ). However, the production using the production device (movable body, etc.) on the front side of the display screen must be executed at a position that overlaps at least a part of the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) when viewed from the front. It is also possible to realize by

Even if the same aspect (second disappearance-related display SKD2) appears as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect), if the reception period type is different, the big hit pattern will be stopped due to the pattern change. It is desirable to have different ratios (expectations) of

In addition, in the example of the production described above, it is possible to execute the production after reception (specific production after reception) using the second production device, and the production after reception (specific production after reception) is executed using the second production device. During the period, in the first production device, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively easy to see, and the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively visible. It is made to have a state where it is difficult to visually recognize it.

That is, in this case, even after the execution of the post-acceptance effect (specific post-acceptance effect) using the second effect device is started based on the acceptance, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) ), it is possible to confirm which aspect appeared. In addition, during the execution period of the post-acceptance effect (specific post-acceptance effect) using the second effect device, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are made relatively difficult to see. As a result, it is expected that the player's gaze target will be naturally shifted from the "first effect device" to the "second effect device".

In the production example described above, the post-acceptance production (post-reception specific production) using the second production device is a model image display that has been continuously displayed (displayed in an easy-to-see state) from before it is accepted, and the remaining time. The execution is started so as not to affect the visibility of the display (frame image, gauge image). More specifically, the simulated image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed in a predetermined area within the display screen (effect display device 1600). The effect after reception (specific effect after reception) is not an image display displayed using at least part of the predetermined area, nor is an effect executed at a position overlapping at least part of the predetermined area when viewed from the front. It is a thing.

Also, in the example of the effect described above, the post-acceptance effect display is started after the appearance timing of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect), but it is displayed at the appearance timing of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect). You may make it start.

Also, in each of the production examples described above, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) uses at least a part of the "area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed". It was decided to realize it as an image display to be displayed. However, in this case, it is desirable to display the image so that the area displayed in the "area where the simulated image is displayed" tends to gradually expand over time.

Further, as described above, the "simulated image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" according to this embodiment can be used as integrated simulated image display IG in multiple modes (integrated simulated image It can be displayed by any of the displays IGa to IGd). Further, according to each of the production examples described above, the display mode, including the display position, size, dynamic depiction, etc., may be maintained and continued even after acceptance. After that, it is possible to recognize in what manner the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) were displayed within the reception period.

As described above, the "simulated image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" may be displayed separately, or the "simulated image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)” may be displayed.

Also, in each of the production examples described above, when the "predetermined image display" such as "simulated image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" is in a non-display state (not displayed state) For example, although it is displayed on the layer, by giving priority to other image display, "simulated image display" or "remaining time display (frame image , gauge image)”, etc. is made invisible. However, if at least a part of the "predetermined image display" such as "simulated image display" or "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" is visible from the player side, this is a "predetermined image display" Therefore, it can be said that the "predetermined image display" is not hidden, but continues to be displayed. The 'predetermined image display' may be an image (for example, an indication effect display) different from the 'simulated image display' or the 'remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)'.

Further, in each of the production examples described above, the post-acceptance specific production may be realized by the first production device (within the display screen of the production display device 1600) instead of the second production device.

Also, in the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, the target of the action (operation) by the player may not necessarily be the same, and different actions may be requested. However, when a different action is desired, the action target display (simulated image display) and remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) are also displayed as different displays.

In the example of the effect described above, when the stock reception effect is executed in the 1D reception period (see FIG. 243), the execution of the effect after the 1D reception is started at the time when the reception validity determination is made within the 1D reception period. 1D precursor effect display ZEC and integrated model image display IG are displayed respectively. In this regard, in the above-described effect example, the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is displayed behind the integrated model image display IG, but instead of this, the integrated model image display IG is It may be displayed behind the 1D precursor effect display ZEC. However, in this case, the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is displayed so as to overlap only a part of the integrated model image display IG, and (at least part of) the integrated model image display IG is displayed. It will be required to be in a state (visible state).

In addition, in the above-described effect example, as the disappearance-related display SKD that can appear when the reception validity determination is made within the 2D reception period, it can also appear when the reception validity determination is made within the 1D reception period. Although the 2D premonition effect display ZED" is used, instead of this, a mode that cannot appear when reception validity determination is made within the 1D reception period may be used.

Also, in the above-described production example, a plurality of reception periods including the 2D reception period are first prepared as the reception period. Effect display ZED (specific effect display)” can be displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIGS. , the motion is detected by the motion detection means (sensor, etc.), the detected information is stored by the detection information storage means (peripheral control RAM 1511c, corresponding processing steps in the program, etc.), and the stored detection information If the reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid action is made within the 2D reception period (the detection information is obtained) (stock reception performance). According to such a configuration, even if the player acts (operates) with excessive momentum while the predictive effect (2D predictive effect display ZED) is being executed, the 2D post-acceptance effect is triggered by this. can be started, and it is expected that the game interest will be favorably maintained through such flexible performance. The configuration and effects are the same not only when the stock reception effect is executed during the 2D reception period, but also when the stock reception effect is executed during the 1D reception period.

Further, in the example of the effect described above, the action is performed by the player before the occurrence of the 2D reception period and while the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is being displayed. However, the motion is detected by motion detection means, and the detection information is stored in the detection information storage means. Then, within the 2D reception period, the detection information stored by the detection information storage means before the occurrence of the 2D reception period and in the state where the "2D precursor effect display ZED" is being displayed. When it is determined that reception is valid based on the detection information (when the detection information is obtained during the first period (stock period) of the period during which the 2D precursor effect display ZED is executed) ) and the reception validity determination is made, as shown in FIG. 247, the 2D precursor effect display ZED is displayed at the time when the 2D post-reception effect based on the reception validity determination is started to be executed. I made it look like According to such a configuration, even if the player performs an action "within the execution period of the 2D precursor effect display ZED" before the occurrence of the 2D reception period, the action is detected. is properly performed, and the detection information may be stored and held until timing tX2 when the second D reception period occurs. In other words, in this case, there is a case where the ``determination of validity of reception, in which the motion of the player is regarded as a valid motion'' is made within the second D reception period based on the detection information obtained before the occurrence of the second D reception period. Therefore, even if the player has acted (operated) with momentum before the occurrence of the second D acceptance period, the player can redo the action after the occurrence of the second D acceptance period. You will be able to enjoy the production after the reception without any need. Also, at this time, the 2D effect is detected based on the detection information obtained by performing the action (operation) in a state in which the 2D reception period has not yet occurred (state in which the 2D precursor effect display ZED is displayed). At the time when the post-acceptance effect starts to be executed, the 2D precursor effect display ZED is not hidden and is displayed. It is possible to preferably recognize that the execution is started based on the action (detection information) performed by the player while the effect display ZED is being displayed. The same can be said for the configuration and effects not only when the stock reception effect is executed during the 2D reception period, but also when the stock reception effect is executed during the 1D reception period.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, at a specific timing (timing tX2a in FIG. 239) within the 2D reception period, based on the detection information (detection information of the player's action) obtained within the 2D reception period. When the reception validity determination is made with the motion by the player as the valid motion, the 2D precursor effect display ZED (specific effect display) is displayed at the time when the 2D post-reception effect based on the reception validity determination is started to be executed. Made it so that it is not displayed. According to such a configuration, when the reception validity determination is made within the 2D reception period based on the detection information obtained before the occurrence of the 2D reception period, The effect mode in the effect display device 1600 at the time when the effect after the 2D reception is started to be executed differs between when the reception validity determination is made within the 2D reception period based on the detected information obtained, This makes it possible to suggest whether or not the reception validity determination has been made based on the detection information obtained before the occurrence of the second D reception period. The same can be said for the configuration and effects not only in the 2D reception period but also in the 1D reception period.

In addition, if reception validity determination is made within the 2D reception period based on the detection information obtained within the 2D reception period, an indication effect is displayed at the time when the corresponding effect after the 2D reception is started to be executed. (Here, the 2D precursor effect display ZED) may be displayed and may not be displayed. That is, in this case, while suggesting whether or not the acceptance validity determination is made based on the detection information obtained before the occurrence of the second D acceptance period, It is possible to make it difficult to recognize , and it is possible to preferably maintain a sense of tension. This example is also applicable in the 1D reception period.

Further, in the above-described effect example, the reception validity determination is made within the 2D reception period based on the detection information obtained within the 2D reception period, and the 2D reception is performed based on the reception validity determination. If the precursor effect display (here, the 2D precursor effect display ZED) is not displayed at the time when the post-effect is started to be executed, the integrated model image display IG ( (Similar image display and remaining time display) are displayed. According to such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 246(e1) and (e2), the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display) starts executing the effect after receiving the second D. After that, the display state is maintained without making it difficult to see due to other image displays, so it is possible to preferably suggest in which mode the image was displayed during the 2D acceptance period. The same can be said for the configuration and effects not only in the 2D reception period but also in the 1D reception period.

Further, in the example of the effect described above, when the "predictive effect display (here, the 2D predictive effect display ZED)" is displayed at the time when the execution of the 2D post-acceptance effect is started, the display shown in FIG. The "predictive effect display (here, 2D predictive effect display ZED)" is made difficult to be visually recognized by the disappearance-related display (here, second disappearance-related display SKD2). According to such a configuration, while suggesting that the stock reception effect is being executed, the "predictive effect display (here, the 2D predictive effect display ZED)" is displayed. It is possible to suppress the suspicion that "reception validity determination has not been made yet". The same can be said for the configuration and effects not only in the 2D reception period but also in the 1D reception period.

Further, in the above-described effect example, when the stock reception effect is executed in the 2D reception period, the disappearance-related display (Fig. 247), and make it difficult to visually recognize the "integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display)" when the reception validity determination is made based on the detection information obtained within the 2D reception period. (See FIG. 246) for the disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKD2). This makes it possible to more suitably suggest that the 2D acceptance period has expired.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, when the stock reception effect is executed in the 2D reception period (see FIG. 247), the integrated model image display is started at the time when the execution of the corresponding 2D post-reception effect is started. (Similar image display and remaining time display) are not displayed (visible), and "predictive effect display (here, 2D predictive effect display ZED)" is displayed, and stock reception effect is displayed during the 1D reception period is executed (see FIG. 243), at the time when the execution of the 1D post-acceptance production corresponding to this is started, the integrated model image display (model image display and remaining time display) is displayed (visible) I made it as it is. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to indicate in which of the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period the stock reception effect is executed, and immediately after the reception period occurs. It is expected that the decrease in interest in the game due to the termination of the game will be suppressed.

Further, in the above-described production example, a plurality of reception periods including the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period are first prepared as reception periods, and an omen production corresponding to the 1D reception period (see FIG. 240) , the 1D precursor effect display ZEC (first effect display) is displayed, and the 2D precursor effect display ZED (second effect display) is displayed in the precursor effect (see FIG. 244) corresponding to the 2D acceptance period. I made it loud.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, even if the player performs an action (operation) while either the 1D precursor effect display ZEC or the 2D precursor effect display ZED is being displayed, the action is Detected by the motion detection means, the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means, and based on the stored detection information, the reception validity determination that the player's motion is a valid motion is made within the first D reception period or Since there is a case where it is performed within the 2D reception period, the player moves with momentum while the precursor effect (1D precursor effect display ZEC or 2D precursor effect display ZED) is being executed. Even in such a case, it has become possible to start the production after reception with this as a trigger, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be preferably maintained through such flexible production.

Moreover, in the above-described production example, the following configurations are adopted. That is, in both the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, if the action is performed by the player before the occurrence of the relevant reception period and in the state where the precursor effect is being executed, The motion is detected by the motion detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. Then, during both the first D reception period and the second D reception period, the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means before the occurrence of the reception period and when the predictive effect is being executed. Based on the detected information, there is a case where the acceptance validity determination is made as the action by the player is regarded as a valid action (stock reception effect). Then, within the 1D reception period, before the occurrence of the 1D reception period and in a state where the precursor effect (1D precursor effect display ZEC) is being executed, the detection information storage means stores the detected information. When reception validity determination is made based on the detection information obtained, the motion by the player is determined to be a valid motion, at the time when the performance after reception based on the reception validity determination is started, the model image display is at least that Made it so that some parts are always displayed. On the other hand, within the 2D reception period, before the occurrence of the 2D reception period and in a state where the precursor effect (2D precursor effect display ZED) is being executed, the detected information storage means If the acceptance validity determination is made based on the detection information stored by the player, the model image display will be displayed at the time when the performance after acceptance based on the reception validity determination is started. I made it so that even a part of it is not displayed. When these configurations are adopted, regardless of whether it is the first D reception period or the second D reception period, based on the detection information obtained before the occurrence of the reception period, "the player's action is a valid action." Since there are cases where the reception validity determination is made within the reception period, the player acts (operates) with vigor before the occurrence of the 1D reception period or the 2D reception period. Even if the reception period has ended, the performance after acceptance can be enjoyed without redoing the operation after the occurrence of the acceptance period. Moreover, in the event that the action (operation) is performed with too much momentum before the first D reception period occurs, at least a part of the model image display will be displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception production based on this is started. Although it is always displayed, if the action (operation) is performed with too much momentum before the 2D reception period occurs, the above-mentioned model image will be displayed at the time when the above-mentioned after-reception production based on this is started to be executed. Since even a part of the display is not displayed, it is possible to determine whether the post-reception effect is based on the 1D reception period or the 2D reception period (before which reception period occurs (whether the player acted at the time) can be preferably suggested.

Moreover, in the above-described production example, the following configurations are adopted. That is, in both the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, if the action is performed by the player before the occurrence of the relevant reception period and in the state where the precursor effect is being executed, The motion is detected by the motion detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. Then, during both the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, it is stored by the detected information storage means before the occurrence of the relevant reception period and in a state where the premonition effect is being executed. Based on the detected information, there is a case where the reception validity determination is made as the action by the player is regarded as a valid action (stock reception effect). Then, within the 1D reception period, before the occurrence of the 1D reception period and in a state where the precursor effect (1D precursor effect display ZEC) is being executed, the detection information storage means stores the detected information. If reception validity determination is made based on the detected information that the player's motion is a valid motion, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge images) are always displayed at least partly. On the other hand, within the 2D reception period, before the occurrence of the 2D reception period and in a state where the precursor effect (2D precursor effect display ZED) is being executed, the detected information storage means If the acceptance validity determination is made based on the detection information stored by the player, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) are not even partly displayed. When these configurations are adopted, regardless of whether it is the first D reception period or the second D reception period, based on the detection information obtained prior to the occurrence of the reception period, "the player's action is a valid action." Since there are cases where the reception validity determination is made within the reception period, the player acts (operates) with vigor before the occurrence of the 1D reception period or the 2D reception period. Even if the reception period is over, the user can enjoy the performance after reception without redoing the operation after the reception period occurs. Moreover, if the action (operation) is performed with momentum before the first D reception period occurs, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) will be displayed at the time when the production after reception based on this is started to be executed. ) is always displayed, at least part of it is always displayed. Since even a part of the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is not displayed at the time of the reception, the production after reception is based on either the 1D reception period or the 2D reception period. (whether the player acted before any acceptance period occurs).

Further, in the example of the effect described above, the operation opportunity is given to the same operating means in the first D reception period and the second D reception period. In this regard, during the first acceptance period, a mode (integrated model image display IGd shown in FIG. 144(d)) that cannot appear in the second acceptance period can be displayed as a model image display or a remaining time display. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest which of the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period is occurring even when the stock reception effect is not performed.

Further, as described above, in the 2D reception period according to this embodiment, the "reception validity determination that the player's motion is a valid motion" is performed based on the detection information obtained before the occurrence of the 2D reception period. is performed within the 2D reception period (when stock reception performance is performed), even a part of the model image display or the remaining time display is not displayed at the time when the performance after reception is started. However, even in this case, as shown in FIGS. 239 and 247, the disappearance-related display (here Then, the second disappearance-related display SKD2) is displayed. According to such a configuration, even if neither the display of the model image nor the display of the remaining time prompting the player to perform the action appears at all, the action is accepted in response to the action by the player within the acceptance period. It becomes possible to suggest that the "post-reception production" is being executed.

In addition, in the 1D reception period, as the production after reception of the 1D, low-expectation aspects (FIGS. 243(e5)-(i5)) and high-expectation aspects (FIGS. 243(e6)-(i6)) appear. The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is executed in different manners (first disappearance-related display SKD1, second disappearance-related display SKD2) depending on the case where . On the other hand, during the 2D reception period, the low-expected aspects (FIGS. 247(e4)-(i4)) and the high-expected aspects (FIGS. 247(e5)-(i5 )) appears, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is executed in the same manner. According to such a configuration, compared to the case of the 1D reception period (when the appearance of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) differs depending on the degree of expectation), after the acceptance is made within the 2D reception period, the "disappearance Since the importance of paying attention to the "related display (disappearing EF effect)" is low, combined with the fact that the model image display or the remaining time display is not displayed, the focus is on what kind of mode will appear as the effect display UGD2C after the 2D reception. You will be able to

In addition, in the 2D reception period according to this production example, the after-reception production (1D post-reception production) corresponding to the 1D reception period is expected as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) that appears when the reception is made. "Second extinction related display SKD2" displayed when executed in a high degree mode is used. That is, in this case, in the second D reception period, as long as the reception is made, it is possible to give an image as if the performance after the reception is executed in a manner with a high degree of expectation, thereby improving the amusement of the game. You will be able to plan.

Note that the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) corresponding to the 2D receiving period does not necessarily have to be the “second disappearance-related display SKD2”. For example, as the disappearance-related display (disappearing EF effect) corresponding to the 2D reception period, it is displayed when the post-reception effect (1D post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1D reception period is executed in a manner with low expectations. The "first disappearance-related display SKD1" may be used, or a mode that does not correspond to the first D reception period may be used as the disappearance-related display.

Further, in the example of the effect described above, during the second D acceptance period, as the disappearance EF effect (disappearance-related display), when there is an acceptance, a specific mode (for example, the second disappearance-related display SKD2) appears, and there is no acceptance. It is desirable that an aspect different from the specific aspect (for example, the third extinction related display SKD3) appears or that no aspect appears. According to such a configuration, if the user forgets to operate in the second D reception period, the disappearance EF effect (for example, the second disappearance related display SKD2) when the reception is made will not appear. It becomes possible to appeal to the user that the user has forgotten to operate, and thereafter, it is possible to suitably maintain the tension when the reception period occurs. .

Further, in the 1D reception period according to the example of the production described above, (at least part of) the model image display or the remaining time display is displayed at the time when the execution of the 1D post-reception production is started based on the performance of the stock reception production. The 1D post-acceptance effect is a case where reception validity determination (stock reception effect) is made based on the detection information obtained before the 1D reception period, and a 1D The processing is executed over a different period of time than when reception validity is determined based on detection information obtained within the reception period (see FIGS. 234 and 236). On the other hand, in the 2D reception period according to the above-described production example, the model image display or the remaining time display is not displayed at the time when the execution of the 2D post-reception production is started based on the fact that the stock reception production is performed. state, and the 2D post-acceptance effect is when reception validity determination (stock reception effect) is made based on the detection information obtained before the 2D reception period, and during the 2D reception period. The processing is executed for the same amount of time as when the reception validity determination is made based on the obtained detection information (see FIGS. 237 and 239). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide completely different performances in the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, thereby improving the game interest.

It should be noted that the detection by the action detection means when the player performs an action and the storage of the detection information by the detection information storage means are not limited to the reception period or the execution period of the precursor effect, but always. You can do it. However, in this case, the detection information stored by the detection information storage means is not stored until the reception period occurs, or even if it is stored, it is not used for reception validity determination during the reception period.

Also, in the example of the effect described above, first, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including the 2D reception period are prepared. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1, even if the action by the player is not detected during the 2D reception period, the acceptance validity determination is made and the 2D reception period is handled. Since the post-acceptance effect (2D post-acceptance effect) may be executed, it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained through such a flexible effect.

Further, in the example of the effect described above, the 2D precursor effect display ZED (specific effect display) is displayed as the precursor effect corresponding to the 2D reception period, and the display is performed before the 2D reception period occurs and Even if the player performs an action while the 2D precursor effect display ZED is being displayed, the action is detected by the action detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. made to be remembered by Then, within the 2D reception period, "the detection stored by the detection information storage means before the occurrence of the 2D reception period and in the state where the 2D precursor effect display ZED is displayed information" (stock reception performance), and if the reception validity judgment is made, at the time when the performance after reception based on the reception validity judgment is started, a model The image display was made not to be displayed. On the other hand, if reception validity determination is made based on ``detected information stored by the detection information storage means within the 2D reception period'', a post-reception effect based on the reception validity determination (2D post-reception effect ), the model image display may be displayed at the time the execution is started. When these configurations are adopted, the ``determination of validity of reception, in which the player's motion is a valid motion,'' is made within the second D reception period based on the detection information obtained before the occurrence of the second D reception period. Therefore, even if the player acts (operates) with momentum before the occurrence of the second D reception period, the player can It is possible to enjoy the post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance) without redoing the action immediately. Moreover, depending on whether or not the simulated image display is displayed at the time when the post-acceptance effect (2D post-acceptance effect) is started to be executed, "before the 2D reception period occurs and the 2D premonitory effect Suggests whether or not it is in a state where reception validity determination is made (state where stock reception effect is made) based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means when the display ZED is displayed. be able to

Further, in the example of the effect described above, the 2D precursor effect display ZED (specific effect display) is displayed as the precursor effect corresponding to the 2D reception period, and is before the 2D reception period occurs and Even if the player performs an action while the 2D precursor effect display ZED is being displayed, the action is detected by the action detection means, and the detection information is stored by the detection information storage means. made to be remembered by Then, within the 2D reception period, "the detection stored by the detection information storage means before the occurrence of the 2D reception period and in the state where the 2D precursor effect display ZED is displayed. information" (stock reception effect), and if the reception validity determination is made, the remaining The time display is now hidden. On the other hand, if reception validity determination is made based on ``detected information stored by the detection information storage means within the 2D reception period'', a post-reception effect based on the reception validity determination (2D post-reception effect ), the remaining time display may be displayed at the start of execution. When these configurations are adopted, the ``determination of whether reception is valid by making the player's motion a valid motion'' is made during the 2D reception period based on the detection information obtained before the occurrence of the 2D reception period. Therefore, even if the player acts (operates) with momentum before the occurrence of the second D reception period, the player can It is possible to enjoy the post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance) without redoing the action immediately. Moreover, depending on whether or not the remaining time display is displayed at the time when the post-acceptance effect (2D post-acceptance effect) is started to be executed, "before the 2D reception period occurs and the 2D premonitory effect Suggests whether or not it is in a state where reception validity determination is made (state where stock reception effect is made) based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means when the display ZED is displayed. be able to

It should be noted that, when reception validity determination is made based on "detected information stored by the detection information storage means within the 2D reception period", a post-reception effect (2D post-reception effect) based on the reception validity determination is performed. At the time when the execution is started, there may be a case where the 2D precursor effect display ZED is displayed and a case where the 2D precursor effect display ZED is not displayed. That is, in this case, the post-reception effect (2D post-reception effect) is started to be executed based on the ``detected information stored by the detected information storage means before the occurrence of the 2D reception period''. or whether the post-reception performance (2D post-reception performance) is being started based on the ``detection information stored by the detection information storage means within the 2D reception period''. It becomes possible to maintain a sense of tension in a suitable manner.

Also, in at least one of the first D reception period and the second D reception period, when the execution of the post-reception effect is started based on the "detected information stored by the detected information storage means before the reception period occurs" A special presentation mode that cannot appear may be prepared. That is, the special effect mode can appear when the effect after reception is not started based on the "detected information stored by the detected information storage means before the reception period occurs". It has become. It is desirable to indicate the high rate of appearance of highly expected aspects as the post-acceptance presentation depending on whether or not the special presentation mode appears.

Also, in the production example described above, first, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period are prepared, and if the 1D reception period occurs, Even if the action by the player is not detected by the action detection means, the 1D post-reception effect corresponding to the 1D reception period can be executed, and if the 2D reception period occurs, the 2D reception period Even if the action of the player is not detected by the action detecting means, the effect after the 2D reception corresponding to the 2D reception period can be executed.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1, there are at least two timings at which the execution of the effect after the 1D reception is started without the movement of the player being detected by the movement detection means within the 1D reception period. As a result, it is expected that the game interest will be improved.

By the way, the player intended to perform an action (operation) within the "period of timings tW1 to W" before the occurrence of the 1D reception period, but in reality, the action (operation) was performed during the period of "timings W to tW2." If the action (operation) is performed within the "period", it is difficult for the player to recognize that the action should be redone after the 1D acceptance period occurs. It can be said that there is a high possibility of forgetting to operate.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the example of the effect described above, the execution of the effect after the 1D reception is started without detecting the motion of the player within the 1D reception period by the motion detection means shown in FIG. 235 and timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235 are prepared, and at timing tW2 (tW2A), "before the first D reception period occurs (within the period of timing tW1 to W ), based on the action (detection information) by the player detected in ), the execution of the 1D post-reception effect is started (stock reception effect) by making the reception validity determination within the 1D reception period. , at timing tW3, "execution of the 1D post-acceptance effect is started based on the arrival of a predetermined timing (timing tW3) without detecting any action by the player, including before the occurrence of the 1D acceptance period. 'I did it. According to such a configuration, the player misrecognizes that the action (operation) was performed within the "period of timing tW1 to W" before the occurrence of the 1D reception period, and as a result, the operation is performed. Even if the player forgets to do so, the performance after the reception of the first D will start to be executed based on the arrival of the timing tW3. become.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, in the 2D reception period, "based on the action (detection information) by the player detected before the occurrence of the 2D reception period, the reception validity determination is performed in the 2D It is possible to make it so that the execution of the effect after the 2D reception is started by performing it within the reception period (stock reception effect), but it is possible to make it so that ``the player's operation including before the occurrence of the 2D reception period Execution is not started after receiving the 2D based on the arrival of the predetermined timing without detecting anything. That is, in this case, in both the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period, "the reception validity determination within the reception period based on the action (detection information) by the player detected before the reception period occurs can be performed (stock reception effect)”, which makes it possible to start executing the effect after receiving it. Moreover, in the 1D reception period, even if such a "stock reception effect" fails, the post-reception effect (1D post-reception effect) is provided as a relief based on the arrival of the predetermined timing (timing tW3). Since it is designed to be executed systematically, you will be able to challenge the “stock reception effect” with confidence. On the other hand, during the 2D reception period, if such a "stock reception effect" fails, the post-reception effect (1D post-reception effect) will not be executed as a remedy. , it becomes possible to suitably impart a sense of tension.

In addition, in the above-described production example, the precursor production corresponding to the 1D reception period (1D precursor production display ZEC, etc.) and the precursor production corresponding to the 2D reception period (2D precursor production display ZED, etc.) are different from each other. Although it has been decided that it is executed as an effect mode, these precursor effects may be executed as the same effect mode (for example, the 2D predictive effect display ZED in either case). According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not a receiving period (first D receiving period) with relief (timing tW3) occurs when the stock receiving effect based on the action when the portent effect is being performed fails. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize, and it is expected that the tension will be maintained appropriately.

In the 1D reception period according to the example of the production described above, if the 1D post-reception production is generated (by the stock reception production) based on the detection information obtained before the 1D reception period, The same processing as in the case of generating the 1D post-reception effect based on the detection information obtained within the 1D reception period (detection by the same motion detection means→storage by the same detection information storage means→same reception valid within the 1D reception period Judgment) is performed to generate the effect after the 1D reception. On the other hand, when the 1D reception effect is generated based on the arrival of the timing tW3 after the 1D reception period occurs, the 1D reception period is based on the detection information obtained within the 1D reception period. A 1D after-reception effect is generated by performing a process different from the case of generating the after-effect (no detection by the same motion detection means, no storage by the same detection information storage means, determination that timing tW3 has arrived). We are planning to let According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide various effects to the player in automatically generating the post-reception effect without requiring the player's action during the reception period. It is hoped that it will increase interest.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, the case where the 1D after reception effect is generated based on the detection information obtained before the 1D reception period (by the stock reception effect), and based on the timing tW3 arrival Since the execution time of the 1D post-reception performance is different from the case where the 1D post-reception performance is generated, the amusement of the game can be improved. Moreover, in the example of the effect described above, the execution time of the effect after the 1D reception when the reception validity determination is made at the specific timing (timing tW2a) within the 1D reception period is obtained before the 1D reception period. The case where the 1D post-acceptance effect is generated based on the detected information (by the stock reception effect) and the case where the 1D post-acceptance effect is generated based on the arrival of the timing tW3 are different. , it becomes possible to further improve the game interest.

On the other hand, in the 2D acceptance period, when there is no remedy (automatic acceptance) in the event that the stock acceptance effect fails, the 2D acceptance (by the stock acceptance effect) is based on the detection information obtained before the 2D acceptance period. Execution of the 2D post-reception production in the case of generating the 2D post-reception production and in the case of generating the 2D post-reception production based on the reception validity determination being made at a specific timing (timing tX2a) within the 2D reception period. Since the times are set to be the same as each other, even if the stock reception performance fails, the same performance can be enjoyed by redoing the movement within the 2D reception period, and there is no remedy. It is expected that the decrease in interest in games due to this will be suppressed.

Further, in the execution period of the predictive effect (1D predictive effect display ZEC) before the 1D receiving period, even if there is a motion by the player, detection information obtained regarding the motion is No notification is made to suggest whether or not the application will be used for acceptance validity determination within the acceptance period. In addition, at least the effect display device 1600 may not suggest that the player's action is detected. With such a configuration, it is expected that the tension will be preferably maintained even during the 1D reception period in which relief (timing tW3) is set when the stock reception effect fails. Become.

It should be noted that even during the execution period of the predictive effect (2D predictive effect display ZED) before the 2D reception period, if there is an action by the player, the detection information obtained with respect to the action will be displayed within the 2D reception period. It is also possible to omit any notification indicating whether or not it will be used for the acceptance validity determination. In addition, at least the effect display device 1600 may not suggest that the player's action is detected.

In addition, in the portent effect corresponding to the 1D receiving period, the 1D portent effect display ZEC and the portent effect sound associated therewith are respectively executed. On the other hand, in the portent performance corresponding to the 2D acceptance period, the 2D portent performance display ZED is executed, but the portent performance sound related to the 2D portent performance display ZED is not executed. That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest whether or not there is a remedy when the stock reception effect fails, through the presence or absence of output of the portent effect sound.

Further, in the above-described effect example, first, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including the 1D reception period are prepared, and when the 1D reception period occurs, the action by the player is performed within the 1D reception period. Even if is not detected by the operation detection means, the 1D post-reception effect corresponding to the 1D reception period can be executed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least the timing shown in FIG. Since there are tW2 (tW2A) and timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235, it is expected that the amusement of the game will be improved.

Further, in the example of the effect described above, the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is displayed as the precursor effect corresponding to the 1D reception period, and the 1D post-reception effect is executed at the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. When it is started, the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is displayed at the time when the 1D after-reception effect starts to be executed, but when the 1D after-reception effect starts to be executed at timing tW3 shown in FIG. , the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is not displayed at the time when the 1D post-acceptance effect starts to be executed. That is, in this case, when the detection information is not obtained within the 1D acceptance period and the execution of the 1D post-acceptance effect is started, the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 and the timing tW3 shown in FIG. It becomes possible to suggest in which state the execution is started.

Further, in the example of the effect described above, even when the 1D post-acceptance effect is started at the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 and the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is displayed, As the disappearance-related display, “first disappearance-related display SKD1” or “second disappearance-related display SKD2” is made to appear (see FIG. 243). In this case, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display) is displayed as either the “first disappearance-related display SKD1” or the “second disappearance-related display SKD2”, and the first D precursor effect display ZEC is displayed. It is desirable to have it executed in a way that overlaps this so as to make it difficult to see.

In addition, in the above-described production example, the execution of the 1D after reception production is started at the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236, and the execution of the 1st reception production is started at the timing tW3 shown in FIG. In both cases, the above-mentioned model image display is displayed at the time when the performance after the 1D acceptance is started. However, instead of this, as shown in FIG. 248, if the execution of the 1D post-acceptance effect is started at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. As in the case where the 2D post-acceptance effect is started to be executed, the model image display may not be displayed at the time when the 1D post-acceptance effect is started to be executed. That is, in this case, even when the stock reception effect is executed in the 1D reception period, the model image display (here, the integrated model image display IG) is not displayed even once in the same way as the stock reception effect is executed in the 2D reception period. Execution of the post-acceptance effect (here, the 1D post-acceptance effect) is started without being displayed (visible).

In addition, in the above-described production example, the execution of the 1D after reception production is started at the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236, and the execution of the 1st reception production is started at the timing tW3 shown in FIG. In both cases, the remaining time display (the frame image and the gauge image) is displayed at the time when the performance after the 1D acceptance is started. However, instead of this, as shown in FIG. 248, if the execution of the 1D post-acceptance effect is started at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. As in the case where the 2D post-acceptance effect is started to be executed, the remaining time display may not be displayed at the time when the 1D post-acceptance effect is started to be executed. That is, in this case, even when the stock reception effect is executed in the 1D reception period, the remaining time display (here, the integrated model image display IG) is not displayed once, just like when the stock reception effect is executed in the 2D reception period. Execution of the post-acceptance effect (here, the 1D post-acceptance effect) is started without being displayed (visible).

According to the configuration according to these other examples, when the performance after the 1D reception is started at the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 based on the detection information obtained before the 1D reception period (See FIG. 248), at the time when the execution of the effect after the first D reception is started, the model image display and the remaining time display are not displayed. When the post-effect is started to be executed, the model image display and the remaining time display are displayed at the time when the effect after the 1D reception is started to be executed (see "i1" and "i2" in FIG. 242). reference). That is, in this case, when the performance after the 1D reception is started without detection of the action by the player within the 1D reception period, this is the first timing (timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236) and the first timing. 2 timing (timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235).

Also, even if these different examples are adopted, when the execution of the after-1D reception effect is started at the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. As such, it is desirable to make the "first disappearance-related display SKD1" or the "second disappearance-related display SKD2" appear as the disappearance-related display. That is, in this case, the "extinction-related display" appears while the model image display and the remaining time display are not being displayed, and the "extinction-related display" is equivalent to the "1D precursor effect display ZEC" or the "1D After-acceptance effect display UGD1” and the like are displayed so as to be difficult to see.

It should be noted that the acceptance periods (see FIG. 248) relating to these other examples are prepared as modifications of the 1D acceptance periods shown in FIGS. 234 to 236 and FIGS. However, instead of this, a 3D reception period (generated by condition 3D) that is different from both the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period may be provided. In this case, when the post-reception effect (3D post-reception effect) corresponding to the 3D reception period is executed, regardless of which of the multiple modes with different expectations the post-reception effect is executed, One mode (for example, the second disappearing related display SKD2) may appear as the related display.

Further, in the above-described effect example, the timing at which the execution of the effect after the 1D reception is started without detecting the motion of the player during the 1D reception period is at least the timing shown in FIG. There are tW2 (tW2A) and timing tW3 shown in FIG. Then, if the motion of the player is not detected by the motion detection means within the first D reception period and the performance after the first D reception is started at the timing tW3 shown in FIG. display) can be displayed, and when the disappearance-related display (disappearing EF display) is displayed, the integrated simulated image display IG (simulated image display, remaining time display) is made difficult to see. It is possible to favorably recognize that the 1D acceptance period has ended.

Further, in the above-described effect example, the execution of the 1D post-reception effect is started at the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. When the disappearance-related display (disappearing EF display) is displayed, when the disappearing-related display (disappearing EF display) is displayed, the integrated model image display IG (simulated image display, remaining time display) and may be made difficult to see differently. That is, in this case, after the execution of the 1D post-acceptance effect is started, the situation where the 1D post-acceptance effect is started at either the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 or the timing tW3 shown in FIG. It will be possible to suggest whether there is

For example, when adopting the configuration according to another example of the 1D reception period, the 1D reception period is determined at the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 based on the detection information obtained before the 1D reception period. When the post-effect is started to be executed, the model image display and the remaining time display are not displayed at the time when the effect after the 1D reception is started to be executed. That is, in this case, when the motion of the player is not detected by the motion detection means within the 1D reception period and the performance after the 1D reception is started at the timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. When the related display (disappearing EF display) is displayed, it becomes difficult to visually recognize displays (1D precursor effect display ZEC, etc.) different from the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display). Alternatively, when the 1D post-acceptance effect starts to be executed at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. An image display that cannot be obtained may be displayed, and the disappearance-related display (the disappearance EF display) may make the image display difficult to see.

236. Also, with respect to disappearance-related display (disappearance EF display), there is a case where it appears at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. The same image is displayed in the case where it appears when the performance is started after the reception of the 1D. That is, in this case, it is difficult to recognize at which of timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 and timing tW3 shown in FIG. It is expected that the disappearing EF display will prompt the player's attention to the "object that is difficult to see".

Further, in the above-described effect example, when the 2D reception period occurs, the movement of the player during the 2D reception period is not detected by the movement detection means, and the 2D reception period corresponding to the 2D reception period is not detected. In the case where the post-acceptance effect is executed (see FIG. 239), the 2D acceptance period ends and the 2D acceptance period ends without the action of the player being detected by the action detection means within the 2D acceptance period. There is a case where the post-effect is not executed (see FIG. 238). This makes it possible to preferably maintain the tension when the second D reception period occurs.

In this respect, in the above-described effect example, a 1D reception period different from the 2D reception period can be further generated, and when the 1D reception period occurs, the player's action is performed during the 1D reception period. Even if it is not detected by the action detection means, the performance after the first D reception corresponding to this is always executed. That is, in this case, when the 2D reception period occurs, it is due to the fact that ``the post-reception effect may or may not occur when the movement of the player is not detected by the movement detection means within the reception period.'' While the sense of tension is suitably imparted, when the 1D reception period occurs, ``a post-reception effect is always generated even if the movement of the player is not detected by the movement detection means during the reception period.'' As a result, it is expected that the game interest will be improved.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute effect setting (at least one of volume, brightness, effect mode, etc.) that causes a change in the effect mode based on the operation by the player. have the means. In this regard, in the case where the motion of the player is not detected by the motion detection means within the second D reception period and the effect after the reception of the second D is executed, the motion by the player within the second D reception period is the above operation. The case where the second receiving period ends without being detected by the detecting means and the effect after receiving the second D is not executed can occur under the same effect setting. In other words, the case where the action after the 2D acceptance is executed without the motion detection means detecting the motion of the player within the 2D acceptance period means that the 2D acceptance period is set in the state where the automatic button effect state is set. It doesn't mean if it happens. For example, even in a state where the automatic button effect state is not set (under the same effect setting), during the 2D reception period, the action of the player is not detected by the action detection means during the 2D reception period. A case where the performance after 2D reception is executed and the performance after 2D reception is not executed after the second reception period ends without the movement of the player being detected by the movement detecting means during the 2D reception period. There is a case.

In the above-described effect example, first, a plurality of reception periods including the 2D reception period are prepared as the reception period, and the 2D precursor effect display ZED is displayed in the precursor effect corresponding to the 2D reception period. I made it loud. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 239, when the player performs a motion, the motion is detected by the motion detection means during the period in which the 2D precursor effect display ZED is displayed. a stock period (first period) during which information detected by the action detection means is used for the reception validity determination within the second D reception period; and the non-stock period (second period) during which the information detected by the motion detection means is not used for the reception validity determination within the 2D reception period even if detected by It becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension. The same can be said for the configuration and effects not only in the 2D reception period (2D precursor effect display ZED) but also in the 1D reception period (1D precursor effect display ZEC) (see FIG. 236).

Also, in the production example described above, as for the stock period (first period) and the non-stock period (second period), as shown in FIG. Both are included in the period during which the 2D precursor effect display ZED is displayed. In other words, in this case, even if the player has acted (operated) with momentum before the occurrence of the second D acceptance period, the player can retry the action after the occurrence of the second D acceptance period. You will be able to enjoy the production after receiving the 2D reception. In addition, if the action (operation) occurs before the 2D reception period occurs, the effect after the 2D reception is not necessarily executed (non-stock period). It becomes possible to suitably maintain a sense of tension. The same can be said for the configuration and effects not only in the 2D reception period (2D precursor effect display ZED) but also in the 1D reception period (1D precursor effect display ZEC) (see FIG. 236).

Further, in the above-described effect example, the ratio of the stock period (first period) to the period during which the precursor effect display is performed is the case where the 1D reception period occurs and the case where the 2D reception period occurs. made different from each other. At least one of the stock period (first period) and the non-stock period (second period) is set as a different time between the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period.

More specifically, in the example of the effect described above, in the example shown in FIG. On the other hand, the ratio of the above "first period (stock period)" is only about 40%, but in the example shown in FIG. The "first period (stock period)" occupies about 70% of the (period from timing tX1 to tX2). That is, in this case, in the "2D precursor effect display ZED (see FIG. 239)", when the action by the player is detected within the period from the start of the precursor effect display to the occurrence of the reception period, this is " The expected value during the "first period (stock period)" can be made higher than in the case of the "1D precursor effect display ZED (see FIG. 236)".

In addition, in the "2D precursor effect display ZED (see FIG. 239)" according to this example, the precursor effect display is executed as compared with the above-described "1D precursor effect display ZEC (see FIG. 236)". Although the ratio of the above-mentioned "first period (stock period)" to the period from the start to the occurrence of the reception period is increased, alternatively, the ratio may be reduced. good.

Further, in the above-described effect example, at least in the effect display device 1600, when the action of the player is detected within the stock period and when the action of the player is detected during the non-stock period, None of them showed any reaction according to the detection. That is, in this case, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not there is a situation in which the stock reception effect can be executed, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be favorably maintained.

Further, in the above-described effect example, first, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period are prepared. ZEC is displayed, and the 2D precursor effect display ZED can be displayed in the second precursor effect corresponding to the 2D acceptance period. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIGS. 236 and 239, the "game A stock period (previous operation permissible period) during which, when a person performs an action, the action is detected by the action detection means and the information detected by the action detection means is used for the reception validity determination within the reception period." , "A non-stock system in which, even if a motion is detected by the motion detection means when a player performs a motion, the information detected by the motion detection means is not used for the acceptance validity determination within the acceptance period. period (pre-movement non-permissible period)" is included, it is possible to preferably maintain a sense of tension.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, both the stock period (preceding action permissible period) and the non-stock period (preceding action non-permissible period) occur earlier than the reception period (1D reception period or 2D reception period). Let it be the previous period. That is, in this case, based on the detection information obtained before the reception period (the first D reception period or the second D reception period) occurs, the "reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid movement" is performed during the reception period. Therefore, even if the player acts (operates) with too much momentum before the acceptance period occurs, the player will not be able to perform the operation after the acceptance period has occurred. It becomes possible to enjoy the production after reception without redoing the action. Moreover, if the action (operation) occurs before the reception period (the first D reception period or the second D reception period) occurs, the performance after the reception is not necessarily executed. From (non-stock period (pre-movement non-permissible period)), the sense of tension can be preferably maintained.

By the way, in the above-described effect example, the stock period (previous action permitted period) within the period during which the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is executed and the stock period (preceding action permitted period) within the period during which the 2D predictive effect display ZED is executed. period), no message prompting the player to take action is displayed.

However, instead of this, a message display prompting the player to make a move is displayed at least during the stock period (previous action permissible period) of the period during which the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is executed, and the 2D precursor effect display ZEC is displayed. During the stock period (previous action permissible period) within the period in which the precursor effect display ZED is executed, the message display prompting the player to perform the action may not be displayed. According to such a configuration, when the 1D reception period occurs, it is possible to prompt the player to obtain the detection information of the motion of the player before the 1D reception period occurs, As a result, it becomes possible to more positively provide an effect (stock reception effect) in which a reception validity determination is made within the 1D reception period based on the detection information obtained in this way. On the other hand, when the 2D reception period occurs, the fact that such a stock reception effect is permitted is kept secret, so that it is possible to add interest to the effect, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. It will be possible to improve

In this case, the message display that is in the display state during the stock period (previous action permissible period) of the period in which the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is executed is also at least part of the non-stock period (previous action non-permissible period). It may be in the display state. According to such a configuration, even if the player performs an action while the message display is in the display state, it is not necessarily used for reception validity determination within the first D reception period, so that a sense of tension is preferable. can be maintained at During the period in which the 2D precursor effect display ZED is executed, no message display is displayed during either the stock period (preceding action permissible period) or the non-stock period (preceding action non-permissible period).

Further, in the above-described effect example, as shown in FIGS. 244 and 247, when the stock reception effect is performed in the 2D reception period, no message display is displayed after the 2D precursor effect display ZED is started to be displayed. Execution of the performance is started after the reception of the second D without any delay. On the other hand, in the modified example regarding the message display, when the stock reception effect is performed during the 1D reception period, the 1D reception period is generated even if the detection information is obtained during the stock period (previous action permissible period). It is desirable not to hide the display of the message within a period of time prior to doing so, and to maintain the display state as if no detection information was obtained. Further, when the stock reception performance is performed in the 1D reception period, it is desirable to keep the message display in a display state even at the time when the execution of the 1D post-reception performance is started accordingly. According to such a configuration, in both the case where the 1D reception period occurs and the case where the 2D reception period occurs, there is a situation where the stock reception effect is performed (situation where the stock reception effect is successful). It becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the user is ready to maintain the sense of tension.

Further, in the above-described effect example, first, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including the 1D reception period are prepared, and when the 1D reception period occurs, the action by the player is performed within the 1D reception period. Even if is not detected by the action detecting means, the 1D post-reception performance corresponding to the 1D reception period can be executed as the post-reception performance. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1, there are at least two timings (see FIG. 236) as the timing at which the performance after the 1D reception is started without detecting the movement of the player within the 1D reception period by the movement detecting means. and timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235), it is expected that the amusement of the game will be improved.

Further, in the example of the effect described above, the timing tW2 shown in FIG. 236 ( tW2A) and timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235 are prepared, and at timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 235, the execution of the 1D post-reception effect is started (stock reception effect) by making the reception validity determination within the 1D reception period based on the detection information), and at the timing tW3 shown in FIG. The performance after the 1D acceptance is started based on the arrival of the predetermined timing (timing tW3) without detecting any action by the player including before the occurrence of the 1D acceptance period.

That is, in this case, ``the reception validity determination can be made within the 1D reception period based on the action (detected information) by the player detected before the 1D reception period occurs (stock reception effect).' This makes it possible to start execution of the effect after receiving the 1D. Moreover, in the 1D reception period, even if such a "stock reception effect" fails, the 1D post-reception effect is executed as a remedy based on the arrival of the predetermined timing (timing tW3). Because it is like this, you will be able to challenge the “stock reception effect” with confidence.

In addition, in the above-described production example, the case where the 1D post-acceptance production is executed based on the fact that the stock reception production is performed within the 1D reception period (see FIG. 236), and the case where the player When the 1D post-acceptance effect is executed based on the arrival of the timing tW3 without detection of the action by did. That is, in this case, when the action by the player is not detected within the 1D receiving period and the 1D post-receiving effect is executed, the 1D post-receiving effect is executed based on which timing. You will be able to suggest At this time, either execution time may be set longer.

Further, in the above-described effect example, if the reception validity determination is made based on the detected information at the timing tW2a within the 1D reception period (see FIG. 234), it means that the stock reception effect is performed within the 1D reception period. (see FIG. 236), and when the timing tW3 arrives without detection of the action by the player within the 1D reception period, the 1D after-reception production is executed (see FIG. 235). It becomes possible to suggest that there is a situation where

In addition, in the above-described effect example, it is possible to generate a specific reception period that is different from both the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period. ) based on the detection information obtained (for example, a specific post-reception effect that is different from the 1D post-reception effect and the 2D post-reception effect) is executed (stock reception effect), and the specific A post-reception effect (specified post-reception effect) may be executed based on the arrival of a predetermined timing without detection of an action by the player within the reception period. Then, a case where a post-receipt effect (post-specified reception effect) is executed based on the fact that the stock reception effect has been performed within the specific reception period, and a predetermined timing when the action by the player is not detected within the specific reception period. The execution time of the post-reception performance (specific post-reception performance) may be the same between the case where the post-reception performance (specific post-reception performance) is executed based on the arrival. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize at which timing the post-reception performance is executed only by looking at the execution time of the post-reception performance, and the sense of tension is preferably maintained. be able to

Further, in the above-described production example, the 2D post-acceptance production is performed in the case where the action of the player is not detected by the action detection means within the 2D reception period (stock reception production); Since the execution time is set to be the same between the case where the player's action is detected by the action detection means within the acceptance period and the case where the action is executed, the interest in the game can be preferably maintained. become able to

On the other hand, the 1D post-acceptance effect is executed when the action of the player is executed without being detected by the action detection means during the 1D acceptance period (stock acceptance effect), and when the player Since the execution time is set to be different between the case where the action is executed based on the detection of the action by the action detection means, different effects can be provided according to the type of reception period. become.

Further, in the above-described production example, in the precursor production suggesting that an action opportunity is given to the player, a precursor production sound corresponding to the precursor production is output (see FIG. 234); There is a case where the portent effect sound corresponding to the portent effect is not output (see FIG. 237). As a result, it is expected that the sense of tension will be favorably maintained in providing the player with an opportunity to act.

Further, when a specific precursor effect sound (effect sound corresponding to the 1D precursor effect display ZEC) is output before the reception period in which the action opportunity is given to the player occurs, the effect shown in FIGS. As shown in 236, timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. ) and timing tW3 shown in FIG. On the other hand, when no premonitory effect sound is output before the acceptance period in which the player is given an action opportunity occurs, as shown in FIGS. There is no timing corresponding to timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235, and timing tW2 shown in FIG. At least there is a timing tX2 (tX2A) corresponding to (tW2A). According to such a configuration, even if the stock reception effect fails as a result of the action performed by the player (the action is detected within the non-stock period) while the precursor effect sound is being output, after the reception Since the production is always executed, it is possible to challenge the stock reception production with a sense of security. In addition, when the premonitory effect sound is not output, if the stock reception effect fails, the player is required to perform another action within the reception period in order to generate the post-reception effect. Therefore, it will be possible to challenge the stock reception production in a tense atmosphere.

It should be noted that, when no premonitory effect sound is output before the acceptance period in which the player is given an action opportunity occurs, as shown in FIGS. There is no timing corresponding to timing tW3 shown in FIG. ) (2D acceptance period), the action of the player is not detected by the action detection means during the acceptance period, and the corresponding post-acceptance effect starts to be executed. 235 and timing tW2 (tW2A) shown in FIG. 236 (another reception period). You may make it so that there is. According to such a configuration, when the foreshadowing effect sound is not output, it is possible to challenge the stock reception effect while maintaining the sense of tension and suitably providing a sense of security. become.

Further, in the example of the effect described above, the situation is that the portent effect sound corresponding to the 1D portent effect display ZEC is being output, and the action by the player is performed within the stock period (first period) and detected. Even if this is the case, the 1D precursor effect display ZEC and the corresponding precursor effect sound are not interrupted before the 1D acceptance period occurs. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize in which of the stock period (first period) or the non-stock period (second period) the movement of the player is detected.

Note that, as described above, the 1D precursor effect display ZEC may be performed so as to straddle the timing at which the 1D reception period occurs. At this time, the portent effect sound corresponding to the 1D portent effect display ZEC is also output across the timing at which the 1D acceptance period occurs. In this case, when the player's action is performed and this is detected while the 1D receiving period is occurring and the portent effect sound corresponding to the 1D portent effect display ZEC is being output. With this as a trigger, the 1D precursor effect display ZEC and the corresponding precursor effect sound may be interrupted within the 1D acceptance period. That is, in this case, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the stock reception effect is performed or the stock reception is received within the first D reception period. On the other hand, when the stock reception effect is performed, the precursor effect sound is interrupted at timing tX2 (tX2A) with this as a trigger.

234 to 247, the "stock reception effect" in the example effects and other examples (modifications) thereof refers to the "prediction effect" before the reception period occurs, as described above. When an action is performed by a player within the "execution period" and this is obtained as detection information, the detection information is stored, and the stored detection information is used in the "reception valid period" within the reception period that occurs thereafter. It is meant to be used as if it were subject to "judgment". Therefore, ``that the player performs an action within the execution period of the precursor effect and obtains this as detection information'' does not mean that ``the operation for setting the automatic button effect state described above has been performed''. It is completely different.

For example, in the "stock reception effect", by confirming the detection information obtained within the "execution period of the sign effect" as it is during the reception period, it is possible to determine whether the reception is valid even if the player's action is not detected during the reception period. is made so that On the other hand, when an operation for setting the automatic button effect state described above is performed, detection information corresponding to the operation is obtained, but the detection information must be held until the acceptance period occurs. no. That is, when the detection information corresponding to the operation for setting the automatic button effect state described above is obtained, the state of the effect state flag is changed to the "automatic button effect state" based on the detection information being obtained. will be set to a specific state corresponding to ". After that, every time the reception period occurs, the state of the effect state flag is confirmed when a predetermined timing within the reception period arrives, so that the player does not perform any action (operation) during the reception period. , it is possible to execute the production after reception.

Therefore, in order to realize the production examples described above with reference to FIGS. Alternatively, it may be a gaming machine that is always controlled to the automatic button presentation state. By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the example of the production described above with reference to FIGS. 236 and timing tW3 shown in FIG. Based on this, the execution of the effect after receiving the 1D is started. That is, in this case, the execution of the 1D post-acceptance effect is started based on the arrival of the predetermined timing before the player's action is detected (acceptance validity determination is not made). On the other hand, when the automatic button effect state is not set, the predetermined timing does not function. After receiving the 1D, the performance is started to be executed. It should be noted that if the 2D reception period occurs when the automatic button effect state is set by the player's operation, during the 2D reception period, the timing tX2 (tX2A) shown in FIG. Based on the arrival of the timing, the execution of the 2D post-acceptance effect is started.

In addition, in the production examples described above with reference to FIGS. 234 to 247 and other examples (modifications) thereof, the actions (operations) required of the player in order to succeed in the above-mentioned "stock acceptance production" are , is the same as the action (operation) required of the player within the corresponding acceptance period.

In addition, in the example of effect described above with reference to FIGS. Also, the above-mentioned "stock reception effect" is not executed based on the detected information. not). That is, only when the player is in a situation where he/she can be aware of the reception period for which the action (operation) is to be performed, it is possible to realize such a "stock reception effect". It can be said that it is important in making the player perform actions (operations) while being conscious of the occurrence of .

Further, as described above, in the production examples described above with reference to FIGS. There is no notification within the effect display device 1600 regarding this. On the other hand, when the automatic button effect state is set, it is obviously necessary to notify the person who made the setting whether or not the setting is completed.

Also, as described above, in the production examples described above with reference to FIGS. It will always be provided for "reception validity judgment" within, and based on this, the post-reception production will always occur. On the other hand, if the automatic button effect state is set, it is obvious that the state can be canceled before the predetermined timing arrives.

In addition, in the above-described effect examples (1D reception period, 2D reception period, etc.), the stock period (first period) is generated first within the period in which the precursor effect is executed, and the non-stock period (second period) period) is generated later than this, and the reception period is generated in a form that leads to this. However, instead of this, the non-stock period (second period) is generated first, and the stock period (first period) is generated after this within the period in which the precursor effect is executed, and is connected to this. A reception period may occur. In this case, it is conceivable that the player's actions are detected across the stock period (first period) and the acceptance period. It is desirable that acceptance validity determination be made within the acceptance period based on the detection information obtained during the stock period (first period) without using the detection information. Alternatively, if the player's motion is detected in a manner spanning the stock period (first period) and the reception period, the detection information obtained during the stock period (first period) and the detection information obtained during the reception period. The acceptance validity determination may be made within the acceptance period based on both. Even in such a case, the presentation may be developed in the manner shown in FIGS. 243 and 247.

It should be noted that in the above-mentioned production examples and other examples (modifications) thereof, unless there is a description that the automatic button production state is set, the state is not set to the automatic button production state, It is described as a pachinko machine 1 that does not have functions related to the automatic button effect state.

In addition, in the above-described example of effect and another example (modification) thereof, during the period in which the 2D precursor effect display ZED is displayed, actions by the player are performed as shown in FIGS. a stock period (first period) during which the action is detected by the action detecting means and the information detected by the action detecting means is used for the acceptance validity determination within the second D accepting period; and an action by the player. is performed, even if the motion is detected by the motion detection means, the information detected by the motion detection means is not used for the reception validity determination within the 2D reception period. 2 periods). Then, after the detection by the motion detection means is made within the non-stock period (second period) of the period in which the 2D precursor effect display ZED is displayed, the motion detection means does not perform the new detection. When the 2D acceptance period has ended, the effect after the 2D acceptance is not executed (see FIG. 238).

234 to 236, during the period in which the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is displayed in the above-described effect example and another example (modification) thereof, a stock period (first period) during which the action is detected by the action detection means and the information detected by the action detection means is used for the reception validity determination within the 1D reception period when the player a non-stock period during which the information detected by the action detection means is not used for the acceptance validity determination within the first D reception period even if the action is detected by the action detection means when the action is performed. (Second period) is included. In spite of this, there is no new detection by the motion detection means after detection by the motion detection means during the non-stock period (second period) of the period in which the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is displayed. Even if the 1D reception period ends before the 1D reception period ends, the effect after the 1D reception is executed (timing tW3 shown in FIG. 235). That is, in this case, even if the action of the player is detected during the non-stock period (second period) instead of the stock period (first period) while the 1D precursor effect display ZEC is being performed. Since it becomes possible to generate the effect after the reception of the 1D without newly detecting the action of the player, it is expected to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 242 and 243, even if detection information is obtained during the stock period (first period) or the non-stock period (second period), In the production progress on the side where the production after the 1D reception can be executed without newly obtaining the detection information, a mode related to the production after the 1D reception (the production display after the 1D reception UGD1- 1 or 1D post-acceptance display UGD1-2), different modes (first disappearance-related display SKD1 or second disappearance-related display SKD2) are made to appear. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 246 and 247, when the detection information is obtained in the stock period (first period) of the stock period (first period) and the non-stock period (second period), As long as the effect progresses on the side where the effect after the 2D reception can be executed without newly obtaining the detection information within the 2D reception period, the aspect related to the effect after the 2D reception is used as the disappearance related display (second Regardless of whether the 2D post-acceptance display UGD2-1 or the 2D post-acceptance display UGD2-2), the same mode (second disappearance-related display SKD2) is made to appear.

That is, in the 1D post-acceptance effect, the detected information is obtained during the 1D acceptance period, regardless of whether the detected information is obtained during the stock period (first period) or the non-stock period (second period). Since it can be executed without obtaining anything new, it is feared that the player's sense of tension cannot be maintained. In this regard, according to the above configuration, when the effect after the reception of the first D is executed, the disappearance-related display itself has the effect of suggesting the degree of expectation, so that the sense of tension is preferably maintained. will be expected. On the other hand, the effect after reception of the 2D is only when the detection information is obtained during the stock period (first period) between the stock period (first period) and the non-stock period (second period). Since it can be executed without obtaining new detection information within the second D reception period, it can be said that the player's sense of tension is maintained by the effect of this itself. In this respect, according to the above configuration, when the 2D post-acceptance effect is executed, the disappearance-related display itself does not have the effect of suggesting the degree of expectation. After the determination is successful, it is expected that the player will be encouraged to concentrate on the effect after receiving the first D. In addition, when the 2D post-acceptance production is executed, the "second disappearance-related display SKD2" corresponding to the high-expectation mode of the 1D post-acceptance production is always displayed as the disappearance-related display. It will be expected to keep well.

Further, as shown in FIG. 243, even if the detection information is obtained during the stock period (first period) or the non-stock period (second period), the detection information In the production development on the side where the 1D post-reception production can be executed without newly obtaining I made it so that the image display and the remaining time display are displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 247, only when the detection information is obtained in the stock period (first period) of the stock period (first period) and the non-stock period (second period) In the production development on the side where the 2D post-reception effect can be executed without newly obtaining detection information within the 2D reception period, if the reception validity determination is made by the stock reception effect, the 2D post-reception effect will be performed. At the start of execution, the model image display and the remaining time display are not displayed (not visible).

That is, in the 1D post-acceptance effect, the detected information is obtained during the 1D acceptance period, regardless of whether the detected information is obtained during the stock period (first period) or the non-stock period (second period). Since it can be executed without obtaining anything new, it is feared that the player's sense of tension cannot be maintained. In this regard, according to the above configuration, even at the time when the execution of the 1D post-acceptance effect is started, the "reception validity determination" has not yet been made because the model image display and the remaining time display are being displayed. It will be expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained by making people aware of the possibilities. On the other hand, the effect after reception of the 2D is only when the detection information is obtained during the stock period (first period) between the stock period (first period) and the non-stock period (second period). Since it can be executed without obtaining new detection information within the second D reception period, it can be said that the player's sense of tension is maintained by the effect of this itself. In this regard, according to the above configuration, the model image display and the remaining time display are not displayed (invisible state) at the time when the execution of the effect after receiving the second D is started, so the "reception validity determination" It becomes easy to recognize that it is in a situation where it is done properly, and it is expected that it will encourage concentration on the performance after receiving the 1D.

Note that the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period according to each production example and modified example (another example) described above may be realized by modifying the following configuration, or the configuration according to the modified example ( 1D reception period, 2D reception period) may be further provided as reception periods different from the above-described 1D reception period and 2D reception period.

That is, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has at least the 1D reception period and the 2D reception period as the reception period during which the action (operation) by the player is permitted.

In this regard, when the 1D post-reception production corresponding to the 1D reception period is executed, as shown in FIGS. (1D post-acceptance production display UGD1-1), and the 1D post-acceptance production display UGD1-2 with a high degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the big hit pattern). ), the disappearance EF effect (disappearance-related display) is executed in a different manner. However, instead of this, there is a case where the 1D post-reception production is executed in a mode (1D post-reception production display UGD1-1) with a low degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern), and a case where the 1D post-reception production is expected. Disappears in one predetermined mode (same mode) regardless of whether it is executed in a high mode (percentage of appearance of jackpot patterns) (1D post-reception production display UGD1-2) An EF effect (disappearance-related display) may be executed.

Further, when the 2D post-acceptance effect corresponding to the 2D acceptance period is executed, as shown in FIGS. A case where it is executed in a low mode (2D post-acceptance effect display UGD2-1) and a mode where the 2D post-acceptance effect is high in expectation (percentage of appearance of big hit symbols) (2D post-acceptance effect display UGD2-2). The disappearance EF effect (disappearance-related display) is executed in one predetermined mode (same mode) regardless of whether it is executed in . However, instead of this, there is a case where the effect after receiving the 2D is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation (proportion of appearance of the big hit pattern) (effect display after the 2D receiving UGD2-1), and the effect after the 2D receiving is expected. The disappearance EF effect (disappearance-related display) may be executed in a different manner from the case of execution in the high mode (2D post-acceptance effect display UGD2-2).

Next, a case where the above modified example is applied to the above-described production example will be described. That is, FIG. 249 corresponds to "when the effect after the 1D reception is executed based on the detection information being obtained within the 1D reception period, or when reception validity determination is made within the 1D reception period" shown in FIG. FIG. 250 is a modified example of the “effect that appears when the 1D post-reception effect is executed based on the arrival of the timing tW3 without being performed”, and FIG. This is a modified example of "effect that appears when the 1D post-acceptance effect is executed based on the detection information obtained in (1). In addition, FIG. 251 shows the state shown in FIG. FIG. 252 is a modified example of "effect that appears when the timing tX3 arrives without being performed", and FIG. This is a modified example of "effect that appears when the effect is executed." It should be noted that, in this modified example, for configurations that are not particularly mentioned, "examples of effects related to the 1D reception period (Figs. 234 to 236, 240 to 243)" 239, FIGS. 244 to 247)”, and can be applied to the “example of production regarding the 1D reception period” and the “example of production concerning the 2D reception period”. is also applicable.

In the modification shown in FIGS. 249 and 250, first, based on the detection information obtained within the 1D reception period, the 1D reception production is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation (proportion of appearance of the jackpot pattern). case (see Figure 249 (e1) ~ (i1)) and 1D production after reception is expected (proportion of appearance of the jackpot pattern) high mode (see Figure 249 (e2) ~ (i2)) is executed The disappearance EF effect (disappearance-related display) is executed in the same manner as in the case of In addition, when the 1D post-reception effect is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) based on the arrival of the timing tW3 (see FIGS. 249(e3) to (i3)), Even when the 1D post-acceptance production is executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of big hit symbols) (see FIGS. 249(e4) to (i4)), the disappearance EF production (disappearance-related display) is executed in the same manner. It is designed to be In addition, when the 1D post-acceptance production is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) based on the detection information obtained before the 1D acceptance period (FIG. 250 (e5) to (i5 )) and the 1D post-reception production is performed in a mode with a high degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) (see FIG. 250 (e6) to (i6)). (disappearance-related display) is executed. Here, the second disappearance-related display SKD2 is executed as the disappearance EF effect.

On the other hand, in the modification shown in FIGS. 251 and 252, the effect after the reception of the 2D is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the big hit pattern) based on the detection information obtained within the reception period of the 2D. (see Figure 251 (e1) to (i1)), and when the production after receiving the 2D reception is executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) (Figure 251 (e2) to (i2 )), the annihilation EF effect is executed in a different manner. In addition, when the production after the 2D reception is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation (proportion of appearance of the jackpot pattern) based on the detection information obtained before the 2D reception period (Fig. 252 (e4) to (i4 )), and even if the 2D post-reception production is executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) (see FIG. 252 (e5) to (i5)), the annihilation EF production is performed in a different manner. is set to run. Here, when it is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) (see FIGS. 251(e1)-(i1) and FIGS. 252(e4)-(i4)), the second EF production is eliminated. When 1 disappearance related display SKD1 is executed and executed in a high mode of expectation (percentage of appearance of big hit symbols) (see FIGS. 251 (e2) to (i2) and FIG. 252 (e5) to (i5)) Second disappearance-related display SKD2 is executed as the disappearance EF effect.

In addition, in the modification shown in FIG. 251, when the timing tX3 arrives without making reception validity determination within the second D reception period, the third extinction related display SKD3 is displayed as the extinction EF effect. However, instead of this, as the extinction EF effect, the mode (first extinction-related display SKD1 or second extinction-related display SKD2) that appears when the reception validity determination is tentatively made within the second D reception period appears. You may do so. According to such a configuration, even if the reception validity determination is not made within the second D reception period, it is possible to confirm the aspect of the disappearing EF effect displayed based on the arrival of the timing tX3. If reception validity determination is tentatively made within the 2D reception period, it becomes possible to recognize in which mode (low expectation mode or high expectation mode) the presentation after the 2D reception was executed.

238 and 246 and the modified example shown in FIG. 251, when timing tX3 arrives without making reception validity determination within the 2D reception period, the 2D reception-after-reception production is executed. I tried not to. 238 and 246 and the modified example shown in FIG. 251, the modified example shown in FIGS. 235 and 242 and the modified example shown in FIG. Similarly to , the effect after the 2D reception may be executed based on the arrival of the timing tX3 without making the reception validity determination within the 2D reception period. That is, in this case, the only difference is the remaining time indicated by the remaining time display (the display area of the gauge image is "0"). i2), or the mode shown in FIGS. 251(e1)-(i1) or 251(e2)-(i2).

[Performance of reception acceptance period that can be operated multiple times]
As explained by exemplifying FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, variation as to which one of a plurality of variation patterns is to be executed is based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the starting winning (holding digestion). Pattern judgment can be executed. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern It is possible to execute a production judgment (such as advance notice judgment) as to which of the expected productions (such as advance notice production) is to appear selectively. It should be noted that depending on the result of this production determination, all of the plurality of expected productions prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern (notice production, etc.) may be sequentially executed, or None of the expected effects (notice effects, etc.) may be executed.

And as described above, when such production determination (variation pattern determination, advance notice determination, etc.) is performed, by performing control to display the production content according to the result of the production determination on the production display device 1600, the big hit determination The variable production by the decorative pattern according to the result is executed together with the expected production (preliminary production) related to the background depiction (background advance notice) and movable body operation (role production). As a result, as a result of execution of the variable effect by the decorative pattern together with the expected effect of the background depiction and the action of the movable body, etc., when the jackpot pattern (special pattern combination) is stopped and displayed, a privilege is given to the player. As a big hit game and a transition to a high probability game state can be executed.

In such a configuration, the variable performance by the decorative pattern is provided as a performance having "a function indicating whether or not a big hit has been obtained as a result of the judgment of the big hit", and the background depiction, the movement of the movable body, etc. is provided as an effect having "the function of suggesting the degree of expectation, that is, the ratio (including 0% and 100%) of the fact that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the determination of the variation pattern, it is specified among the highly expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach effects with background changes, etc.) If the variation pattern is selected, even if any result is obtained as the production judgment (such as the advance notice judgment), when the pattern production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing in the SP reach (predetermined condition is established), it is possible to generate an acceptance acceptance period (validity period) during which performance acceptance is allowed.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low-expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the determination of the variation pattern. Even in the case, when a special result is obtained in the production determination (such as advance notice judgment) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the pattern production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (predetermined condition is established Then), it is possible to generate an acceptance acceptance period (validity period) during which performance acceptance is allowed. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination, even if the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, the acceptable acceptance period (effective period) does not occur. . In addition, the acceptance acceptance period (valid period) that occurs in a predetermined variation pattern is different from the acceptance acceptance period (valid period) that occurs when the pattern production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as an effect (post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, etc.).

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is established, it is possible to generate an acceptance period during which the player is allowed to accept an action (operation). When an action (operation) is accepted, a display change (post-acceptance display) is caused in accordance with the type of acceptance period that occurred. More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1, "action detection means (sensors, etc.) for detecting actions (operations) by the player" and "detection information storage means (peripheral control RAM 1511c, corresponding processing steps in the program, etc.) and "A receiving period can be generated, and based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means, reception validity determination is made to make the action of the player a valid action. If it is done within the reception period, reception-related effect execution means (peripheral control MPU 1511a, relevant processing steps in the program, etc.) that can execute the display after reception corresponding to the reception period. there is

Also, during the acceptance period, an action target indication indicating which one is the "target of the player's action" can be displayed. Such an action target display can be, for example, a model image display in which an object (operation means) to be operated by the player is represented as an image. In particular, the "action object display" according to this example of effect is displayed as a "simulated image display" that simulates the action object of the player and has a plurality of modes with different expectations.

In addition, during the reception period, a remaining time display indicating the remaining time during which the action (operation) by the player is permitted can be displayed. Such remaining time display can be executed, for example, as a depiction that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time passes. In particular, in this production example, at least one of the frame image and the gauge image has a plurality of aspects (for example, the rate of decrease of the display area of the gauge image, the suggestion of the degree of expectation, the suggestion of the type of operation means, etc.). are prepared and are intended to be implemented in any of these modes. A different degree of expectation (ratio of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may be suggested depending on which mode is executed.

In addition, when the acceptance period occurs, it is possible to execute a premonitory effect suggesting that the player will be given an action opportunity (indicating that the acceptance period will occur) before this. there is The portent effect is executed by, for example, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 or the output of the corresponding effect sound.

In addition, even if any result is obtained as a notice production judgment, at the predetermined timing during the SP reach, regarding the fluctuation pattern that generates the acceptable acceptance period (effective period), in addition to the above "specific fluctuation pattern" may also be provided. No matter which result is obtained as a result of the advance notice effect judgment, the fluctuation pattern that causes the acceptable acceptance period (effective period) at the predetermined timing is not included in the low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). or it may be included but its selection rate (occurrence rate) should be low (though not necessarily).

In addition, including each example described above and each example described later, the "operation (action) by the player" to be detected means that the player It is not limited to those that are directly operated (pressing action or drawing action) by the touch sensor, but also the "player's contact action on a specific part" that is detected by the touch sensor, and the "in a specific space" that is detected by the non-contact sensor. It also means that the player's actions in The point is that one or a plurality of accepting means (operating means) for accepting actions by the player (pressing action, sword drawing action, touch action, non-contact action, etc.) may be provided.

By the way, as the acceptable reception period (effective period) according to this embodiment, the type of display after reception or the output sound after reception is different, the audible output status of BGM is different, or the reception permitted period (valid period) is different. Various types of acceptable acceptance periods (effective periods) are prepared, such as the number of times that operation acceptance is allowed within the period), and whether or not the auto repeated hit function is activated. there is

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the following special effects are provided between a plurality of acceptable acceptance periods, so as to enhance the effects when the acceptable acceptance period occurs. or to maintain the sense of tension when the acceptable acceptance period occurs. It should be noted that each of the effects (each configuration) described below does not necessarily have to include all of these configurations. It is possible to suppress the decrease of, or it may be selectively provided with some configurations that are considered necessary to obtain further effects, or it can be applied to another configuration ( Desirable application) may be adopted as appropriate. Furthermore, each effect (configuration) to be described below is merely an example, and any one configuration that can suppress the decline in interest in the game related to the acceptance period may be provided.

[Configuration 1-D]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a simulated image display, which is an image display that imitates the operation means (for example, "operation button 410", "sword ornament 5001", etc.) is displayed ( It is possible to generate a "model image display acceptance period" during which operation reception is permitted for the operation means that is the target to be modeled as the model image display, and if an operation is accepted during the model image display acceptance period, Reception period execution means capable of executing at least one of post-reception display and post-reception sound output based on acceptance of the operation, and a state in which operation reception is permitted when the model image display reception period occurs. , or allowable sound output means capable of audibly outputting an acceptance allowable sound suggesting that operation acceptance will be allowed. Further, the simulated image display can be displayed in such a manner that a periodic change appears as an image display imitating the operating means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as the model image display acceptance period, there is a "short cycle display acceptance period" in which periodic changes in the model image display can be displayed in predetermined time units, and a period in which the periodic changes in the model image display At least a "long-cycle display acceptance period" is prepared in which the display is not performed in units of a predetermined time and can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time. It should be noted that the “predetermined time” for the configuration 1-D is merely a term used to describe the technical concept of the configuration 1-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" related to other configurations, or may mean a time different from the "predetermined time" related to other configurations.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest various differences in performance through the length of time required for one periodic change in the model image display, so the model image display reception period has occurred. It is expected that the tension of the time will be appropriately maintained. In addition to the model image display reception period during which the model image display is displayed, a reception period during which the model image display is not displayed is further prepared, and different effects are further provided depending on whether the model image display is displayed or not. You may suggest.

In addition, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 1-D", the acceptable acceptance sound is audibly output during the "short-cycle display acceptance period", and the acceptance acceptance sound is not audibly output during the "long-cycle display acceptance period". You may make it so that there is a case. According to such a configuration, in the "long-cycle display acceptance period", the player is provided with an opportunity to operate compared to the "short-cycle display acceptance period" in which the acceptability sound is audibly output. Since it becomes difficult to recognize this, it is possible to preferably maintain the tension caused by the increased possibility of forgetting to operate.

In this case, the allowable reception sound is audibly output during the "short-cycle display acceptance period", and the reception allowable sound is audibly output or not audibly output during the "long-cycle display reception period". good too. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize which of the "short-cycle display reception period" and the "long-cycle display reception period" is occurring only by confirming that the acceptance acceptance sound is audibly output. Therefore, not only when the acceptable reception sound is not audibly output, but also when the acceptance acceptable sound is audibly output, it is expected to preferably maintain the tension.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 1-D", during the "long-cycle display reception period", as the reception allowable sound, a mode sound that cannot appear during the "short-cycle display reception period" can be output. can be According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize which of the "short-cycle display reception period" and the "long-cycle display reception period" is occurring only by confirming whether or not the acceptance acceptance sound is audibly output. However, if the type (modal sound) is also confirmed, there is a possibility that it will be possible to easily recognize that the "long-period display acceptance period" has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to preferably maintain the tension when the reception acceptance sound is audibly output.

In this case, the same mode sound may be output as the acceptable acceptance sound in the "short-cycle display acceptance period" and the "long-cycle display acceptance period". According to such a configuration, even when the type (modal sound) of the reception allowable sound is audibly output, the "short-cycle display reception period" and the "long-cycle display reception period" are confirmed. ”, it is not necessarily easy to recognize which is occurring, so it is expected that the tension will be maintained more appropriately.

[Configuration 2-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a model image display, which is an image display that imitates the operation means (for example, "operation button 410" or "sword ornament 5001") is displayed. In addition, it is possible to generate a "model image display acceptance period" in which operation reception is permitted (for the operation means that is the target to be modeled as the model image display), and the operation is accepted during the model image display acceptance period. Then, reception period executing means capable of executing at least one of post-reception display and post-reception sound output based on the reception of the operation is provided. Further, the simulated image display can be displayed in such a manner that a periodic change appears as an image display imitating the operating means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as the model image display acceptance period, there is a "short cycle display acceptance period" in which periodic changes in the model image display can be displayed in predetermined time units, and a period in which the periodic changes in the model image display are performed. At least a "long-cycle display acceptance period" is prepared which is not displayed so as to appear in predetermined time units and can be displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time. Both the "short-cycle display reception period" and the "long-cycle display reception period" can occur while some kind of dramatic sound is being audibly output. It should be noted that the “predetermined time” for the configuration 2-D is merely a term used to describe the technical concept of the configuration 2-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" related to other configurations, or may mean a time different from the "predetermined time" related to other configurations.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest various differences in performance through the length of time required for one periodic change in the model image display, so the model image display reception period has occurred. It is expected that the tension of the time will be appropriately maintained. In addition to the model image display reception period during which the model image display is displayed, a reception period during which the model image display is not displayed is further prepared, and different effects are further provided depending on whether the model image display is displayed or not. You may suggest.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 2-D", in the "short-cycle display reception period", all of the effect sounds that were audible at the time of occurrence until the end of the reception period (all ) will not be put into an inaudible state, but during the “long-period display acceptance period”, (all of) the production sounds that were in an audible state at the time of occurrence until the end of the relevant acceptance period will be put into an inaudible state may be set to

That is, as the model image display acceptance period, there is a "short cycle display acceptance period" in which periodic changes in the model image display can be displayed in predetermined time units, and a "short period display acceptance period" in which periodic changes in the model image display can appear in predetermined time units. Even if a "long-period display reception period" is prepared so that display is possible in units of time longer than the predetermined time without being displayed on the screen, in reality, periodic changes in the simulated image display do not occur for a predetermined period of time. It is difficult to accurately determine whether it appears in units or in units of time longer than the predetermined time. In this regard, in the "short-cycle display reception period", the effect sound that was audible at the time of its occurrence will not end until the end of the reception period, but in the "long-cycle display reception period" , if the effect sound that was in an audible state at the time of its generation may be ended before the end of the acceptance period, will the sound effect that was in an audible state at the time of its generation be ended? By confirming whether or not, it becomes possible to more accurately recognize which of the "short-cycle display acceptance period" and the "long-cycle display acceptance period" is occurring.

In this case, during the "short-cycle display acceptance period", the production sound that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence will not end until the end of the relevant reception period, but the "long-cycle display acceptance period" will not end. Then, the effect sound that was audible at the time of occurrence may or may not end until the end of the acceptance period. According to such a configuration, even if the effect sound that was in an audible state at the time of generation does not end before the end of the reception period, the "short-cycle display reception period" and the "long-cycle display reception period" It is difficult to recognize which of the "period" is occurring. Therefore, the remaining time as the reception period is reduced by the amount that the player delays the operation in order to confirm whether the effect sound that was audible at the time of occurrence is finished or not. It becomes expected to favorably maintain a sense of tension within.

[Configuration 3-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a model image display, which is an image display that imitates the operation means (for example, "operation button 410" or "sword ornament 5001") is displayed. In addition, it is possible to generate a "model image display acceptance period" in which operation reception is permitted (for the operation means that is the target to be modeled as the model image display), and the operation is accepted during the model image display acceptance period. Then, reception period executing means capable of executing at least one of post-reception display and post-reception sound output based on the reception of the operation is provided. Further, the simulated image display can be displayed in such a manner that a periodic change appears as an image display imitating the operating means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the model image display reception period is defined as the period in which the specified type of effect sound is audibly output, and the case in which the specified type of effect sound is made inaudible. and both. Then, as the model image display acceptance period, there is a "short cycle display acceptance period" in which periodic changes in the model image display can be displayed in predetermined time units, and a "short cycle display acceptance period" in which periodic changes in the model image display can appear in predetermined time units. At least a "long-cycle display acceptance period" is prepared so that the display is not displayed in a period longer than the predetermined time and can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time. It should be noted that the “predetermined time” for the configuration 3-D is merely a term used to describe the technical concept of the configuration 3-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" related to other configurations, or may mean a time different from the "predetermined time" related to other configurations. Also, the “specific type of effect sound” related to the configuration 3-D is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 3-D. Therefore, it may mean the same effect sound as the "specific type of effect sound" according to another configuration, or it may mean a different effect sound from the "specific type effect sound" according to the other configuration. may be

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest various differences in performance through the length of time required for one periodic change in the model image display, so the model image display reception period has occurred. It is expected that the tension of the time will be appropriately maintained. In addition to the model image display reception period during which the model image display is displayed, a reception period during which the model image display is not displayed is further prepared, and different effects are further provided depending on whether the model image display is displayed or not. You may suggest.

Further, in the above configuration, the model image display reception period may be generated while the specific type of effect sound is audibly output, or may occur after the specific type of effect sound is made inaudible. Since there are both, it is expected that the effect will be improved when the model image display reception period occurs.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 3-D", in the "short-cycle display reception period", the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the "short-cycle display reception period" occurs Therefore, the specific type of effect sound will not be made inaudible or not made inaudible before the "short period display reception period" occurs, but in the "long period display reception period" , depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the "long-cycle display acceptance period" occurs, a specific type of effect sound is made inaudible before the "long-cycle display acceptance period" occurs There may be cases where the state is set and cases where it is not set to the non-audible state. According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, it is either the "short cycle display reception period" or the "long cycle display reception period" when the operation opportunity is given. Since it becomes easy to recognize whether or not, it is possible to encourage the player to concentrate on the game even when the opportunity to operate is not given.

Regarding the "Short Cycle Display Receiving Period", when the short cycle display receiving period occurs, according to the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended, the appearance of the specific type of effect sound will not change. It is desirable to For example, the "short-cycle display reception period" may be such that the specific type of effect sound is always made inaudible before the "short-cycle display reception period" occurs. At the time when the "display acceptance period" occurs, the specific type of effect sound may always be made audible. Alternatively, the "short-cycle display reception period" may be a specific type of display before the "short-cycle display reception period" occurs, depending on the type of post-operation display or post-operation output sound when the operation is accepted. There is a case (type) in which the effect sound is made inaudible, and a case (type) in which the specific type of effect sound is made audible at the time when the "short-cycle display acceptance period" occurs. good too.

Regarding the "long-cycle display reception period", for example, as the type of the "long-cycle display reception period" that differs in the post-operation display and the post-operation output sound when the operation is accepted, at least the "first long-cycle display reception period " and "second long-cycle display acceptance period" are prepared, and for "first long-cycle display acceptance period", the previous fluctuation that has ended when the first long-cycle display acceptance period occurs The form of the effect sound does not change according to the pattern type (the reception period occurs (or does not occur) while the specific type of effect sound is being audibly output), and the "second long period In the "display reception period", the mode of the sound effect changes according to the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the second long-cycle display reception period occurs (a state in which the sound effect of a specific type is inaudible There may be cases where the acceptance period occurs in the non-audible state, and cases where the acceptance period occurs while the specific type of effect sound is being audibly output). According to such a configuration, it is expected that the sense of tension is appropriately maintained by making it difficult to determine which of the "short-cycle display reception period" and the "long-cycle display reception period" is occurring. It will be done.

[Configuration 4-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a model image display, which is an image display that imitates the operation means (for example, "operation button 410" or "sword ornament 5001") is displayed. In addition, it is possible to generate a "model image display acceptance period" in which operation reception is permitted (for the operation means that is the target to be modeled as the model image display), and the operation is accepted during the model image display acceptance period. Then, reception period executing means capable of executing at least one of post-reception display and post-reception sound output based on the reception of the operation is provided. Further, the simulated image display can be displayed in such a manner that a periodic change appears as an image display imitating the operating means.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1, when an operation is accepted during the model image display acceptance period, there is a case where the post-acceptance display is performed in such a manner that the performance symbols (decorative symbols, etc.) are superimposed from the front side. Then, as the model image display acceptance period, there is a "short cycle display acceptance period" in which periodic changes in the model image display can be displayed in predetermined time units, and a "short cycle display acceptance period" in which periodic changes in the model image display can appear in predetermined time units. At least a "long-cycle display acceptance period" is prepared so that the display is not displayed in a period longer than the predetermined time and can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time. It should be noted that the “predetermined time” for the configuration 4-D is merely a term used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 4-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" related to other configurations, or may mean a time different from the "predetermined time" related to other configurations.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest various differences in performance through the length of time required for one periodic change in the model image display, so the model image display reception period has occurred. It is expected that the tension of the time will be suitably maintained. In addition, in the above configuration, if an operation is accepted during the period of acceptance of the display of the model image, the post-acceptance display may be performed in a manner that overlaps the production pattern from the front side, so the post-acceptance display should be emphasized. has become possible, and it is expected that the performance will be improved when the operation is accepted.

Also, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 4-D", during the short cycle display reception period, there is no case where the display is performed after reception in a manner that overlaps the production pattern from the front side, and reception is performed on the back side. Post-display is performed, but during the long-cycle display reception period, there are cases where post-reception display is performed in a manner that overlaps the production pattern from the front side, and there are cases where post-reception display is performed behind the production pattern. You may do so. According to such a configuration, when the short-cycle display reception period occurs, the display after reception is not emphasized with respect to the design for performance, and the operation opportunity is given to the player in a tense atmosphere. can be given. When the long cycle display acceptance period occurs, the display after acceptance may or may not be emphasized. While maintaining it, it becomes possible to provide a certain degree of security.

In this case, when the post-receipt display is performed in such a manner that it appears to overlap the performance symbols from the front side based on the fact that the reception has been made during the long-cycle display reception period, the player performs a predetermined operation or the like to perform the reception display. It may be possible to shorten the period until the post-display is hidden and the pattern for effect becomes easy to see. According to such a configuration, it is expected that the decrease in the interest in the game due to the decrease in the visibility of the performance symbols when the display after reception is emphasized can be suitably suppressed.

[Configuration 5-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a model image display, which is an image display that imitates the operation means (for example, "operation button 410" or "sword ornament 5001") is displayed. In addition, it is possible to generate a "model image display acceptance period" in which operation reception is permitted (for the operation means that is the target to be modeled as the model image display), and the operation is accepted during the model image display acceptance period. Then, reception period executing means capable of executing at least one of post-reception display and post-reception sound output based on the reception of the operation is provided. Further, the simulated image display can be displayed in such a manner that a periodic change appears as an image display imitating the operating means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when an operation is accepted during the model image display acceptance period, the disappeared EF display that makes the model image display difficult to see is executed in a predetermined manner, and the disappeared EF display is performed in a predetermined manner. It may or may not be performed in a different manner. As the model image display acceptance period, at least a "first model image display acceptance period", a "second model image display acceptance period", and a "third model image display acceptance period" are prepared. In the "image display acceptance period", display is possible so that periodic changes in the model image display appear in predetermined time units (short cycle display acceptance period), "second model image display acceptance period" and "third model image display In the "acceptance period", periodic changes in the model image display are not displayed so as to appear in predetermined time units, but can be displayed so as to appear in time units longer than the predetermined time (long-period display). acceptance period). It should be noted that the “predetermined time” for the configuration 5-D is merely a term used to describe the technical concept of the configuration 5-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" related to other configurations, or may mean a time different from the "predetermined time" related to other configurations. In addition, the "first model image display acceptance period", the "second model image display acceptance period", and the "third model image display acceptance period" related to the configuration 5-D are based on the technical concept of the configuration 5-D. It's just a nomenclature used for explanation. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period (valid period) as the "acceptance period (valid period)" related to other configurations, or it may be different from the "acceptance period (valid period)" related to other configurations. It may mean the acceptance period (effective period).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest various differences in performance through the length of time required for one periodic change in the model image display, so the model image display reception period has occurred. It is expected that the tension of the time will be suitably maintained. Further, in the above configuration, when the operation is accepted during the model image display acceptance period, the disappearing EF display that makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image display is executed in a predetermined mode, and the disappearing EF display is performed in a predetermined mode. is executed in a different manner or is not executed in some cases, it is possible to add a dramatic effect even with such disappearing EF display.

Also, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 5-D", if the operation is accepted during the "first model image display acceptance period (short cycle display acceptance period)", a predetermined result (big hit) is obtained. The post-reception display can be executed in any one of a plurality of modes with different expectations, and the disappearing EF display is "when the post-reception display is performed in a mode with a high degree of expectation among the plurality of modes, the first mode However, if the post-acceptance display is executed in a mode different from the highly expected mode among the plurality of modes, it is executed in a mode different from the first mode, or it is not executed. When the operation is accepted during the "second model image display acceptance period (long-cycle display acceptance period)", it is accepted in any of a plurality of modes with different expectations that a predetermined result (big hit) is obtained. The post-reception display can be executed, and the extinguished EF display is defined as "when the post-reception display is executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation among the plurality of modes, it is executed in the second mode, but when the post-reception display is performed in the plurality of modes. If it is executed in a mode different from the highly expected mode among the modes, it will be executed in a mode different from the second mode or not executed", and "the third model image display acceptance period ( Long cycle display acceptance period)", even if the display after acceptance is made executable in any of the multiple modes with different expectations that a predetermined result (jackpot) is obtained, the EF disappears. The display may be "performed in the third mode regardless of which of the plurality of modes the post-acceptance display is performed". According to such a configuration, during the short-period display acceptance period in which periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of a predetermined time, the degree of expectation is also suggested by the mode of disappearing EF display when the operation is accepted. During the (first model image display acceptance period), it is possible to provide an operation opportunity so that the user does not feel uneasy about having difficulty in recognizing the degree of expectation despite the operation. On the other hand, in the long-period display acceptance period, the periodic change in the model image display is not displayed so as to appear in units of a predetermined time, but appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time. Depending on the mode of EF display, there are cases where the degree of expectation is suggested and cases where the degree of expectation is not suggested (2nd model image display acceptance period, 3rd model image display acceptance period). While providing the operation opportunity so as not to make the player feel uneasy about the difficulty of recognizing the degree of expectation, it is possible to preferably maintain the sense of tension when providing the operation opportunity.

In this case, the "first mode", "second mode", "third mode", "a mode different from the first mode", and "a mode different from the second mode" as disappearing EF display Among the aspects, some aspects may be the same (in any suitable combination), or all aspects may be different. However, "the first mode" and "a mode different from the first mode" are different from each other, and "a second mode" and "a mode different from the second mode" are different from each other.

[Configuration 6-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a model image display, which is an image display that imitates the operation means (for example, "operation button 410" or "sword ornament 5001") is displayed. In addition, it is possible to generate a "model image display acceptance period" in which operation reception is permitted (for the operation means that is the target to be modeled as the model image display), and the operation is accepted during the model image display acceptance period. Then, reception period executing means capable of executing at least one of post-reception display and post-reception sound output based on the reception of the operation is provided. Further, the simulated image display can be displayed in such a manner that a periodic change appears as an image display imitating the operating means.

In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with at least the first operation means and the second operation means as the operation means, and the periodic change in the display of the model image is performed in predetermined time units as the model image display acceptance period. A "short-period display acceptance period" that allows display to appear as it appears, and a periodical change in the model image display that is not displayed in a predetermined time unit and can be displayed in a time unit longer than the predetermined time. At least a "long cycle display acceptance period" is prepared. In at least one of the "short-cycle display acceptance period" and the "long-cycle display acceptance period", acceptance of operations on the first operation means and acceptance of operations on the second operation means are permitted respectively. state. It should be noted that the “predetermined time” for the configuration 6-D is merely a term used to describe the technical concept of the configuration 6-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" related to other configurations, or may mean a time different from the "predetermined time" related to other configurations. Also, the "first operating means" and "second operating means" relating to the configuration 6-D are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 6-D. Therefore, the "first operating means" and "second operating means" according to other configurations may mean the same operating means, respectively, or the "first operating means" and "second operating means" according to other configurations may mean the same operating means. "Two operating means" may mean different operating means.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest various differences in performance through the length of time required for one periodic change in the model image display, so the model image display reception period has occurred. It is expected that the tension of the time will be suitably maintained. Further, in the above configuration, during at least one of the "short-cycle display acceptance period" and the "long-cycle display acceptance period", an operation reception for the first operation means and an operation reception for the second operation means are performed respectively. Since it is in the permitted state, it is possible to add performance using a plurality of operation means.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 6-D" is adopted, both the "short-cycle display reception period" and the "long-cycle display reception period" are set to accept the operation for the first operation means and the second operation means. It may also be possible to allow the reception of operations on the operation means.

In this case, during the "short-cycle display reception period", only the model image display imitating the first operation means among the operation means is displayed, and during the "long-cycle display reception period", the first operation among the operation means is displayed. There are cases where only a model image display imitating the means is displayed, and there are cases where a model image display imitating the first operation means and a model image display imitating the second operation means are displayed. may That is, in this case, basically, during the "short-cycle display accepting period", it is kept secret that the opportunity to operate not only the first operation means but also the second operation means is given, In the "long-cycle display acceptance period", it may be possible to recognize that both the first operation means and the second operation means are given the opportunity to operate. However, when the player can perceive that the time required for one periodic change in the model image display is the predetermined time (the acceptance period is the "short-cycle display acceptance period"), the first operation Since it becomes possible to recognize that the operation opportunity is secretly given not only to the means but also to the second operation means, the performance when the operation opportunity is given is improved. It is expected that

[Configuration 7-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a model image display, which is an image display that imitates the operation means (for example, "operation button 410" or "sword ornament 5001") is displayed. In addition, it is possible to generate a "model image display acceptance period" in which operation reception is permitted (for the operation means that is the target to be modeled as the model image display), and the operation is accepted during the model image display acceptance period. Then, reception period executing means capable of executing at least one of post-reception display and post-reception sound output based on the reception of the operation is provided. Further, the simulated image display can be displayed in such a manner that a periodic change appears as an image display imitating the operating means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as the model image display acceptance period, there is a "short cycle display acceptance period" in which periodic changes in the model image display can be displayed in predetermined time units, and a period in which the periodic changes in the model image display At least a "long cycle display acceptance period" is prepared which is not displayed so as to appear in units of a predetermined time and can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time. In at least one of the "short-cycle display acceptance period" and the "long-cycle display acceptance period", it is made possible to allow multiple operations to be accepted. It should be noted that the “predetermined time” for the configuration 7-D is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 7-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" related to other configurations, or may mean a time different from the "predetermined time" related to other configurations.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest various differences in performance through the length of time required for one periodic change in the model image display, so the model image display reception period has occurred. It is expected that the tension of the time will be suitably maintained. In addition, in the above configuration, operation reception is permitted multiple times during at least one of the "short-cycle display reception period" and the "long-cycle display reception period", so that operation reception is permitted multiple times. It is possible to add a performance by doing so.

In addition, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 7-D", in the "short-cycle display acceptance period", regardless of the type of the acceptance period, the player's action (operation) is accepted (operation acceptance) multiple times. It will be an acceptable type (for example, continuous press type), but in the "long-cycle display acceptance period", the acceptance acceptable period depends on the type of the acceptance period (type of display after acceptance, output sound after acceptance, etc.) A type in which the player is allowed to accept only one action (operation) until the (effective period) ends (while it is occurring) (for example, a single push type). , a type that allows the player to accept an action (operation) multiple times (for example, a repeated push type) until the acceptance allowable period (effective period) ends (while it occurs) ). According to such a configuration, when the "short-cycle display acceptance period" occurs, it is suggested that the operation acceptance is allowed a plurality of times (for example, it is a repeated pressing type). In addition, when the "long cycle display acceptance period" occurs, it is now possible to hide whether or not the operation acceptance is allowed multiple times (for example, whether it is a continuous press type). , the operation opportunity can be given in a tense atmosphere.

In this case, even during the acceptance period (effective period) of a type that allows the player to accept an action (operation) multiple times (for example, a continuous push type), the lottery (judgment) for the effect Depending on the result of (1), the reception period (effective period) may end after only one operation reception. The point is that the reception period (effective period) of a type with a case (pattern) that is allowed multiple times is sufficient.

[Configuration 8-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a model image display, which is an image display that imitates the operation means (for example, "operation button 410" or "sword ornament 5001") is displayed. In addition, it is possible to generate a "model image display acceptance period" in which operation reception is permitted (for the operation means that is the target to be modeled as the model image display), and the operation is accepted during the model image display acceptance period. Then, reception period executing means capable of executing at least one of post-reception display and post-reception sound output based on the reception of the operation is provided. Further, the simulated image display can be displayed in such a manner that a periodic change appears as an image display imitating the operating means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as the model image display acceptance period, there is a "short cycle display acceptance period" in which periodic changes in the model image display can be displayed in predetermined time units, and a period in which the periodic changes in the model image display At least a "long cycle display acceptance period" is prepared which is not displayed so as to appear in units of a predetermined time and can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time. Then, when an operation is accepted for the operating means corresponding to the model image display during the "short cycle display acceptance period", the periodic changes that have appeared in the model image display until then are not displayed. It should be noted that the “predetermined time” for the configuration 8-D is merely a term used to describe the technical concept of the configuration 8-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" related to other configurations, or may mean a time different from the "predetermined time" related to other configurations.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest various differences in performance through the length of time required for one periodic change in the model image display, so the model image display reception period has occurred. It is expected that the tension of the time will be suitably maintained. Further, in the above configuration, when an operation is accepted for the operation means corresponding to the model image display during the "short-cycle display acceptance period", the periodic changes that have appeared in the model image display until then are hidden. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to confirm the time required for one periodic change in the model image display, and it is possible to preferably maintain the tension when the operation is accepted.

As will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 8-D", during the "short cycle display acceptance period", when the operation means corresponding to the model image display is operated and the operation is accepted, the model image display The periodic changes that have appeared until then are hidden, but during the "long-period display acceptance period", when the operation means corresponding to the model image display is operated and the operation is accepted, the model image display There may be a case where the periodic change that has appeared until then is hidden, and a case where the periodic change that has appeared so far in the model image display is continued without being hidden. According to such a configuration, when the periodic change that had appeared in the model image display until then was continued without being hidden when the operation was accepted, the "long-period display acceptance period" occurred. be able to suggest Also, when the periodic change that had appeared in the model image until then is hidden when the operation is accepted, either the "short-cycle display acceptance period" or the "long-cycle display acceptance period" has occurred. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize

In this case, ``the periodic change is hidden'' may be hidden by ``hiding the model image display'', or the model image display continues to be displayed. The periodic change that has appeared so far may be temporarily terminated and displayed still, or the same periodic change may be restarted from the beginning, or a different periodic change may be newly started.

[Configuration 9-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a model image display, which is an image display that imitates the operation means (for example, "operation button 410" or "sword ornament 5001") is displayed. In addition, it is possible to generate a "model image display acceptance period" in which operation reception is permitted (for the operation means that is the target to be modeled as the model image display), and the operation is accepted during the model image display acceptance period. Then, reception period executing means capable of executing at least one of post-reception display and post-reception sound output based on the reception of the operation is provided. Further, the simulated image display can be displayed in such a manner that a periodic change appears as an image display imitating the operating means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as the model image display acceptance period, there is a "short cycle display acceptance period" in which periodic changes in the model image display can be displayed in predetermined time units, and a period in which the periodic changes in the model image display are performed. At least a "long cycle display acceptance period" is prepared which is not displayed so as to appear in units of a predetermined time and can be displayed in units of time longer than the predetermined time. Then, when an operation is accepted for the operation means corresponding to the model image display during the "short-cycle display acceptance period", the periodic changes that have appeared in the model image display until then are not hidden and are continued. made it It should be noted that the “predetermined time” for the configuration 9-D is merely a term used to describe the technical concept of the configuration 9-D. Therefore, it may mean the same time as the "predetermined time" related to other configurations, or may mean a time different from the "predetermined time" related to other configurations.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest various differences in performance through the length of time required for one periodic change in the model image display, so the model image display reception period has occurred. It is expected that the tension of the time will be appropriately maintained. Further, in the above configuration, even if an operation is accepted for the operation means corresponding to the model image display during the "short-cycle display acceptance period", the periodic changes that have appeared in the model image display until then are not displayed. It is expected that the time required for one periodic change in the model image display can be confirmed even after the operation is accepted.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 9-D" is adopted, in the "short-cycle display acceptance period", when the operation means corresponding to the model image display is operated and the operation is accepted, the model image display The periodic changes that have appeared until then continue without being hidden, but during the "long-period display acceptance period", when the operation means corresponding to the model image display is operated and the operation is accepted, the model image is displayed. There may be a case where the periodic change that has appeared until then is hidden, and a case where the periodic change that has appeared so far in the model image display is continued without being hidden. According to such a configuration, when the periodic change that had appeared in the model image display until then is hidden when the operation is accepted, it is suggested that the "long-period display acceptance period" has occurred. be able to In addition, when the periodic change that has appeared in the model image display until then is continued without being hidden when the operation is accepted, either the "short-cycle display acceptance period" or the "long-cycle display acceptance period" It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize what has occurred.

In this case, ``the periodic change is hidden'' may be hidden by ``hiding the model image display'', or the model image display continues to be displayed. The periodic change that has appeared so far may be temporarily terminated and displayed still, or the same periodic change may be restarted from the beginning, or a different periodic change may be newly started.

[Configuration 10-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an acceptance acceptance period during which an operation acceptance for operation means (for example, "operation button 410" or "sword ornament 5001") is allowed reception period execution means capable of executing at least one of post-acceptance display and post-acceptance sound output based on the acceptance of an operation when an operation is accepted during the acceptance permissible period; a permissible sound output means capable of audibly outputting a reception permissible sound suggesting that the operation reception is permitted or that the operation reception will be permitted when the permissible period occurs. In addition, as the acceptable acceptance period, at least a “multiple-time acceptable period” is prepared during which the operation acceptance can be accepted multiple times until the acceptable acceptance period ends.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the ``multiple-time allowable period'' is defined as ``a period in which the operation reception is performed multiple times only by continuing to operate the operation means set as the operation target in which the operation reception is permitted multiple times. In the "maintenance operation permissible period", an acceptance permissible sound is audibly output when the "maintenance operation permissible period" occurs.

According to such a configuration, even if the player is not good at performing multiple operations within a limited time (multiple-time allowable period), when the "maintenance operation allowable period" occurs, By audibly outputting the allowable acceptance sound, it becomes easier to start the operation immediately after the permissible period for the maintenance operation occurs, and it is possible to perform the operation multiple times while there is enough remaining time. In addition, it is expected that the decrease in interest in games will be suppressed because it will be possible to accept operations multiple times just by continuing to operate the operation means. become.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 10-D", as the "multiple times allowed period", among the plurality of operation means, at least A "maintenance operation permissible period" during which operation acceptance is performed multiple times only by continuing to operate the operation means corresponding to the displayed model image display, and operation acceptance is performed multiple times among the plurality of operation means. A "maintenance operation non-permissible period" during which an allowable operation means is at least displayed as a model image display, but the operation is not accepted multiple times only by continuing to operate the operation means corresponding to the model image display. You may prepare. In the "maintenance operation permissible period", the acceptable reception sound is audibly output when generated, but in the maintenance operation non-permissible period, the acceptable reception sound may not be audibly output when generated. According to such a configuration, depending on whether or not the acceptable acceptance sound is audibly output, the "automatic continuous tapping function" is activated, in which the operation acceptance is performed multiple times simply by keeping the operating means in the operated state. It will be possible to suggest whether or not

[Configuration 11-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an acceptance acceptance period during which an operation acceptance for operation means (for example, "operation button 410" or "sword ornament 5001") is allowed and when an operation is accepted within the acceptable acceptance period, at least one of post-acceptance display and post-acceptance sound output can be executed based on the acceptance of the operation. there is In addition, as the acceptance acceptance period, at least a "multiple-times acceptance period" is prepared in which at least a simulated image display simulating an operation means set as an operation target in which operation acceptance is allowed a plurality of times is displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the "multiple times permissible period" may change the effect sound, which is audible at the time of occurrence, to an inaudible state until the "multiple times permissible period" ends. be. In addition, as the "multiple-time allowable period", at least a "maintenance operation allowable period during which the operation is accepted multiple times only by continuing to operate the operation means corresponding to the model image display" is prepared.

According to such a configuration, when the effect sound that was audible at the time of occurrence is changed to an inaudible state while the operation opportunity is given, the operation acceptance is allowed multiple times. It becomes possible to suggest that there is a situation in which a permissive period is occurring. In addition, even if the player is not good at performing multiple operations within a limited time (multiple-time allowable period), "just keep operating the operation means corresponding to the model image display. It is expected that the decrease in the interest in the game will be suppressed.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 11-D", at least the operation means for which the operation reception is allowed multiple times among the plurality of operation means is displayed as a model image display as the "multiple times allowed period". and a "maintenance operation permissible period" during which operation acceptance is performed multiple times only by continuing to operate the operation means corresponding to the model image display, and operation acceptance is allowed multiple times among the plurality of operation means. A "maintenance operation non-permissible period" is prepared in which an operation means that can be performed is displayed at least as a model image display, but the operation acceptance is not performed multiple times only by continuing to operate the operation means corresponding to the model image display. You may make it In the "maintenance operation permissible period", the effect sound that is audible at the time of occurrence is not made non-audible until the "maintenance operation permissible period" ends, but the "maintenance operation non-permissible period" Then, the effect sound that is audible at the time of generation may be made non-audible until the maintenance operation non-permissible period ends. According to such a configuration, when the "multiple times permissible period" occurs, the effect sound that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence is made inaudible until the "multiple times permissible period" ends. Depending on whether or not it is possible to indicate whether or not the "auto repeated tapping function" is enabled, in which the operation reception is performed multiple times simply by keeping the operating means in an operated state.

In this case, the "maintenance operation permissible period" and the "maintenance operation non-permissible period" may occur while the volume of the audible output of the effect sound is being reduced (suppressed). That is, it is sufficient that the effect sound is audible when the "multiple-time allowable period" occurs.

[Configuration 12-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an acceptance acceptance period during which an operation acceptance for operation means (for example, "operation button 410" or "sword ornament 5001") is allowed and when an operation is accepted within the acceptable acceptance period, at least one of post-acceptance display and post-acceptance sound output can be executed based on the acceptance of the operation. there is In addition, as the acceptance acceptance period, at least a "multiple-times acceptance period" is prepared in which at least a simulated image display simulating an operation means set as an operation target in which operation acceptance is allowed a plurality of times is displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the ``multiple times permissible period'' occurs when the specified type of effect sound is audibly output, and occurs after the specific type of effect sound is made inaudible. There are cases. In addition, as the multiple-time allowable period, at least a "maintenance operation allowable period in which the operation is accepted multiple times only by continuing to operate the operation means corresponding to the model image display" is prepared. It should be noted that the “specific type of effect sound” relating to the configuration 12-D is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 12-D. Therefore, it may mean the same effect sound as the "specific type of effect sound" according to another configuration, or it may mean a different effect sound from the "specific type effect sound" according to the other configuration. may be

According to such a configuration, the "multiple times permissible period" occurs when the specific type of effect sound is audibly output, and occurs after the specific type of effect sound is made inaudible. Since there are both cases, it is possible to improve the performance. In addition, even if the player is not good at performing multiple operations within a limited time (multiple operation permissible period), "just keep operating the operation means corresponding to the model image display. It is expected that the decrease in the interest in the game will be suppressed.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 12-D", the "multiple times allowable period" that can occur while a specific type of effect sound is being audibly output is set to "maintenance operation permissible period" in which an operation means that can be permitted multiple times is displayed at least as a model image display and the operation is accepted multiple times simply by continuing to operate the operation means corresponding to the model image display At least an operation means that can be accepted multiple times among a plurality of operation means is displayed as a model image display. A "maintenance operation non-permissible period" may be prepared in which the reception is not performed multiple times. Then, in the "maintenance operation permissible period", a specific type of effect sound is generated before the maintenance operation permissible period occurs according to the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the maintenance operation permissible period occurs. will not be made inaudible or not made inaudible, but in the "maintenance operation non-permissible period", the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the "maintenance operation non-permissible period" occurs If the specific type of production sound is made non-audible before the "maintenance operation non-permissible period" occurs according to the type of There may be a case where the non-audible state is not set (a case where the maintenance operation non-allowable period occurs while a specific type of effect sound is being audibly output). According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous variation pattern, when the "multiple times allowable period" occurs, this is the "maintenance operation allowable period" and the "maintenance operation non-allowable period". Since it becomes easy to recognize which one it is, it is possible to encourage concentration on the game even when an operation opportunity is not given.

Regarding the "maintenance operation permissible period", the state of the specific type of effect sound shall not change according to the type of the previous variation pattern which has ended at the time when the permissible maintenance operation period occurs. is desirable. For example, the “maintenance operation permissible period” may be such that the specific type of effect sound is always made inaudible before the “maintenance operation permissible period” occurs, or the “maintenance operation permissible period ' is generated, the specific type of effect sound may always be in an audible state. Alternatively, during the "allowable period of sustained operation", a specific type of effect sound is produced before the "allowed period of sustained operation" occurs, depending on the type of post-operation display or post-operation output sound when the operation is accepted. may be made inaudible (type), and a case (type) in which a specific type of effect sound is made audible at the time when the "maintenance operation permissible period" occurs.

Regarding the "maintenance operation non-permissible period", for example, as the type of the "maintenance operation non-permissible period" that differs from the post-operation display and post-operation output sound when the operation is accepted, at least the "first maintenance operation non-permissible period and a "second maintenance operation non-permissible period", and for the "first maintenance operation non-permissible period", the previous fluctuation that has ended at the time when the first maintenance operation non-permissible period occurs The mode of the effect sound does not change according to the pattern type (the reception period occurs (or does not occur) while the specific type of effect sound is audibly output), and the "second maintenance operation" In the non-permissible period, when the second maintenance operation non-permissible period occurs, the state of the effect sound changes according to the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended (a state in which the specific type of effect sound is not audible). There may be cases where the acceptance period occurs in the non-audible state, and cases where the acceptance period occurs while the specific type of effect sound is being audibly output). According to such a configuration, it is expected that the sense of tension is preferably maintained by making it difficult to determine which of the "maintenance operation permissible period" and the "maintenance operation non-permissible period" has occurred. Become so.

[Configuration 13-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an acceptance acceptance period during which an operation acceptance for operation means (for example, "operation button 410" or "sword ornament 5001") is allowed and when an operation is accepted within the acceptable acceptance period, at least one of post-acceptance display and post-acceptance sound output can be executed based on the acceptance of the operation. there is In addition, as the acceptance acceptance period, at least a "multiple-times acceptance period" is prepared in which at least a simulated image display simulating an operation means set as an operation target in which operation acceptance is allowed a plurality of times is displayed.

In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with at least the first operating means and the second operating means as the operating means, and during the acceptance acceptance period, the operation acceptance for the first operating means and the operation acceptance for the second operating means all operations are permitted. In addition, as the "multiple times permissible period", at least a "maintenance operation permissible period" is prepared in which the operation reception is performed multiple times only by continuing to operate the operation means corresponding to the model image display. It should be noted that the "first operating means" and "second operating means" of the configuration 13-D are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 13-D. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "first operation means" and "second operation means" according to other configurations, or the "first operation means" and "second operation means" according to other configurations. "operating means" may mean a different operating means.

According to such a configuration, even if the player is not good at performing multiple operations within a limited time (multiple-time allowable period), it is possible to "operate the operation means corresponding to the display of the model image." Since the operation reception will be performed multiple times just by continuing to maintain the state, it is expected that the decline in the interest in the game will be suppressed. In addition, during the acceptable acceptance period, the acceptance of operations for the first operation means and the acceptance of operations for the second operation means are allowed respectively. It is possible to add the production performance that was used.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 13-D" is adopted, at least the operation means for which operation reception is allowed multiple times among the plurality of operation means is displayed as a model image display as the "multiple-time allowable period". and a "maintenance operation permissible period" during which operation acceptance is performed multiple times only by continuing to operate the operation means corresponding to the model image display, and operation acceptance is allowed multiple times among the plurality of operation means. A "maintenance operation non-permissible period" is prepared in which an operation means that can be performed is at least displayed as a model image display, but the operation reception is not performed multiple times only by continuing to operate the operation means corresponding to the model image display. You may make it In the "maintenance operation permissible period", it is permitted to accept both the operation for the first operation means and the operation for the second operation means. Both the image display and the simulated image display imitating the second operation means are not displayed, and only one of the simulated image displays can be displayed. Acceptance of operation for the first operation means and acceptance of operation for the second operation means are both permitted, and a simulated image display that simulates the first operation means and a simulated image that simulates the second operation means are provided. There may be at least a case where both the image display and the image display are displayed respectively. In this case, basically, during the "maintenance operation permissible period", the side of the first operation means and the second operation means on which the corresponding model image display is not displayed may be in a state of being given an operation opportunity. In some cases, it is possible to recognize that both the first operating means and the second operating means are in a state of being given an opportunity to operate during the "maintenance operation non-permissible period". Become. As a result, when it is confirmed that the "maintenance operation allowable period" has occurred as the "multiple times allowable period", it is possible to prompt the operator to operate the operation means on the side where the model image display is not displayed. It becomes possible to do so, and it is expected that the performance will be improved.

In this case, the first operation means is simulated when both the operation reception for the first operation means and the operation reception for the second operation means are permitted in the "maintenance operation non-permissible period". Only one of the simulated image display and the simulated image display imitating the second operating means may be displayed, and both of them may be always displayed. Alternatively, when both the reception of the operation for the first operation means and the reception of the operation for the second operation means are permitted in the "maintenance operation non-permissible period" (for example, after reception display or after reception A case where only one of a simulated image display imitating the first operating means and a simulated image display imitating the second operating means is displayed, and a case where only one of a simulated image display imitating the first operating means is displayed (according to the type of output sound, etc.) There may be a case where both the simulated image display that imitates the second operating means is displayed.

Further, in this case, if both the operation reception for the first operation means and the operation reception for the second operation means are permitted in the "maintenance operation permitted period", the first operation means Both the operation reception of the second operation means and the operation reception of the second operation means are permitted multiple times, and the operation reception of the first operation means and the operation reception of the second operation means are permitted in the "maintenance operation non-permissible period" If both operation acceptance for the first operation means and operation acceptance for the second operation means are allowed multiple times, the other operation acceptance is allowed multiple times may be allowed only once. Furthermore, in this case, during the "maintenance operation non-permissible period", the operation means (for example, the second operation means) that is hidden without being displayed as a simulated image display during the "maintenance operation permissible period" is permitted multiple times. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game due to the automatic repeated hitting function not functioning when the operating means (for example, the second operating means) corresponding to the model image display is operated.

[Configuration 14-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an acceptance acceptance period during which an operation acceptance for operation means (for example, "operation button 410" or "sword ornament 5001") is allowed and when an operation is accepted within the acceptable acceptance period, at least one of post-acceptance display and post-acceptance sound output can be executed based on the acceptance of the operation. there is In addition, as the acceptance acceptance period, at least a "multiple-times acceptance period" is prepared in which at least a simulated image display simulating an operation means set as an operation target in which operation acceptance is allowed a plurality of times is displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as the "multiple times allowable period", at least the "maintenance operation allowable period" in which the operation reception is performed multiple times only by continuing to operate the operation means corresponding to the model image display. During the "maintenance operation permissible period", when an operation is accepted, the display mode (visibility) of the simulated image display that has appeared until then is changed.

According to such a configuration, even if the player is not good at performing multiple operations within a limited time (multiple-time allowable period), it is possible to "operate the operation means corresponding to the display of the model image." Since the operation reception will be performed multiple times just by continuing to maintain the state, it is expected that the decline in the interest in the game will be suppressed. In addition, when an operation is accepted, the display mode as the model image display that has appeared until then is changed. is properly done.

Further, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 14-D", as the "multiple times allowed period", at least the operation means for which the operation reception is allowed multiple times is displayed as a model image display, and the model image At least a "maintenance operation permissible period" during which operation reception is performed multiple times only by continuing to operate the operation means corresponding to the display, and an operation means for which operation reception is permitted multiple times are displayed as a model image display. However, it is also possible to prepare a "maintenance operation non-permissible period" during which the operation reception is not performed a plurality of times only by continuing to operate the operation means corresponding to the model image display. During the "maintenance operation permissible period", when an operation is accepted, the display mode (visibility) of the simulated image display that has appeared until then is changed. Even if this is done, the display mode (visibility) of the simulated image display that has appeared so far may not be changed. According to such a configuration, during the "maintenance operation permissible period", it is suggested that the operation reception is properly performed only by maintaining the operation state, so that the auto repeated hitting function is activated. Together with this, it is expected to improve the amusement of games. On the other hand, in the "maintenance operation non-permissible period", even if the operation is accepted, it is difficult to recognize whether the operation is properly accepted. It is expected that the user will be encouraged to repeat the operation more positively.

[Configuration 15-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a model image display, which is an image display that imitates the operation means (for example, "operation button 410" or "sword ornament 5001") is displayed. It is possible to generate a model image display acceptance period in which operation acceptance is permitted, and when an operation is accepted during the model image display acceptance period, a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound are generated based on the acceptance of the operation. Acceptance period execution means capable of executing at least one of the outputs, and acceptance acceptance indicating that operation acceptance is permitted or that operation acceptance will be allowed when the model image display acceptance period occurs acceptable sound output means capable of audibly outputting sound. Further, the simulated image display can be displayed in such a manner that a periodic change appears as an image display imitating the operating means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, during the model image display acceptance period, only the image display imitating the operation means set as the operation target that is allowed to accept one operation is displayed as the model image display. "Similar image display acceptance period", and "special type model image display acceptance period" in which at least an image display imitating the operation means set as an operation target that is allowed to accept operations multiple times is displayed as a model image display. In the "specific type of model image display reception period", the operation means that is set as an operation target that is allowed to accept one operation and is the target to be displayed as a model image display is When an operation is accepted and the operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared in the model image display corresponding to the operation means is hidden based on the acceptance of the operation. In the "model image display acceptance period", when an operation means that is set as an operation target that is allowed to accept operations multiple times and that is to be displayed as a model image display is operated and an operation is accepted, the operation is accepted. The periodic change that had appeared in the above-mentioned simulated image display corresponding to the operation means can be continued. It should be noted that the "specified type of model image display acceptance period" and "special type of model image display acceptance period" related to the configuration 15-D are the names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 15-D. Not too much. Therefore, it may mean the same model image display acceptance period as the "specific type model image display acceptance period" and "special type model image display acceptance period" according to other configurations. The "specific type model image display acceptance period" and the "special type model image display acceptance period" may mean different model image display acceptance periods.

According to such a configuration, when the operation is accepted, depending on whether or not the periodic change that has appeared in the model image display until then is hidden, the "specified type of model image display acceptance period (operation It is possible to suggest which of the "special type model image display reception period (operation reception is permitted multiple times)" is occurring.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 15-D", when the "special type model image display reception period" occurs, the reception acceptance sound is audibly output and the reception acceptance sound is not audibly output. You may make it so that there is. Then, when the reception permission sound is audibly output, the operation reception is performed by operating the operation means set as the operation target for which the operation reception is permitted multiple times during the "special type model image display reception period". Then, the periodic changes that have appeared in the model image display until then are hidden, but if the acceptable reception sound is not audibly output, the operation reception will be repeated multiple times during the "special type model image display reception period" When an operation means set as a permissible operation target is operated and an operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared in the model image display until then may be continued without being hidden. According to such a configuration, when the "special type model image display acceptance period" occurs, depending on whether or not the acceptance acceptance sound is audibly output, if the operation acceptance is made, the model image display will appear until then. It becomes possible to suggest whether or not periodic changes that were previously hidden are hidden.

[Configuration 16-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a model image display, which is an image display that imitates the operation means (for example, "operation button 410" or "sword ornament 5001") is displayed. It is possible to generate a model image display acceptance period in which operation acceptance is permitted, and when an operation is accepted during the model image display acceptance period, a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound are generated based on the acceptance of the operation. It has reception period execution means capable of executing at least one of the outputs. Further, the simulated image display can be displayed in such a manner that a periodic change appears as an image display imitating the operating means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, during the model image display acceptance period, only the image display imitating the operation means set as the operation target that is allowed to accept one operation is displayed as the model image display. and a "special type of model image display acceptance period" in which at least an image display imitating an operation means set as an operation target that is allowed to accept operations multiple times is displayed as a model image display. In the "specific type of model image display reception period", the operation means that is set as an operation target that is allowed to accept one operation and is the target to be displayed as a model image display is When an operation is accepted and the operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared in the model image display corresponding to the operation means is hidden based on the acceptance of the operation. In the "model image display acceptance period", when an operation means that is set as an operation target that is allowed to accept operations multiple times and that is to be displayed as a model image display is operated and an operation is accepted, the operation is accepted. It is possible to continue the periodic change that has appeared in the simulated image display corresponding to the operation means. Both the "specified type of model image display acceptance period" and the "special type of model image display acceptance period" can occur while the effect sound is audibly output. It should be noted that the "specified type of model image display acceptance period" and "special type of model image display acceptance period" related to the configuration 16-D are the names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 16-D. Not too much. Therefore, it may mean the same model image display acceptance period as the "specific type model image display acceptance period" and "special type model image display acceptance period" according to other configurations. The "specific type model image display acceptance period" and the "special type model image display acceptance period" may mean different model image display acceptance periods.

In such a configuration, both the "specified type of model image display acceptance period (operation acceptance is allowed once)" and the "special type model image display acceptance period (operation acceptance is allowed multiple times)" Since it can occur while being audibly output, it is possible to provide performance using the performance sound.

Also, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 16-D", the "special type model image display acceptance period" is the time until the "special type model image display acceptance period" ends. There may be a case where the effect sound that was in an audible state is not changed to an inaudible state and a case in which the effect sound that was in an audible state at the time of generation is changed to an inaudible state. Then, while the "special type of model image display acceptance period" has occurred and the production sound that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence is audibly output, it is set as an operation target that is allowed to accept operations multiple times. When the operation means is operated and the operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared in the model image display corresponding to the operation means is hidden, and the model image corresponding to the operation means is hidden. A periodic change that has appeared in the display until then may continue without being hidden. On the other hand, while the "special type of model image display acceptance period" has occurred and the production sound that was audible at the time of occurrence is made inaudible, the operation acceptance is permitted multiple times. When an operation means set as an operation target is operated and an operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared until then in the model image display corresponding to the operation means is continued without being hidden. good too. According to such a configuration, when the "special type model image display acceptance period" occurs, the effect sound that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence is inaudible within the "special type model image display acceptance period". It is possible to suggest whether or not the periodic change that has appeared in the model image until then is hidden when the operation is accepted, depending on whether or not the state is set.

[Configuration 17-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a model image display, which is an image display that imitates the operation means (for example, "operation button 410" or "sword ornament 5001") is displayed. It is possible to generate a model image display acceptance period in which operation acceptance is permitted, and when an operation is accepted during the model image display acceptance period, a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound are generated based on the acceptance of the operation. It has reception period execution means capable of executing at least one of the outputs. Further, the simulated image display can be displayed in such a manner that a periodic change appears as an image display imitating the operating means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the model image display acceptance period is divided into "a model image display acceptance period of a type that can occur while the specific BGM is being audibly output" In the "period for accepting the display of a model image of a type that cannot occur" and "the period for accepting the display of a model image of a type that can occur while specific BGM is being audibly output", one operation acceptance is permitted. "Specific type of model image display reception period" in which only the image display imitating the operation means set as the operation target is displayed as the above model image display It can be further classified into a "special type of model image display acceptance period" in which at least an image display imitating the operation means is displayed as the model image display. In the "specified type of model image display acceptance period", the operation means set as an operation target that is allowed to accept one operation and to be displayed as a model image display is operated and the operation is accepted. is performed, based on the acceptance of the operation, the periodic change that had appeared in the model image display corresponding to the operation means is hidden, and the "special type model image display acceptance period ”, when an operation means that is set as an operation target that is allowed to be operated multiple times and that is to be displayed as a model image display is operated and an operation is accepted, the operation corresponding to the operation means is performed. It is made possible to continue the periodic changes that have appeared in the display of the simulated image.

According to such a configuration, when the operation acceptance is given while the specific BGM is audibly output, the "specified type of model image display acceptance period (operation acceptance is allowed once)" and the "special type of While maintaining the tension appropriately by making it difficult to recognize which one of the model image display acceptance period (operation acceptance is allowed multiple times), when the operation is accepted, it will be displayed on the model image. Depending on whether or not the periodic changes that had appeared up until now were hidden, the "specified type of model image display acceptance period (allowing one operation acceptance)" and "special type model image display acceptance period (operation acceptance is allowed multiple times)”

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 17-D", the "special type model image display reception period" is when an operation means set as an operation target for which operation reception is permitted multiple times is operated. When an operation is accepted, a "first special type model image display acceptance period" for hiding the periodic change that has appeared in the model image display corresponding to the operation means, and a period corresponding to the operation means. It can be further classified into the "second special type model image display acceptance period" in which the periodic changes that have appeared in the model image display until then continue without being hidden, and "the first special type model image display acceptance period". "Period" occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output regardless of the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the "first special type model image display acceptance period" occurs. , The "second special type of model image display acceptance period" is the time when the "second special type of model image display acceptance period" occurs. It may occur while the specific BGM is being output in an audible state and may occur while the specific BGM is in a non-audible state. According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous variation pattern, when the "multiple permissible period" occurs while the specific BGM is being audibly Since it can be used as a criterion for determining whether or not the periodic change that has appeared until then is hidden, even when the opportunity to operate is not given, the player can concentrate on the game. will be able to encourage

[Configuration 18-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a model image display, which is an image display that imitates the operation means (for example, "operation button 410" or "sword ornament 5001") is displayed. It is possible to generate a model image display acceptance period in which operation acceptance is permitted, and when an operation is accepted during the model image display acceptance period, a post-acceptance display and a post-acceptance sound are generated based on the acceptance of the operation. It has reception period execution means capable of executing at least one of the outputs. Further, the simulated image display can be displayed in such a manner that a periodic change appears as an image display imitating the operating means.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least the first operating means and the second operating means are prepared as the operating means, and during the model image display acceptance period, the operation acceptance for the first operating means and the operation for the second operating means all operations are allowed. In the model image display acceptance period, only the image display that imitates the operation means set as the operation target that is allowed to accept one operation is displayed as the model image display "Specific type of model image display acceptance period and a "special type of model image display acceptance period" in which at least an image display imitating an operation means set as an operation target that is allowed to accept operations multiple times is displayed as the above model image display. During the "specified type of model image display acceptance period", an operation means that is set as an operation target that is allowed to accept one operation and that is to be displayed as a model image display is operated and the operation is accepted. is performed, based on the acceptance of the operation, the periodic change that had appeared in the model image display corresponding to the operation means is hidden, and the "special type model image display acceptance period ”, when an operation means that is set as an operation target that is allowed to be operated multiple times and that is to be displayed as a model image display is operated and an operation is accepted, the corresponding operation means is accepted. The periodic change that had appeared in the model image display was made to be continued.

According to such a configuration, the model image is displayed when the operation is accepted, depending on which of the "specified type of model image display acceptance period" and the "special type of model image display acceptance period" occurs. It becomes possible to suggest whether or not the periodic changes that have appeared so far will be hidden. In addition, in the above configuration, since the reception of operation for the first operation means and the reception of operation for the second operation means are allowed respectively, a plurality of operation means are used. It is possible to add performance.

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 18-D", the "special type model image display reception period" is when an operation means set as an operation target for which operation reception is permitted multiple times is operated. When the operation is accepted, a "first special type model image display acceptance period" for ending the periodic change that has appeared in the model image display corresponding to the operation means, and the model image corresponding to the operation means. It can be further classified into the "second special type model image display acceptance period" that continues without ending the periodic change that has appeared in the display until then, and the "first special type model image display acceptance period" , both operation reception for the first operation means and operation reception for the second operation means are permitted, but a simulated image display that simulates the first operation means and a second operation means are simulated. Only one of these model image displays can be displayed, but during the "second special type model image display reception period", the first operation means Both the acceptance of operations for the second operation means and the acceptance of operations for the second operation means are permitted, and the display of a simulated image of the first operating means and the simulated image display of the second operating means are permitted. There may be at least some cases where both are displayed respectively. That is, in this case, basically, during the "first special type model image display acceptance period", the side of the first operation means and the second operation means that does not display the "corresponding model image display" is given an operation opportunity. The fact that it is in this state is kept secret, and in the ``second special type model image display acceptance period'', the opportunity to operate both the first operation means and the second operation means is given. It becomes possible that something is made recognizable. As a result, when it is confirmed that the "first special type model image display acceptance period" has occurred, it is possible to prompt the operator to operate even the operation means on the side where the model image display is not displayed. As a result, it is expected that the performance will be improved.

In this case, when both the operation reception for the first operation means and the operation reception for the second operation means are permitted in the "second special type model image display reception period", the first Only one of the simulated image display imitating the operating means and the simulated image display imitating the second operating means may be displayed, and both of them may be always displayed. Alternatively, when both the operation reception for the first operation means and the operation reception for the second operation means are permitted in the "second special type model image display reception period" (for example, reception Depending on the type of post-display or post-acceptance output sound, only one of the simulated image display imitating the first operation means and the simulated image display imitating the second operation means is displayed, and the first operation means is simulated. Both the simulated image display and the simulated image display imitating the second operating means may be displayed.

[Configuration 19-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an acceptance acceptance period during which an operation acceptance for operation means (for example, "operation button 410" or "sword ornament 5001") is allowed reception period execution means capable of executing at least one of post-acceptance display and post-acceptance sound output based on the acceptance of an operation when an operation is accepted during the acceptance permissible period; a permissible sound output means capable of audibly outputting a reception permissible sound suggesting that the operation reception is permitted or that the operation reception will be permitted when the permissible period occurs. In addition, during the acceptable acceptance period, it is possible to display the "acceptance period related periodicity display", which is an image display in which periodic changes can appear. At least a “permissible period” should be prepared.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1, as the "multiple-play allowable period", a "specific multiple-play allowable period" in which at least the first periodicity display and the second periodicity display are displayed as the above-mentioned "acceptance period-related periodicity display" , and the third periodicity display and the fourth periodicity display are at least prepared as the above-mentioned "acceptance period related periodicity display". Then, in the "specific multiple-time allowable period", each time an operation that is allowed multiple times is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared up to that point in the first periodicity display is hidden. In addition, "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple-time allowable period", and "special multiple allowable period" are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 19-D. Therefore, "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple-time allowable period", and " It may mean the same means as "special multiple-time allowable period", or "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", and "third periodicity display" according to other configurations. , "fourth periodicity indication", "specific multiple allowable period" and "special multiple allowable period" may mean different means.

According to such a configuration, the operation is accepted by confirming the number of times the periodic change appearing in the "first periodicity display" is hidden in the "specific multiple-time allowable period". You can check the number of times.

Further, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 19-D", in the "specific multiple-time allowable period", an acceptance-allowed sound is audibly output at the time of occurrence, and an operation acceptance that is allowed multiple times is performed. Each time it is performed, the periodic change that has appeared so far is hidden in the "first periodicity display", but the periodic change that has appeared so far continues in the "second periodicity display". You may do so. In addition, during the "special multiple-time allowable period", the acceptable acceptance sound is not audibly output at the time of occurrence, and the "third periodicity display" and "fourth periodicity display" and "fourth period In any of the "gender display", the periodic changes that have appeared up to that point may be continued. That is, in this case, based on the aspect of the "acceptance period-related periodicity display" when the operation is accepted, "whether or not the operation has been accepted properly can be recognized through the presence or absence of audible output of the acceptance acceptance sound. ” can be suggested. In addition, even if the reception permission sound is audibly output (when it is suggested that it is possible to recognize whether or not the operation reception has been properly performed), instead of the "first periodicity display" A person who mistakenly gazes at the "periodicity display" will find it difficult to recognize whether or not the operation has been properly accepted, so it is expected that the sense of tension will be favorably maintained.

[Configuration 20-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an acceptance acceptance period during which an operation acceptance for operation means (for example, "operation button 410" or "sword ornament 5001") is allowed and a reception period executing means capable of executing at least one of post-reception display and post-reception sound output based on the reception of the operation when the operation is received during the acceptance permissible period. In addition, during the acceptable acceptance period, it is possible to display the "acceptance period related periodicity display", which is an image display in which periodic changes can appear. At least a “permissible period” should be prepared.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as the "multiple-time allowable period", a "specific multiple-time allowable period" in which at least the first periodicity display and the second periodicity display are displayed as the above-mentioned "acceptance period-related periodicity display" , and the third periodicity display and the fourth periodicity display are prepared at least as the above-mentioned "acceptance period related periodicity display". Both the "specific multiple-time allowable period" and the "special multiple-time allowable period" can occur while the effect sound is audibly output. In addition, "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple-time allowable period", and "special multiple allowable period" are merely designations used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 20-D. Therefore, "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple-time allowable period", and " It may mean the same means as "special multiple-time allowable period", or "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", and "third periodicity display" according to other configurations. , "fourth periodicity indication", "specific multiple allowable period" and "special multiple allowable period" may mean different means.

According to such a configuration, both the "specific multiple-time allowable period" and the "special multiple-time allowable period" can occur while the effect sound is audibly output. It is possible to provide effects using sounds and "reception period related periodicity display".

Further, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 20-D", in the "specific multiple-time allowable period", each time an operation that is allowed multiple times is accepted, in the "first periodicity display" Although the periodic changes that have appeared until then are hidden, the periodic changes that have appeared so far may be continued in the "second periodicity display". In addition, in the "special multiple-time allowable period", each time an operation that is allowed multiple times is accepted, it appears in both the "third periodicity display" and the "fourth periodicity display" A periodic change may be continued. In addition, the "specific multiple-time allowable period" does not make the effect sound that was audible at the time of occurrence until the "specific multiple-time allowable period" expires, and the "special In the multiple-time allowable period of ", the effect sound that was audible at the time of occurrence may be made inaudible until the "specific multiple-time allowable period" ends. In other words, in this case, until the end of the acceptance period (effective period), the "acceptance" when the operation is accepted depends on whether or not the effect sound that was audible at the time of its occurrence is made inaudible. Based on the aspect of "period-related periodicity display", it becomes possible to suggest "whether it is possible to recognize whether or not the operation reception has been properly performed". In addition, even if the effect sound that was audible at the time of occurrence is not changed to an inaudible state, the user may mistakenly look at the "second periodic display" instead of the "first periodic display". Since it is difficult for the person who has done so to recognize whether or not the operation has been accepted properly, it is expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained.

[Configuration 21-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an acceptance acceptance period during which an operation acceptance for operation means (for example, "operation button 410" or "sword ornament 5001") is allowed and a reception period executing means capable of executing at least one of post-reception display and post-reception sound output based on the reception of the operation when the operation is received during the acceptance permissible period. In addition, during the acceptable acceptance period, it is possible to display the "acceptance period related periodicity display", which is an image display in which periodic changes can appear. At least a “permissible period” should be prepared.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the ``multiple times permissible period'' occurs when the specified type of effect sound is audibly output, and occurs after the specific type of effect sound is made inaudible. There are cases. Then, as the "multiple-time allowable period", a "specific multiple-time allowable period" in which at least the first periodicity display and the second periodicity display are displayed as the above-mentioned "acceptance period-related periodicity display", and a third periodicity At least a "special multiple-time allowable period" in which the display and the fourth periodicity display are displayed at least as the above-mentioned "acceptance period-related periodicity display" is prepared. In addition, "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific type of effect sound", " "Specific multiple-time allowable period" and "special multiple-time allowable period" are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 21-D. Therefore, "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific type of effect sound", "specific It may mean the same means as "multiple-time allowable period" and "special multiple-time allowable period", respectively, and "first periodicity display" and "second periodicity display" according to other configurations , “third periodicity display”, “fourth periodicity display”, “specific type of effect sound”, “specific multiple-time allowable period”, and “special multiple-time allowable period” means different means can be anything.

According to such a configuration, when the "multiple permissible period" occurs, by checking the output status of the specific type of effect sound, the mode of the "acceptance period related periodicity display", etc., the multiple times It becomes possible to suggest the type as the allowable period.

Further, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 21-D", in the "specific multiple-time allowable period", each time an operation that is allowed multiple times is accepted, in the "first periodicity display" Although the periodic changes that have appeared until then are hidden, the periodic changes that have appeared so far may be continued in the "second periodicity display". The "specific multiple-time allowable period" occurs while a specific type of effect sound is audibly output, but the "special multiple-time allowable period" occurs when a specific type of effect sound is audibly output. There may be a case where the effect sound is generated in the middle and a case where the effect sound of the specific type is not audibly output. That is, in this case, when the "multiple-time allowable period" occurs while the specific type of effect sound is not audibly output, this is a "special multiple-time allowable period". It is suggested that the aspect of "acceptance period related periodicity display" does not change. On the other hand, when the "multiple times permissible period" occurs while a specific type of effect sound is audibly output, is it a "specific multiple times permissible period" or a "special multiple times permissible period"? Since it becomes difficult to recognize, it is possible to encourage people to pay attention to whether the mode of the "acceptance period related periodicity display" changes when the operation is accepted. In addition, a person who mistakenly gazes at the "second periodicity display" instead of the "first periodicity display" will experience a "special multiple-time display" instead of a "specific multiple-use display." Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained.

[Configuration 22-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an acceptance acceptance period during which an operation acceptance for operation means (for example, "operation button 410" or "sword ornament 5001") is allowed and a reception period executing means capable of executing at least one of post-reception display and post-reception sound output based on the reception of the operation when the operation is received during the acceptance permissible period. In addition, during the acceptable acceptance period, it is possible to display the "acceptance period related periodicity display", which is an image display in which periodic changes can appear. At least a “permissible period” should be prepared.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1, as the "multiple-play allowable period", a "specific multiple-play allowable period" in which at least the first periodicity display and the second periodicity display are displayed as the above-mentioned "acceptance period-related periodicity display" , and the third periodicity display and the fourth periodicity display are prepared at least as the above-mentioned "acceptance period related periodicity display". Then, when the "specific multiple-time permissible period" occurs, the timing at which the first periodic display is displayed and the timing at which the second periodic display is displayed are made different from each other. In addition, "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple-time allowable period", and "special multiple allowable period" are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 22-D. Therefore, "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple-time allowable period", and " It may mean the same means as "special multiple-time allowable period", or "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", and "third periodicity display" according to other configurations. , "fourth periodicity indication", "specific multiple allowable period" and "special multiple allowable period" may mean different means.

According to such a configuration, when the "multiple-time allowable period" occurs, it is possible to indicate the type of the "multiple-time allowable period" by confirming the appearance of the acceptance period-related periodicity display. become. In addition, it is expected to improve performance when the "specific multiple times allowable period" occurs.

Further, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 22-D", when the "specific multiple-time allowable period" occurs, the timing at which the first periodicity display is displayed and the second periodicity display are displayed. However, when the "special multiple-time allowable period" occurs, the timing at which the third periodic display is displayed and the timing at which the fourth periodic display is displayed are the same. may be made to be That is, in this case, as the acceptance period in which two types of periodicity displays appear, either a "specific multiple-time allowable period" or a "special multiple-time allowable period" occurs depending on whether or not there is a discrepancy in the display timing. to be able to suggest

[Configuration 23-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an acceptance acceptance period during which an operation acceptance for operation means (for example, "operation button 410" or "sword ornament 5001") is allowed and a reception period executing means capable of executing at least one of post-reception display and post-reception sound output based on the reception of the operation when the operation is received during the acceptance permissible period. In addition, during the acceptable acceptance period, it is possible to display the "acceptance period related periodicity display", which is an image display in which periodic changes can appear. At least a “permissible period” should be prepared.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1, as the "multiple-play allowable period", a "specific multiple-play allowable period" in which at least the first periodicity display and the second periodicity display are displayed as the above-mentioned "acceptance period-related periodicity display" , and the third periodicity display and the fourth periodicity display are prepared at least as the above-mentioned "acceptance period related periodicity display". Then, when the "specific multiple-time allowable period" occurs, the timing at which the first periodic display is displayed and the periodic change is started, and the timing at which the second periodic display is displayed and the periodic change is started The timing to be performed is set to be different from each other. In addition, "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple-time allowable period", and "special multiple allowable period" are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 23-D. Therefore, "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple-time allowable period", and " It may mean the same means as "special multiple-time allowable period", or "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", and "third periodicity display" according to other configurations. , "fourth periodicity indication", "specific multiple allowable period" and "special multiple allowable period" may mean different means.

According to such a configuration, when the "multiple-time allowable period" occurs, the type of the "multiple-time allowable period" can be suggested by checking the aspect of the "acceptance period-related periodicity display". become able to. In addition, it is expected to improve performance when the "specific multiple times allowable period" occurs.

Further, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 23-D", when the "specific multiple-time allowable period" occurs, the first periodicity display is displayed and the periodic change is started. , the timing at which the second periodicity display is displayed and its periodic change is started, but when the "special multiple-time allowable period" occurs, the third periodicity display is displayed and its period The timing at which the periodic change is started may be the same as the timing at which the fourth periodic display is displayed and the periodic change is started. That is, in this case, as the acceptance period in which two types of periodicity indications appear, depending on whether or not there is a shift in the timing at which the periodic changes are started, the "specific multiple-time allowable period" and the "special multiple-time allowable period" It will be possible to suggest which of the "periods" will occur.

[Configuration 24-D]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, an acceptance acceptance period during which an operation acceptance for operation means (for example, "operation button 410" or "sword ornament 5001") is allowed and a reception period executing means capable of executing at least one of post-reception display and post-reception sound output based on the reception of the operation when the operation is received during the acceptance permissible period. In addition, during the acceptable acceptance period, it is possible to display the "acceptance period related periodicity display", which is an image display in which periodic changes can appear. At least a “permissible period” should be prepared.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as the "multiple-time allowable period", a "specific multiple-time allowable period" in which at least the first periodicity display and the second periodicity display are displayed as the above-mentioned "acceptance period-related periodicity display" , and the third periodicity display and the fourth periodicity display are prepared at least as the above-mentioned "acceptance period related periodicity display". Then, when the first periodicity display is displayed when the "specific multiple-time permissible period" occurs, a specific display different from the first periodicity display is displayed, and in the background of the specific display, The display is started in such a manner that the first periodicity display appears. In addition, "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple-time allowable period", and "special multiple allowable period" are merely designations used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 24-D. Therefore, "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", "third periodicity display", "fourth periodicity display", "specific multiple-time allowable period", and " It may mean the same means as "special multiple-time allowable period", or "first periodicity display", "second periodicity display", and "third periodicity display" according to other configurations. , "fourth periodicity indication", "specific multiple allowable period" and "special multiple allowable period" may mean different means.

According to such a configuration, when the "multiple-time allowable period" occurs, the type of the "multiple-time allowable period" can be suggested by checking the aspect of the "acceptance period-related periodicity display". become able to. Also, at this time, it is expected that the sense of tension will be favorably maintained by affecting the visibility of the first periodicity display.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 24-D" is adopted, when the first periodicity display is displayed when the "specific multiple-time allowable period" occurs, a specific display different from this is displayed. Among them, the display is started in such a manner that the first periodic display appears behind the specific display, but the second periodic display is not displayed behind the specific display. When the third periodicity display and the fourth periodicity display are displayed at the occurrence of the "permissible period", both the third periodicity display and the fourth periodicity display are behind another display at the time when the display is started. You may choose not to display it in the According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest which of the "specific multiple-time allowable period" and the "special multiple-time allowable period" occurs at a relatively early point in time when the periodicity display is started. become able to. Moreover, even when the "specific multiple-time allowable period" occurs, a person who mistakenly gazes at the "second periodicity display" instead of the "first periodicity display" may Since there is a possibility of erroneously recognizing as if a "special multiple permissible period" has occurred due to the fact that the precursor effect display corresponding to the "periodic display" is not displayed, it is possible to preferably maintain the sense of tension. come to be expected.

[Configuration 25-D]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the "special image display" can be displayed in any one of a plurality of display modes with different degrees of expectation. Even if it is displayed, a periodic change appears as the "special image display".

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "special image display" is displayed in the first display mode among the plurality of display modes, it can be changed to a display mode different from the first display mode. , when it is displayed in the second display mode among the plurality of display modes, it can be changed to a display mode different from the second display mode. Then, when the "special image display" changes from the first display mode to a display mode different from the first display mode, the time required for one cycle of the "special image display" changes. there is The "special image display", "first display mode", and "second display mode" related to the configuration 25-D are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 25-D. . Therefore, "special image display", "first display mode", and "second display mode" according to other configurations may mean the same means, respectively, or "special image display" according to other configurations ", "first display mode", and "second display mode" may mean different means.

According to such a configuration, when the "special image display" changes from the first display mode to a different display mode, the time required for one periodic change of the "special image display" also changes. As a result, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the display mode of the "special image display" has changed.

Also, as will be described later, when the "configuration 25-D" is adopted, when the "special image display" changes from the first display mode to a display mode different from the first display mode, the "special image display" is set to 1 A change occurs in the time required for the periodic change for one time, but when the "special image display" changes from the second display mode to a display mode different from the second display mode, the time required for one periodic change changes. may not occur. According to such a configuration, the "special image display" can recognize whether or not the display mode has changed depending on whether the display mode changes from the first display mode or the display mode changes from the second display mode. Since the ease of use is different, it is expected that the performance will be improved.

[Configuration 26-D]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the "special image display" can be displayed in any one of a plurality of display modes with different degrees of expectation. Even if it is displayed, a periodic change appears as the "special image display".

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1, the "special image display" may be displayed for a predetermined period of time required for one cyclical change, or when the time required for one cyclical change is displayed for the predetermined period of time. may be displayed at a different specific time, and when the "special image display" is displayed so that the time required for one periodic change is the specific time, the time required for one periodic change The display mode of the "special image display" can be changed while the time is maintained at the specific time. Note that the “special image display”, “predetermined time”, and “specific time” relating to the configuration 26-D are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 26-D. Therefore, "special image display", "predetermined time", and "specific time" according to other configurations may mean the same means, or "special image display" and "predetermined time" according to other configurations. "time" and "specific time" may mean different means.

According to such a configuration, when the "special image display" is displayed such that the time required for one periodic change is the specific time, whether or not the display mode of the "special image display" has changed. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not, and it is expected that the tension will be preferably maintained.

Further, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 26-D", when the "special image display" is displayed so that the time required for one periodic change is the above specific time, the "special image display " can be changed, and when the display mode changes, the time required for one periodic change as the "special image display" may change. When the "special image display" is displayed so that the required time is equal to the predetermined time, the display mode of the special image display may not change. According to such a configuration, the "special image display" suggests whether the display mode changes depending on whether the time required for one periodic change is displayed at the specific time or the predetermined time. be able to Further, when the display mode is displayed for the specific time, the time required for the periodic change can also change when the display mode changes, so that the change can be easily recognized.

[Configuration 27-D]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the "special image display" can be displayed in any one of a plurality of display modes with different degrees of expectation. Even if it is displayed, a periodic change appears as the "special image display".

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1, the "special image display" may be displayed for a predetermined period of time required for one cyclical change, or when the time required for one cyclical change is displayed for the predetermined period of time. may be displayed at different specific times, and if the display mode of the special image display changes, the periodic change that has appeared until then will be hidden, and then the periodic change of the special image display will be made it appear. Note that "special image display", "predetermined time", and "specific time" relating to the configuration 27-D are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 27-D. Therefore, "special image display", "predetermined time", and "specific time" according to other configurations may mean the same means, or "special image display" and "predetermined time" according to other configurations. "time" and "specific time" may mean different means.

According to such a configuration, when the display mode of the special image display changes, the periodic change that has appeared so far is hidden, and then the periodic change of the special image display appears. , when the display mode of the special image display changes, it is expected that interest will be attracted as to whether or not there has also been a change in the time required for the periodic change.

[Other configurations]
In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, it is permitted to perform "acceptance validity determination that the player's action is a valid action based on the detection information stored by the detection information storage means". ) occurs, an integrated model image display ( (see FIG. 144), the decrease in interest in the game is suppressed until the display (display change) is executed after reception. Regarding such an integrated model image display, the operation reception effect (reception period) that occurs when the pattern effect progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and the fluctuation pattern that does not develop into SP reach. It is desirable to display it in both the operation reception effect (reception period) and the low-expectation non-suppressed reception effect and the high-expectation suppressed reception effect. .

It should be noted that the "integrated simulated image display" according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. For example, a display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided in the peripheral decoration image. In addition, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 144) with different degrees of expectation are prepared as the "integrated simulated image display", and it is also the same that the display is made in one of these modes.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example as well, when the acceptable acceptance period (acceptance period) occurs, it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is allowed or that the acceptance of the operation is allowed. In some cases, an acceptance acceptance sound is audibly output, thereby making it difficult to forget to operate. Here, "acceptable sound" means whether or not an acceptable reception period (acceptance period) always occurs while the sound is being output (while sound data is assigned) when the sound output is started. , is a sound that is in a state in which the acceptable acceptance period (acceptance period) has already occurred. In other words, it can be said that the "acceptable sound" is a sound that is not output under a situation in which an effect that has nothing to do with the acceptable reception period (acceptance period) is being performed.

The details of the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described "Configuration 1-D" to "Configuration 26-D" will be described below with reference to the drawings. However, each configuration described below is merely described as the best embodiment, and does not necessarily have to be provided. That is, each configuration described in the specification described below corresponds to any one of the above "configuration 1-D" to "configuration 26-D" when it is desired to obtain further effects It is possible to arbitrarily select and adopt only the configuration that

As described above, in this pachinko machine 1, types of post-acceptance display and post-acceptance output sound that appear at the time of acceptance (for example, post-acceptance effects such as conversation notice, cut-in notice, movable body notice, etc.) We have prepared multiple reception periods (reception effects) with different types of effects). Each reception period has its own conditions for occurrence (for example, a predetermined result is obtained in judgments such as jackpot judgments and production judgments), and if any one of these conditions is met, the condition is established. It is possible to generate a type of reception period (reception effect) according to the occurrence condition.

First, referring to FIGS. 253 to 269, among such a plurality of reception periods (reception effects), the 1E reception period (1E post-reception effect), the 2E reception period (2E post-reception effect ), the 3E reception period (effect after reception of 3E), and the reception period of 4E (effect after reception of 4E). It should be noted that, with reference to FIG. 252, for each reception period described above, the 1E reception period (effect after reception of 1E), the reception period 2E (effect after reception of 2E), the reception period 3E (after reception of 3E production) and the 4E reception period (production after reception of the 4E) may be prepared as a separate reception period, or the 1E reception period (production after the reception of the 1E) and the reception period of the 2E (Effect after reception of 2E), reception period of 3E (effect after reception of 3E), and reception period of 4E (effect after reception of 4E). In addition, in order to realize each invention described below, it is sufficient to have only the necessary configuration among the configurations described below. You can choose not to prepare.

FIG. 253 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when "Condition 1E" is satisfied as the occurrence condition and the 1E reception period (1E reception effect) is generated. 255 to 257 are diagrams showing examples of effects in variation patterns in which the 1E reception period (1E reception effect) occurs.

Now, the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, normal game state that is non-probable variable / non-time saving), and "1E fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of fluctuation pattern determination Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, effect determination (previous effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the 1E variation pattern is performed. After that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (effect depiction according to the 1E variable pattern, BGM playback according to the 1E variable pattern (normal BGM playback during non-reach, etc.) sound output, etc.) is started ( "Situation shown in FIG. 255 (a)"), within the execution period of the variable effect, the effect (notice effect) according to the result of the notice effect determination is the effect of the selected "1E variation pattern" itself will be additionally executed for

As shown in FIG. 253(a), within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "1E variation pattern", the timing ta2 after the 1E time has passed since the variation performance of the decorative symbol SZ was started has arrived. Based on (based on the satisfaction of "Condition 1E"), the 1E acceptance period (effective period) in which "acceptance regarding the 1E post-acceptance display (1E post-acceptance sound output)" is permitted It can occur (situation shown in FIG. 255(c)).

Here, the 1E reception period according to this embodiment is the period until the end of the 1E reception period (until operation reception regarding display after reception of 1E (sound output after reception of 1E) is no longer permitted). ), it functions as a "multiple-time allowable period" in which the operation reception is allowed multiple times.

That is, as will be described later, during the 1E acceptance period, every time an operation is accepted, a display change (for example, a depiction of the 1st meter rising) occurs in the background image etc. as "display after acceptance of 1E". When a special condition is satisfied as a result of receiving operations multiple times in this way, the 1E acceptance period ends and the display change differs from the display change of the background image up to that point (display that does not suggest the degree of expectation). (display suggesting the degree of expectation), that is, a special mode as "1E reception display" (for example, the first meter is full and the first character is revived, etc.) can be displayed. ing. On the other hand, if the special condition is not satisfied within the 1E reception period, based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (for example, based on the remaining time as the 1E reception period becoming "0") (After the 1E acceptance period has ended), a predetermined mode (for example, the 1st meter does not fill up and the 1st character falls down, etc.) is displayed as the ``display after the 1E acceptance.'' It has become. When the predetermined mode is displayed, it is suggested that the degree of expectation (proportion) of winning a big hit is lower than when the special mode is displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when such a 1E acceptance period is generated, an acceptance period-related periodicity display, which is an image display in which periodic changes can appear, is displayed in relation to this. ``First periodicity display SH1'' and ``Second periodicity display SH2'' are displayed as the acceptance period-related periodicity display.

Here, the "first periodicity display SH1" according to this embodiment means "the dog character is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 254(A) and then displayed in the mode shown in FIG. When a moving image such as "to be displayed" is defined as one periodic change, it means a display in which the periodic change can appear repeatedly in a form requiring a predetermined period C time. Further, the "second periodicity display SH2" according to this embodiment means "after the cat character is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 254(a), When a moving image such as "displayed sequentially in each mode" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change is a predetermined period D time (time different from period C time (here, period C time is different than period C time It means a display that can appear repeatedly in a way that takes a long time)).

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to provide the player with information that gives a hint as to which type of acceptance period has occurred, such an acceptance period-related periodicity display (first A periodicity display SH1 and a second periodicity display SH2) are displayed. However, the acceptance period-related periodicity display (first periodicity display SH1, second periodicity display SH2) does not necessarily have to be displayed. For example, if it is desired to make it more difficult to recognize which type of acceptance period has occurred, it is desirable not to display these.

For example, when the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed at the occurrence of the 1E reception period, the first periodicity display SH1 appears behind the specific display while the specific display is being displayed. Although the display is started, the second periodicity display SH2 is never displayed behind the specific display. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, through the visibility of the reception period-related periodicity display at the time when such reception period-related periodicity display starts to be displayed, the generated reception period It suggests the type of

In this production example, as shown in FIGS. 255(b) to (d), as the specific display, it is suggested that the player is given an opportunity to operate (the occurrence of the 1E acceptance period). A premonition effect display is used. Note that the specific display does not necessarily have to be the precursor effect display.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, when the timing ta1 before the occurrence of the 1E acceptance period arrives, as shown in FIGS. 253(c) and 255(b), Execution of "1E foreshadow effect display ZED" is started as the foreshadow effect display. As shown in FIGS. 253(c) and 255(c) and (d), this "1E precursor effect display ZED" includes an integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display), reception The period-related periodicity display (first periodicity display SH1, second periodicity display SH2) is displayed so as to straddle the timing at which it is displayed.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 255(c), the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display) and the first periodicity display SH1 are "1E precursor effect display ZED (specific display). is being displayed, the display is started in such a manner that it appears behind the "1E foreshadow effect display ZED (specific display)". On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 255(d), the second periodicity display SH2 is not displayed behind the "1E precursor effect display ZED (specific display)". Then, the display is started in such a manner that the "1E foreshadow effect display ZED (specific display)" is reversed to the rear side.

In this production example, at the timing ta2 when the 1E reception period occurs, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display) and the display of the first periodicity display SH1 are started. is not limited to The integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display) and the first periodicity display SH1 may be displayed before or after the timing ta2 at which the 1E reception period occurs. The simulated image display IG (simulated image display, remaining time display) and the first periodicity display SH1 may be displayed at different timings.

In this pachinko machine 1, the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH2 are displayed at different timings. In this rendering example, the first periodicity display SH1 is started to be displayed prior to the second periodicity display SH2, and the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed while the first periodicity display SH1 is being displayed. Display is started. In addition, since the first periodic display SH1 according to this example of effect is designed so that the periodic change is started immediately after the display is started, the timing at which the periodic change is started can also be It is made to come before the timing at which the periodic change of the two-periodicity display SH2 is started.

However, for the first periodicity display SH1, for example, the display is started before the timing ta2 at which the 1E reception period occurs, and the periodic change is not started at the time when the display is started. good too. That is, in this case, the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed while maintaining the mode shown in FIG. 254(A). Then, the periodic change in the first periodicity display SH1 may be started based on the arrival of the timing ta2 at which the 1E reception period occurs. In this regard, the second periodicity display SH1, including its periodic change, can be displayed, for example, based on the arrival of the timing ta2. Although the display start timing is different between the two-periodic display SH1 and the periodic change start timing, the timing is the same.

Conversely, the display of the second periodicity display SH2 may be started before the timing at which the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed or the timing at which the 1E reception period occurs. In this case, regarding the second periodicity display SH2, the timing at which the periodic change is started is also the timing ta2 at which the first periodicity display SH1 starts the periodic change or the 1E reception period occurs. preferably before That is, as will be described later, even if an operation is accepted within the 1E accepting period, the second periodicity display SH2 changes periodically (Fig. 254 (a ) to (d)) are not hidden (cancelled), and can be used as a comparison criterion for determining whether or not the periodic change of the first periodicity display SH1 is hidden (cancelled). It has become a thing. Therefore, by starting such "periodic change in the second periodicity display SH2" prior to the first periodicity display SH1, the periodic change in the first periodicity display SH1 can be reduced. This makes it easier to determine whether or not the display has been hidden (cancelled).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display) is also displayed as an image display in which periodic changes can appear. In the 1E reception period, the "operation button 410" is set as an operation means that allows multiple operation receptions, and the "operation receiving part" of the operation button 410 is modeled from the integrated model image display IG. A part (button model image BMG) is defined as a moving image such that "after being displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 254(α), it is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 254(β)" as one periodic change. At this time, the periodic change is repeated in a form requiring a predetermined period A time. As a result, during the 1E reception period, the integrated model image display IG depicts how the "operation receiving section" moves up and down within its movable range. In this example, the period A time and the period C time are exemplified as the same time, but they may be different times.

In this production example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display) is started to be displayed at timing ta2 when the 1E reception period occurs. The display may be started, or the display may be started after the timing ta2. However, if the integrated simulated image display IG (simulated image display, remaining time display) is started to be displayed before the timing ta2 at which the 1E reception period occurs, the 1E reception period will occur for the periodic change. It is desirable to wait for the timing ta2 to start. That is, in this case, the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is displayed while maintaining the form shown in FIG. 254(α) until timing ta2 arrives.

Then, as shown in FIG. 255(c), the integrated simulated image display IG (simulated image display, remaining time display) according to this effect example is also the same as the first periodicity display SH1, "1E precursor effect display While "ZED (specific display)" is being displayed, the display is started in a form appearing behind the "1E precursor effect display ZED (specific display)", and its periodic change is started.

The display range of the 1E precursor effect display ZED is reduced with the passage of time. The periodicity indication SH1 and the second periodicity indication SH2, which is started to be displayed later, develop their respective periodic changes in the manners described above.

Then, as a result of the display range of the 1E precursor effect display ZED being thus reduced, when the 1E precursor effect display ZED is hidden, the second periodicity is displayed as shown in FIG. 255(e). The visibility of not only the display SH2 but also the integrated simulated image display IG and the first periodicity display SH1 is improved. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 255(f) to 255(h1), the integrated model image display IG, the first periodicity display SH1, and the second periodicity display SH1 are displayed unless an operation is accepted by the player. Display SH2 will continue to progress through each of the above-described periodic changes (period A time, period C time, period D time).

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 253, it is assumed that the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed at timing ta2A (timing shown in FIG. 255(f)) within the 1E reception period. I assume. That is, as described above, the 1E reception period according to this embodiment functions as a "multiple-time acceptance period" in which operation acceptance is allowed multiple times, and each time an operation is accepted, the "first 1E "Display after acceptance" changes the background image (for example, a depiction of the first meter rising). A display change (display that suggests expectation) that is different from the display change (display that does not suggest expectation) of the background image until the end of the 1E reception period, that is, a special display as "display after reception of 1E" A mode (for example, a description that the first meter is full and the first character is revived, etc.) can be displayed.

When the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed at timing ta2A (timing shown in FIG. 255(f)) within the 1E reception period, the effect display device 1600 according to this example: First, the modes shown in FIGS. 256(g2) and (h2) appear in sequence.

More specifically, as also shown in FIG. 253, EF display (drawing effect display) in response to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) in the 1E reception period. EKH is displayed. In this production example, the first mode EKH1 and the second mode EKH2 are sequentially displayed as the EF display (effect display) EKH. may be displayed.

Also, for convenience of explanation, illustration is omitted in FIG. 256, but as shown in FIG. "Display after reception of 1E" is displayed. The "display after reception of the 1Eth reception" is as described above, and is displayed, for example, as a depiction (background image) in which the first meter rises. This "1E post-acceptance display" is not displayed in front of the integrated model image display IG, the first periodicity display SH1, and the second periodicity display SH2. Even if they are displayed, they are displayed behind them. Also, although illustration is omitted, when the 1E post-reception display is displayed, the corresponding 1E post-reception sound output is also audibly output.

Also, in the 1E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Hide the periodic changes in the first periodicity representation SH1. In this example, the periodic variation in the first periodicity indication SH1 is hidden by stopping the periodic variation from progressing, although the display of the first periodicity indication SH1 itself continues. I'm doing it. Therefore, in this example, the first periodicity display SH1 shown in FIGS. 256(g2) and (h2) has the same aspect as the first periodicity display SH1 shown in FIG. 255(f), and no progress of the periodic change has occurred from the first periodicity display SH1 shown in FIG. 255(f).

In this respect, in the 1E reception period according to this embodiment, as for the second periodicity display SH2, as shown in FIG. ) is performed, the periodic change (period D time) is not hidden and is continued. Therefore, in this example, the second periodicity display SH2 shown in FIGS. 256(g2) and (h2) is shown in FIG. , (h1), its periodicity is developed. According to such a configuration, when there is the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) in the 1E reception period, the first periodicity display SH1 or the second periodicity display SH2 Only one periodic change SH1 is hidden when an operation is accepted.

Also, in the 1E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. In the integrated model image display IG, the periodic change in the portion (button model image BMG) that imitates the “operation receiving portion” of the operation button 410 is hidden. In this example, although the display of the integrated model image display IG itself continues, the period of the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is reduced by stopping the periodic change and not progressing. changes are hidden. Therefore, in this example, the portion of the integrated model image display IG shown in FIGS. f) of the integrated model image display IG shown in FIG. 255(f). No evolution of the cyclical change has occurred from the manner in which it is assumed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 256(g2) and (h2), EF display EKH (first mode EKH1, second mode EKH2), the first periodicity display SH1 and the integrated model image display IG (button BMG) are displayed in such a way that they overlap from the front, making them difficult to see. The second periodic display SH2, which is not hidden, is not displayed in an overlapping manner from the front. In this example, the first mode EKH1 of the EF display EKH is displayed at a position not overlapping the second periodicity display SH2, and the second mode EKH2 of the EF display EKH is displayed in the second periodicity display SH2. Although it is displayed at a position overlapping the display SH2, it is displayed behind the second periodicity display SH2.

Then, such EF display EKH (first mode EKH1, second mode EKH2) changes as shown in FIG. 253(d) and FIG. will be hidden to Although illustration is omitted, while the EF display EKH (first mode EKH1, second mode EKH2) is being displayed, the acceptance period (first E acceptance period) is continued, and the operation is accepted again. EF display EKH (first mode EKH1, second mode EKH2) in the middle of execution is preferably displayed again from the first mode. That is, in this case, when the operation is accepted while the first mode EKH1 of the EF display EKH is being displayed (see FIG. 256(g2)), the EF display EKH progresses to the second mode EKH2. Without doing so, the display is started again from the first mode EKH1.

Further, with respect to the periodic change in the first periodicity display SH1, a predetermined time has elapsed since the periodic change was hidden in response to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period). Then, it is executed again as shown in FIG. 253(e) and FIG. 256(i2). As shown in FIG. 256(i2), the first periodicity display SH1 according to this example re-performs the periodic change by redoing the periodic change from the mode shown in FIG. 254(A). It will happen. Although illustration is omitted, while the periodic change in the first periodicity display SH1 is hidden in response to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period), the reception period (first E acceptance period) is performed again, the timing at which the operation is accepted again is used as a reference, and a periodic change in the first periodicity display SH1 is performed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing. It is desirable to make it run again. That is, in this case, the time required for the periodic change in the first periodicity display SH1 to be hidden and to be executed again is substantially extended.

Also, with respect to the periodic change in the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), after the periodic change is hidden in response to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period), After the predetermined time has passed, the process is executed again as shown in FIG. 253(e) and FIG. 256(i2). As shown in FIG. 256(i2), the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) according to this example repeats the periodic change from the first aspect (the aspect shown in FIG. 254(α)). In the form of re-executing the cyclical change. Although illustration is omitted, while the periodic change in the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is hidden in response to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) When an operation that does not end the relevant acceptance period (1E acceptance period) is accepted again, the timing at which the operation is accepted again is used as a reference, and an integrated model image is displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing. It is desirable to perform the periodic change in IG (button image BMG) again. In other words, in this case, the period of time required from when the periodic change in the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is hidden until it is executed again is substantially extended.

Also, for convenience of explanation, the illustration is omitted in FIG. After a predetermined period of time has passed since the display was made, it is hidden as shown in FIG. 253(f). The "1E post-acceptance sound output" also becomes inaudible when a predetermined time elapses after the operation is accepted.

Note that the time until the EF display EKH (the first mode EKH1 and the second mode EKH2) is hidden, the time until the periodic change in the first periodicity display SH1 is re-executed, and the integrated model The time until the periodic change in the image display IG (button model image BMG) is re-executed, and the "display after the first E reception" corresponding to the reception of the first operation (operation reception that does not end the reception period) ” may be hidden, the time may be different from each other, or may be the same.

In addition, even during the period in which the periodic change in the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is hidden in response to the operation acceptance while the 1E reception period continues, the gauge image GG is displayed over time. The depiction that decreases according to the number may be continuously displayed without being hidden.

Then, as shown in FIG. 256(i2), while the periodic change in the second periodicity display SH2 continues, the periodic change in the first periodicity display SH1 and the integrated model image display IG (button 256(j2) to (m2), unless the player accepts an operation after that, the integrated model image is displayed. The display IG, the first periodicity display SH1, and the second periodicity display SH2 will continue to progress through each of the above-described periodic changes (period A time, period C time, period D time), respectively.

In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 253, the case where the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed at timing ta2B (timing shown in FIG. 256 (k2)) within the 1E reception period. I assume.

When the second operation acceptance (operation that does not end the 257(l3) and (m3) appear in sequence in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, in substantially the same manner as in the case where the operation acceptance) is performed.

More specifically, as also shown in FIG. 253, EF display (drawing effect display) in response to the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) in the 1E reception period. EKH is displayed. As the EF display (effect display) EKH, the first mode EKH1 and the second mode EKH2 are sequentially displayed. is the same as if

Also, for convenience of explanation, illustration is omitted in FIG. 257, but as shown in FIG. "Display after reception of 1E" is displayed. The "display after 1E reception" is also generally the same as when the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed. Is displayed.

Also, in the 1E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Similar to when an operation is accepted (an operation is accepted that does not end the acceptance period), based on this, the periodic change in the first periodicity display SH1 is hidden. Similarly, for the second periodicity display SH2, as shown in FIG. Do not hide the change (period D time) and let it continue. Similarly, for the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), as shown in FIG. Based on this, the periodic change in the portion (button model image BMG) that imitates the “operation receiving portion” of the operation button 410 is hidden.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 257(l3) and (m3), the EF display EKH (first mode EKH1, second mode EKH2) corresponding to the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) Similar to the EF display EKH (first mode EKH1, second mode EKH2) in response to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period), a first periodicity display SH1 in which periodic changes are hidden and The integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is displayed in such a manner that it overlaps from the front of them to make them difficult to see. SH2 is designed not to be displayed in an overlapping manner from the front.

Thereafter, the EF display EKH (first mode EKH1, second mode EKH2) is hidden, the periodic change in the first periodicity display SH1 is executed again, and the integrated model image display is performed. Regarding the periodic change in the IG (button model image BMG) being executed again and other examples thereof, it is different from the case of the above-described example in response to the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period). It is the same.

Then, as shown in FIG. 257(n3), while the periodic change in the second periodicity display SH2 continues, the periodic change in the first periodicity display SH1 and the integrated model image display IG (button 257(n3) and (o3), unless the player accepts an operation after that, the integrated model image is displayed. The display IG, the first periodicity display SH1, and the second periodicity display SH2 will continue to progress through each of the above-described periodic changes (period A time, period C time, period D time), respectively.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 253, it is assumed that the third operation is accepted at the timing ta2C (the timing shown in FIG. 256(o3)) within the 1E acceptance period.

Here, the 1E reception period is, as shown in FIG. It is terminated based on what you have done. However, in this production example, the third operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period) is performed at timing ta2C (timing shown in FIG. 256 (o3)) within the 1E reception period. It is assumed that the 1E acceptance period ends before the timing ta3 arrives.

In the 1E reception period according to this embodiment, when the third operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period) is performed, the 1E reception period is terminated assuming that the above-described "special condition" is satisfied. A display change different from the display change of the background image up to that time (mode as "1E display after reception" that does not suggest expectation) (mode as "1E display after reception" that suggests expectation) can be displayed. At this time, the "sound output after 1E reception" may also be audibly output in a manner suggesting the degree of expectation.

More specifically, at timing ta2C within the 1E reception period (see FIG. 257(o3)), when the third operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period) is performed, the "display after reception of the 1E and a mode UH1-2 ( 257 (p4) to (s4)) may appear. Mode UH1-1 (FIGS. 257(p3) to (s3)) corresponds to the predetermined mode as the above-described "first E reception display", and mode UH1-2 (FIGS. 257(p4) to (s4) ) corresponds to the above-mentioned special mode as the above-mentioned "1E post-acceptance display".

In this regard, when mode UH1-1 with a relatively low degree of expectation appears as "1E display after reception", as shown in FIGS. The EF display EKH is displayed in a mode (low expectation mode) different from when the modes UH1-2 with relatively high expectations appear.

That is, when mode UH1-1 with a relatively low degree of expectation appears as "first E display after reception", first mode EKH1 (see FIG. 257 (p3)) is displayed as EF display EKH. After that, the third mode EKH3 (see FIGS. 257(q3) and (r3)) is displayed as the EF display EKH. In this way, the "low-expectation mode of EF display EKH" (corresponding to "first disappearing EF" in FIG. )” is executed as a series of aspects (FIGS. 257 (p3) to (r3)) such as “the first aspect EKH1 and the third aspect EKH3 are displayed in sequence”, thereby “after the first E reception It becomes possible to suggest that the aspect UH1-1 with relatively low expectation will appear as "display".

On the other hand, when mode UH1-2 with a relatively high degree of expectation appears as "1E display after reception", as shown in FIGS. The EF display EKH is displayed in a mode (high expectation mode) different from when the mode UH1-1 with a relatively low degree of expectation appears.

That is, when mode UH1-2 with a relatively high degree of expectation appears as "first E display after reception", first mode EKH1 (see FIG. 257 (p4)) is displayed as EF display EKH. After that, the fourth mode EKH4 (see FIGS. 257(q4) and (r4)) is displayed as the EF display EKH. In this way, the "high expectation mode of EF display EKH" (corresponding to "fourth disappearing EF" in FIG. )” is executed as a series of aspects (FIGS. 257 (p4) to (r4)) such as “the first aspect EKH1 and the fourth aspect EKH4 are displayed in sequence”. It becomes possible to suggest that mode UH1-2 with a relatively high degree of expectation will appear as "display".

Note that in the "low expectation mode of EF display EKH" and "high expectation mode of EF display EKH" according to this production example, the period during which the first mode EKH1 is displayed (FIG. 257 (p3), In FIG. 257 (p4)), when the EF display EKH is displayed in response to the first or second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) in the 1E reception period (FIG. 256 (g2) or , see FIG. 257 (l3)), and whether or not the 1E reception period ends, and whether or not the EF display EKH suggests the degree of expectation. We are trying to make it difficult to recognize. However, this configuration does not necessarily have to be provided, and during the display period of "low expectation mode of EF display EKH" or "high expectation mode of EF display EKH", the first or second operation in the 1E acceptance period The same mode as the case where the EF display EKH is displayed in response to acceptance (operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period) may not appear.

Also, in the 1E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. to hide the periodic changes in the first periodicity display SH1. However, here, unlike when the first and second operation receptions are received, the periodic change is hidden by hiding the first periodicity display SH1 itself. Note that in this example, when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted (the situation where the first mode EKH1 of the EF display EKH is displayed) (Fig. 257(p3)-(q3) or Fig. 257(p4)-( q4)), the first periodicity display SH1 is not hidden, and behind the EF display EKH, the state shown in FIG. After that, the first periodicity display SH1 is hidden (based on acceptance of the third operation (acceptance of operation to end the acceptance period)). However, this may be hidden from the time immediately after the operation is received.

Further, in the 1E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. , when the third operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, the periodic change is hidden based on this. Here, by hiding the second periodicity display SH2 itself, the periodic change is hidden. Note that in this example, when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted (the situation where the first mode EKH1 of the EF display EKH is displayed) (Fig. 257(p3)-(q3) or Fig. 257(p4)-( q4)), the second periodicity display SH2 is not hidden, and the state shown in FIG. After that, the second periodicity display SH2 is hidden (based on the reception of the third operation (reception of the reception period for ending the reception period)). However, this may be hidden from the time immediately after the operation is accepted.

Further, in the 1E reception period according to this embodiment, as for the integrated model image display IG, as shown in FIG. is made, the periodic change is hidden based on this. However, here, unlike when the first and second operation receptions are received, by hiding the integrated model image display IG itself, the periodic change is hidden. Note that in this example, when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted (the situation where the first mode EKH1 of the EF display EKH is displayed) (Fig. 257(p3)-(q3) or Fig. 257(p4)-( q4)), the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and behind the EF display EKH, the state shown in FIG. After that, the integrated model image display IG is hidden (based on the third operation acceptance (operation acceptance to end the acceptance period)). However, this may be hidden from the time immediately after the operation is accepted.

Here, the "1E display after reception" is displayed behind the first periodicity display SH1, the second periodicity display SH2, the integrated model image display IG, and the EF display EKH. This makes it difficult to see immediately after the "first E reception display" is displayed. However, as shown in FIGS. 257(p3) to (r3) and FIGS. 257(p4) to (r4), the first periodicity display SH1, the second periodicity display SH2, the integrated model image display IG, EF By hiding the display EKH and the like, the visibility of the "1E display after reception" is gradually improved. Further, as described above, by confirming the mode even when the EF display EKH is displayed, it is possible to distinguish between the mode UH1-1 with low expectations and the mode UH1-2 with high expectations for the "1E display after reception". It is made easy to recognize which one is displayed.

In addition, during the 1E reception period, as shown in FIG. 253, a “first acceptance sound” can be audibly output as the reception acceptance sound when it occurs. In this regard, in the 1E reception period, as shown in FIG. 253, a situation can occur in which the operation is accepted while the "first acceptable sound" is audibly output as the acceptance acceptable sound. However (timing ta2A), the audible output of the "first permissible sound" continues without being interrupted based on the acceptance of the operation.

In the example shown in FIG. 253, the "first acceptable sound" as the accepting acceptable sound is audibly output before the timing ta2 at which the 1E accepting period occurs. The audible output may be started at the timing ta2, or the audible output may be started after the timing ta2.

Also, as shown in FIG. 253, the 1E reception period can occur while the specific BGM is audibly output. That is, in this case, if the specific BGM is audibly output, there is a possibility that the 1E reception period will occur, so it is expected that the decline in the interest in the game will be suppressed. The "specific BGM" may be a BGM playback sound that is output during a normal variation, or a BGM playback sound that is output over a plurality of pattern variations (a plurality of variation patterns). good too. Also, as such "specific BGM", a plurality of types of BGM may be prepared.

In addition, during the 1E reception period, the operation can be accepted only by keeping the operation means (here, "operation button 410") corresponding to the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) in an operated (pressed) state. It is designed to be performed multiple times (operation acceptance is automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (automatic continuous hitting function). According to such a configuration, the player can accept the operation a plurality of times without repeatedly operating (pressing) the operation button 410, so that the game interest can be preferably maintained. come to be expected.

Here, in the 1E reception period, when an operation is performed using such an "automatic repeated hitting function", while the "first mode EKH1" is being displayed as the EF display EKH (Fig. 256 (g2 ), see FIG. 257(l3), etc.), the next operation is accepted. In this case, if the operation is accepted while the "first mode EKH1" is displayed as the EF display EKH, the "second mode EKH2" is not displayed and the "first mode EKH1" is displayed as the EF display EKH. ” will be displayed again.

For example, if an operation is accepted in the situation shown in FIG. 256(g2), a situation shown in FIG. 257 (p3) or the situation shown in FIG. 257 (p4) will appear based on the operation acceptance. 257(q3)-(t3) or the production progress shown in FIGS. 257(q4)-(t4) is carried out depending on which one appears. However, in this case, the periodic changes in the first periodicity display SH1 and the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) are not displayed (interrupted) after the operation is accepted in the situation shown in FIG. 256(g2). ). Also, the periodic change in the second periodicity display SH2 continues even after the operation is accepted in the situation shown in FIG. 256(g2). 257(p3) or FIG. 257(p4).

FIG. 258 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when "Condition 2E" is satisfied as the occurrence condition and the 2E reception period (2E reception effect) is generated. 260 to 262 are diagrams showing examples of effects in variation patterns in which the 2E reception period (2E reception effects) occurs.

Now, the starting condition is established (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, normal game state that is non-probability variable / non-time saving), and "2E fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of fluctuation pattern determination Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, a performance determination (announcement performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 2E variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (effect depiction according to the 2E variable pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 2E variable pattern (normal BGM playback during non-reach, etc.)) is started ( "Situation shown in Fig. 260 (a)"), within the execution period of the variable effect, the effect (notice effect) according to the result of the notice effect determination is the effect of the selected "2E variation pattern" itself will be additionally executed for

As shown in FIG. 260(a), within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "2E variation pattern", the timing tb2 after the 2E time has elapsed since the start of the variation performance of the decorative symbol SZ has arrived. Based on (based on the satisfaction of "condition 2E"), the above-mentioned 2E reception period (effective period) in which "acceptance regarding display after reception of 2E (sound output after 2E reception)" is permitted It can occur (situation shown in FIG. 260(c)).

Here, the 2E reception period according to this embodiment is also similar to the 1E reception period described above, until the 2E reception period ends (display after reception of 2E (sound output after reception of 2E) It functions as a "multiple-time allowable period" in which the operation acceptance is allowed multiple times until the operation acceptance is no longer allowed.

That is, as will be described later, during the 2E acceptance period, every time an operation is accepted, a display change (for example, a depiction of the 2nd meter rising) occurs in the background image or the like as a "display after acceptance of the 2E". If a special condition is satisfied as a result of receiving the operation multiple times in this way, the 2E acceptance period ends and the display change is different from the display change of the background image (display that does not suggest the degree of expectation) until then. (display suggesting the degree of expectation), that is, a special mode as a "display after reception of the 2E" (for example, a depiction of the 2nd meter filling up and the 2nd character reviving, etc.) can be displayed. ing. On the other hand, if the special condition is not satisfied within the 2E reception period, based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (for example, based on the remaining time as the 2E reception period becoming "0") (when the 2E reception period ends), a predetermined mode (for example, the 2nd meter does not fill up and the character falls down) is displayed as the "display after the 2E reception". ing. When the predetermined mode is displayed, it is suggested that the degree of expectation (proportion) of winning a big hit is lower than when the special mode is displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when such a 2E reception period is generated, the reception period related periodicity display, which is an image display in which periodic changes can appear, is displayed in relation to this. The "third periodicity display SH3" and the "fourth periodicity display SH4" are displayed as the reception period related periodicity display.

259(B) and (C) after the dog character is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 259(A). When a moving image such as "displayed sequentially in each shown manner" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change requires a predetermined period E time (time longer than the above-mentioned "period C time"). It means a display that can appear repeatedly in a form. Further, the "fourth periodicity display SH4" according to this embodiment means "after the cat character is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 259(a), When a moving image such as "displayed sequentially in each mode" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change requires a predetermined period F time (a time different from the period D time and the period E time). It means a display that can appear repeatedly.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to provide the player with information that provides a hint as to which type of acceptance period has occurred, such an acceptance period-related periodicity display (third A periodicity display SH3 and a fourth periodicity display SH4) are displayed. However, the acceptance period-related periodicity display (third periodicity display SH3, fourth periodicity display SH4) does not necessarily have to be displayed. For example, if it is desired to make it more difficult to recognize which type of acceptance period has occurred, it is desirable not to display these. Further, the third periodicity display SH3 may be displayed with a character different from the "dog character" used in the first periodicity display SH1. A character different from the "cat character" used in the second periodicity display SH2 may be displayed.

By the way, when the third periodicity display SH3 is displayed when the 2E reception period occurs, the third periodicity display SH3 does not start to appear behind other images. Also, when the fourth periodicity display SH4 is displayed, the fourth periodicity display SH4 does not start to appear behind other images. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, through the visibility of the reception period-related periodicity display at the time when such reception period-related periodicity display starts to be displayed, the generated reception period It suggests the type of

That is, even in this example of effect, as shown in FIGS. 260(b) and (c), the premonitory effect suggesting that the player will be given an operation opportunity (that the 2E reception period will occur). display is performed.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, when the timing tb1 before the occurrence of the 2E accepting period arrives, as shown in FIGS. 258(c) and 260(b), Execution of the "2E predictive effect display ZED" is started as the predictive effect display. As shown in FIGS. 258(c) and 260(b)-(d), this "2E omens effect display ZED" includes an integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display), reception The period-related periodicity display (third periodicity display SH3, fourth periodicity display SH4) is displayed so as to straddle the timing at which it is displayed. In this production example, the "2E precursor effect display ZED" is executed as the same production display as the above-described "1E precursor effect display ZED (see FIGS. 255(b) to (d))". However, it may be executed as an effect display different from the "1E precursor effect display ZED".

Regarding this point, as shown in FIG. All of the periodicity displays SH4 are started to be displayed in such a manner that the "2E precursor effect display ZED" is behind the "2E precursor effect display ZED" being displayed. The display does not start in a form that appears behind the image of the

However, the “integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG)”, the “third periodicity display SH3”, and the “fourth periodicity display SH2” displayed in connection with the occurrence of the 2E reception period , it is sufficient that it does not start to be displayed behind other images. It doesn't have to be. In this sense, the "2E precursor effect display ZED" displays the "integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG)", the "third periodicity display SH3", and the "fourth periodicity display SH2". Alternatively, when the 2E reception period occurs, the "2E precursor effect display ZED" itself may not be executed.

In addition, at the timing tb2 when the 2E reception period occurs, the display of the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display) and the display of the third periodicity display SH3 are started, but the present invention is not limited to this. The integrated simulated image display IG (simulated image display, remaining time display) and the third periodicity display SH3 may be displayed before or after the timing tb2 at which the 3E reception period occurs. The simulated image display IG (simulated image display, remaining time display) and the third periodicity display SH3 may be displayed at different timings.

In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 displays the third periodicity display SH3 and the fourth periodicity display SH4 at the same timing. In addition, both the third periodic display SH3 and the fourth periodic display SH4 according to this example of presentation are designed so that the periodic change is started immediately after the display is started. are set to be started at the same timing.

That is, as will be described later, during the 2E reception period, both the third periodicity display SH3 and the fourth periodicity display SH4 are triggered even if an operation reception is made while the 2E reception period continues. 259(A) to (C) and FIGS. 259(a) to (e)) are not hidden (canceled). Therefore, by displaying the "third periodicity display SH3" and the "fourth periodicity display SH4" having the same properties at the same timing, the periodic changes are not displayed (interrupted). state) can be easily determined.

Also, during the 2E receiving period according to this production example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display) is displayed as an image display in which periodic changes can appear. During the 2E reception period, the "operation button 410" is set as an operation means that allows multiple operation receptions, and the "operation receiving part" of the operation button 410 is modeled from the integrated model image display IG. A portion (button model image BMG) is displayed one after another in the manner shown in FIG. 259(α) and then sequentially displayed in the manners shown in FIGS. When one periodical change is assumed, the periodical change is repeated in a form requiring a predetermined period B time. As a result, during the 2E receiving period, the integrated model image display IG depicts how the "operation receiving section" moves up and down within its movable range. However, the "period B time" of the integrated model image display IG displayed during the 2E acceptance period is set to be longer than the "period A time" of the integrated model image display IG displayed during the above-mentioned 1E acceptance period. Since it is set, in the 2E reception period, the "operation receiving unit" is depicted moving up and down in its movable range more slowly than in the 1E reception period.

Then, as shown in FIG. 260(d), the display range of the 2E precursor effect display ZED is reduced with the lapse of time, and the 2E precursor effect display ZED is displayed in this manner. Among other things, the integrated simulated image display IG, the third periodicity display SH3, and the fourth periodicity display SH4 each develop their respective periodic changes in the manners described above. After that, as shown in FIGS. 260(e) to (g1), the integrated simulated image display IG, the third periodicity display SH3, and the fourth periodicity display SH4 are changed from each of the periodic changes described above. (cycle B time, cycle E time, cycle F time) will continue to progress.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 258, it is assumed that the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed at timing tb2A (timing shown in FIG. 260(e)) within the 2E reception period. I assume. That is, as described above, the 2E acceptance period according to this embodiment functions as a "multiple-time acceptance period" in which operation acceptance is allowed multiple times. 2E "Display after acceptance" will cause a change in the background image (for example, a depiction of the second meter rising). A display change (display that suggests expectation) that is different from the display change of the background image (display that does not suggest expectation) after the 2E reception period ends, that is, a special display as "display after reception of 2E" It is possible to display a mode (for example, a description that the second meter is full and the character is revived).

When the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed at timing tb2A (timing shown in FIG. 260(e)) within the 2E reception period, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, First, the mode shown in FIG. 261(f2) appears.

More specifically, as also shown in FIG. 258, in the 2E reception period, even if the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, the integrated model image is generated with this as a trigger. Inducing a display change that affects the visibility of the display IG, the third periodic display SH3, and the fourth periodic display SH4 (causing either of these displays to display another image in front of it) is It seems that there is no Therefore, in the 2E reception period, even if the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, the EF display (drawing effect display) EKH as shown in FIGS. 256(g2) and (h2) is never displayed.

However, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 261 for convenience of explanation, the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed even during the 2E reception period, as shown in FIG. When the second E is received, a corresponding "display after reception of 2E" is displayed. The "display after reception of 2E" is as described above, and is displayed, for example, as a depiction (background image) in which the 2nd meter rises. This "2E post-acceptance display" is not displayed in front of the integrated model image display IG, the third periodicity display SH3, and the fourth periodicity display SH4. Even if they are displayed, they are displayed behind them. Although illustration is omitted, when the 2E post-reception display is displayed, the corresponding 2E post-reception sound output is also audibly output.

Also, for convenience of explanation, the illustration is omitted in FIG. After a predetermined period of time has passed since the display was made, it will be hidden as shown in FIG. 258(f). The "2E post-acceptance sound output" is also rendered inaudible after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation was accepted.

Further, in the 2E reception period according to this embodiment, even if the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is made, as shown in FIG. does not hide the periodic changes in the third periodicity representation SH3. Accordingly, in this example, the third periodicity display SH3 shown in FIG. It has the same aspect as the third periodicity representation SH3 shown in f1).

Similarly, for the fourth periodicity display SH4, during the 2E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. ) is performed, the periodic change in the fourth periodicity display SH4 is not hidden based on this. Therefore, in this example, the fourth periodicity display SH4 shown in FIG. 261(f2) is a mode advanced from the mode of the fourth periodicity display SH4 shown in FIG. 260(e). It has the same aspect as the fourth periodicity display SH4 shown in f1). According to such a configuration, in the 2E reception period, unlike the case of the 1E reception period described above, when there is the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period), the third periodicity display Neither SH3 nor the fourth periodic representation SH4 will have their periodic variations hidden.

Also, in the 2E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. It does not hide the periodic changes in the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG). Therefore, in this example, the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) shown in FIG. 260, and is the same as the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) shown in FIG. 260(f1).

Also, during the 2E acceptance period, the depiction of the gauge image GG decreasing with time will continue to be displayed during the 2E acceptance period regardless of whether or not an operation is accepted. It has become.

That is, in the 2E reception period according to this embodiment, the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), the third periodicity display SH3, and the fourth periodicity display SH4 are the first operation reception (reception There is no change in the display mode before and after the acceptance of an operation that does not terminate the period, and these periodic changes continue. Therefore, even after the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), the third periodicity display SH3, and the fourth periodicity display SH4 , as shown in FIGS. 261(f2) to (j2), each of the above-described periodic changes (period B time, period E time, period F time) continues to progress.

In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 258, the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed at timing tb2B (timing shown in FIG. 261 (h2)) within the 2E reception period. I assume.

When the second operation reception (operation that does not end the 262(i3) first appears in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, in substantially the same manner as in the case where the operation acceptance) is performed.

More specifically, as also shown in FIG. 258 , during the 2E reception period, when the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, the integrated model image is also taken as a trigger. Inducing a display change that affects the visibility of the display IG, the third periodic display SH3, and the fourth periodic display SH4 (causing either of these displays to display another image in front of it) is do not have. Therefore, in the 2E reception period, even when the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, the EF display (drawing effect display) EKH as shown in FIGS. 256(g2) and (h2) is never displayed.

However, for convenience of explanation, the illustration is omitted in FIG. 262, but as shown in FIG. "Display after reception of 2E" corresponding to this is also displayed. The "display after reception of the 2E" is generally the same as when the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed. Is displayed.

Also, for convenience of explanation, the illustration is omitted in FIG. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the time of display, the display is hidden as shown in FIG. 258(f).

Further, in the 2E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Based on this, the periodic change (period E time) in the third periodicity display SH3 is continued without being hidden, similarly to when the operation reception (operation reception that does not terminate the reception period) is performed. Similarly, for the fourth periodicity display SH4, as shown in FIG. Do not hide the change (period F time) and let it continue. Similarly, for the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), as shown in FIG. However, the periodic change (period B time) is not hidden and is continued.

That is, in the 2E reception period according to this embodiment, the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), the third periodicity display SH3, and the fourth periodicity display SH4 are not operated for the second time (reception There is no change in the display mode before and after the acceptance of an operation that does not terminate the period, and these periodic changes continue. Therefore, even after the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), the third periodicity display SH3, and the fourth periodicity display SH4 , as shown in FIGS. 262(i3) to (l3), each of the above-described periodic changes (period B time, period E time, period F time) continues to progress.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 262, it is assumed that the third operation is accepted at the timing tb2C (the timing shown in (j3) in FIG. 262) within the 2E accepting period.

Here, the 2E reception period is, as shown in FIG. 258(a), originally continued until the timing tb3 when no operation (to end the reception period) is received, and the timing tb3 is reached. It is terminated based on what you have done. However, in this production example, the third operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period) is performed at timing tb2C (timing shown in FIG. 262 (j3)) within the 2E reception period. It is assumed that the 2E reception period is terminated before timing tb3 arrives.

In the 2E reception period according to this embodiment, when the third operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period) is performed, the 2E reception period is terminated assuming that the above-described "special condition" is satisfied. Display change different from display change of the background image up to that time (mode as "2E display after reception" that does not suggest expectation level) (mode as "2E display after reception" that suggests expectation level) can be displayed. At this time, the "sound output after 2E acceptance" may also be audibly output in a manner suggesting the degree of expectation.

More specifically, at timing tb2C within the 2E reception period (see FIG. 262 (j3)), when the third operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period) is performed, the "display after reception of the 2E 262 (k4) to ( There are cases where m4)) appears. Note that mode UH2-1 (not shown) corresponds to the predetermined mode as the above-described "2E post-acceptance display", and mode UH2-2 (FIGS. 262(k4) to (m4)) corresponds to the above-described "second 2E display after reception” corresponds to a special mode.

In this regard, when the "display after 2E reception" is displayed based on the third operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period) in the 2E reception period, regardless of the mode, the "second 2E display after reception”, as shown in FIG. It is supposed to be displayed in front of them so that

Furthermore, when the "2E post-acceptance display" is displayed based on the fact that the third operation is accepted in the 2E acceptance period, the "2E post-acceptance display" is displayed as a decorative pattern regardless of the mode. SZ is also displayed on the front side so that it is on the back side. According to such a configuration, it is possible to display the "display after reception of the 2E" in a more emphasized manner, and it is expected that the amusement of the game will be improved.

According to such a configuration, the "2E post-acceptance display" itself is used for the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), the third periodicity display SH3, the fourth periodicity display SH4, and the like. EF display EKH will function as a "disappearing EF display", so when the third operation is accepted during the 2E acceptance period (operation acceptance to end the acceptance period), the EF display EKH will be displayed based on this. It is never displayed.

It should be noted that, in this production example, at the time when the display of "2E reception after reception" corresponding to the third operation reception (operation reception to end the reception period) is started (see FIG. 262 (k4)), integration The model image display IG (button model image BMG), the third periodicity display SH3, and the fourth periodicity display SH4 continue without hiding their periodic changes. After that, the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), the third periodicity display SH3, and the fourth periodicity display SH4 are each hidden (See FIG. 262 (l4). reference). However, for the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), the third periodicity display SH3, and the fourth periodicity display SH4, " At the time when the 2E display after reception" is started to be displayed (see FIG. 262 (k4)), the display itself and the periodic changes thereof may be hidden.

By the way, in this production example, as shown in FIG. is hidden when has passed. However, as described above, the "2E post-acceptance display" in response to the third operation acceptance (acceptance of operation to end the acceptance period) is the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) or the third periodicity display Not only SH3 and the fourth periodicity display SH4, but also the decorative pattern SZ is displayed on the front side so as to be behind them, so the decorative pattern SZ is difficult to see. There is concern about a decline in interest in gaming.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the "after 2E reception display" corresponding to the third operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period) is displayed, the "after 2E reception The player is given an operation opportunity to end the display state of "display", thereby suppressing the decline in the interest in the game due to the difficulty in visually recognizing the decorative pattern SZ. .

In this production example, in the situations shown in FIGS. 262(k4) and (l4), the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is displayed at a position different from the position displayed up to that point. I have to. That is, in this case, when the operation reception is performed by a predetermined operation while the "display after reception of 2E" and the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) are displayed respectively, the operation reception is performed as shown in FIG. As shown in (m4), the "display after 2E reception" in the display state is hidden.

In addition, during the 2E reception period, as shown in FIG. 258, reception permission sound is not audibly output when it occurs. As a result, when an acceptance period occurs during which the player is allowed to accept operations multiple times, the type (first E reception period, 2E reception period, etc.).

However, as with the 1E reception period, the 2E reception period can also occur while the specific BGM is audibly output, as shown in FIG. In the first place, it is difficult to predict which of the 2E acceptance periods will occur. It is designed to make it difficult to confirm, so that the sense of tension is preferably maintained.

In this regard, the specific BGM that is audibly output within the 2E reception period is, as shown in FIG. ), it terminates its audible output and enters the non-audible state. On the other hand, for the specific BGM that is being audibly output within the 1E reception period, as shown in FIG. It will be continued without The type of reception period can be suggested through the situation of the audible output of the specific BGM.

It should be noted that during the 2E reception period, as shown in FIG. The audible output is not terminated when the operation means (here, "operation button 410") is operated. As a result, the player hesitates about the operation means (here, the "operation button 410") that prompts the user to accept the operation a plurality of times without worrying about the influence of the audible output of the specific BGM. It will be possible to operate without

Further, in the 2E reception period, unlike the case of the 1E reception period described above, the operation means (here, "operation button 410") corresponding to the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is operated (pressed). ), even if you continue to maintain the state, this will prevent the operation reception from being performed multiple times (the operation reception will be automatically repeated at a predetermined time interval) (the auto repeated hit function will not be activated). ing. According to such a configuration, the player can guess the type of the reception period by confirming whether or not the above-described auto repeated hitting function is activated when the operation reception is permitted a plurality of times. becomes possible. In this case, the player must repeatedly operate (press) the operation means ("operation button 410" in this case) corresponding to the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) within the 2E acceptance period. It goes without saying that it will not.

FIG. 263 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when "Condition 3E" is satisfied as the occurrence condition and the 3E reception period (3E reception effect) is generated. 264 and 265 are diagrams showing examples of effects in variation patterns in which the 3E reception period (3E reception effect) occurs.

Now, the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is non-variable and non-time saving), and the "3rd E fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, a performance determination (announcement performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 3E variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (effect depiction according to the 3E variable pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 3E variable pattern (normal BGM playback during non-reach, etc.)) is started ( "Situation shown in FIG. 264 (a)"), within the execution period of the variable effect, the effect (notice effect) according to the result of the determination of the notice effect is produced by the selected "3rd E variation pattern" will be additionally executed for

As shown in FIG. 263(a), within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "3E variation pattern", timing tc2 has arrived after the 3E time has passed since the variation performance of the decorative symbol SZ was started. Based on (based on the satisfaction of "Condition 3E"), the above 3E reception period (effective period) during which "acceptance regarding display after reception of 3E (sound output after 3E reception)" is permitted It can occur (situation shown in FIG. 260(c)).

Here, the 3E reception period according to this embodiment is different from the 1E reception period and the 2E reception period described above, and is the period until the end of the 3E reception period (display after the 3E reception (the 3E reception period). 3E (sound output after reception)), it functions as a "one-time allowable period" in which only one operation reception is permitted.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when such a 3E reception period is generated, the reception period related periodicity display, which is an image display in which periodic changes can appear, is displayed in relation to this. The "fifth periodicity display SH5" is displayed as the reception period related periodicity display.

More specifically, the “fifth periodicity display SH5” according to this embodiment means “after the dog character is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 259(A), When a moving image such as "is sequentially displayed in each mode shown in C)" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change has a predetermined period E time (time longer than the above-mentioned "period C time" ) means an indication that can appear repeatedly in a form requiring That is, the "fifth periodicity display SH5" displayed in the 3E reception period has the same period E time as the "third periodicity display SH3" displayed in the 2E reception period. It is set as In this rendering example, the “fifth periodicity display SH5” is displayed as the same image display as the “third periodicity display SH3”. However, the "fifth periodicity display SH5" does not necessarily have to be the same as the "third periodicity display SH3". They may be different as long as they are slightly different.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to provide the player with information that gives a hint as to which type of acceptance period has occurred, such an acceptance period-related periodicity display (fifth A periodicity display SH5) is displayed. However, the reception period related periodicity display (fifth periodicity display SH5) does not necessarily have to be displayed. For example, if it is desired to make it more difficult to recognize which type of acceptance period has occurred, it is desirable not to display these. Further, the fifth periodicity display SH5 may be displayed with a character different from the "dog character" used in the first periodicity display SH1 and the third periodicity display SH3.

In this regard, when the fifth periodicity display SH5 is displayed at the occurrence of the 3E reception period, the fifth periodicity display SH5 is displayed in a display different from this. The display is started in the form of appearing behind. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, through the visibility of the reception period-related periodicity display at the time when such reception period-related periodicity display starts to be displayed, the generated reception period It suggests the type of

In this production example, as shown in FIGS. 264(b) and (c), as another display, it is suggested that the player is given an opportunity to operate (the occurrence of the 3E acceptance period). It is decided to use the sign effect display to do. It should be noted that the other display does not necessarily have to be the precursor effect display.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, when the timing tc1 before the occurrence of the 3E accepting period arrives, as shown in FIGS. 263(c) and 264(b), Execution of the "3E predictive effect display ZED" is started as the predictive effect display. As shown in FIGS. 263(c) and 264(b)-(d), this "3E omens effect display ZED" includes an integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display), reception The period-related periodicity display (fifth periodicity display SH5) is displayed so as to straddle the timing at which it is displayed. It should be noted that in this production example, the "3E foreshadow effect display ZED" is replaced with the above-described "1E foreshadow effect display ZED (see FIGS. 255(b) to (d))" or "2E foreshadow effect display ZED (see FIGS. 260 (b) to (d))”, but is executed as a different effect display from the “1E precursor effect display ZED” and “2E precursor effect display ZED”. You may do so.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 264(c), the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display) and the fifth periodicity display SH5 display "3E precursor effect display ZED". The display is started in such a manner that it appears behind the "3E foreshadow effect display ZED".

In this production example, at the timing tc2 when the 3E receiving period occurs, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display) and the display of the fifth periodicity display SH5 are started. is not limited to The integrated simulated image display IG (simulated image display, remaining time display) and the fifth periodicity display SH5 may be displayed before or after the timing tc2 at which the 3E reception period occurs. The simulated image display IG (simulated image display, remaining time display) and the fifth periodicity display SH5 may be displayed at different timings.

In addition, in the 3E reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display) is also displayed as an image display in which periodic changes can appear. In the 3E reception period, the "operation button 410" is set as an operation means that allows one operation reception, and the "operation reception part" of the operation button 410 is modeled from the integrated model image display IG. A moving image such that a part (button model image BMG) is "displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 259(α) and then sequentially displayed in each mode shown in FIGS. When the change is periodic, the periodic change is repeated in a form requiring a predetermined period B time. That is, the "integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG)" displayed during the 3E reception period is replaced by the "integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG)" displayed during the 2E reception period. (button model image BMG)" is set as the same period B time. Moreover, in this production example, the "integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG)" displayed during the 3E acceptance period is replaced by the "integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG)" displayed during the 2E acceptance period. BMG)” is displayed as the same image display. However, the "integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG)" displayed during the 3E acceptance period is not necessarily the same as the "integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG)" displayed during the 2E acceptance period. They may not be the same, and for example, they may differ in size (similar shapes, etc.).

According to such a configuration, even during the 3E receiving period, the integrated model image display IG depicts how the "operation receiving section" moves up and down within its movable range. In addition, the "period B time" of the integrated model image display IG displayed during the 3E acceptance period is set to be longer than the "cycle A time" of the integrated model image display IG displayed during the 1E acceptance period. Since it is set, in the 3E receiving period, the "operation receiving unit" is depicted to move slowly up and down in its movable range compared to the 1E receiving period. It should be noted that the "cycle B time" of the integrated model image display IG displayed during the 3E acceptance period is the same as the "cycle B time" of the integrated model image display IG displayed during the 2E acceptance period. In the 3E receiving period, the "operation receiving unit" moves up and down in its movable range at the same speed as in the 2E receiving period.

Then, as shown in FIG. 264(d), the display range of the 3E precursor effect display ZED is reduced with the lapse of time, and the 3E precursor effect display ZED is displayed in this manner. Among them, the integrated simulated image display IG and the fifth periodicity display SH5 develop their respective periodic changes in the manners described above. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 264(e) to (g1), the integrated simulated image display IG and the fifth periodicity display SH5 show the periodic changes (cycle B time, cycle E time ) will continue to progress.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 264, it is assumed that the first operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period) is performed at timing tc2A (timing shown in FIG. 264(e)) within the 3E reception period. I assume. That is, as described above, the 3E acceptance period according to this embodiment functions as a "one-time acceptance period" in which only one operation acceptance is allowed. Therefore, when the first operation is accepted during the 3E acceptance period, the 3E acceptance period ends based on the acceptance of the operation, and the "3E post-acceptance display" corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed. 265 (f2) to (i2)) with a relatively low degree of expectation as ", and a mode UH3-2 ( 265 (f3) to (i3)) may appear. Also, although illustration is omitted, when the 3E post-acceptance display is displayed, the corresponding 3E post-acceptance sound output is also audibly output. The "3E post-acceptance sound output" may also be audibly output in a manner suggesting the degree of expectation.

In this regard, when mode UH3-1 with a relatively low degree of expectation appears as the "3E display after reception" and when mode UH3-2 with a relatively high degree of expectation appears as the "3E display after reception" Now, as shown in FIGS. 265(f2) to (h2) and FIGS. 265(f3) to (h3), the EF display EKH is displayed in the same manner.

That is, in both cases, when the mode UH3-1 with a relatively low degree of expectation appears as the "3E post-acceptance display" and when the mode UH3-2 with a relatively high degree of expectation appears, As the EF display EKH, first, the first mode EKH1 (see FIGS. 265(f2) and (f3)) is displayed. Next, the fifth mode EKH5 (see FIGS. 265(g2) to (h2) or FIGS. 265(g3) to (h3)) is displayed as the EF display EKH. Thus, when the first operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period) is performed in the 3E reception period, regardless of the modes UH3-1 and UH3-2 as the "display after reception of the 3E", " The first mode EKH1 and the fifth mode EKH5 are displayed in sequence.” EF display EKH is executed in a series of modes (Fig. 265 (f2) to (h2) or Fig. 265 (f3) to (h3)). (corresponding to the “third annihilation EF” in the figure). As a result, even if the EF display EKH is confirmed, it is difficult to recognize the degree of expectation as the "display after reception of the 3E".

It should be noted that during the period during which the first mode EKH1 is displayed (Fig. 265 (f2), (f3)) of the display period of "EF display EKH" corresponding to the 3E reception period of this production example, the 1E reception period The same mode as when the operation is accepted (see FIG. 256 (g2), etc.) appears, so that it is difficult to recognize in which type of acceptance period the operation was accepted. there is However, this configuration does not necessarily have to be provided, and during the display period of "EF display EKH" corresponding to the 3E reception period, the same aspect as if the operation reception was made in the 1E reception period does not appear. may

Further, in the 3E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Hide periodic changes. Here, by hiding the fifth periodicity display SH5 itself, the periodic change is hidden. Note that in this example, when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted (the situation where the first mode EKH1 or the fifth mode EKH5 of the EF display EKH is displayed) ((f2) to (h2) in FIG. 265 or (f3) to (h3)), the fifth periodicity display SH5 is not hidden, and behind the EF display EKH, the mode shown in FIG. After that, the fifth periodicity display SH5 is displayed (when the first operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period) is performed). ), it is hidden, but it may be hidden from the time immediately after the operation is accepted.

Further, in the 3E acceptance period according to this embodiment, the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is also shown in FIG. The periodic change is hidden based on the acceptance of the operation to end the operation). Here, by hiding the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) itself, the periodic change is hidden. Note that in this example, when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted (the situation where the first mode EKH1 or the fifth mode EKH5 of the EF display EKH is displayed) ((f2) to (h2) in FIG. 265 or (f2) to (h2)), the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is not hidden, and behind the EF display EKH, the mode shown in FIG. The integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is displayed as it is (the mode in which the progress of change does not occur), and then the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is displayed (the first time (based on the acceptance of the operation to end the acceptance period)), but it is hidden from the situation immediately after the operation is accepted. good too.

Here, the "3E post-acceptance display" is displayed behind the fifth periodicity display SH5, the integrated model image display IG, and the EF display EKH. Immediately after 3E display after reception" is displayed, it is difficult to visually recognize it. However, by hiding the fifth periodicity display SH5, the integrated model image display IG, the EF display EKH, etc., the visibility of the "3E display after reception" is gradually improved. Become. However, as described above, even if the mode of the EF display EKH is confirmed while the EF display EKH is being displayed, the "display after reception of the 3rd E" is the mode UH3-1 with low expectations and the mode UH3 with high expectations. It is difficult to recognize which of -2 is displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 263, during the 3E reception period, the “first allowable sound” can be audibly output as the reception allowable sound as in the 1E reception period. In this regard, during the 3E acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 263, a situation can occur in which an operation is accepted while the "first acceptable sound" is audibly output as the acceptance acceptable sound. However (timing tc2A), the audible output of the "first allowable sound" continues without interruption based on the operation reception.

In the example shown in FIG. 263, the "first acceptable sound" as the accepting acceptable sound is audibly output before the timing tc2 at which the 3E accepting period occurs, but it is not necessarily limited to this, The audible output may be started at timing tc2, or the audible output may be started after timing tc2.

Also, as shown in FIG. 263, the 3E receiving period can occur while the specific BGM is audibly output. That is, in this case, if the specific BGM is audibly output, there is a possibility that the 3E reception period will occur, so it is expected that the decline in the interest in the game will be suppressed. As described above, the "specific BGM" can also be audibly output when the 1E reception period (see FIG. 253) or the 2E reception period (see FIG. 258) occurs. However, during the 3E acceptance period, unlike the 2E acceptance period, the "specific BGM" will not end midway during the 3E acceptance period.

FIG. 268 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when "Condition 4E" is satisfied as the occurrence condition and the 4E reception period (4E reception effect) is generated. FIGS. 268 and 269 are diagrams showing an effect example in a variation pattern in which the 4E reception period (4E reception effect) occurs.

Now, the specific game state (for example, the normal game state that is non-probability variation / non-time saving) is satisfied (holding digestion), and the "4th E fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, effect determination (previous effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the 4E variation pattern is performed. After that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (effect depiction according to the 4E variable pattern, BGM playback according to the 4E variable pattern (normal BGM playback during non-reach, etc.) sound output, etc.) is started ( "Situation shown in FIG. 268 (a)"), within the execution period of the variable effect, the effect (notice effect) according to the result of the notice effect determination is the effect of the selected "4th E variation pattern" itself will be additionally executed for

As shown in FIG. 266(a), within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "4E variation pattern", timing td2 has arrived after the 4E time has passed since the variation performance of the decorative symbol SZ was started. Based on (based on the satisfaction of "condition 4E"), the above 4E reception period (effective period) in which "acceptance regarding display after reception of 4E (sound output after 4E reception)" is permitted It can occur (situation shown in FIG. 268(c)).

Here, the 4E reception period according to this embodiment is different from the 1E reception period and the 2E reception period described above, and is the period until the end of the 4E reception period (display after the 4E reception (4E reception period). 4E (sound output after reception)), it functions as a "one-time allowable period" in which only one operation reception is permitted.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when such a 4E reception period is generated, the reception period related periodicity display, which is an image display in which periodic changes can appear, is displayed in relation to this. The "sixth periodicity display SH6" and "seventh periodicity display SH7" are displayed as the reception period related periodicity displays.

More specifically, the "sixth periodicity display SH6" according to this embodiment means "after the dog character is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 259(A), When a moving image such as "is sequentially displayed in each mode shown in C)" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change has a predetermined period E time (time longer than the above-mentioned "period C time" ) means an indication that can appear repeatedly in a form requiring That is, the "sixth periodicity display SH6" displayed during the 4E reception period is replaced by the "third periodicity display SH3" displayed during the 2E reception period and the 3E reception period. It is set as the same cycle E time as the "fifth periodicity display SH5" displayed in terms of period. In this rendering example, the "sixth periodicity display SH6" is displayed as the same image display as the "third periodicity display SH3" and the "fifth periodicity display SH5". However, the "sixth periodicity display SH6" may not necessarily be the same as the "third periodicity display SH3" or the "fifth periodicity display SH5". It is permissible for dogs to have slightly different points such as bent ears.

Further, the "seventh periodicity display SH7" according to this embodiment means "after the cat character is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 267(a), When a moving image such as "displayed sequentially in each mode" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change has a predetermined period G time (a period different from period D time, period E time, and period F time) means a representation that can appear repeatedly in a form requiring

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to provide the player with information that gives a hint as to which type of acceptance period has occurred, such an acceptance period-related periodicity display (sixth A periodicity display SH6 and a seventh periodicity display SH7) are displayed. However, the acceptance period-related periodicity display (sixth periodicity display SH6, seventh periodicity display SH7) does not necessarily have to be displayed. For example, if it is desired to make it more difficult to recognize which type of acceptance period has occurred, it is desirable not to display these. The sixth periodicity display SH6 is displayed with a character different from the "dog character" used in the first periodicity display SH1, the third periodicity display SH3, the fifth periodicity display SH5, and the like. Alternatively, the seventh periodicity display SH7 may be displayed with a character different from the "cat character" used in the second periodicity display SH2 or the fourth periodicity display SH4. good.

For example, when the sixth periodicity display SH6 is displayed at the occurrence of the 4E acceptance period, the sixth periodicity display SH6 appears behind another display while another display is being displayed. However, the seventh periodicity display SH7 is never displayed behind another display. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, through the visibility of the reception period-related periodicity display at the time when such reception period-related periodicity display starts to be displayed, the generated reception period It suggests the type of

In this production example, as shown in FIGS. 268(b) to (d), as another display, it is suggested that the player will be given an opportunity to operate (the occurrence of the 4E acceptance period). It is decided to use the sign effect display to do. It should be noted that the other display does not necessarily have to be an indication effect display.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, when the timing td1 before the occurrence of the 4E accepting period arrives, as shown in FIGS. 266(c) and 268(b), Execution of the "4E foreshadow effect display ZED" is started as the foreshadow effect display. As shown in FIGS. 266(c) and 268(c) and (d), this "4E omens effect display ZED" includes an integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display), reception The period-related periodicity display (sixth periodicity display SH6, seventh periodicity display SH7) is displayed so as to straddle the timing at which it is displayed. It should be noted that in this production example, the "fourth E precursor effect display ZED" is replaced by the above-mentioned "first E precursor effect display ZED (see FIGS. 255(b) to (d))" or "second E precursor effect display ZED (see FIGS. 260 (b) to (d))” and “3E precursor effect display ZED (see FIGS. 268 (b) to (d))”. Effect display ZED”, “2E precursor effect display ZED”, and “3E precursor effect display ZED” may be executed as a different effect display.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 268(c), the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display) and the sixth periodicity display SH6 display "4E foreshadow effect display ZED". The display is started in such a manner that it appears behind the "4E foreshadow effect display ZED". On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 268(d), the seventh periodicity display SH7 is not displayed in such a manner as to appear behind the "4E foreshadow effect display ZED". The display is started in such a manner that the foreshadowing effect display "ZED" is reversed to the rear side.

In this production example, at the timing td2 when the 4E reception period occurs, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display) and the sixth periodicity display SH6 are started to be displayed. is not limited to The integrated simulated image display IG (simulated image display, remaining time display) and the sixth periodicity display SH6 may be displayed before or after the timing td2 at which the fourth E reception period occurs. The simulated image display IG (simulated image display, remaining time display) and the sixth periodicity display SH6 may be displayed at different timings.

In this pachinko machine 1, the sixth periodicity display SH6 and the seventh periodicity display SH7 are displayed at different timings. In this example of effect, the sixth periodicity display SH6 is started to be displayed prior to the seventh periodicity display SH7, and the seventh periodicity display SH7 is displayed while the sixth periodicity display SH6 is being displayed. Display is started. In addition, since the sixth periodic display SH6 according to this example of effect is designed so that the periodic change starts immediately after the display is started, the timing at which the periodic change starts can also be changed. 7 It is made to be before the timing when the periodic change of the periodicity display SH7 is started.

However, as for the sixth periodicity display SH6, for example, the display is started before the timing td2 at which the 4E reception period occurs, and the periodic change is not started at the time when the display is started. good too. That is, in this case, the sixth periodicity display SH6 is displayed while maintaining the mode shown in FIG. 259(A). Then, the periodic change in the sixth periodicity display SH6 may be started based on the arrival of the timing td2 at which the fourth E reception period occurs. In this respect, regarding the seventh periodicity display SH7, for example, based on the arrival of the timing td2, if the display including the periodic change thereof is started, the sixth periodicity display SH6 and the sixth periodicity display SH6 are displayed. Although the display start timing is different between the 7-periodic display SH7 and the periodic change start timing, the timing is the same.

Conversely, the display of the seventh periodicity display SH7 may be started before the timing at which the sixth periodicity display SH6 is displayed or the timing at which the 4E reception period occurs. In this case, regarding the seventh periodicity display SH7, the timing at which the periodic change is started is more than the timing at which the sixth periodicity display SH6 starts the periodic change and the timing at which the 4th E acceptance period occurs. preferably before

Regarding the relationship of the seventh periodicity display SH7 to the sixth periodicity display SH6, any of the configurations described above may be adopted, but the relationship of the seventh periodicity display SH7 to the sixth periodicity display SH6 should be the same as each other.

In addition, in the 3E reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display) is also displayed as an image display in which periodic changes can appear. In the 4E reception period, the "operation button 410" is set as an operation means that allows one operation reception, and the "operation reception part" of the operation button 410 is modeled from the integrated model image display IG. A moving image such that a part (button model image BMG) is "displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 259(α) and then sequentially displayed in each mode shown in FIGS. When the change is periodic, the periodic change is repeated in a form requiring a predetermined period B time. That is, the "integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG)" displayed during the 4E acceptance period is " It is set as the same period B time as "Integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG)". Moreover, in this production example, the "integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG)" displayed during the 4E acceptance period is replaced by the "integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG)" displayed during the 2E acceptance period and the 3E acceptance period. IG (button model image BMG)" is displayed as the same image display. However, the "integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG)" displayed during the 4E acceptance period is different from the "integrated model image display IG (button model image)" displayed during the 2E acceptance period and the 3E acceptance period. BMG)", and for example, they may be different in size (similar shapes, etc.).

According to such a configuration, even during the 4E reception period, the integrated model image display IG depicts how the "operation receiving section" moves up and down within its movable range. Also, the "period B time" of the integrated model image display IG displayed during the 4E acceptance period is set to be longer than the "period A time" of the integrated model image display IG displayed during the 1E acceptance period. Since it is set, in the 4E receiving period, the "operation receiving unit" is depicted moving up and down in its movable range more slowly than in the 1E receiving period. The "period B time" of the integrated model image display IG displayed during the 4E acceptance period is the same as the "period B time" of the integrated model image display IG displayed during the 2E acceptance period or the 3E acceptance period. , in the 4E accepting period, the "operation receiving unit" moves up and down in its movable range at the same speed as in the 2E and 3E accepting periods.

Then, as shown in FIG. 268(c), the integrated simulated image display IG (simulated image display, remaining time display) according to this effect example is also the same as the sixth periodicity display SH6, "4E foreshadow effect display ZED" is being displayed, the display starts behind the "4E foreshadowing effect display ZED", and its periodic change is started.

As shown in FIGS. 268(b) to (d), the display range of the 4E precursor effect display ZED is reduced with the passage of time, and the 4E precursor effect display ZED is displayed in this manner. Among them, the integrated model image display IG and the sixth periodicity display SH6, and the seventh periodicity display SH7 that started to be displayed after this, each of the above-described modes changes periodically. will be advanced respectively.

Then, as a result of the display range of the 4E predictive effect display ZED being thus reduced, when the 4E predictive effect display ZED is hidden, as shown in FIG. The visibility of not only the display SH7 but also the integrated simulated image display IG and the sixth periodicity display SH6 is improved. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 268(f) to (h1), the integrated model image display IG, the sixth periodicity display SH6, and the seventh periodicity Display SH7 will continue to progress through each of the above-described periodic changes (period B time, period E time, period G time).

In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 269, it is assumed that the first operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period) is performed at timing td2A (timing shown in FIG. 268(f)) within the 4E reception period. I assume. That is, as described above, the 4E reception period according to this embodiment functions as a "one-time acceptance period" in which only one operation reception is allowed. Therefore, when the first operation is accepted during the 4E acceptance period, the 4E acceptance period ends based on the acceptance of the operation, and the "display after 4E acceptance" corresponding to the operation acceptance. 269 (g2) to (j2)) with a relatively low degree of expectation as ", and a mode UH4-2 ( 269 (g3) to (j3)) may appear. Also, although illustration is omitted, when the 4E post-reception display is displayed, the corresponding 4E post-reception sound output is also audibly output. The "sound output after 4E reception" may also be audibly output in a manner suggesting the degree of expectation.

In this regard, when mode UH4-1 with a relatively low degree of expectation appears as the "4E display after reception", as shown in FIGS. The EF display EKH is displayed in a mode (low expectation mode) different from when the mode UH4-2, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, appears.

That is, when mode UH4-1 with a relatively low degree of expectation appears as "4E display after reception", first mode EKH1 (see FIG. 269 (g2)) is displayed as EF display EKH. Next, as the EF display EKH, the sixth mode EKH6 (see FIGS. 269(h2) and (i2)) is displayed. In this way, the "low-expectation mode of EF display EKH" (corresponding to "fourth disappearing EF" in FIG. )” is executed as a series of modes ((g2) to (i2) in FIG. 269) such as “the first mode EKH1 and the sixth mode EKH6 are displayed in sequence”, thereby “after the 4th E reception It becomes possible to suggest that the aspect UH4-1 with relatively low expectations will appear as "display". In this production example, the sixth mode EKH6 (see FIGS. 269(h2) and (i2)) is executed as the same mode as the above-described third mode EKH3 (see FIGS. 257(q3) and (r3)). However, it may be executed as a different aspect.

On the other hand, when mode UH4-2 with a relatively high degree of expectation appears as the "4E post-acceptance display", as shown in FIGS. The EF display EKH is displayed in a mode (high expectation mode) different from when the mode UH4-1 with a relatively low degree of expectation appears.

That is, when mode UH4-2 with a relatively high degree of expectation appears as "display after reception of 4E", first mode EKH1 (see FIG. 269 (g3)) is displayed as EF display EKH. Next, the seventh mode EKH7 (see FIGS. 269(h3) and (i3)) is displayed as the EF display EKH. In this way, the "high expectation mode of EF display EKH" (corresponding to "fifth disappearing EF" in FIG. )” is executed as a series of modes ((g3) to (i3) in FIG. 269) such as “the first mode EKH1 and the seventh mode EKH7 are displayed in sequence”, thereby resulting in the “after the 4th E reception It becomes possible to suggest that the aspect UH4-2 with relatively high expectation will appear as "display". In this production example, the seventh mode EKH7 (see FIGS. 269(h3) and (i3)) is replaced with the above-described fifth mode EKH5 (FIGS. 265(g2) to (h2) and FIGS. ) is executed as the same mode as ), but it may be executed as a different mode.

It should be noted that during the period during which the first mode EKH1 is displayed (FIGS. 269(g2) and (g3)) of the display period of "EF display EKH" corresponding to the 4E reception period of this production example, the 1E reception period The same mode as when the operation is accepted (see FIG. 256 (g2), etc.) appears, so that it is difficult to recognize in which type of acceptance period the operation was accepted. there is However, this configuration does not necessarily have to be provided, and during the display period of "EF display EKH" corresponding to the 4E acceptance period, the same aspect as if the operation was accepted during the 1E acceptance period should not appear. may

Also, in the 4E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Hide the cyclical changes in gender indication SH7. Here, by hiding the sixth periodicity display SH6 and the seventh periodicity display SH7 themselves, the periodic change is hidden. Note that in this example, when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted (situation where the first mode EKH1 or the sixth mode EKH6 (or the seventh mode EKH7) of the EF display EKH is displayed) (Fig. 269 (g2 ) to (h2) or FIG. 269 (g3) to (h3)), the sixth periodicity display SH6 and the seventh periodicity display SH7 are not hidden, and behind the EF display EKH, FIG. The sixth periodicity display SH6 and the seventh periodicity display SH7 are displayed in the state shown in f) (the state in which the periodic change has not progressed), and then the sixth periodicity display SH6 is displayed. and the seventh periodicity display SH7 is hidden (based on the acceptance of the first operation (acceptance of an operation to end the acceptance period)), but the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted. You may choose to hide this from time to time.

In addition, in the 4E reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. to hide its periodic changes. Here, by hiding the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) itself, the periodic change is hidden. Note that in this example, when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted (situation where the first mode EKH1 or the sixth mode EKH6 (or the seventh mode EKH7) of the EF display EKH is displayed) (Fig. 269 (g2 ) to (h2) or Figure 269 (g3) to (h3)), the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is not hidden, behind the EF display EKH, Figure 268 (f ) (a mode in which the progress of the periodic change has not occurred), the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is displayed, and then the integrated model image display IG (button (Based on the acceptance of the first operation (acceptance of an operation to end the acceptance period)), the model image BMG) is hidden from display immediately after the operation is accepted. may be hidden.

Here, the "fourth E display after reception" is displayed behind the sixth periodicity display SH6, the seventh periodicity display SH7, the integrated model image display IG, and the EF display EKH. This makes it difficult to see immediately after the "fourth E reception display" is displayed. However, as the sixth periodicity display SH6, the seventh periodicity display SH7, the integrated model image display IG, the EF display EKH, etc. are hidden, the visibility of the "fourth E reception display" gradually decreases. It will be considered good. Further, as described above, by confirming the mode even when the EF display EKH is displayed, it is possible to distinguish between the mode UH4-1 with low expectations and the mode UH4-2 with high expectations for the "display after reception of the 4th E". It is made easy to recognize which one is displayed.

In addition, during the 4E acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 266, either the "first acceptance sound" or the "second acceptance sound" can be audibly output (selectively) as acceptance acceptance sounds. . For example, at the occurrence of the 4E acceptance period, when the "second acceptance sound" is audibly output as the acceptance acceptance sound, a bigger hit is obtained than when the "first acceptance sound" is audibly output as the acceptance acceptance sound. It is desirable to set it so that it suggests that the degree of expectation (percentage) of In this regard, in the 4E acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 266, the operation is accepted while either the "first acceptable sound" or the "second acceptable sound" is audibly output as the acceptance acceptable sound. Although a situation can occur (timing td2A), the audible output of the "first permissible sound" or "second permissible sound" is interrupted based on the acceptance of the operation.

In the example shown in FIG. 266, the "first acceptable sound" as the accepting acceptable sound is audibly output before the timing td2 at which the 4E accepting period occurs. The audible output may be started at timing td2, or the audible output may be started after timing td2.

Also, as shown in FIG. 266, the 4E reception period can occur while the specific BGM is in an inaudible state. That is, in this case, if the specific BGM becomes inaudible, there is a possibility that the 4E reception period will occur, so it is expected that the decline in the interest in the game will be suppressed. As described above, the "specific BGM" is audible even when the 1E acceptance period (see FIG. 253), the 2E acceptance period (see FIG. 258), or the 3E acceptance period (see FIG. 263) occurs. can be output.

Here, such a 1E acceptance period (see FIGS. 253 to 257), a 2E acceptance period (see FIGS. 258 to 262), a 3E acceptance period (see FIGS. 263 to 265), and a Of the 4E reception periods (see FIGS. 266 to 269), the 1E reception period (see FIGS. 253 to 257) is replaced with the 5E reception period described below (see FIG. 270). Alternatively, it may be generated as the 6E reception period (see FIG. 270). In order to realize the inventions described below, it is sufficient to have only the necessary configuration among the configurations described below. You can choose not to prepare.

FIG. 270 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when "Condition 1E" is satisfied as the occurrence condition and the 5E reception period (5E reception effect) is generated. It should be noted that the production example in the variation pattern in which the 5E reception period (5E reception production) occurs overlaps with the case where the above-described 1E reception period (1E reception production) occurs (see FIGS. 255 to 257). Since there are many parts to be changed, only the differences (changed points) will be explained, and illustrations will be omitted.

That is, as described above, the 1E reception period can occur as a reception period in which multiple operations are permitted, and an integrated model image display IG imitating the operation means in which multiple operations are permitted. (button model image BMG) and acceptance period-related periodicity display (first periodicity display SH1, second periodicity display SH2), which is an image display in which periodic changes can appear, are displayed. Then, during the 1E reception period, the operation means ("operation button 410" in this case) corresponding to the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is operated (not ending the reception period) to accept the operation. Then, based on the reception of the operation, the periodic change in the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) and the periodic change in the first periodicity display SH1 are hidden, and the second periodicity It was mentioned above that the periodic changes in display SH2 are not hidden and continue.

In this regard, in the 5E reception period, which is a modification of the 1E reception period, as shown in FIGS. Even if the corresponding operation means ("operation button 410" in this case) is operated (not ending the acceptance period) and the operation is accepted, the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is displayed based on the operation acceptance. , the periodic changes in the first periodicity representation SH1, and the periodic changes in the second periodicity representation SH2 are not hidden, and are kept in such a way as to continue their periodic changes. It has become. At timing ta2C, when the operation for ending the acceptance period is accepted, based on this, the periodic change in the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) and the periodic change in the first periodicity display SH1 As in the case of the 1E reception period, both the change and the periodic change in the second periodicity display SH2 are hidden.

That is, in this case, based on the arrival of the timing ta2 after the 1E time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect of the decorative symbol SZ (based on the satisfaction of the "condition 1E"), "After receiving the 5E The 5E reception period (effective period) in which "acceptance" is permitted for display (in this example, the same as the display after the 1E reception) occurs (situation shown in FIG. 255(c)), and the 5E reception Even if the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed at timing ta2A (timing shown in FIG. 255(f)) within the period (effective period), the integrated model image display IG (button model The periodic changes in the image BMG), the periodic changes in the first periodic representation SH1, and the periodic changes in the second periodic representation SH2 are not hidden, and their periodic changes are It will continue. Therefore, when the situations shown in FIGS. 256(g2) to (m2), . Yes, that is, the integrated simulated image display IG (button simulated image BMG) and the first periodic display SH1 continue to develop (continue) their periodic changes like the second periodic display SH2.

Similarly, even if the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed at timing ta2B (timing shown in FIG. 256 (k2)) within the 5E reception period (effective period), The periodic changes in the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), the periodic changes in the first periodic display SH1, and the periodic changes in the second periodic display SH2 are all hidden. , and continue their periodic changes. Therefore, when the situations shown in FIGS. 257(l3) to (o3) appear in this modified example, it is the same as when the situations shown in FIGS. 256(l2), (m2), . . . The integrated simulated image display IG (button simulated image BMG) and the first periodicity display SH1 also continue to develop (continue) their periodic changes similarly to the second periodicity display SH2.

Note that when the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed at timing ta2A (timing shown in FIG. 255 (f)) within the 5E reception period (effective period), or at timing ta2B ( 256 (k2)), when the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, the EF display EKH (first mode EKH1, second mode EKH2) is turned on based on the operation reception. Regarding the display and the display change (for example, the depiction of the 1st meter rising, etc.) in the background image etc. as "display after reception of 5E (in this example, same as display after reception of 1E)" , is the same as the case of the 1E reception period (effective period) described above. In addition, when the third operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period) is performed at timing ta2C (timing shown in FIG. 257 (o3)) within the 5E reception period (effective period), based on the operation reception to hide the periodic changes in the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), the periodic changes in the first periodic display SH1, and the periodic changes in the second periodic display SH2, Execution of the "display after reception of 5E (in this example, same as display after reception of 1E)" (FIGS. 257(p3) to (s3), FIGS. This is the same as the case of the 1E acceptance period (effective period).

FIG. 271 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when "Condition 1E" is satisfied as the occurrence condition and the 6E reception period (6E reception effect) is generated. It should be noted that the production example in the variation pattern in which the 6E reception period (6E reception production) occurs overlaps with the case where the above-described 1E reception period (1E reception production) occurs (see FIGS. 255 to 257). Since there are many parts to be changed, only differences (changed points) will be explained, and illustrations will be omitted.

That is, as described above, the 1E reception period can occur as a reception period in which multiple operations are permitted, and an integrated model image display IG imitating the operation means in which multiple operations are permitted. (button model image BMG) and acceptance period-related periodicity display (first periodicity display SH1, second periodicity display SH2), which is an image display in which periodic changes can appear, are displayed. Then, during the 1E reception period, the operation means ("operation button 410" in this case) corresponding to the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is operated (not ending the reception period) to accept the operation. Then, based on the reception of the operation, the periodic change in the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) and the periodic change in the first periodicity display SH1 are hidden, and the second periodicity It was mentioned above that the periodic changes in display SH2 are not hidden and continue.

In this regard, in the 6E reception period, which is a modification of the 1E reception period, as shown in FIGS. When the corresponding operation means ("operation button 410" in this case) is operated (not ending the acceptance period) and the operation is accepted, the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) is changed based on the operation acceptance. All of the periodic changes, the periodic changes in the first periodicity display SH1, and the periodic changes in the second periodicity display SH2 are hidden. As a method for hiding these periodic changes, for example, a method for hiding the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) and the first periodicity display SH1 during the above-described 1E acceptance period. (See FIGS. 256(g2) and (h2) and FIGS. 257(l3) and (m3)) can be used. That is, in this case, the second periodicity display SH2 according to this modification is the same as the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), the first periodicity display SH1, and the like. (character display) is continued, but by not continuing the periodic change up to that point, the periodic change is hidden.

That is, in this case, based on the arrival of the timing ta2 after the 1E time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect of the decorative symbol SZ (based on the satisfaction of the "condition 1E"), "After receiving the 6E In this example, the 6E reception period (effective period) in which "acceptance" regarding display (in this example, the same as the display after the 1E reception) is permitted occurs (situation shown in FIG. 255(c)), and the 6E reception When the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed at the timing ta2A (the timing shown in FIG. 255(f)) within the period (effective period), the integration model is performed based on the operation reception. All of the periodic changes in the image display IG (button model image BMG), the periodic changes in the first periodic display SH1, and the periodic changes in the second periodic display SH2 are hidden. Therefore, in this modified example, when the situations shown in FIGS. 256(g2) and (h2) appear, not only the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) and the first periodicity display SH1 but also the second As for the periodicity display SH2, the periodic change is also hidden. More specifically, in the situations shown in FIGS. 256(g2) and (h2), the second periodicity display SH2 is the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) or the first periodicity display SH1. 255(f), and when the situation shown in FIG. 256(i2) is reached, the periodic change starts again. In this example, the process starts again from the mode shown in FIG. 254(a).

Similarly, when the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed at timing ta2B (timing shown in FIG. 256 (k2)) within the 6E reception period (effective period), Based on the operation reception, any periodic change in the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), the periodic change in the first periodicity display SH1, or the periodic change in the second periodicity display SH2 is selected. will also be hidden. Therefore, in this modified example, when the situations shown in FIGS. 257(l3) and (m3) appear, not only the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) and the first periodicity display SH1 but also the second As for the periodicity display SH2, the periodic change is also hidden. More specifically, in the situations shown in FIGS. 257(l3) and (m3), the second periodicity display SH2 is the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) or the first periodicity display SH1 256(k2), and when the situation shown in FIG. 257(n3) is reached, the periodic change starts again. In this example, the process starts again from the mode shown in FIG. 254(a).

Note that when the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed at timing ta2A (timing shown in FIG. 255 (f)) within the 6E reception period (effective period), or at timing ta2B ( 256 (k2)), when the second operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, the EF display EKH (first mode EKH1, second mode EKH2) is turned on based on the operation reception. As for the display and the display change (for example, depiction of the 1st meter rising) in the background image etc. as "display after reception of 6E (in this example, same as display after reception of 1E)" , is the same as the case of the 1E reception period (effective period) described above. Further, when the third operation reception (operation reception for ending the reception period) is performed at the timing ta2C (the timing shown in FIG. 257 (o3)) within the 6E reception period (effective period), based on the operation reception to hide the periodic changes in the integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG), the periodic changes in the first periodic display SH1, and the periodic changes in the second periodic display SH2, Execution of the "6E post-acceptance display (in this example, the same as the 1E post-acceptance display)" (Figs. 257(p3)-(s3), Figs. This is the same as the case of the 1E acceptance period (effective period).

Regarding the 5E reception period (see FIG. 270) or the 6E reception period (see FIG. 270), the 1E reception period (see FIGS. 253 to 257), the 2E reception period (FIGS. 258 to 262 ), the 3E reception period (see FIGS. 263 to 265), and the 4E reception period (see FIGS. 266 to 269). The 5E acceptance period (see FIG. 270) occurs based on the fulfillment of "Condition 5E" as the occurrence condition, and the 6E acceptance period (see FIG. 270) occurs as the occurrence condition " It will occur based on the fact that condition 6E” is satisfied. That is, for the 1E reception period (see FIGS. 253 to 257), the 5E reception period (see FIG. 270), and the 6E reception period (see FIG. 270), the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment , only one of these acceptance periods may be allowed to occur, or only any two of those acceptance periods may be allowed to occur in response to mutually different occurrence conditions. Alternatively, all of these acceptance periods may be generated in response to mutually different generation conditions.

In each acceptance period (or part of the acceptance period) according to the above-mentioned example of production and its modification, it is suggested that the player will soon be given an opportunity to operate in relation to the occurrence of the acceptance period. Omen effect display ZED, action target display (integrated model image display IG) that suggests reception target (operation receiving part etc.), remaining time display that suggests the remaining time of reception period, image display that can appear periodic changes A certain acceptance period-related periodicity display (first periodicity display SH1 to seventh periodicity display SH7, etc.) can be displayed. However, as described above, each of these configurations does not necessarily have to be provided, and only appropriate configurations among these configurations may be provided. Also, as described above, the operation target display (simulated image display) according to this example is displayed as the "integrated simulated image display IG" integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display. However, it is not necessarily limited to this, and may be displayed separately. This also applies to other acceptance periods. In addition, if the configuration for displaying the integrated model image display IG is not provided, depending on the aspect of the reception period related periodicity display (display form, combination, whether or not to be hidden, etc.), the game It is desirable to suggest the operation target by the person.

In addition, the periodic change is hidden based on the acceptance of the operation (without ending the acceptance period) within the acceptance period (or part of the acceptance period) according to the above-described production example or its modification. The method is not limited to each configuration described above. For example, although periodic changes such as periodicity display (reception period related periodicity display) on the layer and integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) continue By displaying another image (e.g., EF display EKH) in front of it, the periodicity display and integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) are made invisible. Alternatively, the periodicity display or integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) may be displayed by changing it to a periodic change different from the periodic change that has continued until then (for example, by changing the periodic time, etc.). ) to hide the periodic changes that have continued until then, or display periodicity (reception period-related periodicity display) or integrated model image display IG (button model image BMG) itself may be terminated.

In addition, the periodic change is hidden based on the fact that the operation is accepted (without ending the acceptance period) within the acceptance period (or part of the acceptance period) according to the above-mentioned production example or its modification. After that, as a method for restarting the periodic change, the periodic change does not necessarily have to be restarted from the beginning, and the periodic change may be restarted from the middle.

Further, regarding the configuration for displaying the EF display EKH based on the fact that the operation is accepted (without ending the acceptance period) within the acceptance period (or part of the acceptance period) according to the above-described production example or its modification. does not necessarily have to be provided. Although it is not an essential configuration, even if the EF display EKH is not executed (displayed) when an operation is accepted, periodicity display (acceptance period related periodicity display) and integrated model image It is possible to make the periodic change of the display IG (button model image BMG) invisible.

In each reception period (or part of the reception period (for example, the 2E reception period)) according to the above-described production examples and modifications thereof, the precursor effect display ZED is displayed in the second periodicity display SH2 and the third periodicity display SH2. It may be displayed at a position that does not overlap with the periodicity display SH3, the fourth periodicity display SH4, the seventh periodicity display SH7, or the like. Any display may be performed as long as it is not displayed before the second periodicity display SH2, the third periodicity display SH3, the fourth periodicity display SH4, the seventh periodicity display SH7, or the like. During the 2E receiving period, the foreshadowing effect display ZED does not act in relation to the third periodicity display SH3 and the fourth periodicity display SH4. This itself may not be executed (displayed).

Among the reception periods according to the above-described production examples and modifications thereof, the "multiple-time acceptance period (or a partial multiple-time reception period (for example, the 2E reception period)) in which the operation reception is allowed multiple times )” does not terminate the acceptance period based on the fact that the operation has been accepted until the specified number of times (the third) of operations have been accepted. Based on this, we decided to terminate the acceptance period. However, it is determined whether or not to terminate the acceptance period based on the acceptance of the operation, and the acceptance period is terminated based on the predetermined result obtained in the judgment. may

In addition, among the reception periods according to the above-described production examples and modifications thereof, the "multiple-time acceptance period (or a partial multiple-time acceptance period (for example, the 2E acceptance period etc.))”, regardless of whether a “low expectation mode” or a “high expectation mode” is executed as a post-acceptance display, a predetermined condition (for example, the number of operations, a judgment, etc.) is established by accepting the operation. Based on the above, the acceptance period will be terminated and the post-acceptance display will be displayed. However, the possibility that a predetermined condition (for example, the number of operations, judgment, etc.) is established when an operation is accepted is limited to the case where the "high expectation mode" is executed as a post-acceptance display. good too. In other words, in this case, when the "low expectation mode" is set to be executed as the post-acceptance display, the conditions for ending the acceptance period are established based on how many operations are accepted during the acceptance period. Instead, the "low expectation mode" may be executed as a post-acceptance display based on the arrival of the timing at which the acceptance period ends. Alternatively, only when the "specific mode" is executed as the post-reception display, the acceptance period is terminated based on the operation reception, and when the "specific mode" is not executed as the post-reception display, the operation reception is executed. The acceptance period may be prevented from ending. That is, in this case, no post-reception display is performed when the timing for ending the reception period has come.

In addition, among the reception periods according to the above-described production examples and modifications thereof, the "multiple-time acceptance period (or a partial multiple-time acceptance period (for example, the 2E acceptance period etc.))” does not necessarily have to include a configuration for ending the acceptance period based on the acceptance of the operation. That is, in this case, although the operation can be accepted a plurality of times before the end of the acceptance period, the acceptance period will not end based on this, and the operation will not be terminated based on the arrival of the predetermined timing. The acceptance period will end only after

In addition, among the reception periods according to the above-described production examples and modifications thereof, the "multiple-time acceptance period (or a partial multiple-time acceptance period (for example, the 2E acceptance period etc.))”, each time an operation is accepted, a different display change may appear as a post-acceptance display.

Further, the receiving periods according to the above-described production examples and modifications thereof may be arbitrary combinations and may occur sequentially within one variation pattern.

Further, the post-acceptance display does not necessarily indicate the degree of expectation that a big win will be obtained, and may not indicate the degree of expectation.

In addition, in each reception period according to the above-described production example and its modification, when the reception period ends based on the reception of the operation, a common mode (first mode) of EF display (display of effect effect) EKH EKH1) is first displayed (for example, FIGS. 257 (p3) and (p4), FIGS. 265 (f2) and (f3), and FIGS. 269 (g2) and (g3)), and then Another aspect is displayed (for example, FIGS. 257 (q3) to (r3), (q4) to (r4), and FIGS. 265 (g2) to (h2), (g3) to (h3) 269 (h2) to (i2), (h3 to (i3), etc.), EF display (drawing effect display) EKH may be performed, and the common mode (first mode EKH1) is You may make it omit.

In addition, during the reception period according to the above-described example of production and its modification, the display mode of the "special image display" that periodically changes may be changed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. . For example, if an operation is accepted while the integrated simulated image display IG (simulated image display) is being displayed, the display mode of the integrated simulated image display IG may change. In this regard, when changing the display mode of the integrated model image display IG, whether the time required for the periodic change should be maintained or whether the time required for the periodic change should also be changed. By providing performance, it is possible to preferably maintain the amusement of the game. In this example, the "special image display" is to change the integrated model image display IG. Any display (for example, reception period-related periodicity display, etc.) may be used.

FIG. 272 shows a modification in which the display mode of the integrated model image display IG is changed (or not changed) based on the fact that the operation is accepted during the 1E acceptance period (see FIGS. 253 to 257). It is a diagram. FIG. 272 is for explaining how the display mode of the model image display and the time required for the periodic change will change based on the acceptance of the operation. For the sake of convenience, illustration of other configurations (decorative patterns, display after reception, etc.) that have already been explained is omitted. In addition, only the configuration different from the 1E receiving period according to the example of effect described above will be described, and the same configuration will not be particularly mentioned.

In the 1E reception period according to the above-described effect example, the integrated model image display IG is displayed so as to periodically change in "cycle A time" (see FIGS. 253 and 254). In this regard, in the 1E reception period according to this modification, the integrated model image display IG is displayed so as to change periodically at the "period A1 hour", and is different from the "period A1 hour". In some cases, the display is made so as to perform the periodic change in the "cycle A2 hours", which is the time.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 272(a), in the 1E acceptance period, the integrated model image display IG is displayed in the display mode shown in FIG. 144(a) (integrated model image display IGa). and is in a state where it is displayed so as to perform periodic changes at the "period A time", the operation reception for the operation means corresponding to the integrated model image display IG (the first E reception period is If an operation acceptance that does not terminate the operation is performed, a post-acceptance display (not shown) or the like is displayed based on the operation acceptance.

However, if an operation is accepted during the 1E acceptance period according to this modification (an operation acceptance that does not terminate the 1E acceptance period), in addition to these display changes, the display mode of the integrated model image display IG will change. It is subject to change. That is, in the 1E reception period according to this modified example, if it is not determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the operation is accepted, the When the integrated model image display IG is displayed in the mode shown in (c) and it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the operation is accepted, the result of the determination will be used as shown in FIG. The integrated simulated image display IG is displayed in the manner shown in (d) and (e).

Here, when the integrated model image display IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. , as shown in FIG. 272(b), a predetermined EF display EKH is executed to hide (make invisible) the periodicity display that has appeared so far in the integrated model image display IG. After that, as shown in FIG. 272(c), the periodic display in the integrated simulated image display IG is displayed again (visible again), whereby the periodic display in the integrated simulated image display IG is performed. It becomes possible to arouse interest in whether or not the time required for the process has changed. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 272(c), it is assumed that there is no change in the "display mode" or "time required for periodicity display" of the integrated model image display IG. The display IG is displayed in the form shown in FIG. 272(a) (the display form shown in FIG. 144(a) (integrated simulated image display IGa)) and the "period A1 hours".

On the other hand, even if the integrated model image display IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. First, as shown in FIG. 272(d), a predetermined EF display EKH is executed, and the periodicity display that has appeared so far in the integrated model image display IG is hidden (not visible). After that, as shown in FIG. 272(e), the periodic display in the integrated simulated image display IG is displayed again (visible again), whereby the periodic display in the integrated simulated image display IG is performed. It becomes possible to arouse interest in whether or not the time required for the process has changed. In the example shown in FIG. 272(e), it is assumed that both the "display mode" and the "time required for periodicity display" of the integrated model image display IG change. The image display IG is "the display mode (integrated model image display IGd) shown in FIG. 144(d)" and is displayed at the "period A2 hours". As described with reference to FIGS. 144(a) to (d), the integrated model image display IGd (FIG. 272(e)) gives a bigger hit than the integrated model image display IGc (FIG. 272(c)). This suggests that the degree of expectations (percentage) of

According to such a configuration, during the 1E reception period (a period in which a plurality of operation receptions are allowed), when the predetermined condition is satisfied by the operation reception, this triggers the integrated model image display IG. The mode (display mode, cycle time required for one cycle change) of (simulated image display) can be changed, and after that, operations can be accepted in the changed mode. That is, in this case, when the aspect of the integrated model image display IG (model image display) (display format, cycle time required for one periodic change) changes, it suggests that the expectation (high) that a big win is obtained. Since it becomes possible to play games, it is expected that the game interest will be improved.

273 and 274 are diagrams showing modifications in which the display mode of the integrated simulated image display IG (simulated image display) is changed (or not changed) based on the acceptance of the operation during the 2E acceptance period. is. 273 and 274 show how the mode of the integrated model image display IG (model image display) (the display mode and the cycle time required for its periodic change) is based on the acceptance of the operation. For the sake of convenience, the illustration of other explained configurations (decorative patterns, display after reception, etc.) is omitted. In addition, only the configuration different from the 2E receiving period according to the example of effect described above will be described, and the same configuration will not be particularly mentioned.

In the 2E reception period according to the above-described effect example, the integrated simulated image display IG is displayed so as to periodically change in the “period B time” (see FIGS. 258 and 259). In this regard, in the 2E reception period according to this modification, the integrated model image display IG is displayed so as to change cyclically at the "period B1 hour", and is different from the "period B1 hour". When it is displayed so as to perform the periodic change at "cycle B2 time" which is time, and when it is displayed at "cycle B3 time" which is a time different from both "cycle B1 time" and "cycle B2 time" There are cases where it appears to make a change. In this example, "cycle A1 hours", "cycle A2 hours", "cycle B1 hours", "cycle B2 hours", and "cycle B3 hours" are all set as different times.

More specifically, in the 2E reception period according to this modified example, first, as the integrated model image display IG, "the display mode shown in FIG. 144(a) (integrated model image display IGa)" In some cases, it is displayed in "period B1 hours", and in other cases, it is displayed in "the display mode (integrated model image display IGB) shown in FIG. 144(b)" and "period B2 hours". It's becoming

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 273(a), during the 2E acceptance period, the integrated model image display IG is set to "the display mode (integrated model image display IGa) shown in FIG. 144(a)". and is in a state in which it is displayed so as to perform periodic changes at "cycle B1 time", and in this state, an operation reception (this 2nd E reception If an operation acceptance that does not terminate the period is performed, a post-acceptance display (not shown) or the like will be displayed based on the operation acceptance.

However, if an operation is accepted during the 2E acceptance period according to this modification (an operation acceptance that does not terminate the 2E acceptance period), in addition to these display changes, the display mode of the integrated model image display IG will change. It is subject to change. That is, in the 2E reception period according to this modification, if it is not determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the operation is accepted, the When the integrated model image display IG is displayed in the mode shown in (c) and it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the operation is accepted, the 273(d) and (e), and the modes shown in FIGS. 273(f) and (g).

That is, in the 2E reception period according to this modification, a case where the first condition is satisfied as "a predetermined condition when the operation is accepted" and a second condition different from the first condition are satisfied. 273(d) and (e) based on the determination result. ), and if it is determined that the second condition is satisfied as the "predetermined condition when the operation is accepted", the determination 273(f) and (g), the integrated model image display IG is displayed.

Here, when the integrated model image display IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. , as shown in FIG. 273(b), a predetermined EF display EKH is executed, thereby hiding the periodicity display that has appeared so far in the integrated model image display IG (not visible). After that, as shown in FIG. 273(c), the periodic display in the integrated simulated image display IG is displayed again (visible again), whereby the periodic display in the integrated simulated image display IG is performed. It becomes possible to arouse interest in whether or not the time required for the process has changed. In the example shown in FIG. 273(c), it is assumed that the "display mode" and "time required for periodicity display" of the integrated model image display IG do not change. The display IG is displayed in the form shown in FIG. 273(a) (the display form shown in FIG. 144(a) (integrated simulated image display IGa)) and the "period B1 time".

On the other hand, when the integrated model image display IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. First, as shown in FIG. 273(d), a predetermined EF display EKH is executed, and the periodicity display that has appeared so far in the integrated model image display IG is hidden (not visible). After that, as shown in FIG. 273(e), the periodic display in the integrated simulated image display IG is displayed again (visible again), whereby the periodic display in the integrated simulated image display IG is made possible. It becomes possible to arouse interest in whether or not the time required for the process has changed. In the example shown in FIG. 273(e), it is assumed that only the "display mode" of the "display mode" and the "time required for periodicity display" of the integrated model image display IG changes. That is, the integrated simulated image display IG is displayed in "the display mode (integrated simulated image display IGc) shown in FIG. 144(c)" and at the "period B1 time".

Also, when the integrated simulated image display IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 273(f), a predetermined EF display EKH is executed, and the periodicity display that has appeared so far in the integrated model image display IG is hidden (not visible). After that, as shown in FIG. 273(g), the periodic display in the integrated simulated image display IG is displayed again (visible again), whereby the periodic display in the integrated simulated image display IG is performed. It becomes possible to arouse interest in whether or not the time required for the process has changed. In the example shown in FIG. 273(g), it is assumed that both the "display mode" and the "time required for periodicity display" of the integrated model image display IG change. The image display IG is "the display mode (integrated model image display IGd) shown in FIG. 144(d)" and is displayed at the "period B3 hours".

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 274(a), now, in the 2E reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display) is displayed in the display mode shown in FIG. 144(b) (integrated model image display IGb)" and is in a state in which it is displayed so as to periodically change at a "cycle B2 time", and in this state, an operation reception ( Also when an operation reception that does not end the 2E reception period is performed, a post-reception display (not shown) or the like is displayed based on the operation reception.

However, in the 2E reception period according to this modification, the integrated model image display IG is "the display mode (integrated model image display IGb) shown in FIG. In the state where it is displayed so as to make a change, even if an operation is accepted (an operation that does not end the 2E acceptance period), this will be used as a trigger to "predetermined when the operation is accepted. condition (here, the first condition or the second condition)” is never satisfied. Furthermore, the integrated simulated image display IG is in the “display mode (integrated simulated image display IGb) shown in FIG. 144(b)” and is displayed so as to periodically change at “period B2 hours”. In this state, even if an operation is accepted (an operation is accepted that does not end the 2E acceptance period), the periodic display that has appeared so far in the integrated model image display IG is hidden (not visible). ) so that you don't have to.

Therefore, in the 2E reception period according to this modification, the integrated model image display IG is in the "display mode (integrated model image display IGb) shown in FIG. 274(a)), regardless of whether or not the operation is accepted, the integrated simulated image display IG is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 274(a) ( The display is continued with the display mode and cycle B (2 hours).

According to such a configuration, during the 2E reception period (a period in which a plurality of operation receptions are permitted), the integrated model image display IG is changed to the display mode shown in FIG. 144(b) (integrated model image display IGb)" and is displayed so as to periodically change at the "cycle B2 time" (Fig. 274(a)), there is no possibility that the aspect of the integrated model image display IG will change. This makes it possible to encourage concentration on other effects such as display after reception. On the other hand, the integrated simulated image display IG is "the display mode (integrated simulated image display IGa) shown in FIG. When it is in the state of being in a state where the integrated model image display IG may change, it is suggested that the mode of the integrated model image display IG may change. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied by accepting an operation, the mode of integrated model image display IG (model image display) (display mode, cycle time required for one cycle change, etc.) is triggered by this. can be changed, and thereafter, operations can be accepted with the changed mode. That is, in this case, when the aspect of the integrated model image display IG (model image display) (display format, cycle time required for one periodic change) changes, it suggests that the expectation (high) that a big win is obtained. Since it becomes possible to play games, it is expected that the game interest will be improved.

In particular, during the 2E acceptance period (a period in which multiple operation acceptances are allowed), out of the "display mode" and the "periodic time required for one periodic change" of the integrated model image display IG, the "display mode There are cases where only "" changes, and there are cases where both "display mode" and "periodic time required for one periodic change" change, and different expectations are suggested between them. , and whether or not the "cycle time" has changed.

272 to 274, a predetermined EF display EKH is executed to hide periodic changes in the special image display (here, integrated model image display IG). However, the predetermined EF display EKH does not necessarily have to be executed. For example, by hiding the display of the special image display (here, integrated model image display IG) itself, the periodic change may be hidden, or the special image display (here, Although the display itself of the integrated model image display IG) is displayed, the special image display (Here, the integrated simulated image display IG) may be hidden from periodic changes (before change, after change).

In particular, in a state in which the periodic change (before mode change, after mode change) of the special image display (here, integrated simulated image display IG) has not yet been displayed, the display itself precedes the changed display mode. If it is displayed (visible), the tension can be preferably maintained.

In the modification shown in FIGS. 272 and 273, when the mode of the special image display (here, integrated model image display IG) does not change, the period 272(b) and 273(b) may be omitted).

In addition, in FIGS. 272(a) and 273(a), as the special image display (here, integrated model image display IG), the display mode is the same as each other (integrated model image display IGa), but the cycle time ( Although the periods A1 hours and B1 hours) are displayed in different manners, not only the period times but also the display manners may be displayed in different manners. Conversely, in FIGS. 272(a) and 273(a), as the special image display (here, the integrated model image display IG), the display mode is different from each other, but the period time is the same. You may make it In short, it is sufficient that they are displayed in mutually different modes.

In addition, in FIGS. 272(e) and 273(g), the cycle time of the special image display (here, integrated model image display IG) is set to be different from each other, but the same cycle time (cycle A 2 hours, It may be set as a cycle B (3 hours). That is, in this case, the special image displays (here, integrated model image display IG) shown in FIGS. Become.

Alternatively, in FIGS. 272(e) and 273(g), the display mode of the special image display (here, integrated model image display IG) is the same, but it may be displayed in different display modes. . 272(e) and 273(g) (here, integrated model image display IG) are displayed in different display modes and at different cycle times. Become. In this case, the special image display (here, integrated model image display IG) shown in FIG. 272(e) may be displayed in the same display manner as in FIG. 273(e). When the same display mode is used, it is desirable to set the cycle A2 hours and the cycle B1 hours as the same time.

In FIG. 274(a), both the display mode and the cycle time of the special image display (here, integrated model image display IG) are set as unique modes different from any other modes. For example, if the display mode of the special image display (here, the integrated simulated image display IG) is unique, it is possible to obtain the same effect even if the cycle time is the same as any of the other modes. be. Also, the mode shown in FIG. 274(a) may suggest that the degree of expectation is higher than any other mode.

It should be noted that the expression “different display modes” as used herein does not necessarily mean that the modes of the special image display (here, the integrated model image display IG) are different. should be different.

In addition, in the above-described modified example, the effect is realized in the 1E acceptance period (period in which multiple operations are accepted) and the 2E acceptance period (period in which operations are accepted multiple times). However, it does not have to be a performance that appears in multiple acceptance periods. For example, the performance (configuration) realized in FIGS. period).

272 (if the display mode changes while the special image display is displayed in the first mode, both the display mode and the cycle time always change), shown mode (if the display mode changes while the special image display is displayed in the second mode, there are both cases where the cycle time does not change and cases where the cycle time changes), and FIG. The mode shown (neither the display mode nor the cycle time changes when the special image display is displayed in the third mode) does not necessarily have to be realized when the operation is accepted. good. For example, a predetermined condition (first condition, second condition, etc.) may be satisfied at a predetermined timing during the reception period or the execution period of the portent effect, and the predetermined condition is satisfied. 272(c), 273(c), 274(b), etc.), the predetermined When the condition is satisfied, the display mode and cycle time in the special image display (here, the integrated model image display IG) are changed according to the contents (FIGS. 272(e), 273(e), (g) etc.).

272 (if the display mode changes when the special image display is displayed in the first mode, both the display mode and the cycle time always change); 274 (if the display mode changes when the special image display is displayed in the second mode, there are both cases where the cycle time does not change and cases where the cycle time changes), and FIG. (When the special image display is displayed in the third mode, neither the display mode nor the cycle time changes), etc. are necessarily realized as effects (configurations) related to the operation. It does not have to be In short, if a plurality of modes with different expectations are prepared as the "special image display" that is displayed so as to perform periodic changes, the performance described above (the mode shown in FIG. 272 (the special image display is displayed in the first mode, both the display mode and the cycle time change without fail), the mode shown in FIG. 273 (when the special image display is displayed in the second mode When the display mode changes when the It is possible to realize that neither the display mode nor the cycle time changes when the display is on.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to each of the production examples described above, a model image display (here, button model image BMG) that is an image display imitating the operation target (operation button 410) is displayed (as the button model image BMG It is possible to generate a "model image display reception period" during which operation reception is permitted for the operation button 410 to be modeled. When an operation is accepted during the model image display acceptance period, at least one of post-acceptance display and post-acceptance sound output can be executed based on the acceptance of the operation.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to each of the production examples described above, first, as the model image display acceptance period,
・"Short cycle display acceptance period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.)" that can be displayed so that periodic changes in the model image display (here, button model image BMG) appear in predetermined time units (every cycle A time) , 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.))",
・The periodic change in the model image display (here, the model button image BMG) is not displayed in such a manner that it appears in the predetermined time unit (every cycle A time), and the time is longer than the predetermined time (period A time). "Long cycle display reception period (2E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.) that can be displayed so as to appear in units (period B time) ))” at the very least.

On top of this, while the acceptable reception sound is always audibly output during the "short-cycle display reception period", when the reception acceptance sound is audibly output during the "long-cycle display reception period" (the 3rd E reception period , 4E reception period) and a case where no audible output is provided (2E reception period). According to such a configuration, in the "short-cycle display acceptance period", the model image display (here, button model image BMG) is periodically changed ( For example, the depiction of the up and down movement of the button) is performed, and the acceptance acceptance sound is always audibly output, so the expectation on the player side is increased, and it is expected that the game interest will be improved. become. On the other hand, in the "long-cycle display acceptance period", compared to the "short-cycle display acceptance period", it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that an operation opportunity is given. It is possible to preferably maintain the tension caused by the increased possibility of forgetting to operate.

However, in this case, if the "long cycle display reception period (2E reception period (such as FIG. 258), 3E reception period (such as FIG. 263), and 4E reception period (such as FIG. 266)" occurs, the "short cycle Compared to the display reception period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.)", the operation is strongly urged to the player. There is a concern that the interest in gaming will decrease due to the fact that it is not played. Therefore, in the "long-cycle display reception period" according to the above-described effect example, there may be cases where a mode sound (second allowable sound) that cannot appear in the "short-cycle display reception period" is output as the reception allowable sound. (see FIG. 263), it is expected that the game interest will be favorably maintained.

In addition, "long-cycle display reception period (2E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.)" and "short-cycle display reception period (second The 1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), the 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), and the 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.) do not occur at the same time. It is not possible to compare whether the time (cycle time) is long or short. Therefore, it may be difficult for the player to recognize which of the "long-cycle display reception period" and the "short-cycle display reception period" is occurring. In this regard, in the above configuration, whether or not the acceptable acceptance sound is audibly output and the type (modal sound) thereof are also checked, so that the occurrence of the "long-cycle display acceptance period" is confirmed. Since there is a possibility of being easily recognized, it is possible to preferably maintain the sense of tension when the reception acceptable sound is audibly output.

In particular, in the "long-cycle display reception period (2E reception period (FIG. 258, etc.), 3E reception period (FIG. 263, etc.), 4E reception period (FIG. 266, etc.)" related to the above-described production example, reception As permissible sounds, mode sounds that cannot appear in the "short-cycle display reception period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.)" When the (second allowable sound) is audibly output, the degree of expectation that a bigger win is obtained than when the mode sound (first allowable sound) that appears even in the "short-cycle display acceptance period" is audibly output Since the (proportion) is set high, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the model image display (here, button model image BMG) according to the above-described production example is a depiction of a movement that can appear in the operation target (operation receiving unit) (here, a depiction of repeated reciprocating motion when a pressing operation is performed). ) is repeatedly displayed as a moving image, it is possible to prompt the player to perform the operation in a natural manner. However, the periodic change in the simulated image display (here, button simulated image BMG) is not limited to this, and may be, for example, blinking light emission display.

In addition, the "long-cycle display reception period (2E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.)" and "short During the cycle display reception period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.)), an image display imitating the operation means (here, All the "periodic changes" that appear in the button model image BMG) are made to have the same content (depiction of repeating reciprocating motion when pressed), and only the time required for the periodic change is different. Alternatively, not only the time required for the periodic change but also the content of the "periodic change" itself may be different. For example, in the short-cycle display acceptance period, compared to the long-cycle display acceptance period, a model image is displayed (here, a button model image BMG) may be displayed. Alternatively, the model image display (here, button model image BMG) during the short-cycle display acceptance period is displayed as a moving image that repeatedly depicts movements that can appear in the operation receiving section, but during the long-cycle display acceptance period The model image display (here, button model image BMG) is displayed as an image display that repeatedly depicts the movement that can appear in the operation receiving section, and a depiction (blinking) that is different from the depiction of the movement that can appear in the operation receiving section. luminous display, etc.) may be displayed as an image display that repeats.

In addition, during the short-cycle display reception period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.)), a model image display (here, button model Two types of modes are prepared as periodic changes in the image BMG), one of which is "a periodic change in the model image display (here, button model image BMG) is performed in a predetermined time unit (cycle A time). Another aspect is that the periodic change in the simulated image display (here, button simulated image BMG) appears in units of time longer than a predetermined time (cycle A time). , and these two modes may appear within one short-cycle display acceptance period. According to such a configuration, even when the short-cycle display acceptance period occurs, the periodic change in the model image display (here, the model button image BMG) is longer than the predetermined time (period A time). Since it may appear in long time units, the short-cycle display reception period and the long-cycle display reception period (2E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), 4E reception It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the periods (such as FIG. 266) is occurring. If the periodic change in the model image display (here, the model button image BMG) appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time (period A time) within the short-cycle display acceptance period, the long time period is defined as the above-mentioned "cycle B time period." ' may be

In addition, during the short cycle display reception period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.)), a model image display (here, button simulation In the case of preparing two types of modes with different periodic times as the periodic changes in the image BMG), "periodic changes in the simulated image display (here, the button simulated image BMG) appear in units of a predetermined time (period A time). "Aspect displayed on" appears when the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the model image display (here, button model image BMG) is maintained in the operating state, and the model image display ( Here, when the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button model image BMG) is not operated, the "periodic change in the model image display (here, the button model image BMG)" is set for a predetermined time (period A time). Periodic changes with a later time may also appear. According to such a configuration, the short-cycle display reception period and the long-cycle display reception period (2E reception period (FIG. 258, etc.) and 3E reception period ( Fig. 263, etc.) or the 4th E acceptance period (Fig. 266, etc.)) is difficult to recognize, and after the operation is accepted, the recognition can be facilitated. become. For "periodic change of time later than predetermined time (period A time)", an image different from the model image display is displayed in front of the model image display at a position overlapping with the model image display, and the other image By displaying it as a periodic change, even if a periodic change of time later than the predetermined time (period A time) appears as "periodic change in the model image display (here, button model image BMG)" good. Also, the “periodic change” itself may be different, such as one having a period of motion and the other having a period of blinking.

Also, in the "long-cycle display reception period (2E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.))" In the reception period for the type of , the time required for periodic change in the model image display (here, button model image BMG) was set to the same time (period B time), but the time required for "periodic change" was multiple may be used. However, in this case, any time is a predetermined period in the "short-cycle display reception period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.)" It will be set as a time longer than the time (cycle A time). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult to recognize which of the short-cycle display reception period and the long-cycle display reception period is occurring. In this case, when the time period of "periodic change" is a specific time during the long period display reception period, the reception allowable sound is not output, and the period of "periodic change" during the long period display reception period When it is not the specific time, there may be a case where the acceptable acceptance sound is output and a case where it is not output.

Further, in the above-described production example, the same operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is given an opportunity to operate in all reception periods. Opportunities may be provided. For example, during the 1E acceptance period (FIG. 253, etc.), at least a model image display (button model image BMG) imitating the operation button 410 is displayed, and the operation acceptance for the operation button 410 is allowed multiple times. During the 2E reception period (FIG. 258, etc.), at least a model image display (sword decoration image SYG) simulating the sword decoration body 5001 may be displayed, and operation reception for the operation button 410 may be permitted multiple times. . Similarly, for the 3E reception period to the 6E reception period, the targets to which the operation opportunity is given may be set according to their types.

In addition, during the short cycle display reception period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.)), a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410) is displayed as a model image display (here, model button image BMG), but the long-cycle display acceptance period (2E acceptance period (FIG. 258, etc.), 3E acceptance period (FIG. 263, etc.), 4E In the reception period (FIG. 266, etc.), when a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410) is displayed as a model image display (here, button model image BMG) (for example, during the 3E reception period, the 4E reception period) period), and a case where other operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) is displayed as a model image display (sword decoration image SYG) (for example, the 2E acceptance period). Alternatively, in the long cycle display reception period, when a model image display (here, button model image BMG) imitating a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410) is displayed (for example, 3E reception period, 4E Reception period), a model image display (here, button model image BMG) that simulates a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410), and a model image that simulates other operation means (for example, sword ornament 5001) There may be a case where both the display (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed (for example, during the 2E reception period). When both a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410) and other operation means (for example, sword ornament 5001) are displayed, both of them use the same periodic time as the periodic change. is desirable. In addition, a model image display (here, button model image BMG) imitating a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) and a model image display (sword When both decorative images SYG) are displayed, the periodic changes in the simulated image displays differ from each other (for example, one is a periodic change due to blinking light emission display, and the other is a reciprocating motion of the operation receiving unit within its movable range). , etc.). In addition, in the long-period display reception period, when both a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410) and other operation means (for example, sword ornament 5001) are displayed, a specific operation means (for example, When the operation button 410) or other operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) is operated, a predetermined condition can be established, and based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, (with the acceptance of the operation as a trigger), the acceptance period will be terminated. That is, in this case, when a predetermined condition is not satisfied, the reception period is continued without being terminated with the acceptance of the operation (satisfaction of the condition). A corresponding display is displayed after acceptance.

In addition, in the above-described effect examples, the 1E reception period, the 2E reception period, the 5E reception period, and the 6E reception period do not necessarily occur as reception periods in which operation reception is permitted multiple times. , may occur as a reception period during which operation reception is permitted only once.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described production example, the "short-cycle display reception period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.) )” and “Long-cycle display reception period (2E reception period (FIG. 258, etc.) and 3E reception period (FIG. 263, etc.)” are both audible output of sound effect (here, specific BGM). (See Figures 253, 258, 263, 271, 271, etc.). In this regard, in the "short-cycle display acceptance period", the effect sound (here, the specific BGM) that was audible at the time of its occurrence is terminated (becomes inaudible) until the end of the acceptance period. However, during the "long-period display reception period", it seems that the effect sound that was audible at the time of its occurrence may end (2E reception period) before the end of the reception period. made it

That is, as the model image display acceptance period, the "short cycle display acceptance period (1st E Reception Period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E Reception Period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E Reception Period (Fig. 271, etc.)" are displayed so that periodic changes in the model image display appear in predetermined time units. "Long cycle display reception period (2E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.) that can be displayed so as to appear in units of time (period B time) longer than the predetermined time without )”, in practice, does the periodic change in the model image display (here, button model image BMG) appear in predetermined time units, or does it appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time? It is difficult to determine exactly whether In this regard, in the "short-cycle display reception period", the effect sound (here, the specific BGM) that was audible at the time of its generation will not end until the end of the reception period. In the "long-cycle display reception period", if the effect sound (here, specific BGM) that was audible at the time of its generation may be terminated before the end of the reception period, the reception period By confirming whether or not the effect sound that was audible at the time of occurrence has ended, it is possible to more accurately determine which of the "short-cycle display reception period" and the "long-cycle display reception period" is occurring. to be able to recognize

In particular, in the "short-cycle display reception period (1E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (FIG. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (FIG. 271, etc.)" related to the above-described production example, the The effect sound (specific BGM) that was audible at the time of its occurrence will not end until the end of the reception period, but the "long-cycle display reception period (2E reception period (Fig. , 3E Acceptance Period (Fig. 263, etc.)", if the effect sound (specific BGM) that was in an audible state at the time of its occurrence does not end until the end of the acceptance period (3E Acceptance Period) There is a case where it is terminated (2E acceptance period). According to such a configuration, even if the player is paying attention to whether or not the effect sound (specific BGM) that was audible at the time of occurrence of the reception period is terminated, the reception period does not end until the reception period ends. If the effect sound (specified BGM in this case) that was audible at the time of occurrence is not terminated during the period, either the "short-cycle display reception period" or the "long-cycle display reception period" will occur. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether there is. That is, in this case, the remaining time of the reception period is reduced by the amount the player delays the operation in order to confirm whether the effect sound (specific BGM) that was audible at the time of occurrence of the reception period is terminated. Coupled with this, it is expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained during the reception period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described production example, the "short-cycle display reception period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.) )” and “Long cycle display reception period (2E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.) and 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.))” (according to the type of display after reception) , specific BGM) may occur while the audible output is fading out. In short, it is sufficient that some kind of effect sound is made audible at the time when the player is given an opportunity to operate.

In addition, of the "long-cycle display reception period (2E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.) and 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.))" related to the above-described production example, until the reception period ends During the special type reception period (2E reception period) during which the effect sound (specific BGM) that was audible at the time of its occurrence can be terminated, during the reception period (the operation means that can accept multiple operations Even if the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) corresponding to the displayed model image display (here, the button model image BMG) is operated, this triggers an audible state at the time of occurrence. The output related to the effect sound (specific BGM) is not terminated (for example, it is not removed from the channel allocation for outputting the specific BGM), and (it has nothing to do with the operation) When a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the passage of a predetermined period of time or the arrival of a predetermined timing), the output of the effect sound (specific BGM) that was audible at the time of occurrence is terminated. I decided to let According to such a configuration, no matter how many operations the player performs, the output state of the effect sound (specific BGM) that was audible at the time of occurrence of the acceptance period is not affected. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize which type of acceptance period has occurred.

As described above, during the "long-cycle display acceptance period (2E acceptance period (Fig. 258, etc.) and 3E acceptance period (Fig. 263, etc.)", the time point of occurrence In the special type reception period (2E reception period) in which the effect sound (specific BGM) that was in the audible state in , can be terminated, a model image display (here, Both the button model image BMG) and the model image display (sword decoration image SYG) imitating other operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) may be displayed, but any of these operation means may be displayed. It is desirable that the effect sound (specific BGM) that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence is not ended even if the operation is performed. However, when one of these operating means is operated, the effect sound (specific BGM) that was in an audible state at the time of its generation will not be terminated by this as a trigger, but when the other is operated, it will be generated by this. The effect sound (specific BGM) that was audible at that point in time may be terminated. , it is expected to prompt the player to perform various operations.

Here, ``a sound effect (BGM, etc.) that is audible at the time of occurrence of the reception period is not rendered non-audible until the end of the reception period'' means When there are a plurality of types of effect sounds, at least one of the effect sounds may not be rendered inaudible until the acceptance period ends. In addition, ``a sound effect (BGM, etc.) that is audible at the time of occurrence of the reception period is rendered inaudible until the end of the reception period'' means that When there are a plurality of types of effect sounds, it means that all the effect sounds are rendered inaudible, that is, made silent until the end of the reception period. However, the effect sound that starts to be output after the timing at which the acceptance period occurs may be in an audible state.

Further, in the above-described effect example, the same effect sound (specific BGM) is audible at the time of occurrence of the "short-cycle display reception period" and the "long-cycle display reception period". The sound effects that are audible at the time of generation may differ from each other.

In addition, in the above-described production example, the short-cycle display reception period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.)) and a long-cycle display During the reception period (2E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.)), the same mode is displayed as a model image display that imitates the operation target. However, it is not always necessary to display the same aspect. For example, during the long-cycle display acceptance period, different modes may be displayed as simulated image display that imitates the operation target depending on the type. In addition, during the long-cycle display acceptance period, the model image display may be displayed in a special mode that cannot appear during the short-cycle display acceptance period. In this case, the model image display is displayed in the special mode. When it is done, it becomes possible to suggest that the long-cycle display acceptance period will occur. When the model image display is displayed in the special mode, the expectation (percentage) that a big win is obtained is higher than when the common mode is displayed in the short-cycle display acceptance period and the long-cycle display acceptance period. It is desirable to

In addition, the above-mentioned model image display reception period according to the above-described effect example is when the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) is audibly output, and when the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) is not audible. It is assumed that there is both a case where it occurs after the state of (4E reception period (FIG. 266, etc.)). As a result, it is expected that the effect will be improved when the model image display acceptance period occurs.

Note that, in the above-described effect example, when the 4E receiving period (such as FIG. 266) occurs during the model image display receiving period, the specified type of effect sound (specific BGM) occurs before the 4E receiving period occurs. ) is always made inaudible, and as a result, the 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.) is made only while the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) is made inaudible. It was decided to function as something that could occur. However, instead of this (or in addition to this), the short cycle display reception period (1E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (FIG. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (FIG. 271, etc.) ), according to the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended when the short-cycle display reception period occurs, "before the short-cycle display reception period occurs, a specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) is made inaudible or not made inaudible. In the 4E acceptance period (such as FIG. 266), the "long-cycle display acceptance period" occurs according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the "long-cycle display acceptance period" occurs. There may be a case where the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) is made non-audible before, and a case where it is not made non-audible. According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, it is either the "short cycle display reception period" or the "long cycle display reception period" when the operation opportunity is given. Since it becomes easy to recognize whether or not, it is possible to encourage the player to concentrate on the game even when the opportunity to operate is not given. As described above, the type of variation pattern is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the symbol variation is executed based on the determined result (variation pattern type).

When adopting such a configuration, for the "long-cycle display acceptance period", for example, the 2E acceptance period (such as FIG. 258) is the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time when the 2E acceptance period occurs Depending on the type of , ``There are cases where the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) is made inaudible before the 2E reception period occurs, and there are cases where it is not made inaudible.'' In this way, the 3E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.) and the 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.) are changed according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended when the reception period occurs "3E reception period or before the 4E reception period occurs, the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) is made inaudible or not made inaudible. That is, in this case, during the 3E receiving period, the effect sound of the specific type (specific BGM) is audibly output regardless of the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended when the 3E receiving period occurs. Therefore, during the 4E reception period, the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) is made inaudible regardless of the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the 4E reception period occurs. It will occur while you are there. In the 2E acceptance period, even if the mode of the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) changes according to the type of the previous variation pattern, it goes without saying that the mode that appears as the display after acceptance is the same.

In this regard, regarding the "short-cycle display reception period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception reception period (Fig. 271, etc.)", the short-cycle display reception It is important not to change the mode of the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) according to the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended when the period occurs. In this sense, regarding the "short-cycle display reception period", as in the above-described production example, the specific type of sound effect (specific BGM) is always audible at the time when the "short-cycle display reception period" occurs. Alternatively, a specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) is rendered inaudible prior to the occurrence of the "short-cycle display reception period", and the specific type of effect sound is made inaudible. The sound (specific BGM) may be generated only while it is in an inaudible state. Alternatively, for the "short cycle display reception period", a reception period of a type that can occur only while a specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) is in an audible state, and a specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) A reception period of a type that can occur only while in an inaudible state may be included. Even with such a configuration, the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) will not be made inaudible or maintained in an audible state, depending on the type of the previous variation pattern.

In addition, during the model image display reception period according to the above-described production example, when an operation is accepted, the display may be performed after reception in a manner in which the production pattern (decorative pattern SZ, etc.) appears to overlap from the front side ( For example, see FIG. 262 (k4), etc.). As a result, it becomes possible to emphasize the post-acceptance display, and it is expected that the performance when the operation is accepted will be improved.

In particular, in the production example described above, the "short-cycle display reception period (1E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (FIG. 270, etc.), 6E reception reception period (FIG. 271, etc.)" There is no case where the post-acceptance display is performed in a manner that overlaps the symbol SZ from the front side, and the post-acceptance display is performed behind it (see FIG. 257 etc.). 258, etc.), the 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), and the 4E reception period (Fig. period) and a case where display is performed after reception on the back side of the decorative pattern SZ (3E reception period, 4E reception period) (Fig. 262 (k4), (l4), Fig. 265, Fig. 269, etc.). According to such a configuration, when the short cycle display reception period occurs, the post-reception display is not emphasized with respect to the decorative pattern SZ, and the player is given an operation opportunity under a tense atmosphere. can be given. When the long cycle display acceptance period occurs, the display after acceptance may or may not be emphasized. While maintaining it, it becomes possible to provide a certain degree of security.

In addition, in the 2E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.) according to the above-described production example, when an operation reception for ending the reception period is made, this is used as an opportunity to receive the reception in a manner that overlaps the decorative pattern SZ from the front side. Although the post-reception display is performed, the post-reception display may also be performed in such a manner that it appears to overlap the decorative pattern SZ from the front side when an operation is received that does not end the reception period. .

In addition, in the above-described effect example, when performing the after-receipt display in a manner in which the decorative pattern SZ is superimposed from the front side based on the reception being made in the 2E reception period (FIG. 258, etc.), the player It is possible to shorten the period until the display after reception is hidden and the decorative pattern SZ becomes easy to see by a predetermined operation such as by (Fig. 262 (k4), (l4) reference). According to such a configuration, it is expected that the decrease in the interest in the game due to the deterioration in the visibility of the decorative symbol SZ when the display after reception is emphasized can be suitably suppressed.

Even in the "short cycle display reception period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.))", for the decorative pattern SZ The post-acceptance display may be performed in a manner overlapping from the front side, but in this case, the period until the post-acceptance display is hidden and the decorative pattern SZ becomes easy to see should be shortened. should not be possible.

In addition, in the "long cycle display reception period (2E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.)", the front side with respect to the decorative symbol SZ Even if the post-reception display is performed in a manner that overlaps from the reception, it is possible to shorten the period until the post-reception display is hidden and the decorative pattern SZ becomes easy to see (for example , 2E reception period) and impossible (for example, 3E reception period or 4E reception period).

In addition, during the model image display reception period according to the example of effect described above, when an operation is accepted, disappearing EF display that makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image display (decorative pattern SZ) is performed in a predetermined manner (for example, 269 (g2) to (i2), etc.) and the case where the extinguished EF display is executed in a manner different from the predetermined manner (for example, FIG. 269 (g3) to (i3), etc.) or is not executed. There is As a result, it is possible to add a dramatic effect even with the extinction EF display.

In addition, as the model image display reception period, at least the 1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), the 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), and the 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.) are prepared. , the model image display (here, button model image BMG) can be displayed so that periodic changes appear in units of a predetermined time (cycle A time) (short cycle display reception period), the 3rd E reception period and the 4th E reception period. During the reception period, the periodic changes in the model image display (here, the model button image BMG) are not displayed in units of a predetermined time (cycle A time), and are displayed for a time longer than the predetermined time (cycle B time). ) so that it can be displayed in units (long-cycle display acceptance period). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest various differences in performance depending on the length of time required for one periodic change in the model image display (here, button model image BMG). , it is expected that the sense of tension when the model image display acceptance period occurs will be favorably maintained.

Also, when the operation is accepted in the 1E acceptance period (FIG. 253, etc.), one of the multiple modes (mode UH1-1, mode UH1-2) with different expectations that a predetermined result (jackpot) is obtained 257 (p4) to (r4 257 (p3 ) to (r3) are executed (or may not be executed). This also applies to the 5E reception period (FIG. 270, etc.) and the 6E reception period (FIG. 271, etc.). On the other hand, when the operation is accepted in the 4E acceptance period (FIG. 266, etc.), there are multiple modes (mode UH4-1, mode UH4-2) with different expectations that a predetermined result (jackpot) is obtained The display after reception is executable in any one of them, and the disappearing EF display is "when the display after reception is executed in the mode (mode UH4-2) with a high degree of expectation among the above-mentioned multiple modes, from FIG. 269 (g3) to (i3) is executed, but when the post-acceptance display is executed in a mode (mode UH4-1) different from the mode with a high degree of expectation among the plurality of modes (mode UH4-1), it is different from the above mode. (g2) to (i2) are executed (or may not be executed). In this regard, if the operation is accepted during the 3E acceptance period (FIG. 263, etc.), any of the multiple modes (mode UH3-1, mode UH3-2) with different expectations for obtaining a predetermined result (jackpot) Even if the display after reception is made executable, the disappearing EF display is "one mode (Fig. 269 (f2) to (h2 ) and FIG. 269 (f3) to (h3)). According to such a configuration, during the short-period display acceptance period in which periodic changes in the model image display appear in units of a predetermined time (period A time), the degree of expectation is increased depending on the mode of disappearing EF display when the operation is accepted. From the suggestion, it is possible to provide an operation opportunity so as not to cause a feeling of uneasiness due to difficulty in recognizing the degree of expectation even though the operation has been performed. On the other hand, in the long-cycle display acceptance period, the periodic change in the model image display is not displayed in units of a predetermined time (cycle A time), but appears in units of time (cycle B time) longer than the predetermined time. Then, since there are cases where the degree of expectation is suggested and cases where the degree of expectation is not indicated by the mode of the disappearing EF display when the operation is accepted, the sense of tension when giving the opportunity to operate is preferably maintained. be able to

In addition, in the example of the effect described above, it appears when the display after the 1E reception is executed in the "low expectation mode UH1-1" based on the fact that the operation is accepted during the 1E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.). Based on the mode of EF display (effect display) EKH and the operation acceptance during the 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.), the display after reception of the 4E is executed in the "low expectation mode UH4-1". 257 (p3) to (r3 ) and FIGS. 269(g2)-(i2)). In other words, in this case, as a result of accepting the operation by appropriately pressing the button repeatedly, if the post-acceptance display is executed in a low-expectation mode, is it in a state where the operation has been accepted by multiple operations? Since it becomes difficult to recognize whether the operation has been accepted by a single operation, combined with the fact that it is in a situation where low expectations are suggested, it is recommended to encourage the user to refrain from repeatedly pressing buttons appropriately. is expected.

In addition, in the example of effect described above, the mode of EF display (effect display) EKH that appears regardless of the mode of display after reception of 3E based on the fact that the operation is accepted during the 3E reception period (FIG. 263, etc.); EF display (drawing effect display) EKH that appears when the 4E post-reception display is executed in the "high expectation mode UH4-1" based on the fact that the operation is received during the 4E reception period (FIG. 266, etc.) 265 (f2) to (h2), FIGS. 265 (f3) to (h3), and FIGS. 269 (g3) to (i3)). That is, in this case, even if the 3E post-acceptance display is executed in the low-expectation mode UH3-1 based on the fact that the operation is accepted during the 3E acceptance period (FIG. 263, etc.), the EF display ( Effect display) Since the mode of EKH can give the illusion that the degree of expectation is high, it is expected that the decline in the interest in the game will be suppressed.

In addition, in the model image display reception period according to the above-described effect example, the "short cycle display reception period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.))” and at least one of the “long-cycle display reception period (2E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.))” Allow multiple receptions.

In particular, the "short cycle display reception period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.)" related to the above-described production example is Regardless of the type of reception period, the reception of actions (operations) by the player is allowed multiple times (for example, a repeated press type). On the other hand, the "long cycle display reception period (2E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.)" is the reception period. Depending on the type (type of post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, etc.), the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player until the end of the acceptance period (while it occurs) (operation acceptance) If it occurs as a type that is allowed only once (for example, a single push type) (3E acceptance period, 4E acceptance period), and until the acceptance period ends (while it occurs), the player (2E acceptance period). According to such a configuration, when the "short-cycle display acceptance period" occurs, it is suggested that the operation acceptance is allowed a plurality of times (for example, it is a repeated pressing type). Also, when the "long cycle display reception period" occurs, it is now possible to hide whether or not the operation reception is allowed multiple times (for example, whether it is a continuous press type or not). , the operation opportunity can be given in a tense atmosphere.

In this case, even during the acceptance period (effective period) of a type that allows the player to accept an action (operation) multiple times (for example, a continuous push type), the lottery (judgment) for the effect Depending on the result of , there may be a case (possibility) that the acceptance period (effective period) ends with only one operation acceptance. The point is that the reception period (effective period) of a type with a case (pattern) that is allowed multiple times is sufficient.

Of the "long-cycle display acceptance period (2E acceptance period (FIG. 258, etc.), 3E acceptance period (FIG. 263, etc.), 4E acceptance period (FIG. 266, etc.)", the acceptance period ends During the period (2E reception period) during which the operation means for which operation reception is allowed multiple times is displayed as a model image display (here, button model image BMG), the model image display is displayed until the reception Until the end of the period, the operating means for which operation reception is permitted multiple times is not displayed as a model image display (here, button model image BMG) (3E reception period, 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.) )) may be displayed as an image display (mode) that is never displayed. That is, in this case, when the long-cycle display acceptance period occurs, it is possible to suggest whether or not this is a type that allows multiple times (for example, a repeated pressing type).

Furthermore, during the "long cycle display reception period (2E reception period (FIG. 258, etc.), 3E reception period (FIG. 263, etc.), 4E reception reception period (FIG. 266, etc.)" In the acceptance period (the 3rd E acceptance period, the 4th E acceptance period) in which only the operation means that is allowed to accept (operation acceptance) once is displayed as a model image display (here, button model image BMG) The model image display is displayed during the short cycle display reception period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.)) It is displayed as a model image display corresponding to the same operation means, the operation means corresponding to the model image display can be operated only once, and the reception of the action (operation) by the player (operation reception) is plural. In the reception period (2E reception period) in which the operation means allowed to be repeated are displayed at least as the model image display, the model image display that is not displayed in the short-cycle display reception period is displayed, and the operation means corresponding to the model image display can be operated multiple times.

In addition, during the short-cycle display reception period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.)) according to the above-described production example, a model image is displayed. , the auto-repeat function is activated for the operation means that can be operated multiple times corresponding to the long-cycle display reception period (2E reception period (Fig. etc.), and during the 4E receiving period (Fig. 266, etc.)), the auto repeated hitting function is not activated for the operating means that can be operated multiple times corresponding to the model image display. According to such a configuration, while making it difficult to recognize which of the short-cycle display reception period and the long-cycle display reception period is occurring until the player starts the operation, When the operation state is maintained continuously, it becomes possible to suggest which of the short-cycle display reception period and the long-cycle display reception period is occurring through whether or not the automatic continuous hitting function is activated. .

In addition, the model image display (here, the model button image BMG) in the "short-cycle display reception period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.) and 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.)" according to the above-described production example 253 (b ), etc.). That is, in this case, when an operation is accepted for the operation means corresponding to the model image display during the "short-cycle display acceptance period", the periodic changes that have appeared in the model image display until then are hidden. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to confirm the time required for one periodic change in the model image display, and it is possible to preferably maintain the tension when the operation is accepted. In order to obtain such effects, the 5E reception period (eg, FIG. 270) is not generated as the "short cycle display reception period".

Especially in this case, during the "short-cycle display reception period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.) and 6E reception period (Fig. When the operation means ("operation button 410" in this case) corresponding to the image BMG) is operated and the operation is accepted, the periodic changes that have appeared in the model image until then are hidden (Fig. 253 (b), etc.), in the ``long-cycle display reception period (2E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.))", When the operation means (here, "operation button 410") corresponding to the model image display (here, button model image BMG) is operated and the operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared in the model image display until then. is hidden (see Figure 263(b), Figure 266(b), etc.), and when the periodic change that has appeared in the model image display is continued without being hidden (see Figure 258(b)). According to such a configuration, when the periodic change that had appeared in the model image display until then was continued without being hidden when the operation was accepted, the "long-period display acceptance period" occurred. be able to suggest Also, when the periodic change that had appeared in the model image until then is hidden when the operation is accepted, either the "short-cycle display acceptance period" or the "long-cycle display acceptance period" has occurred. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize

Alternatively, an operation means (here, "operation button 410"), the periodic change that had appeared in the display of the simulated image until then was not hidden but continued (see FIG. 270(b), etc.). That is, in this case, even if an operation is accepted for the operation means corresponding to the model image display during the "short-cycle display acceptance period", the periodic changes that have appeared in the model image display until then are not hidden. Since it is set to continue, it is expected that it will be possible to confirm the time required for one periodic change in the model image display even after the operation is accepted. In order to obtain such effects, the 1E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.) and the 6E reception period (FIG. 271, etc.) are not generated as the "short cycle display reception period".

Especially in this case, in the "short-cycle display reception period (5E reception period (FIG. 270, etc.)" according to the above-described effect example, the operation means (here, button simulation image BMG) corresponding to the model image display (here, button model image BMG) "operation button 410") is operated to accept the operation, the periodic change that had appeared in the model image display until then continues without being hidden (see FIG. 270(b), etc.), In the "long-cycle display reception period (2E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.)", a model image display (here, button model When the operation means ("operation button 410" in this case) corresponding to the image BMG) is operated and the operation is accepted, the periodic changes appearing until then in the model image display are hidden (Fig. 263(b), FIG. 266(b), etc.), and the case where the periodic change that has appeared in the model image display is continued without being hidden (see FIG. 258(b)). I made it so. According to such a configuration, when the periodic change that had appeared in the model image display until then is hidden when the operation is accepted, it is suggested that the "long-period display acceptance period" has occurred. be able to In addition, when the periodic change that has appeared in the model image display until then is continued without being hidden when the operation is accepted, either the "short-cycle display acceptance period" or the "long-cycle display acceptance period" It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize what has occurred.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned ``the periodic change is hidden'' may be hidden by ``hiding the model image display'', or the model image display continues to be displayed. The periodic change that has appeared up to , the periodic change (progress) that has appeared up to that point may be rendered invisible to the player.

In addition, a plurality of operation means may be provided, and different operation means may be used depending on whether the periodic change is to be terminated or the periodic change is continued when an operation is accepted, or the same operation means may be used. You may do so.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the example of the effect described above, first, it is possible to generate an acceptable acceptance period during which an operation acceptance for the operating means (in this case, the operation button 410) is allowed, and the operation acceptance is allowed during the acceptable acceptance period. When the operation is accepted, at least one of post-acceptance display and post-acceptance sound output can be executed based on the acceptance of the operation. In addition, as the acceptable reception period, at least a simulated image display imitating the operation means set as the operation target in which the operation reception is permitted multiple times is displayed. , 5E reception period (FIG. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (FIG. 271, etc.), or 2E reception period (FIG. 258, etc.).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described production example, the "multiple-time allowable period" is such that "the operation reception is accepted multiple times just by continuing to operate the operation means corresponding to the model image display." At least the permissible maintenance operation period (1E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (FIG. 270, etc.), or 6E reception reception period (FIG. 271, etc.)" is prepared.

According to such a configuration, even if the player is not good at performing multiple operations within a limited time (multiple-time allowable period), the "simulated image display (here, the button simulated image BMG ) (here, the operation button 410) corresponding to ) will be accepted multiple times just by continuing to operate it. become.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described effect example, as the "multiple-time allowable period", among the plurality of operation means, "an operation means for which operation reception is allowed multiple times" is displayed as a model image (here, a button model A "maintenance operation permissible period (the first 1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), or 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.)", and operation means for which operation reception can be accepted multiple times among a plurality of operation means is displayed at least as a model image display (here, a button model image BMG). Since it was decided to prepare a "maintenance operation non-permissible period (2E acceptance period (Fig. 258, etc.)" that is not repeated, it is expected that the decline in the interest in the game will be suppressed while maintaining an appropriate sense of tension. It will be done.

In addition, in the "maintenance operation permissible period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), or 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.))" related to the above-described production example, the occurrence We decided to audibly output the reception acceptance sound. According to such a configuration, even if the player is not good at performing multiple operations within a limited time (multiple-time allowable period), when the "maintenance operation allowable period" occurs, By audibly outputting the allowable acceptance sound, it becomes easier to start the operation immediately after the permissible period for the maintenance operation occurs, and it is possible to perform the operation multiple times while there is enough remaining time. Furthermore, since "operation reception is performed multiple times only by keeping the operation means (here, the operation button 410) in an operated state", the decline in the interest in the game is reduced. suppression is expected.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described effect example, the "maintenance operation allowable period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), or 6E Acceptance period (Fig. 271, etc.))", the acceptable acceptance sound is audibly output when it occurs, but in the "Maintenance operation non-permissible period (2E acceptance period (Fig. 258, etc.))" in which the automatic continuous tapping function is not activated , Since the acceptable acceptance sound is not audibly output when it occurs, depending on whether or not the acceptable acceptance sound is audibly output, the operation acceptance can be performed multiple times simply by continuing to maintain the operating state of the operation means. It will be possible to suggest whether or not the "auto repeated hit function" will be activated.

It should be noted that in the above-described effect example, the "maintenance operation permissible period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), or 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.)" In the operation non-permissible period (second E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.)), at least the "operation means for which operation reception is permitted multiple times" is displayed as a model image display (here, button model image BMG). Although the objects are the same as each other, they may be different from each other.

In addition, during the "maintenance operation permissible period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.)" according to the above-described production example, the operation reception is not performed, including when the operation state is maintained. Each time it is performed, a change occurs in the display mode of the simulated image display that imitates the operation means that allows multiple operation receptions (the periodic change that appeared until then is hidden). In the operation non-permissible period (2E reception period (FIG. 258, etc.)), the display mode does not change even if the operation is accepted (the periodic change that has appeared until then is continued). That is, in this case, in the "maintenance operation permissible period", even if the operation is performed using the "automatic repeated tapping function", it is possible to suitably suggest that the operation is being accepted properly. It becomes possible to improve the game interest. However, if multiple operation opportunities are provided only by such performance, there is no sense of tension even though multiple operation opportunities are provided within a limited time. As a result, there is a concern that the interest in games will decrease. In this regard, in the "maintenance operation non-permissible period" according to the above-described effect example, since the display mode does not change even if the operation is accepted, it is possible to recognize whether the operation has been accepted properly. It becomes possible to make it difficult, and it is expected that the sense of tension when providing a plurality of opportunities for operation within a limited time can be appropriately maintained. In order to obtain such effects, the 5E reception period (eg, FIG. 270) is not generated as the "short cycle display reception period".

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the example of the effect described above, the "multiple times permissible period" during which at least a simulated image display imitating the operation means set as the operation target for which the operation acceptance is permitted multiple times is displayed is can occur while some sound effect (BGM) is being audibly output, but the sound effect (BGM) is made inaudible until the "multiple-time allowable period" ends. case (2E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.)) and when not in an inaudible state (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.) )) and was made to be.

According to such a configuration, when the effect sound (BGM) that was audible at the time of occurrence of the acceptance period is changed to an inaudible state while the operation opportunity is given, the operation acceptance is performed in a plurality of ways. It becomes possible to suggest that there is a situation in which a “multiple-time allowable period” that is allowed multiple times is occurring. In addition, even if the player is not good at performing multiple operations within a limited time (multiple-time allowable period), "just keep operating the operation means corresponding to the model image display. Since there are cases where the operation is accepted multiple times, it is expected to suppress the decline in game interest.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described effect example, the "maintenance operation permissible period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception Period (Fig. 271, etc.)”, the effect sound (BGM, etc.) that is audible at the time of its generation is not made non-audible until the “maintenance operation permitted period” ends, but the automatic During the "maintenance operation non-permissible period (2E receiving period (Fig. 258, etc.)" in which the continuous hit function is not activated, the effect sound (BGM, etc.) that is audible at the time of occurrence is to be inaudible until the end of the According to such a configuration, when the "multiple-time allowable period" occurs, the effect sound (such as BGM) that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence until the "multiple-time allowable period" ends is turned off. Depending on whether or not the audible state is set, it is possible to suggest whether or not the "automatic repeated tapping function", in which operation reception is performed multiple times simply by continuing to operate the operation means, is activated or not. become.

In addition, in the "maintenance operation non-permissible period (2E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.)" according to the above-described production example, during the reception period (as an image display imitating an operation means that can accept multiple operations) Even if the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) corresponding to the displayed model image display (here, the button model image BMG) is operated, the production sound that was in an audible state at the time of generation is triggered by this operation. The output of (specific BGM) is not terminated (for example, removed from the channel allocation for outputting the specific BGM). That is, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (which has nothing to do with the operation) (for example, the passage of a predetermined period of time or the arrival of a predetermined timing), the audible state was present at the time of occurrence. The output of the effect sound (specific BGM) is terminated. According to such a configuration, no matter how many operations the player performs, the output state of the effect sound (specific BGM) that was audible at the time of occurrence of the acceptance period is not affected. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize which type of acceptance period has occurred.

Here, ``the effect sound (BGM, etc.) that is audible at the time the multiple-time allowable period occurs is not rendered inaudible until the multiple-time allowable period ends'' means When there are a plurality of types of audible effect sounds, it is sufficient that at least one of them is not rendered non-audible until the multiple-time allowable period ends. In addition, ``a sound effect (BGM, etc.) that is audible at the time the multiple-time allowable period occurs is rendered inaudible until the multiple-time allowable period ends'' means that at the time of occurrence, When there are multiple types of sound effects that are audible, it means that all of the sound effects are made non-audible, that is, made silent before the end of the multiple-time allowable period. do. However, the effect sound that starts to be output after the timing at which the acceptance period occurs may be in an audible state.

In this case, the "maintenance operation permissible period" and the "maintenance operation non-permissible period" may occur while the volume of the audible output of the effect sound (BGM) is reduced (suppressed). That is, it is sufficient if there is an effect sound (such as BGM) that is audible at the time when the "multiple-time allowable period" occurs.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, the "maintenance operation allowable period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. ))” and the “maintenance operation non-permissible period (2E acceptance period (Fig. 258, etc.)” in which the automatic repeated hitting function is not activated), and the same effect sound (specific BGM) is audible at the time of their occurrence. However, the effects that are audible at the time of their occurrence may differ from each other.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the example of the production described above, the "multiple times permissible period" is the case where the specific type of production sound (here, specific BGM) is audibly output, and the case where the specific type of production In some cases, the sound (here, the specific BGM) is generated after being rendered inaudible. More specifically, as a "multiple-time allowable period" that can occur while a specific type of effect sound (here, specific BGM) is being audibly output, it is possible to accept operations for a plurality of times among a plurality of operation means. The operation means (here, the operation button 410) that can be operated is displayed at least as a model image display (here, a button model image BMG), and the operation means corresponding to the model image display is kept in an operated state. "Maintenance operation permissible period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.)" in which operation reception is performed multiple times, and a plurality of operation means Of these, at least the operation means (here, the operation button 410) that can be operated multiple times is displayed as a model image display (here, a button model image BMG). A "maintenance operation non-permissible period (second E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.))" is prepared in which operation reception is not performed multiple times only by continuing to maintain the operated state.

In this regard, in the "maintenance permissible period of operation", depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time when the permissible maintenance operation period occurs, a specific type of production is performed before the permissible period of maintenance operation occurs. The sound (here, the specific BGM) is not made inaudible or not made inaudible. When the specific type of effect sound (here, specific BGM) is made inaudible before the "maintenance operation non-permissible period" occurs according to the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended ( When a specific type of production sound is inaudible and the maintenance operation non-permissible period occurs), and when it is not made non-audible (a specific type of production sound is audible and the maintenance operation non-permissible period is may occur). According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous variation pattern, when the "multiple times allowable period" occurs, this is the "maintenance operation allowable period" and the "maintenance operation non-allowable period". Since it becomes easy to recognize which one it is, it is possible to encourage concentration on the game even when an operation opportunity is not given. As described above, the type of variation pattern is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the symbol variation is executed based on the determined result (type of variation pattern).

When adopting such a configuration, the "maintenance operation permissible period (1E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.), 5E reception period (FIG. 270, etc.), 6E reception period (FIG. 271, etc.)" It is important to prevent the mode of the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) from changing according to the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the maintenance operation permissible period occurs. In this sense, regarding the "maintenance operation permissible period", as in the above-described effect example, the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) must be in an audible state at the time when the "maintenance operation permissible period" occurs. Alternatively, the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) is made inaudible before the “maintenance operation permissible period” occurs, and the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) may be set to occur only when the background music is set to an inaudible state. Alternatively, regarding the "maintenance operation permissible period", there is a reception period for a type that can occur only while a specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) is in an audible state, and a specific type effect sound (specific BGM) is non-audible. A reception period of a type that can occur only while in an audible state may be included. Even with such a configuration, the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) will not be made inaudible or maintained in an audible state, depending on the type of the previous variation pattern.

It should be noted that during the "maintenance operation non-permissible period (second E acceptance period (FIG. 258, etc.))", a specific type of effect sound is generated according to the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the maintenance operation permissible period occurs. It is needless to say that the same mode is displayed as the post-acceptance display regardless of the mode of (here, the specific BGM).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described production example, the state in which the operation means (here, the operation button 410) corresponding to the model image display (here, the button model image BMG) is operated as the "multiple-time allowable period". At least a "maintenance operation permissible period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.))" is prepared in which the operation reception is performed multiple times just by continuing to maintain the " In the "maintenance operation permissible period", when an operation is accepted, the display mode (visibility) as a model image display that has appeared until then is changed (Fig. 253 (b) and Fig. 271 (b) reference).

According to such a configuration, even if the player is not good at performing multiple operations within a limited time (multiple-time allowable period), it is possible to "operate the operation means corresponding to the display of the model image." Since the operation reception will be performed multiple times just by continuing to maintain the state, it is expected that the decline in the interest in the game will be suppressed. In addition, when an operation is accepted, the display mode as the model image display that has appeared until then is changed. is properly done.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described effect example, during the "maintenance operation allowable period" of the "multiple times allowable period", when the operation is accepted, the display mode (visual recognition) as the model image display that has appeared until then However, during the "maintenance operation non-permissible period", even if the operation is accepted, the display mode (visibility) as the model image display that has appeared until then is not changed. According to such a configuration, during the "maintenance operation permissible period", it is suggested that the operation reception is properly performed only by maintaining the operation state, so that the auto repeated hitting function is activated. Together with this, it is expected to improve the amusement of games. On the other hand, in the "maintenance operation non-permissible period", even if the operation is accepted, it is difficult to recognize whether the operation is properly accepted. It is expected that the user will be encouraged to repeat the operation more positively.

In this case, in the "maintenance operation permissible period", when the operation is accepted due to the activation of the auto repeated hit function, compared to the case where the operation is not accepted , the time required for periodic changes in the simulated image display to be different.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described production example, first, a model image display (here, button model image BMG), which is an image display imitating the operation means (here, the operation button 410), is displayed and an operation reception is performed. A permissible model image display acceptance period can be generated, and when an operation is accepted during the model image display acceptance period, at least one of post-acceptance display and post-acceptance sound output is generated based on the acceptance of the operation. It is executable. Further, the simulated image display can be displayed in such a manner that a periodic change appears as an image display imitating the operating means.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described production example, during the model image display reception period, only the image display simulating the operation means set as the operation target for which operation reception is permitted once is displayed. ``Specific type of model image display reception period (3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.), etc.)'' displayed as a display and an operation target for which operation reception is permitted multiple times "Special type model image display reception period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 2E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.) , 5E Reception Period (Fig. 270, etc.), and 6E Reception Period (Fig. 271, etc.)", and one operation reception is permitted during the "specified type of model image display reception period". When an operation means (here, the operation button 410) set as an operation target and a target to be displayed as a model image display is operated and an operation is accepted, the operation is accepted. , the periodic change that had appeared in the model image display (here, button model image BMG) corresponding to the operation means is hidden, and during the "special type model image display acceptance period", the operation acceptance is set as an operation target that is permitted multiple times and is displayed as a model image display. The periodic change that had appeared in the corresponding model image display (here, button model image BMG) was made to continue.

According to such a configuration, when the operation is accepted, depending on whether or not the periodic change that has appeared in the model image display until then is hidden, the "specified type of model image display acceptance period (operation It is possible to suggest which of the "special type model image display reception period (operation reception is permitted multiple times)" is occurring.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described effect example, when the "special type model image display reception period (multiple operations)" occurs, when the reception permission sound is audibly output (1E reception period (Fig. 253) etc.), the 6E acceptance period (see FIG. 271, etc.), and the case where the acceptable acceptance sound is not audibly output (the 2E acceptance period (see FIG. 258, etc.)). In addition, when the reception acceptance sound is audibly output (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.)), the "special type model image display reception period (multiple times Operation)”, when an operation means set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is permitted multiple times is operated and an operation is accepted, the periodic changes that have appeared so far in the model image display are hidden. (See FIG. 253(b) and FIG. 271(b)), if the acceptable acceptance sound is not audibly output (2E acceptance period (FIG. 258, etc.)), the "special type model image display acceptance period (multiple times Operation)”, when an operation means set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is permitted multiple times is operated and an operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared in the model image display until then continues without being hidden. (See FIG. 258(b)). According to such a configuration, when the "special type model image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" occurs, depending on whether or not the acceptance permission sound is audibly output, the model image is displayed when the operation is accepted. It becomes possible to suggest whether or not the periodic change that has appeared in the display until then is hidden (whether or not the user is appropriately notified that the operation is being accepted). That is, in this case, when the "special type of model image display reception period (multiple operations)" occurs, if the reception acceptance sound is not output, it is difficult to recognize that the operation is being accepted. It becomes possible to recognize in advance that it is necessary to perform operations a plurality of times, so that the game can be played in a tense atmosphere. In order to obtain such effects, the 5E reception period (eg, FIG. 270) is not generated as the "short cycle display reception period".

It should be noted that the operation means set as the operation target that is permitted multiple times may be the same when the periodic change is terminated and when the periodic change is continued, or may be different. good.

In addition, only the operation means set as the operation target for which the reception of operation is allowed only once in the "reception period for displaying a model image of a specific type (single operation)" is displayed as the model image (in this case, the button model image BMG). , the acceptable reception sound may be audibly output and may not be audibly output. However, only the operation means set as an operation target that is allowed to accept operation only once in the specified type of model image display acceptance period (one operation) is the model image display (here, button model image BMG). When it is displayed, the acceptable acceptance sound may be audibly output. When the permissible sound is audibly output, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether multiple operations are permitted or one operation is permitted.

Alternatively, the 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.) is generated as the "special type model image display reception period (multiple operations)", and the 1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.) or the 6E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.) may not occur. That is, in this case, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described effect example, when the "special type model image display reception period (multiple operations)" occurs, the reception permission sound is audibly output (the 5E reception period ( FIG. 270, etc.)) and a case where the acceptable reception sound is not audibly output (2E acceptance period (FIG. 258, etc.)). However, regardless of whether the reception acceptable sound is audibly output (5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.)) or when the reception acceptance sound is not audibly output (2E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.)) , when an operation is accepted by operating an operation means that is set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is permitted multiple times during the "special type model image display acceptance period (multiple operations)", based on this The cyclical changes appearing in the model image display are not hidden by this method, and the cyclical changes appearing in the model image display are determined whether or not the operation has been accepted (in a manner that does not end the acceptance period). It will continue regardless. In this regard, when the "special type of model image display reception period (multiple operations)" occurs, if the reception permission sound is audibly output (5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.)), it means that the operation reception has been performed. (see FIG. 270(d)), when the acceptable reception sound is not audibly output (2E reception period (FIG. 258, etc.)), even if the operation is accepted, the EF The display (see FIG. 258(d)) is not displayed. According to such a configuration, when the "special type of model image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" occurs, depending on whether or not the acceptance permission sound is audibly output, if the operation is accepted, It becomes possible to suggest whether or not the corresponding EF display is executed (whether or not the fact that the operation is accepted is appropriately notified). Note that the "EF display" in this example means that the display area of the model image display that continues to change periodically regardless of whether or not the operation is accepted is overlapped with the model image display (on the layer). ) is an image display displayed on the front side. Therefore, when the "EF display" is displayed, it is difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display that continues to change periodically, and it is possible to suggest that the operation reception is properly performed. Become. That is, in this case, when the "special type of model image display reception period (multiple operations)" occurs, if the reception acceptance sound is not output, it is difficult to recognize that the operation is being accepted. It becomes possible to recognize in advance that it is necessary to perform operations a plurality of times, so that the game can be played in a tense atmosphere.

In addition, the above-mentioned "special type of model image display reception period (multiple operations)" according to the above-described effect example is the same until the "special type of model image display reception period (multiple operations)" ends. When the production sound that was audible at the time of generation is not made non-audible (1E reception period (see FIG. 253(h)), 6E reception period (see FIG. 271(h))) and its occurrence There is a case where the effect sound that was in an audible state is changed to an inaudible state (2E receiving period (see FIG. 258(h))).

Then, while the "special type of model image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" has occurred and the production sound that was in an audible state at the time of occurrence is being audibly output, the operation acceptance is allowed multiple times. When an operation means (here, the operation button 410) set as an operation target to be operated is operated and an operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared so far in the model image display corresponding to the operation means is hidden. (1E reception period (see FIG. 253(h)), 6E reception period (see FIG. 271(h))), and the cycle that has appeared so far in the model image display corresponding to the operation means It is arranged that there is a case where the target change is continued without being hidden (2E acceptance period (see FIG. 258(h))). It should be noted that here, "the case where the periodic change that has appeared in the model image display corresponding to the operation means continues without being hidden" means the 2E reception period (see FIG. 258(h)). , it is assumed that the operation is accepted in the state of audible output before the effect sound that was in the audible state at the time of its generation is made inaudible.

In addition, while the "special type of model image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" has occurred and the effect sound that was audible at the time of occurrence is made inaudible, multiple operations are accepted. When an operation means set as an operation target that is permitted to be operated once is operated and the operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared so far in the model image display corresponding to the operation means is continued without being hidden. I made it

According to such a configuration, when the "special type model image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" occurs, the audible state at the time of occurrence is within the "special type model image display acceptance period". When the production sound is made inaudible, it is suggested that the periodic change that had appeared in the model image display until then when the operation was accepted will continue without being hidden. If the operation is accepted while the effect sound that was audible at the time of occurrence is still being audibly output within the "simulated image display acceptance period", the periodic changes that have appeared in the simulated image display until then are hidden. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not it is done.

Alternatively, the 5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.) is generated as the "special type model image display reception period (multiple operations)", and the 1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.) or the 6E reception period (Fig. 271 etc.) may not occur. That is, in this case, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described effect example, the "special type model image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" ends the "special type model image display acceptance period (multiple operations)". If the effect sound that was in an audible state at the time of its occurrence is not made inaudible (5E reception period (Fig. 270, etc.)) and the effect sound that was in an audible state at that time is not made inaudible (2E reception period (see FIG. 258(h))). In this case, regardless of whether or not the effect sound that was audible at the time of occurrence of the "special type model image display reception period (multiple operations)" is made inaudible, the "special type When an operation means set as an operation target for which operation acceptance is permitted multiple times in "model image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" is operated and an operation is accepted, it will appear in the model image display based on this. Therefore, the periodic changes appearing in the model image display continue regardless of whether or not the operation is accepted (in a manner that does not end the acceptance period). It will be done. In this regard, it is permissible to accept operations multiple times while the "special type of model image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" has occurred and the effect sound that was audible at the time of occurrence is being audibly output. When the operation means (here, the operation button 410) set as the operation target to be performed is operated and the operation is accepted, the EF display is displayed based on the acceptance of the operation (Fig. 270 (d)), and there are cases where the EF display is not displayed even if the operation is accepted (see FIG. 258(d)). It should be noted that "when the EF display is not displayed even if the operation is accepted" here means that during the 2E acceptance period (see FIG. 258(h)), the effect sound that was audible at the time of This is based on the assumption that an operation is accepted while in the audible output state, prior to the non-audible state. In addition, while the ``special type of model image display acceptance period (multiple operations)'' has occurred and the effect sound that was audible at the time of occurrence is made inaudible, the operation reception is performed multiple times. When an operation means set as an operation target that is permitted to be operated once is operated and an operation is accepted, the EF display will not be displayed with this as a trigger (see FIG. 258(d)). reference).

According to such a configuration, when the "special type model image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" occurs, the audible state at the time of occurrence is within the "special type model image display acceptance period". When the effect sound is made inaudible, it is suggested that the "EF display" will not be displayed when the operation is accepted, but when it occurs within the "special type of model image display acceptance period" When the operation is accepted while the effect sound that was in the audible state is being audibly output, whether or not the "EF display" is displayed when the operation is accepted ) can be made difficult to recognize. Therefore, during the "special type of model image display acceptance period (multiple operations)", when the production sound that was audible at the time of occurrence is made inaudible, the operation is being accepted. It becomes possible to recognize in advance that it is necessary to perform a plurality of operations under the condition that it is difficult to recognize, and the game can be played with a sense of tension.

In the example of the effect described above, the same effect sound (specific BGM) is audibly output at the time of occurrence in each reception period, but different effect sounds may be audibly output.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described effect example, the model image display acceptance period is defined as "a model image display acceptance period of a type that can occur while the specific BGM is audibly output (for example, the 1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 2E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. It can be categorized into "a period for accepting a type of model image display that cannot be performed (e.g., the period for accepting a 4E period (Fig. 266, etc.))", and "a type of model image display that can occur while specific BGM is being audibly output. Reception period" refers to a "specific type of model image display reception period (the 3rd E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.)", and "Special type of model image display reception It can be further classified into periods (eg, 1E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.), 2E reception period (FIG. 258, etc.), 6E reception period (FIG. 271, etc.)". In addition, during the "specified type of model image display reception period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.), 6E reception reception period (Fig. 271, etc.)", operation reception is 1 When an operation means set as a permitted operation target and displayed as a model image display is operated and an operation is accepted, the operation means is operated on the basis of the acceptance of the operation. 253(b), 263(b), 271(b), etc.) are hidden, and the "special type In the model image display acceptance period (for example, the 2E acceptance period (Fig. 258, etc.))", an operation that is set as an operation target that is allowed to accept operations multiple times and that is to be displayed as a model image display When a means is operated and the operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared in the model image display corresponding to the operating means can be continued (for example, see FIGS. 258 to 262).

According to such a configuration, when the operation acceptance is given while the specific BGM is audibly output, the "specified type of model image display acceptance period (operation acceptance is allowed once)" and the "special type of While making it difficult to recognize which one of the model image display acceptance period (manipulation acceptance is allowed multiple times), and appropriately maintaining the sense of tension, when the operation acceptance is made, it will be displayed on the model image. Depending on whether or not the periodic changes that had appeared up until now were hidden, the "specified type of model image display acceptance period (allowing one operation acceptance)" and "special type model image display acceptance period (operation acceptance is allowed multiple times)”, which is occurring.

In addition, the "special type model image display reception period" according to the above-described effect example is set when an operation means set as an operation target for which operation reception is permitted multiple times is operated and the operation is accepted. ``The first special type model image display reception period (for example, the 1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), the 6E reception period ( FIG. 271, etc.))”, and the “second special type model image display acceptance period (2E acceptance period (Fig. 258, etc.))”, and “first special type model image display reception period (e.g., 1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.))” occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output regardless of the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time the "first special type model image display reception period" occurs. The second special type model image display acceptance period (2E acceptance period (Fig. 258, etc.)) is the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time when the "second special type model image display acceptance period" occurs Depending on the type of BGM, there may be cases where it occurs while the specific BGM is being output audibly and cases where it occurs while the specific BGM is in an inaudible state. According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous variation pattern, when the "multiple permissible period" occurs while the specific BGM is being audibly Since it can be used as a criterion for determining whether or not the periodic change that has appeared until then is hidden, even when the opportunity to operate is not given, the player can concentrate on the game. will be able to encourage As described above, the type of variation pattern is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the symbol variation is executed based on the determined result (variation pattern type).

When adopting such a configuration, when an operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared in the model image display until then is hidden. Period (Fig. 253, etc.), 6E Reception Period (Fig. 271, etc.)", it depends on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the model image display reception period of the first special type occurs. , it is important not to change the mode of the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM).

In addition, in the "second special type model image display acceptance period (2E acceptance period (Fig. 258, etc.))", when the second special type model image display acceptance period occurs, It goes without saying that the same mode is displayed as the post-acceptance display regardless of the mode of the specific type of effect sound (here, the specific BGM) according to the pattern type.

Alternatively, the 1E receiving period (Fig. 253, etc.) and the 6E receiving period (Fig. 271, etc.) should be generated as a model image display receiving period of a type that cannot occur while specific BGM is audibly output. may That is, in this case, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described effect example, the model image display acceptance period is defined as "the type of model image display acceptance period that can occur while the specific BGM is being audibly output (for example, the 2E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.), 3E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.)" and "a period for receiving a model image display of a type that cannot occur while specific BGM is being audibly output (for example, the 1E reception period (Fig. 263, etc.) 253, etc.), 4E Reception Period (Fig. 266, etc.), and 6E Reception Period (Fig. "Display acceptance period" refers to a "specified type of model image display acceptance period (3rd E Acceptance period (Fig. 263, etc.)" and "Special type of model image display" in which at least an image display imitating an operation means set as an operation target that is allowed to accept operations multiple times is displayed as the above model image display Reception period (for example, 2E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.))". In the "specified type of model image display acceptance period (3E acceptance period (Fig. 263, etc.)"), the operation is set as an operation target that is allowed to accept one operation and is displayed as a model image display. When the operation means is operated and the operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared so far in the model image display corresponding to the operation means is hidden based on the acceptance of the operation. (see, for example, FIG. 263(b)), and during the "special type model image display acceptance period (for example, the 2E acceptance period (see FIG. 258, etc.))," When an operation means that is set as a model image display and is targeted to be displayed as a model image display is operated and an operation is accepted, the periodic change that has appeared in the model image display corresponding to the operation means It will be possible to continue (see, eg, FIGS. 258-262).

Even with such a configuration, when an operation reception is given while the specific BGM is being audibly While maintaining the tension appropriately by making it difficult to recognize which one of the model image display acceptance period (operation acceptance is allowed multiple times), when the operation is accepted, the model image is displayed Depending on whether or not the cyclical changes that had appeared until then were hidden, the "specified type of model image display acceptance period (operation acceptance allowed once)" and "special type model image display acceptance period (operation It will be possible to suggest which of the reception is allowed multiple times)

Also in this case, the "special type model image display acceptance period (2E acceptance period (Fig. 258, etc.))" Depending on the type of variation pattern, there are cases where the specific BGM is audibly output and cases where the specific BGM is made non-audible. Then, "a type of model image display reception period (for example, the 1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), the 4E reception period (Fig. 266, etc.), the 6E reception Period (Fig. 271, etc.)” is set to occur while the specific BGM is in an inaudible state, regardless of the type of the previous variation pattern that ended when the reception period occurred. good too. According to such a configuration, even if the "multiple permissible period" occurs while the specific BGM is in an inaudible state, if the player remembers the type of the previous variation pattern, , Since it is possible to guess which type the "multiple-time allowable period" is, it is possible to encourage concentration on the game even when the opportunity to operate is not given. .

Alternatively, the 2E reception period (Fig. 258, etc.) and the 5E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.) and the 6E reception period (FIG. 271, etc.) may not be generated. In this regard, the 2E acceptance period (Fig. 258, etc.) of the "special type model image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" ends when the 2E acceptance period (Fig. 258, etc.) occurs. Depending on the type of the previous variation pattern, there are cases where the specific BGM is audibly output and cases where the specific BGM is made inaudible. , the 5E acceptance period (FIG. 270, etc.) of the "special type model image display acceptance period (multiple operations)" may be configured in either of the following configurations a and b.
a. It occurs only while the specific BGM is audible, regardless of the type of the previous variation pattern that ended when the reception period occurred.
b. It occurs only while the specific BGM is in an inaudible state, regardless of the type of the previous variation pattern that ended when the reception period occurred.

In the case of adopting either configuration a or b above, when the "multiple permissible period" occurs, "the periodic change that has appeared until then is hidden in response to the reception of the operation". Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the operation reception is properly performed while the operation is being performed a plurality of times. However, when the operation is accepted during the 5E acceptance period (FIG. 270, etc.), unlike the case of the 2E acceptance period (FIG. 270, etc.), the EF display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed. Therefore, regardless of which of the above configurations a and b is adopted, the player can remember the type of the previous variation pattern to determine whether the EF display corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed. It becomes possible to recognize in advance whether or not (whether or not the operation is properly accepted is notified), and the game can be played with a sense of tension.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the example of the effect described above, first, it is possible to generate an acceptable acceptance period during which an operation acceptance for the operating means (in this case, the operation button 410) is allowed, and the operation acceptance is allowed during the acceptable acceptance period. When the operation is accepted, at least one of post-acceptance display and post-acceptance sound output can be executed based on the acceptance of the operation. In addition, during the acceptable acceptance period, it is possible to display the "acceptance period related periodicity display", which is an image display in which periodic changes can appear. At least a “permissible period” should be prepared.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described effect example, at least the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH2 are displayed as the above-mentioned "acceptance period-related periodicity display" as the "multiple-time allowable period". "A specific multiple-time allowable period (1E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.)", and at least the third periodicity display SH3 and the fourth periodicity display SH4 are displayed as the above-mentioned "reception period related periodicity display" Prepare at least a special multiple-time allowable period (2E reception period (FIG. 258, etc.)). Then, in the "specific multiple-time allowable period", the periodic change that has appeared so far is hidden in the first periodicity display SH1 each time an operation that is allowed multiple times is accepted.

According to such a configuration, an operation is accepted by confirming the number of times the periodic change appearing in the "first periodicity display SH1" is hidden during the "specific multiple-time allowable period." You will be able to check the number of times

In addition, in the above-mentioned "specific multiple times permissible period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.)" according to the above-described production example, when the reception permissible sound is generated, it is audibly output and is permitted multiple times. Each time an operation is accepted (an operation is accepted that does not end the acceptance period), the periodic change that has appeared up to that time is hidden in the "first periodicity display SH1", but is hidden in the "second periodicity display SH2". In , the periodic change that had appeared until then was continued (see Fig. 256 (g2), Fig. 257 (l3), etc.). In addition, in the "special multiple-time allowable period (2E acceptance period (Fig. 258, etc.)", the acceptance acceptance sound is not audibly output when it occurs, and the operation acceptance that is allowed multiple times (the acceptance period is not terminated) 261 (f2 ) and FIG. 262(i3)). In other words, in this case, through the presence or absence of the audible output of the acceptance acceptance sound, "Is it possible to recognize whether or not the operation acceptance has been properly made by checking the mode of the acceptance period-related periodicity display when the operation is accepted?" ” can be suggested. In addition, even when an audible reception acceptance sound is output (when it is suggested that it is possible to recognize whether or not the operation reception has been properly performed), instead of the "first periodicity display SH1" A person who mistakenly gazes at the "second periodicity display SH2" will find it difficult to recognize whether or not the operation reception has been properly performed. become.

However, as the "multiple-time allowable period", the "specific multiple-time allowable period" in which at least the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH2 are displayed as the above-mentioned "acceptance period-related periodicity display" It may occur as the 6E reception period (FIG. 271, etc.) instead of the 1E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.). That is, in this case, each time an operation reception that is permitted multiple times (an operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed, the cycle that has appeared up to that point is displayed in both the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH2. The target change is hidden, and this makes it possible to easily recognize whether or not the operation has been properly accepted. However, in this case, it is desirable that the first periodic display SH1 and the second periodic display SH2 are started to be displayed at the same timing (see FIG. 271(e)). Moreover, it is desirable that the periodic change in the first periodicity display SH1 and the periodic change in the second periodicity display SH2 are performed in the same cycle time.

Further, in the "specific multiple-time allowable period (1E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.) or 6E reception period (FIG. 271, etc.)", when the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated, the operation With this as a trigger, the periodic change in the "acceptance period related periodicity display" is hidden, and in the "special multiple-time allowable period (2E acceptance period (such as FIG. 258)), the first operation means When a second operating means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) is operated, the operation is accepted. may

Also, when generating the 6E receiving period (such as FIG. 271) as the "specific multiple-time allowable period", the time required for one periodic change of the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH2 is become the same as each other. On the other hand, in the "special multiple-time allowable period (2E reception period (eg, FIG. 258)), the times required for one periodic change of the third periodicity display SH3 and the fourth periodicity display SH4 are different from each other. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the type of reception period that has occurred through the relationship of the time required for periodic change in the "reception period related periodicity display". It should be noted that the time required for one periodic change of the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH2 may be the same in the 1E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.) as well.

Also, when the 1E reception period (eg, FIG. 253) is generated as the "specific multiple-time allowable period", the timings of displaying the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH2 are made different from each other. On the other hand, "during a special multiple-time allowable period (2E acceptance period (FIG. 258, etc.)), the third periodicity display SH3 and the fourth periodicity display SH4 are displayed at the same timing. , the type of reception period that has occurred can be suggested through the relationship of the display timing of the "reception period related periodicity display". It should be noted that the timings at which the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH2 are displayed may be made different from each other also in the 6E reception period (FIG. 271, etc.).

In addition, when the 1E receiving period (such as FIG. 253) is generated as the "specific multiple times allowable period", the precursor effect display ZED is performed at the time of occurrence. Of the SH1 and the second periodicity display SH2, only the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed in a manner that makes it difficult to see. More specifically, the portent effect display ZED is displayed so as to overlap in front of the first periodic display SH1, but is displayed in such a manner as to overlap in front of the second periodic display SH2. It was set so that it would not be displayed (not displayed at a position overlapping with the second periodicity display SH2, or displayed behind the second periodicity display SH2). According to such a configuration, depending on whether or not it is made difficult to see in relation to the foreshadowing effect display ZED, whether the first periodicity display SH1 or the second periodicity display SH2 is observed allows the operation to be properly accepted. It becomes easier to recognize whether or not the

Also, when the sixth E reception period (such as FIG. 271) is generated as the "specific multiple-time allowable period", the precursor effect display ZED is performed at the time of occurrence. It is desirable that both SH1 and the second periodicity indication SH2 be displayed in a manner that makes them difficult to see. That is, in this case, the portent effect display ZED is displayed so as to overlap in front of both the first periodicity display SH1 and the second periodicity display SH1.

In addition, in the above-mentioned "specific multiple times allowable period (1E reception period (such as FIG. 253) or 6E reception period (such as FIG. 271)" related to the above-described production example, the operation reception that is permitted multiple times ( Each time an operation acceptance that does not terminate the acceptance period is performed, the periodic change that has appeared up to that time is hidden in the "first periodicity display SH1", but it is hidden in the "second periodicity display SH2". The periodic change that had appeared until was continued (see FIG. 253(e)). In addition, in the "special multiple-time allowable period (2E acceptance period (FIG. 258, etc.)", even if the operation acceptance that is allowed multiple times (operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period) is performed, the "third periodicity In both "display SH3" and "fourth periodicity display SH4", the periodic changes that have appeared up to that point are not hidden but are continued (see FIG. 258(e)). reference). Then, the ``specific multiple-time allowable period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.) or 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.)'' is set until the ``specific multiple-time allowance period'' ends The effect sound that was audible at the time of its occurrence is not changed to an inaudible state (see FIG. 253(h)), and the “special multiple-time allowable period (2E reception period)” Until the end of the “permissible period of time”, the production sound that was audible at the time of its occurrence is made inaudible (see FIG. 258(h)). In other words, in this case, whether or not the effect sound that was audible at the time of its occurrence is made inaudible before the end of the acceptance period (effective period) is determined by the "reception when the operation is accepted." By confirming the aspect of the period-related periodicity display, it is possible to recognize whether or not the operation reception has been properly performed. In particular, when the "specific multiple times permissible period" is generated as the 1E reception period (such as FIG. 253) instead of the 6E reception period (such as FIG. 271), Even if the effect sound is not made inaudible, a person who mistakenly gazes at the "second periodicity display SH2" instead of the "first periodicity display SH1" will not be able to accept the operation. Since it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not it is done properly, it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained.

In addition, the "specific multiple-time allowable period (1E reception period (such as FIG. 253) or 6E reception period (such as FIG. BGM) is audibly output, but for the "special multiple-time allowable period (2E reception period)", a specific type of effect sound (here, specific BGM) is audibly output. Alternatively, it may be generated while the specific type of effect sound (here, specific BGM) is not audibly output. That is, in this case, when the "multiple-time allowable period" occurs while the specific type of effect sound (here, specific BGM) is not audibly output, this is a "special multiple-time allowable period (2E reception period)". That is, when the operation is accepted, the mode of the "acceptance period related periodicity display (third periodicity display SH3, fourth periodicity display SH4") does not change. On the other hand, when the "multiple-time allowable period" occurs while a specific type of effect sound (here, specific BGM) is being audibly output, this is referred to as a "specific multiple-time allowable period" and a "special multiple-time allowable period." Since it becomes difficult to recognize which one of the above, it is possible to prompt attention to see if the mode of the "acceptance period related periodicity display" changes when the operation is accepted.

In this regard, the "specific multiple-time acceptance period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.) or 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.)" ends at the time when the specific multiple-time acceptance period occurs. Depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, the specific type of effect sound (here, specific BGM) is made inaudible or not made inaudible before the specific multiple permissible period occurs. However, in the "special multiple allowable period (2E acceptance period (Fig. 258 etc.))", the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time the "special multiple allowable period" occurs Depending on the type, the specific type of effect sound (here, specific BGM) is made inaudible before the “special multiple permissible period” occurs (the specific type of effect sound is inaudible If a special multiple times permissible period occurs in the state) and if it is not made non-audible (when a special multiple times permissible period occurs in a state where a specific type of production sound is audibly output) You can let it be.

According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous fluctuation pattern, when the "multiple-time allowable period" occurs, this is the "specific multiple-time allowable period" and the "special multiple-time allowable period". Since it becomes easy to recognize which of the "periods" is, it is possible to encourage the player to concentrate on the game even when the opportunity to operate is not provided. As described above, the type of variation pattern is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the symbol variation is executed based on the determined result (variation pattern type).

When adopting such a configuration, regarding the "specific multiple-time allowable period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.) or 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.)", the specific multiple-time allowable period is It is important not to change the mode of the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) according to the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time of occurrence. In this sense, regarding the "specific multiple-time allowable period", as in the above-described production example, the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) is always audible at the time when the "specific multiple-time allowable period" occurs. Alternatively, a specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) is made inaudible before the occurrence of the "specific multiple-time allowable period", and a specific It may be arranged that the type of effect sound (specific BGM) can be generated only while it is in an inaudible state. Alternatively, with regard to the "specific multiple times permissible period", a reception period of a type that can occur only while a specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) is in an audible state, and a specific type of effect sound (specific BGM). It is also possible to include a reception period of a type that can occur only while the is in an inaudible state. Even with such a configuration, the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) will not be made inaudible or maintained in an audible state, depending on the type of the previous variation pattern.

In addition, in the "special multiple allowable period (2E acceptance period (such as FIG. 258))", a specific type It is needless to say that the same mode is displayed as the post-acceptance display regardless of the mode of the effect sound (here, the specific BGM).

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the example of the effect described above, when the "specific multiple-time allowable period (1E reception period (eg, FIG. 253))" occurs, the timing at which the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed. Although the timing at which the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed is different from each other (see FIG. 253(e)), if a "special multiple-time allowable period (2E acceptance period (such as FIG. 258))" occurs , the timing at which the third periodicity display SH3 is displayed is the same as the timing at which the fourth periodicity display SH4 is displayed (see FIG. 258(e)). In other words, in this case, as the acceptance period in which two types of periodicity displays appear, either a "specific multiple-time allowable period" or a "special multiple-time allowable period" occurs depending on whether or not there is a discrepancy in the display timing. to be able to suggest

Further, in the sixth E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.) according to the above-described effect example, the timing at which the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed and the timing at which the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed are set to be the same. The timing at which the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed and the timing at which the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed may be different from each other. Further, instead of the 1E acceptance period (FIG. 253, etc.), the 6E acceptance period may be generated as the "specific plural-time allowable period." Even with such a configuration, as the acceptance period in which two types of periodic displays appear, the "specific multiple-time allowable period" and the "special multiple-time allowable period" are determined depending on whether or not there is a discrepancy in the display timing. ” will occur.

Further, the first periodicity display SH1 may be displayed after the second periodicity display SH2, or may be displayed before the second periodicity display SH2. . When the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed before the second periodicity display SH2, the periodic change is not started at the point of time when the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed, and the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed at or at the timing at which it is displayed. The periodic change may be started thereafter. When the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed before the first periodicity display SH1, the periodic change is not started at the point of time when the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed. The periodic change may be started thereafter. The timing at which the periodic display is displayed means the timing at which at least part of the periodic display is displayed.

However, when the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed before the first periodicity display SH1, the second periodicity display SH2 starts to change periodically before the first periodicity display is displayed. It is preferable that the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed to start the periodic change while the second periodicity display SH2 is being periodically changed. That is, in this case, in the 1E receiving period, while the second periodicity display SH2 on the side where the periodic change is continued is being periodically changed, the first display SH2 on the side where the periodic change is hidden is displayed. Since the display of the periodicity display SH1 is started, the second periodicity display SH2 can be used as a criterion for determining whether or not the periodic change in the first periodicity display SH1 has been hidden (interrupted). will be able to

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the example of the production described above, only a model image display imitating the operation means that is allowed to accept the operation only once is displayed during the acceptance period (the 3rd E acceptance period (Fig. 263, etc.), the 4th E acceptance period). (FIG. 266, etc.)), when there is only one periodicity display (fifth periodicity display SH5) and when two periodicity displays are displayed (sixth periodicity display SH6, seventh periodicity display SH7). That is, in this case, when there is only one periodicity display (fifth periodicity display SH5), it is suggested that only one operation reception is permitted. On the other hand, when two periodicity displays are displayed (the sixth periodicity display SH6 and the seventh periodicity display SH7), it is recognized whether the operation reception is permitted only once or multiple times. It becomes difficult, and it becomes possible to provide operation opportunities in a tense atmosphere.

In particular, in the above-described effect example, the time required for one periodic change in the sixth periodic display (period E time) and the time required for one periodic change in the third periodic display (period E time) and are set at the same time, it is possible to make it even more difficult to recognize whether the operation reception is permitted only once or multiple times.

However, in the 4E reception period (FIG. 266, etc.), of the sixth periodicity display SH6 and the seventh periodicity display SH7, the sixth periodicity display SH6 is also displayed during the 1E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.). The periodic change is performed with a period E time that can appear, but the seventh periodicity display SH7 is changed periodically with a period G time that does not appear within the 1E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.).

It should be noted that in the above-described effect example, the cycle time of the fifth periodicity display SH5 and the sixth periodicity display SH6 is the same as the cycle time of the third periodicity display SH3 (cycle E time), but the first periodicity display SH The cycle time of is set to be shorter than that. The cycle time of the first periodicity display SH is set to be earlier than the periodicity displays SH4 and SH7, so that it can be suggested that a plurality of operations are permitted. I have to.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the example of the effect described above, when the "specific multiple-time allowable period (1E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.))" occurs, the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed and the period The timing at which the periodic change is started differs from the timing at which the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed and the periodic change is started. ))” occurs, the timing at which the third periodicity display SH3 is displayed and the periodic change is started, and the timing at which the fourth periodicity display SH4 is displayed and the periodic change is started. were made to be the same as each other. That is, in this case, as the reception period in which two types of periodicity indications appear, depending on whether or not there is a shift in the timing at which the periodic changes are started, the "specific multiple-time allowable period" and the "special multiple-time allowable period" It will be possible to suggest which of the "periods" will occur.

Further, in the sixth E reception period (FIG. 253, etc.) according to the above-described effect example, the timing at which the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed and its periodic change is started, and the second periodicity display SH2 are displayed. Although the timing at which the periodic change is started is the same, the timing at which the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed and the periodic change is started and the timing at which the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed and the period thereof are the same. The timing at which the target change is started may be made different from each other. Further, instead of the 1E acceptance period (FIG. 253, etc.), the 6E acceptance period may be generated as the "specific plural-time allowable period." Even with such a configuration, as the acceptance period in which two types of periodicity displays appear, the "specific multiple times allowable period" and " It will be possible to suggest which of the "special multiple allowable periods" will occur.

Further, even if the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed after the second periodicity display SH2 and its periodic change is started after the second periodicity display SH1. Alternatively, it may be displayed before the second periodicity display SH2 and its periodic change may be started before the periodic change of the second periodicity display SH1.

Also, although the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed before the second periodicity display SH2, its periodic change is not started at the point of time when the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed, and the second periodicity display is displayed and its cycle is changed. The periodic change may be started at or after the timing of starting the periodic change. That is, in this case, in the 1E receiving period, while the second periodicity display SH2 on the side where the periodic change is continued is being periodically changed, the first display SH2 on the side where the periodic change is hidden is displayed. Since the periodic change of the periodicity display SH1 is started, the second periodicity display SH2 is used as a criterion for determining whether or not the periodic change of the first periodicity display SH1 is hidden (interrupted). can be used as The timing at which the periodic display is displayed means the timing at which at least part of the periodic display is displayed.

However, between the timing at which the first periodicity display SH1 is displayed or the timing at which the periodic change is started and the timing at which the second periodicity display SH2 is displayed or the timing at which the periodic change is started, does not have an essential configuration, and may be set as appropriate.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described effect example, when the "specific multiple-time allowable period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.))" occurs, the first periodicity display When SH1 is displayed, another display (here, the portent effect display ZED) is displayed, and the first periodicity is displayed behind the other display (here, the portent effect display ZED). The display is started with the display SH1 appearing, but the second periodicity display SH2 is not displayed behind the other display (here, the precursor effect display ZED), and the "special multiple-time allowable When the third periodicity display SH3 and the fourth periodicity display SH4 are displayed at the occurrence of the period (2E receiving period (FIG. 258, etc.)), the third periodicity display SH3 and the fourth periodicity display SH4 is not displayed behind any other display at the time it starts to be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest which of the "specific multiple-time allowable period" and the "special multiple-time allowable period" occurs at a relatively early point in time when the periodicity display is started. become able to. Moreover, even when the "specific multiple-time allowable period" occurs, a person who mistakenly gazes at the "second periodicity display SH2" instead of the "first periodicity display SH1" may It is as if a 'special multiple-time allowable period' is generated by not being displayed behind any other display at the time when the second periodicity display SH2' is started to be displayed. Since there is a possibility of erroneous recognition, it is expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained.

In addition, in the example of the effect described above, when "a specific multiple-time allowable period (1E reception period (Fig. 253, etc.), 6E reception period (Fig. 271, etc.))" occurs, the first periodicity display SH1 The second periodicity display SH2 is displayed while another display (in this case, the foreshadowing display ZED) that can be displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side is displayed. The other display (here, the portent effect display ZED) is designed to be displayed in a manner that does not make it difficult to visually recognize. However, the aspect in which the second periodicity display SH2 is not obscured by another display means that the second periodicity display SH2 is not displayed behind any other display. They may be displayed so as not to overlap each other.

It should be noted that the second periodic display SH2 periodically changes even in a situation where the precursor effect display ZED is displayed. The second periodicity display SH2 may start to be displayed before the precursor effect display ZED, or it may start to change periodically before the precursor effect display ZED is displayed. may

In the above-described effect example, the 1E reception period, the 2E reception period, the 3E reception period, and the 4E reception period may occur sequentially within one variation pattern. It is sufficient if the occurrence conditions (occurrence timing) and the display after reception are different from each other.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (FIGS. 272 to 274) according to the modified example described above, the "special image display (here, integrated model image display IG)" is displayed in one of a plurality of display modes with different expectations. It can be displayed, and even when it is displayed in any one of the plurality of display modes, a periodic change appears as the "special image display".

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the "special image display (here, integrated model image display IG)" is the first display mode (here, shown in FIG. 272(a)) among the plurality of display modes. 272(e)), it can be changed to a display mode different from the first display mode (here, the mode shown in FIG. 272(e)), and the second display among the plurality of display modes When displayed in a mode (here, the mode shown in FIG. 273(a)), a display mode different from the second display mode (here, the modes shown in FIGS. 272(e) and (g)) can be changed to Then, the "special image display" changes from the first display mode (here, the mode shown in FIG. 272(a)) to a display mode different from the first display mode (here, the mode shown in FIG. 272(e)). ), the time required for one periodic change as the "special image display" changes (see FIG. 272), but the "special image display" changes to the second display mode (here, FIG. 273 ( a)) to a display mode different from the second display mode (here, the modes shown in FIGS. 273(e) and (g)), the time required for one periodic change A case where no change occurs (here, the aspect shown in FIG. 273(e)) and a case where a change occurs in the time required for one periodic change (here, the aspect shown in FIG. 273(g)) I made it so that there is According to such a configuration, the "special image display" makes it possible to recognize whether or not the display mode has changed depending on whether the display mode changes from the first display mode or the display mode changes from the second display mode. Since the ease of use is different, it is expected that the performance will be improved.

In addition, the "special image display (here, integrated model image display IG)" is the first display mode (here, the mode shown in FIG. 272(a)) and the second display mode (here, FIG. 273(a) ), even if it is displayed in any of the modes shown in ), when the display mode changes, it is suggested that the expectation that a big win is obtained is high. It becomes possible to improve interest.

In particular, according to the modified examples (FIGS. 272 to 274) described above, the "special image display (here, integrated model image display IG)" is shown in the second display mode (here, FIG. 273(a)). mode), if the display mode changes, the time required for one periodic change does not change (here, the mode shown in FIG. 273 (e)), and one cycle There is a case where the time required for the periodic change changes (here, the mode shown in FIG. 273(g)), but the degree of expectation is higher when the time required for one periodic change also changes. It was suggested that it would be higher. That is, in this case, the "special image display (here, integrated model image display IG)" appears in the first display mode (here, the mode shown in FIG. 272(a)) among the plurality of display modes. In this case (see FIG. 272(a)), if the display mode changes, the time required for one periodic change will also change without fail. come to be expected.

Further, according to the modified examples (FIGS. 272 to 274) described above, the "special image display (here, integrated model image display IG)" is the first display mode (here, shown in FIG. 272(a). mode) or the second display mode (here, the mode shown in FIG. 273(a)), the display mode does not change (here, FIG. 272(c) or FIG. 273 Since there is also the aspect shown in (c)), it is expected that the feeling of tension is preferably maintained. It should be noted that in this case, the special image display will be hidden after that when the predetermined timing arrives, with the display mode remaining unchanged.

In addition, if there is a change in the time required for the periodic change, the display mode will change in such a way that the appearance (form) as the "special image display" changes, and the time required for the periodic change will change. If not, the display mode may be changed without changing the outer shape (form) of the special image display.

The special image display is desirably displayed as an image display suggesting the degree of expectation of the symbol variation in the execution state.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the modified examples (FIGS. 272 to 274) described above, the "special image display (here, integrated model image display IG)" When the time required for one periodic change is displayed in the second time (here, cycle B2 hours), the time required for one periodic change is displayed in the first time (here, cycle B1 time) different from the second time. In some cases, when the "special image display" is displayed so that the time required for one periodic change is the first time, the display mode of the "special image display" can be changed. When the mode changes, the time required for one periodic change as the "special image display" may change, or the time may not change (see FIG. 273). When the "special image display" is displayed so that the time required for the periodic change of is the second time, the display mode of the special image display does not change (see FIG. 274). According to such a configuration, the "special image display" takes the first time (here, cycle B1 time) and the second time (here, cycle B2 time) required for one periodic change. It is possible to suggest whether or not there is a possibility that the display mode will change depending on which of the two is displayed. Further, when the display is performed for the first time period (here, period B1 time period), when the display mode changes, the time required for one periodic change may also change. Since there are cases where there is no occurrence of , and the degree of expectation is different between them, it is expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained.

273(a) in the "special image display (here, integrated simulated image display IG)" and FIG. 274 (here, integrated simulated image display IG) As for the mode shown in a), the display modes may be the same as long as the time required for one periodic change is different from each other.

Also, when the time required for one periodic change is the first time (cycle B1 time shown in FIG. 273(a)), the "special image display (here, integrated model image display IG)" When the display mode changes and the time required for one periodic change changes (the mode shown in FIG. 273(g)), the changed time is the second time (shown in FIG. 274(a)). It may be a cycle B2 hours). In this case, the display mode may also be the same as the display mode shown in FIG. 274(a).

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the modified example (FIGS. 272 to 274) described above, the time required for one periodic change is the first time (cycle B1 time shown in FIG. display (here, integrated model image display IG)" is displayed, and when the display mode changes, the time required for one periodic change does not change (see FIG. 273(e) 273(g)) and the case where the time changes (the aspect shown in FIG. 273(g)), and in either case, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is high. In this regard, in the above example, the increase in the degree of expectation suggested by further changes in the time required for one periodic change is greater, so the display of "special image display" It is possible to preferably maintain the tension when the mode changes.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the modified examples (FIGS. 272 to 274) described above, the "special image display (here, integrated model image display IG)" When it is displayed in the first time (here, cycle B1 hours), and when the time required for one periodic change is displayed in a third time (here, cycle B3 hours) different from the first time In some cases, when the display mode of the special image display changes (see, for example, FIGS. 273(e) and (g)), the periodic changes that have appeared until then are hidden (for example, FIG. 273 (d)), and thereafter, periodic changes in the special image display appear (see, for example, FIGS. 273(e) and (g)).

According to such a configuration, when the display mode of the special image display (here, the integrated model image display IG) changes, the periodic change that has appeared so far is hidden, and then the special image display Therefore, when the display mode of the special image display changes, it is expected to attract interest as to whether or not the time required for the periodic change also changes. become.

In particular, in the modification shown in FIG. 273, when the display mode of the “special image display” changes, the time required for one periodic change of the “special image display” changes (for example, FIG. 273 ( e)) and a case where there is no change in the time (see, for example, FIG. Once) hidden, it is expected that the game interest will be favorably maintained.

Further, for example, when the mode shown in FIG. 273(a) changes to the mode shown in FIG. 273(e), or when the mode shown in FIG. 273(a) changes to the mode shown in FIG. 273(g) In this case, a plurality of non-display times (first non-display time, second non-display time) may be prepared. 273(e) may appear even if the periodic change that has appeared until then is hidden for any of the first non-display time and the second non-display time. 273(g). In this regard, the degree of expectation for a big win is different between when the periodic change is hidden for the first non-display time and when the periodic change is hidden for the second non-display time. It is more desirable to That is, in this case, if it is the non-display time on the side with the higher degree of expectation, it can be expected that the aspect with the higher degree of expectation (the aspect shown in FIG. 273(g)) will appear when this ends. As a result, it is expected that the game interest will be improved.

Also, even if there is no change from the mode shown in FIG. 273(b) (or see FIG. 272(b)), the display mode of "special image display" changes according to the length of time that the periodic changes that have appeared up to that point are hidden. It becomes possible to suggest whether or not, and it becomes possible to preferably maintain the interest in the game.

As described above, ``hiding the periodic change'' may be ``hiding the display of the special image'' to hide it, or another image may be replaced with the ``special image''. By displaying it from the front side of the "display" so as to make it invisible, or by continuing to display the special image display but temporarily ending the periodic change that has appeared until then and displaying it statically It is possible.

Further, as a method of "starting the periodic change again", the "special image display" may be displayed again in a visible state and the periodic change may be restarted at the same time. ” is again displayed in a visible state, and then the periodic change can be restarted in a delayed manner. The change may be restarted. In this respect, even if a certain mode (for example, FIG. 273(a)→(e) or FIG. 273(a)→(g)) changes to another mode, the “special image display” is disabled. If the time until the periodic change reappears is longer than the time from the display to the display of the "special image display" is started) and the time from when the "special image display" is hidden until the "special image display" is displayed and the time until the periodic change reappears are the same ("special image display ” and the resumption of the periodic change at the same timing). According to such a configuration, when the "special image display" changes, the display mode after the change and the periodic change can be recognized at the same time. Since there are cases where it is not possible to recognize whether or not the target change has changed, it is possible to preferably improve the performance even when the change in the same mode occurs.

In the production examples (FIGS. 253 to 274) described above, the timing at which each acceptance period occurs may be within a period in which the reach state is not formed, or within a period in which the reach state is formed. good too.

[Reception acceptance period with special performance]
As explained by exemplifying FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, variation as to which one of a plurality of variation patterns is to be executed is based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the starting winning (holding digestion). Pattern judgment can be executed. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern It is possible to execute a production judgment (such as advance notice judgment) as to which of the expected productions (such as advance notice production) is to appear selectively. It should be noted that depending on the result of this production determination, all of the plurality of expected productions prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern (notice production, etc.) may be sequentially executed, or None of the expected effects (notice effects, etc.) may be executed.

And as described above, when such production determination (variation pattern determination, advance notice determination, etc.) is performed, by performing control to display the production content according to the result of the production determination on the production display device 1600, the big hit determination The variable production by the decorative pattern according to the result is executed together with the expected production (preliminary production) related to the background depiction (background advance notice) and movable body operation (role production). As a result, as a result of execution of the variable effect by the decorative pattern together with the expected effect of the background depiction and the action of the movable body, etc., when the jackpot pattern (special pattern combination) is stopped and displayed, a privilege is given to the player. As a big hit game and a transition to a high probability game state can be executed.

In such a configuration, the variable performance by the decorative pattern is provided as a performance having "a function indicating whether or not a big hit has been obtained as a result of the judgment of the big hit", and the background depiction, the movement of the movable body, etc. is provided as an effect having "the function of suggesting the degree of expectation, that is, the ratio (including 0% and 100%) of the fact that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the determination of the variation pattern, it is specified among the highly expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach effects with background changes, etc.) If the variation pattern is selected, even if any result is obtained as the production judgment (such as the advance notice judgment), when the pattern production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing in the SP reach (predetermined condition is established), it is possible to generate an acceptance acceptance period (validity period) during which performance acceptance is allowed.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low-expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the determination of the variation pattern. Even in the case, when a special result is obtained in the production determination (such as advance notice judgment) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the pattern production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (predetermined condition is established Then), it is possible to generate an acceptance acceptance period (validity period) during which performance acceptance is allowed. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination, even if the pattern performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, the acceptable acceptance period (effective period) does not occur. . In addition, the acceptance acceptance period (valid period) that occurs in a predetermined variation pattern is different from the acceptance acceptance period (valid period) that occurs when the pattern production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as an effect (post-acceptance display, post-acceptance output sound, etc.).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to generate an acceptable acceptance period during which the player is allowed to accept an action (operation). When an action (operation) by a player is accepted in , a post-acceptance change (display change, acceptance output sound, effect light emission, etc.) according to the type of acceptance acceptable period that occurred can occur. .

In addition, during the acceptable reception period, it can appear only when the operation acceptance of the operation unit is allowed (acceptance acceptable period) or when the operation acceptance is allowed (acceptance acceptable period). An operation-related display can be displayed. Such an operation-related display is, for example, often displayed as a simulated image display in which an object (operation means) to be operated (operated) by the player is represented as an image, but is not limited to this. , may be an image display that, when displayed, always gives the player an opportunity to operate. The "operation-related display (simulated image display)" has a plurality of modes with different expectations, and one of the plurality of modes may be selectively displayed.

Furthermore, the "operation-related display" means that it is in a state in which acceptance of operations on Sakubu is allowed (acceptance acceptance period), or when the operation acceptance is allowed (acceptance acceptance period). Therefore, at least when the "operation-related display" is displayed, it is sufficient that the acceptable acceptance period always occurs, or that it is in an acceptable state at the time when the "operation-related display" is displayed. Therefore, while the "operation-related display" is displayed, the allowable acceptance period may end before the "operation-related display" is hidden.

Further, during the acceptable reception period, it is possible to display a remaining time display indicating the remaining time during which an action (operation) by the player is permitted to be accepted. Such remaining time display can be executed, for example, as a depiction that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time passes. As modes of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image, a plurality of modes (for example, speed of reduction of the display area of the gauge image, suggestion of the degree of expectation, suggestion of the type of operation means, etc.) are prepared, and these modes may be executed by either In this case, a different degree of expectation (proportion of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may be suggested depending on which mode is executed.

In addition, when the allowable reception period occurs, it is possible to execute a premonition effect suggesting that an action opportunity will be given to the player before this (suggesting that the allowable reception period will occur). It is The portent effect is executed by, for example, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 or the output of a corresponding effect sound.

In addition, even if any result is obtained as a notice production judgment, at the predetermined timing during the SP reach, regarding the fluctuation pattern that generates the acceptable acceptance period (effective period), in addition to the above "specific fluctuation pattern" may also be provided. Further, it may be provided with a variation pattern for generating a reception allowable period (effective period) at a predetermined timing before the SP ready-to-win even if any result is obtained as the announcement performance determination.

In addition, including each example described above and each example described later, the "operation (action) by the player" to be detected means that the player It is not limited to those that are directly operated (pressing action or drawing action) by the touch sensor, but also the "player's contact action on a specific part" that is detected by the touch sensor, and the "in a specific space" that is detected by the non-contact sensor. It also means that the player's actions in In short, it is only necessary to have one or a plurality of receiving means (operation units) for receiving actions (pressing action, drawing action, touch action, non-contact action, etc.) by the player.

By the way, as the acceptable reception period (effective period) according to this embodiment, the type of post-reception display, post-reception output sound, etc., the presence or absence of output, the audible output status of BGM, etc. Various types of acceptance acceptance periods, such as the number of times that operation acceptance is allowed within the acceptance period (validity period) is different, and whether or not the automatic continuous tapping function or automatic button function is activated is different. (validity period) is provided.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the following special effects are provided between a plurality of acceptable acceptance periods, so as to enhance the effects when the acceptable acceptance period occurs. or to maintain the sense of tension when the acceptable acceptance period occurs. It should be noted that each of the effects (each configuration) described below does not necessarily have to include all of these configurations. It is possible to suppress the decrease of, or it may be selectively provided with some configurations that are considered necessary to obtain further effects, or it can be applied to another configuration ( Desirable application) may be adopted as appropriate. Furthermore, each effect (structure) described below is merely an example, and any one structure capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in the game related to the acceptable reception period may be provided.

[Configuration 1-E]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the player does not perform an operation, the same post-acceptance change as when the player performs an operation can occur. (automatic button function). Further, it is possible to generate a multiple operation permissible period in which both operation reception for the first operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) and operation reception for the second operation unit (for example, the sword ornament 5001) are allowed. , when either the operation on the first operation unit or the operation on the second operation unit is performed during the multiple operation permissible period, a post-acceptance change can occur according to the type of the side on which the operation is performed. . In addition, it is possible to display a simulated image display that imitates the operation target by the player.

In this respect, during the multiple-operation allowable period, there may be cases where the display simulating the operation target is not performed even though the operation reception is allowed. The "first operating section" and "second operating section" relating to the configuration 1-E are merely names used to describe the technical concept of the configuration 1-E. Therefore, the "first operating section" and the "second operating section" according to other configurations may mean the same operating section, respectively, or may mean different operating sections. Also, it may mean the same “operation unit” as an operation unit with a different name according to another configuration.

According to such a configuration, even if the player does not perform the operation, the same post-acceptance change as when the player performs the operation may occur. It is possible to generate a multiple operation permissible period in which both the operation acceptance for the operation part and the operation reception for the second operation part are permissible, and during the multiple operation permissible period, although the operation acceptance is permitted, the operation target. The display that imitates is sometimes not performed. In other words, in this case, it is expected that even if there is a person who cannot understand the complicated effects and is unable to operate the game appropriately, the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 1-E", at least a first multiple-operations permitted period and a second multiple-operations permitted period are prepared as the multiple-operations permitted period. During the operation permissible period, both a first simulated image display imitating the first operation unit and a second simulated image display imitating the second operation unit are displayed as simulated image displays. The first model image display may be displayed and the second model image display may not be displayed. According to such a configuration, during the second multiple-operation allowable period, one of the two operation units (the first operation unit and the second operation unit) in a state where operation acceptance is permitted (the second operation unit ) is kept secret that it is in the reception-permitting state, and it is expected that the amusement of the game will be improved. It should be noted that the "first multiple-operation allowable period" and "second multiple-operation allowable period" pertaining to the configuration 1-E are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 1-E. . Therefore, it may mean the same allowable period as the "first multiple-operation allowable period" and the "second multiple-operation allowable period" according to other configurations, or may mean different allowable periods. may be Also, it may mean the same “permissible period” as the permissible period of another name related to other configurations.

In this case, as will be described later, in the "second multiple operation permissible period", the first operation unit to be displayed as a model image display and the second operation unit not to be displayed as a model image display. Of these, the automatic reception function (automatic button function) is enabled only for the operation unit on which the model image is displayed. The automatic reception function (automatic button function) may not be activated for any of the two operation units even though both of the two operation units are to be displayed as simulated images. According to such a configuration, during the "second multiple operation permissible period", the automatic reception function (automatic button function) can be activated only for the operation unit on the side for which the model image is to be displayed. By doing so, it can be expected that it will be even more difficult to recognize that the second operation unit is kept secret while being able to accept operations. On the other hand, in the "first multiple operation permissible period", even though both the first operation section and the second operation section are targeted for the model image display, automatic reception for either of these operation sections is performed. Since the function (automatic button function) is not activated, even when both the first and second operation parts are displayed as simulated images, the difficulty of playing the game is increased, and the tension is increased. It can be expected to keep well.

In addition, in the "second multiple-operation allowable period", "the second multiple-operation allowable period occurs However, during the first multiple-operation permissible period, the specified type of effect sound is not set to the suppression mode or the non-audible state, or is not switched to the suppression mode or the non-audible state. Depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the multiple operation allowable period occurs, "before the first multiple operation allowable period occurs, the specific type of effect sound is suppressed or inaudible It may be "not put into a state, suppressed or put into an inaudible state." According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous variation pattern, the "first multiple-operation permitted period" and the "second multiple-operation permitted period" when the operation opportunity is given. Since it becomes easy to recognize which one, it is possible to encourage the player to concentrate on the game even when an operation opportunity is not given.

Regarding the "second multiple-operation allowable period", the aspect of the specific type of effect sound changes according to the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the second multiple-operation allowable period occurs. It is desirable to avoid For example, the ``second multiple-operation allowable period'' may be such that the specific type of effect sound is always made inaudible before the ``second multiple-operation allowable period'' occurs, A specific type of effect sound may always be made audible at the time when the "second multiple-operation allowable period" occurs.

In addition, in order to make it easier to recognize whether it is the "first multiple-operation permitted period" or the "second multiple-operation permitted period" when an operation opportunity is given, the "first multiple-operation permitted period , it is desirable that the same change occurs as the post-acceptance change when the operation is accepted, regardless of the mode of the specific type of effect sound according to the type of the previous variation pattern.

In addition, in the "first multiple operation permissible period", the display after reception (post-reception change ) is displayed, while in the “second multiple operation permissible period”, when the second operation unit on the side that is not the target of the model image display is operated, it overlaps in front of the production pattern. Display after reception (one of the changes after reception) so that it can be seen, and when the first operation unit on the side targeted for the display of the model image is operated, it appears to overlap behind the production design. A post-acceptance display (one of post-acceptance changes) may be displayed as follows. According to such a configuration, the post-acceptance display in response to the operation of the first operation unit on the side to be displayed as the model image during the "second multiple operation permissible period" is displayed behind the production pattern. It can be expected to suggest the possibility that there may have been an operation unit hidden in a state in which operation can be accepted, by looking at the appearance of being displayed so as to overlap on the side.

In addition, the fact that only one (the second operation unit) of the two operation units (the first operation unit and the second operation unit) in which operation reception is permitted is in the reception-permission state is kept secret. As the allowable period, apart from the second multiple-operation allowable period, a third multiple-operation allowable period may be further generated (under a different generation condition). In the second multiple-operations permissible period, the specific type of effect sound is always suppressed or made inaudible before its generation, whereas in the third multiple-operations permissible period, the specified It may be generated while the type of effect sound is being output in a non-suppressed mode.

In this case, as with the "second multiple-operation allowable period", the "third multiple-operation allowable period" also has the same effect as the "second multiple-operation allowable period". display the post-acceptance display (one of the post-acceptance changes) so that it overlaps in front of it, and when the first operation unit on the side targeted for the model image display is operated, The post-acceptance display (one of the post-acceptance changes) may be displayed so as to be superimposed on the back side.

Also, regarding the "first multiple-operation allowable period", "second multiple-operation allowable period", and "third multiple-operation allowable period" related to the configuration 1-E, the first operation unit and the second operation It is desirable that different post-acceptance displays are displayed depending on which of the units has been operated.

Further, regarding the "second multiple-operation allowable period" and the "third multiple-operation allowable period", compared to the "first multiple-operation allowable period", the state in which operations can be accepted is maintained. It is desirable to set the time short. That is, in this case, the player needs to find out within a limited time (within the effective time) that the operation unit (here, the second operation unit) different from the first operation unit is hidden. It can be expected to occur and maintain a sense of tension well. On the other hand, he/she is so preoccupied with whether or not an operation unit (here, the second operation unit) that is different from the first operation unit is hidden, that he/she cannot operate within the valid time. Even if it is not possible, the automatic button function is activated, and the same change occurs after receiving the operation as when the first operation unit is operated, so that the decline in the interest in the game is preferably suppressed. can be expected. Also, for the "first multiple operation permissible period", a relatively long time is set as the effective period, but at the cost of that, the automatic button function is not activated, so there is a sense of tension. can be expected to be well maintained.

[Configuration 2-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, whether the operation reception for the first operation unit (for example, the sword ornament 5001) or the operation reception for the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) is performed. is allowed, and when either operation on the first operation unit or operation on the second operation unit is performed during the multiple operation allowable period, the type of the side on which the operation is accepted It is possible to display the display after the reception according to the request. In addition, it is possible to display a simulated image display that imitates an operation target by the player, and at least a predetermined multiple operation allowable period is prepared as a type of the multiple operation allowable period.

In this regard, in a predetermined multiple-operation allowable period, it is possible to allow only one operation reception for the first operation unit and allow multiple operation receptions for the second operation unit. Thus, when an operation is performed on the second operation unit for which it is possible to accept multiple operations within a predetermined multiple operation allowable period, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed. , while the post-acceptance display is being displayed, it is possible to accept an operation for the first operating unit. When an operation is performed on the first operation unit while the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation performed on the second operation unit during the predetermined multiple-operation allowable period is being displayed, the operation is performed. The post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed, and the post-acceptance display that has been displayed until then triggered by the operation (the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation performed on the second operation unit) is hidden. I'm trying to be The "first operation unit", "second operation unit", and "predetermined multiple operation permissible period" related to the configuration 2-E are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 2-E. It's just a name. Therefore, the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", and "predetermined multiple operation allowable period" according to other configurations may mean the same operation unit and operation allowable period, respectively. Each of them may mean a different operation part or operation permissible period. In addition, it may mean the same “operation part” or “operation permission period” as the operation part with another name or the operation permission period.

According to such a configuration, during the predetermined multiple-operation allowable period in which both the reception of operations on the first operation unit and the reception of operations on the second operation unit are allowed, the operation is performed on the second operation unit. When an operation is performed on the first operation unit while the post-acceptance display corresponding to the event is being displayed, this is used as a trigger to display the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation, and the display until then. The post-acceptance display (the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation performed on the second operation unit), which was previously displayed, is now hidden, so that the It can be expected that it will be easier to recognize whether the display is after reception, and that the game will be more interesting.

Also, as will be described later, when the "configuration 2-E" is adopted, the types of the multiple operation allowable period are the first multiple operation allowable period (corresponding to the "predetermined multiple operation allowable period") and the second multiple operation allowable period. At least a multiple-operation permissible period is prepared, and during both the first multiple-operation permissible period and the second multiple-operation permissible period, an operation is performed on the second operation unit for which multiple operations can be accepted. When performed, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed, but it may be possible to allow acceptance of the operation on the first operation unit even while the post-acceptance display is being displayed. In this case, an operation is performed on the first operation unit while the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation performed on the second operation unit in the "first multiple-operation allowable period" is displayed. Then, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed, and the post-acceptance display that has been displayed until then triggered by the operation (the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation performed on the second operation unit) is displayed. display) is hidden, and while the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation performed on the second operation unit in the "second multiple-operation allowable period" is being displayed, When an operation is performed on the second operation unit, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed. display after reception) may be prevented from being hidden.

According to such a configuration, when the game strategy is changed from "a state in which a plurality of operations are performed on the second operation unit" to "an operation on the first operation unit", the displayed When the post-acceptance display (the post-acceptance display in response to the operation performed on the second operation unit) is hidden (first multiple operation permissible period) and when it is not hidden (second Since there is a multiple operation permissible period), it can be expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained by enhancing the performance when changing the game strategy.

It should be noted that the "first multiple-operation allowable period" and "second multiple-operation allowable period" pertaining to the configuration 2-E are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 2-E. . Therefore, the "first multiple-operation allowable period" and the "second multiple-operation allowable period" according to other configurations may mean the same operation allowable period, respectively, or they may mean different operation allowable periods. It may be something to do. Also, it may mean the same “operation permitted period” as the operation permitted period with another name.

[Configuration 3-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, both acceptance of operation on the first operation unit (for example, the sword ornament 5001) and acceptance of operation on the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) are permitted. A first operation that can occur only when a state in which reception of operations on the first operation unit is permitted or in a state in which reception of operations on the first operation unit is permitted A related display can be displayed, and a second operation-related display that can appear only when a state in which reception of operation on the second operation unit is permitted or in a state in which reception of operation is permitted is displayed. It is possible.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a first multiple-operations permitted period and a second multiple-operations permitted period are prepared as the multiple-operations permitted period, and the first multiple-operations permitted period and the second multiple-operations permitted period Since both the first operation-related display and the second operation-related display can be displayed during the period, it can be expected that the interest in the game is favorably maintained. In addition, the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", "first multiple operation allowable period" and "second multiple operation allowable period" related to the configuration 3-E are It is just a name used to explain the technical idea. Therefore, the same operation unit and operation allowable period as the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", "first multiple operation allowable period", and "second multiple operation allowable period" according to other configurations , or may mean different operation units or operation permissible periods. In addition, it may mean the same “operation part” or “operation permission period” as the operation part with another name or the operation permission period.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 3-E" is adopted, in the "first multiple-operation allowable period", the first operation-related display and the second operation-related display are both displayed. A state is established in which acceptance of operation on the operation unit is permissible and acceptance of operation on the second operation unit is permissible. On the other hand, in the "second multiple-operation allowable period", only the first operation-related display is displayed among the first operation-related display and the second operation-related display, and operation reception on the first operation unit is permitted. and acceptance of operations on the second operation unit is permitted. While both the display and the second operation-related display are displayed, it is possible to accept the operation on the first operation unit and accept the operation on the second operation unit. may

According to such a configuration, only one of the two operation units (the first operation unit and the second operation unit) in the state where operation reception is permitted (the second operation unit) is in the reception permission state. Even if an operation permissible period during which the information is concealed occurs, if the operation unit on the concealed side is operated on a trial basis, the concealed state is canceled, so that the game interest is preferably maintained. be expected to do so. As the "operation-related display", for example, a model image display in which an object (operation means) to be operated (operated) by the player is represented as an image is often displayed, but it is not limited to this. As described above, it is sufficient to display an image that, when displayed, always gives the player an opportunity to operate.

[Configuration 4-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, both acceptance of operation on the first operation unit (for example, the sword ornament 5001) and acceptance of operation on the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) are permitted. A first operation that can occur only when a state in which reception of operations on the first operation unit is permitted or in a state in which reception of operations on the first operation unit is permitted A related display can be displayed, and a second operation-related display that can appear only when a state in which reception of operation on the second operation unit is permitted or in a state in which reception of operation is permitted is displayed. It is possible.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a specific multiple-operations allowable period is prepared as the multiple-operations-allowed period. As one of the post-acceptance changes in accordance with the above, a post-acceptance overlapping display is performed in which both the first operation-related display and the second operation-related display become difficult to visually recognize. As a result, the specific multiple-operation allowable period in which both the operation reception for the first operation unit and the operation reception for the second operation unit are permitted ends when the first operation unit is operated. It becomes possible to suitably suggest that to the player. In addition, the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", and "specific multiple operation permissible period" related to the configuration 4-E are names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 4-E. It's nothing more than Therefore, the "first operation unit", the "second operation unit", and the "specific multiple operation permissible period" according to other configurations may mean the same operation unit and the same operation permissible period, respectively. It may mean a different operation part or an operation permissible period. In addition, it may mean the same “operation part” or “operation permission period” as the operation part with another name or the operation permission period.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 4-E", as a type of multiple operation permitted period, in addition to the specific multiple operation permitted period, a special multiple operation permitted period is further prepared. When an operation to the first operation unit is accepted during the multiple operation permissible period, as a post-acceptance change, a special post-acceptance presentation indicating the degree of expectation that a predetermined result has been obtained is displayed, and the first operation is performed. Only the first operation-related display out of the related display and the second operation-related display is displayed in a post-acceptance overlapping display that makes it difficult to visually recognize, and the post-acceptance overlapping display corresponding to a specific multiple-operation allowable period is always performed in the same display mode. However, the post-acceptance overlapping display corresponding to the special multiple-operation allowable period may be displayed in a different display mode depending on the mode (expectation level) of the special post-acceptance effect display.

According to such a configuration, during the special multiple-operation permissible period, the operation-related display is visually displayed in an image display different from the special post-acceptance effect display suggesting the degree of expectation that a predetermined result has been obtained. Regarding the "duplicate display after reception" that is displayed to make it difficult, even if the "first operation-related display" of the first operation-related display and the second operation-related display is displayed so that it is difficult to see, Since the "second operation-related display" is not displayed in such a way as to make it difficult to see, the special post-acceptance effect display is the "first operation unit" on the side where the "operation-related display" is made difficult to see. It becomes possible to suitably suggest that it appeared due to the operation on . On top of this, the post-acceptance duplicate display corresponding to the specific multiple-operation allowable period is always executed in the same display mode, but the post-acceptance duplicate display corresponding to the special multiple-operation allowable period is a special post-acceptance effect. Since it is displayed in a different display mode depending on the mode of display (expectation), it is possible to see the expectation of a big hit just by looking at "duplicate display after reception" in order to confirm which operation caused it. be able to recognize. It should be noted that the “special multiple operation permissible period” related to the configuration 4-E is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 4-E. Therefore, it may mean the same manipulation permissible period as the "special plural manipulation permissible period" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different manipulation permissible period. Also, it may mean the same “operation permitted period” as the operation permitted period with another name.

[Configuration 5-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permission period during which an operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation permission period, change can occur. Then, a display is provided that simulates an operation target for which operation reception is permitted.

In this regard, during the allowable operation period of the pachinko machine 1, there are cases where the operation is accepted only once when the operation unit is maintained in the operated state, and there are cases where the operation is accepted multiple times. Therefore, it can be expected that the game interest will be improved through such a variety of effects.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 5-E", at least a specific operation allowable period is prepared as a type of operation allowable period, and multiple operations are allowed during the specific operation allowable period. At least the first operation unit for the specific period and the second operation unit for the specific period may be set as the operation unit that can be operated. When the first operation unit is maintained in the operated state for a specific period of time, the operation is accepted multiple times. You may choose not to do so.

According to such a configuration, even if the operation unit is allowed to receive operations a plurality of times, the so-called automatic continuous hitting function may not be activated in some cases, so that the tension can be preferably maintained. can be expected. The "specified period first operation unit", "specified period second operation unit", and "specified operation permitted period" related to the configuration 5-E are used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 5-E. It's just a nickname. Therefore, the "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", and "specific operation permitted period" according to other configurations may mean the same operation unit and the same operation permitted period. However, they may mean different operation units and operation permissible periods. In addition, it may mean the same “operation unit” or “operation allowable period” as the operation unit having another name or the operation allowable period.

In this case, as a type of operation permitted period, in addition to the specific operation permitted period, a special operation permitted period is further prepared. , the special period first operation section and the special period second operation section may be set at least. Further, even if either the special period first operation section or the special period second operation section is maintained in the operated state, the operation acceptance may not be performed multiple times.

According to such a configuration, even if there are a plurality of operation units that are allowed to receive operations a plurality of times, the so-called auto-flick function is effective for any of the operation units depending on the type of operation-permissible period. Therefore, it can be expected that the sense of tension is preferably maintained. It should be noted that the “special operation permissible period” related to the configuration 5-E is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 5-E. Therefore, it may mean the same manipulation permissible period as the "special manipulation permissible period" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different manipulation permissible period. Also, it may mean the same “operation permitted period” as the operation permitted period with another name.

When adopting the "Configuration 5-E", the "special period first operation section" and "special period second operation section" are replaced with the "specific period first operation section" and "specific period second operation section". It may be provided as the same operation unit as any one of. For example, one of the special period first operation section and the special period second operation section may be the same as the specific period second operation section. Further, the other of the special period first operation section and the special period second operation section may be permitted to accept operations even during the specific operation permitted period.

[Configuration 6-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period during which an operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation permissible period, it is accepted. can cause later changes. In addition, it is possible to display a simulated image that simulates an operation target for which operation reception is permitted so that periodic changes appear.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a specific operation permission period is prepared as a type of operation permission period. When an operation is performed on the operation unit, as one of the post-acceptance changes, the periodic change that had appeared until then in the display of the simulated image that simulates the operation unit is hidden, or Since it is made difficult to visually recognize by another image display, it is preferable for the player to be in the situation where the operation is accepted even though the simulated image display is displayed even after the operation is performed. to be able to suggest It should be noted that the “specific operation permissible period” related to the configuration 6-E is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 6-E. Therefore, it may mean the same manipulation permissible period as the "specific manipulation permissible period" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different manipulation permissible period. Also, it may mean the same “operation permitted period” as the operation permitted period with another name.

In addition, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 6-E", as the type of operation permitted period, at least a specific operation permitted period and a special operation permitted period are prepared, and in the "specific operation permitted period", multiple times is set, and when an operation is performed on the operation part, as one of the changes after the reception, it appears in the display of the model image that imitates the operation part. The cyclical change that was being performed is hidden, or the display of the model image is hidden, and in the "special operation permitted period", an operation unit is set in which it is permitted to accept multiple operations. When an operation is performed on the operation unit, the periodic change that has appeared so far in the simulated image display that simulates the operation unit is not hidden, and the periodic change is continued. good too.

According to such a configuration, when an operation is performed on an operation unit that is allowed to be operated a plurality of times, the periodic change that has appeared until then in the simulated image display simulating the operation unit is not displayed. or the model image display is hidden, and the periodic change is continued without being hidden, so the operation reception is properly performed It is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not a person is in the situation, and it can be expected that the sense of tension is preferably maintained. It should be noted that the “special operation permissible period” related to the configuration 6-E is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 6-E. Therefore, it may mean the same manipulation permissible period as the "special manipulation permissible period" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different manipulation permissible period. Also, it may mean the same “operation permitted period” as the operation permitted period with another name.

[Configuration 7-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permission period during which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation permission period, the change after reception is performed. can give rise to In addition, it is possible to display a simulated image that imitates the operating unit.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1, the simulated images can be displayed so that periodic changes appear. is displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time, it is expected that the amusement of the game will be improved by various performances.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 7-E", at least a specific operation permitted period and a special operation permitted period are prepared as the operation permitted period, and in the "specific operation permitted period", multiple It is allowed at least to accept an operation for the first operation unit for a specific period during which the number of operation receptions is permitted, and to accept an operation for the second operation unit for a specific period different from the first operation unit for the specific period. In the "permissible operation period", operation reception for the first operation unit during a special period in which multiple operation receptions are permitted, and operation reception for the special period second operation unit different from the special period first operation unit are performed. It may be at least acceptable. Then, in the "specific operation permissible period", a simulated image display simulating the first operation unit for the specific period is displayed so that the periodic change appears in predetermined time units, and in the "special operation permissible period" Alternatively, the simulated image display simulating the first operation unit during the special period may be displayed so that the periodic change appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time.

According to such a configuration, since the time required for the periodic change differs depending on the type of the operation allowable period and the type of the operation target, it is expected that the game interest will be improved by various effects. be done. In addition, "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", "special period first operation unit", "special period second operation unit", "specific operation permitted period" related to the configuration 7-E ” and “special operation permissible period” are merely designations used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 7-E. Therefore, "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", "special period first operation unit", "special period second operation unit", "specific operation permitted period" and It may mean the same operation part or operation permission period as the "special operation permission period", or it may mean a different operation part or operation permission period. In addition, it may mean the same “operation part” or “operation permission period” as the operation part or the operation permission period of another name.

Also, the specific-period first operation unit in the "specific operation-allowed period" may be the same operation unit as the special-period second operation unit in the "special operation-allowed period." However, in this case, even though the first operation section for the specific period and the second operation section for the special period are the same operation section, during the "specific operation permitted period", a model image that imitates the first operation section for the specific period is displayed. Display so that a periodic change appears in a predetermined time unit, and in the "special operation permissible period", display a simulated image that imitates the second operation unit during the special period, and display the periodic change in units of time longer than the predetermined time (It may be the same cycle time as the display of the simulated image that imitates the first operation unit during the special period). According to such a configuration, even if the operation target (operation unit) is the same, the time required for the periodic change varies depending on the type of the generated "operation allowable period". It is possible to greatly vary the effect of the "permissible period" depending on the type, and it can be expected that this will improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Configuration 8-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permission period during which an operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation permission period, change can occur. In addition, it is possible to execute a display that imitates an operation target for which operation reception is permitted (simulated image display means).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a predetermined operation permission period and a specific operation permission period are prepared as types of the operation permission period. There is an operation unit that is subject to and is allowed to accept multiple operations. On the other hand, since a different sound can be output as the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, depending on when the operation is performed, it is expected that the game interest will be improved. Note that the “predetermined operation permissible period” and the “specified operation permissible period” related to the configuration 8-E are merely names used for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 8-E. Therefore, it may mean the same manipulation permissible period as the "predetermined manipulation permissible period" and the "specific manipulation permissible period" according to other configurations, or may mean a different manipulation permissible period. Also, it may mean the same “operation permitted period” as the operation permitted period with another name.

Further, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 8-E", an operation unit that is subject to display by the model image display means and that is allowed to accept multiple operations during the "predetermined operation allowable period" When an operation is performed on , a post-operation output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes. When an operation is performed on an operation unit for which operation reception is permissible, even if there is a case where a post-operation output sound is output and a case where a post-operation output sound is not output as one of the post-reception changes. good.

According to such a configuration, during the "specific operation permissible period", even if an operation is performed on an operation unit that is to be displayed by the model image display means and that is permitted to receive operations a plurality of times. Since there are cases where the post-operation output sound is output and cases where the post-operation output sound is not output, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the operation reception has been properly performed, and the sense of tension is preferably maintained. can be expected.

[Configuration 9-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permission period during which an operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation permission period, change can occur. In addition, it is possible to execute a display that imitates an operation target for which operation reception is permitted.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a specific operation permission period is prepared as a type of operation permission period. There is an operation unit that can be operated multiple times, and if the operation unit is kept in an operated state, a post-operation output sound, which is one of the changes after acceptance, is output at predetermined intervals. To output a post-operation output sound each time an operation is performed on an operation unit when the operation is performed a plurality of times. As a result, it is expected that even if the operation unit is kept in an operated state, it is possible to favorably suggest that the operation is being properly accepted, as is the case when the operation is performed multiple times. It will be done. It should be noted that the “specific operation permissible period” related to the configuration 9-E is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 9-E. Therefore, it may mean the same manipulation permissible period as the "specific manipulation permissible period" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different manipulation permissible period. Also, it may mean the same “operation permitted period” as the operation permitted period with another name.

Further, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 9-E", at least "specific operation permitted period" and "special operation permitted period" are prepared as types of operation permitted period, and "specific operation permitted period" Then, there is an operation unit that allows operation acceptance multiple times and can be operated multiple times only by continuing to maintain the operated state, and if the operation unit continues to be operated A post-operation output sound, which is one of the changes, is output at predetermined time intervals, and when the operation unit is operated a plurality of times (for example, at intervals slower than the predetermined time), the operation is performed. The post-operation output sound may be output each time the operation is performed. On the other hand, during the special operation permission period, there is an operation unit that is allowed to accept operations multiple times, but even if the operation state is maintained, the operation acceptance is not performed multiple times. Even if it continues to be maintained, the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, will not be output at predetermined time intervals, and multiple times (for example, at intervals slower than the predetermined time) for the operation unit When the operation is performed, the post-operation output sound may or may not be output when the operation is performed.

According to such a configuration, during the special operation allowable period, there is an operation unit for which the so-called auto-flick function is not activated. is output in some cases and is not output in some cases, it can be expected that it will be difficult to recognize whether the operation has been properly accepted and that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained. It should be noted that the “special operation permissible period” related to the configuration 9-E is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 9-E. Therefore, it may mean the same manipulation permissible period as the "special manipulation permissible period" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different manipulation permissible period. Also, it may mean the same “operation permitted period” as the operation permitted period with another name.

[Configuration 10-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permission period during which an operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation permission period, change can occur. In addition, it is possible to display a simulated image that simulates an operation target for which operation reception is permitted so that periodic changes appear.

In this respect, in the operation permissible period of the pachinko machine 1, first, when the cyclical change of the model image display appears in units of a predetermined time, and when the cyclical change of the model image display is longer than the predetermined time There are cases where it is displayed so that it appears in units. In addition, a case where the periodic change of the model image display appears in a predetermined time unit during the operation permissible period, and a case where the periodic change of the model image display during the operation permissible period is a time unit longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time In both cases, when an operation is performed on the operation unit corresponding to the model image display among the plurality of operation units, the post-operation output, which is one of the post-acceptance changes Since the sound can be output, it can be expected to preferably suggest that the operation reception is properly performed.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 10-E", at least a specific operation permitted period and a special operation permitted period are prepared as types of the permitted operation period. A periodic change in the display may be displayed so as to appear in predetermined time units, and when an operation unit corresponding to the display of the simulated image is operated, a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, may be output. . On the other hand, in the "special operation permissible period", the model image display is displayed so that periodic changes appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time. There may be a case where the post-operation output sound, which is one of the above, is output, and a case where the post-operation output sound is not output.

According to such a configuration, when the cyclical change of the model image display appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time, the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is output. Since there are cases in which the post-operation output sound is not output in some cases, it can be expected to give a sense of tension as to whether the operation reception has been properly performed. Note that the “specific operation permissible period” and the “special operation permissible period” related to the configuration 10-E are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 10-E. Therefore, it may mean the same manipulation permissible period as the "specific manipulation permissible period" and the "special manipulation permissible period" according to other configurations, or may mean a different manipulation permissible period. Also, it may mean the same “operation permitted period” as the operation permitted period with another name.

[Configuration 11-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permission period during which an operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation permission period, change can occur. In addition, it is possible to execute a display that imitates an operation target for which operation reception is permitted. Further, even if no operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation permitted period, it is possible to execute the same post-acceptance processing as when the operation is performed (automatic reception executing means).

In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 prepares at least a specific operation permitted period and a special operation permitted period as types of the operation permitted period. In the "specific operation permissible period", there is an operation unit that is the object of processing by the automatic reception execution means (the object for which the automatic button function is activated) and that can accept operation multiple times. On the other hand, when an operation is performed by the player, a post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is output as a specific sound. On the other hand, during the special operation permission period, there is an operation unit that is not subject to processing by the automatic reception execution means (target for which the automatic button function is activated) and for which operation reception is permitted multiple times. On the other hand, when an operation is performed by the player, the post-operation output sound, which is one of the changes after the reception, can be output as a special sound different from the specific sound. Since it becomes possible to suggest whether or not to be processed by the automatic reception executing means through such a form of the post-operation output sound, it can be expected to favorably maintain the amusement of the game. Note that the “specific operation permissible period” and the “special operation permissible period” related to the configuration 11-E are merely names used for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 11-E. Therefore, it may mean the same manipulation permissible period as the "specific manipulation permissible period" and the "special manipulation permissible period" according to other configurations, or may mean a different manipulation permissible period. Also, it may mean the same “operation permitted period” as the operation permitted period with another name.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 11-E", at least a specific operation allowable period and a special operation allowable period are prepared as types of operation allowable periods, and the "specific operation allowable period" automatically accepts One of the post-acceptance changes when the player performs an operation on an operation unit that is the object of processing by the execution means (the object for which the automatic button function is activated) and for which the operation can be accepted multiple times. The post-operation output sound may be output as the specific sound. On the other hand, in the "special operation permissible period", the player is not subject to processing by the automatic reception execution means (target for which the automatic button function is activated), and the operation reception is permitted multiple times. When the operation is performed, there are cases where the post-operation output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is output as a special sound different from the specific sound, and there are cases where the post-operation output sound itself is not output. may According to such a configuration, since the conditions under which the post-operation output sound is output differ between the specific operation permissible period and the special operation permissible period, it can be expected to preferably maintain the sense of tension.

In this case, in the specific operation permissible period, ``the operation unit that is subject to processing by the automatic reception execution means and that can accept operations multiple times'', and in the special operation permissible period, The "operating unit that does not have a function and can be operated multiple times" may be the same operating unit, or may be a different operating unit.

Also, for example, an operation unit that is not subject to processing by the automatic reception execution means and that can accept operations multiple times during the special operation permission period is set as an operation unit that is also subject to operation during the specific operation permission period. It may be However, during the special operation permissible period, ``an operation part that is not subject to processing by the operation automatic reception execution means and for which operation reception can be accepted multiple times'' is set as an operation part that is to be operated even during the specific operation permissible period. In that case, ensure that the post-operation output sound is always output when the operation is performed, or even avoid outputting the post-operation output sound when the operation is performed. is preferred (not a mandatory configuration). No matter which configuration is adopted (for example, even if the post-operation output sound is not even output when an operation is performed), the post-operation output sound is output. Since the conditions differ between the specific operation permissible period and the special operation permissible period, it can be expected that the sense of tension is preferably maintained.

[Configuration 12-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permission period during which an operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation permission period, change can occur. In addition, upon occurrence of the operation permissible period, an audible output of a reception permissible sound suggesting that the operation reception is permitted or that the operation reception will be permitted will be audibly output. In addition, it is possible to execute a display simulating an operation target for which operation reception is permissible.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a specific operation permission period is prepared as a type of operation permission period. operation acceptance can be at least acceptable. Then, when an operation is performed on either the specific period first operation section or the specific period second operation section while the reception permission sound is being audibly output during the specific operation permission period, this triggers the operation. Acceptable sounds are made inaudible. This makes it possible to preferably indicate that the operation has been properly accepted regardless of whether the first operation unit for the specific period or the second operation unit for the specific period is operated.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 12-E", as the type of operation permitted period, at least a specific operation permitted period and a special operation permitted period are prepared. Acceptance of operation to the first operation unit and acceptance of operation to the second operation unit for a specific period are at least permissible, and during the specific operation permissible period, the acceptance permissible sound is audibly output for the specific period. When either the operation reception for the first operation unit or the operation reception for the second operation unit for a specific period is performed, the reception permission sound may be made inaudible. On the other hand, in the "special operation permissible period", it is possible to allow at least the reception of operations on the first operation unit during the special period and the reception of operations on the second operation unit during the special period. When an operation is accepted for the second operation unit during a special period while the acceptance acceptance sound is audibly output in , the acceptance acceptance sound will not be made inaudible, and the special operation acceptance When an operation is accepted for the first operation unit during a special period while the acceptance acceptance sound is audibly output during the period, the acceptance acceptance sound may be made non-audible with this as a trigger.

According to such a configuration, since the conditions for making the acceptance acceptance sound inaudible differ between the specific operation acceptance period and the special operation acceptance period, it is expected that the sense of tension is preferably maintained. sell. In addition, "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", "special period first operation unit", "special period second operation unit", "specific operation permitted period" related to the configuration 12-E ” and “special operation permissible period” are merely designations used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 12-E. Therefore, "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", "special period first operation unit", "special period second operation unit", "specific operation permitted period", and "special operation permissible period" may mean the same operation part and operation permissible period, or may mean a different operation part and operation permissible period. Also, it may mean the same “operation unit” and “operation allowable period” as an operation unit with another name or an operation allowable period.

In this case, the "specific period first operation part" of the specific operation allowed period may be the same as the "special period first operation part" or the "special period second operation part" of the special operation allowed period, They may be different from each other.

In addition, the "specific period second operation part" of the specific operation permitted period may be the same as the "special period first operation part" or the "special period second operation part" of the special operation permitted period, or both It can be different.

Further, the special period first operation unit (or the special period second operation unit) may be permitted to accept operations even during the specific operation permitted period.

[Configuration 13-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permission period during which an operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation permission period, change can occur. In addition, upon occurrence of the operation permissible period, an audible output of a reception permissible sound suggesting that the operation reception is permitted or that the operation reception will be permitted will be audibly output. In addition, it is possible to execute a display simulating an operation target for which operation reception is permissible.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a specific operation allowable period and a predetermined operation allowable period are prepared as types of the operation allowable period. In the "predetermined operation permissible period", operation reception for the first operation unit for a predetermined period and operation reception for the second operation unit for a predetermined period are allowed. can be at least permissible, it is possible to progress the performance in a similar manner in spite of the different types in the specific operation permissible period and the predetermined operation permissible period. In addition, "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", "predetermined period first operation unit", "predetermined period second operation unit", "specific operation permitted period" related to the configuration 13-E ” and “predetermined operation permissible period” are merely designations used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 13-E. Therefore, the "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", "predetermined period first operation unit", "predetermined period second operation unit", "specific operation allowable period", and "predetermined operation permissible period" may mean the same operating part and operation permissible period, or may mean a different operating part and operation permissible period. Also, it may mean the same “operation unit” and “operation allowable period” as an operation unit with another name or an operation allowable period.

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 13-E", in the "predetermined operation permissible period", it is at least permissible to accept an operation to the first operation unit for a predetermined period and to accept an operation to the second operation unit for a predetermined period. During the predetermined operation permissible period, while the acceptance permissible sound is audibly output, either the operation of the first operating section is accepted for the predetermined period or the operation of the second operating section is accepted for the predetermined period. This may be used as a trigger to prevent the acceptable acceptance sound from being rendered inaudible. On the other hand, in the "specific operation permissible period", it is possible to allow at least the reception of operations on the first operation section for a specific period and the reception of operations on the second operation section for a specific period. If an operation is accepted on the first operating unit for a specific period while the acceptance acceptance sound is audibly output in , the acceptance acceptance sound will not be made non-audible in the specified period. When an operation is accepted with respect to the two operation units, the reception permission sound may be made inaudible. According to such a configuration, since the conditions under which the acceptance acceptance sound is made inaudible differ between the predetermined operation allowable period and the specific operation allowable period, it is expected that the sense of tension is preferably maintained. sell.

In this case, the "specific period first operation unit" of the specific operation allowable period may be the same as the "predetermined period first operation unit" or the "predetermined period second operation unit" of the predetermined operation allowable period. They may be different from each other.

Further, the "specified period second operating part" of the specified operation permissible period may be the same as the "predetermined period first operating part" or the "predetermined period second operating part" of the predetermined operation permissible period. It can be different.

Further, the first operating unit for a predetermined period (or the second operating unit for a predetermined period) may be allowed to accept operations even during the specific operation permitted period.

[Configuration 14-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permission period during which an operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation permission period, Display can be displayed. In addition, upon occurrence of the operation permissible period, an audible output of a reception permissible sound suggesting that the operation reception is permitted or that the operation reception will be permitted will be audibly output.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when a player operates an operation unit for which operation reception is permitted during the operation permission period, the post-reception display is displayed so as to overlap the performance symbols in front thereof. Since there are cases where it is displayed, and there are cases where the display after reception is displayed so as to overlap with the performance pattern behind it, the performance is given between the display after reception and the performance pattern. It can be expected that it will improve the interest in gaming.

Further, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 14-E", at least a specific operation allowable period is prepared as a type of the operation allowable period. Both operation reception for the operation part and operation reception for the second operation part are permissible, and when the player performs an operation on the first operation part, the performance pattern is superimposed on the front side. , and when the player operates the second operation unit, the post-acceptance display may be displayed so as to be superimposed on the back side of the performance pattern. According to such a configuration, it is possible to select which one of the performance pattern and the display after reception is preferentially desired depending on which one of the first operation unit and the second operation unit is operated. Therefore, it can be expected that the amusement of the game can be favorably maintained. The “first operation unit”, “second operation unit”, and “specific operation permissible period” related to the configuration 14-E are the names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 14-E. Not too much. Therefore, the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", and "specific operation permissible period" according to other configurations may mean the same operation unit and the operation permissible period, or different operation units. or an operation permissible period. Also, it may mean the same “operation unit” and “operation allowable period” as an operation unit with another name or an operation allowable period.

[Configuration 15-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permission period during which an operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation permission period, change can occur. In addition, it is possible to execute a premonition effect display that suggests that the operation permissible period will occur. In addition, it is possible to execute a display simulating an operation target for which operation reception is permissible.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a specific operation permission period is prepared as a type of operation permission period. is at least permissible, and the precursor effect display is executed so as to straddle the timing at which the specific operation allowable period occurs, and the precursor effect display is displayed during the specific operation allowable period. When an operation is performed on either the first operation part for a specific period or the second operation part for a specific period while the display is on, the precursor effect display is set to a non-display state. That is, in this case, even if an operation is performed on either the first operation unit for the specific period or the second operation unit for the specific period while the precursor effect display is being displayed, the operation is properly accepted. It becomes possible to suitably suggest that there is a situation where

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 15-E", at least a specific operation permitted period and a special operation permitted period are prepared as types of the permitted operation period. Acceptance of operations on the first operation unit and acceptance of operations on the second operation unit for a specific period are at least permissible, and the precursor effect display is displayed so as to straddle the timing at which the specific operation permissible period occurs. When either the operation of the first operation unit for the specific period or the operation of the second operation unit for the specific period is accepted while the precursor effect display is being displayed in the specific operation permissible period, this is used as a trigger. The portent effect display may be set to a non-display state. On the other hand, during the "special operation permissible period", it is possible to allow at least the reception of operations on the first operation section during the special period and the reception of operations on the second operation section during the special period. It is displayed so as to straddle the timing at which the special operation permissible period occurs, but if an operation is accepted for the first operation unit during the special period while the premonitory effect display is audibly output during the special operation permissible period, this is done. is not hidden, and an operation is accepted for the second operation unit during the special period while the precursor effect display is displayed during the special operation permissible period. Triggered by this, the precursor effect display may be hidden.

According to such a configuration, since the conditions under which the precursor effect display is hidden are different between the specific operation permissible period and the special operation permissible period, it is expected that the sense of tension will be favorably maintained. sell. In addition, "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", "special period first operation unit", "special period second operation unit", "specific operation "allowable period" and "special operation allowable period" are merely names used to explain the technical idea of the configuration 15-E. Therefore, "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", "special period first operation unit", "special period second operation unit", "specific operation permitted period", and "special operation permitted period" may mean the same operation unit and operation permitted period, or may mean a different operation unit and operation permitted period. Also, it may mean the same “operation unit” and “operation allowable period” as an operation unit with another name or an operation allowable period.

In this case, the "specific period first operation section" of the specific operation permitted period may be the same as the "special period first operation section" or the "special period second operation section" of the special operation permitted period, They may be different from each other.

In addition, the "specific period second operation part" of the specific operation permitted period may be the same as the "special period first operation part" or the "special period second operation part" of the special operation permitted period, or both It can be different.

Further, the special period first operation unit (and the special period second operation unit) may be permitted to accept operations even during the specific operation permitted period.

[Configuration 16-E]
Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of performing variable display of performance symbols. Further, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period during which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and to display a post-reception display when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation permissible period. In addition, it is possible to execute a premonition effect display that suggests that the operation permissible period will occur. In addition, it is possible to execute a display simulating an operation target for which operation reception is permissible.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, the precursor effect display can be executed so as to straddle the timing at which the operation permission period occurs, and the game is performed for the operation unit whose operation reception is permitted during the operation permission period. When an operation is performed by a person, the post-acceptance display is displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side of the performance pattern, and the post-reception display is displayed so as to be superimposed on the back side of the performance pattern. Since there is a case, it can be expected to improve the game interest by providing a performance with the performance pattern regarding the display after reception.

Further, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 16-E", at least a specific operation permissible period is prepared as a type of operation permissible period. Both operation reception for the part and operation reception for the second operation part are permissible, and when the player performs an operation on the first operation part, the performance pattern is superimposed on the front side. The post-acceptance display may be displayed, and when the player operates the second operation unit, the post-acceptance display may be displayed so as to be superimposed on the back side of the performance pattern. According to such a configuration, it is possible to select which one of the performance pattern and the display after reception is preferentially desired depending on which one of the first operation unit and the second operation unit is operated. Therefore, it can be expected that the amusement of the game can be favorably maintained. The “first operation unit”, “second operation unit”, and “specific operation permissible period” related to the configuration 16-E are the names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 16-E. Not too much. Therefore, the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", and "specific operation permissible period" according to other configurations may mean the same operation unit and the operation permissible period, or different operation units. or an operation permissible period. Also, it may mean the same “operation unit” and “operation allowable period” as an operation unit with another name or an operation allowable period.

[Configuration 17-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permission period during which an operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation permission period, display. In addition, it is possible to execute a premonition effect display that suggests that the operation permissible period will occur. It is possible to execute a display that imitates an operation target for which operation reception is permissible.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a specific operation permissible period is prepared as a type of operation permissible period. Also, when a specific time elapses after the specific operation allowable period occurs, the same post-acceptance display as when an operation is performed on the operation unit is performed (automatic button function is activated), The precursor effect display is executed so as to straddle the timing when the specific operation permissible period occurs, but is hidden at the timing before the specific time elapses after the specific operation permissible period occurs. made it As a result, while the precursor effect display is being displayed, the player is informed that there is no possibility that the automatic button function will be activated, that is, that the player is in a situation in which it is possible to perform the operation calmly. You will be able to make suggestions to

In addition, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 17-E", at least a specific operation permitted period and a special operation permitted period are prepared as types of the operation permitted period, and in the "specific operation permitted period", the specified Even if no operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation permissible period, the same post-acceptance display as when the operation is performed on the operation unit is performed after the specified time has passed since the specific operation permissible period occurred. (the automatic button function is activated), and the precursor effect display is executed so as to straddle the timing at which the specific operation allowable period occurs, but after the specific operation allowable period occurs, the above It may be hidden at a timing before the specific time elapses. On the other hand, in the "special operation allowable period", even if no operation is performed on the operation unit during the special operation allowable period, when the special time elapses after the special operation allowable period occurs, the operation unit The same post-acceptance display as when the operation is performed (automatic button function is activated) is performed, and the precursor effect display is performed so as to straddle the timing when the special operation permission period occurs. , and is also displayed when the special time has passed since the special operation permissible period occurred. The same post-acceptance display as when an operation is performed on the operation unit may be started in a state in which the effect display is displayed instead of being hidden.

According to such a configuration, whether or not the portent effect display is hidden depends on the timing at which the automatic button function is activated, depending on whether or not the specific operation allowable period and the special operation allowable period. Therefore, it can be expected to preferably maintain the sense of tension when the operation permissible period in which the automatic button function is activated occurs. Note that the “specific operation permissible period” and the “special operation permissible period” related to the configuration 17-E are merely names used to describe the technical concept of the configuration 17-E. Therefore, it may mean the same manipulation permissible period as the "specific manipulation permissible period" and the "special manipulation permissible period" according to other configurations, or may mean a different manipulation permissible period. Also, it may mean the same “operation permitted period” as the operation permitted period with another name.

In this case, the specific time and the special time may be the same time or different times.

[Configuration 18-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permission period during which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted. give rise to In addition, it is possible to execute a display that imitates the operation unit (simulated image display means).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a predetermined operation permission period and a specific operation permission period are prepared as types of the operation permission period, and in the predetermined operation permission period, it is possible to accept a plurality of operations, and the above model is provided. It is assumed that there is an operation unit to be displayed by the image display means. In the specific operation permissible period, there is an operation unit which is not subject to display by the model image display means, although it is permitted to receive operations a plurality of times. Since the reception can be performed multiple times (so-called auto repeated function), it is expected that the difficulty of the game due to the concealment of the operation unit to be operated will be alleviated and the decline in the interest in the game will be suppressed. sell.

Further, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 18-E", the operating unit is allowed to accept multiple operations in the "predetermined operation allowable period" and is the target of display by the model image display means. , and even if the operation unit is maintained in an operated state, the operation reception may not be performed multiple times. According to such a configuration, it is expected that the sense of tension is preferably maintained not only when the operation unit to be operated is concealed, but also when the operation unit to be operated is not concealed. can be

In addition, when adopting the "configuration 18-E", the "predetermined operation permissible period" permits reception of operations a plurality of times, and the number of operation units to be displayed by the model image display means is one. Alternatively, there may be a plurality of operations, and even if the operation unit is maintained in an operated state, the operation acceptance may not be performed multiple times. On the other hand, during the "specific operation permissible period", there are at least the first and second operation units as the operation units that are permitted to accept multiple operations, but are not displayed by the model image display means. However, the operation can be accepted multiple times just by keeping the first operation part in the operated state, while the operation can be accepted multiple times even if the second operation part is kept in the operated state. may not be performed more than once.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to accept a plurality of operations during the "specific operation permissible period", but even an operation unit that is not subject to display by the model image display means has a so-called auto-flick function. is not activated in some cases, it can be expected that the tension will be maintained more appropriately. The "first operation unit", "second operation unit", "predetermined operation permissible period", and "specific operation permissible period" related to the configuration 18-E explain the technical concept of the configuration 18-E. It is just a name used for the purpose. Therefore, it means the same operation unit and operation allowable period as "first operation unit", "second operation unit", "predetermined operation allowable period", and "specific operation allowable period" according to other configurations. Alternatively, it may mean a different operation part or an operation permitted period. In addition, it may mean the same “operation part” or “operation permission period” as the operation part with another name or the operation permission period.

In this case, at least one of the first operation section and the second operation section (for example, the second operation section) is permitted to receive operations a plurality of times during a predetermined operation permitted period, and the display by the model image display means is permitted. may be set as an operation unit to be targeted for.

[Configuration 19-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permission period during which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted. give rise to In addition, it is possible to execute a display that imitates the operation unit (simulated image display means). Further, when an operation is accepted for the operation unit during the operation allowable period, as one of the post-acceptance changes, a post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the operation acceptance can be output.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a predetermined operation permission period and a specific operation permission period are prepared as types of the operation permission period, and during the "predetermined operation permission period", it is possible to accept the operation, and the model image There is an operation unit to be displayed by the display means, and when the operation unit is operated, a post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the operation can be output. On the other hand, in the "specific operation permissible period", there is an operation unit that is allowed to accept operations and is not subject to display by the model image display means. Since it is possible to output an output sound after accepting the operation according to the operation, even if the operation is performed while the operation unit to be operated is hidden, the operation can be performed properly. You will be able to suggest that you are in a situation.

Further, as will be described later, when the "Configuration 19-E" is adopted, there is an operation unit that is permitted to accept operations during the "specific operation permitted period" and is not subject to display by the model image display means. When the operation unit is operated, there may be a case where the post-acceptance output sound is output according to the operation, and a case where the post-acceptance output sound is not output according to the operation. That is, in this case, since it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the operation has been properly accepted when the operation unit in the hidden state is operated, it can be expected that a more suitable sense of tension is imparted.

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "Configuration 19-E", there is one operating unit that is permitted to accept operations and that is to be displayed by the model image display means during the "predetermined operation permitted period". Alternatively, there may be a plurality of them, and when the operation unit is operated, a post-acceptance output sound may be output. On the other hand, in the "specific operation permissible period", there are at least the first operation part and the second operation part as operation parts that are permitted to accept operations but are not displayed by the model image display means. When an operation is performed on the part, the post-acceptance output sound may be output, but when an operation is performed on the second operation part, the post-acceptance output sound may not be output. That is, in this case, during the "specific operation permissible period", if an operation unit that is not in the concealed state is operated, a post-acceptance output sound may be output. Since the post-acceptance output sound is output only when an operation is performed on the first operation part of the first operation part and the second operation part, not only the first operation part but also the second operation part Therefore, it is possible to further conceal the state in which operation reception is permitted. The "first operation unit", "second operation unit", "predetermined operation permissible period", and "specific operation permissible period" related to the configuration 19-E explain the technical concept of the configuration 19-E. It is just a name used for the purpose. Therefore, it means the same operation unit and operation allowable period as "first operation unit", "second operation unit", "predetermined operation allowable period", and "specific operation allowable period" according to other configurations. Alternatively, it may mean a different operation part or an operation permitted period. In addition, it may mean the same “operation part” or “operation permission period” as the operation part with another name or the operation permission period.

In this case, the post-acceptance output sound may be output in different manners depending on at least one of the type of operation-allowed period and the type of operation unit operated by the player.

In addition, at least one of the first operation unit and the second operation unit (for example, the second operation unit) is allowed to accept operations and is a target of display by the model image display means during a predetermined operation permission period. It may be set as an operation unit.

[Configuration 20-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute variable display of the performance symbols. Further, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period during which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and to display the post-acceptance display when an operation on the operation unit is accepted during the operation permissible period. In addition, it is possible to display a display that imitates the operation unit (simulated image display means).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a predetermined operation permission period and a specific operation permission period are prepared as types of the operation permission period, and during the "predetermined operation permission period", it is possible to accept the operation, and the model image There is an operation unit to be displayed by the display means, and when the operation unit is operated, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation can be displayed. There is an operation unit for which reception is permitted and is not subject to display by the model image display means. As a result, it is possible to suggest that the operation is performed properly even if the operation is performed while the operation unit to be operated is kept secret.

Further, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 20-E", there is an operation unit that is allowed to accept operations and is not subject to display by the model image display means during the specific operation permitted period, and the operation unit is operated, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to overlap the production pattern in front of it, and the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed in front of the production pattern. It may be displayed so as to overlap on the back side in some cases. According to such a configuration, during the specific operation permissible period, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a performance effect between the performance pattern and the post-acceptance display when the hidden operation unit is operated. can be expected.

Further, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 20-E", the first operation unit is an operation unit that is permitted to accept operations during the specific operation permitted period but is not subject to display by the model image display means. and at least a second operation unit, and when an operation is performed on the first operation unit, a post-receipt display corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to be superimposed on the back side of the production pattern, and the second operation unit When an operation is performed on the operation unit, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation may be displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side of the production design. According to such a configuration, it is possible to select which one of the performance pattern and the display after reception is preferentially desired depending on which one of the first operation unit and the second operation unit is operated. Therefore, it can be expected that the amusement of the game can be favorably maintained.

[Configuration 21-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate a multiple operation allowable period in which both the operation reception for the first operation unit and the operation reception for the second operation unit are permitted. When either the operation on the first operation unit or the operation on the second operation unit is performed within the allowable period, a post-acceptance display can be displayed according to the type of the side on which the operation has been accepted. In addition, although it is possible to display a simulated image display that imitates the operation target by the player (simulated image display means), the display that imitates the operation target is displayed by the simulated image display means even though the reception of the operation is permitted. It may not be done by

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a first multiple-operation permitted period and a second multiple-operation permitted period are prepared as types of the multiple-operation permitted period. When an operation is performed on the "first operation unit" for which operation acceptance is permissible, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed. Acceptance of operations on the second operation unit is allowed. Then, while the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation performed on the "first operation unit" in the first multiple-operation allowable period is being displayed, an operation is performed on the "second operation unit". is displayed, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed, and the post-acceptance display (the post-acceptance display on the side of the first operation unit) that has been displayed up to that time can be hidden with the operation as a trigger. Therefore, it is possible to preferably suggest that the production progresses due to the newly performed operation to the second operation unit side, not the interrupted operation to the first operation unit side. Become.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 21-E" is adopted, both the display imitating the first operation unit and the display imitating the second operation unit are displayed in the "first multiple operation permissible period". In such a situation, both operation reception for the first operation section and operation reception for the second operation section are permitted, and at least the first operation section out of the first operation section and the second operation section is permitted. may be allowed to accept multiple operations. In addition, during the "second multiple-operation allowable period", neither the display imitating the first operation unit nor the display imitating the second operation unit is displayed. In addition, at least the first operating section of the first operating section and the second operating section is allowed to accept multiple operations. good too. Then, when an operation is performed on the first operation unit for which multiple operations can be accepted during the "first multiple-operation allowable period", a post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed. While the post-acceptance display is being displayed, it is permissible to accept an operation on the second operation unit, and if an operation is performed on the second operation unit while the post-acceptance display is being displayed, The post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation may be displayed, and the post-acceptance display (the post-acceptance display on the first operation unit side) that has appeared until then may be hidden in response to the operation. On the other hand, when an operation is performed on the first operation unit for which it is possible to accept multiple operations during the "second multiple operation allowable period", the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed. However, even while the post-acceptance display is being displayed, acceptance of operations on the second operation unit is allowed, and while the post-acceptance display is being displayed, an operation is performed on the second operation unit. , the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed, but the post-acceptance display (the post-acceptance display on the first operation unit side) that has appeared until then may not be hidden by the operation. . According to such a configuration, when an operation is performed on the second operation unit while the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation on the first operation unit is being displayed, the operation on the first operation unit is triggered by this operation. In some cases, the display after reception is hidden, and in other cases, the display after reception is not hidden in response to the operation on the first operation unit. can be expected.

It should be noted that the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", "first multiple operation allowable period", and "second multiple operation allowable period" according to the configuration 21-E It is just a name used to explain the technical idea of Therefore, the same operation unit and operation allowable period as the “first operation unit”, “second operation unit”, “first multiple operation allowable period”, and “second multiple operation allowable period” according to other configurations are used. Alternatively, it may mean a different operation part or an operation permitted period. In addition, it may mean the same “operation unit” or “operation allowable period” as the operation unit having another name or the operation allowable period.

[Configuration 22-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate a multiple operation permissible period in which both the reception of operations on the first operation unit and the reception of operations on the second operation unit are permitted. In addition, the first operation-related display, which can appear only when the operation acceptance of the first operation unit is allowed or when the operation acceptance is allowed, can be displayed. In addition, it is possible to display a second operation-related display that can appear only when the second operation unit is in a state in which it is permitted to accept operations, or in a state in which it is permitted to accept operations.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a first multiple-operations permitted period and a second multiple-operations permitted period are prepared as the multiple-operations permitted period. Since both the related display and the second operation related display can be displayed, the operation by the player is smoothly encouraged even if the reception of operations is allowed for a plurality of operation units. can be expected.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 22-E" is adopted, in the "first multiple-operation allowable period", the first operation-related display and the second operation-related display are both displayed. It may be possible to receive an operation for the operation unit or to accept an operation for the second operation unit. On the other hand, during the "second multiple-operation allowable period", when neither the first operation-related display nor the second operation-related display is displayed, an operation reception for the first operation unit or an operation reception for the second operation unit is performed. However, when an operation for the second operation unit is accepted under this situation, the second operation-related display is displayed, and while the second operation-related display is being displayed, the first operation It may be possible to receive an operation for the unit or to accept an operation for the second operation unit. According to such a configuration, the secrecy regarding "the state in which operation reception is permitted" in the second operation unit is canceled by the operation on the second operation unit, and the second operation-related display is displayed. Since it becomes possible to accept an operation for the first operation unit or to accept an operation for the second operation unit while the operation is being performed, it can be expected to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 22-E" is adopted, even if an operation is accepted for the first operation unit during the "second multiple operation permissible period", it is allowed to accept an operation for the first operation unit. The first operation-related display, which can appear only when the user is in a state where the operation is accepted or when the operation acceptance is permitted, may be prevented from being displayed. According to such a configuration, since the performance when the operation reception is performed is different between the first operation part and the second operation part which are in a concealed state, the game interest is improved. can be expected.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 22-E" is adopted, the second operation-related display is displayed while neither the first operation-related display nor the second operation-related display is displayed in the "second multiple-operation allowable period". The second operation-related display that is displayed based on the acceptance of the operation on the operation unit may have a display mode different from the second operation-related display that appears when the "first multiple-operation allowable period" occurs. .

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 22-E", during the "second multiple operation permissible period", the operation of the second operation unit is accepted while the display related to the second operation is not displayed. In this case, the second operation-related display may be displayed, but the display suggesting the degree of expectation may not be displayed. That is, in this case, it is possible to prompt a further operation on the second operation unit while the second operation-related display is being displayed.

It should be noted that the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", "first multiple operation allowable period", and "second multiple operation allowable period" according to the configuration 22-E It is just a name used to explain the technical idea of Therefore, the same operation unit and operation allowable period as the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", "first multiple operation allowable period", and "second multiple operation allowable period" according to other configurations are used. Alternatively, it may mean a different operation part or an operation permitted period. In addition, it may mean the same “operation part” or “operation permission period” as the operation part with another name or the operation permission period.

[Configuration 23-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permission period during which an operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation permission period, change can occur. In addition, it is possible to execute a display that imitates an operation target for which operation reception is permitted (simulated image display means).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a predetermined operation permitted period and a specific operation permitted period are prepared as types of the operation permitted period. However, if an operation is performed on the operation part during the "predetermined operation permission period", or if the operation is performed on the operation part during the "specific operation permission period" Suggest which type of operation permissible period occurred because it was made possible to output a different sound as a post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes. will be able to

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 23-E", the "predetermined operation permissible period" is subject to display by the model image display means, and multiple operations can be accepted. There are one or more operation units, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit, a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes. There is one or a plurality of operation units that are not subject to display by the display means and that are allowed to receive operations multiple times, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit, one of the changes after reception is performed. As one example, there may be a case where the output sound is output after reception and a case where the output sound is not output after reception. According to such a configuration, during the "specific operation permissible period", there are cases in which an output sound is output after reception and in which an output sound is not output when a hidden operation unit is operated. Therefore, it can be expected that the sense of tension as to whether or not the operation has been properly accepted can be preferably maintained.

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "Configuration 23-E", during the "specific operation permissible period", it is not subject to display by the model image display means and multiple operations can be accepted. There are at least a first operation unit and a second operation unit as the operation unit, and when an operation is performed on the first operation unit, a post-operation output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes, but the second operation unit As one of the post-acceptance changes, a post-operation output sound may not be output when an operation is performed on the . According to such a configuration, in the "specific operation permitted period", it is possible to further enhance the secrecy of the "state in which the operation reception is permitted" in the second operation unit, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. It can be expected that

In this case, during the "specific operation permissible period", there may be no operation unit that is subject to display by the model image display means and that is allowed to receive operations (multiple times).

In addition, in the "predetermined operation permissible period", at least the second operation unit is an operation unit that is displayed by the model image display means and that is allowed to receive operations a plurality of times. A post-acceptance output sound may be output as one of the post-acceptance changes when an operation is performed on the part.

In addition, at least one of the first operation section and the second operation section (for example, the second operation section) is to be displayed by the model image display means during the "predetermined operation allowable period", and is operated a plurality of times. It may be used as an operation unit for which reception is permitted.

Further, when the first operation unit is operated during the specific operation permissible period, there may be a case where the change occurs after the acceptance and a case where the change does not occur after the acceptance. According to such a configuration, it can be expected that the sense of tension when operating the confidential first operation unit is preferably maintained during the "specific operation permissible period".

The "first operation unit", "second operation unit", "predetermined operation permissible period", and "specific operation permissible period" related to the configuration 23-E explain the technical concept of the configuration 23-E. It is just a name used for the purpose. Therefore, the same operation unit and operation allowable period as the "first operation unit", "second operation unit", "first multiple operation allowable period", and "second multiple operation allowable period" according to other configurations are used. Alternatively, it may mean a different operation part or an operation permitted period. In addition, it may mean the same “operation part” or “operation permission period” as the operation part with another name or the operation permission period.

[Configuration 24-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permission period during which an operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation permission period, change can occur. In addition, it is possible to execute a display that imitates an operation target for which operation reception is permitted (simulated image display means).

In this regard, in the operation permissible period of the pachinko machine 1, it may be possible to accept multiple operations for an operation unit that is not targeted for display by the model image display means. Since the operation reception can be performed multiple times if the operation is continued to be maintained, the difficulty of the game due to the concealment of the operation part to be operated is alleviated and the decline in the interest in the game is suppressed. can be expected.

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 24-E", it is possible to accept multiple operations during the operation permissible period for the operation unit that is not targeted for display by the model image display means. When the operation unit is maintained in an operated state, there may be cases where the operation is accepted multiple times and cases where the operation is not accepted multiple times. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably impart a sense of tension while alleviating the difficulty of playing the game due to the concealment of the operation unit to be operated.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 24-E" is adopted, at least a specific operation permissible period is prepared as an operation permissible period. There are at least a first operation unit and a second operation unit as operation units that are not subject to display but are allowed to receive operations multiple times. The operation reception may be performed a plurality of times when the second operation unit is kept in an operated state without the reception being performed a plurality of times. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the confidentiality of whether or not a plurality of operation receptions are permitted for the first operation unit during the specific operation permission period, and the sense of tension can be preferably improved. can be expected to give

The "first operation unit", "second operation unit", and "specific operation permissible period" related to the configuration 24-E are the names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 24-E. Not too much. Therefore, "first operation unit", "second operation unit", and "specific operation permissible period" according to other configurations may mean the same operation unit and operation permissible period, or different operation units or an operation permissible period. In addition, it may mean the same “operation unit” or “operation allowable period” as the operation unit having another name or the operation allowable period.

[Configuration 25-E]
Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is capable of performing variable display of performance symbols. Further, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period during which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and to display the post-acceptance display when an operation on the operation unit is accepted during the operation permissible period. In addition, it is possible to display a display that imitates the operation unit.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a predetermined operation permission period and a specific operation permission period are prepared as types of the operation permission period. There is an operation part that is not subject to display by the display means, and when the operation part is operated, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed so that it can be seen on the front side of the production pattern, and "specific operation permitted In the "period", there is an operation unit that is allowed to accept operations and is not subject to display by the model image display means. so that it can be displayed so that it overlaps with the front side of it. As a result, even when the operation part to be operated is kept secret, it is possible to suitably suggest that the operation has been properly performed, thereby improving the amusement of the game. can be expected.

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 25-E", in the "predetermined operation permissible period", the operation unit is allowed to accept operations and is not displayed by the model image display means for a predetermined period of time. There are at least one operation part and a second operation part for a predetermined period, and when the first operation part is operated for a predetermined period, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to be visible in front of the production pattern, and the predetermined When the second operation unit is operated during the period, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation may be displayed so as to be seen on the front side of the production pattern. On the other hand, during the "specific operation permissible period", there are at least a first operation unit for a specific period and a second operation unit for a specific period as operation units that are allowed to accept operations and that are not displayed by the model image display means. When the first operation section is operated for a specific period, the post-receipt display corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to be visible in front of the production pattern, and when the second operation section is operated for a specific period, the operation is performed. The display after receiving the response may be displayed so as to be visible behind the production design. According to such a configuration, in the "predetermined operation permissible period", regardless of whether the concealed first operation unit for a predetermined period or the second operation unit for a predetermined period is operated, the display after reception is performed with respect to the production pattern. is displayed in front of it, it can be suggested that the operation has been accepted properly. If you operate the second operation part for a specific period of the part and the second operation part for a specific period, the after-acceptance display will be displayed behind the effect symbol, so the after-acceptance display will be displayed. This makes it difficult to recognize that the operation has been accepted, and it is possible to suitably give a sense of tension as to whether or not the operation reception has been properly performed.

Further, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 25-E", an operation unit that is allowed to accept operations and is a target of display by the model image display means in the "predetermined operation allowable period"; There is an operation unit for which reception is permitted and is not subject to display by the model image display means, and the operation unit for which operation reception is permitted and is subject to display by the model image display means is operated. Then, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed so that it can be seen behind the production pattern, and the operation unit is allowed to accept the operation and is not subject to display by the model image display means. When operated, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation may be displayed so as to be seen on the front side with respect to the production pattern. On the other hand, during the "specific operation permissible period", there is no operation unit for which operation reception is permitted and which is to be displayed by the model image display means, but operation reception is permitted and the model image is displayed. There are at least a first operation part for a specific period and a second operation part for a specific period as operation parts that are not subject to display by the means, and when the first operation part for the specific period is operated, the display after reception according to the operation is a production pattern. is displayed so as to be visible in front of it, and when the second operation unit is operated for a specific period, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to be visible behind it in relation to the production pattern. may According to such a configuration, in the "predetermined operation permissible period", when the operation unit (the first operation unit for the predetermined period) to be displayed by the model image display means is operated, the visibility of the production pattern is reduced. While the display after acceptance is displayed in a difficult-to-visually-recognized manner without deterioration, when the hidden operation unit (the second operation unit for a predetermined period) is operated, even if the visibility of the production pattern is deteriorated, The post-acceptance display is conspicuously displayed, thereby facilitating the recognition of proper acceptance of the operation instead of keeping it secret until then. On the other hand, in the "specific operation permissible period", even if the concealed operation unit (the first operation unit for the specified period, the second operation unit for the specified period) is operated, the first operation unit for the specified period If the is operated, the visibility of the production pattern is not deteriorated, and the display after acceptance is displayed in a form that is difficult to see. Of course, by making it difficult to recognize whether or not the operation has been accepted properly, it is expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained.

In addition, the "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", "predetermined operation permitted period", and "specific operation permitted period" related to the configuration 25-E are the technology of the configuration 25-E. It is just a designation used to describe the idea. Therefore, it means the same operation unit and operation allowable period as the "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", "predetermined operation allowable period", and "specific operation allowable period" according to other configurations. , or may mean a different operation part or an operation permitted period. In addition, it may mean the same “operation part” or “operation permission period” as the operation part with another name or the operation permission period.

[Configuration 26-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute variable display of the performance symbols. Further, it is possible to generate an operation permissible period during which an operation reception for the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation for the operation unit is accepted during the operation permissible period, a post-acceptance change occurs. In addition, it is possible to display a display that imitates the operation unit.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a predetermined operation permission period and a specific operation permission period are prepared as types of the operation permission period, and during the "predetermined operation permission period", it is possible to accept the operation, and the model image There is an operation part that is not subject to display by the display means, and when the operation part is operated, as one of the post-acceptance changes, no post-acceptance output sound is output, and operation acceptance is allowed during the "specific operation allowable period" There is an operation unit that is enabled and is not subject to display by the model image display means, and when the operation unit is operated, a post-acceptance output sound can be output as one of the post-acceptance changes. That is, in this case, when an operation unit for which operation reception is permitted and which is not subject to display by the model image display means is operated, a post-reception output sound is output as one of the post-reception changes (specific operation permitted). period) and when no output is made (predetermined operation permissible period), it can be expected that the sense of tension is preferably maintained.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 26-E" is adopted, in the "predetermined operation permissible period", the operation unit is permitted to accept operations and is not displayed by the model image display means for a predetermined period of time. There are at least one operating section and a second operating section for a predetermined period, and when either the first operating section for a predetermined period or the second operating section for a predetermined period is operated, a post-acceptance change occurs, but it is accepted as one of the post-acceptance changes. It may be configured such that the post-output sound is not output. On the other hand, during the "specific operation permissible period", there are at least a first operation unit for a specific period and a second operation unit for a specific period as operation units that are allowed to accept operations and that are not displayed by the model image display means. If the first operation unit is operated for a specific period, post-acceptance changes occur, but one of them is that the post-acceptance output sound is not output, but if the second operation unit is operated for a specific period, the post-acceptance changes As one example, an output sound may be output after acceptance. According to such a configuration, in the "predetermined operation permissible period", even if any of the concealed first operation unit for a predetermined period and the second operation unit for a predetermined period is operated, changes occur after acceptance, but One of the changes is that the output sound is not output after acceptance. As one of the post-acceptance changes, the post-acceptance output sound is output only when the second operation unit is operated. That is, in this case, even if the operation unit is kept secret, the player side can recognize that the output sound will be output after receiving the operation when the operation is accepted. When the first operation unit is operated for a specific period of time, or when the operation is performed during the "predetermined operation permissible period", it is difficult to recognize whether or not the operation is properly accepted, thereby creating a sense of tension. It can be expected to keep well.

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 26-E", an operation unit that is allowed to accept operations and is a target of display by the model image display means during the "predetermined operation allowable period"; There is an operation unit that is allowed to be accepted and is not subject to display by the model image display means, and an operation unit that is allowed to accept operation and is subject to display by the model image display means is operated. A post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes. As one example, the output sound may not be output after acceptance. On the other hand, during the "specific operation permissible period", although there is no operation unit for which operation reception is permitted and displayed by the model image display means, operation reception is permitted and the model image is displayed. There are at least a first operation part for a specific period and a second operation part for a specific period as operation parts that are not subject to display by the means, and if the first operation part for the specific period is operated, changes will occur after acceptance, but it is accepted as one of them. The post-acceptance output sound may be output as one of the post-acceptance changes when the second operation unit is operated for the specific period of time without outputting the post-acceptance sound. According to such a configuration, during the "predetermined operation permissible period", if a concealed operation unit is operated, changes occur after acceptance, but one of them is that no output sound is output after acceptance. , it is possible to make it difficult to recognize that an operation has been accepted, thereby making it difficult to recognize that an operation opportunity has been given to the operation unit. On the other hand, in the "specific operation permissible period", when operating the confidential operation unit, a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes (specific period second operation unit), As one of the changes, there is a case where the output sound is not output after reception (the first operation unit for a specific period). Therefore, even when a plurality of operation units are concealed, if an output sound is output after reception (the second operation unit for a specific period), it is appropriately suggested that an operation opportunity has been secretly given. It can be expected to avoid a situation in which none of the players notice that a hidden button has occurred. On the other hand, among the "specific period first operation unit" and the "specific period second operation unit", the confidentiality of the specific period first operation unit can be further enhanced, and the game interest can be improved. can be expected to improve

In addition, the first operation unit for a specific period is used as "an operation unit that is allowed to accept operations and is not subject to display by the model image display means" during a predetermined operation permission period, and the second operation unit for a specific period is used as: During the predetermined operation permissible period, if it is used as "an operation unit which is allowed to accept operations and is a target of display by the above-mentioned model image display means", which operation unit is hidden during the "specified operation permissible period". As a judgment as to whether or not it is set to , it is possible to use the effect in the "predetermined operation permissible period" as a hint.

In addition, the "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", "predetermined operation permitted period", and "specific operation permitted period" related to the configuration 26-E are the technology of the configuration 26-E. It is just a designation used to describe the idea. Therefore, it means the same operation unit and operation allowable period as the "specific period first operation unit", "specific period second operation unit", "predetermined operation allowable period", and "specific operation allowable period" according to other configurations. , or may mean a different operation part or an operation permitted period. In addition, it may mean the same “operation part” or “operation permission period” as the operation part with another name or the operation permission period.

[Configuration 27-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permission period during which an operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation permission period, change can occur. In addition, it is possible to execute a display that imitates an operation target for which operation reception is permitted (simulated image display means).

In this regard, in the operation permissible period of the pachinko machine 1, it may be possible to accept multiple operations for an operation unit that is not targeted for display by the model image display means. is maintained in the operated state, the operation reception can be performed multiple times, so that the difficulty of the game due to the concealment of the operation part to be operated is alleviated and the decline in the interest in the game is suppressed. can be expected to

Further, as will be described later, during the operation permissible period, there are cases where it is permissible to accept multiple operations for an operation unit that is not targeted for display by the model image display means. There may be a case where the operation is received multiple times and a case where the operation is not received multiple times even if the state is maintained. According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain a sense of tension when operating an operation unit that is not displayed by the model image display means.

Also, as will be described later, at least a specific operation permission period is prepared as the operation permission period, and during the specific operation permission period, multiple operations can be accepted although they are not subject to display by the model image display means. There are at least a first operation unit and a second operation unit as the operation unit, and when the first operation unit is kept in the operated state, the operation acceptance is not performed multiple times, and the second operation unit is operated. When it continues to be maintained, the operation reception may be performed multiple times. The number of times that the operation can be accepted when only the first operation unit is continuously and repeatedly operated within the specific operation permissible period is It may be set to be smaller than the number of times that the operation can be accepted. That is, in this case, in a specific operation permissible period, the first operation unit on the side in which the so-called auto-repeat function is not activated is required more than the second operation unit on the side where the so-called auto-repeat function is activated. Since the number of repeated hits (the number of consecutive operations) required for the game can be reduced, it can be expected to suppress the decrease in interest in the game. Here, "the operation is accepted" means, for example, a case in which an apparent change (display change, post-acceptance output sound output, lamp emission change, etc.) occurs after accepting the operation as a trigger. is doing. Therefore, if the operation is detected internally, but it does not cause any visible change after acceptance (even if some internal processing (such as extending the time for which the display is maintained after acceptance, etc.) is performed) , it cannot be said that "the operation is accepted".

In addition, the "specific operation permissible period", "first operation section", and "second operation section" related to the configuration 27-E are the names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 27-E. It's nothing more than Therefore, the "specific operation permissible period", the "first operation part", and the "second operation part" according to other configurations may mean the same operation part and the operation permissible period, or different operation It may mean a part or an operation permissible period. In addition, it may mean the same “operation unit” or “operation allowable period” as the operation unit having another name or the operation allowable period.

[Configuration 28-E]
Further, for example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an operation permission period during which an operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the operation permission period, change can occur. In addition, it is possible to execute a display that imitates an operation target for which operation reception is permitted (simulated image display means).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, at least a predetermined operation permission period and a specific operation permission period are prepared as types of the operation permission period, and in the "predetermined operation permission period", it is possible to accept multiple operations, and When there is an operation unit to be displayed by the model image display means, and an operation is performed on the operation unit, the predetermined operation allowable period can be terminated with the operation as a trigger. , In the "specific operation permissible period", there is an operation unit that is allowed to accept multiple operations, but is not subject to display by the model image display means, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit , the specific operation permitted period is not terminated with the operation as a trigger. According to such a configuration, when an operation opportunity is given to an operation unit that is not to be displayed by the model image display means, any changes are made after the acceptance until the player is convinced that the operation has been properly accepted. Even though it is a hidden button, it is possible to reduce anxiety such as whether the opportunity to operate is given or whether the operation reception has been properly done. can be expected.

Further, as will be described later, in the "predetermined operation permissible period", there are one or more operation units that are permitted to receive operations a plurality of times and that are to be displayed by the model image display means. When an operation is performed using the specified operation as a trigger, the predetermined operation permission period can be terminated. There are at least the first and second operation sections as operation sections that are not subject to display by the model image display means. It may be configured such that the specific operation permissible period is never terminated. According to such a configuration, unlike the situation where there is an operation unit to be displayed by the model image display means (predetermined operation permissible period), there are a plurality of hidden buttons (specific operation permissible period). , the player may use various operation units without considering the risk of unintentionally ending the specific operation permission period when checking which operation unit is secretly enabled. can be operated with confidence.

Further, as will be described later, in the "predetermined operation permissible period", there are both an operation part whose predetermined operation permissible period is terminated by an operation and an operation part whose predetermined operation permissible period is not terminated by an operation. can be

Also, as will be described later, in the "specific operation permissible period", when the first operation unit is operated, the first side post-specific operation change corresponding to the operation can be caused as one of a plurality of first side modes. However, if the first operation unit is operated again while the "special first side mode" is occurring among the plurality of first side modes, the change after the first side specific operation is "special first side When the second operation part is operated, the change after the second side specific operation corresponding to the operation is set to any one of the plurality of second side aspects. However, if the second operation unit is operated again while the "special second side mode" is occurring among the plurality of second side modes, the change after the second side specific operation is " A second side aspect different from the "special second side aspect" may be prevented from newly occurring. According to such a configuration, it can be understood that there is no need to operate the first operation part any more when the "special first side mode" appears while the first operation part is being operated. It is possible to shift from the "state of operating the first operating section" to the "state of operating the second operating section" without anxiety. Also, when the second operation unit is being operated, when the "special second aspect" appears, it can be understood that there is no need to operate the second operation unit any more. It is possible to shift from the "operating state" to the "operating state of the first operation unit" without anxiety.

Also, as will be described later, in the "specific operation permissible period", when the first operation unit is operated, the first side post-specific operation change corresponding to the operation can be caused as one of a plurality of first side modes. However, if the first operation unit is operated again while the "special first side mode" is occurring among the plurality of first side modes, the "special first side mode" that has been in the execution state until then ' is terminated, and the execution of the 'special first side mode' is started again as a change after the first side specific operation, and when the second operation unit is operated, the second operation corresponding to the operation is performed. A change after a two-side specific operation can be caused as one of a plurality of second side aspects, but if the second operation unit is activated while the "special second side aspect" is occurring among the plurality of second side aspects, When operated again, the "special second side mode" that has been in the execution state until then may not change at least visually. According to such a configuration, it is possible to repeatedly confirm the "special first side mode" when the first operation section is operated, whereas the "special second side mode" can be repeatedly confirmed when the second operation section is operated. Since it is not possible to repeatedly check the "side mode", it is preferable to provide a sense of security, which is the above-mentioned effect, and also to provide a sense of tension when the second operation unit is operated. can be expected to do.

[Other configurations]
Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, if there is an acceptable acceptance period (acceptance period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation unit based on the determination result (jackpot determination, performance determination, etc.), the acceptance target A related operation-related display (for example, a simulated image display that simulates the operation receiving unit) is displayed, but the operation-related display (such as a simulated image display that simulates the operation receiving unit) may be displayed as an integrated model image display (see FIG. 144) that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image that decorates the . Regarding such an integrated model image display, the operation reception effect (reception period) that occurs when the pattern effect progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and the fluctuation pattern that does not develop into SP reach. It is desirable to display it in both the operation reception effect (reception period) and the low-expectation non-suppressed reception effect and the high-expectation suppressed reception effect. .

It should be noted that the "integrated simulated image display" has been described with reference to FIGS. A display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided in the image. In addition, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 144) with different degrees of expectation are prepared as the "integrated simulated image display", and it is also the same that the display is made in one of these modes.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example as well, when the acceptable acceptance period (acceptance period) occurs, it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is allowed or that the acceptance of the operation is allowed. In some cases, an acceptance acceptance sound is audibly output, thereby making it difficult to forget to operate. Here, "acceptable sound" means whether or not an acceptable reception period (acceptance period) always occurs while the sound is being output (while sound data is assigned) when the sound output is started. , is a sound that is in a state in which the acceptable acceptance period (acceptance period) has already occurred. In other words, it can be said that the "acceptable sound" is a sound that is not output under a situation in which an effect that has nothing to do with the acceptable reception period (acceptance period) is being performed.

By the way, as described above, in this pachinko machine 1, the type (for example, conversation notice, cut-in notice, movable body notice etc.) have different reception periods (reception effects). Occurrence conditions are set for each acceptance period, and when any one of the occurrence conditions is established, a reception period of a type corresponding to the established occurrence condition can be generated.

Also, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of operation units (for example, the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) as operation units for receiving operations by the player. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (multiple operation permissible period) during which not only one operation section but also several (a plurality of) operation sections can accept operations. and

First, with reference to FIGS. 275 to 277, an example of a basic effect when such a multiple-operation allowable period occurs will be described. However, the configurations described with reference to FIGS. 275 to 277 are conceptual for facilitating understanding of the technical features of the present application, and are not essential configurations.

FIG. 275 shows the acceptance period (multiple operation 276 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when an operation is performed on "operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)" during the reception period after the occurrence of the allowable period, FIG. is an acceptance period (multiple operation permissible period ) is generated and an operation is performed on the “operation unit B (in this case, the operation button 410)” within the acceptance period. FIG. FIG. 11 is a rendering diagram showing an example of rendering contents when a reception period (multiple operation permissible period) occurs.

Now, as shown in FIGS. 275(c) and 276(c), for example, if a predetermined condition is satisfied at timing T1 within the symbol variation, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates an acceptance period ("Figure 277(a)"). As a result, when an action (operation) is performed by the player during the reception period, a post-reception change occurs in accordance with the operation (operation reception).

However, this reception period is a reception period during which both "operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)" and "operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" are allowed to accept operations ( In the effect display device 1600, the operation-related display A prompting the operation of the operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the operation part B (here, the operation 275(d), (e), FIGS. 276(d), (e), and FIG. 277(a). ).

Moreover, during the acceptance period, the operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is allowed to accept only one operation, while the operation part B (here, the operation button 410) allows a plurality of operation receptions. It is designed to accept only one operation reception permissible.

Therefore, for example, when an operation is performed on the operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) at the timing T2 (see FIG. 275) within the reception period, the operation (operation reception) is performed. (See FIG. 275(f) and FIGS. 277(b11a), (b11b), (b12a), (b12b))), and perform processing for ending the acceptance period itself. Become. In this example, as one of the post-acceptance changes, post-acceptance display C (FIG. 277 (b11a) and (b12a) correspond to low expectations) and post-acceptance display D ( 277 (b11b) and (b12b), and one of the high expectations) is displayed.

On the other hand, for example, when an operation is performed on the operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) at timing T3 (see FIG. 276) within the reception period, (See FIG. 276(f) and FIG. 277(b11a), (b11b), (b12a), (b12b)). At this time, in this example, the post-reception display A1 (first mode) is displayed as one of the post-reception changes (see FIG. 277(b21)). However, since the operation unit B (in this case, the operation button 410) is "allowed to accept operations multiple times within the acceptance period", the acceptance period ends based on the first operation. never

Next, for example, when the second operation is performed on the operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) at the timing T4 (see FIG. 276) within the reception period, the operation (operation reception) is performed. A corresponding post-acceptance change is generated (see FIGS. 276(f) and 277(b22)). At this time, in this example, as one of the post-reception changes, the post-reception display A2 (second mode) is displayed (see FIG. 277 (b22)). However, in this example, even when the operation unit B (in this case, the operation button 410) is operated for the second time, the acceptance period is not ended based on this.

Then, for example, when the operation unit B (here, operation button 410) is operated for the third time at timing T5 (see FIG. 276) within the reception period, the operation (operation reception ) (see FIG. 276(f) and FIG. 277(b23a), (b23b), (b24a), (b24b)), and perform processing to end the acceptance period itself. It will happen. In this example, as one of the post-acceptance changes, post-acceptance display C (FIG. 277 (b23a) and (b24a) correspond to low expectations) and post-acceptance display D ( 277 (b23b) and (b24b), and one of high expectations) is displayed.

That is, in this example, as shown in FIG. 277, if you want to defeat the enemy character with only one operation, you can operate the operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001). If you want to defeat the character by performing multiple operations, you can operate the operation unit B (in this case, the operation button 410).

It should be noted that here, the operation on the operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) and the operation on the operation part B (here, the operation button 410) are designed so that the effect result is the same (success or failure of defeat). However, for example, when operating the operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001), "effect result regarding the success or failure of defeating the enemy character" appears, and when operating the operation part B (here, the operation button 410), "enemy A different display result may be displayed, for example, a production result regarding the success or failure of leaving (escape) from the battle scene with the character. In this example, the "sword ornament 5001" is used as the operation unit A, and the "operation button 410" is used as the operation unit B. .

By the way, in such a multiple-operation allowable period, for example, although an operation on the operation unit B (in this case, the operation button 410) that allows multiple operations is started, the final result display does not appear easily. In the middle of the multiple-operation allowable period, switch from "operation on operation part B (here, operation button 410)" to "operation on operation part A (here, sword ornament 5001)". A case is assumed in which the performance is to be developed, and in this case, there is a problem as to what kind of processing should be performed. In addition, even if any of the plurality of operation units is within the multiple operation permissible period prepared as "an operation unit that is permitted to accept only one operation", for example, a game can be played within the multiple operation permissible period. If there is no operation by the player, there is a problem of which operation unit to activate the above-mentioned "automatic button function". There are various issues, such as whether to enable

The details of the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described "Configuration 1-E" to "Configuration 27-E" will be described below with reference to the drawings. However, in order to realize these inventions, it is sufficient to appropriately provide only the necessary configurations among the configurations described below, and it is not necessary to provide all of them. For example, depending on the type (type of invention) of the problem to be solved (intended effect), the reception period (multiple operation permissible period) during which several (plural) operation units are allowed to accept operations does not necessarily have to be It may be one that does not occur (a reception period during which only one operation unit is allowed to accept operations), or it may not be equipped with an operation unit that allows multiple operations to be accepted. , it may be one that does not have an operation unit that allows only one operation reception, or one that does not activate the automatic button function or the automatic repeated hitting function. Also, with reference to FIG. 274 and above, each reception period may or may not necessarily include these. That is, each configuration described in the specification described below corresponds to any one of the above "configuration 1-E" to "configuration 27-E" when it is desired to obtain further effects It is possible to arbitrarily select and adopt only the configuration that

First, referring to FIGS. 278 to 295, the 1st reception period, the 2nd reception period, the 3rd reception period, the 4th reception period, and the 5th reception period among the reception periods will be described. and It should be noted that each reception period described above with reference to FIG. It may be one of the 1st F reception period, the 2nd F reception period, the 3rd F reception period, the 4th F reception period, and the 5th F reception period. good. In order to realize the inventions described below, it is sufficient to have only the necessary configuration among the configurations described below. You can choose not to prepare.

FIG. 278 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when the "condition 1F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition, the first F acceptance period occurs, and the player performs an operation. FIG. 279 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when the first F reception period occurs and the player does not perform any operation. FIG. 281 is a diagram showing an example of effect when the 1F acceptance period occurs.

Now, the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, normal game state that is non-variable and non-time saving), and "1F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of fluctuation pattern determination Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, a performance determination (announcement performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 1st F variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (such as effect depiction according to the 1st F variable pattern, BGM playback according to the 1F variable pattern (normal BGM playback at non-reach time, etc.) sound output, etc.) is started, Within the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) corresponding to the result of the determination of the preliminary performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "1F variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 278(a), within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "1st F variation pattern", the timing te2 has arrived after the 1F time has elapsed since the start of the variation performance of the decorative symbol SZ. (Based on the fact that "Condition 1F" is satisfied), "acceptance regarding changes after the 1F reception (display UA, UB after the 1F reception, sound output after the 1F reception, etc.)" is allowed. 281(b)).

Here, in the 1F reception period according to this embodiment, the 1F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is operated once until the 1F reception period ends. Only acceptance is allowed, and the 1st F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is allowed to accept operations a plurality of times until the 1st F acceptance period ends. (multiple operation permissible period).

That is, as described above, in such a 1F reception period (multiple operation permitted period), for example, although an operation on the 1F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) that allows multiple operations is started, The player feels uneasy about the fact that the final result display does not appear for a long time, and in the middle of the 1st F reception period (multiple operation permitted period), "Operation on 1st F operation unit B (here, operation button 410) ' to 'operation on the 1st F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)' to advance the presentation.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when generating such a 1F reception period, first, the premonitory effect display suggesting that the player is given an opportunity to operate (that the 1F reception period will occur) is displayed. is executable.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, when the timing te1 before the occurrence of the 1F accepting period arrives, the timings shown in FIGS. ), execution of the "1F precursor effect display ZFD" is started as the precursor effect display. As shown in FIGS. 278(d), 279(d), and FIGS. 281(a) and (b), this "1F precursor effect display ZFD" displays the 1F operation-related displays A and B. It is displayed so as to straddle the timing before and after the timing.

278, 279, and 281(b), (c), etc., the 1st F operation section A (here, the sword "1F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", which can only appear when the operation acceptance for the ornament 5001) is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted. , 1F operation section B (in this case, the operation button 410) is in a state in which it is permitted to accept operations, or a "1F operation-related Display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed respectively. It should be noted that, in this production example, the timing of occurrence of the 1F acceptance period, ``1F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)'' and ``1F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)'' are displayed respectively. Although the timing is set to be the same as the timing of For example, "1F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed after the timing at which the 1F precursor effect display ZFD is displayed, and The display may be started before the timing at which the 1F reception period occurs, and the display may be made to straddle the timing. Alternatively, display of "1F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" will start to be displayed after the timing of the occurrence of the 1F reception period. may

It should be noted that the "first F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "first F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" according to this example correspond to "first F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)” and “display (simulated image display) imitating the 1st F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)”. The display content is not necessarily limited to this.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 281(b), "1F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" While the "display ZFD" is being displayed, the display is started so as to appear to overlap behind the "1F foreshadow effect display ZFD".

Also, "1F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed as image displays in which periodic changes can appear. . That is, as described above, during the 1st F reception period, as the operation unit that is permitted to receive operations by the player, only one operation reception is permitted. )” and a “1st F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)” that can accept multiple operations.

As for the "1st F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", the part (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the operation receiving part of the "1st F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is shown in the figure. 280(A) and then sequentially displayed in each of the modes shown in FIGS. 280(B) to (D). The change appears repeatedly in a form requiring a predetermined period 1F time A.

As for the "1st F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)", the part (button model image BMG) that simulates the operation receiving part of the "1st F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" is shown in FIG. After being displayed in the mode shown in (a), it is sequentially displayed in each mode shown in FIGS. 280 (b) to (d)." appears repeatedly in a form requiring a predetermined period 1F time B.

According to these configurations, during the first F reception period, as shown in FIGS. (Here, the operation button 410)”, etc., appears as a depiction of each “operation receiving portion” moving up and down in its movable range. In this example, the period 1F time A and the period 1F time B are exemplified as the same time, but they may be set to different times. However, since it is set as a time longer than the "cycle 3F time A" displayed in the 3F reception period described later, in the 1F reception period, the "operation receiving part" is more active than in the 3F reception period. A state of moving slowly up and down the movable range will be depicted.

In addition, when "1F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are started to be displayed before the timing te2 at which the 1F reception period occurs , the periodic change is preferably started after waiting for the timing te2 at which the 1F acceptance period occurs. That is, in this case, the "1F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "1F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are shown in FIG. , (a) are maintained.

In this example, "1F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are, as shown in FIG. While the "predictive effect display ZFD" is being displayed, the display is started in a form appearing behind the "1F predictive effect display ZFD", and the periodic change is started. As shown in FIGS. 281(a) and 281(b), the display range of the 1F precursor effect display ZED is reduced with the lapse of time. Therefore, "1F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed while the 1F precursor effect display ZFD is displayed in this manner. will be started.

Then, as a result of the display range of the first F precursor effect display ZFD being reduced in this way, when the first F precursor effect display ZFD is hidden, as shown in FIG. The related display A (sword decoration image SYG)” and the “1F operation related display B (button model image BMG)” are considered to have good visibility. The situation shown in FIG. 281(c) functions as an explanation screen (defeat 100 enemies) regarding the operation effect, and when this is finished, the effect shown in FIG. 281(d) appears. become. It should be noted that "1F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are shown in FIGS. As shown in f), each of the above-described periodic changes (period 1F time A, period 1F time B) will continue to progress respectively.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIGS. 278 and 281, at the timing te2A (the timing shown in FIG. 281(e)) within the 1F reception period, the "1F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is pressed. It is assumed that the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed for the . In this example, the operation is accepted based on the falling edge of the operation detection signal, but this is not the only option, and "operation acceptance based on the operation detection signal" can be realized by other methods. may

That is, in the first F reception period according to this embodiment, whether or not the expectation of a big hit is high or low can be suggested by "whether or not 100 enemies can be defeated". If the "1F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" that is allowed multiple times is operated, the number of remaining enemies may decrease each time the operation is performed. The production can progress.

In this example, at the timing te2A (the timing shown in FIG. 281(e)) within the first F acceptance period, the first operation acceptance is made for the "first F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)". In this case, as shown in FIGS. 278(i), (k) and 281(e), "Remaining 75 bodies" is displayed as the 1F post-acceptance display UB1, and the 1F post-acceptance output sound B is audibly output. However, such "1F post-acceptance change B", including the case of the second and subsequent operations described later, is different from these effect changes (1F post-acceptance display, 1F post-acceptance output sound) An effect change (for example, an effect change that changes the lighting mode of the effect lamp, etc.) may be further performed. Alternatively, such "1F change after reception B" does not necessarily have to be executed with a plurality of effect elements, and any one of the above effect elements (for example, effect that changes the light emission mode of the effect lamp change) only.

In addition, among the "first-fourth post-acceptance change B" in response to the first reception of operation on the "fifth-fourth operation unit B (here, operation button 410)", the execution time of the firstf-fourth reception output sound B is While it is set shorter than the time set as the reception period, the execution time of the 1F post-reception display UB1 is set longer than the time set as the reception period. Therefore, the second and subsequent operation acceptances for the "1st F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" are the same as those for the previously performed "1st F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)". This is done while the corresponding 1F post-acceptance display UB is being displayed.

In this example, at the timing te2B (the timing shown in FIG. 281(f)) within the first F reception period, the second operation is performed on the “first F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)”. It is assumed that the When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 278(i), (k), and FIG. Output sound B is audibly output after 1F reception. Here, when there is a first operation on the "1st F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" and when "the first F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated Although the same sound is output as the 1F post-acceptance output sound B when the second and subsequent operations are performed, a different sound may be output.

In this example, at the timing te2C (the timing shown in FIG. 281(g)) within the first F reception period, the third operation is performed on the “first F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)”. It is assumed that the However, when the third operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 278(i), (k) and FIG. , 1F post-acceptance output sound B, any new sound is not audibly output.

Note that in this example, when the operation for a predetermined number of times (here, the third time) is performed on the "first floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the first floor acceptance period It was made to prevent "a new display appears as the display UB after the reception on the 1st floor, or some kind of sound is newly audibly output as the output sound B after the reception on the 1st floor". A determination is made when an operation is performed on the "first floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the period, and based on the result of the determination, a new display UB after reception of the first floor is displayed. It may be arranged such that no such display is performed, or that no sound is audibly output as the output sound B after reception on the first floor. In short, despite the fact that such an event ("1st floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is operated within the 1st floor reception period), a new display as the display UB after reception of the 1st floor is displayed. No new sound is audibly output as the output sound B after reception of the 1st floor) may be generated when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

However, as described above, in spite of having performed an operation on the "1st floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" within the 1st floor acceptance period, the post-acceptance display and acceptance corresponding to the operation are displayed. If the post-output sound does not appear, the player feels uneasy about whether it is safe to continue operating the ``1st F operation unit B (in this case, the operation button 410)''. It will happen. And it is thought that such a feeling of uneasiness gradually becomes stronger as the remaining time as the reception period of the 1st floor becomes shorter.

In this regard, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 278 and 281, the "initial game strategy (timings te2A to te2C )”, and the player can make the final effect appear with just one operation. It assumes the case of switching to the target "new game strategy".

That is, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 278(a), (h), and (i), the 1st floor post-acceptance display in response to the reception of the operation to the "1st floor operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" In the situation where UB (here, "remaining 65 bodies") is being displayed, at timing te2D (timing shown in FIG. Now, it is assumed that an operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001).

In this pachinko machine 1, at timing te2D (timing shown in FIG. 281(h)) within the reception period of the 1st floor, if an operation is performed on the ``1st floor operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' , change A occurs after the first F reception. For example, as one of the post-1F acceptance changes A, first, the 1F acceptance period is terminated based on the operation (see FIGS. 278(a) and (c)). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 278(h), (k) and FIG. 281(h), in response to the operation on the "1st F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the "output after reception of the 1st F "Sound A" is audibly output, and "1F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to "1F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" is hard to see. 1F effect display EF" is displayed.

Here, regarding the "1F post-acceptance output sound A" when the "1F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" is operated, the above-mentioned "1F post-acceptance output Sound B” is audibly output as a different sound. In addition, when the operation is performed on the "1F operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)" during the 1F reception period, the same mode as the 1F effect display EF (privilege such as a big hit (see FIG. 281(h)) is displayed.

In this respect, the 1F effect display EF according to this example of presentation is, as shown in FIG. The display is started in a situation in which neither the model image BMG) nor the first floor post-acceptance display UB is hidden, and the operated side "first floor operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)” corresponding to “1F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)” is displayed so as to appear to overlap from the front, and also "1F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" corresponding to "1F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is also displayed so as to appear to overlap from the front. It's becoming

That is, in this case, both "1F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" The first F effect display EF corresponding to the operation of the "body 5001)" makes it difficult to visually recognize. On the other hand, when an operation is performed on the "first floor operation unit B (in this case, the operation button 410)" during the first floor reception period, the "first floor operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" is displayed based on this operation. is not displayed. In addition, during the 1st F acceptance period, the "1st F post-acceptance display UB" corresponding to the operation on the "1st F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is also shown in FIGS. 1F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) and 1F operation-related display B (button model image BMG).

Therefore, during the 1F acceptance period, when the ``1F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' is operated, the ``1F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)'' and the ``1F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)'' Operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" is obscured by another image (first F effect display EF), but "first F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is operated. Occasionally, with this as an opportunity, "1F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is not made difficult to see, and "1F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" is not made difficult to see. It has become. In this example, the "first F effect display EF" changes its form so that the display range becomes smaller as time elapses.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 278(h) and 281(i), while the "1st F effect display EF" is being displayed, the "1st F operation part A (here, sword decoration 1F post-acceptance display UA corresponding to the operation on "body 5001)" is displayed. In this example, the display UA after reception on the 1st floor displays "a mode in which three decorative patterns are aligned", but may be displayed in a "mode in which three decorative patterns are not aligned". may The 1F post-acceptance display UA is displayed behind the "1F effect display EF", and visibility is improved when the "1F effect display EF" is hidden. will improve.

In this example, the display of the "1st floor display UA after acceptance" is started while the "1st floor effect display EF" is being displayed. Displayed so as to straddle the period during which the "post-reception display UB" is displayed and the period during which the "1F post-reception display UA" is displayed. This, combined with the fact that no effect display is performed when the mode of the "1F post-acceptance display UB" changes (FIGS. 281(e) and (f)), creates a dramatic effect resulting from operations on different operation units. appears.

The “1st F post-acceptance display UA” may be displayed at the same timing as the “1st F effect display EF” is displayed. However, in this case as well, the "1F post-acceptance display UA" is displayed so as to appear to overlap behind the "1F effect display EF", and the "1F effect display EF" is hidden. Visibility is improved when displayed.

In addition, in the 1st F reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Sometimes based on this, periodic changes that have appeared until then in "1F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" (see Fig. 280) is to be continued without hiding (end, interruption, cycle switching, etc.). That is, in the 1F reception period, the periodic changes in the ``1F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)'' and the ``1F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)'' Here, before and after receiving an operation for the operation button 410 (receiving an operation that does not terminate the acceptance period), the display mode does not change, and the periodic changes continue. Therefore, even after the operation acceptance (operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period) for the "1st F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is performed, the "1st F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" The "1F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" continues to progress through the above-described periodic changes (period 1F time A, period 1F time B).

On the other hand, during the 1F reception period, as shown in FIGS. Based on this, periodic changes in "1F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are hidden. Here, by hiding "1F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "1F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" themselves, their periodic changes are hidden. I am planning to

Also, in this example, while the first F reception period continues, the gauge image GG is depicted to decrease with the lapse of time, but this depiction may not necessarily be performed.

Also, during the 1st F acceptance period, the ``1st F operation section B (here, the Even if the operation button 410) is maintained in an operated (pressed) state, the operation reception is not performed multiple times (operation reception is automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (auto repeated pressing). function is not activated) (see FIG. 278(b)). In this case, during the 1st F reception period, if the "1st F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" corresponding to the "1st F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" is operated a plurality of times. Needless to say, the player must repeatedly operate (press) the "1F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" if the reception is desired.

Further, the 1F reception period is, as shown in FIG. It will be terminated on that basis. In this regard, the 1F reception period occurs as a reception period during which the automatic button function described above is not activated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 279, when the operation for ending the acceptance period is not accepted until the timing te3 arrives in the first F acceptance period, the 1F acceptance period starts based on the arrival of the timing te3. is terminated, and the 1F post-acceptance change A that appears when an operation is performed on the ``1F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' and the ``1F operation part B ( Here, none of the first F post-acceptance change B that appears when the operation button 410)'' is operated is executed.

In addition, when the 1st floor acceptance period occurs, audible output of "permissible sound C" as the 1st floor acceptance acceptance sound suggesting that the operation reception is permitted or that the operation acceptance will be permitted. (see Figures 278 and 279). In the 1F reception period, while the "allowable sound C" is being audibly , operation button 410)” is performed, the “permissible sound C” is not interrupted. However, when the first F reception period occurs, the reception permission sound may not necessarily be audibly output. Also, the 1F precursor effect display ZFD may not necessarily be executed. Also, when an operation is accepted within the 1F acceptance period, it is sufficient if it causes some change after acceptance, for example, the display after 1F acceptance and the output sound after 1F acceptance are not necessarily executed. You may do so.

Incidentally, the "acceptable reception sound" is different from the sound (premonition effect sound) output corresponding to the premonition effect display. Since the "predictive effect sound" is output in response to the predictive effect display, it is normally output prior to the acceptable acceptance sound. Therefore, the "predictive effect sound" changes its form as the output sound according to the mode of the predictive effect display. can be output in the form

FIG. 282 is a time chart showing an example of the content of the effect when the "condition 2F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition, the 2F acceptance period occurs, and the player performs an operation. FIG. 283 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when the 2nd F acceptance period occurs and the player does not perform any operation. 285 and 286 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the 2F acceptance period occurs.

Now, the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, normal game state that is non-probability variable / non-time saving), and "2F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of fluctuation pattern determination Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, a performance determination (announcement performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the second F variation pattern is performed. After that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (effect depiction according to the second F variable pattern, BGM reproduction according to the second F variable pattern (normal BGM reproduction during non-reach, etc.) sound output, etc.) is started, Within the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) corresponding to the result of the determination of the preliminary performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "2F variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 282(a), within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "second F variation pattern", the timing tf2 has arrived after the second F time has elapsed since the start of the variation performance of the decorative symbol SZ. (Based on the fact that "Condition 2F" is satisfied), "acceptance regarding changes after 2F reception (display UA, UB after 2F reception, sound output after 2F reception, etc.)" is allowed. 285(b)).

Here, in the 2F reception period according to this embodiment, as in the above-described 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), the 2F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) Until the end of the 2nd F reception period, only one operation reception is allowed, and the 2nd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) can be operated until the end of the 2nd F reception period. It is permissible to accept multiple operations during this period (multiple operation permissible period). It should be noted that in this example, the "1st F operation part A" used in the 1st F reception period and the "2nd F operation part A" used in the 2nd F reception period are the same operation part (here, the sword ornament 5001). However, the operation units may be different from each other. Also, the same operation unit (here, the operation button 410) is used for the “first F operation unit B” used in the first F reception period and the “second F operation unit B” used in the second F reception period. It may be a different operation unit.

That is, during the second F reception period (multiple operation permissible period), similarly to the above-described first F reception period, for example, operations on the second F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) in which multiple operations are permitted are performed. Although the game has started, the player feels uneasy about the fact that the final result display does not appear for a long time. 410)” to “operation for the 2F operation portion A (here, the sword ornament 5001)” to advance the presentation.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when the second F acceptance period is generated, first, an indication effect display is executed to suggest that the player will be given an operation opportunity (that the second F acceptance period will occur). It is possible.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, when the timing tf1 before the occurrence of the 2F reception period arrives, the timings shown in FIGS. ), execution of the “2F precursor effect display ZFD” is started as the precursor effect display. 282(d), 283(d), 285(a) and 285(b), the 2F operation-related displays A and B are displayed. It is displayed so that it straddles before and after the timing to be displayed.

282, 283, 285(b), (c), etc., even if the 2F reception period occurs in this example of presentation, the 2F operation unit A (here, the sword ``2F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)'' that can appear only when the operation acceptance for the decorative body 5001) is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted. , 2F operation section B (in this case, the operation button 410) is allowed to accept operations, or "2F operation-related Display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed respectively. In this production example, the timing of occurrence of the 2F acceptance period, ``2F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)'' and ``2F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)'' are displayed respectively. Although the timing is the same as the timing of For example, "2F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed after the timing at which the 2F precursor effect display ZFD is displayed, and The display may be started before the timing at which the second F reception period occurs, and the display may be made to straddle the timing. Alternatively, "2F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" will start to be displayed after the timing of the occurrence of the 2F acceptance period. may

Note that the "second F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "second F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" according to this example are "second F operation part A (here, sword decoration 5001)” and “the display (simulated image display) that simulates the 2nd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)”. The display content is not necessarily limited to this.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 285(b), "2F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" While the "display ZFD" is being displayed, the display is started so as to appear to overlap behind the "2F foreshadow effect display ZFD".

In addition, "2F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed as image displays in which periodic changes can appear. . That is, as described above, during the 2nd F acceptance period, the ``2nd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001 )” and a “2nd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)” that allows multiple operations to be accepted.

As for the "2F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", the part (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the operation receiving part of the "2F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is shown in the figure. 284 (A) and then sequentially displayed in each of the modes shown in FIGS. 284 (B) to (D). The change appears repeatedly in a form requiring a predetermined period 2F time A.

As for the "2nd F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)", the part (button model image BMG) that imitates the operation receiving part of the "2F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" is shown in FIG. After being displayed in the mode shown in (a), it is sequentially displayed in each mode shown in FIGS. 284 (b) to (d)." appears repeatedly in a form requiring a predetermined period 2F time B.

According to these configurations, during the 2F reception period, as shown in FIGS. (Here, the operation button 410)”, etc., appears as a depiction of each “operation receiving portion” moving up and down in its movable range. In this example, the period 2F time A and the period 2F time B are illustrated as the same time, but they may be set to different times. However, since it is set as a time longer than the "cycle 3F time A" displayed in the 3F reception period described later, in the 2F reception period, as in the above-described 1F reception period, the 3F reception period By comparison, the "operation receiving part" is depicted as slowly moving up and down within its movable range. The period 2F time A and the period 2F time B may be set to be the same as the period 1F time A and the period 1F time B, respectively.

In addition, when "2F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are started to be displayed before timing tf2 when the 2F reception period occurs , it is desirable to wait for the timing tf2 at which the second F reception period occurs before starting the periodic change. That is, in this case, the "2F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "2F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are shown in FIG. , (a) are maintained.

In this example, "2F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are, as shown in FIG. While the "predictive effect display ZFD" is being displayed, the display is started in a form appearing behind the "2F predictive effect display ZFD", and the periodic change is started. The display range of the 2F precursor effect display ZED is reduced as time elapses, as shown in FIGS. 285(a) to (d).

In addition, the "2F foreshadow effect display ZFD" according to this example is the "2F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "2F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)". It is executed by both "Mode ZFD-1" displayed so as to overlap on the front side and "Mode ZFD-2" displayed so as to overlap on the rear side. . Therefore, "2F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are "mode ZFD-1" of "2F precursor effect display ZFD". However, it is displayed in front of the "mode ZFD-2" in the "2F premonition effect display ZFD". Note that mode ZFD-2 may not necessarily be provided.

That is, the "2F precursor effect display ZFD" according to this example, as shown in FIGS. Even when the timing tf3 (timing tf3 at which the second F reception period ends without any operation by the player) at which the set time set for the reception period elapses, it is not in the non-display state. It is possible to continue the display without fail.

However, after the start of the display of the "second F omen effect display ZFD", the reduction rate of the display area of the "mode ZFD-1" is set to be greater than that of the "mode ZFD-2". . As a result, even while the "2F precursor effect display ZFD" is being displayed (continuously), the "2F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2F operation-related display B (button The visibility of the model image BMG) is gradually improved. The reduction rate of the display area of "Mode ZFD-1" may be "100%", and the reduction rate of the display area of "Mode ZFD-2" may be "0%".

By the way, during the 2F reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 285 and 286, “Hero YS” and “Magician MT” facing the BOSS character are displayed on the effect display device 1600, respectively. ``Hero YS'' is used as a character that moves according to the operation on ``2F operation part A (here, sword decoration 5001)'', and ``Magician MT'' is used as a character that operates in ``2F operation part B (Here, the operation button 410)" is used as a character that moves according to the operation.

More specifically, if an operation is performed on the ``second floor operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' during the second floor acceptance period, ``the hero YS will be the BOSS based on the one-time operation acceptance. Whether or not the character can be beaten" is provided, and depending on the result, the degree of expectation for a big hit is high or low (it may be "100%" or "0%"). can be suggested.

On the other hand, if an operation is performed on the "second floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the reception period of the second floor, an effect such as "whether it is possible to withdraw (escape) from the BOSS battle" is displayed. sex is provided. That is, when an operation is performed on the "second floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the second floor reception period, the magical power value displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen ("magic" decoration display) On the other hand, the painted area) can increase, and when the magic power value is full, the magician MT casts a spell and successfully escapes (escapes) from the BOSS battle. Then, when the escape (escape) succeeds in this way, it can be suggested that the degree of expectation for the big win is higher (it may be "100%") compared to the case of no success.

In the 2F receiving period according to this production example, at the time of occurrence, "2F operation-related display A", "2F operation-related display B", "brave man YS", "magician MT", and "BOSS character" etc., are mostly covered by the fog expressed by the "2nd F precursor effect display ZFD", and the whole picture cannot be recognized (situation close to secrecy). As described above, the fog represented by the "2F premonition effect display ZFD" continues to be displayed even at the timing tf3 when the set time as the 2F reception period elapses. is.

However, as described above, the fog represented by the "2nd F Omen effect display ZFD" decreases its display area as time elapses, so the "2F operation related display A", The visibility of "2F operation-related display B", "brave man YS", "wizard MT", "BOSS character", etc. is gradually improved.

In particular, in this production example, the fog represented by the "2F precursor effect display ZFD" includes the fog represented by the "mode ZFD-1" described above and the fog represented by the "mode ZFD-2" described above. There is fog. In this respect, the reduction rate of the fog display area represented by "Mode ZFD-1" is set to be greater than the reduction rate of the fog display area represented by "Mode ZFD-2". During the reception period on the 2nd floor, the visibility of the ``2nd floor operation-related display A'', the ``2nd floor operation-related display B'', etc. will be improved, while the fog expressed by the ``2nd floor precursor effect display ZFD'' will remain for a long time. will be able to improve this favorably.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIGS. 282 and 285, at the timing tf2A (the timing shown in FIG. 285(c)) within the 2F acceptance period, the "2F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is pressed. It is assumed that the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed for the . In this example as well, operations are accepted based on the falling edge of the operation detection signal, but the invention is not limited to this, and "operation acceptance based on the operation detection signal" can be realized by other methods. may

In this example, at the timing tf2A (timing shown in FIG. 285(c)) within the 2F acceptance period, the first operation is accepted for the "2F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)". 282(i), (k), and FIG. area) increases (magical power value changes from "0" to "1")" and "Magician MT is accumulating MP" are performed respectively (after reception on the 2nd floor Display UB1).

In this example, if an operation is performed on the "2F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" within the 2F reception period, the corresponding post-reception output sound is audibly output. (See FIG. 282(k)). In other words, in this case, the depiction of the "Magician MT" secretly accumulating MP for the BOSS character will be made, but as a player, in addition to being required to perform such an operation multiple times, when performing the operation Due to the low response (performance), it is possible to arouse anxiety such as "Is it okay to continue such operations?"

However, if the response (performance) when operating the "second floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the second floor reception period is too low, the game interest There is concern that the Therefore, in this production example, the display UB (“magical power value (“magic "Description where the area filled in with respect to the decorative display) increases" and "Description where the wizard MT is accumulating MP", etc.) are behind the above-mentioned "2F Omen effect display ZFD" It is set so that it will not be displayed, and when it overlaps, it will be displayed on the front side. In this production example, there are "mode ZFD-1" and "mode ZFD-2" as the "2F precursor effect display ZFD". The display UB after reception on the 2nd floor is displayed. According to such a configuration, the operation reception itself is properly performed while the output sound is not audibly output after the reception while arousing a sense of anxiety such as "Is it okay to continue such an operation?" It becomes possible to preferably suggest that the situation exists.

It should be noted that such a "change after reception of the 2nd floor B", including the case of the second and subsequent operations described later, is a change in effect that is different from the display UB after the reception of the 2nd floor (e.g., changing the lighting mode of the effect lamp). effect change, etc.) may be further performed. Alternatively, such "change after reception of the 2nd floor B" does not necessarily have to be executed with a plurality of effect elements, and any one of the effect elements described above (for example, an effect that changes the light emission mode of the effect lamp change) only.

In addition, the execution time of the ``post-receipt display UB of the 2nd floor'' in response to the reception of an operation on the ``second floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)'' is set longer than the time set as the reception period. there is Therefore, the second and subsequent operation acceptances for the "2nd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" are the same as those for the previously performed "2F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)". This is done while the 2nd F post-acceptance display UB is being displayed.

Then, in this example, as shown in FIG. 282, at the timing tf2B (the timing shown in FIG. 285(d)) within the second F acceptance period, the "second F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" It is assumed that the second operation is performed. When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 282(i), (k) and FIG. The area filled with the display) increases (magical power value changes from "1" to "2")" and "Magician MT is further accumulating MP" are now performed respectively. (display UB2 after reception on the 2nd floor). However, at this time, as described above, the post-acceptance output sound is not audibly output (see FIG. 282(k)).

Then, in this example, at the timing tf2C (the timing shown in FIG. 286(e)) within the 2F reception period, the third operation is performed on the "2F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)." It is assumed that the However, when the third operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 282(i), (k) and FIG. A new display (mode) does not appear as the display UB.

Note that in this example, when the operation for a predetermined number of times (here, the third time) is performed on the "second floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the second floor reception period Although it was set so that "a new display does not appear as the display UB after accepting the second floor", instead of this, within the period for accepting the second floor, for the "second floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" A determination may be made when an operation is performed on the second F, and based on the result of the determination, a new display may not be performed as the second F post-acceptance display UB. In short, even though the event ("second floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is operated within the reception period of the second floor), a new display is displayed as the display UB after reception of the second floor. does not appear) should be generated when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

However, as described above, even if an operation is performed on the "2F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" even during the 2F reception period, the post-acceptance display and post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the operation are displayed. does not appear, the player feels a sense of unease, wondering if it is safe to just continue to operate the "2F operation unit B (in this case, the operation button 410)". . And it is thought that such a sense of anxiety will gradually become stronger as the remaining time as the reception period for the second floor becomes shorter. In particular, during the 2nd floor reception period, if an operation is performed on the "2nd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", even if the 2nd floor post-reception display UB is displayed, This feeling of uneasiness is all the more so because the post-output sound is not audibly output.

In this respect, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 282, 285 and 286, the "initial game strategy (timing tf2A to tf2C)”, and by operating to the side of “2F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)” that can make the final effect appear with just one operation It assumes the case of switching to a "new game strategy" aiming at the development of production.

That is, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 282(a), (h), and (i), the 2nd floor post-acceptance display in response to the reception of the operation for the '2nd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)' At timing tf2D during the 2F reception period, while UB2 (here, a depiction of a magical power value of "2", a depiction of a wizard MT accumulating more MP, etc.) is displayed , "2F operation part A (here, sword ornament 5001)" is assumed to be operated.

In this pachinko machine 1, when an operation is performed on the "2F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at the timing tf2D within the 2F reception period, the 2F post-reception change A occurs. For example, as one of the post-2F acceptance changes A, first, the 2F acceptance period is terminated based on the operation (see FIGS. 282(a) and (c)). Also, as shown in FIGS. 282(h), (k) and FIGS. 286(f), (i), the "second 2F post-acceptance output sound A" is audibly output, and "2F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to "2F operation unit A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" is visually recognized. The "second F effect display EF" to make it difficult is displayed, and furthermore, the second F post-acceptance display UA is displayed.

In this regard, the 2F effect display EF according to this production example includes "2F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "2F operation-related Display B (button model image BMG)" and "2F precursor effect display ZFD" are not hidden, and the display is started in a state where the display is started on the operated side. "2F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to "2F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" is displayed so as to appear to overlap from the front. ing.

It should be noted that when an operation is performed on the "second floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the second floor reception period, the "second floor operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" is visually recognized based on this operation. The effect display EF that makes it difficult to perform is not displayed.

In addition, as the "display UA after reception of the second floor" in response to the reception of the operation for the "second floor operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the reception period of the second floor, the degree of expectation (the big hit A case where a mode UA-1 (Fig. 286 (f) ~ (h)) with a high obtained rate) appears, and a mode UA-2 (a rate at which a big hit is obtained) lower than that mode ( 286(i) to (k)) may appear. In addition, as described above, when the 2F post-acceptance display UA is displayed, the corresponding "2F post-acceptance output sound A" is also audibly output. It may be audibly output in a manner suggesting the degree.

In this regard, when mode UA-1 with a relatively high degree of expectation appears as the "display UA after reception on the 2nd floor", as shown in FIG. A "second F effect display EF-1", which is different from the mode UA-2 with a low degree of expectation, is displayed.

That is, when mode UA-1 with a relatively high degree of expectation appears as "second F post-acceptance display UA", first mode EF-1 (see FIG. 286(f)) is displayed as second F effect display EF. As a result, it is possible to suggest that the mode UA-1, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, will appear as the "2F post-reception display UA".

On the other hand, when mode UA-2 with a relatively low degree of expectation appears as the "second F post-acceptance display UA", the "2F post-acceptance display UA , the 2nd F effect display EF is displayed in a manner different from when the mode UA-1 with a relatively high degree of expectation appears.

That is, when mode UA-2 with a relatively low degree of expectation appears as "second F post-acceptance display UA", second mode EF-2 (see FIG. 286(i)) is displayed as second F effect display EF. This makes it possible to suggest that the mode UA-2 with a relatively low degree of expectation will appear as the "second F post-reception display UA".

In addition, in the 2nd F acceptance period according to this embodiment, the "2nd F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "2nd F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are shown in FIGS. As indicated by 286, the periodic change is hidden based on the operation on the "2F operation part A (here, sword ornament 5001)". Here, the periodic changes are hidden by hiding the "2F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "2F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" themselves. It will happen.

In addition, in the 2F receiving period according to this embodiment, the ``2F foreshadow effect display ZFD'' is also displayed as shown in FIGS. ” is hidden based on the operation. However, the "2F precursor effect display ZFD" is not hidden by the operation of the "2F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)".

Note that in this example, when in the situation immediately after the operation is accepted (the situation in which the second F effect display EF is displayed) (see FIGS. 286(f) and (i)), the "second F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)”, “2F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)”, and “2F precursor effect display ZFD” are not hidden, and “2F operation-related display A (Sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed so as to appear to overlap behind the second F effect display EF. Then, after this, such "2F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "2F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)", and "2F precursor effect display ZFD" are changed to "2F operation Section A (here, sword ornament 5001)" is set to a non-display state (see FIGS. 286(g) and (j)). However, this may be hidden from the time immediately after the operation is received.

Here, the "2F post-acceptance display UA" includes such "2F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "2F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)", "2F effect display EF" and "decorative pattern SZ" are displayed on the back side, thereby making it difficult to visually recognize the "second F post-reception display UA" immediately after it is displayed (Fig. 286(f), (i)). However, by hiding "2F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "2F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)", "2F effect display EF", etc. The visibility of the "display UA after reception on the 2nd floor" is gradually improved. Further, as described above, by confirming the mode even while the 2nd F effect display EF is being displayed, the "display UA after reception on the 2nd floor" has a high-expectation mode UA-1 and a low-expectation mode UA- It is made easy to recognize which of 2 and 2 is displayed.

286(h) and (k), the display contents of the "display UA after receiving reception on the 2nd floor" according to this production example correspond to the degree of expectation UA-1 and UA-2. will be developed.

In addition, during the 2F acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 282, either the "first acceptable sound A1" or the "second acceptable sound A2" is (selectively) used as the 2F acceptance acceptable sound at the time of occurrence. audible output. For example, at the occurrence of the 2F acceptance period, when the "first acceptance sound A1" is audibly output as the acceptance acceptance sound, the jackpot is greater than when the "second acceptance sound A2" is audibly output as the acceptance acceptance sound. It is desirable to set so as to suggest that the degree of expectation (ratio) obtained is high.

In this respect, during the 2F reception period, as shown in FIG. Although a situation in which an operation is accepted may occur, when an operation is accepted for the "2F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", the "first allowable sound A1” or “second allowable sound A2” are not interrupted (timings tf2A, tf2B, tf2C). However, while either the "first allowable sound A1" or the "second allowable sound A2" is audibly output as the acceptance allowable sound, the operation of the "2F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" When the acceptance is made, the audible output of the "first allowable sound A1" or "second allowable sound A2" is interrupted (timing tf2D).

In addition, during the 2F reception period, based on the operation performed on the ``2F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'', the ``2F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) and "2F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are hidden, or the 2F acceptance period is terminated. However, when an operation is performed on the "2F operation unit B (in this case, the operation button 410)", regardless of how many times the operation is performed, the "2F operation-related display A (knife Decoration image SYG)” and “2F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)” may not be hidden or the 2F acceptance period may be terminated.

For example, as a result of repeatedly performing operations on the "second floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the second floor reception period, the magical power value (the area filled with the "magical" decoration display) When it accumulates to the increase, it may wait until the timing tf3 when the second F reception period is terminated, and perform a magic withdrawal effect based on the arrival of the timing tf3. And in this case, even if the magic power value (the area filled with the "magic" decoration display) accumulates until the timing tf3 arrives, the "2nd F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)", it is possible to select whether or not to perform a one-time attack on the BOSS character while the effect of using magic to escape is confirmed. Since it becomes possible to perform, it becomes possible to improve the game interest. However, in this case, if an operation is performed on the "2F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the effect of casting a spell and leaving will not be performed regardless of the effect result.

Alternatively, the effect judgment is performed prior to generating the second F reception period, and if a special judgment result is not obtained as a result of the production judgment, "2F operation unit B ( Here, no matter how many times the operation button 410) is operated, the magic power value (the area filled with the "magic" decoration display) will not accumulate until it increases (the acceptance period will not end). may be executed as a predetermined effect. In this case, when the operation is performed on the "2F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the "2F post-acceptance display UA" with relatively low expectations UA-2 may always appear, or there may be a possibility that an aspect UA-1 with a relatively high degree of expectation will appear. In this regard, if a mode UA-1 with a relatively high degree of expectation is likely to appear when the ``2F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' is operated, It is possible to suitably suppress the decrease in the interest in the game when the magic power value cannot be increased even if the "second F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated many times. can be expected.

In addition, in this production example, the display UB after reception of the 2nd floor (a depiction of an increase in magic power, a depiction of a wizard MT accumulating MP, etc.) is not limited to the "2nd floor foreshadowing display ZFD", but also the "second display UB". 2F Post-acceptance display UA" is also displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side without being displayed behind it (see FIGS. 286(f), (g), etc.). In this example, when the aspect UA-1 is displayed as the “second F post-acceptance display UA”, the aspect UA-1 is changed to the second F post-acceptance display UB (a depiction of an increase in the magical power value, and , etc.), but even when the mode UA-2 is displayed as the "second F post-acceptance display UA", the mode UA -2 may be displayed behind the 2F post-acceptance display UB (a depiction of increasing magical power values, a depiction of a magician MT accumulating MP, etc.) so as to appear to overlap.

In addition, in this production example, the display UB after reception on the 2nd floor (a depiction of an increase in magical power value, a depiction of a wizard MT accumulating MP, etc.) appears to overlap in front of the decoration symbol SZ even in relation to it. (See FIG. 285(d), FIG. 286, etc.), but in relation to the decorative pattern SZ, it may be displayed so as to overlap behind it.

In addition, in this production example, regarding the display UB after receiving the 2nd floor (description of increasing magic power value, depiction of the wizard MT accumulating MP, etc.), during the 2nd floor reception period, "2nd floor operation unit A (here, , sword decoration 5001)" is not hidden based on this operation. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 282(i) and FIG. The fact that the display is continued at the time when the "2nd F post-acceptance display UA" or "2nd F effect display EF" corresponding to the operation on the operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is started. Of course, even when "2F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "2F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)", and "2F effect display EF" are hidden, Display can be continued.

However, in this case, regarding the 2nd F post-reception display UB (depiction of increasing magical power value, depiction of wizard MT accumulating MP, etc.), during the period when "2F post-reception display UA" is displayed It is desirable to have it displayed. As a result, while appealing that it is possible to progress the production even by receiving an operation (magic by a wizard) on the "second floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", in reality, the "second floor By receiving an operation on the operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001), it is possible to suitably suggest that the production is in a progressed state.

Further, in the 2F acceptance period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Based on this, the periodic changes (see FIG. 284) that have appeared so far in the “2F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)” and “2F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)” are eliminated. It continues without displaying (end, interruption, cycle switching, etc.). That is, during the 2F reception period, periodic changes in the ``2F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)'' and the ``2F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)'' Here, before and after receiving an operation for the operation button 410 (receiving an operation that does not terminate the acceptance period), the display mode does not change, and the periodic changes continue. Therefore, even after the operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) for the "second floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is performed, the "second floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" The "2F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" continues to progress through the above-described periodic changes (cycle 2F time A, cycle 2F time B).

On the other hand, during the 2F reception period, as shown in FIGS. 282 and 286, when the ``2F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' is operated, the ``2F operation-related Periodic changes in display A (sword decoration image SYG)” and “second F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)” are hidden. Here, by hiding "2F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "2F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" themselves, their periodic changes are hidden. I am planning to

Also, in this example, while the second F reception period continues, the gauge image GG is depicted to decrease with the lapse of time, but this may not necessarily be performed.

Also, during the 2nd floor acceptance period, the ``2nd floor operation section B (here, the Even if the operation button 410) is maintained in an operated (pressed) state, the operation reception is not performed multiple times (operation reception is automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (auto repeated pressing). function is not activated) (see FIG. 282(b)). In this case, during the 2nd F reception period, if the ``2nd F operation unit B (in this case, the operation button 410)'' corresponding to the ``2nd F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)'' is operated a plurality of times. Needless to say, the player must repeatedly operate (press) the "second F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" if the reception is desired.

Further, the 2F reception period is originally continued until timing tf3 arrives when there is no operation reception (to end the reception period), as shown in FIG. It will be terminated on that basis. In this respect, the 2F acceptance period occurs as an acceptance period during which the automatic button function described above is activated. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 283, when an operation for ending the acceptance period is not accepted until timing tf3 arrives in the second F acceptance period, the "second F operation" is executed within the acceptance period. The same post-acceptance change A as when an operation is performed on part A (here, sword ornament 5001) can occur based on the arrival of timing tf3. That is, in this case, the effect corresponding to the "2F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" that requires multiple operations within the 2F reception period and that does not activate the so-called auto repeated hitting function is performed. Since it becomes impossible to enjoy the game unless the user himself/herself operates it, it can be expected that the sense of tension is appropriately maintained.

It should be noted that even when timing tf3 arrives without the end of the second F reception period despite the operation of the "second F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the second F reception period, the The same post-acceptance change A as when an operation is performed on the "2F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" within the acceptance period will occur based on the arrival of timing tf3. . That is, in this case, while the 2F post-acceptance display UB (a depiction of increasing magical power values, a depiction of a wizard MT accumulating MP, etc.) is displayed, the above-mentioned automatic button function is activated and after the reception Change A will occur.

FIG. 287 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the "condition 3F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition, the 3rd F receiving period occurs, and the player performs an operation. FIG. 288 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when the 3rd F acceptance period occurs and the player does not perform any operation. 290 and 291 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the 3rd F acceptance period occurs.

Now, the starting condition is established (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, normal game state that is non-probability variable / non-time saving), and "3rd F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of fluctuation pattern determination Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (announcement performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 3rd F variation pattern. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (such as effect depiction according to the 3rd F variable pattern, BGM reproduction according to the 3F variable pattern (normal BGM reproduction at non-reach time, etc.) sound output, etc.) is started, Within the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) corresponding to the result of the determination of the preliminary performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "3rd F fluctuation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 287(a), within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "3rd F variation pattern", the timing tg2 after the 3rd F time has passed since the start of the variation performance of the decorative symbol SZ has arrived. (Based on the fact that "Condition 3F" is satisfied), "acceptance of 3F post-acceptance changes (3F post-acceptance display UA, UB, 3F post-acceptance sound output, etc.)" is allowed. 291(b)).

Here, the 3F reception period according to this embodiment is different from the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281) and the 2F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286). Both the 3F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the 3F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) are operated multiple times until the end of the 3F acceptance period. Acceptance is permitted (multiple operation permitted period). In this example, the "3rd floor operation part A" used in the 3rd floor reception period is replaced with the "1st floor operation part A" used in the 1st floor reception period, or the "2nd floor operation part A" used in the 2nd floor reception period. , etc. (in this case, the sword ornament 5001), but different operation units may be used. Also, the "3rd floor operation part B" used in the 3rd floor reception period is called the "1st floor operation part B" used in the 1st floor reception period, the "2nd floor operation part B" used in the 2nd floor reception period, etc. Although the same operation part (the operation button 410 here) is used, different operation parts may be used.

Even during such a 3F reception period (multiple operation permissible period), as in the above-described 1F reception period and 2F reception period, for example, a 3F operation unit in which multiple operations are permitted Although the player started to operate B (in this case, the operation button 410), the player felt uneasy about the fact that the final result display did not appear, There is a case where an attempt is made to advance the effect by switching from "operation on the 3F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" to "operation on the 3F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". It is assumed that

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when generating the 3rd F acceptance period, first, an indication effect display suggesting that the player will be given an operation opportunity (that the 3rd F acceptance period will occur) is executed. It is possible.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, when the timing tg1 before the occurrence of the 3rd F accepting period arrives, FIGS. ), execution of the "3rd F precursor effect display ZFD" is started as the precursor effect display. 287(d), 288(d), 290(a) and 290(b), the 3rd F operation-related displays A and B are displayed. It is displayed so that it straddles before and after the timing to be displayed.

287, 288, 290(b), (c), etc., even when the 3rd F reception period occurs in this example of presentation, the 3rd F operation section A (here, the sword The "3rd F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that can only appear when the operation acceptance for the decorative body 5001) is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted. , 3F operation section B (in this case, the operation button 410) is in a state in which it is permitted to accept operations, or a "3F operation-related Display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed respectively. In this production example, the timing of occurrence of the 3rd F acceptance period, the ``3rd F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)'' and the ``3rd F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)'' are displayed respectively. Although the timing is set to be the same as the timing of For example, "3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed after the timing at which the 3F precursor effect display ZFD is displayed, and The display may be started before the timing at which the 3rd F reception period occurs, and the display may be performed so as to straddle the timing. Alternatively, "3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" will start to be displayed after the timing of the occurrence of the 3F acceptance period. may

Note that the "3rd F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "3rd F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" according to this example are "3F operation part A (here, sword decoration 5001)” and “display (simulated image display) imitating the 3rd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)”. The display content is not necessarily limited to this.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 290(b), "3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" While the "display ZFD" is being displayed, the display is started so as to appear to overlap behind the "3rd F precursor effect display ZFD".

Also, "3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed as image displays in which periodic changes can appear. . That is, as described above, during the 3rd F acceptance period, as the operation part that can accept operations by the player, the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001) that can accept operations multiple times" ', and a '3rd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)' that can accept multiple operations.

As for the "3rd F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", the part (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the operation receiving part of the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is shown in the figure. 289(A), and then sequentially displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 289(B)." It is designed to appear repeatedly in a form requiring a period of 3F time A.

As for the "3rd F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)", the part (button model image BMG) that imitates the operation receiving part of the "3rd F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" is shown in FIG. After being displayed in the mode shown in (a), it is sequentially displayed in each mode shown in FIGS. 289 (b) to (d)." appears repeatedly in a form requiring a predetermined period of 3F time B.

According to these configurations, during the 3rd F acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. (Here, the operation button 410)”, etc., appears as a depiction of each “operation receiving portion” moving up and down in its movable range. In this example, "cycle 3F time A (see FIGS. 289A and 289B)" is replaced with "cycle 1F time A" and "cycle 1F time B" in the above-mentioned 1F reception period, and the above-mentioned 2F It is set as a time shorter than "cycle 2F time A", "cycle 2F time B", "cycle 3F time B" (see FIGS. 289(a) to (d)), etc. in the acceptance period. Therefore, in the "3rd F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" during the 3rd F reception period, the "operation reception unit" moves its movable range up and down faster than in the above-described 1F reception period and the 2nd F reception period. The way it moves will be depicted. In this case, regarding the "third floor operation part A" corresponding to the "third floor operation-related display A" during the third floor acceptance period, the "first floor operation part A" corresponding to the "first floor operation-related display A" during the first floor acceptance period A", and the same operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001) as the "second F operation unit A" corresponding to the "second F operation-related display A" during the second F reception period. It is desirable to make the time required for the periodic change different from each other even though the images are displayed for the same operation unit.

In addition, when "3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are started to be displayed before timing tg2 when the 3F reception period occurs , it is desirable to wait for the timing tg2 at which the 3F reception period occurs before starting the periodic change. That is, in this case, "3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are shown in FIG. , (a) are maintained.

In this example, "3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are, as shown in FIG. While the "predictive effect display ZFD" is being displayed, the display is started to appear behind the "3rd F predictive effect display ZFD", and the periodic change is started. In this example, the display range of the 3F precursor effect display ZED is reduced as time elapses, as shown in FIGS. 290(a) to (e).

It should be noted that the "3F foreshadow effect display ZFD" according to this example is different from the "3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)". It consists only of "modes" that appear to overlap on the front side, and "modes" that appear to overlap on the rear side are not executed. As shown in FIGS. 287 to 291 and the like, the "3F premonition effect display ZFD" according to this example is started to be displayed before the timing tg2 at which the 3F acceptance period occurs, and is hidden before the arrival of the timing tg3 (the timing tg3 at which the reception period for the 3rd floor ends without any operation by the player) at which the set time set for the game has passed. .

By the way, during the 3rd F reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 290 and 291, the effect display device 1600 displays “Hero YS” and “Magician MT” facing the BOSS character. ``Hero YS'' is used as a character that moves according to the operation on ``3rd F operation part A (here, sword decoration 5001)'', and ``Magician MT'' is used as a character that operates in ``3rd F operation part B (Here, the operation button 410)" is used as a character that moves according to the operation.

More specifically, when an operation is performed on the ``3rd floor operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)'' during the 3rd floor acceptance period, ``the hero YS will change the BOSS character based on the reception of the operation a plurality of times. Whether or not it can be beaten" is provided, and the result suggests whether the expectation of a big hit is high or low (it may be "100%" or "0%"). can be

On the other hand, if an operation is performed on the "third floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the reception period of the third floor, an effect such as "whether it is possible to withdraw (escape) from the BOSS battle" is displayed. sex is provided. That is, when an operation is performed on the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 3rd floor reception period, the magical power value displayed at the lower right of the display screen ("Magic" decoration display) On the other hand, the painted area) can increase, and when the magic power value is full, the magician MT casts a spell and successfully escapes (escapes) from the BOSS battle. Then, when the escape (escape) succeeds in this way, it can be suggested that the degree of expectation for the big win is higher (it may be "100%") compared to the case of no success.

In the 3rd F reception period according to this production example, at the time of occurrence, "3rd F operation-related display A", "3rd F operation-related display B", "brave man YS", "wizard MT", "BOSS character" However, most of them are covered by the thunder represented by the "3rd F omen effect display ZFD", and the whole picture cannot be recognized. However, unlike the above-described "second F omen effect display ZFD", the thunder expressed by the "third f omen effect display ZFD" according to this example of effect does not occur until the time set as the third F acceptance period has passed. is set to a non-display state before timing tg3. Further, since the display area of the thunder expressed by the "3rd F precursor effect display ZFD" also decreases with the passage of time, "3F operation-related display A", "3F operation-related display A", "3F operation-related The visibility of "Display B", "Brave YS", "Magician MT", "BOSS Character", etc. is gradually improved from the stage before the "3rd F Omen effect display ZFD" is hidden. It will be done.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIGS. 287 and 290, at the timing tg2A (the timing shown in FIG. 290(c)) within the 3F reception period, the "3F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is pressed. It is assumed that the first operation reception (operation reception that does not end the reception period) is performed for the . In this example as well, operations are accepted based on the falling edge of the operation detection signal, but the invention is not limited to this, and "operation acceptance based on the operation detection signal" can be realized by other methods. may

In this example, at timing tg2A (timing shown in FIG. 290(c)) within the 3rd F reception period, the first operation reception is performed for the "3rd F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)". 287(i), (k), and FIG. area) increases (magical power value changes from "0" to "1")" and "Magician MT is accumulating MP". Display UB1).

In this example, if an operation is performed on the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 3rd floor reception period, the corresponding reception is performed in the same manner as in the 2nd floor reception period. The post-output sound is prevented from being audibly output (see FIG. 287(k)). In other words, in this case, the depiction of the "Magician MT" secretly accumulating MP for the BOSS character will be made, but as a player, in addition to being required to perform such an operation multiple times, when performing the operation Due to the low response (performance), it is possible to arouse anxiety such as "Is it okay to continue such operations?"

However, if the response (performance) when operating the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 3rd floor reception period is too low, the game interest There is concern that the Therefore, in this production example, the display UB after reception of the 3rd floor ("Magic value increases "depiction" and "depiction of the magician MT accumulating MP", etc.) are not displayed behind the above-mentioned "3rd F Omen effect display ZFD", and when overlapping, the front side It is supposed to be displayed on

It should be noted that such a "change after reception of the 3rd floor B", including the case of the second and subsequent operations described later, is a change in effect that is different from the display UB after reception of the third floor (for example, changes in the lighting mode of the effect lamps). effect change, etc.) may be further performed. Alternatively, such "change after reception of the 3rd F reception B" does not necessarily have to be executed with a plurality of effect elements, and any one of the above effect elements (for example, an effect that changes the light emission mode of the effect lamp change) only.

In addition, the execution time of the "post-receipt display UB on the 3rd floor" in response to receiving an operation on the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is longer than the time set as the reception period. there is Therefore, the second and subsequent operation receptions for the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" will not be the same as the previous operation for the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)". This is done while the corresponding 3rd F post-acceptance display UB is being displayed.

Then, in this example, as shown in FIG. 287, at the timing tg2B (the timing shown in FIG. 290(d)) within the 3rd F acceptance period, the "3rd F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" It is assumed that the second operation is performed. When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 287(i), (k) and FIG. The area filled with the display) increases (magical power value changes from "1" to "2")" and "Magician MT is further accumulating MP" are now performed respectively. (display UB2 after reception on the 3rd floor). However, at this time, as described above, the post-acceptance output sound is not audibly output (see FIG. 287(k)).

In this example, at timing tg2C (the timing shown in FIG. 290(e)) within the 3rd F reception period, the third operation is performed on the ``3rd F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)''. It is assumed that the However, when the third operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 287(i), (k), and FIG. A new display (mode) does not appear as the display UB.

Note that in this example, when the operation for a predetermined number of times (here, the third time) is performed on the "3F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" within the 3F acceptance period Although it was set so that "a new display does not appear as the display UB after accepting the 3rd floor", instead of this, within the 3rd floor accepting period, for the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" Then, based on the result of the determination, the third F post-acceptance display UB may not be newly displayed. In short, in spite of the fact that such an event (“3rd floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)” is operated within the 3rd floor reception period), a new display is displayed as the display UB after reception of the 3rd floor. does not appear) should be generated when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

However, as described above, even if an operation is performed on the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" even during the 3rd floor reception period, the post-acceptance display and post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the operation are displayed. does not appear, the player feels uneasy about whether it is okay to continue operating the ``third floor operation unit B (in this case, the operation button 410)''. . And it is thought that such a feeling of uneasiness gradually becomes stronger as the remaining time as the reception period for the third floor becomes shorter. In particular, during the 3rd F acceptance period, if an operation is performed on the "3rd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", even if the 3rd F post-acceptance display UB may be displayed, This feeling of uneasiness is all the more so because the post-output sound is not audibly output.

In this regard, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 287, 290 and 291, the "initial game strategy (timing tg2A to tg2C)” and switches to a “new game strategy” that aims to progress the production by operating the “3rd F operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)” multiple times. It is assumed.

That is, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 287(a), (h), and (i), the 3rd floor post-acceptance display in response to the acceptance of the operation on the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" While UB2 (here, a depiction of a magical power value of "2", a depiction of a wizard MT accumulating more MP, etc.) is displayed, timing tg2D ( At the timing shown in FIG. 291(f)), it is assumed that the first operation reception for the "3rd F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is performed.

In this pachinko machine 1, at the timing tg2D (the timing shown in FIG. 291(f)) within the 3rd F reception period, the first operation reception for the "3rd F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is performed. is made, the 3rd F post-acceptance change A can occur as shown in FIGS. 287 and 291(f).

As such a change A after reception of the 3rd F, for example, as shown in FIGS. 287(g) to (k) and FIG. ” corresponding to the first operation of “3F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001)” is audibly output, and “3F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)” is displayed to make it difficult to see the “3rd F effect display EF1”, and furthermore, the 3rd F post-acceptance display UA1 is displayed. Here, as the 3rd F post-acceptance display UA1, "depiction in which the hero YS attacks and the HP of the BOSS character is reduced to about 75% remaining" is performed.

However, as shown in FIGS. 287(i) and (j), when the first operation is performed on the "3rd F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the "audible output state Regarding the 3rd floor reception acceptance sound that was in the "3rd floor acceptance acceptance sound that was in the displayed state" and the "3rd floor reception acceptance display UB that was in the displayed state", the first operation for "3rd floor operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" When there is a reception, it does not turn into a non-audible state or a non-display state with this as a trigger, and these execution states are continued.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 287(e), when the first operation is performed on the ``3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'', the ``periodic change state 3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)” that was in the “3F operation unit A (here, sword decoration body 5001)” was received for the first time. It is assumed that periodic changes are hidden. At this time, although the "3rd F effect display EF1" makes it difficult to see, the "3rd F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" itself continues to be displayed, and has been displayed until then. Only periodic changes are to be terminated once. It should be noted that the periodical change once terminated in this manner is restarted from the beginning after the lapse of a predetermined time.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. Operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3rd F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are both displayed. It is displayed so as to appear to overlap with the "3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "3F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001)" from the front.

It should be noted that when an operation is performed on the "3rd floor operation unit B (in this case, the operation button 410)" during the 3rd floor reception period, the "3rd floor operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" is visually recognized based on this operation. The effect display EF that makes it difficult to perform is not displayed.

And in this example, as shown in FIGS. 287(a), (h), and (i), after receiving the previous operation reception for "3rd F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001)" In a situation where change A is occurring in various ways, and in response to receiving an operation for "3rd floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)", display UB2 after reception of 3rd floor (here, magic power value is "2" 291 (g), (h ), it is assumed that the second and third operation receptions for the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" are performed at each timing shown in ).

In this pachinko machine 1, at the timings tg2E and tg2F (each timing shown in FIGS. 291(g) and (h)) within the 3rd F acceptance period, the "3rd F operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)" 287 and 291, similarly to the case of accepting the first operation for the "3rd F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001)" when the second and third operations are accepted. As shown in (g) and (h), the 3rd F post-acceptance change A can occur.

In particular, with respect to the "output sound A1 after reception on the 3rd floor" and the "3rd floor effect display EF1", the same mode appears when the first operation is accepted and when the second and third operations are accepted. I can hear it. It should be noted that the periodic change in the "3rd F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", which was once terminated at the previous operation acceptance, maintains the terminated state at the time when the operation is accepted for the second or third time. Alternatively, the end state may be canceled and restarted. However, when the operation is accepted for the second or third time, the end state of the periodic change is generated again with this as a trigger. It will happen. That is, in this case, the once terminated periodic change is restarted from the beginning after the lapse of a predetermined time from the time when the second or third operation is received as a reference.

In this regard, the ``post-receipt display UA on the 3rd floor'' is basically the same as when the first operation is accepted for the ``operation part A on the 3rd floor (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' (post-reception display UA1 on the 3rd floor). are technically the same. However, when the operation is accepted for the second time, ``depiction that the hero YS attacks and the remaining HP of the BOSS character is reduced to about 50% (3F after acceptance display UA2)'' is performed (Fig. 291 (g )), and when the third operation is accepted, `` Hero YS attacks, and the remaining HP of the BOSS character is reduced to about 25% (3rd F reception display UA3) '' is performed ( (See FIG. 291(h)), progress as a production can be seen.

In addition, during the 3rd F acceptance period according to this example, every time an operation is performed on the ``3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'', an effect (the BOSS character HP reduction) was made to progress. However, even when an operation is performed on the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" such as making the display progress with a predetermined probability based on the result of the determination, the display will not be displayed. There may be cases where progress is made and cases where progress is not made. However, if an operation is performed on the "3F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" during the 3F acceptance period, the "3F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" Unlike the case where the operation is performed, even if the display does not progress, the "3rd floor output sound after reception A1" is audibly output, the "3rd floor effect display EF1" is displayed, and the "3rd floor effect display EF1" is displayed. The periodic change in the operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) is terminated.

Then, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 287(a), (h), and (i), the reception corresponding to the third operation reception for the "3rd F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001)" In a situation where the post-change A is occurring in various ways, and in response to the operation reception for the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", the display UB2 after reception of the 3rd floor (here, the magical power value is "2 ” and the depiction of the wizard MT accumulating more MP) are still displayed, at the timing tg2G (see FIG. 291 (i)) within the 3F reception period , "3F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001)" is assumed to be operated for the fourth time.

In this pachinko machine 1, when the fourth operation is accepted for the "3F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at the timing tg2G within the 3F acceptance period, the 3F post-acceptance change A can cause For example, as one of the 3F post-acceptance changes A, first, the 3F acceptance period is terminated based on the operation (see FIGS. 287(a) and (c)). Also, as shown in FIGS. 287(h), (k) and FIGS. 291(f), (l), the "third 3F post-acceptance output sound A2" is audibly output, and "3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to "3F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" is visually recognized. A difficult "3F effect display EF2" is displayed, and further, a 3F post-acceptance display UA4 is displayed.

In this regard, the 3rd F effect display EF2 according to this production example includes "3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3F operation-related display B (button The model image BMG)" is not hidden, and the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001 )” corresponding to the “3rd F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)”.

It should be noted that when an operation is performed on the "3rd floor operation unit B (in this case, the operation button 410)" during the 3rd floor acceptance period, the "3rd floor operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" is visually recognized based on this operation. The effect display EF that makes it difficult to perform is not displayed.

In addition, as the "post-receipt display UA4 on the 3rd floor" in response to the fourth operation reception on the "3rd floor operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the 3rd floor reception period, the degree of expectation is relatively high. A mode UA4-1 (FIGS. 291(i) to (k)) with a high (proportion of obtaining a big win) appears and a mode UA4 with a lower degree of expectation (proportion of obtaining a big win) than this mode. -2 ((l) to (n) in FIG. 291) may appear. In addition, as described above, when the 3rd F post-reception display UA4 is displayed, the corresponding "3F post-reception output sound A2" is also audibly output. It may be audibly output in a manner suggesting the degree.

In this regard, when a mode UA4-1 with a relatively high degree of expectation appears as the "3rd F post-acceptance display UA4", as shown in FIG. The "3rd F effect display EF2-1", which is different from the appearance of the mode UA4-2 with a low degree of expectation, is displayed.

That is, when mode UA4-1 with a relatively high degree of expectation appears as "the 3rd F post-acceptance display UA", the first mode EF2-1 (see FIG. 291(i)) is displayed as the 3rd F effect display EF2. This makes it possible to suggest that the mode UA4-1 with a relatively high degree of expectation will appear as the "3rd F post-acceptance display UA4".

On the other hand, when an aspect UA4-2 with a relatively low degree of expectation appears as the "3rd F post-acceptance display UA4", as shown in FIG. A "3rd F effect display EF2-2" is displayed, which is different from the mode UA4-1 with a high degree of expectation.

That is, when mode UA4-2 with relatively low expectations appears as "3F post-acceptance display UA4", the second mode EF2-2 (see FIG. 291(l)) is displayed as the 3F effect display EF2. This makes it possible to suggest that the mode UA-2 with a relatively low degree of expectation will appear as the "3rd F post-reception display UA4". Note that the 3F effect display EF2 is displayed as an image display different from the 3F effect display EF1 in both the first mode EF2-1 and the second mode EF2-2.

In addition, in the 3rd F acceptance period according to this embodiment, the "3rd F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "3rd F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are shown in FIGS. As indicated by 291, the periodic change is hidden based on the reception of the fourth operation for the "3rd F operation part A (here, sword ornament 5001)". Here, the periodic changes are hidden by hiding the "3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "3F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" themselves. It will happen.

Note that in this example, when the situation is immediately after the operation is accepted (the situation where the 3rd F effect display EF2 is displayed) (see FIGS. 291(i) and 291(l)), the "3rd F operation-related display A (Sword decoration image SYG)” and “3F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)” are not hidden, and “3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)” It is displayed so as to overlap behind the third F effect display EF2. Then, after that, such "3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are changed to "3F operation section A (here, sword decoration 5001 )” is set to a non-display state (see FIGS. 291(j) and (m)). However, this may be hidden from the time immediately after the operation is received.

Here, the "3F post-acceptance display UA4" includes such "3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "3F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)", "3F effect display 291(i), ( l)). However, by hiding "3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "3F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)", "3F effect display EF2", etc. The visibility of the "third post-acceptance display UA4" is gradually improved. Further, as described above, even when the "3rd F effect display EF2" is displayed, by confirming its mode, the "3rd F post-acceptance display UA4" can be identified as the high-expected mode UA4-1 and the low-anticipated mode. It is made easy to recognize whether it is displayed in UA4-2 or UA4-2.

286(k) and (n), the display content of the "display UA4 after reception of the 3rd floor" according to this example of effect is determined according to the mode of expectation UA4-1 and UA4-2. will be developed.

In addition, during the 3F acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 287, either the "first acceptable sound B1" or the "second acceptable sound B2" is (selectively) generated as the 3F acceptance acceptable sound. audible output. For example, when the 3F acceptance period occurs, when the "first acceptable sound B1" is audibly output as the 3F acceptance acceptable sound, the "second acceptable sound B2" is audibly output as the acceptance acceptable sound. It is desirable to set so as to suggest that the degree of expectation (proportion) of winning a big hit is high. Note that the first allowable sound B1 may be the same as or different from the "first allowable sound A1" described above. Also, the second allowable sound B2 may be the same as or different from the "second allowable sound A2" described above. In addition, the 3F acceptance acceptable sound does not necessarily have to be output in any one of a plurality of modes (a plurality of acceptable sounds), and may be output in only one mode (one acceptable sound). There may be.

In this regard, during the 3rd F acceptance period, as shown in FIG. When an operation is accepted for the "3F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)", the audible output of the 3F acceptance permission sound is not interrupted (timings tg2A, tg2B, tg2C). ).

In this regard, when an operation is accepted for "3F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" while the 3F reception acceptance sound is audibly output, the 3F reception acceptance sound is triggered by this. audible output can be interrupted (timing tg2G). However, during the 3rd floor acceptance period, even if an operation for the ``3rd floor operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' is accepted while the 3rd floor acceptance acceptance sound is audibly output, Since there are both a case where the audible output of the 3F acceptance acceptable sound is interrupted (timing tg2G) and a case where the audible output of the 3F acceptance acceptable sound is not interrupted (timings tg2D, tg2E, tg2F), It can be expected that the sense of tension when an operation is performed on the "3rd floor operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" during the 3rd floor reception period is preferably maintained.

Also, during the 3rd F acceptance period, based on the fact that the ``3rd F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)'' is operated, the ``3rd F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) and "3F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are hidden, or the 3F acceptance period is terminated. However, when an operation is performed on the "3rd F operation section B (in this case, the operation button 410)", regardless of how many times the operation is performed, the "3rd F operation-related display A (sword Decoration image SYG)” and “3F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)” may not be hidden or the 3F acceptance period may be terminated.

For example, as a result of repeatedly performing operations on the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 3rd floor acceptance period, the magical power value (the area filled with the "magical" decoration display) When it accumulates to the increase, it is possible to wait until the timing tg3 when the 3rd F reception period ends arrives, and perform magic to leave based on the arrival of the timing tg3. And in this case, even if the magical power value accumulates until the timing tg3 arrives, it is in a state where it is permitted to accept operations on the ``3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)''. By doing so, it is possible to challenge the BOSS character to attack a plurality of times while the effect of enchanting and leaving is fixed, so that the interest in the game can be improved. will be able to However, when the 3rd F post-acceptance display UA4 is displayed as a result of performing multiple attacks in this way (when the 3rd F acceptance period ends), the effect of casting a spell and leaving is no longer performed.

Alternatively, the effect judgment is performed prior to the occurrence of the 3rd F reception period, and if a special judgment result is not obtained as a result of the production judgment, the "3rd F operation unit B ( Here, no matter how many times the operation button 410 is operated, the magical power value will not accumulate until it increases (the reception period will not end). good too. In this case, when the fourth operation is performed on the "3rd floor operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the "3rd floor post-acceptance display UA4" is set, and the degree of expectation is relatively low. UA4-2 may always appear, or there may be a possibility that UA4-1, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, will appear. In this regard, if a mode UA4-1 with a relatively high degree of expectation is likely to appear when the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is operated, It is possible to suitably suppress the decline in the interest in the game when the magic power value cannot be increased even if the "3rd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated many times. can be expected.

In addition, in this production example, regarding the display UB after reception of the 3rd floor (a depiction of increasing magical power, a depiction of a wizard MT accumulating MP, etc.), not only the "3rd floor precursor effect display ZFD" but also the "3rd floor 3F Post-acceptance display UA" is also displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side without being displayed behind it (see FIGS. 291(f) to (n), etc.). Also, in this production example, the post-acceptance display UB on the 3rd floor (a depiction of increasing magical power values, a depiction of a wizard MT accumulating MP, etc.) appears to overlap in front of the decoration symbol SZ in relation to it. (See FIGS. 290 and 291, etc.), but in relation to the decorative pattern SZ, it may be displayed so as to overlap behind it.

In addition, in this production example, regarding the display UB after the reception of the 3rd floor (a depiction of an increase in the magic power value, a depiction of the wizard MT accumulating MP, etc.), during the reception period of the 3rd floor, "3rd floor operation unit A (here , sword decoration 5001)" is not hidden based on this operation. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 287(i) and FIG. At the time when the "3rd F post-acceptance display UA4" or "3rd F effect display EF" corresponding to the operation on the operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) starts to be displayed, the display continues. Of course, even when "3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "3F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)", and "3F effect display EF" are hidden, Display can be continued.

However, in this case, regarding the 3rd F post-reception display UB (depiction of increasing magical power value, depiction of wizard MT accumulating MP, etc.), during the period when "3rd F post-reception display UA4" is displayed It is desirable to have it displayed. As a result, while appealing that it is possible to progress the production even by receiving an operation (magic by a wizard) on the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", in reality, the "3rd floor By receiving an operation on the operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001), it is possible to suitably suggest that the production is in a progressed state.

Further, in the 3rd F acceptance period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Based on this, the periodic changes (see FIG. 289) that had appeared until then in the “3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)” and “3F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)” were eliminated. It continues without displaying (end, interruption, cycle switching, etc.). That is, during the 3F reception period, periodic changes in the ``3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)'' and the ``3F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)'' Here, before and after receiving an operation for the operation button 410 (receiving an operation that does not terminate the acceptance period), the display mode does not change, and the periodic changes continue. Therefore, even after receiving an operation (receiving an operation that does not end the acceptance period) for the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", the "3rd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" or The "3F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" continues to progress through the above-described periodic changes (cycle 3F time A, cycle 3F time B).

On the other hand, during the 3rd F acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. 287 and 291, when the ``3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' is operated, the ``3F operation related Periodic changes in display A (sword decoration image SYG)” and “3rd F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)” are hidden. Here, in the reception of the first to third operations on the "3rd floor operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)", "3rd floor operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3rd floor operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" itself is not hidden, but its periodic changes are hidden (finished), but the fourth time for "3rd F operation part A (here, sword ornament 5001)" In the operation reception, by hiding "3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "3F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" themselves, their periodic changes are hidden. I am planning to display it.

Also, in this example, while the 3rd F reception period continues, the gauge image GG is depicted to decrease with the lapse of time, but this may not necessarily be performed.

Also, during the 3rd floor acceptance period, the ``3rd floor operation section B (here, Even if the operation button 410) is maintained in an operated (pressed) state, the operation reception is not performed multiple times (operation reception is automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (auto repeated pressing). function is not activated) (see FIG. 287(b)). In this case, during the 3rd F reception period, if the ``3rd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)'' corresponding to the ``3rd F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)'' is operated a plurality of times. Needless to say, the player must repeatedly operate (press) the "3rd F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" if the reception is desired.

However, during the 3rd F acceptance period, the ``3rd F operation section A (here, When the sword decorative body 5001) is kept in an operated (pressed) state, this causes the operation to be accepted multiple times (the auto repeated hitting function is activated and the operation is automatically accepted at predetermined time intervals). (see Figure 287(a)). In this production example, it is assumed that the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is operated (pressed) from timing tg2D (situation shown in FIG. 291(f)). Accordingly, the operation is accepted at predetermined time intervals (timings tg2E, tg2F, tg2G).

Further, the 3rd F reception period is, as shown in FIG. It will be terminated on that basis. In this regard, the 3rd F acceptance period occurs as an acceptance period during which the automatic button function described above is activated. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 288, until timing tg3 arrives in the 3rd F acceptance period, an operation acceptance (here, "3F operation unit A (here, sword decoration If the 4th operation reception for "body 5001)" is not performed, operation reception for ending the reception period by operating "3rd F operation part A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" within the reception period The same post-acceptance change A as when (here, the fourth operation reception for "3rd F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" is performed) can occur based on the arrival of timing tg3. It's like That is, in this case, the effect corresponding to the "3rd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" that requires multiple operations within the 3rd F reception period and that does not activate the so-called auto repeated hitting function is performed. Since it becomes impossible to enjoy the game unless the user himself/herself operates it, it can be expected that the sense of tension is preferably maintained.

It should be noted that even when timing tg3 arrives without the end of the 3rd F reception period despite the operation of the "3rd F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 3rd F reception period, the The same post-acceptance change A as when an operation is performed on the "3rd F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" within the acceptance period will occur based on the arrival of timing tg3. . That is, in this case, while the 3rd F post-acceptance display UB (a depiction of increasing magical power, a depiction of a wizard MT accumulating MP, etc.) is displayed, the above-mentioned automatic button function is activated and after the reception Change A will occur.

In the 3rd F acceptance period according to this example, when a predetermined number of operations (here, the 4th time) are performed on the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" ``Acceptance of operation to end the acceptance period'' is performed and the display UA4 after acceptance of the 3rd floor is displayed. A determination is made when an operation is performed on the decoration body 5001)", and based on the result of the determination, an "operation reception for ending the reception period" is performed, and the 3rd floor post-reception display UA4 is displayed. Alternatively, "acceptance of an operation that does not terminate the acceptance period" may be performed, and any one of the 3rd F post-acceptance displays UA1 to UA3 may be displayed. In short, when an operation is performed on such an event ("3rd F operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)" within the 3rd F reception period), this is used as an opportunity to "accept the operation to end the reception period ” is performed) should be generated when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

Further, the "3rd F precursor effect display ZFD" according to this example is set to a non-display state before timing tg3 arrives. In this regard, the "3F precursor effect display ZFD" according to this example is such that, while the "3F precursor effect display ZFD" is being displayed, Even if an operation is performed on it, it will not be hidden. However, regarding the "3F foreshadow effect display ZFD", while the "3F foreplay effect display ZFD" is being displayed, the "3F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is operated. When it is done, there are both a case where it is triggered by this and a case where it is not changed to a hidden state. For example, while the "3F foreshadow effect display ZFD" is being displayed, an operation for ending the 3F acceptance period is accepted by operating the "3F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)". When this happens, the ``3F foreshadowing display ZFD'' is hidden, but the 3F receiving period is not terminated by operating the ``3F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)''. When the operation is accepted, it may be arranged so that the "3F premonition effect display ZFD" is not hidden with this as a trigger.

FIGS. 292 and 293 are time charts showing an example of the contents of the effect when the condition 4F is satisfied as the occurrence condition, the 4th F acceptance period occurs, and the player performs an operation.

Now, the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is non-variable and non-time saving), and the "4th F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, a performance determination (announcement performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 4th F variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effects of the decorative pattern SZ (such as effect depiction corresponding to the 4th F fluctuation pattern, BGM reproduction corresponding to the 4F fluctuation pattern (normal BGM reproduction during non-reach, etc.) sound output, etc.) are started, Within the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) according to the result of the determination of the preliminary performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "4th F variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 292(a), within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "4th F variation pattern", the timing th2 after the 4th F time has passed since the start of the variation performance of the decorative symbol SZ has arrived. (Based on the fact that "Condition 4F" is satisfied), "acceptance of 4F post-reception changes (4F post-reception display UA, UB, 4F post-reception sound output, etc.)" is allowed. It is possible to generate the above-mentioned 4F reception period (effective period).

Here, the 4th reception period according to this embodiment includes the 1st reception period described above (see FIGS. 278 to 281), the 2nd reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), and the 3rd reception period. (See FIGS. 287 to 291), etc., both the 4th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the 4th F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) Until the end of the 4F acceptance period, only one operation acceptance is allowed (multiple operation acceptance period). In this example, the ``4th floor operation part A'' used in the 4th floor reception period is replaced with the ``1st floor operation part A'' used in the 1st floor reception period, and the ``2nd floor operation part A'' used in the 2nd floor reception period. and "3rd F operation part A" used in the 3rd F reception period (in this case, the sword ornament 5001), but different operation parts may be used. In addition, the "4th F operation part B" used in the 4th F reception period is changed to the "1st F operation part B" used in the 1st F reception period, the "2nd F operation part B" used in the 2nd F reception period, Although the operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410) is the same as the “3F operation unit B” used in the 3F acceptance period, the operation units may be different from each other.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when the 4th reception period is to be generated, first, an indication effect display suggesting that the player will be given an operation opportunity (that the 4th reception period will occur) is executed. It is possible.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, when the timing th1 before the fourth F reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 292(d) and 293(d), Execution of "4th F precursor effect display" is started as the precursor effect display. As shown in FIGS. 292(d) and 292(d), this "fourth floor precursor effect display" is displayed so as to extend before and after the timing at which the fourth floor operation-related displays A and B are displayed. . Although illustration is omitted, the "fourth floor precursor effect display" is executed in a manner different from the "fourth floor precursor effect display", the "second floor precursor effect display", etc., and the "third floor precursor effect display" is executed. It would be desirable to implement it in the same manner. However, the "4th F omen effect display" may be executed in a manner different from the "3F omen effect display".

That is, in this production example, even when the 4th F acceptance period occurs, as shown in FIGS. "4F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that can appear only when the state is set or the state in which the operation acceptance is permitted, and the 4th F operation section B (here, operation "4th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" that can appear only when the operation reception of the button 410) is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted. Each is displayed. In this production example, the timing of occurrence of the 4th F reception period, ``4th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)'' and ``4th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)'' are displayed respectively. Although the timing is the same as the timing of For example, "4F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "4F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed after the timing at which the 4F precursor effect display ZFD is displayed, and The display may be started before the timing at which the 4th F acceptance period occurs, and may be displayed in a manner that straddles the timing. Alternatively, "4th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "4th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" may be started to be displayed after the timing of the occurrence of the 4th F acceptance period. may

Note that the "4th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "4th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" according to this example are "4th F operation part A (here, sword decoration 5001)” and “display (simulated image display) imitating the 4th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)”. The display content is not necessarily limited to this.

In this regard, "4th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "4th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed while "4th F precursor effect display ZFD" is displayed. The display is started so as to be superimposed on the back side of the "4th F Omen effect display ZFD".

In addition, "4th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "4th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed as image displays in which periodic changes can appear. . That is, as described above, during the 4th F acceptance period, the 4th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001 )” and a “4th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)” that allows one-time operation acceptance.

As for the "4th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", the part (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the operation receiving part of the "4th F operation part A (here, sword decoration 5001)" When a moving image such as "displayed in one mode and then sequentially displayed in several other modes" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change takes a predetermined period of 4F time A. It appears repeatedly.

Further, regarding the "4th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)", the part (button model image BMG) imitating the operation receiving part of the "4th F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) is the second When a moving image such as "displayed in one mode and then sequentially displayed in several other modes" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change is repeated in a manner requiring a predetermined period of 4F time B. It's supposed to appear.

According to these configurations, during the 4th F reception period, each " The operation receiving part" will appear as a depiction that moves up and down in its movable range. In this example, "cycle 4F time A" and "cycle 4F time B" are set to be longer than "cycle 3F time A" in the above-described 3F acceptance period. Therefore, in the "4th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" during the 4th F acceptance period, the "operation receiving part" moves slowly up and down in its movable range compared to the above-mentioned 3F acceptance period. will be depicted. In this case, for the "4th F operation section A" corresponding to the "4th F operation-related display A" during the 4th F acceptance period, the "3F operation The same operation part (here, the sword decoration 5001) as the part A" is provided as the same operation part (here, the sword decoration body 5001), so that the time required for the periodic change is different from each other even though the same operation part is the object of the simulated image display. It is desirable to be able to The period 4F time A may be set to be the same as the period 1F time A or the period 2F time A.

In addition, when "4th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "4th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are started to be displayed before timing th2 at which the 4th F reception period occurs , it is desirable to wait for the timing th2 at which the fourth F reception period occurs before starting the periodic change. That is, in this case, the "4th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "4th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed until timing th2 arrives. mode" and "second mode" are maintained.

In this example, "4F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "4F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed while "4F precursor effect display ZFD" is displayed. , the display is started in the form of appearing behind the "4th F precursor effect display", and the periodic change is started. Note that in this example, the display range of the 4th F precursor effect display ZED is reduced with the lapse of time.

It should be noted that the "4th F precursor effect display" according to this example is the "4th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "4th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)". It consists only of the "modes" that appear to overlap on the side, and the "modes" that appear to overlap on the rear side are not executed. As shown in FIGS. 292 and 293 , the “4F premonition effect display” according to this example is started to be displayed before the timing th2 at which the 4F reception period occurs, and during the 4F reception period. On the other hand, it is hidden before timing th3 (timing th3 at which the reception period for the 4th F is terminated without any operation by the player) when the set time elapses.

Although illustration is omitted, for example, if an operation is performed on the "4th floor operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" during the reception period of the 4th floor, "the hero will be the BOSS based on the reception of only one operation. Whether or not the character can be beaten" is provided, and depending on the result, the degree of expectation for a big hit is high or low (it may be "100%" or "0%"). may be suggested. However, it is desirable that the content of the effect is different from other reception periods (for example, the type of BOSS character is different).

On the other hand, if an operation is performed on the "4th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 4th F acceptance period, "the BOSS battle is withdrawn by magic by the wizard based on the operation acceptance only once. Whether it is possible to (escape)" is provided, and depending on the result, the expectation of a big hit is high or low (it may be "100%" or "0%" ) may be suggested.

In the 4th F reception period according to this production example, at the time of occurrence, "4th F operation-related display A", "4th F operation-related display B", "brave man", "wizard", "BOSS character", etc. , and the "fourth floor foreshadow effect display" cover most of them, making it impossible to perceive the whole picture. However, unlike the above-described "2F predictive effect display ZFD", the "4F predictive effect display" according to this example of effect is performed before the timing th3 at which the set time as the 4F reception period elapses. It is supposed to be in a hidden state. In addition, since the display area of the "fourth floor precursor effect display" is also reduced as time elapses, "fourth floor operation-related display A", "fourth floor operation-related display B", " The visibility of "brave man", "magician", "BOSS character", etc. is gradually improved from the stage before the "4th F precursor effect display" is hidden.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 292, it is assumed that the operation is accepted for the "4th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" at the timing th2A within the 4th F acceptance period. . In this example as well, operations are accepted based on the falling edge of the operation detection signal, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "operation acceptance based on the operation detection signal" can be realized by other methods. may

In this pachinko machine 1, when an operation is performed on the "4th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" at timing th2A within the 4th F acceptance period, the 4th F post-acceptance change B occurs. For example, as one of the 4F post-acceptance changes B, first, the 4F acceptance period is terminated based on the operation (see FIGS. 292(b) and (c)). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 292(i) and (k), "fourth F post-acceptance output sound B" is audibly output in response to the operation on "fourth F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)". At the same time, the "4th F effect display EF" is displayed, and further the "4th F post-acceptance display UB" is displayed.

In this regard, the 4th F effect display EF according to this production example is, as shown in FIG. The display is started in a situation where neither the model image BMG)'' nor the ``fourth premonition effect display'' is in a non-display state. Moreover, in this example, in front of the "4th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "4th F operation part A (here, sword decoration 5001)" on the side not being operated. It is displayed so as to appear to overlap from the top, making it difficult to visually recognize the "fourth F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)".

In addition, as the "display UB after reception of the 4th floor" corresponding to the reception of operation for the "4th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 4th floor reception period, there is a relative degree of expectation (a big hit can be obtained). A case where a mode UB-1 with a higher degree of expectation (percentage of winnings) appears, and a case where a mode UB-2 (see FIG. 292(i)) with a lower degree of expectation (percentage of a big hit) than the mode appears. There seems to be Further, as described above, when the 4th F post-acceptance display UB is displayed, the corresponding "4th F post-acceptance output sound B" is also audibly output. It may be audibly output in a manner suggesting the degree.

In this regard, when mode UB-1 with a relatively high degree of expectation appears as the "4th F post-reception display UB", and when mode UB-2 with a relatively low degree of expectation appears as the "4th F post-reception display UB" "4th F effect display EF-1" which is a different aspect is displayed.

That is, when mode UB-1 with a relatively high degree of expectation appears as "4F post-reception display UB", the first mode EF-1 (see FIG. 292(g)) is displayed as the 4F effect display EF. As a result, it is possible to suggest that the mode UB-1, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, will appear as the "fourth F post-acceptance display UB".

On the other hand, when mode UB-2 with a relatively low degree of expectation appears as the "4th F post-reception display UB", mode UB-1 with a relatively high degree of expectation appears as the "4th F post-reception display UB." The 4th F effect display EF is displayed in a different manner.

That is, when the mode UB-2 with relatively low expectations appears as the "4F display after reception UB", the second mode EF-2 (see FIG. 292(g)) is displayed as the 4F effect display EF. This makes it possible to suggest that the mode UB-2 with a relatively low degree of expectation will appear as the "fourth F post-acceptance display UB".

Also, in the 4th F acceptance period according to this embodiment, the "4th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "4th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are shown in FIG. The periodic change is hidden based on the operation on the "4th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" so that the periodic change is displayed. Here, the periodic changes are hidden by hiding the "4th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "4th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" themselves. It will happen.

Further, in the 4th F reception period according to this embodiment, the "4th F precursor effect display" is also displayed based on the operation on the "4th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" as shown in FIG. to hide it.

Note that in this example, in the situation immediately after the operation acceptance for the "4th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" (the situation in which the 4th F effect display EF is displayed), the "4th F operation Related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "4F operation related display B (button model image BMG)", and "4F precursor effect display" are not hidden, and "4F operation related Display A (sword decoration image SYG)” is displayed so as to appear to overlap behind the 4th F effect display EF. Then, after this, such "4th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "4th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)", and "4th F precursor effect display" are changed to "4th F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" is set to a non-display state. However, this may be hidden from the time immediately after the operation is received.

Here, the "4th F post-acceptance display UB" includes such "4th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "4th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)", "4th F effect display EF", which makes it difficult to see immediately after the "4th F post-acceptance display UB" is displayed. However, by hiding "4F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "4F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)", "4F effect display EF", etc. The visibility of the "fourth floor post-acceptance display UB" is gradually improved. In addition, as described above, by confirming the mode even while the 4th F effect display EF is displayed, the "4th F post-acceptance display UB" can be found in the high-expected mode UB-1 and the low-expected mode UB-. It is made easy to recognize which of 2 and 2 is displayed.

In addition, the display contents of the "fourth floor display after reception UB" according to this production example are developed in accordance with the expectations UB-1 and UB-2.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 293, it is assumed that the operation is accepted for the "4th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at the timing th2B within the 4th F acceptance period. ing. In this example as well, operations are accepted based on the falling edge of the operation detection signal, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "operation acceptance based on the operation detection signal" can be realized by other methods. may

In this pachinko machine 1, when an operation is performed on the "4th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at the timing th2B within the 4th F reception period, the 4th F post-reception change A occurs. For example, as one of the 4F post-acceptance changes A, first, the 4F acceptance period is terminated based on the operation (see FIGS. 293(a) and 293(c)). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 293(h) and (k), "4F post-acceptance output sound A" corresponding to the operation on "4F operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)" is audibly output. In addition, the "4th F effect display EF" that makes it difficult to visually recognize the "4th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "4th F operation part A (here, sword decoration 5001)" is displayed. is displayed, and furthermore, the 4th F post-acceptance display UA is displayed.

In this regard, the 4th F effect display EF according to this production example is, as shown in FIG. The display is started in a situation where neither the model image BMG)'' nor the ``fourth premonition effect display'' is in a non-display state.

In addition, the degree of expectation (the big hit is A case where a mode UA-1 with a higher percentage of winning) appears, and a mode UA-2 with a lower degree of expectation (percentage of getting a big hit) than the mode appears (see FIG. 293(h)). It is supposed to be. Further, as described above, when the 4th F post-acceptance display UA is displayed, the corresponding "4th F post-acceptance output sound A" is also audibly output. It may be audibly output in a manner suggesting the degree.

In this regard, when mode UA-1 with a relatively high degree of expectation appears as the "4th F post-reception display UA", and when mode UA-2 with a relatively low degree of expectation appears as the "4th F post-reception display UA" "4th F effect display EF-1" which is a different aspect is displayed.

That is, when mode UA-1 with a relatively high degree of expectation appears as the "fourth F post-acceptance display UA", the first mode EF-1 (see FIG. 293(g)) is displayed as the fourth F effect display EF. As a result, it is possible to suggest that the mode UA-1, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, will appear as the "fourth F post-reception display UA".

On the other hand, when mode UA-2 with a relatively low degree of expectation appears as the "4th F post-reception display UA", mode UA-1 with a relatively high degree of expectation appears as the "4th F post-reception display UA." The 4th F effect display EF is displayed in a different manner.

That is, when mode UA-2 with a relatively low degree of expectation appears as the "fourth F post-acceptance display UA", the second mode EF-2 (see FIG. 293(g)) is displayed as the fourth F effect display EF. This makes it possible to suggest that the mode UA-2 with a relatively low degree of expectation will appear as the "fourth F post-reception display UA".

According to such a 4F reception period, as shown in FIGS. and when an operation is performed on the "4th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", the same aspect (aspect UA-1, aspect UA- 2) will appear, and it can be said that this is a different configuration from any of the above-described 1F to 3F acceptance periods.

In addition, in the 4th F reception period according to this embodiment, "4th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "4th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are shown in FIG. so that the periodic change is hidden based on the operation on the "4th F operation part A (here, sword ornament 5001)". Here, the periodic changes are hidden by hiding the "4th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "4th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" themselves. It will happen.

Further, in the 4th F acceptance period according to this embodiment, the ``4th F foreshadow effect display'' is also displayed in response to the operation of the ``4th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'', as shown in FIG. Hidden based on

It should be noted that in this example, when in the situation (the situation in which the 4th F effect display EF is displayed) immediately after the operation is accepted for the "4th F operation section A (here, the sword decoration 5001)", the "4th F Operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)”, “4th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)”, and “4th F precursor effect display EF” are not hidden, and “4th F Operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed so as to appear to overlap behind the 4th F effect display EF. Then, after this, such "4th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "4th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)", and "4th F precursor effect display EF" are changed to "4th F operation "Part A (here, sword ornament 5001)" is set to a non-display state based on the operation. However, this may be hidden from the time immediately after the operation is received.

Here, the "4th F post-acceptance display UA" includes such "4th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "4th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)", "4th F effect display EF", which makes it difficult to see immediately after the "fourth F post-acceptance display UA" is displayed. However, by hiding "4F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "4F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)", "4F effect display EF", etc. The visibility of the "fourth floor post-acceptance display UA" is gradually improved. Further, as described above, even when the 4th F effect display EF is displayed, by confirming the mode, the "4th F post-acceptance display UA" can be identified as the high-expectation mode UA-1 and the low-expectation mode UA- It is made easy to recognize which of 2 and 2 is displayed.

In addition, the display contents of the "fourth floor reception after reception UA" according to this production example are advanced in accordance with the expectations UA-1 and UA-2.

In addition, during the 4F acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, either the "first acceptable sound C1" or the "second acceptable sound C2" (selected audibly). For example, at the occurrence of the 4th F acceptance period, when the "first acceptance sound C1" is audibly output as the acceptance acceptance sound, the jackpot is greater than when the "second acceptance sound C2" is audibly output as the acceptance acceptance sound. It is desirable to set so as to suggest that the degree of expectation (ratio) obtained is high.

It should be noted that the "first acceptable sound C1" as the 4th F acceptance acceptable sound is desirably a sound that is not audibly output as the 2nd F acceptance acceptable sound or the 3rd F acceptance acceptable sound. On the other hand, the “second acceptable sound C2” as the 4th F acceptable sound may be output as the same sound as the “first acceptable sound A2” as the 2F acceptable acceptable sound. Further, the “second acceptable sound C2” as the 4th F acceptable sound may be output as the same sound as the “second acceptable sound B2” as the 3F acceptable acceptable sound.

In this respect, during the 4F acceptance period, either the "first acceptance sound C1" or the "second acceptance sound C2" is audible as acceptance acceptance sounds, as shown in FIGS. While the output is being output, a situation may occur in which an operation is accepted. Even if an operation is accepted for any of the operation buttons 410), this will be used as a trigger to interrupt the audible output of the 4F acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound A1, second acceptable sound A2). (timings th2A and th2B).

292 and 293, during the 4th F acceptance period, "4th F operation part A (here, sword ornament 5001)" and "4th F operation part B (here, operation button 410) ”, this triggers “4th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)” and “4th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)”. is hidden, or the 4th F reception period is terminated.

292 and 293, the 4th F acceptance period is originally continued until timing th3 arrives when no operation (to terminate the acceptance period) is received, and timing th3 arrives. It will be terminated on that basis. In this regard, the 4th F acceptance period occurs as an acceptance period during which the automatic button function described above is activated. More specifically, when the operation for ending the acceptance period is not accepted until the timing th3 arrives in the 4th F acceptance period, "4F operation unit A (here, sword decoration The same post-acceptance change A as when the operation is performed on the body 5001)" can occur based on the arrival of the timing th3.

FIG. 294 is a time chart showing an example of the contents of the effect when the condition 5F is satisfied as the occurrence condition, the 5th F accepting period occurs, and the player performs an operation.

Now, when the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is non-variable and non-time saving), and the "5th F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, a performance determination (announcement performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 5th F variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (such as effect depiction according to the 5th F variable pattern, BGM playback according to the 5F variable pattern (normal BGM playback at non-reach time, etc.) sound output, etc.) is started, During the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) corresponding to the result of the determination of the preliminary performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "5th F variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 294, within the execution period of the variation effect according to the "5th F variation pattern", based on the arrival of the timing ti2 after the 5th F time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (Based on the fact that "Condition 5F" is satisfied), "receipt of change after Fifth F reception (display UA, UB after Fifth F reception, sound output after Fifth F reception, etc.)" is permitted. A 5F reception period (effective period) can be generated.

Here, the fifth F reception period according to this embodiment has basically the same configuration as the above-described second F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286). Therefore, during the 5th F reception period, the 5th F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001) is allowed to accept only one operation until the 5th F reception period ends. The 5th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is allowed to accept multiple operations until the 5th F acceptance period ends (multiple operations allowed). period). "5th F operation part A" and "5th F operation part B" used in the 5th F reception period are the same as "2nd F operation part A" and "2nd F operation part B" used in the 2nd F reception period It is desirable to use the operation part. However, this is not required.

That is, during the 5th F reception period (multiple operation permissible period), similarly to the 2nd F reception period described above, for example, the operation of the 5th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) that allows multiple operations is performed. Although the game has started, the player feels uneasy about the fact that the final result display does not appear for a long time, and in the middle of the 5th F acceptance period (multiple operation allowed period), "5th F operation part B (here, operation button 410)” to “operation for the 5th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)” to advance the presentation.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when generating the 5th reception period, first, an indication effect display suggesting that the player will be given an operation opportunity (that the 5th reception period will occur) is executed. It is possible.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of effect, when the timing ti1 before the occurrence of the 5th F acceptance period arrives, as shown in FIG. The execution of the 5th foreshadow effect display” is started. As shown in FIG. 294(d), this "5F premonition effect display" is displayed so as to extend before and after the timing at which the 5F operation-related displays A and B are displayed. The "5F precursor effect display" is executed as a mode (type) different from the "1F precursor effect display", "2F precursor effect display", and the like. Also, it may be executed in the same manner as "3F precursor effect display", "4F precursor effect display", or the like. However, the "5th F omen effect display" may be executed in the same mode as the "2F omen effect display", or may be executed in a mode different from the "3F omen effect display".

That is, in this production example, even when the 5th F acceptance period occurs, as shown in FIG. Alternatively, the "5th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" that can appear only when the operation acceptance is permitted, and the 5th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) "5th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" that can only appear when the operation acceptance for the button is permitted or when the operation reception is permitted. It has become a thing. In this production example, the timing of occurrence of the 5th F acceptance period, the '5th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)' and the '5th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)' are displayed respectively. Although the timing is set to be the same as the timing of For example, "5F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "5F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" may be displayed after the timing at which the 5F precursor effect display is displayed and at the The display may be started before the timing at which the 5F acceptance period occurs, and may be displayed in a manner that straddles the timing. Alternatively, "5th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "5th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" will start to be displayed after the timing of the occurrence of the 5th F acceptance period. may

Note that the "5th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "5th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" according to this example are "5th F operation part A (here, sword decoration 5001)” and “display (simulated image display) imitating the 5th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)”. The display content is not necessarily limited to this.

In this regard, "5F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "5F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed while "5F precursor effect display" is displayed. The display is started so as to be superimposed on the back side of the 5th F Omen Effect Display.

In addition, the "5th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "5th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed as image displays in which periodic changes can appear. . That is, as described above, during the 5th F reception period, as the operation unit that can accept operation by the player, only one reception of operation is permitted. )” and a “5th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)” that allows multiple operations to be accepted.

As for the "5th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", the part (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the operation receiving part of the "5th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is specified. When a moving image such as "displayed in one mode and then sequentially displayed in several modes" is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change appears repeatedly in a form requiring a predetermined period of 5F time A. It has become.

As for the "5th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)", the portion (button model image BMG) imitating the operation receiving part of the "5th F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" , and then sequentially displayed in some manner." When a moving image is regarded as one periodic change, the periodic change appears repeatedly in a form requiring a predetermined period of 5F time B. It's becoming

According to these configurations, during the 5th F reception period, each " The operation receiving part" will appear as a depiction that moves up and down in its movable range. In this example, the period 5F time A and the period 5F time B are exemplified as the same time, but they may be set to different times. However, since it is set as a time longer than the "cycle 3F time A" displayed in the above-mentioned 3F reception period, in the 5F reception period, the same as the above-mentioned 2F reception period, the 3F reception period By comparison, the "operation receiving part" is depicted as slowly moving up and down within its movable range. It is desirable to set the period 5F time A and the period 5F time B to be the same as the period 2F time A and the period 2F time B, respectively.

In addition, when "5th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "5th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are started to be displayed before the timing ti2 at which the 5th F reception period occurs , it is desirable to wait for the timing ti2 at which the 5F reception period occurs before starting the periodic change. That is, in this case, the "5th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "5th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed in the above-described predetermined manner and It will be displayed in a form that maintains each specific aspect.

Also in this example, "5F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "5F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are displayed while "5F precursor effect display" is displayed. The display is started in the form of appearing behind the "5th F premonition effect display", and the periodic change is started. It should be noted that the display range of the 5th F precursor effect display is reduced with the lapse of time.

However, the "5th F precursor effect display" according to this example differs from the "2F precursor effect display" in that "5F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "5F operation-related display B (button model BMG)” is composed only of “modes” displayed so as to appear to overlap in front of them, and “modes” displayed to appear to overlap behind them are not executed. It has become. As shown in FIG. 294 and the like, the “5th F omen effect display” according to this example is started before the timing ti2 at which the 5th F reception period occurs, and is set for the 5th F reception period. The display is hidden before the arrival of the timing ti3 (timing ti3 at which the reception period for the 5th F is terminated without any operation by the player) at which the set time has passed.

By the way, in the 5th F reception period according to this embodiment, as in the 2nd F reception period described above, the effect display device 1600 displays the "brave" and the "wizard" facing off against the BOSS character. The "brave" is used as a character that moves according to the operation on the "fifth floor operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", and the "magician" is used as a character that operates according to the operation on the "fifth floor operation part B (here, the operation button 410)” is used as a character that moves according to the operation. However, it is desirable that the content of the effect be different from other reception periods including the second F reception period (for example, the type of BOSS character is different).

More specifically, if an operation is performed on the "fifth floor operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" during the fifth floor reception period, "the hero will be a BOSS character based on the one-time operation reception. Whether or not it is possible to defeat the player", and depending on the result, whether the expectation of a big hit is high or low (it may be "100%" or "0%") can be suggested.

On the other hand, if an operation is performed on the "5th floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the reception period of the 5th floor, an effect such as "whether it is possible to withdraw (escape) from the BOSS battle" is displayed. sex is provided. That is, when an operation is performed on the "5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 5th floor reception period, the magical power value displayed at the bottom right of the display screen ("Magic" decoration display) On the other hand, the painted area) can be increased, and when the magic power value is full, the magician casts a spell and successfully escapes (escapes) from the boss battle. Then, when the escape (escape) succeeds in this way, it can be suggested that the degree of expectation for the big win is higher (it may be "100%") compared to the case of no success.

In the 5th F reception period according to this production example, at the time of occurrence, "5th F operation-related display A", "5th F operation-related display B", "brave man", "wizard", "BOSS character", etc. , and the ``fifth floor foreshadowing display'', most of them are covered, and the whole picture cannot be recognized.

However, unlike the case of the above-described "second F precursor effect display", the "fifth floor precursor effect display" according to this example does not occur before the timing ti3 at which the set time as the fifth F acceptance period elapses. It is supposed to be in the display state. In addition, since the display area of the ``fifth floor precursor effect display'' also decreases with the passage of time, the ``fifth floor operation-related display A'', the ``fifth floor operation-related display B'', and the `` The visibility of "brave man", "magician", "BOSS character", etc. is gradually improved from the stage before the "5F premonition effect display" is hidden.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 294, at timing ti2A within the 5th F reception period, the first operation reception (without ending the reception period) is performed on the "5th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)". operation reception) is assumed. In this example as well, operations are accepted based on the falling edge of the operation detection signal, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "operation acceptance based on the operation detection signal" can be realized by other methods. may

In this example, at the timing ti2A within the 5th F acceptance period, when the first operation is accepted for the "5th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", FIG. As shown in k), as one of the changes B after reception of the 5th F, "Magic power value (area filled with "Magic" decoration display) is increased (magical power value is increased from "0" to "1" "Depiction of change)" and "Depiction of witch MT accumulating MP" are performed respectively (fifth floor post-acceptance display UB1). It should be noted that the fifth F post-reception display UB1 may be executed in the same manner (same effect image) as the above-described "second F post-reception display UB1".

In this example, if an operation is performed on the "5th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 5th F reception period, the output sound corresponding to this is audibly output after reception. (See FIG. 294(k)). In other words, in this case, the "magician" secretly accumulates MP for the BOSS character. Since the response (performance) is low, it becomes possible to arouse anxiety such as "Is it safe to continue such operations?"

However, if the response (performance) when operating the "5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 5th floor reception period is too low, the game interest There is concern that the Therefore, in this production example, the display UB after reception of the 5th floor ("Magical power value increases "depiction" and "description of the magician MT accumulating MP", etc.) are not displayed behind the above-mentioned "5F omens effect display", and when overlapping, it is displayed on the front side It is supposed to be displayed. According to such a configuration, the operation reception itself is properly performed while the output sound is not audibly output after reception, while arousing a sense of anxiety such as "Is it okay to continue such an operation?" It becomes possible to preferably suggest that the situation exists.

It should be noted that such a "change after reception of the 5th floor B", including the case of the second and subsequent operations described later, is a change in effect that is different from the display UB after reception of the 5th floor (for example, changes in the lighting mode of the effect lamps). effect change, etc.) may be further performed. Alternatively, such "change after reception of the 5th F reception B" does not necessarily have to be executed with a plurality of effect elements, and any one of the above effect elements (for example, an effect that changes the light emission mode of the effect lamp change) only.

In addition, the execution time of the ``post-receipt display UB of the 5th floor'' in response to the reception of the operation on the ``5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)'' is longer than the time set as the reception period. there is Therefore, the second and subsequent operation acceptances for the "5th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" are the same as those for the previous operation for the "5th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)". This is done while the 5th F post-acceptance display UB is being displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 294, at timing ti2B within the 5th F reception period, when the second operation is performed on the "5th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is assumed. When the second operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 294(i) and (k), as one of the 5th F post-acceptance changes B, "Magic power value ("Magic" decoration display is painted over). area) increases (magical power value changes from "1" to "2")" and "Magician MT is further accumulating MP" are performed (5F Reception Rear display UB2). It should be noted that the display UB2 after reception on the fifth floor may also be executed in the same manner (same effect image) as the "display after reception on the second floor UB2" described above. However, at this time, as described above, the post-acceptance output sound is not audibly output (see FIG. 294(k)).

In this example, it is assumed that at timing ti2C within the 5th F acceptance period, the third operation is performed on the '5th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)'. However, when the third operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 294(i) and (k), the post-acceptance output sound is not audibly output, and a new display is made as the 5th F post-acceptance display UB. (mode) does not appear.

Note that in this example, when the operation for a predetermined number of times (here, the third time) is performed on the "5th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 5th F reception period Although it was set so that "a new display does not appear as the display UB after accepting the 5th F reception", instead of this, within the 5th F reception period, for the "5th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" Then, based on the result of the determination, it is also possible not to perform a new display as the 5th F post-acceptance display UB. In short, even though the event ("5th floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is operated within the 5th floor reception period, a new display is displayed as the display UB after reception of the 5th floor). does not appear) should be generated when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

However, as described above, even if an operation is performed on the "5th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" even during the 5th F reception period, the post-acceptance display and post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the operation are displayed. does not appear, the player feels uneasy about whether it is okay to continue operating the ``5th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)''. . And it is thought that such a sense of anxiety will gradually become stronger as the remaining time as the reception period for the 5th floor becomes shorter. In particular, during the 5th F acceptance period, if an operation is performed on the "5th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", even if the 5th F post-acceptance display UB may be displayed, This feeling of uneasiness is all the more so because the post-output sound is not audibly output.

In this regard, in the production example shown in FIG. 294, the "initial game strategy (timings ti2A to ti2C)" aiming at progressing production by operating the "5th F operation unit B (in this case, the operation button 410)" multiple times. The player gives up and aims at the development of the production by operating the "5th F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" that can make the final production result appear with just one operation. It assumes the case of switching to a "playing strategy".

That is, in this example, as shown in FIG. 294, a display UB2 after reception of the 5th F (here, the magic power value is "2") in response to the reception of the operation for the "5th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is displayed. , and a depiction of the wizard MT accumulating more MP, etc.), at timing ti2D within the 5th F reception period, "5th F operation unit A (here, It is assumed that an operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001).

In this pachinko machine 1, when an operation is performed on the "5th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at the timing ti2D within the 5th F reception period, the 5th F post-reception change A occurs. For example, as one of the changes A after the 5th F reception, first, the 5th F reception period is terminated based on the operation. In addition, "5F operation part A (here, sword ornament 5001)" is audibly output according to the operation on "5F operation part A (here, sword ornament 5001)", and "5F operation part A (here, sword ornament 5001)" is audibly output. A "5th F effect display EF" that makes it difficult to visually recognize the "5th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the decoration 5001)" is displayed, and a 5th F post-acceptance display UA is displayed. .

In this regard, the 5th F effect display EF according to this production example is, as shown in FIG. BMG)" are not hidden, and the "5th F operation part A (here, sword decoration 5001)" of the operated side is started to be displayed. is displayed so as to appear to overlap from the front with the "5th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to .

Note that when an operation is performed on the "5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 5th floor acceptance period, the "5th floor operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" is visually recognized based on this operation. The effect display EF that makes it difficult to perform is not displayed.

In addition, as the "display UA after reception of the 5th floor" in response to the operation reception for the "5th floor operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" within the reception period of the 5th floor, the degree of expectation (the big hit is There are cases where a mode UA-1 with a high degree of expectation (percentage of winnings) appears, and mode UA-2 with a lower degree of expectation (percentage of winnings) than the mode appears ( See Figure 294(h)). It is desirable that the 5th F post-acceptance display UA is not executed in the same mode (same effect image) as the above-described "5th F post-acceptance display UA". Further, as described above, when the 5th F post-reception display UA is displayed, the corresponding "5th F post-reception output sound A" is also audibly output. It may be audibly output in a manner suggesting the degree.

In this regard, when mode UA-1 with a relatively high degree of expectation appears as the "display UA after reception on the 5th floor" and mode UA-2 with a relatively low degree of expectation appears as the "display UA after reception on the 5th floor" In "Toki", the same mode is displayed as "5th F effect display EF". That is, in this case, even if the mode of the "fifth F effect display EF" is confirmed, the mode of the "fifth F post-acceptance display UA" cannot be recognized.

In this case, the "5th F effect display EF" is the same mode as the mode EF-2, which has a lower degree of expectation, out of the modes EF-1 and EF-2 of the "2nd F effect display EF". may be displayed as In addition, such a "5th F effect display EF" is displayed in the same mode as the mode EF-2, which has a lower expectation level, out of modes EF-1 and EF-2 of the "3rd F effect display EF". Alternatively, of the mode EF-1 and mode EF-2 of the "4th F effect display EF", it may be displayed in the same mode as the mode EF-2 on the lower expected side. good.

In addition, in the 5th F reception period according to this embodiment, "5th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "5th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are shown in FIG. so that the periodic change is hidden based on the operation on the "5F operation part A (here, sword decoration 5001)". Here, the periodic changes are hidden by hiding the "5th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and the "5th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" themselves. It will happen.

Further, in the 5th F reception period according to this embodiment, the ``5th F precursor effect display'' is also omitted, but while the ``5F precursor effect display'' is being displayed, the ``5F operation unit A (Here, sword ornament 5001)" is hidden based on this operation. However, the "5th F premonition effect display" is not hidden by the operation of the "5th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)".

Note that in this example, when an operation is performed on the "5th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" while the "5th F omen effect display" is being displayed (not shown), the operation reception is performed. When in the situation immediately after the effect display EF is displayed, "5F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "5F operation-related display B (button model image BMG) , and ``5F premonition effect display'' are not hidden, and ``5F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)'' appears to overlap behind the 5F effect display EF. is displayed as Then, after that, such "5F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "5F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)", and "5F precursor effect display" are changed to "5F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001)" is set to a non-display state based on the operation. However, this may be hidden from the time immediately after the operation is received.

Here, the "5th F post-acceptance display UA" includes such "5th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "5th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)", "5th F effect display EF", so that it is difficult to see immediately after the "fifth F post-acceptance display UA" is displayed. However, by hiding "5F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "5F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)", "5F effect display EF", etc. The visibility of the "fifth floor post-acceptance display UA" is gradually improved. However, as described above, even if the aspect is confirmed while the 5th F effect display EF is being displayed, the "5th F post-acceptance display UA" is the aspect UA-1 with high expectations and the aspect UA-1 with low expectations. It is not possible to recognize which one of 2 and 2 is displayed.

In addition, during the 5F reception period, as shown in FIG. 294, the 5F reception permission sound can be audibly output when it occurs. However, when the 5th reception period occurs, only one form of the 5th reception acceptance sound can be audibly output, and the degree of expectation (ratio) that a big hit is obtained is not suggested. It is made like this.

In this regard, during the 5th F acceptance period, as shown in FIG. The audible output of the 5F reception acceptance sound is not interrupted when the operation of the "5F operation unit B (in this case, the operation button 410)" is accepted (timings ti2A, ti2B, ti2C). Moreover, during the 5th F reception period, when an operation reception for the "5th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is made while the 5th F reception period is being audibly output, this will also be used as a trigger. The audible output of the 5F acceptance acceptance sound is not interrupted (timing ti2D).

In addition, during the 5th F reception period, based on the fact that the '5th F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)' is operated, the '5th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) and "5th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are hidden, or the 5th F acceptance period is terminated. On the other hand, when an operation is performed on the "5th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", the "5th F operation-related display A" is triggered no matter how many times the operation is performed. (sword decoration image SYG)” and “5th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)” may not be hidden or the 5th F acceptance period may be terminated.

For example, as a result of repeatedly operating the "5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 5th floor acceptance period, the magical power value (the area filled with the "devil" decoration display) When it accumulates to the increase, it is possible to wait until the timing ti3 at which the 5th F reception period ends arrives, and perform magic to leave based on the arrival of the timing ti3. In this case, even if the magical power value accumulates until the timing ti3 arrives, it is still possible to accept operations on the ``5th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)''. By doing so, it becomes possible to select whether or not to perform a one-time attack against the BOSS character while the effect of casting magic and leaving is fixed, so that it is possible to increase the interest of the game. You will be able to make improvements. However, in this case, if the "5th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is operated, the effect of using magic to escape is not performed regardless of the effect result.

Alternatively, the production judgment is performed prior to the occurrence of the 5th F acceptance period, and if a special judgment result is not obtained as a result of the production judgment, the ``5th F operation unit B ( Here, no matter how many times the operation button 410 is operated, the magical power value will not accumulate until it increases (the acceptance period will not end). good too. In this case, when the operation is performed on the "5th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the "5th F reception post-acceptance display UA", which is relatively low in expectation UA-2 may always appear, or there may be a possibility that an aspect UA-1 with a relatively high degree of expectation will appear. In this regard, if the ``5F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' is operated, there is a possibility that the aspect UA-1 with a relatively high degree of expectation will appear. It is possible to suitably suppress the decline in the interest in the game when the magic power value cannot be increased even if the "5th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated many times. can be expected.

In addition, in this production example, the display UB after reception on the 5th floor (a depiction of increasing magical power, a depiction of a wizard accumulating MP, etc.) is not only the "5th floor sign effect display", but also the "5th floor reception In relation to the "rear display UA", it is not displayed behind it, but is displayed so as to appear to be superimposed on its front side. In this example, when the aspect UA-1 is displayed as the “5th F post-acceptance display UA”, the aspect UA-1 is changed to the 5th F post-acceptance display UB (a depiction of an increase in the magic value, or a witch using MP). However, even when the mode UA-2 is displayed as the "fifth F post-reception display UA", the mode UA- 2 may be displayed behind the 5th F post-acceptance display UB (a depiction of increasing magical power values, a depiction of a wizard accumulating MP, etc.) so as to appear to overlap.

In addition, in this production example, the display UB after reception on the 5th floor (depiction of increasing magical power value, depiction of a wizard accumulating MP, etc.) will be overlapped in front of the decoration pattern so that it can be seen. However, in relation to the decorative pattern, it may be displayed so as to overlap behind it.

In addition, in this production example, regarding the display UB after the reception of the 5th floor (depiction of increasing magical power value, depiction of a wizard accumulating MP, etc.), during the reception period of the 5th floor, "5th floor operation unit A (here, When an operation is performed on "sword ornament 5001)", it is prevented from being hidden based on this. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 294(i) and the like, the 5th F post-acceptance display UB (a depiction of an increasing magic power value, a depiction of a wizard accumulating MP, etc.) is "5th F operation unit A ( Here, the display is continued at the time when the "fifth F reception display UA" or "fifth F effect display EF" corresponding to the operation on "sword ornament 5001)" is started, and the "fifth 5F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)”, “5F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)”, and “5F effect display EF” will continue to be displayed even when they are hidden. It will happen.

However, in this case, the display UB after reception on the 5th floor (a depiction of increasing magical power, a depiction of a wizard accumulating MP, etc.) will not be displayed during the period when the "display UA after reception on the 5th floor" is displayed. It is desirable to be in the state of As a result, while appealing that it is possible to progress the production even by receiving an operation (magic by a wizard) on the "5th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)", in reality, "5th F By receiving an operation on the operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001), it is possible to suitably suggest that the production is in a progressed state.

Further, in the 5th F reception period according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. To hide (end, interrupt, cycle switching, etc.) the periodic changes that have appeared so far in the operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) and the 5th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG). It will continue without That is, during the 5th F acceptance period, periodic changes in the '5th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)' and '5th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)' Here, before and after receiving an operation for the operation button 410 (receiving an operation that does not terminate the acceptance period), the display mode does not change, and the periodic changes continue. Therefore, even after the operation acceptance (operation acceptance that does not end the acceptance period) for the "5th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is performed, the "5th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" The "5F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" continues to progress through the above-described periodic changes (cycle 5F time A, cycle 5F time B).

On the other hand, during the 5th F reception period, as shown in FIG. 294, when the ``5th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' is operated, the ``5th F operation-related display A ( The periodic changes in the "sword decoration image SYG)" and the "5th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" are hidden. Here, by hiding "5F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" and "5F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" themselves, their periodic changes are hidden. I am planning to

Also, in this example, while the fifth F reception period continues, the gauge image GG is rendered to decrease with the passage of time, but this may not necessarily be performed.

Also, during the 5th F acceptance period, the '5th F operation section B (here, Even if the operation button 410) is maintained in an operated (pressed) state, the operation reception is not performed multiple times (operation reception is automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (auto repeated pressing). function is not activated) (see FIG. 294(b)). In this case, during the 5th F reception period, if the "5th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" corresponding to the "5th F operation-related display B (button model image BMG)" is operated a plurality of times. Needless to say, the player must repeatedly operate (press) the "5th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" if the reception is desired.

294(c), the 5th F acceptance period is originally continued until timing ti3 when there is no operation acceptance (to end the acceptance period), and timing ti3 is reached. It will be terminated on that basis. In this regard, the 5th F acceptance period occurs as an acceptance period during which the automatic button function described above is not activated. Therefore, if the operation for ending the acceptance period is not accepted until the timing ti3 arrives in the 5th F acceptance period, even if the timing ti3 arrives, the 5th F operation unit A (here, , sword ornament 5001)” or “5F operation section B (here, operation button 410)” is not executed.

By the way, in each of the above-described 1st F reception period to the 5th F reception period, an operation opportunity is given to each of the two types of operation units (operation acceptance is permitted), and the effect display device 1600 can perform these two operations. A display (simulated image display) related to each type of operation unit is performed. However, in any of the 1st F reception period to the 5th F reception period, it is sufficient that at least two types of operation units are provided with an opportunity to operate (acceptance of operation is permitted), and three or more types may be given an opportunity to operate (acceptance of operation is permitted) to each of the operation units.

In addition, as a type of such "acceptance period during which an operation opportunity can be given (operation acceptance is permitted) to at least two types of operation units",
・During the acceptance period, the operation opportunity is given by preventing the display (simulated image display) related to the operation part to which the operation opportunity is given (operation acceptance is allowed). A confidentiality reception period may be further prepared which has a performance to conceal the state.

When such a confidentiality acceptance period is provided, for example, separately from the first F acceptance period (see FIGS. 278 to 281) (or instead of the first F acceptance period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)), It is also possible to provide an acceptance period in which neither "1F operation-related display A" nor "1F operation-related display B" is displayed during the 1F reception period, and other configurations are the same. . However, when both of these reception periods are provided, the contents of the mutual effects (post-reception display, premonition effect display, reception acceptance sound, etc.) as the effects after reception may be executed as different types.

In addition, apart from the 2F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286) (or instead of the 2F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286)), during the 2F reception period, "2F operation related It is also possible to provide a reception period in which neither "display A" nor "2F operation-related display B" is displayed, and the rest of the configuration is the same. However, when both of these reception periods are provided, the contents of the mutual effects (post-reception display, premonition effect display, reception acceptance sound, etc.) as the effects after reception may be executed as different types.

In addition, apart from the 3F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291) (or instead of the 3F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291)), during the 3F reception period, "3F operation related It is also possible to provide an acceptance period in which neither "display A" nor "3rd F operation-related display B" is displayed, and other configurations are the same. However, when both of these reception periods are provided, the contents of the mutual effects (post-reception display, premonition effect display, reception acceptance sound, etc.) as the effects after reception may be executed as different types.

In addition, apart from the 4F reception period (see FIGS. 292 and 293) (or instead of the 4F reception period (see FIGS. 292 and 293)), during the 4F reception period, "4F operation related It is also possible to provide an acceptance period in which neither "display A" nor "fourth-f operation-related display B" is displayed, and the rest of the configuration is the same. However, when both of these reception periods are provided, the contents of the mutual effects (post-reception display, premonition effect display, reception acceptance sound, etc.) as the effects after reception may be executed as different types.

In addition, apart from the 5th F acceptance period (see FIG. 294) (or instead of the 5th F acceptance period (see FIG. 294)), during the 5th F acceptance period, the "5th F operation-related display A" and the "5th 5F operation-related display B" is not displayed at all, and the reception period may be set to be the same except for the other configurations. However, when both of these reception periods are provided, the contents of the mutual effects (post-reception display, premonition effect display, reception acceptance sound, etc.) as the effects after reception may be executed as different types.

Such "acceptance period in which operation opportunities can be given (operation acceptance is permitted) to at least two types of operation units" is displayed on each display related to these two types of operation units (for example, two types of operation units). , etc.) are not performed. In this case, for example, this may be generated as the 10th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 303 to 306) or the 11th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 307 to 310) described below.

In order to realize each invention (confidentiality reception period) described below, it is sufficient to have only the necessary configuration among the configurations described below. These periods may not necessarily be provided, or only the necessary types of reception periods may be provided.

FIG. 303 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the "condition 10F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition, the 10th F acceptance period occurs, and the player performs an operation. FIG. 304 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when the 10th F reception period occurs and the player does not perform any operation. FIGS. 305 and 306 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the 10th F acceptance period occurs.

Now, the starting condition is established (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is non-variable and non-time saving), and the "10th F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a performance determination (announcement performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 10th F variation pattern. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (such as effect depiction corresponding to the 10th F fluctuation pattern, BGM reproduction according to the 10th F fluctuation pattern (normal BGM reproduction at non-reach time, etc.) sound output, etc.) is started, Within the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) corresponding to the result of the determination of the preliminary performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "10th F variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 303(a), within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "10th F variation pattern", timing tj2 has arrived after the 10th F time has passed since the variation performance of the decorative symbol SZ was started. (Based on the fact that "Condition 10F" is satisfied), "acceptance regarding changes after 10F reception (display UA, UB after 10F reception, sound output after 10F reception, etc.)" is allowed. It is possible to generate the 10th F reception period (effective period).

Here, the 10th F reception period according to this embodiment is the same as the 3rd F reception period described above (see FIGS. 287 to 291). Both the operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) can accept multiple operations until the 10th F acceptance period ends (multiple operations allowed). period). In this example, the ``10th floor operation part A'' used in the 10th floor reception period is replaced with the ``1st floor operation part A'' used in the 1st floor reception period, and the ``2nd floor operation part A'' used in the 2nd floor reception period. and "3rd F operation part A" used in the 3rd F acceptance period (in this case, the sword ornament 5001), but different operation parts may be used. In addition, the "10th F operation part B" used in the 10th F reception period is changed to the "1st F operation part B" used in the 1st F reception period, the "2nd F operation part B" used in the 2nd F reception period, Although the operation unit (here, the operation button 410) is the same as the “3F operation unit B” used in the 3F acceptance period, the operation units may be different from each other. In addition, during the 10th F reception period, it is possible to further allow reception of an operation for an operation unit different from both the 10th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the 10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410). You may do so.

However, in the "10th F reception period", as shown in FIGS. 303(e), (f), and FIG. 305(a), when the "10th F reception period" occurs, Operation-related display (here, "operation-related display" corresponding to the 10th F operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001), "operation Related display”) is not displayed, which is different from the above-mentioned “3F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291)”. That is, in this case, all of the plurality of operation units (the 10th F operation unit A and the 10th F operation unit B) that are in a state in which operation reception is permitted are in a state in which operation reception is permitted. This can be expected to favorably maintain the tension when given an opportunity to operate.

In this respect, in the "10th F acceptance period" according to this production example, the final result display appears as a result of operating the 10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) that allows multiple operations. In such a case, the effect is realized to make the user remember the feeling that ``there may be other operation parts (the 10th F operation part A) in a state in which an operation opportunity is secretly given.'' That is, in this case, the operation target is switched from ``operation on the 10th F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)'' to ``operation on the 10th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' to progress the effect. It becomes easier to cause cases where you are trying to

For example, in the "10th F reception period" according to this production example, no matter how many times any of the 10th F operation unit A and the 10th F operation unit B, which are allowed to be operated a plurality of times, is operated, the 10th F operation is triggered. The reception period is not terminated, and is terminated only when timing tj3, which is a predetermined time after the occurrence of the 10th F reception period, arrives. there is As a result, the player sees that the reception period for the 10th F does not end no matter how many times the player operates it, and is aware of the possibility that there are other operating units to which the opportunity to operate is secretly given. be able to feel it.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, first, in generating the "10th F reception period", as shown in FIGS. The premonitory effect display suggesting the occurrence of the period is not executed at the timing before the occurrence of the period. Further, as shown in FIGS. 303(d) and 304(d), and FIG. , sword decoration 5001), and the "operation-related display" corresponding to the 10th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) are not displayed. is also as described above.

However, in this production example, if an operation is performed on the "10th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" within the 10th F acceptance period, the 10th F post-acceptance display UB is displayed in addition to this as a trigger. 303(f)). At this time, the post-acceptance output sound is not audibly output.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 303, it is assumed that the first operation is performed on the “10th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)” at timing tj2A. The "10th F operation-related display B" is not displayed until the arrival of . In this regard, when the "10th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is operated for the first time at timing tj2A, the 10th F post-acceptance display UB is displayed with this as a trigger. In addition, the “10th F operation-related display B” is displayed (in the situation shown in FIG. 305(b) and subsequent figures, the “10th F operation-related display B” is displayed).

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. At the time of occurrence of the "10th F reception period", it can be kept secret that the reception of the operation on the operation button 410)" is permitted. However, as shown in FIG. 305(b), the concealed state is such that if an operation is accepted for the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" even once during the "10th F acceptance period", Since only the secrecy of the "10th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" side is released, it can be expected that the game interest will be improved while maintaining the tension appropriately. become.

In this example, the "10th F operation-related display B" is not displayed as a display imitating the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", and is displayed as a display image different from this. and Therefore, during the 10th F acceptance period, the display imitating the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" does not appear. In addition, as for the “10th F operation-related display B”, the display may be configured so that periodic changes do not appear. Also, it is desirable that the disappearing EF display is not displayed when the "10th F operation-related display B" is hidden. However, none of these are essential configurations. For example, even if an operation is accepted for the ``10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)'' during the ``10th F reception period'', this triggers the ``10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)''. In addition to not displaying the display imitating the button 410), it is also possible not to display the "10th F operation-related display B". That is, in this case, the "10th F operation-related display B" will not appear during the 10th F acceptance period.

In addition, during the 10th F reception period, if an operation is performed on the "10th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", one of the "10th F reception change A" corresponding to the operation , ``What type of equipment will the hero YS appear wearing? "100%" or "0%") may be suggested. In this production example, the display UA after reception on the 10th floor is a "first production mode UA1" in which the hero YS appears wearing only underwear, and a "second production mode UA1" in which the hero YS appears wearing cloth clothes. UA2" or "3rd mode UA3" in which the hero YS appears wearing iron armor. 1st performance mode UA1", and ``3rd performance mode UA3'' suggests that the expectation of big win is higher than ``second performance mode UA2''.

On the other hand, during the 10th F reception period, if an operation is performed on the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", one of the "10th F post-reception changes B" corresponding to the operation is performed. As a result, the performance (UB displayed after reception on the 10th floor) such as "Which type of equipment does the wizard MT appear in?" (may be "100%" or "0%"). In this production example, the display UB after reception on the 10th floor is "first production mode UB1" in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a walking stick, and "second production mode UB2" in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a rod. , or ``third presentation mode UB3'' in which the wizard MT appears with a wand. The degree of expectation is high, and the "third effect mode UB3" suggests that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than that of the "second effect mode UB2".

In this production example, it is assumed that an operation is performed on the "10th floor operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)" while the 10th floor reception display UB is being displayed. In a state where the post-acceptance display UA is displayed, there may be a case where the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated. In this case, the execution of the 10th F post-acceptance display UB is normally started in one of the above-described multiple modes based on the acceptance of the operation on the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)". The 10th F post-acceptance display UA in the execution state does not cause any change or end with this as a trigger. However, at this time, if the final mode (third effect mode UB3) of the 10th F post-acceptance display UB is being displayed, the operation to the "10th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is performed. When it is broken, there is no change in appearance (display change) triggered by this.

In this production example, as shown in FIGS. 305(b) and (c), the first operation is performed on the "10th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" within the 10th F acceptance period. In this case, the 10th F post-acceptance display UB as one of the "10th F post-acceptance change B" is executed as the "first production mode UB1" in which the wizard MT appears with a walking stick. there is

However, as described above, in this example, if an operation is performed on the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 10th F reception period, the corresponding output sound after reception Since there is no audible output (see Fig. 303(k)), even if the wizard MT is newly equipped with one of the above three types, it will be It will be possible to incite anxiety such as "Is it safe to continue such operations?"

However, if the response (performance) when operating the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the 10th F reception period is too low, the game interest will increase. There is concern that the Therefore, in this production example, the display UB after the reception of the 10th floor (which type of magician MT 305(b) and (c), it should not be displayed behind the decorative pattern SZ, and when it overlaps It is supposed to be displayed so that it can be seen on the front side.

Regarding the "10th F post-acceptance change B" corresponding to the operation on the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 10th F acceptance period, even in the case of the second and subsequent operations described later, In addition, it is also possible to further perform a change in effect (for example, a change in effect such as changing the lighting mode of the effect lamp) that is different from the display UB after reception of the 10th F reception. Alternatively, the "10th F post-acceptance change B" does not necessarily have to be executed with a plurality of effect elements, and only one of the above-described effect elements (for example, effect change that changes the lighting mode of the effect lamp) may be implemented so as to obtain the same effect.

In addition, the execution time of the "10th F post-acceptance display UB" and "10th F operation-related display B" in response to the acceptance of an operation on the "10th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is set as the acceptance period. longer than specified (not a required configuration). Therefore, the second and subsequent operations on the "10th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" depend on the previous operation on the "10th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)". This is done while the "10th F post-acceptance display UB" and "10th F operation-related display B" are being displayed (while the situation shown in FIG. 305(c) is appearing). In this example, the timing at which the "10th F post-acceptance display UB" is hidden is the same as the timing at which the "10th F operation-related display B" is hidden.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 303, at timing tj2B within the 10th F acceptance period (situation where the effect display shown in FIG. It is assumed that the operation button 410)" is operated for the second time.

In this production example, when the second operation is performed on the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 10th F acceptance period, FIGS. As shown in (d) to (f), the 10th F post-reception display UB as one of the 10th F post-reception changes B is a "second presentation mode UB2" in which the wizard MT appears with a rod. It is now running. In this example, the magician MT (first rendering mode UB1) who has been equipped with a stick is depicted moving out of the display screen once (see FIG. 305(d)), and then equipped with a rod. (See FIG. 305(e)). can't Also in this case, as described above, the post-acceptance output sound is not audibly output (see FIG. 303(k)). Further, regarding the "10th F operation-related display B" displayed in response to the first operation on the "10th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)", the "10th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" When the button 410)" is operated for the second time, the display mode and state are not changed in response to this operation, and the display up to that point is continued.

Then, in this example, as shown in FIG. 303, at timing tj2C within the 10th F acceptance period (situation where the effect display shown in FIG. It is assumed that the operation button 410)" is operated for the third time.

In this production example, when the third operation is performed on the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 10th F acceptance period, FIGS. As shown in (g) to (i), the 10th F post-reception display UB as one of the 10th F post-reception changes B is a "third production mode UB3" in which the wizard MT appears with a wand. It is now running. In this example, the magician MT (second rendering mode UB2), who had been equipped with a rod until then, is depicted moving out of the display screen once (see FIG. 305(g)), and then equipped with a staff. 305(h)), but this is the only method for causing a display change as the display UB after reception on the 10th floor. can't Also in this case, as described above, the post-acceptance output sound is not audibly output (see FIG. 303(k)). Further, the "10th F operation-related display B" displayed in response to the first operation on the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" also displays the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)." When the button 410)" is operated for the third time, the display mode and state are not changed in response to this operation, and the display up to that point is continued.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 303, at timing tj2D within the 10th F reception period (situation where the effect display shown in FIG. It is assumed that the operation button 410)" is operated for the fourth time.

However, in this production example, when the fourth operation is performed on the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 10th F reception period, FIGS. As shown in FIGS. 305(j) and 306(k), not only is the post-reception output sound not audibly output, but there is no visible change ( mode) does not appear. That is, in this case, before and after the fourth operation is performed on the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 10th F reception period, the change after reception is It does not occur, and the effect continues as it was before the fourth operation was performed. At this time, the post-acceptance output sound is not audibly output, and the "10th F operation-related display B" continues to be displayed.

In this example, according to how many times the "10th F operation unit B (in this case, the operation button 410)" is operated within the 10th F reception period, the "specified However, instead of this, within the 10th reception period, the ``10th F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)" is determined when an operation is performed, and based on the result of the determination, "the display is changed to a specific mode" or "a new mode does not appear". You can do it like this. In short, it is sufficient that such a display change occurs when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

Incidentally, in this production example, when the "second production mode UB2" appears as the display UB after accepting the 10th floor, after that, at least only the "10th floor operation unit B (in this case, the operation button 410)" is continuously operated. Even if the operation is accepted within the 10th F acceptance period, the "first presentation mode UB1" will not appear. " appears, after that, even if at least "the 10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" continues to be operated, the fact that the operation is accepted within the 10th F acceptance period will trigger the " First production mode UB1" and "second production mode UB2" do not appear. Therefore, the "third effect mode UB3" can be said to be the "final result display" of the 10th F post-acceptance display UB. Therefore, in this example of effect, even if the user operates the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" after the "third effect mode UB3" is displayed, the above-described "fourth time The same situation as in “Operation of

However, as described above, even if an operation is performed on the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" even during the 10th F reception period, the post-acceptance display and post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the operation are displayed. does not appear, the player feels uneasy about whether it is okay to continue operating the ``10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)''. . Then, it is considered that such a feeling of anxiety gradually becomes stronger as the remaining time of the 10th F acceptance period becomes shorter (as the elapsed time becomes longer). In particular, during the 10th F acceptance period, if an operation is performed on the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", even if the 10th F post-acceptance display UB may be displayed, This feeling of uneasiness is all the more so because the post-output sound is not audibly output.

In this regard, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 303, 305 and 306, the "initial game strategy (timing tj2A to tj2D)” and switches to a “new game strategy” that aims to progress the production by operating the “10th F operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)” multiple times. It is assumed.

That is, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 303(a), (h), and (i), the 10th F post-acceptance display in response to the operation acceptance for the "10th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" In the situation where UB3 is displayed (conditions shown in FIG. 306(k)), at timing tj2E within the 10th F reception period, for "10th F operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)" It is assumed that the first operation has been performed.

In this pachinko machine 1, when the first operation is accepted for the "10th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at the timing tj2E within the 10th F acceptance period, the change after the 10th F acceptance can give rise to A.

As such a change A after reception of the 10th F, for example, as shown in FIGS. 303(h), (k) and FIG. ” is audibly output, and the 10th F post-acceptance display UA is displayed. Here, as the post-acceptance display UA on the 10th floor, a "first presentation mode UA1" in which the hero YS appears wearing only underwear appears. However, as shown in FIGS. 306(l) and 306(m), regarding the "display UA after the reception of the 10th F (what type of equipment the hero YS appears in)", the above-mentioned "1st 10F Post-Receipt Display UB" is displayed so that it can be seen behind the decorative pattern SZ.

Note that the "10th F post-acceptance output sound A" is output as a sound that will not be output when an operation is accepted for any of the operation units during the above-described 1F acceptance period. I am planning to do so.

In addition, regarding the "change A after receiving the 10th F" corresponding to the operation on the "10th F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" within the 10th receiving period, in the case of the second and subsequent operations described later Including , it is also possible to further perform a change in effect different from the display UA after reception of the 10th floor (for example, a change in effect such as changing the lighting mode of the effect lamp). Alternatively, the "10th F post-acceptance change A" does not necessarily have to be executed with a plurality of effect elements, and only one of the above-described effect elements (for example, effect change that changes the lighting mode of the effect lamp) may be implemented so as to obtain the same effect.

It should be noted that if an operation is performed on the ``10th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' within the 10th F reception period, the ``10th F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)'' 303(e)).

Further, in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 303(i), 306(l), (m), etc., while the "display UB after reception on the 10th floor" is being displayed, the "10th floor operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" will be operated for the first time. However, the "10th F post-acceptance display UB" is hidden when the first operation is accepted for the "10th F operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)". It is designed to continue its execution state without being overwritten.

Here, the "10th F post-acceptance change A (10th F post-acceptance display UA)" in response to the acceptance of the operation on the "10th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" corresponds to the "10th F post-acceptance change B (10th F Display after reception UB)”, the execution state is terminated in a short period of time within the reception period, and the non-execution (non-display) state is set.

Therefore, the second and subsequent operations on the "10th F operation section A (here, the operation button 410)" correspond to the previous operations on the "10th F operation section A (here, the operation button 410)" In some cases, it may be performed while the "10th F reception display UA" is already in a non-execution (non-display) state. ”, while the display UA after reception on the 10th floor is not displayed, the display UA after reception on the 10th floor (Hero YS wears any type of equipment. Do you want to appear wearing it?)" is started to be executed.

However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 303(h), at timing tj2F within the 10th F reception period (situation where the effect display shown in FIG. Here, it is assumed that the second operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001). In this production example, the second and subsequent operations on the "10th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" also display the "10th F post-acceptance display UA" corresponding to the previous operation. It is assumed that this is done in the presence of

In this production example, when the second operation is performed on the ``10th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)'' within the 10th F reception period, FIGS. As shown in 306(n)-(p), the 10th F post-reception display UA as one of the 10th F post-reception changes A is a "second presentation mode" in which the hero YS appears wearing cloth clothes. UA2". In this example, the hero YS (first production mode UA1), who had been wearing only underwear until then, is depicted moving out of the display screen (see FIG. 305(n)), and then wearing cloth. It was decided that the reappearance would be depicted with clothes equipped (second production mode UA2) (see FIG. 306(o)), but as a method of causing a display change as the display UA after receiving the 10th floor reception, It is not limited to this. Also in this case, the post-acceptance output sound is audibly output as described above (see FIG. 303(k)). In addition, the "10th F post-acceptance display UB" is also hidden when the second operation is accepted for the "10th F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)". It is designed to continue its execution state without being overwritten.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 303(h), at the timing tj2G within the 10th F reception period (situation where the effect display shown in FIG. Here, it is assumed that the third operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001).

In this production example, when the third operation is performed on the ``10th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)'' within the 10th F reception period, FIGS. As shown in 306(q) to (s), the 10th F post-reception display UA as one of the 10th F post-reception changes A is the "third presentation mode" in which the hero YS appears with iron armor. UA3". In this example, the hero YS (second production mode UA2), who had been wearing clothes made of cloth until then, is depicted as moving out of the display screen (see FIG. 306(q)), (See Figure 306(r)). is not limited to this. Also in this case, the post-acceptance output sound is audibly output as described above (see FIG. 303(k)). In addition, the "10th F post-acceptance display UB" is also hidden when the third operation is accepted for the "10th F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)". It is designed to continue its execution state without being overwritten.

Then, in this example, as shown in FIG. 303(h), at timing tj2H within the 10th F reception period (situation where the effect display shown in FIG. Here, it is assumed that the fourth operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001).

In this production example, when the fourth operation is performed on the "10th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" within the 10th F acceptance period, FIGS. As shown in 306 (t) to (v), the 10th F post-reception display UA as one of the 10th F post-reception changes A is the "third presentation mode" in which the hero YS appears with iron armor. UA3". In this example, the hero YS (third production mode UA3), who had been equipped with iron armor until then, is depicted as moving out of the display screen (see FIG. 306(t)), and after that, (See Figure 306(u)). is not limited to this. Also in this case, the post-acceptance output sound is audibly output as described above (see FIG. 303(k)). In addition, the "10th F post-acceptance display UB" is also hidden when the fourth operation is accepted for the "10th F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)". It is designed to continue its execution state without being overwritten.

That is, in this case, during the 10th F reception period, when the fourth operation is performed on the "10th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the display after reception of the 10th F that has been in the execution state until then is displayed. The "third effect mode UA3" as the UA is interrupted, and after the reception of the 10th F, the execution of the "third effect mode UA3" as the display UA is restarted.

Then, in this example, as shown in FIG. 303(h), at the timing tj2I within the 10th F acceptance period (situation where the effect display shown in FIG. Here, it is assumed that the fifth operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001).

In this production example, when the fifth operation is performed on the ``10th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)'' within the 10th F reception period, FIGS. As shown in 306 (w) to (y), the 10th F post-reception display UA as one of the 10th F post-reception changes A is a "third presentation mode" in which the hero YS appears with iron armor. UA3". In this example, the hero YS (third production mode UA3), who had been equipped with iron armor until then, is depicted as moving out of the display screen (see FIG. 306(w)), and after that, (See Figure 306(x)). is not limited to this. Also in this case, the post-acceptance output sound is audibly output as described above (see FIG. 303(k)). In addition, the "10th F post-acceptance display UB" is also hidden when the fifth operation is accepted for the "10th F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)". It is designed to continue its execution state without being overwritten.

That is, in this case, during the 10th F reception period, when the fifth operation is performed on the "10th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", the same as when the fourth operation is performed, Rendering effect in which the "third performance mode UA3" as the 10th F post-reception display UA that has been in an execution state until then is interrupted, and the "3rd performance mode UA3" as the 10th F post-reception display UA is re-started. will appear.

In this example, according to how many times the "10th F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is operated within the 10th F reception period, " "change the display to a specific mode" or "make the same mode appear again", but instead of this, within the 10th F reception period, "the 10th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is operated, and based on the result of the determination, ``change the display to a specific aspect'' or ``make the same aspect appear again''. You can In short, it is sufficient that such a display change occurs when each predetermined condition is satisfied.

Incidentally, in this example of effect, when the "second effect mode UA2" appears as the display UA after the acceptance of the 10th floor, the "first effect mode UA1" is triggered by the fact that the operation is accepted within the acceptance period of the 10th floor. " will not appear, and if "3rd effect mode UA3" appears as the display UA after accepting the 10th floor, the reception of the operation within the acceptance period of the 10th floor will trigger " The first effect mode UA1" and the "second effect mode UA2" do not appear. Therefore, the "third effect mode UA3" can be said to be the "final result display" of the 10th F post-acceptance display UA. Therefore, in this production example, even if the user operates the ``10th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' after the ``third production mode UA3'' is displayed, the above-mentioned ``4 The same situation as the "operation for the 5th time" and the "operation for the 5th time" will appear.

In addition, regarding the "10th F post-acceptance output sound", the same mode can appear regardless of the number of times the operation has been accepted. However, it may be audibly output in a different manner according to the manner of "10th F post-acceptance change A (10th F post-acceptance display UA)".

In addition, in this production example, the "10th F post-reception change A (the 10th 10F post-acceptance display UA)" appears, and the "10F post-acceptance change B (10th F post-acceptance display UB)” appears, regardless of the operation timing, before the execution state of “10th F post-acceptance change B (10th F post-acceptance display UB)” ends. Then, the execution state of "10th F post-acceptance change A (10th F post-acceptance display UA)" is terminated.

In addition, during the 10F reception period, as shown in FIG. 303, the reception permission sound is not audibly output and the display suggesting the remaining time is not performed.

Also, in this production example, the display UA after receiving reception on the 10th floor is not displayed so as to appear to overlap the front side of the decorative pattern SZ, but is displayed behind it (Fig. 306). (l)-(y), etc.). On the other hand, the display UB after reception on the 10th floor is displayed so as to overlap with the front side of the decorative pattern SZ in relation to it.

Further, during the 10th F reception period, even if the "10th F operation unit B (in this case, the operation button 410)" is kept being operated (pressed), the operation reception is performed multiple times (for a predetermined time period). The operation reception is automatically repeated each time (the automatic repeated hitting function is not activated) (see FIG. 303(b)). In this case, if it is desired that the "10th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is operated multiple times within the 10th F reception period, the player can 10F operation section B (here, operation button 410)" must be repeatedly operated (pressed).

However, during the 10th F acceptance period, if the ``10th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' is kept in the operated (pressed) state, the operation will be accepted multiple times (auto repeated hits). The function is activated and the operation reception is automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (see FIG. 303(a)).

The 10F reception period continues until timing tj3 arrives, and ends only when timing tj3 arrives, as shown in FIG. 303(c). In this respect, the 10th F acceptance period occurs as an acceptance period during which the automatic button function described above is not activated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 304, when no operation is performed within the 10th F reception period, the 10th F reception is performed without any change in display or sound output related to the reception period. The acceptance period will end.

FIG. 307 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the "condition 11F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition, the 11th F acceptance period occurs, and the player performs an operation. FIG. 308 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when the 11th F reception period occurs and the player does not perform any operation. FIGS. 309 and 310 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the 11th F acceptance period occurs.

Now, the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is non-variable and non-time saving), and the "11th F fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, a performance determination (announcement performance determination, etc.) corresponding to the 11th F variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (effect depiction according to the 11th F change pattern, BGM reproduction according to the 11th F change pattern (normal BGM reproduction at non-reach time, etc.) sound output, etc.) is started, Within the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) corresponding to the result of the determination of the preliminary performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "11th F variation pattern" itself.

As shown in FIG. 307(a), within the execution period of the variation performance related to the "11th F variation pattern", timing tk2 has arrived after the 11th F time has elapsed since the start of the variation performance of the decorative symbol SZ. Based on (based on the satisfaction of "condition 11F"), the above 11F reception period (valid period) can occur.

Here, the 11th F reception period according to this embodiment is the same as the 10th F reception period described above (see FIGS. Both the operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) can accept multiple operations until the end of the 11th F acceptance period (multiple operations allowed). period). In this example, the "11th floor operation part A" used in the 11th floor reception period is replaced with the "1st floor operation part A" used in the 1st floor reception period, and the "2nd floor operation part A" used in the 2nd floor reception period. , "3rd F operation part A" used in the 3rd F reception period, and "10th F operation part A" used in the 10th F reception period (here, the sword ornament 5001). , may be different operation units. In addition, the "11th F operation part B" used in the 11th F reception period, the "1st F operation part B" used in the 1st F reception period, the "2nd F operation part B" used in the 2nd F reception period, The same operation unit (here, the operation button 410) as the “3rd F operation unit B” used in the 3rd F reception period, the “10th F operation unit B” used in the 10th F reception period, etc., but different operations may be a part. Also, during the 11th F acceptance period, it is possible to further allow acceptance of an operation for an operation part different from both the 11th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the 11th F operation part B (here, the operation button 410). You may do so.

Similarly, in the "11th F reception period", as shown in Figs. 307(e), (f), and Fig. 309(a), the operation unit (here, "operation-related display" corresponding to the 11th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001), the 11th F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) ("Operation-related display") is not displayed. That is, in this case, all of the plurality of operation units (the 11th F operation unit A and the 11th F operation unit B) that are in a state in which operation reception is permitted are in a state in which operation reception is permitted. This can be expected to favorably maintain the tension when given an opportunity to operate.

Also, in the "11th floor reception period" according to this production example, the final result display appeared as a result of operating the 11th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) that allows multiple operations. In this case, the performance is realized to make one feel that "there may be other operating units (the 11th F operating unit A) that are in a state of being secretly given an opportunity to operate." That is, in this case, the operation target is switched from ``operation on the 11th F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)'' to ``operation on the 11th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' to progress the effect. It becomes easier to cause cases where you are trying to

For example, in the "11th F reception period" according to this production example, no matter how many times any of the 11th F operation unit A and the 11th F operation unit B, which are allowed to be operated a plurality of times, is operated, the 11th F The acceptance period is not terminated, and is terminated only when timing tk3, which is a predetermined time after the occurrence of the 11th F acceptance period, arrives. there is As a result, the player sees that the reception period for the 11th floor does not end no matter how many times the player operates it, and is aware of the possibility that there are other operation units to which the opportunity to operate is secretly given. be able to feel it.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, first, in generating the "11th F reception period", as shown in FIG. The premonition effect display suggesting this at the previous timing is not executed. Also, as shown in FIG. 307(d), FIG. 309(a), etc., even after the 11th F reception period has occurred, basically, the 11th F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001) , and the "operation-related display" corresponding to the 11th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is not displayed. .

However, even in this production example, as in the case of the 10th F reception period described above, if an operation is performed on the "11th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 11th F reception period, this will be used as a trigger. In addition to displaying the 11th F post-acceptance display UB, the "11th F operation-related display B" is displayed (see FIG. 307(f)). At this time, the post-acceptance output sound is not audibly output.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 307, it is assumed that the first operation is performed on the "11th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tk2A. The "11th F operation-related display B" is not displayed until the arrival of . In this regard, when the first operation is performed on the "11th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tk2A, the 11th F post-acceptance display UB is displayed with this as a trigger. In addition, the "11th F operation-related display B" is displayed ("11th F operation-related display B" is displayed in the situations shown in FIG. 309(b) and subsequent figures).

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. At the time of occurrence of the "11th F reception period", it can be kept secret that the reception of the operation on the operation button 410)" is permitted. However, as shown in FIG. 309(b), the concealed state is such that if an operation is accepted even once for the ``11th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)'' during the ``11th F reception period'', Since only the secrecy of the "11th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" side is released, it can be expected to improve the game interest while maintaining the tension appropriately. become.

In this example, "11th F operation-related display B" is not displayed as a display imitating "11th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)", and is displayed as a display image different from this. and Therefore, during the 11th F acceptance period, the display imitating the "11th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" does not appear. In addition, the display of the "11th F operation-related display B" may be configured so that periodic changes do not appear. Also, it is desirable that the disappearing EF display is not displayed when the "11th F operation-related display B" is hidden. However, none of these are essential configurations. For example, even if an operation is accepted for the "11th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the "11th F reception period", the "11th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is triggered by this. In addition to not displaying the display imitating the button 410), it is also possible not to display the "11th F operation-related display B". That is, in this case, the "11th F operation-related display B" will not appear during the 11th F accepting period.

In addition, during the 11th F reception period, if an operation is performed on the "11th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)", one of the "11th F post-reception changes A" corresponding to the operation , ``What type of equipment will the hero YS appear wearing? "100%" or "0%") may be suggested. In this production example, the display UA after reception on the 11th floor is a "first production mode UA1" in which the hero YS appears wearing only underwear, and a "second production mode UA1" in which the hero YS appears wearing cloth clothes. UA2" or "3rd mode UA3" in which the hero YS appears wearing iron armor. 1st performance mode UA1", and ``3rd performance mode UA3'' suggests that the expectation of big win is higher than ``second performance mode UA2''. As is clear from FIGS. 305 and 309 and the like, the 10th F post-reception display UA and the 11th F post-reception display UA are executed as different effects (image displays).

On the other hand, during the 11th F acceptance period, if an operation is performed on the ``11th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)'', one of the ``11th F post-acceptance changes B'' corresponding to the operation is performed. As a result, the performance (UB displayed after reception on the 11th floor) such as "Which type of equipment does the wizard MT appear in?" (may be "100%" or "0%"). In this production example, the display UB after reception on the 11th floor is "first production mode UB1" in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a walking stick, and "second production mode UB2" in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a rod. , or ``third presentation mode UB3'' in which the wizard MT appears with a wand. The degree of expectation is high, and the "third effect mode UB3" suggests that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than that of the "second effect mode UB2". As is clear from FIGS. 306 and 310, the 10th F post-acceptance display UB and the 11th F post-acceptance display UB are executed as different effects (image displays).

In this production example, it is assumed that an operation is performed on the ``11th floor operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' while the 11th floor reception display UB is being displayed. In a state where the post-acceptance display UA is displayed, an operation may be performed on the "11th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)". In this case, normally, the execution of the 11th F post-acceptance display UB is started in one of the above-described multiple modes based on the acceptance of the operation for the "11th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)". The 11th F post-acceptance display UA in the execution state does not cause any change or end with this as a trigger. However, at this time, if the final mode (third rendering mode UB3) of the 11th floor post-acceptance display UB is being displayed, an operation to the "11th floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is performed. When it is broken, there is no change in appearance (display change) triggered by this.

In this production example, as shown in FIGS. 309(b) and (c), the first operation is performed on the "11th floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" within the 11th floor acceptance period. In this case, the 11th F post-acceptance display UB as one of the "11th F post-acceptance change B" is executed as the "first production mode UB1" in which the wizard MT appears with a walking stick. there is

However, as described above, in this example, if an operation is performed on the "11th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 11th floor reception period, the corresponding post-reception output sound Since there is no audible output (see Fig. 307(k)), even if the witch MT equipped with any of the above three types is newly depicted, coupled with its secrecy, etc. It will be possible to incite anxiety such as "Is it safe to continue such operations?"

However, if the response (performance) when operating the "11th floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the 11th floor reception period is too low, the game interest will increase. There is concern that the Therefore, in this production example, the display UB after the reception of the 11th floor (which type of magician MT 309(b) and (c), it should not be displayed behind the decorative pattern SZ, and when it overlaps It is supposed to be displayed so that it can be seen on the front side.

Regarding the "11th F post-acceptance change B" corresponding to the operation on the "11th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 11th F acceptance period, even in the case of the second and subsequent operations described later, In addition, it may be possible to further perform a change in effect (for example, a change in effect such as changing the lighting mode of the effect lamp) that is different from the display UB after reception on the 11th floor. Alternatively, the "11th F post-acceptance change B" does not necessarily have to be executed with a plurality of effect elements, and only one of the above-described effect elements (for example, effect change that changes the lighting mode of the effect lamp) may be implemented so as to obtain the same effect.

In addition, the execution time of the "11th floor post-acceptance display UB" and "11th floor operation-related display B" in response to the acceptance of an operation on the "11th floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is set as the acceptance period. longer than specified (not a required configuration). Therefore, the second and subsequent operations on the "11th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)" depend on the previous operation on the "11F operation section B (here, the operation button 410)". This is done while the "11th F post-acceptance display UB" and "11th F operation-related display B" are being displayed (while the situation shown in FIG. 309(c) is being displayed). In this example, the timing at which the "11th F post-acceptance display UB" is hidden is the same as the timing at which the "11th F operation-related display B" is hidden.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 307, at timing tk2B within the 11th F acceptance period (situation where the effect display shown in FIG. It is assumed that the operation button 410)" is operated for the second time.

In this production example, when the second operation is performed on the ``11th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)'' within the 11th floor reception period, FIGS. As shown in (d) to (f), the 11th F post-reception display UB as one of the 11th F post-reception changes B is a "second production mode UB2" in which the wizard MT appears equipped with a rod. It is now running. In this example, the magician MT (first rendering mode UB1) who has been equipped with a stick is depicted as moving out of the display screen (see FIG. 309(d)), and then equipped with a rod. (See FIG. 309(e).) However, this is the only method for causing a display change as the 11th floor reception display UB. can't Also in this case, as described above, the post-acceptance output sound is not audibly output (see FIG. 307(k)). Further, regarding the "11th F operation-related display B" displayed in response to the first operation on the "11th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)", the "11th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" When the button 410)" is operated for the second time, the display mode and state are not changed in response to this operation, and the display up to that point is continued.

Then, in this example, as shown in FIG. 307, at timing tk2C within the 11th F reception period (situation where the effect display shown in FIG. It is assumed that the operation button 410)" is operated for the third time.

In this production example, when the third operation is performed on the ``11th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)'' within the 11th floor reception period, FIGS. As shown in (g) to (i), the 11th F post-reception display UB as one of the 11th F post-reception changes B is a "third production mode UB3" in which the wizard MT appears with a staff. It is now running. In this example, the magician MT (second rendering mode UB2), who had been equipped with a rod until then, is depicted as moving out of the display screen (see FIG. 309(g)), and then equipped with a staff. 309(h)), but this is the only method for causing a display change as the 11th floor reception display UB. can't Also in this case, as described above, the post-reception output sound is not audibly output (see FIG. 307(k)). Further, the "11th F operation-related display B" displayed in response to the first operation on the "11th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" also displays the "11th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)." When the button 410)" is operated for the third time, the display mode and state are not changed in response to this operation, and the display up to that point is continued.

Then, in this example, as shown in FIG. 307, at timing tk2D within the 11th F reception period (situation where the effect display shown in FIG. It is assumed that the operation button 410)" is operated for the fourth time.

However, in this production example, when the fourth operation is performed on the "11th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 11th floor reception period, FIGS. As shown in FIGS. 309(j) and 310(k), not only is the post-reception output sound not audibly output, but there is no visible change ( mode) does not appear. That is, in this case, before and after the fourth operation is performed on the "11th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 11th F reception period, the change after reception is This does not occur, and the effect continues with the state before the fourth operation is performed. At this time, the post-acceptance output sound is not audibly output, and the "11th F operation-related display B" continues to be displayed.

In this example, according to how many times the "11th floor operation unit B (in this case, the operation button 410)" is operated within the 11th floor reception period, the "specified However, instead of this, during the 11th F acceptance period, the ``11th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is determined when an operation is performed, and based on the result of the determination, "the display is changed to a specific mode" or "a new mode does not appear". You may do so. In short, it is sufficient that such a display change occurs when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

Incidentally, in this production example, when the "second production mode UB2" appears as the display UB after accepting the reception of the 11th floor, after that, at least only the "11th floor operation unit B (in this case, the operation button 410)" is continuously operated. Even if the operation is accepted within the 11th floor acceptance period, the "first effect mode UB1" will not appear. " appears, after that, even if at least "the 11th floor operation unit B (in this case, the operation button 410)" is continued to be operated, the fact that the operation is accepted within the 11th floor reception period will trigger " The first rendering mode UB1” and the “second rendering mode UB2” do not appear. Therefore, the "third effect mode UB3" can be said to be the "final result display" of the 11th F post-acceptance display UB. Therefore, in this production example, even if an operation is performed on the "11th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" after the "third production mode UB3" is displayed, the "fourth time The same situation as "operation of" appears.

However, as described above, even during the 11th floor reception period, even though the operation was performed on the "11th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", the display after reception and the output sound after reception according to the operation does not appear, the player feels uneasy about whether it is safe to continue operating the ``11th F operation unit B (in this case, the operation button 410)''. . And it is thought that such a feeling of anxiety gradually becomes stronger as the remaining time as the 11th F reception period becomes shorter (as the elapsed time becomes longer). In particular, during the 11th F acceptance period, if an operation is performed on the "11th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", even if the 11th F post-acceptance display UB may be displayed, This feeling of uneasiness is all the more so because the post-output sound is not audibly output.

In this regard, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 307, 309 and 310, the "initial game strategy (timing tk2A to tk2D)”, and switch to a “new game strategy” aiming at the development progress by operating the “11th F operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)” multiple times. It is assumed.

That is, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 307(a), (h), and (i), the 11th floor post-acceptance display in response to the acceptance of the operation on the "11th floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" In the situation where UB3 is displayed (conditions shown in FIG. 310(k)), at timing tk2E within the 11th F acceptance period, for "11th F operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)" It is assumed that the first operation has been performed.

In this pachinko machine 1, when the first operation is accepted for the "11th F operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)" at the timing tk2E within the 11th F acceptance period, the change after the 11th F acceptance can give rise to A.

In this production example, when the first operation is performed on the "11th floor operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" within the 11th floor acceptance period, FIGS. As shown in 310(l), the 11th F post-reception display UA as one of the 11th F post-reception changes A is executed as a "first presentation mode UA1" in which the hero YS appears wearing only underwear. It is designed to be

However, when an operation is performed on the ``11th F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)'' during the 11th F reception period, the display UA after the 11th F reception is displayed. The 11th F operation-related display A" is displayed (see FIG. 307(e)). Also, at this time, the output sound after reception is not audibly output, that is, the same operation as when the "11th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is performed It is designed to show performance.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 307, it is assumed that at timing tk2E, the first operation is performed on the "11th F operation section A (here, sword ornament 5001)". Until tk2E arrives, the "11th F operation-related display A" is not displayed (in the situations shown in FIGS. 309(a) to 310(k), the "11th F operation-related display A" is displayed). not). In this regard, when the first operation is performed on the "11th F operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)" at timing tk2E, the 11th F post-acceptance display UA is displayed with this as a trigger. In addition, "11th F operation-related display A" is displayed ("11th F operation-related display A" is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 310(k) and subsequent figures).

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. At the time of occurrence of the "11th F reception period", it is possible to conceal the fact that the reception of the operation on the operation button 410)" is permitted. However, as shown in FIG. 309(b), the concealed state is such that if an operation is accepted even once for the ``11th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)'' during the ``11th F reception period'', Confidentiality on the "11th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" side will be canceled, and furthermore, operation reception for "11th F operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)" will be accepted once However, if this is done, the secrecy of the ``11th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' will also be released, so that the tension will be appropriately maintained while improving the amusement of the game. can be expected. The order of these confidentiality cancellations changes according to the order in which the operation units are operated. In this case, the secrecy of the "11th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" side is released, and then, according to the operation acceptance for the "11th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" The secrecy of the "11th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is further canceled.

The ``11th F operation-related display A'' is not displayed as a display modeled after the ``11th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'', and is displayed as a different display image. In addition, the display of the "11th F operation-related display A" is designed so that periodic changes do not appear. Also, it is desirable that the disappearing EF display is not displayed when the "11th F operation-related display A" is hidden. However, none of these are essential configurations, and even if an operation is accepted for "11th F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" during the "11th F acceptance period" The "11th F operation-related display A" may not be displayed.

However, when the "11th F operation-related display A" is displayed, it is displayed as a display image different from the "11th F operation-related display B". This suggests which operation-related display corresponds to "the 11th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" or "the 11th F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)". will be able to

As described above, in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 310(l) and (m), during the 11th F acceptance period, 1 When the second operation is performed, the 11th F post-reception display UA as one of the "11th F post-reception change A" is changed to the "first presentation mode UA1" in which the hero YS appears wearing only underwear. It is now running.

However, as described above, in this example, even if an operation is performed on the "11th F operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)" within the 11th F reception period, the reception corresponding to this Since the post-output sound is not audibly output (see FIG. 307(k)), even if the hero YS is depicted as newly appearing with one of the above three types, the secrecy Combined with these, it becomes possible to arouse anxiety such as "Is it safe to continue such operations?"

However, if the response (performance) when operating the "11th F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" during the 11th F reception period is too low, the game There is concern that interest will decline. Therefore, in this production example, the display UA after the reception of the 11th floor (here, the hero YS is any 310(l), (m), it is not displayed behind the decorative pattern SZ, and overlaps with it. Sometimes it is displayed so that it can be seen on the front side.

In addition, regarding the "11th F post-acceptance change A" corresponding to the operation on the "11th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" within the 11th F acceptance period, in the case of the second and later operations described later, Including , it is also possible to further perform a change in effect (for example, a change in effect such as changing the lighting mode of the effect lamp) that is different from the display UA after reception on the 11th floor. Alternatively, the "11th F post-reception change A" does not necessarily have to be executed with a plurality of effect elements, and only one of the above-described effect elements (for example, effect change that changes the lighting mode of the effect lamp) may be implemented so as to obtain the same effect.

In addition, the execution time of the "11th F post-acceptance display UA" and "11th F operation-related display A" in response to the acceptance of an operation on the "11th F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" is also the acceptance period. Longer than the set time (not a mandatory configuration). Therefore, the second and subsequent operations on the ``11th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)'' are the same as the previous operations on the ``11th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)''. ``11th floor post-reception display UA'' and ``11th floor operation-related display A'' according to the above, and ``11th floor post-reception display UB'' in response to the operation on the ``11th floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)'' and "11th F operation-related display B" are displayed (while the situation shown in FIG. 310(m) appears). In this example, the timing at which the "11th floor post-acceptance display UA" is hidden is the same as the timing at which the "11th floor operation-related display A" is hidden.

Then, in this example, as shown in FIG. 307, at timing tk2F within the 11th F acceptance period (situation where the effect display shown in FIG. It is assumed that the second operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001).

In this production example, when the second operation is performed on the ``11th floor operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)'' within the 11th floor reception period, FIGS. As shown in 310(n)-(p), the 11th F post-reception display UA as one of the 11th F post-reception changes A is a "second production" in which the hero YS appears wearing cloth clothes. It is designed to be executed as mode UA2. In this example, the hero YS (first rendering mode UA1), who had been wearing only underwear until then, is depicted moving out of the display screen (see FIG. 310(n)), and then wearing cloth. It was decided that the character would reappear in the state of wearing clothes (second production mode UA2) (see FIG. 310(o)). It is not limited to this. Also in this case, as described above, the post-reception output sound is not audibly output (see FIG. 307(k)). In addition, regarding the "11th F operation-related display A" displayed in response to the first operation on the "11th F operation part A (here, sword ornament 5001)", the "11th F operation part A (here, When the sword ornament 5001)" is operated for the second time, the display mode and state are not changed in response to this operation, and the display up to that point is continued.

Then, in this example, as shown in FIG. 307, at timing tk2G within the 11th F reception period (situation where the effect display shown in FIG. It is assumed that the third operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001).

In this production example, when the third operation is performed on the ``11th floor operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)'' within the 11th floor reception period, FIGS. As shown in 309(q)-(s), the 11th F post-reception display UA as one of the 11F post-reception changes A is the "third production" in which the hero YS appears wearing iron armor. It is designed to be executed as mode UA3. In this example, the hero YS (second production mode UA2), who had been wearing clothes made of cloth until then, is depicted as moving out of the display screen (see FIG. 310(q)), (See Figure 310(r)). is not limited to this. Also in this case, as described above, the post-reception output sound is not audibly output (see FIG. 307(k)). In addition, the "11th F operation-related display A" displayed in response to the first operation on the "11th F operation part A (here, sword decoration 5001)" When the third operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001)", the display mode and state are not changed in response to this operation, and the display up to that point is continued.

Then, in this example, as shown in FIG. 307, at timing tk2H within the 11th F reception period (situation where the effect display shown in FIG. It is assumed that the fourth operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001).

However, in this production example, when the fourth operation is performed on the ``11th floor operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' within the 11th floor reception period, FIGS. , as shown in FIGS. 310(s) and 310(t), the post-reception output sound is not audibly output, and there is no visible change as the 11th F post-reception display UA (11th F post-reception change A). (mode) does not appear. That is, in this case, before and after the fourth operation is performed on the "11th F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" within the 11th F reception period does not occur, and the effect continues as it was before the fourth operation was performed. In this case, the post-acceptance output sound is not audibly output, and the "11th F operation-related display A" continues to be displayed.

In this example, according to how many times the "11th floor operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" is operated within the 11th floor reception period, the display UA after the reception of the 11th floor " However, instead of this, during the reception period for the 11th floor, the ``eleventh floor operation unit A (here, the sword A determination is made when an operation is performed on the ornament 5001)", and based on the result of the determination, it is possible to ``change the display to a specific mode'' or ``may appear a new mode. You can also make it "not". In short, it is sufficient that such a display change occurs when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

Incidentally, in this production example, when the "second production mode UA2" appears as the display UA after accepting the reception of the 11th floor, after that, at least only the "11th floor operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is operated. Even if it continues, the "first effect mode UA1" will not appear when the operation is accepted within the 11th floor acceptance period. UA3" appears, after that, even if at least "the 11th floor operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" continues to be operated, the operation reception is performed within the 11th floor reception period. As such, the “first effect mode UA1” and the “second effect mode UA2” do not appear. Therefore, the "third effect mode UA3" can be said to be the "final result display" of the 11th F post-acceptance display UA. Therefore, in this example of effect, even if an operation is performed on the "11th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" after the "third effect mode UA3" is displayed, the above-mentioned "4 The same situation as in the “second operation” appears.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 307, during the 11th F acceptance period, no acceptance acceptance sound is audibly output and no display indicating the remaining time is made.

Also, during the 11th F reception period, either of the ``11th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' and the ``11th F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)'' is operated (pressed). Even if it continues to be maintained, this prevents the operation reception from being performed multiple times (the operation reception is automatically repeated at predetermined time intervals) (the auto repeated hitting function is not activated) (Fig. 307(a), (b)). In this case, during the 11th F acceptance period, multiple operations on the ``11th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' and the ``11th F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)'' If the player wants to be accepted, the player repeatedly operates the ``11th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' and ``the 11th F operation part B (here, the operation button 410)''. Needless to say, it must be (pressed).

Also, the 11th F acceptance period is continued until timing tk3 arrives, and ends only when timing tk3 arrives, as shown in FIG. 307(c). In this respect, the 11th F reception period occurs as a reception period during which the automatic button function described above is not activated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 308, when no operation is performed within the 11th F acceptance period, the 11th F will continue without any change in the display or sound output related to the acceptance period. The acceptance period will end.

In the 11th F acceptance period, the ``sword ornament 5001'' was used as the ``11th F operation part A'', and the ``operation button 410'' was used as the ``11th F operation part B''. The "operation button 410" may be used as the "11th F operation part A", and the "sword ornament 5001" may be used as the "11th F operation part B".

Furthermore, when such a confidentiality acceptance period is provided, the technique is not limited to concealing both types of operation units.
For example, instead of the 2F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the 6F reception period described below (see FIGS. 295 and 296) is a modified example of the 2F reception period. may be generated as In addition, instead of the 3F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7F reception period described below (see FIGS. 297 and 298) is a modified example of the 3F reception period. may be generated as In addition, instead of the 4F reception period (see FIGS. 292 and 293), the 8F reception period described below (see FIGS. 299 and 300) is a modified example of the 4F reception period. may be generated as In addition, instead of the 5th F reception period (see FIG. 294), a 9th F reception period (see FIG. 301) described below is generated as a modification of the 5th F reception period. good too.

In addition, in order to realize each invention (confidentiality acceptance period) described below, it is sufficient to have only the necessary configuration among the configurations described below. It is possible that each reception period described above with reference to the drawings does not necessarily include these, or that only the necessary types of those reception periods may be provided.

FIGS. 295 and 296 are time charts showing an example of the effect content when "Condition 2F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition and the "Sixth F acceptance period" occurs as a modification of the Second F acceptance period. . It should be noted that the illustration of the production example in the variation pattern in which the "6th F reception period" occurs is omitted because there are many overlapping parts with the case where the above-mentioned 2F reception period occurs (see FIGS. 285 and 286). In addition, basically, only the differences (changed points) from the "2F acceptance period" will be explained. Therefore, among the configurations related to the "6th F reception period", the configurations that are not particularly mentioned are the same as the case where the "2nd F reception period" occurs.

That is, in the 6th F reception period, as in the 2nd F reception period described above, the 2nd F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is operated once until the 6th F reception period ends. Only acceptance is allowed, and the 2nd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is allowed to accept operations multiple times until the 6th F acceptance period ends. (multiple operation permissible period). In addition, other examples of the "2nd floor operation unit A" and "2nd floor operation unit B" can also be appropriately applied in the same manner as the above-described case of the 2nd floor acceptance period.

However, in the "6th F reception period", when the "6th F reception period" occurs, the "2nd F operation related display A" corresponding to the 2nd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001) Although it is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 295(f) and 296(f), the "2F operation-related display B" corresponding to the 2F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) is not displayed. 282 to 286) in that it is not performed. That is, in this case, only some of the plurality of operation units (2F operation unit A, 2F operation unit B) that are in a state where operation reception is permitted are in a state where operation reception is permitted. ”, so that it can be expected that the sense of tension when the reception period occurs will be maintained appropriately while suppressing the decline in the interest in the game due to the concealment. Become.

In this respect, the 6th F acceptance period differs from the 2nd F acceptance period in that the "2nd F operation-related display A" is displayed and the "2nd F operation-related display B" is not displayed. and the contents of the effect are the same as those of the second F reception period described above. Therefore, even when the 6th F acceptance period occurs, basically, the presentation progresses as shown in FIGS.

285 and 286 (the second F reception period), the "second F operation-related display B (button model The only difference is that the image BMG)" is not displayed, and the other contents are basically the same. This configuration (configuration other than the 2F operation-related display B) is similarly applicable.

Therefore, when the "sixth F acceptance period" occurs, first, the "second F precursor effect display ZFD" is displayed at the timing when the second F operation-related display A is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 285 and 295. It is displayed so as to straddle the front and back.

In addition, the ``2F precursor effect display ZFD'' is executed by both the ``mode ZFD-1'' and the ``mode ZFD-2'', and the ``2F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG) , under what conditions it is hidden, and ``2F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)'' is displayed with periodic changes. The points are also as described above in the second F acceptance period.

Further, in this production example, if the first operation for the "second floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is performed during the sixth floor reception period, the same as in the above-described second floor reception period (Fig. 285(c)), and with this as a trigger, the 2nd F post-acceptance display UB1 is displayed. In this case, the point that the output sound after reception is not audibly output is also the same. However, in this production example, if an operation is performed on the "second floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the reception period of the sixth floor, the display UB1 after reception of the second floor is displayed. Triggered by the operation, the "2F operation-related display B" is displayed (see FIG. 295(f)).

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 295, it is assumed that an operation is performed on the "second F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tf2A, and timing tf2A arrives. 285(a) and (b), the "2F operation-related display B" is not displayed. In this regard, when an operation is performed on the "2F operation unit B (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tf2A, the "2F operation-related display B" is displayed. (In the situation shown in FIG. 285(c) and subsequent figures, "2F operation-related display B" is displayed).

According to such a configuration, the fact that the operation acceptance for the "2F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" can be accepted is kept secret at the time when the "6F acceptance period" occurs. sell. However, the concealed state will be canceled if the operation reception for the "second floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is performed even once during the "sixth floor reception period". It can be expected to improve the amusement of the game while maintaining it in a favorable manner.

Here, such "2nd F operation-related display B" may be displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. 284 to 286 even in the "6th F acceptance period". However, the display mode (the mode shown in FIGS. 284 to 286, etc.) that should normally be displayed when the acceptance period occurs is in the middle of the "6th F acceptance period" and the operation is accepted. , there is a concern that the player will remember the negative feeling that it was "intentionally hidden" until then, and the interest in the game will decrease.

Therefore, in the "sixth floor reception period" according to this production example, the "second floor operation-related display A" is displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. ” is displayed in a manner different from that shown in FIGS. For example, "2F operation-related display B" is not displayed as a display imitating "2F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)", and is displayed as a display image different from this. good too. Further, the “2F operation-related display B” may be configured so that the display does not show periodic changes. However, none of these are essential configurations, and even if an operation is accepted for the "second floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" during the "sixth floor reception period", this will be used as a trigger to " The 2F operation-related display B" may not be displayed.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 295, it is assumed that the second operation is performed on the "second F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tf2B within the sixth F acceptance period. there is In this case, during the 6th F reception period, as in the case of the 2nd F reception period described above (see FIG. 285(d)), the 2nd F post-reception display UB2 is displayed based on the fact that the second operation has been performed. is displayed (see FIG. 295(i)). In this case, the point that the post-reception output sound is not audibly output is also the same (see FIG. 295(k)).

In this respect, during the reception period of the 6th floor according to this production example, the display mode of the "2nd floor operation-related display B" does not change based on the fact that the second operation is performed. The display mode that has appeared is continued (see FIG. 295(e)).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 295, it is assumed that the third operation is performed on the "second F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tf2C within the sixth F acceptance period. there is In this case, in the sixth F reception period, as in the case of the second F reception period described above (see FIG. 286(e)), when the third operation is performed, FIG. 286(e) and FIG. As shown in 295(i) and (k), the post-acceptance output sound is not audibly output, and a new display (mode) does not appear as the 2F post-acceptance display UB. In this example as well, despite the fact that such an event (“second floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)” is operated within the reception period of the sixth floor), a new display UB after the reception of the second floor is displayed. display does not appear) should be generated when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 295(a), (h), and (i), "2F reception In the situation where "back display UB2" and "2F operation-related display B" are displayed, at timing tf2D within the 6F reception period, "2F operation part A (here, sword decoration 5001) ” is assumed to be operated.

Even during the 6th F reception period, if an operation is performed on the "2nd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at the timing tf2D, the 2F post-reception change A occurs. That is, as one of the changes A after the 2nd F reception, first, the 6th F reception period is terminated based on the operation (see FIGS. 295(a) and (c)). Also, as shown in FIGS. 286(f), (i) and FIGS. 295(h), (k), the "second 2F post-reception output sound A" is audibly output, and "2F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to "2F operation unit A (here, sword decoration body 5001)" is visually recognized. The "second F effect display EF" to make it difficult is displayed, and furthermore, the second F post-acceptance display UA is displayed.

286(f), (i) and FIG. , “2F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)”, “2F operation-related display B”, and “2F precursor effect display ZFD” are not hidden, and “2F operation-related Display A (sword decoration image SYG)” is displayed so as to appear to overlap behind the second F effect display EF. Then, after that, such "2F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "2F operation-related display B", and "2F precursor effect display ZFD" are changed to "2F operation section A (here, 286(g) and (j)). However, this may be hidden from the time immediately after the operation is accepted.

However, regarding the "2nd floor operation-related display B" that appeared during the "6th floor reception period" and on the condition that the operation was accepted, unlike the case of the above-described "2nd floor reception period", The non-display state may be set at the same timing (under the same conditions) as the display UB2 after reception on the 2nd floor. That is, in this case, it is hidden during the period in which the 2F post-acceptance display UA is displayed.

In addition, regarding the "second floor operation-related display B" that appeared during the "second floor reception period" and on the condition that an operation was accepted, unlike the above-described "second floor reception period", other may be displayed in the same manner as the 2nd F post-acceptance display UB. That is, in this case, the 2F operation-related display B is not displayed behind the above-described "2F premonitory effect display ZFD" or "2F effect display EF", and when they overlap, it is displayed in front of them. will be displayed. Also, it may be displayed on the front side in relation to the decorative pattern SZ. When adopting such a configuration, the second F operation-related display B is different from the second F operation-related display A in relation to the above-described "second F precursor effect display ZFD" and "second F effect display EF." will be displayed.

In addition, regarding the ``2F reception acceptance sound'', ``whether the automatic repeated hit function is activated'', and ``whether or not the automatic button function is activated'', etc. during the 6th floor reception period, the above-mentioned 2F reception period is the same as for However, during the 6th F acceptance period, if there is no operation for the ``2nd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)'', as shown in FIG. Needless to say, the operation-related display B" is not displayed.

FIGS. 297 and 298 are time charts showing an example of the effect content when "Condition 3F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition and the "7th F reception period" occurs as a modified example of the 3F reception period. . It should be noted that an example of the effect in the variation pattern in which the "7th F reception period" occurs is omitted from the illustration because there are many parts that overlap with the case where the above-described 3F reception period occurs (see FIGS. 290 and 291). In addition, basically, only the differences (changed points) from the "3rd F reception period" will be explained. Therefore, among the configurations related to the "7th F reception period", the configurations that are not particularly mentioned are the same as the case where the "3rd F reception period" occurs.

That is, during the 7th F reception period, as in the 3rd F reception period described above, both the 3rd F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the 3rd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) Until the 7th F acceptance period ends, multiple operation acceptances are permitted (multiple operation acceptance period). In addition, other examples of the "3rd floor operation unit A" and "3rd floor operation unit B" can also be appropriately applied in the same manner as in the case of the above-described 3rd floor acceptance period.

However, in the "7th F acceptance period", when the "7th F acceptance period" occurs, the "3rd F operation related display A" corresponding to the 3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001) Although it is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 297(f) and 298(f), the "3F operation-related display B" corresponding to the 3F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is not displayed. 290 and 291) in that it is not performed. That is, in this case, of the plurality of operation units (the 3rd F operation unit A and the 3rd F operation unit B) that are in a state where operation reception is permitted, only some of the operation units are in a state where operation reception is permitted. ”, so that it can be expected that the sense of tension when the reception period occurs will be maintained appropriately while suppressing the decline in the interest in the game due to the concealment. Become.

In this respect, the 7th F acceptance period differs from the 3rd F acceptance period in that the "3rd F operation-related display A" is displayed and the "3rd F operation-related display B" is not displayed. and the content of the effect are the same as those of the above-mentioned 3rd F acceptance period. Therefore, even when the 7th F acceptance period occurs, basically, the presentation progresses as shown in FIGS. 290 and 291.

290 and 291 (the 3rd F reception period), the 3rd F operation-related display B (button model The only difference is that the image BMG)" is not displayed, and the other contents are basically the same. This configuration (configuration other than the 3rd F operation-related display B) is similarly applicable.

Therefore, when the "seventh F reception period" occurs, first, the "three F precursor effect display ZFD" is displayed at the timing when the third F operation-related display A is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 290 and 291. It is displayed so as to straddle the front and back.

In addition, in what manner the "3F foreshadow effect display ZFD" is displayed with respect to the "3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", and under what conditions it is hidden. and how the "3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed with periodic changes, etc., are the same as those described above in the 3F reception period.

Further, in this production example, if the first operation for the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is performed during the seventh floor reception period, the same as in the above-described third floor reception period (Fig. 290(c)), and with this as a trigger, the 3rd floor post-acceptance display UB1 is displayed. In this case, the point that the output sound after reception is not audibly output is also the same. However, in this production example, if an operation is performed on the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the reception period of the 7th floor, in addition to displaying the display UB1 after reception of the 3rd floor, Triggered by the operation, the "3F operation-related display B" is displayed (see FIG. 297(f)).

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 297, it is assumed that an operation is performed on the "3rd F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tg2A, and timing tg2A arrives. Until then, the "3F operation-related display B" is not displayed (in the situation shown in FIGS. 290(a) and (b), the "3F operation-related display B" is not displayed). In this regard, when an operation is performed on the "3F operation unit B (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing tg2A, the "3F operation-related display B" is displayed. (In the situations shown in FIG. 290(c) and after, the “3rd F operation-related display B” is displayed).

According to such a configuration, the fact that the operation acceptance for the "3rd floor operation unit B (in this case, the operation button 410)" is permitted is kept secret at the time when the "7th floor acceptance period" occurs. sell. However, the concealed state will be canceled if the operation reception for the "3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" is performed even once during the "7th floor reception period". It can be expected to improve the amusement of the game while maintaining it in a favorable manner.

Here, such "3rd F operation-related display B" may be displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. 289 to 291 even in the "7th F acceptance period". However, the display mode (the mode shown in FIGS. 289 to 291, etc.) that should normally be displayed when the reception period occurs is in the middle of the "7th F reception period" and the operation reception has been performed. , there is a concern that the player will remember the negative feeling that it was "intentionally hidden" until then, and the interest in the game will decrease.

Therefore, in the "seventh floor acceptance period" according to this production example, the "thirteenth floor operation-related display A" is displayed in the manner shown in FIGS. ” is displayed in a manner different from that shown in FIGS. For example, "3F operation-related display B" is not displayed as a display imitating "3F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)", and is displayed as a display image different from this. good too. In addition, the display of the "3rd F operation-related display B" may be configured so that periodic changes do not appear. However, none of these are essential configurations, and even if an operation is accepted for the "3rd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" during the "7th F acceptance period", this will be used as a trigger to " The 3rd F operation-related display B" may not be displayed.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 297, it is assumed that the second operation is performed on the "3rd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" at the timing tg2B within the 7th F acceptance period. there is In this case, in the seventh F reception period, as in the case of the third F reception period described above (see FIG. 290(d)), the third F post-reception display UB2 is displayed based on the fact that the second operation has been performed. is displayed (see FIG. 297(i)). At this time, the point that the post-reception output sound is not audibly output is also the same (see FIG. 297(k)).

In this respect, during the reception period of the seventh floor according to this production example, the display mode of the "third floor operation-related display B" does not change based on the fact that the second operation is performed, and until then, The display mode that has appeared is continued (see FIG. 297(e)).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 297, it is assumed that the third operation is performed on the "3rd F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" at timing tg2C within the 7th F acceptance period. there is In this case, in the seventh F reception period, as in the case of the third F reception period described above (see FIG. 290(e)), when the third operation is performed, FIG. As shown in 297(i) and (k), the post-acceptance output sound is not audibly output, and a new display (mode) does not appear as the 3F post-acceptance display UB. In this example as well, in spite of the fact that such an event ("3rd floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is operated within the 7th floor reception period), a new display UB is displayed after reception of the 3rd floor. display does not appear) should be generated when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 297(a), (h), and (i), "3F reception In the situation where "back display UB2" and "3rd F operation-related display B" are displayed, at timing tg2D within the 7th F reception period, "3rd F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001) ” is assumed to be operated.

Even in the 7th F acceptance period, if the first operation acceptance is made for the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" at the timing tg2D, the 3F post-acceptance change A can occur. That is, as the 3F post-acceptance change A, for example, as shown in FIGS. 297(g) to 297(k) and FIG. "3F post-acceptance output sound A1" corresponding to the first operation for is audibly output, and "3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed to make it difficult to visually recognize the "3rd F effect display EF1", and furthermore, the 3rd F post-acceptance display UA1 is displayed.

In addition, when the first operation is performed, "3F acceptance acceptable sound in the state of being audibly output", "3F post-acceptance display UB in the displayed state", "periodic change 3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)”, “3F effect display EF1”, etc., which were in the state of performing the above, are the same as in the case of the above-described 3F acceptance period.

Further, in the 7th F acceptance period according to this production example, for the '3rd F operation-related display B', the first operation acceptance for '3rd F operation part A (here, sword ornament 5001)' is made. 297(e)).

Also in this example, as shown in FIGS. 297(a), (h), and (i), the reception corresponding to the previous operation reception for the "3rd F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" Post-change A is occurring in various ways, and the 3rd floor post-acceptance display UB2 is still displayed in response to the acceptance of an operation on the '3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)'. Among them, at the timings tg2E and tg2F (timings shown in FIGS. 291(g) and (h)) within the 7th F reception period, the second time for the "3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" and the third operation reception are assumed.

2nd and 3rd times for "3rd F operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)" at timings tg2E and tg2F (timings shown in FIGS. 291(g) and (h)) in the 7th F acceptance period 291 (g), (h) and FIG. 297 can cause the 3rd F post-acceptance change A, as shown in .

In particular, with respect to "output sound A1 after acceptance of the 3rd floor" and "effect display EF1 of the 3rd floor", the same mode appears when the first operation is accepted and when the second and third operations are accepted. I can hear it. It should be noted that the periodic change in the "3rd F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", which was temporarily terminated at the time of accepting the previous operation, maintains the terminated state when the second and third operations are accepted. Alternatively, the end state may be canceled and restarted. However, when the operation is accepted for the second or third time, the end state of the periodic change is generated again with this as a trigger. It will happen. That is, in this case, the once terminated periodic change is restarted from the beginning after the lapse of a predetermined time from the time when the second or third operation is received as a reference.

In this regard, the ``post-receipt display UA on the 3rd floor'' is basically the same as when the first operation is accepted for the ``operation part A on the 3rd floor (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' (post-reception display UA1 on the 3rd floor). are technically the same. However, even during the reception period on the 7th floor according to this example, when the second operation reception is performed, "the hero YS attacks, and the remaining HP of the BOSS character is reduced to about 50% (displayed after the reception on the 3rd floor. UA2)” is performed (see FIG. 291(g)), and when the third operation is accepted, the depiction of “Hero YS attacks and the HP of the BOSS character is reduced to about 25% remaining (3rd F After reception display UA3)” is performed (see FIG. 291(h)), and progress as production can be seen. In other words, the effect of the "display UA1 after reception of the 3rd floor" is the same as that of the reception period of the 3rd floor, and other examples thereof can also be applied as appropriate.

In addition, when the second and third operations are performed, "3F acceptance acceptable sound in the state of audible output", "3F post-acceptance display UB in the displayed state", "cycle The 3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", the "3F effect display EF1", etc., which were in the state of making a change, are the same as in the case of the 3F reception period described above.

In addition, during the 7th F acceptance period according to this production example, the 2nd and 3rd operations for the '3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)' are accepted for the '3rd F operation-related display B'. Based on this, the display mode does not change, and the display mode that has appeared until then is continued (see FIG. 297(e)).

Also in this example, as shown in FIGS. 297(a), (h), and (i), the reception corresponding to the third operation reception for the "3rd F operation section A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" Post-change A is occurring in various ways, and the 3rd floor post-acceptance display UB2 is still displayed in response to the acceptance of an operation on the '3rd floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)'. Among them, at the timing tg2G (see FIG. 291(i)) within the 7th F acceptance period, it is assumed that the 4th operation is accepted for the ``3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)''. is doing.

At timing tg2G within the 7th F acceptance period, when the 4th operation is accepted for the ``3rd F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'', the 3F post-acceptance change A can occur. That is, as one of the changes A after the 3rd F reception, first, the 7th F reception period is terminated based on the operation (see FIGS. 297(a) and (c)). Also, as shown in FIGS. 291(i), (l) and FIGS. 297(h), (k), the "th 3F post-acceptance output sound A" is audibly output, and "3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to "3F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001)" is visually recognized. The "3rd F effect display EF" to make it difficult is displayed, and furthermore, the 3rd F post-acceptance display UA is displayed.

291(i), (l) and FIG. , “3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)”, “3F operation-related display B”, and “3F precursor effect display ZFD” are not hidden, and “3F operation-related Display A (sword decoration image SYG)” is displayed so as to appear to overlap behind the third F effect display EF. Then, after that, such "3F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "3F operation-related display B", and "3F precursor effect display ZFD" are changed to "3F operation section A (here, 286(l), (m)). However, this may be hidden from the time immediately after the operation is received.

However, regarding the "3rd floor operation-related display B" that appears during the "7th floor reception period" and on the condition that an operation has been accepted, unlike the case of the "3rd floor reception period" described above, the The non-display state may be set at the same timing (under the same conditions) as the display UB2 after reception on the 3rd floor. That is, in this case, the 3rd F post-acceptance display UA4 is hidden during the period in which it is displayed.

Also, regarding the "3rd floor operation-related display B" that appeared during the "7th floor acceptance period" and on the condition that an operation was accepted, unlike the case of the "3rd floor acceptance period" described above, other may be displayed in the same manner as the 3rd F post-acceptance display UB. That is, in this case, the 3rd F operation-related display B is not displayed behind the above-described ``3rd F precursor effect display ZFD'' or ``3rd F effect display EF''. will be displayed. Also, it may be displayed on the front side in relation to the decorative pattern SZ. When adopting such a configuration, the 3F operation-related display B is different from the 3F operation-related display A in relation to the above-described "3F precursor effect display ZFD" and "3F effect display EF." will be displayed.

In addition, regarding the ``3rd floor reception acceptance sound'', ``whether the automatic repeated hit function is activated'', and ``whether or not the automatic button function is activated'' during the 7th floor reception period, the above-mentioned 3rd floor reception period is the same as for However, during the 7th F acceptance period, if there is no operation for the ``3rd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)'', as shown in FIG. Needless to say, the operation-related display B" is not displayed.

FIGS. 299 and 300 are time charts showing an example of the effect contents when the "condition 4F" is satisfied as the occurrence condition and the "fourth F acceptance period" occurs as a modified example of the fourth F acceptance period. . In addition, regarding the production example in the variation pattern in which the "eighth F reception period" occurs, since there are many parts that overlap with the case where the above-mentioned 4th F reception period occurs (see FIGS. 292 and 293), basically , "4th F reception period" will be explained. Therefore, among the configurations related to the "eighth F reception period", the configurations not specifically mentioned are the same as the case where the "fourth F reception period" occurs.

That is, in the 8th F reception period, as in the 4th reception period described above, the 4th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the 4th F operation part B (here, the operation button 410) Until the end of the 8th F reception period, only one operation reception is permitted (multiple operation permitted period). In addition, other examples of the "fourth floor operation unit A" and "fourth floor operation unit B" can also be appropriately applied in the same manner as in the case of the above-described fourth floor acceptance period.

However, in the "4th F reception period", when the "4th F reception period" occurs, the "4th F operation related display A" corresponding to the 4th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001) Although it is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 299(f) and 300(f), the "4th F operation-related display B" corresponding to the 4th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) is not displayed. 292 and 293) in that it is not performed. That is, in this case, of the plurality of operation units (4F operation unit A, 4F operation unit B) that are in a state where operation reception is permitted, only some of the operation units are in a state where operation reception is permitted. ”, so that it can be expected that the sense of tension when the reception period occurs will be maintained appropriately while suppressing the decline in the interest in the game due to the concealment. Become.

In this respect, the 8th F acceptance period is different from the above-described 4th F acceptance period in that the "4th F operation-related display A" is displayed and the "4th F operation-related display B" is not displayed. and the contents of the effect are the same as those of the reception period of the 4th floor described above. Therefore, even when the 8th F acceptance period occurs, basically, the effect is developed with the contents as described above when the 4th F acceptance period occurs.

292 and 293 (fourth F reception period), the "fourth F operation-related display B (button model The only difference is that the image BMG)" is not displayed, and the other contents are basically the same. This configuration (configuration other than the 4th F operation-related display B) is similarly applicable.

However, in the 8th F reception period, unlike the 6th F reception period and the 7th F reception period described above, even if an operation is performed on the 4th F operation unit B within the 8th F reception period, this will be used as a trigger to " The 4th F operation-related display B" is never displayed.

In addition, the "fourth F reception acceptance sound" and "whether or not the automatic button function is activated" for the eighth F reception period are the same as in the above-described fourth F reception period.

FIGS. 301 and 302 are time charts showing an example of the effect content when "Condition 5F" is satisfied as the generation condition and the "9th F reception period" occurs as a modification of the 5th F reception period. . It should be noted that the production example in the variation pattern in which the "9th F reception period" occurs has many overlaps with the case where the above-described 5th F reception period occurs (see FIG. 294). Only differences (changed points) from 5F Reception Period" will be explained. Therefore, among the configurations related to the "9th F reception period", the configurations that are not particularly mentioned are the same as the case where the "5th F reception period" occurs.

That is, in the 9th F reception period, as in the 5th F reception period described above, the 5th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001) is operated once until the 9th F reception period ends. Only acceptance is allowed, and the 5th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410) is allowed to accept operations multiple times until the 9th F acceptance period ends. (multiple operation permissible period). In addition, other examples of the "fifth floor operation unit A" and "fifth floor operation unit B" can also be appropriately applied in the same manner as in the case of the fifth floor acceptance period described above.

However, in the "9th F reception period", when the "9th F reception period" occurs, the "5th F operation related display A" corresponding to the 5th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001) Although it is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 301(f) and 302(f), the "5th F operation-related display B" corresponding to the 5th F operation section B (here, the operation button 410) is not displayed. This differs from the above-mentioned "5F reception period (see FIG. 294)" in that it is not performed. That is, in this case, of the plurality of operation units (the 5th F operation unit A and the 5th F operation unit B) that are in a state where operation reception is permitted, only some of the operation units are in a state where operation reception is permitted. ”, so that it can be expected that the sense of tension when the reception period occurs will be maintained appropriately while suppressing the decline in the interest in the game due to the concealment. Become.

In this regard, the ninth F reception period differs from the above-described 5F reception period in that the "fifth F operation-related display A" is displayed and the "fifth F operation-related display B" is not displayed. and the contents of the effect are the same as those of the above-described 5th F acceptance period. Therefore, even when the ninth F acceptance period occurs, basically, the presentation progresses with the content (the fifth F acceptance period) as described above with reference to FIG. 294 .

That is, the production example when the "9th F reception period" occurs is that when compared with the production example (5th F reception period) shown in FIG. " is not displayed, but the other contents are basically the same, and another example that can be applied to the configuration related to the 5th F reception period is Configurations other than the 5th F operation-related display B) can be similarly applied.

Therefore, when the "ninth F acceptance period" occurs, first, the "fifth F precursor effect display ZFD" is displayed before and after the timing when the second F operation-related display A is displayed, as shown in FIGS. It is displayed so as to straddle the

In addition, in what manner the "5th F precursor effect display ZFD" is displayed with respect to the "5th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", and under what conditions it is hidden. In addition, the fact that the "5th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is displayed with periodic changes is also as described above in the 5th F acceptance period.

Further, in this production example, if the first operation for the "5th floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is performed within the 9th floor reception period, this Triggered by this, the 5th F post-acceptance display UB1 is displayed. In this case, the point that the output sound after reception is not audibly output is also the same. However, in this production example, if an operation is performed on the "5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" within the 9th floor reception period, the display UB1 after reception of the 5th floor is displayed. Triggered by the operation, the "5th F operation-related display B" is displayed (see FIG. 301(f)).

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 301, it is assumed that an operation is performed on the “5th F operation unit B (here, operation button 410)” at timing ti2A, and timing ti2A arrives. Until then, the "5th F operation-related display B" is not displayed. In this regard, when an operation is performed on the "5th F operation unit B (in this case, the operation button 410)" at timing ti2A, the "5th F operation-related display B" is displayed. there is

According to such a configuration, the fact that the operation acceptance for the "5th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" can be accepted is kept secret at the time when the "9th F acceptance period" occurs. sell. However, the concealed state will be canceled if an operation is accepted for the "5th floor operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)" even once during the "9th floor reception period", so the tension is increased. It can be expected to improve the amusement of the game while maintaining it in a favorable manner.

Here, such "fifth-f operation-related display B" may be displayed in the same manner as the above-described "fifth-f reception period" in the "ninth-f reception period". However, if the display mode that should normally be displayed when the reception period occurs appears on the condition that it is in the middle of the "9th F reception period" and there is an operation reception, it will not be possible until then. There is a concern that the player will feel a negative feeling that "it was intentionally hidden" and that the interest in the game will be lowered.

Therefore, in the "9th F reception period" according to this production example, the "5th F operation-related display A" is displayed in the same manner as in the above-described "5th F reception period", but the "5th F operation-related display B" is displayed. are displayed in a manner different from the manners shown in FIGS. For example, it may not be displayed in the same manner as the "5th F reception period" described above, and may be displayed as a display image different from this. In addition, the display of the “5th F operation-related display B” may be configured so that periodic changes do not appear. However, none of these are essential configurations, and even if an operation is accepted for the ``5th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)'' during the ``9th F reception period'', this will be used as a trigger to " The 5th F operation-related display B" may not be displayed.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 301, it is assumed that the second operation is performed on the “2nd F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)” at the timing ti2B within the 9th F acceptance period. there is In this case, the 5th F post-reception display UB2 is displayed in the 9th F reception period, as in the case of the 5th F reception period described above, based on the fact that the second operation has been performed. In this case, the point that the output sound after reception is not audibly output is also the same.

In this regard, in the ninth floor acceptance period according to this production example, the display mode of the "fifth floor operation-related display B" does not change based on the second operation being performed. The display mode that has appeared is continued (see FIG. 301(f)).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 301, it is assumed that the third operation is performed on the “5th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)” at the timing ti2C within the 9th F acceptance period. there is In this case, even in the 9th F reception period, as in the case of the 5th F reception period described above, when the third operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. Not only is the output sound not audibly output, but a new display (mode) does not appear as the display UB after reception of the 5th F reception. In this example as well, in spite of the fact that such an event ("fifth floor operation unit B (here, operation button 410)" is operated within the ninth floor reception period), a new post-fifth reception display UB is displayed. display does not appear) should be generated when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 301(a), (h), and (i), the "5th F reception In the situation where "back display UB2" and "5F operation-related display B" are displayed, at timing ti2D within the 9F reception period, "5F operation unit A (here, sword decoration 5001) ” is assumed to be operated.

Even in the 9th F acceptance period, if an operation is performed on the "5th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)" at timing ti2D, the 5th F post-acceptance change A occurs. That is, as one of the changes A after reception of the 5th F, first, the 9th F reception period is terminated based on the operation (see FIGS. 301(a) and 301(c)). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 301(h) and (k), the audible output of the ``post-acceptance output sound A of the 5th F'' corresponding to the operation of the ``5th F operation part A (here, the sword ornament 5001)'' is output. In addition, the "5th F effect display EF" that makes it difficult to visually recognize the "5th F operation related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" corresponding to the "5th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001)" is displayed. is displayed, and the 5th F post-acceptance display UA is displayed.

Further, even in the situation immediately after the operation is accepted in the 9th F acceptance period (the situation where the 5th F effect display EF is displayed), as shown in FIG. "Decoration image SYG)", "5F operation-related display B", and "5F premonition effect display ZFD" are not hidden, and "5F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)" is not hidden. , are displayed so as to overlap behind the 5th F effect display EF. Then, after that, such "5th F operation-related display A (sword decoration image SYG)", "5th F operation-related display B", and "5th F precursor effect display ZFD" are changed to "5th F operation section A (here, It is set to a non-display state based on the operation on the "sword ornament 5001)". However, this may be hidden from the time immediately after the operation is received.

However, unlike the case of the above-described "5th F reception period", the "5th F operation-related display B" that appeared on the condition that the operation was accepted during the "9th F reception period" The non-display state may be set at the same timing (same conditions) as the display UB2 after reception on the 5th floor. That is, in this case, it is hidden during the period during which the display UA after reception of the 5th F is displayed.

In addition, unlike the case of the above-described "5th F reception period", the "5th F operation-related display B" that appeared on the condition that the operation was accepted during the "9th F reception period" may be displayed in the same manner as the 5th F post-acceptance display UB. That is, in this case, the 5th F operation-related display B is not displayed behind the above-mentioned "5th F precursor effect display ZFD" or "5th F effect display EF". will be displayed. Also, it may be displayed on the front side in relation to the decorative pattern SZ. When adopting such a configuration, the 5F operation-related display B is different from the 5F operation-related display A in relation to the above-described "5F premonition effect display ZFD" and "5F effect display EF." will be displayed.

In addition, regarding the ``fifth floor acceptable sound'', ``whether or not the automatic repeated hit function is activated'', and ``whether or not the automatic button function is activated'' during the 9th floor reception period, the above-mentioned 5th floor reception period is the same as for However, during the 9th F acceptance period, if there is no operation for the "5th F operation unit B (here, the operation button 410)", as shown in FIG. Needless to say, the operation-related display B" is not displayed. Note that the example shown in FIG. 302 is described as an example in which the automatic button function is not activated.

As shown in FIG. 301, during the 9th F reception period, as in the 5th F reception period described above, during the output period of the '5th F reception acceptance sound', the '5th F operation part A (here, the sword decoration 5001 )” and “5F operation unit B (in this case, operation button 410)”, the output of “5F reception acceptance sound” is not interrupted. .

In each reception period according to the above-described production examples and their modifications, in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, a sign production display that suggests that the player will soon be given an opportunity to operate, and a reception target (operation There is a reception period in which an operation-related display (simulated image display) suggesting a receiving part, etc., and a remaining time display suggesting the remaining time of the reception period can be displayed. However, as described above, each of these configurations does not necessarily have to be provided, and it may be provided with only an appropriate configuration among these configurations, or such a configuration may be provided only during a part of the reception period. You may prepare. In addition, the operation-related display (simulated image display) according to this example is displayed as an "integrated simulated image display" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display. It is not limited and may be displayed separately. This also applies to other acceptance periods.

In addition, as a method of hiding the periodic change based on the fact that the operation is accepted within the acceptance period (or part of the acceptance period) according to the above-described production example or its modification, Not limited to the configuration, for example, the periodic change of the operation-related display on the layer continues, but the periodic change of the operation-related display is performed by displaying another image (for example, effect display) in front of it. may be made invisible, or the operation-related display may be changed to a periodic change different from the periodic change that has continued until then (for example, changing the periodic time, etc.) , the periodic change that has continued until then may be hidden, or the display of the operation-related display itself may be terminated.

In addition, the periodical change of the operation-related display A on the 3rd floor is hidden based on the fact that the operation is accepted within the acceptance period (the acceptance period on the 3rd floor, the acceptance period on the 7th floor) according to the above-described production examples and modifications thereof. After that, as a method for restarting the periodic change (timings tg2D, tg2E, tg2F, tg2G), it is not necessary to restart the periodic change from the beginning. good.

During the 3rd floor reception period and the 7th floor reception period, operations were accepted until the specified number of times (3rd time) operation was received for "5th floor operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)". Based on this, the acceptance period is not terminated, and the acceptance period is ended based on the fact that the operation has been accepted a specific number of times (the third time). However, it is determined whether or not to terminate the acceptance period based on the fact that the operation is accepted, and the acceptance period is terminated based on the fact that a predetermined result is obtained in the judgment. may

In addition, during the 3rd floor reception period and the 7th floor reception period, regardless of whether the "low expectation mode" or "high expectation mode" is executed as the post-reception display, "5th floor operation unit A (here, When a predetermined condition (for example, the number of operations, determination, etc.) is established by accepting an operation on the sword decoration 5001), the acceptance period is terminated and the post-acceptance display is displayed. However, there is a possibility that a predetermined condition (for example, the number of operations, determination, etc.) may be satisfied when an operation is accepted for "5F operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)". The post-display may be limited to the case where the "high expectation mode" is executed. That is, in this case, when the "low expectation mode" is to be executed as a post-acceptance display, how much operation is performed on the "5th F operation unit A (here, sword ornament 5001)" during the acceptance period? Even if the acceptance is made, the conditions for ending the acceptance period will not be established based on this, and based on the arrival of the timing of the end of the acceptance period, "low expectation mode" will be displayed after acceptance. may be executed. Alternatively, only when the "specific mode" is executed as a post-acceptance display, the acceptance period is terminated based on the acceptance of the operation for the "5th F operation unit A (here, the sword ornament 5001)", When the "specific mode" is not executed as the post-acceptance display, the acceptance period may not end based on the operation acceptance for the "5th F operation unit A (here, the sword decoration 5001)". That is, in this case, no post-reception display is performed when the timing for ending the reception period has come.

Further, the receiving periods according to the above-described production examples and modifications thereof may be arbitrary combinations and may occur sequentially within one variation pattern.

In addition, the "post-acceptance change (post-acceptance display)" corresponding to the operation acceptance in each acceptance period according to the above-mentioned production example and its modification does not necessarily suggest the degree of expectation that a big win can be obtained. may For example, during the execution period of the jackpot game, it may occur as a reception period as to whether or not the probability variation function is to be activated, and may be executed as a display after the reception. It may occur as a mere reception period in a mini-game that has nothing to do with it, and may be executed as a display after the reception. Therefore, the acceptance period according to the above-described example of effect and its modification does not necessarily have to occur within the period during which the symbol variation is executed.

In addition, it is not necessary to include all of the reception periods for the above-described production examples and modifications thereof. Of the reception periods according to the above-described production examples and modifications thereof, an appropriate combination of two or more reception periods may be provided, or only one arbitrary reception period may be provided.

During the 4th F reception period and the 8th F reception period, when "4th F operation part A (here, sword ornament 5001)" is operated and "4th F operation part B (here, operation button 410)" The same post-acceptance change (post-acceptance display, etc.) may occur when is operated.

The 4th F reception period and the 8th F reception period may be generated as reception periods in which the automatic button function described above is not activated.

Further, in each reception period described above, first, the reception of operations on the first operation unit (for example, the sword ornament 5001) and the reception of operations on the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) are permitted. A permissible period can be generated, and when an operation on the first operating section or an operation on the second operating section is performed during the multiple operation permissible period, a post-acceptance display corresponding to the type of the side on which the operation is accepted is displayed. It is possible to display. In addition, it is possible to display a simulated image display that imitates the operation target by the player, and at least the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281) is prepared as a type of multiple operation allowable period.

In this regard, during the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), only one operation reception is allowed for the first operation unit (1F operation unit A, for example, the sword ornament 5001). and the second operation unit (the first F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) can be allowed to receive operations multiple times. When an operation is performed on the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) for which the number of operation receptions can be permitted, the 1F post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation is displayed. Even while the post-acceptance display UB is being displayed, acceptance of an operation to the 1st floor operation unit A is permitted. Then, the 1F post-acceptance display UB corresponding to the operation performed on the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) during the 1F acceptance period (see FIGS. 278 to 281) is displayed. When an operation is performed on the first operation unit (for example, the sword ornament 5001) during this period (timing te2D), the 1F post-acceptance display UA corresponding to the operation is displayed, and the operation triggers it. The 1F post-acceptance display UB (the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation performed on the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410)) that had been displayed until now is hidden ( See Figures 278(h), (i) and Figures 279(g), (h), etc.).

According to such a configuration, the 1F reception period ( 278 to 281), while the first operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) is being operated, the first operation unit (For example, when an operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001), this triggers the display of the 1F post-acceptance display UA corresponding to the operation, and the 1F post-acceptance display that has been displayed until then. Since the UB is hidden, it becomes easy to recognize which of the above-described operation units is operated in response to the post-acceptance display, which can be expected to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, the type of the multiple-operations allowed period is the "first multiple-operations allowed period (for example, the 1st F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" related to the configuration 2-E. and the "second multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), or the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.) related to the configuration 2-E. ”, and in both the “first multiple-operation allowable period” and the “second multiple-operation allowable period” related to the above configuration 2-E, multiple operations can be accepted. When an operation is performed on the second operation unit (the 1st F operation unit B, the 2nd F operation unit B, etc., for example, the operation button 410 in each case), the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation (the 1st F after-acceptance Display UB, second F post-reception display UB, etc.) are displayed (see FIGS. 281(e), (f) and FIGS. 285(c), (d), etc.), but the post-reception display is displayed. It is possible to accept an operation for the first operation part (the 1st F operation part A, the 2nd F operation part A, etc., both of which are sword ornaments 5001, for example). It is

In this case, it is determined that an operation is performed on the second operation unit (first F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) during the “first multiple operation permissible period” according to the configuration 2-E. When an operation is performed on the first operation unit (the 1st F operation unit A, for example, the sword ornament 5001) while the corresponding 1F post-acceptance display UB is displayed, the 1st operation unit corresponding to the operation is displayed. The 1F post-acceptance display UA is displayed, and the 1F post-acceptance display UB that has been displayed until then is hidden by this operation (see FIGS. 278(i) and 281(h)). reference).

On the other hand, in the "second multiple operation permissible period" according to the configuration 2-E, the second operation unit (2F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) is operated. When the first operation unit (the second F operation unit A, for example, the sword ornament 5001) is operated while the corresponding second F post-reception display UB is displayed, the first operation unit corresponding to the operation is displayed. The 2F post-acceptance display UA is displayed, and the 2F post-acceptance display UB that has been displayed until then is not hidden due to this operation (FIGS. 282(i) and 286(f)). (see (k)).

According to such a configuration, "the state in which the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) is operated a plurality of times" is changed to the "operation on the first operation unit (for example, the sword ornament 5001). ”, the post-acceptance display (the post-acceptance display in response to the fact that the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) has been operated) that has been displayed until then is hidden. Since there are cases where it is displayed (first F-A multiple operation allowable period) and cases where it is not hidden (first F-B multiple operation allowable period), the performance when changing the game strategy is enhanced. It can be expected that the tension will be maintained appropriately.

In this case, the “first multiple operation permissible period (for example, the first F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)” related to the configuration 2-E and the “second In the multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), or the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.), the second operation unit (first F operation For example, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410), the post-acceptance display (1F post-acceptance display UB, 2F post-acceptance display UB) are the same as each other. It is desirable to make an indication (such as an increase in magical power value) appear. That is, in this case, the game strategy is changed from "a state in which the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) is being operated a plurality of times" to "the operation for the first operation unit (for example, the sword ornament 5001)". is changed, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the post-acceptance display (the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) that has been displayed until then is hidden, and the tension is increased. It can be expected to remain favorable.

In addition, the "second multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), or the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.) related to the above configuration 2-E ”, the “second multiple-operation allowable period” occurs according to the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the “second multiple-operation allowable period” related to the configuration 2-E occurs. A specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) has never been made inaudible (or suppressed) or not made inaudible (or suppressed) before (for example, a specific type of effect sound has not been made non-audible (or suppressed)). However, in the "first multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" related to the above configuration 2-E, , According to the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the "first multiple-operation allowable period" related to the configuration 2-E occurs, the "first multiple-operation allowable period" related to the configuration 2-E ” is set to the non-audible state (or suppressed), and when it is not set to the non-audible state (or suppressed) (the specific type of sound effect is audible) If there is a reception period in ). According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous variation pattern, when the operation opportunity is given, the "first multiple operation allowable period" and " Since it becomes easy to recognize which one of the "second multiple-operation allowable period", it is possible to encourage the player to concentrate on the game even when the opportunity to operate is not given. In this case, it is desirable that the display after reception is the same even if the mode of the effect sound changes according to the type of the previous variation pattern.

In addition, the "second multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), or the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.) related to the above configuration 2-E , the 2nd F post-reception display UA and the 2nd F effect display EF are the post-reception display when the second operation unit (the 2nd F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) is operated. It was decided to display on the back side of (2F post-acceptance display UB). In other words, in this case, it is possible to make it difficult to see the 2F post-acceptance display UA until the 2F post-acceptance display UB is hidden, thereby changing the game strategy midway through. You will be able to have the disadvantage of time.

It should be noted that the acceptance period according to the example of the production described above includes the acceptance period during which the automatic button function is activated. While the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation on the operating section B, the 3rd F operating section B, the 4th F operating section B, or the 5th F operating section B) is being displayed, the first operating section (the 2nd F operating section A, the 3rd F operation part A, the 4th F operation part A, or the 5th F operation part A), when the automatic button function is enabled, the second operation part (the 2nd F operation It is desirable not to hide the display after receiving an operation on any one of the section B, the 3rd F operating section B, the 4th F operating section B, and the 5th F operating section B).

In addition, in the above-described effect example, a multiple-operation allowable period is set in which both the reception of operations on the first operation unit (for example, the sword ornament 5001) and the reception of operations on the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) are permitted. Operation-related displays that can occur and can appear only when the state is in a state in which reception of operations on the first operation unit is permitted or in a state in which reception of operations on the first operation unit is permitted, and display on the second operation unit It is possible to display an operation-related display or the like that can appear only when a state in which operation acceptance is permitted or in a state in which operation reception is permitted.

In this regard, in the above-described rendering example, the multiple-operation allowable period is defined as the "first multiple-operation allowable period (for example, the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" related to the configuration 3-E. , "Second multiple operation permissible period (for example, 2F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), or 6F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.)" related to the above configuration 3-E is prepared at least, and in the "first multiple-operation allowable period" and "second multiple-operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 3-E, the 1st F operation-related displays A and B and the 2nd F operation-related display A , B can be displayed, it can be expected that the amusement of the game is favorably maintained.

In addition, in the "first multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" related to the above configuration 3-E, , For example, the 1st F operation-related display A corresponding to the sword ornament 5001) and the 1st F operation-related display B corresponding to the second operation unit (the 1st F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) is also displayed, it is possible to accept operations on the first operation unit (for example, the sword ornament 5001) and accept operations on the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410). be in a state where
On the other hand, in the “second multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.)” related to the above configuration 3-E, the first operation unit (2nd F operation unit A For example, the 2F operation-related display A corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) is displayed, but the operation-related display A corresponding to the second operation unit (2F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) is displayed. Although the display is not displayed, it is possible to accept operations on the first operation unit (for example, the sword ornament 5001) and accept operations on the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410). I made sure it was in good condition. However, when an operation is accepted for the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) under this situation, the 2F operation-related display B corresponding to the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) is displayed as a trigger. decided to display. That is, in this case, while both of the 2F operation-related displays A and B are displayed, acceptance of operation on the first operation unit (for example, the sword ornament 5001) is allowed, and the second operation unit (for example, , operation button 410) is permitted.

According to such a configuration, only one of the two operation units (the first operation unit and the second operation unit) in the state where operation reception is permitted is in the reception permission state. is concealed Even if the "second multiple operation permitted period (for example, the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.)" related to the above configuration 3-E occurs, the side to be concealed When the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) is operated on a trial basis, the concealed state is canceled, so that it is expected that the game interest will be favorably maintained. As the “operation-related display”, for example, a model image display in which an object (operation means) to be operated (operated) by the player is represented as an image is often displayed, but is not limited to this. As described above, it is sufficient to display an image that, when displayed, always gives the player an opportunity to operate.

In this case, the “first multiple operation permissible period (for example, the first F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)” related to the configuration 3-E and the “second 's multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.)", the operation-related display (the 1st F operation-related display B, the same image display may be displayed as the second F operation-related display B).

In addition, when the 2F operation-related display B is displayed within the "second multiple-operation allowable period (for example, the 6F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.)" related to the above configuration 3-E, It is desirable that the 2F operation-related display B is not hidden until the "second multiple-operation allowable period" of the configuration 3-E ends.

In addition, when the "second multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 6F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.)" related to the configuration 3-E occurs, the " Even if an operation on the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) is accepted (slightly) before the timing at which the "second multiple-operation allowable period" occurs, the second F operation-related display is triggered by this. B may be displayed. That is, in this case, in the "second multiple-operation allowable period" according to the configuration 3-E, as in the "first multiple-operation allowable period" according to the configuration 3-E, when the valid period occurs, the first operation While both the operation-related display corresponding to the part (for example, the sword ornament 5001) and the operation-related display corresponding to the second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) are displayed, the first operation part (for example, , sword ornament 5001) or the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410).

In addition, the second operation unit (slightly) before the timing of occurrence of the "second multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.)" related to the configuration 3-E (For example, when an operation on the operation button 410) is accepted, the second operation-related displays A and B are displayed until the end of the "second multiple-operation allowable period" related to the configuration 3-E. Both should be displayed.

In addition, within the "second multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 6F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.)" related to the above configuration 3-E, the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) When an operation is performed, the second operation-related display B is displayed in response to the operation (see FIG. 295(f)), and the second operation-related display B is not displayed. may According to such a configuration, the sense of tension when the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) is operated within the “second multiple operation permissible period” according to the above configuration 3-E is preferably maintained. can be expected to

In addition, within the "second multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.)" related to the above configuration 3-E, the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) A case where the second operation-related display B is not displayed after an operation has been performed is, for example, when the second operation is performed by preventing the operation itself on the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) from being accepted. The related display B may not be displayed, or the second operation related display B may be displayed because the predetermined condition is not satisfied although the operation of the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) is accepted. You may choose not to do so.

In addition, the "second multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), or the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.) related to the above configuration 3-E ”, according to the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the “second multiple operation permissible period” related to the configuration 3-E occurs, the “second multiple operations The specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) is not made inaudible (or suppressed) or not made inaudible (or suppressed) before the “permissible period” occurs (for example, The acceptance period occurs after the specific type of effect sound is always made inaudible) is the "first multiple operation allowable period (for example, the first F acceptance period (Figs. 278 to 281 ), etc.)”, the configuration 3-E “ A case where the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) is made non-audible (or suppressed) before the occurrence of the "first multiple operation permissible period", and a case where it is not made non-audible (or suppressed) (specific If the acceptance period occurs while the type of effect sound is in an audible state). According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous variation pattern, when the operation opportunity is given, the "first multiple operation allowable period" and the "first multiple operation allowed period" and the "second Since it becomes easy to recognize which one of the 2 multiple operation allowable periods, it is possible to encourage the player to concentrate on the game even when an operation opportunity is not given. In this case, it is desirable that the display after reception is the same even if the mode of the effect sound changes according to the type of the previous variation pattern.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, a multiple-operation allowable period is set in which both the reception of operations on the first operation unit (for example, the sword ornament 5001) and the reception of operations on the second operation unit (for example, the operation button 410) are permitted. Operation-related displays that can occur and can appear only when the state is in a state in which reception of operations on the first operation unit is permitted or in a state in which reception of operations on the first operation unit is permitted, and display on the second operation unit It is possible to display an operation-related display or the like that can appear only when a state in which operation acceptance is permitted or in a state in which operation reception is permitted.

In this regard, in the above-described effect example, the "specific multiple operation permissible period (for example, the first F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" related to the above configuration 4-E, and the above configuration 4-E At least such a "special multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F acceptance period (see FIGS. 282 to 286) or the 6th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 295 and 296)" is prepared. Then, in the "special multiple operation permissible period (2F reception period, 6F reception period)" according to the above configuration 4-E, When the operation is accepted, as a post-acceptance change, the 2nd F post-acceptance display UA indicating the degree of expectation that a big win has been obtained is displayed, and the 2nd F operation-related display A becomes difficult to be visually recognized. EF is executed. In this respect, the 1F effect display corresponding to the "specific multiple operation permissible period (1F acceptance period)" according to the above configuration 4-E is always executed in the same display mode, but the above configuration 4-E The 2F effect display EF corresponding to the "special multiple operation permissible period (2F acceptance period, 6F acceptance period)" is displayed in a different display mode depending on the mode of the 2F post-reception display UA (modes UA1 and UA2). I made it to be.

According to such a "2F effect display EF", the "special multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 2F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), or the 6F reception period (See FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.)” can suitably suggest that the appearance of the “operation-related display” is caused by the operation of the “first operation unit” on the side that makes the “operation-related display” difficult to see. become able to. In addition, it is possible to preferably recognize the degree of expectation for a big hit just by looking at the mode of the "second F effect display EF" in order to confirm which operation is the cause.

In addition, in the "specific multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" related to the above configuration 4-E, the first operation unit (1F operation unit A, For example, when an operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001), as one of the changes after receiving the operation, both the 1F operation-related displays A and B become difficult to see ("1F effect display EF " is executed. As a result, operation reception for the first operation unit (1F operation unit A, for example, sword ornament 5001) and operation reception for the second operation unit (2F operation unit B, for example, operation button 410) However, the “specific multiple operation permissible period” related to the configuration 4-E, which is permissible, is the operation of the first operation unit (1F operation unit A, for example, the sword ornament 5001). It is possible to favorably suggest to the player that the game is in a finished state (a state in which no operation reception for the second operation unit is permitted).

It should be noted that when the "special multiple operation permissible period" pertaining to configuration 4-E above is the "second F acceptance period (see FIGS. 282 to 286)", the "second F effect display EF" It is desirable that only the 2F operation-related display A among the related displays A and B is displayed so as to make it difficult to visually recognize. Also, when the "special multiple operation permissible period" related to configuration 4-E is the "6th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 295 and 296)", the second operation unit (2F operation unit, for example , operation button 410), the second F operation-related display B is displayed. In this regard, even if the "second F effect display EF" is displayed when the second F operation-related display B is displayed, the second F operation-related display A , B, it is desirable that only the 2nd F operation-related display A is displayed so as to make it difficult to see.

In addition, the "special multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), or the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc." related to the configuration 4-E above. The "2F effect display EF" corresponding to , may be displayed in front of the 2F operation-related display A at a position that overlaps it, and may be displayed at a position that does not overlap with the 2F operation-related display B. However, although it overlaps with the 2F operation-related display B, it may be displayed behind it.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, the "specific multiple operation permissible period (for example, the first F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" related to the configuration 4-E, and the configuration related to the configuration 4-E Apart from the "special multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), or the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.)", the above configuration 4-E "predetermined multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 5th F acceptance period (see FIG. 294) or the 9th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 301 and 302)"). Then, in the "predetermined multiple operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 4-E, as in the "special multiple operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 4-E, the first operation unit (5F operation unit A For example, when an operation is accepted for the sword decoration 5001), as a change after acceptance, the 5th F post-acceptance display UA that suggests the degree of expectation is displayed, and the 5th F operation-related display A becomes difficult to visually recognize. 5F effect display EF is displayed.

In this regard, in the above-described effect example, the "predetermined multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 5th F reception period (see FIG. 294) or the 9th F reception period (see FIGS. 301 and 302)" related to the configuration 4-E ) etc.)” is always executed in the same display mode, and its display mode is the “special multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), or the 6th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.) I have to.

For example, if the aspect EF-2 that appears when the expectation is low is made to appear as the "5th F effect display EF", even if the aspect EF-2 appears as the "2nd F effect display EF", this To make a player aware of the possibility of being displayed as the ``5th F effect display EF'' and of the possibility of appearance of highly expected mode UA2 as the 5th F post-acceptance display UA. Therefore, it can be expected to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game when the mode EF-2 appears as the "second F effect display EF".

Alternatively, if the aspect EF-1 that appears when the expectation is high is made to appear as the "5th F effect display EF", the aspect EF-1 should always appear when the "5th F effect display EF" is displayed. can be expected to improve the amusement of games.

In addition, in the above-described production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation permissible period) during which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a change occurs after reception. sell. Then, a display is provided that simulates an operation target for which operation reception is permitted.

In this respect, in the reception period according to the above-described production example, when the operation is accepted only once when the operation unit is kept in the operated state (so-called auto repeated hits are not activated), and when the operation is accepted multiple times. Since there is a case where the game is played (when the so-called auto repeated hits are activated), it can be expected that the amusement of the game will be improved through such a variety of effects.

More specifically, as the type of acceptance period, the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 3rd F acceptance period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 297 to See FIG. 298), etc.)” is prepared at least. Then, in the "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 5-E, as an operation unit that can accept multiple operations, the first operation unit for a specific period (3F operation unit A, for example, sword decoration It is in a permissible state to accept an operation on the body 5001) and to accept an operation on the second operation unit (3F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) for a specific period. Then, in the "specific operation permissible period" according to the configuration 5-E, as shown in FIGS. 287(a) and (b) and FIGS. 3F operation unit A, for example, if the sword ornament 5001) is kept in the operated state, the operation reception is performed multiple times (although the auto repeated hitting function is activated), but the second operation unit for a specific period Even if the operation button 410, which is the operation section B on the 3rd floor, is maintained in an operated state, the operation is not accepted multiple times (the auto repeat function is not activated).

According to such a configuration, there are cases where the so-called auto-repeating function is not activated even for an operation unit that can be operated multiple times, so that the sense of tension can be preferably maintained. can be expected.

In addition, although not explained in the above-mentioned production example, the “specific operation allowable period (for example, the 3rd F acceptance period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th F acceptance period (see FIG. 297 to FIG. 298, etc.)”, a “special operation permitted period” related to the configuration 5-E may be further prepared.

For example, in the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), not only the 1F operation unit B (eg, operation button 410), but also the 1F operation unit A (eg, sword decoration 5001) In addition to being provided as "an operation unit that allows multiple operation receptions", the modified first F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281) is provided as a "special operation You may make it generate|occur|produce as "permissible period." That is, in this case, in the "special operation permitted period (deformed 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" related to the above configuration 5-E, the special period 1st operation unit (1F operation unit A Yes, for example, accepting operations for the sword decoration 5001) and accepting operations for the special period second operation unit (first F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) can be accepted multiple times. become. On top of this, in the "special operation permitted period (deformed 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" related to the above configuration 5-E, the special period first operation unit (1F operation unit A For example, even if either the sword ornament 5001) or the special period second operation unit (the first F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) continues to be operated, multiple operation receptions It will be made so that it will not be turned (the auto repeated hit function will not be activated).

According to such a configuration, even if there are a plurality of operation units that are allowed to receive operations a plurality of times, the so-called auto-flick function is effective for any of the operation units depending on the type of operation-permissible period. Therefore, it can be expected that the tension will be preferably maintained.

In addition, the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 to 298), etc.)" related to the above configuration 5-E and the "special operation permissible period (deformed 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281, etc.)”, the operation unit (3F There are operation-related displays A and 1F operation-related displays A and B), but the reason why the operation reception is performed multiple times when the operation unit is maintained in the operated state is due to the above configuration 5-E. Specific operation allowable period (for example, the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. See FIG. 281), etc.) will not be performed.

In addition, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.)" related to the above configuration 5-E, the "specific operation permissible period" related to the configuration 5-E occurs. Depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time point, ``before the ``specific operation permissible period'' related to the configuration 5-E occurs, the specific type of effect sound is suppressed or in an inaudible state (for example, the reception period occurs after the specified type of production sound is always made inaudible), but it depends on the above configuration 5-E In the "special operation permissible period (deformed 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)", the previous Depending on the type of variation pattern, ``before the ``special operation permissible period'' related to the configuration 5-E occurs, a specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) is made inaudible (or suppressed). , and when the effect sound is not set to the non-audible state (or suppressed) (when the acceptance period occurs while the specific type of effect sound is in the audible state). According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous variation pattern, when the operation opportunity is given, the "specific operation permitted period" and the "special operation permitted period" related to the above configuration 5-E , so that the player can be encouraged to concentrate on the game even when an operation opportunity is not provided. In this case, it is desirable that the display after reception is the same even if the mode of the effect sound changes according to the type of the previous variation pattern.

In addition, in the above-described production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation permissible period) during which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a change occurs after reception. sell. In addition, it is possible to display a simulated image that simulates an operation target for which operation reception is permitted so that periodic changes appear.

In this respect, in the above-described effect example, as the type of reception period, the "specific operation permitted period (for example, the 3rd F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th F reception period ( See Figures 297 and 298), etc.)" is prepared at least. In the "specific operation permissible period" of configuration 6-E, an operation unit (3F operation unit A, for example, sword decoration 5001) that allows multiple operations to be accepted is set. When an operation is performed on the operation unit, as one of the post-acceptance changes, the periodic change that had appeared until then in the display imitating the operation unit (operation-related display A on the 3rd floor) disappears. or made difficult to see by another image display. Therefore, even after the operation is performed, the display imitating the target (3F operation-related display A) is displayed, while appropriately suggesting to the player that the operation is being accepted. be able to

Also, in the above-described effect example, as the type of reception period, the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 3rd F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291) and the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and FIG. 298), etc.)” and the “special operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)” related to the above configuration 6-E. there is In addition, in the "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 6-E, there is an operation unit (the 3rd F operation unit A, for example, the sword ornament 5001) that can accept multiple operations. When an operation is performed on the operation unit, as one of the post-acceptance changes, is the periodic change that has appeared until then in the display imitating the operation unit (3F operation-related display A) hidden? , or the model image display is hidden, and in the "special operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 6-E, an operation unit (1F operation unit B, for example , operation button 410) are set, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit, the periodic change that has appeared so far in the display (1F operation-related display B) imitating the operation unit is not displayed. The periodic change was allowed to continue.

According to such a configuration, when an operation is performed on an operation unit that is allowed to receive operations a plurality of times, the periodic change that has appeared until then in the display imitating the operation unit is hidden. 287 or 297), or the periodic change is continued without being hidden (see FIG. 278). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the operation reception is properly performed, and it can be expected that the sense of tension is preferably maintained.

It should be noted that the "special operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 6-E is not the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 281), etc.). As described above, in the modified 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), the operation reception for the special period 1st operation unit (1F operation unit A, for example, sword decoration 5001), and the special period It is in a state in which it is permissible to accept operations on the second operation unit (first F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) multiple times. In this case, even if either the special period first operation section or the special period second operation section is operated, the periodic changes in the 1F operation-related displays A and B are continued without being hidden. It is desirable to

In addition, in the above-described effect example, in the "specific operation permitted period (for example, the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.)" related to the configuration 6-E, the first operation unit (3rd F Operation unit A, for example sword decoration 5001) and operation reception for the second operation unit for a specific period (3F operation unit B, for example, operation button 410) are both allowed. , Of these operation parts, only the first operation part (the 3rd F operation part A, for example, the sword decoration 5001) is the display target of the model image display (3F operation related display A) for a specific period Of the first operating section (3F operating section A, for example, sword ornament 5001) and the second operating section for a specific period (3F operating section B, for example, operating button 410), at least the first operation for a specific period The part is allowed to accept multiple operations. On the other hand, in the "special operation permissible period (for example, the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" related to the above configuration 6-E, the first operation unit (1F operation unit A Yes, for example, acceptance of operation on the sword ornament 5001) and acceptance of operation on the special period second operation unit (first F operation unit B, for example, operation button 410) are both permitted. Both of them are displayed in the model image display (1st F operation related displays A and B), and the special period 1st operation unit (1st F operation unit A, for example, sword decoration body 5001) and the special period 2nd At least the second operating section of the operating sections (the 1st F operating section B, for example, the operating button 410) is allowed to accept multiple operations during the special period.

In this respect, in the above-described effect example, the first operation unit (3F For example, when an operation is accepted for the operation unit A, for example, the sword ornament 5001), as one of the changes after the operation is accepted, a display that imitates the first operation unit for a specific period (3F operation-related display A) The periodic changes that had appeared until then were hidden, or the simulated display itself was hidden. In addition, in the "special operation permitted period (for example, the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" related to the above configuration 6-E, the special period 2nd operation unit (1F operation unit B, for example , operation button 410), the periodic change that had appeared until then in the display (1F operation-related display B) imitating the second operation unit during the special period is not hidden and is not displayed. The periodic change continues, but when an operation is accepted for the special period 1st operation part (1st F operation part A, for example, the sword ornament 5001), the special period 1st operation part is simulated. The cyclical changes that have appeared until then in the display and the display imitating the second operation unit during the special period are hidden, respectively, or the simulated image display is hidden.

According to such a configuration, the "displayability of the periodic change appearing in the model image display" when the operation unit is operated differs depending on the type of reception period, so that a sense of tension is preferably obtained. can be expected to be maintained at

In addition, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.)" related to the above configuration 6-E, According to the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the ``specific operation permissible period'' for the configuration 6-E occurs The specific type of production sound is not set to the suppression mode or the non-audible state, or is not set to the suppression mode or the non-audible state (for example, the specific type of production sound must be set to the non-audible state before Acceptance period occurs), but in the "special operation permitted period (1F acceptance period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), modified 1F acceptance period, etc.)" related to the above configuration 6-E, the configuration 6 - Depending on the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time when the "special operation permissible period" for E occurs, "specified before the "special operation permissible period" for the configuration 6-E occurs When the type of sound effect (specific BGM) is made non-audible (or suppressed) and when it is not made non-audible (or suppressed) (the reception period occurs while the specific type of sound effect is audible) case). According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous variation pattern, the "specific operation permitted period" and the "special operation permitted period" related to the above configuration 6-E when the operation opportunity is given , so that the player can be encouraged to concentrate on the game even when an operation opportunity is not provided. In this case, it is desirable that the display after reception is the same even if the mode of the effect sound changes according to the type of the previous variation pattern.

In addition, in the above-described production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation permissible period) during which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a change can occur after reception. In addition, it is possible to display a display that imitates the operation unit.

In this regard, in the above-described presentation example, the display imitating the operation unit (operation-related display) can be displayed so that periodic changes appear, and the display is such that the periodic changes appear in units of a predetermined time. (the 3rd F operation-related display A displayed during the 3rd F acceptance period or the 7th F acceptance period); In each production example, all types of operation-related displays having periodic changes except for the 3rd floor operation-related display A) are provided, so that the game interest can be improved by various effects. Be expected.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, as the reception period (operation permitted period), the "specific operation permitted period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th floor Reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.)” and “Special operation permitted period (for example, 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)” related to the above configuration 7-E I am planning to prepare. Then, in the "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 7-E, the first operation unit (3F operation unit A) for a specific period during which multiple operations can be accepted. For example, the sword decoration 5001 ) and operation reception for a specific period second operation section (third F operation section B, for example, operation button 410) different from the specific period first operation section is at least permissible, and the above configuration In the "special operation permissible period" related to 7-E, it is possible to accept operations for the first operation unit (1F operation unit B, for example, operation button 410) during a special period in which multiple operations can be accepted. , and acceptance of operations on a special period second operation section (first F operation section A, for example, sword ornament 5001) different from the special period first operation section may be allowed at least. Then, in the "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 7-E, the display imitating the first operation unit for a specific period (here, the 3rd F operation-related display A) is changed periodically by a predetermined time unit. , and in the "special operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 7-E, the display imitating the first operation unit during the special period (here, the 1F operation-related display B) is displayed periodically The change is displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time.

According to such a configuration, since the time required for the periodic change differs depending on the type of reception period and the type of the operation target, it is expected that the game interest will be improved by various effects. be.

In addition, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.)" related to the above configuration 7-E The specific period 1st operation unit (3rd floor operation unit A) is a special period in the "special operation permitted period (for example, 1st reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" related to the above configuration 7-E It may be the same operation part as the second operation part (first F operation part A). Also, in this case, even though the first operation unit for the specific period and the second operation unit for the special period are the same operation unit, the "specific operation permitted period (for example, the 3rd F reception period (Fig. 287 to 291) and the 7th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 297 and 298)”, the display imitating the first operation unit (3rd F operation-related display A) for a specific period is changed periodically. It is displayed so as to appear in predetermined time units, and in the "special operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 7-E, the special period second operation section (1F operation section A, for example, the sword decoration 5001) is modeled. The display (1F operation-related display A) is displayed so that its periodic change appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time (may be the same periodic time as the 1F operation-related display B). may According to such a configuration, even if the operation target (operation unit) is the same, the time required for the periodic change varies depending on the type of "acceptance period" that has occurred. ” can be greatly varied depending on the type, and it can be expected to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 7th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.)" related to the above configuration 7-E, the first operation unit (the 3rd F operation unit A and For example, for the sword decoration 5001), a display (3F operation-related display A) imitating this is displayed so that its periodic change appears in a predetermined time unit, but the second operation unit (3F operation In part B, for example, the display imitating the operation button 410) is not displayed, and the "special operation permitted period (for example, the 1st F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)" related to the above configuration 7-E )”, a display (1F operation-related display B) imitating the special period first operation unit (1F operation unit B, for example, operation button 410) and a special period second operation unit (1F operation unit B) In the 1st floor operation section A, for example, the display (1st floor operation-related display A) imitating the sword ornament 5001) is changed so that periodic changes appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time. decided to display. According to such a configuration, when the periodic change appears within the predetermined period of time, it can be suggested that there is an operation unit that is in a state in which operation acceptance is permitted. become.

Moreover, in the above-described effect example, the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 6th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 295 and 296) and the 8th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 299 and 300 ), 9F acceptance period (see FIGS. 301 and 302), etc." 2F operation-related display A, 4th floor operation-related display A, and 5th floor operation-related display A), although periodic changes appear in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, operation acceptance is allowed. There is an operating unit that is kept secret. That is, in this case, when the periodic change appears within the predetermined period of time, it is suggested that there is an operating unit that is in a state in which it is possible to accept the operation, which is kept secret. appears in units of time longer than the above-mentioned predetermined time, if there is an operation unit that is concealed that it is in a state where operation reception is permitted (for example, the 6th F reception period or the 8th F reception period , 9th F reception period, etc.) and there are cases where it does not exist (eg, 1st F reception period), so it can be expected to preferably maintain the sense of tension.

In addition, in the "special operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period)" according to the above configuration 7-E, a display imitating the first operation unit during the special period (1F operation related display B), The time required for the periodic change may be the same as or different from the display imitating the two operation units (1F operation-related display A).

In the above-described production example, even when the display imitating the same operation unit is performed, the operation is different depending on whether the periodic change appears in the predetermined time period or in a time unit longer than the predetermined time period. The form of dynamic display (such as the amount of stroke when moving up and down) that appears in the display that imitates the part may be different.

In addition, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.)" related to the above configuration 7-E , Depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the ``specific operation permissible period'' for the configuration 7-E occurs, ``a ``specific operation permissible period'' for the configuration 7-E occurs. The specific type of sound effect is not set to the suppressed mode or the non-audible state before the specified type of sound effect is set to the suppressed mode or the non-audible state (for example, the specific type of sound effect is always set to the inaudible state However, the "special operation permissible period" related to the above configuration 7-E has ended at the time when the "special operation permissible period" related to the configuration 7-E occurs. Depending on the type of the previous variation pattern, the specific type of effect sound (specific BGM) is made inaudible (or suppressed) before the “special operation permissible period” for the configuration 7-E occurs. There may be a case where the effect sound is inaudible and a case where it is not set to a non-audible state (or suppressed) (a case where the acceptance period occurs while the specific type of effect sound is in an audible state). According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous variation pattern, the "specific operation allowable period" and the "special operation period" related to the configuration 7-E when the operation opportunity is given. Since it becomes easy to recognize which of the "permissible periods" is, it is possible to encourage the player to concentrate on the game even when the opportunity to operate is not given. In this case, it is desirable that the display after reception is the same even if the mode of the effect sound changes according to the type of the previous variation pattern.

The above-mentioned "deformed 1F reception period" may be applied to the "special operation permitted period (eg, 1F reception period)" related to configuration 7-E.

In addition, in the above-described production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation permissible period) during which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a change occurs after reception. sell. In addition, it is possible to execute a display that imitates an operation target for which operation reception is permitted (simulated image display means).

In this respect, in the above-described effect example, as the type of reception period, the "predetermined operation allowable period (for example, the 3rd F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th F reception period ( (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.)” and at least the “specific operation permissible period (for example, the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)” related to the above configuration 8-E. there is In both the "predetermined operation permissible period" and the "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 8-E, an operation unit that is subject to display by the model image display means and that is allowed to accept multiple operations. (3F operation part A or 1F operation part B), but operation was performed on the operation part (3F operation part A) during the "predetermined operation allowable period" according to the above configuration 8-E , and when an operation is performed on the operation unit (1st F operation unit B) during the “specific operation permitted period” according to the above configuration 8-E, the output after reception, which is one of the changes after reception Since it is possible to output different sounds as sounds, it is expected that the amusement of the game will be improved.

In addition, in the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.)" related to the above configuration 8-E , when an operation is performed on the operation unit (the operation unit A on the 3rd floor) which is to be displayed by the model image display means and which is allowed to receive operations a plurality of times, after reception as one of the changes after reception While the output sound is output, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" related to the above configuration 8-E, the display by the model image display means When an operation is performed on an operation unit (1F operation unit B) that is targeted and allowed to receive operations multiple times, outputting a post-acceptance output sound as one of post-acceptance changes and acceptance There may be cases where the post-output sound is not output.

According to such a configuration, during the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" related to the above configuration 8-E, the object to be displayed by the model image display means Even if an operation unit (1F operation unit B) that is set to and is allowed to accept multiple operations is operated, a post-acceptance output sound is output and a post-acceptance output sound is not output. Since there will be cases, it can be expected that it will be difficult to recognize whether or not the operation reception has been properly performed, so that the sense of tension can be preferably maintained.

In addition, within the "specific operation permitted period (for example, the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" according to the above configuration 8-E, the A case where an operation is performed on an operation unit (1st F operation unit B) for which operation reception is permitted, but no output sound is output after the reception is triggered, for example, when the object to be displayed by the model image display means It is also possible to prevent the output sound from being output after acceptance by preventing the operation itself from being accepted for the operation unit (first F operation unit B) that is permitted to accept multiple operations, or to display a simulated image. Although the operation itself is accepted for the operation unit (1F operation unit B) that is subject to display by the means and is allowed to accept multiple operations, a predetermined condition is not satisfied, and an output sound is output after acceptance. may not be output.

In addition, within the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)", it is subject to display by the model image display means and multiple operations reception is permitted. A case in which an operation is performed on the operation unit (1F operation unit B), but the output sound is not output after receiving this as a trigger, for example, "specific operation allowable period (for example, 1F reception period (Fig. 278 to See FIG. 281), etc.)”. In addition, it is desirable that the event can occur regardless of how long or short the time has passed since the last operation was received. Further, even if the post-acceptance output sound is not output, some post-acceptance change may occur.

In addition, in the "predetermined operation permissible period" and "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 8-E, the operation unit (the The 3F operating section A and the 1F operating section B) may be the same operating section, or may be different operating sections.

In addition, when the "predetermined operation permissible period" related to the configuration 8-E is set to occur as the "7th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.", display by the model image display means and is allowed to accept operations multiple times, if the post-acceptance output sound is always output when an operation is performed on the operation unit (1F operation unit B) that is allowed to accept operations multiple times, operation acceptance is allowed. It becomes possible to suggest that there is an operation unit that is in a hidden state. On the other hand, in the "specific operation permissible period" in which there is no concealed operation unit, there are cases where the output sound is output after acceptance and there are cases where it is not output, so there is no confidentiality effect. can also be expected to improve performance.

In addition, in the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.)" related to the above configuration 8-E, At the time when the "predetermined operation permissible period" related to the configuration 8-E occurs, "predetermined operation permissible period" related to the configuration 8-E occurs before The specific type of production sound is not set to the suppression mode or the non-audible state, or is not set to the suppression mode or the non-audible state (for example, the specific type of production sound must be set to the non-audible state before Acceptance period occurs) is the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 1F acceptance period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" related to the above configuration 8-E, and the "specific Depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the operation permissible period occurs, "a specific type of effect sound (specified BGM) may be made non-audible (or suppressed) or may not be made non-audible (or suppressed) (when the acceptance period occurs while a specific type of production sound is audible). can be According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous variation pattern, the "predetermined operation allowable period" and the "specific operation allowable period" related to the above configuration 8-E when the operation opportunity is given. , so that the player can be encouraged to concentrate on the game even when an operation opportunity is not provided. In this case, it is desirable that the display after reception is the same even if the mode of the effect sound changes according to the type of the previous variation pattern.

The "deformed 1F reception period" described above may be applied to the "specific operation permissible period (eg, 1F reception period)" related to the configuration 8-E.

In addition, in the above-described production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation permissible period) during which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a change occurs after reception. sell. In addition, it is possible to execute a display that imitates an operation target for which operation reception is permitted (simulated image display means). In addition, it is possible to execute a display that imitates an operation target for which operation reception is permitted.

In this respect, in the above-described effect example, as the type of acceptance period, the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 3rd F acceptance period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th F acceptance period ( (see Figures 297 and 298), etc.)" and at least the "special operation permitted period (for example, the first F acceptance period (see Figures 278 to 281), etc.)" related to the configuration 9-E. there is

Then, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.)" related to the above configuration 9-E, There is an operation unit (3F operation unit A) that allows operation acceptance multiple times and can be operated multiple times only by continuing to maintain the operated state, and the operation unit (3F operation unit A) is operated. If the state is maintained, the post-acceptance output sound A, which is one of the post-acceptance changes A, is output at predetermined time intervals, and a plurality of sounds (for example, at intervals slower than the predetermined time) are output to the operation unit. When the operation is performed once, the post-acceptance output sound A is output each time the operation is performed.

In addition, during the "special operation permitted period (for example, the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" related to the above configuration 9-E, operation reception is permitted multiple times, but the operation is maintained. There is an operation unit (1st F operation unit B) that does not accept the operation multiple times even if it continues to be operated, and even if the operation unit (1st F operation unit B) is kept in the operated state, the change B after acceptance One post-acceptance output sound B is not output at predetermined time intervals, and the operation unit (first F operation unit B) is operated a plurality of times (for example, at intervals slower than the predetermined time). is performed, the post-acceptance output sound B may or may not be output when the operation is performed.

According to this configuration, during the "special operation permissible period (for example, the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" related to the above configuration 9-E, the so-called auto repeat function is not activated. (1st F operation part B), and furthermore, even if the operation part (1st F operation part B) is operated, the post-acceptance output sound B may or may not be output when the operation is performed. Since there will be cases, it can be expected that it will be difficult to recognize whether the operation has been properly accepted, and the sense of tension will be preferably maintained.

In addition, the "specific operation permitted period (for example, the 3rd F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.)" An operation unit (3rd F operation unit A) that allows operation acceptance multiple times and can be operated multiple times just by continuing to maintain the operated state, and the “special operation allowable period ( For example, the 1F acceptance period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)", ``Operation acceptance is allowed multiple times, but operation is not accepted multiple times even if the operating state is maintained ( The 1F operation unit B)" may be the same operation unit or may be a different operation unit.

In addition, the "specific operation permitted period (for example, the 3rd F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.)" The operation unit (3F operation unit A) that allows operation acceptance multiple times and can be operated multiple times just by continuing to maintain the operated state is the “special operation allowable period ( For example, it may be set as an operation unit (for example, the 1st F operation unit A) to be operated even during the 1st F acceptance period (see FIGS. 278 to 281).

In addition, in the "special operation permitted period (for example, the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" related to the above configuration 9-E, "operation reception is permitted multiple times, but the state of operation is maintained The operation unit (1F operation unit B) that does not accept operations multiple times even if it continues to do so” is the “specific operation allowable period (for example, the 3F acceptance period (see FIGS. 287 to 291)” related to the above configuration 9-E. 297 and 298), etc.)”, and may be set as an operation unit (for example, the 3rd F operation unit B) to be operated.

However, in the "special operation permissible period" related to the above configuration 9-E, "operation reception is permitted multiple times, but even if the operation state is maintained, the operation reception is not performed multiple times (1F operation "Part B)" is set as an operation part (for example, the 3rd F operation part B) that is to be operated even in the "specific operation permissible period" according to the configuration 9-E, even if it is the same operation part Regardless of the above configuration 9-E, "During the specific operation permissible period, even the post-operation output sound will not be output when an operation is performed (see FIGS. 287(k) and 297(k). reference).

In addition, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.)" related to the above configuration 9-E, Depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the ``specific operation permissible period'' for the configuration 9-E occurs The specific type of production sound is not set to the suppression mode or the non-audible state, or is not set to the suppression mode or the non-audible state (for example, the specific type of production sound must be set to the non-audible state before Acceptance period occurs), but in the "special operation permitted period (for example, the 1F acceptance period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" related to the configuration 9-E, the "specific Depending on the type of the previous variation pattern that has ended at the time when the operation permissible period occurs, "a specific type of effect sound (specified BGM) may be made non-audible (or suppressed) or may not be made non-audible (or suppressed) (when the acceptance period occurs while a specific type of production sound is audible). can be According to such a configuration, if the player remembers the type of the previous variation pattern, the "specific operation permitted period" and the "special operation permitted period" related to the above configuration 9-E when the operation opportunity is given , so that the player can be encouraged to concentrate on the game even when an operation opportunity is not provided. In this case, it is desirable that the display after reception is the same even if the mode of the effect sound changes according to the type of the previous variation pattern.

The above-mentioned "deformed 1F reception period" may be applied to the "special operation permitted period (eg, 1F reception period)" related to configuration 9-E.

In addition, in the above-described production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation permissible period) during which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a change occurs after reception. sell. In addition, a display simulating an operation target for which operation reception is permitted can be displayed so that periodic changes appear.

In this respect, in the reception period according to the above-described example of production, first, when a periodic change in the display that imitates the operation target for which operation reception is permitted appears in a predetermined time unit (the third reception period, the third reception period, and the The 3rd floor operation-related display A) displayed during the 7th floor reception period, etc., and the case where the periodic change in the display imitating the operation target appears in units of time longer than the predetermined time (each of the above-mentioned effects In the example, there is an operation-related display other than the 3F operation-related display A). In addition, if the periodic change in the display imitating the operation target is displayed in a predetermined time unit during the reception period (3F operation-related display displayed during the 3rd floor reception period or the 7th floor reception period) A), and the case where periodic changes in the reception period are displayed so as to appear in units of time longer than the predetermined time (in each of the above-described production examples, the operation-related display on the 3rd floor is not the operation-related display A). In any case, when an operation is performed on an operation unit corresponding to a display imitating the operation target among the plurality of operation units, a post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, can be output. Therefore, it can be expected to favorably indicate that the operation reception has been properly performed.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, as the type of reception period, the "specific operation permitted period (for example, the 3rd F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291) and the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and FIG. 298), etc.)” and the “special operation permissible period (for example, the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)” related to the above configuration 10-E. there is In this regard, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.)" related to the above configuration 10-E , a display (3F operation-related display A) imitating an operation target is displayed so that periodic changes appear in predetermined time units, and an operation unit (3F operation unit When A) is operated, a post-acceptance output sound, which is one of post-acceptance changes, is output. On the other hand, in the "special operation permitted period (for example, the 1st F acceptance period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" related to the above configuration 10-E, a display that imitates the operation target (1st F operation-related display B ) is displayed so that periodic changes appear in units of time longer than a predetermined time, and when the operation unit (1F operation unit B) corresponding to the display (1F operation-related display B) imitating the operation target is operated, , there are cases where the post-acceptance output sound B, which is one of the post-acceptance changes B, are output (timings te2A and te2B) and cases where the post-acceptance output sound B is not output (timing te2C).

According to such a configuration, when a periodic change in the display imitating the operation target is displayed in a time unit longer than the predetermined time, the post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is displayed. Since there are cases where the output sound is output and cases where the output sound is not output after the acceptance, it can be expected that a feeling of tension as to whether the operation acceptance has been properly performed can be suitably imparted.

Further, in this case, the 3rd floor operation part A of the "specific operation permitted period" according to the configuration 10-E and the 1st floor operation part B of the "special operation permitted period" according to the configuration 10-E are the same operation part , or a different operation unit.

Also, regarding the 1st F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.), the 3rd F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.) It is desirable to set it as a valid time longer than

Further, in the above-described effect example, when the operating unit (eg, the 1st F operating unit B) is operated, the post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is not output (eg, timing te2C) This occurs while the game is being played normally, and does not occur while the notification sound is being output based on the detection of some kind of abnormality. For example, even if the operation unit (for example, the 1st F operation unit B) is operated while only "BGM output based on the start of pattern variation" is audibly output as the sound, the change after reception (for example, timing te2C) may occur when the output sound is not output after reception, which is one of the above. However, a case (for example, timing te2C) where the post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, is not output may occur.

In addition, in the above-described production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation permissible period) during which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a change occurs after reception. sell. In addition, a display simulating an operation target for which operation reception is permitted can be displayed so that periodic changes appear. In addition, even if no operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, it is possible to execute the processing (automatic button function) that causes the same change after reception as when the operation is performed (automatic reception execution means).

In this respect, in the above-described effect example, first, as the type of reception period, the "specific operation permitted period (for example, the 3rd floor reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th floor reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298, etc.)” and the “special operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)” related to the above configuration 11-E. I'm doing it.

Then, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.)" related to the above configuration 11-E, There is an operation unit (3rd F operation unit A) which is a target of processing by the automatic reception execution means (a target for which the automatic button function is activated) and is allowed to accept operation multiple times, and the operation unit (3rd F operation When the player performs an operation on part A), the post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes A, is output as modes A1 and A2 (see FIG. 287(k)).

On the other hand, in the "special operation permissible period (for example, the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" related to the above configuration 11-E, the object of processing by the automatic reception execution means (the automatic button function is There is an operation unit (1F operation unit B) that is not an object to be validated) and that can accept operation multiple times, and the player performs an operation on this operation unit (1F operation unit B). 278(k), the post-reception output sound, which is one of the post-reception changes B, is output as a sound (post-reception output sound B) different from the above modes A1 and A2 (see FIG. 278(k)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not to be processed by the automatic reception execution means (target for enabling the automatic button function) through the form of the output sound after reception. Therefore, it can be expected to favorably maintain the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the above-described production example, the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 3rd F acceptance period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 297 and 298 ), etc.)”, for the operation unit (3F operation unit A) that is the target of processing by the automatic reception execution means (the target for which the automatic button function is activated) and that can accept operation multiple times When an operation is performed by the player, a post-acceptance output sound, which is one of post-acceptance changes, is output (see FIG. 287(k)). However, in the "special operation permitted period (for example, the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" related to the above configuration 11-E, the object of processing by the automatic reception execution means (the automatic button function is activated When the player performs an operation on the operation unit (1F operation unit B) that is not the object to be accepted) and is allowed to accept operations multiple times, a post-acceptance output sound that is one of the post-acceptance changes is output in a manner different from the above modes A1 and A2 (see timings te2A and te2B shown in FIG. 278(k)), and when the post-acceptance output sound itself is not output (FIG. 278(k) (see timing te2C shown in ). According to such a configuration, since the conditions for outputting the output sound after reception are different between the "specific operation permissible period" and the "special operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 11-E, tension can be felt. It can be expected to remain favorable.

In this case, the “specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.) related to the above configuration 11-E” "The operation unit (3F operation unit A) that is the object of processing by the automatic reception execution means and can accept operation multiple times (3F operation unit A)", and the "special operation permitted period (for example, the 1F acceptance period (see FIGS. 278 to 281, etc.)” is the same as “an operation unit (1F operation unit B) that is not subject to processing by the automatic reception execution means and that can accept operations multiple times” It may be an operation unit or a different operation unit.

Further, for example, in the "special operation permissible period (for example, the first F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), etc.)" of the above configuration 11-E, "not subject to processing by automatic reception execution means and operation reception can be allowed multiple times (1F operation unit B)” is the “specific operation allowable period (for example, the 3F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291) and the 3rd 7F Acceptance Period (see FIGS. 297 and 298)” may also be set as an operation unit (for example, the 3rd F operation unit B) to be operated. However, the "operation unit (1F operation unit B) that is not subject to processing by the automatic reception execution means and that can accept operations multiple times" of the "special operation permission period" according to the above configuration 11-E is the above If it is set as an operation unit (for example, the 3rd F operation unit B) that is to be operated even in the "specific operation permissible period" according to configuration 11-E, an output sound after reception when the operation is performed It is desirable to ensure that the sound is always output, or to prevent even the case where the post-reception output sound is output when the operation is performed (this is not an essential configuration). No matter which configuration is adopted (for example, even if even the case where the post-acceptance output sound is output when an operation is performed is prevented), the post-acceptance output sound is output. Since the conditions are different between the "specific operation permissible period" and the "special operation permissible period" according to configuration 11-E, it can be expected that the sense of tension will be favorably maintained.

In addition, in the above-described production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation permissible period) during which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a change occurs after reception. sell. In addition, when the acceptance period occurs, an acceptance acceptance sound can be audibly output to indicate that the operation acceptance is allowed or that the operation acceptance will be allowed. In addition, it is possible to execute a display simulating an operation target for which operation reception is permissible.

In this regard, in the above-described effect example, as the type of reception period, the "specific operation permitted period (for example, the 4th F reception period (see FIGS. 292 and 293), the 8th F reception period ( 299 and 300), etc.)” and the “special operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F acceptance period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the 6th F acceptance period (see FIG. 295 and FIG. 296), etc.)” are prepared at least.

Then, in the above-described effect example, the "specific operation permitted period (for example, the 4th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 292 and 293), the 8th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 299 and 300 )”, the operation acceptance for the first operation unit (4th F operation unit A, for example, the sword ornament 5001) for a specific period and the second operation unit (4th F operation unit B, for example, , operation button 410) is at least permissible, and in the "specific operation permissible period" according to the configuration 12-E, while the acceptance permissible sound is audibly output, a specific period Operation reception for the first operation unit (4F operation unit A, for example, sword ornament 5001) or operation reception for the specific period second operation unit (4F operation unit B, for example, operation button 410) 292(k), 293(k), 299(k), and 300(k). etc.). Note that the acceptable acceptance sound may be output across the timing th2 at which the “specific operation acceptable period” related to the configuration 12-E occurs, or it may be output at the timing th2 or later. may

On the other hand, in the production example described above, the "special operation permitted period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286) and the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and See FIG. 296), etc.)”, the reception of operations for the special period first operation unit (second F operation unit A, for example, sword decoration 5001) and the special period second operation unit (second F operation unit B) , for example, operation reception for the operation button 410) is at least permissible, and during the audible output of the acceptance permissible sound in the "special operation permissible period" according to the configuration 12-E During the special period, when an operation is accepted for the second operation unit (2F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410), the acceptance permission sound is not made inaudible (Fig. 282). timings tf2A, tf2B, and tf2C shown in ), during the special period 1st operation unit (2F operation unit A For example, when an operation is accepted for the sword ornament 5001), the reception acceptance sound is made inaudible (timing tf2D shown in FIG. 282). Note that the acceptable acceptance sound may be output across the timing tf2 at which the "special operation permitted period" related to the configuration 12-E occurs, or may be output at the timing th2 or later. may

According to such a configuration, the condition for making the acceptance acceptance sound inaudible is the "special operation acceptance period (for example, the 2F acceptance period (see FIGS. 282 to 286) or , 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.)”, and the “special operation permissible period (for example, 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286) and 3rd 6F Reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296, etc.)”, so it can be expected that the sense of tension will be favorably maintained.

In this case, the specific period first operation unit (4th F operation unit A) of the "specific operation permitted period" according to the configuration 12-E is the special period of the "special operation permitted period" related to the configuration 12-E It may be the same as the 1 operation part (2nd F operation part A), or may be different.

Further, the specific period second operation unit (4th F operation unit B) of the "specific operation permissible period" according to the configuration 12-E is the special period first operation of the "special operation permissible period" according to the configuration 12-E It may be the same as the part (second F operation part A) or the special period second operation part (second F operation part B), or may be different from either.

In addition, the special period first operation section (second F operation section A) and the special period second operation section (second F operation section B) of the "special operation permitted period" according to the above configuration 12-E are the above configuration 12-E Acceptance of the operation may be permitted even during the "specific operation permitted period".

In addition, in the above-described production example, the "special operation permitted period (for example, the 2nd F acceptance period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the 6th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 295 and 296 )”, the special period first operation unit (second F operation unit A, for example, sword ornament 5001) and the special period second operation unit (second F operation unit B, for example, operation button 410), the automatic button function is activated for the first operation unit during the special period, and the automatic button function is not activated for the second operation unit during the special period. That is, in this case, if the player himself/herself does not operate the special period second operation section (the second F operation section B, for example, the operation button 410) on the side where multiple operations are required, this is taken as a trigger. After acceptance, the contents of the change cannot be seen. Therefore, a game with a low degree of difficulty (one operation is enough, and even if there is no operation, the change after receiving the operation can be confirmed) and a game with a high degree of difficulty (multiple operations) is required, and if there is no operation, it is not possible to confirm the change after receiving the operation when there is an operation), and it is possible to provide both at the same time. can be expected to increase.

In addition, in the above-described production example, the "special operation permitted period (for example, the 2nd F acceptance period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the 6th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 295 and 296 ), etc.)”, the acceptance acceptance sound is made inaudible until timing tf3 at which the automatic button function is activated arrives. As a result, it is possible to suggest that the timing for activating the automatic button function has not yet arrived while the acceptable acceptance sound is being output, so that the player is not deprived of an opportunity to operate. It will be possible to enjoy games while feeling secure.

In addition, in the above-described production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation permissible period) during which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a change occurs after reception. sell. In addition, when the acceptance period occurs, an acceptance acceptance sound can be audibly output to indicate that the operation acceptance is allowed or that the operation acceptance will be allowed. In addition, it is possible to execute a display simulating an operation target for which operation reception is permissible.

In this regard, in the above-described effect example, as the type of acceptance period, the "predetermined operation allowable period (for example, the 5th F acceptance period (see FIG. 294) and the 9th F acceptance period (see FIG. 301 and 302), etc.)” and the “specific operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the 6th F reception period (FIGS. 295 and 296 See ), etc.)” at the very least.

In addition, in the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 5th F reception period (see FIG. 294), the 9th F reception period (see FIGS. 301 and 302), etc.)" related to the above configuration 13-E, 1 operation part (5th F operation part A, for example, sword ornament 5001) and operation acceptance for the second operation part (5th F operation part B, for example, operation button 410) for a predetermined period. at least acceptable. In this respect, in the above-described effect example, in the "predetermined operation permissible period" according to the configuration 13-E, the first operation unit (fifth F operation unit A) is operated for a predetermined period while the acceptance permissible sound is audibly output. Even if an operation is accepted or an operation is accepted for the second operation unit (the 5th F operation unit B) for a predetermined period of time, the reception permission sound will not be made inaudible. (See FIGS. 294(j) and (k) and FIGS. 301(j) and (k)).

On the other hand, the “specific operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F acceptance period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the 6th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.)” related to the above configuration 13-E Then, for a specific period of time, the first operation section (2F operation section A, for example, sword ornament 5001) is accepted for operation, and the second operation section (2F operation section B, for example, operation button 410) is accepted for a specific period. Acceptance of operations may be at least acceptable. In this respect, in the above-described effect example, in the “specific operation permissible period” according to the configuration 13-E, while the acceptance permissible sound is audibly output, the first operation unit (second F operation unit A) is When an operation is accepted, the acceptable acceptance sound will not be made inaudible, but if an operation is accepted for the second operation section (second F operation section B) for a specific period, this will be turned off. As a trigger, the permissible acceptance sound is made inaudible (see FIGS. 282(j) and (k) and FIGS. 295(j) and (k)). According to such a configuration, since the conditions under which the acceptance acceptance sound is rendered inaudible differ between the predetermined operation acceptance period and the specific operation acceptance period, it is expected that the sense of tension is preferably maintained. sell.

In this case, the "specified period first operation unit" of the "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 13-E is replaced by the "predetermined period first operation unit" of the "predetermined operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 13-E. Alternatively, it may be the same as the "predetermined period second operation unit", or may be different from both.

In addition, the "specific period second operation unit" of the "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 13-E is the "predetermined period first operation unit" or " It may be the same as the "predetermined period second operation unit", or may be different from both.

Further, the first operation unit for a predetermined period (or the second operation unit for a predetermined period) may be allowed to accept operations even during the "specific operation permitted period" according to the configuration 13-E.

In addition, the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F acceptance period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the 6th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.)" related to the above configuration 13-E, The permissible sound is the same as in the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 5th F reception period (see FIG. 294), the 9th F reception period (see FIGS. 301 and 302), etc.)" related to the above configuration 13-E. You may enable it to be output in a form.

In particular, in the "predetermined operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 13-E, the same mode is always displayed as the 5th F effect display F, and the "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 13-E occurs. is output in a form that can be output even in the "predetermined operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 13-E, and in a form that is not output in the "predetermined operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 13-E. It is desirable that there is a case.

For example, if the aspect EF-2 that appears when the expectation is low is made to appear as the "5th F effect display EF (always the same aspect)", if the aspect EF-2 appears as the "2nd F effect display EF" However, it is possible to make the player aware of the possibility that this is displayed as the "fifth F effect display EF", and furthermore, the possibility that the highly expected mode UA2 will appear as the fifth F post-acceptance display UA. Since it becomes possible to do so, it can be expected to suppress the deterioration of the game interest when the mode EF-2 appears as the "second F effect display EF".

Alternatively, if the aspect EF-1 that appears when the expectations are high is made to appear as the "5th F effect display EF (always the same aspect)", the aspect EF-1 is always displayed when the "5F effect display EF" is displayed. Since it is possible to make 1 appear, it can be expected that the game interest will be improved.

Further, in the example of the effect described above, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation permissible period) during which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, the post-reception display is displayed. sell. In addition, when the acceptance period occurs, an acceptance acceptance sound can be audibly output to indicate that the operation acceptance is allowed or that the operation acceptance will be allowed.

In this respect, in the above-described production example, as the acceptance period, the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 2nd F acceptance period (see FIGS. 282 to 286) and the 6th F acceptance period (see FIG. 295 and FIG. 296), etc.)”, and in the “specific operation permissible period” according to the configuration 14-E, the first operation unit (2F operation unit B among the plurality of operation units, For example, both operation reception for the operation button 410) and operation reception for the second operation unit (2F operation unit A, for example, the sword ornament 5001) are allowed, and the first operation unit (2F operation When the player operates the part B), the second F post-acceptance display UB is displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side of the decorative pattern SZ (see FIGS. 285(c), (d), etc.). ), when the player operates the second operating unit (second F operating unit A), the second F post-acceptance display UA is displayed so as to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ. (See FIG. 286(g), etc.). According to such a configuration, depending on which of the first operation unit (second F operation unit B) and the second operation unit (second F operation unit A) is operated, either the decorative pattern SZ or the post-acceptance display is selected. Since it is possible to select whether or not to watch with priority, it can be expected that the interest in the game can be favorably maintained.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 2nd F acceptance period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the 6th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 295 and 296 ), etc.)”, when an operation is performed on the first operation unit (second F operation unit B) and when an operation is performed on the second operation unit (second F operation unit A) In (1) and (2), different display modes (UA, UB) are made to appear as display after reception. According to such a configuration, not only the problem of visibility as the post-reception display, but also the effect content can be taken into consideration, and it is possible to force the user to select which display after the reception is desired. can be expected to provide

In addition, in the above-described production example, the "specific operation permitted period (for example, the 2nd F acceptance period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the 6th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.)”, when the player operates the first operation unit (second F operation unit B) while the acceptance acceptance sound is being audibly output, the post-acceptance display indicates that the acceptance While the audible output of the allowable sound is continued, it is displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side of the decorative pattern SZ. On the other hand, when the player operates the second operation unit (second F operation unit A) while the acceptable acceptance sound is audibly output, the acceptable acceptance sound becomes non-audible. The post-acceptance display is displayed so as to be superimposed on the back side of the decorative pattern SZ. According to such a configuration, when the user selects to view the post-reception display preferentially out of the decorative pattern SZ and the post-reception display, the audible output of the acceptance permission sound is continued as compensation for the selection. Since it is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the person is in a situation where the reception has been made, it can be expected that the sense of tension can be preferably maintained. Also, in order to avoid this, if the audible output of the acceptance acceptance sound is interrupted based on the operation acceptance, as a compensation, the display after acceptance is made difficult to see by the decorative pattern SZ, so in this case can also be expected to favorably maintain a sense of tension.

In particular, in the production example described above, if the "specific operation permissible period" of configuration 14-E is realized as the "6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296)", the reception permission sound is audible. When the player performs an operation on the above-mentioned first operation unit (second F operation unit B) on the non-display target (hidden) side of the display that imitates the operation target among the output, the display after reception is , while the audible output of the acceptability sound is continued, it is displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side of the decorative pattern SZ. On the other hand, while the acceptable reception sound is audibly output, the player performs an operation on the second operation unit (second F operation unit A) on the side of the display target of the display imitating the operation target. Triggered by this, the acceptance acceptance sound is made inaudible, and the post-acceptance display is displayed so as to be superimposed on the back side of the decorative pattern SZ. According to such a configuration, even if the player operates the first operation unit (second F operation unit B) on the (secret) side, the audible output of the reception permission sound is interrupted with this as a trigger. Therefore, it is possible to add a performance element regarding concealment to whether or not the operation reception has been properly performed. However, instead of that, the post-acceptance display is displayed so as to appear to be superimposed on the front side of the decorative pattern SZ. ), it can be expected to be provided as special information to help the player determine whether the operation has been properly accepted.

In addition, in the above-described production example, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation permissible period) during which operation reception on the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period, a change occurs after reception. sell. In addition, it is possible to execute a premonition effect display that suggests that the operation permissible period will occur. In addition, it is possible to execute a display simulating an operation target for which operation reception is permissible.

In this regard, in the above-described effect example, as the acceptance period, the "specific operation allowable period (for example, the 4th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 292 and 293), the 8th F acceptance period (see FIG. 299 and FIG. 300), etc.)” and the “special operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the 6th F reception period (FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.).

Then, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 4th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 292 and 293), the 8th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 299 and 300), etc.)" related to the above configuration 15-E, Receipt of operation for the first operation section (4th floor operation section A, for example, sword ornament 5001) for a specific period and reception of operation for the second operation section (4th floor operation section B, for example, operation button 410) for a specific period is at least permissible, and the precursor effect display is displayed across the timing th2 at which the “specific operation permissible period” related to the configuration 15-E occurs, and the configuration 15-E While the precursor effect display is being displayed in the "specific operation permissible period", the reception of the operation to the first operation unit (4th floor operation unit A) for the specific period and the reception of the operation to the second operation unit (4th floor operation unit B) for the specific period When any of the operations is accepted, this is used as an opportunity to turn off the indication effect display (Fig. 292(d), Fig. 293(d), Fig. 299(d), See FIG. 300(d), etc.).

On the other hand, the "special operation permitted period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.)" related to the above configuration 15-E Then, during the special period, the first operation unit (second F operation unit A, for example, the sword ornament 5001) is accepted for operation, and the second operation unit (second F operation unit B, for example, operation button 410) is accepted during the special period. Acceptance of operation is at least permissible, and the precursor effect display is displayed so as to straddle the timing tf2 at which the “special operation permissible period” related to the configuration 15-E occurs. During the "special operation permissible period" of 15-E, when an operation is accepted for the first operation unit (second F operation unit A) during the special period while the sign effect display is audibly output, the sign is triggered by this. The effect display is not hidden, and during the special period second operation unit (second F operation When an operation is accepted for the part B), the premonition effect display is hidden (see FIG. 282(d), FIG. 295(d), etc.). According to such a configuration, the condition for hiding the precursor effect display is different between the "specific operation permitted period" and the "special operation permitted period" according to the configuration 15-E. It can be expected to maintain a good feel.

In this case, the "specific period first operation unit" of the "specific operation permitted period" according to the above configuration 15-E is replaced by the "special period first operation unit" of the "special operation permitted period" according to the configuration 15-E. Alternatively, it may be the same as the "special period second operation section", or may be different from any of them.

In addition, the "specific period second operation unit" of the "specific operation permitted period" according to the above configuration 15-E is the "special period first operation unit" or " It may be the same as the "special period second operation unit" or may be different from any of them.

In addition, the "special period first operation unit (and special period second operation unit)" according to the above configuration 15-E can accept operations even during the "specific operation permitted period" according to the above configuration 15-E. may be

In addition, in the example of effect described above, when the "specific operation permitted period" related to the configuration 15-E is realized as the eighth F reception period (see FIGS. 299 and 300), Even if an operation is performed on the second operation unit (4F operation unit B, for example, the operation button 410) for a specific period, the first operation unit (4F operation unit A, for example) is operated for a specific period. , sword decoration 5001), the 4F effect display is displayed so as to overlap the 4F operation-related display A corresponding to the 4F operation-related display A from the front. A, for example, it is possible to suitably suggest that acceptance of operation of the sword ornament 5001) has become unacceptable.

In addition, in the example of the effect described above, the 4F precursor effect display may be displayed as the same image display as the 5F precursor effect display. Further, the 4F precursor effect display may be displayed as the same image display as the 3F precursor effect display.

In addition, in the example of effect described above, the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ can be executed. In addition, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation permissible period) during which operation reception on the operation unit is allowed, and to display a post-reception display when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the reception period. In addition, it is possible to execute a premonition effect display that suggests that the reception period will occur. In addition, it is possible to execute a display simulating an operation target for which operation reception is permissible.

In this respect, in the example of the effect described above, the precursor effect display can be executed so as to straddle the timing at which the operation permitted period occurs, On the other hand, when the operation by the player is performed, the post-acceptance display is displayed so as to overlap the decoration pattern SZ in front of it (for example, the 2F post-acceptance display UB2 shown in FIG. 286(e), etc.). ), and the case where the post-reception display is displayed so as to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ (for example, the 2F post-reception display UA1 shown in FIG. 286(g)). Therefore, it can be expected that the display after reception will have a performance effect with the decorative pattern SZ to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, as the type of reception period, the specific operation allowable period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the 5th F reception period (see FIG. 294 ), the 6th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), or the 9th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 301 and 302)).

Then, in the "specific operation permissible period" according to the configuration 16-E, the first operation part among the plurality of operation parts (for example, when the specific operation permissible period is realized as the second F reception period, the "second F operation part B", and corresponds to the reception of operation for the operation button 410) and the second operation unit (for example, if the specific operation allowable period is realized as the second F reception period, it corresponds to the "second F operation unit A", sword decoration (body 5001, etc.) are all permissible, and when the player operates the first operation unit (for example, the second F operation unit B), the front side of the decorative symbol SZ is displayed. Display the post-acceptance display (for example, 2F post-acceptance display UB) so as to overlap (see, for example, FIG. 286(e)), and display the second operation unit (for example, 2F operation unit A) When an operation is performed by the player, a post-acceptance display (for example, the 2nd F post-acceptance display UA) is displayed so as to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ (for example, FIG. 286 (g ), etc.). According to such a configuration, depending on which one of the first operation unit (for example, the second F operation unit B) and the second operation unit (for example, the second F operation unit A) is operated, the decorative symbol SZ and the post-reception display Since it is possible to select which one to preferentially, it can be expected that the interest in the game can be favorably maintained.

Further, in the above-described production example, during the "specific operation permissible period" of configuration 16-E, an operation was performed on the first operation unit (for example, the operation button 410, which is the 2F operation unit B). and when an operation is performed on the second operation unit (for example, the 2nd F operation unit A, the sword decoration 5001, etc.), a different display mode as the post-reception display (for example, after the 2nd F reception Display UA, UB) was made to appear. According to such a configuration, not only the problem of visibility as the post-reception display, but also the effect content can be taken into consideration, and it is possible to force the user to select which display after the reception is desired. can be expected to provide

Further, in the above-described effect example, in the “specific operation permissible period” according to the configuration 16-E, an operation on the first operation unit (for example, the 2F operation unit B and the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation units Acceptance and operation acceptance for the second operation unit (for example, the second F operation unit A, sword decoration 5001, etc.) are both permissible, and the first operation unit ( For example, when the operation button 410 of the 2F operation unit B is operated by the player, the post-acceptance display is decorated while the precursor effect display is displayed instead of being hidden. It is displayed so as to overlap in front of the symbol SZ and the portent effect display (see, for example, FIG. 286(e)). When the player performs an operation on the operation unit A (such as the sword decoration 5001), the foreshadowing display is hidden with this as a trigger, and the display after reception is behind the decorative pattern SZ. 286(f) and (g)).

According to such a configuration, in the "specific operation permissible period" according to the configuration 16-E, when the first operation unit is operated, the precursor effect display is not hidden in response to the operation. Since the post-acceptance display is displayed so as to overlap the portent effect display from the front thereof, the visibility thereof is ensured. On the other hand, when the second operation unit is operated, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to appear to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ. Since it is hidden, its visibility is ensured. Since the visibility of the post-acceptance display is ensured through such different methods when the first operation unit is operated and when the second operation unit is operated, it is possible to make the performances significantly different from each other. Therefore, it can be expected to improve performance when prompting the user to select which one of the first operation unit and the second operation unit is to be operated.

Further, in the example of the effect described above, it is possible to generate an acceptance period (operating allowable period) during which acceptance of an operation on the operation unit is permitted, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit during the acceptance period, a post-acceptance display is generated. sell. In addition, it is possible to execute a premonition effect display that suggests that the reception period will occur. It is possible to execute a display that simulates an operation target for which operation acceptance is permissible.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, as the type of reception period, the "specific operation permitted period (for example, the 3rd F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 4th F reception period (see FIG. 292 and FIG. 293), the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), or the 8th F reception period (see FIGS. 299 and 300), etc.), and the “special operation At least an allowable period (for example, the 2nd F acceptance period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the 6th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.) is prepared.

Then, the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 3rd F reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), the 4th F reception period (see FIGS. 292 and 293), the 7th F reception period ( (see FIGS. 297 and 298), or during the eighth F acceptance period (see FIGS. 299 and 300), etc.), no operation is performed on the operation unit during the “specific operation permissible period” of configuration 17-E. Even in such a case, when a specific time (set valid time) elapses after the occurrence of the "specific operation permissible period" related to the configuration 17-E, the same reception as when the operation is performed on the operation unit Display is performed (automatic button function is activated). In this regard, the precursor effect display is executed so as to straddle the timing at which the “specific operation permissible period” related to the configuration 17-E occurs, but the specific time has passed since the specific operation permissible period occurred. It was decided that it would be hidden at the timing before it was done.

On the other hand, the "special operation permissible period (for example, the 2nd F reception period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), etc.) related to the above configuration 17-E" Then, even if the operation unit is not operated during the "special operation permissible period" according to the configuration 17-E, the special time will be When (the set valid time) elapses, the same post-acceptance display as when an operation is performed on the operation unit is performed (the automatic button function is activated). In this regard, the precursor effect display is executed so as to straddle the timing at which the "special operation permitted period" related to the configuration 17-E occurs, and the "special operation permitted period" related to the configuration 17-E occurs. is displayed even when the special time (set effective time) has passed since then, and the special When the time (set effective time) has passed, the same post-acceptance display as when an operation is performed on the operation unit while the precursor effect display is displayed instead of being hidden is started. I made it

According to such a configuration, the relationship between the timing at which the automatic button function is activated by the "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 17-E and the "special operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 17-E Since the timing at which the precursor effect display is hidden is different in , it can be expected that the sense of tension when the operation permissible period for activating the automatic button function occurs occurs.

In this case, the "specific time" and the "special time" may be the same time or different times.

Further, the precursor effect display is displayed corresponding to the "specific operation permissible period" according to the configuration 17-E, and is displayed corresponding to the "special operation permissible period" according to the configuration 17-E. Depending on the case, it may be displayed in the same manner, or may be displayed in a different manner,

In addition, in the production example described above, as the type of reception period, apart from the "specific operation permitted period" and "special operation permitted period" related to the configuration 17-E, the "predetermined operation permitted period" related to the configuration 17-E (For example, the 5th F acceptance period (see FIG. 294), the 9th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 301 and 302), etc.).

In this respect, in the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 5th F reception period (see FIG. 294), the 9th F reception period (see FIGS. 301 and 302), etc.)" related to the configuration 17-E, If no operation is performed on the operation unit during the "predetermined operation allowable period" according to configuration 17-E, the same post-acceptance display as when an operation is performed on the operation unit is performed (automatic button function is enabled). It's not like that. In this regard, the precursor effect display is executed so as to straddle the timing at which the "predetermined operation permissible period" related to the configuration 17-E occurs. After the "predetermined operation permissible period" occurs, it is hidden at a timing (shorter time elapses) before either the specific time or the special time elapses (FIG. 294(d), See Figures 301(d) and 302(d)).

According to such a configuration, if the indication of the indication effect is hidden at some point during the reception period, the automatic button function may or may not be activated. Therefore, it can be expected to prompt the player to perform the operation quickly. In addition, while the precursor effect display is displayed, if the reception period does not end ("specific operation permissible period" for configuration 17-E, "predetermined operation permissible period" for configuration 17-E), the reception period is terminated ("Special operation permitted period" for configuration 17-E), but the automatic button function is always enabled even if the reception period is terminated. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

As described above, the 5th F reception period (see FIG. 294) and the 9th F reception period (see FIGS. 301 and 302) may be subject to activation of the automatic button function. In this case, the time during which the precursor effect display is displayed is set as the specific time (the set effective time), and these acceptance periods are realized as the "specific operation permissible period" according to the configuration 17-E. It will happen.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, as the type of reception period, the "predetermined operation allowable period (for example, the first F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)" related to the configuration 18-E, and At least the “specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))” related to E is prepared.

In addition, during the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 1st F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))", the 1st floor operation section B is allowed to accept a plurality of operations and is displayed as a model image display. (operation button 410), and even if this operation unit is maintained in an operated state, the operation reception is not performed multiple times (the so-called auto repeated hitting function is not activated). On the other hand, during the “specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)”, it is possible to accept multiple operations, but the 10th F operation which is not displayed as a model image display. There is a part A (sword decoration body 5001), and the operation can be accepted multiple times just by continuing to operate the operation part (so-called auto repeated hitting function is activated). It can be expected that the difficulty in playing the game due to the operation unit being kept secret will be alleviated and the decrease in interest in the game will be suppressed. In addition, it can be expected that the sense of tension is preferably maintained not only when the operation unit to be operated is concealed, but also when the operation unit to be operated is not concealed.

In addition, in the example of the effect described above, in the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))" related to the configuration 18-E, it is allowed to accept multiple operations. In addition, there are a plurality of operation units displayed as a model image display including the "1st F operation unit B (operation button 410)", and even if any of the operation units is maintained in the operated state, the operation reception will be repeated multiple times. It may be set so that it is never performed (so-called auto repeated hitting function is not activated).

In addition, in the above-described effect example, it is allowed to accept multiple operations during the “specific operation allowable period (for example, the 10th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))” related to the configuration 18-E. However, as operation parts that are not displayed as a model image display, "1st operation part (10th F operation part A (sword ornament 5001))" and "2nd operation part (10th F operation part B (operation button 410))" At least there is, but regarding the ``first operation part (10th F operation part A (sword ornament 5001)'', the operation can be accepted multiple times just by continuing to operate it, whereas the ``second Regarding the operation unit (the 10th F operation unit B (operation button 410))”, even if it is maintained in the operated state, it is made so that the operation reception is not performed multiple times (Fig. 303 (a), ( b)).

According to such a configuration, during the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))", it is possible to accept multiple operations, but it is displayed as a model image display. Since the so-called automatic repeated hitting function may not be activated even for the operation unit that is not activated, it can be expected that the sense of tension will be more preferably maintained.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, in the "specific operation permitted period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))", the "first operation unit (10th F operation unit A (sword decoration 5001) )”, the post-acceptance display UA is displayed behind the pattern (see FIG. 306, etc.). When an operation is accepted for the operation unit (the 10th F operation unit B (operation button 410)), the post-acceptance display UB is displayed in front of the design (so that it can be seen overlapping the front side of the decorative design SZ). (See FIGS. 305 and 306, etc.). That is, in this case, when an operation is performed on an operation unit for which the operation opportunity is not concealed, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation reception is executed in a manner that is difficult to see, and the operation opportunity is given. When an operation is performed on an operation unit that has been kept confidential, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the acceptance of the operation is executed in a manner that is easy to see. It can be expected that the game interest will be improved while maintaining the sense of tension appropriately even in the event of occurrence.

Also, in the above-described effect example, in the "specific operation permitted period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))", the "first operation unit (10th F operation unit A (sword ornament 5001))” can be operated multiple times, and when the “first operation unit (10F operation unit A (sword ornament 5001))” is operated, the reception output sound is always output. (See FIG. 303(k)). As a result, during the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))", When an operation is performed, it is possible to make it easier to recognize whether or not the operation has been accepted after the operation has been accepted.

Further, in the above-described effect example, in the "specific operation permitted period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))", the "second operation unit (10th F operation unit B (operation button ))” can be operated multiple times, but when the “second operation unit (10th F operation unit B (operation button 410))” is operated, a reception output sound is output. (See FIG. 303(k)). As a result, during the ``specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)''), an operation on the ``second operation unit (the 10th F operation unit B (operation button 410))'' can be performed. , it includes performance elements that make it difficult to recognize whether or not the operation has been accepted even after the operation has been accepted, and it can be expected that the sense of tension is preferably maintained.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, during the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 1st F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))", multiple operation receptions are allowed and displayed as a model image display. When the operation unit (1F operation unit B (operation button 410)) is operated, there are cases where the reception output sound is output and cases where the reception output sound is not output (Fig. 278 (k) ). As a result, even in the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 1st F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)"), a few effects are included that make it difficult to recognize whether or not the operation has been accepted. , can be expected to favorably maintain tension.

It should be noted that, in the above-described effect example, the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))" has ended at the time when the "specific operation permissible period" occurs. According to the type of the variation pattern of the above, ``before the specific operation permissible period occurs, the specified type of effect sound is suppressed or inaudible, or is not suppressed or inaudible.'' However, in the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the first F acceptance period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))", the previous fluctuation pattern that has ended at the time when the "predetermined operation permissible period" occurs Before the "predetermined operation permissible period" occurs, depending on the type, the effect sound of the specific type is put into the suppression mode or the non-audible state, or is not brought into the suppression mode or the non-audible state. good too. For this configuration, the above-mentioned "Configuration 3-D", "Configuration 12-D", "Configuration 17-D", "Configuration 1-E" to "Configuration 9-E", and specific examples related thereto Since it is the same as the content as described in , a detailed description thereof will be omitted. It should be noted that the other examples described above with respect to the configuration can be similarly applied to the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281) and the 10F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306). For example, even if there is a change in the mode (audible state) of the effect sound according to the type of the previous variation pattern, the mode as the post-acceptance change in response to the operation does not change accordingly, and remains the same. .

In addition, in the above-described effect example, as the type of reception period, the "predetermined operation allowable period (for example, the first F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)" related to the configuration 19-E, and At least the “specific operation permitted period (for example, the 10th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))” related to E is prepared.

Then, during the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))", there are one or more operation units that are permitted to receive operations and are displayed as model images. 278(k), the post-acceptance output sound can be output when the operation unit is operated. On the other hand, during the ``specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)''), the operation reception is permitted, but the operation unit that is not displayed as a model image display is the ``first There are at least an operation unit (10F operation unit A (sword ornament 5001)) and a second operation unit (10F operation unit B (operation button 410)), and a “first operation unit (10F operation unit A (sword ornament 5001))", an output sound may be output after acceptance, but if an operation is performed on the "second operation unit (10th F operation unit B (operation button 410))" When done, the post-acceptance output sound will no longer be output. That is, in this case, during the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)", if an operation unit that is not in a concealed state is operated, a post-reception output sound may be output. , “specific operation permitted period (for example, 10th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)”), the first operation unit of the first operation unit and the second operation unit in the concealed state can be operated. Since the post-acceptance output sound is output only when the It will be possible to

In this case, the post-acceptance output sound may be output in a different manner depending on at least one of the type of the permitted operation period and the type of the operating unit operated by the player.

Also, in this case, during the “specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))”, the operation on the “second operation unit (the 10th F operation unit B (operation button 410))” is performed. is performed, the post-acceptance output sound is not output. However, as shown in FIG. 303(i), the ``second operation unit (10F operation unit B (operation Even if the button 410))" is operated, there may be cases where no change (at least in appearance) occurs after receiving the operation (see FIG. 303(i)). reference).

In addition, in the above-described effect example, during the "predetermined operation allowable period (for example, the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))", the operation unit is allowed to accept operations and is displayed as a model image display. When (1F operation unit B (operation button 410)) is operated, there are cases where the reception output sound is output and cases where the reception output sound is not output (see Fig. 278 (k)). . As a result, even in the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 1st F acceptance period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))", a small number of effects are included that make it difficult to recognize whether or not the operation has been accepted. , can be expected to favorably maintain tension.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, as the type of reception period, the "predetermined operation allowable period (for example, the first F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)" related to the configuration 20-E, and the At least the “specific operation permitted period (for example, the 10th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))” related to E is prepared. During the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 1st F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)", there is an operation unit that allows operation reception and is displayed as a model image display, and the operation unit is operated. Then, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation can be displayed. There is an operation part that is acceptable and is not displayed as a model image display. Even if the operation is performed while the operation unit is kept secret, it is possible to suggest that the operation is properly performed.

In this regard, during the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)", operation reception is permitted, but the operation unit that is not displayed as a model image display is the "first operation (10F operation part A (sword ornament 5001))" and "second operation part (10F operation part B (operation button 410))". , the post-acceptance display UA corresponding to the operation is displayed behind the pattern (so that it appears to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ), and when an operation is performed on the second operation unit, The post-receipt display UB can be displayed in front of the pattern (so that it appears to be superimposed on the front side of the decorative pattern SZ) (see FIGS. 305 and 306, etc.). Depending on which one of the first operation part and the second operation part is operated, it is possible to select which one of the decorative pattern SZ and the display after reception is to be preferentially viewed. It can be expected to remain favorable.

In addition, during the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))", there are a plurality of operation units that are allowed to receive operations and are displayed as model images. Even when any one of the operation units is operated, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is not displayed behind the pattern (so that it appears to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ). The post-acceptance display according to the operation may be displayed at a position displaced from the decorative pattern SZ or behind the pattern (so that it appears to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ). According to such a configuration, when the operation unit that is allowed to accept operation and is displayed as a model image display is operated, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation is displayed behind the decorative pattern SZ. Therefore, even after the operation is accepted, the performance will not be kept confidential, and the player can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

Further, in the above-described effect example, the first operation unit (1F operation unit B in the 1F reception period, and 10F operation unit B in the 10F reception period) related to the configuration 21-E. Button 410") and the second operation unit related to the above configuration 21-E (the 1st F operation unit A during the 1st F reception period, and the 10th operation unit A during the 10th F reception period, here (corresponding to "sword decoration 5001") can generate a multiple operation permissible period in which both operations are permitted, and during the multiple operation permissible period, either the operation on the operation button 410 or the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is allowed. is performed, it is possible to display a post-acceptance display corresponding to the type of the side on which the operation is accepted. In addition, although it is possible to display a simulated image display that imitates the operation target by the player (simulated image display means), the display that imitates the operation target is displayed by the simulated image display means even though the reception of the operation is permitted. It may not be done by

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as a type of such a multiple operation allowable period, the "first multiple operation allowable period (for example, the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)" related to the above configuration 21-E )” and the “second multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))” related to the configuration 21-E. When an operation is performed on the "operation button 410" (in which multiple operations can be accepted) during the first multiple-operation allowable period, the post-acceptance display UB corresponding to the operation is displayed. Even while the post-acceptance display UB is being displayed, acceptance of operations on the "sword ornament 5001" is permitted (see FIG. 278). Then, during the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281), the post-reception display UB corresponding to the operation performed on the "operation button 410" is displayed, and the "sword ornament 5001" is displayed. is operated, the post-acceptance display UA corresponding to the operation is displayed, and the post-acceptance display UB (post-acceptance display on the operation button 410 side) that has been displayed until then triggered by the operation is displayed. Since it can be hidden (see FIGS. 281(h) and (i)), instead of the interrupted operation on the "operation button 410" side, the newly performed "sword decoration 5001 It is possible to favorably suggest that the production is in a state of progress by the operation on the '' side.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, in the "first multiple operation permitted period (for example, the first F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))", the display imitating the "operation button 410" and the "sword While the display imitating the "decorative body 5001" is displayed, both the reception of the operation to the "operation button 410" and the reception of the operation to the "sword decoration body 5001" are allowed, and At least the "operation button 410" out of the "operation button 410" and the "sword ornament 5001" may be allowed to accept multiple operations. In addition, in the "second multiple operation permitted period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))", a display imitating the "operation button 410" and a display imitating the "sword decoration 5001" are not displayed, both the operation reception for the "operation button 410" and the operation reception for the "sword decoration 5001" are allowed, and the "operation button 410" and the "sword At least the "operation button 410" of the "decorative body 5001" is allowed to accept multiple operations.

Then, during the "first multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)"), the operation of the "operation button 410", for which multiple operations can be accepted, is performed. When performed, the post-acceptance display UB corresponding to the operation is displayed, but even while the post-acceptance display UB is being displayed, it is possible to accept the operation on the "sword ornament 5001". If an operation is performed on the "sword ornament 5001" while the post-display UB is being displayed, the post-acceptance display UA corresponding to the operation is displayed, and the post-acceptance display UA that has appeared until then is triggered by the operation. The post-acceptance display UB (post-acceptance display on the operation button 410 side) can be hidden. On the other hand, with respect to the "operation button 410" for which it is possible to accept multiple operations during the "second multiple operation acceptance period (for example, the 10th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)") When an operation is performed, a post-acceptance display UB corresponding to the operation is displayed, but even while the post-acceptance display UB is being displayed, it is possible to accept an operation for the "sword ornament 5001". If an operation is performed on the "sword ornament 5001" while the post-acceptance display UB is being displayed, the post-acceptance display UA corresponding to the operation is displayed. The post-acceptance display UB (post-acceptance display on the operation button 410 side) that had been displayed is not hidden. According to such a configuration, when the "sword ornament 5001" is operated while the post-acceptance display UB corresponding to the operation of the "operation button 410" is being displayed, the "operation button 410 , and the post-reception display UB is not hidden in response to an operation on the "operation button 410". It can be expected to improve the amusement of games.

It should be noted that during the ``first multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)'', the operation of the ``operation button 410'', which may be allowed to accept multiple operations, is not performed. It is possible to accept multiple operations during the post-acceptance display UB according to what has been done and the "second multiple-operation allowable period (for example, the 10th F accept period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))". The post-reception display UB in response to the operation performed on the available "operation button 410" may be the same image display or may be displayed as a similar image display. In other words, in this case, it can be expected to have an effect such as whether or not the image display of the specific mode (display after reception UB) is hidden when the "sword decoration 5001" is operated. become.

In addition, in the ``10th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)'', the post-acceptance display UB corresponding to the operation performed on the ``operation button 410'' is displayed. When an operation is performed on the ornament 5001", the post-acceptance display UA corresponding to the operation may be displayed so as to overlap the post-acceptance display UB behind it.

In addition, if an operation on the "operation button 410" and an operation on the "sword ornament 5001" are performed within the "10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)", regardless of the timing of those operations, First, the post-acceptance display UB that appears in response to the operation of the "operation button 410" is always displayed when the post-acceptance display UA that appears in response to the operation of the "sword ornament 5001" is hidden. , it is desirable to be hidden at a later timing than this.

Further, in the above-described production example, the first operation unit (1F operation unit A in the 1F reception period, and the 10F operation unit A in the 10F reception period) related to the configuration 22-E. (corresponding to decoration 5001"), and the second operation unit (1F operation unit B in the 1F reception period, 10F operation unit B in the 10F reception period, Here, it is possible to generate a multiple-operation allowable period in which both acceptance of operations on the "operation button 410") is allowed. Further, it is possible to display a first operation-related display that can appear only when a state in which reception of operations on the first operation unit is permitted or in a state in which reception of operations is permitted. It is possible to display a second operation-related display that can appear only when a state in which reception of operations on the operation unit is permitted or in a state in which reception of operations is permitted.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as the types of the multiple operation allowable period, the "first multiple operation allowable period (for example, the 1st F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))" related to the above configuration 22-E and At least the “second multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))” related to the configuration 22-E is prepared.

Then, in the "first multiple-operation allowable period (for example, 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))", the first operation-related display (1F operation-related display A) and the second operation-related display ( While all the 1F operation-related displays B) are displayed, if an operation is performed on the "sword ornament 5001", this operation is accepted, and if an operation is performed on the "operation button 410", this is accepted. Operation can be accepted. On the other hand, neither the first operation-related display nor the second operation-related display is displayed during the “second multiple-operation permitted period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)”). Among them, if an operation is performed on the "sword ornament 5001", it will be accepted, and if an operation is performed on the "operation button 410", it will be accepted. , a second operation-related display (10th F operation-related display B) is displayed. , the state in which not only the reception of operations on the "operation buttons 410" but also the reception of operations on the "sword ornament 5001" is permitted can continue. According to such a configuration, the secrecy of the "state in which operation reception is permitted" in the "operation button 410" is canceled by the operation of the "operation button 410", and the second operation-related display While (the 10th F operation-related display B) is being displayed, it is possible to receive an operation for the "sword ornament 5001" and an operation for the "operation button 410", so that the interest in the game can be improved. can be expected.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, even if an operation for "sword decoration 5001" is accepted during the "second multiple operation permitted period (for example, the 10th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)") , The first operation-related display (the 10th F operation-related display A) is never displayed (see FIGS. 303 and 306). According to such a configuration, since the performance when the operation is accepted is different between the "sword decoration body 5001" and the "operation button 410" in the hidden state, it is possible to increase the interest of the game. Improvements can be expected.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, both the first operation-related display and the second operation-related display are The second operation-related display (the 10th F operation-related display B) that is not displayed but is displayed based on the reception of the operation on the “operation button 410” is the “first multiple-operation permitted period (for example, the 1st F reception period (See FIGS. 278 to 281))” is displayed in a manner different from the second operation-related display (1F operation-related display B) that appears when “(see FIGS. 281 and 281)” (see FIGS. 281 and 305). That is, in this case, even if the 10th F operation-related display B is displayed after the occurrence of the reception period, the "display image that should be displayed originally is hidden" as displayed during other reception periods. Since it becomes difficult for the player to remember the feeling of "I was playing", it can be expected that the decline in the interest in the game will be suppressed.

In addition, in the above-described production example, during the "second multiple-operation permitted period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))", while the second operation-related display is not displayed, the "operation button 410", the second operation-related display (10F operation-related display B) is displayed, but the display suggesting the degree of expectation may not be displayed. That is, in this case, it is possible to prompt further operation of the "operation button 410" while the second operation-related display (10th F operation-related display B) is being displayed.

In addition, in the above-described production example, the second operation-related display (10F operation-related display B) and When the post-acceptance display UB is displayed, the second operation-related display (the 10th F operation-related display B) and the post-acceptance display UB are displayed regardless of the timing at which they are displayed. The display is prevented from being hidden until the "permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))" ends. In particular, in the above-described effect example, the second operation-related display ( Since the display of the 10th F operation-related display B) and the post-acceptance display UB are continued, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize when the acceptance period has ended. In this case, depending on the timing of the operation, the second operation-related display (10th F operation-related display B) and the post-acceptance display UB may be displayed during the second multiple-operation allowable period (for example, the 10th F reception period (FIGS. 303 to 306). ))”, the time to continue displaying after the end of the “second multiple operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))” should be longer.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, as the type of reception period, the "predetermined operation allowable period (for example, the first F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)" related to the configuration 23-E, and At least the “specific operation permitted period (for example, the 10th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))” related to E is prepared. Then, in the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, 1F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281))" and "specific operation permissible period (for example, 10F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))" In any case, there is an operation unit that can be operated multiple times. Since it is possible to output a different sound as the post-acceptance output sound, which is one of the post-acceptance changes, depending on whether an operation is performed on the part, any type of operation allowable period occurred. It will be possible to suggest whether

In addition, in the above-described effect example, during the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 1st F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)", it is displayed as a model image display and multiple operation receptions are permitted. When an operation is performed on the operation unit, a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes. In the 10th F Acceptance Period (see FIGS. 303 to 306), there are one or more operating units that are not displayed as model images and are allowed to accept multiple operations. When an operation is performed on the part, as one of the post-acceptance changes, there may be cases where the post-acceptance output sound is output and cases where the post-acceptance output sound is not output. According to such a configuration, during the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)", when the hidden operation unit is operated, the post-reception output sound Since there are cases where the output sound is output and cases where the output sound is not output after acceptance, it can be expected that the sense of tension as to whether or not the operation has been accepted properly can be maintained.

In particular, in the example of the effect described above, during the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)", it is not displayed as a model image display and multiple operation receptions are permitted. Possible operation units include at least a first operation unit (10F operation unit A (sword ornament 5001)) and a second operation unit (10F operation unit B (operation button 410)). When an operation is performed, a post-operation output sound is output as one of the post-reception changes, but when an operation is performed on the second operation unit, a post-operation output sound is output as one of the post-reception changes. (See FIG. 303(k)). According to such a configuration, during the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)", the secrecy regarding the "state in which operation reception is permitted" in the second operation unit It can be expected that it will be possible to further enhance the sexuality of the game, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In this case, during the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))", it is displayed as a model image display and (multiple times) operation reception is permitted. It is more desirable that there are no operating parts that

In addition, in the above-described effect example, during the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 1st F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)", it is displayed as a model image display and multiple operation receptions are permitted. There is at least the second operation unit (1F operation unit B (operation button 410)) as an operation unit that is assumed to be the operation unit, and when the second operation unit is operated, one of the changes after reception There are cases where the output sound is output and cases where the output sound is not output after reception. Therefore, even in the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the first F reception period (see FIGS. 278 to 281)"), it is possible to preferably maintain the sense of tension.

It should be noted that, in the above-described effect example, both "when the output sound is output after reception" and "when the output sound is not output after reception" within one reception period are the predetermined time from the previous operation. after , and the same operation is performed again.

In addition, during the reception period related to the above-described production example, there are cases where it is possible to accept multiple operations for an operation unit that is not displaying a simulated image, and the operation unit is kept in an operated state. When you continue to press, there are cases where the operation is accepted multiple times (when the auto-repeat function is activated) and cases when the operation is not accepted multiple times (when the auto-repeat function is not activated). . According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably impart a sense of tension while alleviating the difficulty of playing the game due to the concealment of the operation unit to be operated.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, at least the "specific operation permitted period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))" related to the configuration 24-E is prepared as the type of reception period. In the "specific operation permissible period", the first operation unit (the 10th F operation Part A (operation button 410)) and the second operation part (10F operation part B (sword ornament 5001)) related to the above configuration 24-E are present, and when the operation button 410 is kept in the operated state When the operation reception is not performed multiple times and the sword ornament 5001 is kept in the operated state, the operation reception is performed multiple times (see FIGS. 303(a) and 303(b)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to accept a plurality of operations on the operation button 410 during the "specific operation permitted period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)"). It can be expected that the confidentiality of can be improved, and a sense of tension can be suitably imparted.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, as the type of reception period, the "predetermined operation permitted period (for example, the 11th F reception period (see FIGS. 307 to 310), the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295, see FIG. 296), or the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297, 298), etc.) and the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 306))” at least.

Then, "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, 11th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 307 to 310), 6th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), or 7th F acceptance period (FIGS. 297 and 298 ), etc.), there is one or more operation units that are not displayed as a model image but are allowed to accept multiple operations, and even if you continue to operate the operation unit Operation reception is not performed multiple times (automatic continuous tapping function is not activated) (see Fig. 307, Fig. 295, Fig. 297, etc.). 10F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)”, the first operation unit according to the above configuration 24-E as an operation unit that does not display a simulated image but can accept multiple operations. (10F operation part A (operation button 410)) and the second operation part (10F operation part B (sword decoration body 5001)) related to the above configuration 24-E are present at least, and the operation button 410 is maintained in an operated state. When the operation continues, the operation is not accepted multiple times, and when the sword ornament 5001 is kept in the operated state, the operation is accepted multiple times (see FIGS. 303(a), (b), etc.). . According to such a configuration, it is expected that the sense of tension when operating the operation unit, for which whether or not an operation opportunity is given is kept secret, can be maintained more appropriately.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, as the type of reception period, the "predetermined operation permitted period (for example, the 11th F reception period (see FIGS. 307 to 310))" related to the configuration 25-E and the configuration 25-E At least a “specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))” is prepared.

Then, during the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 11th F reception period (see FIGS. 307 to 310))", the above configuration 25-E is used as an operation unit in which operation reception is permitted and the model image display is not displayed. There is at least the "predetermined period first operation unit (here, operation button 410)" related to the above configuration 25-E and the "predetermined period second operation unit (here, sword ornament 5001)" related to the above configuration 25-E. When the first operation section is operated, the post-acceptance display UB corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern SZ on the front side thereof, and when the second operation section is operated for a predetermined period, the second operation section is displayed. The responsive post-acceptance display UA is displayed so as to appear to overlap with the decorative pattern SZ on the front side thereof (see FIGS. 309 and 310).

On the other hand, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))", the operation unit is allowed to accept operations and does not display the model image display. There are at least the "specific period first operation unit (here, operation button 410)" related to 25-E and the "specific period second operation unit (here, sword ornament 5001)" related to configuration 25-E, When the first operating section is operated for a specific period, the post-receipt display UB corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern SZ in front of it, and when the second operating section is operated for a specific period. The post-acceptance display UA corresponding to the operation is displayed so as to be superimposed behind the decorative pattern (see FIGS. 305 and 306).

According to such a configuration, during the "predetermined operation permitted period (for example, the 11th F reception period (see FIGS. 307 to 310)", the first operation unit for a predetermined period and the second operation unit for a predetermined period are kept secret. Regardless of which part is operated, the post-acceptance displays UA and UB are displayed overlapping the decorative pattern SZ in front of the ornamental pattern SZ. On the other hand, in the "specific operation permitted period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)"), the confidential specific period first operation unit and specific period second operation unit If the second operating unit is operated for a specific period of time, the post-reception display UA will be displayed behind the decorative pattern SZ, so that the display of the post-reception display UA is recognized. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of tension as to whether or not the operation reception is properly performed.

Alternatively, in the production example described above, the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 6th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), or the 7th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 297 and 298 ), etc.)”, the operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001) where operation acceptance is allowed and a model image is displayed, and the operation unit where operation acceptance is allowed and a model image is not displayed There is an operation unit (here, the operation button 410), and when the operation unit that allows operation acceptance and displays a model image is operated, the post-acceptance display UA corresponding to the operation is displayed on the decorative pattern SZ. (See FIG. 286(g), etc.). The post-acceptance display is displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side of the decorative pattern SZ (see FIG. 285(d), etc.).

On the other hand, during the ``specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)'', there is no operation unit where operation reception is permitted and a model image display is displayed. , as operation units for which operation reception is permitted and no simulated image display is performed, the “specific period first operation unit (here, operation button 410)” and “specific period second operation (here, sword ornament 5001)", and when the first operation unit is operated for a specific period of time, the post-acceptance display UB corresponding to the operation appears to overlap the decoration pattern SZ on the front side thereof. , and when the second operation unit is operated for a specific period of time, the post-acceptance display UA corresponding to the operation may be displayed so as to appear to overlap behind the decorative pattern SZ.

According to such a configuration, during the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the sixth F acceptance period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), the seventh F acceptance period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.)," When the operation unit (the first operation unit for a predetermined period of time) where the image display is performed is operated, the post-acceptance display UA is displayed in a difficult-to-see manner without deteriorating the visibility of the decorative pattern SZ. When the operation unit (the second operation unit for a predetermined period) is operated, the post-acceptance display UB is conspicuously displayed even if the visibility of the decorative pattern SZ is deteriorated, thereby making it possible to accept the operation. As for what was done right, it becomes easier to recognize, instead of being kept secret. On the other hand, during the “specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)”, the concealed operation units (the first operation unit for the specified period, the second operation unit for the specified period, part) is operated, if the first operation part is operated for a specific period of time, the post-acceptance display UA is displayed in a manner that is difficult to see without degrading the visibility of the decorative pattern SZ. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained by making it difficult to recognize whether or not the operation reception is properly performed, as well as keeping secret whether or not the operation reception is permitted. It will be done.

At least one of the "specific period first operation unit" according to the configuration 25-E and the "specific period second operation unit" according to the configuration 25-E is the "predetermined operation allowable period" according to the configuration 25-E ” may be acceptable. For example, the first operation unit for a specific period is used as an operation unit that is permitted to accept operations and does not display a simulated image during the "predetermined operation permissible period", and the second operation unit for a specific period: It may be used as an operation unit in which operation reception is permitted and a simulated image is displayed during a predetermined operation permitted period. Alternatively, any of the plurality of operation units for which operation acceptance is allowed and for which no model image display is performed during the predetermined operation allowable period, operation acceptance is allowed and model image display is performed during the specific operation allowable period. It may be one that is used as an operation unit that does not have a controller.

Further, in the "predetermined operation permissible period" according to the configuration 25-E, it may be possible to allow acceptance of an operation on an operation unit that is different from the first operation unit for a predetermined period and the second operation unit for a predetermined period. A model image display may be performed for the operation unit.

In addition, in the "predetermined operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 25-E and the "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 25-E, there are operation units that allow multiple operations. Among the operation units, With respect to the operation unit for which the automatic repeated hitting function is activated, the post-receipt display corresponding to the operation of the operating unit is displayed so as to be superimposed on the back side of the decorative pattern SZ, and the automatic repeated hitting function is performed. is not activated, it is desirable to display the post-acceptance display corresponding to the operation on the operation part so as to be superimposed on the front side of the decorative pattern SZ.

In addition, in the example of effect described above, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ can be executed. In addition, it is possible to generate a reception period (operation permissible period) during which reception of an operation to the operation unit is permitted, and if an operation to the operation unit is received during the reception period, a post-reception change occurs. In addition, it is possible to display a display that imitates the operation unit.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as the type of operation permitted period, the "predetermined operation permitted period (for example, the 11th F reception period (see FIGS. 307 to 310))" and the above configuration 26- At least a “specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))” relating to E is prepared.

Then, during the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 11th F reception period (see FIGS. 307 to 310))", the above configuration 26- There is at least the "predetermined period first operation unit (here, operation button 410)" related to E and the "predetermined period second operation unit (here, sword ornament 5001)" related to configuration 26-E, and the predetermined period When either the first operation unit or the second operation unit is operated for a predetermined period of time, the change after reception occurs, but as one of the changes after reception, the output sound after reception is not output (Fig. 307). (k)).

On the other hand, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))", the operation unit is allowed to accept operations and does not display the model image display. There are at least the "specific period first operation unit (here, operation button 410)" related to 26-E and the "specific period second operation unit (here, sword ornament 5001)" related to configuration 26-E, When the first operation unit is operated for a specific period, a post-acceptance change occurs. One of them is that no post-acceptance output sound is output. As one, output sound is output after reception.

According to such a configuration, during the "predetermined operation permitted period (for example, the 11th F reception period (see FIGS. 307 to 310)", the first operation unit for a predetermined period and the second operation unit for a predetermined period are kept secret. Even if any part is operated, a post-acceptance change will occur, but as one of the post-acceptance changes, a post-acceptance output sound will not be output. (see FIGS. 303 to 306))”, only when the second operating unit for a specified period of time is operated among the first operating unit for a specified period and the second operating unit for a specified period which are hidden As a result, the output sound will be output after reception. That is, in this case, even if the operation unit is kept secret, the player side can recognize that the output sound will be output after receiving the operation when the operation is accepted. When the first operation unit is operated for a specific period of time, or when the operation is performed during the "predetermined operation permissible period", it is difficult to recognize whether or not the operation is properly accepted, thereby creating a sense of tension. It can be expected to keep well.

Alternatively, in the production example described above, the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 6th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), or the 7th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 297 and 298 ), etc.)”, the operation unit (here, the sword ornament 5001) where operation acceptance is allowed and a model image is displayed, and the operation unit where operation acceptance is allowed and a model image is not displayed There is an operation unit (here, the operation button 410), and when the operation unit that allows operation acceptance and displays a simulated image is operated, the post-acceptance output is one of the post-acceptance changes according to the operation. When an operation unit that outputs sound (see FIGS. 295(k) and 297(k), etc.), is permitted to accept operations, and does not display a simulated image, is operated, after accepting the operation One of the changes is to prevent the output sound from being output after reception (see Fig. 295(k), Fig. 297(k), etc.).

On the other hand, during the ``specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)'', there is no operation unit where operation reception is permitted and a model image display is displayed. , as operation units for which operation reception is permitted and no simulated image display is performed, the “specific period first operation unit (here, operation button 410)” and “specific period second operation part (here, sword decoration 5001)", and if the first operation part is operated for a specific period, changes occur after acceptance, but one of them is that the output sound is not output after acceptance, and for a specific period When the second operation unit is operated, a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of post-acceptance changes.

According to such a configuration, during the "predetermined operation permissible period (for example, the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), or the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298)," If you operate an operation unit that is set to , changes will occur after acceptance, but one of them is that no output sound will be output after acceptance. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the operation opportunity has been given to the operation unit. On the other hand, during the “specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)”, if the hidden operation unit is operated, it is one of the post-reception changes. There is a case of outputting an output sound (specific period second operation unit) and a case of not outputting an after-acceptance output sound as one of the post-acceptance changes (specific period first operation unit). Therefore, even when a plurality of operation units are concealed, if an output sound is output after reception (the second operation unit for a specific period), it is appropriately suggested that an operation opportunity has been secretly given. It can be expected to avoid a situation in which none of the players notice that a hidden button has occurred. On the other hand, among the "specific period first operation unit" and the "specific period second operation unit", the confidentiality of the specific period first operation unit can be further enhanced, and the game interest can be improved. can be expected to improve

In addition, in the "predetermined operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 26-E, the "specific period first operation unit" according to the above configuration 26-E is changed to "allow operation reception and no model image display The "specified period second operation section" according to the configuration 26-E is used as the "operation unit", and the "predetermined operation permissible period" according to the configuration 26-E "allows operation acceptance and displays a model image If it is used as an operation part where the operation is performed, it is possible to use the performance in the "predetermined operation permission period" as a hint as to which operation part is hidden in the "specific operation permission period". become able to.

In addition, when the operation button 410 is operated during the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)"), at least an apparent change occurs after reception, but one of them is There are cases where no output sound is output after reception, and there are cases where output sound is not output after reception and there is no apparent change after reception. That is, in this case, it can be expected that the feeling of tension is further heightened when an operation is performed in the "specific operation permitted period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)").

In addition, in the "predetermined operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 26-E and the "specific operation permissible period" according to the above configuration 26-E, there are operation units that allow multiple operations. Among the operation units, For the operation unit for which the automatic repeated hitting function is activated, a post-acceptance output sound is output as one of the post-acceptance changes according to the operation of the operation unit, and for the operating unit for which the automatic repeated hitting function is not activated. As one of the post-acceptance changes according to the operation on the operation unit, the output sound after reception is not output, so that the tension when operating the confidential operation unit can be increased can be expected.

In addition, during the reception period (operation permissible period) according to the above-described effect example, it may be possible to accept multiple operations for an operation unit that is not displaying a simulated image. If you continue to operate it, there are cases where the operation reception is performed multiple times (when the auto repeat function is activated) and there are cases where the operation reception is not performed multiple times. It is possible to preferably maintain the tension when operating the operation unit while alleviating the difficulty of the game due to the hidden operation unit to some extent.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, at least the "specific operation permitted period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see Figs. The first operation unit according to the above configuration 27-E is prepared as an operation unit for which a model image is not displayed during the "specific operation permissible period" but multiple operations can be accepted. (Here, the operation button 410) and the second operation unit (here, the sword decoration 5001) related to the above configuration 27-E, and when the operation button 410 is kept in the operated state, multiple operation receptions When it is not turned (automatic repeated hitting function is not activated) and the sword ornament 5001 is kept in the operated state, the operation reception is performed multiple times (automatic repeated hitting function is activated) (Fig. See 303(a), (b)).

When only the operation button 410 is continuously and repeatedly operated during the “specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)”, the number of times the operation can be accepted The number of times to cause a post-change) is the operation acceptance when only the sword ornament 5001 is continuously and repeatedly operated during the ``specific operation allowable period (for example, the 10th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)''). may be less than the number of times that can be done (at least the number of times that causes an apparent post-acceptance change). That is, in this case, during the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306)", the operation unit (operation button 410) on the side where the so-called auto repeated hitting function is not activated is Compared to the operation unit (sword ornament 5001) on the side on which the so-called auto repeat function is activated, the required number of repeat hits (the number of consecutive operations) can be reduced, so the game is more interesting. It can be expected to suppress the decrease.

In the example of the production described above, "the operation is accepted" means, for example, when this triggers at least a change in appearance after acceptance (display change, output of output sound after acceptance, change in lamp emission, etc.) means that Therefore, if an operation is detected internally, but it does not cause any apparent change after acceptance (even if some internal processing (such as extending the time that the display is maintained after acceptance) is performed) , it cannot be said that "the operation is accepted".

In addition, in the above-described effect example, as the type of acceptance period, the "predetermined operation allowable period (third acceptance period (see FIGS. 287 to 291) or seventh acceptance period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.)” and the “specific operation permitted period (for example, the 10th F acceptance period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))” related to the configuration 28-E.

During the "predetermined operation permissible period (the third acceptance period (see FIGS. 287 to 291) or the seventh acceptance period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), etc.), it is allowed to accept multiple operations. In addition, there is one or a plurality of operation units on which the model image is displayed, and when an operation is performed on the operation unit, the predetermined operation permission period can be terminated with the operation as a trigger ( See Figures 287(a), (c), (e) and Figures 297(a), (c), (e), etc.). On the other hand, in the "specific operation permissible period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))", it is possible to accept multiple operations, but the operation unit does not display a model image. As such, there are at least the "first operating section (here, the sword ornament 5001)" related to the configuration 28-E and the "second operating section (here, the operation button 410)" related to the configuration 28-E. , The sword ornament 5001, or the operation button 410 is operated so that the specific operation allowable period is not terminated by the operation (see FIGS. 303(a) to (c) reference). According to such a configuration, unlike the situation where there is an operation unit in which a model image is displayed (predetermined operation permitted period), under the situation where there are a plurality of hidden buttons (specific operation permitted period), the player can , when investigating which operation unit is secretly enabled to operate, without considering the risk of unintentionally ending the specific operation permissible period, it is safe for various operation units. be able to operate.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, the "predetermined operation allowable period (third reception period (see FIGS. 287 to 291) or seventh reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298)" related to the configuration 28-E etc.)”, an operation unit (see FIGS. 287(a) and (c) and FIGS. 287(b) and (c) and FIGS. 297(b) and (c)) for which the predetermined operation allowable period is not terminated. Therefore, it can be expected that the sense of tension when operating an operation unit that is not concealed within a certain acceptance period is preferably maintained.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, in the "specific operation permitted period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))", the "first operation unit (here, sword decoration 5001)" is operated, a change after the first side specific operation corresponding to the operation (corresponding to the 10th F post-acceptance display UA in the figure, but it may be a change in light emission of a lamp or the like) is generated by a plurality of second 1 side modes (modes UA1 to UA3) can be generated, but the "first operation unit ( Here, when the "sword ornament 5001)" is operated again, a first side mode (modes UA1, UA2) different from the "special first side mode (mode UA3)" as a change after the first side specific operation does not newly occur, and when the second operation unit (here, the operation button 410) is operated, the change after the second side specific operation (in the figure, the 10th F post-acceptance display UB (although it may be a change in light emission of a lamp, etc.) can be generated as one of the plurality of second side aspects (aspects UB1 to UB3), but among the plurality of second side aspects, "special If the second operation unit (here, the operation button 410) is operated again while the second side mode (mode UB3)" is occurring, the change after the second side specific operation is "special second side mode A new second side mode (modes UB1 and UB2) different from (mode UB3) is prevented from newly occurring (timings tj2D and tj2H shown in FIG. 303, and (i), (j) and See Figure 306 (s) to (y), etc.) According to such a configuration, when the "first operation section (here, the sword ornament 5001)" is being operated, the "special first side aspect " appears, it can be understood that there is no need to operate the "first operation part (here, the sword ornament 5001 )" any more. In addition, when the second operation unit (here, the operation button 410) is being operated, a "special second side aspect" appears. Since it can be understood that it is not necessary to operate the second operation unit (the operation button 410 in this case) any more at the point in time when the operation is performed, the state of operating the first operation unit is changed from the state of operating the second operation unit. You will be able to move to ” with peace of mind.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, in the "specific operation permitted period (for example, the 10th F reception period (see FIGS. 303 to 306))", the "first operation unit (here, sword decoration 5001)" is operated, a change after the first side specific operation corresponding to the operation (corresponding to the 10th F post-acceptance display UA in the figure, but it may be a change in light emission of a lamp or the like) is generated by a plurality of second 1 side modes (modes UA1 to UA3) can be generated, but the "first operation unit ( Here, when the "sword ornament 5001)" is operated again, the "special first side mode (mode UA3)" that has been in the execution state until then ends, and the change after the first side specific operation is " 306 (s) to (y), etc.), and the second operation unit (here, the operation button 410) When operated, a change after the second side specific operation (corresponding to the 10th F post-acceptance display UB in the figure, but it may be a change in light emission of a lamp or the like) corresponding to the operation is generated by a plurality of second side Although it can be generated as any of the side modes (modes UB1 to UB3), the second operation unit (here, , operation button 410) is operated again, the "special second side aspect (aspect UB3)" which has been in the execution state until then does not change at least visually (Fig. 305(i) , (j), etc.). According to such a configuration, when the first operation section (here, the sword ornament 5001) is operated, it is possible to repeat execution of the "special first side mode (mode UA3)" again from the beginning. On the other hand, when the second operation unit (in this case, the operation button 410) is operated, the execution of the "special second side mode (mode UB3)" cannot be repeated from the beginning. It can be expected that a sense of reassurance, which is the function and effect obtained by the above, is imparted, and a feeling of tension is suitably imparted when the second operation part (here, the operation button 410) is operated.

Note that the “specific period first operation unit” according to each configuration described above may be the same operation unit as the “predetermined period first operation unit”, or may be an operation unit different from the “predetermined period first operation unit”. There may be. Further, the “specific period first operation unit” according to each configuration described above may be the same operation unit as the “predetermined period second operation unit”, or may be an operation unit different from the “predetermined period second operation unit”. There may be. Further, the “specific period second operation unit” according to each configuration described above may be the same operation unit as the “predetermined period first operation unit”, or may be an operation unit different from the “predetermined period first operation unit”. There may be. Further, the “specific period second operation unit” according to each configuration described above may be the same operation unit as the “predetermined period second operation unit”, or may be an operation unit different from the “predetermined period second operation unit”. There may be.

Further, the "predetermined period first operation unit" according to each configuration described above may be the same operation unit as the "specific period first operation unit", or may be an operation unit different from the "specific period first operation unit". There may be. Further, the "predetermined period first operation unit" according to each configuration described above may be the same operation unit as the "specific period second operation unit", or may be an operation unit different from the "specific period second operation unit". There may be. Further, the “predetermined period second operation unit” according to each configuration described above may be the same operation unit as the “specific period first operation unit”, or may be an operation unit different from the “specific period first operation unit”. There may be. Further, the “predetermined period second operation unit” according to each configuration described above may be the same operation unit as the “specific period second operation unit”, or may be an operation unit different from the “specific period second operation unit”. There may be.

In addition, in the reception period according to the above-described production example, when the operation unit is operated, the post-reception display is not newly displayed and the post-reception output sound is not newly output (for example, timing te2C shown in FIG. 278, , timing tf2C shown in FIGS. 282 and 295, timing tg2C shown in FIGS. 287 and 297, timing ti2C shown in FIGS. 294 and 301, timing tj2D shown in FIG. There is timing tk2D, tk2H, etc.), but in this case, the operation reception itself may not be performed. It is also possible to prevent the new output sound from being output after reception. In addition, if there is an operation reception itself, but the post-reception display is not newly displayed and the post-reception output sound is not newly output because the predetermined conditions are not satisfied, a new display of the post-reception display or the post-reception output is performed. In addition to the new sound output, some kind of post-acceptance change (for example, the time until the post-acceptance display that was displayed at the time of operation is hidden will be longer). may

In addition, in the production example described above, the 2nd F acceptance period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the 3rd F acceptance period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), and the 4th F acceptance period (FIGS. 292 and 293 ), the 5th F reception period (see FIG. 294), the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), and the 8th F reception During the period (see FIGS. 299 and 300) and the ninth F acceptance period (see FIGS. 301 and 302), when an operation is accepted while the precursor effect display is being displayed, the " In some cases, the "display imitating the operation target (operation-related display)" and the "predictive effect display" are hidden. In this case, in the above-described effect example, the "effect display EF" is displayed while the "display imitating the operation target (operation-related display)" and the "predictive effect display" are not hidden and are displayed. is displayed first. In this regard, in the above-described production example, the "effect display EF" is displayed in front of the "display imitating the operation target (operation-related display)" and is displayed so as to make it difficult to see. However, at this time, the "prediction effect display" may also be displayed in front of it so as to make it difficult to see. According to such a configuration, even after the operation is accepted, the operation is properly accepted while the display of the "display imitating the operation target (operation-related display)" and the "predictive effect display" is left. It becomes possible to preferably suggest that there is a situation. Further, in this case, the indication of the sign effect is not hidden even when the display after reception is displayed, and the display after reception is displayed behind the display of the sign effect. is desirable.

In addition, in the production example described above, the 2nd F acceptance period (see FIGS. 282 to 286), the 3rd F acceptance period (see FIGS. 287 to 291), and the 4th F acceptance period (FIGS. 292 and 293 ), the 5th F reception period (see FIG. 294), the 6th F reception period (see FIGS. 295 and 296), the 7th F reception period (see FIGS. 297 and 298), and the 8th F reception During the period (see FIGS. 299 and 300) and the ninth F reception period (see FIGS. 301 and 302), an operation is accepted while the precursor effect display is being displayed, and the precursor effect is received by the operation reception. When the display (operation-related display) imitating the display and the operation target is hidden, the operation-related display is made difficult to see before the precursor effect display and the operation-related display are hidden. Although the effect display appears as described above, it is desirable that the effect display be displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side of the prognostic effect display so as to make it difficult to visually recognize the effect display. Also, at this time, the portent effect display is not hidden even when the post-acceptance display is displayed, and is displayed in such a manner as to overlap the front side of the post-acceptance display so as to make it difficult to visually recognize the post-acceptance display. It is desirable to

In addition, during the 3rd F reception period, the 7th F reception period, the 10th F reception period, the 11th F reception period, etc., operation unit B (3rd F operation unit B, 7th F operation unit B, 10th F operation After performing an operation on operation part A (3rd F operation part A, 7th F operation part A, 10th F operation part A, 11th F operation part A) after performing an operation on operation part A However, after operating the operation unit A (the 3rd F operation unit A, the 7th F operation unit A, the 10th F operation unit A, and the 11th F operation unit A), the operation unit B ( It is basically the same when the 3rd F operating section B, the 7th F operating section B, the 10th F operating section B, and the 11th F operating section B) are operated.

For example, during the 3rd F reception period and the 7th F reception period, although the operation unit A (the 3rd F operation unit A, the 7th F operation unit A) was operated several times, the player is continued without satisfying the conditions for ending , stop the operation on the operation part A (the 3rd F operation part A, the 7th F operation part A), and operate the operation part B (the 3rd F operation part B, the 7th F operation B), the post-acceptance change B (for example, the 3rd F post-acceptance display UB, the 7th F post-acceptance display UB) in response to the operation occurs in one of the above-described multiple modes. . However, as described above, the post-acceptance change A (for example, the 3rd F post-acceptance display UA, the 7th F post-acceptance display UA) in response to the operation on the operation unit A (the 3rd F operation unit A, the 7th F operation unit A) This time is significantly shorter than the set time as the acceptance period. Therefore, the post-acceptance change B (for example, the 3rd F post-acceptance display UB and the 7th F post-acceptance display UB) can A case where execution is started while the post-reception change A (for example, the 3rd F post-reception display UA, the 7th F post-reception display UA) continues, and a case where the post-reception change A (for example, the 3rd F post-reception display UA, the In some cases, the execution is started after the end of 7F post-acceptance display UA).

In this regard, while the post-acceptance change A (for example, the 3rd F post-acceptance display UA, the 7th F post-acceptance display UA) continues, by operating the operation unit B (the 3rd F operation unit B, the 7th F operation unit B) If post-reception change B (for example, 3F post-reception display UB, 7F post-reception display UB) occurs, first, post-reception change A (for example, 3F post-reception display UA, 7F post-reception display UA) , is continued without being terminated by the operation of the operation section B (the 3rd F operation section B, the 7th F operation section B). At this time, the post-reception display UB is displayed so as to overlap the post-reception display UA from the front side. However, in this case, since no new operation is performed on the operation unit A (the 3rd F operation unit A, the 7th F operation unit A), the post-acceptance change A (for example, the 3rd F post-acceptance display UA, the 7th F post-acceptance display UA) is hidden while the post-acceptance change B (for example, the 3rd F post-acceptance display UB, the 7th F post-acceptance display UB) is being executed. On the other hand, after the post-acceptance change A (for example, the 3rd F post-acceptance display UA, the 7th F post-acceptance display UA) is hidden, the operation unit B (the 3rd F operation unit B, the 7th F operation unit B) If post-acceptance change B (for example, 3rd F post-acceptance display UB, 7th F post-acceptance display UB) is caused by an operation, then the above-mentioned “post-acceptance change A (e.g., 3rd F post-acceptance display UA, 7th F post-acceptance display UA) does not occur, the mode when change B after reception (for example, 3F post-reception display UB, 7F post-reception display UB) occurs (Figs. 287 to 291, 297, 298, etc. See ) will progress the production.

Further, for example, in the 10th F reception period and the 11th F reception period, although the operation unit A (the 10th F operation unit A, the 11th F operation unit A) was operated several times, the player At the stage where the conditions for the end of the acceptance period are not satisfied and continue 11F operation unit B), the post-acceptance change B (e.g., 10F post-acceptance display UB, 11F post-acceptance display UB) in response to the operation occurs in any of the above-described multiple modes. becomes.

Here, as described above, the period during which the 10th F post-acceptance change A according to the operation on the 10th F operation unit A is executed is much shorter than the set time as the acceptance period. Therefore, the 10th F post-acceptance change B is started depending on the timing when the 10th F operation unit B is operated, while the 10th F post-acceptance change A continues. Execution may start after the end of In this regard, if the 10F post-acceptance change B occurs due to an operation on the 10F operation unit B while the 10F post-acceptance change A continues, first, the 10F post-acceptance change A is the 10F operation unit It will continue without being terminated by the operation on B as a trigger. At this time, the 10th F post-reception display UB is displayed so as to overlap the 10th F post-reception display UA from the front side. However, in this case, since no new operation is performed on the 10F operation unit A, the 10F post-acceptance change A is not executed while the 10F post-acceptance change B is being executed. On the other hand, if the 10th F post-acceptance change B is caused by an operation on the 10th F operation unit B after the 10th F post-acceptance change A is hidden, the above-mentioned "10th F post-acceptance change A has not occurred Under the circumstances, the effect will be developed in the mode (see FIGS. 303 to 306, etc.) when the change B occurs after the 10th F reception.

On the other hand, as described above, the period during which the 11th F post-acceptance change A is executed in response to the operation on the 11th F operation unit A is longer than the set time as the acceptance period, similar to the 11th F post-acceptance change B. It's time. Therefore, the 11th F post-acceptance change B is started while the 11th F post-acceptance change A continues, regardless of the timing at which the 11th F operation unit B is operated. However, even if the 11th F post-acceptance change B occurs due to an operation on the 11th F operation unit B while the 11th F post-acceptance change A continues, the 11th F post-acceptance change A does not affect the 11th F operation unit B. It will continue without being terminated with the operation as a trigger.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to several embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes are possible.

If a plurality of operation units are prepared that are permitted to accept operations during the acceptance period according to the example of the production described above, these operation units may be provided as different operation units. , may be provided as different parts in one operation unit.

Further, in the above-described production example, the display imitating the operation unit may be an image display in which at least the relevant portion is expressed as an image, and a portion different from the operation unit is also expressed in the same image display. It can be anything that exists.

In addition, in the above-described production example, depending on the type of reception period, when the reception period occurs, the reception acceptance sound is output in one of multiple modes with different expectations (expectations for granting benefits such as big hits). Although there are cases, in the reception period of the type in which the acceptable acceptance sound is output in such a manner, if an operation is performed on a specific operation unit while the acceptable acceptance sound is being output, this is triggered. (This is not an essential configuration). In other words, in this case, if the operation is performed at an early stage after the acceptance period occurs, there is a risk that the expectation level information provided by the acceptance acceptance sound cannot be recognized early, so the acceptance period occurs. It can be expected to suppress playing a rough game, such as performing a continuous hit operation from before.

Also, in the example of the effect described above, depending on the type of reception period, there is a case where the reception acceptance sound is always output in the same manner when the reception period occurs, but the reception acceptance sound is output in such a manner. In the acceptance period for each type, if an operation is performed on a specific operation unit while the acceptable acceptance sound is being output, the acceptance acceptable sound is made inaudible, and In some cases, allowable sounds may not be rendered inaudible (this is not a mandatory configuration). That is, in this case, if the acceptable acceptance sound is not made inaudible, it is possible to recognize that the acceptance acceptable sound was not of the type that suggests the degree of expectation when the user has mistakenly operated early. Therefore, it can be expected to suppress the decline in gaming interest. In addition, when the reception acceptable sound is made inaudible, it is not a type of reception acceptable sound that suggests the degree of expectation in the first place, so there is no disadvantage in operating early, but the player side does not have the expectation level. Since it is possible that the reception acceptable sound is of the suggested type, it is expected that even if such a type of reception acceptable sound is used, the above-described miscellaneous game will be suppressed. sell.

For example, in each of the above-described examples of effects related to the automatic effect function, there are cases where a display such as "Auto button is being set" is displayed, but this display does not necessarily have to be performed. In particular, if the pachinko machine 1 is not a pachinko machine set to an automatic performance mode, but a pachinko machine 1 in which the automatic performance function can always be activated and the processing itself such as "setting to the performance state" is not installed, It is desirable to prevent the display such as "Auto button being set" from being displayed. In the pachinko machine 1, which does not have a process itself such as "setting to the effect state", the effective period during which the automatic effect function is performed and the automatic effect function are determined according to the type of operation reception effect that the player's operation is permitted. A period of validity that is not played may occur.

Further, in each of the production examples described above, the "simulated image" may be any image that prompts the player to perform an operation. It does not have to be displayed as an image imitating the operation means.

Also, when adopting the automatic effect function in each of the above-described effect examples, the timing of automatically generating (automatically accepting) the operation acceptance within the operation valid period is set to any timing within the operation valid period. may be In order to appropriately provide the player with an opportunity to operate, it is necessary to detect an operation when an operation is not detected until a predetermined timing arrives after half or more of the operation valid period has elapsed. It is desirable that the reception is automatically generated (automatic reception), and the post-operation production is started based on the automatically generated operation reception. In this sense, an operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) when an operation is not detected until the remaining time within the operation valid period reaches one frame, and a post-operation effect is produced based on the automatically generated operation reception. It can be said that it is the most desirable to start. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples of effects related to the automatic effect function, if the bar display is not hidden even after the effective period ends and is maintained, the operation is performed in accordance with the timing when the effective period ends. It is desirable to perform an effect that changes the mode of the means (for example, vibration, turning off the LED, etc.). As a result, even if the bar display is not hidden and is displayed continuously, it is expected to prevent misrecognition by the player, such as "Isn't the valid period continuing?" Become so.

In each of the production examples described above, when "period" and "time" are described, they may be the minimum unit of "period" or "time" in terms of control. It also means time.

A model image that imitates an operation receiving part that receives an operation and a border decoration image that decorates the periphery of the model image may be separately prepared as image data, and the image data may be combined and displayed as an integrated model image. good.

In the example shown in FIG. 144, when an operation opportunity is given to one operation means, the "normal button model image BMGa" is displayed (FIGS. 144(a) and (c)), and 144(b) and (d)). However, when the "normal button model image BMGa" is displayed (FIGS. 144(a) and (c)), the first operating means (first operation receiving unit) is given an opportunity to operate, and the "special button When a model image BMGb' is displayed (FIGS. 144(b) and (d)), for a second operating means (second operation receiving section) different from the first operating means (first operation receiving section) You may make it give an operation opportunity.

In each of the explanation examples described above, the members (operating means) prepared as operation targets include items that require a pressing operation (pressing action) (such as buttons) and items that require an inserting/removing operation (inserting/extracting action) (a Decoration, etc.), or may be realized as a device (proximity sensor, etc.) that requires a player's action such as non-contact or touch.

The peripheral edge decoration image SSG does not imitate the peripheral edge decoration part actually provided on the periphery of "the operation receiving part to which the operation opportunity is given", but at least part of it imitates the peripheral edge decoration part. It is acceptable as long as it does not have a rim, and there may be a part that imitates the peripheral decorative part.

Regarding the second valid period in which the operation-related images (integrated model image IG, etc.) are displayed in a "display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG" and the valid period in which the gauge image itself is not displayed, Instead of a finite one in which a predetermined set time is set, it may be infinitely continued as long as a predetermined condition irrelevant to the passage of time is not satisfied.

When displaying the specific image TG within the effective period, the gauge image GG does not necessarily have to be displayed.

As for the "automatic reception effect" described from FIG. 144 onwards, any of the implementation methods for the "automatic reception effect" exemplified earlier may be employed. Any of the above-described realization methods may be adopted as to how the model image and the gauge image are displayed when the automatic reception presentation is performed. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a reception effect occurs, the type of effect state at the time of occurrence, or the type of the reception effect (effect after operation) itself, or the reception effect Even if there is no operation by the player within the effective period, the same post-operation effect as when there was an operation is executed ("automatic effect function" is activated) depending on the conditions under which If there is no operation by the player within the validity period, the post-operation effect may not be executed (the "automatic effect function" may not be activated). The timing at which the automatic effect function is activated may be at a predetermined timing within the effective period, at the end of the effective period, or after a short period of time has passed after the effective period ends. may be

The reception period illustrated in each of the production examples described above (for example, the reception periods D and E shown in FIGS. 194 to 199, the reception periods F and G, etc.) are not necessarily the production according to the result of the big hit determination (production determination) It does not have to occur within the pattern. For example, during the period in which the symbol variation is not performed (for example, the period in which the jackpot game is performed, various interval periods, etc.) (predetermined conditions are (based on what was established). In this case, ``after x seconds from the start of variation'' shown in FIG. The timing "after x seconds" may arrive, and the reception period D may be generated at that timing. According to such a configuration, since the reception period D occurs after the pattern variation is stopped with the hold being "0", it is possible to keep the player who wants to stop the game. become. In this sense, it may be set as "x seconds after the fluctuation stops" instead of "x seconds after the fluctuation starts".

In addition, the acceptance period illustrated in each of the production examples described above (for example, the acceptance periods D and E shown in FIGS. It does not necessarily have to be set as "elapsed time value", and when a predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, when 10 game balls are accepted in the big winning opening), the acceptance period is set. It may be terminated.

At the timing shown in FIG. 228(b), as shown in FIG. 212(a), the operation target display (simulated image display) and remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) are in a non-display state and cannot be visually recognized. state.

Also, in each of the production examples described above, the disappearance EF production (such as a disappearance effect image) is a production after reception (a conversation notice that indicates the degree of expectation depending on which conversation appears, whether the movable body will operate, etc.) It is commonly used for multiple reception periods with different types, such as a movable effect that suggests the degree of expectation depending on whether or not, a cut-in notice that indicates the degree of expectation depending on which mode the cut-in display appears, etc.) (can be executed in the same presentation mode), and thereby makes it possible to recognize that the operation reception (operation reception) is properly performed (the reception period is finished). In other words, since the performance after reception differs depending on the type of reception period, when you see the contents of the performance, is it being performed during the reception period, or is the reception period over? It is difficult to recognize whether this is done in conjunction with In this regard, regardless of the type of reception period, by preparing a disappearing EF effect that can appear in a common (same) production mode when the reception period ends, the operation reception (operation reception) is properly performed and the post-reception production is performed. is being executed. However, as a gaming machine (pachinko machine 1), it is sufficient if a common disappearance EF effect (disappearance effect image, etc.) is executed in multiple types of post-acceptance effects, for example, a specific type of post-acceptance effect occurs. A dedicated annihilation EF effect that can be executed only occasionally may be prepared.

In addition, each reception period (for example, 1E reception period, 2E reception period, 3E reception period, 4E reception period, 5E reception period, 6E reception period, etc.) ) may include those that occur during the variation period of the decorative symbols and those that do not occur during the variation period of the decorative symbols.

Further, the above-described first periodicity display SH1 and third periodicity display SH3 may be displayed as "periodic changes in simulated image display imitating the operation means" displayed during the acceptance period. . That is, in this case, the first periodicity display SH1 and the third periodicity display SH3 are synonymous with the model image display (button model image BMGa).

In addition, regarding the items described as "preferable" in the above-mentioned production examples, modifications, notes, etc., it only describes further effects when the same configuration is provided, and the same configuration , needless to say.

That is, in the embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine formed by combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also in this case, the same effects can be obtained.

Claims (1)

a determination means for determining;
privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the fact that a predetermined result is obtained in the judgment by the judging means;
reception state execution means capable of generating a reception state in which reception of an operation by a player is permitted, and displaying a post-reception display corresponding to the type of reception state when reception is made in the reception state;
with
As the reception state, a plurality of types of reception states including a first reception state and a second reception state are prepared,
The first receiving state can occur while the specific BGM is being audibly output. the specific BGM is rendered inaudible;
The second receiving state can occur after the specific BGM that has been audibly output is no longer audibly output. is not audibly output,
Even if the operation by the player is not accepted after the occurrence of the first acceptance state, the specific BGM is made non-audible when a predetermined timing arrives, and even in the situation where the specific BGM is made non-audible, The first acceptance state continues,
moreover,
The second reception state occurs when a predetermined time has passed since the specific variation pattern based on the result of determination by the determination means was started, and the specific BGM is when the specific variation pattern is started. is made inaudible before the elapse of a predetermined time from , but the first reception state does not occur between the start of the specific variation pattern and the time when the specific BGM is made inaudible.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images